This is a modern-English version of The Races of Man: An Outline of Anthropology and Ethnography, originally written by Deniker, Joseph. It has been thoroughly updated, including changes to sentence structure, words, spelling, and grammar—to ensure clarity for contemporary readers, while preserving the original spirit and nuance. If you click on a paragraph, you will see the original text that we modified, and you can toggle between the two versions.

Scroll to the bottom of this page and you will find a free ePUB download link for this book.

Book Cover

Original Book Cover

Original Book Cover


THE CONTEMPORARY SCIENCE SERIES.

THE MODERN SCIENCE SERIES.


EDITED BY HAVELOCK ELLIS.

EDITED BY HAVELOCK ELLIS.

THE RACES OF MAN.

HUMAN RACES.


Frontispiece

Naga of Manipur in gala costume, with caudiform appendage.
(Phot. lent by Miss Godden.)

Naga from Manipur in festive attire, with a tail-like extension.
(Photo provided by Miss Godden.)


THE RACES OF MAN:
Anthropology and Ethnography Overview

BY

BY

J. DENIKER, Sc.D. (PARIS),

J. DENIKER, Sc.D. (PARIS),

Chief Librarian of the Museum of Natural History, Paris; Honorary Fellow of the Anthropological Institute of Great Britain; Corresponding Member of the Italian Anthropological, Netherland Geographical, and Moscow Natural Science Societies, etc.

Chief Librarian of the Museum of Natural History, Paris; Honorary Fellow of the Anthropological Institute of Great Britain; Corresponding Member of the Italian Anthropological, Netherlands Geographical, and Moscow Natural Science Societies, etc.

WITH 176 ILLUSTRATIONS AND 2 MAPS.

WITH 176 ILLUSTRATIONS AND 2 MAPS.

LONDON
WALTER SCOTT, LIMITED

PATERNOSTER SQUARE
1900

LONDON WALTER SCOTT, LIMITED PATERNOSTER SQUARE 1900


PREFACE.

My object in the present work has been to give in a condensed form the essential facts of the twin sciences of anthropology and ethnography. The very nature of such an undertaking condemns the author to be brief, and at the same time somewhat dogmatic; inevitable gaps occur, and numerous inequalities in the treatment. To obviate, partly at least, such defects, I have endeavoured not merely to present the actual facts of the subject, but also to summarise, with as much fidelity as possible, the explanations of these facts, in so far as such may be educed from theories among which there is often sufficient perplexity of choice. In many cases I have ventured, however, to give my personal opinion on different questions, as, for instance, on the signification of the laryngeal sacs among anthropoid apes, on many questions of anthropometry in general, on the classing of “states of civilisation,” on fixed and transportable habitations, on the classification of races, on the races of Europe, on the Palæ-American race, etc.

My goal in this work has been to provide a concise overview of the key facts in the fields of anthropology and ethnography. Given the nature of this task, I have to keep it brief and somewhat assertive; there will be inevitable gaps and inconsistencies in the coverage. To address some of these issues, I’ve tried not only to present the factual information but also to summarize the explanations behind these facts as faithfully as possible, despite the often confusing range of theories. In many instances, I've also shared my personal views on various topics, such as the purpose of laryngeal sacs in anthropoid apes, various aspects of anthropometry, the categorization of "states of civilization," permanent and movable dwellings, race classification, the races of Europe, and the Paleo-American race, among others.

My book is designed for all those who desire to obtain rapidly a general notion of ethnographic and anthropological[Pg viii] sciences, or to understand the foundations of these sciences. Thus technical terms are explained and annotated in such a manner that they may be understood by all.

My book is intended for anyone who wants to quickly grasp the basics of ethnographic and anthropological[Pg viii] sciences or to understand the core principles behind them. Technical terms are explained and annotated in a way that's accessible to everyone.

Those who may wish for further details on special points will be able to take advantage of the numerous bibliographical notes, at the foot of the pages, in which I have sought to group according to plan the most important or accessible works. I believe that even professional anthropologists will be able to consult my work profitably. They will find condensed in it information which is scattered over a vast crowd of notes and memoirs in all languages. I trust also that they may appreciate the Appendices, as well as the lists in the text itself, in which are collected from the best sources some hundreds of figures relating to the chief dimensions of the human body.

Those who want more details on specific topics can take advantage of the many bibliographical notes at the bottom of the pages, where I've tried to organize the most important or accessible works. I believe that even professional anthropologists will find my work valuable. They'll discover condensed information that is spread across a vast number of notes and memoirs in various languages. I also hope they will appreciate the Appendices, along with the lists in the text itself, which compile hundreds of figures from the best sources related to the main dimensions of the human body.

The illustrations which complete and elucidate the text have been selected with very great care. With two or three exceptions, the “types” of the different peoples are photographs of well-authenticated subjects, often such as have been observed and measured by competent authorities, or by myself.

The illustrations that enhance and clarify the text have been chosen with great care. With a couple of exceptions, the "types" of the various peoples are photographs of verified subjects, often ones that have been observed and measured by qualified experts, or by me.

I attach too much importance to the systematic illustration of anthropological works not to fail to express here my sincere indebtedness to the institutions and individuals who have been good enough to lend me blocks and photographs. I have thus to thank the Anthropological Institute of Great Britain and Ireland, the Anthropological Society and the Anthropological School of Paris, the India Museum, the Museum of Natural History of Paris, the Smithsonian Institution of Washington, Dr. Beddoe, Prince Roland Bonaparte, M. Chantre, Drs. Collignon and Delisle, Herr Ehrenreich and[Pg ix] his editors Fr. Vieweg & Sons, Professor Haddon, Dr. Lapicque, Mr. Otis Mason, Dr. Sören Hansen, MM. S. Sommier, P. and F. Sarasin and their editor Herr C. Kreidel of Wiesbaden, Dr. Ten Kate, Mr. Thurston, Miss Godden, Miss Werner, and Messrs. Harper & Bros.

I place a lot of importance on the organized presentation of anthropological works, so I want to take a moment to express my genuine gratitude to the institutions and individuals who kindly lent me blocks and photographs. I would like to thank the Anthropological Institute of Great Britain and Ireland, the Anthropological Society, the Anthropological School of Paris, the India Museum, the Museum of Natural History in Paris, the Smithsonian Institution in Washington, Dr. Beddoe, Prince Roland Bonaparte, M. Chantre, Drs. Collignon and Delisle, Herr Ehrenreich and[Pg ix] his editors Fr. Vieweg & Sons, Professor Haddon, Dr. Lapicque, Mr. Otis Mason, Dr. Sören Hansen, MM. S. Sommier, P. and F. Sarasin and their editor Herr C. Kreidel of Wiesbaden, Dr. Ten Kate, Mr. Thurston, Miss Godden, Miss Werner, and Messrs. Harper & Bros.

I desire also to thank in this place Dr. Collignon, Mr. Havelock Ellis, and M. Salomon Reinach, for the trouble they have taken in revising the proofs of certain parts of my work.

I also want to thank Dr. Collignon, Mr. Havelock Ellis, and M. Salomon Reinach for the effort they put into reviewing the proofs of some sections of my work.

J. DENIKER.

J. DENIKER.


CONTENTS.


INTRODUCTION.
PAGE
ETHNIC GGROUPS AND ZOological SSPECIES 1
Difficulties in applying to Man the terms of zoological nomenclature—Criterion of species—Terms to give to the “Somatological Units” constituting the genus Homo—Monogenesis and Polygenesis—The “Ethnic Groups” are constituted by the different combinations of the “Somatological Units” or “Races”—Somatic characters and ethnic characters.
CHAPTER I.
SOMATIC CCHARACTERS 12
DDISTINCTIVE CCHARACTERS OF MAN AND APES.—Monkeys and anthropoid apes—Erect attitude—Curvature of the spine—Brain—Skull—Teeth—Other characters—Differences less accentuated in the fœtus and the young than in the adult.
DDISTINCTIVE MORPHOLOGICAL CCHARACTERS OF HUMAN RACES.Stature: Individual limits—Dwarfs and giants—Average stature of different populations—Influence of environment—Differences according to sex—Reconstitution from the long bones—Teguments: Skin—Hair of head and body—Four principal types—Microscopic structure—Correlation between the hair of the head and the pilosity of the body—Pigmentation: Colouring of the skin, the eyes, and the hair—Changes in the pigment. [Pg xii]
CHAPTER II.
1. MMorphological CCHARACTERS (continued) 53
Cranium or Skull: Cranial measurements—Orbits and orbital index—Nasal bone and nasal index—Prognathism—Head of the living subject: Cephalic index—Face—Eyes—Nose and nasal index in the living subject—Lips—Trunk and Limbs: The Skeleton—Pelvis and its indices—Shoulder blade—Thoracic limb—Abdominal limb—Proportions of the body in the living subject—Trunk and neck—Curve of the back—Steatopygy—Various Organs: Genital organs—Brain—Its weight—Convolutions—The neuron—Its importance from the psychical point of view.
CHAPTER III.
2. PHYSIOLOGICAL CCHARACTERS 105
Functions of nutrition and assimilation: Digestion, alimentation, growth, temperature of the body, etc.—Respiration and circulation: Pulse, composition of the blood, etc.—Special odour—Functions of communication: Expression of the emotions, acuteness of the senses, etc.—Functions of reproduction: Menstruation, menopause, increase in the number of conceptions according to season, etc.—Influence of environment: Acclimatation—Cosmopolitanism of the genus Homo and the races of mankind—Cross-breeding.
3. PPSYCHOLOGICAL AND PPathological CCHARACTERS.—Difficulties of studying them—Immunities—Nervous diseases of uncivilised peoples.
CHAPTER IV.
ETHNIC CCHARACTERS 123
Various stages of social groups and essential characters of human societies: Progress.—Conditions of Progress: Innovating initiative, and tradition—Classification of “states of civilisation.” [Pg xiii]
I.—LLINGUISTIC CCHARACTERS.Methods of exchanging ideas within a short distance—Gesture and speech—Divisions of language according to structure—Jargons—Communications at a relatively remote distance: optic and acoustic signals—Transmission of ideas at any distance and time whatever—Handwriting—Mnemotechnic objects—Pictography—Ideography—Alphabets—Direction of the lines of handwriting.
CHAPTER V.
II. SSOCIOLOGICAL CCHARACTERS 144
1. MMATERIAL LIFE: Alimentation: Geophagy—Anthropophagy—Preparation of foods—Fire—Pottery—Grinding of corn—Stimulants and Narcotics—Habitation: Two primitive types of dwellings—Permanent dwelling (hut)—Removable dwelling (tent)—Difference of origin of the materials employed in the two types—Villages—Furniture—Heating and lighting—Clothing: Nakedness and Modesty—Ornament precedes dress—Head-dress—Ethnic mutilations—Tattooing—Girdle, necklace, and garland the origin of all dress—Manufacture of garments—Spinning and weaving—Means of Existence: tools of primitive industry—Hunting—Fishing—Agriculture—Domestication and rearing of animals.
CHAPTER VI.
II. SOCIOLOGICAL CCHARACTERS (continued) 197
2. PPSYCHIC LIFE: Games and Recreations—Their importance—Games of children and adults—Sports and public spectacles—Masks—Fine Arts—Graphic arts—Ornamentation—Drawing—Sculpture—Dancing—Its importance among uncultured peoples—Pantomime and dramatic art—Vocal and instrumental music—Instruments of music—Poetry—Religion—Animism—Its two elements: belief in the soul, and belief in spirits—Fetichism—Polytheism—Rites and ceremonies—Priesthood—International religions—MythsScience—Art of counting—Geometry—Calculation of time—Clocks and calendars—Geography and cartography—Medicine and surgery. [Pg xiv]
CHAPTER VII.
SOCIOLOGICAL CCHARACTERS (continued) 229
3. FFAMILY LIFE.—Relations of the two sexes before marriage—Marriage and family—Theory of promiscuity—Group marriage—Exogamy and endogamy—Matriarchate—Degrees of relationship and filiation—Polyandry—Levirate—Polygamy and monogamy—Patriarchate—Rape and purchase of the bride—Duration of conjugal union—Children—Birth—Nurture—Name of the child and of adults—Initiation, circumcision, etc.—Old men and their fateFunereal rites—Mourning.
4. SSOCIAL LIFE.—(a) Home life of a peopleEconomic organisation—The forms of property depend on production—Common property and family property—Village community—Individual property—Social organisation—Totemism—Clan rule—Family rule—Territorial rule—Caste and class rule—Democratic rule—Social morals—Right and justice—Taboo—Retaliation, vendetta, and ordeals—Secret societies—Extra legal judges—Formulæ of politeness—(b) International life of peoples—Absence of sympathetic relations—Hostile relations—War—Arms of offence—Bow and arrows—Arms of defence—Neutral relations—Commerce—Money—Cowry—Transports and means of communication—Primitive vehicles—Navigation.
CHAPTER VIII.
CCLASSIFICATION OF RACES AND PPEOPLE 280
Criticism of anthropological classification—Frequent confusion of the classing of races and of peoples—The determining of races can be based only on somatic characters—For the classing of peoples, on the contrary, it is necessary to take into account ethnic characters (linguistic and sociological), and above all geographical distributionClassification of races proposed by the author—Succinct characterisation of the twenty-nine races which are therein mentioned—Classification of ethnic groups adopted in this work. [Pg xv]
CHAPTER IX.
RACES AND PPEOPLE OF EEUROPE 299
Problem of European ethnogeny—I. AANCIENT IINHABITANTS OF EEuropePrehistoric races—Quaternary period—Glacial and interglacial periods—Quaternary skulls—Spy and Chancelade races or types—Races of the neolithic period—Races of the age of metals—Aryan question—Position of the problem—Migration of European peoples in the historic periodII. EEUROPEAN RACES OF THE PRESENT DAY—Characteristics of the six principal races and the four secondary races—III. PRESENT PPEOPLE OF EEUROPEA. Aryan peoples: Latins, Germans, Slavs, Letto-Lithuanians, Celts, Illyro-Hellenes—B. Anaryan peoples: Basques, Finns, etc.—C. Caucasian peoples: Lesgians, Georgians, etc.
CHAPTER X.
RACES AND PPEOPLE OF ASIA 359
AANCIENT IINHABITANTS OF ASIA.—Prehistoric times—Pithecanthropus erectus (Dub.)—Ages of stone and metals.—PRESENT IINHABITANTS OF ASIA.—Races of Asia—I. Peoples of Northern Asia—Yeniseian, Palæasiatic and Tunguse groups.—II. Peoples of Central Asia—Turkish, Mongolian, and Thibetan groups—Peoples of the south-west of Thibet and of South China (Lolo, Miao-tsé, Lu-tsé, etc.).—III. Peoples of Eastern Asia—Chinese, Coreans, and Japanese.—IV. Peoples of Indo-China—Aborigines, Mois, Kuis, Siam, Naga, etc.—More recent mixed populations: Annamese, Cambodians, Thai, etc.—V. Peoples of India—Castes—Dravidians and Kolarians—Indo-Aryans and unclassified populations—VI. Peoples of Anterior Asia—Iranians and Semites.
CHAPTER XI.
RACES AND PPEOPLE OF AAFRICA 426
AANCIENT IINHABITANTS OF AFRICA.—Succession of races on the “dark continent”—PRESENT IINHABITANTS OF AAFRICAI. Arabo-Berber or Semito-Hamite Group: [Pg xvi] Populations of Mediterranean Africa and Egypt—II. Ethiopian or Kushito-Hamite Group: Bejas, Gallas, Abyssinians, etc.—III. Fulah-Zandeh Group: The Zandeh, Masai, Niam-Niam populations of the Ubangi-Shari, etc., Fulbé or Fulahs—IV. Nigritian Group: Nilotic Negroes or Negroes of eastern Sudan—Negroes of central Sudan—Negroes of western Sudan and the Senegal—Negroes of the coast or Guinean Negroes, Kru, Agni, Tshi, Vei, Yoruba, etc.-V. Negrillo Group: Differences of the Pygmies and the Bushmen—VI. Bantu Group: Western Bantus of French, German, Portuguese, and Belgian equatorial Africa—Eastern Bantus of German, English, and Portuguese equatorial Africa—Southern Bantus: Zulus, etc.—VII. Hottentot-Bushman Group: The Namans and the Sans—VIII. Populations of Madagascar: Hovas, Malagasi, Sakalavas.
CHAPTER XII.
RACES AND PPEOPLE OF OOceania 474
The Stone Age in Oceania—I. Australians: Uniformity of the Australian race—Language and manners and customs of the Australians—Extinct TasmaniansII. Populations of the Asiatic or Malay Archipelago: Papuan and Negrito elements in the Archipelago—Indonesians and Malays of Sumatra, Borneo, Celebes, etc.—III. Melanesians: Papuans of New Guinea—Melanesians properly so called of the Salomon and Admiralty Islands, New Hebrides, New Caledonia, etc.—IV. Polynesians: Polynesians properly so called of Samoa, Tahiti, and Sandwich Islands, New Zealand, etc.—Micronesians of the Caroline and Marianne Islands, etc.—Peopling of the Pacific Islands and of the Indian Ocean.
CHAPTER XIII.
RACES & PPEOPLE OF AMERICA 507
The four ethnic elements of the New World—Origin of the AmericansAANCIENT IINHABITANTS OF AMERICA—Problem [Pg xvii] of palæolithic man in the United States—Palæolithic man in Mexico and South America—Lagoa Santa race; Sambaquis and Paraderos—Problem of the Mound-Builders and Cliff-Dwellers—Ancient civilisation of Mexico and Peru—Present American RacesAmerican languages.
PPEOPLE OF NORTH AMERICAI. EskimoII. Indians of Canada and United States: a. Arctic—Athapascan group; b. Antarctic—Algonquian-Iroquois, Chata-Muskhogi, and Siouan groups; c. Pacific—North-west Indians, Oregon-California and Pueblo groups—III. Indians of Mexico and Central America: a. Sonoran-Aztecs; b. Central Americans (Mayas, Isthmians, etc.)—Half-breeds in Mexico and the Antilles.
PPEOPLE OF SOUTH AAmericaI. Andeans: Chibcha, Quechua, and other linguistic families; the Araucans—II. Amazonians: Carib, Arawak, Miranha, and Panos families; unclassed tribes—III. Indians of East Brazil and the Central Region: Ges linguistic family; unclassed tribes (Puri, Karaya, Bororo, etc.); Tupi-Guarani family—IV. South Argentine: Chaco and Pampas Indians, etc.; Patagonians, Fuegians.
APPENDIX 577
INDEX OF AUTHORS 597
INDEX OF SUBJECTS 604

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS.

FIG. PAGE
Naga of Manipur in gala costume Frontispiece
1. Skull of gorilla 16
2. Skull of man 17
3. Microscopic section of skin and of hair 34
4. Mohave Indians of Arizona 35
5, 6. Pure Veddah of Dangala Mountains of Ceylon 38
7. Toda woman (India) 38
8. Kurumba man of Nilgiri Hills 42
9. Agni Negro of Krinjabo, Western Africa 42
10. Dolichocephalic skull of an islander of Torres Straits 56
11. Brachycephalic skull of a Ladin of Pufels (Tyrol) 56
12, 13. Skull of ancient Egyptian exhumed at Thebes 60, 62
14, 15. Jenny, Australian woman of Queensland 65
16. Japanese officer (old style) 69
17. Two men, Nagas of Manipur 71
18. Eye of a young Kalmuk girl of Astrakhan 78
19. Welsh type of Montgomeryshire 78
20. Kalmuk of Astrakhan 81
21. Jew of Algiers 82
22. Persian Hadjemi 83
23. A, Skull with Inca bone; B, Malar bone divided in two; C, Superior part of femur, etc. 88
24. Hottentot woman of Griqualand 94
25. Brain with indication of the three “centres of projection” and the three “centres of association” 103
26. Dakota Indian gesture language 129
27. Writing by notches of the Laotians 134
28. Coloured prehistoric pebbles of the grotto of Mas-d’Azil (Ariège) [Pg xx] 137
29. Journal of the voyage of an Eskimo of Alaska 137
30. Petition of Chippeway Indians to the President of the United States 140
31. Various signs of symbolic pictography 141
32. Paternoster in Mexican hieroglyphics 141
33. Ancient Chinese hieroglyphics 142
34. Method of fire-making by rubbing 149
35.  Do.   do.    sawing 151
36.  Do.   do.    twirling 151
37. Bark vessel, used by Iroquois Indians 154
38. Type of Iroquois earthen vessel 154
39. Making of pottery without wheel 155
40. Primitive harvest 155
41. Hemispherical hut in straw of Zulu-Kafirs 161
42. Hut and granary of the Ovampos (S. Africa) 163
43. Summer tent of Tunguse-Manegres 163
44. “Gher” or tent of the Kalmuks of Astrakhan 167
45. Hexagonal house of non-roving Altaians 167
46. Kraal, or Kafir village, with defensive enclosure 168
47. Zulu girl, with head-dress, necklace, belt, and chastity apron 170
48. Ufhtaradeka, typical Fuegian with mantle 173
49. Ainu woman, tattooed round the lips 174
50, 51. Foot of Chinese woman artificially deformed 175
52. Native of the Department of Haute-Garonne 177
53. Dancing costume of natives of Murray Islands 178
54. Method of making stone tools by percussion 184
55. Method of flaking stone by pressure 186
56. Knife of chipped flint of the Hupa Indians 187
57. Kalmuk turning lathe with alternating rotatory movement 188
58. Principle of tackle utilised by Eskimo, landing a walrus 190
59. Dance of Australians during the Corroboree 199
60. Anthropomorph ornamental design of the Papuans of New Guinea 201
61, 62. Zoomorph ornamental designs on a club and a spatula 202
63. Conventional representation of an alligator 204
64. Ornamental motive derived from the preceding design 204
65. Ornamental designs of the Karayas 204
66. Bushman painting, representing the battle going in favour of the Bechuana [Pg xxi] 206
67. Symbolic adzes of Mangaia Island 207
68. “Sansa” or “Zimba,” a musical box of the Negroes 211
69. “Marimba,” the Negro xylophone 212
70. Bushman playing on the “gora” 213
71. Detail of construction of the “gora” 214
72. Eskimo geographical map 226
73. Chipped flint dagger of the Californian Indians 256
74. Axe of the Banyai (Matabeleland) 259
75. Missile arms of the Australians 260
76. Throwing-stick of the Papuans of German New Guinea 261
77. Different methods of arrow release 264
78. Australian shield in wood 267
79. Indonesian shields 267
80. Shield of Zulu-Kafirs 267
81. Money of uncivilised peoples 273
82. Method of tree-climbing in India 275
83. Malayo-Polynesian canoe with outrigger 279
84. Chellean flint implement, Saint-Acheul (Somme) 302
85. Quaternary art (Magdalenian period) 306
86. Spy skull, first quaternary race 313
87. Chancelade skull, second quaternary race 313
88. Islander of Lewis (Hebrides) 319
89, 90. Norwegian of South Osterdalen 322
91. Young Sussex farmer 325
92. Englishwoman of Plymouth 329
93. Fisher people of Island of Aran (Ireland) 330
94. Young woman of Arles 331
95, 96. Pure type of Highlander (clan Chattan) 332, 333
97. Anglian type, common in north and north-east of England 336
98. Frenchman of Ouroux (Morvan) 337
99, 100. Dolichocephalic Frenchmen of Dordogne 337
101. Englishman (Gloucestershire) 340
102, 103. Russian carpenter, district of Pokrovsk 342, 343
104, 105. Russian woman, district of Veréïa 346, 347
106. Cheremiss of Ural Mountains 349
107, 108. Kundrof Tatar (Turkoman) of Astrakhan 352
109. Georgian Imer of Kutais 355
110, 111. Chechen of Daghestan [Pg xxii] 356, 357
112. Skull of the Pithecanthropus erectus (Dab.) 361
113. Calvaria of Pithecanthropus, seen from above 361 362
114. Polished stone axe found in Cambodia 363
115, 116. Tunguse hunter (Siberia) with ski and staff 367, 370
117. Ainu of Yezo (Japan) with crown of shavings 371
118. Educated Chinaman of Manchu origin 383
119. Leao-yu-chow, Chinese woman 385
120. Young Japanese women taking tea 388
121. Tong King artisan of Son-tai 389
122. Khamti of Lower Burma, Assam frontier 393
123. Black Sakai of Gunong-Inas (Perak, Malay Pen.) 396
124. Negrito chief of Middle Andaman 398
125. Gurkha of the Kus or Khas tribe, Nepal 403
126. Group of Paniyan men and children of Malabar 404
127. Young Irula girl 406
128. Santal of the Bhagalpur Hills 407
129. An old Toda man of Nilgiri Hills 412
130. Group of Todas of Nilgiri Hills 415
131, 132. Singhalese of Candy, Ceylon 416
133. Tutti, Veddah woman of the village of Kolonggala 418
134. Natives of Mekran (Baluchistan) 421
135. Arts and crafts among the Kafirs 430
136. Tunisian Berber, Oasis type 433
137. Trarza Moor of the Senegal 434
138. Hamran Beja of Daghil tribe 437
139. Yoro Combo, fairly pure Fulah of Kayor (Futa Jallon) 442
140. Bonna M’Bané, Mandingan-Sossé 447
141. Catrai, Ganguela-Bantu 456
142. Swazi-Bantu woman and girl 466
143. N’Kon-yui, Bushman of the region of Lake Ngami 467
144. Hova of Tananarivo 472
145. Ambit, Sundanese of Java (Preanger prov.) 476
146. Natives of Livuliri (near Larantuka, Floris) 479
147, 148. Buri, a Solorian of Adanara Island 480, 481
149, 150. “Billy,” Queensland Australian 483, 485
151. Young Papuan woman of the Samarai people 492
152. Papuans of the Kerepunu tribe at Tamain-Hula (New Guinea) 496
153. Woman of the Fuala clan (New Caledonia) [Pg xxiii] 497
154, 155. Tahitian woman of Papeete 502, 503
156. Tahitian of Papeete 504
157. West Greenland Eskimo 517
158, 159. Gahhigué-Vatake, a Dakota-Siouan Indian 521, 523
160. Woman of Wichita tribe, Pawnee Nation, Ind. Terr., U.S. 526
161. Christian Apache Indian 529
162. Young Creole woman of Martinique 538
163. Miztec Indian (Mexico) 539
164. Miztec women (Mexico) 541
165. Guaraunos chief, with his two wives 547
166. Guaraunos of the mouth of the Orinoco 549
167, 168. Kalina or Carib of Dutch Guiana 554, 555
169, 170. Miranha Indian of Rio Yapura 557, 559
171. Bakairi, Carib tribe of upper Xingu 562
172. Aramichaux Indian (Carib tribe of French Guiana) 566
173. Bororo woman (unclassified tribe of Matto Grosso) 568
174. Kamanakar Kipa, young Yahgan Fuegian girl 571
175. Tualanpintsis, Yahgan Fuegian, and his wife Ticoaeli 575
MAP 1. Europe in the first glacial period 303
 „  2. Approximate distribution of the races of Europe 327

THE RACES OF MAN.

HUMAN RACES.


INTRODUCTION.
ETHNIC GROUPS AND ANIMAL SPECIES.

Difficulties in applying to Man the terms of zoological nomenclature—Criterion of species—Terms to give to the “Somatological Units” constituting the genus Homo—Monogenesis and Polygenesis—The “Ethnic Groups” are constituted by the different combinations of the “Somatological Units” or “Races”—Somatic characters and ethnic characters.

Difficulties in applying zoological naming conventions to humans—Criteria for defining species—Terminology for the "Somatological Units" that make up the genus Homo—Monogenesis and Polygenesis—The "Ethnic Groups" are formed by the various combinations of "Somatological Units" or "Races"—Physical traits and ethnic traits.

THE innumerable groups of mankind, massed together or scattered, according to the varying nature of the earth’s surface, are far from presenting a homogeneous picture. Every country has its own variety of physical type, language, manners, and customs. Thus, in order to exhibit a systematic view of all the peoples of the earth, it is necessary to observe a certain order in the study of these varieties, and to define carefully what is meant by such and such a descriptive term, having reference either to the physical type or to the social life of men. This we shall do in the subsequent chapters as we proceed to develop this slight sketch of the chief general facts of the physical and psychical life of man, and of the most striking social phenomena of the groups of mankind.

THE countless groups of people, gathered together or spread out, depending on the diverse features of the earth’s landscape, do not create a uniform image. Each country has its own distinct physical characteristics, languages, behaviors, and traditions. Therefore, to provide a structured overview of all the people on the planet, it's essential to maintain a specific order in studying these differences and to clearly define what is meant by various descriptive terms related to either physical traits or the social lives of people. We will do this in the following chapters as we continue to expand on this brief outline of the main general facts about human physical and mental life, as well as the most notable social phenomena among different groups of people.

But there are some general terms which are of more importance than others, and their meaning should be clearly understood from the first. I refer to expressions like “people,” “nation,” “tribe,” “race,” “species,” in short, all the designations of the different groupings, real or theoretic, of human beings. Having defined them, we shall by so doing define the object of our studies.

But there are some general terms that are more important than others, and their meanings should be clearly understood from the start. I’m talking about words like “people,” “nation,” “tribe,” “race,” “species,” and basically all the labels used for the various real or theoretical groupings of human beings. By defining these terms, we will also define the focus of our studies.

Since ethnography and anthropology began to exist as sciences, an attempt has been made to determine and establish the great groups amongst which humanity might be divided. A considerable diversity of opinion, however, exists among leading scientific men not only as to the number of these groups, of these “primordial divisions” of the human race, but, above all, as to the very nature of these groups. Their significance, most frequently, is very vaguely indicated.

Since ethnography and anthropology became recognized as sciences, efforts have been made to identify and classify the major groups into which humanity can be divided. However, there is significant disagreement among prominent scientists not only regarding the number of these groups, these "primordial divisions" of the human race, but also regarding the nature of these groups. Their importance is often described in very vague terms.

In zoology, when we proceed to classify, we have to do with beings which, in spite of slight individual differences, are easily grouped around a certain number of types, with well-defined characters, called “species.” An animal can always be found which will represent the “type” of its species. In all the great zoological collections there exist these “species-types,” to which individuals may be compared in order to decide if they belong to the supposed species. We have then in zoology a real substratum for the determination of species, those primordial units which are grouped afterwards in genera, families, orders, etc.

In zoology, when we classify organisms, we deal with beings that, despite minor individual differences, can easily be grouped around a certain number of types with clearly defined characteristics, called “species.” There is always an animal that represents the “type” of its species. In all major zoological collections, there are these “species-types” to which individuals can be compared to determine if they belong to the identified species. Thus, zoology provides a solid foundation for determining species, these fundamental units that are later organized into genera, families, orders, and so on.

Is it the same for man? Whilst knowing that the zoological genus Homo really exists quite distinct from the other genera of the animal kingdom, there still arises the question as to where the substratum is on which we must begin operations in order to determine the “species” of which this genus is composed. The only definite facts before us are these groups of mankind, dispersed over the whole habitable surface of the globe, to which are commonly given the names of peoples, nations, clans, tribes, etc. We have presented to us Arabs, Swiss, Australians, Bushmen, English, Siouan Indians, Negroes, etc., without knowing if each of these groups is on an equal footing from the point of view of classification.

Is it the same for humans? While we know that the zoological genus Homo exists distinctly from other genera in the animal kingdom, the question arises about the basis we should use to determine the “species” that make up this genus. The only clear facts we have are these groups of people, spread across the entire habitable surface of the globe, commonly referred to as peoples, nations, clans, tribes, etc. We see Arabs, Swiss, Australians, Bushmen, English, Siouan Indians, Negroes, etc., without knowing if each of these groups is equal in terms of classification.

Do these real and palpable groupings represent unions of individuals which, in spite of some slight dissimilarities, are[Pg 3] capable of forming what zoologists call “species,” “sub-species,” “varieties,” in the case of wild animals, or “races” in the case of domestic animals? One need not be a professional anthropologist to reply negatively to this question. They are ethnic groups formed by virtue of community of language, religion, social institutions, etc., which have the power of uniting human beings of one or several species, races, or varieties,[1] and are by no means zoological species; they may include human beings of one or of many species, races, or varieties.

Do these real and tangible groupings represent unions of individuals that, despite some minor differences, are[Pg 3] able to form what zoologists refer to as “species,” “sub-species,” “varieties” for wild animals, or “races” for domestic animals? You don't need to be a professional anthropologist to answer this question negatively. They are ethnic groups created by a shared language, religion, social institutions, etc., which have the ability to unite people from one or several species, races, or varieties,[1] and are definitely not zoological species; they can include individuals from one or many species, races, or varieties.

Here, then, is the first distinction to make: the social groups that we are to describe in this work under the names of clans, tribes, nations, populations, and peoples, according to their numerical importance and the degree of complication of their social life, are formed for us by the union of individuals belonging usually to two, three, or a greater number of “somatological units.” These units are “theoretic types” formed of an aggregation of physical characters combined in a certain way. The separate existence of these units may be established by a minute analysis of the physical characters of a great number of individuals taken haphazard in any given “ethnic group.” Here are, then, entities, theoretic conceptions exactly like “species” in zoology; only instead of having within our reach the “types” of these species as in zoological collections, we are obliged to rest content with approximations thereto, for it is a very rare occurrence to meet with an individual representing the type of the somatological unit to which he belongs. Most frequently we have to do with subjects whose forms are altered by blendings and crossings, and in whom, setting aside two or three typical traits, we find only a confused mixture of characters presenting nothing striking. Ordinarily, the more peoples are civilised the more[Pg 4] they are intermixed within certain territorial limits. Thus the number of “somatological units” is so much the greater when the “ethnic groups” are more civilised, and it is only among entirely primitive peoples that one may hope to find coincidence between the two terms. In reality, those peoples are almost undiscoverable who represent “somatological units” comparable to the “species” of zoology.

Here’s the first distinction to make: the social groups we’ll discuss in this work—under the labels of clans, tribes, nations, populations, and peoples—are organized based on their size and the complexity of their social lives. These groups are formed by the connection of individuals typically belonging to two, three, or more “somatological units.” These units are “theoretic types” made up of a combination of physical traits arranged in a specific way. We can establish the separate existence of these units by closely analyzing the physical traits of a wide range of individuals randomly selected from any particular “ethnic group.” Here we have entities, theoretical concepts similar to “species” in zoology; the only difference is that, unlike zoological collections where we have access to the “types” of these species, we must settle for approximations because it’s very rare to find an individual that perfectly represents the type of the somatological unit they belong to. Most often, we encounter individuals whose forms have been altered by mixing and crossbreeding, and aside from two or three typical traits, we see only a confused blend of characteristics that are not particularly distinctive. Generally, as societies become more civilized, they also tend to be more mixed within certain territorial boundaries. This means the number of “somatological units” increases in more civilized “ethnic groups,” and it's only among completely primitive peoples that we might find a match between the two concepts. In truth, such peoples are nearly impossible to find when it comes to representing “somatological units” that can be compared to the “species” in zoology.

But, it may be asked, do you believe that your “somatological units” are comparable with “species”? Are they not simple “varieties” or “races”?

But, it might be asked, do you think your “somatological units” are comparable to “species”? Are they not just simple “varieties” or “races”?

Without wishing to enter into a discussion of details, it seems to me that where the genus Homo is concerned, one can neither speak of the “species,” the “variety,” nor the “race” in the sense that is usually attributed to these words in zoology or in zootechnics.

Without wanting to dive into the details, it seems to me that when it comes to the genus Homo, we can't really talk about “species,” “variety,” or “race” in the way those terms are typically used in zoology or animal breeding.

In effect, in these two sciences, the terms “species” and “variety” are applied to wild animals living solely under the influence of nature; whilst the term “race” is given in a general way to the groups of domestic animals living under artificial conditions created by an alien will, that of man, for a well-defined object.

In these two fields of study, the terms “species” and “variety” refer to wild animals that exist purely in their natural environment. Meanwhile, the term “race” is generally used to describe groups of domestic animals that live in controlled conditions set by humans for specific purposes.

Let us see to which of these two categories man, considered as an animal, may be assimilated.

Let’s find out which of these two categories humans, seen as animals, can be compared to.

By this single fact, that even at the very bottom of the scale of civilisation man possesses articulate speech, fashions tools, and forms himself into rudimentary societies, he is emancipated from a great number of influences which Nature exerts over the wild animal; he lives, up to a certain point, in an artificial environment created by himself. On the other hand, precisely because these artificial conditions of life are not imposed upon him by a will existing outside himself, because his evolution is not directed by a “breeder” or a “domesticator,” man cannot be compared with domestic animals as regards the modifications of his corporeal structure.

By this single fact, that even at the very bottom of the scale of civilization, humans have the ability to speak, create tools, and form basic societies, they are freed from many influences that nature has over wild animals; they live, to some extent, in an artificial environment they created themselves. However, precisely because these artificial living conditions aren’t imposed on them by an external will, and because their evolution isn’t directed by a “breeder” or a “domesticator,” humans cannot be compared to domesticated animals in terms of the changes in their physical structure.

The data relating to the formation of varieties, species, and races can therefore be applied to the morphological study of man only with certain reservations.

The data about the formation of varieties, species, and races can only be used for the morphological study of humans with some limitations.

This being established, let us bear in mind that even the distinction between the species, the variety (geographical or otherwise), and the race is anything but clearly marked. Besides, this is a question that belongs to the domain of general biology, and it is no more settled in botany or in zoology than in anthropology. The celebrated botanist, Naegeli, has even proposed to suppress this distinction, and definitely show the identical nature of all these divisions by instituting his great and small species.[2]

This being established, let's keep in mind that the differences between species, varieties (geographical or otherwise), and races are anything but clearly defined. Also, this question falls within the field of general biology and is just as unsettled in botany and zoology as it is in anthropology. The well-known botanist, Naegeli, even suggested getting rid of this distinction and demonstrating the identical nature of all these categories by introducing his great and small species.[2]

The idea of “species” must rest on the knowledge of two orders of facts, the morphological resemblances of beings and the lineal transmission of their distinctive characters. Here, in fact, the formula of Cuvier is still in force to-day in science. “The species is the union of individuals descending one from the other or from common parents, and of those who resemble them as much as they resemble each other.”[3] (I have italicised the passage relating to descent.) It is necessary then that beings, in order to form a species, should be like each other, but it is obvious that this resemblance cannot be absolute, for there are not two plants or two animals in nature which do not differ from each other by some detail of structure; the likeness or unlikeness is then purely relative; it is bound to vary within certain limits.

The concept of "species" relies on understanding two sets of facts: the physical similarities among organisms and the hereditary transmission of their unique traits. In this context, Cuvier's formula still holds true in modern science. "A species is the grouping of individuals descending one from the other or from common parents, along with those that resemble them as much as they resemble each other."[3] (I've italicized the part about descent.) Therefore, for organisms to belong to a species, they need to be similar to one another. However, it's clear that this similarity can't be total, as no two plants or animals in nature are identical in every detail of their structure; thus, the similarities and differences are merely relative and will vary within certain boundaries.

But what are these limits? Here we are on the verge of the arbitrary, for there exists no fixed rule determining the point to which individual unlikeness may go in order to be considered as characteristic of a species. A difference which entitles one zoologist to create a species hardly suffices, according to another, to constitute a “variety,” a “sub-species,” or a “race.” As to the second criterion of species drawn from the[Pg 6] transmission and the descent of characters, it is theoretic rather than practical. Without dwelling on the numerous examples of “varieties” as fertile among themselves as “species,”[4] let us ask ourselves how many zoologists or botanists have verified experimentally the fertility of the species which they have created. In the large majority of cases, the species of plants and animals have been established solely from morphological characters, very often from the examination of dead specimens, and without any guarantee that the beings in question proceeded from common parents and that when crossed they would be fertile or not.

But what are these limits? We're getting into somewhat arbitrary territory here, since there's no fixed rule that defines how different an individual can be before it's considered typical of a species. A difference that one zoologist thinks justifies creating a new species might be seen by another as merely a “variety,” a “sub-species,” or a “race.” The second criterion for defining species, based on the transmission and descent of traits, is more theoretical than practical. Without going into the many examples of “varieties” that are as fertile as “species,” let’s consider how many zoologists or botanists have actually tested the fertility of the species they proposed. In most cases, plant and animal species have been established mainly based on morphological traits, often through the examination of deceased specimens, without any assurance that these organisms came from common parents or whether they would be fertile when bred together.

In the case of man, as in that of the majority of plants and animals, fertility or non-fertility among the different groups has not been experimentally proved, to enable us to decide if they should be called “races” or “species.” To a dozen facts in favour of one of the solutions, and to general theories in regard to half-breeds, can be opposed an equal number of facts, and the idea, not less general, of reversion to the primitive type.[5] And again, almost all the facts in question are borrowed from cross-breeding between the Whites and other races. No one has ever tried cross-breeding between the Australians and the Lapps, or between the Bushmen and the Patagonians, for example. If certain races are indefinitely fertile among themselves (which has not yet been clearly shown), it may be there are others which are not so.[6] A criterion of descent being unobtainable, the question of the rank to be assigned to the genus Homo is confined to a morphological criterion, to the differences in physical type.

In humans, just like with most plants and animals, whether different groups are fertile or not hasn’t been tested enough for us to determine if they should be called “races” or “species.” For every fact that supports one side, there are just as many that support the other, along with general theories about mixed breeds, and the widespread idea of reverting back to the original type.[5] Plus, almost all the relevant facts come from cross-breeding between White people and other races. No one has ever looked into cross-breeding between Australians and Lapps, or Bushmen and Patagonians, for instance. If some races are consistently fertile with each other (which hasn’t been clearly demonstrated), it’s possible that others are not.[6] Since we can't get a clear criterion for descent, deciding on the classification of the genus Homo is limited to a morphological standard, focusing on physical type differences.

According to some, these differences are sufficiently pronounced for each group to form a “species”; according to others they are of such a nature as only to form racial distinctions. Thus it is left to the personal taste of each investigator what name be given to these.

According to some, these differences are significant enough for each group to be considered a "species"; according to others, they are only enough to create racial distinctions. Therefore, it's up to each investigator's personal preference what label to use for these.

We cannot do better than cite upon this point the opinion of a writer of admitted authority. “It is almost a matter of indifference,” says Darwin, “whether the so-called races of man are thus designated, or ranked as ‘species’ or ‘sub-species,’ but the latter term appears the most appropriate.”[7] The word “race” having been almost universally adopted nowadays to designate the different physical types of mankind, I shall retain it in preference to that of “sub-species,” while reiterating that there is no essential difference between these two words and the word “species.”

We can't do better than reference the opinion of a respected writer. “It doesn't really matter,” says Darwin, “whether the so-called races of man are labeled that way or categorized as ‘species’ or ‘sub-species,’ but the latter term seems more fitting.”[7] Since the term “race” has been widely adopted today to refer to the different physical types of humanity, I will stick with it instead of “sub-species,” while emphasizing that there is no fundamental difference between these two terms and the word “species.”

From what has just been said, the question whether humanity forms a single species divided into varieties or races, or whether it forms several species, loses much of its importance.

From what we just discussed, the question of whether humanity is a single species divided into different varieties or races, or if it consists of several species, becomes less significant.

The whole of this ancient controversy between monogenists and polygenists seems to be somewhat scholastic, and completely sterile and futile; the same few and badly established facts are always reappearing, interpreted in such and such a fashion by each disputant according to the necessities of his thesis, sometimes led by considerations which are extra-scientific. Perhaps in the more or less near future, when we shall have a better knowledge of present and extinct races of man, as well as of living and of fossil animal species most nearly related to man, we shall be able to discuss the question of origin. At the present time we are confined to hypothesis without a single positive fact for the solution of the problem. We have merely to note how widely the opinions of the learned differ in regard to the origin of race of certain domestic animals, such as the dog, the ox, or the horse, to get at once an idea of the difficulty of the problem. And yet, in these[Pg 8] cases, we are dealing with questions much less complicated and much more carefully studied.

The entire debate between monogenists and polygenists seems to be overly academic, completely unproductive, and pointless; the same few poorly established facts keep coming up, interpreted differently by each side based on their arguments, sometimes influenced by factors that aren't scientific. Maybe in the not-so-distant future, when we have a better understanding of both current and extinct human races, as well as living and fossil animal species that are closest to humans, we’ll be able to discuss the question of origin. Right now, we’re limited to hypotheses with no solid facts to solve the problem. Just looking at how widely opinions vary among experts regarding the origins of certain domesticated animals, like dogs, cattle, or horses, gives us a sense of how challenging this issue is. And yet, in these[Pg 8] cases, we’re dealing with questions that are much less complicated and have been studied more thoroughly.

Moreover, whether we admit variety, unity or plurality of species in the genus Homo we shall always be obliged to recognise the positive fact of the existence in mankind of several somatological units having each a character of its own, the combinations and the intermingling of which constitute the different ethnic groups. Thus the monogenists, even the most intractable, as soon as they have established hypothetically a single species of man, or of his “precursor,” quickly cause the species to evolve, under the influence of environment, into three or four or a greater number of primitive “stocks,” or “types,” or “races,”—in a word, into somatological units which, intermingling, form “peoples,” and so forth.

Moreover, whether we acknowledge the variety, unity, or plurality of species within the genus Homo, we must recognize the clear fact that humanity consists of several different physical groups, each with its own unique characteristics. The combinations and mixing of these groups create the various ethnic communities. Therefore, even the most stubborn monogenists, once they propose a single species of human or its "precursor," quickly lead to the idea that this species evolves, influenced by the environment, into three, four, or even more primitive "stocks," "types," or "races"—essentially, distinct physical groups that, when mixed, form "peoples," and so on.

We can sum up what has just been said in a few propositions. On examining attentively the different “ethnic groups” commonly called “peoples,” “nations,” “tribes,” etc., we ascertain that they are distinguished from each other especially by their language, their mode of life, and their manners; and we ascertain besides that the same traits of physical type are met with in two, three, or several groups, sometimes considerably removed the one from the other in point of habitat. On the other hand, we almost always see in these groups some variations of type so striking that we are led to admit the hypothesis of the formation of such groups by the blending of several distinct somatological units.

We can sum up what we've just discussed in a few points. By closely examining the different “ethnic groups” often referred to as “peoples,” “nations,” “tribes,” etc., we find that they are primarily distinguished from one another by their language, way of life, and customs. Additionally, we notice that similar physical traits can be found in two, three, or even more groups, which may be quite far apart in terms of their living environments. On the flip side, we often observe in these groups some variations in type that are so notable that we are led to consider the idea that these groups were formed by mixing several distinct physical units.

It is to these units that we give the name “races,” using the word in a very broad sense, different from that given to it in zoology and zootechnics. It is a sum-total of somatological characteristics once met with in a real union of individuals, now scattered in fragments of varying proportions among several “ethnic groups,” from which it can no longer be differentiated except by a process of delicate analysis.

It is to these units that we refer to as “races,” using the term in a broad sense, different from its meaning in zoology and animal husbandry. It is a collection of physical traits that were once found in a cohesive group of individuals, now dispersed in different amounts among various “ethnic groups,” which can only be distinguished through careful analysis.

The differences between “races” are shown in the somatological characteristics which are the resultant of the continual struggle in the individual of two factors: variability, that is to say, the production of the dissimilar; and heredity, that is to[Pg 9] say, the perpetuation of the similar. There are the differences in outer form, in the anatomical structure, and in the physiological functions manifested in individuals. Thus the study of these characters is based on man considered as an individual of a zoological group. On the other hand, the differences between the ethnical groups are the product of evolutions subject to other laws than those of biology—laws still very dimly apprehended. They manifest themselves in ethnical, linguistic, or social characteristics. The study of them is based on the grouping of individuals in societies.

The differences between “races” can be seen in the physical traits that result from the ongoing struggle of two factors within individuals: variability, which means the creation of differences; and heredity, which means the continuation of similarities. These differences appear in external forms, anatomical structures, and physiological functions in individuals. Therefore, the study of these traits is based on humans viewed as members of a zoological group. On the other hand, the differences among ethnic groups arise from evolutions governed by different laws than those of biology—laws that are still not fully understood. These differences show up in ethnic, linguistic, or social characteristics. The study of these is based on how individuals are grouped into societies.

To study these two categories of characteristics, either in their general aspect as a whole, or in describing successively the different peoples, is to study mankind with the object of trying to assign the limits to the “races” constituting the ethnical groups, and to sketch the reciprocal relations and connections of these groups with each other.

To examine these two types of characteristics, whether looking at them as a whole or describing the various peoples one by one, is to study humanity with the goal of defining the boundaries of the “races” that make up the ethnic groups and outlining the relationships and connections between these groups.

The science which concerns itself more especially with the somatological characteristics of the genus Homo, whether considered as a whole in his relation to other animals, or in his varieties, bears the name of anthropology; that which deals with the ethnical characteristics is called ethnography in some countries and ethnology in others.

The science that focuses specifically on the physical traits of the genus Homo, whether looked at as a whole in relation to other animals or in its different varieties, is known as anthropology; the study of ethnic characteristics is referred to as ethnography in some countries and ethnology in others.

This latter science should concern itself with human societies under all their aspects; but as history, political economy, etc., have already taken possession of the study of civilised peoples, there only remain for it the peoples without a history, or those who have not been adequately treated by historians. However, there is a convergence of characters in mankind, and we find even to-day the trace of savagery in the most civilised peoples. Ethnical facts must not then be considered separately. We must compare them either among different peoples, or, down the course of the ages, in the same people, without concerning ourselves with the degree of actual civilisation attained.

This new field of study should explore human societies in all their aspects. However, since history, political economy, and similar disciplines have already focused on civilized societies, it mainly deals with those without a history or those that haven't been properly addressed by historians. Still, there are common traits among humans, and we can still see remnants of primitive behaviors in the most civilized societies today. Ethnic facts shouldn't be viewed in isolation. We need to compare them across different societies or over time within the same society, regardless of their current level of civilization.

Certain authors make a distinction between ethnography and ethnology, saying the first aims at describing peoples or the different stages of civilisation, while the second should[Pg 10] explain these stages and formulate the general laws which have governed the beginning and the evolution of such stages. Others make a like distinction in anthropology, dividing it theoretically into “special” and “general,” the one describing races, and the other dealing with the descent of these races and of mankind as a whole.[8] But these divisions are purely arbitrary, and in practice it is impossible to touch on one without having given at least a summary of the other. The two points of view, descriptive and speculative, cannot be treated separately. A science cannot remain content with a pure and simple description of unconnected facts, phenomena, and objects. It requires at least a classification, explanations, and, afterwards, the deduction of general laws. In the same way, it would be puerile to build up speculative systems without laying a solid foundation drawn from the study of facts. Already the distinction between the somatic and the ethnic sciences is embarrassing; thus psychological and linguistic phenomena refer as much to the individual as to societies. They might, strictly speaking, be the subject of a special group of sciences. In the same way, the facts drawn from the somatic and ethnic studies of extinct races are the subject of a separate science—Palethnography, otherwise Prehistory, or Prehistoric Archæology.

Certain authors differentiate between ethnography and ethnology, stating that the first focuses on describing people or the various stages of civilization, while the second should[Pg 10] explain these stages and establish the general laws that have governed their beginnings and evolution. Others make a similar distinction in anthropology, dividing it theoretically into “special” and “general,” where the former describes races and the latter addresses the origins of these races and humanity as a whole.[8] However, these categories are entirely arbitrary, and in practice, it's impossible to discuss one without offering at least a brief overview of the other. The two perspectives, descriptive and speculative, cannot be handled separately. Science cannot be satisfied with just a straightforward description of disconnected facts, phenomena, and objects. It needs at least classification, explanations, and ultimately, the derivation of general laws. Similarly, it would be naive to develop speculative systems without a solid foundation based on the study of facts. The distinction between somatic and ethnic sciences is already confusing; psychological and linguistic phenomena pertain to both individuals and societies. They could, strictly speaking, form the basis for a separate group of sciences. Likewise, the findings from somatic and ethnic studies of extinct races are the focus of a distinct science—Palethnography, also known as Prehistory, or Prehistoric Archaeology.

The object of this book being the description of ethnical groups now existing on the earth, and of the races which compose them, the title of “Ethnography” might fitly be given to it in conformity with the classifications which have just been mentioned. Nevertheless, it contains in its early chapters a summary, as it were, of what these classifications style[Pg 11] “General Anthropology and Ethnology,” for the descriptions of the several peoples can scarcely be understood if we have not in the first instance given at least a general idea of the somatic as well as the ethnic characters which serve to distinguish them.

The goal of this book is to describe the ethnic groups currently existing on Earth and the races that make them up, so it can be appropriately labeled as "Ethnography" in line with the classifications mentioned earlier. However, in the early chapters, it provides a summary of what these classifications refer to as[Pg 11] “General Anthropology and Ethnology." Understanding the descriptions of the various peoples is difficult without first giving at least a basic overview of the physical and ethnic characteristics that distinguish them.


CHAPTER I.
BODY CHARACTERS.

DISTINCTIVE CHARACTERS OF MAN AND APES.

DISTINCTIVE CHARACTERISTICS OF HUMANS AND APES.

Monkeys and anthropoid apes—Erect attitude—Curvature of the spine—Brain—Skull—Teeth—Other characters—Differences less accentuated in the fœtus and the young than in the adult.

Monkeys and ape-like creatures—Upright posture—Curve of the spine—Brain—Skull—Teeth—Other features—Differences are less pronounced in the fetus and the young than in adults.

DISTINCTIVE MORPHOLOGICAL CHARACTERS OF HUMAN RACES.

DISTINCTIVE MORPHOLOGICAL CHARACTERS OF HUMAN RACES.

Stature: Individual limits—Dwarfs and giants—Average stature of different populations—Influence of environment—Differences according to sex—Reconstitution from the long bones—Teguments: Skin—Hair of head and body—Four principal types—Microscopic structure—Correlation between the hair of the head and the pilosity of the body—Pigmentation: Colouring of the skin, the eyes, and the hair—Changes in the pigment.

Stature: Individual limits—Short people and tall people—Average height of different populations—Impact of the environment—Variations based on sex—Reconstruction from the long bones—Teguments: Skin—Hair on the head and body—Four main types—Microscopic structure—Connection between head hair and body hair—Pigmentation: Color of the skin, eyes, and hair—Changes in pigment.

Distinctive Characters of Man and Apes.

THE physical peculiarities distinguishing man from the animals most nearly allied to him in organisation, and those which differentiate human races one from another, are almost never the same. I shall in a few words point out the former, dwelling at greater length on the latter, which have a more direct connection with our subject.

THE physical traits that set humans apart from the animals most similar to us in structure, as well as those that differentiate human races from each other, are rarely the same. I will briefly mention the former and elaborate more on the latter, as they are more directly related to our topic.

From the purely zoological point of view man is a placental or Eutherian mammal, because he has breasts, because he is more or less covered with hair, because his young, nourished in the womb of the mother through the medium of the placenta, come fully formed into the world, without needing to be protected in a pouch or fold of skin, as in the case of[Pg 13] the marsupial mammals (implacentals or Metatherians), or completing their development in a hatched egg, as in the case of the monotremata or Prototherians.

From a purely zoological standpoint, humans are placental or Eutherian mammals because they have breasts, have some body hair, and give birth to fully formed young. These young are nourished in the womb through the placenta, without the need to be carried in a pouch or skin fold like [Pg 13] marsupial mammals (implacentals or Metatherians), or developing from a hatched egg like monotremes or Prototherians.

In this sub-class of the placental mammals, man belongs to the order of the Primates of Linnæus, in view of certain peculiarities of his physical structure—the pectoral position of the breasts, the form, number, and arrangement of the teeth in the jaw, etc.

In this subgroup of placental mammals, humans belong to the order of the Primates as categorized by Linnæus, due to specific features of their physical structure—the position of the breasts on the chest, the shape, number, and arrangement of teeth in the jaw, and so on.

The order of the Primates comprises five groups or families: the Marmosets (Hapalidæ), the Cebidæ, the Cercopithecidæ, the anthropoid apes (Simidæ), and lastly, the Hominidæ.[9] Putting aside the first two groups of Primates, which inhabit the New World, and which are distinguished from the three other groups by several characters, let us concern ourselves with the apes of the Old World and the Hominians. Let us at the outset remember that the monkeys and the anthropoid apes exhibit the same arrangement of teeth, or, as it is termed, the same “dental formula,” as man. This formula, a character of the first importance in the classification of mammals, is summed up, as we know, in the following manner: four incisors, two canines, four premolars, and six molars in each jaw.

The order of Primates consists of five groups or families: the Marmosets (Hapalidæ), the Cebidæ, the Cercopithecidæ, the anthropoid apes (Simidæ), and finally, the Hominidæ.[9] Setting aside the first two groups of Primates that live in the New World, which are different from the other three groups in several ways, let’s focus on the apes of the Old World and the Hominians. It’s important to remember that monkeys and anthropoid apes have the same arrangement of teeth, known as the same “dental formula,” as humans. This formula, which is crucial for classifying mammals, is expressed as follows: four incisors, two canines, four premolars, and six molars in each jaw.

The Cercopithecidæ walk on their four paws, and this four-footed attitude is in harmony with the structure of their spine, in which the three curves, cervical, dorsal, and lumbar, so characteristic in man, are hardly indicated; thus the spine seems to form a single arch from the head to the tail. As to this last appendage, it is never wanting in these monkeys, which are also provided with buttock or ischiatic callosities, and often with cheek-pouches.

The Cercopithecidæ walk on all fours, and this quadrupedal stance aligns well with their spinal structure, where the three curves—cervical, dorsal, and lumbar—that are so prominent in humans are barely noticeable; instead, their spine appears to form a single arch from the head to the tail. As for their tails, these monkeys always have them, and they also typically possess buttock or ischiatic calluses, along with cheek pouches.

The anthropoid apes form a zoological group of four genera only. Two of these genera, the gorilla and the chimpanzee, inhabit tropical Africa; the two others, the orang-utan and[Pg 14] the gibbon, are confined to the south-east of Asia, or, to be more precise, to Indo-China, and the islands of Sumatra and Borneo. We can even reduce the group in question to three genera only, for many naturalists consider the gibbon as an intermediate form between the anthropoid apes and the monkeys.[10] The anthropoids have a certain number of characters in common which distinguish them from the monkeys. Spending most of their life in trees, they do not walk in the same way as the macaques or the baboons. Always bent (except the gibbon), they move about with difficulty on the ground, supporting themselves not on the palm of the hand, as do the monkeys, but on the back of the bent phalanges. They have no tail like the other apes, nor have they cheek-pouches to serve as provision bags. Finally, they are without those callosities on the posterior part of the body which are met with in a large number of Cercopithecidæ, attaining often enormous proportions, as for instance, among the Cynocephali. The gibbon alone has the rudiments of ischiatic callosities.

The anthropoid apes consist of only four genera. Two of these genera, the gorilla and the chimpanzee, live in tropical Africa; the other two, the orangutan and[Pg 14] the gibbon, are found in southeast Asia, specifically in Indo-China, as well as the islands of Sumatra and Borneo. We can narrow the group down to just three genera because many naturalists view the gibbon as a transitional type between the anthropoid apes and monkeys.[10] The anthropoids share several characteristics that set them apart from monkeys. They spend most of their lives in trees and don’t walk like macaques or baboons. They are always hunched over (except for the gibbon) and find it hard to move on the ground, resting not on the palms of their hands like monkeys, but on the backs of their bent fingers. They lack tails like other apes and don’t have cheek pouches to carry food. Additionally, they don't have the calluses on the rear body that many members of Cercopithecidæ have, which can be quite large, as seen in the Cynocephali. Only the gibbon has remnants of ischial callosities.

If we compare man with these apes, which certainly of all animals resemble him most, the following principal differences may be noted. Instead of holding himself in a bending position, and walking supported on his arms, man walks in an erect attitude—the truly biped mode of progress. In harmony with this attitude, his vertebral column presents three curves, cervical, dorsal, and lumbar, very definitely indicated, while they are only faintly marked in the anthropoids, and almost absent in the monkeys. This character, moreover, is graduated in man; in civilised man the curvature in question is more marked than among savages. There is no need, however, to see in that any “character of superiority.” It is quite simply an acquired formation; it is more marked in civilised man just because it is one of the conditions of the stability of the vertebral column, a stability so essential in sedentary life, while a curvature less marked gives much more flexibility[Pg 15] to the movements, at once so numerous and varied, of the savage.[11]

If we compare humans to these apes, which are definitely the animals that resemble us the most, we can note some key differences. Instead of crouching and walking on his arms, humans walk upright—truly a bipedal way of moving. This upright posture corresponds with a vertebral column that has three distinct curves: cervical, thoracic, and lumbar, clearly defined in humans, while they are only slightly visible in the great apes and almost nonexistent in monkeys. Additionally, this feature varies in humans; in civilized individuals, the curvature is more pronounced than in those from primitive cultures. However, this shouldn't be seen as a "superiority." It's simply a result of development; the curvature is more prominent in civilized humans because it contributes to the stability of the vertebral column, which is essential for a sedentary lifestyle, whereas a less pronounced curvature allows for much more flexibility in the numerous and varied movements of primitive peoples.[Pg 15]

But to what does man owe this erect and biped attitude? Professor Ranke has put forward on this subject a very ingenious hypothesis.[12] According to him, the excessive development of the brain, while conducive to enlargement of the skull, would at the same time determine the change of attitude in a being so imperfectly and primitively biped as was our progenitor. In this way would be assured the perfect equilibrium on the vertebral column of the head, made heavy by the brain. Without wishing to discuss this theory, let me say that several peculiarities in the anatomical structure of man, compared with those of anthropoid apes and other mammals, give it an air of plausibility.

But what accounts for this upright, two-legged position of humans? Professor Ranke has proposed a very clever hypothesis on this topic.[12] He suggests that the significant growth of the brain, while contributing to a larger skull, would also lead to the adjustment of posture in a being that was not fully and evolvedly bipedal like our ancestors. This would ensure that the head, weighed down by the brain, maintains perfect balance on the vertebral column. Without delving into a discussion of this theory, I will point out that several unique features in human anatomy, compared to those of great apes and other mammals, lend it some credibility.

In fact, while with the majority of mammals the equilibrium of the head is assured by very powerful cervical ligaments, and with anthropoid apes by very strong muscles, extending from the occiput to the spinous processes of the cervical vertebræ, twice as long as those of man (Figs. 1 and 2, a), which prevent the massive muzzle from falling upon the chest and pressing on the organs of respiration,[13] we see nothing of a similar kind in the genus Homo—no cervical ligament, and no powerful muscles at the nape of the neck. The very voluminous brain-case of man suffices to counterbalance the weight of the much reduced maxillary part, almost without the aid of muscles or special ligaments, and the head balances itself on the vertebral column (Fig. 2).

In fact, while most mammals have powerful cervical ligaments to stabilize their heads, and anthropoid apes rely on strong muscles that extend from the back of the skull to the cervical vertebrae—twice as long as those in humans (Figs. 1 and 2, a)—to keep their heavy muzzles from resting on their chests and putting pressure on their breathing organs,[13] we don’t see anything similar in the genus Homo. There are no cervical ligaments or strong muscles at the back of the neck. The large brain case of humans is enough to balance the lighter maxillary part almost entirely without the help of muscles or specific ligaments, allowing the head to rest on the vertebral column (Fig. 2).

This equilibrium being almost perfect, necessitates but very thin and flexible ligaments in the articulation of the two occi[Pg 16]pital condyles of the skull on the atlas. The slight muscles to be found behind the articulation are there only to counterbalance the trifling tendency of the head to fall forward.

This balance is nearly perfect, requiring only very thin and flexible ligaments in the joint where the two occipital condyles of the skull meet the atlas. The small muscles located behind the joint are only there to counteract the slight tendency of the head to tilt forward.

In connection with this point, we must remember that Broca and several other anthropologists see, on the contrary, in the biped attitude, one of the conditions of the development of the brain, as that attitude alone assures the free use of the hands and extended range of vision. Somewhat analogous ideas have lately been put forward by men of science of the first rank like Munro and Turner.[14]

In relation to this point, we should keep in mind that Broca and several other anthropologists believe that walking on two legs is actually one of the key factors in the brain's development, as this posture allows for the free use of our hands and a wider field of vision. Similar concepts have recently been proposed by top scientists like Munro and Turner.[14]

Skull of Gorilla

FIG. 1.—Skull of Gorilla, one-fourth actual size.
a, spinous processes of cervical vertebræ;
b, cranial crests, sagittal and occipital.

FIG. 1.—Skull of Gorilla, one-fourth actual size.
a, spinous processes of cervical vertebrae;
b, cranial crests, sagittal and occipital.

In any case, let us remember in regard to this point, that at birth man still bears traces of his quadrupedal origin; he has then scarcely any curves in the vertebral column. The cer[Pg 17]vical curve only shows itself at the time when the child begins to “hold up its head,” in the sitting posture to which it gradually becomes accustomed—that is to say about the third month. On the other hand, as soon as the child begins to walk (the second year), the prevertebral muscles and those of the loins act upon the lower regions of the spine and produce the lumbar curve.

In any case, let's keep in mind that at birth, humans still show signs of their four-legged ancestry; they hardly have any curves in their spine. The neck curve only develops when the baby starts to “hold up its head” and gets used to sitting, which is around the third month. On the other hand, as soon as the child begins to walk (around the second year), the muscles in the front of the spine and those in the lower back start to influence the lower part of the spine and create the lower back curve.

Thus, perhaps, the chief fact which determines the erect attitude so characteristic of man is the excessive development of his brain, and the consequent development of the brain-case.

Thus, maybe the main reason for the upright posture that's so typical of humans is the significant growth of the brain and the resulting expansion of the skull.

Skull of Man

FIG. 2.—Skull of Man, one-fourth natural size.
a, spinous processes of cervical vertebræ.

FIG. 2.—Skull of Man, one-fourth actual size.
a, spinous processes of cervical vertebrae.

It is in this excessive development of the brain that the principal difference between man and the anthropoid apes must be sought. We know in fact from the researches of numerous anthropologists (see Chapter II.) that the average weight of a man’s brain in European races (the only races sufficiently known in this respect) is 1360 grammes, and that of a woman’s is 1211 grammes. These figures may rise to 1675[Pg 18] grammes in certain instances, and fall to 1025 in others.[15] Brains weighing less than 1000 grammes are generally considered as abnormal and pathological.

It is in this significant growth of the brain that we find the main difference between humans and anthropoid apes. Research conducted by various anthropologists (see Chapter II.) shows that the average weight of a man's brain in European populations (the only groups well-studied in this regard) is 1360 grams, while for women, it's 1211 grams. In some cases, these figures can go up to 1675[Pg 18] grams, and in others, they can drop to 1025 grams.[15] Brains that weigh less than 1000 grams are typically considered abnormal and indicative of a medical issue.

On the other hand, the brains of the great anthropoid apes (gorilla, chimpanzee, and orang-utan), the only ones comparable to man in regard to weight of body, have an average weight of 360 grammes. This weight may rise to 420 grammes in certain isolated cases, but never exceeds this figure. And even in these cases, with the orang-utan, for example,[16] it only represents one half per cent. of the total weight of the body, while with European man the proportion is that of at least three per cent., according to Boyd and Bischoff.[17]

On the other hand, the brains of the great apes (gorilla, chimpanzee, and orangutan), which are the only ones comparable to humans in terms of body weight, have an average weight of 360 grams. This weight can go up to 420 grams in certain rare cases, but it never exceeds that amount. Even in these cases, like with the orangutan,[16] it only makes up half a percent of the total body weight, while in European humans, the proportion is at least three percent, according to Boyd and Bischoff.[17]

The excessive development of the brain and of the brain-case which encloses it is correlative, in the case of man, with the reduction of the facial part of the skull. In this respect the difference is also appreciable between him and the animals. In order to convince ourselves of this we have only to compare the human skull with that of any ape whatever, placing both in the same horizontal plane approximately parallel to the line of vision.[18]

The excessive growth of the brain and the skull that surrounds it is related, in humans, to the shrinking of the facial part of the skull. This difference is also noticeable when comparing humans to animals. To see this clearly, we can simply compare a human skull with that of any ape, positioning both on the same horizontal plane roughly parallel to the line of sight.[18]

Viewed from above, or by the norma verticalis, as the anthropologists say, the bony structure of the human head leaves nothing of its facial part to be seen (Fig. 11); at the very most may be observed, in certain rare instances, the lower part of the nasal bones, or the alveolar portion of the upper jaw (Fig. 10). On the other hand, with apes, anthropoid or otherwise, almost all the facial part is visible. Examined in profile (norma lateralis), the bony structure of the heads of man and monkeys presents the same differences.

Viewed from above, or by the norma verticalis, as anthropologists refer to it, the bony structure of the human head shows almost none of its facial features (Fig. 11); in rare cases, you might see the lower part of the nasal bones or the alveolar section of the upper jaw (Fig. 10). In contrast, with apes, whether anthropoid or not, most of the facial features are visible. When viewed from the side (norma lateralis), the bony structure of the heads of humans and monkeys shows similar differences.

With the anthropoid apes, the facial portion forming a veritable muzzle rises, massive and bestial, in advance of the skull, while with man, very reduced in size, it is placed below the skull. The facial angle, by means of which the degree of protuberance of the muzzle may, to a certain point, be measured, exhibits notable differences when the skulls of man and animals are compared in this particular. On continuing the examination of the profiles of the bony structures of the two heads in question, we notice also the slight development of the facial part of the malar bone in man, as compared with its temporal part, and the contrary in the ape; as well as the difference in the size of the mastoid processes, very strong in man, very much diminished proportionately to the dimensions of the head in the anthropoid apes.

With anthropoid apes, the facial area creates a true muzzle that is large and beastly, positioned in advance of the skull, whereas in humans, it is much smaller and located below the skull. The facial angle, which measures the extent of the muzzle's protrusion, shows significant differences when comparing the skulls of humans and animals in this regard. Continuing to examine the outlines of the bony structures of the two heads, we also observe the slight development of the facial portion of the malar bone in humans compared to its temporal part, while it's the opposite in apes. Additionally, there is a notable difference in the size of the mastoid processes: they are quite prominent in humans but much smaller relative to the size of the head in anthropoid apes.

Seen from the front (norma facialis), the human skull presents a peculiarity which is not observed in any anthropoid skull, namely, that the top of the nasal opening is always situated higher than the lowest point of the lower edge of the orbits (Fig. 12); while in the anthropoid apes it is always found below this point. Lastly, if the skulls in question, always placed on the horizontal plane, are compared from behind (norma occipitalis), it will be noted that on the human skull the occipital foramen is not seen at all; on the skulls of monkeys it is plainly visible, if not wholly, at least partly.[19]

Seen from the front (norma facialis), the human skull has a unique feature not found in any anthropoid skull: the top of the nasal opening is always located higher than the lowest point of the lower edge of the eye sockets (Fig. 12), whereas in anthropoid apes, it is always found below this point. Finally, when comparing the skulls from behind (norma occipitalis), it’s clear that the occipital foramen is completely absent in the human skull; in monkey skulls, it is clearly visible, if not entirely, at least partially.[19]

All the other characters which distinguish man from the anthropoid apes are only the consequences of the great enlargement of his brain-case, at the expense of the maxillary part of the face, and of the erect attitude and biped progression.

All the other traits that set humans apart from anthropoid apes are just the results of the significant expansion of their brain case, which comes at the expense of the jaw area, along with their upright posture and ability to walk on two legs.

Let us take, for instance, those enormous crests which give an aspect at once so strange and horrible to the skulls of the adult males of the gorilla and the chimpanzee. These projections are due to the extreme development of the masticatory muscles which move the heavy jaws and of the cervical muscles, ensuring the equilibrium of the head. Not[Pg 20] having found sufficient room for their insertion on the too small brain-case, they have, so to speak, compelled the bony tissue in the course of development to deposit itself as an eminence or crest at the point where the two lines of insertion meet on the crown of the head. The best proof of this is that the young have no crests, and that on their skulls the distance between the temporal lines marking the insertion of the temporal muscles is almost as great as it is in man. In the gorillas, it is the same with the enormous spines of the cervical vertebræ, to which are fixed the muscular masses of the nape of the neck. These crests and these processes being less developed in the orang-utan, its head is not so well balanced, and its heavy muzzle falls on its chest. So one may suppose that the laryngeal sacs, considerably larger than those of the gorilla, serve him as air-cushions to lessen the enormous weight of the jaw resting on the trachea. The gibbon, better adapted to biped progression, and having a less heavy jaw, has no skull-crests. Further, with it, the ventricles of Morgagni, that is to say, the little pouches situated behind the vocal cord in the larynx, never develop (except in one species, Hylobates syndactylus) into enormous air-sacs as in the orang-utan. In this respect, the gibbon approaches much nearer to man than the other anthropoids, but it is also more distinguished from him than the others by the excessive length of the arms, or, to be more exact, of the pectoral limbs. It holds itself erect and walks almost as well as man, aided by the long arms and hands which touch the ground even when the animal is standing quite upright, and which he uses as a pendulum when walking. In the case of three other anthropoids, which bend forward in walking, the pectoral limb is shorter than in the gibbon but longer than in man.

Let’s consider the large ridges that give the skulls of adult male gorillas and chimpanzees such a strange and frightening appearance. These protrusions result from the significant development of the chewing muscles that move the heavy jaws and the neck muscles that keep the head balanced. Since there isn’t enough space for these muscles to attach on the small braincase, the bony tissue has, in a sense, developed into a ridge where the muscle attachment lines converge on the top of the skull. The best evidence for this is that young primates don’t have these ridges, and on their skulls, the distance between the lines that indicate where the temporal muscles attach is almost as wide as in humans. In gorillas, the same is true for the large spines of the neck vertebrae, which support the neck muscles. These ridges and spines are less pronounced in the orangutan, leading to a less balanced head and its heavy face resting on its chest. Therefore, it’s likely that the vocal sacs, which are much larger than those in gorillas, act as air cushions to reduce the burden of the jaw pressing on the trachea. The gibbon, being better suited for walking on two legs and having a lighter jaw, does not have skull ridges. Additionally, the Morgagni ventricles—small pouches behind the vocal cords in the larynx—never turn into large air sacs like in the orangutan, except in one species, Hylobates syndactylus. In this regard, the gibbon is much closer to humans than other apes, but it is also more distinct from us due to its long arms, or, more accurately, its pectoral limbs. It stands upright and walks nearly as well as humans, with its long arms and hands touching the ground even while standing straight, using them like a pendulum when moving. In contrast, the three other apes that lean forward while walking have shorter pectoral limbs than the gibbon but longer ones than humans.

The first toe, opposable in the anthropoid apes and unopposable in man, the relative length of the toes and fingers generally, etc., only constitute modifications correlative to the erect attitude and biped movement of man, and to his terrestrial habitat as opposed to the arboreal habitat of the[Pg 21] anthropoid apes, and to their biped movement necessitating the support of the hands.

The first toe, which can move in the anthropoid apes but cannot in humans, the overall length of the toes and fingers, and similar aspects, are just adaptations related to humans walking upright and moving on two legs, as well as living on land instead of the trees like the anthropoid apes, whose two-legged movement requires the use of their hands for support.

The differences in the form and size of the teeth are also the consequence of the inequality of the development of the maxillary part of the face in man, and in the apes in general.

The differences in the shape and size of teeth are also a result of the unequal development of the upper part of the face in humans and in apes overall.

The size of the teeth in proportion to that of the body is less in man than in the apes (Figs. 1 and 2). Putting aside the incisors and the canines, the size of the molars and the premolars of these animals is larger in relation to the length of the facial portion of the skull. The “dental index” of Flower, that is to say the centesimal relation of the total length of the row of molars and premolars to the length of the naso-basilar line (from the nasal spine to the most advanced point of the occipital foramen), is always greater in the anthropoid apes than in man; in the latter it is never above 47.5, while it is 48 in the chimpanzee, 58 in the orang, and 63 in the gorilla.

The size of human teeth relative to body size is smaller than that of apes (Figs. 1 and 2). Excluding the incisors and canines, the molars and premolars of these animals are larger compared to the length of the facial part of the skull. Flower's “dental index,” which is the percentage relationship of the total length of the molar and premolar row to the length of the naso-basilar line (from the nasal spine to the most forward point of the occipital foramen), is always higher in anthropoid apes than in humans; in humans, it never exceeds 47.5, while it measures 48 in chimpanzees, 58 in orangutans, and 63 in gorillas.

As to the arrangement of the teeth on the alveolar arch, with man they are in a compact line forming a continuous series without any notable projection of any one tooth above the common level; while in all the apes is observed an interval (diastema) between the canines and the lateral incisors of the upper jaw, and between the canines and the first premolars of the lower jaw. These gaps receive in each jaw the projecting part of the opposite canine.

As for the way the teeth are arranged on the alveolar arch, in humans they are in a tight line creating a continuous sequence without any significant protrusion of any tooth above the general level; whereas in all apes, a gap (diastema) is seen between the canines and the lateral incisors of the upper jaw, and between the canines and the first premolars of the lower jaw. These gaps accommodate the protruding part of the opposite canine in each jaw.

Like the anthropoid apes, man has five tubercles in the lower molars, while the monkeys have in general only four. This rule admits, however, of numerous exceptions: very often the fifth posterior tubercle is wanting in the two last molars in man; on the other hand, it is regularly found in the last molar in certain kinds of monkeys (Cynocephali, Semnopitheci). As to the wisdom tooth, in certain pithecoid apes (Cynocephali, Semnopitheci) it is greater in size than the anterior molars; whilst in certain others, like the Cercopitheci, it is much less than the two first molars. With the anthropoid apes this tooth is of the same size as the other molars or a little smaller, and it is generally the same with man, though in some[Pg 22]what frequent cases it is entirely wanting. The dental arch is different as regards form in man and in apes. In man it has a tendency towards the parabolic and elliptical form, whilst in apes it usually takes the form of U.

Like the great apes, humans have five bumps on their lower molars, while monkeys typically have only four. However, there are many exceptions to this rule: often, the fifth back bump is missing on the last two molars in humans; conversely, it's regularly present on the last molar in certain types of monkeys (Cynocephali, Semnopitheci). Regarding the wisdom tooth, in some ape species (Cynocephali, Semnopitheci), it is larger than the front molars; whereas in others, like the Cercopitheci, it is much smaller than the first two molars. In great apes, this tooth is about the same size as the other molars or slightly smaller, which is also generally true for humans, although in some[Pg 22] cases it may be entirely absent. The shape of the dental arch differs between humans and apes. In humans, it tends to be parabolic or elliptical, while in apes, it usually forms a U.

It should be noted that all the characters that distinguish man from the anthropoid apes have a tendency to become more marked with the development of civilisation and life in a less natural environment, or artificially modified, as we have already seen in regard to the curves of the vertebral column. Thus the absence of the fifth tubercle in the lower molars has been more often noted in European races (29 times out of 51, according to Hamy) than with Negroes and Melanesians. The wisdom tooth seems to be in a state of retrogressive evolution among several populations. Especially in the white races it is nearly always smaller than the other molars; the number of the tubercles is reduced to three instead of four or five; very often in the lower jaw it remains in its alveola and never comes through.

It should be noted that all the characteristics that differentiate humans from anthropoid apes tend to become more pronounced with the development of civilization and life in a less natural or artificially modified environment, as we have already observed regarding the curves of the vertebral column. For example, the absence of the fifth tubercle in the lower molars has been noted more frequently in European races (29 times out of 51, according to Hamy) than in Black Africans and Melanesians. The wisdom tooth appears to be undergoing retrogressive evolution in several populations. Particularly in white populations, it is almost always smaller than the other molars; the number of tubercles is reduced to three instead of the usual four or five; and very often in the lower jaw, it remains stuck in its socket and never erupts.

In the same way the little toe tends, in the higher races (perhaps owing to tight boots), to become atrophied and formed of but two phalanges instead of three. Pfitzner has noted this reduction in thirty feet out of a hundred and eleven that he examined.[20]

Just like the little toe often gets smaller in certain groups of people (maybe because of tight shoes), it tends to develop with only two bones instead of three. Pfitzner observed this change in thirty out of the one hundred eleven feet he studied.[20]

It is perhaps in similar retrogressive evolutions due to the “social environment” that we must seek the explanation of a great number of characters of “inferiority” and “superiority,” so called, of certain races.

It might be in similar backward developments caused by the "social environment" that we should look for the reasons behind many traits of "inferiority" and "superiority," as labeled, of certain races.

The difference between man and the ape in regard to teguments is not so appreciable as might be thought. Man comes into the world covered almost entirely with lanugo or short fine hair. This hair is afterwards replaced in early infancy by permanent hair which only occupies certain parts of the body. Primitive man, it may be presumed, was entirely covered with hair, except perhaps on the front part of the trunk, where natural selection in the struggle with parasites (infesting that warm part of the mother’s body in contact with the[Pg 23] young when being suckled) would soon cause the disappearance of the hair from that place, as indeed we see in apes.[21] It is curious to observe in this respect that the disposition of the hair of the arms in man is far from recalling that of the anthropoid apes, as Darwin thought, but rather resembles the disposition observed among the monkeys. In fact, instead of being directed upwards towards the bend of the elbow, this hair is turned downwards towards the wrist in the higher half of the arm, and transversely in its lower half. The anthropoid apes being accustomed to cover the head with their arms, or to keep them above their head so as to cling to the branches of the trees on which they spend their life, the hairs may have taken in this case an opposite direction to that of the primitive type of the Primates by the simple effect of gravity.[22]

The difference between humans and apes regarding skin covering isn't as noticeable as you might think. Humans are born almost completely covered in lanugo or short fine hair. This hair is later replaced in early infancy by permanent hair that only grows in specific areas of the body. It can be assumed that early humans were fully covered in hair, except perhaps on the front part of the torso, where natural selection would lead to hair loss due to parasites thriving in that warm area of the mother’s body in contact with the[Pg 23] young during nursing, much like what we see in apes.[21] It's interesting to note that the hair on human arms doesn't really resemble that of anthropoid apes, as Darwin suggested, but instead looks more like that of monkeys. In fact, rather than growing upward toward the elbow, this hair grows downward toward the wrist in the upper half of the arm and horizontally in the lower half. Since anthropoid apes often cover their heads with their arms or hold their arms above their heads to grasp branches, the hair may have evolved in the opposite direction from the primitive type of Primates simply due to gravity.[22]

Space does not permit us to pass in review several other characters distinguishing man from the anthropoid apes: absence of certain muscles (acromiotrachelian, etc.) in the former, simplicity of the cerebral folds in the latter, the absence of the lobulation of the liver and that of the penile bone in the former and their presence in some of the anthropoid apes, etc.

Space doesn't allow us to discuss several other traits that set humans apart from the anthropoid apes: the lack of certain muscles (acromiotrachelian, etc.) in humans, the simpler brain folds in apes, the absence of lobes in the liver and the penile bone in humans, which are present in some anthropoid apes, and so on.

Let me say in conclusion that all these distinctions are only very marked when adult individuals are compared, for they become accentuated with age. The fœtus of the gorilla at five months bears a very close resemblance to the human fœtus of the same age. A young gorilla and a young chimpanzee, by their globular skull, by their not very prominent muzzle, and by other traits, remind one of young Negroes. In comparing the skulls of gorillas, from the fœtal state through all the stages of growth to the adult state, we can follow step by step the transformation of a face almost human into a muzzle of the most bestial aspect, as a result of the excessive develop[Pg 24]ment of the face in front and below in the anthropoid ape, and the growth of the skull upward and behind in man, as if these parts moved in different directions in relation to a central point in the interior of the skull near to the sella turcica.[23]

Let me conclude by saying that all these distinctions are much more noticeable when comparing adult individuals, as they become more pronounced with age. A five-month-old gorilla fetus looks really similar to a human fetus of the same age. A young gorilla and a young chimpanzee, with their round skulls and less prominent muzzles, remind us of young Black children. By looking at gorilla skulls from the fetal stage through all growth stages to adulthood, we can trace step by step how a nearly human face transforms into a more animal-like muzzle. This change happens because the face develops excessively in the front and below in the anthropoid ape, while the skull grows upward and back in humans, almost as if these parts are moving in different directions from a central point inside the skull near the sella turcica.[23]

Distinctive Characters of Human Races.

In treatises on anthropology, anatomy, and physiology will be found all the information wished for on the different somatic characters of man, as well as on their variations according to sex, age, and race. It would be exceeding the limits of our subject were I to describe here, one by one, all the anatomical or morphological characters drawn from the bony, muscular, nervous, and other systems of which the human body is composed. We shall only pass in review the characters which possess a real importance in the differentiation of races. These are much less numerous than is generally supposed, and belong for the most part to the category of characters that are observed in the living subject. It is generally believed that the sole concern of anthropology is the description of skulls. This is one of the common errors of which there are so many current among the general public on scientific subjects. To be sure, the skull, and especially the head, of the living subject furnish the principal characters which differentiate races, but there exist several others, without a knowledge of which it is difficult to direct one’s steps in the midst of the diversity of forms presented by the human body according to race. We distinguish in general two kinds of somatic characters: (1) those dealing with the form and structure of the body—morphological characters; and (2) those which are connected with its different functions—physiological characters, with which we will include psychological and pathological characters.

In discussions about anthropology, anatomy, and physiology, you can find all the information you need regarding the various physical traits of humans and how they differ by sex, age, and race. It would go beyond our topic here to list all the anatomical or morphological features that make up the human body, including those related to the skeletal, muscular, nervous, and other systems. We will only review the traits that are truly significant in distinguishing between races. There are far fewer of these than most people think, and most belong to the types of traits that can be observed in living individuals. Many believe that anthropology is solely focused on describing skulls, which is a common misconception among the general public regarding scientific topics. While the skull, particularly the head of a living person, does provide key traits that differentiate races, there are several others that you need to know to navigate the wide variety of forms presented by the human body by race. Generally, we distinguish two types of physical traits: (1) morphological traits, which relate to the shape and structure of the body, and (2) physiological traits, which are linked to its various functions, including psychological and pathological traits.

We shall first examine the morphological characters,[Pg 25] beginning with those furnished to us by the body as a whole—the stature, the nature of the tegument (the skin and hair), and its colouring. We shall afterwards pass to an examination of the morphology of the head, and the different parts of the body, with their bony framework (skull and skeleton). We shall complete this brief account by a glance at the internal organs, muscles, brain, viscera.

We will first look at the physical characteristics,[Pg 25] starting with those provided by the entire body—height, the type of skin and hair, and its color. Next, we will focus on the structure of the head and various body parts, including their bony framework (skull and skeleton). We'll wrap up this overview by taking a look at the internal organs, muscles, brain, and organs in the body.

Stature.—Of all the physical characters which serve to distinguish races, stature is perhaps that which has hitherto been regarded as eminently variable. It has been said that not only does stature change with age and sex, but that it varies also under the influence of external agencies. These variations are unquestionable, but it must be remarked that they are produced in a similar way in all races, and cannot exceed certain limits imposed by race.

Stature.—Of all the physical traits that differentiate races, stature is probably the most notably variable. It has been stated that stature not only changes with age and gender but also fluctuates due to external factors. These variations are undeniable, but it should be noted that they occur in a similar manner across all races and cannot go beyond certain limits set by each race.

Even from birth stature varies. Setting aside individual variations, the new-born are on an average a little taller, for example, in Paris (499 millim. for boys) than in St. Petersburg (477 millim.). Unfortunately we have hardly any data in regard to this important question for the non-European populations. Here in a tabulated form is the average height of the new-born of different populations, so far as information has been obtainable.

Even at birth, height varies. Ignoring personal differences, newborns are generally a bit taller, for instance, in Paris (499 mm for boys) compared to St. Petersburg (477 mm). Unfortunately, we barely have any data on this important issue for non-European populations. Below is a table showing the average height of newborns from different populations, as far as we have been able to gather information.

AVERAGE STATURE.

AVERAGE HEIGHT.

PPopulations. BOYS. GIRLs. NGAME OF
OBSERVER.
Millim. Inches. Millim. Inches.
Annamese 474 18.49 464 18.10 Mondière.
Russians of St. Petersburg 477 18.60 473 18.45 Mies.
Germans of Cologne 486 18.95 484 18.88 Mies.
Americans of Boston 490 19.27 482 18.80 Bowditch.
English 496 19.35 491 19.31 C. Roberts.
French of Paris 499 19.52 492 19.35 Mies.

According to this table there would also be from the time of birth an inequality of stature of the two sexes; boys exceed girls by a figure which varies from 2 to 10 millim., that is to say on an average half a centim. (less than a quarter of an inch). The data relating to different races are insufficient; it may be remarked, however, that with people very low in stature, like the Annamese (1 m. 58, or 5 feet 2 inches), on the average the new-born are also shorter than those of people of greater stature, as, for instance, the English or the inhabitants of the United States. The French (average height 5 feet 5 inches) appear to be an exception to this rule.

According to this table, there’s also an inequality in height between the two sexes from the time of birth; boys are taller than girls by a range of 2 to 10 millimeters, which averages out to about half a centimeter (less than a quarter of an inch). The data regarding different races is limited; however, it’s noteworthy that among very short people, like the Annamese (1 minute. 58, or 5 feet 2 inches), newborns are also on average shorter than those of taller populations, such as the English or Americans. The French (average height 5 feet 5 inches) seem to be an exception to this pattern.

We shall examine at greater length in Chapter IV. increase of stature in connection with all the phenomena of growth. Let me for the present say that as regards man, the age of 18 to 25 years, according to race, may be considered as the practical limit of this growth. In order to make a useful comparison of statures of different populations, we should only take, then, adults above these ages.

We will look more closely at the growth spurt in Chapter IV. and its relationship to all growth phenomena. For now, I’ll just say that for humans, the age range of 18 to 25 years, depending on the race, can be seen as the practical limit for this growth. To effectively compare the heights of different populations, we should only include adults older than these ages.

It must be said on this point that the greater part of the reliable information which we possess concerning stature relates solely to men, and among these, more especially to conscripts or soldiers. And it has often been objected that the figures in documents furnished in connection with the recruiting of armies do not represent the true height of any given population, for the conscripts, being in general from 20 to 21 years of age, have not yet reached the limit of growth.

It should be noted that most of the reliable information we have about height pertains mainly to men, particularly conscripts or soldiers. It has frequently been argued that the figures in documents related to military recruitment do not accurately reflect the true height of any given population, as conscripts, who are generally 20 to 21 years old, have not yet reached their full height.

This is true in certain cases; for example, when we have the measurements of all conscripts, who, in fact, grow from 1 to 2 centimetres during their military service; but when we have only the measurements of those enrolled, that is to say only of men above the standard height (and that is most frequently the case), the question presents a different aspect. The average height of this picked section of the population, higher by 1 to 2 centimetres than that of men of their age in general, may be considered (as I have elsewhere shown[24])[Pg 27] to represent the average stature of the whole number of adult males of any given population. We may then, while making certain reservations, take the height of those enrolled (but not that of all the conscripts) as representing the height of the adults of any given population.

This is true in some cases; for instance, when we have the measurements of all conscripts, who actually grow by 1 to 2 centimeters during their military service. However, when we only have the measurements of those who are enrolled, meaning only the men above the standard height (which is usually the case), the situation looks different. The average height of this selected group of the population, which is higher by 1 to 2 centimeters than that of men their age in general, can be seen (as I've shown elsewhere[24])[Pg 27] as representing the average height of all adult males in any given population. Therefore, we can consider the height of those enrolled (but not all conscripts) to represent the height of adults in any given population, while keeping certain reservations in mind.

The individual limits between which the height varies are very wide. It is admitted in general that the limits of height in the normal man may vary from 1 m. 25 (4 feet 1 inch) to 1 m. 99 (6 feet 6 ¾ inches). Below 1 m. 25 begins a certain abnormal state, often pathological, called Dwarfism. Above 2 m. we have another corresponding state called Giantism. Dwarfs may be 38 cent. high (15 inches), like the little feminine dwarf Hilany Agyba of Sinai (Joest), and giants as high as 2 m. 83 (9 feet 5 inches), like the Finn Caïanus (Topinard).[25]

The range of height for people varies greatly. Generally, it's accepted that the height of an average adult can range from 1 minute. 25 (4 feet 1 inch) to 1 min. 99 (6 feet 6.75 inches). Below 1 minute. 25, we enter a condition known as Dwarfism, which is often considered abnormal or pathological. On the other end, heights above 2 m. are classified as Giantism. Dwarfs can be as short as 38 centimeters (15 inches), like the small female dwarf Hilany Agyba from Sinai (Joest), and giants can reach heights of 2 m. 83 (9 feet 5 inches), as exemplified by the Finn Caïanus (Topinard).[25]

Dwarfism may be the result of certain pathological states (microcephaly, rickets, etc.), as it may be equally the result of an exceeding slowness of growth.[26] In the same way giantism is often seen associated with a special disease called acromegaly, but most frequently it is produced by an excessive growth. In any case, exceptional statures, high or low, are abnormal phenomena, the acknowledged sterility of dwarfs and giants being alone sufficient to prove this.

Dwarfism can result from certain medical conditions (like microcephaly, rickets, etc.), and it can also be caused by unusually slow growth.[26] Similarly, gigantism is often linked to a specific disease called acromegaly, but it usually comes from excessive growth. Regardless, extreme heights—whether tall or short—are considered abnormal, and the recognized infertility of both dwarfs and giants is enough evidence to support this.

Extreme statures which it is agreed to call normal, those of 1 m. 25 and 1 m. 99, are very rare. One might say that, in general, statures below 1 m. 35 and above 1 m. 90 are exceptions. Thus in the extensive American statistics,[27] based on more than 300,000 subjects, but one giant (above 2 m.) is met with out of 10,000 subjects examined, and hardly five individuals in 1000 taller than 1 m. 90 (75 inches). Again, in the statistics of the Committee of the British Association,[28] which embrace 8,585 subjects, only three individuals in a[Pg 28] thousand have been found taller than 1 m. 90. Yet in these two cases, populations of a very high stature (1 m. 72 on an average) were being dealt with. If we turn to a population lower in stature, for instance the Italian, we find only one subject 1 m. 90 or above in height in 7000 examined, according to the statistics of Pagliani.[29] In the same way, low statures under 1 m. 35 (53 inches) are met with only once in every 100,000 cases among the subjects examined by the American Commission, and not once among 8,585 inhabitants of the United Kingdom; even in a population low in stature, like the Italians, only three such in every 1000 subjects examined are to be found. We do not possess a sufficient number of figures to be able to affirm that among all the populations of the globe the instances of all these extreme statures are exceptional, but what we know leads us to suppose that it is so, and that the limits of normal stature in man are between 1 m. 35 and 1 m. 90.

Extreme heights commonly considered normal, those of 1 minute. 25 and 1 min. 99, are quite rare. Generally speaking, heights below 1 min. 35 and above 1 min. 90 are exceptions. In extensive American statistics,[27] based on over 300,000 subjects, there's only one giant (over 2 m) found among 10,000 subjects examined, and barely five individuals in 1,000 are taller than 1 min. 90 (75 inches). Similarly, in the statistics from the Committee of the British Association,[28] which includes 8,585 subjects, only three people in a[Pg 28] thousand have been found taller than 1 min. 90. Yet in these two cases, the populations being considered had a very high average height of 1 min. 72. If we look at a population with shorter stature, like the Italians, we find only one subject 1 minute. 90 or taller out of 7,000 examined, according to Pagliani's statistics.[29] Similarly, heights below 1 minute. 35 (53 inches) are encountered only once in every 100,000 cases among subjects examined by the American Commission, and not once among 8,585 individuals from the United Kingdom; even in a shorter population like the Italians, only three out of every 1,000 subjects examined fit this category. We don’t have enough data to definitively say that these extreme heights are exceptional across all populations in the world, but what we do know suggests that it is likely true, and that the normal height range for humans is between 1 m. 35 and 1 min. 90.

The figures of individual cases are much less interesting than the averages of the different populations, that is to say the height obtained by dividing the sum of the statures of individuals by the number of subjects measured. On comparing these averages it becomes possible to form a clear idea of the difference existing among the various peoples. But here there is an observation to make.

The numbers from individual cases are far less interesting than the averages from different populations, meaning the height calculated by dividing the total height of individuals by the number of people measured. By comparing these averages, we can get a clear picture of the differences among various groups of people. However, there’s an important point to note here.

The data of this kind published up to the present in the majority of books may often lead to error. In fact, as a general rule they give only the average height without stating the number of subjects measured. Very often it is only the rough guess of a traveller who has not even measured at all the populations of which he speaks. In other cases we have averages drawn from the measurements of two, three, or four subjects, which are evidently insufficient for a standard which varies so much in one individual and another, and even in the same individual according to the hour of the day.

The data of this type published in most books up to now can often lead to mistakes. Most of the time, they only provide the average height without mentioning how many people were measured. Often, it’s just a rough estimate from a traveler who hasn’t even measured the populations they refer to. In other cases, averages are based on the measurements of just two, three, or four individuals, which is clearly not enough for a standard that varies so much from one person to another and even within the same person at different times of the day.

We know, in fact, that man measures one or two centimetres more on rising in the morning than on going to bed at night,[Pg 29] when the fibro-cartilaginous discs situated between the vertebræ are compressed, more closely packed, and the vertebral column is more bent. Unscrupulous conscripts whose stature is near the regulation limit know perfectly well that if the day before the official examination they carry heavy loads, they compress their intervertebral discs so that their height is sometimes diminished by three centimetres.

We know that a person is actually one or two centimeters taller in the morning when they get up than at night when they go to bed,[Pg 29] because the fibro-cartilaginous discs between the vertebrae are compressed, more tightly packed, and the spine is more curved. Unethical recruits who are close to the legal height requirement are fully aware that if they carry heavy loads the day before their official exam, it compresses their intervertebral discs enough to sometimes reduce their height by three centimeters.

It is necessary then, in order to avoid error, not only to have measurements taken from adult subjects, but also from several series containing a great number of these subjects. Calculation and inference have shown us that it is necessary to have at least a series of one hundred individuals to guarantee the exact figure of the height of a population but slightly blended. Series of 50 to 100 individuals may still furnish occasionally good indications, and series of 25 to 50 individuals an approximation; but with series under 25 individuals doubt begins and the figures are often most deceptive.

It’s important, to avoid mistakes, to take measurements from adult subjects as well as from multiple groups with a large number of these subjects. Calculations and conclusions have demonstrated that we need at least a group of one hundred individuals to ensure an accurate representation of a population’s height, though not completely uniform. Groups of 50 to 100 individuals can still sometimes provide useful information, and groups of 25 to 50 individuals can give a rough estimate; however, with groups of fewer than 25 individuals, uncertainty arises, and the figures can often be misleading.

I have brought together and grouped in the table at the end of this volume (Appendix I.) average statures calculated in series of twenty-five individuals or more. These series have been based on the collation of hundreds of documents, of which limits of space prevent a full enumeration.

I have gathered and organized in the table at the end of this volume (Appendix I.) average heights calculated from groups of twenty-five individuals or more. These groups are based on the collection of hundreds of documents, which I can't list completely due to space limitations.

An examination of our table shows that the extreme averages of different populations fluctuate, in round figures, from 1 m. 38 (4 ft. 6 in.) with the Negrillo Akkas, to 1 m. 79 (5 ft. 10.5 in.) with the Scots of Galloway.[30] But if we set aside the pigmy tribe of the Akka, quite exceptional as regards stature, as well as the Scots of Galloway, and even the Scots of the north in general (1 m. 78), who likewise form a group entirely apart, we arrive at the extreme limits of stature, varying from 1465 mm. with[Pg 30] the Aeta or Negritoes of the Philippines, and 1746 mm. with the Scots in general. In round figures, then, we can recognise statures of 1 m. 46 (4 feet 9.5 inches) and 1 m. 75 (5 feet 9 inches) as the extreme limits of averages in the different populations of the globe. The medium height between these extremes is 1 m. 61, but if we put on one side the exceptional group of Negritoes (Akka, Aeta, Andamanese, and Sakai), we shall note that the rest of mankind presents statures which ascend by degrees, almost uninterruptedly, from millimetre to millimetre between 1 m. 54 and 1 m. 75, which makes the average 1 m. 65 (5 feet 5 inches), as Topinard has discovered.[31] Topinard has likewise proposed the division of statures, since universally adopted, into four categories, viz.: short statures, under 1 m. 60; statures under the average, between 1 m. 60 and 1 m. 649; statures above the average, between 1 m. 65 and 1 m. 699; and lastly, high statures, 1 m. 70 and over.

An analysis of our table shows that the height averages of different populations vary significantly, ranging from about 1 minute. 38 (4 ft. 6 in.) for the Negrillo Akkas, to 1 minute. 79 (5 ft. 10.5 inches.) for the Scots of Galloway.[30] However, if we exclude the Akka, who are notably short, as well as the Scots of Galloway, and even the Scots from the north in general (1 minute. 78), who also form a distinct group, we find that the heights range from 1465 mm with the Aeta or Negritoes of the Philippines, to 1746 mm with the Scots overall. So, we can identify heights of approximately 1 minute. 46 (4 feet 9.5 inches) and 1 min. 75 (5 feet 9 inches) as the extreme average limits among various global populations. The mean height between these extremes is 1 minute. 61, but if we disregard the exceptional Negrito groups (Akka, Aeta, Andamanese, and Sakai), we observe that the rest of humanity shows heights that gradually increase, almost seamlessly, from 1 minute. 54 to 1 minute. 75, resulting in an average height of 1 min. 65 (5 feet 5 inches), as noted by Topinard.[31] Topinard also suggested categorizing heights, which has become widely accepted, into four groups: short heights, under 1 minute. 60; below average heights, between 1 minute. 60 and 1 minute. 649; above average heights, between 1 min. 65 and 1 minute. 699; and finally, tall heights, 1 minute. 70 and above.

Our table shows conclusively that there are many more populations (almost double the number) whose stature is above or under the average, than populations of a short or high stature.

Our table clearly shows that there are many more populations (almost double the number) whose height is above or below average than populations of short or tall stature.

Short stature is rare in Africa, being found only among the Negrillo pigmies and Bushmen; in South America a few tribes of low stature are also met with; but the true home of low stature populations is Indo-China, Japan, and the Malay Archipelago. In the remaining portion of Asia this low stature is only met with again in Western Siberia, and among the tribes called Kols and Dravidians in India.

Short stature is uncommon in Africa, found only among the Negrillo pygmies and Bushmen; in South America, a few tribes of shorter people can also be found; however, the primary areas of low stature populations are Indo-China, Japan, and the Malay Archipelago. In the rest of Asia, this shorter stature appears again mainly in Western Siberia and among the tribes known as Kols and Dravidians in India.

Statures under the average predominate in the rest of Asia (with the exception of the populations to the north of India and anterior Asia) and in Eastern and Southern Europe, while statures above the average comprise Irano-Hindu populations, the Afrasian Semites, the inhabitants of Central Europe, as well as the Melanesians and Australians.

Statures below the average are common in most of Asia (except for the people north of India and in Eastern Asia) and in Eastern and Southern Europe, while above-average heights are found among Irano-Hindu populations, Afrasian Semites, people from Central Europe, as well as Melanesians and Australians.

Thus high stature is plainly limited to Northern Europe, to North America, to Polynesia, and especially to Africa,[Pg 31] where it is met with as well among Negroes as among Ethiopians.

Thus, tall stature is clearly restricted to Northern Europe, North America, Polynesia, and especially Africa,[Pg 31] where it occurs among both Black people and Ethiopians.

What is the influence of environment on stature? This is one of the most controverted questions. Since the time of Villermé the statement has been repeated in a variety of ways that well-being was favourable to growth and increase in stature, and that hardship stunted growth. There are facts which seem to prove this. In a population supposed to be formed of a mixture of many races, the well-fed upper classes appear to possess a higher stature than the lower classes; thus, while the English of the liberal professions are 69.14 inches (1757 mm.) in height, the workmen of the same nation are only 65.7 inches (1705 mm.).[32] But can we not likewise adduce here the influence of race? That predominating in the aristocracy and well-to-do classes does not, perhaps, predominate in the working classes. Beddoe[33] and others have remarked that the stature of miners is lower than that of the population around them; in the same way, workmen in shops and factories are inferior in height to those who labour in the open air, and this in Belgium (Houzé) as well as in England (Beddoe, Roberts) or Russia (Erisman, Anuchin).[34] According to Collignon,[35] the populations of Normandy and Brittany living in the neighbourhood of railways and high-roads are superior in height to those living in out-of-the-way places. He concludes from this that the material conditions of life being improved since the formation of roads, the stature of the population has increased. According to Ammon and Lapouge, the population of the towns in France and Southern Germany are taller in stature than those of the country,[Pg 32] because of the migration towards urban centres of the tall dolichocephalic fair race which they call Homo Europeus. However, Ranke observed just the opposite, and there are other objections to be raised against this theory, based on the data of recruiting. These town-dwellers of high stature are perhaps only conscripts too quickly developed; town life accelerates growth, and town-dwellers have nearly reached the limit of their height while dwellers in villages have not finished growing. This is so true that in countries where statistics have been taken of the civic population, as in England for example, the population of the towns is shorter in stature than that of the country. Beddoe explains this fact by the bad hygienic conditions in towns, the want of exercise and drinking habits of dwellers in cities.[36]

What impact does the environment have on height? This is one of the most debated questions. Since Villermé's time, it has been said in many ways that well-being promotes growth and increases height, while hardship stunts it. There are facts that seem to support this. In a population made up of different races, the well-nourished upper classes appear to be taller than the lower classes; for example, while English professionals average 69.14 inches (1757 mm), the working-class individuals are only 65.7 inches (1705 mm).[32] But can we not also consider the impact of race here? The race dominant in the upper and middle classes may not be the same as that in the working class. Beddoe[33] and others have noted that the height of miners is lower than that of the general population around them; similarly, workers in shops and factories are shorter than those who work outdoors, as noted in Belgium (Houzé), England (Beddoe, Roberts), and Russia (Erisman, Anuchin).[34] According to Collignon,[35] people in Normandy and Brittany living near railways and highways are taller than those in remote areas. He concludes that improvements in living conditions since roads were built have resulted in increased height in the population. According to Ammon and Lapouge, urban populations in France and Southern Germany are taller than those in rural areas,[Pg 32] due to the migration of the tall dolichocephalic fair race they refer to as Homo Europeus. However, Ranke noted the opposite, and there are other arguments against this theory based on recruitment data. These tall urban dwellers may just be conscripts who have matured quickly; urban life might accelerate growth, and city residents may have nearly reached their height potentials while villagers are still growing. This is evident in countries where statistics on the civilian population have been collected, such as England, where city populations are shorter than those in rural areas. Beddoe attributes this trend to poor hygienic conditions in cities, lack of exercise, and the drinking habits of city dwellers.[36]

To conclude, the influence of environment cannot be denied in many cases: it may raise or lower stature, especially by stimulating or retarding and even arresting growth; but it is not demonstrated that such a change can be perpetuated by hereditary transmission and become permanent. The primordial characteristics of race seem always to get the upper hand, and the modifications produced by environment can alter the stature of the race only within very restricted limits. Thus miners of a high stature like the Scotch, for example, while shorter than the Scotch of the well-to-do classes, will be still taller than the individuals of the well-to-do classes in, for example, Spain or Italy, and much more so than those of Japan (1 m. 59). Stature is truly then a character of race, and a very persistent one.

To sum up, the impact of the environment is undeniable in many situations: it can increase or decrease height, especially by promoting, slowing, or even stopping growth; however, it hasn't been proven that such changes can be passed down through heredity and become permanent. The fundamental traits of a race seem to always take precedence, and environmental changes can only modify the height of a race within very narrow limits. For example, miners who are tall, like the Scots, may be shorter than wealthy Scots, but they will still be taller than wealthy individuals in countries like Spain or Italy, and even more so than those in Japan (1 minute. 59). Therefore, height is indeed a characteristic of race, and it's a very consistent one.

So far I have spoken only of the height of men. That of women (as regards adult women of seventeen to twenty-three years of age, according to race) is always lower than the height of men, but by how much? Tentatively, Topinard gave the figure 12 centimetres as the general differ[Pg 33]ence between the stature of the two sexes in all races. The data for the height of women being very scarce, I have only been able to bring together thirty-five series of measurements of women comprising each more than fifteen individuals, for comparison with series of measurements of men.

So far, I’ve only talked about the height of men. When it comes to women (specifically adult women aged seventeen to twenty-three, depending on their race), they are always shorter than men, but by how much? Tentatively, Topinard suggested that the average difference in height between the two sexes across all races is 12 centimeters. Since there’s very little data on women's heights, I’ve only managed to gather thirty-five sets of measurements of women, each with more than fifteen individuals, to compare with sets of measurements of men.

It follows from this slight inquiry that in twenty cases out of thirty-five, that is to say, almost two-thirds, the difference in height between the two sexes in any given population hardly varies more than from 7 to 13 centimetres (3 to 5 inches); fourteen times out of thirty-five it only varies from 11 to 13 centimetres (4.5 to 5 inches), so that the figure of 12 centimetres (5 inches) may be accepted as the average. Besides, the difference does not appear to change according to the average stature, more or less high, of the race: it is almost the same for the Tahitians and the Maricopas, who are tall, as it is for the Samoyeds and the Caribs, who are short.[37]

It turns out that in twenty out of thirty-five cases, which means almost two-thirds, the height difference between men and women in any given population rarely changes more than 7 to 13 centimeters (3 to 5 inches). In fourteen of those thirty-five cases, it only varies from 11 to 13 centimeters (4.5 to 5 inches), so the figure of 12 centimeters (5 inches) can be considered the average. Furthermore, this difference doesn’t seem to change based on the overall height of the race: it’s almost the same for the tall Tahitians and Maricopas as it is for the shorter Samoyeds and Caribs.[37]

Thus, then, in a general way, the categories of statures—tall, short, etc.—for women will be comprised within the same limits already indicated for man, only reduced by 12 centimetres for each category. Thus, high statures for women will begin at 1 m. 58 instead of 1 m. 70; short statures under 1 m. 48 instead of 1 m. 60.

Therefore, in general terms, the height categories for women—tall, short, etc.—will fall within the same ranges previously mentioned for men, but reduced by 12 centimeters for each category. So, tall heights for women will start at 1 min. 58 instead of 1 min. 70; short heights will be under 1 min. 48 instead of 1 min. 60.

The stature of a living man is naturally higher than that of his skeleton, but what the difference is is not exactly known. It can hardly, however, exceed 2 or 3 centimetres, according to Topinard, Rollet, and Manouvrier.

The height of a living person is naturally taller than that of their skeleton, but the exact difference isn't clearly understood. However, it likely doesn’t exceed 2 or 3 centimeters, according to Topinard, Rollet, and Manouvrier.

By means of measurements of the long bones of the limbs (femur, humerus, etc.), the height of the skeleton of which they form part may be approximately calculated. For this purpose we make use of Rollet’s formula,[38] according to which the length of the femur must be multiplied by 3.66 for the height of man, and by 3.71 for the height of woman, or multiply the length of the humerus by 5.06 or by 5.22, according[Pg 34] to sex. But this formula is only applicable to subjects whose stature is near the average, 1 m. 65. In the generality of cases we must substitute for it more exact calculations by the help of Manouvrier’s tables.[39] It is by this means that Rahon[40] has been able to determine approximately the height of the prehistoric populations of France, which will be dealt with in Chapter IX.

Using measurements of the long bones in the limbs (like the femur and humerus), we can roughly estimate the height of the skeleton they belong to. For this, we use Rollet’s formula,[38] which states that the length of the femur should be multiplied by 3.66 for male height and by 3.71 for female height, or the length of the humerus should be multiplied by 5.06 or 5.22, depending[Pg 34] on gender. However, this formula only applies to individuals whose height is around the average, 1 min. 65. In most cases, we need to rely on more accurate calculations using Manouvrier’s tables.[39] This approach has allowed Rahon[40] to roughly estimate the height of prehistoric populations in France, which will be discussed in Chapter IX.

Teguments: The Skin.—The human skin is essentially composed of two parts, the corium (Fig. 3, D) and a superficial epidermis; the latter is formed in its turn of two cellular layers, the horny layers (Fig. 3, c.c.), the quite shallow cells of which are freely exposed to the air, and Malpighi’s layer situated beneath it, with granules of pigment in more or less quantity in its lower range of cells (Fig. 3, c.p.). In certain places the epidermis is modified so as to form either a mucous[Pg 35] membrane, as, for instance, on the lips, or a horny substance, sometimes transparent (as the cornea of the eye) and sometimes only translucent and more or less hard (the nails).

Teguments: The Skin.—The human skin is mainly made up of two parts: the dermis (Fig. 3, D) and the outer epidermis. The epidermis consists of two layers of cells: the outer layer with dead cells (Fig. 3, c.c.), which are directly exposed to the air, and Malpighi’s layer beneath it, which contains pigment granules in varying amounts in its lower cells (Fig. 3, c.p.). In some areas, the epidermis changes to form either a mucous[Pg 35] membrane, like on the lips, or a hard substance that can be transparent (like the cornea of the eye) or translucent and varying in hardness (like the nails).

Skin and Hair

FIG. 3.—Microscopic section (partly schematic) of skin and of hair: A, of a European; B, of a Negro.

FIG. 3.—Microscopic section (partly schematic) of skin and hair: A, of a European; B, of an African American.

c.c. horny layer or cuticle and c.p. pigmented layer (rete Malpighii) of the epidermis;
D. corium; g.su. sweat gland; c.e. excretory duct; pa. hair papilla, and
fo.
hair follicle; m. erector pili muscle; g.s. sebaceous gland; p. hair.

c.c. outer layer or cuticle and c.p. pigmented layer (rete Malpighii) of the skin;
D. dermis; g.su. sweat gland; c.e. excretory duct; pa. hair papilla, and
fo.
hair follicle; m. erector pili muscle; g.s. sebaceous gland; p. hair.

There is little to say about the differences in the nature and structure of the skin according to race. Its colouring, of which I shall speak later on (see Pigmentation), is more important. Attention has been drawn to the hardness of the corium and the velvety softness of the skin in the negro; the latter quality is probably due to the profusion and size of the sebaceous glands which accompany the hair. Bischoff has made an interesting observation on the relative rarity of the sweat glands (which are found in the thickness of the[Pg 37] corium, Fig. 3, g.su.) among the Fuegians,[41] but comparative studies on this subject have not been pursued in regard to other races. The disposition of the papilla ridges on the tips of the fingers, so well studied by Galton,[42] is of great interest as regards the identification of the individual; but from this fact alone, that it is a good characteristic of the individual, it loses all its value as a characteristic of race.

There isn’t much to say about the differences in the nature and structure of skin based on race. Its coloring, which I will discuss later (see Pigmentation), is more significant. People have noted the thickness of the dermis and the silky softness of the skin in Black individuals; this softness is likely due to the abundance and size of the sebaceous glands associated with the hair. Bischoff observed something interesting about the relative scarcity of sweat glands (which are located within the thickness of the [Pg 37] dermis, Fig. 3, g.su.) among the Fuegians,[41] but there hasn’t been much comparative research on this topic in other races. The arrangement of the papilla ridges on the tips of the fingers, which Galton studied extensively,[42] is very interesting for identifying individuals; however, because it is a good individual characteristic, it loses its value as a racial characteristic.

Mohave Indians

FIG. 4.—Mohave Indians of Arizona; smooth hair type.
(Phot. Ten Kate.)

FInsta. 4.—Mohave Indians of Arizona; straight hair type.
(Phot. Ten Kate.)

Hair of the Head and Body.—The most important horny product of the skin, as regards the differentiation of races, is[Pg 38] undoubtedly the hair of the head and body. The general structure and number of the hairs (about 260 to each square centimetre) hardly show any difference between race and race; on the other hand, the length of the hair of the head, the relation of this length in one sex to that in the other, the nature of the hair, its consistence, its transverse section, its form, its colour, vary much according to race.

Hair of the Head and Body.—The most significant horny product of the skin, in terms of distinguishing between races, is[Pg 38] definitely the hair on the head and body. The overall structure and density of the hairs (about 260 per square centimeter) show little difference from one race to another; however, the length of the hair on the head, the comparison of this length between genders, the type of hair, its texture, cross-section, shape, and color all vary significantly between races.

Pure Veddah

FIG. 5.—Pure Veddah of Dangala Mountains of Ceylon; wavy hair type.
(Phot. Brothers Sarasin.)

FInstagram. 5.—Pure Veddah from the Dangala Mountains in Sri Lanka; wavy hair type.
(Phot. Brothers Sarasin.)

The body hair has its origin in a layer of the epidermis, deeply imbedded in the corium as though it were in a little sac or follicle (Fig. 3, fo.); from the bottom of this sac, and covering by its root a little papilla (Fig. 3, pa.) filled with vessels designed to nourish it, each hair rises and pushes its way to the outside; it is always accompanied by a little muscle which can move it (Fig. 3, m.r.), and by a sebaceous gland (Fig. 3, g.s.) designed to lubricate it.

The body hair originates from a layer of the epidermis, embedded deep in the dermis as if it were in a small sac or follicle (Fig. 3, fo.); from the base of this sac, and covering a tiny papilla (Fig. 3, pa.) filled with vessels that nourish it, each hair grows and makes its way to the surface; it is always accompanied by a small muscle that can move it (Fig. 3, m.r.), and by a sebaceous gland (Fig. 3, g.s.) that helps lubricate it.

Front View

FIG. 6.—Same subject as Fig. 5, front view.
(Phot. Brothers Sarasin.)

FInstagram. 6.—Same subject as Fig. 5, front view.
(Phot. Brothers Sarasin.)

Four principal varieties of hair are usually distinguished in anthropology, according to their aspect and their nature—straight, wavy, frizzy, and woolly. It is easy to form a clear idea at first sight of the differences which are presented by these varieties, but the most careful examination shows that the differences are deeper, and can be pursued even into the microscopic structure of the hair.

Four main types of hair are typically identified in anthropology based on their appearance and texture—straight, wavy, curly, and kinky. At first glance, it's easy to see the differences among these types, but a closer look reveals that the distinctions run deeper and can even be traced down to the microscopic structure of the hair.

Toda Woman

FIG. 7.—Toda woman (India); curly hair type.
(Phot. Thurston.)

FInstagram. 7.—Whole woman (India); curly hair type.
(Phot. Thurston.)

Straight and smooth hair (droit or lisse in French, straff or schlicht in German) is ordinarily rectilinear, and falls heavily in bands on the sides of the head; such is the hair of the Chinese, the Mongols, and of American Indians (Fig. 4). Straight hair is ordinarily stiff and coarse, but it is sometimes found tolerably fine; for example, among the western Finns. It is true that in this case it has a tendency to become wavy. Wavy hair (ondé in French, wellig in German) forms a long curve or imperfect spiral from one end to the other (Figs. 5 and 6). It is called curly when it is rolled up at the extremity (Fig. 7). The whole head of hair when wavy produces a very pleasing effect; I will merely cite as examples certain fair Scotchwomen. The type is very widespread among Europeans, whether dark or fair. The frizzy type (frisé in French, lockig in German) is that in which the hair is rolled spirally,[Pg 39] forming a succession of rings a centimetre or more in diameter (Fig. 8). Such is the hair of the Australians (Figs. 21 and 22), the Nubians, of certain Mulattos, etc. Lastly, the type of woolly hair (crépu in French, kraus in German) is characterised by spiral curves exceedingly narrow (from 1 millimetre to 9 millimetres as the maximum); the rings of the spiral are very near together, numerous, well rolled, and often catch hold of each other, forming tufts and balls, the whole result recalling in appearance sheep’s wool (Fig. 9). The type admits of two varieties. When the hair is relatively long and the spirals sufficiently broad, the whole head looks like a continuous fleece, as with certain Melanesians (Fig. 153), or the majority[Pg 40] of Negroes (Figs. 9 and 47). In his classification of the human races, Haeckel[43] has taken this type as characteristic of the group of eriocomes. But when the hair is short, consisting of[Pg 41] very small spirals, it has a tendency, when tangled, to form little tufts, the dimensions of which vary from the size of a pea to that of a pepper-corn; these tufts are separated by spaces which appear bald (pepper-corn hair). This type (called lophocome by Haeckel) is very widespread among Hottentots and Bushmen, but the majority of Negroes have it in their infancy, and even at adult age, especially towards the temples, on the forehead—briefly, in all the places where the hair remains very short (Fig. 9). We must not think that the disposition of which I have just spoken is due to the hair being stuck in the skin of the head like the bristles of a brush, for the mode of insertion is the same in all races, with Bushmen as with Europeans or Mongols. At the most it may be noted that the rows of hair in Negroes are more irregular, and are closer together in certain places, leaving in other rows intervals between them of two or three millimetres. Only, as a consequence of the shortness and[Pg 42] the excessive twisting, the hair gets entangled and the spirals catch hold of each other, so forming glomerules or tufts.

Straight and smooth hair (droit or lisse in French, straff or schlicht in German) is typically straight and falls heavily in sections on the sides of the head; this is the hair type found in Chinese, Mongolian, and American Indian people (Fig. 4). Straight hair is usually stiff and coarse, although it can sometimes be relatively fine; for instance, among western Finns. In this case, it often tends to become wavy. Wavy hair (ondé in French, wellig in German) forms a long curve or imperfect spiral from one end to the other (Figs. 5 and 6). It is referred to as curly when it curls at the ends (Fig. 7). A full head of wavy hair creates a very appealing look; a good example of this can be seen in certain fair-skinned Scottish women. This hair type is common among Europeans, regardless of whether they have dark or light hair. The frizzy type (frisé in French, lockig in German) features hair that curls spirally, [Pg 39] forming a series of rings that are a centimeter or more in diameter (Fig. 8). This type is characteristic of Australians (Figs. 21 and 22), Nubians, and some mixed-race individuals, among others. Finally, the woolly hair type (crépu in French, kraus in German) is marked by very tight spiral curls that are extremely narrow (ranging from 1 millimeter to a maximum of 9 millimeters); the spirals are very close together, numerous, tightly curled, and often interlock, forming clumps and balls, resembling sheep’s wool (Fig. 9). This type has two variations. When the hair is relatively long and the spirals wide enough, the entire head resembles a continuous fleece, as seen in certain Melanesians (Fig. 153) or most Black individuals (Figs. 9 and 47). In his classification of human races, Haeckel[43] identified this type as characteristic of the eriocomes group. However, when the hair is short, consisting of [Pg 41] very tiny spirals, it tends to become tangled, forming small clumps that vary in size from that of a pea to a peppercorn; these clumps are separated by areas that appear bald (peppercorn hair). This type (referred to as lophocome by Haeckel) is prevalent among Hottentots and Bushmen, but most Black individuals also experience it in childhood and even in adulthood, especially at the temples, on the forehead—essentially, wherever the hair remains very short (Fig. 9). It is important to note that this hair pattern does not result from the hair being embedded in the scalp like brush bristles, as the way hair is rooted is the same across all races, whether Bushmen, Europeans, or Mongolians. However, it may be noted that the hair rows in Black individuals tend to be more irregular and closer together in certain areas, leaving other rows with gaps of two or three millimeters. As a result of the short length and tight twisting, the hair becomes tangled and the spirals can latch onto one another, thereby forming clumps or tufts.

Kurumba Man

FIG. 8.—Kurumba man of Nilgiri Hills; frizzy hair type.
(Phot. Thurston.)

FInstagram. 8.—Kurumba man from the Nilgiri Hills; frizzy hair type.
(Phot. Thurston.)

Does there exist any difference of form between straight, waved, frizzy, or woolly hair? The microscopical examination of transverse sections of the hair allows us to reply affirmatively to this question. This examination, already applied to the hair in 1822 by Heusinger, then successively by Blower (of Philadelphia), Kölliker, Pruner-Bey, Latteux, and Waldeyer,[44] has yielded results which have been vigorously discussed, and are still debatable if we cling to the individual and absolute figures, comparing sections made according to defective methods, or carried out on different levels of the hair. But if we calculate the index—that is to say, the relation of the breadth to the length (= 100) of the section (and that in a great number of individual cases)—we obtain satisfactory results, as Topinard and Ranke[45] have shown in general, as also Baelz in the case of the Japanese, and Montano in the case of the races of the Malay Archipelago.[46]

Is there any difference in the structure of straight, wavy, curly, or woolly hair? A microscopic examination of cross-sections of hair allows us to answer this question affirmatively. This examination was first applied to hair in 1822 by Heusinger, and later by Blower (from Philadelphia), Kölliker, Pruner-Bey, Latteux, and Waldeyer,[44] yielding results that have been extensively discussed and are still debated, especially when we focus on individual and absolute measurements, comparing sections taken using flawed methods or from different parts of the hair. However, if we calculate the index—which is the ratio of the width to the length (= 100) of the section (and do this for a large number of individual samples)—we find satisfying results, as shown generally by Topinard and Ranke[45] and by Baelz for the Japanese, and Montano for the races of the Malay Archipelago.[46]

Agni

FIG. 9.—Agni Negro of Krinjabo, Western Africa; woolly hair type.
(Photo. Thoman, lent by Collignon.)

FInstagram. 9.—Agni Negro of Krinjabo, Western Africa; woolly hair type.
(Photo. Thoman, lent by Collignon.)

If we consider a great number of microscopical sections, all obtained from the same level of the hair, we note that straight hair gives a circular section, whilst woolly hair gives one in the form of a lengthened ellipse. This ellipse is less extended, a little more filled out, in the sections of wavy hair. If the major axis of the ellipse be supposed to equal 100, the minor axis will be represented by figures varying from 40 to 50 for the woolly hair of the Bushmen and the Hottentots, from 50[Pg 43] to 60 for that of the Negroes, while the straight hair of the Eskimo will have this axis = 77, that of the Thibetans = 80, that of the Japanese = 85, etc. The hair of Europeans represents an elliptical section in which the major axis being = 100, the minor axis will be represented by figures varying from 62 to 72 (Topinard). It can be said to-day with certainty, after the work of Unna,[47] that the woolly hair of Negroes rolls up into a compact spiral precisely because of the flattened shape of this elliptical section, and of the special form of the follicle and papilla. In fact, in the Negro the follicle, instead of being straight, as in the European (Fig. 3, A), is curved inward in the form of a sabre, or even of the arc of a quarter of a circle (Fig. 3, B); further, the papilla is flattened instead of being round. One would say that the hair has encountered in its development so much resistance on the part of the dermis (which is so hard, in fact, among the Negroes), that it would be twisted, as it were, from the first. Emerging from an incurvated mould, it can only continue to roll up outside, given especially its flattened shape; it rolls up into a spiral, the plane of which, at the beginning, is perpendicular to the surface of the skin.[48] As to the thickness of the hair, it appears that in general it is greater in straight hair than in woolly; however, the hair of the western Finns is straight and fine at the same time.

If we look at a large number of microscopic sections taken from the same level of hair, we see that straight hair has a circular section, while woolly hair has an elongated elliptical section. Wavy hair produces an ellipse that is less elongated and a bit fuller. If we assume the major axis of the ellipse equals 100, the minor axis ranges from 40 to 50 for the woolly hair of the Bushmen and Hottentots, from 50[Pg 43] to 60 for that of Negroes, and the straight hair of Eskimos will have this axis at 77, while that of Tibetans is 80 and for Japanese it’s 85, etc. The hair of Europeans shows an elliptical section where the major axis equals 100 and the minor axis ranges from 62 to 72 (Topinard). It can be confidently stated today, following Unna's work,[47] that the woolly hair of Negroes curls into a tight spiral due to the flattened shape of this elliptical section and the unique form of the follicle and papilla. Specifically, in Negroes, the follicle curves inward like a saber, instead of being straight as in Europeans (Fig. 3, A), resembling the arc of a quarter circle (Fig. 3, B); additionally, the papilla is flattened rather than round. It seems that the hair faced so much resistance from the dermis (which is indeed very hard among Negroes) during its development that it is twisted from the start. Emerging from a curved mold, it can only continue to curl outward given its flattened shape; it spirals, initially with its plane perpendicular to the skin's surface.[48] Regarding hair thickness, it generally appears to be thicker in straight hair compared to woolly hair; however, the hair of western Finns is both straight and fine.

A certain correlation appears to exist between the nature of the hair and its absolute and relative length. Thus straight hair is at the same time the longest—Chinese, Americans, Indians (Fig. 4), while woolly hair is shortest, from 5 to 15 centimetres (Fig. 9); wavy hair occupies an intermediate position. Moreover, the difference between the length of the hair of men and women is almost inappreciable in the two extreme divisions. In certain straight-haired races the hair of the head is as long with men as with women; one need but to[Pg 44] call to mind the plaits of the Chinese, or the beautiful heads of hair of the Red Indians, which may attain in certain cases a length of even two metres (Catlin). In frizzy-haired races the hair of the head, on the contrary, is equally short in the two sexes; the hair of the head of women among the Bushmen, Hottentots, and even Negroes, is not appreciably longer than among the men. It is only in the categories of wavy and in part of frizzy hair, that the differences are appreciable. With European men the length of the hair rarely exceeds 30 or 40 centimetres, while with the women it averages 65 to 75 centimetres, and may attain in exceptional cases to 2 metres (as in the case of an Englishwoman, according to Dr. D. Watson).

A certain relationship seems to exist between the type of hair and its absolute and relative length. Straight hair is generally the longest—seen in Chinese, Americans, and Indians (Fig. 4), while woolly hair is the shortest, ranging from 5 to 15 centimeters (Fig. 9); wavy hair falls in between. Additionally, the difference in hair length between men and women is almost negligible in the two extremes. In some straight-haired groups, men's hair is just as long as women's; one only needs to think of the braids of the Chinese or the beautiful hair of the Native Americans, which can even reach lengths of up to two meters in some cases (Catlin). In populations with tightly curled hair, both men and women have similarly short hair; among the Bushmen, Hottentots, and even Black Africans, women's hair is not significantly longer than men's. Only in the categories of wavy and partly frizzy hair are the differences noticeable. In European men, hair length rarely exceeds 30 or 40 centimeters, while for women it averages 65 to 75 centimeters and can exceptionally reach up to 2 meters (as reported in the case of an Englishwoman by Dr. D. Watson).

Another fact to be noted is that the general development of the pilose system on the face, as on the rest of the body, seems also to be in relation to the nature of the hair of the head.

Another thing to note is that the overall development of the hair system on the face, just like on the rest of the body, also seems to be related to the type of hair on the head.

Straight-haired races are ordinarily very glabrous, the men have hardly a rudimentary tuft of beard—American Indians (Fig. 4), Mongols (Fig. 20), Malays; while in the wavy or frizzy-haired races, the development of the pilose system is considerable—Australians, Dravidians, Iranians (Fig. 22), Ainus (Fig. 117), etc. The woolly-haired races are not, however, included in this rule; glabrous types (Bushmen, western Negroes) are found side by side with rather hairy types (Melanesians, Akka, Ashanti). There appears to be a certain likeness between the abundance of hair on the head and on the body. Thus, according to Hilgendorf, the Japanese who are glabrous have from 252 to 286 hairs to each square centimetre on the head, whilst the hairy Ainus have only 214. Negroes and white men do not appear, however, to present the same differences (Gould). Even baldness results largely from the nature of the hair. According to Gould, baldness is ten times less frequent among Negroes than among Whites, between 33 years and 44 years, and thirty times less so between 21 and 32. Among Mulattos it is more frequent than among the Negroes, but less than among Whites.[Pg 45] Lastly, among Red Indians it seems to be still more rare than among Negroes. White hair follows almost the same rule.[49]

Straight-haired races are usually very smooth-skinned, with men having little more than a basic stubble of beard—like American Indians (Fig. 4), Mongols (Fig. 20), and Malays; while in races with wavy or frizzy hair, there's a noticeable development of body hair—such as Australians, Dravidians, Iranians (Fig. 22), and Ainus (Fig. 117). However, the rule doesn’t apply to woolly-haired races, where hairless types (Bushmen, western Negroes) exist alongside hairier types (Melanesians, Akka, Ashanti). There seems to be a connection between the amount of hair on the head and the body. For instance, according to Hilgendorf, hairless Japanese have between 252 to 286 hairs per square centimeter on their heads, while the hairier Ainus have only 214. Negroes and white men don’t appear to show the same differences (Gould). Even baldness is largely influenced by hair type. Gould states that baldness is ten times less common among Negroes than among Whites between the ages of 33 and 44, and thirty times less common between ages 21 and 32. Among Mulattos, it occurs more than among Negroes, but less than among Whites.[Pg 45] Lastly, baldness among Red Indians seems to be even rarer than among Negroes. White hair tends to follow a similar pattern.[49]

In the mass, the human races may be divided according to the character of their hair as follows:—

In the mass, human races can be classified based on their hair type as follows:—

Woolly Hair.—Bushmen, Negro, and Melanesian races.

Woolly Hair.—Bushmen, Black, and Melanesian races.

Frizzy Hair.—Australian, Ethiopian, Beja, Fulbé, etc., and Dravidian.

Frizzy Hair.—Australian, Ethiopian, Beja, Fulbé, and Dravidian.

Wavy Hair.—The white races of Europe, of Northern Africa, and Asia (Melanochroi or the dark-complexioned Whites, and Xanthochroi or pale Whites).

Wavy Hair.—The white races of Europe, Northern Africa, and Asia (Melanochroi or the dark-skinned Whites, and Xanthochroi or light-skinned Whites).

Fine, straight, or lightly-waved Hair.—Turco-Tatars, Finns, Ainus, and Indonesians (Dyaks, Nagas, etc.); lastly,

Fine, straight, or lightly-waved Hair.—Turco-Tatars, Finns, Ainus, and Indonesians (Dyaks, Nagas, etc.); lastly,

Coarse straight Hair.—Mongolians and American races, with some exceptions. It must be noted that, in the manifold blendings of races, characteristics of the hair amalgamate. Thus the half-breeds between Negroes and American Indians have, most frequently, the hair frizzy or wavy. But there are also frequent reversions to the primitive type, almost always, however, a little weakened.

Coarse straight hair.—Mongolian and American races, with some exceptions. It's important to note that in the many different mixes of races, hair characteristics combine. Therefore, the mixed-race individuals between Black people and Native Americans often have frizzy or wavy hair. However, there are also frequent returns to the original type, which are usually somewhat less strong.

There are no races of hairy men. Everything that has been said of different “hairy savages” in the interior of Africa or Indo-China resolves itself into the presence of a light down (probably the remains of embryonic lanugo) in the case of the Akkas of the Upper Nile, or to the fortuitous existence of one or two families of hairy men and women from Burma exhibited some years ago in Europe and America. Other “phenomena” have been shown, like the famous Julia Pastrana or the “Dog-men” of Russia. All these subjects are only particular cases of atavism, or of a reversion to the probable primordial condition of man or of his precursor at the period when he was as hairy as, for instance, the anthropoid apes of to-day; they are by no means the representatives of a hairy race.

There are no races of hairy men. Everything that’s been said about different “hairy savages” in the interior of Africa or Indo-China boils down to the presence of a light down (likely the remnants of embryonic lanugo) in the case of the Akkas of the Upper Nile, or to the random existence of one or two families of hairy men and women from Burma that were displayed several years ago in Europe and America. Other “phenomena” have been presented, like the famous Julia Pastrana or the “Dog-men” of Russia. All of these cases are just specific examples of atavism, or a return to what is believed to be the original state of humans or their ancestors when they were as hairy as today’s anthropoid apes; they are not representatives of a hairy race.

The beard is, as we know, one of the sexual characteristics of man, although many fine ones are found among certain women, notably among the Europeans of the south, and especially among Spanish women. The more hairy the body, the thicker as a[Pg 46] rule is the beard. In the glabrous races (Mongols, Malays, Americans) a few straggling hairs are all that can be seen at the corners of the mouth and on the chin (Figs. 20 and 168); in the very hairy races, like the Ainus, the Iranians, certain Semites, the Todas, the Australians, the Melanesians, the beard is strong and abundant on the lips, the chin, and the cheeks, where it reaches sometimes to the cheek-bones (Fig. 22); in the Negro and Bushmen races neither the moustache nor the beard can attain to great dimensions, because of the curly nature of the hair (Figs. 140 and 143). The eyelashes and the eyebrows are likewise much developed in races having an abundant beard, and this is the case in both sexes; we have only to recall the thick and joined eyebrows of the Persian women. On the other hand, among the Mongolians we note the small development of the eyelashes in relation to the particular structure of their eye (see p. 77).

The beard is known to be one of the sexual traits of men, although many women have impressive beards as well, particularly among Southern Europeans, especially Spanish women. Generally, the hairier the body, the thicker the beard tends to be. In hairless groups (like Mongols, Malays, and Americans), only a few sparse hairs can be seen at the corners of the mouth and on the chin; in very hairy groups, like the Ainus, Iranians, certain Semites, Todas, Australians, and Melanesians, the beard is pronounced and plentiful on the lips, chin, and cheeks, sometimes reaching the cheekbones. In the Negro and Bushman groups, neither the mustache nor the beard can grow very large due to the curly texture of the hair. The eyelashes and eyebrows are also well-developed in groups with abundant beards, and this is true for both sexes; for instance, Persian women often have thick, unibrowed brows. Meanwhile, among Mongolians, we see a smaller development of eyelashes due to the unique structure of their eyes.

Pigmentation.—The distribution of the pigment which gives the colouring to the skin, to the hair, to the iris, varies much according to race, and forms, along with the nature of the hair, a good distinctive characteristic. As I have already stated above, the pigment is accumulated principally in the lowest layers of the rete Malpighii (Fig. 3, c.p.), but it is also met with in small quantities in the horny layer, and even in the dermis.[50] According to race, the microscopic granules of pigment of a uniform brown are very unequally distributed around the nuclei of the cells, to which they give the most varied tones from pale yellow to dark brown, almost black. As the pigment exists in all races, and in all parts of the body, it is to its more or less plentiful accumulation in the cells that the colouring of the skin and its derivatives is due. Further, there must be added, for certain races at least, the combination with the tint of the blood of the vessels, as seen through the skin.

Pigmentation.—The distribution of the pigment that gives color to the skin, hair, and iris varies significantly by race and is a key characteristic, along with hair type. As I mentioned earlier, pigment mainly collects in the lowest layers of the rete Malpighii (Fig. 3, c.p.), but it's also found in smaller amounts in the outer layer and even in the dermis.[50] Depending on the race, the microscopic pigment granules, which appear as a uniform brown, are unevenly spread around the cell nuclei, creating a range of shades from pale yellow to dark brown, nearly black. Since pigment is present in all races and throughout the body, the variability in its accumulation within cells accounts for the coloring of the skin and its derivatives. Additionally, in some races, the color of the blood in the vessels, visible through the skin, also contributes to this coloration.

Every one knows that our white races become tanned in the sun; the cause of this is the pigment, developing abundantly[Pg 47] and being deposited in the cells under the combined action of air, heat, and light; the congestion of the vessels has also something to do with it. In the same way, persons living a long time in dense forests or in dark though airy places end by becoming paler, in consequence of the loss of the pigment, but recover colour immediately on re-exposure to the sun. But the modifications produced by the action of air and sun vary even among Europeans according to the colouring peculiar to their race.

Everyone knows that our white races get tanned in the sun; this happens because pigment develops abundantly[Pg 47] and gets deposited in the cells due to the combined effects of air, heat, and light; the congestion of the blood vessels also plays a role. Similarly, people who spend a long time in dense forests or in dark but well-ventilated places become paler because they lose pigment, but they regain color as soon as they're exposed to the sun again. The changes caused by the actions of air and sun also vary among Europeans depending on the natural coloring specific to their race.

Thus among the fair races of Northern Europe the skin, burnt by the sun, becomes red, as if swollen; on the other hand, among the dark-coloured peoples of the Mediterranean, it takes a bronze tint. There are thus between these two races notable differences, if not in the chemical nature of the pigment, which is scarcely likely, at least in regard to its quantity. It is the same with other races generally, and ten principal shades of colour at least can easily be distinguished. In the first place, among Whites, three shades: 1st, pale white; 2nd, florid, or rosy, peculiar to the Scandinavians, English, Dutch, etc.; 3rd, brownish-white, peculiar to Spaniards, Italians, etc. In the races called Yellow, three varieties of colour can likewise be distinguished: 4th, yellowish-white, a sickly hue the colour of wheat, as, for example, among certain Chinese; 5th, olive-yellow, the colour of new portmanteau leather, as among the majority of South American Indians, Polynesians, and Indonesians; 6th, dark yellow-brown, dark olive, or the colour of dead leaves, as among certain Americans, Malays, etc. In the dark-skinned races, four shades at least must be distinguished: 7th, red, copper-coloured, as, for example, among the Bejas, Niam-Niam, Fulbé; 8th, reddish-brown, chocolate, as among the Dravidians, the Australians, certain Negroes and Melanesians; lastly, 9th, sooty black, and 10th, coal-black, for example, among the different Negro populations.

Thus, among the fair-skinned people of Northern Europe, skin that has been tanned by the sun turns red, almost like it's swollen; on the other hand, among the darker-skinned people of the Mediterranean, it takes on a bronze hue. There are significant differences between these two groups, if not in the chemical makeup of the pigment, which is unlikely, then at least in the amount of it. The same goes for other races in general, and at least ten main shades of color can be easily identified. First, among Whites, there are three shades: 1st, pale white; 2nd, florid or rosy, which is typical for Scandinavians, English, Dutch, etc.; 3rd, brownish-white, common among Spaniards, Italians, etc. Among the groups referred to as Yellow, three color variations can also be recognized: 4th, yellowish-white, a sickly wheat-like hue, seen in certain Chinese; 5th, olive-yellow, resembling new leather, found in most South American Indians, Polynesians, and Indonesians; 6th, dark yellow-brown, dark olive, or the color of dried leaves, which can be seen in some Americans, Malays, etc. In dark-skinned races, at least four shades must be noted: 7th, red, copper-like, for example, among the Bejas, Niam-Niam, Fulbé; 8th, reddish-brown, chocolate-colored, typical of Dravidians, Australians, certain Black people, and Melanesians; finally, 9th, sooty black, and 10th, coal-black, as seen among various Black populations.

In order to avoid an arbitrary designation of colours, anthropologists make use of chromatic tables, in which examples of the chief variations of colour are marked by numbers. The best table, almost universally adopted, is that[Pg 48] of Broca, of thirty-four shades.[51] The Anthropological Institute of Great Britain and Ireland has published a very practical and simplified edition of it,[52] which contains only the ten numbers of principal shades proposed by Topinard, namely, those I have just enumerated.

To avoid choosing colors randomly, anthropologists use color charts, which display examples of the main color variations marked by numbers. The most widely used chart is Broca's, which includes thirty-four shades.[Pg 48][51] The Anthropological Institute of Great Britain and Ireland has published a very practical and simplified version of it,[52] which only includes the ten main shades proposed by Topinard, which are the ones I just listed.

The pigment is not uniformly distributed, as I have said, through the whole body, and this is so with the Whites as well as with the darkest races. In all of them the parts of the body most deeply coloured are the nape of the neck, the back (as with animals), the back part of the limbs, the arm-pits, the scrotum, and the breasts; the belly (as with animals), the insides of the hands, the soles of the feet, are among the most lightly coloured. The parts covered by garments are less coloured among white and yellow races than the parts uncovered; it is affirmed, but without reliable proofs, that the contrary takes place among the dark and black populations.

The pigment isn't evenly spread throughout the body, as I've mentioned, and this applies to both white people and those from darker races. In all groups, the most heavily pigmented areas are the back of the neck, the back (similar to animals), the backs of the limbs, the armpits, the scrotum, and the breasts; the belly (also like animals), the insides of the hands, and the soles of the feet are generally lighter in color. It's noted that the areas covered by clothing are less pigmented in white and yellow races compared to the uncovered parts; it’s claimed, though without solid proof, that the opposite is true for dark and black populations.

In the iris, the pigmentation assumes a particular character. As we know, this perforated diaphragm of the eye is composed, histologically, of three layers: an anterior epithelial one; a middle one, the “stroma,” with muscular fibres, designed to enlarge or reduce the pupil; and lastly, a posterior layer, called the pigmental layer. But it must not be thought that this layer is the only repository of the pigment of the iris. It is also found accumulated in the thickness of the stroma, and between the muscular fibres. In both places the granules of the pigment have the same brown colour as in the rest of the body, but the pigment of the posterior or pigmental layer is only seen through the stroma and appears blue or grey, more or less light or dark, according to its quantity, just as the black veins of the blood appear to us blue through the skin. On the contrary, the pigment accumulated in the stroma or between the muscular fibres of the iris exhibits its natural yellow, brown, or almost black colour[Pg 49]ing, according to the quantity of it, under the form of a trail radiating very clearly from the pupil towards the periphery of the eye occupying one-third, two-thirds, or even the whole of the iris.

In the iris, the pigmentation takes on a distinct appearance. As we know, this perforated diaphragm of the eye has three layers: an outer epithelial layer, a middle layer called the “stroma” that contains muscle fibers responsible for enlarging or reducing the pupil, and a back layer known as the pigmental layer. However, it's important to note that this layer isn't the sole storage for the iris's pigment. Pigment is also found within the stroma and between the muscle fibers. In both areas, the pigment granules have the same brown color as in the rest of the body, but the pigment in the back or pigmental layer is only visible through the stroma and appears blue or gray, varying from light to dark based on its amount—similar to how our veins look blue through the skin. In contrast, the pigment found in the stroma or between the muscle fibers of the iris shows its natural yellow, brown, or nearly black color, which can manifest as a clear trail radiating from the pupil to the periphery of the eye, covering one-third, two-thirds, or even the entire iris.[Pg 49]

Seen at a certain distance, irises without pigment in their stroma appear blue or grey; those having the whole or the greater part of this charged with pigment appear brown, dark brown, or almost black, according to the quantity of this pigment. But irises having a blue or grey foundation strewn with yellowish spots of pigment appear green, yellow, yellowish-grey, greenish-grey, etc.

Seen from a distance, irises without pigment in their stroma look blue or gray; those with most of this area filled with pigment appear brown, dark brown, or nearly black, depending on the amount of pigment present. However, irises that have a blue or gray base scattered with yellowish spots of pigment look green, yellow, yellowish-gray, greenish-gray, and so on.

There are thus distinguishable only three fundamental shades of the iris, or, as is commonly said, of the colour of the eyes: light (blue or grey); dark (bright or dull brown or black); and intermediate shades (green, yellow, yellowish-grey, greenish-grey, etc.). This classification is entirely based on the quantity of pigment in the iris.

There are therefore only three main colors of the iris, or, as people commonly say, eye color: light (blue or gray); dark (bright or dull brown or black); and intermediate shades (green, yellow, yellowish-gray, greenish-gray, etc.). This classification is completely based on the amount of pigment in the iris.

It is only in fair European races that blue or grey eyes are found, perhaps also in the Turco-Ugrian races; light-brown eyes are met with among some Mongolians. In all the other populations of the earth the eyes are dark-brown or black. It is the same with the colouring of the hair. It varies appreciably among the wavy-haired races, much less so among the straight and frizzy-haired races, and remains always black among the woolly-haired races. Four principal shades can be distinguished in the hair—black, dark-brown, chestnut-brown (châtain in French), and fair. In this last shade, golden must be separated from flaxen and dull grey-reddish hair. Red hair of all shades is only an individual anomaly, accompanied besides, almost always, by freckles (ephelides) on the face and neck. There are no red-haired races, but light and chestnut hair may have a reddish reflection in it. Red hair is very common in countries where several white-coloured races (brown or fair) are intermixed. In these crossed races there are found heads of hair of all colours—black, brown, fair, reddish-brown, dull-grey, chestnut, etc. This is the natural result of the intermixture of blood. Among a[Pg 50] dark-haired people, which has remained free from intermixture, or has only intermingled with dark-haired races, an exceptional red-haired individual constitutes a pathological condition, called “erythrism” by Broca. Erythrism can only manifest itself in certain races; at least, until now no example has been instanced among the Negroes; on the other hand, erythrism is somewhat common among the Jews of Europe, and among such Jews it is most frequently associated with frizzy hair.[53]

Blue or gray eyes are only found in fair European races and possibly also in the Turco-Ugrian races; light brown eyes can be seen in some Mongolian groups. In all other populations around the world, eyes are dark brown or black. The same goes for hair color. It varies significantly among wavy-haired races, much less so among straight and frizzy-haired races, and is always black among woolly-haired races. Four main shades of hair can be identified: black, dark brown, chestnut brown (châtain in French), and fair. Within the fair category, golden should be distinguished from flaxen and dull gray-reddish hues. Red hair, in all its shades, is just an individual anomaly, and it almost always comes with freckles (ephelides) on the face and neck. There are no specific red-haired races, but light and chestnut hair can sometimes have a reddish tint. Red hair is very common in countries where several white-skinned races (brown or fair) mix together. In these mixed races, you can find hair of all colors—black, brown, fair, reddish-brown, dull gray, chestnut, etc. This diversity is a natural result of blood mixing. Among a[Pg 50] group of dark-haired people who have not mixed with others or have only mingled with dark-haired races, an unusual red-haired individual is considered a pathological condition, known as "erythrism" by Broca. Erythrism can only appear in certain races; so far, there hasn't been an example among Negroes. However, erythrism is somewhat common among Jews in Europe, and among those Jews, it is most often found with frizzy hair.[53]

The colouring of the hair depends not only on the pigment, but on the more or less quantity of air in the medulla of the hair, which blends the white and grey tones with the general tint given by the pigment. In the air, the hair fades, becomes less highly coloured, duller. Certain acids of the perspiration render the hair reddish-brown, as for instance, under the arm-pit.

The color of hair depends not just on the pigment, but also on the amount of air present in the medulla of the hair, which mixes the white and gray shades with the overall color provided by the pigment. In air, hair loses its color, becoming less vibrant and duller. Certain acids in sweat can turn hair reddish-brown, like in the underarms.

At birth pigment is found in the body in less quantity than in the adult state. Every one knows that the hair of children, often light-coloured at birth and in early years, becomes darker as they grow up. Almost all our European children are born with blue eyes, and the pigment only begins to increase in the iris, transforming the eyes into grey, brown, or black at the end of some weeks, or even months after birth. New-born Chinese, Botocudos, Malays, Kalmuks, are much less yellow than the adults of these people, and, lastly, Negroes at birth are of a reddish-chocolate or copper colour, which only becomes darker at the end of three or four days, beginning in certain places, such as the nape, nipples, scrotum, etc.

At birth, the body contains less pigment than in adulthood. Everyone knows that children often have light-colored hair when they’re born and in their early years, which darkens as they grow older. Almost all European babies are born with blue eyes, and the pigment in their irises starts to increase, changing their eyes to grey, brown, or black weeks or even months after birth. New-born Chinese, Botocudos, Malays, and Kalmuks are much less yellow than the adults of their ethnic groups, and lastly, babies of African descent are born with a reddish-chocolate or copper color that only darkens after three or four days, beginning in certain areas like the nape, nipples, and scrotum.

The presence of temporary spots of pigment noticed among new-born Japanese by Grimm and Baelz, among the Chinese by Matignon, among the Tagals of the Philippines by Collignon, and among the Eskimo by Sören-Hansen,[54] is more puzzling. These are somewhat large blue, grey, or black spots, situated in the sacro-lumbar region and on the buttocks, which disappear about the age of two, three, or five years. The existence of these spots, like that of the ephelides in the European child, would prove rather the migration of pigmental granules to the places selected than a general increase of them. In most races women appear to have clearer skin than men; in that respect, as in many other characters, they have a closer resemblance to children. It is thought by some that the hair of women is lighter than that of men among European races.[55]

The temporary pigment spots observed in newborns of various groups—Japanese by Grimm and Baelz, Chinese by Matignon, Tagals of the Philippines by Collignon, and Eskimos by Sören-Hansen,[54] are quite intriguing. These are fairly large blue, gray, or black spots found in the lumbar-sacral area and on the buttocks, which fade away by the age of two, three, or five. The presence of these spots, similar to freckles in European children, suggests a migration of pigment granules to specific areas rather than a general increase in pigmentation. Typically, women in most ethnic groups seem to have clearer skin than men; in this sense, as well as in several other traits, they resemble children more closely. Some believe that women’s hair is lighter than men’s among European races.[55]

Among Negroes the pigment is visible not only on the skin, in the hair, and the iris, but also in the sclerotic, in the mucous membrane of the lips, the mouth, the genital organs, etc.; the internal organs, even, are not free from it; the suprarenal capsules, the mesentery, the liver, the spleen, are often coloured with black spots of pigment, and even the brain contains numerous pigmented points in its envelopes and in its grey matter. Such an abundance of pigment would become a danger to the White, as is proved by certain diseases, melanism, for example, in which the pigment especially invades the viscera, or Addison’s disease, in which, on the contrary, there is an over-production of pigment in the skin and the mucous membranes.

Among Black people, pigment is present not only in the skin, hair, and eyes, but also in the whites of the eyes, the mucous membranes of the lips, mouth, genital areas, and more. Even internal organs are not exempt; the adrenal glands, mesentery, liver, and spleen often have black pigment spots, and the brain contains many pigmented areas in its coverings and gray matter. This high amount of pigment can pose risks for white individuals, as seen in certain diseases like melanism, which particularly affects the internal organs, or Addison's disease, where there is an excess of pigment in the skin and mucous membranes.

The total absence of pigment, which may occur with the Negro as with the White, is termed albinism. This may be accompanied, if complete (that is to say, when, besides the white skin and hair, the iris is also deprived of pigment, and appears red), by somewhat serious affections of the eyesight.[Pg 52] But, in every respect, albinos are weakly, and probably not fertile amongst themselves.

The total lack of pigment, which can happen in both Black and White individuals, is called albinism. This condition can be severe if it’s complete—that is, when the skin and hair are white, and the iris also lacks pigment, appearing red—resulting in significant vision problems.[Pg 52] Overall, albinos tend to be frail and are likely not fertile with one another.

In considering from all points of view the nature of hair and pigmentation in general, we cannot help noticing a certain correlation between these two characters. In fact, to the white colouring of the skin corresponds, in a general fashion, wavy hair, the colouring of which varies often in accord with the colour of the eyes and the shades of the skin (white, fair, brown races); to the yellow colouring corresponds straight, smooth hair; to the reddish-brown skin, frizzy hair; and to the black, woolly hair.

When we think about hair and pigmentation from every angle, we can't help but notice a connection between the two. Generally speaking, wavy hair tends to correspond with lighter skin, often matching the eye color and skin tone (white, fair, brown races). Straight, smooth hair is linked to yellow-toned skin; frizzy hair goes with reddish-brown skin; and woolly hair is associated with black skin.


CHAPTER II.

1. MORPHOLOGICAL CHARACTERS (continued).

Cranium or Skull: Cranial measurements—Orbits and orbital index—Nasal bone and nasal index—Prognathism—Head of the living subject: Cephalic index—Face—Eyes—Nose and nasal index in the living subject—Lips—Trunk and Limbs: The Skeleton—Pelvis and its indices—Shoulder blade—Thoracic limb—Abdominal limb—Proportions of the body in the living subject: Trunk and neck—Curve of the back—Steatopygy—Various Organs: Genital organs—Brain—Its weight—Convolutions—The neuron—Its importance from the psychical point of view.

Cranium or Skull: Cranial measurements—Orbits and orbital index—Nasal bone and nasal index—Prognathism—Head of the living subject: Cephalic index—Face—Eyes—Nose and nasal index in the living subject—Lips—Trunk and Limbs: The Skeleton—Pelvis and its indices—Shoulder blade—Thoracic limb—Abdominal limb—Proportions of the body in the living subject: Trunk and neck—Curve of the back—Steatopygy—Various Organs: Genital organs—Brain—Its weight—Convolutions—The neuron—Its importance from the psychological perspective.

HAVING treated of the body in its general aspect, we shall now examine from the morphological point of view its different parts: the head, trunk, limbs, etc., as well as their relations to each other and their reciprocal dimensions, both in the skeleton and the living subject.

HSAVING discussed the body in its general form, we will now look at its different parts from a structural perspective: the head, trunk, limbs, etc., along with how they relate to each other and their proportional sizes, both in the skeleton and in a living person.

Cranium or Skull.—This part of the skeleton forms the object of investigation of a very extended branch of anthropology called craniology.

Cranium or Skull.—This part of the skeleton is the focus of a large field of anthropology known as craniology.

Craniology must not be confounded with the cranioscopy of the phrenologists, a sham science founded by Gall, who wished to establish a connection between certain bumps or irregularities of the surface of the skull and the parts of the brain in which, as was pretended, were localised the different intellectual functions. It is now demonstrated that the inequalities of the external table of the cranium walls have no relation whatever with the irregularities of the internal table, and still less have they anything in common with the conformation of the various parts of the brain. But if there be[Pg 54] no such direct connection as this between the cranium and the brain, there is nevertheless a certain remote relation between them, and the brain has attained such a development in man that the study of everything which concerns it, immediately or remotely, possesses great interest. This would alone suffice to explain the pre-eminent position assigned to craniology in the natural history of man. But there exist still other reasons why the study of the skull is one of the most cultivated branches of anthropology. As in the case of all the other mammals, the skull in man is one of the parts of the skeleton, and even of the entire body, which exhibits the greatest number of well-marked variations. The differences in the form and the dimensions of the skull in correlation with those of the brain and the masticatory organs, serve to distinguish races and species, both in man and other vertebrata. Besides, the teeth, which characterise not only genera but even families and orders of the mammifera, are always attached to the skull, though not forming part of the bony system. We may also observe that the skull, with the other bones of the skeleton, constitutes the only anatomical document of prehistoric man which has come down to us; it is only in studying it that we can connect and compare, from the point of view of physical type, existing with extinct races of mankind.

Craniology should not be confused with cranioscopy practiced by phrenologists, a pseudo-science created by Gall, who aimed to link certain bumps or irregularities on the skull's surface to specific areas of the brain where, it was claimed, various intellectual functions were localized. It's now proven that the irregularities on the outer surface of the skull have no relation to the inner surface's variations, and even less to the shape of different parts of the brain. However, while there isn't a direct connection between the skull and the brain, there is still a distant relationship between them, and the human brain has developed to such an extent that studying everything related to it, whether directly or indirectly, is highly interesting. This alone explains why craniology holds a prominent place in the natural history of humanity. Additionally, there are other reasons why studying the skull is one of the most explored areas of anthropology. Like all other mammals, the human skull shows the greatest number of clear variations among the skeleton and the entire body. Differences in skull shape and size, in relation to those of the brain and the chewing organs, help distinguish races and species in both humans and other vertebrates. Moreover, teeth, which characterize not only genera but also families and orders of mammals, are always attached to the skull, even though they aren't part of the bony structure. We can also note that the skull, along with other bones of the skeleton, is the only anatomical evidence of prehistoric humans that has survived; only by studying it can we connect and compare existing physical types with extinct races of humanity.

The characters that may be observed in the skull are very numerous, and may be divided into descriptive characters, which give an account of the conformation of the bony structure of the head and its parts, and craniometrical characters, which give the dimensions of these parts by exact measurements taken by means of special apparatus or instruments. These two orders of characters are complementary to each other. The cranial characters vary according to race, but within the limits of each race there are other lesser variations according to age and sex.

The features that can be seen in the skull are quite numerous and can be categorized into descriptive features, which describe the shape of the bony structure of the head and its parts, and craniometrical features, which provide the measurements of these parts using precise tools or instruments. These two types of features complement each other. The cranial features differ by race, but within each race, there are also smaller variations based on age and sex.

The general form of the cranium, as also the number, the consistence, and structure of the different parts which compose it are modified as the individual develops and grows[Pg 55] older. Formed of a single cartilaginous and membranous substance at the beginning of embryonic life, the cranium is composed in the last fœtal state of a great number of points of ossification of various texture. At birth the number of these points has considerably diminished; they have united for the most part to form the different parts of the bones of the cranium or brain case and the bones of the face; as the child grows, these points grow and end by being contiguous; about the age of eighteen or twenty years they form bones separated by sutures. There are twenty-one separated bones described in classic treatises on anatomy. Later on these bones begin to unite, the sutures which separate them disappear, and in extreme old age the cranium is formed of a bony mass almost as continuous and homogeneous as was the cranial cartilaginous and membranous mass in the embryo. According to the number of the pieces composing the cranium, and also according to their position, structure, and conformation, according to the degree of obliteration of the sutures and the order in which the obliteration of each suture takes place, according to the general form of the forehead, the angle of the lower jaw, according to the volume and dimensions of the skull, and lastly, according to the state of the dentition, etc., the nearly exact age of the individual to whom the skull had belonged may easily be discovered in this cycle of development. Other characters serve to distinguish the sex: the forehead is straight and rounded in woman, retreating in man; the cranial cavity is less in woman than in man in any given race; the orbital edges are sharper in woman, the impress of the muscles less marked, the weight of the skull in general less than that of the masculine skull, etc.[56] Lastly, the characters of race are[Pg 56] numerous and special. I shall proceed briefly to enumerate some of them. First in order of importance comes cranial capacity, or the volume of the cavity of the brain-case, which gives an idea of the volume of the brain, and approximately of its weight.

The overall shape of the skull, along with the number, consistency, and structure of its various parts, changes as a person grows older[Pg 55]. Initially made up of a single cartilaginous and membranous substance at the start of embryo development, the skull consists of many points of ossification of various textures in the late fetal stage. By birth, the number of these points has significantly decreased; they have mostly merged to form the different parts of the skull or brain case and the facial bones. As the child develops, these points increase and eventually become adjacent; around eighteen to twenty years of age, they form separate bones divided by sutures. Classic anatomy texts describe twenty-one distinct bones. Later, these bones start to fuse, the sutures that separate them disappear, and in extreme old age, the skull consists of a bony mass almost as continuous and homogeneous as the initial cartilaginous and membranous mass in the embryo. By analyzing the number of pieces in the skull, along with their position, structure, shape, the degree of sutural fusion, and the order in which each suture closes, as well as features like the shape of the forehead, the angle of the jaw, the size and shape of the skull, and the state of tooth development, one can easily determine the approximate age of the individual to whom the skull belonged. Other characteristics can help identify sex: women tend to have a straight and rounded forehead, while men's foreheads are more receding; women generally have a smaller cranial cavity than men in any given race; the edges of the eye sockets are sharper in women, the muscle markings less pronounced, and the overall weight of the skull is less than that of the male skull, etc.[56] Finally, the characteristics of race are[Pg 56] numerous and specific. I will briefly list some of them. The most important is cranial capacity, or the volume of the brain-case, which provides an idea of the brain's size and approximate weight.

Dolichocephalic Skull

FIG. 10.—Dolichocephalic skull
of an islander of Torres Straits. Cephalic index, 61.9.
(After O. Thomas.)

FIG. 10.—Long-headed skull
of an islander from the Torres Straits. Cephalic index, 61.9.
(After O. Thomas.)

Cranial capacity may vary to the extent of double the minimum figure (from 1100 cubic centimetres to 2200 cubic centimetres) among normal individuals in the human race. The average capacity for the races of Europe is from 1500 to 1600 cubic centimetres; that of the skulls of Asiatic races appears to be very nearly the same; that of the Negro races and Oceanians a little smaller, perhaps from 1400 to 1500 cubic centimetres on an average. That of the Australians, the Bushmen, and the Andamanese is still less, from 1250 to 1350 cubic centimetres. But it must not be forgotten that the volume of the head, as with its other dimensions, has a certain relation to the height of the individual, and, as a matter of fact, Bushmen and Andamanese are very short in stature; Australians, however, are of average height. Partly, too, to their disproportion of height must, probably, be attributed the difference between the volume of the cranium in man and in woman. According to the series examined, this sexual difference may extend from 100 to 200 cubic centimetres, and even beyond, in favour of man. The cranial capacity of woman represents from eighty-five to ninety-five of the cranial capacity of man.[57] The cranial capacity of lunatics, of certain criminals, and especially of celebrated or distinguished men, scholars, artists, statesmen, etc., appears to be slightly superior to the average of their race. We shall revert later to the question of cranial capacity in connection with weight of brain.

Cranial capacity can vary significantly, with some individuals having up to double the minimum size (ranging from 1100 to 2200 cubic centimeters). The average capacity for European races is between 1500 and 1600 cubic centimeters; Asiatic skulls have a similar average. In contrast, the average for Negro races and Oceanians is slightly lower, around 1400 to 1500 cubic centimeters. Australians, Bushmen, and Andamanese have even smaller averages, between 1250 and 1350 cubic centimeters. It's important to note that head size, like other body dimensions, relates to an individual's height; Bushmen and Andamanese tend to be quite short, while Australians are of average height. This difference in height may also contribute to the variation in cranial capacity between men and women. Based on the examined series, this sexual difference can range from 100 to 200 cubic centimeters, and sometimes even more, favoring men. The cranial capacity of women is about 85 to 95 percent of that of men.[57] The cranial capacity of individuals with mental health issues, certain criminals, and especially notable figures like scholars, artists, and statesmen tends to be somewhat higher than the average for their race. We will revisit the topic of cranial capacity in relation to brain weight later.

Dolichocephalic Skull

FIG. 11.—Brachycephalic skull
of a Ladin of Pufels (Tyrol). (After Holl.)

FIG. 11.—Brachycephalic skull
of a Ladin from Pufels (Tyrol). (After Holl.)

The general form of the brain-case is an oval, but this oval may be more or less rounded, quite globular (Fig. 11), or more or less elongated to resemble an ellipse, the major axis of which[Pg 57] is almost double the minor (Fig. 10). The numerical expression of the cranial form is given in anthropology by what is called the cephalic index—that is to say, by the relation of the length of the cranium (ordinarily measured from the glabella to the most prominent point of the occiput (Figs. 10 and 13, A B) to its greatest breadth (Fig. 10, C D, Fig. 12, M N)). Reducing uniformly the first of these measurements to 100, we obtain the different figures for the breadth, which expresses the cranial form; thus very round skulls (Fig. 11) have 85, 90, and even 100 (extreme individual limit) for index, while elongated skulls (Fig. 10) may have an index of 70, of 65, and even of 58 (extreme individual limit). According to Broca’s nomenclature, skulls having indices between 77.7 and 80 are mesaticephalic or mesocephalic; those having the indices below this figure are sub-dolichocephalic (up to 75), or dolichocephalic (beyond 75, Fig. 10); those which have the[Pg 58] index above 80 are sub-brachycephalic (up to 83.3), or brachycephalic (above 83.3, Fig. 11).[58] Peoples or ethnic groups being formed of various elements, it is in most cases impossible to determine, after the examination of an isolated skull, to which population it belongs; all that can be said is that the skull is brachy- or dolicho-cephalic, orthognathous or prognathous, etc. We must have a certain number of skulls (from ten to thirty at least, according to the homogeneity of the population) to be able to discern the constituent elements of this population as far as they are manifested in the cranial characteristics. The average measurements are then deduced from a given number of skulls, by adding the individual measurements and dividing them by the number of skulls examined. But the average of any measurement whatever only gives a very general and somewhat vague idea of the actual dimensions of skulls. To determine it we must co-ordinate and seriate these skulls—that is to say, arrange them, for example, in an ascending order of figures expressing their cephalic index. In this manner we can discover one or several indices around which the skulls are grouped in the largest number. It is thus that we can often discern two or three cranial elements in the same population.[59]

The general shape of the skull is oval, but it can be more or less rounded, completely round (Fig. 11), or more or less elongated like an ellipse, where the longer axis[Pg 57] is almost twice the length of the shorter one (Fig. 10). In anthropology, the numerical description of skull shape is given by what’s called the cephalic index—which is the ratio of the length of the skull (usually measured from the glabella to the most prominent point of the back of the head (Figs. 10 and 13, A B)) to its widest breadth (Fig. 10, C D, Fig. 12, M N). By standardizing the first measurement to 100, we can get the different values for the breadth, which indicates the skull shape; for instance, very round skulls (Fig. 11) have a cephalic index of 85, 90, or even 100 (extreme individual limit), while elongated skulls (Fig. 10) might have an index of 70, 65, or even 58 (extreme individual limit). According to Broca’s terminology, skulls with indices between 77.7 and 80 are called mesaticephalic or mesocephalic; those with indices lower than this are categorized as sub-dolichocephalic (up to 75) or dolichocephalic (above 75, Fig. 10); skulls with indices above 80 are sub-brachycephalic (up to 83.3) or brachycephalic (above 83.3, Fig. 11).[58] Since people or ethnic groups are made up of various elements, it’s usually impossible to determine, just by examining a single skull, which population it belongs to; all that can be concluded is whether the skull is brachy- or dolichocephalic, orthognathous or prognathous, etc. We need a sufficient number of skulls (at least ten to thirty, based on how homogeneous the population is) to identify the components of this population as represented in their skull traits. The average measurements are then calculated from a specific number of skulls by adding the individual measurements and dividing by the number of skulls studied. However, the average of any measurement only provides a very general and somewhat vague idea of the actual dimensions of the skulls. To get a clearer picture, we need to coordinate and serialize these skulls—meaning we should arrange them, for example, in ascending order based on their cephalic index. This way, we can identify one or more indices around which the majority of skulls cluster. Often, we can recognize two or three cranial elements within the same population.[59]

If we apply these methods to the study of the cephalic index, we see that generally the crania of Negroes, Melanesians, Eskimo, Ainus, Berbers, the races of Northern Europe, etc., are dolichocephalic, while those of the Turkish peoples, the Malays, certain Slavs, Tyrolese, etc., are brachycephalic; that the dolichocephalic predominate in Great Britain, while the brachycephalic are in a majority in France, etc. (See p. 75, and Appendix II.)

If we use these methods to study the cephalic index, we find that generally, the skulls of Black people, Melanesians, Eskimos, Ainus, Berbers, and the races of Northern Europe are long-headed, while those of Turkish people, Malays, certain Slavs, Tyroleans, etc., are broad-headed. The long-headed individuals are more common in Great Britain, while the broad-headed are in the majority in France, etc. (See p. 75, and Appendix II.)

The relation of the height to the breadth or to the length of the skull gives likewise an idea of its general form. It is thus that we recognise low skulls (platycephalic), medium (orthocephalic or metriocephalic), or high (hypsicephalic).

The relationship between the height and the width or length of the skull also gives us an idea of its overall shape. This is how we identify low skulls (platycephalic), medium skulls (orthocephalic or metriocephalic), or high skulls (hypsicephalic).

In order more correctly to describe the different peculiarities of the cranium, and to be able to refer the measurements to fixed co-ordinates, it is desirable to place the skull, when being studied, on a horizontal plane. Unfortunately, anthropologists are far from being agreed as to this initial plane. In France, in England, and in many other countries, that adopted is the alveolocondylean plane of Broca (Fig. 13, L K), which passes through the condyles and the alveolar border of the upper jaw; it is nearly parallel to the horizontal plane passing through the visual axes of the two eyes in the living subject; whilst in Germany the plane still in favour is one passing through the inferior border of the orbit and the centre or top of the contour of the auditory meatus[60] (Fig. 13, N M). The skull once conveniently placed in position according to a horizontal plane, the different views of it are the following: seen from above (norma verticalis of Blumenbach, Figs. 10 and 11), from below (norma basilaris), from the side or in profile (norma lateralis, Fig. 13), from the full face (norma facialis, Fig. 12), or from behind (norma occipitalis).

To accurately describe the unique features of the skull and to reference measurements against fixed coordinates, it’s important to position the skull on a horizontal plane during examination. Unfortunately, there isn’t a consensus among anthropologists about what this initial plane should be. In France, England, and many other countries, the adopted plane is the alveolocondylean plane of Broca (Fig. 13, L K), which runs through the condyles and the alveolar border of the upper jaw; it is almost parallel to the horizontal plane that passes through the visual axes of both eyes in a live person. In Germany, however, the preferred plane is one that runs through the lower edge of the orbit and the center or top of the auditory canal[60] (Fig. 13, N M). Once the skull is properly positioned according to a horizontal plane, the different views of it are as follows: from above (norma verticalis of Blumenbach, Figs. 10 and 11), from below (norma basilaris), from the side or profile (norma lateralis, Fig. 13), from the full face (norma facialis, Fig. 12), or from behind (norma occipitalis).

In regard to the face, different measurements express its general form; thus the relation of the bi-zigomatic length (Fig. 12, I G) to the total height of the bony structure of the head (Fig. 12, K L), or to its partial height from the glabella to the alveolar border of the upper jaw-bone (Fig. 12, F H), serves to separate skulls into brachy-or dolicho-facial, or, as they are also called, chamæprosopes and leptoprosopes. Other characters, such as the excessive development of the supraciliary ridges (Fig. 13, A), also give a special physiognomy to the bony structure of the face.

In terms of the face, different measurements reflect its overall shape; for example, the relationship between the bi-zigomatic length (Fig. 12, I G) and the total height of the head's bony structure (Fig. 12, K L), or its partial height from the glabella to the alveolar border of the upper jaw (Fig. 12, F H), allows us to categorize skulls as brachycephalic or dolichocephalic, also known as chamæprosopes and leptoprosopes. Other features, like the prominent development of the supraciliary ridges (Fig. 13, A), also contribute to the unique appearance of the facial bony structure.

Skull of Ancient Egyptian

FIG. 12.—Skull of ancient Egyptian exhumed at Thebes,
with principal craniometrical lines.

FInstagram. 12.—Skull of an ancient Egyptian dug up at Thebes,
with key craniometric lines.

But the parts that deserve particular attention are the orbits and the nasal skeleton. The orbital orifice represents a quadrilateral figure more or less irregular, more or less angular or rounded, the length and breadth of which can[Pg 61] be measured. According to Broca,[61] the breadth is measured from the point called dacrion (Fig. 12, X) (situated at the intersection of the fronto-lachrymal suture and the crista lachrymalis) to the most distant point of the opposite edge of the orbit (Fig. 12, Y); the height (Fig. 12, T Z) is also measured perpendicularly to the preceding line. The relation of this height to the breadth = 100, or the orbital index, expresses in figures the form of the more or less shallow quadrilateral of the orbit. What are called average orbits, or mesosemes, are those whose index varies from 83 (Broca), or from 84 (Flower), to 89; shallow orbits, or microsemes, those which have the index lower than 83 or 84; finally, higher or large orbits, megasemes, those which have their index from 90 and upwards. The annexed table gives the orbital indices of the principal populations of the globe.

But the parts that need special attention are the eye sockets and the nasal structure. The eye socket opening is an irregular quadrilateral shape, which can be more or less angular or rounded, and its length and width can[Pg 61] be measured. According to Broca,[61] the width is measured from a point called the dacrion (Fig. 12, X) (located where the fronto-lacrimal suture meets the lacrimal crest) to the farthest point on the opposite edge of the eye socket (Fig. 12, Y); the height (Fig. 12, T Z) is measured perpendicular to the previous line. The relationship of this height to the width = 100, or the orbital index, numerically represents the shape of the more or less shallow quadrilateral of the eye socket. The so-called average eye sockets, or mesosemes, are those with an index ranging from 83 (Broca) or 84 (Flower) to 89; shallow eye sockets, or microsemes, have an index lower than 83 or 84; finally, higher or larger eye sockets, megasemes, have an index of 90 and above. The attached table shows the orbital indices of the main populations around the world.

Profile View

FIG. 13.—Same skull as Fig. 12, profile view.

FIG. 13.—Same skull as Fig. 12, side view.

TABLE OF ORBITAL INDICES.
(Crania of both Sexes together; series of more than 10 subjects.)

TABLE OF ORBITAL INDICES.
(Crania of both sexes combined; series of more than 10 subjects.)

No. of
Crania.
Ethnic Groups. Orbital
Index.
Observer.
MICROSEMES.
49 New Caledonians 80.6 Broca.
14 Tasmanians 80.8 Flower.
101 Australians 81.5 Fl., Tur., C.E.[62]
22 Kaffirs 83 Broca.
21 Bushmen 83 Turner.
16 Hottentots 83.9 } Broca, Hamy.
53 Spanish Basques of Zaraus 83.6
MESOSEMES (84 89).
23 Papuans of the Northwest (Rubi) 84 C.E.
20 Ruck Islanders (Carolines) 84.1 Virchow.
11 Croats 84.3 Broca.
20 Papuans in general 84.4 Broca.
13 Botocudos 84.7 Rey.
68 Melanesians 85.1 Flower.
132 Ainus 85.2 Koganei.
20 Negroes of Kordofan 85.1 Broca.
84 Western Negroes 85.4 Broca.
96 Papuans of the N. W. (Kordo) 85.8 C.E.
11 Natives of Admiralty Islands 86 Turner.
43 Negroes 86.3 Flower.
80 Auvergnats 86.5 Broca.
11 Vitians (Fiji) 87 Flower.
18 Maori 87 Turner.
208 Various Europeans 87 Flower.
48 Fuegians 87.5 Mantegazza, Hya., Den.
31 Japanese 88 Baelz.
63 Southern Bretons 88.1 Broca.
19 Eskimo 88.2 Broca.
33 English 88.4 Flower.
43 Veddahs 88.5 Sarasin, Fl.
28 Corsicans 88.6 Broca.
26 Kabyles 88.9 Broca.
16 Hindus 89.2 Flower.
11 Bugis of Mangkassar 89.2 C.E.
28 Berbers 89.5 C.E.
28 Arabs 89.5 Ten Kate.
11 Dyaks 89.8 C.E.
19 Javanese 89.5 C.E.
12 Tatars of the Volga 89.5 C.E.
MEGASEMES (90 AND UPWARDS).
69 Kalmuks 90.2 Den., Ivanovs.
26 Indians of N. America 90.8 Broca.
13 Modern Mexicans 90.8 Broca.
43 Javanese 91.1 Broca.
88 Polynesians 91.6 Fl., Broca.
14 Andamanese 91.7 Flower.
127 Am. Indians in gen. 91.7 Broca.
17 Malays 91.9 C.E.
30 Peruvians not deformed 92 Broca.
16 Modern Aztecs 92.1 C.E.

The capacity of the orbital cavity and its depth are also measured, but, as the researches of L. Weiss have demonstrated, there is no correlation between the form of the skull (dolicho- or brachy-cephalic) and this depth. On the other hand, it appears to have some relation with the form of the face; broad faces (chamæprosopes) have deeper orbits than long faces (leptoprosopes).[63]

The size and depth of the eye socket are also measured, but, as L. Weiss's research has shown, there is no link between the shape of the skull (long-headed or round-headed) and this depth. However, it seems to relate to the shape of the face; broad faces (chamæprosopes) have deeper eye sockets than long faces (leptoprosopes).[63]

The skeleton of the nose presents numerous variations according to race. The nasal bones may be more or less inclined, one in relation with another, so as to form either an almost flat plane or a sort of prominent roof; their outline may be straight, concave, or convex; their breadth and their length also vary. The form of these bones, together with the nasal opening which is found below, may be expressed by the figures of the nasal index—that is to say, of the relation between the height of the bony mass (from the root of the nose to the anterior nasal spine) and its breadth (lines V B and E D of Fig. 12). According to the greater or lesser breadth of the nasal bones and of the nasal opening, the skull is called leptorhinian (long-nosed) or platyrhinian (flat-nosed); the intermediate forms bear the name of mesorhinian. The form of the nasal opening appears to be transmitted very tenaciously by heredity (Broca).

The structure of the nose shows a lot of differences based on race. The nasal bones can be angled differently in relation to each other, creating either a nearly flat surface or a prominent arch; their shape can be straight, concave, or convex; and their width and length can also change. The shape of these bones, along with the nasal opening below, can be described using the nasal index, which represents the relationship between the height of the bone structure (from the root of the nose to the front nasal spine) and its width (lines V B and E D of Fig. 12). Depending on whether the nasal bones and opening are wider or narrower, the skull is categorized as leptorhinian (long-nosed) or platyrhinian (flat-nosed); the in-between types are called mesorhinian. The shape of the nasal opening seems to be strongly inherited (Broca).

The following table, in which I have introduced only series of more than ten skulls, gives the distribution of the principal ethnic groups according to their nasal index.

The following table, which includes only series of more than ten skulls, shows the distribution of the main ethnic groups based on their nasal index.

It is easy to see in running the eye over this table, that almost all the populations of the so-called white races are leptorhinians, while all the yellow populations are comprised exclusively in the group of mesorhinians, and Negroes and Bushmen in that of the platyrhinians.

It’s clear from looking at this table that nearly all the populations of the so-called white races are leptorhinians, while all the yellow populations fall exclusively into the mesorhinians group, and the Negroes and Bushmen are part of the platyrhinians.

The Polynesians seem to be leptorhinians, the Melanesians with the Australians show a tendency towards platyrhiny.

The Polynesians appear to be leptorhinians, while the Melanesians and Australians tend to exhibit characteristics of platyrhiny.

NASAL INDEX OF THE CRANIUM.
(Series of more than 10 Skulls of both Sexes together.)

NASAL INDEX OF THE CRANIUM.
(Series of over 10 skulls of both sexes combined.)

Number of
Skulls.
Ethnic Groups. Nasal
Index.
Observer.
LEPTORHINIANS (less than 48).
46 Eskimo 42.2 Broca, Flower
54 Spanish Basques 43.8 Broca
17 Guanches 44.2 Broca
28 Arabs 44.4 C.E.
28 Berbers 46.2 C.E.
32 English 46.0 Flower
83 Auvergnats 46.2 Broca
17 Frisians 46.3 Topinard
122 Parisians 46.7 Broca
12 Tatars of the Volga 47.1 Ten Kate
52 Argentine Araucans 47.1 Ten Kate
127 American Indians in general 47.2 Ten Kate
48 Fuegians 47.5 Mant., Hyad., Den.
15 Botocudos 47.2 Rey., Virch.
18 Maoris 47.5 Turner
88 Polynesians 47.9 Flower, Broca
MESORHINIANS (48 53).
11 Natives of the Admiralty Is. 48.0 Flower
72 Italians of Lombardy 48.3 Flower
28 Sardinians 48.6 Flower
66 Kalmuks 49.0 Denik., Ivanovs.
94 Chinese 49.1 T.K., Br., Fl.
31 Japanese 49.5 T.K., Baelz
16 Hindus 50.0 C.E.
11 Bugis of Mangkassar 50.0 C.E.
21 Annamese 50.1 Topinard
33 Marvars (India) 50.0 Flower
21 Russians (chiefly of Kazan) 50.3 Malief
14 Andamanese 50.6 Flower
126 Ainus 50.9 Koganei
19 Inhab. of Ruck Isl. (Carolines) 51.2 Virchow
29 Permiaks 51.7 Malief
43 Veddahs 51.8 Saras., Flower
17 Malays 51.9 C.E.
11 Dyaks 51.9 Montano
135 New Caledonians 52.3 C.E.
16 Modern Aztecs 52.1 C.E.
PLATYRHINIANS (over 53).
25 Negroes of Fernando Po 53.7 Topinard
11 Negroes of the Sudan, Darfour, etc. 54.2 C.E.
35 Negroes of Senegal 55.1 C.E.
25 Negroes of Upper Guinea 55.2 C.E.
22 Nubians (Bejas) 55.1 Broca
18 Negroes of Kordofan 55.4 Topinard
13 Fijians of Viti-Levu (interior) 56.5 Flower
132 Australians 56.2 Fl., Br., Turner, C.E.
21 Bushmen 58.4 Turner
15 Negroes of Lower Guinea 58.8 C.E.
12 Kafirs 61.7 C.E.

Prognathism, that is to say the degree of projection of the maxillary portion of the face, is a characteristic trait of certain skulls; however, it does not seem to play so important a part in the classification of races as anthropologists had thought twenty or thirty years ago. It presents too many individual varieties to be taken as a distinctive character of race. The degree of prognathism is measured by means of different facial angles, of which that of Cloquet, passing by the forehead, the upper alveolar point (between the two incisors), and the external auditory meatus (Fig. 13, F O K), is one of the best. However, as it expresses the relation of points too far removed from each other, it is better to confine ourselves to the measurement of alveolar prognathism, that is to say, of the sub-nasal projection of the face. This prognathism is measured with the angle determined by the alveolar point, the external auditory meatus, and the nasal spine (Fig. 13, F′ O K).

Prognathism, which refers to how much the upper part of the face sticks out, is a characteristic feature of certain skulls; however, it doesn't seem to be as important for classifying races as anthropologists thought twenty or thirty years ago. There are too many individual variations for it to be seen as a definitive racial trait. The degree of prognathism is assessed using different facial angles, of which Cloquet's angle—measured from the forehead, the upper alveolar point (between the two incisors), and the external auditory meatus (Fig. 13, F O K)—is one of the most effective. However, since it involves points too far apart, it's better to focus on measuring alveolar prognathism, which refers to the sub-nasal projection of the face. This type of prognathism is measured using the angle formed by the alveolar point, the external auditory meatus, and the nasal spine (Fig. 13, F' O K).

Jenny, Australian Woman

FIG. 14.—Jenny, Australian woman of Queensland.
Height, 1 m. 56; cephalic index, 71.2; nasal index, 119.
(Photo. Prince Roland Bonaparte.)

FInstagram. 14.—Jenny, Australian woman from Queensland.
Height, 1 minute 56; cephalic index, 71.2; nasal index, 119.
(Photo. Prince Roland Bonaparte.)

Among numerous other measurements which give indications for certain characters we must cite: the minimum frontal diameter (Fig. 12, S J); the interorbital line; the length and the breadth of the palate, the relation of which constitutes the palatal index, etc. Among the measurements of the curves it is necessary to note the horizontal circumference of the head, the antero-posterior curve with its frontal, parietal, and occipital portions, etc. Besides the facial angles, a great number of others are taken; the more important are the sphenoidal angle and the different occipital angles (of Daubenton, Broca, etc.), which give the inclination of the occipital foramen in relation to a horizontal plane. The measurements of these angles furnish valuable indications on the characters called seriary, to which we have recourse in order to compare man with animals which bear the closest resemblance to him.

Among many other measurements that indicate specific traits, we should mention: the minimum frontal diameter (Fig. 12, SJ); the interorbital line; the length and width of the palate, which together create the palatal index, etc. When measuring the curves, it’s essential to note the horizontal circumference of the head, as well as the antero-posterior curve, which includes its frontal, parietal, and occipital sections, etc. In addition to the facial angles, many other angles are measured; the most significant include the sphenoidal angle and various occipital angles (of Daubenton, Broca, etc.), which show the tilt of the occipital foramen in relation to a horizontal plane. Measurements of these angles provide valuable insights into the traits referred to as seriary, which we use to compare humans with animals that resemble us the most closely.

Jenny, in Profile

FIG. 15.—Same subject as Fig. 14, seen in profile.
Example of nose concave and flattened, of prognathism, and of prominent superciliary arches.
(Photo. Prince Roland Bonaparte.)

FInstagram. 15.—Same subject as Fig. 14, viewed from the side.
An example of a concave and flattened nose, prognathism, and prominent brow ridges.
(Photo. Prince Roland Bonaparte.)

But all these measurements do not suffice to exhaust the data of the morphology of the skull. There still remain a host of descriptive characters: the general form of the skull, pentagonal, oval, elliptical, etc.; the contour of the face more or less angular or rounded, its canine fossa more or less deep, its zygomatic arches, and its molar bones more or less projecting, etc. Certain anomalies in the sutures of the bones, as for example the persistence of the medio-frontal suture, the dispositions of the pterion (point of union of the sutures between the[Pg 66] frontal, the temporal, the sphenoid, and the parietal bones), are only important as seriary characters, but there are others which possess some value in the differentiation of races. The Wormian bones, or points of ossification inserted between the bones of the skull, are of the number. One of these bones found between the parietal bones and the occipital, has[Pg 67] even received the name of the Inca bone (Fig. 23, A), on account of its very frequent occurrence among Peruvian crania (deformed or not). In fact, it is met with in an imperfect state 20 times in 100 and perfect 5.4 times in 100 among Peruvians, while in Negro crania it is found only 6 times in 100 imperfect, and 1.5 perfect; among Europeans it is still more rarely[Pg 68] imperfect, and is hardly ever met with perfect (Anuchin). This peculiarity seems to be a special character of the American race, seeing that among the crania of the Indians of the New World (outside Peruvians) the anomaly in question is found 10 times in 100 imperfect and 1.3 times perfect. Among the Indians of Rio Salado, an affluent of the Gila in Arizona, the frequency of this anomaly is still greater than among Peruvians (5.7 perfect cases against 5.4 in Peru).[64] In the same way, the presence of a suture which divides into two, more or less imperfectly, the malar bone (Fig. 23, B) appears to be a special character of Ainu and Japanese crania; Hilgendorf has even proposed to call the lower portion of the malar bone thus formed os japonicum (Fig. 23, B, a). While the suture is only met with 11 or 12 times in 100 in Mongolian races, and 9 times in 100 in European races according to Ten Kate,[65] it is found from 25 to 40 times in 100 among Japanese according to Doenitz.

But all these measurements don't fully cover the details of the skull's structure. There are still many descriptive characteristics left: the overall shape of the skull, whether it's pentagonal, oval, elliptical, etc.; the shape of the face, which can be more angular or rounded; how deep the canine fossa is; and how much the zygomatic arches and molar bones project. Certain irregularities in the sutures of the bones, like the persistence of the medio-frontal suture and the arrangement of the pterion (where the frontal, temporal, sphenoid, and parietal bones meet), are mainly important as series characters, but others have some significance in distinguishing races. One of these is the presence of Wormian bones, or extra points of ossification found between the skull bones. One of these bones, located between the parietal and occipital bones, has even been named the Inca bone (Fig. 23, A) due to its frequent occurrence in Peruvian skulls (whether deformed or not). In fact, it appears in an imperfect state 20 times out of 100 and in a perfect state 5.4 times out of 100 among Peruvians, while in Black skulls it shows up only 6 times out of 100 imperfectly and 1.5 times perfectly; it's even rarer among Europeans, where imperfect cases are hardly found, and perfect ones are almost never encountered (Anuchin). This characteristic seems to be unique to the American race since, among the skulls of New World Indians (excluding Peruvians), this specific anomaly occurs 10 times out of 100 imperfectly and 1.3 times perfectly. Among the Indians of Rio Salado, a tributary of the Gila River in Arizona, this anomaly is even more common than among Peruvians (5.7 perfect cases compared to 5.4 in Peru).[64] Similarly, the presence of a suture that splits the malar bone into two parts, more or less imperfectly (Fig. 23, B), seems to be a unique feature of Ainu and Japanese skulls; Hilgendorf even suggested naming the lower part of the malar bone formed in this way os japonicum (Fig. 23, B, a). While this suture occurs only 11 or 12 times out of 100 in Mongolian races and 9 times in 100 in European races according to Ten Kate,[65] it is found 25 to 40 times out of 100 among Japanese according to Doenitz.

It is well understood that in the description of crania the alterations of form produced by all kinds of causes are taken into account. (Such, for example, is the considerable asymmetry or plagiocephaly due to a physiological cause, as the hypertrophy of the capacity of the skull, or its atrophy in the pathological cases of hydrocephaly or microcephaly, and so many other ethnic deformations which will come up for treatment in Chapter V., etc.)

It’s well known that when describing skulls, we consider the changes in shape caused by various factors. For example, there’s significant asymmetry or plagiocephaly due to physiological reasons, like the increased size of the skull, or its reduced size in pathological cases of hydrocephaly or microcephaly, along with many other ethnic deformities that will be discussed in Chapter V., etc.

The head of the living subject furnishes more numerous characters than the skull, especially if the face be considered with the play of feature. Sometimes an examination of the face suffices to determine the race of the subject.

The head of a living person provides more distinguishing features than the skull, especially when considering the facial expressions. Sometimes, looking at the face alone is enough to identify the person's race.

The measurements of the head are about fifty in number, but they are not all of equal importance. Very few of them, indeed, are really useful.

The measurements of the head are about fifty in total, but not all of them are equally important. In fact, very few are truly useful.

The chief of the angular measurements is the facial angle; great importance was formerly attached to it when prognathism, or the degree of projection of the maxillary region,[Pg 69] was considered as a character of inferiority. In spite of the numerous instruments invented (double square, Harmand’s instrument, Jacquard’s goniometer, etc.), great precision in these measurements is not attainable. The only angle which can be taken with sufficient exactitude, thanks to the facial medium goniometer of Broca, is Cuvier’s angle, formed by a line running either from the glabella or the point between the eyebrows to the interval between the incisor teeth, and by another line starting from the external auditory meatus towards this interval. This angle enables us to estimate the total prognathism and the alveolar prognathism, but the variations which it presents are too slight (3 to 4 degrees), taking race with race, to constitute a distinctive character. Prognathism of the lips, pushed forward to form the prominence of the “muzzle,” which gives so characteristic an expression to the profile of certain Negroes or Australians (Fig. 15), is not expressed by this measurement, and ordinarily cannot be measured in any way.

The main focus of the angular measurements is the facial angle; it used to be seen as very important when prognathism, or how much the maxillary region sticks out,[Pg 69] was viewed as a sign of inferiority. Despite the many tools created (like the double square, Harmand’s instrument, Jacquard’s goniometer, etc.), achieving great accuracy in these measurements is tough. The only angle that can be measured with adequate precision, thanks to Broca’s facial medium goniometer, is Cuvier’s angle, which is formed by a line going from the glabella or the spot between the eyebrows to the gap between the incisor teeth, and another line starting from the external auditory meatus towards this gap. This angle allows us to assess the total prognathism and the alveolar prognathism, but the differences it shows are too minor (3 to 4 degrees) across different races to be considered a distinguishing characteristic. Prognathism of the lips, which are pushed forward to create the “muzzle” that gives a distinctive look to the profiles of some Black people or Australians (Fig. 15), isn’t captured by this measurement and usually can’t be accurately measured at all.

Among the measurements of the curve of the head the principal are those of the horizontal circumference with its anterior and posterior portions, the limits of which are found at the supra-auricular point, that is to say, in the depression which is found immediately in front of the spot where the helix of the pinna of the ear is inserted. The value of this measurement has also been exaggerated, it being said that men of well-developed minds have the circumference greater than men without intellectual culture. The comparative observations of Broca made on house-surgeons and attendants of hospitals seem to bear out the assertion; but they have not been confirmed, and stature appears to have a decided relation with the size of the head.

Among the measurements of the curve of the head, the main ones are the horizontal circumference with its anterior and posterior portions, which are defined by the supra-auricular point, or the dip right in front of where the helix of the ear is located. The significance of this measurement has been overstated, with claims that individuals with well-developed minds have a larger circumference than those without intellectual development. Broca's comparative studies on house-surgeons and hospital attendants seem to support this claim, but they haven't been substantiated, and height seems to have a clear connection to head size.

Japanese Officer

FIG. 16.—Japanese officer (old style), born at Tokio.
Example of elongated face.
(Phot. Coll. Mus. Nat. Hist., Paris.)

FIG. 16.—Japanese officer (traditional style), born in Tokyo.
Example of an elongated face.
(Phot. Coll. Mus. Nat. Hist., Paris.)

The measurements in a straight line are more numerous and more important than those of angles and curves. Those which give the antero-posterior diameter or maximum length of the head (from the glabella to the most prominent point of the occiput, as on the cranium) and the transverse maximum diameter, are the first to note. We have already seen (p. 57)[Pg 70] that their centesimal relation constitutes what is called the cephalic index. Let us note afterwards the total height of the head (projection on a vertical plane), the maximum breadth of the face (between the zygomatic arches) and the different “lengths” of the face, the relation of which to the breadth constitutes the facial index. The latter is far from expressing the form of the face as well as does the cephalic index the form of the head, on account of its irregularity, and the want of agreement between anthropologists with regard to the “facial lengths.” Nevertheless we distinguish according to these measurements elongated faces or leptoprosopic (Fig. 16),[Pg 71] short faces or chamæprosopic (Fig. 17), and medium faces, meso- or ortho-prosopic (Fig. 14).

The measurements in a straight line are more numerous and more important than those of angles and curves. The ones that indicate the front-to-back diameter or maximum length of the head (from the forehead to the most prominent point at the back of the skull, as seen on the cranium) and the widest transverse diameter are the first to note. We have already seen (p. 57)[Pg 70] that their percentage relationship makes up what is called the cephalic index. Next, we should note the total height of the head (projection on a vertical plane), the maximum width of the face (between the cheekbones) and the various “lengths” of the face, which in relation to the width makes up the facial index. The facial index is not as effective in representing the shape of the face as the cephalic index is for the shape of the head, due to its irregularity and the lack of consensus among anthropologists regarding the “facial lengths.” Nonetheless, we distinguish based on these measurements elongated faces or leptoprosopic (Fig. 16),[Pg 71] short faces or chamæprosopic (Fig. 17), and medium faces, meso- or ortho-prosopic (Fig. 14).

Two Naga Men

FIG. 17.—Two men, Nagas of Manipur.
Examples of large faces with prominent cheek-bones.
(Phot. Miss Godden.)

FInstagram. 17.—Two men, Nagas of Manipur.
Examples of large faces with prominent cheekbones.
(Phot. Miss Godden.)

Other measurements taken are the frontal minimum diameter or minimum breadth of the forehead (between the temporal ridges of the frontal bone, which makes a projection under the skin); the distance between the inner angles or canthus of the eyes is a good measurement, especially if it be compared with the breadth of the nose, taken by just touching with the points of[Pg 72] the callipers the alæ of the nose. Referred to the length of the nose (between the root of the nose and the point of insertion of the septum) reduced to 100 it gives the nasal index, one of the important characters in the classification of races. Among several other measurements may be mentioned the breadth of the mouth between the commissure of the lips, the subject being in repose; the length and the breadth of the ears, etc. All these measurements are taken either with callipers or with sliding compasses, similar to those used by shoemakers or engineers, or with special instruments.[66]

Other measurements taken include the frontal minimum diameter or the smallest width of the forehead (measured between the temporal ridges of the frontal bone, which creates a bump under the skin); the distance between the inner corners or canthus of the eyes is a useful measurement, especially when compared to the width of the nose, which is taken by lightly touching the tips of[Pg 72] the callipers at the sides of the nose. When related to the length of the nose (measured from the root of the nose to the point where the septum attaches) and reduced to 100, this gives the nasal index, a significant characteristic in race classification. Among several other measurements, we can also note the width of the mouth between the corners of the lips when the subject is relaxed; the length and width of the ears, etc. All these measurements are taken using callipers or sliding compasses, similar to those used by shoemakers or engineers, or with specialized instruments.[66]

Measurements taken on the living subject can never be as accurate as those obtained on the cranium; but, on the other hand, they may be much more numerous, and the greater number of observations compensates largely for individual errors due to difficulties of the mode of operation. Further, when measuring heads of living subjects, there is the advantage of knowing sex, approximate age, and exact origin, while in the case of one-half the crania examined, one or more of these particulars may be wanting. All these conditions sufficiently explain why, in these latter days, the attention of anthropologists is directed towards measurements of living subjects, among which those of the head occupy the foremost place.

Measurements taken on living subjects can never be as precise as those taken from the skull; however, they can be much more numerous, and the larger quantity of observations significantly offsets individual errors due to the challenges of the measurement process. Additionally, when measuring the heads of living subjects, you have the advantage of knowing their sex, approximate age, and exact background, while in about half of the skulls examined, one or more of this information might be missing. All these factors clearly explain why, in recent times, anthropologists are focusing more on measurements of living subjects, with head measurements being a top priority.

Do the measurements of the head of the living subject correspond to the measurements of the cranium? Various researches made with the object of elucidating this question leave it still unsettled. It was believed at first, for instance, that the bregma, or point of junction between the coronal and the sagittal sutures in the cranium (Fig. 11, O), corresponded in the head with the most prominent point of the line passing from the supra-auricular point to another perpendicularly to the horizontal plane; but the very careful researches of Broca and Ferré have shown that this point is always in front of the bregma by a quantity which varies according to sex and indi[Pg 73]vidual. The correspondence of the tourbillon of the hair with the lambda, or point of junction on the cranium of the sagittal and occipital sutures (Fig. 11, F), has not either been clearly demonstrated. The principal measurement, the cephalic index, does not appear always to correspond on the cranium and on the head of the living subject. A priori, the living head should have the index a little higher than the cranium, the muscles of the temporal region being thicker than those of the supra-occipital and frontal region. However, experiments made in connection with this subject are contradictory. According to Broca, two units must be subtracted from the index taken on the living subject in order to obtain the index on the cranium; this is also the opinion of Stieda and Houzé and a great number of anthropologists, while Mantegazza and Weisbach advocate the reduction of the index by three units; and Virchow and Topinard do not admit any. In the face of these divergent opinions, it is best to give the indices on the cranium and the living subject separately as they are, and indicate the rate of reduction or augmentation.

Do the measurements of a living person's head match those of the cranium? Various studies aimed at answering this question remain inconclusive. Initially, it was believed that the bregma, or the point where the coronal and sagittal sutures in the cranium meet (Fig. 11, O), aligned with the highest point along the line drawn from the supra-auricular point to another point perpendicular to the horizontal plane. However, detailed research by Broca and Ferré has shown that this point is always in front of the bregma by an amount that varies depending on sex and individual traits. The relationship between the tourbillon of the hair and the lambda, or the junction point of the sagittal and occipital sutures on the cranium (Fig. 11, F), has also not been conclusively proven. The main measurement, the cephalic index, does not always align between the cranium and the head of a living person. A priori, the living head should have a slightly higher index than the cranium since the muscles in the temporal region are thicker than those in the supra-occipital and frontal areas. However, experiments on this topic produce conflicting results. According to Broca, two units should be subtracted from the index measured on a living subject to obtain the cranium index; this view is shared by Stieda, Houzé, and many anthropologists, while Mantegazza and Weisbach suggest reducing the index by three units; Virchow and Topinard do not recommend any adjustments. Given these differing opinions, it is best to present the indices for the cranium and the living subject separately, along with the applicable rates of reduction or increase.

However, in a general way, one may admit, and I admit in this book, the difference of two units between the indices of the cranium and the living subject. In this way the two may be compared by adding these two units to the index of crania and removing them from the index of the living subject. I have given (p. 57) the divisions of the cephalic index of the cranium; those of the living subject are the same with the addition of two units.

However, generally speaking, one can acknowledge, and I acknowledge in this book, the difference of two units between the indices of the skull and the living person. In this way, the two can be compared by adding these two units to the skull index and subtracting them from the index of the living person. I have provided (p. 57) the divisions of the cephalic index of the skull; those of the living person are the same with the addition of two units.

We may now proceed to examine a little more closely the principal measurements and the indices on the living subject by beginning precisely with the cephalic index, which I believe to be, in spite of the recent criticisms of Sergi[67] and Ehrenreich,[68] one of the good characteristics of race, enabling us to make some secondary partitions in the principal parti[Pg 74]tions of the genus Homo, based, as we shall see afterwards (Chapter VIII.), on the colour of the skin and the nature of the hair. Assuredly this index cannot express by itself alone the true form of the head or the cranium, but it supplies very clearly a first indication which gives a much better idea than detailed description, useful, to be sure, but rendering the study almost impossible when it is a question of comparing with one another a great number of different types. On the other hand, this index has such a fixity within the limits of any given race, that it is difficult to conceive how it could be dispensed with. The figures given by different authors when they rest on a sufficient number of subjects agree so much among themselves as to the cephalic index, that it is impossible to deny its fixity. The recent researches of Gonner[69] on one hundred children of Basel, far from weakening the assertion, as it would appear, speak in its favour; made on only the new-born or children one month old, they confirm what was already known, that the cephalic index varies with age, and by no means contradict its fixity. Ordinarily, at birth children appear to be more dolichocephalic than the adults of their race, but from the first month the head grows faster in breadth than in length; thus at the end of the first month, according to Gonner, the head is broadened in 52 children in 100, and remains stationary in 9 per 100. My own researches lead me to believe that the heads of children increase at first in breadth, to arrive afterwards gradually at a definite form, which is fixed about the age of ten, twelve, or fifteen years, according to race.

We can now take a closer look at the main measurements and indices on living subjects, starting with the cephalic index. Despite recent criticisms from Sergi[67] and Ehrenreich,[68] I believe it’s still one of the key characteristics of race, allowing us to make some secondary divisions within the main groupings of the genus Homo, based, as we'll discuss later (Chapter VIII.), on skin color and hair type. Clearly, this index alone doesn't perfectly capture the true shape of the head or skull, but it provides a clear initial indication that's much more informative than a detailed description, which, while useful, makes it nearly impossible to compare a wide variety of different types. Moreover, this index is so stable within a specific race that it's hard to imagine it being unnecessary. The figures reported by various authors, when based on a sufficient number of subjects, agree closely on the cephalic index, making it impossible to deny its stability. Recent research by Gonner[69] involving one hundred children from Basel actually supports this assertion, contrary to what one might think; since it was conducted only on newborns or children one month old, it confirms what was already known—that the cephalic index varies with age, not contradicting its stability. Typically, at birth, children seem to be more dolichocephalic than the adults of their race, but starting from the first month, their heads grow wider faster than they grow longer. By the end of the first month, according to Gonner, 52 out of 100 children's heads are broader, while 9 out of 100 remain the same. Based on my own research, I believe that children's heads initially grow in width and then gradually reach a definitive shape that becomes fixed around the ages of ten, twelve, or fifteen, depending on the race.

If instead of comparing, as Gonner has done, children of one month old with their parents, he had taken children from ten years upwards, he would have arrived at the same results as Spalikowski, who on forty-eight infants at Rouen found forty-one of which the cranial form corresponded with their parents. The researches of O. Ammon, Johansson and[Pg 75] Westermarck, Miss Fawcett and Pearson, as well as my own (yet unpublished), lead to the same result.[70]

If instead of comparing, like Gonner did, one-month-old children with their parents, he had looked at kids aged ten and up, he would have reached the same conclusions as Spalikowski, who found that out of forty-eight infants in Rouen, forty-one had cranial shapes that matched their parents. The research by O. Ammon, Johansson, Westermarck, Miss Fawcett, and Pearson, as well as my own (still unpublished), leads to the same conclusion.[70]

The differences of the cephalic index according to sex are insignificant. According to my personal researches, this difference hardly exceeds on the average 0.7 in the living subject and 1.5 in the cranium; and even this latter figure is exaggerated. It may, in a general way, be admitted that the difference between the cephalic index of men and women hardly exceeds one unit—that is to say, the degree of personal error in the observation. This difference is, in any case, less than the discrepancies between the different series of a single and homogeneous race.

The differences in the cephalic index based on sex are minimal. From my research, this difference barely averages 0.7 in living subjects and 1.5 in the skull, and even that latter number is likely inflated. Generally speaking, we can accept that the difference between the cephalic index of men and women is hardly more than one unit—that is, the level of personal error in the observation. In any case, this difference is less than the variations found within different groups of a single, homogeneous race.

In the table of the cephalic index which appears at the end of this volume (Appendix II.), however, I have given only the figures relating to men. A few series comprising individuals of both sexes appear there as exceptional cases. I have taken care to mark these with a letter S. In this table will be found side by side with indices taken on the living subjects some taken on crania, but no series contains measurements of crania and heads intermingled. The series of ten to twenty subjects or crania in the table appear there exceptionally, for the only series furnishing figures really exact are those comprising more than twenty individuals.

In the table of the cephalic index at the end of this volume (Appendix II.), I have only included the data for men. A few series that include individuals of both sexes are noted as exceptional cases. I've marked these with the letter S. In this table, you'll find indices from living subjects alongside those from skulls, but no series mixes measurements of skulls and heads. The series with ten to twenty subjects or skulls are included only as exceptions because the only series providing truly accurate figures are those with more than twenty individuals.

An inspection of the table shows us that there is a certain regularity in the distribution of the different cranial forms on the surface of the earth.

An examination of the table reveals that there's a noticeable pattern in the distribution of various cranial shapes across the Earth's surface.

Dolichocephaly is almost exclusively located in Melanesia, in Australia, in India, and in Africa. Sub-dolichocephaly, diffused in the two extreme regions, North and South, of Europe, forms in Asia a zone round India (Indo-China, Anterior Asia, China, Japan, etc.), but is met with only sporadically in other parts of the world, especially in America. Mesocephaly[Pg 76] is frequent in Europe in the regions bordering on the sub-dolichocephalic countries, as well as in different parts of Asia and America. Sub-brachycephaly, much diffused among the Mongolians of Asia and the populations of Eastern Europe, is very rare elsewhere. Lastly, brachycephalic and hyper-brachycephalic heads are almost exclusively limited to Western and Central Europe, to some populations of Asia, Turco-Mongols, Irano-Semites, and Thaï-Malays.

Dolichocephaly is primarily found in Melanesia, Australia, India, and Africa. Sub-dolichocephaly is spread across the northern and southern extremes of Europe and forms a zone in Asia around India (Indo-China, Anterior Asia, China, Japan, etc.), but it is only seen occasionally in other parts of the world, especially in America. Mesocephaly[Pg 76] is common in Europe, particularly in regions bordering sub-dolichocephalic countries, as well as in various areas of Asia and America. Sub-brachycephaly is widespread among Mongolians in Asia and populations in Eastern Europe, but it is very rare elsewhere. Finally, brachycephalic and hyper-brachycephalic heads are mostly found in Western and Central Europe, among certain populations in Asia, Turco-Mongols, Irano-Semites, and Thai-Malays.

Has the form of the head, so far as the cephalic index can express it, an influence on the volume of the brain, and consequently on its weight, and even perhaps on the mentality? This question is subordinate to another, namely: To what point is the weight of the brain the expression of the psychical value of this organ? We shall see further, on p. 101, that the weight can only be considered as a very rough approximation for the solution of psychological questions. But even in recognising in the weight of the brain the exaggerated importance that too long has been attributed to it, it may be said that it is not in relation with the conformation of the skull. The only investigation made into this matter—that of Calori—restricted to the figures of adults (from 20 to 60 years) by Topinard,[71] shows us that among Italian men the brachycephalic have on an average 27 grammes of brain more than the dolichocephalic, while among Italian women it is the dolichocephalic who have the better of the brachycephalic by 21 grammes. The differences in the two shapes being so very trifling, one may consider one’s self equally intelligent whether dolichocephalic or brachycephalic.

Does the shape of the head, as indicated by the cephalic index, affect brain volume and weight, and maybe even mentality? This question is tied to another: How much does brain weight reflect the mental value of this organ? We'll see later, on p. 101, that weight can only serve as a rough estimate in psychological discussions. Even acknowledging that brain weight has been given too much importance for a long time, it's clear that it doesn’t directly relate to skull shape. The only study on this, by Calori, which looked at adults (ages 20 to 60) as noted by Topinard,[71] shows that among Italian men, brachycephalic individuals have, on average, 27 grams more brain weight than dolichocephalic individuals, while among Italian women, dolichocephalic individuals have 21 grams more than brachycephalic individuals. The differences in head shape are so small that one can consider oneself equally intelligent regardless of being dolichocephalic or brachycephalic.

Next to the form of the head, that of the face is of great importance in recognising races. It may be more or less long or broad, oval (Fig. 109), ellipsoidal (Fig. 136), or round (Figs. 119, 164, and 169), with soft contours or very angular, and then it may be found as an elongated rectangle (Fig. 121) or a square (Fig. 124); it may approximate also to the pentagonal form (Fig. 17), etc.

Next to the shape of the head, the shape of the face is very important in identifying different races. It can be long or wide, oval (Fig. 109), elliptical (Fig. 136), or round (Figs. 119, 164, and 169), with smooth curves or sharp angles. It can also appear as an elongated rectangle (Fig. 121) or a square (Fig. 124); it can even resemble a pentagonal shape (Fig. 17), etc.

The forehead may be broad or narrow, low or high, retreating[Pg 77] (oblique, Fig. 21) or straight (Figs. 24 and 90), it may present a medium protuberance, as for instance, among many Negro tribes (Fig. 140), etc. The superciliary arches may be absent (Mongolian races) or very prominent, overhanging the eyes (Australians, Fig. 15; Veddahs, Fig. 5).

The forehead can be broad or narrow, low or high, receding[Pg 77] (oblique, Fig. 21) or straight (Figs. 24 and 90). It can show a medium bump, as seen among various African tribes (Fig. 140), etc. The superciliary arches might be missing (as in some Mongolian groups) or very pronounced, jutting over the eyes (Australians, Fig. 15; Veddahs, Fig. 5).

The cheek-bones may be little developed (Europeans) or very prominent (Mongolians, Figs. 17 and 20; Bushmen, Fig. 24, etc.), but cheek-bones projecting forward must be distinguished from those developed laterally. The chin may be pointed, rounded, square, projecting, retreating (Fig. 15), but these variations are of little importance, and may be found in conjunction with the most diverse forms of the face, while giving to it its own character. The posterior angles of the lower jaw may be more or less wide, and thus help to produce the angular contour of the face; quadrangular in the case of the square chin (Fig. 121), or with pentagonal contour in the case of the pointed chin (Fig. 118).

The cheekbones can be underdeveloped (Europeans) or very prominent (Mongolians, Figs. 17 and 20; Bushmen, Fig. 24, etc.), but it's important to differentiate between cheekbones that stick out forward and those that are more developed sideways. The chin can be pointed, rounded, square, projecting, or recessed (Fig. 15), but these differences don't really matter much. They can appear alongside various face shapes, giving each face its unique character. The back angles of the lower jaw can be wider or narrower, contributing to the angular shape of the face; they can be quadrangular if the chin is square (Fig. 121) or pentagonal if the chin is pointed (Fig. 118).

The eyes furnish also some differences of form. We distinguish the ordinary eye, as in our countries, and the oblique or narrowed Mongolian eye. The latter presented in its most perfect form is characterised as follows. It is placed obliquely, so that its external angle is higher than its inner angle (Fig. 121). This disposition is due to the too high attachment of the external palpebral ligament to the skull, as Regalia has shown.[72] Its palpebral aperture is much narrower than in the ordinary eye, and instead of having the form of an almond, it has rather that of a scalene triangle (Figs. 18 and 118) or of a little fish whose head corresponds to the inner angle (Fig. 119). But these peculiarities are not the most important, and may be met with, though rarely, in ordinary eyes. The essential characters of the Mongolian eye consist, as Metchnikof[73] has shown, in a puffiness of the upper eyelid, which turns down at the inner angle of the narrowed eye, and, instead of being free, as in the ordinary eye, is folded towards[Pg 78] the eyeball, forming a fixed fold in front of the movable ciliary edge; this last becomes invisible and the eyelashes are scarcely seen. Moreover, towards the inner angle of the eye, the eyelid forms a fold covering more or less the caruncula, and sometimes extending more or less far below (Fig. 18). These peculiarities, which can be met with quite often among the children of all races as a transitory characteristic, may be explained up to a certain point by the very small development of the pilous system in general in people among whom they persist. For among Europeans, for instance, the inversion of the eyelid (entropion) may become a cause of disease (trichiasis) precisely on account of the growth of the eyelashes.[74]

The eyes also show some differences in shape. We identify the typical eye, as found in our regions, and the oblique or narrow Mongolian eye. The latter, in its most refined form, is characterized as follows. It is positioned at an angle, so its outer corner is higher than its inner corner (Fig. 121). This arrangement results from the high attachment of the outer eyelid ligament to the skull, as Regalia has demonstrated.[72] Its eyelid opening is much narrower than in a typical eye, and instead of resembling an almond, it looks more like a scalene triangle (Figs. 18 and 118) or a small fish whose head corresponds to the inner corner (Fig. 119). However, these characteristics are not the most significant and may occasionally appear, although rarely, in typical eyes. The key traits of the Mongolian eye, as Metchnikof[73] has indicated, include puffiness of the upper eyelid, which droops at the inner corner of the narrowed eye, and instead of being free like in a typical eye, it folds toward[Pg 78] the eyeball, creating a permanent fold in front of the movable eyelashes; the eyelashes become less visible, and the eyelid creates a fold that partially covers the caruncle and can extend downwards to varying degrees (Fig. 18). These features, which are quite common among children of all ethnicities as a temporary trait, can be partially explained by the minimal development of the hair system in general among those who show these traits. For example, in Europeans, eyelid inversion (entropion) can lead to disease (trichiasis) specifically because of eyelash growth.[74]

Eye of Young Kalmuk Girl

FIG. 18.—Eye of a young Kalmuk girl of Astrakhan.
Example of Mongoloid eye
(from nature).

FIG. 18.—Eye of a young Kalmuk girl from Astrakhan.
Example of Mongoloid eye
(from nature).

Sometimes this puffiness only extends to the outer part of the eyelid; we have thus a variety of the Mongolian eye, with a palpebral triangular opening, very frequent among the eastern Finns (Fig. 106) and the Turco-Tatar populations.

Sometimes, this swelling only occurs on the outer part of the eyelid; we see a variation of the Mongolian eye here, with a triangular palpebral opening, which is quite common among the eastern Finns (Fig. 106) and the Turco-Tatar populations.

Welsh Type, Montgomeryshire

FIG. 19.—Welsh type of Montgomeryshire.
Eyes and hair dark.
(Photo. and particulars, Beddoe.)

FInstagram. 19.—Welsh type of Montgomeryshire.
Dark eyes and hair.
(Photo. and details, Beddoe.)

The nose, by the variety and the fixity of its forms, presents one of the best characters for distinguishing races. We can express by means of the nasal index of Broca its width (measured by just touching the alæ of the nose) in relation to its length (from the root to the sub-nasal spine) supposed = 100. This index varies in the proportion of one to three[Pg 79] (from 40 to 120), according to race. Among the platyrhinians, the breadth of the nose exceeds 85 (Fig. 14); among the leptorhinians, this breadth is less than 70 (Fig. 16); lastly, among the mesorhinians, it oscillates between 70 and 85, according to the nomenclature of R. Collignon. [75] I give in Appendix III. a table of the nasal indices of the principal populations; I have only introduced into it series of[Pg 80] more than ten individuals, whose measurements have been taken according to the Broca-Collignon method, explained above.[76]

The nose, with its diverse shapes and consistent features, serves as one of the best indicators for identifying different races. We can express its width (measured by just touching the sides of the nose) relative to its length (from the bridge to the area just above the upper lip), which is set at a baseline of 100. This ratio varies significantly, ranging from one to three[Pg 79] (from 40 to 120), depending on the race. For platyrhinians, the width of the nose is over 85 (Fig. 14); for leptorhinians, it is below 70 (Fig. 16); lastly, for mesorhinians, it ranges between 70 and 85, according to R. Collignon’s classification. [75] I present in Appendix III a table of the nasal indices for the main populations; I have only included groups of[Pg 80] more than ten individuals, whose measurements were taken using the Broca-Collignon method described earlier. [76]

Besides the general form of the nose given by the nasal index, there remain a host of descriptive characters which may be observed in this organ. It may be more or less flattened (examples: Negroes, Melanesians, Mongolians), or more or less prominent (Europeans, Jews, Arabs). Its profile may be: (1) straight and sometimes sinuous (examples: Turco-Tatars, Europeans, Fig. 19); (2) concave (certain Finns, Bushmen, Lapps, Australians, Fig. 15); (3) convex and sometimes arched (American Indians, Semites, Fig. 21). Each of these forms may be in combination with a fine, thick, or medium tip, and with a plane of the nostrils directed upwards, downwards, or horizontally. A. Bertillon[77] admits at least fifteen varieties of the forms of the nose. In the majority of cases concave noses have the extremity thick, and the plane of the nostrils directed upward (Figs. 9, 14, and 15); convex noses, on the contrary, have most frequently the tip fine, and the plane of the nostrils directed downward (Figs. 21, 102, 103, and 134). But there are also convex noses with very thick tips, for instance, among the Jews and the Iranians of the Assyroid type (Fig. 22), or again, among the Papuans and the Melanesians (Fig. 53), as well as concave noses with fine tips, for instance, among certain European races (Figs. 97, 104, and 105). Broad noses are most frequently flattened (Figs. 14, 15, and 24), but the flattening may also extend to narrow noses, as for example among the Mongols (Fig. 20). The sunken, very depressed root of the nose is almost always associated with a considerable prominence on the supraciliary[Pg 81] arches: examples, Australians, Fuegians, etc. (Figs. 14, 15, and 48).

Besides the general shape of the nose indicated by the nasal index, there are many descriptive features that can be seen in this organ. It can be more or less flattened (examples: Black people, Melanesians, Mongolians) or more or less prominent (Europeans, Jews, Arabs). Its profile can be: (1) straight and sometimes wavy (examples: Turco-Tatars, Europeans, Fig. 19); (2) concave (some Finns, Bushmen, Lapps, Australians, Fig. 15); (3) convex and sometimes arched (American Indians, Semites, Fig. 21). Each of these shapes can be combined with a fine, thick, or medium tip, and with the nostrils facing upwards, downwards, or horizontally. A. Bertillon[77] recognizes at least fifteen varieties of nose shapes. In most cases, concave noses have thick tips, and the nostrils face upward (Figs. 9, 14, and 15); convex noses, on the other hand, tend to have fine tips, and the nostrils face downward (Figs. 21, 102, 103, and 134). However, there are also convex noses with very thick tips, such as among Jews and Assyroid-type Iranians (Fig. 22), or among Papuans and Melanesians (Fig. 53), as well as concave noses with fine tips, seen in certain European races (Figs. 97, 104, and 105). Broad noses are most often flattened (Figs. 14, 15, and 24), but flattening can also occur in narrow noses, as seen in Mongols (Fig. 20). The sunken, deeply depressed nose root is almost always linked to significant prominence on the eyebrow arches: examples include Australians, Fuegians, etc. (Figs. 14, 15, and 48).

Kalmuk of Astrakhan

FIG. 20.—Kalmuk of Astrakhan.
Example of convex and flattened nose.
(Phot. S. Sommier.)

FIG. 20.—Kalmuk of Astrakhan.
Example of a convex and flat nose.
(Phot. S. Sommier.)

In a general way, as may be seen from the table, the leptorhinians, who have for the most part the convex and straight noses, with fine, straight, or turned-down tips, are met with almost exclusively among Europeans, Eurasians, Armenians,[Pg 82] Caucasians, and Eurafricans (Arabo-Berbers), as well as among the inhabitants of anterior Asia. The mesorhinians, among whom the form of the profile of the nose varies much, include different populations of India, some American, Turco-Tatar, and Mongol peoples. And lastly, the platyrhinians, having most frequently the profile convex and the tip turned up, comprise the whole of the black populations of Africa, Oceania, and India.

In general, as shown in the table, the leptorhinians, who mostly have convex and straight noses with fine, straight, or upturned tips, are found almost exclusively among Europeans, Eurasians, Armenians,[Pg 82] Caucasians, and Eurafricans (Arabo-Berbers), as well as among the people of East Asia. The mesorhinians, whose nose profiles vary widely, include different populations from India, some from the Americas, as well as Turco-Tatar and Mongol groups. Lastly, the platyrhinians, who often have a convex profile and an upturned tip, include the entire black populations of Africa, Oceania, and India.

Jew of Algiers

FIG. 21.—Jew of Algiers.
Example of convex and prominent nose.
(Phot. Coll. Mus. Hist. Nat., Paris.)

FIG. 21.—Jew of Algiers.
An example of a convex and prominent nose.
(Phot. Coll. Mus. Hist. Nat., Paris.)

At birth and during early infancy the nose is most frequently concave, with the tip turned up (Fig. 130); it only becomes straight or convex in the adult; in old age it has a tendency[Pg 83] to become convex with the tip turned down (Bertillon, Hoyer). In the dead body it always takes the arched form. According to Broca and Houzé, the nasal index has a tendency to get lower—that is to say, the nose becomes relatively thinner as the individual advances in age; according to Hoyer,[78] the contrary takes place.

At birth and during early infancy, the nose is usually concave with the tip turned up (Fig. 130); it only becomes straight or convex in adulthood. In older age, it tends to become convex with the tip turned down (Bertillon, Hoyer). In a corpse, it always takes on an arched shape. According to Broca and Houzé, the nasal index tends to decrease—meaning the nose becomes relatively thinner as a person gets older; however, according to Hoyer,[78] the opposite occurs.

Jew of Algiers

FIG. 22.—Persian Hadjemi.
Example of Assyroid nose.
(Author’s Phot. Coll.)

FIG. 22.—Persian Hadjemi.
Example of Assyroid nose.
(Author’s Phot. Coll.)

The ears present few characteristic traits for distinguishing races,[79] but the same cannot be said of the lips. They are thin in the so-called white races and among Mongols; very thick and protruding among the Negroes; somewhat thick among Malays, Melanesians, etc. Their form contributes much towards hiding or accentuating dental or alveolar prognathism.

The ears have few distinct features that help identify different races,[79] but that’s not true for the lips. They are thin in what are considered white races and among Mongols; very thick and protruding in Black individuals; and somewhat thick among Malays, Melanesians, and others. The shape of the lips plays a significant role in either concealing or emphasizing dental or jaw protrusion.

Skeleton of the Trunk and Limbs.—The parts of the skeleton other than the head furnish but few materials for characterising[Pg 84] races. We have already seen (p. 14) that the differences of curvature in the vertebral column according to race may be explained by the mode of life. As to the other peculiarities of the spine,—spinous processes split in the cervical vertebræ,[80] narrow sacrum, etc.,—all that can be said about them is that they are more frequent among Negroes, and perhaps among Melanesians, than among Whites.

Skeleton of the Trunk and Limbs.—The parts of the skeleton aside from the head provide limited information for identifying[Pg 84] different races. We have already noted (p. 14) that variations in the curvature of the vertebral column related to race can be attributed to lifestyle. Regarding other features of the spine—such as split spinous processes in the cervical vertebrae,[80] the narrow sacrum, etc.—it's only worth mentioning that these are more commonly found in Black individuals and possibly in Melanesians than in White individuals.

The pelvis has more importance on account of its function from the obstetrical point of view, and of its influence on the general form of the body. Unfortunately this part of the skeleton has only been studied in very inadequate series among a dozen populations. Subjoined is given:—1st, the table of pelvic index—that is to say, the centesimal relation between the maximum breadth of the pelvis (between the iliac crests) and its height (from the top of the iliac crest to the lowest point of the ischion), taking for our unit sometimes the first of these measurements following Turner, sometimes the second following Broca; 2nd, the table of the index of the inlet (pelvic or brim index of English authors)—that is to say, the relation of the antero-posterior diameter of this aperture (from the middle of the promontory of the sacrum to the pubic symphysis) to its maximum transverse diameter, which, let us suppose, = 100.[81] It will be remarked that the tables, formed of series of five subjects at least, are given in separate parts for men and for women, as the sexual differences are very appreciable in the pelvis of all races. In a general way the pelvis is broader and less high, its slope more pronounced, in woman than in man. The iliac fossa are wider in the former than in the latter; the superior inlet or brim is elliptical or reniform in woman, in the form[Pg 85] of a playing-card heart in man, etc. But, as may be seen by our table, if these differences are very appreciable in certain races, notably among Whites and Negroes, they become less and less among Melanesians, among whom the pelves of the two sexes approximate nearly to the masculine type.

The pelvis is significant due to its role in childbirth and its impact on overall body shape. Unfortunately, this part of the skeleton has only been studied in a limited number of groups across about a dozen populations. Below is provided: 1st, the table of pelvic index, which represents the percentage ratio between the pelvis's maximum width (between the iliac crests) and its height (from the top of the iliac crest to the lowest point of the ischion), using either the first or second measurement as the unit, depending on whether we follow Turner or Broca; 2nd, the table of the inlet index (pelvic or brim index according to English authors), which shows the relation of the antero-posterior diameter of this opening (from the center of the sacral promontory to the pubic symphysis) to its maximum transverse diameter, which we can assume is 100.[81] It should be noted that these tables, consisting of groups of at least five individuals, are presented separately for men and women, as the sexual differences in the pelvis are noticeable across all races. Generally, the female pelvis is wider, shorter, and has a steeper slope compared to the male pelvis. The iliac fossae are broader in women than in men; the superior inlet or brim is elliptical or kidney-shaped in women and resembles a playing-card heart shape in men, etc. However, as shown in our table, while these differences are quite pronounced in certain races, especially among Whites and Blacks, they become less significant among Melanesians, where the pelvises of both sexes closely resemble the male type.

Has the form of the pelvis, and especially that of the inlet, any relation to the form of the head of the fœtus and of the child? Exact data for solving this question are wanting. However, comparing from our tables the index of the superior inlet and that of the cephalic index, it may be observed that, in a general way, pelves with a large aperture are met with in brachycephalic races, and pelves with a narrow aperture in dolichocephalic races. But there are numerous exceptions: I note at least four (English, Russian, Swedish mesocephal and Malay women) in the meagre list of 12 series of women that, with much difficulty, I have been able to draw up.

Does the shape of the pelvis, especially the inlet, relate to the shape of the fetus's head and the child's head? We lack precise data to answer this question. However, by comparing our tables of the pelvic inlet index and the cephalic index, we can generally observe that wider pelvic openings are found in brachycephalic races, while narrower openings are seen in dolichocephalic races. Still, there are many exceptions: I can point out at least four (English, Russian, Swedish mesocephalic, and Malay women) from the limited list of 12 groups of women that I have managed to compile with great difficulty.

The form of the shoulder-blade varies little with race. The scapular index—that is to say, the centesimal relation between the breadth of the shoulder-blade and its length (measured on the vertebral edge and taken as the unit of comparison)—oscillates between 64.9 (Australians) and 70.2 (Andamanese). In a list of 14 series of from 10 to 462 shoulder-blades that I have drawn up from the works of Broca, Livon, Turner, Topinard, Garson, Martin, Hyades, Sarasin, Hamy, Koganei, and my own measurements, the populations are arranged as follows: index from 64.9 to 66.6, Australians, Europeans, Fuegians, Bushmen, Ainus, Peruvians, Polynesians; indices from 67.2 to 70.2, Japanese, Veddahs, Hindu-Sikhs, Malays, Negroes, Melanesians, Andamanese. This classification suffices to show that the greater or less breadth of the shoulder-blade has almost no value as a seriate character or as a character of race. It is the same with the sub-spinal index, which it has been proposed to add to the foregoing in order to judge of the form of the shoulder-blade.[82]

The shape of the shoulder blade doesn't vary much between races. The scapular index—which is the percentage relationship between the width of the shoulder blade and its length (measured along the vertebral edge and used as the reference point)—ranges from 64.9 (Australians) to 70.2 (Andamanese). In a list of 14 series containing between 10 and 462 shoulder blades that I've compiled from the works of Broca, Livon, Turner, Topinard, Garson, Martin, Hyades, Sarasin, Hamy, Koganei, and my own measurements, the populations are categorized as follows: index from 64.9 to 66.6 includes Australians, Europeans, Fuegians, Bushmen, Ainus, Peruvians, and Polynesians; indices from 67.2 to 70.2 include Japanese, Veddahs, Hindu-Sikhs, Malays, Negroes, Melanesians, and Andamanese. This classification shows that the width of the shoulder blade has very little significance as a distinguishing feature or racial characteristic. The same goes for the sub-spinal index, which has been suggested as an addition to evaluate the shape of the shoulder blade.[82]

MEN.
Number of
Pelves.
Ethnic Groups. Index. Observer.
1a. INDEX OF HEIGHT (TURNER).[83]
7 Fuegians 77 Garson, Martin.
7 Australians 77 Garson, Turn., Vern.
46 Europeans 79 Verneau, Turner.
1b. PELVIC INDEX OR INDEX OF WIDTH-HEIGHT (BROCA).
17 Negroes in general 121.3 Garson, Verneau.
11 Melanesians 122.7 Verneau.
46 Europeans 126.6 Garson, Verneau.
5 Fuegians 129.8 Hyades, Deniker.
2. INDEX OF THE SUPERIOR INLET.
63 Europeans { Princ. French 80 Verneau, Flower.
8  „  Italians 82 Marri.
17 Fuegians 85.1 Deniker, Hyades, Martin, Garson.
12 New Caledonians 91 Verneau.
38 Negroes 92.3 Turner, Henning, Verneau, Vrolik.
24 Australians 96.6 Flower, Turner, Vern., Ecker, etc.
14 Andamanese 98.7 Turner, Fritsch.
5 Bushmen 99.5 Gar., Turn., Flow.
WOMEN.
Number of
Pelves.
Ethnic Groups. Index. Observer.
1a. INDEX OF HEIGHT (TURNER).
28 Europeans 74.3 Garson, Verneau.
7 Australians 76.6 Gars., Turn., Vern.
8 Andamanese 76 Gars., Turn.
1b. PELVIC INDEX OR INDEX OF WIDTH-HEIGHT (BROCA).
13 Andamanese 125.5 Garson.
10 Melanesians 129 Garson, Verneau.
5 Australians 130.4 Garson, Verneau.
10 Negresses 134.2 Garson, Verneau.
28 Europeans 134.9 Garson, Verneau.
2. INDEX OF THE SUPERIOR INLET.
33 Europeans { Princ. Engl. 77.6 Garson.
49  „  French 79 Verneau.
14 Japanese 82.8 Dönitz, Werner.
5 Hawaiians 83 Turner.
13 Fuegians 83 Deniker, Hyades, Sergi, Martin.
50 Russians 84.8 Filatof.
9 Italians 86.7 Marri.
32 Negresses 88.4 Turner, Verneau.
8 Australians 88.5 Turn., Vern., Garson.
8 Bushmen 91.6 Muller, Hux., Ver., Fl.
16 Andamanese 91.7 Henning.
20 Malays 94.8 Garson, Flow., Turn.

As to the skeleton of the limbs, here is a summary of what can be said about it from the point of view which specially concerns us now. In the thoracic limb the humerus presents an interesting peculiarity: the perforations of the olecranon cavity (which receives the extremity of the ulna) are very frequent in prehistoric bones in Europe (10 to 27 times in 100), as well as in America (31 times).[84]

As for the skeleton of the limbs, here’s a summary of what we can say about it from our current perspective. In the thoracic limb, the humerus has an interesting feature: the holes in the olecranon cavity (which holds the end of the ulna) are quite common in prehistoric bones in Europe (10 to 27 times in 100) and in America (31 times).[84]

This perforation is met with more often among men than women, perhaps because it is more especially connected with the extent and frequent repetition of the movements of flexion and extension. Here is its growing frequency in the races from a list which I have drawn up with series varying from 20 to 249 humeri: white population of the United States (3.8 times in a hundred), French, Fuegians, Ainus, Basques, Melanesians, Japanese, Negroes, Polynesians, Mongolians, and American Indians (36.2 times in a hundred). The torsion of the humerus—that is to say, the degree of rotation of the lower part of this bone in relation to its upper part, is a character of a certain seriate value; but it is of no use in the differentiation of races. Besides, the degree of torsion varies too much in the same race: it is greater in woman than in man, in short than in long humeri (Manouvrier, Martin, etc.). This torsion is measured by the angle of torsion, which is taken either according to Broca’s method or Gegenbaur’s. This is how the different peoples are arranged according to the decreasing figures of this angle (series of 10 humeri): according to Broca’s system:—Melanesians (angle of 141°), Guanches, Arabs or at least Kabyles, Polynesians, Negroes, Peruvians, Californians, Europeans, French (164°); according to Gegenbaur’s system:—Ainus (149.5°), Fuegians, Veddahs, Japanese, Swiss, Germans[Pg 88] (168°). Until further discoveries are made, a single fact becomes prominent from the examination of this character—that is, that the torsion appears to be greater in white races than in black and yellow. In the ulna Collignon has noted a special incurvation in certain prehistoric bones.

This perforation occurs more often in men than in women, possibly because it's especially linked to the extent and frequency of flexion and extension movements. Here’s its increasing frequency in different races based on a list I've compiled with series ranging from 20 to 249 humeri: white population of the United States (3.8 times in a hundred), French, Fuegians, Ainus, Basques, Melanesians, Japanese, Blacks, Polynesians, Mongolians, and American Indians (36.2 times in a hundred). The torsion of the humerus—referring to the degree of rotation of the lower part of this bone compared to its upper part—is a characteristic of certain serial value; however, it doesn't help in differentiating races. Additionally, the degree of torsion varies too much within the same race: it’s greater in women than in men, shorter humeri show more torsion than longer ones (Manouvrier, Martin, etc.). This torsion is measured by the angle of torsion, which can be measured using either Broca’s method or Gegenbaur’s. Here’s how different populations are organized according to the decreasing figures of this angle (series of 10 humeri): according to Broca’s system:—Melanesians (angle of 141°), Guanches, Arabs or at least Kabyles, Polynesians, Blacks, Peruvians, Californians, Europeans, French (164°); according to Gegenbaur’s system:—Ainus (149.5°), Fuegians, Veddahs, Japanese, Swiss, Germans[Pg 88] (168°). Until more discoveries are made, one fact stands out from the examination of this characteristic—that is, torsion seems to be greater in white races than in black and yellow. In the ulna, Collignon has noted a specific curvature in certain prehistoric bones.

Skull, Malar Bone, Femur

FIG. 23.—A, Skull with Inca Bone, b;
B, Malar Bone divided in two (a, os Japonicum);
C, superior part of femur with third trochanter (3), and the hypo-trochanteric fossa (x);
1 and 2, normal trochanters.

FIG. 23.—A, Skull with Inca Bone, b;
B, Malar Bone split in two (a, os Japonicum);
C, upper part of femur with third trochanter (3), and the hypo-trochanteric fossa (x);
1 and 2, normal trochanters.

In the femur one peculiarity has especially attracted the attention of anthropologists in recent times; it is the more or less frequent presence of the third trochanter (Fig. 23, C 3), or tuberosity situated between the great (ibid., 1) and the lesser (ibid., 2) trochanter on the offshoot from the linea aspera which[Pg 89] furnishes a point of attachment to the lower part of the gluteus maximus. This projection, pointed out and studied for the first time by Houzé,[85] appears in infancy as a special centre of ossification analogous to those of the other diaphyses (Török, Deniker, Dixon), and so does not seem to depend on the greater or less development of the gluteus maximus (Bertaux).[86] The third trochanter is almost always accompanied by a hypotrochanteric fossa (Fig. 23, C).

In the femur, one unique feature has particularly caught the attention of anthropologists lately; it's the varying presence of the third trochanter (Fig. 23, C 3), or a tuberosity located between the greater (ibid., 1) and lesser (ibid., 2) trochanters on the branch from the linea aspera, which[Pg 89] serves as an attachment point for the lower part of the gluteus maximus. This projection, first identified and studied by Houzé,[85] appears in infancy as a distinct center of ossification similar to those of the other diaphyses (Török, Deniker, Dixon), and it does not seem to rely on the greater or lesser development of the gluteus maximus (Bertaux).[86] The third trochanter is almost always accompanied by a hypotrochanteric fossa (Fig. 23, C).

Here is the frequency with which the third trochanter occurs according to a list which I have compiled:—

Here is how often the third trochanter appears according to a list I put together:—

Number
of
Femurs.
Populations. Frequency
per 100
of the 3rd
trochanter.
Observers.
42 Belgians and French of the
Reindeer Period
13 Houzé
28 Negroes 21 Houzé, Costa
68 Ainus 26.5 } Koganei
73 Japanese 28.8
67 Inhabitants of Brussels 30.2 Houzé
102 Italians 30.4 Costa
54 Hungarians 36.1 Török
110 Belgians and French of the
Polished Stone Period
38 Houzé
76 Fuegians 64.3 Hyad., Denik.,
Martin, Costa

Two points will be observed in this table, the rarity of the third trochanter among Negroes, and its excessive frequency among the Fuegians. The women of the latter have also the hypochanteric fossa 80 times in a 100 (out of 76 femurs examined); it almost forms then, like the third trochanter, a character of race.

Two points will be noted in this table: the rarity of the third trochanter among Black individuals and its high frequency among the Fuegians. The women from the latter group exhibit the hypochanteric fossa 80 times out of 100 (from 76 femurs examined); it essentially acts as a racial characteristic, similar to the third trochanter.

In the tibia attention has been called to platycnemia—that is to say, the transversal flattening in the upper third of the diaphysis of the bone, so that its posterior side becomes transformed into a border. It has been supposed that this form is a reversion towards the simian type, but Manouvrier[87] has shown that platycnemia never attains in the anthropoid apes the degree which it presents in the human race, where it is due especially to the development of the tibialis posticus muscle which plays a great part in the maintenance of the upright position, and in the movements of walking and running. The degree of platycnemia may thus vary according to the more or less sedentary or wandering habits of the different populations.

In the tibia, attention has been drawn to platycnemia—which refers to the horizontal flattening in the upper third of the bone’s shaft, causing its back side to turn into a ridge. It was believed that this shape is a throwback to the ape-like type, but Manouvrier[87] demonstrated that platycnemia never reaches the level found in anthropoid apes as it does in humans. In humans, it is mainly due to the development of the tibialis posticus muscle, which plays a significant role in keeping an upright posture and in walking and running. The extent of platycnemia can therefore vary based on how sedentary or nomadic different populations are.

The retroversion of the head of the tibia—that is to say, the slope of the articular surface of it behind—pointed out and described for the first time by Collignon in prehistoric tibias, is also not a simian character. According to Manouvrier,[88] it is often met with among Parisians in a degree superior to that exhibited by anthropoid apes. This retroversion, generally associated with platycnemia, is connected with the half-bending attitude of the lower limb in the manner of walking which is called the bending gait, common among peasants, and especially mountaineers. The retroversion is more marked in the tibia of the new-born child than in that of the adult, and this appears to have a connection with the permanent bending of the knee during intra-uterine life.

The backward tilt of the head of the tibia—which refers to the angle of the joint surface at the back—was first pointed out and described by Collignon in prehistoric tibias, and it isn't a monkey trait. According to Manouvrier,[88] it's often seen in Parisians to a greater extent than in anthropoid apes. This backward tilt, often linked with flat tibia, is associated with the slightly bent position of the lower limb in a walking style known as the bending gait, which is common among peasants and especially mountain dwellers. The backward tilt is more pronounced in the tibia of newborns than in adults, and this seems to be related to the permanent bending of the knee during life in the womb.

The length of the bones of the pelvic and thoracic limbs varies according to race, but it is difficult to establish the degree of these variations, owing to the small number of observations made. Besides, we can more profitably substitute for measurements of limbs on the skeleton those of the living subject; in the latter case we can at least relate all the measurements to the true height of the subject, whilst the height is never exactly known from the skeleton.

The length of the bones in the pelvic and upper limbs varies by race, but it's tough to determine how much they differ due to the limited number of observations. Additionally, we can gain more insight by using measurements from living individuals instead of those from skeletons; with living subjects, we can at least relate all measurements to their actual height, while the height from a skeleton is never precisely known.

However, the measurements of the long bones have their[Pg 91] importance, for they permit us to reconstitute approximately, as we have already seen (p. 33), the height of subjects of which we have only the bones, as is the case of all populations that have preceded us.

However, the measurements of the long bones are important because they allow us to roughly reconstruct, as we have already seen (p. 33), the height of individuals from whom we only have bones, just like with all populations that came before us.

It is for this reason that I give the following figures derived from nine series of from five to seventy-two skeletons. The length of the humerus represents from 19.5 (Polynesians) to 20.7 per cent. (Europeans) of the height of the skeleton; that of the radius from 14.3 (Europeans) to 15.7 (Negroes); that of the femur from 26.9 (South Americans) to 27.9 (New Caledonians); lastly, the length of the tibia represents from 21.5 (Esthonians) to 23.8 per cent. (New Caledonians) of the height of the skeleton. Thus the differences are insignificant, and the variations between race and race do not extend beyond the limits of a unit and a half for each of the bones.

It’s for this reason that I’m presenting the following figures taken from nine studies involving five to seventy-two skeletons. The length of the humerus makes up between 19.5% (Polynesians) and 20.7% (Europeans) of the skeleton’s height; the radius ranges from 14.3% (Europeans) to 15.7% (Negroes); the femur varies from 26.9% (South Americans) to 27.9% (New Caledonians); finally, the tibia accounts for between 21.5% (Esthonians) and 23.8% (New Caledonians) of the skeleton’s height. Therefore, the differences are minimal, and the variations between races do not exceed one and a half units for each of the bones.

The length of the radius in relation to the humerus (= 100) exhibits variations a little more appreciable. It is 72.5 among Europeans, 76 among New Caledonians, 79 among Negroes, 79.7 among Veddahs, 80.6 among Fuegians, 81.7 among Andamanese. Let us note that the fore-arm, relatively to the arm, is much longer in the fœtus in the first stages of development and in early infancy than in the adult;[89] it is shortened in proportion to the height as the fœtus and the infant grow.

The length of the radius compared to the humerus (= 100) shows some noticeable variations. It measures 72.5 among Europeans, 76 among New Caledonians, 79 among Black people, 79.7 among Veddahs, 80.6 among Fuegians, and 81.7 among Andamanese. It's important to note that the forearm is relatively longer than the arm in the fetus during the early stages of development and in infancy than in adults; it gets shorter in relation to height as the fetus and infant grow.

Proportions of the Body in the Living Subject.—In spite of the quantity of material accumulated, we have not been able up to the present to make any use of the differences which these proportions exhibit according to race. The reason is that these differences are very trifling. In order to understand this proposition better I will give by way of illustration the proportions which we may consider as nearly normal in a European of average stature (1 m. 65, or 5 ft. 5 ins.). Topinard established thus the principal proportions of the European,[90] assuming the height = 100.

Body Proportions in Living Individuals.—Despite the amount of information gathered, we have not yet been able to utilize the differences these proportions show based on race. The reason is that these differences are quite minor. To illustrate this point, I will provide the proportions we can consider nearly normal for an average-height European (1 minute. 65, or 5 ft. 5 ins.). Topinard established the main proportions of the European,[90] considering the height = 100.

Head 13
Trunk and neck 35
(32.7 without neck.)
Thoracic limb 45
Arm 19.5
Forearm 14
Hand 11.5
Abdominal limb 47.5
(from the ischiatic plane to the ground.)
Foot 15
Span of arms (middle finger of one hand to
 middle finger of the other.)
104.4

The proportions in the different populations of the earth oscillate round these figures without diverging from them more than three units, or five at most. Thus, for example, the proportions of the height of the head vary between 11.4 and 15, according to Rojdestvensky;[91] the proportions of the trunk without the neck from 32.6 to 32.8, according to Topinard, etc.

The proportions in different populations around the world fluctuate around these numbers, not straying more than three units, or five at most. For instance, the head height proportions range from 11.4 to 15, according to Rojdestvensky; [91] the trunk proportions, excluding the neck, range from 32.6 to 32.8, according to Topinard, and so on.

The length of the thoracic limb scarcely varies more than between 42.6 and 47.6, according to the lists of sixteen and twenty-seven series published by Ivanovsky and Topinard,[92] and according to a third list of twenty-four series that I have drawn up. We can count on the fingers the populations in which the proportion for the hand exceeds the figure 11 with its decimals or sinks below it; it is the same in regard to the foot, of which the figure 15 with its decimals is rarely exceeded or is not reached.[93] The variations of length for the abdominal limb do not extend further than from 45.1 to 49.2 (Topinard), etc.

The length of the upper limb rarely varies more than between 42.6 and 47.6, based on the lists of sixteen and twenty-seven series published by Ivanovsky and Topinard,[92] and according to a third list of twenty-four series that I have compiled. We can count on one hand the populations where the ratio for the hand exceeds 11 with its decimals or drops below it; the same goes for the foot, where the number 15 with its decimals is seldom surpassed or not reached.[93] The variations in length for the lower limb range from 45.1 to 49.2 (Topinard), etc.

The thoracic perimeter exceeds half the height in all adult populations of the world, except perhaps some groups[Pg 93] of Georgian Svanes and Jews, or other populations which happen to be in bad hygienic conditions.

The chest circumference is greater than half the height in all adult populations around the world, except maybe for some groups[Pg 93] of Georgian Svanes and Jews, or other populations that are in poor hygiene conditions.

Thus proportions of the limbs are not good characters of race. Besides, certain dimensions (length of limbs, of the head) are always dependent on height. Thus individuals and races of high stature have the face and abdominal limb a little more elongated than individuals and races of short stature. On the other hand, individuals and races of short stature have in general the head larger, the trunk shorter, and the thoracic perimeter relatively more considerable than individuals and races of high stature, but the differences are very trifling as a general rule.

Thus, the proportions of the limbs are not reliable indicators of race. Additionally, certain measurements (like limb length and head size) are always influenced by height. Taller individuals and races tend to have slightly longer faces and limbs compared to shorter individuals and races. Conversely, shorter individuals and races generally have larger heads, shorter trunks, and relatively larger chest measurements than taller individuals and races, but these differences are usually quite minor.

Trunk and Limbs of the Living.—To complete our study on the living subject, let us again note some peculiarities. The neck is ordinarily long and thin among Negroes, Ethiopians (Figs. 9 and 138), and on the contrary short among the majority of the American Indians (Figs. 163 and 169); the shoulders are very broad among the women of the latter (Fig. 165), and very narrow among the Chechen and Lesghi women. Usually the long neck is associated with a form of trunk like an inverted pyramid and a high stature, while the short neck surmounts a cylindrical trunk and is associated with a low stature. Ensellure—that is to say, the strongly marked curve of the dorso-lumbo-sacral region—is especially marked among Spanish women whose lumbar incurvation is such, and the movements of the lumbar vertebræ so extensive, that they are able to throw themselves backwards so as even to touch the ground (Duchenne of Boulogne). Ensellure is also more marked among Negroes than among Whites. It must be noted that it may also be merely a consequence of abdominal obesity, pregnancy, or steatopygia.

Trunk and Limbs of the Living.—To finish our study on the living subject, let's point out some distinct traits again. The neck is generally long and thin among Black individuals, Ethiopians (Figs. 9 and 138), while it's typically short among most American Indians (Figs. 163 and 169); the shoulders are very broad among women of the latter group (Fig. 165), and quite narrow among Chechen and Lezgian women. Usually, a long neck is linked with a trunk shape like an upside-down pyramid and a tall stature, while a short neck sits atop a cylindrical trunk and is associated with a shorter stature. Ensellure—meaning the pronounced curve of the dorso-lumbo-sacral area—is especially noticeable among Spanish women, whose lumbar arch is such that they can lean back far enough to touch the ground (Duchenne of Boulogne). Ensellure is also more pronounced among Black individuals than among White individuals. It's important to note that it can also simply be a result of abdominal obesity, pregnancy, or steatopygia.

By the last-mentioned term is designated excessive projection of the buttocks due to the accumulation of subcutaneous fat (Fig. 24); these are physiological fatty tumours proceeding from the hypertrophy of the adipose tissue more or less abundant in these regions among all races, and analogous to the fatty tumours of the cheeks of the orang-utan, which are simply[Pg 94] Bichat’s fatty balls existing among men and among the anthropoids,[94] only excessively developed. As in those tumours, the fat of the steatopygous masses does not even disappear after disease which has emaciated the rest of the body. Steatopygia is characteristic of the Bushman race; it is only met with in all its characters (alteration of form on the lateral and anterior sides of the thighs; persistence even in emaciation, etc.) among populations into the composition of which enters the Bushman element: Hottentots (Fig. 24), Nama, etc. The cases of steatopygia observed among other Wolof or Somali women, for example, are only the exaggeration of adipose deposit among the muscular fibres, as with Europeans, not of the subcutaneous adipose layer. Steatopygia is especially marked in the Bushman woman, in whom it commences to develop only from the age of puberty; but it exists also, though in a less degree, in the male of that race (Fig. 143).

By the last-mentioned term, we refer to the excessive projection of the buttocks caused by the buildup of subcutaneous fat (Fig. 24); these are physiological fatty tumors resulting from the enlargement of the adipose tissue, which is more or less abundant in these areas across all races. This condition is similar to the fatty tumors found in the cheeks of the orangutan, which are simply[Pg 94] Bichat's fatty masses present in humans and anthropoids, only excessively developed. Just like those tumors, the fat in the steatopygous masses does not disappear even after illness has caused the rest of the body to lose weight. Steatopygia is characteristic of the Bushman race; it is found fully developed (with changes in shape on the lateral and front sides of the thighs; persistence even in emaciation, etc.) among populations that include the Bushman element: Hottentots (Fig. 24), Nama, etc. Cases of steatopygia seen in other Wolof or Somali women, for instance, are merely an exaggeration of fat deposits among the muscle fibers, similar to what is seen in Europeans, not of the subcutaneous adipose layer. Steatopygia is particularly pronounced in Bushman women, developing only from puberty; however, it is also present, albeit to a lesser extent, in the males of that race (Fig. 143).

Hottentot Woman, Griqualand

FIG. 24.—Hottentot woman of
Griqualand (Cape Colony);
35 years; height, 4 ft. 8 ins.;
cephalic index, 76.4.
Example of steatopygia.
(Photo. Prince Roland Bonaparte.)

FInstagram. 24.—Hottentot woman of
Griqualand (Cape Colony);
35 years old; height, 4 ft. 8 in.;
cephalic index, 76.4.
Example of steatopygia.
(Photo. Prince Roland Bonaparte.)

We cannot enlarge on other exterior characters: on the form of the trunk and of the limbs; on the leg with poorly de[Pg 95]veloped calf, and the foot with the prominent heel which is observed among certain Negroes (but not among all); on the more or less diverging big toe which is remarked among the majority of the peoples of India, Indo-China, and the insular world dependent on Asia, from Sumatra to Japan, etc.

We can't elaborate on other external features: the shape of the trunk and limbs; the leg with a poorly developed calf, and the foot with a prominent heel that can be seen in some Black individuals (but not in all); or the varying angles of the big toe that are noted among most peoples of India, Indo-China, and the island nations dependent on Asia, from Sumatra to Japan, etc.

Two words, however, on the subject of the pretended existence of races of men with tails. We must relegate to the domain of fable the cases of this kind which are announced from time to time in publications for the popularisation of science so called. The costumes of certain populations have given rise to the fable of men with tails (see frontispiece). Isolated cases of men having as an anomaly a caudal excrescence more or less long, free, or united to the trunk, are known to science, and numbers have been described, but no single serious description has ever been given of populations with tails.[95] Quite recently, again, Lartschneider has demonstrated that the ilio-coccygian and pubio-coccygian muscles in mammifera have lost in man their character of symmetrical and paired skeleton muscles, and are driven back towards the interior of the pelvis as single unpaired muscle plates (fibres of the levator ani). Primitive man has never had a caudal appendage since he acquired the biped attitude; the disappearance of the tail is even one of the indispensable conditions of that attitude.[96]

Two words, however, about the supposed existence of races of men with tails. We should dismiss the cases mentioned from time to time in publications that aim to popularize science as myths. The clothing of certain populations has contributed to the legend of men with tails (see frontispiece). Isolated instances of individuals having an anomaly with a tail, whether short or long, attached or detached from the body, are recognized by science, and many have been documented, but no credible description of populations with tails has ever been provided.[95] Recently, Lartschneider demonstrated that the ilio-coccygeal and pubio-coccygeal muscles in mammals have lost their symmetrical and paired skeletal structure in humans and have been reduced to single unpaired muscle plates (fibres of the levator ani). Primitive humans have never had a tail since adopting bipedalism; the loss of the tail is even one of the necessary conditions for that posture.[96]

The different internal or external organs of man afford also some special characters, though not very numerous, for differentiating race.

The various internal and external organs of humans also provide some specific traits, though not many, for distinguishing between races.

The muscular system, little known outside white races, has, up to the present, not given any important indication on this point. At the very outside, we can say, thanks to the works of Chudzinsky, Le Double, Macalister, Popovsky, Testut, Turner, etc., and the Committee of the Anatomical Society of Great Britain and Ireland, that certain muscular anomalies are more frequent in the Negro than in the White, and that the muscles[Pg 96] of the face are less differentiated in the former than in the latter.[97] In the splanchnic system some differences have also been observed between the White and the Negro, notably the excessive volume of the liver, the spleen, the suprarenal-capsules, and, in general, the hypertrophy of all the organs of excretion in the latter compared with the former. The venous system appears also to be more developed in the Negro than in the White. Somewhat notable differences must certainly be observable in the structure and general conformation of the organs of the voice and of speech—tongue, larynx, lungs. But our knowledge on this subject is still very imperfect. Attention has been drawn to the feeble development of the anterior fibres of the stylo-glossal muscle of the tongue, the greater development of the Wrisberg cartilage of the larynx with the muscles stronger in the Negro than in the White,[98] but nothing is known about the larynx of other races.

The muscular system, not widely understood outside of white populations, has not provided any significant insights on this issue up to now. At most, we can state, based on the studies of Chudzinsky, Le Double, Macalister, Popovsky, Testut, Turner, and others, as well as the Committee of the Anatomical Society of Great Britain and Ireland, that certain muscular anomalies occur more frequently in Black individuals than in White individuals, and that the facial muscles[Pg 96] of Black individuals are less differentiated than those of White individuals.[97] In the splanchnic system, some differences have also been noted between White and Black individuals, particularly the larger size of the liver, spleen, suprarenal capsules, and generally the hypertrophy of all excretory organs in the latter compared to the former. The venous system also seems to be more developed in Black individuals than in White ones. There are likely significant differences in the structure and overall shape of the organs related to voice and speech—such as the tongue, larynx, and lungs. However, our understanding of this area remains quite limited. Attention has been drawn to the underdevelopment of the anterior fibers of the stylo-glossal muscle in the tongue, the greater development of the Wrisberg cartilage in the larynx, and stronger muscles in Black individuals compared to their White counterparts,[98] but nothing is known about the larynx of other racial groups.

There is nothing, even to the bony parts of the vocal apparatus, which does not undergo ethnic variations. Thus the larger cornua of the hyoid bone are not attached to the body of it in 75 to 95 per cent. of cases observed among the Indians of America, whilst the same anomaly is met with in only 25 to 35 per cent. of cases among Europeans, and only in 30 per cent. among Negroes, which probably harmonises with the differences in the production of sounds in the language of each of these peoples.[99]

There’s nothing, not even the bony parts of the vocal system, that doesn’t show ethnic variations. For example, the larger cornua of the hyoid bone are not connected to the body of the bone in 75 to 95 percent of cases observed among Native Americans, while this discrepancy occurs in only 25 to 35 percent of cases among Europeans, and in only 30 percent among Black people. This likely aligns with the differences in how sounds are produced in the languages of each of these groups.[99]

The genital organs also present some differences according to race, but rather in the dimensions of the various parts than in their form. The only peculiarity worth notice is the exaggerated development of the labia minora among the Bushman women, known under the name of “apron.” This peculiarity, which appears from infancy, is met with only[Pg 97] among the Bushman race and the people into whose composition enters the Bushman element—Hottentots, Nama, Griqua, etc.[100]

The genital organs show some differences based on race, but more in the size of the various parts than in their shape. The only notable feature is the pronounced development of the labia minora among Bushman women, often referred to as the “apron.” This characteristic, which appears from childhood, is found only[Pg 97] among the Bushman people and those with Bushman ancestry—like the Hottentots, Nama, Griqua, etc.[100]

The breasts of women may also present variations of form. Ploss[101] classes them under four heads according to their height, which is inferior, equal, or more or less superior to the diameter of their base; we have thus mammæ like a bowl or the segment of a globe, hemispherical, conical, and pyriform. These forms may be found in combination with a more or less extended and prominent areola, and with a nipple which may be discoidal, hemispherical, digitiform, etc. It is especially among Negresses that we meet with conical and pyriform mammæ, and digitiform nipples, while mammæ shaped like the segment of a sphere predominate among Mongolian and European women of the fair race; women of the south-east of Europe and hither Asia have for the most part hemispherical breasts.

The breasts of women can also vary in shape. Ploss[101] categorizes them into four types based on their height, which can be lower, equal, or greater than the diameter of their base. This results in shapes like a bowl or part of a globe, hemispherical, conical, and pear-shaped. These forms can also be combined with a more or less pronounced areola and a nipple that can be flat, rounded, finger-like, etc. Conical and pear-shaped breasts, along with finger-like nipples, are especially common among Black women, while breast shapes resembling a part of a sphere are predominant among Mongolian and European women of lighter skin; women from the southeastern part of Europe and western Asia mostly have hemispherical breasts.

Among the internal organs, the brain, or better, the encephalon, deserves a little more attention. I have already said with regard to cranial capacity (p. 56) that appreciable differences have been observed in the volume of the brain-case according to age, sex, and race. This difference is in harmony with irregularity in the volume and consequently in the weight of the brain. At birth, European boys have 334 grammes of brain on an average, girls 287 grammes. This quantity increases rapidly up to 20 years of age, remains almost stationary between 20 and 40 or 45, then begins to decrease, slowly at first, until 60 years, then more rapidly.

Among the internal organs, the brain, or more accurately, the encephalon, deserves a bit more attention. As I mentioned regarding cranial capacity (p. 56), significant differences have been observed in the volume of the braincase based on age, sex, and ethnicity. This variation aligns with irregularities in both the volume and weight of the brain. At birth, European boys have an average brain weight of 334 grams, while girls have an average of 287 grams. This weight increases rapidly until around 20 years of age, remains relatively stable between 20 and 40 or 45, and then starts to decline, gradually at first, until age 60, and then more quickly.

Let me also add that the weight of the encephalon varies enormously according to individuals. Topinard[102] in a series of 519 Europeans, men of the lower and middle classes, found that variations in weight extended from 1025 grammes to 1675[Pg 98] grammes. The average weight of the brain among adult Europeans (20 to 60 years) has been fixed by Topinard, from an examination of 11,000 specimens weighed, at 1361 grammes for man, 1290 grammes for woman. It has been asserted that the other races have a lighter brain, but the fact has not been established by a sufficient number of examples. In reality all that can be put against the 11,000 brain-weighings mentioned above concerning the cerebral weights of non-European races, amounts to nothing, or almost nothing. The fullest series that Topinard[103] has succeeded in making, that of Negroes, comprises only 190 brains; that of Annamese, which comes immediately after, contains only 18 brains. And what do the figures of these series teach us? The first series, dealing with Negroes, gives a mean weight not much different from that of Europeans—1316 grammes for adult males of from 20 to 60 years; and the second, dealing with the Annamese, a mean weight of 1341 grammes, almost identical with that of Europeans. For other populations we have only the weight of isolated brains, or of series of three, four, or at most eleven specimens, absolutely insufficient for any conclusions whatever to be drawn, seeing that individual variations are as great in exotic races as among Europeans, to judge by Negroes (1013 to 1587 grammes) and by Annamese (from 1145 to 1450 grammes). Even in the great series of Europeans, surprises await us in comparing the figures. Thus Peacock found an average of 1388 grammes for the English from a series of 28 brains, whilst Boyd finds 1354 grammes from a series of 425 brains. The difference (34 grammes) is greater here than between the brains of Annamese and Europeans, and hardly less than that which we have just found between Negroes and Europeans (45 grammes). For the French the figures are more in agreement. Broca found from the weights of 167 brains an average of 1359 grammes, and Bischoff[104] from 50 brains an average of 1381 grammes; difference, 22 grammes.

Let me also add that the weight of the brain varies significantly among individuals. Topinard[102] studied a group of 519 Europeans, specifically men from the lower and middle classes, and found that brain weights ranged from 1025 grams to 1675[Pg 98] grams. Topinard determined that the average brain weight for adult Europeans (ages 20 to 60) is 1361 grams for men and 1290 grams for women based on an analysis of 11,000 specimens. It has been claimed that other races have lighter brains, but this hasn't been proven by enough examples. In reality, the evidence against the 11,000 brain weighings mentioned above regarding the weights of non-European races is minimal, if not nonexistent. The largest data set Topinard[103] compiled for Black individuals includes only 190 brains, while the next largest for Annamese only has 18 brains. So what do these numbers show us? The first set, concerning Black individuals, reports a mean weight not much different from that of Europeans—1316 grams for adult males aged 20 to 60; the second one, for the Annamese, has a mean weight of 1341 grams, nearly identical to that of Europeans. For other populations, we only have weights for isolated brains or small groups of three, four, or, at most, eleven specimens, which are far too few to draw any solid conclusions, given that individual variations are just as significant in these exotic races as they are among Europeans, as seen in the cases of Black individuals (1013 to 1587 grams) and Annamese (from 1145 to 1450 grams). Even in the extensive data set of Europeans, there are surprising differences when comparing the numbers. Peacock found an average of 1388 grams for the English based on a sample of 28 brains, whereas Boyd found 1354 grams from 425 brains. The difference of 34 grams is greater than the difference observed between the brains of Annamese and Europeans, and not much less than what was just noted between Black individuals and Europeans (45 grams). For the French, the figures align more closely. Broca calculated an average of 1359 grams from the weights of 167 brains, while Bischoff[104] found an average of 1381 grams from 50 brains; the difference is 22 grams.

Not having at our disposal sufficient data for the weight, let us see if the cranial capacity could not supply them, for we know, since the investigations of Manouvrier,[105] that we have just to multiply by the co-efficient 0.87 the capacity of the cranial cavity to get with reasonable exactitude the weight of the brain which it contained. This is what we learn from the figures of cranial capacity brought together by Topinard,[106] after the necessary corrections, and reduction to cubic measurement by the system of Broca: among Europeans the measurement is 1565 c.c. on an average for men, varying from 1530 c.c. (22 Dutch) to 1601 c.c. (43 Finns). We have in various series the following succession of cranial capacities for the populations of the other parts of the world: the greatest is contained in a series of 26 Eskimo (1583 c.c.), the least that of 36 Australians (1349 c.c.) and of 11 Andamanese (1310 c.c.). Between these two extremes the other populations would be thus arranged in a decreasing order of capacity: 36 Polynesians (1525 c.c.), 18 Javanese (1500 c.c.), 32 Mongols (1504 c.c.), 23 Melanesians (1460 c.c.), 74 Negroes (1441 c.c.), and 17 Dravidians of Southern India (1353 c.c.).

Not having enough data for the weight, let's see if cranial capacity can help us out, since we know from Manouvrier's research,[105] that we can just multiply the cranial cavity's capacity by the coefficient 0.87 to get a reasonably accurate estimate of the brain's weight it held. This is what we learn from the cranial capacity figures compiled by Topinard,[106] after making the necessary adjustments and converting to cubic measurements using Broca's system: for Europeans, the average measurement is 1565 c.c. for men, ranging from 1530 c.c. (22 Dutch) to 1601 c.c. (43 Finns). In various groups, the following cranial capacities are recorded for populations around the world: the largest is from a group of 26 Eskimos (1583 c.c.), while the smallest comes from 36 Australians (1349 c.c.) and 11 Andamanese (1310 c.c.). Between these two extremes, the other populations can be listed in decreasing order of capacity as follows: 36 Polynesians (1525 c.c.), 18 Javanese (1500 c.c.), 32 Mongols (1504 c.c.), 23 Melanesians (1460 c.c.), 74 Negroes (1441 c.c.), and 17 Dravidians from Southern India (1353 c.c.).

The difference between the highest and lowest of these figures is 255 c.c., a little greater than that which is shown between man and woman in all races. On the other hand, Manouvrier[107] gives the following weights, deduced from cranial capacities: 187 modern Parisians, 1357 grammes; 61 Basques, 1360 grammes; 31 Negroes, 1238 grammes; 23 New Caledonians, 1270 grammes; 110 Polynesians, 1380 grammes; and 50 Bengalis, 1184 grammes; the difference of the two extremes is 196 grammes. Must we then see in these differences the influence of stature and bulk of body, as[Pg 100] appears unquestionable in the sexual difference? We are tempted to believe it when we see that the mean weight of the largest brain in Europe has been found among the Scotch (1417 grammes, an average obtained by Reid and Peacock from 157 brains), whose stature is the highest of the human family, and that the mean weight of the Italians, whose average stature is rather small, is only 1308 grammes (from 244 cases weighed by Calori). The Polynesians and the Caucasians,[108] peoples of high stature, also outweigh the Andamanese and the Javanese, of very low stature. However, we see (from weights and cranial capacity) that Negro populations of very high stature, also Australians and New Caledonians of medium stature, have the cerebral weight much smaller than the Eskimo and certain Asiatics of low stature, like the Javanese.

The difference between the highest and lowest of these figures is 255 c.c., slightly greater than the disparity seen between men and women across all races. On the other hand, Manouvrier[107] provides the following weights based on cranial capacities: 187 modern Parisians weigh in at 1357 grammes; 61 Basques, 1360 grammes; 31 Negroes, 1238 grammes; 23 New Caledonians, 1270 grammes; 110 Polynesians, 1380 grammes; and 50 Bengalis, 1184 grammes. The difference between the two extremes is 196 grammes. Should we then consider these differences to reflect the influence of height and body size, as[Pg 100] seems obvious in the sexual difference? It’s tempting to think so, especially when the average weight of the largest brain in Europe has been found among the Scottish (1417 grammes, an average calculated by Reid and Peacock from 157 brains), whose height is the greatest of all humans. In contrast, the average weight for Italians, who tend to be shorter, is only 1308 grammes (based on 244 cases weighed by Calori). The Polynesians and Caucasians,[108] both tall peoples, also weigh more than the Andamanese and Javanese, who are quite short. However, we find (from weights and cranial capacity) that Negro populations of very tall stature, as well as Australians and New Caledonians of medium height, have brain weights that are much smaller than those of Eskimos and certain Asians of shorter stature, like the Javanese.

There is here a double influence, that of stature and that of race. We might have introduced a third element—the weight of the body, but it represents too many different things, and may vary according to the degree of stoutness of the individual, the dietary regimen, etc. C. Voit found, when operating on two dogs of nearly equal bulk, that the weight of the brain of the well-fed dog represented 1.1 per cent. of the weight of its body, whilst the brain of the dog which had fasted for twenty-two days represented 1.7 per cent. of the weight of the body.[109] At all events, we cannot deny the influence of the bulk of the active parts of the body on the volume of the brain.[110] But then a new question arises. Is[Pg 101] the increase of the volume of the brain made at the cost of the white substance formed solely of conducting-fibres, or of the grey substance formed principally of cells with their prolongations (neurons), that is to say, of the part which is exclusively affected by the psychic processes? This question still waits its solution. It is not the gross weight of the brain, but really the weight of the cortical layer which should be compared in the different races and subjects, in order to judge of the quantity of substance devoted to the psychic functions in each particular case.[111] Before the very delicate weighings of this kind are made, we have a round-about method of ascertaining the quantity of that substance by the superficial area which it occupies. The cerebral cortex, composed of the grey substance, forms on the surface of the brain sinuous folds called cerebral convolutions. Now, in brains of equal volume, the greater the surface of the cortex, the more numerous, sinuous, and complicated will be these folds. As the thickness of the grey layer is very much the same in all brains, it is evident that the complexity in the structure of the convolutions corresponds to the increase of the grey substance, and consequently of the psychic force. Now, the little that is known of the cerebral[Pg 102] convolutions in different races, and of various subjects in the same race, appears to conform to this deduction. The brains of idiots, of the weak-minded, present very simple convolutions, almost comparable to those of the anthropoid apes, whose brain is like a simplified diagram of the human brain. On the other hand, distinguished personages, great scholars, orators, men of action, exhibit a complexity, sometimes truly remarkable, of certain convolutions. I say expressly certain convolutions, for all these folds, arranged according to a certain plan, common to all men, have not the same value from the physiological point of view. In the grey layer of certain of them are the centres of motor impulses, and of the general sensibility of the body (for example, those which are arranged around the fissure of Rolando,[Pg 103] Fig. 25, 2, 2), and only regulate the voluntary movements of the limbs, the trunk and the head; others are connected with different forms of sensibility—visual (Fig. 25, 4), auditory (Fig. 25, 6), gustatory, olfactory, etc. But there are, between the different motor or sensorial regions (centres of projection) which take nearly a third of the grey substance of the brain, a great many more convolutions the grey substance of which is connected with no special function (white spots in Fig. 25). What is their purpose? Basing his opinion on the tardy myelinisation[112] of the nerve-fibres which terminate in it, subsequent to the birth of the individual and to the myelinisation of the fibres of the sensory and motor centres, Flechsig[113] supposes that these convolutions were designed to enable the different cerebral centres to communicate with each other and to render us conscious of this communication; therefore he has named their grey substance “centres of association” (Fig. 25, 1, 3, 5). Without the convolutions, the other centres would remain isolated and condemned to a very restricted activity. Now, as the eminent anatomist Turner[114] has shown so clearly, it is found that the convolutions of the sensory and motor centres do not present any great differences in the brain of a child, a monkey, a Bushman, or of a European man of science, like Gauss; what differentiates these brains is the degree of complexity of the convolutions concerned with association. There, then, is the part of the brain which we want to utilise for the purpose of comparison, reduced by almost a third. But let us suppose that differences of volume and weight are found in these two-thirds of the grey substance. Have we more reason to think that we are approaching the solution of the problem?

There are two main influences here: stature and race. We could have mentioned a third factor—the body weight—since it can mean a lot of different things and can change based on how stout someone is, their diet, etc. C. Voit found that when he performed surgery on two dogs of similar size, the brain of the well-fed dog made up 1.1 percent of its body weight, while the brain of the dog that had fasted for twenty-two days made up 1.7 percent. In any case, we can't ignore how the size of the active parts of the body affects the size of the brain. A new question arises, though: does the increase in brain size come at the expense of the white matter, which consists mainly of conducting fibers, or the gray matter, made up mostly of cells (neurons) that are directly impacted by mental processes? This question remains unanswered. It's not the total weight of the brain that matters but the weight of the cortical layer that needs to be compared across different races and individuals to understand the amount of substance dedicated to mental functions in each case. Before we conduct exact measurements, we can use a roundabout method to determine the amount of that substance by looking at the surface area it covers. The cerebral cortex, made up of gray matter, forms wavy folds on the brain's surface called cerebral convolutions. In brains of the same size, the larger the cortical surface area, the more numerous and twisted those folds will be. Since the thickness of the gray layer is quite similar across all brains, it's clear that the complexity of the convolutions corresponds to increased gray matter and, consequently, greater mental capacity. From what we know about cerebral convolutions in various races and individuals within the same race, this idea seems to hold true. The brains of individuals with intellectual disabilities exhibit very simple convolutions, nearly resembling those of anthropoid apes, whose brains look like a simplified version of human brains. In contrast, notable figures, skilled scholars, orators, and influential people show a level of complexity, sometimes quite remarkable, in certain convolutions. It's important to specify "certain" convolutions because all these folds follow a general pattern common to all humans but don’t have the same significance from a physiological perspective. In some of them, the gray substance contains the centers for motor impulses and general body sensations (for instance, those around the Rolando fissure), regulating voluntary movement of limbs, torso, and head; others are linked to different types of senses—visual, auditory, taste, smell, etc. However, there are many more convolutions between the various motor and sensory regions (called centers of projection) that account for nearly a third of the brain's gray matter, but their gray substance doesn’t correspond to a specific function (shown as white spots in Fig. 25). What is their function? Focusing on the slow development of the nerve fibers that extend into them, which occurs after birth and follows the myelination of sensory and motor centers, Flechsig suggests that these convolutions allow different brain centers to communicate with each other and make us aware of this communication; hence, he called their gray substance “centers of association.” Without these convolutions, other centers would be isolated and have very limited activity. As the renowned anatomist Turner pointed out, the convolutions of the sensory and motor centers don’t show significant differences in the brains of a child, a monkey, a Bushman, or a European scholar like Gauss; what sets these brains apart is the complexity of the association convolutions. This is the part of the brain we want to examine for comparison, which accounts for almost a third. But let’s assume we find differences in volume and weight in the remaining two-thirds of the gray matter. Does that bring us closer to finding a solution to the problem?

Brain, Centres of Projection

FIG. 25.—Brain with indication of the three “centres of projection”
(2, general sensibility; 4, visual; 6, auditory) and the three “centres of association”
(1, frontal; 3, parietal; 5, occipito-temporal); 1, fissure of Rolando; 7, Island of Reil.
(After Flechsig.)

FIG 25.—Brain showing the three “projection centers”
(2, general sensitivity; 4, visual; 6, auditory) and the three “association centers”
(1, frontal; 3, parietal; 5, occipito-temporal); 1, Rolando's fissure; 7, Island of Reil.
(After Flechsig.)

It is believed that certain cells of the grey substance only, the great and the little pyramidal-shaped cells, are associated with the psychical functions, and that each of these, forming with its axis-cylinder, dendrons and other branching prolongations what is called a neuron, is not in constant connection with, and does not occupy a fixed position once for all in regard to, other similar neurons, but may by means of its prolongations place itself alternately in contact with a great number of these.[115] Hence the complexity of the nervous currents resulting from these continual changes of contact. Thus the cerebral activity might not merely be measured by the quantity and the size of the cells of the grey substance, but also by the number and the variety of the habitual contacts which are probably established after an education, a training of the cells. As from the same number of keys of a piano the tyro can produce only a few dissimilar sounds, while an artist elicits varied melodies, so from cerebral cells practically equal in number a savage is only able to extract vague and rudimentary ideas, while a thinker brings out of them intellectual treasures. How far are we, then, from the true appreciation of cerebral work with our rude weighings of an organ in which, with one part that would assuredly help us to the solution of the problem, we weigh at least three other parts having nothing or almost nothing to do with it! And even if we succeeded in finding the number, the weight, and the volume of the neurons, how are we to estimate the innumerable combinations of which they are capable? The problem appears almost insoluble. However, in science we must never lose hope, and—who knows?—perhaps some day the solution of the question will be found, and it will then appear as simple as to-day it appears a matter of course to see through the body with radioscopical apparatus.

It’s thought that only certain cells in the grey matter, specifically the large and small pyramid-shaped cells, are connected to mental functions. Each of these cells, along with its axis cylinder, dendrites, and other branching extensions, forms what we call a neuron. These neurons don’t always stay connected or have a fixed position in relation to other similar neurons, but can use their extensions to connect with many of them. This creates a complex network of nervous currents from these constant changes in contact. Therefore, brain activity may not only depend on the quantity and size of the grey matter cells but also on the number and variety of regular connections established through education and cell training. Just like a beginner can make only a few different sounds with the same keys on a piano while an artist can create varied melodies, a primitive person may extract only vague and basic ideas from similar numbers of brain cells, while a thinker can draw out intellectual treasures. We are still far from truly understanding brain activity when we crudely measure an organ where, with one part potentially helping us solve the issue, we also examine at least three other parts that have little or no relevance. And even if we manage to determine the number, weight, and volume of the neurons, how can we account for the countless combinations they can form? The challenge seems nearly impossible. However, in science, we must never lose hope. Who knows? Maybe one day the solution will be discovered, and it will seem as straightforward as it does today to see through the body with radiological equipment.


CHAPTER III.

2.—PHYSIOLOGICAL CHARACTERS.

2.—PHYSIOLOGICAL CHARACTERISTICS.

Functions of nutrition and assimilation: Digestion, alimentation, growth, temperature of the body, etc.—Respiration and circulation: Pulse, composition of the blood, etc.—Special odour—Functions of communication: Expression of the emotions, acuteness of the senses, etc.—Functions of reproduction: Menstruation, menopause, increase in the number of conceptions according to season, etc.—Influence of environment: Acclimatation—Cosmopolitanism of the genus Homo and the races of mankind—Cross-breeding.

Functions of nutrition and assimilation: Digestion, eating, growth, body temperature, etc.—Respiration and circulation: Pulse, blood composition, etc.—Special odor—Functions of communication: Expression of emotions, sensitivity of the senses, etc.—Functions of reproduction: Menstruation, menopause, increase in the number of pregnancies based on the season, etc.—Influence of environment: Acclimatization—Cosmopolitanism of the genus Homo and the races of humanity—Cross-breeding.

3.—PSYCHOLOGICAL AND PATHOLOGICAL CHARACTERS.

3.—PSYCHOLOGICAL AND PATHOLOGICAL TRAITS.

Difficulties of studying them—Immunities—Nervous diseases of uncivilised peoples.

Difficulties in studying them—Immunities—Nervous diseases of uncivilized people.

2.—PHYSIOLOGICAL CHARACTERS.

THE differences observable in the fulfilment of the organic functions—nutrition, respiration, circulation of the blood, reproduction, etc.—according to race are unquestionable; but they are still too little studied for us to be able to speak with as much certainty of them as of morphological differences. Further, these functions exhibit so many individual variations that it will always be difficult to rely on averages; besides, the latter present as far as we know a great uniformity.

THE differences we see in how the organic functions—nutrition, respiration, blood circulation, reproduction, etc.—are carried out according to race are undeniable; however, they haven't been studied enough for us to speak with the same confidence about them as we do about morphological differences. Additionally, these functions show so many individual variations that it will always be challenging to depend on averages; moreover, the averages we have seem to show a lot of uniformity.

The functions of nutrition and assimilation scarcely present any varieties according to race. Indigent populations living from hand to mouth by hunting, fishing, the gathering of fruit, etc., exposed to the alternations of famine and plenty, surprise us by their faculty of absorbing a great quantity of food; thus the Eskimo and the Fuegians feed for several days running on a stranded whale. The tendency to obesity is[Pg 106] observed in certain races more than in others; very frequent among the Kirghiz, it is rare among their neighbours the Kalmuks, etc. The early obesity of Jewish women, which is besides artificially fostered in Africa and in the East, is also to be noted. Growth in different races would prove of some interest, but investigations into this subject have been made only in Europe and America.[116] Great difficulties stand in the way of these inquiries among uncivilised peoples, as it is almost impossible to ascertain the exact age of individuals. In a general way stature and weight increase with age somewhat irregularly, and as if by fits and starts; almost always a period of rapid growth in height succeeds a period of calm, during which the dimensions of the body increase in width (shoulders, pelvis, etc.). It has also been remarked that growth in height is especially rapid from the month of April to July and August, that it diminishes from November to March; and that, lastly, weight increases especially from August-September to the end of November. Sexual differences make themselves felt from birth. We have already seen (p. 26) that at birth the stature of boys exceeds that of girls by a figure which varies from two to eight millimetres (.08 to .32 of an inch), let us say of half a centimetre (less than the quarter of an inch) on an average. During the first year stature increases very rapidly: the child a year old is one and a half times as tall as at birth. The increase is less rapid until the fourth year, when the height is double what it was at birth. From the fourth year the growth is a little slower till the age of puberty, when there is a fresh start, and when the sexual differences are especially marked; girls grow more rapidly than boys between ten and fifteen years of age, but after fifteen boys take the lead and grow at first quickly, then slowly till their twenty-third year, at which age they have almost attained[Pg 107] the limit of their stature; while women seem to stop growing at twenty.

The functions of nutrition and assimilation hardly show any differences based on race. Poor communities that live hand to mouth through hunting, fishing, gathering fruits, etc., who face cycles of food scarcity and abundance, amaze us with their ability to consume large amounts of food; for example, the Eskimos and the Fuegians can eat for several days from a whale that has washed ashore. The tendency towards obesity is[Pg 106] more common in certain races than others; it's quite frequent among the Kirghiz but rare among their neighbors, the Kalmuks, etc. The early onset of obesity in Jewish women, which is also artificially promoted in Africa and the East, is another point of note. Growth patterns in different races would be interesting to study, but research on this topic has only been conducted in Europe and America.[116] Significant challenges arise in studying these issues among uncivilized peoples, as it’s almost impossible to determine individuals’ precise ages. Generally, height and weight increase with age in an irregular way, often occurring in spurts; there is typically a period of rapid height growth followed by a phase where the body’s width (shoulders, pelvis, etc.) increases. It's also been observed that height growth is especially fast from April to July and August, slows down from November to March, and that weight tends to increase from late August to the end of November. Sexual differences are noticeable from birth. We have already noted (p. 26) that at birth, boys are taller than girls by an amount that varies from two to eight millimeters (.08 to .32 of an inch), averaging about half a centimeter (less than a quarter of an inch). In the first year, height increases rapidly: a one-year-old is one and a half times taller than at birth. The growth rate slows down until the fourth year, when the child’s height is double what it was at birth. From the fourth year, growth continues at a slightly slower pace until puberty, when there is another growth spurt, and sexual differences become particularly noticeable; girls grow faster than boys between ages ten and fifteen, but after fifteen, boys catch up and initially grow quickly, then more slowly until about their twenty-third year, at which point they have almost reached[Pg 107] their final height; while women seem to stop growing at twenty.

The size of most of the organs increases pretty regularly; the heart in girls at the age of puberty and the brain in the two sexes are the only exceptions to this rule. The weight of the brain is 2 12 times greater at one year than at birth, 3 13 at five years, 3.7 at ten, and 3.9 at fifteen; later its growth diminishes, to reach its maximum before the age of twenty, 4 times its initial weight, and to decline slightly after forty or forty-five years.

The size of most organs increases quite consistently; the heart in girls during puberty and the brain in both genders are the only exceptions to this pattern. The weight of the brain is 2 12 times heavier at one year than at birth, 3 1/3 at five years, 3.7 at ten, and 3.9 at fifteen; after that, its growth slows down, reaching its peak before the age of twenty, at four times its original weight, and then it slightly decreases after the age of forty or forty-five.

At birth the brain represents 12.4 per cent. of the total weight of the body, at a year old 10.9 per cent., at five 8.4, at fifteen 3.8, and at twenty-five 2.3 per cent. only.[117] Unfortunately we have hardly any parallel observations on non-European populations. The only observations of this kind based on a sufficient number of subjects (several thousands) relate to the Japanese. According to Baelz, the stature of the Japanese increases after the age of puberty only 8 per cent., whilst it increases 13 per cent. among Europeans. On the other hand, Drs. Hamada and Sasaki say that growth diminishes greatly among Japanese men from sixteen or eighteen, and is found to be completely arrested at the age of twenty-two.[118] There is abundance of evidence that Negroes, Melanesians, and Malays attain their maximum height between eighteen and twenty-one. Dietary regimen and comfortable circumstances have a great influence on growth, as I have already said when speaking of stature (p. 31).

At birth, the brain makes up 12.4 percent of the total body weight, 10.9 percent at one year old, 8.4 percent at five, 3.8 percent at fifteen, and only 2.3 percent at twenty-five.[117] Unfortunately, we have very few similar observations on non-European populations. The only substantial observations, based on several thousand subjects, relate to the Japanese. According to Baelz, the height of the Japanese increases by only 8 percent after puberty, while it increases by 13 percent among Europeans. On the other hand, Drs. Hamada and Sasaki note that growth significantly slows among Japanese men from sixteen or eighteen, and is completely halted by the age of twenty-two.[118] There is ample evidence that Black people, Melanesians, and Malays reach their maximum height between eighteen and twenty-one. Diet and comfortable living conditions greatly influence growth, as I have mentioned when discussing height (p. 31).

The activity of transformations in the system certainly presents differences according to climate, but not according to race. Thus the alimentary supply is conditioned solely by the heat required.[119] The temperature of the body hardly varies two[Pg 108] or three tenths of a degree, for instance, among two peoples so different as regards type and mode of life as the French of the north and the Fuegians. In fact, the temperature taken in the mouth is from 37.1° to 37.2° C. among the former and 37.4° among the latter.[120] Besides, among Europeans the individual variations range between 37.1° and 37.5° C. Among Negroes the temperature appears to be, on the contrary, a little lower than that of Europeans.

The process of transformations in the system definitely varies based on climate, but not on race. Therefore, the food supply is determined solely by the heat needed.[119] The body temperature hardly differs by two[Pg 108] or three tenths of a degree, for example, between two very different groups like the northern French and the Fuegians. In fact, the temperature measured in the mouth is between 37.1° and 37.2°C. for the former and 37.4° for the latter.[120] Additionally, among Europeans, individual variations fall between 37.1° and 37.5° C. In contrast, the temperature among Black individuals seems to be slightly lower than that of Europeans.

Let us pass on to the respiratory functions. The vital capacity or the quantity of air in the expanded lungs, which is 3.7 cubic metres among the English according to Hutchinson, and from 3 to 4 cubic metres among Europeans in general, falls to 3 metres among the Whites and the Indians of the United States (Gould), and even to 2.7 among the Negroes of this latter country. The difference is very trifling; however, it has to be taken into consideration, seeing that among Europeans persons of high stature have an absolute capacity superior to that of people of low stature. Frequency of respiration seems to be greater among uncivilised peoples than with Europeans (14 to 18 respirations per minute); it is from 16 to 20 respirations among the Fuegians, 18 to 20 among the Mongol-Torgootes, 19 among the Kirghiz, and 18 among the Afghans.[121]

Let’s move on to the respiratory functions. The vital capacity, or the amount of air in fully expanded lungs, is about 3.7 cubic meters for the English according to Hutchinson, and ranges from 3 to 4 cubic meters for Europeans in general. It drops to 3 meters for Whites and Indians in the United States (Gould), and even goes down to 2.7 for Black people in the U.S. The differences are small, but they should be considered, as taller Europeans generally have a greater lung capacity than shorter individuals. The rate of breathing seems to be higher in uncivilized groups compared to Europeans (14 to 18 breaths per minute); it ranges from 16 to 20 breaths among the Fuegians, 18 to 20 among the Mongol-Torgootes, 19 among the Kirghiz, and 18 among the Afghans.[121]

For the circulation of the blood here are a few scattered data. The pulse is the same among the Fuegians (72 beats per second) and the Tarantchi of Chinese Turkestan (72.9 beats) as among Europeans (71 to 72); it is a little faster among the Whites and the Negroes of the United States (74.8 and 74 beats), and much faster among the Indians of America and the Mulattos (76.3 and 77 beats), among the Torgootes[Pg 109] (76.6), and among the Kirghiz (77.7). The number of red globules in the blood varies but little according to race: Europeans have on an average five millions of them to the cubic millimetre, Hindus and Negroes seem to have half a million less, and the Fuegians half a million more.[122] But these differences are insignificant when we think that the number of these elements of the blood may vary by a million in the same subject according to the state of his health, nutrition, etc.

For the circulation of the blood, here are a few scattered data points. The pulse is similar among the Fuegians (72 beats per minute) and the Tarantchi of Chinese Turkestan (72.9 beats) as it is among Europeans (71 to 72); it is slightly faster among White and Black Americans (74.8 and 74 beats), and much faster among Native Americans and Mulattos (76.3 and 77 beats), among the Torgootes[Pg 109] (76.6), and among the Kirghiz (77.7). The number of red blood cells varies little by race: Europeans have an average of five million of them per cubic millimetre, while Hindus and Blacks seem to have about half a million less, and the Fuegians about half a million more.[122] But these differences are minor when we consider that the number of these blood elements can vary by a million in the same individual depending on their health, nutrition, and other factors.

Certain travellers (Erman, Huc) have asserted that they could recognise a population by its odour. Without going so far as this, it must be admitted that some ethnic groups and, more particularly, the Negroes and the Chinese have their specific odour, which gets fainter with scrupulous cleanliness, but, it is said, never disappears. In the case of the Negro this odour is due especially to the abundance of the secretion of his very voluminous and numerous sebaceous glands. It was on this property that the planters relied for putting their dogs on the scent of the fugitive Negro. The Blacks themselves are perfectly aware of it, it appears, and those of the West Indies have even framed this proverb—

Certain travelers (Erman, Huc) have claimed they can identify a population by its odor. While this might be an exaggeration, it’s acknowledged that some ethnic groups, particularly Black people and Chinese people, have distinctive odors that become less noticeable with thorough cleanliness, but reportedly never completely go away. For Black people, this specific odor is largely attributed to the abundance of secretion from their numerous and large sebaceous glands. Planters used this trait to train their dogs to track down runaway Black people. It seems that Black individuals are fully aware of this, and those from the West Indies even coined a proverb—

“The Lord He loves the nigger well,
He knows His nigger by the smell.”

The odour of musk exhaled by the Chinese is attested by a great amount of evidence; that of the Australians and New Caledonians appears to be also duly reported. We must not confound these odours sui generis with those which certain peoples contract from the food they eat, as, for instance, the odour of garlic among the populations of Southern Europe and the Jews.[123]

The scent of musk produced by the Chinese is backed by a lot of evidence; the scent from the Australians and New Caledonians also seems to be well-documented. We shouldn't confuse these unique odors with those that certain groups pick up from their diet, like the smell of garlic among Southern Europeans and Jews.[123]

With regard to muscular force, the data furnished by the[Pg 110] dynamometer are deceptive, and cannot teach us anything; besides, the individual differences are enormous.

With respect to muscular force, the data provided by the[Pg 110] dynamometer is misleading and doesn’t teach us anything; moreover, the individual differences are significant.

Functions of Relation.—A whole chapter could be written on the muscles and gestures serving for the expression of the emotions, and on their differences according to race.[124] Let us content ourselves with a single example connected with astonishment and surprise. These feelings are expressed almost everywhere by the raising of the eyebrows and the opening of the mouth; several peoples (Eskimo, Tlinkits, Andamanese, Indians of Brazil) accompany this play of feature by a slap on the hips; the Ainus and the Shin-Wans of Formosa give themselves a light tap on the nose or the mouth, whilst the Thibetans pinch their cheek. The Negro Bantus have the habit of moving the hand before the mouth as a sign of astonishment, and the Australians, as well as the western Negroes, protrude their lips as if to whistle (Fig. 141). In a general way the play of physiognomy is more complicated the more the people is civilised. Certain peoples execute movements of facial muscles difficult to imitate, such as the protrusion of the upper lip alone, which the Malays execute with the same facility and grace as a chimpanzee (Hagen). I shall speak in Chapter IV. of conventional gestures. The attitudes of the body in repose also vary with the different peoples: the kneeling attitude is common to Negroes (Figs. 135 and 142); the squatting position is frequently used by them and the peoples of the East, and also by the Americans; the upright position on one foot, the other being bent and the sole supported on the knee of the former, is met with as well in Oceania as among the Bejas, Negroes, etc.[125]

Functions of Relation.—A whole chapter could be written about the muscles and gestures that express emotions, and how these differ by race.[124] Let’s just look at one example related to astonishment and surprise. These feelings are generally shown by raising the eyebrows and opening the mouth; some groups (Eskimo, Tlinkits, Andamanese, Brazilian Indians) add a slap on the hips to this facial expression; the Ainus and the Shin-Wans of Formosa give themselves a light tap on the nose or mouth, while the Tibetans pinch their cheeks. The Bantu people often move their hand in front of their mouth to show astonishment, and Australians, along with some Western Africans, push their lips out as if to whistle (Fig. 141). Overall, the expression of facial features becomes more complex in more civilized societies. Certain groups perform facial movements that are hard to imitate, like the ability to protrude only the upper lip, which Malays do with the same ease and grace as a chimpanzee (Hagen). I will discuss conventional gestures in Chapter IV.. The body postures at rest also vary among different peoples: the kneeling position is common among Black people (Figs. 135 and 142); the squatting position is often used by them, as well as by Eastern peoples and Americans; the upright position on one foot, with the other bent and its sole resting on the knee of the standing foot, is found in both Oceania and among the Bejas, Black people, etc.[125]

The acuteness of the senses is superior to ours among uncultured and half-civilised peoples. The Andamanese can discover certain fruits in the forests a long way off, being guided solely by the sense of smell. Taking as a unit the normal visual[Pg 111] acuteness calculated according to the formula of Snellen, we shall have the following figures for different populations:—1.1 for the Germans; 1.4 for the Russians; 1.6 for the Georgians; 2.7 for the Ossetes and Kalmuks; 3 for the Nubian Bejas; and 5 for the Indians of the Andes. It is in a Kalmuk that the individual maximum of visual acuteness (6.7) has been noted.[126] An interesting fact has been observed by Dr. Herzenstein from the study of 39,805 Russian soldiers, viz., that visual acuteness is greater as the pigment of the iris and the hair is more developed. In fact, we only find among the fair-haired 72.4 per cent. of individuals whose visual acuteness is stronger than the normal, and 2.7 per cent. whose acuteness is weaker, whilst among the dark-haired the corresponding figures are 84.1 and 1.7; they see then, other things being equal, better than the fair-haired.[127]

The sharpness of the senses is better than ours among uncultivated and semi-civilized peoples. The Andamanese can find certain fruits in the forests from far away, relying solely on their sense of smell. Using normal visual[Pg 111] sharpness as a baseline, calculated based on Snellen's formula, here are the figures for different populations: 1.1 for Germans; 1.4 for Russians; 1.6 for Georgians; 2.7 for Ossetes and Kalmuks; 3 for the Nubian Bejas; and 5 for the Indians of the Andes. The highest recorded individual visual sharpness (6.7) was noted in a Kalmuk.[126] An interesting observation made by Dr. Herzenstein in his study of 39,805 Russian soldiers is that visual sharpness is higher among individuals with more developed iris and hair pigment. In fact, among the fair-haired individuals, 72.4 percent have better than normal visual sharpness, while 2.7 percent have weaker sharpness. In contrast, among dark-haired individuals, the figures are 84.1 percent and 1.7 percent respectively; thus, they see better than the fair-haired, all else being equal.[127]

The functions of reproduction are so difficult to study, even among civilised peoples, that it is almost impossible to say anything positive about them when dealing with savage peoples. Thus, for example, we can scarcely draw up an exact table of the first appearance of menstruation. This period varies from the age of ten (Negresses of Sierra Leone) to that of eighteen (Lapps). The influence of climate is unquestionable; authors as competent as Tilt in England, Krieger in Germany, Dubois and Pajot in France, are agreed on this point. They state that the first indication of the period of puberty appears between eleven and fourteen in warm countries, between thirteen and sixteen in temperate countries, and between fifteen and eighteen in cold countries. But they are also obliged to admit the influence of other factors—race, occupation, dietary regimen, etc. Thus in Austria, with the same climate and in the same social conditions, Jewish girls menstruate at fourteen to fifteen, Hungarian girls at fifteen to sixteen, and Slovak girls at fourteen to sixteen (Joachim); on the other hand, it is known that[Pg 112] dwelling in a town, indolent life, premature sexual excitations, accelerate the appearance of the menses. Alimentation has also its share of influence in the matter. Thus among the badly-fed girls of the despised caste of Illuvar (Southern India) their periods appear at about sixteen, while the girls of India in general menstruate at eleven, twelve, or thirteen.[128] It must not be thought that in all countries the appearance of the menses is also indicative of the period when sexual relations begin. Among the majority of the peoples of India, among the Turks, the Mongols, the Persians, among the Polynesians, the Malays, and the Negroes, young girls enter into sexual relations much before the appearance of the menses—at eleven, ten, and even nine years of age. The time when marriage takes place is also not an indication; it is a matter of social convention, among the savage as among the half-civilised. Thus among the Mongol Torgootes girls begin to have sexual relations at fourteen on an average, and marry at eighteen; for boys the corresponding figures are fourteen and a half and nineteen (Ivanovsky).

The functions of reproduction are really tough to study, even among civilized people, making it nearly impossible to make any definitive statements about them when talking about uncivilized communities. For instance, we can hardly create an exact timeline for the onset of menstruation. This age ranges from ten (for Black women in Sierra Leone) to eighteen (for Lapps). The impact of climate is clear; experts like Tilt in England, Krieger in Germany, and Dubois and Pajot in France all agree on this. They argue that the first signs of puberty generally appear between eleven and fourteen in warmer regions, between thirteen and sixteen in temperate climates, and between fifteen and eighteen in colder areas. However, they also acknowledge the influence of other factors—like race, occupation, and diet. In Austria, for example, where the climate and social conditions are similar, Jewish girls start menstruating between fourteen and fifteen, Hungarian girls between fifteen and sixteen, and Slovak girls between fourteen and sixteen (Joachim). Conversely, it’s known that living in a city, leading a lazy lifestyle, and early sexual stimulation can speed up the onset of menstruation. Diet also plays a role; for instance, poorly-fed girls from the lower caste of Illuvar in Southern India start their periods around sixteen, while the general population of girls in India menstruates at eleven, twelve, or thirteen.[128] It's important to note that in all countries, the appearance of menstruation does not necessarily signal the start of sexual activity. Among many Indian populations, as well as among Turks, Mongols, Persians, Polynesians, Malays, and Black communities, young girls engage in sexual relations well before they start menstruating—at ages eleven, ten, or even nine. The timing of marriage also doesn't serve as an indicator; it’s simply a social convention, whether among uncivilized or semi-civilized groups. For example, among the Mongol Torgootes, girls typically become sexually active at fourteen and marry at eighteen, while boys have corresponding averages of fourteen and a half and nineteen (Ivanovsky).

The time of the appearance of the critical age is subject to so many fluctuations that even for European populations it is scarcely possible to establish averages, but most of the figures oscillate around the ages of forty-five to fifty. It is known that in woman ovulation goes on regularly throughout the year without those accelerations or exasperations of the genesic functions in certain seasons which are observed among animals in heat. In this respect the human female differs totally from wild animals (except the apes, among whom menstruation has been noted), and approximates closely to the female of domestic animals. And yet certain facts seem to indicate that it has not always been so. These facts have reference to the greater frequency of conceptions during certain periods of the year.

The timing of the critical age varies so much that it's almost impossible to determine averages, even for European populations. Most figures tend to cluster around the ages of forty-five to fifty. It's known that women experience regular ovulation throughout the year, without the spikes or heightened reproductive activities seen in certain seasons among animals in heat. In this way, human females are quite different from wild animals (except for apes, where menstruation has been observed) and are more similar to female domestic animals. However, some evidence suggests that this hasn't always been the case. This evidence points to a higher rate of conceptions during specific times of the year.

The Swedish physician Wargentin was the first to point out in 1767 this frequency in his own country. Since then, several statisticians, doctors, and naturalists have confirmed it:[Pg 113] Quetelet for Belgium and Holland (maximum of births in February, the maximum of conceptions in May); Wappæus for Central Europe (two maxima of conception, in winter, and at the end of spring or the beginning of summer); Villermé (same periods) for different countries, including those of the southern hemisphere; Sormani for Italy (conceptions in July); Mayr for Germany (conceptions in December); Beukemann for the different provinces of the German empire (maximum of conceptions in December in the north, in spring in the south); Hill for India (maximum of conceptions, December-January); lastly, different authors for Russia (maximum of conceptions in winter).

The Swedish doctor Wargentin was the first to highlight this trend in his country in 1767. Since then, several statisticians, doctors, and naturalists have confirmed it: [Pg 113] Quetelet for Belgium and Holland (peak births in February, peak conceptions in May); Wappæus for Central Europe (two peaks of conception, in winter and at the end of spring or the start of summer); Villermé (same periods) for various countries, including those in the southern hemisphere; Sormani for Italy (conceptions in July); Mayr for Germany (conceptions in December); Beukemann for the different provinces of the German Empire (peak conceptions in December in the north, in spring in the south); Hill for India (peak conceptions, December-January); and finally, various authors for Russia (peak conceptions in winter).

The explanations which have been put forward up to the present of this phenomenon are of different kinds. According to certain authors, the maxima observed in many countries in the spring are owing to the fact of there being in this season “plenty of everything,” better nourishment, in short, something which compels the genesic instinct of man, like that of most animals, to participate in the “awakening of nature.” To this it is replied by other observers that in certain countries the maxima are reported in the winter months, that is to say in the season when the temperature and the relative absence of the good things of life do not seem to be a priori favourable to generation; these scientists look for the cause in the social organisation. They notice that in countries of the north it is in the month of December that, after having finished their work in the fields, the inhabitants give themselves up to festivities and rejoicings, and that it is in this month the greatest number of unions are contracted; on the other hand, in the south the most popular festivals are those of the spring at the awakening of nature. Others, again, assert that these differences are owing as much to religion as to latitude.

The explanations that have been put forward so far for this phenomenon vary. Some authors suggest that the peaks observed in many countries during the spring are due to the abundance of resources in this season—better nutrition, in short—driving humans, like most animals, to participate in the "awakening of nature." Other observers respond by noting that in certain countries, the peaks occur in winter, when the low temperatures and lack of resources don't seem to be favorable for reproduction; these scientists attribute the cause to social organization. They observe that in northern countries, it’s in December, after finishing their work in the fields, that people engage in festivities and celebrations, and that this month sees the highest number of unions formed. Conversely, in southern countries, the most popular festivals happen in spring during nature's awakening. Others argue that these differences are influenced by both religion and latitude.

All these explanations are somewhat unscientific, and have never been verified by figures or experience. According to Rosenstadt,[129] cosmic and social influences do not count at[Pg 114] all in the question, for often the periods during which recrudescence of conceptions occurs are the same for countries differing entirely in climate, religion, and manners (Italy, Russia, Sweden). These influences may, at the most, create conditions favourable to the bringing about of the phenomenon, may prepare the ground for it. But as to the phenomenon itself it would be, according to Rosenstadt, merely the remains in man of his animal nature, a “physiological custom” inherited from the animals, his ancestors.

All these explanations are somewhat unscientific and have never been backed up by data or experience. According to Rosenstadt,[129] cosmic and social influences don't matter at[Pg 114] all in this discussion, as the time periods when ideas resurface are often the same for countries that are completely different in terms of climate, religion, and culture (like Italy, Russia, and Sweden). These influences might, at best, create favorable conditions for the phenomenon to occur, preparing the environment for it. However, when it comes to the phenomenon itself, Rosenstadt argues that it is simply the remnants of human beings' animal nature, a "physiological habit" passed down from their animal ancestors.

Primitive man would inherit from his ancestors the habit of procreating by preference at particular times. On the arrival of this period of sexual excitement fecundations would take place wholesale. With the development of civilisation man has sexual relations all the year round, but the “physiological custom” of procreating at a certain period does not entirely disappear; it remains as a survival of the animal state, and manifests itself in the recrudescence of the number of conceptions during certain months of the year. This conclusion is corroborated by the fact that among certain savage tribes copulation seems to take place at certain periods of the year; for example, among the Australians at the time of the yam harvest (see Chap. VII., Marriage, etc.).[130]

Primitive humans inherited from their ancestors the tendency to procreate during specific times. When this period of sexual excitement arrived, fertilizations would happen in large numbers. With the advancement of civilization, humans engage in sexual relations throughout the entire year, but the “physiological custom” of reproducing at certain times doesn’t completely fade away; it lingers as a remnant of our animal origins and is evident in the increase of pregnancies during specific months. This idea is supported by the observation that some indigenous tribes seem to have sexual relations during particular times of the year; for instance, among the Australians during the yam harvest (see Chap. VII., Marriage, etc.).[130]

It is perhaps as a survival of these habits that we must regard the annual festivals followed by wholesale marriages among the Sonthals, and the wholesale marriages still practised to-day in Brittany on the eve of Lent. Thus in the little market-town of Plougastel-Daoulas (Finistère), containing only 7000 inhabitants, thirty-four marriages were celebrated at once on the 5th of February 1896, and the preceding year, before Lent, forty-eight couples had been united on the same day in this locality.[131] The famous “Bharzwad Jang,” or “Marriage of the Shepherds,” a ceremony practised by certain tribes (Mer, Shir, Rabai) of Western Kathiawar (India), is also perhaps a survival of this custom. It consists in the[Pg 115] celebration of marriage on the same day, but at stated intervals (of about twenty-four years), of all the bachelors of the tribe. At the last ceremony of this kind, which took place from the 28th of April to the 3rd of May 1895, 775 couples were thus married at once.[132]

We can see a continuation of these traditions in the annual festivals with mass weddings among the Sonthals, and the mass weddings still held today in Brittany right before Lent. For example, in the small market town of Plougastel-Daoulas (Finistère), which has only 7,000 residents, thirty-four weddings happened on February 5, 1896, and the year before, just before Lent, forty-eight couples were married on the same day in that area.[131] The well-known “Bharzwad Jang,” or “Marriage of the Shepherds,” is a ceremony observed by some tribes (Mer, Shir, Rabai) in Western Kathiawar (India) and may also be a remnant of this tradition. It involves the celebration of marriage on the same day, but at set intervals (about every twenty-four years), for all the single men in the tribe. During the last such ceremony, held from April 28 to May 3, 1895, 775 couples were married at the same time.[132]

The question of the fertility of women in different populations is one of great interest as regards the future of these populations, but it is scarcely more than outlined yet. If we know in a general way that the birth-rate is very low in France and somewhat low in the non-immigrant part of the population of the United States, that it is very high in Russia and among the Jews, etc., we know almost nothing about the subject in connection with uncivilised peoples; in their case, as in our own, we must take into account the different elements of the problem—social conditions, voluntary limitation (Australians), infanticide (Polynesia), etc.

The issue of women’s fertility across different populations is a significant concern for the future of these groups, but it's still mostly unexplored. While we generally recognize that the birth rate is quite low in France and somewhat low in the non-immigrant population in the United States, and that it's very high in Russia and among Jewish communities, we know almost nothing about this topic in relation to uncivilized peoples. In their case, just like in ours, we need to consider the various factors involved—social conditions, voluntary family planning (Australians), infanticide (Polynesia), and so on.

Influence of Environment.—I can scarcely treat here as fully as I could wish such interesting questions as the influence of external circumstance, of acclimatation and crossings or hybridisation, inasmuch as they are still very little and imperfectly studied. The direct influence of environment has rarely been observed with all the scientific exactness to be wished. Ordinarily we have to rest satisfied with phrases which do not mean a great deal.[133] Even the influence of con[Pg 116]ditions so abnormal as the complete absence of light and solar heat, those sources of everything living, during several months, has only been observed incidentally. Nossiloff,[134] however, has noted day by day the influence of the polar night on an ordinary population (not hardened and picked, like the crews of polar expeditions) and proved its depressing action, manifesting itself in general apathy of body and mind, in a tendency to drowsiness, and in diminution of the height and the thoracic perimeter; this action is especially noticeable in children, who visibly pine away during this period. Unfortunately the observations of Nossiloff are limited to a small number of subjects.

Influence of Environment.—I can hardly delve as deeply as I would like into the fascinating questions regarding the impact of external circumstances, acclimatization, and hybridization, since these topics are still quite underexplored. The direct influence of the environment has seldom been studied with the scientific rigor we would hope for. Typically, we're left with vague phrases that lack depth.[133] Even the impact of conditions as extreme as the complete absence of light and solar heat, which are essential for all life, over several months has only been casually noted. Nossiloff,[134] however, has carefully tracked the effects of the polar night on an ordinary population (not those specially selected like the crews of polar expeditions) and demonstrated its negative effects, which appear as general lethargy in body and mind, increased drowsiness, and a decrease in height and chest circumference; this effect is particularly evident in children, who visibly deteriorate during this time. Unfortunately, Nossiloff's observations are limited to a small number of subjects.

It is more than probable that all the modifications which the organism undergoes as a result of the influence of environment are mostly of a chemical nature, and have only a remote effect on the human frame. According to W. Kochs,[135] the whole question of acclimatation in tropical countries resolves itself into the quantity of water in the organism. He bases his deductions principally on the difference found to exist in the quantity of water contained in the flesh of oxen of the Argentine Republic in comparison with that[Pg 117] found among cattle of Northern Germany. The former have from 80 to 83 per cent. of water, while the latter have from 72 to 75 per cent. only. If it is the same with man, as Kochs supposes, he would have from 7 to 8 per cent. less solid matter to burn in his body in the tropics than in temperate countries, and the vital energy would be affected accordingly. Thus only the organism that had acquired the quantity of water necessary for supporting the heat of the tropics would be acclimatised; this is so true that Whites acclimatised in tropical countries suffer more from the cold in Europe than their compatriots who have never left Europe.[136] Besides, the Negroes of Senegal begin to suffer from cold when the thermometer falls below 20° C. (68° Fahr.), whilst the Fuegians who are not more warmly clad bear very well the cold of 0° to -4° C. (32° to 25° Fahr.).

It’s highly likely that most changes the organism experiences due to environmental influences are mainly chemical and only have a slight impact on the human body. According to W. Kochs,[135] the entire issue of acclimatization in tropical regions boils down to the amount of water in the body. He mainly bases his conclusions on the differences in water content found in the flesh of oxen in the Argentine Republic as compared to cattle in Northern Germany. The former have 80 to 83 percent water, while the latter have only 72 to 75 percent. If humans are the same, as Kochs suggests, they would have about 7 to 8 percent less solid matter to burn in their bodies in the tropics than in temperate regions, which would affect their vital energy accordingly. Therefore, only organisms that have acquired the necessary amount of water to endure the heat of the tropics would be acclimatized; this is supported by the fact that Whites who have acclimatized in tropical areas suffer more from cold in Europe than their peers who have never left Europe.[136] Furthermore, the Black population of Senegal begins to feel cold when the temperature falls below 20° C (68° F), while the Fuegians, who are not more warmly dressed, tolerate temperatures as low as 0° to -4°C (32° to 25° F).

Taken as a whole, the genus Homo is cosmopolitan. In fact, man inhabits the whole earth from the icy regions of Greenland (in the neighbourhood of the eightieth degree of N. latitude) to the torrid zone which stretches between the tropic of Cancer and the Equator. He is found in countries situated at 75 or 200 metres below the level of the sea (Caspian depression, depression of Louktchin in Eastern Turkestan), as well as on table-lands at an elevation of more than 5000 metres (Thibet). But if we consider the numerous sub-divisions of the genus Homo which are called species, sub-species, or races, the question of cosmopolitanism becomes more complicated as at the same time the positive data for its solution are less numerous.

Overall, the genus Homo is cosmopolitan. In fact, humans live all over the planet, from the icy areas of Greenland (near the 80th degree of N. latitude) to the hot zone that stretches between the Tropic of Cancer and the Equator. They can be found in places located 75 or 200 meters below sea level (like the Caspian depression and the Louktchin depression in Eastern Turkestan), as well as on plateaus over 5000 meters high (such as Tibet). However, when we look at the many subdivisions of the genus Homo referred to as species, subspecies, or races, the question of cosmopolitanism gets more complex, and at the same time, the positive data to resolve it are fewer.

Apart from the European and Negro races, peoples have never changed their habitat abruptly—have not transported themselves in a body into climates very different from their native country, though slow migrations, advancing from place to neighbouring place, have been numerous at all times and among all peoples; these have been followed by acclimatation, the sole criterion of cosmopolitanism. It must also be remarked that civilised peoples withstand better than[Pg 118] savages changes of every kind. In this respect the former bear a stronger resemblance than the latter to domestic animals, which rarely become sterile outside of their native country. According to Darwin,[137] this results from the fact that civilised peoples, as well as domestic animals, have been subjected in the course of their evolution to more numerous variations, more frequent changes of place, and also more important crossings.

Aside from European and Black people, groups have never abruptly changed their living locations—never moved completely into climates that are very different from their homeland. However, gradual migrations, moving from one place to another nearby, have always been common among all groups; these migrations have led to acclimatization, which is the only true measure of cosmopolitanism. It's also important to note that civilized peoples adapt better than[Pg 118] savages to various changes. In this way, civilized people are more similar to domesticated animals, which rarely become infertile outside their home countries. According to Darwin,[137] this happens because civilized peoples, just like domesticated animals, have undergone more variations, frequent changes of location, and significant crossbreeding throughout their evolution.

The question whether each race of mankind can live and reproduce itself—that is to say, become acclimatised—on any point of the globe will, evidently, only be resolved when attempts of this kind are undertaken by each race and pursued during several generations. Now there are no exact data on this subject except for the so-called white race and in some measure for Negroes. Without reckoning cosmopolitan peoples like the Jews and the Gypsies, it is certain that the majority of European peoples can as a race get acclimatised in the most diverse regions, in Canada (English and French) as in Brazil (Portuguese and Germans), Mexico (Spaniards), Australia (English), Southern Africa (Dutch Boers). The assumed failures of acclimatation are connected with countries where there has never been any European colonisation (India, Java), and where it is known that there are isolated cases of the collective acclimatation of several families.

The question of whether each race of humans can live and reproduce in any part of the world—essentially, become acclimatized—will clearly only be answered when each race attempts this and continues for several generations. Currently, there are no precise data on this topic except for the so-called white race and, to some extent, for Black people. Excluding cosmopolitan groups like Jews and Gypsies, it’s certain that most European groups can acclimatize as a race in various regions, such as Canada (English and French) and Brazil (Portuguese and Germans), Mexico (Spaniards), Australia (English), and Southern Africa (Dutch Boers). The supposed failures of acclimatization are linked to places where there has never been any European colonization (India, Java), and it is known that there are isolated instances of several families successfully acclimatizing.

According to Clements Markham and Elisée Reclus, the Englishman not only as an individual but as a race is able to live in the Cisgangetic peninsula.[138] Many generations of Englishmen have flourished in various parts of India. Numerous examples could be cited of children being acclimatised without detriment to their strength or health. According to Francis Galton, the mortality in 1877 of European soldiers in India (12.7 per 1000) was less than that of native soldiers (13.4) and Hindus in general (35). In the Dutch Indies the Dutch have kept themselves in good health for several genera[Pg 119]tions.[139] We must leave out of the question certain unhealthy regions (like Lower Senegal) where the natives suffer almost as much as Europeans. On the whole, the so-called white race appears to have the aptitude of acclimatation in all countries, provided, of course, that it makes the necessary sacrifices for several generations.

According to Clements Markham and Elisée Reclus, the English not only as individuals but also as a group can thrive in the Cisgangetic peninsula.[138] Many generations of English people have prospered in different parts of India. There are plenty of examples of children adapting without harming their strength or health. Francis Galton noted that in 1877, the death rate of European soldiers in India (12.7 per 1000) was lower than that of native soldiers (13.4) and Hindus in general (35). In the Dutch Indies, the Dutch have maintained their health for several generations.[Pg 119][139] We should exclude certain unhealthy areas (like Lower Senegal) where the locals suffer almost as much as Europeans. Overall, the so-called white race seems to have the ability to adapt to all countries, as long as it is willing to make the necessary sacrifices over several generations.

If it be said of certain regions that they are not colonisable by Europeans, it is thereby implied that the sacrifices entailed by acclimatation are out of all proportion to the advantages to be gained by colonisation. As to Negroes, they thrive in temperate countries like the United States, where they multiply at the same rate as the Whites. By a strange anomaly they do not seem to thrive as well in Mexico, in the Antilles, and in Guiana—that is to say in the same isothermal zone (26°–28° C., or 70°–82° Fahr.) as their native country; nevertheless they live and reproduce there.

If it's said that some regions can't be colonized by Europeans, it means that the challenges of adapting to those areas outweigh the benefits of colonization. As for Black people, they thrive in temperate regions like the United States, where their population grows at the same rate as White people. Interestingly, they don't seem to do as well in Mexico, the Caribbean, and Guiana—essentially in the same temperature zone (26°–28° C, or 70°–82°F) as their home country; still, they do live and reproduce there.

Upon the whole, if we consider (1) that the most mixed and most civilised races are those which are soonest acclimatised, (2) that the tendency of races to intermingle, and of civilisation to develop, goes on increasing every day in every part of the world, we may affirm without being accused of exaggeration that the cosmopolitanism of mankind, if it does not yet exist to-day in all races (which seems somewhat improbable), will develop as a necessary consequence of the facility of acclimatation. For it to become general is only a matter of time.

Overall, if we think about (1) the fact that the most diverse and advanced societies adapt to their environment the quickest, (2) the increasing tendency for races to mix and for civilization to grow worldwide, we can confidently say—without being accused of overstatement—that humanity's cosmopolitan nature, even if it doesn’t fully exist today in all races (which seems unlikely), will inevitably develop as a natural result of our ability to adapt. It’s just a matter of time before it becomes widespread.

As to the fertility of acclimatised families, it has been established outside of hybridisation. Thus it has been possible to trace back certain English families in the Barbadoes for six generations.[140] As much may be said of the French in the islands of Mauritius and Réunion. In the Brazilian province of Rio Grande do Sul, between 25°–30° S. latitude—that is, in a sub-tropical region—it has been ascertained that there are three or four generations of German colonists,[Pg 120] whose children enjoy very good health.[141] Lastly, in Matabeleland there are already two or three generations of Dutch.[142] It must be said that certain European races are more capable than others of becoming acclimatised in tropical countries. Thus it is universally acknowledged that people of the south of Europe—Spaniards, Italians, Provençals—become sooner acclimatised in Africa and equatorial America than the English and the Germans of the north.

Regarding the fertility of acclimatized families, it has been confirmed outside of hybridization. Hence, certain English families in Barbados have been traced back for six generations.[140] The same can be said for the French in the islands of Mauritius and Réunion. In the Brazilian province of Rio Grande do Sul, located between 25°–30° S latitude—essentially a subtropical area—it has been found that there are three or four generations of German colonists,[Pg 120] whose children are in excellent health.[141] Finally, in Matabeleland, there are already two or three generations of Dutch.[142] It's important to note that certain European races are more capable than others of acclimatizing to tropical countries. It's widely recognized that people from southern Europe—Spaniards, Italians, Provençals—adapt more quickly in Africa and equatorial America than the English and Germans from the north.

But in spite of the facility of acclimatation, race-characters hardly seem to change in the new environment; the chemical constituents of the tissues having changed, the body adapts itself without change either in outward form or even colour.

But despite the ease of adaptation, racial characteristics hardly seem to change in the new environment; although the chemical makeup of the tissues has changed, the body adjusts without any change in outward appearance or even color.

The German colonists of Brazil and the Steppes of the Volga bear a perfect resemblance to each other after more than a century of separation from their race-brothers of Swabia or Franconia. It is the same after two or three centuries with the English of the Barbadoes, the French of Réunion, the Dutch of the Transvaal, etc.

The German settlers in Brazil and those in the Volga region look remarkably similar to each other even after more than a hundred years apart from their relatives in Swabia or Franconia. The same can be said after two or three centuries for the English in Barbados, the French in Réunion, the Dutch in the Transvaal, and so on.

The phenomena of hybridity are even less studied than those of the influence of environment; I shall speak of some of these in regard to different populations, but the facts are too isolated and disputed for any general conclusions to be drawn.

The phenomenon of hybridity is studied even less than the impact of the environment; I will discuss some of these in relation to different populations, but the facts are too isolated and debated for any general conclusions to be made.

In reality, all that we know is that a great number of races produce half-breeds by crossing, but whether these half-breeds in so crossing produce a new race or revert to one of the ancestral types has not been demonstrated. Humanity appears to move in a confused medley of the most diverse and composite forms, without any one of them being able to persist; for the means of persistence, artificial selection or sexual selection, are wanting. The only selection which may have a decided influence on the predominance of the characters of a race in its interminglings is that which proceeds from the number of individuals of each of the races concerned in[Pg 121] the blending and their respective fecundity, but this selection has hardly begun to be studied.

In reality, all we really know is that many races produce mixed offspring through breeding, but it hasn't been proven whether these mixed offspring create a new race or revert to one of the ancestral types. Humanity seems to exist in a confusing mix of diverse and blended forms, none of which can truly persist because the means for persistence, like artificial selection or sexual selection, are lacking. The only factor that might significantly influence the dominant traits of a race in these intermixings is the number of individuals from each of the races involved in[Pg 121] the blending and their respective fertility, but this aspect has barely started to be studied.

3.—PSYCHOLOGICAL AND PATHOLOGICAL CHARACTERS.

It remains to speak of psychological characters—that is to say, of temperament and the different manifestations of mind, feeling, and affections. But it must be admitted that it is almost impossible to treat these in the face of many contradictory facts. Speaking generally, it may be said that the American and Mongoloid races are grave, meditative, a little obtuse, melancholic; and that, on the contrary, the Negro races and Melanesians are playful, laughing, lively, and superficial as children. But there are many exceptions to such general rules. Each traveller, each observer, tends to judge in his own way a given people according to the nature of the relations (pacific, hostile, etc.) which he has had with it. We are unable to affirm anything when we have once made up our minds to escape from the commonplace generalities that savages are wanting in foresight and general ideas, that they are cruel, that their imitative faculties are highly developed, etc.

It’s time to talk about psychological characters—meaning temperament and the various ways the mind, emotions, and feelings show up. However, it’s important to recognize that it’s nearly impossible to address these due to many conflicting facts. Generally speaking, we can say that American and Mongoloid races tend to be serious, reflective, a bit dull, and melancholic; while, on the other hand, the Black races and Melanesians are playful, cheerful, lively, and naïve like children. But there are plenty of exceptions to these broad statements. Each traveler or observer tends to judge a particular group based on the nature of their interactions (friendly, hostile, etc.) with them. We can’t really claim anything once we decide to move beyond the usual stereotypes that suggest savages lack foresight and general ideas, that they are cruel, and that their ability to imitate is highly developed, etc.

Pathological characters are better known, as for example, in regard to immunities. It is a proved fact that Negroes, for instance, are proof against the contagion of yellow fever; that they resist much better than Europeans the terrible intermittent fevers which prevail on the coasts of Africa. But if savage peoples enjoy certain immunities, they are, on the contrary, very susceptible to the infectious diseases which civilised peoples introduce among them; whole tribes have been exterminated by syphilis, measles, and consumption in South America, Polynesia, and Siberia.[143] There are also diseases peculiar to certain populations, such, for example, as the sleeping sickness among the Wolofs and Songhaï, which manifests itself in an invincible tendency to sleep.[144] It has[Pg 122] long been asserted that savage peoples are not afflicted by nervous and mental diseases. Nothing of the kind. The genuine “great hysteria” of Charcot has been observed among Negresses of Senegal, among Hottentot women and Kafirs, as well as in Abyssinia and Madagascar.[145] Other nervous diseases have been noticed among Hurons and Iroquois,[146] and in New Zealand. Some forms of neurosis appear to be limited to certain ethnic groups. Such is the “Amok” of the Malays—a sort of furious and imitative madness perhaps provoked at the same time by suggestion. Developed especially among the Malays, it is also met with among the Indians of North America, where it has been called “jumping” by the Whites. The “Myriachit” of the Ostiaks and other natives of Siberia, the “Malimali” of the Tagals of the Philippines, the “Bakchis” of the Siamese, are similar diseases. Under the name of “Latah” are designated among the Malays all sorts of nervous diseases, but more particularly the imitative madness which impels women to undress before men, to throw children up in the air in imitation of a game of ball, etc. Besides, the name Latah is also given to a mental state in which the patient is afraid of certain words (tiger, crocodile), and which is met with somewhat frequently not only among the Malays, but also among the Tagals and the Sikhs of India.[147]

Pathological characters are more commonly known, particularly in relation to immunities. It's a well-established fact that Black people, for example, are immune to yellow fever; they withstand the dreadful intermittent fevers found along the African coasts much better than Europeans do. However, while indigenous peoples may have certain immunities, they are highly susceptible to infectious diseases brought by more developed societies; entire tribes have been wiped out by syphilis, measles, and tuberculosis in South America, Polynesia, and Siberia.[143] There are also diseases unique to specific populations, such as sleeping sickness among the Wolofs and Songhaï, which presents as an uncontrollable need to sleep.[144] It has[Pg 122] long been claimed that indigenous peoples don’t suffer from neurological and mental illnesses. This is simply not true. The genuine “great hysteria” described by Charcot has been observed among Senegalese women, Hottentot women, and Kafirs, as well as in Abyssinia and Madagascar.[145] Other neurological disorders have been noted among the Hurons and Iroquois,[146] and in New Zealand. Some forms of neurosis seem to be confined to certain ethnic groups. For example, the “Amok” among Malays is a type of violent and imitative madness that may be triggered by suggestion. While primarily seen among Malays, it also occurs among Native Americans, where it has been referred to as “jumping” by White people. The “Myriachit” among the Ostiaks and other Siberian natives, the “Malimali” among Tagals in the Philippines, and the “Bakchis” among the Siamese are similar conditions. The term “Latah” is used among Malays to refer to various nervous disorders, particularly the imitative madness that causes women to undress in front of men or throw children in the air as if engaging in a game. Additionally, the name Latah also refers to a mental state wherein the individual has a fear of specific words (like tiger, crocodile), which occurs fairly frequently, not just among Malays, but also among the Tagals and Sikhs of India.[147]


CHAPTER IV.
ETHNIC CHARACTERS.

Various stages of social groups and essential characters of human societies: Progress.—Conditions of Progress: Innovating initiative, and tradition—Classification of “states of civilisation.”

Various stages of social groups and key characteristics of human societies: Progress.—Conditions for Progress: innovative initiative, and tradition—Classification of “states of civilization.”

I.—LINGUISTIC CHARACTERS.

I.—LANGUAGE CHARACTERS.

Methods of exchanging ideas within a short distance—Gesture and speech—Divisions of language according to structure—Jargons—Communications at a relatively remote distance: optic and acoustic signals—Transmission of ideas at any distance and time whatever—Handwriting—Mnemotechnic objects—Pictography—Ideography—Alphabets—Direction of the lines of handwriting.

Ways to exchange ideas over short distances—Gestures and spoken words—Types of language based on structure—Slang—Communication over longer distances: visual and sound signals—Sharing ideas at any distance and at any time—Writing—Memory aids—Pictures—Symbols—Alphabets—Direction of writing lines.

SO far we have considered man as an isolated being, apart from the groupings which he forms with his fellows. But in order to get a correct idea of the sum-total of the manifestations of his physical life, and especially of his psychical life, we must further consider him in his social environment.

SO far, we have looked at man as a separate individual, different from the groups he forms with others. However, to truly understand the totality of his physical and especially his mental experiences, we need to view him in his social context.

Nowhere on the earth has there been found a race of men the members of which lived completely alone and isolated as the majority of animals are seen to do. It is in fact but very rarely that the latter combine into societies; they form a family group only temporarily during the period of raising the young, etc. Man, on the contrary, becomes almost helpless apart from society, incapable of maintaining the struggle for existence without the help of his fellow-men. The development of all the manifestations of “sociality” is then the measure of progress of human societies. The more man[Pg 124] is “socialised,” if I may thus express it, the less he depends on nature.

Nowhere on earth has there been a human race whose members lived completely alone and isolated like most animals tend to do. In fact, it's very rare for animals to form societies; they only create temporary family groups while raising their young, etc. Humans, on the other hand, become almost helpless without society, unable to survive the struggle for existence without the support of others. The development of all forms of "sociality" is then a measure of the progress of human societies. The more socialized a person becomes, the less they depend on nature.

This dependence on nature has long served as a criterion in ethnography for dividing peoples into two groups—the “civilised” and the “savage.” The name given by the Germans to “savages,” Naturvölker (peoples in a state of nature), explains sufficiently this way of looking at things. According to their greater or less dependence on nature, peoples were divided into hunters, shepherds or nomads, and tillers of the soil or settlers, without, however, characterising in a very precise way each of these states. Morgan was the first to bring a little definiteness into this nomenclature, and at the same time he has shown the necessity of introducing another criterion into the estimate of states of civilisation. In fact, to establish the three forms of socialisation—savage, barbarous, and civilised—he has accepted as a distinctive mark between the second and the third the existence of handwriting—that is to say, of the material means used by the two forces necessary to the inception and maintenance of progress: innovating initiative, and conservation of what has been acquired.[148] He has not made as much of this classification as, in my opinion, he might have done. In fact, the ethnic groups of the earth only differ among themselves from the social point of view by the degree of culture—its essence being always and everywhere the same: pursuit of more and more easy means of satisfying wants and desires. Now, if the form assumed by this species of activity, in a word, if production, subject to the influence of climate, geographical position, etc., is the basis of all social development, as Grosse has so well shown,[149] the nature and evolution of the needs and desires themselves depend up to a certain point on the “temperament” of the[Pg 125] race, which must likewise be taken into consideration. The nature and amount of psychic force in any given society, the evolution of which is effected by its mode of production, may in its turn, having attained a certain degree of development, re-act on the economic state, and modify it. We see nothing like this in the animal communities. Bees and ants arrange their hives and manage the affairs of their community to-day as they did a thousand insect-generations ago. It is very probable that race has something to do with psychic force, but up to the present time the fact has not been scientifically demonstrated. However that may be, in order to form a correct opinion as to the degree of civilisation of any people, we should have to take into consideration not only its material culture, but also its état d’âme, its psychology, to realise the psychical resources which it has at its command. Thus certain peoples (Australians, Bushmen), though at the bottom of the scale as regards material culture, are nevertheless well endowed from the artistic point of view; in the same way the Polynesians of a hundred years ago, who were inferior in knowledge of pottery and metallurgy to the Negroes, were superior to them in general intelligence and the richness of their mythology.

This reliance on nature has long been used as a standard in ethnography to separate people into two groups—the “civilized” and the “savage.” The term the Germans use for “savages,” Naturvölker (peoples in a state of nature), clearly illustrates this perspective. Based on how much they depend on nature, people were categorized as hunters, pastoralists, or nomads, and farmers or settlers, although these categories weren't defined very precisely. Morgan was the first to clarify this classification a bit and also highlighted the need for introducing another criterion to evaluate states of civilization. In fact, he proposed three forms of social organization—savage, barbarous, and civilized—defining the distinction between the second and the third as the existence of writing, which represents the material means required by the two forces essential for initiating and sustaining progress: innovative initiative and the preservation of what has been achieved.[148] He hasn't emphasized this classification as much as I think he could have. The ethnic groups of the world differ from each other socially only by their degree of culture—its essence being consistently the same: the pursuit of increasingly easier ways to satisfy wants and desires. Now, if the way this activity manifests, in other words, if production, is influenced by climate, geographical location, etc., and serves as the foundation for all social development, as Grosse has demonstrated so well,[149] then the nature and evolution of needs and desires themselves are also somewhat influenced by the “temperament” of the[Pg 125] race, which also needs to be taken into account. The nature and amount of psychological strength in any given society, which evolves through its mode of production, may eventually, once it reaches a certain level of development, react back on the economic state and alter it. We don't observe anything similar in animal communities. Bees and ants organize their hives and manage their communities today just as they did thousands of insect generations ago. It's quite likely that race is connected to psychological strength, but so far, this hasn’t been scientifically proven. Regardless, to make an accurate assessment of the level of civilization of any people, we need to consider not only its material culture but also its état d’âme, its psychology, to understand the psychological resources it has available. Therefore, some groups (Australians, Bushmen), despite being at the bottom of the scale regarding material culture, are nonetheless rich in artistic talent; similarly, Polynesians from a hundred years ago, who were less skilled in pottery and metallurgy than the Negroes, excelled in general intelligence and the depth of their mythology.

But progress is only possible if, side by side with individual power of initiating change, there exists in the social aggregate what may be called the power of conservation. There may be produced among savage peoples, as Ratzel[150] has so well pointed out, persons of exceptional natural talent, men of genius; but the activity of these will almost always be sterile. Even if they succeed in ameliorating the material condition, in raising the moral or intellectual level of the members of their tribe or of their class, the result of their activity has only an ephemeral existence, their efforts are not continued, and after their death, for want of the conservative power, everything falls back into the primitive condition. The secret of civilisation lies not so much in efforts of isolated individuals as in accumulation of these efforts, in the transmission from one generation to[Pg 126] another of the acquired result, of a sum-total of knowledge which enables each generation to go further without beginning everything over again ab ovo. In this way progress is unlimited by the very conditions of its origin, and civilisation is only the sum of all the acquisitions of the human mind at any given period.

But progress is only possible when, alongside the individual ability to spark change, there is a collective force that can maintain stability. As Ratzel[150] pointed out, among primitive societies, there can be individuals with exceptional natural talent and genius, but their contributions will often be ineffective. Even if they manage to improve the material conditions or elevate the moral or intellectual standards of their tribe or class, their impact is usually short-lived. After their passing, without a sustaining force, everything reverts to its original state. The key to civilization does not lie solely in the efforts of individuals but in the accumulation of these efforts and the passing down of knowledge from one generation to[Pg 126] another. This shared knowledge allows each new generation to progress further without starting from scratch ab ovo. Thus, progress is boundless, sustained by the very nature of its creation, and civilization is simply the total accumulated knowledge and achievements of humanity at any given time.

The conservative and transmittive power become really established in a society only when the means of communicating thought are sufficiently developed, when language has taken a definite form, and an easy method is devised of fixing it by conventional signs more or less indelible and transmissible to future generations. Thus, to estimate different states of civilisation we must have recourse to linguistic characters, understanding by such everything which concerns the means of communicating ideas in time and space—that is to say, spoken or mimetic language and its graphic representation. But before passing rapidly in review the linguistic characters, I owe the reader a few words of explanation of the terms which I am about to use in designating “states of civilisation.”

The conservative and transmissive power truly establishes itself in a society only when the means of communicating thoughts are sufficiently developed, when language has taken a clear form, and a straightforward method is created for fixing it with conventional signs that are more or less permanent and can be passed down to future generations. So, to evaluate different levels of civilization, we need to refer to linguistic characters, which include everything related to the means of communicating ideas across time and space—that is, spoken or gestural language and its written representation. But before quickly reviewing the linguistic characters, I owe the reader a brief explanation of the terms I will use to describe “states of civilization.”

In these latter days a classification of these states nearly in accordance with the desiderata which were formulated at the beginning of this chapter has been proposed by Vierkandt.[151] This classification takes material culture into account, but the primordial division which is adopted in it, between peoples in a state of nature (or better, uncivilised) and civilised peoples, is based on the development of certain psychical traits denoting a greater or less development of individuality, of the spirit of free investigation, etc. Savage peoples, without any true civilisation, are divided in this classification into semi-civilised and uncivilised properly so-called, with sub-divisions into nomads and tillers of the soil for the former, and hunters and wanderers for the latter.

In recent times, Vierkandt has proposed a classification of these states that aligns closely with the goals outlined at the beginning of this chapter.[151] This classification considers material culture, but the main division it uses separates people in a state of nature (or more accurately, uncivilized) from civilized people. This distinction is based on the development of certain psychological traits indicating varying degrees of individuality, the spirit of free inquiry, and so on. Uncivilized groups, lacking true civilization, are further divided into semi-civilized and uncivilized categories, with subcategories for the former being nomads and farmers, and for the latter, hunters and wanderers.

Admitting the criterion of the existence or non-existence of writing and the relative value of the two elements of progress[Pg 127] mentioned above, I arrive at a classification of “states of civilisation” which recalls somewhat that of Vierkandt, but which differs from it on several points. It may be summarised as follows:—

Admitting the factor of whether writing exists or not and the relative importance of the two aspects of progress[Pg 127] mentioned earlier, I come up with a classification of "states of civilization" that is somewhat similar to Vierkandt's, but which differs in several respects. It can be summarized as follows:—

(1) Savage peoples, progressing exceedingly slowly, without writing, sometimes possessing a pictographic method; living in little groups of some hundreds or thousands of individuals. They are divided into two categories: hunters[152] (examples: Bushmen, Australians, Fuegians) and tillers of the soil (examples: Indians of North America, Melanesians, the majority of Negroes).

(1) Primitive societies evolve very slowly, lacking written language, sometimes using pictograms; living in small groups of a few hundred to a few thousand individuals. They fall into two categories: hunters[152] (for example: Bushmen, Australians, Fuegians) and agriculturists (for example: Native Americans, Melanesians, most Africans).

(2) Semi-civilised peoples, making an appreciable but slow progress, in which the conservative power predominates, forming authoritative societies or states of several thousands or millions of individuals; having an ideographic or phonetic writing, but a rudimentary literature. They are divided likewise into two categories: tillers of the soil (examples: Chinese, Siamese, Abyssinians, Malays, Ancient Egyptians, and Peruvians) and nomads (examples: Mongols, Arabs).

(2) Semi-civilized peoples, making noticeable but slow progress, where conservative power is dominant, creating authoritative societies or states with thousands or millions of individuals; having either ideographic or phonetic writing, but a basic level of literature. They are also divided into two categories: farmers (examples: Chinese, Siamese, Abyssinians, Malays, Ancient Egyptians, and Peruvians) and nomads (examples: Mongols, Arabs).

(3) Civilised peoples, making rapid progress, in which the initiating and innovating power predominates, forming states based on individual liberty, and consisting of several millions of individuals; having a phonetic writing and a developed literature. Their economic state is especially characterised by industrialism and cosmopolitan commercialism (examples: the majority of the peoples of Europe and North America).

(3) Civilized nations, making quick advancements, where the power of initiation and innovation is dominant, creating societies built on personal freedom and made up of millions of individuals; possessing a phonetic writing system and a rich literature. Their economic conditions are particularly marked by industrialism and global commerce (for example: most of the people in Europe and North America).

Having said this much, we shall begin the study of ethnic characters with those which we may consider the indispensable condition of all associability, that is to say the linguistic characters.

Having said this, we will start the study of ethnic traits with those that we can consider essential for all forms of social interaction, specifically linguistic traits.

I.—LINGUISTIC CHARACTERS.

Without pursuing the inquiry whether language is born of inarticulate cries, of onomatopæias or otherwise, whether it has a single or a multiple origin, we may content ourselves[Pg 128] with stating the fact, that language does not constitute the only means by which men may understand each other and communicate ideas. There are several others. They may be arranged in three groups:—means of communicating near at hand: gestures and words; means of communicating at a relatively remote distance: various signals; means of communicating at any distance and time whatever: writing.

Without getting into whether language comes from inarticulate sounds, onomatopoeia, or something else, and whether it has one origin or multiple origins, we can simply point out[Pg 128] that language isn't the only way people can understand each other and share ideas. There are several other methods. They can be categorized into three groups: ways to communicate up close: gestures and spoken words; ways to communicate over a relatively long distance: various signals; ways to communicate at any distance and time: writing.

Gestures.—Many gestures are natural and common to all men. All who have had to ask for anything to eat or drink in a foreign country without knowing the language, must have appreciated this means of international communication. However, the same gestures do not always and everywhere signify the same thing. Let us take, for example, the simplest ideas, negation and affirmation. In Central and Northern Europe these ideas are expressed, as every one knows, by a bending of the head forward and by lateral movements of the head. But there are few exotic peoples (Andamanese, Ainus, certain Hindus) who make use of the same gestures. Most of them, on the contrary, affirm by shaking the head laterally (Arabs, Botocudos, certain Negroes) and deny by raising it; most frequently this latter gesture is accompanied by an uplifting of the eyebrows (Abyssinians) or a particular smacking of the tongue (Syro-Arabs, Naya-Kurumbas, etc.). The natives of the Admiralty Islands express negation by a tap on the nose.[153] In Italy and generally in Mediterranean Europe, the signs of negation, with many other feelings besides, are expressed by gestures of the hands; thus to say “no,” the hand is moved sharply before the breast, the fingers being closed except the forefinger, which is held up vertically. Perhaps the practice of carrying burdens on the head, thus preventing the movements of this part of the body, has had something to do with the abundant development of gestures with the arms by which the European of the south may be recognised. An almost analogous sign, but consisting in a slow movement outward and downward, signifies “yes” among the Indians of North America. These last have pushed to the utmost limits the use of the language[Pg 129] of gesture. G. Mallery has collected the treasures of this language, which is being lost to-day, and has drawn up a vocabulary of it.[154] At the period when this language flourished, the Indians were able to express by gestures not only common and proper nouns, but also verbs, pronouns, particles, etc.; they made elaborate speeches by combining the gestures of the body, the head, and the arms. They introduced abbreviations exactly as that is done in pictographic writing. Here is an example of how a Dakota Indian (Fig. 26) says by means of gestures, I am going home: he brings his hand with the forefinger stretched out towards his breast (I), then extends it forward and outward as high as the shoulder (am going), and, closing the fist, he lets it drop abruptly (home). It is supposed that extreme diversity of dialects has been the chief cause of the development of this strange sign-language; it would serve as a bond between tribes which could not converse with one another.

Gestures.—Many gestures are natural and common to everyone. Anyone who has had to ask for food or drink in a foreign country without knowing the language has likely appreciated this form of international communication. However, the same gestures don’t always mean the same thing everywhere. For instance, take the basic ideas of negation and affirmation. In Central and Northern Europe, these ideas are expressed by nodding the head forward and shaking it side to side. But few cultures (like the Andamanese, Ainus, and certain Hindus) use the same gestures. Most of them, on the other hand, affirm by shaking their heads sideways (like Arabs, Botocudos, and certain African groups) and deny by raising their heads; often, this latter gesture is accompanied by raising the eyebrows (like Abyssinians) or a specific clicking of the tongue (like Syro-Arabs and Naya-Kurumbas). The natives of the Admiralty Islands show negation by tapping their noses.[153] In Italy and generally in Mediterranean Europe, signs of negation, along with many other feelings, are expressed through hand gestures; to say “no,” the hand is moved sharply in front of the chest, with the fingers closed except for the forefinger, which is held up vertically. Perhaps carrying burdens on the head, which limits head movement, has contributed to the rich development of arm gestures that characterize Southern Europeans. A similar sign, but with a slow outward and downward movement, means “yes” among Native Americans. These groups have pushed the use of sign language to its limits[Pg 129]. G. Mallery has collected examples of this language, which is fading today, and has compiled a vocabulary for it.[154] When this language was thriving, the Indians could express not only common and proper nouns but also verbs, pronouns, particles, and more through gestures; they delivered complex speeches by combining movements of their body, head, and arms. They also created abbreviations similar to those found in pictographic writing. Here’s an example of how a Dakota Indian (Fig. 26) conveys I am going home with gestures: he brings his hand with the forefinger pointed towards his chest (I), then extends it forward and outward up to shoulder height (am going), and, closing his fist, lets it drop suddenly (home). It is believed that the extreme diversity of dialects has been the main reason for the development of this unique sign language; it served as a connection between tribes that couldn’t communicate verbally.

Dakota Gesture Language

FIG. 26.—Dakota Indian gesture language.
(After Mallery.)

Fig. 26.—Dakota Indian sign language.
(After Mallery.)

Speech.—Setting aside the almost unique example of the North American Indians, gestures are generally only the[Pg 130] auxiliaries of speech. The latter, which is the exclusive appanage of the genus Homo, while it is formed of a somewhat limited number of articulate sounds, nevertheless presents such a mass of varied combinations of these sounds that at first one would expect to be lost in the multitude of languages, dialects, idioms, vernacular forms, etc. Fortunately, linguists have been able to establish the fact that, in spite of their apparent diversity, dialects are capable of being grouped into languages, and the latter into linguistic families, which, in their turn, have been reduced, according to their morphological structure, to three principal groups: monosyllabic or isolating languages, agglutinative languages, and inflectional languages.

Speech.—Aside from the almost unique case of North American Indians, gestures are usually just the[Pg 130] support of speech. The latter, which is uniquely human, consists of a somewhat limited set of articulated sounds but offers such a vast array of combinations that at first, it seems overwhelming with the multitude of languages, dialects, idioms, vernacular forms, etc. Luckily, linguists have been able to show that, despite their obvious differences, dialects can be categorized into languages, and those languages into linguistic families. These families have, in turn, been classified into three main groups based on their morphological structure: monosyllabic or isolating languages, agglutinative languages, and inflectional languages.

In the monosyllabic languages all the words are roots, there are neither suffixes nor prefixes nor any modification of the words, and their relation in a proposition is only given by the respective places which they occupy in it. Thus in the Chinese language the word ta may signify “great, greatness, greatly, to enlarge,” according to its position in the phrase. The grammar is entirely a matter of syntax. Homophonous words of various signification abound in it, and in speech are only distinguished by the way in which they are pronounced, by the tones, high, low, rising, falling, interrogatory, etc.

In monosyllabic languages, all the words are roots; there are no suffixes or prefixes, and no changes to the words. Their relation in a sentence is only determined by their position in it. For example, in Chinese, the word ta can mean “great, greatness, greatly, to enlarge,” depending on where it appears in a phrase. The grammar is solely focused on syntax. There are many homophonous words with different meanings, and in spoken language, they are distinguished only by pronunciation, including tones like high, low, rising, falling, and interrogative.

In agglutinative languages the words are formed of several elements, adhering, agglutinated together, of which one only possesses its own peculiar value, the others being coupled with it to define it, and having an entirely relative signification. The first of these elements is the root of the word, whilst the others are only obsolete roots, having lost their own signification, and are reduced to the rank of determinative particles or affixes with a definite meaning. The affixes may be placed before the root (as in the Bantu languages), and then they bear the name of prefixes, or at the end (as in Turkish and Mongolian), and then they are called suffixes. Thus the suffix lar or liar in Turkish gives the signification of the plural of the word to which it is joined (ex. arkan, the rope; arkanlar, the ropes); the suffix[Pg 131] tchi designates the person concerned with something, etc., for instance, arkantchi, rope-maker; the suffix ly indicates possession (ex. arkanly, with a cord, attached). Other suffixes, la, lyk, denote action, quality (arkanla, to attach with a cord; arkanlyk, the best kind of cord).[155]

In agglutinative languages, words are made up of multiple components that stick together. Only one of these components has its own specific meaning, while the others are connected to it to add definition and have a completely relative meaning. The first component is the root of the word, while the others are just outdated roots that have lost their original meaning and have become determinative particles or affixes with specific meanings. The affixes can be placed before the root (as seen in Bantu languages), in which case they're called prefixes, or after the root (like in Turkish and Mongolian), where they're referred to as suffixes. For example, the suffix lar or liar in Turkish signifies the plural of the word it's attached to (e.g., arkan, meaning rope; arkanlar, meaning ropes); the suffix[Pg 131] tchi indicates the person involved in something, such as arkantchi, meaning rope-maker; the suffix ly shows possession (e.g., arkanly, meaning with a cord, attached). Other suffixes, la, lyk, express action or quality (e.g., arkanla, to attach with a cord; arkanlyk, meaning the best kind of cord).[155]

Among the agglutinative languages we distinguish a special group called polysynthetic or incorporating languages; this group is formed exclusively of American idioms. It is characterised by the phenomenon of incorporation, by syncope or by ellipsis, of nouns to the verb, so as to form but one word of the whole proposition; for instance, in Algonkin, the phrase-word nadholiniu, “bring us the canoe,” is formed of the elided words naten bring, amochol canoe, i euphonic, and niu to us. A similar incorporation takes place when in Italian they say, for instance, dicendo-ci-lo, “in telling it to us.”

Among the agglutinative languages, there’s a specific group called polysynthetic or incorporating languages; this group consists exclusively of American languages. It is characterized by incorporating nouns into the verb through processes like omission or abbreviation, creating a single word for the entire proposition. For example, in Algonkin, the word nadholiniu, meaning “bring us the canoe,” is made up of the shortened words naten (bring), amochol (canoe), i (euphonic), and niu (to us). A similar incorporation occurs in Italian, where they say, for instance, dicendo-ci-lo, meaning “in telling it to us.”

The inflectional languages differ from the agglutinative to this extent, that the root may modify its form to express its relations with another root. But this change is not indispensable; sometimes the inflection may be attained by the modification of prefix or suffix. Thus, in Hebrew, the root mlch gives, when modified, malach he reigned, malchu they reigned, melechu the king, melachim kings, etc.

The inflectional languages are different from the agglutinative languages in that the root can change its form to show its relationship with another root. However, this change isn't always necessary; sometimes inflection can be achieved by altering a prefix or suffix. For example, in Hebrew, the root mlch can be modified to produce malach (he reigned), malchu (they reigned), melechu (the king), melachim (kings), and so on.

With the exception of the Chinese, the peoples of Indo-China, and the Thibetans, who speak monosyllabic languages, and also the Indo-Europeans and the Semito-Hamites, who use inflectional languages, all the rest of mankind belongs, by its mode of speech, to the division of agglutinative language. It must not be thought, however, that the difference is very marked in the three categories which I have just mentioned. We have already seen, for example, that the inflectional languages, like Italian, may have agglutinative forms; the Arab, the Frenchman, the Provençal have also recourse occasionally to agglutination; on the other hand, most of the isolating languages of Indo-China and Thibet exhibit several agglutinative characteristics, and even in[Pg 132] Chinese, that pre-eminently monosyllabic language, there may be distinguished “fullroots having their signification, and “emptyroots playing the part of affixes.

With the exception of the Chinese, the people of Indo-China, and the Tibetans, who speak monosyllabic languages, along with the Indo-Europeans and the Semito-Hamites, who use inflectional languages, all other humans have a mode of speech that falls into the category of agglutinative language. However, it shouldn't be assumed that the distinction is very clear-cut among the three categories I just mentioned. We've already seen, for example, that inflectional languages, like Italian, can have agglutinative forms; Arabs, French, and Provençals also occasionally use agglutination. On the flip side, many isolating languages from Indo-China and Tibet display several agglutinative traits, and even in[Pg 132] Chinese, which is primarily monosyllabic, you can identify “fullroots that have their own meanings, and “emptyroots that function as affixes.

It was thought until quite recently that originally all the languages of the earth were monosyllabic, that by a process of evolution they became transformed into agglutinative languages, passing thence into the final and most perfect form, the inflectional. But the immense disproportion between the number of peoples speaking the agglutinative languages and that of the other two categories; the presence of the agglutinative forms in monosyllabic languages; the unequivocal tendency of several inflected languages, like English, towards monosyllabism; lastly, the recent researches of Terrien de Lacouperie into the ancient pronunciation of Thibetan and Chinese words, have appreciably shaken this belief: one is rather led to see in agglutination the most primitive form of language. From it would be derived monosyllabism, polysyntheticism, and inflection; the two latter forms would tend in their turn towards monosyllabism.[156] I shall mention with regard to each of the principal ethnic groups, the peculiarities of the languages which they speak, and in Chapter VIII. I shall say a few words about linguistic classifications and the relation between “peoples” and “languages.” For the moment it is enough to point out that besides morphological structure, there are other characters: vocabulary, grammatical and phonetic forms, which enable us to group the allied idioms into linguistic families. Let me add that side by side with the thousands of languages and principal dialects distributed among the populations of the earth, there exist jargons, that is to say, semi-artificial languages, originating especially in the necessities of commerce.[157]

It was believed until fairly recently that all the languages of the world were originally monosyllabic and that, through evolution, they transformed into agglutinative languages, which then evolved into the most advanced form, inflectional languages. However, the significant disparity between the number of people who speak agglutinative languages compared to the other two categories; the occurrence of agglutinative forms in monosyllabic languages; the clear trend of several inflected languages, like English, towards monosyllabism; and the recent research by Terrien de Lacouperie into the ancient pronunciation of Tibetan and Chinese words have seriously challenged this belief. It seems more reasonable to consider agglutination as the most primitive form of language. Monosyllabism, polysyntheticism, and inflection could all derive from it; the latter two forms would also tend towards monosyllabism.[156] I will mention the unique characteristics of the languages spoken by each of the main ethnic groups, and in Chapter VIII. I will discuss linguistic classifications and the connection between “peoples” and “languages.” For now, it’s important to highlight that, in addition to morphological structure, there are other aspects: vocabulary, grammatical and phonetic forms, that allow us to group related languages into families. Additionally, alongside the thousands of languages and major dialects spoken by the world's populations, there are jargons, which are semi-artificial languages that mainly arise from the needs of commerce.[157]

Let us not forget either that the different sexes and certain castes or classes, especially of sorcerers and priests, have often a special language, sacred or otherwise, but always unknown to persons of the other sex or of other castes, and kept secret. Language varies also among certain peoples (for example, among the Javanese) according as a superior speaks to an inferior, or vice versâ.

Let’s also remember that different genders and certain castes or classes, especially sorcerers and priests, often have a specific language, whether sacred or not, that remains unknown to people of the opposite gender or from different castes, and is kept secret. Language also varies among certain groups (for example, the Javanese) depending on whether a superior is speaking to an inferior, or vice versa.

Signals.—To communicate at a distance relatively remote, all peoples make use of optic or acoustic signals. Optic signals are at first amplified gestures; thus the various tribes of Red Indians recognised each other at a distance by making conventional signs with the arms and the body. An arm raised high with two fingers uplifted and the others closed, signified “Who are you?” etc. Signals by means of lighted fires, to announce the tidings of a beast killed, the approach of the enemy, etc., still remain in use among the Indians of America, not only in the north, but also in the south of the continent as far as Cape Horn. Signalling by means of objects visible from afar, of a more complicated kind, is in everyday use even among civilised peoples, forming the basis of optic telegraphy; and there exists for sailors of all nations a truly international language, by means of flags of different colours, the code and the dictionary of which are found on board of every ship bound on a long voyage.

Signals.—To communicate over long distances, all cultures use visual or sound signals. Visual signals start as simple gestures; for example, different tribes of Native Americans recognized each other from afar by using specific signs with their arms and bodies. An arm raised high with two fingers up and the rest closed meant “Who are you?” and so on. Using lit fires to signal news about a game hunted, the approach of an enemy, etc., is still practiced by Native Americans, not only in the north but also in the south of the continent down to Cape Horn. Signaling with objects that can be seen from a distance, which is more complex, is commonly used even among civilized societies, forming the basis of visual telegraphy. There’s also a truly international language for sailors of all nations, using flags of different colors, the code and dictionary of which are available on every ship embarking on a long journey.

Among acoustic signals, apart from conventional cries and sounds of instruments, we must note two kinds of language of a quite special character. There is, firstly, the whistle language, which by means of whistles more or less loud, succeeding in a certain order and produced simply by the mouth, sometimes by introducing into it two fingers, enables a conversation to be held at a distance.

Among acoustic signals, besides regular cries and sounds from instruments, we should highlight two unique types of language. First is the whistle language, which uses whistles of varying loudness, arranged in a specific order and created just by the mouth—sometimes by placing two fingers in it—allowing for conversations to happen over long distances.

This language has attained a high degree of perfection in[Pg 134] the Canary Islands,[158] but is also known in other parts of the globe (among the Berbers of Tunis, for instance). This language, however, must not be confounded with conventional signals, always the same, given by the whistle for commands in the navy, for example. The other mode of communicating at a distance, a highly developed one, is the drum language of the Dualas and other Bantu Negroes of the Cameroons, the Gallas, the Papuans, etc. With simply a drum they succeed, by varying the number and the order of the beats, in forming a veritable language of two hundred to three hundred words, very complicated and difficult to learn.[159]

This language has reached a high level of perfection in[Pg 134] the Canary Islands,[158] but it is also found in other parts of the world (like among the Berbers of Tunis, for example). However, this language shouldn’t be confused with standard signals that are always the same, like those given by a whistle for commands in the navy. Another advanced method of communicating at a distance is the drum language of the Dualas and other Bantu people in the Cameroons, the Gallas, the Papuans, and so on. Using just a drum, they manage to create a true language of two hundred to three hundred words by varying the number and order of the beats, which is quite complex and challenging to learn.[159]

Writing by Notches

FIG. 27.—
Writing by notches
of the Laotians.
(After Harmand, Engraving
of the Soc. Anthrop. Paris.
)

FIG. 27.—
Writing by notches
of the Laotians.
(After Harmand, Engraving
of the Soc. Anthrop. Paris.
)

Writing.—The idea of communicating his thought graphically, in time and in space, to his fellow, must have come to man from the origin of civilisation; but through what stages must it have passed before becoming embodied in a system at once so simple and ingenious as that of alphabetic writing! Before inventing phonetic writing in general, man must have passed through the period of ideographic writing, and this is already an advance on another and prior method of representing and communicating thought, a method much more simple, which may be called in a general way the use of symbolic objects and mnemonic marks. As typical of this use of symbolic objects we may mention the messages of the Malays of Sumatra, which are formed of packets containing different objects: small quantities of salt, pepper, betel, etc., having respectively the signification of love, hate, jealousy, etc. According to the quantity and arrangement of the objects in the packet the message serves to express such or such a feeling. This system attains its perfection in the Wampums of the Red Indians. These are either chaplets of beads of different colours fashioned from shells (Fig. 83, 7), also used as money, or embroideries made with the same beads on long ribbons forming kinds of belts, which have[Pg 135] the value of diplomatic documents to the Indians.[160] The staff-messages in use among the Melanesians, the Niam-Niams, the Ashantis, and the peasants of Lusatia and Silesia, etc., have the same signification. This is often a sort of passport or a summons; the form of the staff, as well as the particular marks which it bears, are so many signs to make known the commands of the chief, or of the mayor, the order of the day for the assembly, etc.

Writing.—The idea of expressing thoughts visually, both in time and space, has likely been with humans since the dawn of civilization; but it must have gone through many stages before evolving into a system as simple and clever as alphabetic writing. Before developing phonetic writing generally, humans must have experienced a phase of ideographic writing, which represents an improvement over an even earlier method of expressing and sharing thoughts—a much simpler approach that can broadly be referred to as the use of symbolic objects and mnemonic marks. One example of this use of symbolic objects is the messages sent by the Malays of Sumatra, which consist of packets containing various items: small amounts of salt, pepper, betel, etc., each representing feelings such as love, hate, jealousy, and so on. Depending on the quantity and arrangement of the items in the packet, the message conveys a specific sentiment. This system reaches its height in the Wampums of the Native Americans. These consist of necklaces made from different colored beads crafted from shells (Fig. 83, 7), which also serve as currency, or embroideries made with the same beads on long ribbons that create belts, which hold[Pg 135] the same importance as official documents among the Indians.[160] The staff-messages used by the Melanesians, the Niam-Niams, the Ashantis, and the villagers of Lusatia and Silesia, etc., have a similar significance. These often act as a kind of passport or summons; the shape of the staff, along with the specific marks it bears, serves as signals to communicate the orders of the chief or mayor, or the agenda for the gathering, etc.

The notches which these staffs sometimes bear form a connecting link with the mnemonic marks which the less civilised peoples have the habit of making on trees, on bits of bark, or pieces of wood. It is the first step towards writing properly so called. Little horn tablets bearing notches have been found in the sepulchral caverns of the quaternary period at Aurignac (Dordogne). Even still the Eskimo, the Yakuts, the Ostiaks, the Macusis of Guiana, the Negroes of the west coast of Africa, the Laotians, the Melanesians, the Micronesians, commonly make use of them to keep their accounts, or note simple facts; they even continue in use among Europeans, as a survival of the old practice under the form of “baker’s tallies,” or words to denote letters (Buchstabe, little staff of “beechwood,” in German), etc. Here, for instance, is the translation of what was conveyed by a notched tablet found by Harmand in a Laotian village attacked by a cholera epidemic (Fig. 27): Twelve days from now (12 notches to the right) every man who shall venture to penetrate into our enclosure will remain a prisoner, or pay us four buffaloes (4 notches lower down) or twelve ticals (pieces of money) as ransom (12 notches). On the other side, but doubtful, is the number of men (8), women (9), and children (11) of the village.[161]

The notches that these staffs sometimes have create a link to the mnemonic marks that less civilized peoples typically make on trees, pieces of bark, or bits of wood. It’s the first step towards proper writing. Small horn tablets with notches have been discovered in the burial caves from the quaternary period at Aurignac (Dordogne). Even today, the Eskimo, Yakuts, Ostiaks, Macusis of Guiana, Negroes of the west coast of Africa, Laotians, Melanesians, and Micronesians commonly use these to keep their accounts or note simple facts; they even persist among Europeans as a remnant of the old practice in the form of “baker’s tallies,” or words to indicate letters (Buchstabe, little staff of “beechwood,” in German), etc. For instance, here’s what a notched tablet found by Harmand in a Laotian village hit by a cholera outbreak conveyed (Fig. 27): Twelve days from now (12 notches to the right), anyone who dares enter our enclosure will either stay a prisoner or pay us four buffaloes (4 notches lower down) or twelve ticals (pieces of money) as ransom (12 notches). On the other side, though it's uncertain, is the number of men (8), women (9), and children (11) of the village.[161]

An analogous mnemotechnical object is the knotted cord,[Pg 136] which is met with among a great number of peoples, Ostiaks, Angola and Loango Negroes, Malagasi, Alfurus of the Celebes, etc. According to the number and colour of the cords, and the number of the knots which they bear, events past or to come are brought to mind, accounts of a bartering transaction kept, etc. Among the Micronesians of the Pelew Islands, when two individuals make an appointment with one another for a certain date, each makes on a cord as many knots as there remain days to run. Undoing a knot each day and coming to the last knot at the date of the appointment, they of necessity recall it. According to Chinese tradition, the first inhabitants of the banks of the Hoang-ho, before the invention of writing properly so called, also made use of little cords knotted to notched staffs as mnemonic instruments. Besides, is not our practice of tying a knot in our handkerchief to remember something a simple survival of these customs? The method of expressing certain events and certain ideas by means of knots made in different ways and variously arranged has been carried to the last degree of perfection in the case of the quipus of the ancient Peruvians. The quipus are cord rings to which are attached various little cords of different colours. On each of these little cords are found two or more knots variously formed. The Peruvian and Bolivian shepherds again make use of similar quipus, but much less complicated, to keep accounts. Let us also note in the same order of ideas the different marks of ownership, of family relationship, of tribeship (the Totems of the Red Indians, the Tamgas of the Kirghiz, etc.), which it is the custom to put on weapons, dwellings, animals, and even the bodies of the[Pg 137] men (New Zealand). Hence are derived trade-marks and armorial bearings.

An equivalent memory aid is the knotted cord,[Pg 136] found among many cultures, including the Ostiaks, the Angola and Loango Negroes, the Malagasi, and the Alfurus of the Celebes, among others. The number and color of the cords, as well as the number of knots they have, help people remember past or future events, keep track of trade transactions, and so on. In Micronesia, specifically the Pelew Islands, when two people make an appointment for a specific date, each ties a knot for every remaining day until the meeting. By undoing one knot each day until they reach the last one on the appointment date, they inevitably remember it. According to Chinese tradition, the earliest inhabitants along the Hoang-ho river, before writing was invented, also used knotted cords on notched sticks as memory tools. Additionally, isn’t our habit of tying a knot in our handkerchief to remember something a simple version of these customs? The practice of conveying certain events and ideas through knots arranged in different ways has reached a high level of sophistication with the quipus of the ancient Peruvians. The quipus consist of cord rings with various smaller cords of different colors attached. Each of these smaller cords has two or more knots in various patterns. Peruvian and Bolivian shepherds also use similar, but much simpler, quipus for record-keeping. It’s also worth noting the different symbols of ownership, family ties, and tribal affiliation (such as the Totems of Native Americans and the Tamgas of the Kirghiz), which are customarily marked on weapons, homes, animals, and even people’s bodies[Pg 137] (New Zealand). These practices are the origins of trademarks and family crests.

Lastly, are not the pebbles bearing strokes printed in red, the number of which varies from one to nine, and several other signs (Fig. 28), found by M. Piette[162] in the palæolithic stations of the south of France, at Mas-d’Azil (Ariège), also mnemonic objects? It has been asserted that they were playing dice, but the size of the pebbles is against this view.

Lastly, aren’t the pebbles marked with red strokes, varying from one to nine, along with several other symbols (Fig. 28), discovered by M. Piette[162] in the Paleolithic sites of southern France, at Mas-d’Azil (Ariège), also memory aids? Some have claimed that they were used as dice, but the size of the pebbles contradicts this idea.

Coloured Pebbles

FIG. 28.—Coloured prehistoric pebbles of the grotto of Mas-d’Azil (Ariège).
1 and 1A, two sides of the same pebble; 2, pebble with three marks;
3, pebble with four marks differently arranged.
(After Piette.)

FInstagram. 28.—Colored prehistoric pebbles from the grotto of Mas-d’Azil (Ariège).
1 and 1A, two sides of the same pebble; 2, pebble with three marks;
3, pebble with four marks arranged differently.
(After Piette.)

Eskimo Pictography

FIG. 29.—Journal of the voyage of an Eskimo of Alaska. Example of pictography.
(After Mallery-Hoffmann.)

FIG. 29.—Journal of an Alaskan Eskimo's voyage. Example of pictography.
(After Mallery-Hoffmann.)

The methods which I have just mentioned are the precursors of true writing. This really only begins with drawings expressing a sequence of ideas, with pictography. Imperfect attempts at pictography are found in the drawings of the Melanesians, representing different events of their life; in certain rock-pictures of the Bushmen (Fig. 64) and Australians. But already among the Eskimo, side by side with the simple representation of objects, certain figures are seen to appear denoting action or relations between objects: this is the beginning of ideographic writing. Here, for example, is the gist of a hunting story engraved by an Eskimo of Alaska on[Pg 138] an ivory whip (Fig. 29). The first figure (1) represents the story-teller himself, his right hand making the gesture which indicates “I,” and his left, turned in the direction in which he is going, means “go.” Continuing our translation, we read the subsequent figures as follows:—(2) “in a boat” (paddle raised); (3) “sleep” (hand on the head) “one night” (the left hand shows a finger); (4) “(on) an island with a hut in the middle” (the little point); (5) “I going (farther);” (6) “(arrive at) an (other) isle inhabited” (without a point); (7) “spend (there) two nights;” (8) “hunt with harpoon;” (9) “a seal;” (10) “hunt with bow;” (11) “return in canoe with another person” (two oars directed backward); (12) “(to) the hut of the encampment.” As is evident, this ideography bears a relation to the language of gesture. It might be thus assumed a priori that it is highly developed among the Indians of North America, and as a matter of fact it is. The number of pictographs on tablets of wood, bits of bark, skins (often on those forming the tent), is enormous in every tribe. These are messages, hunting stories, songs, veritable annals embracing cycles of seventy, a hundred and more years (the latter bear the picturesque name of “winter tales”).[163] We may judge of the degree of development of this art among the Indians by the following example of a petition (Fig. 30) presented in 1849 to the President of the United States by the Chippeway chiefs asking for the possession of certain small lakes (8) situated in the neighbourhood of Lake Superior (10), towards which[Pg 139] leads a certain road (11). The petition is painted in symbolic colours (blue for water, white for the road, etc.) on a piece of bark. Figure 1 represents the principal petitioning chief, the totem of whose clan is an emblematic and ancestral animal (see Chapter VII.), the crane; the animals which follow are the totems of his co-petitioners. Their eyes are all connected with his to express unity of view (6), their hearts with his to express unity of feeling. The eye of the crane, symbol of the principal chief, is moreover the point of departure of two lines: one directed towards the President (claim) and the other towards the lakes (object of claim). In the other pictographs the symbolism is carried yet further by the reproduction either of parts of the object for the object itself (head or footmarks for the whole animal, etc.), or by conventional objects for very complicated ideas. Thus the Dakotas indicate “a fight” by the simple drawing of two arrows directed against each other (Fig. 31, 1); the Ojibways represent morning by the rising sun (2), “nothing” by the gesture of a man stretching out his arms despairingly (3), and “to eat” by the gesture of the hand carried to the mouth (4), exactly as the ancient Mexicans and Egyptians have drawn it in their hieroglyphics, or again, the natives of Easter Island (Fig. 31, 5) in[Pg 140] their rude attempt at ideographic writing on their “speech tablets.”[164] The writing of these tablets is but a series of mnemonic signs which succeed each other in boustrophedon arrangement (see p. 142), being used for sacred and profane songs, or for magical rites.

The methods I just mentioned are the beginnings of true writing. It really starts with drawings that express a sequence of ideas, known as pictography. Imperfect examples of pictography can be seen in the drawings of the Melanesians, which depict various events from their lives, as well as in certain rock art from the Bushmen (Fig. 64) and Australians. However, even among the Eskimo, alongside simple representations of objects, we see figures that denote action or relationships between objects: this is the start of ideographic writing. For instance, here’s the essence of a hunting story carved by an Eskimo from Alaska on[Pg 138] an ivory whip (Fig. 29). The first figure (1) shows the storyteller himself, with his right hand making the gesture for “I,” and his left hand pointing in the direction he is going, indicating “go.” As we translate, we interpret the next figures as follows:—(2) “in a boat” (with a raised paddle); (3) “sleep” (hand on the head) “one night” (the left hand showing a finger); (4) “(on) an island with a hut in the middle” (the small point); (5) “I going (farther);” (6) “(arrive at) another inhabited isle” (without a point); (7) “spend (there) two nights;” (8) “hunt with a harpoon;” (9) “a seal;” (10) “hunt with a bow;” (11) “return in a canoe with another person” (two oars pointing backward); (12) “(to) the hut of the encampment.” Clearly, this ideography is related to sign language. One could surmise a priori that it is well-developed among Native Americans, and in fact, it is. The number of pictographs on wooden tablets, bits of bark, and skins (often those used to build the tent) is vast across every tribe. These serve as messages, hunting stories, songs, and real chronicles covering periods of seventy, a hundred years, or more (the latter being whimsically called “winter tales”).[163] We can gauge the level of development of this art among Native Americans with an example of a petition (Fig. 30) presented in 1849 to the President of the United States by the Chippeway chiefs, requesting the ownership of certain small lakes (8) located near Lake Superior (10), towards which[Pg 139] a specific road (11) leads. The petition is painted in symbolic colors (blue for water, white for the road, etc.) on a piece of bark. Figure 1 depicts the main chief petitioning, whose clan totem is an emblematic ancestral animal (see Chapter VII.), the crane; the animals that follow are the totems of his fellow petitioners. Their eyes are all connected to his, indicating a shared perspective (6), and their hearts are linked to his to express unity of feeling. The crane's eye, representing the principal chief, is also the starting point for two lines: one directed toward the President (claim) and the other toward the lakes (object of claim). In the other pictographs, the symbolism is taken further by depicting parts of an object to represent the whole (like a head or footprints for the entire animal) or by using conventional symbols for more complex ideas. For instance, the Dakotas illustrate “a fight” with a simple drawing of two arrows pointing at each other (Fig. 31, 1); the Ojibways depict morning with the rising sun (2), “nothing” with a gesture of a man stretching out his arms in despair (3), and “to eat” with the motion of a hand going to the mouth (4), just like the ancient Mexicans and Egyptians portrayed it in their hieroglyphics, or the natives of Easter Island (Fig. 31, 5) in their crude attempts at ideographic writing on their “speech tablets.”[164] The writing on these tablets consists of a series of mnemonic signs arranged in boustrophedon style (see p. 142), used for both sacred and everyday songs, or for magical rituals.

Petition of Chippeway Indians

FIG. 30.—Petition of Chippeway Indians to the President of the United States. Example of pictography.
(After Schoolcraft.)

FIG. 30.—Petition of Chippeway Indians to the President of the United States. An example of pictography.
(After Schoolcraft.)

From a similar pictographic method is derived the figurative writing in hieroglyphics of the Egyptians, the Chinese, the Mexicans of the table-land of Anahuoc and their neighbours the Mayas of the peninsula of Yucatan. This mode of writing is a step in advance; certain figures have the phonetic value of the first syllable of the word which they represent. It is the rebus or “iconomatic” system, as Brinton calls it. Thus the first words of the Lord’s Prayer are represented in the Mexican code by the figures of a flag (Fig. 32) (pantli), a stone (tetl), the fruit of the Indian fig (nochtli), and another stone (tetl), the first syllables of which form pa-te-noch-te (Pater-noster).[165] The drawings not representing more than sounds, in this species of writing there is a tendency to simplify them, and thus we see the primitive figure being transformed into a conventional sign representing a sound, a[Pg 141] syllable. This transformation may be traced in the Egyptian hieroglyphics as well as in the cuneiform writing of the ancient Assyrians. In Chinese writing the same phenomenon has taken place, as is evident from Fig. 33, which represents the ancient hieroglyphics side by side with the modern—morning, 1; the moon, 2; a mountain, 3; tree, 4; dog, 5; horse, 6; man, 7. These characters, though simplified, have kept their first signification corresponding to the figure. The association of these figures with the purely phonetic signs constitutes one of the principal resources of Chinese writing, which enables homophonic words,[166] etc., to be distinguished.

From a similar pictographic method comes the figurative writing in hieroglyphics used by the Egyptians, the Chinese, the Mexicans of the Anahuac highlands, and their neighbors the Mayas of the Yucatán Peninsula. This writing style is a step forward; certain images represent the sounds of the first syllable of the word they depict. It's known as the rebus or “iconomatic” system, as Brinton refers to it. For example, the first words of the Lord’s Prayer are represented in the Mexican code by the symbols of a flag (Fig. 32) (pantli), a stone (tetl), the fruit of the Indian fig (nochtli), and another stone (tetl), the first syllables of which spell out pa-te-noch-te (Pater-noster).[165] Since the images represent mainly sounds, this type of writing tends to simplify them, leading to the primitive figure being changed into a conventional symbol that represents a sound, a[Pg 141] syllable. This change can be observed in both Egyptian hieroglyphics and in the cuneiform writing of ancient Assyrians. A similar occurrence is seen in Chinese writing, as shown in Fig. 33, which displays ancient hieroglyphics alongside modern ones—morning, 1; the moon, 2; a mountain, 3; tree, 4; dog, 5; horse, 6; man, 7. These characters, despite being simplified, retain their original meanings associated with the figures. The connection of these figures with purely phonetic symbols is one of the key features of Chinese writing, allowing for the distinction of homophonic words,[166] etc.

Symbolic Pictography

FIG. 31.—Various signs of symbolic pictography:
1, war; 2, morning; 3, nothing; 4 and 5, to eat.

FInstagram. 31.—Different signs of symbolic pictography:
1. war; 2. morning; 3. nothing; 4 and 5. to eat.

Paternoster; Mexican Hieroglyphics

FIG. 32.—Paternoster in Mexican hieroglyphics.

Fig. 32.—Paternoster in Mexican hieroglyphics.

Chinese characters have been adopted by only one people with an agglutinative language, the Japanese, who along with these characters (Mana) use another method of writing (Kana), which is syllabic. The Egyptians, speaking an inflectional language, had, on the contrary, to abandon hieroglyphic writing at an early period in order to pass on to syllabic[Pg 142] writing and running characters (hieratic and demotic). It is supposed that from the Egyptian (hieroglyphic and hieratic) writing was derived the alphabet styled the Phœnician, the prototype of most of the alphabets of the world.[167]

Chinese characters have only been adopted by one group that speaks an agglutinative language: the Japanese. They use these characters (Mana) along with another writing system (Kana), which is syllabic. In contrast, the Egyptians, who spoke an inflectional language, had to abandon hieroglyphic writing early on to switch to syllabic writing and running characters (hieratic and demotic). It's believed that the alphabet known as the Phoenician, which is the basis for most alphabets in the world, was derived from Egyptian writing (both hieroglyphic and hieratic).[Pg 142][167]

Chinese Hieroglyphics

FIG. 33.—Ancient Chinese hieroglyphics (top line),
Modern (bottom line).

FIG. 33.—Ancient Chinese characters (top line),
Modern (bottom line).

The direction of the lines in writing is especially determined by the nature of the materials written upon. As long as it is a question of tracing on rocks, monuments, etc., there is no dominant direction, and the signs are disposed, as in the pictograph, at hazard, in any direction whatever. Even the ancient Greeks wrote sometimes from right to left, sometimes from left to right, sometimes in “boustrophedon”—that is to say, alternately, in both directions, as oxen walk during ploughing.

The direction of lines in writing is mainly influenced by the type of surface being used. When it comes to carving on rocks, monuments, and so on, there isn’t a specific dominant direction, and the symbols are arranged, like in pictographs, randomly in any direction. Even ancient Greeks occasionally wrote from right to left, sometimes from left to right, and sometimes in “boustrophedon”—which means alternating directions, like how oxen move when plowing.

But from the time people began to write on palm leaves, on bits of bark, on tablets, papyrus, paper, it has been found necessary to choose a uniform direction.

But since people started writing on palm leaves, pieces of bark, tablets, papyrus, and paper, it became necessary to choose a consistent direction.

The brush of the Chinese determined the direction downwards and from right to left, as for painting. The ancient Syriac estranghelo was also written in the same way, but from left to right; this direction still persists in Mongol writing, which is derived from it, while Arabic had transformed it into horizontal writing from right to left. And to-day certain peoples, for instance the Somalis, yet write Arabic downwards, and read it from right to left, turning over the leaf at 90°. Writing from right to left may have been favoured by the sacred custom of the Arabs placing themselves with their face to the east, the light coming from the right; besides, contrary to what takes place with us, in Arabic writing the paper must be made to move from left to right with the left hand, while the right hand, which writes, remains motionless.[168]

The brush strokes of the Chinese go downwards and from right to left, similar to painting. The ancient Syriac estranghelo was also written this way, but from left to right; this style is still seen in Mongol writing, which is based on it, while Arabic evolved into horizontal writing from right to left. Today, some groups, like the Somalis, still write Arabic downwards and read it from right to left, flipping the page at a 90° angle. Writing from right to left may have been influenced by the Arab tradition of positioning themselves facing east, with light coming from the right; in addition, unlike in our writing, in Arabic writing the paper must be moved from left to right using the left hand, while the right hand, which does the writing, stays still.[168]

The propagation of the different methods of ancient and modern writing and their adoption by different peoples, are closely bound up with the religion and progress in civilisation of these peoples. Thus the Mussulman world has adopted the Arabic writing; the Buddhists of the north, without distinction of race, hold in great esteem the sacred Thibetan characters, whilst those of the south venerate the Pali writing. The Mongol and Manchu alphabets are remains of the Uighuro-Nestorian influence and of the Syriac writing in Central Asia, as the Javanese alphabet is the remains of the civilising domination of the Hindus in Java. With the expansion of European colonisation the characters of the Latin alphabet become more and more prevalent; in Europe even, they tend to relegate to the second place the other characters (gothic, cyrilic, etc.). At the same time, new modes of writing are coming to the front, the telegraphic alphabet, stenography, precursors of a writing of the future, universal, international, simple, and rapid.

The spread of various ancient and modern writing systems and their adoption by different cultures are closely linked to the religions and advancements of those societies. For example, the Muslim world has embraced Arabic script; Buddhist communities in the north, regardless of their ethnicity, highly value the sacred Tibetan characters, while those in the south revere Pali writing. The Mongol and Manchu alphabets are remnants of Uighuro-Nestorian influence and Syriac script in Central Asia, just as the Javanese alphabet reflects the cultural impact of Hindu rule in Java. With the rise of European colonization, the Latin alphabet has become increasingly dominant; even in Europe, it tends to overshadow other scripts (like Gothic, Cyrillic, etc.). At the same time, new writing systems are emerging, such as the telegraphic alphabet and stenography, which are early steps toward a future writing style that is universal, international, simple, and fast.


CHAPTER V.

II.—SOCIOLOGICAL CHARACTERS.

II.—SOCIOLOGICAL CHARACTERS.

1. MATERIAL LIFE: Alimentation: Geophagy—Anthropophagy—Preparation of foods—Fire—Pottery—Grinding of corn—Stimulants and narcotics—Habitation: Two primitive types of dwellings—Permanent dwelling (hut)—Removable dwelling (tent)—Difference of origin of the materials employed in the two types—Villages—Furniture—Heating and lighting—Clothing: Nakedness and modesty—Ornament precedes dress—Head-dress—Ethnic mutilations—Tattooing—Girdle, necklace, and garland the origin of all dress—Manufacture of garments—Spinning and weaving—Means of existence: tools of primitive industry—Hunting—Fishing—Agriculture—Domestication and rearing of animals.

1. MMATERIAL LIFE: Food: Eating dirt—Cannibalism—Food preparation—Fire—Pottery—Grinding corn—Stimulants and drugs—Housing: Two basic types of homes—Permanent home (hut)—Temporary home (tent)—Different sources of materials used in both types—Villages—Furniture—Heating and lighting—Clothing: Nudity and modesty—Ornamentation comes before clothing—Headgear—Cultural body modifications—Tattooing—Belt, necklace, and garland as the origins of all clothing—Garment production—Spinning and weaving—Living: tools of early industry—Hunting—Fishing—Farming—Domestication and breeding of animals.

1. MATERIAL LIFE.

Alimentation.—The first and most imperious preoccupation of man at all times is the search for food. It is therefore natural that we should begin our brief account of sociological characters with those relating to this preoccupation.

Food.—The primary and most urgent concern for humans at all times is the quest for nourishment. Thus, it makes sense to start our overview of sociological aspects with those connected to this concern.

In tropical countries man finds in nature without effort edible plants in sufficient quantity for his support. It is said that in the island of Ceram a single sago-tree will yield what will nourish a man for a whole year.

In tropical countries, people can easily find enough edible plants in nature to sustain themselves. It's said that on the island of Ceram, one sago tree can provide enough food to nourish a person for an entire year.

In temperate countries there are also not wanting vegetable species which, with only slight effort on man’s part, produce nutritive substances. The animal world also supplies everywhere a great variety of species suitable for food. These, for the most part, belong to the division of vertebrates or molluscs; however, certain of the arthropods (crustaceans, insects, etc.),[Pg 145] echinoderms (sea-urchins), nay, even worms (large earthworms of China, Tonkin, and Melanesia), also furnish their contingent to human gluttony.

In temperate regions, there are also plenty of plant species that, with minimal effort from humans, provide nutritious food. The animal kingdom also offers a wide variety of species suitable for eating. Most of these are vertebrates or mollusks; however, some arthropods (like crustaceans and insects),[Pg 145] echinoderms (like sea urchins), and even worms (such as large earthworms from China, Tonkin, and Melanesia) contribute to what people consume.

The mineral kingdom contributes only salt, which, however, is unknown to certain tribes, as, for example, the Veddahs (Sarazin), the Somalis (Lapicque), etc. Besides, according to Bunge,[169] peoples whose food is almost exclusively animal (as is the case of the Veddahs, Eskimo, etc.) never eat salt, while those whose chief food is of vegetable origin experience an irresistible need for this condiment, probably because of the insufficiency of mineral substances in plants.

The mineral kingdom provides only salt, which, however, is unfamiliar to certain groups, such as the Veddahs (Sarazin) and the Somalis (Lapicque), among others. Additionally, according to Bunge,[169] people whose diets consist almost entirely of animal products (like the Veddahs and Eskimo) never consume salt, while those whose main food source is plant-based feel a strong craving for this seasoning, likely due to the lack of mineral nutrients in plants.

Perhaps also to this need of supplying the deficiency of mineral substances (calcareous or alkaline salts) is due the habit of eating certain earthy substances—kaolin, clay, limestone. Geophagy has, in fact, been observed in all parts of the world: in Senegal (the earth called “konak”), in Persia (argillaceous earth from Nichapur and the saline steppes of Kirman, composed of carbonate of magnesia and chalk),[170] and especially in the Asiatic archipelago, in India, and South America. In the markets of Java are sold little squares or figures in baked clay (“ampo” in Javanese) which are much valued, especially by pregnant women.[171] In Calcutta are sold similar products, and in several towns of Peru hawkers offer for sale little figures in edible earth. The Indians of Bolivia eat a white clay, a kind of kaolin called “pasa.”[172] The Whites settled in South America are likewise addicted to geophagy. Women assert that the eating of earth gives a delicate complexion to the face. The same custom has also been pointed out among women in several countries of Europe, more especially in Spain, where the sandy clay which is[Pg 146] used for making the “alcarrazas” is especially in vogue as an edible earth.[173]

The need to make up for a lack of minerals (like calcium or alkaline salts) might explain the habit of eating certain earthy substances—like kaolin, clay, and limestone. Geophagy has actually been seen all over the world: in Senegal (the earth known as “konak”), in Persia (clay from Nichapur and the salty plains of Kirman, made up of magnesium carbonate and chalk),[170] and especially in the Asian archipelago, India, and South America. In the markets of Java, you can find small squares or shapes made of baked clay (“ampo” in Javanese) that are highly sought after, particularly by pregnant women.[171] Similar items are sold in Calcutta, and in various towns in Peru, vendors sell little figures made of edible earth. The Indigenous people of Bolivia consume a type of white clay known as “pasa.”[172] White settlers in South America also have a taste for geophagy. Women claim that eating earth enhances the complexion of the face. This custom has likewise been noted among women in several European countries, especially in Spain, where the sandy clay used for making “alcarrazas” is particularly popular as an edible earth.[173]

We must now pass on to speak of another food—human flesh. Anthropophagy is much less general than is usually believed. Many peoples have been wrongly accused of this crime against humanity by travellers who have had neither the time nor the means necessary to verify the fact, and by writers who here formed a hasty generalisation from isolated facts.[174]

We now need to discuss another type of food—human flesh. Anthropophagy is much rarer than most people think. Many cultures have been falsely accused of this crime against humanity by travelers who lacked the time or resources to verify the truth, and by writers who made quick generalizations based on a few isolated incidents.[174]

Cannibalism has also been too hastily inferred from the observation of facts like “head-hunting,” or the practice of adorning houses with human skulls and bones. As with human sacrifices, these are perhaps survivals of ancient cannibalism, but not proofs of its existence at the present time.

Cannibalism has also been too quickly assumed from observations like “head-hunting” or the practice of decorating homes with human skulls and bones. Just like with human sacrifices, these may be remnants of ancient cannibalism, but they aren't evidence of its existence today.

Besides, it must be noted that most of the statements of authors have reference to bygone times, which would lead us to suppose that anthropophagy is a custom tending to disappear among all peoples, even among those who have not been converted to one of the religions whose dogmas condemn this practice (Christianity, Buddhism, worship of Riamba in Africa,[175] Islamism, etc.).

Besides, it's worth mentioning that most of the statements from authors refer to past times, which makes us think that cannibalism is a practice that is fading away among all cultures, even those who haven't adopted one of the religions that condemn it (Christianity, Buddhism, the worship of Riamba in Africa,[175] Islam, etc.).

It appears from the very conscientious work of P. Bergemann,[176] that actually the only regions of the world where anthropophagy has been really proved to exist are Oceania (including the Asiatic Archipelago), Central Africa, and Southern America.

It seems from the detailed research of P. Bergemann,[176] that the only places in the world where cannibalism has been definitively shown to occur are Oceania (which includes the Asian Archipelago), Central Africa, and South America.

The Battas of Sumatra, the natives of the Solomon Islands, of New Britain, and of certain islands of the New Hebrides, as well as a large number of Australian tribes, are known as[Pg 147] incorrigible cannibals. We can speak less confidently as to the other inhabitants of Oceania. Dyaks, Fijians, New Caledonians, Karons of New Guinea, seem to have abandoned cannibalism. In South America positive facts abound concerning the anthropophagy of the Arovaques and certain Indians of Columbia, the Botocudos and some other Brazilian tribes; but for the rest of the continent they resolve themselves into the statements of ancient travellers or to the report of survivals. On the other hand, Central Africa appears to be the chief seat of anthropophagy. It is of frequent occurrence among the Niam-Niams, the Monbuttus, the Bandziris, and other tribes of the River Ubangi, as well as among the tribes of the Congo basin, the Basangos, the Manyuema, the tribes of Kassai, etc. We have likewise genuine proofs enough for the Fans of French Congo and certain tribes of the Benguelas. In general, cannibalism appears to be unknown in Africa beyond the tenth degree of latitude to the north and south of the Equator.

The Battas of Sumatra, the natives of the Solomon Islands, New Britain, and some islands of the New Hebrides, as well as many Australian tribes, are known as[Pg 147] notorious cannibals. We can be less certain about the other inhabitants of Oceania. Dyaks, Fijians, New Caledonians, and the Karons of New Guinea seem to have moved away from cannibalism. In South America, there are concrete facts about the cannibalism of the Arovaques and certain Indian tribes in Colombia, the Botocudos, and other Brazilian tribes; however, for the rest of the continent, reports are mostly based on accounts from ancient travelers or reports of survivals. On the other hand, Central Africa seems to be the main area for cannibalism. It frequently occurs among the Niam-Niams, the Monbuttus, the Bandziris, and other tribes near the River Ubangi, as well as among tribes in the Congo basin, like the Basangos, the Manyuema, the tribes of Kassai, and so on. We also have enough genuine evidence of cannibalism among the Fans of French Congo and certain tribes of the Benguelas. Generally, cannibalism seems to be absent in Africa beyond the tenth degree of latitude north and south of the Equator.

Cannibalism is practised for three reasons: necessity, gluttony, superstition.

Cannibalism is practiced for three reasons: survival, greed, and superstition.

Necessary Anthropophagy may take place in consequence of the want of animal food, as in Australia, or in consequence of accidental circumstances (shipwreck, famine), as it may occur even among civilised peoples; but this kind of cannibalism is as rare as that which is attributable to gluttony. It is said, however, that the Melanesians of the Solomon Islands, the New Hebrides, and New Britain hunt man merely to satisfy their taste for human flesh. The Niam-Niams pursue the same kind of sport not only for the flesh, but for the human fat which they utilise for lighting purposes. Various tribes of the Ubangi buy slaves or capture men separated from their fellows in order to fatten them up and eat them afterwards; sometimes, to improve the flavour of this kind of meat, the carcasses are left to soak in water; similar facts have been observed among the Manyuema. However that may be, the majority of cases of cannibalism may be explained by superstitious beliefs. There is especially a[Pg 148] belief in the possibility of appropriating the virtues and the qualities of a man by eating the whole or certain portions of his body—the heart, the eyes, the liver. Sometimes drinking the blood of the victim is regarded as sufficient.[177]

Necessary Anthropophagy can happen due to a lack of animal food, like in Australia, or because of unexpected events (like shipwrecks or famine), even among civilized people; however, this type of cannibalism is as rare as that driven by gluttony. It is said that the Melanesians from the Solomon Islands, the New Hebrides, and New Britain hunt humans simply to satisfy their taste for human flesh. The Niam-Niams engage in the same practice, not just for the meat, but also for the human fat, which they use for lighting. Various tribes of the Ubangi buy slaves or capture individuals separated from their groups to fatten them up and later eat them; sometimes, to enhance the flavor of this meat, the bodies are soaked in water, a practice also observed among the Manyuema. Regardless, most instances of cannibalism can be explained by superstitious beliefs. There is particularly a belief in the possibility of gaining the virtues and qualities of a person by consuming whole parts or specific portions of their body—the heart, the eyes, the liver. Sometimes, just drinking the victim's blood is considered enough.[177]

Of the three causes which I have just enumerated the first two are probably the remains of downright anthropophagy—that is to say, of the habit of eating one’s relatives and especially one’s offspring just the same as any other flesh, as it exists among many animals. The Australians, for example, are known to eat their children which they have killed for other reasons (restriction of progeny).

Of the three reasons I've just listed, the first two are likely leftover practices from outright cannibalism—that is, the habit of eating one's relatives, especially one's children, just like any other type of meat, as seen in many animals. For instance, Australians are known to eat their children whom they have killed for other reasons (to limit the number of offspring).

R. S. Steinmetz[178] has thought it possible to bring together all these cases of anthropophagy under the name of “endocannibalism,” or the practice of eating parents and relatives. He mentions a great number of tribes in which this practice exists alone or combined with “exocannibalism,” that is to say the habit of eating the flesh of strangers. This second sort of cannibalism, much more widely diffused, however, than endocannibalism, is alone amenable to moral, religious, or social ideas, while endocannibalism is but the remains of a natural state of primitive man, the residue of instincts which still stirred his soul at the period when he wandered solitary through the virgin forests without realising the possibility of forming any social group whatever.[179]

R. S. Steinmetz[178] believes it’s possible to categorize all these instances of cannibalism under the term “endocannibalism,” which refers to the practice of consuming parents and relatives. He points out numerous tribes where this practice exists, either on its own or alongside “exocannibalism,” meaning the habit of eating the flesh of strangers. Although exocannibalism is more widespread, it is more open to moral, religious, or social interpretations, while endocannibalism represents just the remnants of a primitive state of humanity—the leftover instincts that still affected early humans during the time they roamed alone through untouched forests, not realizing they could form any social groups at all.[179]

Ritual anthropophagy persists for a considerable length of time, and may accord with a relatively developed civilisation. The Battas, the Monbuttus, the Niam-Niams, are tribes[Pg 149] almost half civilised; one has a well-developed method of writing and a style of ornament, the others have a fairly advanced social organisation. As a survival, anthropophagy manifests itself not only in the practice of cutting off the heads (Dyaks) in human sacrifices, but also in a multitude of religious or superstitious practices among a great number of even civilised peoples. The belief in the supposed curative properties of human flesh, especially that of executed criminals, is still in full force in China,[180] and was so in Europe in ancient times and in the Middle Ages; the Salic law forbade the magical practices associated with anthropophagy. To drink from the skull of an enemy was a very widespread custom in Asia and Europe, and even until the beginning of this century the remains of the skull of a hanged criminal figured among the remedies in the pharmacopœias of Central Europe.

Ritual cannibalism has been around for a long time and can be found in relatively developed societies. The Battas, the Monbuttus, and the Niam-Niams are tribes[Pg 149] that are almost semi-civilized; one has a sophisticated writing system and decorative style, while the others have a fairly advanced social structure. As a remnant of the past, cannibalism shows up not just in the practice of beheading (like the Dyaks) during human sacrifices, but also in many religious or superstitious rituals among many even civilized people. The belief in the supposed healing properties of human flesh, especially that of executed criminals, is still prevalent in China,[180] and it was common in Europe during ancient times and the Middle Ages; the Salic law banned the magical practices related to cannibalism. Drinking from the skull of an enemy was a widespread tradition in Asia and Europe, and even up until the beginning of this century, the remains of a hanged criminal's skull were included as remedies in the pharmacopoeias of Central Europe.

Preparation of Foods.—There is no people on earth which eats all its food quite raw, without having subjected it to previous preparation. Some few northern tribes, the Eskimo, the Chukchi, eat, it is true, reindeer’s flesh and fish quite raw, but they cut these up, prepare dried provisions from them, and moreover they cook their vegetable food.

Preparation of Foods.—There is no culture on earth that consumes all of its food completely raw without any prior preparation. A few northern tribes, like the Eskimo and the Chukchi, do eat reindeer meat and fish raw, but they also cut these into pieces, make dried foods from them, and cook their plant-based meals.

Food is prepared by cutting it into pieces, subjecting it to a fermentation, moistening it, triturating it, and especially by exposing it to the action of fire.

Food is made by cutting it into pieces, fermenting it, adding moisture, grinding it up, and especially by cooking it.

Fire-Making by Rubbing

FIG. 34.—Method of fire-making by rubbing.
(After Hough.)

FInstagram. 34.—How to make fire by rubbing.
(After Hough.)

No tribe exists, even at the bottom of the scale of civilisation, which is not to-day acquainted with the use of fire, and as far back as we can go into prehistoric times we find material traces of the employment of fire (cinders, charcoal, pieces of worn-out pyrites, cracked flint, etc.). However, the preservation of fire produced by the natural forces (conflagrations, lightning, volcanoes, etc.) must have preceded the production of fire (Broca, Von den Steinen). Most of the forces of nature transformable into heat—light, electricity, motion, and chemical affinity—have been turned to account by man in the production of fire with more or less success. Kindling flame by concentrat[Pg 150]ing the solar light with bi-convex glasses and mirrors, mentioned from the remotest antiquity, could never have become general. It is the same with electricity. On the other hand, motion and chemical affinity have been at all times, and still are, pre-eminently the two productive forces of fire. Motion is utilised in three different ways: by the friction of two pieces of wood, by the striking together of two pieces of certain mineral substances, or by pneumatic compression. The last method is little used; it has been observed among the Dyaks of Borneo and in Burma. It is based on the principle of the pneumatic tinder-box of our scientific demonstration rooms. But the two other modes of utilising motion are still in general use among all savage peoples.[181]

No tribe exists, even at the lowest level of civilization, that isn't familiar with the use of fire today. As far back as we can trace, there are physical signs of fire use (like cinders, charcoal, worn-out pyrites, cracked flint, etc.). However, learning to preserve fire created by natural forces (like wildfires, lightning, volcanoes, etc.) likely came before learning to make fire (Broca, Von den Steinen). Most of the natural forces that can be turned into heat—light, electricity, motion, and chemical affinity—have been used by humans to create fire with varying degrees of success. Igniting flame by concentrating sunlight with convex lenses and mirrors has been mentioned since ancient times, but it could never become widespread. The same goes for electricity. On the other hand, motion and chemical affinity have always been, and continue to be, the main sources for producing fire. Motion can be harnessed in three ways: by rubbing two pieces of wood together, by striking certain mineral substances together, or through pneumatic compression. The last method is rarely used; it's been noted among the Dyaks of Borneo and in Burma. It works on the principle of the pneumatic tinder-box from our scientific demonstration rooms. But the other two methods of using motion are still commonly used by all indigenous peoples.[181]

A little red-hot ember capable of setting fire to certain substances (tinder, down, dry grass, etc.) may be obtained either by rubbing together two pieces of wood, or by sawing one across the other, or by turning the end of one in a little hole made in the other. Hence, three ways of making fire by friction, each having a well-defined geographical area. The first way (simple rubbing), the most primitive and the least easy, is employed especially in Oceania. It consists in rubbing a little stick of hard wood, bending it downward, against a log of soft wood held between the knees (Fig. 34). A little channel is thus hollowed out of the log, and in the end the operator succeeds in obtaining incandescent particles of pulverised wood, which gather at the bottom of the channel. He has only to throw in a little dry grass or tinder and to blow upon it to obtain the flame.

A small red-hot ember that can ignite certain materials (like tinder, down, dry grass, etc.) can be created by either rubbing two sticks together, sawing one against the other, or twisting the end of one stick into a small hole in the other. Thus, there are three methods for making fire through friction, each having a specific geographical distribution. The first method (simple rubbing), the most basic and the least effective, is particularly used in Oceania. It involves rubbing a small stick of hard wood down against a log of soft wood that is held between the knees (Fig. 34). This action carves out a small channel in the log, and eventually, the person succeeds in producing glowing particles of pulverized wood that collect at the bottom of the channel. All they need to do is add some dry grass or tinder and blow on it to produce a flame.

The sawing method (Fig. 35) is employed by the Malays and by some Australian tribes, as well as in Burma and India. A piece of bamboo split longitudinally is sawn with the cutting edge of another piece of bamboo until the sawdust becomes hot and sets fire to the tinder on which it falls.

The sawing method (Fig. 35) is used by the Malays and some Australian tribes, as well as in Burma and India. A piece of bamboo split lengthwise is sawn with the cutting edge of another piece of bamboo until the sawdust gets hot enough to ignite the tinder it lands on.

Fire-Making by Sawing

FIG. 35.—Method of fire-making by sawing.
(After Hough.)

FIG. 35.—How to make fire by sawing.
(After Hough.)

The twirling or rotatory method (Fig. 36), which consists in turning the end of a fragment of wood supported on the surface of another fragment, is the most generally used. It is met with among Negroes, the Indians of North and South America, the Chukchi, in certain regions of India, etc. The most primitive apparatus consists of a log or board of soft wood, held horizontally with the feet, on which is placed the blunted point of a cylindrical stick of hard wood. Twirling the stick rapidly between the hands in both directions, a little hole is hollowed and the dust of the wood which gathers around the point becomes incandescent. It is thus that some tribes of Zulus and of Australians, the Ainus, etc., make fire.

The twirling or rotary method (Fig. 36) involves turning the end of a piece of wood resting on another piece, and it's the most commonly used technique. You can find it among Black communities, Native Americans from both North and South America, the Chukchi, and in certain areas of India, among others. The simplest setup consists of a log or softwood board held horizontally with the feet, on which the blunted end of a hard cylindrical stick is placed. By rapidly twisting the stick between both hands, a small hole is created, and the dust from the wood that gathers around the point gets very hot. This is how some tribes of Zulus, Australians, the Ainu, and others create fire.

Fire-Making by Twirling

FIG. 36.—Method of fire-making by
twirling among the Kafirs.
(After Wood.)

FIG. 36.—How to make fire by
twirling among the Kafirs.
(After Wood.)

But to this primitive apparatus important improvements are made among other populations, especially among the Redskins and the Eskimo. The hole in a horizontal board is[Pg 152] hollowed out beforehand, then a communication is made between this hole and one of the vertical faces of the board by a channel through which escapes to the outside the woody powder produced by rubbing, in the form of little incandescent cylinders, which falls on the tinder. As to the upright stick, different contrivances are fitted to it to render its motion more rapid and more regular. Thus the Eskimo wind round it a cord which is drawn alternately in both directions;[182] in this case the upper end of the stick is held by an assistant or by the operator himself. They apply also to these apparatus a mouth-drill, etc.

But to this basic device, significant improvements have been made by various groups, especially among Indigenous peoples and the Inuit. A hole is drilled in a horizontal board beforehand, then a channel is created between this hole and one of the vertical sides of the board, allowing the woody powder produced by rubbing to escape outside. This powder forms small glowing cylinders that fall onto the tinder. For the upright stick, different mechanisms are added to make its motion faster and more consistent. For instance, the Inuit wrap a cord around it that is alternately pulled in both directions; in this case, the top end of the stick is held by either an assistant or the operator. They also use a mouth-drill and other tools with these devices.

The second method of obtaining fire, that of striking together two pieces of iron pyrites or two pieces of flint, or flint against pyrites, must, like the first, have been known from the most remote period. To-day it is only employed by some few backward tribes—Fuegians, Eskimo, Aleuts. With the knowledge of iron, which replaced pyrites, the true “flint and steel” was invented; it very quickly superseded in Europe and Asia the production of fire by friction, as, in its turn, it has been superseded by apparatus utilising the chemical affinity of different bodies (matches).

The second method of making fire, which involves striking together two pieces of iron pyrites or two pieces of flint, or flint against pyrites, has likely been known since ancient times. Today, it's only used by a few isolated tribes—Fuegians, Eskimos, Aleuts. With the advent of iron, which replaced pyrites, the true “flint and steel” was developed; it quickly took over in Europe and Asia the fire-making methods involving friction, just as it has now been replaced by devices that use the chemical reactions of different materials (matches).

But the old processes survive in traditions, in religion. Thus the present Brahmins of India obtain fire for religious ceremonies by the friction of two sticks, in front of shops where English matches are sold; it is still by friction that the Indians of America, amply provided with matches, procure fire for the sacred festivals. Even in Europe, in Great Britain, and in Sweden, at the beginning of this century the fire intended for superstitious uses (to preserve animals and people against contagious diseases) was kindled by rubbing together two pieces of wood. This practice was forbidden by a decree, dating from the end of last century, in the same district of Jönköping whence to-day are sent forth by millions the famous Swedish matches.[183]

But the old practices live on in traditions and religion. Today, Brahmins in India still create fire for rituals by rubbing two sticks together, even in front of stores that sell English matches. Similarly, Native Americans, who have plenty of matches, still use friction to create fire for their sacred celebrations. Even in Europe, like in Great Britain and Sweden, at the start of this century, fire meant for superstitious purposes (to protect animals and people from contagious diseases) was lit by rubbing two pieces of wood together. This method was banned by a decree at the end of last century in the same area of Jönköping that now produces millions of well-known Swedish matches.[183]

The long and difficult processes of obtaining fire compel savage tribes to preserve it as one of the most precious things. Almost everywhere it is to women that the care is committed. Among the Australians, women who let the fire go out are punished almost as severely as were the Roman vestals of old. The Papuans of Astrolabe Bay (New Guinea) prefer to go several leagues in search of fire to a neighbouring tribe than to light another (Miklukho-Maclay). The preparation of “new fire” among a great number of tribes, especially in America and Oceania, is celebrated with festivals and religious ceremonies.[184]

The long and challenging process of obtaining fire makes it one of the most valuable things for primitive tribes. Almost everywhere, the responsibility for it falls on women. Among the Australians, women who let the fire go out face punishment nearly as harsh as that of the ancient Roman vestals. The Papuans of Astrolabe Bay (New Guinea) would rather travel several leagues to find fire from a neighboring tribe than start a new one themselves (Miklukho-Maclay). The creation of "new fire" among many tribes, especially in America and Oceania, is celebrated with festivals and religious ceremonies.[184]

Cooking.—Fire, once discovered, heat, light, and at the same time the means of rendering a great variety of foods more digestible, were artificially assured to man. But it is somewhat difficult to roast a piece of meat in the fire, especially when there is not a metal skewer at hand, as was the case with primitive man. So, at an early stage, he tried to find some method of cooking his food, especially fruits. He heated stones in the open fire, and with these stones he cooked his meat and vegetables. The process is still in use to-day among tribes unacquainted with pottery. Thus the Polynesians before their “civilisation” by Europeans proceeded in the following way to cook their food. Stones heated in the fire were put at the bottom of a hole dug in the ground; upon these stones was spread a layer of leaves, on which were placed the fruit of the bread-tree, then a fresh layer of leaves and other heated stones; care being taken to cover the whole with leaves and earth. In half-an-hour a delicious dish was drawn out of the hole.[185]

Cooking.—Once fire was discovered, it provided heat, light, and a way to make a variety of foods easier to digest. However, it's not easy to roast a piece of meat over an open flame, especially without a metal skewer, which primitive humans lacked. So, early on, they looked for ways to cook their food, particularly fruits. They heated stones in the fire and used these stones to cook meat and vegetables. This method is still used today by tribes that don't have pottery. For example, the Polynesians, before their "civilization" by Europeans, cooked their food using this technique: they heated stones in the fire, placed them at the bottom of a hole dug in the ground, added a layer of leaves, placed the breadfruit on top, then added another layer of leaves and more heated stones, making sure to cover everything with leaves and earth. In half an hour, a delicious meal was ready to be taken out of the hole.[185]

Among most savage Indonesians food is cooked in bamboo vessels filled with water, in which heated stones have been previously plunged. This method of cooking with stones is also in use at the two extreme points of America, among the[Pg 154] Indians of Alaska and the Fuegians. It is even used in Europe among the Serbian and Albanian mountaineers.

Most indigenous Indonesians cook food in bamboo containers filled with water, where they’ve previously placed heated stones. This method of cooking with stones is also used at the two farthest points of America, among the[Pg 154] Indians of Alaska and the Fuegians. It is even practiced in Europe by the Serbian and Albanian mountain dwellers.

Pottery.—But real cooking, even of the simplest sort, is only possible with the existence of pottery, the manufacture of which must have followed closely on the discovery of a method of obtaining fire, for no example is known of unbaked pottery.

Pottery.—However, genuine cooking, even at its most basic, is only feasible with the existence of pottery. The creation of pottery must have come soon after the discovery of how to create fire, as there are no known instances of unbaked pottery.

There are still peoples unacquainted with this art, such as the Australians and the Fuegians, but the absence of it is not always the sign of an inferior degree of civilisation, as we may see in the Polynesians before the arrival of Europeans, and also the present Mongols, whose cooking utensils consist of iron, wooden, and leather vessels, for pottery which easily breaks would be an encumbrance in nomadic life.

There are still groups of people unfamiliar with this art, like the Australians and the Fuegians, but not having it doesn't always mean a less advanced level of civilization. We can see this with the Polynesians before Europeans arrived and also with the current Mongols, whose cooking tools include iron, wooden, and leather containers. Pottery, which breaks easily, would be a burden in a nomadic lifestyle.

Bark Vessel

FIG. 37.—Bark vessel,
used by Iroquois Indians.
(After Cushing.)

FIG. 37.—Bark container,
used by Iroquois people.
(After Cushing.)

Earthen Vessel

FIG. 38.—Type of Iroquois
earthen vessel, moulded on the
bark vase of Fig. 37.
(After Cushing.)

FIG. 38.—Type of Iroquois
earthen vessel, shaped based on the
bark vase of Fig. 37.
(After Cushing.)

The most primitive pottery is made without the potter’s wheel. In its manufacture we may admit, with Otis Mason,[186] three special methods of working. Modelling by hand; moulding to an exterior or interior mould, usually a basket or other object of wicker-work, which burns away afterwards in the baking (Figs. 37 and 38); and lastly, a method of proceeding which may be called coiling in clay. Long strings of clay are[Pg 155] taken and rolled so as to form a cone or a cylinder, or any other form of the future pot, then the sides are made even.

The earliest pottery is made without a potter's wheel. In its creation, we can acknowledge, with Otis Mason,[186] three specific methods of shaping. Hand modeling; molding to an outside or inside mold, usually a basket or another wicker object, which burns away later during baking (Figs. 37 and 38); and finally, a technique we can call coiling in clay. Long strands of clay are[Pg 155] taken and rolled to create a cone or a cylinder, or any other shape for the future pot, and then the sides are smoothed out.

The Zuñi Indians of New Mexico begin this work in a little basket-dish (Fig. 39), which shows the connection of this method with that of moulding, whilst the Wolofs, whom I have seen working in the same way, as well as the Kafirs (Fig. 135, to the left), have only as a base to work upon a clay disc or a wooden porringer, moulding being unknown to them. But in both cases this mode of manufacture is already a step towards pottery formed by the wheel, only instead of the clay it is the hand of the workman which turns, naturally much more slowly. Besides, the primitive wheel, that is to say, a disc or a board set in motion by the hand, sometimes without a pivot, as still seen in China, does not revolve with the dizzy speed of the true wheel, the construction of which is an adaptation of the general processes of the transmission of forces by means of levers and wheels.

The Zuñi Indians of New Mexico start this process using a small basket-dish (Fig. 39), which highlights how this technique connects to molding. Meanwhile, the Wolofs, whom I've observed working in a similar manner, along with the Kafirs (Fig. 135, to the left), only have a clay disc or a wooden bowl as their base, as they are unfamiliar with molding. In both scenarios, this manufacturing method represents an early step toward pottery made on a wheel, with the difference being that it’s the worker's hand that turns the material, which is obviously much slower. Additionally, the primitive wheel—a disc or board rotated by hand, sometimes without a pivot, as seen in China today—doesn't spin with the rapid speed of a true wheel. The design of the true wheel is based on the fundamental principles of force transmission through levers and wheels.

Zuñi Pottery

FIG. 39.—Making of pottery without wheel by
the Zuñi Indians (coiling method).
(After Cushing.)

FInstagram. 39.—Creating pottery by hand without a wheel by
the Zuñi Indians (coiling technique).
(After Cushing.)

In regard to pottery it must be noted that its manufacture is left almost exclusively to women among most of the tribes of America, while it is entrusted without distinction to men and women in Africa.

In terms of pottery, it's important to point out that its production is almost entirely handled by women in most tribes in America, while in Africa, it is assigned to both men and women equally.

Harvest, Shoshones

FIG. 40.—Primitive harvest, the women (Shoshones) gathering wild grain.
(After Powell.)

FInstagram. 40.—Early harvest, the women (Shoshones) collecting wild grain.
(After Powell.)

Grinding of Corn.—We need not dwell on the means of[Pg 156] preparing food independently of the action of fire (milk and its products, pemmican, etc.); they vary infinitely. Let us deal briefly, however, with the method of preparing grain. Many peoples are unacquainted with flour: they eat the grain either roasted or cooked, as we do still the most anciently known perhaps of the graminaceæ, rice and millet. In the primitive state of agriculture certain tribes of North America combined in one single operation the threshing, winnowing,[Pg 157] and roasting of grain. After being triturated between the hands, the grain is thrown into a basket-dish (Fig. 40) in which are red-hot stones; the straw burns, the husk comes off and partly burns too, whilst the grain is being roasted.

Grinding of Corn.—We don't need to spend much time on ways of preparing food without using fire (like milk and its products, pemmican, etc.); there are countless variations. However, let's briefly cover how to prepare grain. Many cultures don’t know about flour: they eat the grain either roasted or cooked, similar to how we still consume some of the oldest grains, like rice and millet. In the early days of agriculture, certain tribes in North America combined threshing, winnowing,[Pg 157] and roasting grain into one process. After being crushed between their hands, the grain is placed into a basket-dish (Fig. 40) containing red-hot stones; the straw catches fire, the husk comes off and also burns partially while the grain is roasted.

From the time when some intelligent man perceived when crushing a grain of corn, perhaps by chance, between two stones, that flour might supply a more delicate food than roasted grain, the art of the miller was discovered. There are three ways of preparing flour: pounding in a mortar, trituration on a flat surface, and true grinding by means of a mill turned by the hand or other motor power—animals, water, wind, steam.

From the moment a clever person noticed that crushing a grain of corn, maybe by accident, between two stones could produce flour, which is a finer food than roasted grain, the craft of milling was born. There are three methods of making flour: using a mortar to pound it, grinding it on a flat surface, and true grinding with a mill powered by hand or other sources of energy—like animals, water, wind, or steam.

The mortar, used by a great number of savage or half-civilised tribes to crush not only grain but also the roots of starchy plants, cassava, yam, etc., must have been known for a very long time. Its most primitive form is met with among the Indians of North America—a block of granite or sandstone in which a cavity has been made, with a piece of porous rock, almost cylindrical, for the pestle. In Africa and Oceania the mortar and pestle are of wood. Almost everywhere the pounding is done by women. The rudest hand-mills, such as are met with among the Arabs, the Kabyles, the Bushmen, are made of a round stone pierced in the centre, turned on another stone by means of a handle passing through the hole. Incisions on the triturating surface of the millstone is not found as yet in these primitive machines.

The mortar, used by many primitive or semi-civilized tribes to crush not just grain but also the roots of starchy plants like cassava and yam, has likely been known for a very long time. Its most basic form can be found among the Native Americans, consisting of a block of granite or sandstone with a hollowed-out area, and a piece of porous rock, nearly cylindrical, serving as the pestle. In Africa and Oceania, the mortar and pestle are made of wood. Nearly everywhere, it’s women who do the pounding. The simplest hand mills, like those used by Arabs, Kabyles, and Bushmen, are made of a round stone with a hole in the center, turned on another stone with a handle going through the hole. No incisions on the grinding surface of the millstone are found in these basic machines yet.

The preservation of food is known to a great number of savage and half-civilised tribes. The Eskimo preserve their meat by means of cold, many fisher peoples resort to salting, the art of preparing true pemmican by enclosing the food in a mass of grease or honey is known to the Veddahs of Ceylon, to Negroes, etc.

The preservation of food is recognized by many primitive and semi-civilized tribes. The Eskimos keep their meat cold for preservation, many fishing communities use salting, and the technique of making true pemmican by enclosing food in a mixture of grease or honey is known to the Veddahs of Ceylon, as well as to some African communities, etc.

Stimulants.—Among most savage peoples special fermented beverages are found: “koumiss,” or fermented mare’s milk, among the Turco-Mongols; bamboo beer among the Moïs of French Indo-China; millet or eleusine beer among the Negroes; sago-juice wine among the populations of the coast[Pg 158] of the Indian Ocean—Dravidians (Fig. 81), Indonesians, Malays; “pulque,” derived from the juice of the agave, among the Mexicans of the high table-lands. I must lastly mention “kava,” the national beverage of the Polynesians, concocted from the juice of the leaves of a pepper-plant (Piper methysticum), which is made to ferment by means of the ptyalin of the saliva, these leaves being previously chewed in company, each spitting out his “quid” into the common dish.

Stimulants.—Among many indigenous peoples, you can find unique fermented beverages: “koumiss,” or fermented mare’s milk, among the Turco-Mongols; bamboo beer among the Moïs of French Indo-China; millet or eleusine beer among various African groups; sago-juice wine among the coastal populations[Pg 158] of the Indian Ocean—Dravidians (Fig. 81), Indonesians, Malays; and “pulque,” made from the juice of the agave, among the Mexicans of the highlands. Lastly, I should mention “kava,” the national drink of the Polynesians, which is made from the juice of the leaves of a pepper plant (Piper methysticum). The leaves are chewed together, and the saliva helps ferment the mixture, with everyone spitting out their “quid” into a shared dish.

The distillation of fermented liquids for the purpose of obtaining alcohol is known to most semi-civilised peoples. We need but instance the “arka” of the Turco-Mongols derived from “koumiss,” the arrack of the Chinese and Japanese, etc.

The distillation of fermented liquids to obtain alcohol is known to most semi-civilized people. We only need to mention the “arka” of the Turco-Mongols, which comes from “koumiss,” and the arrack of the Chinese and Japanese, etc.

Among the stimulants, tonics, narcotics, drugs, etc., other than fermented beverages, and tea, coffee, and chocolate of international fame, must be mentioned the kola nut used as a stimulant on a large scale in the whole of Western Africa; the “maté” (Ilex paraguayensis) taking the place of tea in a large portion of South America; different roots and certain fish (like the Fistularia serrata of Java)[187] used by way of aphrodisiacs; lastly, the “coca” of the Peruvians and Bolivians (Erithroxylon coca), the leaves of which taken as an infusion plunge you, says Mantegazza, in the most delicious dreams, while pulverised and chewed with lime they only act as a stimulant. It is possible that the chewing of betel or siri, that is to say, areca palm nut mixed with shell lime and wrapped in a leaf of betel (Chavica betle), produce the same effect; but this habit appears to be induced by hygienic considerations in regard to the mouth. However that may be, the chewing of betel nut, inseparable from Malaysian civilisation, always has a tendency to blacken the teeth of peoples addicted to it.[188]

Among the stimulants, tonics, narcotics, drugs, etc., aside from fermented drinks and internationally known beverages like tea, coffee, and chocolate, we should note the kola nut, which is widely used as a stimulant throughout Western Africa; "maté" (Ilex paraguayensis), which often replaces tea in much of South America; various roots and certain fish (like the Fistularia serrata from Java)[187] used as aphrodisiacs; and finally, the “coca” of the Peruvians and Bolivians (Erithroxylon coca), whose leaves, when brewed as a tea, can supposedly lead to the most delightful dreams, whereas when powdered and chewed with lime, they serve merely as a stimulant. It’s possible that chewing betel or siri, which consists of areca palm nut mixed with shell lime and wrapped in a betel leaf (Chavica betle), produces similar effects; however, this practice seems to be motivated by hygiene concerns related to oral health. Regardless, the practice of chewing betel nut, integral to Malaysian culture, tends to stain the teeth of those who engage in it.[188]

The practice of tobacco smoking, universal at the present day, only spread into Europe in the sixteenth century. In the primitive home of this plant, America, the Indians smoke moderately, although the pipe with them plays a ceremonial part (“the calumet of peace,” etc.). The pipe, which in Europe is yielding place to the cigar, is still held in great honour throughout the whole of Asia, where ethnographers point out more than 150 ethnic varieties of this object, without counting the numerous forms of “narghile.” The cigarette appears to be of Malay origin.[189] The habit of smoking opium, which so speedily becomes an invincible passion, tends at the present day to spread wherever Chinese influence penetrates: in Corea, Indo-China, etc.

The habit of smoking tobacco, common today, only made its way to Europe in the sixteenth century. In its native home, America, Native Americans smoke in moderation, using the pipe mostly for ceremonial purposes (like “the calumet of peace,” etc.). While the pipe is being replaced by cigars in Europe, it is still highly regarded across Asia, where researchers have identified over 150 different ethnic types of it, not including the various forms of “narghile.” The cigarette seems to have originated in Malaysia.[189] The practice of smoking opium, which quickly becomes an overwhelming addiction, is now spreading wherever Chinese influence reaches: in Korea, Indo-China, and beyond.

The practice of smoking haschish, a product of Indian hemp (Cannabis Indica), is localised in Persia and Asia Minor; but it is found also among the Baluba Negroes of the Congo basin, who attach to it a great importance from the politico-religious point of view.

The practice of smoking hashish, a product of Indian hemp (Cannabis Indica), is mainly found in Persia and Asia Minor; however, it is also present among the Baluba people of the Congo basin, who regard it as very significant from a political and religious perspective.

Not satisfied with eating, drinking, inhaling by the mouth, and chewing stimulants, man absorbs them too by the nose. The habit of taking a pinch of snuff, formerly the fashion in the best society of Europe, seems now to be relegated to the lower classes. But among several of the Bantu Negroes of Uganda, of the Cameroons, and the east coast of Africa, snuff-taking (introduced by Europeans?) is still in great honour, and Kafirs in high positions carry coquettishly very small snuffboxes in the lobe of their ears. Instead of snuff, the Mura Indians of the Lower Amazon take “parica,” a very stimulating powder, which is derived from the dry seeds of a vegetable called “Inga.” The stuff is taken by two persons together, during the festival of the ripening of the Inga. One of these Indian braves puts the parica into a tube and puffs it into the nose of his companion.[190]

Not satisfied with eating, drinking, inhaling, and chewing stimulants, people also take them through their noses. The trend of using snuff, which was once popular in high society across Europe, now seems to be limited to lower classes. However, among some Bantu groups in Uganda, the Cameroons, and the east coast of Africa, snuff-taking (introduced by Europeans?) is still highly regarded, and Kafirs in prominent positions often carry stylishly small snuffboxes in their ear lobes. Instead of snuff, the Mura Indians of the Lower Amazon use “parica,” a very stimulating powder made from the dry seeds of a plant called “Inga.” This powder is shared between two people during the festival celebrating the ripening of the Inga. One of the Indian participants places the parica into a tube and blows it into the nose of his partner.[190]

As Letourneau[191] judiciously observes, the chief motive for[Pg 160] the use of various drugs and stimulants all over the earth is the desire experienced by every human being to emancipate himself, if even for a moment, from the ordinary conditions of existence. He is only too happy to be able to find at pleasure, in the midst of the fatigues, the annoyances, and the miseries of daily life, a moment of forgetfulness, the semblance of refuge.

As Letourneau[191] wisely notes, the main reason people around the world use different drugs and stimulants is the desire to break free, even if just for a moment, from the everyday realities of life. They are more than willing to find, amidst the exhaustion, frustrations, and struggles of daily living, a moment of escape, a false sense of refuge.

Habitation.—The natural shelters—caverns, overhanging rocks, holes in the ground, thick foliage, hollow trunks of trees, etc.—must have been utilised by primitive man as places of abode. But which of these shelters served as a model for the first artificial dwellings? Not the cavern, for even now it is made use of just as it is by civilised populations in China, Tunisia, Afghanistan, and even France, in the valley of the Cher. Besides, with the exception, perhaps, of the huts of the Eskimo, half underground and covered with a dome of ice blocks, constructions in mineral substances are scarcely found among savage peoples.[192] Substances of vegetable origin were those first utilised for fixed habitations (hut, etc.), and substances derived from animals for dwellings which could be carried.[193]

Habitation.—Natural shelters—caves, overhanging rocks, holes in the ground, dense foliage, hollow tree trunks, etc.—must have been used by primitive humans as living spaces. But which of these shelters inspired the first man-made homes? Not the cave, since even today it is used just as it is by modern populations in China, Tunisia, Afghanistan, and even France, in the Cher valley. Also, aside from possibly the huts of the Eskimo, which are partially underground and topped with a dome of ice blocks, structures made from mineral materials are rarely found among indigenous peoples.[192] Plant-based materials were the first to be used for permanent homes (like huts), and animal-derived materials were used for portable shelters.[193]

The hut, which is the prototype of the fixed habitation, is derived probably from the screen formed of a series of branches stuck in the ground, as one sees it still among the Australians. Sometimes this screen is constructed of large palm-leaves resting against crossed branches, as for example among the Veddahs of Ceylon, Andamanese, the Botocudos, and other Indians of Brazil. The leafy branches of these screens had but to be arranged in the form of a circle or in two parallel rows, their tops joined together, the interstices[Pg 161] stopped up with grasses, moss, and bark, in order that the frail shelter might be transformed into a stronger dwelling, a better protection against the inclemencies of the weather. The form which this primitive dwelling was thus obliged to take depended then, before everything else, on the arrangement of the branches of the screen: if put in the form of a circle the hut became conical provided the branches used in its construction were rigid and but little spread out (Fuegians); hemispherical, cupola-shaped, if they were flexible and leafy (Australians); if they were placed in two parallel rows the hut took the form of a two-sided roof, flat (Indians of the Amazon), or convex (Todas), according to the materials.

The hut, which serves as the example of a fixed home, likely comes from a screen made of a series of branches stuck in the ground, similar to what is still seen among Australians. Sometimes, this screen is made of large palm leaves leaning against crossed branches, as seen among the Veddahs of Ceylon, Andamanese, the Botocudos, and other Indigenous peoples of Brazil. The leafy branches of these screens just needed to be arranged in a circle or in two parallel rows with their tops connected, and the gaps[Pg 161] filled with grasses, moss, and bark, to convert the fragile shelter into a sturdier dwelling, providing better protection against harsh weather. The shape of this primitive dwelling consequently depended primarily on how the branches of the screen were arranged: if shaped in a circle, the hut became conical as long as the branches used were stiff and not widely spread (like with Fuegians); hemispherical or dome-shaped if they were flexible and leafy (like with Australians); and if placed in two parallel rows, the hut took on the shape of a two-sided roof, either flat (like the Indigenous peoples of the Amazon) or curved (like Todas), depending on the materials used.

Zulu Hut

FIG. 41.—Hemispherical hut in straw of Zulu Kafirs.
(After Wood and other sources.)

FIG. 41.—Hemispherical straw hut of Zulu Kafirs.
(After Wood and other sources.)

Trying to secure themselves still better from the rain, the wind, and the sun, the first architects must have dug out the soil beneath the hut, as the Ainus, the Chukchi, the Kamtchadales still do at the present time, and this may have suggested the idea, as Tylor says,[194] of extending the vertical[Pg 162] walls above the ground. The rushes, the little twigs, and the clods of potter’s clay or grass which were used at first to stop up the holes, eventually formed the walls, and the ancient hut thus raised was transformed into a dwelling a little more com[Pg 163]fortable, having roof and walls. This was probably the origin of the hive-shaped huts of the Zulu Kafirs (Fig. 41), and the cylindrical, conical-roofed huts of the Ovampos (Fig. 42), and the Gauls of the time of Cæsar. Straw entering into the composition of the roof, and sometimes even the body of these dwellings, they may be styled straw huts or thatched huts. As to the quadrangular huts, they are transformed in the same manner into those little houses so characteristic of the Muchikongos, of French Congo and the coast of Guinea.[195] Among the peoples inhabiting the shores of the Pacific and Indian Oceans, from the Kamtchadales and the Indians of the north-west of America to the Maoris and the natives of Madagascar, the quadrangular houses are erected on poles even when they are far from water. The materials of which they are constructed are bamboos, reeds, and palm-leaves.[196]

Trying to protect themselves even more from the rain, wind, and sun, the first architects must have dug into the ground beneath the hut, similar to what the Ainus, Chukchi, and Kamtchadales still do today. This likely inspired the idea, as Tylor mentions,[194] of extending the vertical[Pg 162] walls above ground. The rushes, small twigs, and clumps of potter’s clay or grass that were initially used to fill the holes eventually formed the walls, transforming the ancient hut into a slightly more com[Pg 163]fortable dwelling with a roof and walls. This was likely the origin of the hive-shaped huts of the Zulu Kafirs (Fig. 41), and the cylindrical, conical-roofed huts of the Ovampos (Fig. 42), as well as the Gauls during the time of Cæsar. With straw used in the roof and sometimes even in the body of these structures, they can be called straw huts or thatched huts. As for the quadrangular huts, they evolved similarly into the small houses typical of the Muchikongos, from French Congo and the coast of Guinea.[195] Among the communities living along the shores of the Pacific and Indian Oceans, from the Kamtchadales and the Indigenous peoples of the north-west coast of America to the Maoris and the natives of Madagascar, quadrangular houses are built on stilts even if they are far from water. They are made from materials like bamboo, reeds, and palm leaves.[196]

Ovampo Hut

FIG. 42.—Hut and granary of the Ovampos (South Africa).
(After Wood.)

FIG. 42.—Hut and granary of the Ovampos (South Africa).
(After Wood.)

In order to give solidity to the straw and reed-built walls, it must have been necessary at an early period to plaster them over with potter’s earth (Senegal, palafittes of the bronze age in Europe). In very dry countries it was seen that lumps of clay were able of themselves to form sufficiently solid walls, and this observation has led naturally enough to the making of sun-dried bricks, which were known to the Babylonians, to the Egyptians, and are still used to-day in the Sudan, in Turkestan, and Mexico.

To make the straw and reed walls more solid, it must have been necessary early on to cover them with clay (like the palafittes from the Bronze Age in Europe). In very dry areas, it was observed that clumps of clay could create sturdy walls on their own, which naturally led to the production of sun-dried bricks. These bricks were known to the Babylonians and Egyptians, and they are still used today in Sudan, Turkestan, and Mexico.

Tent of Tunguz-Manegres

FIG. 43.—Summer tent of Tunguz-Manegres,
of birch-tree bark (exceptional type).

FInstagram. 43.—Summer tent of Tunguz-Manegres,
made of birch bark (unique type).

Movable Habitations.—From the moment when the tired hunter of primitive times fell asleep beneath the skin of a wild beast spread out on two or three poles, and folded it up on the morrow to carry it away with him in his wanderings, the tent was invented. Skins continued to be the best material for its construction until the invention of felt and stuffs, plaited or woven of a sufficient breadth. Bark has only been used[Pg 164] exceptionally, in Siberia for example, and for summer tents only (Fig. 43). Like the hut, the tent may be circular, conical (Indians of North America), cupola-shaped (Kafirs), or quadrangular in the form of a prismatic roof (Thibetans, Gypsies). The last-mentioned of these forms has not been improved on, and the Arab tent of the present day, which is derived from it, differs from its prototype only in its dimensions and the awning set up at the entrance. On the other hand, the two circular forms have been improved on by the use of pieces of wattling instead of poles, and felt instead of skins. The tent has thus become a comfortable dwelling, the best suited to the life of half-civilised nomads, a real house with a roof, conical in the “Gher” of the Mongols (Fig. 44), almost hemispherical [Pg 166] in the “Yourte” of the Kirghiz.[197] This dwelling of the nomads has even served as a model for the permanent wooden habitations of the tribes of the Yenisei or Altai. Their wooden house has a ground-plan of hexagonal or octagonal form, imitating the circular yourte or felt tent (Fig. 45), and it is only little by little, under Russian influence, that it is transformed into a four-sided house.[198] The “mazankis” of the Teleuts of Siberia[Pg 167] and the Little Russians with their walls of fascines plastered with clay and lime, are only imitations of wattled tents.

Movable Habitations.—From the time when the tired hunter of ancient days fell asleep under the skin of a wild animal stretched out on two or three poles, and packed it up the next day to take with him on his travels, the tent was born. Skins remained the best material for making tents until the invention of felt and fabrics that were plaited or woven wide enough. Bark has only been used[Pg 164] in rare cases, such as in Siberia, and only for summer tents (Fig. 43). Like huts, tents can be circular, conical (used by Native Americans), dome-shaped (Kafirs), or rectangular with a prismatic roof (Tibetans, Gypsies). The rectangular style has not been improved upon, and today’s Arab tents, which stem from this design, differ from their original only in size and the awning at the entrance. Meanwhile, the two circular styles have been enhanced by using woven materials instead of poles, and felt instead of animal skins. As a result, the tent has evolved into a comfortable living space, well-suited for half-civilized nomads. It's a real house with a roof, conical like the “Gher” of the Mongols (Fig. 44), and nearly hemispherical [Pg 166] like the “Yourte” of the Kirghiz.[197] This nomadic dwelling has even inspired the design of the permanent wooden homes of the Yenisei or Altai tribes. Their wooden houses have a hexagonal or octagonal layout, mimicking the circular yourte or felt tent (Fig. 45), and it is only gradually, under Russian influence, that they transform into four-sided houses.[198] The “mazankis” of the Teleuts in Siberia[Pg 167] and the Little Russians, with their walls made of bundles of sticks plastered with clay and lime, are merely imitations of woven tents.

Gher of the Kalmuks

FIG. 44.—“Gher” or tent of the Kalmuks of Astrakan,
part being raised in order to show framework and interior.
(Photo. S. Sommier.)

FInsta. 44.—“Gher” or tent of the Kalmuks of Astrakan,
part being raised to reveal the framework and interior.
(Photo. S. Sommier.)

Hexagonal House, Altaians

FIG. 45.—Hexagonal house of non-roving Altaians,
constructed in imitation of the felt tent of the nomads.
(After Yadrintsev.)

FIG. 45.—Hexagonal house of settled Altaians,
built to resemble the felt tent of the nomads.
(After Yadrintsev.)

As social life becomes more complicated, there appear, side by side with the dwelling properly so called, other struc[Pg 168]tures: granaries and storehouses, ordinarily built on wooden pillars (among the Malays and the Ainus), or on a clay stand (among the Negroes of the Sudan) or a wooden support (Fig. 42), to protect them against the attacks of wild beasts. Access to them, as to the houses on poles, is gained by primitive ladders, a series of notches in a tree-trunk. Other structures, light straw huts on trees, serve as refuges in case of attack and as posts of observation to watch the movements of enemies. The idea of defence was also the first motive for the grouping of houses into villages. In non-civilised countries almost always the villages and urban agglomerations are surrounded with palisades (Kraal of the Kafirs, Fig. 46), ditches, sometimes filled with traps and prickles (Laos), lastly, with walls. Watch-towers replace the airy posts of observation on trees (example: Lesghi village of the Caucasus). According to the forms of propriety (see Chapter VII.), several families may inhabit enormous houses in which each has a special apartment adjoining the common space in which dwell the non-married people (Nagas, Mossos, Pueblo Indians). The “communal houses,” so general in all Oceania and among certain peoples of Indo-China, which serve at the same time as “bachelor’s dens,” as “clubs,” as temples, as inns, represent the common rooms of phalansteries as separated from the private parts.

As social life gets more complex, alongside traditional homes, there are other structures: granaries and storage buildings, typically built on wooden pillars (like among the Malays and the Ainus), or on clay bases (among the Sudanese Negroes) or wooden supports (Fig. 42), to protect them from wild animals. Access to these, like the houses on stilts, is through simple ladders or by climbing notches carved into tree trunks. Other lightweight straw huts built in trees act as shelters during attacks and observation posts to monitor enemy movements. The need for defense was also the main reason houses began to cluster into villages. In non-civilized regions, villages and urban areas are almost always surrounded by palisades (like the Kraal of the Kafirs, Fig. 46), ditches, sometimes rigged with traps and spikes (in Laos), or walls. Watchtowers now take the place of lofty tree observation points (such as in the Lesghi village of the Caucasus). Depending on social norms (see Chapter VII.), several families might live in large houses, each with its own apartment next to shared spaces for unmarried individuals (like the Nagas, Mossos, and Pueblo Indians). The “communal houses,” common in all of Oceania and among some Indo-Chinese peoples, which serve as “bachelor pads,” “clubs,” temples, and inns, represent the common areas of phalansteries, separate from private spaces.

Kraal, Kaffir Village

FIG. 46.—Kraal, or Kafir village, with defensive enclosure.
(Partly after Wood.)

FIG. 46.—Kraal, or Kafir village, with a defensive enclosure.
(Partly after Wood.)

With habitations are naturally connected furniture, methods of heating and lighting. Among primitive peoples all the furniture consists of some skins and straw or dry grass for bed and seat. Mats are already a sign of a fairly advanced civilisation; carpets, seats, and beds come after (Figs. 44 and 120). The wooden pillow in the form of a bench is found from Japan and New Guinea to the country of the Niam-Niams and the Eastern Sudan, where it must probably have penetrated from Egypt. Chests for linen, plate, etc., are quite late inventions.

With homes are naturally connected furniture, methods of heating, and lighting. Among primitive peoples, all the furniture consists of some skins and straw or dry grass for beds and seating. Mats are already a sign of a fairly advanced civilization; carpets, chairs, and beds come after (Figs. 44 and 120). The wooden pillow in the form of a bench can be found from Japan and New Guinea to the land of the Niam-Niams and the Eastern Sudan, where it probably originated from Egypt. Chests for linen, dishes, etc., are quite recent inventions.

For heating purposes a fire in the middle of the hut was used in the first instance. The Fuegians burn enormous trees, which project from the hut and are brought forward into[Pg 169] the fire as the end is consumed. The smoke issues by the open extremity of the hut. The Altaians, the Kamtchadales, the Tunguses, the Kalmuks, are content with a similar fire kept in the middle of the tent or wooden house (Figs. 44 and 45). Among the Russian peasants one may meet with houses, “koornaïa izba,” having a stove, but not a chimney; the smoke issues by the windows and by an orifice in the roof. In Corea the smoke of the stove is carried under the planks; in China under a sort of clay bed (Kang). The mantelpiece, raised above the hearth, appears to be a European invention which preceded that of the true chimney, which latter appeared in the eleventh century. Among the Eskimo the seal oil, which burns in great lamps of earth dried in the sun, serves to give warmth and light at the same time.

For heating, a fire was initially set in the center of the hut. The Fuegians burn massive trees that stick out from the hut, pulling them into[Pg 169] the fire as they burn down. Smoke escapes through the open end of the hut. The Altaians, Kamtchadales, Tunguses, and Kalmuks all use a similar fire in the middle of their tents or wooden houses (Figs. 44 and 45). Russian peasants may have houses called "koornaïa izba," which feature a stove but lack a chimney; smoke exits through the windows and a hole in the roof. In Korea, the stove's smoke is directed under the floorboards, while in China it's directed under a kind of clay bed known as Kang. The mantelpiece, raised above the hearth, seems to be a European invention that came before the true chimney, which appeared in the eleventh century. Among the Eskimo, seal oil is burned in large lamps made of sun-dried earth, providing both warmth and light.

Very finely made lamps have been described as existing among the Indians of North America. The Polynesians burn coco-nut oil in a half of the shell of the coco-nut itself, using the fibres which cover the fruit by way of wick. In Egypt, in Babylon, in Europe, lamps have been known from the earliest times.[199] But most primitive peoples are still content to burn fat pine-knots or resinous torches for lighting purposes. The Moïs-Lays of French Indo-China obtain light by means of little pieces of fir-wood burning aloft on a chandelier formed of a double metal fork.[200] This description may be applied word for word to the “loocheena” of the Russian peasants, the use of which has not disappeared at the present time. Moreover, the torch was much used in the whole of Europe side by side with closed and open lamps before the invention of the candle, the light of which grows dim to-day before the petroleum lamp even in China and Turkestan, and before the electric light among us.

Very finely crafted lamps have been reported among the Indigenous peoples of North America. The Polynesians use coconut oil in half of the coconut shell itself, with the fibers that cover the fruit serving as a wick. In Egypt, Babylon, and Europe, lamps have been known since ancient times.[199] However, most primitive cultures still prefer to use fat pine knots or resinous torches for lighting. The Moïs-Lays of French Indo-China achieve light using small pieces of fir wood burning on a chandelier made from a double metal fork.[200] This description fits perfectly with the “loocheena” used by Russian peasants, which is still in use today. Furthermore, the torch was widely used across Europe alongside closed and open lamps before the invention of the candle, whose light now pales in comparison to that of the petroleum lamp even in China and Turkestan, and especially before electric light in our times.

Dress and Ornament.—To say that primitive man went about quite naked is almost a commonplace, but to say that nudity is not synonymous with savagery would appear a paradox to many. And yet nothing is more true. Among the peoples who know nothing of dress there are some quite savage, like the Fuegians, the Australians, the Botocudos, and others who have attained a certain degree of civilisation, like the Polynesians (before the arrival of Europeans) and the Niam-Niams. Let us remember, moreover, that the Greeks of classic antiquity only half covered their nakedness. It does not necessarily follow that the less clothes a people wears the more savage it is. It is a question of climate and social convention, entirely like the emotion of modesty, which is not at all something natural and innate in man. It is not met with among animals, and one could mention dozens of cases of peoples among whom the sentiment is entirely lacking. On the contrary, the fashion of covering the female genital organs, for example among different tribes of the Amazon,[201] and the male organs among the New Caledonians[202] or the New Hebrideans, is such as rather to attract attention to these parts than to hide them. The same thing may equally be said of the little ornamented aprons barely covering the genital organs which are worn by the Kafir women (Fig. 47), etc. Certain authors (Darwin, Westermarck) even think that ornament in general, that of the region of the abdomen in particular, was one of the most powerful means of sexual selection, by attracting attention to the genital organs. It is, rather, the garment which gives birth to the sentiment of modesty, and not modesty which gives birth to the garment. Among a people as civilised as the Japanese, men and women bathe together quite naked without any one being shocked. It was the same in Russia during the last century.

Dress and Ornament.—It’s a common belief that primitive humans were completely naked, but saying that nudity equals savagery might seem like a contradiction to many. However, that’s far from the truth. Among groups that don’t use clothing, there are some very savage ones, like the Fuegians, Australians, and Botocudos, alongside others who have reached a certain level of civilization, like the Polynesians (before the Europeans arrived) and the Niam-Niams. Furthermore, we should remember that ancient Greeks only partially covered their bodies. The amount of clothing a culture wears doesn’t automatically indicate how savage they are; it’s more about climate and social norms, similar to the feeling of modesty, which isn’t a natural or innate part of being human. Animals don’t have this, and there are many groups that completely lack that sentiment. In fact, the practice of covering female genitals, seen in various Amazon tribes,[201] or male genitals among New Caledonians[202] or New Hebrideans, often draws more attention to those parts rather than concealing them. The same applies to the minimal aprons worn by Kafir women, which barely cover their genitals (Fig. 47). Some authors (Darwin, Westermarck) even suggest that ornamentation, especially around the abdomen, played a significant role in sexual selection by emphasizing the genital areas. It’s more about clothing creating a sense of modesty rather than modesty giving rise to clothing. Among a civilized culture like the Japanese, men and women bathe together in the nude without anyone being offended. This was also the case in Russia a century ago.

Kraal, Kaffir Village

FIG. 47.—Zulu girl with the three types of ornament:
head-dress, necklace, and belt; also leather chastity apron decorated with pearls.
(Phot. lent by Miss Werner.)

FIG. 47.—Zulu girl with the three types of ornament:
headpiece, necklace, and belt; also a leather chastity apron decorated with pearls.
(Photo provided by Miss Werner.)

And yet, to prove how conventional all this sentiment of modesty is, it is only necessary to say that the Japanese [Pg 172] are shocked to see the nude in works of art;[203] that it is as indecent for a Chinese woman to show her foot as for a European woman to expose the most intimate parts of her body; that a Mussulman woman surprised in the bath by indiscreet eyes hastens before anything else to hide her face, the rest of the body being exposed to view without any great[Pg 173] shock to modesty; that a European woman could never uncover her breast in the street and does it in a ballroom, etc.

And yet, to show how conventional all this modesty really is, it’s enough to say that the Japanese [Pg 172] are appalled by nudity in art; [203] that for a Chinese woman, showing her foot is as indecent as it would be for a European woman to reveal her most private parts; that a Muslim woman caught in the bath by prying eyes quickly hides her face first, while the rest of her body being visible isn’t considered a major breach of modesty; that a European woman could never bare her breasts in the street but might do so at a ballroom, etc.

Ufhtaradeka, Fuegian

FIG. 48.—Ufhtaradeka, typical Fuegian with primitive mantle of seal-skin;
height, 1 m. 56; ceph. ind., 79.1.
(Phot. of the Scientific Miss. of Cape Horn, Coll. Mus. Nat. Hist., Paris.)

FIG. 48.—Ufhtaradeka, a typical Fuegian wearing a primitive seal-skin mantle;
height, 1 minute 56; ceph. ind., 79.1.
(Photo from the Scientific Mission of Cape Horn, Collection Museum of Natural History, Paris.)

Starting from the primordial nudity of mankind, we are led to inquire what was the motive which prompted men to clothe themselves. In countries with a rigorous climate it was the necessity of protecting themselves from cold and damp, but in the other parts of the world this has not been the case. The sentiment of vanity, the desire of being different from others, of pleasing, of inspiring with horror, begot ornaments which became transformed little by little into dress.

Starting from the very basic nakedness of humanity, we start to wonder what drove people to start wearing clothes. In places with harsh climates, it was essential for them to protect themselves from the cold and dampness, but in other regions, that wasn't the case. The feeling of vanity, the need to stand out from others, to impress, or even to evoke fear led to the creation of ornaments, which gradually evolved into clothing.

Adornment of the Body.—Strange as it may appear at the outset, the fact that ornament preceded dress is well established in ethnography. It is, moreover, often difficult to draw the boundary-line between the two. Thus the first and most primitive mode of personal adornment is certainly that in which the body itself is adorned without the putting on of any extraneous objects whatsoever. And the most simple of these primitive adornments, the daubing of the body with colouring matter, may also be considered as one of the first garments. Almost all peoples who go naked practise this mode of adornment (Figs. 59 and 124), but it is held in special esteem on the American continent. The colours most used are red, yellow, white, and black, yielded by such substances as ochre, the juice of certain plants, chalk, lime, and charcoal. Certain tribes of the Amazon basin fix a covering of feathers on their body, daubed with a sticky substance. The painting of the face (Figs. 158 and 159) is colouring only of a modified form. Thibetan women coat their face over with a thick layer of paste or starch, which with a refinement of coquetry they inlay with certain seeds arranged so as to form designs more or less artistic, without interfering with the red spots on the cheeks made with the juice of certain berries. Chinese women only put a thin coating of rice-starch without seeds, and the Javanese women, like our ladies of fashion, are content with rice powder. The red spots on the cheeks of Mongolian and Thibetan women are the prototypes of the paint which spoils[Pg 174] so unnecessarily the fresh complexion and the faces, naturally so beautiful, of the women of Southern Europe (Spain, Serbia, Roumania).

Adornment of the Body.—As strange as it may seem at first, it's well-known in the study of cultures that decoration came before clothing. It's often hard to distinguish between the two. The first and most basic form of personal adornment is certainly one where the body itself is decorated without any additional items. One of the simplest forms of these primitive decorations, applying color to the body, can also be seen as one of the first types of clothing. Almost all societies that go without clothes use this method of adornment (Figs. 59 and 124), but it is particularly valued in the Americas. The most commonly used colors are red, yellow, white, and black, derived from substances like ochre, the juice of certain plants, chalk, lime, and charcoal. Some tribes in the Amazon basin apply a covering of feathers to their bodies, coated with a sticky substance. Face painting (Figs. 158 and 159) is just a modified form of coloring. Tibetan women cover their faces with a thick layer of paste or starch, and with a touch of flair, they embed seeds to create more or less artistic designs, while preserving the red spots on their cheeks made from the juice of certain berries. Chinese women apply a thin layer of rice starch without seeds, and Javanese women, like our fashionable ladies, often use rice powder. The red spots on the cheeks of Mongolian and Tibetan women are the early versions of the makeup that unnecessarily detracts from the naturally beautiful complexions of women in Southern Europe (Spain, Serbia, Romania).

Ainu Woman

FIG. 49.—Ainu woman tattooed round the lips.

FIG. 49.—Ainu woman with tattoos around her lips.

The custom of applying lac to the teeth, in vogue among the Malays, the Chinese, and the Annamese; the colouring of the lips so generally practised from Japan to Europe; the dyeing of the nails and the hair with “henna” (Lawsonia inermis) in Persia and Asia Minor; lastly, the painting of the eyebrows and eyelashes in the east, the dyeing of the hair in the west, are various manifestations of this same mode of primitive adornment.

The practice of applying lacquer to teeth, common among Malays, Chinese, and Annamese; the coloring of lips widely done from Japan to Europe; dyeing nails and hair with "henna" (Lawsonia inermis) in Persia and Asia Minor; and finally, the painting of eyebrows and eyelashes in the east, along with hair dyeing in the west, are all different expressions of this same form of basic decoration.

Foot of Chinese Woman

FIG. 50.—Foot of Chinese woman
artificially deformed.
(After photograph.

FInstagram. 50.—Foot of a Chinese woman
artificially deformed.
(After photograph.

Side by side with colouring must be placed tattooing, which leaves more indelible marks. There exists an infinite number of varieties of it, which, however, may be reduced to two[Pg 175] principal categories: tattooing by incision, in which the design is produced by a series of scars or gashes, and tattooing by puncture, in which the design is formed by the introduction under the skin of a black powder by means of a needle. The first method is practised by dark-skinned peoples, Negroes, Melanesians, Australians (Figs. 14, 15, 149, and 150). In this case the incision having injured the non-pigmented dermic layer the scars are less coloured than the surrounding skin. Tattooing by puncture is only possible among clear-skinned peoples; among the latter may be instanced the New Zealanders, the Dyaks, and the Laotians, called “green-bellies.” In the case of a great number of peoples, tattooing is restricted to one sex only, chiefly to women (Ainus, Fig. 49, Chukchi), or else to certain categories of persons (postilions and drawers of carriages in Japan; sailors, criminals, and prostitutes in Europe).

Next to coloring, we have tattooing, which leaves more permanent marks. There are countless types of tattooing, but they can be grouped into two main categories: tattooing by incision, where the design is made through a series of scars or cuts, and tattooing by puncture, where the design is created by inserting black powder under the skin using a needle. The first method is practiced by dark-skinned groups, including Black people, Melanesians, and Australians (Figs. 14, 15, 149, and 150). In this method, the incision damages the non-pigmented layer of skin, resulting in scars that are less pigmented than the surrounding skin. Tattooing by puncture is typically done among lighter-skinned groups, such as New Zealanders, Dyaks, and the Laotians, referred to as “green-bellies.” For many cultures, tattooing is limited to one gender, primarily women (Ainus, Fig. 49, Chukchi), or specific groups of people, like postilions and carriage drivers in Japan, or sailors, criminals, and prostitutes in Europe.

Skeleton of Foot

FIG. 51.—Skeleton of the foot
represented in Fig. 50,
with outline of shoe.

FIG. 51.—Skeleton of the foot
shown in Fig. 50,
with the outline of a shoe.

Tattooing may be already considered as an ethnic mutilation; but there exist many others of a less anodyne character which are also connected with ornamentation. Chinese women deform their feet by means of tight bandages, and end by transforming them into horrible stumps (Figs. 50 and 51), which only[Pg 176] allow them to walk by holding on to surrounding objects. European and other “civilised” women compress themselves in corsets to such an extent that they bring on digestive troubles, and even displacement of the kidneys.[204] The Australians draw out the teeth of young men on their reaching the age of puberty; Negroes of the western coast of Africa break the teeth and transform them into little points; the Malays file them into the form of a half-circle, a saw, etc. As to cranial deformations, a whole chapter would not suffice to describe them all. Topinard distinguishes four principal types of such, without counting the various special forms (trilobate skull of the islanders of Sacrificios, etc.). In general the skulls are lengthened by this practice into a sort of sugar-loaf, the top of which points more or less upward and backward. It is chiefly by compression, by means of bandages, boards, or various caps and head-dresses, that the desired form of the head is obtained.[205]

Tattooing might already be seen as a form of ethnic mutilation, but there are many other, more extreme practices related to body decoration. Chinese women bind their feet tightly with bandages, eventually turning them into deformed stumps (Figs. 50 and 51), which forces them to walk by gripping onto nearby objects. European and other “civilized” women squeeze themselves into corsets so tightly that they can suffer from digestive issues and even kidney displacement.[204] In Australia, young men have their teeth pulled out upon reaching puberty; on the west coast of Africa, some groups chip their teeth into sharp points; and in Malaysia, teeth are filed into shapes like half-circles or saws. When it comes to head shaping, a whole chapter wouldn’t be enough to cover all the variations. Topinard identifies four main types of cranial deformation, not counting the different specific forms (like the trilobate skull of the Sacrificios islanders, etc.). Typically, these practices elongate the skulls into a shape reminiscent of a sugar loaf, with the top tilting upward and backward. The desired head shape is mainly achieved through compression using bandages, boards, or various caps and headgear.[205]

Intentional deformation is practised by the Chinooks and other Indian tribes of the Pacific slope of the United States; by the Aymaras of Bolivia; in the New Hebrides; among a great number of tribes of Asia Minor, where the deformed skulls recall those which Herodotus had described under the name of macrocephali. In Europe the custom of altering the shape of the head has spread a little everywhere; the best known deformation is that which Broca had described under the name of “Toulousaine,” and which is still practised both in the north and south of France (Fig. 52). What effect may deformation of the head have on intellectual development? Inquiries made in this direction afford no positive information; but it may be presumed that without being as harmful as some people believe, the deformation, by displacing the convolutions of the brain, may favour the[Pg 177] outbreak of cerebral diseases in persons predisposed to them.[206]

Intentional deformation is practiced by the Chinooks and other Indigenous tribes along the Pacific coast of the United States, by the Aymaras in Bolivia, in the New Hebrides, and among many tribes in Asia Minor, where the altered skulls resemble those described by Herodotus as macrocephali. In Europe, the custom of changing the shape of the head has spread widely; the most well-known deformation is what Broca referred to as “Toulousaine,” which is still practiced in both northern and southern France (Fig. 52). What impact does head deformation have on intellectual development? Research in this area doesn't provide clear answers, but it can be assumed that while it may not be as detrimental as some think, the deformation, by shifting the brain's folds, could increase the risk of brain diseases in individuals who are already predisposed to them.[Pg 177][206]

“Toulousaine” Deformation

FIG. 52.—Native of the Department of Haute-Garonne
whose head has undergone the deformation called “Toulousaine.”
(Phot. Delisle; engraving belonging to the Paris Anthro. Society.)

FInstagram. 52.—Native of the Haute-Garonne Department
whose head has experienced the deformation known as “Toulousaine.”
(Phot. Delisle; engraving from the Paris Anthro. Society.)

Adornment with Objects attached to the Body.—The perforation of the ear, the nose, and the lips is made with the view of placing in the hole an ornament of some kind or other. Thus this species of mutilation may be considered as a natural step towards the second manner of adornment, which consists in placing or suspending gauds on the body. When people have few garments or none at all they are compelled to hook[Pg 178] these objects to the body itself. The Botocudo perforates the lobes of the ears and the lower lip to insert into them heavy wooden plugs; other Indians of South America perforate the cheeks to stick feathers therein; the Papuans and the Australians the nasal septum, that it may hold a bone or stick (Figs. 53 and 149); the Caribs and the Negroes of the Ubangi the lower lip, for the insertion of crystal, bone, or metal rods, or simply pins. Similar customs persist, moreover, among peoples more amply clothed. The nose-rings among the Dravidians or among Tatar women; the ear-pendants of the American Indians (Figs. 158, 159, 160, and 161); the bone plugs placed in the cheeks among the Eskimo; the metal plates or precious stones inlaid in the teeth among the Malays of Sumatra, exist to prove this point. And the ear-rings of our civilised European women are the last vestige of a savage form of adornment which requires the mutilation of an organ.

Adornment with Objects Attached to the Body.—The piercing of the ear, nose, and lips is done to insert some kind of ornament into the hole. This form of modification can be seen as a natural progression to the second way of decorating, which involves placing or hanging decorations on the body. When people have few clothes or none at all, they have to attach these objects directly to their skin. The Botocudo tribe pierces the lobes of their ears and lower lips to insert heavy wooden plugs; other South American tribes pierce their cheeks to insert feathers; the Papuans and Australians pierce the nasal septum to hold a bone or stick (Figs. 53 and 149); the Caribs and Ubangi people pierce the lower lip to insert crystal, bone, metal rods, or simply pins. Similar practices are found among more fully clothed cultures. Nose rings are common among Dravidians and Tatar women; ear pendants are worn by American Indians (Figs. 158, 159, 160, and 161); the Eskimo use bone plugs in their cheeks; and the Malays of Sumatra inlay metal plates or precious stones in their teeth. Lastly, the earrings worn by European women today are the last remnants of a primitive form of decoration that involves modifying a part of the body.

The hair also is used to attach ornaments: flowers, jewels, ribbons, chips, feathers (Figs. 47, 117, 154, 158, 159, and frontispiece). As to the arrangement of the hair, it depends a great deal on its nature. The Negroes, with their short and woolly hair, are enabled to have a complicated head-dress (Figs. 47 and 141). Peoples with smooth hair are content to leave it floating behind (Americans, Fig. 160, Indonesians), or to gather it up into a chignon (Annamese, Coreans, Eskimo), in one or several plaits (Chinese), or in several rolls or bands, stuck together and disposed in various ways (Mongols, Japanese, Fig. 120, Chinese). But it is among peoples with frizzy and slightly woolly hair that the head-dress attains a high degree of perfection. We have but to mention the capillary structures of the Bejas (Fig. 138), the Fulbés (Fig. 139), the Papuans and some Melanesians, whose mops of hair with a six-toothed comb coquettishly planted at the top are so characteristic (Figs. 152 and 153).

The hair is also used to attach decorations: flowers, jewels, ribbons, chips, and feathers (Figs. 47, 117, 154, 158, 159, and frontispiece). The way hair is styled depends a lot on its texture. People with short, curly hair, like Black individuals, can have intricate hairstyles (Figs. 47 and 141). Those with straight hair often let it flow behind them (Americans, Fig. 160, Indonesians) or gather it into a bun (Annamese, Koreans, Eskimos), in braids (Chinese), or in multiple rolls or bands styled variously (Mongols, Japanese, Fig. 120, Chinese). However, it's among people with frizzy and slightly curly hair that hairstyles reach a remarkable level of creativity. Just look at the hair styles of the Bejas (Fig. 138), the Fulbés (Fig. 139), the Papuans, and some Melanesians, whose thick hair often features a six-toothed comb playfully placed on top, which is very distinctive (Figs. 152 and 153).

Natives of Murray Islands

FIG. 53.—Dancing costume of natives of Murray Islands (Torres Straits).
Type of Papuan (in the centre), Melanesian (on the right), and mixed race (on the left).
(Phot. Haddon.)

FInstagram. 53.—Dancing costume of locals from Murray Islands (Torres Straits).
Type of Papuan (in the center), Melanesian (on the right), and mixed-race (on the left).
(Phot. Haddon.)

The custom of shaving the hair of the head and the beard, as well as the habit of plucking out the hairs, are more general among peoples whose pilous system is little developed than [Pg 180] among hairy peoples. All the Mongolians, all the Indians of America, and almost all the Oceanians shave or pluck out the hair. Amongst them the razor, sometimes a fragment of obsidian or glass, is used in conjunction with depilatory tweezers. The wearing of the beard or long hair is often a matter of fashion or social convention. From the time of the patriarchs the beard has been honoured in the East, while in the West the fluctuations of fashion or opinion have made of its presence or absence a sign of opposition (Protestant clergy before the eighteenth century in Germany, Republicans of the middle of this century in France), or a distinctive mark of certain classes (Catholic clergy, servants, actors, soldiers in many states). Several superstitious ideas are connected with human hair. From at least the ninth century to the end of the Middle Ages, the Slavs and the Germans shaved the crown of their children’s heads, believing that it facilitated teething.

The practice of shaving the hair on the head and beard, along with the habit of pulling out hair, is more common among people with less body hair than among those with more. All Mongolians, all Native Americans, and nearly all Oceanians shave or pluck out their hair. For them, a razor, sometimes made from obsidian or glass, is used along with tweezers for hair removal. Wearing a beard or long hair is often a matter of style or social norms. Since the time of the patriarchs, beards have been respected in the East, while in the West, changing styles and opinions have made having or not having a beard a sign of opposition (like Protestant clergy before the eighteenth century in Germany, and Republicans in mid-century France) or a marker of certain social classes (like Catholic clergy, servants, actors, and soldiers in many areas). Various superstitions are associated with human hair. From at least the ninth century until the end of the Middle Ages, the Slavs and Germans would shave the crowns of their children's heads, believing it helped with teething.

It would take too long to enumerate all the peoples among whom the cutting of the hair is a stigma of slavery or degradation; certain peoples cut their hair as a sign of mourning (Dakota Indians, etc.), others, on the contrary, let it grow very long for the same reason. On the other hand, the habit of letting the nails grow to a length of several centimetres, so general among the wealthy classes in Indo-China and Malaysia, is inspired chiefly by vanity; the object being to show that they have no need to resort to manual labour in order to live.

It would take too long to list all the cultures where cutting hair is seen as a sign of slavery or shame; some cultures cut their hair as a sign of mourning (like the Dakota Indians), while others, on the contrary, let it grow long for the same reason. On the other hand, the practice of letting nails grow several centimeters long, which is common among the wealthy in Indo-China and Malaysia, is mainly motivated by vanity; the goal is to demonstrate that they don't have to engage in manual labor to survive.

The Girdle, Necklace, and Garland.—Ornaments fixed to the body without mutilating it (the second stage in the evolution of ornament) are very varied. Originally strips of hide, sinews of animals, or herbaceous twigs, sometimes plaited, were fastened around the head or parts of the body where there was a depressed surface, above a bony projection or a muscular protuberance—the neck, the waist, the wrists, the ankles, as is still seen among the Fuegians (Fig. 174), Melanesians, Bushmen, and Australians. According to the parts of the body thus adorned, four classes of ornaments may be[Pg 181] recognised: garlands, collars, belts (Fig. 47), and bracelets (on the arms and legs). To these simple bands men began at first to attach all sorts of secondary ornaments: bright shells (frontispiece and Figs. 53 and 151), seeds and gay-coloured insects, beads of bone and shell-fish (Figs. 151, 159, and 160), claws of wild beasts, teeth and knuckle bones of animals and human beings (Figs. 158 and 159), bristles and hoofs of the Suidæ, pieces of fur, feathers of birds, leaves and flowers. And it is to these superadded ornaments that we may trace the origin of the garment proper. The thong of the head, over and above its utilitarian purpose as a quiver (the Bushmen push their arrows into it), becomes transformed into the crown of feathers so well known among the American Indians and Melanesians (Fig. 53), into a wreath of flowers among the Polynesians, into all kinds of head-covering among other tribes (Figs. 22, 40, 107, 108, 109, 115, 134, 145, etc.).

The Girdle, Necklace, and Garland.—Body ornaments that don't involve alterations (the second stage in the evolution of ornament) are quite diverse. Initially, pieces made from animal hides, tendons, or plant twigs, sometimes braided, were tied around the head or areas of the body with a depressed surface, located above a bone or muscle bulge—the neck, waist, wrists, and ankles, as still seen among the Fuegians (Fig. 174), Melanesians, Bushmen, and Australians. Based on the parts of the body they adorn, we can identify four categories of ornaments: garlands, collars, belts (Fig. 47), and bracelets (for arms and legs). Men started to attach all kinds of secondary decorations to these simple bands: colorful shells (frontispiece and Figs. 53 and 151), seeds and brightly colored insects, beads made from bones and shells (Figs. 151, 159, and 160), claws from wild animals, and teeth and knuckle bones from animals and humans (Figs. 158 and 159), bristles and hooves from pigs, bits of fur, bird feathers, leaves, and flowers. It is to these added ornaments that we can trace the origin of actual clothing. The headband, aside from its practical use as a quiver (the Bushmen insert their arrows into it), transforms into the feathered crown commonly recognized among American Indians and Melanesians (Fig. 53), into a flower crown among Polynesians, and into various types of head coverings among other tribes (Figs. 22, 40, 107, 108, 109, 115, 134, 145, etc.).

To the thong of the neck or collar may be suspended a beast’s skin, and you have it then transformed into a mantle. Among the Fuegians this piece of skin is so scanty that they are obliged to turn it about according to the direction of the wind in order to protect the body effectually (Fig. 48). The thong of the waist, the girdle, was likewise laden with different appendages, and became transformed into a skirt. The leafy branches which the Veddahs push under their belt, the pieces of bark upheld by the belt among the Niam-Niams, the Indo-Malayan “sarong” (Figs. 126 and 146), which combines the functions of a skirt and a belt,—these are all merely the prototype of the skirt.

To the neck or collar, you can attach an animal hide, turning it into a cloak. Among the Fuegians, this piece of skin is so small that they have to reposition it based on the wind direction to effectively cover their bodies (Fig. 48). The waist thong, or girdle, was also loaded with different accessories and transformed into a skirt. The leafy branches that the Veddahs tuck into their belts, the pieces of bark held up by the belt among the Niam-Niams, and the Indo-Malayan “sarong” (Figs. 126 and 146), which serves as both a skirt and a belt—these are all just early versions of the skirt.

Space fails us to show in detail how the other ornaments and garments have sprung from these humble beginnings. How from the bracelet proceeded the ring; how the stone, the twisted tooth, the perforated shell (Figs. 53 and 152) replaced the thongs in this class of ornament; how, when once metals became known, gold and silver plates, hollow and solid rings in gold, silver, copper, or iron (Figs. 112 and 158), brass wire rolled several times around the neck and the limbs, were substituted for thongs of skin, blades of grass, and[Pg 182] shell beads. The inlaying of precious stones has transformed ornament. The wearing of massive metal becomes uncomfortable even in the climate of the tropics; in certain countries of Africa, rich ladies of fashion have slaves specially employed in emptying pots of water over the spiral-shaped bracelets which coil around the whole arm or leg and become excessively hot in the sun (J. G. Wood).

Space doesn't allow us to explain in detail how other decorative items and clothing evolved from these simple beginnings. How the bracelet led to the ring; how stones, twisted teeth, and perforated shells (Figs. 53 and 152) replaced the thongs in this type of ornament; how, once metals were discovered, gold and silver plates, hollow and solid rings made from gold, silver, copper, or iron (Figs. 112 and 158), and brass wire wrapped several times around the neck and limbs replaced thongs made of skin, blades of grass, and shell beads. The addition of precious stones has changed ornamentation. Wearing heavy metal jewelry can be uncomfortable even in tropical climates; in some African countries, wealthy fashionable women have slaves specifically assigned to pour water over the spiral-shaped bracelets that wrap around their arms or legs, as these can become uncomfortably hot in the sun (J. G. Wood).

It is necessary, however, to say a few words about the fabrication of stuffs and the making of garments.

It is necessary, however, to say a few words about the production of materials and the creation of clothing.

The skins of animals—ox, sheep, reindeer, horse, seal, dog, eland, etc.—were used at first just as they were. Then men began to strip off the hair when there was no necessity to protect themselves from cold, soaking the skin in water, to which they added sometimes cinders or other alkaline substances. This is still the method adopted by the Indians of the far west to obtain the very coarse and hard ox-hide for their tents. But if they wish to utilise it for garments, or if they have to deal with the skin of the deer, they scrape it afterwards with stone or metal scrapers, cut it into half the thickness and work it with bone polishers to render it more supple.[207] Tanning comes much later among half-civilised peoples (like the ancient Egyptians, etc.). Apart from the mammals, few animals have furnished materials for the dress of man;[208] the famous mantles and hats of birds’ feathers so artistically worked by the Hawaiians and the ancient Mexicans were only state garments, reserved for chiefs; clothes of salmon skin, prepared in a certain way, have not passed beyond the territory of a single tribe, the Goldes of Amoor; the fish-bladder waterproofs of the Chukchi are only fishing garments. On the other hand, the number of plants from which garments may be made is very great. Several sorts of wood supply the material of which boots are made (the sabot in France and Holland). The bark of the birch is utilised also for plaited boots (“lapti” of the Russians and Finns), the bark of several tropical[Pg 183] trees, almost in its natural state or scarcely beaten, is employed as a garment by the Monbuttus, the Niam-Niams, the tribes of the Uganda, and is characteristic of Zandeh peoples in general; this kind of garment is also found in America (among the Warraus of Guiana and the Andesic tribes). In Oceania the preparation of stuffs from the beaten bark of paper mulberry (Brusonnetia papyrifera) has attained a high degree of perfection, and the “Tapa” of Tahiti with its coloured and printed patterns, the “Kapa” of Hawaii, might enter into competition with woven stuffs.[209]

The hides of animals—like oxen, sheep, reindeer, horses, seals, dogs, and elands—were initially used just as they were. Then, people started to remove the hair when they didn't need the fur for warmth, soaking the hide in water, often adding ashes or other alkaline materials. This is still the technique used by the Native Americans in the far west to obtain the coarse and tough ox-hide for their tents. However, if they want to use it for clothing or if they are dealing with deer skin, they scrape it afterward with stone or metal tools, thin it out, and work it with bone polishers to make it softer.[207] Tanning appears later among semi-civilized societies (like the ancient Egyptians, etc.). Besides mammals, few animals have provided materials for human clothing;[208] the famous capes and hats made from bird feathers, intricately crafted by the Hawaiians and the ancient Mexicans, were only ceremonial garments reserved for chiefs; clothes made from salmon skin, prepared a specific way, have not gone beyond the territory of a single tribe, the Goldes of Amoor; the waterproof garments made from fish bladders by the Chukchi serve only for fishing. On the other hand, there are many plants that can be used to make clothes. Several types of wood provide materials for making boots (like the sabot in France and Holland). Birch bark is also used for woven boots (the "lapti" of the Russians and Finns), while the bark of several tropical trees, either in its natural state or minimally processed, is used as clothing by the Monbuttus, the Niam-Niams, and the tribes of Uganda, and is characteristic of Zandeh peoples in general; this kind of clothing is also found in America (among the Warraus of Guiana and the Andean tribes). In Oceania, the process of making fabrics from the beaten bark of the paper mulberry (Brusonnetia papyrifera) has reached a high level of skill, and the "Tapa" of Tahiti with its colorful and printed designs, as well as the "Kapa" of Hawaii, could compete with woven fabrics.[209]

The latter have been known since remote antiquity. Woven stuffs are found in the pile-dwellings of the bronze age in Europe and in the pyramids of Egypt. But it seems that the plaiting of vegetable fibres and grasses, as it is still practised to-day with esparto grass, must have preceded true weaving. The Polynesians still manufactured, at the beginning of this century, robes plaited with the stems of certain grasses, and plaited straw hats are made by Malays, Indians of North-west America, etc. On the whole, weaving is only plaiting of a finer substance, yarn, which itself is only very thin cord or twine. The process of spinning cord or thread is always the same. In its most primitive form it consists simply in rolling between the palms of both hands, or with one hand on the thigh, the fibres of some textile substance. This is how the Australian proceeds to make a line with his wife’s hair, or the New Zealander when he transforms a handful of native flax, inch by inch, into a perfect cord. The Australian had only to transform into a spindle the little staff with two cross-pieces, on which he rolls up his precious line, to effect a great improvement in his art.[210] In fact, the spindle is a device so well adapted for its purpose that it has come down from the most remote Egyptian antiquity into our steam spinning factories almost without alteration in form. Primitive weaving must have been done at first with the needle, like tapestry or modern embroidery,[Pg 184] but soon this wearisome process was replaced by the following arrangement: two series of threads stretched between two staffs which may be alternately raised and lowered half (warp) by means of vertical head-threads attached to wooden sleys; between the gaps of the threads passes the shuttle carrying the woof, which is thus laid successively above and below each thread of the warp. This is the simplest weaving-loom.

The latter have been known since ancient times. Woven materials have been found in the pile-dwellings of the Bronze Age in Europe and in the pyramids of Egypt. However, it seems that the plaiting of plant fibers and grasses, as is still practiced today with esparto grass, likely came before true weaving. At the beginning of this century, the Polynesians were still making robes plaited from the stems of certain grasses, and Malays, along with Native Americans from the Northwest, create plaited straw hats. Overall, weaving is just plaiting using finer materials, yarn, which itself is merely very thin cord or twine. The process of spinning cord or thread is always the same. In its most basic form, it consists simply of rolling the fibers of some textile material between the palms of both hands, or with one hand on the thigh. This is how an Australian makes a line from his wife’s hair, or how a New Zealander turns a handful of native flax into a perfect cord inch by inch. The Australian needed only to transform a small staff with two cross-pieces, which he uses to wind his precious line, into a spindle to significantly improve his craft.[210] In fact, the spindle is such a well-suited device for its purpose that it has been passed down from ancient Egyptian times to our steam spinning factories almost unchanged in design. Primitive weaving must have initially been done with a needle, similar to tapestry or modern embroidery,[Pg 184] but this laborious method was soon replaced by a system where two sets of threads are stretched between two rods that can be alternately raised and lowered halfway (warp) using vertical head-threads attached to wooden sleys; through the gaps in the threads, a shuttle carrying the woof passes, which is then laid successively above and below each thread of the warp. This is the simplest weaving loom.

The dyeing of thread and stuffs by an application of mordants (kaolin especially) is known to all peoples acquainted with weaving. Nature supplies colours such as indigo, turmeric, litmus, purple, madder, etc., which are subjected to transformations by being left to steep with certain herbs. The Polynesians were acquainted even with printing on textures by means of fern-fronds or Hibiscus flowers, which they steeped in colour and applied to their “tapa.”

The dyeing of thread and fabrics using mordants (especially kaolin) is known to everyone familiar with weaving. Nature provides colors like indigo, turmeric, litmus, purple, madder, and others, which can be transformed by soaking them with specific herbs. The Polynesians even knew how to print on textiles using fern fronds or Hibiscus flowers, which they soaked in dye and applied to their “tapa.”

The primitive “tailors” cut their hides or stuffs with flint knives, sewing the pieces together in shoemaker fashion; they made holes with a bone or horn awl and passed through them a thread made of the sinews of some animal, or of woven grass, etc. Sewing with needles is less common among uncultured peoples, but it has been found in Europe from the neolithic period.

The early “tailors” used flint knives to cut their hides or fabrics, stitching the pieces together like shoemakers. They created holes with a bone or horn awl and threaded them with sinew from animals or woven grass. Sewing with needles isn't as common among uncivilized groups, but it has been discovered in Europe since the Neolithic period.

Making Stone Tools by Percussion

FIG. 54.—Method of making stone tools
by percussion; the first blow.
(After Holmes.)

FIG. 54.—How to create stone tools
using striking; the initial hit.
(After Holmes.)

Means of Existence.—To procure food and the necessary raw materials for the construction of a shelter and the making of clothes, man had to resort at an early stage to various tools, arms, and instruments, which rendered his hunting, fishing, and fruit-gathering expeditions more productive.[211]

Means of Existence.—To get food and the essential materials for building a home and making clothes, humans had to use different tools, weapons, and equipment from an early stage, which made their hunting, fishing, and foraging trips more successful.[211]

We will glance rapidly, in the first place, at tools of a general character needed for all kinds of work. Among most uncultured peoples the raw materials used for making tools were, and are, stone, wood, bone, shell, horn. The metals—copper, bronze, iron, steel—only came later on. This does not mean that the knowledge of the use of metals is necessarily connected with a superior stage of civilisation. Thus most Negroes of Central Africa are excellent black[Pg 185]smiths (Fig. 135), though otherwise less advanced than certain peoples unacquainted with metals, like the New Zealanders or the Incas of Peru, for example (before the arrival of the Europeans).

We will quickly take a look at general tools needed for all kinds of work. Among many uncivilized people, the raw materials used for making tools were, and still are, stone, wood, bone, shell, and horn. The metals—copper, bronze, iron, and steel—came later. This doesn’t mean that knowing how to use metals is necessarily linked to a more advanced stage of civilization. For instance, many Blacksmiths in Central Africa are skilled craftsmen (Fig. 135), even though they may be less advanced than certain groups unfamiliar with metals, like the New Zealanders or the Incas of Peru, for example (before Europeans arrived).

We cannot dwell on the methods of working each of the materials from which tools may be made. It is enough to say that there are two principal methods of working stone—cutting and polishing. The chips are removed from a stone either by percussion with another stone (Fig. 54), or by pressure with the end of a bone or piece of pointed wood (Fig. 55). It[Pg 186] was thus that the Europeans of the post-tertiary period obtained their flint tools (Fig. 84), and to-day the same process may still be seen in operation, less and less frequently it is true, among the Eskimo when they are making their knives, and among the Fuegians and Californians when they are preparing their spear-heads or arrows, etc. (Figs. 56 and 73). The process of polishing takes longer and produces finer tools (Figs. 71 and 112). In Europe it succeeded that of stone-cutting, and it flourished among the peoples of Oceania and America before the arrival of Europeans. Polished tools are obtained by rubbing for a long time a chipped or unchipped stone against another stone with the addition of water and sand, or the dust of the same rock from which the tool is made.

We can't focus on how to work with each type of material used for making tools. It’s enough to say there are two main ways to work with stone—cutting and polishing. Chips are removed from a stone either by striking it with another stone (Fig. 54) or by applying pressure with the end of a bone or a pointed piece of wood (Fig. 55). That’s how Europeans in the post-tertiary period made their flint tools (Fig. 84), and today this same method is still seen, though less often, among the Eskimo when they create their knives, and among the Fuegians and Californians when they prepare their spearheads or arrows, etc. (Figs. 56 and 73). The polishing process takes longer and produces finer tools (Figs. 71 and 112). In Europe, it replaced stone-cutting and thrived among the people of Oceania and America before Europeans arrived. Polished tools are made by rubbing a chipped or unchipped stone against another stone for a long time, using water and sand, or the dust from the same type of rock used to make the tool.

As to metals, of the two methods of working them, forging, which can be adopted in the case of native metals, is more general amongst uncultured peoples than casting, which implies a knowledge of treating the ore. The Indians of America could forge copper, gold, and silver before the arrival of Columbus, but the casting of bronze or iron-ore was unknown to them. On the other hand, Negroes know how to obtain iron by smelting the ore, and from the very earliest times the peoples of Europe, Anterior Asia, China, and Indo-China were acquainted with the treatment of copper ore,[212] and obtained bronze by the amalgamation of copper with tin, and sometimes with lead or antimony (in Egypt, Armenia, the Caucasus, Transylvania).

As for metals, of the two ways to work with them, forging, which can be used with native metals, is more common among less advanced societies than casting, which requires knowledge of how to process ore. Native Americans could forge copper, gold, and silver before Columbus arrived, but they didn't know how to cast bronze or iron. In contrast, some African groups were able to smelt iron from ore, and from ancient times, people in Europe, Eastern Asia, China, and Southeast Asia were familiar with processing copper ore,[212] and produced bronze by combining copper with tin, and sometimes lead or antimony (in Egypt, Armenia, the Caucasus, Transylvania).

Flaking Stone by Pressure

FIG. 55.—Method of flaking stone by pressure;
the splinter (c) is severed by outside pressure on the stone
with a pointed bone (a).
(After Holmes.)

FIG. 55.—How to flake stone using pressure;
the splinter (c) is broken off by applying outside pressure on the stone
with a pointed bone (a).
(After Holmes.)

In the early stages of material progress the objects manufactured were not differentiated; the weapon of to-day became the tool of to-morrow, the agricultural implement of the day after. However, there are savages who have sometimes special instruments for cutting or chopping (axes, knives, saws of stone or shell), saws for scraping or planing (scrapers and raspers of stone, bone, shell, etc.), for piercing (awls of bone or horn, stone bits), for hammering and driving in (stone hammers), etc. As to the fastenings which keep together the different parts of the tools, these are chiefly bands (sinews, strips of hide or bark, plaited or spun cords) and the sticky preparations of various gums and resins. An axe or a knife is fixed to its handle by means of cords of plaited coco-nut fibres in Polynesia (Fig. 71) and very rarely among Negroes (Fig. 74), by resin in Australia and among the Hupa Indians of the Oregon (Fig. 56), and by sinews or strips of sealskin among the Chukchi and the Indians of California (Fig. 73).

In the early days of material advancement, the items made were not distinct; today's weapon became tomorrow's tool, and the agricultural device of the following day. However, there are tribes who sometimes have specific tools for cutting or chopping (axes, knives, stone or shell saws), saws for scraping or planing (scrapers and rasps made of stone, bone, shell, etc.), tools for piercing (bone or horn awls, stone bits), and tools for hammering and driving (stone hammers), etc. As for the fastenings that hold different parts of the tools together, these mainly consist of bands (sinews, strips of hide or bark, braided or spun cords) and sticky mixtures made from various gums and resins. In Polynesia (Fig. 71), an axe or knife is attached to its handle using braided coconut fiber cords, which is rarely found among African tribes (Fig. 74), while in Australia and among the Hupa Indians of Oregon (Fig. 56), resin is used, and among the Chukchi and California Indians (Fig. 73), sinews or strips of sealskin are used.

Knife, Hupa Indians

FIG. 56.—Knife of chipped flint of the Hupa Indians;
it is mounted on a wood handle with pitch. Attached to a longer handle it becomes a spear.
(After Ray, U.S. Nat. Museum.)

FIG. 56.—Knife made of chipped flint by the Hupa Indians;
it has a wooden handle secured with pitch. When attached to a longer handle, it turns into a spear.
(After Ray, U.S. Nat. Museum.)

The invention of primitive “machines” followed that of tools. Alternate rotatory motion must have been utilised in the first instance as being the easiest to obtain. Example: the flint-pointed drill of the Indians of the north-west of America, the apparatus for making fire (see Fig. 36), or the turning-lathe of the Kalmuks (Fig. 57), the Egyptians and the Hindus, moved by the palms of the hand at first, with a cord afterwards, and later again with a bow.[213] The transformation of this alternating motion into a continuous circular one must probably have resulted from the use of the spindle furnished with its wheel. In this instrument, so simple in appearance, is found the first application of the important discovery that rotatory movement once produced may be maintained during a certain time by a heavy weight performing the function of a fly-wheel.

The invention of basic “machines” came after tools. An alternating rotary motion was likely used first because it was the easiest to achieve. For example, the flint-pointed drill of the Native Americans in the northwest, the device for starting a fire (see Fig. 36), or the turning lathe used by the Kalmuks (Fig. 57), the Egyptians, and the Hindus, were initially operated by hand, then later with a cord, and eventually with a bow.[213] The shift from this alternating motion to a continuous circular motion probably came from using a spindle equipped with a wheel. This simple-looking tool demonstrates the first application of the significant discovery that rotary movement, once generated, can be sustained for a while by a heavy weight acting as a flywheel.

The potter’s wheel (p. 55) is a second application of the same principle; rollers for the conveyance of heavy objects are a third (see Chap. VII., Transports). The screw and the nut[Pg 188] appear to be a comparatively recent invention, presupposing a degree of superior development. Certain authors see in the use of twisted cords, and the cassava-squeezer of the Caribs of Guiana,[214] the first steps towards that invention. The principle of the single pulley is frequently applied by savages, and the compound pulley or tackle-block is known to the Eskimo, who make use of it to land huge cetaceans (Fig. 58).

The potter’s wheel (p. 55) is the second application of the same principle; rollers for moving heavy objects are a third (see Chap. VII., Transports). The screw and the nut[Pg 188] seem to be a relatively recent invention, assuming a level of advanced development. Some authors view the use of twisted cords and the cassava squeezer of the Caribs of Guiana,[214] as the early stages leading to that invention. The principle of the single pulley is often used by indigenous peoples, and the compound pulley or tackle block is known to the Eskimos, who use it to land large whales (Fig. 58).

Kalmuk Turning Lathe

FIG. 57.—Kalmuk turning lathe with alternating rotatory movement
obtained by means of a strap (a);
(c) block of wood to make a porringer;
(d) bench for the workman.
(After Reuleaux.)

FIG. 57.—Kalmuk lathe with an alternating rotary motion
achieved through a strap (a);
(c) piece of wood for making a porringer;
(d) workbench for the craftsman.
(After Reuleaux.)

We may divide the activity displayed by uncivilised and even half-civilised peoples in procuring the necessaries of life into four great categories: hunting, fishing, agriculture with fruit-gathering, and cattle-breeding.

We can break down the activities shown by uncivilized and even semi-civilized people in getting the essentials for life into four main categories: hunting, fishing, farming and fruit picking, and raising livestock.

Hunting is almost the only resource of uncivilised peoples; it is still a powerful auxiliary means of livelihood with nomads and primitive tillers of the soil, and it is only among civilised peoples that it assumes the character of a sport. Originally,[Pg 189] man was obliged to hunt without weapons, as certain tribes still sometimes do. On dark nights, when the cormorants are asleep, the Fuegian hunter, hanging by a thong of seal-skin, glides along the cliffs, holding on to jutting points of rock; when near a bird he seizes it with both hands and crushes its head between his teeth, without giving it time to utter a cry or make a movement. He then passes on to another, and so continues until some noise puts the cormorants to flight.

Hunting is nearly the only resource for uncivilized people; it remains a significant way of making a living for nomads and primitive farmers, and it’s mainly among civilized people that it becomes a sport. Originally,[Pg 189] humans had to hunt without weapons, like certain tribes do sometimes today. On dark nights, when the cormorants are asleep, the Fuegian hunter, hanging by a seal-skin thong, moves silently along the cliffs, gripping onto jutting rocks; when he gets close to a bird, he grabs it with both hands and crushes its head with his teeth, not giving it a chance to make a sound or move. He then moves on to another bird, continuing this until some noise causes the cormorants to flee.

But more frequently the inventive faculty is brought into play to construct all kinds of weapons for facilitating the capture of prey. As most of these contrivances are at the same time weapons of war, we shall glance at them in Chapter VII. Moreover, the multiplicity of weapons has not prevented primitive man from using all sorts of stratagems for capturing animals. Any one who has dipped into the old books on venery, or even into catalogues of modern gunsmiths, is able to realise this, for most of the traps, snares, and pitfalls represented are also found among savages. Bow-traps are especially favoured, but the springe for birds and the pitfalls for large animals are not despised. To these we may add the use of bait, poisoning, the smoking of bees in order to take their honey, the imitation of the song of birds to allure them to the gin, disguise by means of the skin of a beast the better to approach it, and the artifices devised by man in his war with animals are not yet exhausted. There is still the most treacherous of all: having degraded certain animals by domestication (falcon, dog, cat, etc.), man makes them hunt their untamed kind (see Domestication).

But more often, creativity is used to create all kinds of tools for capturing prey. Since many of these tools also serve as weapons of war, we'll take a look at them in Chapter VII.. Furthermore, the variety of weapons hasn't stopped early humans from using various tricks to catch animals. Anyone who has explored old texts on hunting or even modern gunsmith catalogs can see this, as many traps, snares, and pitfalls shown are also used by primitive people. Bow traps are particularly popular, but springes for birds and pitfalls for larger animals are also utilized. Additionally, there's the use of bait, poison, smoking bees to collect their honey, mimicking bird songs to lure them into traps, and disguising oneself with animal skins to get closer. The clever strategies humans have come up with in their battle against animals are far from being exhausted. Perhaps the most deceptive tactic of all is domesticating certain animals (like falcons, dogs, and cats) to help hunt their wild counterparts (see Domestication).

In fishing there is the same display of artifice. The simple gathering of shells, sea-urchins, and crustaceans at low tide, mostly left to the women, supplements but little the means of subsistence of fishing populations. The bulk of fish and animals of aquatic habits are taken by means of suitable weapons, and still more often by means of traps, weirs, poisoned waters, etc.

In fishing, there's the same level of skill involved. The basic collection of shells, sea urchins, and crustaceans at low tide is mostly done by women and adds very little to the livelihoods of fishing communities. The majority of fish and aquatic animals are caught using appropriate tools, and even more frequently through traps, weirs, poisoned water, and so on.

The weapons most used in fishing are pikes with one or several teeth (tridents, fish-spears), that the Melanesians, the[Pg 190] Fuegians, the Indians of Brazil, and so many other savages handle with the utmost dexterity, never missing the fish for which they lie in wait sometimes for hours at a time. The bow is also sometimes employed to shoot the fish (Andamanese), but the special missile used in fishing is the harpoon, the wood or bone head of which usually takes the form of a fork or pike with one or several barbs.

The most common tools used for fishing are pikes with one or more points (like tridents or fish-spears), which the Melanesians, the[Pg 190] Fuegians, the Indigenous people of Brazil, and many other cultures master with impressive skill, rarely missing the fish they target, sometimes waiting for hours. Bows are also occasionally used to catch fish (as seen in the Andaman Islands), but the key tool for fishing is the harpoon, which typically has a wooden or bone tip shaped like a fork or pike with one or more barbs.

Eskimo Tackle

FIG. 58.—Principle of tackle utilised by Eskimo, landing a walrus.
Above, on left, detail of the arrangement of the rope round stakes.
(After Elliot.)

FIG. 58.—Principle of tackle used by Eskimos to land a walrus.
Above, on the left, detail of how the rope is arranged around the stakes.
(After Elliot.)

The Fuegians simply throw their harpoons like a javelin, the[Pg 191] Eskimo make use of instruments to hurl them (see Chap. VII.). In many harpoons the head is only fitted to the shaft and attached to it by a long cord; immediately the animal is wounded the shaft separates itself from the head and acts as a float, indicating the spot where the victim has plunged, for it will not be long before he comes again to the surface to breathe, and other wounds are then inflicted. The Eskimo of Asia and the Chukchi also attach bladders to the shaft as floats. But all these weapons are chiefly employed against marine mammals (seals, sea-lions, walruses, whales, etc.); for catching fish recourse is had to other means. Poisoning the water appears to be one of the most primitive. It is constantly practised by Australians, Indonesians, and Melanesians. We have next to refer to the various devices for catching fish, which, according to O. Mason, may be grouped into two categories—(1) those intended to bring the fish, quietly following its way, into a place or trap from which it cannot afterwards get out, and (2) those which consist in getting it to swallow a hook hidden under some form of bait.

The Fuegians simply throw their harpoons like javelins, while the Eskimos use tools to launch them (see Chap. VII.). In many harpoons, the head is only attached to the shaft by a long cord; as soon as the animal is hit, the shaft separates from the head and acts as a float to mark where the animal has gone under. It won’t be long before it comes back up for air, and that's when more wounds can be inflicted. The Asian Eskimos and the Chukchi also attach bladders to the shaft to act as floats. However, these weapons are mainly used against marine mammals (like seals, sea lions, walruses, and whales); when it comes to catching fish, other methods are used. One of the most primitive methods is poisoning the water, commonly practiced by Australians, Indonesians, and Melanesians. Next, we should look at the different devices for catching fish, which, according to O. Mason, can be grouped into two categories—(1) those designed to direct the fish, which is swimming along, into a trap it can’t escape from, and (2) those that involve making it swallow a hook hidden under some kind of bait.

Among the former of these devices, bow-nets and sweep-nets in bamboo and rattan are very widely used among the Dyaks, Micronesians, etc. Cast-nets are less common among uncivilised peoples; they are met with, however, in Polynesia. Fish-hooks other than those in metal are made of bone, the thorns of certain trees, of wood, and especially of mother-of-pearl. For fishing-boats, see Chapter VII. (Navigation).

Among the earlier versions of these tools, bow-nets and sweep-nets made from bamboo and rattan are widely used by the Dyaks, Micronesians, and others. Cast-nets are less common among non-modern societies but can be found in Polynesia. Fish-hooks, aside from metal ones, are made from bone, thorns from certain trees, wood, and especially mother-of-pearl. For fishing-boats, see Chapter VII. (Navigation).

Agriculture.—It is constantly stated that man has passed successively through three stages—that in the first he was a hunter, in the second a nomadic shepherd, and in the third a tiller of the soil. This is only true if we consider agriculture as it is understood at the present day in Europe, that is to say as closely connected with the existence of certain domestic animals (horses, oxen, etc.) which supply man with motive power and at the same time with manure. But there are numerous peoples, without these domestic animals, who nevertheless are acquainted with agriculture, only it is a special kind of agriculture which is related rather to our ornamental and market[Pg 192] gardening, at least by the method of cultivation.[215] Hahn has proposed to call this species of cultivation after the principal, and almost the only, tool which is used—“Hoe-culture” (Hackbau in German); while cultivation by means of a plough drawn by animals might be called true agriculture (Ackerbau).

Agriculture.—It is often said that humanity has gone through three stages: first as hunters, then as nomadic shepherds, and finally as agricultural workers. This holds true primarily when we think of agriculture as it's defined today in Europe, which is heavily tied to certain domesticated animals (like horses and oxen) that provide power and manure. However, many cultures exist without these domesticated animals and still practice agriculture, although it's a specific type that's more akin to our ornamental and market[Pg 192] gardening, particularly regarding cultivation methods.[215] Hahn has suggested calling this method of cultivation after the main, and nearly the only, tool used—“Hoe-culture” (Hackbau in German); whereas cultivation using a plow pulled by animals could be referred to as true agriculture (Ackerbau).

It is evident that in the development of mankind the most primitive hoe-culture, such as is practised by certain tribes of Africa and South America, may well have sprung from the gathering of plants and roots. The Australians, the Papuans (Fig. 152), and the Indians of California even yet make use of pointed staves, hardened in the fire, to unearth natural roots; certain Negroes and Bushmen join to the staff a stone whorl which makes the work easier. These “digging sticks” are the first agricultural implements; they perhaps preceded the hoe. The habit that many Australian tribes have of returning periodically to the same places for the gathering of fruits and roots, giving these time to grow, is one of the first steps towards the cultivation of the ground; it proves a comprehension of the development of a plant from a sown seed. Hoe-culture prevails at the present time in vast regions of tropical Africa and in South America. The tubers, maniocs, yams, and sweet potatoes play a prominent part there, but the graminaceæ also are represented by the maize introduced from America and rice from Asia, and it is among the two peoples who have adopted these cereals as the staple of their food, the Incas of Peru and the Chinese, that hoe-culture has been improved by the introduction of manure. Carried to a still greater degree of perfection by the employment of artificial manure, it has been transformed by civilised peoples into “plantations” (sugar-cane, coffee, etc.) in tropical countries and into “horticulture” in all climates.

It's clear that in human development, the most basic farming practices, like those used by certain tribes in Africa and South America, likely originated from foraging for plants and roots. Aboriginal Australians, Papuans (Fig. 152), and California Indians still use pointed sticks, hardened in fire, to dig up natural roots; some African and Bushmen groups attach a stone weight to their sticks to make the task easier. These "digging sticks" are the earliest farming tools; they probably came before the hoe. Many Australian tribes have a habit of returning to the same spots to gather fruits and roots, allowing time for them to regrow, which is an early step toward cultivating land; it shows an understanding of how plants develop from seeds. Hoe-based agriculture is still common today in large areas of tropical Africa and South America. Tubers like cassava, yams, and sweet potatoes are significant, but grains like maize from America and rice from Asia are also present. Among the people who have made these grains staples, like the Incas of Peru and the Chinese, hoe agriculture has advanced with the use of manure. With further enhancement through artificial fertilizers, it has evolved into "plantations" (like sugar, coffee, etc.) in tropical regions and into "horticulture" across all climates.

True agriculture could only have originated where the ox, the horse, the buffalo, and other animals used in ploughing were first domesticated—that is to say, in Eurasia, and perhaps more particularly in Mesopotamia, where the art of irrigation was known at a period when in other countries there was not even any agriculture at all. As far[Pg 193] back as the historic Chaldean monuments can take us we find agriculture existing in this part of Asia. In Europe it has appeared since the neolithic age, after the quaternary period. Domestic animals having most probably been introduced into Egypt from Asia, it may be supposed that before their introduction the country of the Pharaohs was cultivated by the hoe, like the kingdom of the Incas of old, or that of the “sons of Heaven” of the present day. Besides, in Asia, as in Europe, hoe-culture existed thus early, and the favourite plant cultivated was millet (Panicum miliaceum, L.), consumed but little to-day, but universally known, which attests its importance in antiquity.[216]

True agriculture could only have started where the ox, horse, buffalo, and other animals used for plowing were first domesticated—that is, in Eurasia, particularly in Mesopotamia, where the technique of irrigation was developed long before agriculture appeared in other regions. As far back as the historic Chaldean monuments can take us, we find agriculture thriving in this area of Asia. In Europe, it emerged during the Neolithic age, after the Quaternary period. Domestic animals were likely brought into Egypt from Asia, suggesting that before their arrival, the land of the Pharaohs was cultivated with hoes, similar to how the Inca kingdom was in the past or the “sons of Heaven” are today. Additionally, in Asia and Europe, hoe-culture existed early on, with millet (Panicum miliaceum, L.) being the most commonly cultivated plant, which is now less consumed but was widely recognized, highlighting its significance in ancient times.[216]

The system of laying lands fallow and raising crops in rotation could only have been established with the development of agriculture. Hoe-culture was satisfied with the total exhaustion of the soil, even if it had to seek out new ground cleared by a conflagration of the forests, the ashes of which were the first and only manure.

The method of leaving land unused and growing different crops in cycles could only have come about with the advancement of farming. Hand cultivation was okay with completely depleting the soil, even if it meant looking for fresh ground cleared by a forest fire, where the ashes were the first and only fertilizer.

The plough, that implement so characteristic of true agriculture, has evolved, as regards its form, from the double-handled hoe of Portuguese Africa (Livingstone), which bears so close a resemblance to that of the Egyptian monuments, to the “sokha” of the Russian peasants, and even to the steam plough of the modern farmer, not to mention the heavy ploughs, all of wood except the share and the coulter, still in use in many rural districts of Central Europe. Reaping in both systems of cultivation is accomplished with knives or special implements, bill-hooks, examples of which, almost as perfect as those of to-day, are found as far back as the days of ancient Egypt and the bronze age in Europe; the scythe, known to the ancient Greeks, appears to be a later improvement.

The plow, an essential tool of true agriculture, has transformed in its design from the double-handled hoe used in Portuguese Africa (Livingstone), which closely resembles those seen in Egyptian monuments, to the "sokha" of Russian peasants, and even to the steam-powered plow used by modern farmers. Not to forget, there are still heavy wooden plows in many rural areas of Central Europe, which only have metal shares and coulters. Harvesting in both farming systems is done with knives or specialized tools like billhooks, which have been found in ancient Egypt and from the Bronze Age in Europe, almost as refined as what we have today; the scythe, known to the ancient Greeks, seems to be a later advancement.

The threshing of wheat, which often constitutes but a single[Pg 194] operation with winnowing and the preparation of food (see p. 156) in hoe-culture, is accomplished in true agriculture with the aid of domestic animals, either by making them tread on the threshing-floor, or draw over the cut corn a heavy plank strewn with fragments of flint (the tribulum of the Romans, the mowrej of the Arabs and the Berbers, in Syria, Tunisia, and Egypt). For grinding, see p. 156.

The threshing of wheat, which is often just a single[Pg 194] task along with winnowing and food preparation (see p. 156) in hoe-culture, is carried out in true agriculture with the help of domestic animals, either by having them walk on the threshing floor or by pulling a heavy plank scattered with flint fragments over the cut wheat (the tribulum of the Romans, the mowrej of the Arabs and Berbers, in Syria, Tunisia, and Egypt). For grinding, see p. 156.

The use of granaries for storing the crop is known to most semi-civilised peoples (see p. 168); almost always the granaries are arranged on poles (example: Ainus), or on clay stands (example: Negroes). “Silos,” or holes in the ground for hiding the crop in, exist among the Kabyles of Algeria, the Laotians (Neïs), the Mongols of Zaidam (Prjevalsky), etc.

The use of granaries for storing crops is familiar to most semi-civilized societies (see p. 168); granaries are usually set up on poles (like the Ainus) or on clay stands (as seen with the Negroes). "Silos," or holes in the ground for storing crops, are found among the Kabyles of Algeria, the Laotians (Neïs), the Mongols of Zaidam (Prjevalsky), and others.

Domestic Animals.—The breeding of domestic animals should be considered, as I have already said, an occupation denoting a social state superior to that in which hoe-culture is prevalent. But before concerning himself specially with the breeding of cattle, man knew how to domesticate certain animals. I emphasise this term, for domestication presupposes a radical change, by means of selection, in the habits of the animal, which becomes capable of reproducing its species in captivity; this is not the case with animals simply tamed.

Domestic Animals.—As I mentioned before, breeding domestic animals should be viewed as a sign of a more advanced social state compared to one where farming with hand tools is common. However, before focusing specifically on the breeding of cattle, humans learned how to domesticate certain animals. I want to stress this term because domestication involves a significant shift, achieved through selective breeding, in the behavior of the animal, which then becomes able to reproduce its kind in captivity; this is not the case for animals that are simply tamed.

One of the first animals tamed, then domesticated, by man was probably the dog. The most uncultured tribes—Fuegians and Australians—possess domesticated dogs, trained for hunting. Europeans of neolithic times bred several species of them: the Canis familiaris palustris, of small size; a large dog (C. f. Inostrantzewi), the remains of which have been found in the prehistoric settlements of Lake Ladoga and Lake Neuchâtel, and which would be nearly allied to the Siberian sledge-dogs; lastly, the Canis familiaris Lesneri, of very slender form, with skull somewhat resembling that of the Scotch greyhound (deerhound), which gave birth in the bronze age to two races: the shepherd dog (Canis familiaris matris optimæ) and the hunting dog (Canis familiaris intermedius). It is from these three species of Arctic origin that most of the canine races of Europe and Central and Northern Asia are descended; those of Southern[Pg 195] Asia, of Oceania, and Africa would be derived from a different type, represented to-day by the Dingo of Australia.[217] We may lay stress on these differences of canine races because often the races of domestic animals vary according to the human races which breed them. Thus, it has been observed in the Tyrol that the geographical distribution of races of oxen corresponds with that of varieties of the human race.

One of the first animals that humans tamed and then domesticated was probably the dog. Even the most primitive tribes—like the Fuegians and Australians—had domesticated dogs trained for hunting. Europeans during the Neolithic period bred several dog species: the small Canis familiaris palustris; a larger dog (C. f. Inostrantzewi) whose remains have been found in prehistoric settlements around Lake Ladoga and Lake Neuchâtel, closely related to Siberian sled dogs; and finally, the slender Canis familiaris Lesneri, which has a skull somewhat resembling that of the Scottish greyhound (deerhound). In the Bronze Age, this dog became the ancestor of two breeds: the shepherd dog (Canis familiaris matris optimæ) and the hunting dog (Canis familiaris intermedius). Most of the dog breeds in Europe and Central and Northern Asia trace their origins back to these three Arctic species; those in Southern Asia, Oceania, and Africa come from a different type, represented today by the Dingo of Australia.[217] We emphasize these differences among dog breeds because the varieties of domestic animals often correspond to the human races that breed them. For example, in the Tyrol, it has been noted that the geographical distribution of cattle breeds aligns with the varieties of human populations.

After dogs, several other carnivorous animals have been tamed with a view to the chase: tiger, ferret, civet cat, wild cat, leopard, and falcon; but man has only been able to domesticate two: the ferret and the cat. The Chinese have succeeded in domesticating the cormorant and utilising it for fishing, placing, however, a ring on its neck, so that it cannot give way to its wild instinct to swallow the fish which it catches.

After dogs, several other carnivorous animals have been domesticated for hunting: tiger, ferret, civet cat, wild cat, leopard, and falcon; but humans have only managed to fully domesticate two: the ferret and the cat. The Chinese have successfully trained the cormorant for fishing, placing a ring around its neck to prevent it from giving in to its natural instinct to swallow the fish it catches.

Many animals have been domesticated by peoples acquainted only with hoe-culture; such as the pig and the hen in Africa and Oceania; the she-goat in Africa; the turkey, the duck (Anas moschata), the guinea-pig, and the llama in America. But true agriculture begins only with the domestication of the bovine races, the she-goat, and the ass; and true breeding of cattle with the domestication of the camel and the sheep among nomads. The horse and the mule do not appear until a little later among nomads, as among sedentary peoples.

Many animals have been domesticated by communities familiar only with basic farming techniques, like pigs and chickens in Africa and Oceania, and goats in Africa. In America, there are turkeys, ducks (Anas moschata), guinea pigs, and llamas. However, true agriculture only starts with the domestication of cattle, goats, and donkeys, along with the proper breeding of livestock and the domestication of camels and sheep among nomadic groups. Horses and mules come into play a bit later, both among nomads and settled populations.

Among the domesticated bovidæ other than the ox must be mentioned the yak in Thibet and around Thibet; the gayal of Assam and Upper Burma; the banteng (Bos sondaicus) of Malaysia; and the buffalo, which is found everywhere where rice is planted. In mentioning, besides the animals just referred to, the reindeer of hyperborean peoples (Laplanders, Samoyeds, Tunguses, Chukchi), we shall have exhausted the list of nineteen domesticated mammals actually known to the different peoples, according to Hahn. As to birds, out of thirteen, we have named only[Pg 196] four: cormorant, duck, hen, and turkey; to these must be added the goose, the swan, the Guinea-fowl, the peacock, the pheasant, the canary, the parrot, the ostrich, and, lastly, the pigeon, which perhaps of all the winged race is the easiest to tame. The other classes of animals have furnished few useful helpers of man. Among insects there are the bee and the silkworm; among fishes we can mention only three: carp, goldfish, and Macropus viridiauratus, Lacep., chiefly bred for amusement by the Chinese.

Among the domesticated cattle apart from the ox, we should mention the yak found in Tibet and its surrounding areas; the gayal from Assam and Upper Burma; the banteng (Bos sondaicus) of Malaysia; and the buffalo, which is present wherever rice is grown. Besides these animals, if we include the reindeer of the Arctic peoples (Laplanders, Samoyeds, Tunguses, Chukchi), we will have listed all nineteen domesticated mammals known to various cultures, according to Hahn. Regarding birds, we have named only[Pg 196] four: cormorant, duck, hen, and turkey; we should also add the goose, swan, Guinea-fowl, peacock, pheasant, canary, parrot, ostrich, and finally, the pigeon, which is possibly the easiest bird to tame. Other animal groups have provided few useful companions for humans. Among insects, there's the bee and the silkworm; in terms of fish, we can only note three: carp, goldfish, and Macropus viridiauratus, Lacep., primarily raised for entertainment by the Chinese.


CHAPTER VI.

II. SOCIOLOGICAL CHARACTERS—continued.

II. SOCIOLOGICAL CHARACTERS—continued.

2. PSYCHIC LIFE: Games and Recreations—Their importance—Games of children and adults—Sports and public spectacles—Masks—Fine Arts—Graphic arts—Ornamentation—Drawing—Sculpture—Dancing—Its importance among uncultured peoples—Pantomime and dramatic art—Vocal and instrumental music—Instruments of music—Poetry—Religion—Animism—Its two elements: belief in the soul, and belief in spirits—Fetichism—Polytheism—Rites and ceremonies—Priesthood—International religions—MythsScience—Art of counting—Geometry—Calculation of time—Clocks and calendars—Geography and cartography—Medicine and surgery.

2. PPSYCHIC LIFE: Games and Recreation—Their importance—Games for kids and adults—Sports and public events—Masks—Fine Arts—Visual arts—Decoration—Drawing—Sculpture—Dancing—Its significance among less developed cultures—Pantomime and theater—Singing and instrumental music—Music instruments—Poetry—Religion—Animism—Two main beliefs: the soul and spirits—Fetishism—Polytheism—Rituals and ceremonies—Clerical roles—Global religions—MythsScience—Counting systems—Geometry—Time measurement—Clocks and calendars—Geography and map-making—Medicine and surgery.

2. PSYCHIC LIFE.

Games and Recreations.—In two works based on carefully observed facts, Groos has shown that animals do not expend all their muscular and psychic energy in procuring the means of material existence, but, further, expend this energy in games, which are really a process of training, of education. In a greater degree is this the case with man, that animal whose psychical life has expanded so enormously.[218] In fact, games are the first manifestations of the psychical life not only of man individually but of mankind as a whole.

Games and Recreations.—In two works based on careful observation, Groos has demonstrated that animals don't use all their physical and mental energy solely for survival, but also engage this energy in play, which serves as a way of training and learning. This is even more pronounced in humans, whose mental development has expanded significantly. In fact, games are one of the first signs of mental activity, not only for individuals but for humanity as a whole.

It is necessary to distinguish between the games of children and those of adults. The former are above all imitation, while the latter aim at either gaining an advantage or demonstrating muscular or mental strength and skill.

It’s important to differentiate between the games of children and those of adults. The former are mainly about imitation, while the latter focus on gaining an advantage or showcasing physical or mental strength and skill.

The boys of “savages” handle tiny bows and lassoes made by themselves, and hunt toy guancos, birds, and turtles made of clay and wood, in imitation of their fathers; while the little[Pg 198] girls treat their rag dolls as actual children, repeating the gestures and words of their mothers. It is the imitative game of the young.

The boys of “savages” use tiny bows and lassoes that they made themselves, and they hunt toy guancos, birds, and turtles crafted from clay and wood, mimicking their fathers; while the little[Pg 198] girls care for their rag dolls like they’re real kids, copying the actions and words of their moms. It’s the playful imitation of the young.

But if the object of the game is to exercise the strength and skill, it becomes common to children and adults. It is such with the game of hand-ball, known to all peoples with the exception perhaps of the Negroes; and stilts, which are met with in Europe, China, Eastern Africa, and Polynesia. Side by side with these games in which muscular skill plays the principal part, there are others in which attention and quickness of the senses are put to the test. To guess in which hand some object is hidden is a recreation among the Tlinkits, as among Europeans. Among the Hottentots this game is complicated, inasmuch as it is necessary to point out by a special position of the fingers the hand of the partner which is supposed to conceal the object, thus recalling the very ancient game known to the Egyptians, and called by the Romans mirare digitis, which survives at the present time under the name of “Morra” in Italy.

But if the goal of the game is to showcase strength and skill, it becomes popular among both kids and adults. This is true for the game of handball, which is known to all cultures except, perhaps, the Black communities; and stilts, which can be found in Europe, China, Eastern Africa, and Polynesia. Alongside these games that focus on physical skill, there are others that test attention and quickness of the senses. Guessing which hand hides an object is a pastime for the Tlinkits, just like it is for Europeans. Among the Hottentots, this game is more complex because players must indicate with a special position of their fingers which hand of their partner is believed to be concealing the object, reminiscent of the very old game known to the Egyptians, called by the Romans mirare digitis, which still exists today under the name “Morra” in Italy.

This is how it is played:—Simultaneously each partner, putting out his hand, shows whatever number of fingers he may think fit, bending the others, and at the same moment mentioning a number; he whose figure equals the sum of the fingers stretched out by the two partners wins the game. It is evident that this game, known in absolutely the same form in China, is already a game of chance. It is the same with most games played with dice, whether the latter be represented by true dice (China, prehistoric Europe), or by otter’s teeth, seeds, etc., variously marked or coloured (Indians of North America), or by sheep’s astragali (Central Asia, Persia, etc.). Lotto is known to the Chinese, the Siamese, etc., and it was the Celestials who introduced roulette or the thirty-four animal games into Indo-China.[219]

This is how it's played: each partner simultaneously puts out their hand and shows whatever number of fingers they choose, bending the others, and at the same time mentions a number; the person whose figure matches the sum of the fingers extended by both partners wins the game. It's clear that this game, known in exactly the same way in China, is already a game of chance. This applies to most games played with dice, whether actual dice (China, prehistoric Europe), or represented by otter’s teeth, seeds, etc., that are marked or colored differently (Indians of North America), or by sheep’s astragali (Central Asia, Persia, etc.). Lotto is recognized by the Chinese, the Siamese, etc., and it was the Celestials who introduced roulette or the thirty-four animal games into Indo-China.[219]

The chief intellectual game is chess, invented in India; varieties of chess are the game of draughts, known wherever European civilisation penetrates, and the game of Uri or Mugole, spread by the Arabs throughout the whole of Africa from Madagascar to Senegal. The object used in this latter game is a block of wood with 16, 24, or 32 little cups disposed in two or four rows, in which the aim is to place in a certain way a certain number of little stones or seeds. A third variety of the game of chess, backgammon, holds a middle place between Uri and the game of dice, and in consequence is half a game of chance. It is known under the name of Tob in Egypt and Palestine, of Pachisi in India, and of Patolitzli in ancient Mexico.[220]

The main intellectual game is chess, which originated in India. Variations of chess include draughts, which is known wherever European civilization has spread, and the game of Uri or Mugole, which was introduced by the Arabs throughout Africa from Madagascar to Senegal. In this latter game, the piece used is a wooden block with 16, 24, or 32 small cups arranged in two or four rows, where the goal is to place a certain number of small stones or seeds in a specific way. A third variation of chess, backgammon, falls between Uri and the game of dice, making it partly a game of chance. It is known as Tob in Egypt and Palestine, Pachisi in India, and Patolitzli in ancient Mexico.[220]

Dance of Australians

FIG. 59.—Dance of Australians during the Corroboree or ceremony of initiation.
(Drawn by P. Moutet, partly after Brough Smyth and Sav. Kent.)

FIG. 59.—Dance of Australians during the Corroboree or initiation ceremony.
(Drawn by P. Moutet, partly after Brough Smyth and Sav. Kent.)

Sports and Spectacles.—Hand-to-hand contests so prized by the Japanese and the Mongols, horse-races esteemed by all nomads, the superb nautical sports practised of old by the Hawaiians, in which, standing upright or astraddle on a canoe, they descended cataracts several metres in height,[221] and so many other sports still form, as it were, a link between games properly so called, giving pleasure to those taking part in them, and spectacles, which give pleasure to others. Most spectacles are composed of the dance, pantomime, scenic representations, music and song, of which I shall presently treat. Outside the manifestation of these arts, public spectacles are confined almost everywhere to the different ceremonies, festivals, and processions connected with various rites or customs (initiation, common marriages, worship of the dead, etc.), or to jugglery, exhibition of animals, acrobatic performances, sleight-of-hand tricks, etc., most of which have originated in India. To these we must add combats between men and animals or between animals themselves, the best known of which are the bull-fights so dear to the Hispano-Portuguese of Europe and America, and the cockfights which have had ardent supporters not only in England and [Pg 201] the United States, but also in Spanish America, all over the Malay Archipelago, etc. In China and Siam people are less blood-thirsty; they are content to look at contests between crickets, grasshoppers, and fishes.

Sports and Spectacles.—Hand-to-hand contests highly valued by the Japanese and Mongols, horse races favored by all nomads, and the impressive water sports once practiced by the Hawaiians, where they would stand or balance on a canoe while descending waterfalls several meters high,[221] along with many other sports, serve as a bridge between games that bring joy to participants and spectacles, which entertain observers. Most spectacles consist of dance, pantomime, theatrical performances, music, and song, which I will discuss shortly. Besides these art forms, public spectacles often involve various ceremonies, festivals, and processions tied to different rituals or customs (like initiation, weddings, and honoring the dead), or activities such as juggling, animal exhibitions, acrobatics, sleight-of-hand tricks, etc., many of which originated in India. We should also include battles between humans and animals or among animals themselves, the most notable being the bullfights cherished by the Hispano-Portuguese in Europe and America, and the cockfights that have passionate fans not just in England and [Pg 201] the United States, but also throughout Spanish America and the Malay Archipelago, among other places. In China and Siam, people are less bloodthirsty; they prefer watching competitions between crickets, grasshoppers, and fish.

Anthropomorph Ornamental Design

FIG. 60.—Anthropomorph
ornamental design of the
Papuans of New Guinea.
(After Haddon.)

FInstagram. 60.—Anthropomorph
ornamental design of the
Papuans of New Guinea.
(After Haddon.)

Masks play an important part in festivals, ceremonies, and spectacles, as in so many other manifestations of the social life of uncivilised and half-civilised peoples (religion, war, justice). Let us merely mention the fantastic masks used in dances and processions among the Javanese and the Dyaks, and especially those of the Melanesians; certain of them are made of cocoa-nuts, with an imitation of the beard and moustache in the fibres of this fruit, others have the human skull as a groundwork. The Papuans are very skilful in making masks with tortoise shells, etc.[222]

Masks play a significant role in festivals, ceremonies, and events, just like in many aspects of the social lives of uncivilized and semi-civilized peoples (religion, war, justice). Let's just mention the incredible masks used in dances and parades among the Javanese and the Dyaks, especially those of the Melanesians; some are crafted from coconuts, featuring beards and mustaches made from the fruit's fibers, while others use human skulls as a base. The Papuans are particularly skilled at making masks using tortoise shells, etc.[222]

The Arts.—Artistic manifestations are distinguished from games by this fact, that their object is not only to afford pleasure to the artist himself during the execution of his work, but also to cause this pleasure to be shared by the greatest possible number of his fellow-beings. These manifestations are called forth then by the sentiment of human sociability, and the more they are developed in an ethnic group the higher this group is from the point of view of social organisation.

The Arts.—Artistic expressions are different from games in that their purpose isn’t just to bring enjoyment to the artist while creating, but also to allow that enjoyment to be experienced by as many people as possible. These expressions arise from a sense of human connection, and the more they flourish within a community, the more advanced that community is in terms of social structure.

Zoomorph Ornament on a Club

FIG. 61.—Zoomorph ornamental design
on a club (New Guinea).
(After Haddon.)

FIG. 61.—Zoomorphic ornamental design
on a club (New Guinea).
(After Haddon.)

The Graphic Arts.—It is often among the less advanced and[Pg 202] more uncultured peoples that we find very skilful draughtsmen. And here it is necessary to make a distinction between design properly so called, whether it be on the flat surface, in bas-relief, engraved, etc., and what is generally called ornamental or decorative art. The latter exists among almost all peoples (except perhaps the Fuegians), and does not always spring from artistic feeling. Sometimes vanity, the desire to possess the most ornate object, inspires the hand of the artist, who almost always, among the uncivilised, is not a professional. The characteristic trait of the decorative art of primitive peoples is that every leading idea is inspired by real objects; there are no lines purely and voluntarily ornamental, and still less are there geometric figures, as was thought until recent times. All the supposed figures of this class are simplified drawings of animals, inanimate objects, etc.[223] The most frequent ideas are inspired by animals (zoomorphs), men (anthropomorphs), and manufactured objects (skeuomorphs); those which are drawn from plants (phyllomorphs) are excessively rare (Haddon).

The Graphic Arts.—It is often among the less advanced and[Pg 202] more unrefined cultures that we find very skilled artists. Here, it’s important to distinguish between actual design—whether it’s on a flat surface, in bas-relief, engraved, etc.—and what is typically referred to as ornamental or decorative art. The latter is found among almost all cultures (except perhaps the Fuegians) and doesn’t always come from a sense of artistry. Sometimes, the desire to have the most elaborate object drives the artist, who is often not a professional in uncivilized societies. A key feature of decorative art from primitive cultures is that every main idea is inspired by real objects; there are no purely decorative lines, and geometric figures are even less common than previously thought. All the supposed figures in this category are simplified drawings of animals, inanimate objects, etc.[223] The most common themes are inspired by animals (zoomorphs), humans (anthropomorphs), and manufactured objects (skeuomorphs); those drawn from plants (phyllomorphs) are extremely rare (Haddon).

Zoomorph Ornament on a Spatula

FIG. 62.—Zoomorph ornamental design
on a spatula (New Guinea).
(After Haddon.)

FInstagram. 62.—Zoomorphic ornamental design
on a spatula (New Guinea).
(After Haddon.)

Fig. 60 shows us, for example, in an engraving on a bark belt executed by a Papuan, the human face transformed into an ornamental motive. At the extremity of the object is still plainly seen a face with both eyes, and a mouth widely opened showing a fine set of teeth; lower down, perpendicularly to this,[Pg 203] we see two faces with only the mouth and a single eye left, its companion having strayed into the intervening space between the two faces. Another example: the head of the frigate bird, a favourite ornamental motif of the half-Melanesian populations of the south-east extremity of New Guinea, is plainly visible in the middle of the second row, and throughout the fourth row of ornaments on a club (Fig. 61), but it is transformed into arabesques on the other rows. Overlapping in a certain order, this head is transformed into spiral ornaments (Fig. 62). In the same way, among the ancient inhabitants of Chiriqui (Isthmus of Panama) the already somewhat diagrammatic figure of the alligator (Fig. 63) is transformed into ornament (Fig. 64) in which it would be difficult, without the presence[Pg 204] of intermediate forms, to find a resemblance to the reptile in question. Among the Karayas of Central Brazil ornaments like those reproduced here (Fig. 65) are simplified forms of lizards (A), bats (B), of the skin of a rattle-snake (C), and of another snake (D).[224] Imitations of manufactured objects, drawing of cords, arrangement of fibres in a tissue, etc., are often suggested by the mode of manufacture of the decorated object—for example, in pottery by the impress of the woven basket which has served as a mould in the manufacture of the pot, etc. (see p. 154). Often the entire object is transformed into ornament and becomes unsuitable for the use to which it was intended, such as the double fish-hooks in mother-of-pearl of the islanders of the Torres Straits,[225] and the ornamental and symbolic axes of the Polynesians of the Hervey Islands or Cook’s Archipelago (Fig. 67).

Fig. 60 shows, for instance, an engraving on a bark belt created by a Papuan, where the human face is turned into an ornamental design. At the end of the object, we can still clearly see a face with both eyes and a mouth wide open, displaying a set of fine teeth; lower down, in line with this, [Pg 203] we see two faces with just a mouth and a single eye remaining, its partner having moved into the space between the two faces. Another example is the head of the frigate bird, a popular ornamental motif among the half-Melanesian populations at the southeastern tip of New Guinea, which is clearly visible in the middle of the second row and throughout the fourth row of decorations on a club (Fig. 61), but it is turned into arabesques in the other rows. Arranged in a certain way, this head transforms into spiral designs (Fig. 62). Similarly, among the ancient inhabitants of Chiriqui (Isthmus of Panama), the already somewhat diagrammatic figure of the alligator (Fig. 63) becomes ornamentation (Fig. 64) in which it would be challenging, without the help of intermediate forms, to find a similarity to the reptile in question. Among the Karayas of Central Brazil, the ornaments shown here (Fig. 65) are simplified representations of lizards (A), bats (B), the skin of a rattlesnake (C), and another snake (D).[224] Imitations of manufactured objects, drawings of cords, and arrangements of fibers in a weave, etc., are often inspired by the way the decorated object is made—for example, in pottery, by the imprint of the woven basket that served as a mold in the pot's creation, etc. (see p. 154). Frequently, the entire object is transformed into ornamentation and becomes unsuitable for its intended use, like the double fish-hooks in mother-of-pearl made by the islanders of the Torres Straits,[225] and the ornamental and symbolic axes used by the Polynesians of the Hervey Islands or Cook’s Archipelago (Fig. 67).

Alligator, Conventional

FIG. 63.—Conventional representation of an alligator;
ancient pottery of Chiriqui, Isthmus of Panama.
(After Holmes.)

FIG. 63.—Standard depiction of an alligator;
ancient pottery from Chiriqui, Isthmus of Panama.
(After Holmes.)

Alligator, Ornamental

FIG. 64.—Ornamental motive derived from
the preceding design (Chiriqui pottery).
(After Holmes.)

FInstagram. 64.—Decorative pattern taken from
the previous design (Chiriqui pottery).
(After Holmes.)

Decorative Designs of the Karayas

FIG. 65.—Decorative designs of the Karayas
(Central Brazil)—A, lizards (engraved on a tomb);
B, flying bats; C, rattle-snake; D,
other snake (plaiting on a club).
(After Von den Steinen.)

FIG. 65.—Decorative designs of the Karayas
(Central Brazil)—A, lizards (engraved on a tomb);
B, flying bats; C, rattlesnake; D,
another snake (braiding on a club).
(After Von den Steinen.)

It is interesting to note that the more a people loves ornament, the less it is capable of producing drawings properly so called. Thus the Polynesians, the Malays, the Indians of North-west America, are past-masters in ornamentation, but they draw badly; while the Australians, whose ornaments are rudimentary, paint on the polished surfaces of rocks and grottos, in white, red, and yellow, large pictures representing hunting scenes, “corroborees,” also human faces with a sort of aureole around them (hair?), but almost always without a mouth. The Bushmen, whose tools and arms bear no ornament, have also their great rock-pictures. We can form an idea of them by the annexed reproduction of a picture drawn [Pg 206] on the wall of a cave near Hermon, and published by Andree.[226] It represents Bushmen, who have carried off the cattle of the Bechuanas, engaged in a struggle with the latter, who are pursuing them. All the details of the picture are well observed, even to the form and coats of the oxen, the respective colours, stature, and arms of the combatants (the little yellow Bushmen armed with bows, and the tall, black Bechuanas armed with assagais). The Melanesians are as skilful in ornamentation as in drawing, their drawing having a tendency to become transformed into pictography; pictography has almost entirely swallowed up drawing among the Indians of North America, but it reappears among the Hyperboreans (Eskimo, Chukchi, Yakuts, Tlinkits). What all these primitive drawings lack is perspective and relief; we should also look in vain for it in the art of half-civilised peoples like the Chinese, the Hindus, the Persians, the Cambodians.

It’s interesting to point out that the more a group loves decoration, the less skilled it tends to be at creating what we would call proper drawings. For example, the Polynesians, Malays, and Northwest American Indians are masters of ornamentation, but their drawing skills are lacking. In contrast, the Australians, who have simple ornaments, create large paintings on the smooth surfaces of rocks and caves in white, red, and yellow that depict hunting scenes, "corroborees," and often human faces surrounded by a sort of halo (perhaps hair?), but almost always without mouths. The Bushmen, whose tools and weapons are unadorned, also have impressive rock art. We can get an idea of their artwork from the adjacent reproduction of a picture drawn [Pg 206] on a cave wall near Hermon, published by Andree.[226] It shows Bushmen who have stolen the cattle of the Bechuanas, fighting back against them as they chase them. The details in the picture are well observed, including the shape and fur of the oxen, the colors and sizes of the fighters, and their weapons (the small yellow Bushmen with bows and the tall, black Bechuanas with spears). The Melanesians are skilled in both decoration and drawing, with their drawing style leaning towards pictography. In North America, pictography has almost completely taken over drawing, but we see a resurgence of traditional drawing in Hyperborean cultures (Eskimos, Chukchi, Yakuts, Tlinkits). What all these primitive drawings lack is perspective and depth; this absence is also found in the art of semi-civilized cultures like the Chinese, Hindus, Persians, and Cambodians.

Sculpture, which like drawing is met with even among the remains of quaternary man in Europe (Fig. 85), attains little development among uncultured peoples in general. The carved wooden articles of the Melanesians and Negroes, the gigantic statues of the Polynesians of Easter Island, the figures in low relief of the monuments of the ancient Peruvians, Mexicans, and Khmers, the numerous little figures in wood or potter’s clay of the Malays, Negroes, etc., are not superior to the stage of development of Egyptian and Greek art earlier than the fifth century B.C., in which the median or sagittal plan of the human body is always straight, vertical, and never distorted. Even if there is an assemblage of two or more figures, their lines are always either parallel or perpendicular to each other.[227] Needless to say that among many peoples “national art” has been profoundly modified by an adopted religion, which has introduced or created an art of its own (prohibition against representations of human figures by Islam, conventional postures in Buddhist drawings, etc.).

Sculpture, like drawing, can be found even in the remnants of prehistoric humans in Europe (Fig. 85), but it doesn't typically develop much among uncivilized societies. The carved wooden items created by the Melanesians and Africans, the massive statues from the Polynesians of Easter Island, the low relief figures found on ancient Peruvian, Mexican, and Khmer monuments, and the many small figures made from wood or clay by Malays and Africans, are on par with the level of Egyptian and Greek art before the fifth century B.C., where the basic structure of the human body remains straight, vertical, and never twisted. Even when two or more figures are grouped together, their lines are always either parallel or at right angles to one another.[227] It's important to note that in many cultures, “national art” has been significantly changed by the adoption of a religion, which has brought about its own form of art (such as Islam's prohibition against depicting human figures, or the conventional poses in Buddhist artwork, etc.).

Bushman Painting

FIG. 66.—Bushman painting, representing the battle going
in favour of the Bechuana, who are trying to recover their stolen cattle.
(After R. Andree.)

FIG. 66.—Bushman painting, showing the battle going
in favor of the Bechuana, who are attempting to recover their stolen cattle.
(After R. Andree.)

Dancing.—The productions of the graphic arts charm the eye after completion; those of the musical arts are enjoyed only while being performed. But there is an art which combines these two modes of æsthetic enjoyment: it is dancing. Its plastic attitudes are so many pictures, and its movements have a rhythm like music.

Dancing.—The works of graphic arts appeal to the eye once they're finished; the creations of musical arts are appreciated only while they’re being played. But there’s an art that blends these two forms of aesthetic pleasure: it’s dancing. Its poses are like countless pictures, and its movements follow a rhythm similar to music.

Symbolic Adze, Mangaia Island

FIG. 67.—Symbolic adze of
Mangaia Island (Hervey Islands or
Cook’s Archipelago, Polynesia),
Museum of Copenhagen.
(After Haddon.)

FInstagram. 67.—Symbolic adze from
Mangaia Island (Hervey Islands or
Cook’s Archipelago, Polynesia),
Museum of Copenhagen.
(After Haddon.)

This art, sunk among civilised peoples to the level of a simple amusement, plays a large part in the life of uncultured peoples. Thus the great nocturnal festivals of the Australians, the “Corroborees” (Fig. 59), celebrated in connection with important events, are only a succession of very varied dances, strictly regulated, and executed by young men trained a long time beforehand by the elders of the tribe for these choregraphic exercises. Men alone take part in them, as in all serious affairs; women are only there as spectators or musicians. It is by dancing alone that, among uncultured peoples, joy in common is expressed in regard to a happy event which affects the whole tribe. Let us also note that these dances are executed by a gathering of individuals who have given proof of their solidarity, having sacrificed part of their liberty by submitting to the discipline of the elders in order to afford pleasure to the people of their tribe. The joy, moreover, is mutual, for the performers “feel” the dance without seeing it, and the[Pg 208] spectators witness it without experiencing the immediate effects of movement.

This art, reduced among civilized people to just a simple form of entertainment, plays a significant role in the lives of less developed communities. For example, the grand nighttime celebrations of the Australians, the “Corroborees” (Fig. 59), held for important occasions, consist of a series of diverse dances, which are strictly organized and performed by young men who have been trained for a long time by the tribe's elders for these choreographed performances. Only men participate in these dances, as is the case with all serious matters; women are there only as spectators or musicians. In these uncultured societies, dancing is the sole way to express communal joy regarding a happy event that affects the entire tribe. It’s also important to note that these dances are performed by a group of individuals who have demonstrated their unity, sacrificing part of their freedom by adhering to the elders’ discipline in order to bring joy to their tribe. The happiness is shared, as the dancers "feel" the rhythm without seeing it, while the[Pg 208] spectators watch it without feeling the immediate physical effects of the movement.

Dancing is then a great school of “solidarity” in primitive societies; more than any other act, it brings into prominence the benefits of sociality. But this favourable result is only possible in the smaller groupings, in which at least half of the society may take part in the dance; this condition no longer exists in civilised societies, numbering millions on millions of members: thus in these societies the choregraphic art is in a complete state of decay.

Dancing is a significant way to build "solidarity" in primitive societies; more than any other activity, it highlights the advantages of social connection. However, this positive outcome is only achievable in smaller groups, where at least half of the community can participate in the dance. This condition no longer applies in modern societies, which have millions and millions of people: as a result, in these societies, the art of choreography is in a complete state of decline.

Dances of the character of “corroborees” are a step towards the ritual dances which play so great a part in most religions. I may instance the epileptic dances of the Siberian and American Shamans, or the Negro fetich-worshippers, the gyrations of the Dervishes, the masked ballets performed by the Buddhist-Lamaite priests, the sacred dances of the Levites among the ancient Jews, etc. Christianity retained the dance in its rites even until the eighth century, and one may still see the partial survival of it in what takes place in Seville Cathedral during the Easter festival. Dancing assumed a sacred character by being conjoined with a symbolic mimicry, especially as connected with offerings, with sacrifices, or with religious ecstasy.

Dances like “corroborees” are a step towards the ritual dances that play a significant role in most religions. For example, there are the trance dances of Siberian and American Shamans, the voodoo rituals of African worshipers, the spinning of Dervishes, the masked performances by Buddhist-Lamaite priests, and the sacred dances of the Levites among the ancient Jews, etc. Christianity held onto dance in its rituals up until the eighth century, and you can still see remnants of it during the Easter festival at Seville Cathedral. Dancing took on a sacred meaning by being combined with symbolic representations, especially in relation to offerings, sacrifices, or religious ecstasy.

But it has also evolved in another direction by having associated with it two other species of mimicry, one recalling strife and battles, the other love. Hence come warlike dances and lascivious dances. The latter have this characteristic, that they are performed either solely by women—as, for example, the “Hula-Hula” of the Hawaiians—or by both sexes (Eskimo), and very seldom by men alone (the “Kaoro” of the Australians, performed at the advent of the marriage season, or the time of the yam harvest). Moreover, it may be presumed that the alternating dances of men and women were, at the beginning of societies, a powerful aid to sexual selection.

But it has also evolved in another way by incorporating two other types of mimicry, one related to conflict and battles, the other to love. This is where warlike dances and lascivious dances come into play. The latter are characterized by being performed either solely by women—like the “Hula-Hula” of the Hawaiians—or by both genders (Eskimo), and very rarely by men alone (the “Kaoro” of the Australians, performed at the start of the marriage season or during the yam harvest). Furthermore, it can be assumed that the alternating dances of men and women were, at the beginning of societies, a significant factor in sexual selection.

The movements performed during the dance vary with every people, and also according to the nature of the dance. The[Pg 209] Australians leap, advance suddenly, then fall back with threatening or lascivious gestures, as the case may be (Fig. 59); Negroes add to the steps and innuendoes movements of the head and pelvis. Among most Asiatics (Chinese, Japanese, Malays) men do not dance, and in the case of women, the choregraphic art degenerates into a series of rhythmical movements of the arms and trunk, without change of position. It is to mimicry, that is to say, the first step towards pantomime, that dances imitating the movements of animals (Eskimo, Araucans) owe their origin. The pantomime of the uncultured, like their dancing, is always accompanied by music and song, sometimes by masks and disguises. We have but to develop the share of song and recitation, to render the music less dependent on the rhythm, in order to transform these exercises into real dramatic representations.[228]

The movements in dance vary across different cultures and also depend on the type of dance. The[Pg 209] Australians jump, move forward quickly, then retreat with aggressive or suggestive gestures, depending on the situation (Fig. 59); Black dancers incorporate head and hip movements into their steps and innuendo. In most Asian cultures (Chinese, Japanese, Malays), men typically don’t dance, and when women do, their choreography tends to consist of repetitive arm and torso movements without changing position. Dances that mimic animal movements, seen in cultures like the Eskimos and Araucans, have their origins in imitation, which is essentially the first step toward pantomime. The performances of those without formal culture, much like their dances, are always accompanied by music and singing, and sometimes by masks and costumes. If we enhance the role of song and spoken word and make the music less reliant on rhythm, we can transform these performances into true dramatic representations.[228]

Vocal and instrumental music are the common property of mankind as a whole. There is no people that does not know at least how to hum an air of a few notes; and rare are those who have no instrument of music (Fuegians, certain Micronesians, Veddahs). The music of uncivilised peoples is most frequently reduced to one only of its elements, rhythm,—better understood when we bear in mind that the greater part of the time it forms only the accompaniment of dancing. Melody and harmony are reduced to their simplest expressions.[229] And yet in the opinion even of specialists it is very difficult to note the airs of “savages,” and three-fourths of the notations published in different works are incorrect. That is the result of these airs having been written down according to our scale, which is heptatonic. Now this scale, although existing even among many uncivilised peoples, is not the only one which is used.

Vocal and instrumental music belong to all of humanity. No culture is without people who can at least hum a tune or two, and it’s rare to find someone who doesn’t have any musical instrument (like some Fuegians, certain Micronesians, and Veddahs). The music of less developed societies often focuses mainly on one element: rhythm—especially considering that it primarily serves as an accompaniment for dancing. Melody and harmony are usually very simple. [229] Even specialists agree that it's quite challenging to accurately capture the tunes of "primitive" cultures, and about three-quarters of the notations published in various works are incorrect. This happens because these tunes have been transcribed using our heptatonic scale. While this scale can be found among many less developed peoples, it isn't the only one they use.

We find them using certain successions of sounds with fixed intervals, that is to say, true scales of two, three, and even six sounds. Most frequently “natural tones” (tonic,[Pg 210] third, fifth) form the scale (Bushmen). The airs of uncivilised peoples are often in the minor tone, for example, the following Fuegian air, transcribed by Carfort:—[230]

We find that they use specific sequences of sounds with set intervals, which means true scales of two, three, and even six notes. Most often, "natural tones" (tonic, [Pg 210] third, fifth) make up the scale (Bushmen). The melodies of uncivilized peoples are often in the minor key, like the following Fuegian melody, transcribed by Carfort:—[230]

Fuegian Air

In fine, the scale being merely a convention based on the construction of instruments, the most perfect of which, like our violin, can only give half-tones or, exceptionally, quarter or third tones, there can be no such thing as a “natural scale.” It is the musical instruments of a people that determine the scale it uses; thus the study of these instruments should precede that of singing.[231]

In short, the scale is just a convention based on how instruments are built, and the best of these, like our violin, can only produce half-tones or, occasionally, quarter or third tones. So, there really isn’t a “natural scale.” The musical instruments of a culture dictate the scale they use; therefore, understanding these instruments should come before studying singing.[231]

As the most primitive music may be reduced to rhythm alone, the earliest musical instruments were objects serving to beat time; pieces of wood clapped together, as still seen to-day among the Annamese, or rude drums like those which the Australian women use during the corroborees—a cloak of opossum skin stretched between the thighs, on which they tap with a stick (Fig. 59). But, like castanets, the triangle, etc., these, properly speaking, are not instruments of music producing a scale, or at any rate a series of varying sounds. Three kinds of true musical instruments may be distinguished—wind instruments, string instruments, and percussion instruments. Of wind instruments the most ancient is probably the flute or the shepherd’s pipe of cane, bamboo, animal or human bone, etc., as seen among the Botocudos and the Yurunas of Xingu[Pg 211] (Brazil).[232] The bow was the first corded instrument; the Kafirs and Negroes of Angola “play on the bow” by attaching to it a gourd and tightening at will by means of a sliding ring the cord which they play (Fig. 135). As to instruments of percussion: the most generally used among the Negroes are the Sansá, a sort of musical box (Fig. 68), and the xylophone, a kind of piano (Fig. 69). The most uncivilised peoples, however, have composite instruments; as, for instance, the “gora” of the Bushmen (Figs. 70 and 71).[233]

As the most basic music can be reduced to rhythm, the earliest musical instruments were objects used to keep time; pieces of wood clapped together, like those still seen today among the Annamese, or simple drums similar to those used by Australian women during the corroboree—a cloak of opossum skin stretched between their thighs, which they tap with a stick (Fig. 59). But, like castanets, triangles, etc., these are not truly musical instruments that produce a scale, or at least a series of varying sounds. Three types of true musical instruments can be identified—wind instruments, string instruments, and percussion instruments. Among wind instruments, the oldest is likely the flute or shepherd’s pipe made from cane, bamboo, animal, or human bone, as seen among the Botocudos and the Yurunas of Xingu[Pg 211] (Brazil).[232] The bow was the first string instrument; the Kafirs and Negroes of Angola “play on the bow” by attaching a gourd to it and tightening the string as needed with a sliding ring (Fig. 135). Regarding percussion instruments, the most commonly used among the Negroes are the Sansá, a type of musical box (Fig. 68), and the xylophone, a kind of piano (Fig. 69). The most primitive peoples, however, have composite instruments; for example, the “gora” of the Bushmen (Figs. 70 and 71).[233]

Sansá, or Zimba

FIG. 68.—“Sansá” or “Zimba,” a musical box of the Negroes,
placed on or in a calabash; played with the fingers.
(After Wood.)

FIG. 68.—“Sansá” or “Zimba,” a musical box of the Black people,
set on or in a gourd; played with the fingers.
(After Wood.)

The harp of the Kafirs and the gora give forth only feeble sounds, and serve chiefly to satisfy the musical taste of the performer; they are scarcely heard by the others. This fact,[Pg 212] like others, proves that music is a less powerful means of socialisation than dancing; it affords joys more intimate, more individual, except when it is reduced to what is its least musical element so to speak—rhythm; then the part it plays is a considerable one, especially in warlike manifestations. No army has been able to do without music.

The harp played by the Kafirs and the gora produces only weak sounds and mainly caters to the musical preference of the player; it’s hardly heard by anyone else. This fact,[Pg 212] like others, shows that music isn’t as strong a tool for socializing as dancing; it offers more personal, individual joys, unless it comes down to its simplest form—rhythm; then it takes on a significant role, especially during wartime. No army has ever managed to go without music.

Marimba

FIG. 69.—“Marimba,” the Negro xylophone.
(After Wood.)

FIG. 69.—“Marimba,” the Black xylophone.
(After Wood.)

Poetry.—Singing and poetry are indistinguishable during the early stages of civilisation. The poetic productions of uncultured peoples have as yet been very little studied,[234] but from what is known about them it appears that the earliest creations of this kind are repeated rhythmical phrases, expressing the most common sensations, and concerned chiefly with the digestive functions: complaint in regard to hunger, the pleasure experienced after feasting, or a desire for certain articles of food as expressed in this song of the Australian—

Poetry.—Singing and poetry are pretty much the same in the early phases of civilization. The poetic works of unrefined cultures haven't been studied much,[234] but from what we know, it seems that the earliest creations of this sort are rhythmic phrases that repeat, expressing basic feelings related to our most common experiences, especially focused on digestion: expressing complaints about hunger, the joy felt after a big meal, or cravings for specific foods, like in this song from Australia—

“The peas that the white men eat are good—
I should like some, I should like some.”

Afterwards come the emotions of hunting: the jubilation at[Pg 213] having killed an animal, recitatives after the manner of the following:—

Afterward, there are the emotions of hunting: the joy at[Pg 213] having killed an animal, followed by recitals like the ones below:—

“The Kangaroo ran very fast,
But I ran faster still.
How fat he was,
How plump he was!
What a fine roast he made!
O Kangaroo, O Kangaroo.”
Bushman Playing on the Gora

FIG. 70.—Bushman playing on the “gora.”
(Partly after Wood.)

FIG. 70.—Bushman playing on the “gora.”
(Partly after Wood.)

War-songs are not unknown to Australian savages, but the beauties of nature and the feelings of love are subjects only occasionally met with in the poetry of uncivilised hunters. They begin to appear among the Eskimo, and are highly developed among half-civilised nomads, contemplators of nature, whose[Pg 214] lyric poetry is sometimes inspired by very elevated feelings, as is shown, for example, by Kalmuk songs.[235] As to epic poetry, it is met with only among half-civilised peoples who possess a history.

War songs aren't unfamiliar to Australian Indigenous people, but themes of nature and love appear only sporadically in the poetry of unrefined hunters. These themes start to show up among the Inuit and become more prominent among semi-civilized nomads who appreciate nature, and their lyric poetry often reflects elevated feelings, as seen in Kalmuk songs.[Pg 214][235] Epic poetry, on the other hand, is found only among semi-civilized societies that have a history.

Construction of the Gora

FIG. 71.—Detail of construction of the “gora.”
(After Wood.)

FIG. 71.—Detail of construction of the “gora.”
(After Wood.)

Religion.—For a considerable time now the question has been discussed by ethnographers, theologians, and moralists, whether or not there exist peoples without a religion. The answer to this question depends entirely on the meaning we give to religion. If by this word is meant an acknowledged revealed doctrine, accompanied by a well-ordered ritual and a strongly organised priesthood, as implied in current speech, or even if it simply means the belief in “beings superior to man” and in “a future beyond the tomb,” as Quatrefages would use it,[236] there are certainly peoples who have nothing of this kind. If, on the contrary, we content ourselves with the minimum definition of religion, given by E. B. Tylor,[237] “belief in spiritual beings,” it is difficult to find a tribe on the earth which has not this belief. I should like to modify a little this definition of Tylor’s by substituting “imaginary beings” for “spiritual,” to indicate clearly their psychological origin, for it is in beings entirely created out of their imagination that savages believe.

Religion.—For quite some time, ethnographers, theologians, and moralists have debated whether there are people without a religion. The answer depends entirely on how we define religion. If we mean an acknowledged revealed doctrine paired with a structured ritual and a well-organized priesthood, as is commonly understood today, or even if we define it simply as the belief in “superior beings” and “an afterlife,” as Quatrefages would describe it,[236] then there are definitely peoples who lack this. However, if we settle for the minimum definition of religion provided by E. B. Tylor,[237] that is, “belief in spiritual beings,” it’s tough to find a tribe on Earth that doesn't hold this belief. I would like to slightly adjust Tylor’s definition by replacing “spiritual” with “imaginary” to clearly indicate their psychological origin, as it is beings entirely created from their imagination that people in these cultures believe in.

This belief originates chiefly in the fear of unusual or extraordinary events, and especially of disease and death. Sometimes the idea of a “spiritual being” is so inseparable from the sensation of fear that it only presents itself when the latter occurs. Thus the Fuegian Yahgan have no clear idea of “spirits,” and it is only at dusk under the influence[Pg 215] of fear that they imagine themselves to be attacked by the “savages of the west,” by the “Walapatu,” which some of them regard as ghosts, and others quite simply as individuals of a neighbouring tribe, that of the Alakalufs.[238]

This belief mainly comes from a fear of unusual or extraordinary events, especially disease and death. Sometimes, the idea of a "spiritual being" is so closely linked to the feeling of fear that it only arises when fear is present. For example, the Fuegian Yahgan don't have a clear concept of "spirits," and it’s only at dusk, influenced by fear, that they imagine being attacked by the "savages of the west," known as the "Walapatu," which some of them see as ghosts, while others simply consider them members of a neighboring tribe, the Alakalufs.[Pg 215][238]

But cases of this kind are rare, and most uncivilised peoples have the rudiments of natural religion a little more developed, a belief in spirits less vague. We may, with the eminent ethnologist Tylor, give the name of “Animism” to this primitive religion.

But cases like this are rare, and most uncivilized peoples have the basics of natural religion a bit more developed, with a belief in spirits that is less vague. We can, following the distinguished ethnologist Tylor, call this primitive religion “Animism.”

Animism in the most primitive forms consists in believing that the body of a man contains another more subtle being, a “soul,” capable of being temporarily separated from its envelope, and admitting further that everything that exists, beasts, plants, stones, down to objects fashioned by hand, have equally a soul which is endowed with corresponding qualities. Thus the Shans of the Kieng-Tung (upper Burma) believe that the soul leaves the body of a man asleep in the form of an iridescent butterfly;[239] the Malays have the same ideas, and take care on that account not to awaken a man asleep. His observation of the shadow which exactly repeats every movement of a man, of reflections in the water, may confirm a savage in his animistic beliefs, but what especially establishes them are the dreams and visions during which he lives another life and is “another man.” Death is considered as a separation of man from his shadow or his soul, something like the separation which is effected during sleep. Most frequently it is the breath, the air breathed[Pg 216] out, which represents the immaterial being that forsakes the body. Thus, among the natives of Nias Island, the one to become chief is he who succeeds, sometimes not without a desperate struggle with his rivals, in swallowing the last breath of the dying chief.[240] Besides, for the most part uncivilised people think that death is only a prolonged sleep, and it is on that account that some are accustomed to keep the corpse as long as possible, sometimes until putrefaction sets in, in their huts or in the immediate neighbourhood (see p. 243). They imagine that the soul seeks to re-enter the body, and if it does not find it, wanders restlessly around the dwellings, and is angry with the living who have hidden the body from it. Cases of lethargy, of hypnotic sleep, of fainting-fits, which strike the imagination the more forcibly because more rare than ordinary sleep, confirm the belief in the separation of man and his double. In fine, the mind of a savage does not regard death as a natural phenomenon, but as a violent and very prolonged separation of man and his soul.

Animism in its most basic form involves the belief that a person's body houses another, more subtle being, a "soul," which can temporarily separate from its physical form. It also accepts that everything that exists—animals, plants, stones, and even handmade objects—has its own soul, each with its own qualities. For example, the Shans of Kieng-Tung (upper Burma) believe that a person's soul leaves their sleeping body in the form of an iridescent butterfly; the Malays share similar beliefs and therefore avoid waking someone who is asleep. A person's observation of their shadow, which mirrors every movement, and reflections in water might reinforce these animistic beliefs. However, what primarily solidifies these beliefs are dreams and visions where they experience another life and become "another person." Death is viewed as a separation of a person from their shadow or soul, similar to the separation that occurs during sleep. Often, it's the breath—the air exhaled—that symbolizes the immaterial essence leaving the body. For instance, among the natives of Nias Island, the person who becomes chief is the one who manages, sometimes through a fierce struggle against rivals, to consume the last breath of the dying chief. Furthermore, most often uncivilized people think of death as a prolonged sleep, which is why some are accustomed to keeping a corpse as long as possible, often until decomposition begins, in their huts or nearby (see p. 243). They believe the soul attempts to re-enter the body, and if it can’t find it, it wanders restlessly around the home, angry with the living for hiding it. Instances of lethargy, hypnotic states, and fainting—which are more striking because they are rarer than regular sleep—reinforce the belief in the separation of a person and their double. Ultimately, a primitive person's mind does not see death as a natural event, but rather as a violent and extended separation between the person and their soul.

But what is the cause of this separation? Here comes in the second element of animism, the belief in “spirits,” imaginary beings who take the most diverse forms, like the soul itself. Sometimes the “soul” of a dead man is also a “spirit”; there are here no subtle distinctions. However, what especially differentiates “spirits” from “souls” is this, that the former are more active, that they constantly take part in human affairs, so that the whole life of a savage is passed in compromises or continual struggles with spirits. Every disease, every misfortune, every death, comes from the angry “spirit.” Happily, side by side with wicked spirits, who are legion, there are encountered from time to time benevolent ones, who become protectors, or “patrons” of men. Most frequently these are the “souls” of the old men of the tribe, of the “ancestors.” As these old men have[Pg 217] ordinarily endowed the tribe or the family with some material advantage by giving during life counsels dictated by their long experience, they are laid under contribution after death. Their memory is recalled in times of misfortune, and advice is asked of them. This is the origin of ancestor worship.

But what causes this separation? This brings us to the second aspect of animism: the belief in “spirits,” imaginary beings that can take many different forms, much like the soul itself. Sometimes the “soul” of a dead person is also seen as a “spirit”; there are no fine distinctions here. What mainly sets “spirits” apart from “souls” is that spirits are more active; they are constantly involved in human affairs, so the life of a person in a tribal society is filled with negotiations or continuous struggles with spirits. Every illness, every misfortune, every death is seen as a result of an angry “spirit.” Fortunately, alongside the many wicked spirits, there are also benevolent ones who occasionally appear as protectors or “patrons” of people. These are usually the “souls” of the tribe's elders or “ancestors.” Since these elders have typically provided the tribe or family with some material benefit through their wise counsel during their lives, they continue to be called upon after their deaths. Their memory is honored during hard times, and people seek their guidance. This is how ancestor worship begins.

The number of spirits is infinite, there is a whole world of them. Every object, sometimes every category of objects, has its spirit, and as objects may be made so spirits may be created, or at least may be made to communicate to objects a portion of their power. This circumstance gives birth to fetichism,[241] which is only one of the sides of animism, one of the grossest forms. Fetichistic peoples consider certain objects called fetiches, gris-gris, etc., as beings endowed with an inherent will and power. Every object, a piece of wood, a bundle of grass, a stone, a nail, a claw, a lock of hair, a horn, a rag, a bit of string, may become fetiches; the material value of the object bears no relation to its power as a fetich; the most insignificant things may be the greatest fetiches.[242] As to the relations which exist between spirits and objects, they are of a twofold character: either the fetich is regarded as an animated being, as the material envelope of a spirit,[Pg 218] or it is only an instrument by which the existence of the spirit is manifested, a vehicle in some way of part of its power. It must be remarked, however, that the two forms of connection between the spirit and the material object are frequently interblended, and a fetich to which sacrifices are offered as to a living being, may become a simple amulet preserving its possessor from wounds or any other misfortune. Fetichism is the first step towards idolatry, but it is essentially distinguished from it in that idols are only images, representations of certain supernatural beings, whilst fetiches are these beings themselves, or at least the direct vehicles of a portion of their power. The boundary line between idolatry and fetichism is, however, often difficult to define exactly.

The number of spirits is endless; there’s an entire world of them. Every object, and sometimes every category of objects, has its own spirit. Just as objects can be created, spirits can be formed as well, or at the very least, made to share part of their power with objects. This leads to fetichism,[241] which is just one aspect of animism, one of its most basic forms. People who practice fetichism view certain objects called fetiches, gris-gris, etc., as beings with their own will and power. Anything—like a piece of wood, a clump of grass, a stone, a nail, a claw, a strand of hair, a horn, a rag, or a piece of string—can become a fetich. The object's material value doesn’t matter; even the most trivial items can hold immense power as fetiches.[242] The relationship between spirits and objects has two dimensions: either the fetich is seen as a living being, the physical form of a spirit,[Pg 218] or it acts merely as a tool through which a spirit demonstrates its existence, a means of expressing part of its power. It's important to note that these two types of connections between spirit and object often overlap, and a fetich that receives sacrifices like a living being can also become a simple amulet that protects its owner from harm or other misfortunes. Fetichism is the first step toward idolatry, but it’s fundamentally different because idols are just images or representations of specific supernatural beings, whereas fetiches are those beings themselves or directly channel some of their power. However, clearly defining the distinction between idolatry and fetichism can be quite tricky.

Animism with its variants, more or less developed, is the religion of all uncivilised peoples untouched by international or universal religions: Buddhism, Christianity, Mahomedanism, etc., and even among those who have accepted one of these religions, animistic ideas persist with great obstinacy.

Animism, along with its various forms, is the belief system of all uncivilized peoples who haven't been influenced by international or universal religions like Buddhism, Christianity, or Islam. Even among those who have adopted one of these religions, animistic ideas stubbornly continue to exist.

How many Christian peasants there are who believe as firmly in spirits, in ghosts, in guardian genii of cattle and crops, as in the various saints of the church with whom they sometimes confound them! Besides, spirits, such as angels and demons, are admitted by most Christian churches. Fetichistic practices also form part of the outer worship of Lamaite Buddhism and Taoism, and they are not only tolerated but prescribed by other universal religions. I need but mention the amulets, talismans, scapularies, miracle-working relics, etc., among Mahomedans (Figs. 139 and 140) and Christians (Fig. 161).

How many Christian peasants believe just as strongly in spirits, ghosts, and guardian angels for their livestock and crops as they do in the different saints of the church, with whom they sometimes mix them up! Moreover, most Christian churches acknowledge the existence of spirits like angels and demons. Fetishistic practices are also a part of the external worship in Lamaite Buddhism and Taoism, and they are not only accepted but even encouraged by other major religions. I only need to mention the amulets, talismans, scapulars, miracle-working relics, etc., among Muslims (Figs. 139 and 140) and Christians (Fig. 161).

Worship of Natural Objects and Phenomena.—It is impossible to review even the principal forms which animism assumes. As society grows and develops, the notion of the soul and of spirits is transferred from the more immediate objects surrounding man to objects more remote and the phenomena of nature. The latter, by reason of their greatness or violence, are regarded as spirits much higher and more power[Pg 219]ful than the others. They become superior divinities entitled to “worship.” Thus we have the worship of water (sacred rivers, Ganges, Nile), worship of plants and especially trees (sacred forests of the Gauls, the Germans, the Finns, the Papuans), the worship of animals and more especially birds (the eagle of the Aztecs and the Peruvians, the ibis of the Egyptians), and serpent-worship (prevalent everywhere, but principally in India and Western Africa).

Worship of Natural Objects and Phenomena.—It's impossible to cover even the main forms that animism takes. As society evolves, the idea of the soul and spirits shifts from the immediate surroundings of people to more distant objects and natural phenomena. These phenomena, due to their immense power or intensity, are seen as spirits that are much greater and more powerful than others. They become superior deities deserving of “worship.” This is evident in the worship of water (like sacred rivers such as the Ganges and the Nile), the worship of plants, particularly trees (such as the sacred forests of the Gauls, Germans, Finns, and Papuans), the worship of animals, especially birds (like the eagle revered by the Aztecs and Peruvians and the ibis honored by the Egyptians), and serpent-worship (which is widespread but especially common in India and Western Africa).

The worship of the elements varies according to the kind of life led by a people; the succession of climates, the rain which gives life to the seed, the sun which burns the grasses, etc., are incarnations of so many divinities for agricultural peoples, while they have no importance for peoples living by the chase. Fire is considered as a divinity by several peoples (see p. 153). The adoration of fire was the ancient religion of the Persians, and is still preserved to-day among certain Parsees of India: we pass over the god Xiuhtecutli, “lord of fire,” of the ancient Mexicans, the goddess Vesta of the Romans, etc. Often the worship of the sun was combined with that of fire, and the ancient solar festivals sung by Ovid have become the midsummer eve bonfires, which the clergy still bless every year in several places in Lower Brittany. I can only mention the legends relating to the divine origin of fire, which all resemble more or less that of Prometheus (the Mahonika of the Polynesians, the Tleps of the Circassians, etc.). The difference between the great spirits which animate the phenomena of nature and the little spirits concerned with the trivial facts of man’s daily life once admitted, there is established a hierarchy in the world of spirits entirely modelled on the hierarchy of human society. Above gnomes, elves, demons, sprites, and so many common spirits, we find among the Khonds[243] the six great gods (of rain, first-fruits, procreation, hunting, war, and boundaries), who in their turn are governed by the sun-god and his wife, the powerful goddess of the earth. The religion of the Khonds is already polytheism, and this may end either in the dualism of two contrary prin[Pg 220]ciples (the germs of which are seen in the example quoted above, and which are impersonated by Ormuzd and Ahriman of the religion of Zoroaster) or in pantheism or monotheism.

The worship of the elements changes based on the lifestyle of a people; the variety of climates, the rain that nurtures crops, the sun that scorches the grass, etc., represent different deities for agricultural societies, while they hold no significance for those who rely on hunting. Fire is seen as a divine entity by many cultures (see p. 153). The reverence for fire was the ancient faith of the Persians and is still practiced today among some Parsees in India; we also acknowledge the god Xiuhtecutli, “lord of fire,” from the ancient Mexicans and the goddess Vesta from the Romans, among others. Often, sun worship was intertwined with fire worship, and the ancient solar festivals celebrated by Ovid have transformed into the midsummer bonfires that clergy continue to bless every year in various locations in Lower Brittany. I can only mention the myths about the divine origin of fire, which all share similarities with the tale of Prometheus (the Mahonika of the Polynesians, the Tleps of the Circassians, etc.). Once we recognize the distinction between the great spirits that animate nature's phenomena and the lesser spirits involved in the everyday aspects of human life, a hierarchy of spirits emerges that mirrors the hierarchy of human society. Above the gnomes, elves, demons, sprites, and many ordinary spirits, we find among the Khonds[243] the six major gods (of rain, first-fruits, fertility, hunting, war, and boundaries), all governed by the sun-god and his wife, the powerful goddess of the earth. The religion of the Khonds already reflects polytheism, which may evolve into the dualism of two opposing principles (the beginnings of which are evident in the earlier examples, represented by Ormuzd and Ahriman from Zoroastrianism) or lead to pantheism or monotheism.

Religion and Morality.—Animistic religion is destitute of the moral element which many persons consider inseparable from religion. Its code of morals has nothing to do with religion; it is based on public opinion and social conventions independent of beliefs. It is only in the more developed forms of polytheistic or monotheistic religions, and especially in those whose ministers sought to have an effective influence on the people, that the moral element was introduced little by little and placed beside the dogmatic and ritual element.[244] If the survival of the soul and the after-life form part of the beliefs of a great number of uncultured peoples, as shown especially by funereal rites, the life beyond the tomb is for them only the continuation of real life; the country of the dead resembles the country of the living, the same customs flourish there, the same usages, the same kind of life; the Eskimo continue their fishing feats, and may even die there a second time; the Polynesians give themselves up there to the same pleasures as they enjoyed on earth, etc. The other world is only a duplicate of this world, and no idea of justice is connected with it; the evil and the good in it have the same destiny.[245]

Religion and Morality.—Animistic religion lacks the moral component that many people see as essential to religion. Its moral code isn’t tied to religion; it's based on public opinion and social norms that exist independently of beliefs. Only in more advanced forms of polytheistic or monotheistic religions, especially where leaders aimed to exert real influence over the community, was the moral element gradually introduced alongside the doctrinal and ritual aspects.[244] For many uncultured groups, beliefs in the survival of the soul and an afterlife are evident, particularly through funeral practices, but for them, the afterlife is just a continuation of real life; the land of the dead mirrors the world of the living, with the same customs, practices, and way of life. The Eskimos continue their fishing activities there and might even “die” a second time; Polynesians indulge in the same pleasures as they did on earth, etc. The other world is simply a replica of this world, and there's no notion of justice associated with it; both the wicked and the virtuous share the same fate.[245]

Rites and Ceremonies.—What is the nature of the relations of man and spirits in primitive religion? Sometimes an attempt is made to combat the spirits. The Fuegians barricade themselves in their huts and keep themselves armed, in readiness to ward off blows, the whole night long, when they fancy they hear the “walapatu”;[246] the Australians hold[Pg 221] an annual celebration for the purpose of getting rid of all the ghosts of the last year’s dead; the Negroes of the Gold Coast assemble together in arms from time to time to drive the evil spirits from their village; rushing about in all directions, with frantic howling, they return home and assert that they sleep more easily, and for a while afterwards enjoy better health.[247] But these contests with spirits are rare, and it is usually found preferable to employ craft against them (hence exorcism, incantation, the use of symbols, etc.), or gentleness (prayer, offerings, sacrifices). The last method, which is most frequently used, develops into an outward cult; the “fetich-house,” like that seen in Dahomey and other Negro countries, becomes transformed into a temple; the place of sacrifice into an altar, and instead of real animals or plants, images of them in paper, butter, clay, etc., are sacrificed, or finer offerings such as grass, flowers, perfumes, etc.

Rites and Ceremonies.—What are the relationships between humans and spirits in early religions? Sometimes people try to fight off the spirits. The Fuegians barricade themselves in their huts and stay armed all night, ready to defend themselves when they think they hear the “walapatu”;[246] Australians hold[Pg 221] an annual celebration to chase away the ghosts of those who died in the past year; the people of the Gold Coast gather with weapons from time to time to scare off evil spirits from their village; they run around frantically howling, and afterward claim that they sleep better and enjoy improved health for a while.[247] However, these battles with spirits are uncommon, and it is usually preferable to use strategies against them (like exorcisms, chants, symbols, etc.), or kindness (through prayer, offerings, sacrifices). The latter approach, which is the most common, evolves into an organized cult; the “fetich-house,” like those found in Dahomey and other African countries, changes into a temple; the place of sacrifice becomes an altar, and instead of real animals or plants, they offer images of them made from paper, butter, clay, etc., or more refined offerings like grass, flowers, perfumes, and so on.

Priesthood.—In the earliest stages of religion man put himself into communication with spirits at his own risk and peril; but as he soon perceived that he was frequently unsuccessful in obtaining what he wished, and could not prevent them laying their spells on him, he was compelled to have recourse to intermediaries. He observed that certain individuals are better fitted to deal with spirits; that they can fall into a trance and remain in this death-like condition long enough to be able to treat with demons, and he came to the conclusion that they were appointed to intercede with spirits for simple mortals and to direct propitiatory ceremonies, offerings, and prayers. It was thus that the priesthood arose, under the form of fetich-men or shamans, who play so important a part in the life of Negroes, the Tunguse peoples and Mongols, and the Indians of North America. All the functions of life, marriage, pregnancy, the entering upon the age of puberty, birth, death, hunting or warlike expeditions, require the offices of the sorcerer, of the shaman, who is usually at the same time a doctor (see below). As society develops, numerically and in civilisation, there is[Pg 222] formed a sacerdotal class, which sometimes holds both the temporal power and the civil (as is still the case to-day in certain regions of Africa, and in Thibet). Often side by side with the regular priesthood thus constituted the ancient sorcerers continue to live and to wield great authority over the people; in most of the Lama-Buddhist temples the presence of a sorcerer is admitted for oracles, propitiations, etc.

Priesthood.—In the early stages of religion, people reached out to spirits at their own risk; however, they quickly realized that they often failed to get what they wanted and couldn't stop the spirits from casting spells on them. This led them to seek out intermediaries. They noticed that certain individuals were better equipped to interact with spirits, able to enter trances and stay in a death-like state long enough to communicate with demons. This led to the belief that these individuals were chosen to intercede with spirits on behalf of ordinary people and to oversee rituals, offerings, and prayers. This is how the priesthood emerged, initially in the form of fetich-men or shamans, who play a significant role in the lives of various cultures, including Africans, Tungus peoples, Mongols, and Native Americans. Life's important events—marriage, pregnancy, reaching puberty, birth, death, hunting, or warfare—often require the services of a sorcerer or shaman, who is usually also a healer (see below). As society grows both in numbers and in civilization, a priestly class has emerged, which sometimes holds both spiritual and secular power (as is still the case in certain parts of Africa and Tibet today). Alongside this official priesthood, ancient sorcerers often remain influential, and in many Lama-Buddhist temples, the presence of a sorcerer is accepted for purposes like oracles and propitiations.

International Religions.—This is not the place to speak of universal or international religions like Brahmanism, spread over India and the Asiatic archipelago; the once flourishing Buddhism of the south, based on the doctrine of the “little vehicle” (Hinâyâna), the last remains of which are to be found in Siam and the Island of Ceylon; the Buddhism of the north, or Lamaism, based on the doctrine of the “great vehicle” (Mâhāyāna), which rules the Thibetan and Mongol world, nor of the other more or less altered forms of this religion, Chinese Foïsm, Japanese and Annamese Buddhism, Indian Jainism, etc. And we must take for granted as better known the other universal religions, Judaism with its sects which do not acknowledge the Talmud (like the Karaites of the Crimea); Mahomedanism, with its two principal divisions, the sect of Shiahs (Persians) and that of the Sunis (other Mahomedan peoples); Christianity, with its great divisions and numerous sects (Copts, Nestorians, etc.). And we must notice finally the “national religions”—Taoism in China, Shintoism in Japan, Confucianism in both these countries, etc.

International Religions.—This isn't the right place to discuss universal or international religions like Brahmanism, found throughout India and the Asian archipelago; the once-thriving Buddhism of the south, based on the teachings of the “little vehicle” (Hinâyâna), the last remnants of which can be seen in Siam and the Island of Ceylon; the northern Buddhism, or Lamaism, based on the teachings of the “great vehicle” (Mâhāyāna), which dominates the Tibetan and Mongolian world, nor of the other more or less modified versions of this religion, such as Chinese Foïsm, Japanese and Annamese Buddhism, Indian Jainism, etc. We can assume that the other universal religions are well-known, including Judaism and its sects that do not recognize the Talmud (like the Karaites of Crimea); Islam, with its main divisions, the sect of Shiahs (Persians) and that of the Sunis (other Islamic peoples); Christianity, with its major divisions and various sects (Copts, Nestorians, etc.). Lastly, we should also mention the “national religions”—Taoism in China, Shintoism in Japan, Confucianism in both countries, etc.

Myths.—Myths occupy an intermediate position between science, poetry, and religion, for they try to explain all phenomena while leaving a great deal to the imagination. The infinite variety of myths is only apparent. They all may be reduced to a very limited number of ideas or fancies, which are the same among all peoples. They are all explanations, more or less simple and childish, of the origin of plants, animals, men, the earth, the stars, etc., founded on the idea of animism. The details change according to the nature of the country, but the substance remains always the same. It is a vegetation of fancy more or less luxuriant and beautiful on the common[Pg 223] ground of animism. Thus religion and myths are often one and the same thing, since they are derived from a common source, from that habit which primitive men share with children of giving a personality to every object they contemplate, from the sun to a knife, from a blade of grass to the ocean. We cannot dwell longer on this subject, which would require developing at considerable length;[248] I will merely say that on carefully studying myths we find in them psychological data relating to the mode of thinking of a people, rather than indications of the relations and affinity of one people with another, for borrowed details in myths are innumerable among all peoples.[249]

Myths.—Myths sit at a crossroads between science, poetry, and religion because they attempt to explain all phenomena while still leaving a lot to the imagination. The infinite variety of myths is just an illusion. In reality, they can all be distilled down to a very small number of ideas or concepts that are universal among different cultures. They serve as explanations, varying from simple to naive, for the origins of plants, animals, humans, the earth, the stars, and so on, based on the idea of animism. The specifics may differ depending on the country, but the core substance remains the same. It's a lush and beautiful growth of imagination rooted in the common ground of animism. Thus, religion and myths often overlap since they come from a shared origin: the tendency of primitive people, much like children, to attribute personality to every object they observe, from the sun to a knife, from a blade of grass to the ocean. We can’t delve deeper into this topic, as it would require extensive elaboration; I will just mention that by thoroughly studying myths, we uncover psychological insights about how a people think, rather than clues about the relationships and connections between different cultures, as borrowed elements in myths are countless among all societies.[Pg 223]

Sciences.—It is only with the rudiments of the sciences that we have to deal in the case of uncivilised and even half-civilised peoples.

Sciences.—We only have to engage with the basics of the sciences when it comes to uncivilized and even partially civilized peoples.

The knowledge of numbers exists more or less among all the peoples of the earth. We often say, “Such a people can only count up to three, because it has no special word to denote a higher number.” This reasoning is not always just, for, by adopting it, we might accuse the French of scarcely being able to count beyond sixty, since they have no special words for, say, seventy-five or eighty, and to express these fall back on words already employed in counting—sixty and fifteen or four score. Many savages employ a similar method. Thus the Yahgan Fuegians have only words for the number one (Kaueli), two (Kombaï), and three (Maten); but they make use of the words Akokombaï (literally “the other two,” or “another time two”) to denote four, and Akomaten (the other three) to indicate six.[250]

The understanding of numbers exists to some extent among all the people of the world. We often say, “Such a group can only count up to three because they don’t have a specific word for a higher number.” This reasoning isn’t always fair, because if we followed it, we could argue that the French can barely count beyond sixty, since they don’t have unique words for, say, seventy-five or eighty, and instead use existing words for counting—sixty and fifteen or four score. Many indigenous people use a similar approach. For example, the Yahgan Fuegians have specific words for one (Kaueli), two (Kombaï), and three (Maten); but they use the terms Akokombaï (literally “the other two,” or “two more”) to refer to four, and Akomaten (the other three) to refer to six.[250]

Certain Australians proceed in a similar manner.[251] If these[Pg 224] tribes had been able to continue the same process beyond this point they would have arrived at the duodecimal system; what they lacked for that were objects which should always be within their reach to assist them in this mode of calculation. Peoples who thought of distinguishing by special words the first five figures had at once, in their fingers, an aid to enable them to set up a decimal system. Many South American Indians, Caribs, Tupis, and Tamanacas of the Orinoco count by the fingers, hands, and feet, employing thus the decimal system; instead of five they say “a hand”; instead of ten, “two hands”; instead of twelve, “two hands and two fingers”; instead of fifteen, “two hands and one foot”; instead of twenty, “a man”; and so forth. With the development of civilisation the fingers of the hand are replaced by objects, by little stones, seeds or shells, which are arranged in boxes representing units, tens, etc. From these were derived the abaci of the Chinese and Russians.

Some Australians do things the same way.[251] If these[Pg 224] tribes had been able to keep going with this method, they would have developed a base-12 counting system; what they were missing were items that could always be within their reach to help them with this type of calculation. People who thought to use special words for the first five numbers immediately had their fingers as a tool to create a decimal system. Many South American Indians, Caribs, Tupis, and Tamanacas from the Orinoco count using their fingers, hands, and feet, thus employing the decimal system; instead of five, they say “a hand”; instead of ten, “two hands”; instead of twelve, “two hands and two fingers”; instead of fifteen, “two hands and one foot”; instead of twenty, “a man”; and so on. As civilization progressed, fingers were replaced by objects like small stones, seeds, or shells, which were arranged in containers representing units, tens, etc. The abacuses of the Chinese and Russians were derived from these.

Geometry—Calculation of Time.—Measures of distances, surfaces, etc., which gave birth to geometry, are found again among certain uncivilised peoples. The Indians of Veragua find the height of a tree by measuring the distance from which they see it, turning their back and bending the body in such a way that the head is between the outstretched legs; the ancient Egyptians measured the surfaces of their lands empirically by means of geometric figures, etc. The measurement of time by the movement of the stars exists among all peoples, the succession of day and night, and the phases of the moon, being the things easiest to observe. Thus days and months or “moons” are nearly everywhere equal. But it is not the same with regard to the year. It is the succession of vegetation or seasons which determines periods longer than months. Thus the Andamanese count by successions of three seasons (cold, dry, and wet); the Papuans by successions of two seasons (corresponding to the prevailing monsoons), but the epochs at which these seasons arrive do not coincide exactly with lunar divisions, and tallying computation becomes more difficult. Thus, as soon as writing was invented, the[Pg 225] more intelligent of the nomadic tribes, especially, turned their attention towards noting coincidences of the position of the sun in relation to the constellations, according to the seasons, for the principal constellations, especially the Great Bear, Orion, the Southern Cross, are known by almost all the peoples of the earth, who have emerged from the state of savages dependent on the chase.

Geometry—Calculation of Time.—Measures of distances, areas, etc., that gave rise to geometry are also found among some primitive cultures. The Indigenous people of Veragua determine the height of a tree by measuring the distance from which they can see it, bending over with their heads between their outstretched legs; the ancient Egyptians measured their land areas practically using geometric shapes, etc. The measurement of time based on the movement of stars exists among all people, with the cycle of day and night and the phases of the moon being the easiest to observe. Therefore, days and months or “moons” are almost universally similar. However, this is not the case with years. The changes in vegetation or seasons define periods longer than months. For example, the Andamanese measure time in three seasons (cold, dry, and wet); the Papuans recognize two seasons (aligned with the prevailing monsoons), but the timing of these seasons doesn't exactly align with lunar cycles, making consistent calculations harder. Thus, once writing was invented, the[Pg 225] more advanced nomadic tribes, in particular, began to focus on recording the alignments of the sun with the stars according to the seasons, as the main constellations, especially the Great Bear, Orion, and the Southern Cross, are recognized by nearly all societies that have moved beyond a primitive, hunting-dependent lifestyle.

The verification of the time when the year begins (coinciding generally with some commemorative festival) became later the business of State astronomers (Egypt, India), who were at the same time astrologers or magicians.

The verification of when the year starts (usually aligning with a commemorative festival) later became the responsibility of state astronomers (Egypt, India), who were also astrologers or magicians.

Calendars and Clocks.—There are yet in China astronomers who periodically harmonise the lunar with the solar year, though, for the ordinary purposes of life, other peoples make use of the solar year calculated either from a reign (as in ancient Egypt), or day by day in a cycle of sixty years, formed by the combination of ten kou (stock) and twelve tchi (branches), as in the Hindu calendar. A similar calendar is found among the ancient Mexicans.[252] In regard to the divisions of the days into hours, they are somewhat uncertain among the Andamanese and Australians, and they begin to assume a definite character only with the introduction of the sundial, as for example among the Zuñi Indians, who have before nearly every cabin a pillar, the shadow of which serves to indicate the hours. In China and in Corea the use of the candle which burns a certain time is a remnant of the mode of calculating time according to the duration of the fire.[253] The running of water and sand has been utilised, as we know, in the construction of clepsydras and other primitive clocks of classic antiquity and of the Middle Ages.

Calendars and Clocks.—In China, there are still astronomers who regularly synchronize the lunar calendar with the solar year. However, for everyday use, other cultures rely on the solar year, calculated either from a specific reign (like in ancient Egypt) or day by day in a sixty-year cycle, which is made up of ten kou (stocks) and twelve tchi (branches), similar to the Hindu calendar. A comparable calendar was used by the ancient Mexicans.[252] When it comes to dividing days into hours, there's some uncertainty among the Andamanese and Australians; a clearer structure only emerges with the introduction of the sundial, such as those used by the Zuñi Indians, who place a pillar in front of nearly every cabin, with its shadow indicating the time. In China and Korea, the candle that burns for a set duration is a vestige of an earlier method of measuring time based on how long a fire lasts.[253] The flow of water and sand has been used, historically, in the creation of clepsydras and other primitive clocks from classical antiquity and the Middle Ages.

Eskimo Geographical Map

FIG. 72.—Eskimo geographical map.
(After Holm.)

FIG. 72.—Inuit geographical map.
(After Holm.)

Geography and Cartography.—We can only indicate summarily what primitive navigators and half-civilised nomads know of geography. Orientation according to the cardinal points is known even to peoples as primitive as the Fuegians[Pg 226] and the Andamanese, but cartography is only developed among those who draw. The Australians can draw maps on the sand very accurately, except as regards distances; we have even maps drawn on weapons, like that of figure 79, F, representing a lagoon and an arm of Broken River, between which is situated the territory of the tribe to which the owner of the weapon belonged.[254] The Micronesians of the Marshall Islands construct with bamboo rods geographical maps in which these rods represent the direction of the currents, and the shells or seeds attached to their intersections, the different islands.[255]

Geography and Cartography.—We can only briefly mention what primitive navigators and semi-civilized nomads understand about geography. Knowing how to orient themselves according to the cardinal points is something even very primitive peoples like the Fuegians[Pg 226] and the Andamanese are aware of, but cartography is only developed among those who create drawings. Australians can draw quite accurate maps in the sand, though they struggle with distances; we even have maps drawn on weapons, like the one in figure 79, F, depicting a lagoon and an arm of Broken River, with the territory of the tribe to which the weapon's owner belonged between them.[254] The Micronesians of the Marshall Islands create geographical maps using bamboo rods, where these rods indicate the direction of currents, and the shells or seeds attached at their intersections represent the different islands.[255]

But it is the Eskimo who excel in the cartographic art, as may be seen from the specimen which I reproduce from S. Holm.[256] This consists of two wooden tablets (Fig. 72). One of them (A) represents all the fiords, bays, and capes of that part of the coast of Eastern Greenland comprised between Kangerdenarsikajik (a) and Sicralik (b); we must read the names of these places in the direction of the arrow. The second tablet (B) represents the islands off the coast; situated opposite to different bays. By bringing it near to, or removing it from the first, we have the[Pg 227] distance between the coast and each of the islands. The ancient Mexicans had topographical maps, marine charts, and even cadastral plans, much more perfect than those of the ancient Egyptians. The Chinese maps still further surpass these models, and remind one already of our coasting pilot books in their use of orientation by means of the compass.[257]

But it's the Eskimos who really shine in the art of map-making, as shown in the example I’m sharing from S. Holm.[256] This consists of two wooden tablets (Fig. 72). One of them (A) shows all the fjords, bays, and capes along the coast of Eastern Greenland, specifically between Kangerdenarsikajik (a) and Sicralik (b); we need to read the names of these places following the direction of the arrow. The second tablet (B) illustrates the islands off the coast, located opposite different bays. By moving it closer to or further away from the first tablet, we can determine the[Pg 227] distance between the coast and each of the islands. The ancient Mexicans had topographical maps, marine charts, and even land-use plans that were far more advanced than those of the ancient Egyptians. The Chinese maps go even further, resembling our modern nautical guides in their use of compass orientation.[257]

I should take up the whole chapter if I were to give an account, even in an abridged form, of everything concerning primitive medicine.[258] I will merely point out that, according to their animistic conception of the world, “savages” have no other idea of disease than as a malevolent manifestation of a spirit who enters into the man, of a demon who “possesses” him. Thus, fetich-men and shamans are the first doctors. They know how to “drive” from the body of the patient the evil spirit who torments him, to “draw out” the disease in the form of a pebble, or some other object deftly concealed before the operation. Moreover, the bones, mummified portions of the body of sick persons, or of fetich-men themselves, may become after their death relics possessing miraculous healing power, etc. For the matter of that, even among civilised peoples diseases are often attributed to the “evil eye,” to “spells” (France), to “Jettatura” (Italy), etc. Among the Indians of North America there are also special healers (medicine-men) who are held in great esteem, and who sometimes form a corporation (Mide), into which admission can only be gained after a professional examination in the “doctors’ cabin” (Schoolcraft, Hoffmann). Along with incantations and magical proceedings, with dancing and music, the principal remedies of the Australian healers and the American medicine-men are scarifications, blood-letting, and blood-sucking. Negroes show a preference for cupping-glasses. The processes of advanced surgery among certain peoples go as far as ovariotomy (Australians), laparotomy and the cæsarian operation (Negroes of Uganda); but not as far as the amputation of limbs, the fingers excepted. Trepanning, known from[Pg 228] the quaternary period in Europe, is also employed among Negroes, Persians, New Hebridians, etc., for nervous diseases, epilepsy, etc. The clyster, the great remedy of our ancestors, is hardly used, except by the Dakota Indians and the Negroes of the west coast of Africa, where also the doctor squirts the drug into the sick person from his mouth through the medium of a calabash (Monnier).[259] Attenuation of virus is even practised by, for example, the Bushmen, who use it to cure the bite of scorpions and serpents.[260]

I could fill an entire chapter if I were to cover everything about primitive medicine.[258] I’ll just highlight that in their belief system, “savages” perceive disease as an evil spirit that enters a person, or a demon that “possesses” them. Because of this, fetich-men and shamans act as the earliest doctors. They know how to “drive out” the tormenting evil spirit from the patient’s body, or to “extract” the disease by pulling out an object like a pebble that was secretly placed before the procedure. Also, bones and mummified parts of sick individuals or fetich-men can become relics after their death that are believed to hold miraculous healing abilities, etc. In fact, even among civilized societies, illnesses are sometimes blamed on the “evil eye,” “spells” (in France), “Jettatura” (in Italy), and so on. Among the Native Americans, there are special healers (medicine-men) who are highly respected and sometimes form a group (Mide), which requires a professional assessment for membership in their “doctors’ cabin” (Schoolcraft, Hoffmann). The main treatments from Australian healers and American medicine-men involve incantations and magical rituals, along with dancing and music, as well as techniques like scarification, bloodletting, and blood-sucking. Black people prefer cupping glasses. Advanced surgical procedures among some groups include ovariotomy (Australians), laparotomy, and cesarean sections (in Uganda), but do not extend to amputation of limbs, except for fingers. Trepanning, known from[Pg 228] the Quaternary period in Europe, is also practiced by Black people, Persians, and New Hebrideans for treating nervous diseases, epilepsy, and so on. The clyster, a significant remedy for our ancestors, is rarely used today, except by the Dakota Indians and West African Blacks, where the healer squirts medicine into the patient’s mouth using a calabash (Monnier).[259] The Bushmen even practice virus attenuation to treat scorpion and snake bites.[260]


CHAPTER VII.

SOCIOLOGICAL CHARACTERS—conclusion.

SOCIAL CHARACTERS—conclusion.

3.—FAMILY LIFE.—Relations of the two sexes before marriage—Marriage and family—Theory of promiscuity—Group marriage—Exogamy and endogamy—Matriarchate—Degrees of relationship and filiation—Polyandry—Levirate—Polygamy and monogamy—Patriarchate—Rape and purchase of the bride—Duration of conjugal union—Children—Birth—Nurture—Name of the child and of adults—Initiation, circumcision, etc.—Old men and their fateFunereal rites—Mourning.

3.—FFAMILY LIFE.—Relationships between men and women before marriage—Marriage and family—Theory of promiscuity—Group marriage—Exogamy and endogamy—Matriarchy—Degrees of kinship and parentage—Polyandry—Levirate—Polygamy and monogamy—Patriarchy—Rape and bride price—Duration of marriage—Children—Birth—Child and adult naming—Initiation, circumcision, etc.—Elderly people and their fateFuneral rites—Grieving.

4.—SOCIAL LIFE.—(a) Home life of a peopleEconomic organisation—The forms of property depend on production—Common property and family property—Village community—Individual property—Social organisation—Totemism—Clan rule—Family rule—Territorial rule—Caste and class rule—Democratic rule—Social morals—Right and justice—Taboo—Retaliation, vendetta, and ordeals—Secret societies—Extra legal judges—Formulæ of politeness—(b) International life of peoples—Absence of sympathetic relations—Hostile relations—War—Arms of offence—Bow and arrows—Arms of defence—Neutral relations—Commerce—Money—Cowry—Transports and means of communication—Primitive vehicles—Navigation.

4.—SSOCIAL LIFE.—(a) Home life of a peopleEconomic organization—The types of property are based on production—Common property and family property—Village communities—Individual property—Social organization—Totemism—Clan rule—Family rule—Territorial rule—Caste and class rule—Democratic rule—Social morals—Rights and justice—Taboos—Retaliation, revenge, and trials—Secret societies—Extra-legal judges—Forms of politeness—(b) International life of peoples—Lack of sympathetic relations—Hostile relations—War—Offensive weapons—Bows and arrows—Defensive weapons—Neutral relations—Commerce—Money—Cowrie—Transportation and means of communication—Primitive vehicles—Navigation.

THE subjects about to be treated are so vast and complicated that it is almost impossible to give an idea of them in a few words and without going into details. So our account will of necessity be somewhat dogmatic, and will only touch on some salient facts of family and social life.

THE topics we're going to discuss are so broad and complex that it's nearly impossible to summarize them in just a few words without getting into specifics. Therefore, our explanation will inevitably be somewhat straightforward and will only highlight a few key points about family and social life.

3.—FAMILY LIFE.

The relations of the two sexes are somewhat free among uncivilised and half-civilised peoples so long as there is no formal marriage or birth of a child. In the whole of Oceania,[Pg 230] Malaysia, among the Samoyeds, Mongols, and certain Negroes, sexual intercourse between the young people of both sexes is by no means prohibited.[261] Sometimes even, as among the Bavenda for example, the young men and women give themselves up to obscene “games.”[262] Uncivilised peoples among whom the loss of virginity would be considered dishonouring to a girl are somewhat rare (Nias islanders, Igorrotes, Malays of Menangkabau). Most of them treat it with indifference, and among some of them defloration is obligatory before marriage; it is effected artificially or naturally by the parents (Bataks, Pelew islanders), by the matrons (Bissayas of the Philippines), by the priests (Cambodia), and even, it is said, by persons paid for this kind of work.[263] It would be possible to give instances of many other customs which shock our ideas about chastity and marriage. Thus in the Algerian Arab tribe of the Ouled-Naïl, no young girl will find a husband if she has not previously acquired a dowry by regular prostitution. On the other hand, it must not be forgotten that the prostitution of girls before marriage was required by certain cults of antiquity (cult of Aphrodite at Abydos, Ephesus, etc., cult of Mylitta in Babylonia, etc.).

The relationships between the two sexes are relatively open among uncivilized and semi-civilized societies as long as there is no formal marriage or birth of a child. In all of Oceania,[Pg 230] Malaysia, among the Samoyeds, Mongols, and certain African groups, sexual relations between young people of both genders are not prohibited.[261] Sometimes, as seen among the Bavenda, for example, young men and women engage in explicit “games.”[262] Uncivilized groups where losing virginity is seen as shameful for a girl are quite rare (like the Nias islanders, Igorrotes, and Malays of Menangkabau). Most of them treat it with indifference, and among some, losing virginity is required before marriage; this is done either artificially or naturally by the parents (like the Bataks, Pelew islanders), by older women (Bissayas of the Philippines), by priests (in Cambodia), and even, reportedly, by people paid for that purpose.[263] There are many other customs that would shock our views on chastity and marriage. For instance, in the Algerian Arab tribe of the Ouled-Naïl, no young woman will find a husband if she hasn’t previously earned a dowry through regulated prostitution. Additionally, it’s important to note that prostitution before marriage was required by certain ancient cults (like the cult of Aphrodite at Abydos, Ephesus, etc., and the cult of Mylitta in Babylonia, etc.).

Marriage and Family.—But marriage once contracted, the woman, among almost all uncivilised and half-civilised peoples, is no longer free. From this moment either the husband, the family on the mother’s or father’s side, or the clan, see strictly to the observation of the marriage rules which are in vogue, and the laws, written or unwritten, punish every slip of the woman who was so free before marriage. It is the contrary to what one often sees in our civilised societies. In fine, marriage is above all a social convention, and the form which it takes in different ethnic groups is intimately connected with the social and economic constitution of these groups.[Pg 231] The position of woman in society, ideas on conjugal obligations, etc., are entirely subordinated to the ideas which prevail about property and the social organism.

Marriage and Family.—However, once married, a woman, among nearly all uncivilized and partially civilized societies, loses her freedom. From that point forward, the husband, the family from either the mother's or father's side, or the clan, closely monitors adherence to the marriage rules that are in place, and any misstep by the woman, who was free before marriage, is punished by both written and unwritten laws. This contrasts sharply with what is often observed in our civilized societies. Ultimately, marriage is primarily a social convention, and the various forms it takes across different ethnic groups are closely linked to the social and economic structures of those groups.[Pg 231] The role of women in society, beliefs about marital responsibilities, etc., are completely subordinated to the prevailing ideas about property and the social structure.

Theory of Promiscuity.—We often hear it said that marriage has sprung from a “state of promiscuity” in which mankind primitively lived; every man could then couple with every woman, “like the animals,” people sometimes add, forgetting that among animals the most akin to man this state of promiscuity is rather exceptional, and that the polygamous and even monogamous family exist among a great number of birds and mammals.[264]

Theory of Promiscuity.—It's often said that marriage originated from a "state of promiscuity" where early humans lived; back then, every man could pair up with any woman, "like animals," people sometimes say, forgetting that among animals most similar to humans, this state of promiscuity is quite rare, and that polygamous and even monogamous family structures exist among many birds and mammals.[264]

The theory of promiscuity or “communal marriage,” so well summed up some time ago by Lubbock,[265] has few defenders at the present day. We know that actually there does not exist on the earth any population practising an “irregular promiscuity,” and the evidence of history is reduced to three or four texts of Herodotus, Strabo, and Solinus, the interpretation of which is far from easy.[266]

The theory of promiscuity or “communal marriage,” which was previously summarized by Lubbock,[265] has few supporters today. We know that there are no populations on Earth that actually practice “irregular promiscuity,” and the historical evidence is limited to just a few texts from Herodotus, Strabo, and Solinus, the meaning of which is quite difficult to interpret.[266]

Group Marriage.—What has been often taken for promiscuity is only a form of marriage, different from our individual marriage, which, nevertheless, represents the first attempt to regulate sexual relations and to define[Pg 232] ties of kinship in order to ensure the existence and bringing up of children. This form of marriage, admirably studied by Howitt and Fison[267] among the Australians, has received from them the name of “group marriage.” Its essential feature is that men and women, by the fact of belonging to such and such a group or clan are not marriageable one with another, and are obliged by the fact of their birth to contract unions with members of other groups of the tribe.

Group Marriage.—What many have often considered promiscuity is actually a different type of marriage that exists alongside individual marriage. Nonetheless, it represents an early attempt to organize sexual relationships and define[Pg 232] family ties to ensure the survival and upbringing of children. This type of marriage, thoroughly explored by Howitt and Fison[267] among the Australians, is referred to by them as “group marriage.” The key characteristic of this arrangement is that men and women belonging to a specific group or clan cannot marry each other and are required, due to their birth, to form unions with members of other groups within the tribe.

Marriage by groups is met with in its most pronounced form among the Australians and some tribes of India (Nairs, Todas). Among the Australians this custom co-exists with individual exogamous marriage (the “Noa” of the Dieri of Central Australia), and exhibits itself in its simplest form in the example of the Wotjoballuk Australians of the north-west of Victoria. This tribe is divided into two classes or clans, the Gamutch and the Krokitch. The men of the Gamutch clan are by right the husbands of all the women of the Krokitch tribe, and vice-versâ. But it is only a virtual right. In practice, during the great festivals of initiation (see p. 241), the old men of the tribe, assembled in council, distribute among the bachelors of a clan the unappropriated girls of the other clan. This marriage, called “Pirauru” among the Dieri, and known under the name of “Paramour custom” by the colonials, gives the right to the man of the Gamutch clan, for example, to contract a marriage with the woman of the Krokitch clan thus allotted to him when the occasion shall present itself; he may also take with him one or more of these women and make her or them live with his wife of the individual marriage. However, as the same woman may be allotted in the successive festivals to several men, there are certain rules of precedence to observe in the fulfilment of the conjugal duties, if chance puts two men before their “common” wife:[Pg 233] the elder brother takes precedence of the younger, the man up in years of the youth.[268]

Group marriage is most clearly seen among the Australians and certain Indian tribes (Nairs, Todas). Among the Australians, this custom exists alongside individual exogamous marriage (the "Noa" of the Dieri of Central Australia) and shows itself in its simplest form with the Wotjoballuk Australians of north-west Victoria. This tribe is split into two classes or clans, the Gamutch and the Krokitch. The men of the Gamutch clan have the right to marry all the women of the Krokitch tribe, and vice versa. However, this right is mostly theoretical. In reality, during the major initiation festivals (see p. 241), the elder men of the tribe come together to allocate the unmarried girls of one clan to the bachelors of the other clan. This marriage practice, called "Pirauru" among the Dieri and referred to as "Paramour custom" by the colonizers, allows a man from the Gamutch clan, for example, to marry a woman from the Krokitch clan assigned to him when the opportunity arises; he can also take one or more of these women to live with his wife from an individual marriage. However, since the same woman may be assigned to several men at successive festivals, there are specific rules of precedence to follow when it comes to fulfilling marital duties, if two men find themselves with their "common" wife: the older brother has priority over the younger, and the older man has priority over the younger man.[Pg 233]

Exogamy and Endogamy.—Group marriage is closely connected with what is called exogamy or exogeny, that is to say, marriage outside the clan, as opposed to endogamy or endogeny, marriage within the clan. It must be said, however, that exogamy is as often met in the individual form of marriage, and that sometimes endogamy, interdicted within the limits of a clan, is, on the contrary, practised within the limits of the tribe of which these clans are the components. There is in this case exogamy in relation to the clan and endogamy in relation to the tribe.

Exogamy and Endogamy.—Group marriage is closely linked to what is called exogamy or exogeny, meaning marriage outside the clan, as opposed to endogamy or endogeny, which refers to marriage within the clan. It should be noted, however, that exogamy is just as commonly found in individual marriages, and sometimes endogamy, which is restricted within a clan, is practiced within the tribe to which these clans belong. In this case, there is exogamy concerning the clan and endogamy regarding the tribe.

Matriarchate.—But how are matters of filiation and family to be decided with such a system of marriage, for it is impossible to settle the question of paternity in this case? To Bachofen and McLennan[269] we must attribute the honour of having discovered a complete system of filiation, in vogue among many uncivilised peoples, and the exact opposite to that which we are accustomed to in our societies: filiation by the mother, or matriarchate. Thus in our example of the Australians of Wotjoballuk (p. 232), the posterity of a man of the Gamutch clan married to a woman of the Krokitch clan will belong to the Krokitch clan; if, on the contrary, the father is a Krokitch and the mother a Gamutch, the children will belong to the Gamutch clan. This filiation establishes the uterine relationship and, united to exogamy, prevents marriage between nearest relatives. In fact, the son of the first couple being of the Krokitch clan, will not be able to marry[Pg 234] his uterine sister, since she is of the same clan as he is, but only an alien woman, or a relative, according to our conventions, of the Gamutch clan, for example, the sister of his father. Theoretically, a father of the Gamutch clan would be able to marry his daughter, since she belongs to the Krokitch clan; but in practice these cases are forbidden by custom, for example among the Australian Dieri,[270] or they are avoided by the existence not of two, but of four or a greater number of classes in the tribe, with prohibitions against the marriage of people of certain of these classes.[271]

Matriarchate.—But how are issues of lineage and family to be decided in this marriage system, since it’s impossible to determine paternity? We owe Bachofen and McLennan[269] the credit for identifying a thorough system of lineage used by many uncivilized societies, which is completely opposite to what we’re familiar with in our own: lineage through the mother, or matriarchate. For instance, in the case of the Australians of Wotjoballuk (p. 232), the children of a man from the Gamutch clan who marries a woman from the Krokitch clan will belong to the Krokitch clan; conversely, if the father is from the Krokitch clan and the mother is from the Gamutch, the children will belong to the Gamutch clan. This system establishes maternal lineage and, combined with exogamy, prevents marriage between close relatives. In fact, the son of the first couple, belonging to the Krokitch clan, won’t be able to marry his uterine sister, as she is from the same clan, but can only marry an outside woman or a relative, according to our norms, such as a sister from his father's clan, the Gamutch. Theoretically, a father from the Gamutch clan could marry his daughter since she belongs to the Krokitch clan; however, in practice, customs forbid such cases, for example among the Australian Dieri,[270] or these situations are avoided by having not just two, but four or more classes within the tribe, with specific prohibitions against marriage between people from certain classes.[271]

However, peoples who practise group marriage and exogamy have not to regard incest very seriously, for degrees of relationship are not fixed with them as with us. To fix relationship, they make use of a system called by Morgan, who discovered it (among the American Indians first), and described it admirably,[272] the “classificatory system.” In its simplest form, such as it is met with, for example, among the Micronesians and the Maoris, it may be thus summed up. All persons allied by consanguinity are divided into five groups. The first is formed of myself and my brothers, sisters, and cousins; we all bear the same name, which is that of the whole group. The second group is formed of my father and mother with their brothers and sisters, as well as their cousins, all likewise bearing the same name; the third group comprises my grandparents, with their brothers, sisters, etc.; the fourth, the cousins of my children, whom I[Pg 235] consider as my sons and daughters; lastly, the fifth group is composed of the grandchildren of my brothers and sisters, whom I consider as my grandchildren. A similar system of nomenclature is very common among certain peoples of India, and sometimes causes much embarrassment to English judges newly landed. To give an example: A witness said that his father was at home at such and such an hour; then, a few minutes after, he affirmed that his father was in the fields. The judge is perplexed until, by a series of questions, he elicits the fact that the witness means his “little” father, equivalent to our term uncle.[273] Westermarck has tried to interpret the classificatory system differently; he sees in it only an artifice of speech, a way of addressing persons of different ages; but as Fison judiciously observes, if it be held that this system has no reference to degrees of relationship we should have to deny any idea whatever of this subject to certain peoples who have no other expressions to denote degrees of relationship.[274]

However, groups that practice group marriage and exogamy don't take incest very seriously, as their understanding of degrees of relationship isn't as fixed as it is for us. To define relationships, they use a system identified by Morgan, who first discovered it among the American Indians and described it wonderfully,[272] the “classificatory system.” In its simplest form, like that found among the Micronesians and the Maoris, it can be summarized as follows. All people related by blood are divided into five groups. The first group consists of myself, my brothers, sisters, and cousins; we all share the same name, which represents the entire group. The second group includes my father and mother along with their brothers, sisters, and cousins, who also share the same name; the third group is made up of my grandparents and their siblings, etc.; the fourth group consists of my children’s cousins, whom I[Pg 235] see as my sons and daughters; finally, the fifth group comprises my siblings' grandchildren, whom I regard as my grandchildren. A similar naming system is quite common among certain peoples in India and sometimes confuses newly arrived English judges. For example, a witness might say that his father was at home at a specific time; then, shortly after, he claims his father was in the fields. The judge gets confused until he asks a series of questions and discovers that the witness is referring to his "little" father, which is similar to our term uncle.[273] Westermarck has attempted to interpret the classificatory system differently; he views it merely as a speech technique, a way to address people of different ages. However, as Fison wisely points out, if this system is considered unrelated to degrees of relationship, we would have to deny any understanding of this topic to certain groups that lack other terms for indicating degrees of relationship.[274]

Polyandry, that is to say, marriage in which the woman possesses several husbands, is considered by the majority of authors as a form derived from group marriage. With the exception of two doubtful examples (Khasias and Saporogian Cossacks), polyandry always assumes the fraternal form; that is to say, the husbands of the woman are brothers. The classic country of polyandry is Thibet. There each of the brothers cohabits in turn with their common wife, a certain period being allotted. Among the ancient Arabs, according to Strabo, matters were arranged less systematically, and the first comer on his arrival at the woman’s house asserted his marital rights, after having taken care, however, to place his staff across the door, as is still done in the case of temporary marriages in Persia and among the Todas, who leave the cloak as well as the staff. Polyandry is practised by several peoples living on the borders of Thibet (Miris, Dophlas, Abors,[Pg 236] Khasias, Ladakhis, etc.), but appears to be but rarely met with elsewhere, and almost never outside of India. It is explained by the scarcity of women in these countries (a statement not confirmed by statistics in regard to certain of them), and by the necessities of the pastoral life of these peoples.

Polyandry, which means a marriage where a woman has several husbands, is seen by most authors as a form that comes from group marriage. With the exception of two questionable examples (the Khasias and Saporogian Cossacks), polyandry usually takes on a fraternal form; that is, the husbands are brothers. The classic region for polyandry is Tibet. There, each brother alternates in living with their shared wife for specific periods. Among ancient Arabs, according to Strabo, the situation was less organized, and the first man to arrive at the woman’s house claimed his marital rights, after making sure to place his staff across the door, similar to practices still seen in temporary marriages in Persia and among the Todas, who leave both a cloak and a staff. Polyandry is practiced by several groups living near Tibet (Miris, Dophlas, Abors,[Pg 236] Khasias, Ladakhis, etc.), but it appears to be rare elsewhere, and almost never found outside of India. This is often attributed to the scarcity of women in these regions (a claim not backed by statistics in regard to some of them) and by the demands of the pastoral lifestyle of these communities.

Levirate, or compulsory marriage with a dead brother’s widow, a very widespread custom in India (where it is called niyoga), among the Iroquois and other American Indians, the Melanesians, the Negroes, as well as the ancient Egyptians and Jews, is considered as a survival of polyandry. However, Maine, Westermarck, and others see in it only a custom established with a view to securing the protection of orphan children.[275] With polyandry is also connected, on not very good grounds it seems to me, parental marriage. In this form of union the father or uncle or some other relative really cohabits with the nominal wife of his son or nephew during the minority of the latter. This custom, according to Shortt, prevails in India among the Reddies or Naickers, and according to Haxthausen among the peasantry in Russia, where a modification of this kind of relation, strongly reprehended, however, is still known at the present day under the name “Snokhachestvo.”[276]

Levirate, or mandatory marriage with a deceased brother’s widow, is a very common practice in India (where it’s referred to as niyoga), among the Iroquois and other Native American tribes, the Melanesians, Afro-descendants, as well as the ancient Egyptians and Jews. It is viewed as a remnant of polyandry. However, Maine, Westermarck, and others argue that it’s simply a custom intended to ensure the protection of orphaned children.[275] Parental marriage is also linked to polyandry, although the connection seems weak to me. In this type of arrangement, the father, uncle, or another relative actually lives with the legal wife of his son or nephew while the latter is still a minor. According to Shortt, this practice exists in India among the Reddies or Naickers, and according to Haxthausen, among the peasantry in Russia, where a variation of this kind of relationship, which is strongly condemned, is still referred to today as “Snokhachestvo.”[276]

Polygamy and Monogamy.—Individual marriage, which may, as we have seen in Australia, co-exist with group marriage, assumes two different forms—polygamy and monogamy. The latter does not necessarily proceed from the former. Many savage tribes, like the Veddahs and the Andamanese, are monogamous, as are also a certain number of mammals and birds. Among others (Fuegians, Bushmen) polygamy is exceptional. In reality it only takes root in societies a little more advanced, in which, especially, the idea of individual property is already more[Pg 237] or less firmly planted. Woman is then considered very much as a slave, from whom pleasure and labour may be obtained; she is treated like any other property; the more wives a man has, the richer and more esteemed is he. Polygamy is widely diffused over the world, either in its pure form (Mahomedans, Australians, American Indians, Negroes, etc.) or in its modified forms: lawful concubinage (all over the East), or unlawful (Europe), and temporary marriage (Persia, Japan).

Polygamy and Monogamy.—Individual marriage, which can exist alongside group marriage as seen in Australia, takes on two different forms—polygamy and monogamy. The latter doesn't necessarily arise from the former. Numerous tribes, like the Veddahs and the Andamanese, practice monogamy, as do some mammals and birds. In other groups (like the Fuegians and Bushmen), polygamy is rare. In fact, it tends to develop in slightly more advanced societies, where the concept of individual property is already somewhat established. In these societies, women are often viewed as slaves, providing both pleasure and labor; they are treated like any other form of property, and a man’s wealth and status increase with the number of wives he has. Polygamy is prevalent around the world, either in its pure form (like among Muslims, Australians, Native Americans, Black people, etc.) or in modified forms: legal concubinage (common in the East), illegal forms (in Europe), and temporary marriage (like in Persia and Japan).

It is only with the development of society that monogamy, nominal or real, develops, and with it a little respect for woman. She enjoys more liberty, as do also the children who have passed a certain age. Thus is constituted the family of to-day, in which, however, the patriarchal spirit is still dominant.

It is only with the advancement of society that monogamy, whether it's just in name or truly practiced, emerges, bringing a bit more respect for women. Women have more freedom, and so do children who have reached a certain age. This is how today's family is formed, although the patriarchal mindset still prevails.

Patriarchate.—Individual polygamous marriage is most frequently allied to a new form of affiliation, that of kinship through males, which, in its turn, is rooted in the constitution of property and the subordination of woman to man. In the matriarchate the natural protector of the child and the family is the mother’s brother; in the patriarchate his place is taken by the father, who extends the right of property not only to include the mother, but also the children; he may sell them, hire them out, etc. The patriarchate is the régime under which live most half-civilised peoples and a great number of uncivilised.

Patriarchate.—Individual polygamous marriage is often connected to a new kind of relationship, one based on male kinship, which is grounded in property rights and the subjugation of women by men. In a matriarchate, the natural protector of the child and family is the mother's brother; in a patriarchate, this role is taken by the father, who extends property rights to include not just the mother but also the children; he has the authority to sell them, rent them out, etc. The patriarchate is the régime under which most semi-civilized societies and many uncivilized ones operate.

Several matrimonial customs may be explained by the primitive forms of marriage. Thus the practice of showing hospitality to a stranger by lending him one’s wife, so common among savages and half-civilised nomads, may be explained as a relic of group marriage, in which, as we have seen, the exchange and the lending of women are practised.[277] Similarly, the custom, very prevalent, especially in Malaysia, which requires a husband to live in his wife’s family, is considered by most authors as a relic of the matriarchate. Another[Pg 238] custom, nearly always allied to the first, but which is also met with as a survival in the cases where the woman goes to live with her husband’s family, is that prohibiting newly-married couples from speaking to their fathers and mothers-in-law (avoidance). The best known form, widely diffused from the Kafirs to the Mongols, is the forbidding of the husband not only to speak to, but even to see his mother-in-law; if by chance he should meet her, he is obliged to take to flight, or, at any rate, to turn aside out of the way. Among several peoples of the Caucasus and certain North American Indians this custom is observed only until the birth of the first child. This custom, in a general way, is considered as a relic either of exogamy (Tylor) or of anti-incest customs (Westermarck).[278]

Several marriage customs can be explained by early forms of marriage. For instance, the practice of welcoming a stranger by lending him one’s wife, which is common among primitive and semi-civilized nomads, can be seen as a leftover from group marriage, where, as we have seen, the exchange and lending of women take place.[277] Similarly, the custom, quite common especially in Malaysia, which requires a husband to live with his wife’s family, is viewed by most authors as a remnant of matriarchal society. Another[Pg 238] custom, usually connected to the first and also found where the woman lives with her husband’s family, is the one that prohibits newly-married couples from talking to their in-laws (avoidance). The most well-known version, found from the Kafirs to the Mongols, bars the husband not only from speaking to but even from seeing his mother-in-law; if he happens to encounter her, he must either run away or, at the very least, avoid her path. Among some groups in the Caucasus and certain North American Indigenous peoples, this practice is only followed until the first child is born. Generally, this custom is regarded as a leftover of either exogamy (Tylor) or anti-incest rules (Westermarck).[278]

Among the most widely diffused practices having a connection with marriage, we must mention the abduction of the wife, whether real (Arabs, Turco-Mongols, Caribs, Patagonians, Burmese, Australians, etc.) or simulated and symbolic, and often forming part of the marriage ceremonies (among a host of peoples). Ethnologists are not agreed as to the origin of this custom; some see in it the last vestiges of exogamy, others the relic of the slavery of women, etc.

Among the most common practices related to marriage, we should note the abduction of the bride, whether it’s actual (like among Arabs, Turco-Mongols, Caribs, Patagonians, Burmese, Australians, etc.) or fake and symbolic, often being part of marriage ceremonies in many cultures. Ethnologists disagree about the origin of this custom; some view it as the remnants of exogamy, while others see it as a leftover from the enslavement of women, etc.

Side by side with simulated abduction there is almost always the purchase of the wife from her parents (the “Kalym” of the Turco-Tatars, etc.), which proves that marriage by purchase took the place of marriage by capture in the[Pg 239] exogamous relations between tribes, and contributed to their social cohesion, preventing quarrels and wars (Tylor). The marriage portion is only found in societies having a relatively high organisation. It is, as it were, a payment for the guardianship which the husband assumes over the wife and her children under the patriarchal system. The institution of the marriage portion is probably derived from the practice still in vogue among many peoples, according to which the parents offer presents in exchange for the money or the service given as the purchase-price of their daughter.

Alongside simulated abduction, there is almost always the purchase of the wife from her parents (the “Kalym” among the Turco-Tatars, etc.), which shows that marriage by purchase replaced marriage by capture in the[Pg 239] exogamous relationships between tribes and helped their social cohesion, preventing conflicts and wars (Tylor). The marriage portion is only present in societies with a relatively advanced organization. It's essentially a payment for the protection the husband provides over the wife and her children under the patriarchal system. The concept of the marriage portion likely comes from the practice still seen among many cultures, where parents give gifts in exchange for the money or services received as the purchase price for their daughter.

The duration of the conjugal union varies so much among different peoples that no general rule can be laid down regarding it. From unions of a night (under the régime of group marriage, in temporary or trial marriages) to the indissolubility prescribed by the Christian religions, there is quite a scale of conjugal relations more or less durable. Most frequently the husband may discard the wife when she has ceased to please him; sometimes divorce is hedged round with certain formalities of established custom.

The length of marriage varies widely across different cultures, so it's hard to establish a universal rule about it. Marriages can last from just one night (in the context of group marriage or temporary relationships) to the lifelong commitment required by Christian faiths. There’s a broad range of marital relationships that are more or less lasting. Usually, a husband can end the marriage when he no longer finds his wife appealing; in some cases, divorce comes with specific customs and formalities.

Children.—In all societies, as in the animal world, the family is principally established for the bringing up of children. But it is far from true that the arrival of children is everywhere accepted with joy. The voluntary limitation of progeny is not an invention of advanced civilisation. Savages could teach us much on this point. The Australians with this object practise ovariotomy on women, the operation “mika” (artificial hypospadias) on men, or simply kill off the superfluous infants. Infanticide on a large scale was practised by the Polynesians before their “Europeanisation”; it exists still here and there in Thibet, so far as girls are concerned. Some would even see in this custom the origin of polyandry.

Children.—In all societies, as in the animal kingdom, the family is mainly formed for raising children. However, it's not true that the arrival of children is always welcomed with joy. The choice to limit the number of offspring isn’t just a modern concept. Indigenous people could give us a lot of insights on this matter. Australians perform ovariotomy on women and the operation “mika” (artificial hypospadias) on men, or simply eliminate extra infants. The Polynesians practiced widespread infanticide before being influenced by Europeans; it still occurs occasionally in Tibet, particularly concerning girls. Some even attribute the custom to the origins of polyandry.

Birth.—But having once decided to let a child live, the uncivilised look well after it. One could write a volume, if one wished to enumerate all the hygienic and at the same time superstitious customs attendant on the pregnancy, parturition, and recovery of the woman among different peoples. The act of generation is considered by nearly all the un[Pg 240]civilised as something at once mysterious and impure. The pregnant woman is kept quiet and rubbed; she has to occupy a hut apart before, during, or after the birth of the child, according to the custom of the different countries. Rarely is the woman allowed to be confined alone; the examples quoted have reference for the most part to isolated cases, such as may happen even among the civilised. She is often assisted at the time of the confinement by one or more women, and sometimes by men.[279]

Birth.—Once a decision is made to let a child live, those who are less advanced take good care of it. You could write a whole book detailing the various health practices and superstitions surrounding pregnancy, childbirth, and the woman's recovery across different cultures. Most people regarded as uncivilized see the act of creation as both mysterious and unclean. The pregnant woman is kept calm and receives massage; she is often expected to stay in a separate hut before, during, or after giving birth, depending on local customs. It’s rare for a woman to give birth alone; most of the examples cited refer to isolated instances, which can also occur among the civilized. She often has the support of one or more women during childbirth, and sometimes men are present as well.[279]

Among the customs which accompany birth, the most curious is that of the “couvade” practised by the Basques, the Indians of Brazil and Guiana, and other peoples. According to this custom, the husband, after the coming into the world of the child, behaves exactly as if it were he who had been confined; he betakes himself to bed, receives congratulations, sometimes looks after the baby. E. B. Tylor sees in this custom a survival of the matriarchate in a society with a patriarchal régime. It would be the ransom paid by the husband for the right, which formerly belonged to the mother, to be called the head of the house.[280]

Among the customs that accompany birth, the most interesting is the "couvade" practiced by the Basques, the Indigenous peoples of Brazil and Guiana, and other groups. According to this tradition, the husband, after the child is born, acts as if he has just given birth; he stays in bed, accepts congratulations, and sometimes cares for the baby. E. B. Tylor believes this custom is a remnant of matriarchy in a patriarchal society. It would represent the price the husband pays for the right, which once belonged to the mother, to be recognized as the head of the household.[280]

As to the child, from the moment of his entrance into the world, every effort is made to keep away from him the spirits which might harm him; the Laotians, in the vicinity of the house which shelters him, hang bells, rattles, and cloth-bands, so that, shaken by the wind, they may make a noise and keep away evil spirits (Harmand, Neis). The Malays and the Nias Islanders for this purpose prepare special fetiches (Modigliani).

As for the child, from the moment he is born, every effort is made to shield him from any harmful spirits. The Laotians, in the area around his home, hang bells, rattles, and cloth strips, so that when the wind blows, they make noise to drive away evil spirits (Harmand, Neis). The Malays and the Nias Islanders also create special charms for this purpose (Modigliani).

The name which is given to a child is also the result of much care and forethought. Fetichers, shamans, sorcerers, and priests are consulted. The name chosen is sometimes determined by the locality or house of the birth. Thus the Kalmuks who were exhibited at Paris in 1882 gave the name of “Paris” to the child which one of their number brought into the world. The Negroes of Senegal, under similar[Pg 241] circumstances in 1895, called one of their new-born “The Frenchman.” But most frequently the name given is of a plant or animal (Red Indians, Mongols, etc.). It must be said, however, that among many peoples the name given at birth is not borne throughout life. It may be changed more than once. The most frequent cause for doing this is the fear of spirits; the Dyaks and the Mongols change the name of sick persons to “deceive the spirit” who has caused the disease; among the Fuegians, the Indians of North America, the Polynesians, and the Malays, the name of a dead man is not allowed to be uttered, and all his namesakes are obliged to change their name. Often, too, the name is changed because their “trade” requires it; the Okanda healers bear another name when they practise their art; and among civilised peoples changes of name are bound up with certain social conditions (monks, actors, prostitutes, etc.).

The name given to a child is usually the result of careful thought and consideration. People like fetichers, shamans, sorcerers, and priests are consulted. Sometimes, the name is influenced by the location or home where the child is born. For example, the Kalmuks who were showcased in Paris in 1882 named one of their newborns “Paris.” Similarly, the people of Senegal called one of their new babies “The Frenchman” under comparable circumstances in 1895. More often, names are derived from plants or animals (like with the Red Indians, Mongols, etc.). It’s important to note that among many cultures, the name given at birth is not necessarily the name carried throughout life. It can be changed multiple times. The most common reason for this is the fear of spirits; the Dyaks and Mongols change the names of sick individuals to “trick the spirit” that caused the illness. Among the Fuegians, North American Indians, Polynesians, and Malays, the name of a deceased person is not spoken aloud, and all their namesakes are required to change their names. Additionally, names can be changed based on their “profession”; for instance, Okanda healers use a different name while practicing their craft, and in more civilized societies, name changes are often tied to specific social situations (like monks, actors, prostitutes, etc.).

Education of Children.—Suckling ordinarily lasts a very long time among uncivilised peoples, till the child is two, three, four, and five years old, sometimes even older.[281] Children are treated kindly by uncivilised peoples, and rarely are they chastised as they are in Europe, though a certain “discipline” appears among the half-civilised, with the necessity of making the child learn many more things. At the age of puberty, among most uncivilised peoples, the ceremony of initiation takes place. This is a sort of higher education with certain tests, followed by a ceremony, after which the individual is declared adult. It is met with among the Australians, as also among the American Indians, Negroes, etc., with the same essential features. The young men of the tribe are led into a place apart, where the sorcerers, the fetichers, or the “old men,” teach them during a varying period all that a “man” should know about social and sexual life. The candidates are then put tests, sometimes very cruel, to make sure of their power[Pg 242] to resist thirst, hunger, and physical pain. Those who emerge victorious from these tests are brought back triumphantly into the villages, and feasted during several days.[282]

Education of Children.—Breastfeeding typically lasts a very long time among uncivilized peoples, often until the child is two, three, four, or five years old, and sometimes even longer.[281] Children are treated with kindness by uncivilized peoples, and they are rarely punished as they are in Europe, though there seems to be some form of “discipline” among the semi-civilized, with the need to teach the child many more things. At puberty, among most uncivilized peoples, the ceremony of initiation occurs. This serves as a type of higher education with specific tests, followed by a ceremony, after which the individual is considered an adult. This is observed among the Australians, as well as among American Indians, Africans, and others, sharing the same essential features. The young men of the tribe are taken to a separate area, where the shamans, medicine men, or “elders” teach them for a varying period about everything a “man” should know regarding social and sexual life. The candidates then undergo tests, sometimes quite harsh, to evaluate their ability[Pg 242] to withstand thirst, hunger, and physical pain. Those who successfully pass these tests are triumphantly returned to the villages and celebrated with feasts lasting several days.[282]

Among the operations to which young men are subjected during initiation, we must specially notice circumcision, generally practised all over Oceania, among the American Indians and other peoples, without taking into account the Israelite and Mussulman world, in which this custom has now but a religious symbolic signification. Moreover, several religions have kept the custom of initiation, giving to it very varied forms (shaving of the forelock among Buddhists, first communion among Catholics, etc.).

Among the practices that young men go through during initiation, we should particularly highlight circumcision, which is commonly performed throughout Oceania, among American Indians, and other groups, not including the Jewish and Muslim communities, where this practice now mostly holds a religious symbolic meaning. Additionally, various religions have maintained the initiation custom, each giving it different forms (like shaving the forelock among Buddhists, first communion among Catholics, etc.).

The lot of the old men is not an enviable one in primitive societies. They are not cared for, and often when they become infirm they are left to die of hunger. The voluntary suicide of the old men, which is committed amid great pomp among the Chukchi[283] and some other peoples, may be explained as much by the miseries of existence as by the belief in a better life beyond the tomb, which is the basis of funereal rites.[284] Among nearly all peoples it is customary to put into the grave objects which the dead had used in their ordinary occupations, but only such as constituted private property: weapons by the side of a warrior, pottery near to a woman, etc.[285] These objects are usually broken to signify that they also are dead, and that their “soul” goes to accompany their owner into the other life. It is also with this idea that a warrior’s favourite horse is sacrificed on his grave (Red Indians, Altaians), or a symbolic ceremony suffices, the animal being led in the funeral procession, a custom[Pg 243] still practised all over Europe at the interments of superior officers. In India women are sacrificed, slaves in Dahomey and among the Dyaks, etc., in order that the dead may not be deprived of anything in the other world.[286]

The fate of old men is not a desirable one in primitive societies. They aren't cared for, and often when they become weak, they're left to starve. The voluntary suicide of old men, which is carried out with great ceremony among the Chukchi[283] and some other cultures, can be understood as much by the hardships of life as by the belief in a better life after death, which underpins funeral rites.[284] Among nearly all societies, it's common to include items that the deceased used in their daily lives in the grave, but only those that were their private property: weapons next to a warrior, pottery near a woman, etc.[285] These items are usually broken to signify that they are also dead, and that their “soul” will accompany their owner into the afterlife. It's also with this belief that a warrior’s favorite horse is sacrificed at his grave (as seen with Native Americans and Altaians), or a ceremonial gesture is sufficient, with the animal being led in the funeral procession, a practice[Pg 243] still observed across Europe at the funerals of higher-ranking officials. In India, women are sacrificed, while slaves in Dahomey and among the Dyaks, etc., are offered up so that the dead lack nothing in the next world.[286]

Funeral ceremonies and the practice of going into mourning give place to feasts of diverse character. Among the Dualas of the Cameroons (Western Africa), the “feast of the dead” lasts nine days, the time required for his soul to make the journey to Bela, the place of eternal rest. Among the Battas of Sumatra, we find these funeral feasts accompanied by dances and a special kind of game, the Topingha. The exhumation of the bones of the dead person at the end of a certain time, practised by several Indonesian, Melanesian, and American tribes, is the occasion of orgies; I may also mention the habit of visiting the cemetery at stated periods, and taking food either on the grave or by the side of it, which is very general in Europe.

Funeral ceremonies and the practice of mourning give way to various feasts. Among the Dualas of Cameroon (Western Africa), the “feast of the dead” lasts nine days, which is the time it takes for the soul to journey to Bela, the place of eternal rest. Among the Battas of Sumatra, these funeral feasts are accompanied by dances and a special game called Topingha. The exhumation of bones after a certain period, practiced by several Indonesian, Melanesian, and American tribes, leads to celebrations; I should also mention the custom of visiting cemeteries at specific times and bringing food to eat either on or beside the grave, which is quite common in Europe.

Among the feasts organised in honour of the dead let us mention the Bung of the Japanese, at the end of which miniature skiffs in straw are thrown into the sea, supposed to transport the souls of the dead who have been present at the feast back to their dwelling-place.

Among the feasts held to honor the dead, let's mention the Bung of the Japanese, at the end of which small straw boats are placed in the sea, believed to carry the souls of the deceased who attended the feast back to their home.

The modes of sepulture, although very varied,—interment, incineration, exposure to the air (natural mummification), embalming, pure and simple abandonment on the earth or to the waves,—have not a great importance from the ethnical point of view; often two or three modes may co-exist among the same people (examples, Mongols, Papuans).

The ways of burial, while quite diverse—burial, cremation, exposure to the elements (natural mummification), embalming, or simply leaving the body on the ground or in the water—aren’t very significant from an ethnic perspective; often two or three methods can exist simultaneously among the same group (for example, the Mongols and Papuans).

Mourning.—Outward manifestations of grief caused by the death of a near relative exist among all peoples of the world, even the most uncivilised. These are, first, cries, lamentations, and tears (Bushmen, Bechuana, ancient Egyp[Pg 244]tians, Caribs of Guiana, Italians, Russians). Then succeed material signs displayed on the body, some of which are the consequence of cruel practices which seem to suggest the idea of sacrifice for the purpose of removing the anger of “the dead man’s soul,” which wanders about the survivors. We need only mention the cutting off of the finger-joints among the Bushmen, of the toes among the Fijians, the drawing out of teeth in Eastern Polynesia, the laceration of the skin among the Australians, the burnings among the New Caledonians. Under a milder form the same idea of sacrifice manifests itself in the custom of plucking out the hair of the beard (Australians, Fijians), of cutting or shaving off a part or the whole of the hair (Jews and Egyptians in ancient times, Huns, Albanians, Hovas, Malays, American Indians, Basutos, Gallas). Certain signs of mourning on the body seem to be caused by the desire not to be recognised by the “spirit” of the dead person; such is the custom of daubing the face or the whole body, practised by the Negroes of Central Africa, the Australians, the Polynesians, etc. Among peoples who are more clothed, the mode of dress is altered. General negligence in dress is a sign of grief among the Bechuana and the Malays; tearing of the garments is practised among the American Indians; the Manganya of Southern Africa wrap the body in palm-leaves, which they wear until they fall withered to the ground. The conventional colour of the clothes, white among the Chinese, black among Europeans, is a sign of the same kind.

Mourning.—Expressions of grief following the death of a close relative are found in every culture worldwide, even in the most primitive societies. These expressions include cries, lamentations, and tears (Bushmen, Bechuana, ancient Egyptians, Caribs of Guiana, Italians, Russians). Following these, there are physical signs displayed on the body, some of which result from harsh practices that seem to suggest the idea of sacrifice to appease the anger of “the dead person's soul,” which lingers among the living. Examples include amputating finger joints among the Bushmen, severing toes among the Fijians, removing teeth in Eastern Polynesia, skin laceration among the Australians, and burning among the New Caledonians. In a milder form, the same idea of sacrifice appears in customs like plucking out beard hair (Australians, Fijians) or cutting or shaving part or all of the hair (Jews and Egyptians in ancient times, Huns, Albanians, Hovas, Malays, American Indians, Basutos, Gallas). Certain mourning signs on the body seem to be driven by the desire to avoid recognition by the “spirit” of the deceased; this is evident in the practice of painting the face or body, common among Central African Negroes, Australians, Polynesians, etc. Among more clothed populations, the style of dress is altered. General neglect in appearance signifies grief among the Bechuana and the Malays; tearing of clothing is practiced by American Indians; the Manganya of Southern Africa wrap their bodies in palm leaves, which they wear until they decay and fall off. The traditional color of mourning attire, white for the Chinese and black for Europeans, also signifies the same sentiment.

4.—SOCIAL LIFE.

Social life may be studied both as limited to a given people (inner life) and in the relations of one people with another (international life).

Social life can be examined both within a specific group (inner life) and in the interactions between different groups (international life).

The inner life of a given ethnical group comprises economic or property organisation, and social organisation properly so called (administration and politics). Ideas of morals, right, and justice depend much on the forms which these organisa[Pg 245]tions have taken, as well as on usages and customs; and the latter in their turn are derived principally from family organisation and religious ideas.

The inner life of an ethnic group includes economic or property structures, as well as social organization in the strict sense (administration and politics). Concepts of morality, rights, and justice are heavily influenced by the forms these organizations take, as well as by traditions and customs; and these customs, in turn, primarily stem from family structures and religious beliefs.

The international life of peoples manifests itself in three different ways: either in hostile relations (war), in pacific neutral relations (commerce), or in sympathetic relations (exchange of ideas and feelings, feasts, congresses, etc.).

The international life of nations shows itself in three different ways: either through hostile relations (war), through peaceful neutral relations (trade), or through friendly relations (sharing ideas and feelings, celebrations, conferences, etc.).

Inner Life of a People—Economic Organisation.The system by which property is held depends on the mode of production, for the distribution and consumption of wealth are in intimate relation with the mode of procuring it. Among savage hunters it is often necessary for several to combine to catch big game; thus Australians hunt the kangaroo in bands of several dozen individuals; the Eskimo gather quite a flotilla of kayaks for whale-fishing. The captured kangaroos, the whale brought to shore, are considered common property; each eats of the spoil according to his hunger. The territory of each tribe among the Australians and Red Indians is considered collective property; every one hunts on it in his own way, on condition that he does not encroach on the territory of neighbouring tribes. But in the midst of this common property certain objects used solely by the individual, his garments, his weapons, etc., are considered personal property, while the tent with its furniture, etc., belongs to the family; as the canoe which is used for whale fishing, holding five or six persons, belongs to these persons in common.

Inner Life of a People—Economic Organisation.The system by which property is held depends on how things are produced, since the distribution and consumption of wealth are closely related to how it's obtained. Among primitive hunters, it's often necessary for several people to team up to catch larger game; for example, Australians hunt kangaroos in groups of several dozen, and the Eskimos gather a fleet of kayaks for whale hunting. The kangaroos caught and the whale brought ashore are seen as common property; everyone eats according to their hunger. The territory of each tribe among the Australians and Native Americans is viewed as collective property; anyone can hunt there as long as they don't encroach on neighboring tribes' land. However, within this common property, certain items used solely by individuals, like their clothing and weapons, are regarded as personal property, while the tent and its furnishings belong to the family; similarly, the canoe used for whale hunting, which holds five or six people, is owned collectively by those individuals.

Thus in the same society three sorts of property, collective, family, and individual, may exist simultaneously side by side. What decides its category is the character of the labour expended, the mode of production. I have made a flint implement with my own hands, it is mine; with the assistance of my wife and children I have built the hut, it belongs to the family; I have hunted with the people of my tribe, the beasts slain belong to us all in common. The animals which I have killed by myself on the territory of the tribe are mine, and if by chance the animal wounded by me escapes and is killed by another, it belongs to both of us and the skin is[Pg 246] his who gave the finishing stroke. For this reason each arrow bears the mark of its owner.

Thus, in the same society, three types of property—collective, family, and individual—can exist at the same time. What determines its category is the nature of the labor put in and the way of production. If I make a flint tool myself, it’s mine; if I build a hut with my wife and kids, it belongs to the family; if I hunt with my tribe, the animals we kill are ours collectively. The animals I’ve killed on our tribe’s land are mine, and if by chance the animal I wounded gets away and is killed by someone else, it belongs to both of us, and the skin goes to the person who delivered the final blow. This is why every arrow has the owner’s mark on it.

It is thus that matters are arranged among the Tunguses and North American Indians. Among the latter, rules have been strictly laid down in regard to bison-hunting from the point of view of individual property.[287]

It’s organized this way among the Tunguses and North American Indians. For the North American Indians, there are strict rules about bison hunting concerning personal property.[287]

But since the introduction of fire-arms, the balls bearing no distinctive marks, the slain bisons are divided equally; they are considered as common property. This example shows plainly how closely are related production and the system by which property is held. Common and private property do not lead among savages to monopoly, for the products of the chase cannot be kept for long without getting spoilt; so after having taken what he wants for himself, the hunter gives the remainder to his relatives, his family, or the tribe. It is this which partly explains the carelessness of savages and the absence among them of the spirit of thrift and thought for the future.

But since the introduction of firearms, the bullets having no distinctive marks, the killed bison are shared equally; they are seen as common property. This example clearly illustrates how closely related production and the system of property ownership are. Common and private property don’t lead to monopoly among primitive people, as the products of the hunt can’t be stored for long without spoiling; so after taking what he needs for himself, the hunter shares the rest with his relatives, family, or tribe. This partly explains the lack of concern for savings and future planning among primitive people.

Family Property.—With the introduction of agriculture, most of the objects of personal property become family property; the transformation frequently coincides with the appearance of the patriarchal form of family life; the land still remains for some time common property, but soon it likewise becomes family property. The members of the same family group enjoy in common the products of the soil, which common labour has fertilised. This mode of property existed in Russia before the sixteenth century, that is to say, before the establishment of the communal ownership of the soil still in vogue to-day. It is found in England from the thirteenth to the fourteenth century (Seebohm), and in certain parts of France (in the Nivernais, according to the statement of Guy Coquille) in the form of “porçonneries” having “pot and fire” in common, working in the same fields and accumulating their savings in the[Pg 247] same box.[288] With the growth of population, this family joint-ownership developed into an agricultural commune, the true “village community” of English authors, with the alienation of holdings and the admission of strangers into its midst, with periodic distributions of the various strips of land. The best type of this kind of community is the Russian “mir.” In India it is met with side by side with the family commune among the Dravidian and Aryan peoples, and in Western Europe numerous traces of it are found.[289] But these are only traces and survivals, for communal property has been destroyed here as in the Mussulman world, often by means of force, with the establishment of the feudal system, which gave birth to the different modes of land tenure which we find to-day. In Russia and in India the dissolution of the communal system is still taking place under our eyes, but from intrinsically different causes, especially the rapid increase of population and diminution of the size of holdings.

Family Property.—With the rise of agriculture, most personal belongings become family property; this change often happens alongside the emergence of a patriarchal family structure. Land remains common property for a while, but it soon becomes family property as well. Members of the same family group share the benefits of the land, which has been nourished by their collective labor. This type of property was present in Russia before the sixteenth century, meaning before the establishment of the communal ownership of land that still exists today. In England, it appeared from the thirteenth to the fourteenth century (Seebohm), and in parts of France (in Nivernais, according to Guy Coquille), it took the form of “porçonneries” where they shared “pot and fire,” working the same fields and saving their money in the same box.[Pg 247] [288] As the population grew, this family joint-ownership evolved into an agricultural commune, the true “village community” described by English writers, characterized by the division of holdings and the inclusion of outsiders, along with periodic distributions of various land strips. The best example of this kind of community is the Russian “mir.” In India, it exists alongside family communes among both Dravidian and Aryan groups, and traces of it can be found throughout Western Europe.[289] However, these are just remnants, as communal property has been dismantled here just as in the Muslim world, often through force, with the rise of the feudal system, which led to the different forms of land tenure we see today. In Russia and India, the breakdown of the communal system is still occurring, but for fundamentally different reasons, particularly the rapid population growth and the shrinking size of landholdings.

Social Organisation.—The constitution of society is modelled on that of property. In the simplest cases the family organisation is at the same time the social organisation. Under the régime of group marriage, and even after its partial replacement by individual marriage, tribes are divided into a certain number of clans, each of which, with the majority of peoples, has its totem. The totem is a class of material objects (never an isolated object, thus differing from the fetish) for which uncivilised man professes a superstitious veneration, believing in a sort of mysterious connection between himself and each representative of the class of objects. Most frequently the totem is some species of animal or vegetable which the members of the clan regard as their ancestor, and also as the patron and protector of the whole clan. The Iroquoian legends relate circumstantially how the tortoise, their totem and ancestor, got rid of its shell and gradually developed[Pg 248] into man. The totem is represented on different objects belonging to the clan. Our blazons and armorial bearings are derived from the totem, as well as marks of ownership. The totemistic divisions are independent of the territorial divisions of the tribe; the connection is, rather, a moral one. The inhabitants of a territorial district may belong to several clans, and, on the other hand, the members of one and the same “totem” may inhabit places distant from each other.

Social Organisation.—The structure of society is shaped by property. In the most basic situations, family structure is also the social structure. During the régime of group marriage, and even after it was partially replaced by individual marriage, tribes are divided into a number of clans, each of which, like most people, has its own totem. The totem is a type of material object (never a single object, which sets it apart from a fetish) that uncivilized people hold in superstitious reverence, believing in a sort of mysterious link between themselves and each representative of that type of object. Most often, the totem is some species of animal or plant that clan members see as their ancestor, as well as the guardian and protector of the entire clan. The Iroquoian legends describe in detail how the tortoise, their totem and ancestor, shed its shell and gradually evolved[Pg 248] into a human. The totem is depicted on various objects belonging to the clan. Our coats of arms and heraldic symbols are derived from the totem, along with marks of ownership. The totemistic divisions are separate from the tribal territorial divisions; instead, the connection is more moral. People in a specific area may belong to several clans, and conversely, members of the same “totem” may live far apart from each other.

Nearly always the totem is subject to taboo[290] (page 252). The social organisation of clans and “phratries” (groups of clans of which the members are intermarriable) joined to totemism is widespread among North American Indians, Australians, Melanesians of the Solomon Islands, the Tshi-speaking tribes of the Gold Coast, etc. It exists side by side with other social organisations among the Kirghis, the Kevsurs of the Caucasus (Kovalewsky), the Mandingoes (Binger), etc. Under this primitive régime there are no permanent chiefs, but intermittent councils, formed of the “old men” in each clan. If several clans are united into a tribe, an elective chief sometimes appears, but always invested with only a temporary and very limited power.

Almost always, the totem is subject to taboo[290] (page 252). The social structure of clans and “phratries” (groups of clans whose members can intermarry) connected to totemism is common among North American Indians, Australians, Melanesians from the Solomon Islands, the Tshi-speaking tribes of the Gold Coast, and others. It exists alongside other social structures among the Kirghis, the Kevsurs of the Caucasus (Kovalewsky), the Mandingoes (Binger), and more. In this primitive régime, there are no permanent chiefs, only occasional councils made up of the “old men” in each clan. If several clans come together to form a tribe, an elective chief might sometimes emerge, but they always hold only temporary and very limited power.

Family Organisation.—With the change from the hunting to the agricultural mode of life, with the establishment of affiliation by blood and the patriarchal family, with the constitution of family ownership, the social organisation is also transformed. All the members of the family gathered under the same roof (often in the literal sense of the word; for example, among the Indonesians and the Pueblo Indians) constitute the social unit. Such is the origin of the commune in China and Japan, of the “fine” in Ireland, etc. The chief of the race, the living “ancestor,” becomes the chief of the society, and his power tends to become hereditary.[291]

Family Organization.—As society transitioned from hunting to agriculture, with the development of blood relations and the patriarchal family alongside the establishment of family ownership, social organization also changed. All family members living under one roof (often quite literally, as seen in communities like the Indonesians and the Pueblo Indians) form the basic social unit. This is the origin of the commune in China and Japan, and the “fine” in Ireland, among others. The leader of the family, regarded as the living “ancestor,” becomes the leader of society, and this power often becomes hereditary.[291]

Territorial Organisation.—When family ownership is replaced by communal ownership, the social organisation takes the territorial form. All the people inhabiting a given territory, whether related by blood or not, form the social unit. The Russian “Volost,” the Annamese commune, the Japanese “Mura,” the “Calpulli” of the ancient Toltecs, are examples of this kind of grouping.[292] Sometimes these territorial organisations form by themselves independent states, governed by an elected chief, assisted by the delegates of each commune (Moqui in North America, Krumen and Vakamba in Africa, Samoans in Oceania), or controlled by popular assemblies (New Hebrideans, most of the peoples of Western Africa and the Congo basin). Sometimes also they form part of vaster confederations at the head of which is an elected chief, a council, etc. (Rejangs of Sumatra with their “Pangherans,” or princes, Afghans with their “Khans,” etc.).

Territorial Organisation.—When family ownership shifts to communal ownership, social organization takes on a territorial form. All the people living in a specific area, whether they are related by blood or not, become the social unit. The Russian "Volost," the Annamese commune, the Japanese "Mura," and the "Calpulli" of the ancient Toltecs are examples of this type of grouping.[292] Sometimes, these territorial organizations can become independent states, governed by an elected chief, supported by representatives of each commune (like the Moqui in North America, Krumen and Vakamba in Africa, and Samoans in Oceania), or overseen by popular assemblies (such as the New Hebrideans and many peoples of Western Africa and the Congo basin). They can also be part of larger confederations led by an elected chief, a council, and so on (like the Rejangs of Sumatra with their "Pangherans," or princes, and the Afghans with their "Khans," etc.).

Organisation of Castes and Classes.—We may find already in the territorial organisation of society the rudiments of the formation of classes, shown by the development of private property and wealth, and also by the authority of the chiefs and powerful persons who become the “protectors” of the weak. This differentiation of classes is also marked by the appearance of slavery, the result of wars and the right of private property (enslavement for debt). It takes definite form in the class organisation which presupposes the existence of two groups of citizens at least—the lords and nobles, the aristocracy or directing class, and the “people,” the plebeian or directed class. The relations between these classes may extend from the complete servitude of the one and the exercise of the right of life and death by the other, to an almost absolute equality of the two.

Organization of Castes and Classes.—We can see the beginnings of class formation in the societal organization by how private property and wealth develop, along with the authority of leaders and powerful individuals who act as "protectors" of the weak. This division into classes is further highlighted by the emergence of slavery, which comes from wars and the concept of private property (enslavement due to debt). It takes a definite shape in a class system that assumes there are at least two groups of citizens—the lords and nobles, or the aristocracy and ruling class, and the “people,” who make up the plebeian or subordinate class. The relationships between these classes can range from one being completely subservient to the other, with the latter having the power of life and death, to a situation where both classes are almost equal.

There is similarly a perfect gradation for non-free people, as opposed to citizens divided into two or more classes. At[Pg 250] the foot of the ladder are “slaves,” in the strict sense of the word, not regarded even as men; while at the top are found those who by birth are not free, but who by fortune or otherwise may come to occupy a position almost equal to that of free citizens of the highest class.

There is also a clear hierarchy for non-free people, unlike citizens who are split into two or more classes. At[Pg 250] the bottom of the ladder are “slaves,” in the strict sense, not seen as human; while at the top are those who are not free by birth, but who by luck or other means may reach a status almost equivalent to that of the highest class of free citizens.

What are the qualifications required in order to become chief in primitive social organisations? Most often, by election, those become chief who are bravest in war, strongest, most skilful in the chase (American Indians, Congolese), or the chiefs are the richest (Indians, Polynesians, Negroes), or simply they are the biggest, the best fed (Athapascans, according to Bancroft). But whatever may be the ground on which they are chosen, the power of these chiefs is often most precarious, and it may disappear with the cause of its origin (war, hunting expedition). Chiefs elected for a stated period are invested with more real power. Sometimes they are elected for life; this is a step towards hereditary power which may degenerate into the purest absolutism (ancient Dahomey). The outward ensigns of authority are of various sorts: clubs and commander’s staffs (Oceania and Europe), parasols (Asia, Africa),[293] etc. In the same way as the clan is responsible for the misdeeds of each of its members, so the absolute monarch, king, sultan, khan, prince, etc., is responsible for the acts committed by his subjects. The corollary of the conception that kings or other potentates represent the most skilful, influential, and bravest men is that of forfeiture of power when the holder becomes aged or infirm, or when he shows himself incapable of reigning (Quechuas, Masai); in certain absolute States the right of revolt against an incapable holder of royal power is expressly recognised (China), at least in theory.[294]

What qualifications are needed to become a chief in basic social organizations? Usually, chiefs are chosen based on their bravery in battle, strength, or hunting skills (like American Indians and Congolese), or they may be the wealthiest (such as Indians, Polynesians, and Africans), or simply the largest and best-fed (like the Athapascans, according to Bancroft). Regardless of how they are selected, the power of these chiefs is often quite unstable, disappearing with the situation that brought them to power (like war or hunting). Chiefs elected for a specific time have more actual authority. Sometimes, they are elected for life, which is a step towards hereditary power that can lead to absolute rule (as seen in ancient Dahomey). The symbols of authority vary: clubs and staffs (in Oceania and Europe), parasols (in Asia and Africa),[293] etc. Just as the clan is accountable for the wrongdoings of its members, so too is an absolute monarch, king, sultan, khan, or prince responsible for the actions of their subjects. This idea that kings or other leaders are the most skilled, influential, and courageous people implies that they can lose their power when they become old or weak, or when they fail to govern effectively (as with the Quechuas and Masai); in certain absolute states, the right to revolt against an ineffective ruler is explicitly recognized (as in China), at least theoretically.[294]

Feudal and Democratic Organisation.—It would be out of place here to dwell on the development of the feudal system and the theocracy which result from the régime of classes. Let us[Pg 251] merely say that almost all half-civilised peoples are still in the midst of the feudal régime or are just emerging from it. The recognition of individual liberty forms the first step towards the organisations of modern European states, constitutional monarchies or republics, in which the aim is to reduce to a minimum governmental action and the differences of classes, especially before the law,—to establish, in a word, a democratic régime.

Feudal and Democratic Organization.—It's not the right place to explore the evolution of the feudal system and the theocracy that come from a class regime. Let us[Pg 251] just state that nearly all semi-civilized societies are still caught up in the feudal system or are just starting to break free from it. Acknowledging individual freedom is the first step towards the formation of modern European states, whether they are constitutional monarchies or republics, where the goal is to minimize governmental intervention and the distinctions of classes, particularly in legal matters—essentially, to establish a democratic system.

Social morality, or the basis of conduct imposed on the members of society, is a convention recognised by the laws and by public opinion. This is to say that it changes from one people to another, according to the degree of culture, surrounding circumstances, etc. In the most uncivilised tribes life has a relative security, owing to certain rules of conduct to which each member submits from fear of punishment or the disapprobation of public opinion. The right of the strongest is not applied in all its brutal logic even among savages.

Social morality, or the foundation of behavior expected from society's members, is a convention acknowledged by laws and public opinion. This means it varies from one group to another, depending on their level of culture, environmental factors, and so on. Even in the most primitive tribes, life has a certain level of security because of specific behavioral guidelines that each individual follows, driven by the fear of punishment or negative judgment from others. The principle of the strongest does not play out in its harshest form even among those seen as savages.

Their rules of morality are of course not always in accordance with ours. Among the uncivilised, it is not a question of absolute right, of absolute morality; everything is reduced to a very restricted altruism, not extending beyond kin and immediate neighbours. It is wrong to kill a man of one’s own clan, or to steal something from the collective property of the clan; but it is, on the contrary, very praiseworthy to strike down with a well-directed arrow a stranger to the clan, or to carry off something from a neighbouring clan. Gradually the moral sentiment extends to people of the same tribe, of the same class or caste, of the same religion, but such extension is slow. Among the civilised the moral code sometimes varies as it is applied on this or that side of political or social boundaries.

Their morals aren’t always in line with ours. Among the uncivilized, it’s not about absolute right or wrong; it all comes down to a limited kind of altruism that doesn’t go beyond family and close neighbors. It’s considered wrong to kill someone from your own group or to steal from the group’s shared resources; but it’s seen as very admirable to kill a stranger from outside the group or to take something from a neighboring group. Over time, the sense of morality expands to include people from the same tribe, class or caste, or religion, but this process is slow. Among the civilized, the moral code can sometimes change depending on political or social boundaries.

Besides, in a general way, a number of acts regarded as culpable by the codes of all civilised states, are yet tolerated, and even extolled, in certain particular circumstances; such as the taking of life, for example, in legitimate defence, in a duel, during war, or as capital punishment. Thus in recalling examples of this kind, we shall be less severe on a Dyak who cuts off a man’s head solely that he may carry[Pg 252] this trophy to his bride; for if he did otherwise he would be repulsed by all, and would not be able to marry. Among the uncivilised, morality is purely utilitarian; it encourages acts of utility to the clan, to the tribe (hospitality, protection of children, respect for common property, etc.), it reprobates those which are not advantageous (support of the old people, compassion for slaves, etc.).

Besides, generally speaking, many actions that are considered wrong by the laws of all civilized countries are still tolerated and even praised in certain specific situations. For example, taking a life can be accepted in legitimate self-defense, in a duel, during war, or as capital punishment. When we think of examples like this, we might be less harsh on a Dyak who decapitates a man just to bring this trophy to his bride. If he didn’t, he would be shunned by everyone and would be unable to marry. Among the uncivilized, morality is purely utilitarian; it promotes actions that benefit the clan or tribe, like hospitality, protecting children, and respecting shared property, while condemning those that aren’t advantageous, such as caring for the elderly or showing compassion for slaves.

Right and Justice.—At the origin of societies morals and the action of justice are indistinguishable, public opinion constitutes “common law,” often respected even by the legislations of the civilised. I cannot undertake to speak here of morals based on religious ideas, nor of ethnical jurisprudence.[295] Let it suffice to give some examples of customs which bring into prominence some of the ideas of right and justice of uncivilised peoples.

Right and Justice.—At the foundation of societies, morals and the pursuit of justice are the same; public opinion forms what is considered “common law,” which is often respected even by the legal systems of civilized societies. I won’t attempt to discuss morals grounded in religious beliefs or ethical law. [295] It’s enough to provide some examples of customs that highlight the concepts of right and justice among uncivilized peoples.

Taboo is one of the customs which show in the clearest way the power of public opinion in primitive societies. This custom, common in Australia, Melanesia, and especially in Polynesia, may be briefly defined as an interdiction, by the authority of the council of old men, chiefs, priests, etc., to in any way use a certain object or living thing. Thus, young Australians are forbidden to eat the flesh of the emu before reaching the age when they undergo “initiation” (see p. 241); taboo in this case has a utilitarian purpose, as also in Polynesia, where chickens, bananas, and yams are tabooed when there is a scarcity. Sometimes taboo is only to be observed by women or children, etc. Whoever infringes this law runs the risk of punishment by death.

Taboo is one of the customs that clearly demonstrates the influence of public opinion in primitive societies. This practice, found in Australia, Melanesia, and especially Polynesia, can be briefly described as a prohibition imposed by the council of elders, chiefs, priests, etc., against using a certain object or living thing in any way. For example, young Australians are not allowed to eat emu meat before they reach the age of "initiation" (see p. 241); in this case, the taboo serves a practical purpose, as it does in Polynesia, where chickens, bananas, and yams are off-limits during times of scarcity. Sometimes, the taboo only applies to women or children, etc. Anyone who breaks this rule risks severe punishment, including death.

Another example of judicial and social custom is the vendetta. At the beginnings of socialisation, in groups organised in clans, every offensive act had to be personally “avenged” by the victim. The vengeance assumes then the form of a judicial combat (prototype of European duel). In the case of murder, it is the near relatives who take upon themselves the duty of avenging it, but as the search for the[Pg 253] true culprit is sometimes difficult, the whole clan is held responsible for the act committed by one of its members, and it becomes lawful to kill any one belonging to this clan to avenge the murder. The law of retaliation also implies that the misdeed should be avenged in nearly the same form in which it was committed. Gradually, however, vengeance passes into the hands of the representatives of society (judges, magistrates), and the penal code is established.

Another example of legal and social custom is the vendetta. In the early days of social structures, within clan groups, any act of offense had to be personally "avenged" by the victim. Vengeance then took the form of a judicial combat (the prototype of the European duel). In cases of murder, it is the close relatives who take on the responsibility of seeking revenge, but since finding the true culprit can be challenging, the entire clan is held accountable for the actions of one of its members, making it acceptable to kill anyone from that clan to avenge the murder. The law of retaliation also states that the wrongdoing should be avenged in a manner similar to the original offense. However, over time, vengeance shifts to society's representatives (judges, magistrates), leading to the establishment of a penal code.

Ordeals represent one of the most widespread methods of judicial procedure of non-civilised peoples. Most frequently the carrying out of these trials is entrusted to magicians believed to have the faculty of discovering the guilty person. Needless to say that the presents offered by interested parties had a considerable influence on the decision of these umpires.[296]

Ordeals are one of the most common methods of trial used by non-civilized societies. Typically, these trials are conducted by magicians who are thought to have the ability to identify the guilty party. It's obvious that the gifts given by those involved significantly affect the decisions made by these judges.[296]

The taking of an oath is the last remnant of this mode of procedure; it is a moral test which, among many peoples, is associated with the obligation of swallowing certain special beverages (the rust of a sword in wine in Malaysia, blood among the Chinese, etc.).

The taking of an oath is the final holdover of this process; it's a moral test that, in many cultures, is linked to the duty of consuming specific drinks (like sword rust in wine in Malaysia, blood among the Chinese, etc.).

Secret Societies—Extra-legal Judges.—In every social organisation which is imperfect or powerless to give satisfaction to the just claims of its members, secret societies are formed which undertake the redressing of wrongs and the re-establishment of justice. Such, for example, are the societies of the “Duk-Duk” of New Britain, usually formed of a confidant of the chief of the tribe, and of young men who have entered the “club” on payment of a somewhat large sum. Each Duk-Duk is on occasion a justiciary; clad in his particular dress and wearing a horrible mask, he runs howling through the village, and all those who are not in the secret run away terrified. He goes to the hut of the native against whom a complaint had been[Pg 254] lodged or who is suspected of a crime, and inflicts punishment which may vary from a simple fine to death. No one dare resist him, for sooner or later a violent end would be the fate of him who had raised his hand against the Duk-Duk. The members of this secret society, who recognise each other by certain signs, meet together in places to which the profane are forbidden to approach under pain of death. They give themselves up in these places to songs, dances, and copious feasting, in which human flesh often forms the chief dish. They are also sorcerers and healers.[297]

Secret Societies—Extra-legal Judges.—In every social organization that is flawed or unable to meet the rightful demands of its members, secret societies emerge to address injustices and restore fairness. Take, for instance, the “Duk-Duk” societies of New Britain, typically made up of a trusted confidant of the tribal chief and young men who join the “club” by paying a hefty fee. Each Duk-Duk sometimes acts as a judge; dressed in distinctive attire and wearing a terrifying mask, he howls through the village, sending those unaware running in fear. He visits the home of the person against whom a complaint has been lodged or who is suspected of a crime, delivering punishments that can range from a simple fine to execution. No one dares oppose him, as doing so could lead to a violent end for anyone who challenges the Duk-Duk. The members of this secret society, who recognize each other by specific signs, gather in places off-limits to outsiders, under the threat of death. In these locations, they indulge in songs, dances, and lavish feasts, which often include human flesh as a main dish. They are also practitioners of sorcery and healing.[297]

Similar societies exist among the Yoruba Negroes of Guinea, and the traces of like institutions are found in Europe, as, for example, the famous “Oat-field procedure” (Haberfeld treiben), an ancient custom which is kept up in the region of upper Bavaria situated between the Inn and the Isar. It is a sort of trial by a secret tribunal of misdemeanours which are not reached by the ordinary penal law. The court of Munich had in 1896 to deal with one of these procedures, which have now become very rare.[298]

Similar societies can be found among the Yoruba people of Guinea, and similar institutions have also been noted in Europe, such as the well-known “Oat-field procedure” (Haberfeld treiben), an ancient tradition still practiced in the upper Bavaria region between the Inn and the Isar. It serves as a kind of trial conducted by a secret tribunal for minor offenses that the regular legal system doesn't address. In 1896, the Munich court had to handle one of these procedures, which have now become very rare.[298]

Rules of Politeness.—Departments of social life which depend on mutual sympathy or the feeling of solidarity are not numerous. We must include in this category associations formed for the chase or for agricultural work like harvest, assistance in the reconstruction of a house destroyed by fire, etc. This kind of labour in common is chiefly known in societies in which the commune is the basis of social life, among Southern Slavs and Russians. The custom of “exchanging blood,” or drinking in the same cup, widely spread among these Slavs, as among the Malays, the Indonesians, and the Negroes, is also one of the expressions of sincere mutual sympathy, while rules of politeness are the manifestations, frequently hypocritical, of feelings of sociability. They vary infinitely. Thus salutations present a great diversity, but[Pg 255] the origin of them all is the desire to show inferiority to the person saluted, and to express sympathy and devotion. The expression of inferiority is a posture which puts you lower than the person saluted. This posture varies from prostration to the ground (Negroes, Cambodians) to simple inclination of the head (Europeans), passing through a series of intermediate forms: touching the ground with the forehead (Chinese), simple genuflexion, and the “curtsey” of our mothers. As to manifestations of sympathy, they are almost always expressed by an embrace or kiss. In the case of the most humble submission, the kiss is given to the soil trodden by the feet of the person saluted, while in that of friendship between equals it is bestowed on the cheek or lips; intermediate forms are not wanting here either, and the various habits of kissing the foot, the garments, the hand, etc., are universally known. To these two principal manifestations of politeness several others may be added. A person meeting a friend or even a casual acquaintance uncovers the whole or a part of the body, the breast (certain Negroes), the arm or head (Europeans); each rubs the other with oil or with earth, nose is brought into contact with nose, and each “sniffs” the other’s health (Lapps, Eskimo, Malays, Polynesians);[299] each shakes the other’s hands, places the hand on the forehead (Hindus) or on the breast (Mussulmans), or draws out the tongue while scratching at the same time the ear (Thibetans, etc.).[300]

Rules of Politeness.—The areas of social life that rely on mutual sympathy or a sense of solidarity are few. We should include in this group associations formed for hunting or agricultural work like harvesting, helping to rebuild a house that burned down, and so on. This kind of shared labor is mainly seen in societies where the community is the foundation of social life, such as among Southern Slavs and Russians. The custom of “exchanging blood,” or drinking from the same cup, is widespread among these Slavs, as well as among the Malays, Indonesians, and Africans, and it represents genuine mutual sympathy. On the other hand, rules of politeness often reflect, at times deceitfully, feelings of sociability. These rules can vary greatly. For instance, greetings come in many forms, but[Pg 255] their origin lies in the desire to show submission to the person being greeted, as well as to convey sympathy and loyalty. The expression of submission involves a posture that places you lower than the person greeted. This can range from prostration (as seen in some African and Cambodian cultures) to a simple nod of the head (common among Europeans), passing through various intermediate gestures such as touching the ground with your forehead (Chinese), simple kneeling, and the “curtsy” our mothers used to do. Regarding displays of sympathy, they are almost always shown through an embrace or a kiss. In the case of complete submission, the kiss is placed on the ground where the feet of the person greeted have walked, while in friendships among equals, it is given on the cheek or lips; there are also intermediate customs, like kissing the foot, garment, hand, etc., which are well-known worldwide. In addition to these two main forms of politeness, there are several others. When meeting a friend or even an acquaintance, a person might uncover part or all of their body, such as the chest (among certain Africans), arm, or head (among Europeans); they might rub oil or dirt on each other, touch noses and “sniff” one another's health (like the Lapps, Eskimos, Malays, and Polynesians);[299] they shake hands, place their hand on the forehead (Hindus) or on the breast (Muslims), or even stick out their tongues while scratching their ears at the same time (Tibetans, etc.).[300]

Flint Dagger, Californian Indians

FIG. 73.—Chipped flint dagger
of the Californian Indians, with
otter-skin wrapping for grip.
(From O. Mason.)

FIG. 73.—Chipped flint dagger
of the Californian Indians, with
otter-skin wrapping for grip.
(From O. Mason.)

International Life of Peoples.—The relations of ethnical groups one with another may be of three sorts—hostile, neutral, or sympathetic. The relations of the last category are only just indicated among civilised peoples in the form[Pg 256] of international festivals, exhibitions, and congresses; international scientific, charitable, and professional gatherings, etc. Inter-gatherings are non-existent, or reduced to a few feasts and rejoicings among the uncivilised and half-civilised; on the other hand, hostile relations (or war) exist among all peoples, from the most savage to the most refined. Neutral relations (commerce) are but little developed among the uncivilised, and only begin really to assume any importance among the half-civilised; they attain a high degree of development among the civilised.

International Life of Peoples.—The relationships between ethnic groups can be categorized into three types—hostile, neutral, or sympathetic. The relationships in the sympathetic category are only just hinted at among civilized societies, seen through international festivals, exhibitions, congresses, and various scientific, charitable, and professional gatherings. Among the uncivilized and semi-civilized, such gatherings are either nonexistent or limited to a few celebrations. In contrast, hostile relations (or war) are present among all peoples, from the most primitive to the most advanced. Neutral relations (commerce) are underdeveloped among the uncivilized and only start to gain significance among the semi-civilized, reaching a high level of development among the civilized.

War is made on various pretexts among the uncivilised, who have no special armies, each member having to fight in conjunction with the other members of his clan, tribe, or people, as the case may be, either to procure for himself provisions, slaves, wives, or cattle, or to avenge defeat, murder, or robbery on the individuals of a “foreign,” and consequently hostile (Hostis of the Romans) clan, tribe, or people. The conflicts are not very deadly at this stage of civilisation; frequently the hostilities are reduced to mutual insults, to manœuvres in which efforts are made to frighten the enemy by cries, by warlike dances, by disguises and masks of horrible aspect. Sometimes also the fate of the battle is decided by single combat between two chiefs or two braves selected from each of the adverse camps. Ambushes, traps, and surprises are more common than pitched battles.

War is fought for various reasons among uncivilized groups, who don’t have specialized armies; each member must fight alongside others from their clan, tribe, or community, whether to secure food, slaves, wives, or cattle, or to seek revenge for a defeat, murder, or theft committed by members of a "foreign" and therefore hostile (Hostis of the Romans) clan, tribe, or community. At this stage of civilization, the conflicts aren't usually very lethal; often, the hostilities reduce to insults, or tactics intended to scare the enemy through shouting, war dances, or terrifying disguises and masks. Sometimes, the outcome of a battle is decided by a one-on-one fight between two leaders or brave warriors chosen from each side. Ambushes, traps, and surprise attacks are more common than open battles.

On the whole, war in primitive societies is only a species of man-hunt. Thus the offensive weapons are nearly always[Pg 257] the same for hunting and war. It is only among the half-civilised that, with more or less permanent armies, weapons specially designed for war make their appearance, as well as works of a defensive character—fortresses, palisades, protective moats, and caltrops.

Overall, warfare in primitive societies is basically a type of man-hunt. So, the offensive weapons are almost always[Pg 257] the same for hunting and fighting. It's only among the semi-civilized that, with more or less permanent armies, we see weapons specifically designed for war, along with defensive structures like fortresses, palisades, protective moats, and caltrops.

I can give here but a very brief description of offensive and defensive weapons.[301]

I can provide just a very short overview of offensive and defensive weapons.[301]

Offensive weapons may be divided into two categories—weapons held firmly in the hand and missile weapons; each of these categories comprises striking, cutting, and piercing weapons.

Offensive weapons can be divided into two types—handheld weapons and projectile weapons; each of these types includes striking, cutting, and piercing weapons.

Among the weapons held firmly in the hand, the striking or blunt ones play an important part among the uncivilised, for these are derived directly from the staff, pre-eminently the weapon of primitive peoples. The most common is the club, only just distinguished from a staff by its terminal swelling in[Pg 258] Australia; it takes the most varied forms in Oceania, where almost every island or group of islands has its particular forms of club. The sharp-ended clubs of the New Hebrides are the connecting-link with pointed weapons, of which the spear, the lance, the assagai, the fork, are the best known forms. The point of these weapons is sometimes of flint (as among Melanesians of the Admiralty Islands), sometimes of bone, wood, shark’s teeth (natives of the Gilbert or Kingsmill Islands), sometimes of bronze (prehistoric Europe, China), of iron (Negroes), steel (Europeans). Cutting weapons, with the exception of the axe, the form of which varies infinitely (Figs. 66, 74, 114, 158), are generally piercing weapons[Pg 259] as well. The simplest is the knife, whether it be of flint (Fig. 56), bronze, or iron (Fig. 146); from it is derived the sabre; and the flint poignard or dagger, which gradually became transformed into the steel sword.[302]

Among the weapons held firmly in the hand, the striking or blunt ones play a significant role among the uncivilized, as these are directly derived from the staff, which is primarily the weapon of primitive peoples. The most common is the club, barely different from a staff due to its thicker end in[Pg 258] Australia; it appears in many variations in Oceania, where almost every island or group of islands has its unique types of club. The sharp-ended clubs of the New Hebrides connect to pointed weapons, with the spear, lance, assagai, and fork being the most recognized forms. The tips of these weapons are sometimes made of flint (as seen among Melanesians of the Admiralty Islands), sometimes of bone, wood, or shark’s teeth (natives of the Gilbert or Kingsmill Islands), and sometimes of bronze (prehistoric Europe, China), iron (Negroes), or steel (Europeans). Cutting weapons, aside from the axe, which comes in countless variations (Figs. 66, 74, 114, 158), are generally piercing weapons[Pg 259] as well. The simplest is the knife, whether it is made of flint (Fig. 56), bronze, or iron (Fig. 146); from it, the sabre is derived, along with the flint poignard or dagger, which gradually evolved into the steel sword.[302]

Missile Weapons.—The readiest missile weapon to throw at the quarry or the enemy is the weapon carried in the hand; this is what must have happened many times to primitive man in the excitement of the combat or chase.

Missile Weapons.—The easiest missile weapon to use against the target or the enemy is the one you hold in your hand; this is likely what happened many times to early humans in the heat of battle or hunting.

But to throw a staff, a stone, or any weapon whatever so adroitly as to wound an animal or a man was a difficult thing to do. It became necessary to increase the force of the propulsion, which could be done only in two ways: either by giving a special form to the projectile, or by discharging it by means of a special apparatus constructed for the purpose.

But throwing a stick, a stone, or any kind of weapon skillfully enough to hit an animal or a person was pretty tough. It became essential to boost the power of the throw, which could only be achieved in two ways: either by shaping the projectile in a certain way or by using a special device designed for that purpose.

Axe of the Banyai

FIG. 74.—Axe of the Banyai (Matabeleland), employed in
hunting elephants; special hafting, partly by means of bands.
(After Wood.)

FIG. 74.—Axe of the Banyai (Matabeleland), used for
hunting elephants; unique handle design, partly with bands.
(After Wood.)

The first of these methods did not produce very brilliant results. The Zandeh peoples and their congeners of Central Africa considerably modified the knife to make use of it as a weapon to throw with the hand (trumbache); the Franks had the missile battle-axe called “francisque,” and the Romans javelins of all sorts. But the use of these weapons was very restricted in all times. Clubs are still used as missile-weapons either by reducing their size (the kerri-kerri of the Bantu Negroes) or by changing their form (the boomerang of the Australians). The boomerang (Fig. 75) is a wooden blade, the form of which varies from a very gentle curve to that of a square; its surface is always slightly curved. Thrown into the air, certain kinds of boomerang have a secondary movement of gyration and return to the foot of the thrower, as a hoop returns to the child when he throws it before him, having given it first a rotatory motion. Similar weapons (singa) exist among the Khonds of Orissa (India); they existed also in ancient Egypt, and have served perhaps as models for the “trumbaches” of the Zandeh of the present day. Let us add to the boomerang the “bolas” of the Patagonians[Pg 260] (which must not be confounded with the lasso) and the balls of bone united by little cords which the Eskimo use for killing birds, and we shall have exhausted the list of weapons thrown directly by the hand, which, moreover, are not very effective. The true improvements in missile-weapons have only been attained by the second solution of the problem—that is to say, by increasing the power of propulsion by means of special apparatus.

The first of these methods didn’t yield very impressive results. The Zandeh people and their counterparts in Central Africa significantly altered the knife to use it as a throwing weapon (trumbache); the Franks had a missile battle-axe called a “francisque,” and the Romans had various types of javelins. However, the use of these weapons has always been quite limited. Clubs are still used as thrown weapons, either by shortening their length (like the kerri-kerri of the Bantu people) or by changing their shape (like the boomerang from Australia). The boomerang (Fig. 75) is a wooden blade that curves from a slight arc to a square shape; its surface is consistently slightly curved. When thrown, certain types of boomerangs have a spinning motion and return to the thrower, similar to how a hoop comes back to a child after being thrown with a spinning action. Similar weapons (singa) are found among the Khonds of Orissa (India); they were also present in ancient Egypt and may have inspired the modern “trumbaches” of the Zandeh. Let’s also include the “bolas” from the Patagonians[Pg 260] (which should not be confused with the lasso) and the bone balls connected by cords that the Eskimo use for hunting birds. This covers the list of hand-thrown weapons, which aren’t very effective. Significant advancements in missile weapons have only come from the second approach to the problem—specifically, by enhancing propulsion power through specialized devices.

Missile Arms of the Australians

FIG. 75.—Missile arms of the Australians: a, b, boomerangs;
c, transverse section of a boomerang; f, Lil-lil, a kind of boomerang,
with geographical map representing the environs of Broken River;
d, the same seen sideways.
(After Br. Smyth.)

FIG. 75.—Missile weapons of the Australians: a, b, boomerangs;
c, cross-section of a boomerang; f, Lil-lil, a type of boomerang,
with a map showing the area around Broken River;
d, the same viewed from the side.
(After Br. Smyth.)

The contrivances for hurling missiles may be divided into three categories, according to the three forces which set them[Pg 261] in motion: direct application of the muscular force of man, elasticity of certain solid bodies, and lastly, the pressure of gases. Of the first of these forces but little use is made. The amentum of classic antiquity had only a restricted use. The throwing-stick,[303] or stick provided with a notch which serves to increase the force of the impulse given by the arm to a javelin, is only used in some very circumscribed regions of the globe, especially on the borders of the Pacific Ocean, in Australia, where it bears the name of Woomera, in Melanesia (Fig. 76), in the north-west of America, among the Eskimo and Chukchis. It was also known in pre-Columban times in Mexico and Peru, whence, perhaps, it passed into Brazil. Another similar weapon, the sling, in former times much used by Semitic peoples, and still surviving as a common toy of our children, is scarcely used as a weapon of any importance, except by some Polynesian or American tribes (Hupa Indians, Araucans, Fuegians).

The tools for launching projectiles can be categorized into three types based on the three forces that set them[Pg 261] in motion: the direct application of human muscular force, the elasticity of certain solid materials, and the pressure of gases. There's not much use made of the first category. The amentum from ancient times had a very limited application. The throwing stick,[303] or stick with a notch that helps increase the force of the throw from the arm to a javelin, is only found in a few remote areas of the world, particularly along the Pacific Ocean, in Australia, where it’s called Woomera, in Melanesia (Fig. 76), and in the northwestern part of America, among the Eskimo and Chukchis. It was also known in pre-Columbian times in Mexico and Peru, from where it may have spread to Brazil. Another similar weapon, the sling, once widely used by Semitic peoples and still a common toy among children today, is hardly used as a significant weapon, except by certain Polynesian or American tribes (like the Hupa Indians, Araucans, and Fuegians).

Missile weapons which make use of the pressure of gases are very little known among uncivilised peoples. We can only mention the blow-tube, the Sarbacan, or more correctly speaking the Zarabatana, of the South American Indians, and its homologue the Sumpitan of the Malays, in common use among the Indonesians of the Asiatic Archipelago and Indo-China.

Missile weapons that use gas pressure are not very well known among uncivilized people. We can only mention the blowpipe, the Sarbacan, or more accurately, the Zarabatana, of the South American Indians, and its counterpart, the Sumpitan, used commonly among the Malays and Indonesians in the Asian Archipelago and Indo-China.

Throwing-stick of the Papuans

FIG. 76.—Throwing-stick of the Papuans of German New Guinea,
and the manner of using it in order to hurl a javelin;
below, longitudinal section of a throwing-stick.
(Partly after Von Luschan.)

FIG. 76.—Throwing stick of the Papuans from German New Guinea,
and how it's used to throw a javelin;
below, a side view of a throwing stick.
(Partly after Von Luschan.)

This weapon is known in Europe from[Pg 262] the circumstance of a child’s toy bearing the first of these names. It is a long tube from which a little arrow is expelled by the breath, resembling in size and appearance a knitting-needle, and provided at its unpointed end with a ball of elderpith or tow, which serves as wadding. The range of this arm is from 75 to 100 feet. The sumpitan may be considered as a weapon indirectly set in motion by muscular force, for the arrow is expelled from it as the result of contractions of the thoracic muscles, but it is better to regard it as the prototype of the fire-arm, as the arrow may be discharged by utilising the expansion of gas, and thus transformed into a fire-arm. As to true fire-arms, known to the Chinese and peoples of antiquity, they have only made real headway in Europe, and that from the fifteenth century.

This weapon has been known in Europe since[Pg 262] because a child's toy carries the first of its names. It’s a long tube that shoots a small arrow using breath, similar in size and look to a knitting needle, and has a ball of elder pith or tow at the blunt end, which acts as wadding. It can shoot an arrow from 75 to 100 feet. The sumpitan can be seen as a weapon powered indirectly by muscle force since the arrow is pushed out by the contraction of the chest muscles, but it’s better to think of it as the forerunner to firearms because the arrow can also be discharged using gas expansion, thus becoming a firearm. As for true firearms, known to the Chinese and ancient peoples, they only started gaining real traction in Europe from the fifteenth century.

But if the missile weapons in the two categories which I have just enumerated are little known to uncivilised peoples (setting aside, of course, the fire-arms imported by civilised man), those of the third category, in which advantage is taken of the muscular force of an elastic body (the bow), is universally employed by them, as it was formerly in Europe. The most perfected arm of this kind was the complicated cross-bow of our ancestors and the Chinese.

But if the missile weapons in the two categories I just mentioned are not well-known to uncivilized peoples (excluding, of course, the firearms brought in by civilized people), those in the third category, which uses the muscle power of an elastic object (the bow), are used universally by them, just as they were in Europe in the past. The most advanced weapon of this type was the intricate crossbow used by our ancestors and the Chinese.

The Bow and Arrow.[304]—The origin of the bow is unknown; certain authors consider that a flexible twig arranged as a snare would give the first idea of it. This may be so, for among the Maoris of New Zealand there used to be a hand-weapon which bore a striking resemblance to this snare: a whip with a flexible handle, by means of which an arrow held in the hand was shot off.[305] Among several Eurasian peoples there is a toy which reproduces this weapon as a survival; among the Votiaks it even bears the name of n’el, which means arrow in[Pg 263] several Finnish languages.[306] However that may be, we may divide the infinite variety of bows into two groups: the plain bow—that is to say, the bow formed of a single piece of wood, and the composite bow, made of various materials—wood, horn, ivory, sinews, leather, etc., glued solidly together.

The Bow and Arrow.[304]—The exact origin of the bow is unclear; some authors suggest that a flexible branch used as a trap could have inspired its design. This seems plausible, as the Maoris of New Zealand once had a weapon that closely resembled this trap: a whip with a flexible handle, which could launch an arrow held in the hand.[305] Among various Eurasian cultures, there's a toy that mimics this weapon as a relic; in Votiak culture, it’s even named n’el, which means arrow in[Pg 263] several Finnish languages.[306] Regardless of its origins, we can categorize the countless types of bows into two main groups: the plain bow, which is crafted from a single piece of wood, and the composite bow, made from various materials—wood, horn, ivory, sinews, leather, etc.—that are glued together securely.

The least complicated type of the composite bow is that of the eastern Eskimo, of wood and horn, or of wood and bone, the weapon being strengthened by a cord of sinews applied along the “back” or the outer side (opposed to the “belly,” inner side, which is nearest the archer when he bends the bow).[307]

The simplest type of composite bow is the one used by the eastern Eskimo, made of wood and horn or wood and bone. This weapon is reinforced by a sinew cord placed along the "back" or the outer side (in contrast to the "belly," inner side, which is closest to the archer when they draw the bow).[307]

Among simple bows we must mention that of the Melanesians, having a groove sometimes on the outer, sometimes on the inner side; that of the Monbuttus, provided with a “grip”; lastly, that of the Andamanese, in the form of an S, resembling in its general appearance on the one hand certain bows of the Eskimo, and on the other, those of certain Bantu Negroes of Eastern Africa (according to Foa).[308]

Among simple bows, we should note the one used by the Melanesians, which has a groove that can be either on the outer side or the inner side. There's also the bow used by the Monbuttus, which has a “grip,” and finally, the Andamanese bow, which is shaped like an S. This bow resembles certain Eskimo bows on one hand and some bows from the Bantu people of Eastern Africa on the other (according to Foa).[308]

Methods of Arrow Release

FIG. 77.—Different methods of arrow release.
Top, primitive release.
Middle, Mongolian release.
Bottom, Mediterranean release.
(After E. Morse.)

FInsta. 77.—Different ways to release an arrow.
Top, basic release.
Middle, Mongolian release.
Bottom, Mediterranean release.
(After E. Morse.)

Arrows cut wholly from one piece of wood are rare. Most of them are composed of three distinct parts fitted together: head, shaft, and feather. The head is of hard wood (sometimes hardened in the fire) or of human bone among the Melanesians; of chipped stone among certain American Indians and our quaternary ancestors; of bone, wood, and iron among various Siberian peoples; of iron among most of the other peoples. The form of the head varies infinitely; but the varieties turn around two types: sagittal (as a classic or conventional arrow) and lanceolate (as a laurel leaf). There are likewise arrow-heads with transverse or hollowed edges in the form of the fruit of the maple (Turks and Tunguses of Siberia, Negroes of the Congo). Lastly, there are arrows of which the head has nothing pointed about it, for it is shaped like a ball, an olive or cone upside down, etc. These arrows are used by several Siberian peoples (Ostiaks, Tunguses), by Negroes of the Congo, Indians of Western Brazil, etc., as a blunt weapon for killing animals whose fur, being valuable, might be spoilt by the blood flowing from a wound. The Buriats of old used whistling arrows, probably to frighten their enemies, etc. The feather is wanting in several forms of Melanesian arrows very complicated as regards the head, in certain African arrows, etc. Among the Monbuttus it consists of the hair of animals; everywhere else, however, of birds’ feathers.

Arrows made from a single piece of wood are rare. Most consist of three separate parts: the head, shaft, and feathers. The head can be made from hardwood (sometimes hardened in fire) or human bone among the Melanesians; chipped stone among some Native Americans and our prehistoric ancestors; bone, wood, and iron among various Siberian groups; and iron among most other cultures. The shape of the head varies widely, but mainly falls into two categories: sagittal (like a typical arrow) and lanceolate (like a laurel leaf). There are also arrowheads with flat or hollow edges that resemble the fruit of the maple tree (used by the Turks and Tunguses of Siberia and the Black people of the Congo). Finally, some arrows have heads that aren't pointed at all, shaped like a ball, an olive, or an upside-down cone, etc. These arrows are used by various Siberian peoples (like the Ostiaks and Tunguses), the Congolese, and Indigenous people of Western Brazil, serving as blunt weapons to kill animals whose valuable fur could be ruined by flowing blood from a wound. Historically, the Buriats used whistling arrows, likely to scare off their enemies. Some complex Melanesian arrow types lack feathers, as do certain African arrows. Among the Monbuttus, arrow shafts are made with animal hair, while in other places, they're typically made with bird feathers.

The mode of shooting the arrow and bending the bow vary too with different countries. The Veddahs draw the cord lying on the back, holding the bow between the feet; the Andamanese and the Eskimo hold the bow vertically, the Omahas and the Siouans, horizontally, etc. To bend the immense Mongolian or Scythian bow it was necessary to hold it by the knees, etc. Morse[309] distinguishes five special methods of releasing the arrow. The most primitive (primary release) is that which is naturally adopted by children of every race when they attempt for the first time to draw the bow (Fig. 77, top): the arrow and the cord are held between the stretched[Pg 265]-out thumb and the second joint of the bent forefinger (Ainus, Chippewas, Assyrians, etc.). The second method is only a variant of the first, and is widespread like the first, especially among the North American Indians. Both give but a moderate propelling power to the arrow. The third method consists in holding the arrow between the thumb and the second joint of the scarcely bent forefinger, whilst the first joint of this finger draws the string, with the help of the third finger. In this method of release it is necessary to hold the bow horizontally (Omahas, Siamese, the natives of the greater Andaman Island, the Egyptians and the Greeks of antiquity). The fourth, so-called Mediterranean, method (Fig. 77, bottom) consists in drawing the string by the first joints of all the fingers except the thumb and the little finger, the arrow being nipped between the fore and middle fingers and placed on the left of the bow; this is the method practised by European archers of all ages, as well as that of the Hindus, Arabs, Eskimo, and[Pg 266] Veddahs. Lastly, the fifth method, known as the Mongolian method (Fig. 77, middle), is quite different from the others. The string in this case is drawn by the bent thumb, kept in this position by the forefinger; the arrow, taken in the hollow at the base of these two fingers, is placed on the right of the bow. This method has been practised from the most remote antiquity by Asiatic peoples: Mongols, Manchus, Chinese, Japanese, Turks, Persians, and was likewise practised by the ancient Scythians; in order that the hand may be protected from the recoil of the string, it is necessary to wear a special kind of ring, either of bone, horn, ivory, or metal, on the thumb, or a peculiar three-fingered glove.

The way people shoot arrows and bend bows varies across different countries. The Veddahs pull the string while lying on their back, holding the bow between their feet; the Andamanese and Eskimo hold the bow upright, while the Omahas and the Siouans hold it horizontally, and so on. To bend the large Mongolian or Scythian bow, one must hold it by the knees, among other methods. Morse[309] identifies five distinct ways to release the arrow. The most basic (primary release) is the one that children of every culture naturally use when they try to draw a bow for the first time (Fig. 77, top): the arrow and string are held between the extended thumb and the second joint of the bent index finger (Ainus, Chippewas, Assyrians, etc.). The second method is a variation of the first, and it is widely used, especially among North American Indigenous peoples. Both provide only moderate power to the arrow. The third method involves holding the arrow between the thumb and the second joint of the slightly bent index finger, while the first joint of this finger pulls the string, assisted by the third finger. This method requires the bow to be held horizontally (Omahas, Siamese, the natives of the greater Andaman Island, the Egyptians, and the ancient Greeks). The fourth method, known as the Mediterranean method (Fig. 77, bottom), involves pulling the string with the first joints of all fingers except the thumb and little finger, with the arrow pinched between the fore and middle fingers and positioned to the left of the bow. This is the technique used by European archers throughout history, as well as by Hindus, Arabs, Eskimos, and the Veddahs.[Pg 266] Finally, the fifth method, called the Mongolian method (Fig. 77, middle), is quite different from the others. Here, the string is drawn back by the bent thumb, held in this position by the index finger; the arrow is rested in the hollow at the base of these two fingers and placed to the right of the bow. This technique has been used by Asian cultures for a very long time: Mongols, Manchus, Chinese, Japanese, Turks, Persians, and was also practiced by the ancient Scythians. To protect the hand from the string’s recoil, users need to wear a special type of ring, made from bone, horn, ivory, or metal, on the thumb, or a unique three-fingered glove.

Defensive Weapons.—Originally, in their simplest forms, they would not differ appreciably from offensive weapons such as tree-branches, or clubs, perhaps a little broader and flatter than those used for attack. The inhabitants of Drummond Island (Gilbert or Kingsmill archipelago, Micronesia), as well as the natives of the Samoan Islands, can ward off hostile arrows in a marvellous way with only cudgels and clubs; several other peoples (Hawaiians, Tahitians) are acquainted neither with buckler nor cuirasse, and defend themselves with clubs, their native weapons. The Dinkas of the upper White Nile, the Mundas, their neighbours on the south, as well as the Baghirmis of the Central Sudan, can turn aside the arrows of their enemies by means of sticks, either straight or bent like a bow, and somewhat thicker in the middle.

Defensive Weapons.—Originally, in their simplest forms, they wouldn’t be significantly different from offensive weapons like tree branches or clubs, maybe just a bit broader and flatter than those used for attacking. The people of Drummond Island (Gilbert or Kingsmill archipelago, Micronesia), as well as the natives of the Samoan Islands, can remarkably deflect hostile arrows with just cudgels and clubs; several other groups (Hawaiians, Tahitians) have no knowledge of shields or armor and defend themselves with clubs, their traditional weapons. The Dinkas of the upper White Nile, the Mundas, their neighbors to the south, and the Baghirmis of Central Sudan can deflect their enemies' arrows using sticks that are either straight or curved like a bow, and somewhat thicker in the middle.

The different forms of shield are only derivatives from the primitive weapon, the club. The evolution must have been effected in various ways, according to local conditions. We may, however, distinguish two principal lines, two types, of evolution to which all the others can be referred. The first is only the development in breadth and the flattening out of the club; this is the origin of most of the long shields. The second is characterised by the presence of a piece of wood, skin, etc., applied to the club around the place where it is held by the hand; this hand-guard was the origin of the round shields and some of the long ones.

The various types of shields are just variations of the original weapon, the club. This evolution likely occurred in different ways depending on local conditions. However, we can identify two main lines of evolution to which all others can be traced. The first represents an expansion and flattening of the club, which led to the creation of most long shields. The second is marked by the addition of a piece of wood, skin, or similar material around the grip of the club; this hand-guard gave rise to both round shields and some long shields.

Australian Shield

FIG. 78.—Australian shield in wood; three sides shown.

FInstagram. 78.—Australian wooden shield; three sides displayed.

The most striking example of the first type is furnished by the shields of the Australians. Certain of them (the Tamarangs) are only clubs a little flattened out and enlarged in the middle; others (the Mulabakas) are very narrow little boards rounded towards both ends with a hilt formed by the slit made in the hinder side, which is a little bulging or ridge-like (Fig. 78); others take the form of boards somewhat broad, oval, and sometimes ridge-like. Shields of a similar kind, with the ridge a little enlarged at both ends, are used by the Alfurus of the Southern Moluccas (Fig. 79, b). The characteristic shield of the Dyaks and other Indonesians (including those of lower Burma, see Frontispiece) is also derived from a type analogous to the Mulabaka. It is a ridge-like wooden board, sometimes adorned with human hair (Fig. 79, f).

The most striking example of the first type is provided by the shields of the Australians. Some of them (the Tamarangs) are essentially clubs that are slightly flattened and wider in the middle; others (the Mulabakas) are narrow boards rounded at both ends, featuring a hilt created by a slit on the back that is slightly bulging or ridge-like (Fig. 78); others are more broad, oval boards, and sometimes also ridge-like. Shields of a similar design, with the ridge slightly wider at both ends, are used by the Alfurus of the Southern Moluccas (Fig. 79, b). The typical shield of the Dyaks and other Indonesians (including those from lower Burma, see Frontispiece) is also based on a type similar to the Mulabaka. It consists of a ridge-like wooden board, sometimes decorated with human hair (Fig. 79, f).

Indonesian Shields

FIG. 79.—Indonesian shields—b,
of the Alfurus of the Moluccas (wood and inlayings);
f, of the Dyaks (painted wood,
tufts of human hair).

FInstagram. 79.—Indonesian shields—b,
from the Alfurus of the Moluccas (wood with inlays);
f, from the Dyaks (painted wood,
adorned with tufts of human hair).

Shield of Zulu-Kafirs

FIG. 80.—Shield of Zulu-Kafirs,
in ox skin, with medial club.

FIG. 80.—Shield of Zulu-Kafirs,
made from ox skin, with a central club.

The second mode of development of the shield is marked by the placing on the club some sort of wooden, metal,[Pg 268] or skin guard. The clubs or primitive shields of the Monudus are surrounded in the middle by a band of buffalo skin, under which the hand is passed to hold them. Let us suppose that some day this annular band, becoming half-detached, formed in front of the hand a bulwark, the somewhat large surface of which protected it more effectually than the primitive ring, and we understand the origin of shields formed of bits of animal skin fixed on a club, at first very small, like those of the Hottentots, then becoming enormous, like those of the Zulus (Fig. 80). Similar, but[Pg 269] quadrangular bucklers are found among the Shulis of the upper White Nile, the Fans of the Ogowé, etc. Among other equestrian and nomadic peoples the frequent changes of place that were rendered necessary decided the rounded, lighter form of the leather shield, the club of which has disappeared, the hand-grip being made of a thong. Such are the shields of the Bejas, the Abyssinians, the Somalis, and also those of the North American Indians.

The second way the shield developed involved adding some kind of wooden, metal, or skin guard to the club. The clubs and primitive shields of the Monudus have a band of buffalo skin in the middle, which allows the hand to pass through to hold them. Imagine that someday this circular band became partially detached, creating a barrier in front of the hand, which protected it more effectively than the original ring did. This helps us understand how shields made of patches of animal skin attached to a club came to be, starting off small, like those used by the Hottentots, and eventually becoming large, like those of the Zulus (Fig. 80). Similar quadrangular bucklers can be seen among the Shulis of the upper White Nile, the Fans of the Ogowé, and others. Among various equestrian and nomadic groups, the need to frequently change locations led to the development of a rounded, lighter leather shield, which no longer had a club but instead featured a handgrip made of a thong. This is how the shields of the Bejas, Abyssinians, Somalis, and the North American Indians came about.

In countries where cattle are scarce, shields similar to those of the Zulus are made with rattan twigs or reeds, or palm-leaves artistically plaited; such are the large shields of the Niam-Niams, of certain Dyak and Naga tribes (Frontispiece), etc. These shields are not very strong, but there is this to be said for them, that the arrows striking them instead of rebounding, pierce them, and remain fixed, to the benefit of the owner of the defensive weapon.

In places where cattle are hard to come by, shields like those of the Zulus are crafted from rattan twigs, reeds, or intricately woven palm leaves; these are the large shields used by the Niam-Niams and some Dyak and Naga tribes (Frontispiece), among others. While these shields aren’t very durable, it’s worth noting that arrows that hit them don’t bounce off but instead get stuck through them, which is advantageous for the person using the shield.

The space which we have given to the description of shields hardly permits us to dwell longer on protective armour, breast-plates, coats of mail, helmets, vantbraces, greaves,[310] etc. It may, however, be said that there exist peculiar kinds of armour among certain peoples and in certain regions of the world: the dress of the natives of the Kingsmill Islands, woven from cocoa-nut fibres, which affords an admirable protection against their wood-handled weapons with sharks’ teeth fixed in their edges; breast-plates of buffalo skin, in use among the Indians of America; the padded breast-plates of the Baghirmi warriors and Chinese soldiers, ancient Japanese and ancient Mexicans. Among the latter, armour consisting of little boards of lacquered wood was further affixed to the breast-plate, similar kinds being found all around the shores of the North Pacific, among the Eskimo, the Chukchi, the Koriaks (little ivory or bone plates), and among the Tlinkit Indians of the north-west of America (wooden plates sewn on stuffs), etc.[311]

The space we've dedicated to describing shields doesn't allow us to elaborate further on protective armor, including breastplates, chainmail, helmets, arm guards, greaves, [310] etc. However, it's worth mentioning that there are unique types of armor among various cultures and regions around the world: the attire of the natives from the Kingsmill Islands, made from coconut fibers, which provides excellent protection against their wooden weapons with shark teeth attached to the edges; buffalo skin breastplates used by some Native American tribes; padded breastplates worn by Baghirmi warriors and Chinese soldiers, as well as ancient Japanese and Mexicans. Among the Mexicans, armor made of small lacquered wooden boards was added to the breastplate, and similar types can be found along the North Pacific shores among the Eskimos, Chukchi, Koriaks (small ivory or bone plates), and the Tlinkit Indians of the northwest of America (wooden plates sewn onto fabric), etc.[311]

But it would require a volume to describe all the inventions which have resulted from the hostile relations of peoples. Let us pass on to a more peaceful subject, to neutral relations, which are more profitable to men.

But it would take a whole book to discuss all the inventions that have come from the conflicts between nations. Let's move on to a more peaceful topic, to neutral relations, which are more beneficial to people.

Commerce is almost unknown among uncivilised hunters. It could only develop in societies already numerous, inhabiting various territories, their products differing to such an extent that they might be exchanged with advantage. The progress of industry, with the division of labour and the specialisation which it involves, also had something to do with it. Thus, in Guiana, each tribe has its special industry and visits even a hostile tribe to effect exchanges.[312] This is the primitive form of commerce, originating probably in the custom of exchanging presents.

Commerce is nearly nonexistent among uncivilized hunters. It can only develop in societies that are already large, living in different areas, with products that vary enough to be traded for mutual benefit. The growth of industry, along with the division of labor and the specialization it requires, also contributed to this. For example, in Guiana, each tribe has its own specialized industry and even visits unfriendly tribes to make exchanges.[312] This represents the primitive form of commerce, likely stemming from the practice of exchanging gifts.

Primitive commerce is not infrequently conducted in such a way that the treating parties do not see each other. According to Humboldt, at the beginning of this century the modern Mexicans traded with savage tribes, wandering on their northern frontier, in this way. The barterers did not see each other; the goods were fastened to posts devoted to this use and then left. The purchaser came for them, replacing them by objects having an equal value. It is thus that the Sakai still traffic with the Malays, the Veddahs with the Singhalese. The Veddahs even order things in this silent way; they deposit, for example, side by side with the goods which they offer, cut leaves representing the form of the spear-head which they desire to acquire from the Singhalese blacksmiths.

Primitive trade often happens in a way that the parties involved don’t meet each other. According to Humboldt, at the start of this century, modern Mexicans engaged in trade with tribal groups living on their northern border in this manner. The traders wouldn’t see each other; instead, items were secured to posts meant for this purpose and left there. The buyer would come to collect them, leaving items of equal value in return. This is how the Sakai still trade with the Malays, and the Veddahs with the Singhalese. The Veddahs even make requests in this quiet way; they place, for instance, cut leaves that resemble the shape of the spear-head they wish to acquire next to the goods they are offering to the Singhalese blacksmiths.

Commerce, indispensable to societies at all complex, developed everywhere as soon as man emerged from savagery, and it has been a powerful agent in the diffusion of ideas, and often even an agent of civilisation. It has profoundly modified societies in which it has developed, opening out before them new horizons and making them learn foreign tongues and the manners of other societies.

Commerce, essential to societies of all kinds, emerged everywhere as soon as humans moved beyond primitive living, and it has been a strong force in spreading ideas and often even a catalyst for civilization. It has significantly transformed the societies in which it has flourished, presenting them with new opportunities and encouraging them to learn new languages and the customs of other cultures.

It was a step towards broader solidarity, but at the same[Pg 271] time it opened the door to the spirit of lucre, to monopoly of wealth, to mercantile egoism, to greed of gain. This explains why in most primitive societies merchants were but little esteemed.[313]

It was a move towards greater unity, but at the same[Pg 271] time it allowed for the rise of profit-seeking, the concentration of wealth, commercial selfishness, and a desire for gain. This is why, in most early societies, merchants were not highly valued.[313]

Money.—In the primitive forms of commerce exchanges were made directly; object was bartered for object, as we see it still done to-day sporadically in many countries. But soon the need for values was felt—standards which would render exchanges more rapid, easy, and equitable. For this purpose objects coveted by the greatest number of persons were chosen. These objects were either ornaments (on which primitive commerce especially depends) or things which everybody wanted. It is thus that jewels, objects of adornment (feathers, pearls, shells, etc.), stuffs, furs (Siberian peoples, Alaska), salt (Laos), cattle (Africa, “Pecunia” of the Romans), slaves (Africa, New Guinea), became the first current money of primitive commerce. Later, certain objects were chosen which by their rarity are of great value. It is thus that the Pelew islanders treasure up as current money (Andou) a certain number of obsidian or porcelain beads (Fig. 81, 1 and 8) and terra-cotta prisms, imported no one knows when and how into the country, which have a very great value; a certain tribe possesses one single clay prism (called Baran) and regards it as a public treasure, etc. In the island of Yap, in the neighbourhood of the Pelews, the place of money is taken by blocks of aragonite, a rock which, being unknown on the island, has to be sought for in the Pelews. The greater the block the greater its value. Fifty pound bank-notes are replaced here by enormous mill-stones, so heavy that two men can hardly carry them; they serve rather to flatter the vanity of the rich people of the country, who exhibit them before their huts, than to facilitate exchanges.[314] It is clear from this example that the rarity of a substance is not sufficient to make it into good money. The second condition is that it may be easily handled, and though small in bulk, may represent a high value, either real or fiduciary.[Pg 272] Such are the teeth of the Wapiti deer (Cervus canadensis), which the Shoshone Indians and the Bannocks of Idaho and Montana[315] still make use of in their transactions. Such, again, is the skin-money of the ancient Carthaginians and Scandinavians,[316] the cocoa-seed money of the ancient Mexicans, the[Pg 273] use of which is kept up to the present day; the animal skull-money of the Mishmee, etc.[317]

Money.—In the early days of trade, people exchanged goods directly; one item was swapped for another, similar to some practices still seen today in various countries. However, it quickly became clear that there was a need for standards of value—something that would make trade faster, easier, and fairer. To serve this purpose, items that were greatly desired by the majority were selected. These items were often decorative (which primitive trade especially relied on) or universally wanted goods. This is how jewels, adornments (like feathers, pearls, shells, etc.), textiles, furs (from Siberian tribes, Alaska), salt (in Laos), cattle (in Africa, known as “Pecunia” by the Romans), and slaves (from Africa and New Guinea) became the first forms of money in primitive commerce. Later, certain rare items were chosen due to their high value. For example, the Pelew Islanders use obsidian or porcelain beads (Fig. 81, 1 and 8) and terra-cotta prisms, which were brought into the country under unknown circumstances, as money. One tribe even possesses one single clay prism called Baran, which they view as a public treasure. In the nearby island of Yap, money is represented by large blocks of aragonite, a rock not found on the island, which must be sourced from the Pelews. The larger the block, the greater its value. Here, fifty-pound banknotes are substituted by massive millstones so heavy that two men can barely lift them; they serve more to showcase the wealth of the local elite, who display them outside their homes rather than facilitate trade. [314] This example clearly shows that simply having a rare item doesn't guarantee it's good money. The second requirement is that it must be manageable and, even if small, must convey significant value, whether real or symbolic. [Pg 272] Such are the teeth of the Wapiti deer (Cervus canadensis), which the Shoshone Indians and the Bannocks of Idaho and Montana [315] still use in their transactions. Similarly, there was the skin-money of ancient Carthaginians and Scandinavians, [316] the cocoa-seed money of the ancient Mexicans, which is still in use today; and the animal skull-money of the Mishmee, etc. [317]

Money of Uncivilised Peoples

FIG. 81.—Money of uncivilised peoples: 1, 8, pearls (Pelew Islands); 2, iron plates (Ubangi);
3, rings of copper (Central Africa); 4, 5, cowries; 6, string of cowries;
7, “wampum” (N. Am. Indians); 9, money pick-axe (Negroes of the Upper Nile).
Figs. 1, 4, 5, and 8 are two-thirds, the others one-eighth of actual size.

FInstagram. 81.—Currency of uncivilized peoples: 1, 8, pearls (Pelew Islands); 2, iron plates (Ubangi);
3, copper rings (Central Africa); 4, 5, cowries; 6, string of cowries;
7, “wampum” (North American Indians); 9, money pick-axe (Negroes of the Upper Nile).
Figs. 1, 4, 5, and 8 are two-thirds, the others one-eighth of actual size.

Let us give a glance at eatables employed as money: rice-grains by the ancient Coreans and the modern natives of the Philippines; grains of salt in Abyssinia and at Laos; “cakes of tea,” which serve as the monetary unit in Mongolia. Let us also make but a passing reference to the pieces of stuff of a fixed length, which have a current value in China, Thibet, Mongolia, Africa, etc., and come to the subject of shells. Several species are employed as money: the Dentalum entalis by the Indians of the north-west of America, the Venus mercenaria, transformed into beads (wampum) by the Indians of the Atlantic coast of the United States (Fig. 81, 7), etc. But of all shells, the cowry is the best known. Two species are specially utilised as money, Monetaria (cyprea) moneta, L. (Fig. 81, 4, 5, 6), and Monetaria annulus, L. The first-mentioned seems to be most commonly used in Asia, the second in Africa.[318] Both are known all over the Indian Ocean, but they are gathered in great quantities only at two points, the Maldive Islands (to the west of Ceylon) and the Sooloo Islands (between the Philippines and Borneo). On the Asiatic continent the use of them was widespread, especially in Siam and in Laos. Twenty years ago 100 to 150 of these shells were worth a halfpenny. In Bengal, in the middle of last century, 2,400 to 2,560 cowries were worth a rupee, 100 a penny.

Let’s take a look at food items used as money: rice grains by the ancient Koreans and modern natives of the Philippines; grains of salt in Ethiopia and Laos; and “tea cakes,” which serve as currency in Mongolia. We should also briefly mention lengths of fabric that have a set value in China, Tibet, Mongolia, Africa, etc., and move on to the topic of shells. Several types are used as currency: the Dentalum entalis by the Indigenous peoples of the north-western United States, and the Venus mercenaria, made into beads (wampum) by the Indigenous peoples of the Atlantic coast of the United States (Fig. 81, 7), among others. But of all the shells, the cowry is the most well-known. Two species are primarily used as currency, Monetaria (cyprea) moneta, L. (Fig. 81, 4, 5, 6), and Monetaria annulus, L. The first one seems to be most commonly used in Asia, while the second is prevalent in Africa.[318] Both are found throughout the Indian Ocean, but they are collected in large amounts only at two locations: the Maldives (west of Sri Lanka) and the Sulu Islands (between the Philippines and Borneo). On the Asian continent, their use was widespread, especially in Thailand and Laos. Twenty years ago, 100 to 150 of these shells were worth half a penny. In Bengal, in the middle of the last century, 2,400 to 2,560 cowries were worth one rupee, and 100 were worth one penny.

The true zone in which the cowry circulates is, however, tropical Africa; the fact is explained by its rarity, for the shell not being known in the Atlantic, it is only by commercial relations that it could have been propagated from east to west across the continent, from Zanzibar to the Senegal, and these[Pg 274] commercial relations must have existed for a long period, for Cadamosto and other Portuguese travellers of the fifteenth century mention the use of the cowry as money among the “Moors” of the Senegal. The rate of exchange of the cowry is much higher in Africa than in Asia, which shows that this shell is an imported object. It was probably by the Arabs that the cowry was introduced to the east coast of Africa. Later on the Europeans also got hold of this trade.[319]

The primary area where cowries circulate is tropical Africa. This is due to their rarity; since the shell isn't found in the Atlantic, it could only spread from east to west across the continent through trade, from Zanzibar to Senegal. These[Pg 274] trade connections must have existed for a long time, as Cadamosto and other Portuguese travelers in the fifteenth century noted that cowries were used as money among the Senegalese “Moors.” The exchange rate for cowries is much higher in Africa than in Asia, indicating that this shell is an imported item. It was likely the Arabs who brought cowries to the east coast of Africa, and eventually, Europeans also became involved in this trade.[319]

The cowry is still current to-day along all the west coast of Africa as far as the Cuanza River in Angola; farther south, as far as Walfisch Bay, another kind of “shell-money” is found, chaplets formed of fragments of a great land shell, the Achatina monetaria, strung on cord; they are principally made in the interior of the country of Benguela, in the district of “Selles,” and are despatched along the whole coast, and as far as London. These chaplets, about eighteen inches long, were worth fifteen years ago from fivepence to one shilling and threepence.[320]

The cowry is still used today along the entire west coast of Africa up to the Cuanza River in Angola; farther south, near Walfisch Bay, another type of “shell-money” is found, consisting of necklaces made from pieces of a large land shell, the Achatina monetaria, strung on cord. These are mainly produced in the interior of Benguela, in the district of “Selles,” and are sent along the entire coast, even as far as London. These necklaces, about eighteen inches long, were worth five pence to one shilling and three pence fifteen years ago.[320]

But it is to metals especially that we may trace the origin of true money. Iron or bronze plates of fixed size or weight served as money in Assyria, among the Mycenians, and the inhabitants of Great Britain at the time of Julius Cæsar. Metal plates of varying form are in general use in Africa as money, as for example the “loggos” of the Bongos and other negroes of the Upper Nile (Fig. 81, 9), the spear-heads of the Jurs, the iron plates of the peoples of the basin of the Ubangi (Fig. 81, 2), the X-shaped bronze objects made in Lunda, which are current all over the Congo. Thirty years ago, in Cambodia, iron money, in the form of[Pg 275] thin rings, from five and a half to six inches long, and weighing about seven ounces, was used.

But we can particularly trace the origins of true money to metals. Iron or bronze plates of a fixed size or weight functioned as money in Assyria, among the Mycenaeans, and the people of Great Britain during Julius Caesar’s time. In Africa, metal plates of various shapes are commonly used as money, such as the “loggos” among the Bongos and other communities in the Upper Nile (Fig. 81, 9), the spearheads of the Jurs, and the iron plates used by the people in the Ubangi basin (Fig. 81, 2), along with the X-shaped bronze items made in Lunda, which are used throughout the Congo. Thirty years ago in Cambodia, iron money in the form of [Pg 275] thin rings, measuring five and a half to six inches long and weighing around seven ounces, was in circulation.

A general fact to be noted in regard to primitive money is that it may be transformed without much trouble into an object of use (lance-iron, shovel, hoe, arrow-head, sword). In China the first bronze money had the form of a knife, the handle of which terminated in a ring; in time the blade became shorter and shorter, and at last disappeared, leaving only the ring, which was transformed into that Chinese money, pierced with a square hole, called “sapec,” or “cash.” Brass or copper wire, of which pieces are cut up (Fig. 81, 3), represents money in Central Africa. Silver bars, pieces of which are cut according to need, are also current money in China, as they were in Russia in the fifteenth century, as well as skins.

A general fact to be noted about primitive money is that it can easily be turned into a useful item (like a spear, shovel, hoe, arrowhead, or sword). In China, the first bronze money was shaped like a knife, with a handle that ended in a ring. Over time, the blade got shorter and eventually disappeared, leaving just the ring, which evolved into a type of Chinese money with a square hole in the middle called “sapec” or “cash.” In Central Africa, brass or copper wire is cut into pieces to represent money (Fig. 81, 3). Silver bars, which are cut into pieces as needed, also serve as money in China, just as they did in Russia in the fifteenth century, along with animal skins.

The question of transport and means of communication is closely allied to that of commerce. There is little to say about trade-routes, which most frequently are tracks made by chance in savage countries, and sometimes horrible neck-breaking roads in half-civilised countries. The means of transport are very varied, and may furnish matter for an interesting monograph, as O. Mason has shown.[321] The simplest mode of transport is that on men’s backs, with or without the aid of special apparatus, like the ski and snow-shoes in cold countries (Figs. 115 and 116). To be noted apart are the attachments for climbing trees, used from Spain to New Caledonia, passing through Africa and India (Fig. 82). We come next to the utilisation of animals, the ass, horse, mule, camel, ox, zebra, dog, etc., which at first carried the loads on their backs, and were afterwards employed as draught animals.

The topic of transport and means of communication is closely related to commerce. There’s not much to say about trade routes, which are often just paths created by chance in wilderness areas and sometimes dangerous, rough roads in less developed regions. The methods of transport are quite varied and could be the subject of an interesting study, as O. Mason has demonstrated.[321] The simplest form of transport is when people carry things on their backs, with or without special gear, like ski and snowshoes in cold climates (Figs. 115 and 116). Also noteworthy are the climbing attachments used from Spain to New Caledonia, passing through Africa and India (Fig. 82). Next, we look at the use of animals, such as donkeys, horses, mules, camels, oxen, zebras, dogs, etc., which initially carried loads on their backs and were later used as draft animals.

Tree-climbing in India

FIG. 82.—Method of tree-climbing in India.
(After B. Hurst.)

FIG. 82.—How to climb trees in India.
(After B. Hurst.)

Primitive Vehicles.—Most uncivilised peoples are unacquainted with any form of vehicle. This is so among the Australians, Melanesians, and most of the natives of Africa and America. But there are also a number of populations pretty well advanced in civilisation whom their special circumstances do not permit the use of chariots or other vehicles on wheels; such are the[Pg 276] Eskimo and other Hyperboreans, the Polynesians, etc. The sledges of the former, the canoes of the latter, fitly take the place of the carriage. Nomadic peoples have a kind of aversion to every sort of vehicle; they prefer to carry things on the backs of camel, ass, or horse. The earliest vehicle must have been something of the same description as that seen among the Prairie Indians of the present day—two tree branches attached to the sides of a horse, that is to say, inclined shafts, the ends of which drag on the ground; on them is laden the luggage, which is used by these Indians as a seat. Let us suppose that one day this primitive vehicle happens to break, but incompletely, so that one portion of the branch drags horizontally on the ground, and we shall understand the advantage which men must have taken of this mishap. He[Pg 277] must have understood at once that traction is made easier by joining at an obtuse angle one pair of horizontal branches to another serving as shafts. From this point to placing pieces of wood transversely on horizontal branches there is only a step, and the sledge, as we see it still among the Finns and Russian peasants, was invented. Primitive as is this vehicle, it is admirably adapted to primitive roads, and still remains to-day the sole means of locomotion, winter as well as summer, in the forest regions of northern Russia, where no wheeled carriage would be able to pass, the pathways being scarcely visible across the dense virgin forest, when the ground is covered with a thick bed of moss and grass. It is only later, and in less wooded countries, that man thought of putting rollers under the horizontal branches of the sledge, contrivances which afterwards became transformed into true wheels. If this genesis of the vehicle be accepted, the appearance of sledges in funeral rites, even at the time when wheeled carriages were already invented, is explained quite simply as the survival of a custom the more venerated the greater its antiquity.[322]

Primitive Vehicles.—Most tribal societies don't use any form of vehicles. This is true for Australians, Melanesians, and many native people in Africa and America. However, some groups that are relatively advanced in civilization cannot use carts or other wheeled vehicles due to their unique conditions; examples include the[Pg 276] Eskimos and other Hyperboreans, Polynesians, and more. The sledges of the former and the canoes of the latter serve as their means of transport. Nomadic groups often have a dislike for vehicles; they prefer to carry their loads on the backs of camels, donkeys, or horses. The first vehicle might have resembled what we see today among the Prairie Indians—two tree branches attached to the sides of a horse, meaning inclined shafts with ends dragging on the ground; they load their luggage on these branches and use it as a seat. Imagine that one day this primitive vehicle gets damaged but not completely, so one part of the branch drags horizontally on the ground; this shows how people could take advantage of this situation. They must have realized that pulling becomes easier by connecting two pairs of horizontal branches at an obtuse angle to another set acting as shafts. Moving from this to adding crosspieces on horizontal branches is just a small step, leading to the invention of the sledge, which we still see among Finns and Russian peasants. Though this vehicle is primitive, it works perfectly on primitive roads and remains the only way to get around, both winter and summer, in the forested areas of northern Russia, where wheeled vehicles can’t manage as paths are barely visible among the thick virgin forest, especially when covered in a heavy layer of moss and grass. It was only later, in less wooded areas, that people thought to put rollers under the horizontal branches of the sledge, which eventually evolved into real wheels. If we accept this origin of vehicles, then the presence of sledges in funeral rituals, even when wheeled vehicles were already invented, can easily be understood as a tradition that becomes more respected the older it is.[322]

The two-wheeled chariot was known in Asia from the most remote antiquity; it was used either in war (Assyrians, Chaldeans, Persians) or for purposes of transport. Even at the present day in India, Ceylon, Indo-China, the light waggon drawn by zebras or asses is much more common than the four-wheeled cart drawn by buffaloes. In the far East, where man is employed for draught purposes, the wheel-barrow takes the place of the car, and the Japanese jinrickshaw, as well as the Indo-Chinese pousse-pousse, are only adaptations of modern carriages to this mode of transport by men. It is only to the north of the Yang-tse-Kiang that one comes across Chinese cars with two cogged wheels, and heavy waggons, a sort of tumbrel without springs, with massive and sometimes solid wheels, drawn by buffaloes. It is perhaps such vehicles[Pg 278] that served as the type for the Russian tarantass, a box fixed on long parallel shafts which rest on the axles. It was likewise from Asia that the Greeks and Romans, and perhaps the Egyptians, brought back the models of their elegant and light war-chariots. As to four-wheeled waggons, the populations of Europe must have known them at least from the bronze age, to judge from the remains found in the lake-dwellings of Italy and the tombs of Scandinavia. The waggons of the ancient Germanic peoples, also employed in war, resembled those which are still met with at the present day among the peasants of central and western Europe. The same kind of conveyances have been transported by the Dutch Boers as far as South Africa, and by the colonists of the Latin race even into the solitudes of the Pampas.

The two-wheeled chariot has been around in Asia since ancient times; it was used for both warfare (by the Assyrians, Chaldeans, Persians) and transportation. Even today in India, Ceylon, and Indo-China, light wagons pulled by zebras or donkeys are much more common than four-wheeled carts pulled by buffalo. In the Far East, where people are used for pulling, the wheelbarrow replaces the car, and the Japanese jinrickshaw, along with the Indo-Chinese pousse-pousse, are simply modern adaptations of carriages used for human transport. It's only north of the Yang-tse-Kiang that you see Chinese carts with two cogged wheels and heavy wagons, which are a kind of tumbrel without springs and have large, sometimes solid wheels, pulled by buffalo. Such vehicles[Pg 278] may have inspired the Russian tarantass, a box mounted on long parallel shafts resting on the axles. The Greeks, Romans, and perhaps Egyptians also brought back designs for their elegant and lightweight war chariots from Asia. As for four-wheeled wagons, people in Europe must have known about them since at least the Bronze Age, based on remains found in Italy's lake dwellings and Scandinavian tombs. The wagons used by ancient Germanic tribes, which were also used in warfare, looked similar to those still seen today among peasants in central and western Europe. These types of vehicles have been carried by Dutch Boers all the way to South Africa and by Latin colonists even into the remote areas of the Pampas.

Navigation.—Transport by water has undergone more important transformations than vehicular transport. From the air-filled leather bottle, on which, after the manner of the ancient Assyrians, rivers are still crossed in Turkestan and Persia,[323] to elegant sailing yachts; from the primitive reed rafts of the Egyptians and the natives of lake Lob-Nor (Chinese Turkestan) to the great ocean liners, there are numberless intermediate forms. Australian canoes made from a hollowed-out tree-trunk, Fuegian canoes made of pieces of bark joined together by cords of seal’s sinews, the effective Eskimo “kayaks” made with seal skins, the elegant skiffs of the Polynesians with their outriggers or balancing beams which defy the tempests of the ocean (Fig. 83), heavy Chinese junks, etc. We cannot enter into the details of this subject; let us merely observe that there is a great difference in the aptitude of various peoples for navigation. It is not enough to live by the sea-shore to become a good sailor; take for example the case of the Negroes who have never been able to go far away from their coasts, and who often have not even an elementary knowledge of navigation, while the Polynesians and the[Pg 279] Malays make bold and perilous voyages of several thousand miles across the Pacific and Indian oceans; canoes of the Malay type are seen from Honolulu and Easter Island to Ceylon and Madagascar. With the taste for navigation and voyages migrations become more numerous, and the intellectual horizons widen perceptibly. It is thus one of the great means of bringing peoples into closer relationship.

Navigation.—Water transport has changed more dramatically than land transport. From the air-filled leather bags that are still used to cross rivers in Turkestan and Persia, similar to the ancient Assyrians,[323] to sleek sailing yachts; from the basic reed rafts created by the Egyptians and the locals of Lake Lob-Nor (Chinese Turkestan) to massive ocean liners, there are countless forms in between. Australian canoes made from hollowed tree trunks, Fuegian canoes made from bark tied together with seal sinews, the efficient Eskimo “kayaks” made from seal skins, and the stylish Polynesian skiffs with their outriggers that withstand ocean storms (Fig. 83), heavy Chinese junks, and more. We can’t go into all the details here; let’s just note that different cultures have varying levels of skill in navigation. Living by the coast doesn’t automatically make someone a good sailor; for instance, many African communities have never ventured far from their shores and often lack basic navigation skills, while the Polynesians and Malays undertake bold and risky journeys of thousands of miles across the Pacific and Indian Oceans; Malay-type canoes can be spotted from Honolulu and Easter Island to Ceylon and Madagascar. With a passion for navigation, migrations increase, and people’s perspectives broaden significantly. This makes it one of the key ways to bring different cultures closer together.

Canoe with Outrigger

FIG. 83.—Malayo-Polynesian canoe with outrigger (seventeenth century).
(After O. Mason.)

FIG. 83.—Malayo-Polynesian canoe with outrigger (17th century).
(After O. Mason.)


CHAPTER VIII.

CLASSIFICATION OF RACES AND PEOPLES.

CATEGORIZATION OF RACES AND PEOPLES.

Criticism of anthropological classifications—Frequent confusion of the classing of races and of peoples—The determining of races can be based only on somatic characters—For the classing of peoples, on the contrary, it is necessary to take into account ethnic characters (linguistic and sociological), and above all geographical distributionClassification of races proposed by the author—Succinct characterisation of the twenty-nine races which are therein mentioned—Classification of ethnic groups adopted in this work.

Criticism of anthropological classifications—Frequent confusion of the classification of races and of peoples—Determining races can only be based on physical characteristics—For classifying peoples, however, it's necessary to consider cultural characteristics (linguistic and sociological), and especially geographical distributionClassification of races proposed by the author—Brief description of the twenty-nine races mentioned—Classification of ethnic groups used in this work.

EXCEPTION has frequently been taken to the anthropological classifications of different authors, from the time of F. Bernier (1672) to our own days, in that they recognise in humanity an excessively variable number of races, from two (Virey in 1775) up to thirty-four (Haeckel in 1879).[324] These strictures are by no means deserved, seeing that those who make them almost always compare classifications dating from various times, and consequently drawn up from facts and documents which are not comparable. In all sciences, classifications change in proportion as the facts or objects to be classed become better known.

EXCEPTION has often been linked to the anthropological classifications of various authors, from F. Bernier in 1672 to the present day, as they recognize an extremely variable number of races in humanity, ranging from two (Virey in 1775) to thirty-four (Haeckel in 1879).[324] These criticisms are certainly not warranted, since those making them usually compare classifications from different periods, which are based on facts and documents that can't be compared. In all sciences, classifications change as the facts or objects being categorized become better understood.

Besides, if we go to the root of the matter we perceive that the diversity in the classifications of the genus Homo is often only apparent, for most classifications confuse ethnic groups and races. If my readers refer back to what I said in the[Pg 281] introduction on “races” and “ethnic groups,” they will understand all the difficulties this causes.

Besides, if we get to the heart of the issue, we see that the various classifications of the genus Homo are often just superficial. Most classifications mix up ethnic groups and races. If my readers look back at what I mentioned in the[Pg 281] introduction about “races” and “ethnic groups,” they will grasp all the complications this creates.

In order to class peoples, nations, tribes, in a word, “ethnic groups,” we ought to take into consideration linguistic differences, ethnic characters, and especially, in my opinion, geographical distribution. It is thus that I shall describe the different peoples in the subsequent chapters, while classing them geographically. But for a classification of “races” (using the word in the sense given to it in the introduction), it is only necessary to take into account physical characters. We must try to determine by the anthropological analysis of each of the ethnic groups the races which constitute it; then compare these races one with another, unite those which possess most similarities in common, and separate those which exhibit most dissimilarities.

To classify peoples, nations, tribes, or what we call "ethnic groups," we need to consider language differences, cultural traits, and, especially, geographical distribution. That's how I'll describe the various groups in the upcoming chapters, focusing on their geographical locations. However, for classifying "races" (in the sense explained in the introduction), we only need to look at physical characteristics. We should analyze each ethnic group anthropologically to identify the races that make it up; then, we can compare these races, group those with the most similarities together, and distinguish those with the most differences.

On making these methodic groupings we arrive at a small number of races, combinations of which, in various proportions, are met with in the multitude of ethnic groups.

By creating these systematic groupings, we end up with a small number of races, which are mixed in various proportions across the many ethnic groups.

Let us take for example the Negrito race, of which the Aetas of the Philippines, the Andamanese, and the black Sakai are the almost pure representatives. This race is found again here and there among the Melanesians, the Malays, the Dravidians, etc. In all these populations the type of the Negrito race is revealed on one side by the presence of a certain number of individuals who manifest it almost in its primitive purity, and on the other by the existence of a great number of individuals, whose traits likewise reproduce this type, but in a modified form, half hidden by characters borrowed from other races. Characteristics of various origin may thus be amalgamated, or merely exist in juxtaposition.

Let’s take the Negrito race as an example, represented almost purely by the Aetas of the Philippines, the Andamanese, and the black Sakai. This race can also be found scattered among the Melanesians, Malays, Dravidians, and others. In all these groups, the Negrito type is shown in two ways: first, through individuals who display its nearly original form, and second, through a larger number of individuals whose features reflect this type, but in a modified way, partially obscured by traits borrowed from other races. Characteristics of different origins can thus be amalgamated, or simply exist in juxtaposition.

Race-characters appear with a remarkable persistency, in spite of all intermixtures, all modifications due to civilisation, change of language, etc. What varies is the proportion in which such and such a race enters into the constitution of the ethnic group. A race may form the preponderating[Pg 282] portion in a given ethnic group, or it may form a half, a quarter, or a very trifling fraction of it; the remaining portion consisting of others. Rarely is an ethnic group composed almost exclusively of a single race; in this case the notion of race is confused with that of people. We may say, for example, that the tribes called Bushmen, Aetas, Mincopies, Australians, are formed of a race still almost pure; but these cases are rare. Already it is difficult to admit that there is but one race, for example, among the Mongols; and if we pass to the Negroes we find among them at least three races which, while being connected one with another by a certain number of common characteristics, present, nevertheless, appreciable differences. Now, each of these races may be combined, in an ethnic group, not only with a kindred race, but also with other races, and it is easy to imagine how very numerous may be these combinations.

Race characteristics persist remarkably, despite intermixing and changes due to civilization, language changes, and so on. What changes is the proportion of each race in the makeup of an ethnic group. A race might make up the majority[Pg 282] of a specific ethnic group, or it could be half, a quarter, or a very small part of it, with the rest consisting of other races. It's rare for an ethnic group to be made up almost entirely of one race; in those cases, the idea of race gets mixed up with that of people. For instance, we might say that the tribes known as Bushmen, Aetas, Mincopies, and Australians consist of a race that is still quite pure; however, these cases are uncommon. It’s already challenging to accept that there's just one race among the Mongols; and when it comes to Negroes, we find at least three races that, while connected by some common traits, still have significant differences. Each of these races can combine within an ethnic group, not only with similar races but also with different ones, making it easy to imagine how many combinations there could be.

I have just said that the number of human races is not very considerable; however, reviewing the different classifications proposed, in chronological order, it will be seen that this number increases as the physical characters of the populations of the earth become better known. Confining ourselves to the most recent and purely somatological classifications, we find the increase to be as follows:—In 1860, Isid. Geoffroy Saint-Hilaire admitted four principal races or “types,” and thirteen secondary ones.[325] In 1870, Huxley proposed five principal races or types, and fourteen secondary ones or[Pg 283] “modifications.”[326] Finally, in 1878, Topinard enumerated sixteen races, and increased this number in 1885 to nineteen.[327] In mixed classifications, based on both somatic and ethnic characters, a very much greater number of sub-divisions is found, but the reason of that is that “ethnic groups” are included.

I just mentioned that the number of human races isn’t very large; however, if we look at the different classifications proposed over time, we can see that this number increases as we learn more about the physical characteristics of the world's populations. Focusing on the most recent classifications based solely on body structure, we see the following growth: In 1860, Isid. Geoffroy Saint-Hilaire recognized four main races or "types" and thirteen secondary ones.[325] In 1870, Huxley proposed five main races or types, along with fourteen secondary ones or[Pg 283] “modifications.”[326] Finally, in 1878, Topinard identified sixteen races and increased that number to nineteen in 1885.[327] In mixed classifications that consider both body structure and ethnic traits, there’s a much larger number of subdivisions, but that’s because “ethnic groups” are included.

Putting these aside, we see in the most complete mixed[Pg 284] classifications only four or five principal races, and twelve to eighteen secondary races. Thus Haeckel and Fr. Mueller admit four principal races (called “tribes” by Haeckel, “sub-divisions” by Mueller), and twelve secondary races (called “species” and sub-divided into thirty-four “races” by Haeckel, called “races” and sub-divided into numerous “peoples” by Fr. Mueller).[328] On the other hand, De Quatrefages sub-divides his five “trunks” into eighteen “branches,” each containing several ethnic groups, which he distinguishes under the names of “minor branches” and “families.”[329]

Putting these aside, we see in the most complete mixed[Pg 284] classifications only four or five main races, and twelve to eighteen secondary races. Thus, Haeckel and Fr. Mueller acknowledge four main races (referred to as “tribes” by Haeckel and “sub-divisions” by Mueller) and twelve secondary races (called “species” and broken down into thirty-four “races” by Haeckel, known as “races” and further divided into various “peoples” by Fr. Mueller).[328] On the other hand, De Quatrefages divides his five “trunks” into eighteen “branches,” each containing several ethnic groups, which he identifies as “minor branches” and “families.”[329]

Some years ago I proposed a classification of the human races, based solely on physical characters.[330] Taking into account all the new data of anthropological science, I endeavoured, as do the botanists, to form natural groups by combining the different characters (colour of the skin, nature of the hair, stature, form of the head, of the nose, etc.), and I thus managed to separate mankind into thirteen races. Continuing the analysis further, I was able to give a detailed description of the thirty sub-divisions of these races, which I called types, and which it would have been better to call secondary races, or briefly “races.” A mass of new material,[Pg 285] and my own researches, have compelled me since then to modify this classification. This is how it may be summarised in the form of a table, giving to my former “types” the title of race or sub-races, and grouping them under six heads—

Some years ago, I proposed a classification of human races based solely on physical traits.[330] Considering all the new findings in anthropological science, I aimed, like botanists, to create natural groups by combining various traits (skin color, hair type, height, head shape, nose shape, etc.), and I successfully categorized humanity into thirteen races. As I continued the analysis, I was able to provide a detailed description of the thirty subdivisions of these races, which I called types. It would have been more appropriate to refer to them as secondary races, or simply “races.” A wealth of new information,[Pg 285] along with my own research, has since prompted me to revise this classification. Here's how it can be summarized in a table, giving my former “types” the designation of race or sub-race, and organizing them into six categories—

A. WOOLLY HAir, BROAD NOSE. Races and Sub-races.
Yellow skin, steatopygous, short stature, dolichocephalic Bushmen (s. r. Hottentots and Bushmen) 1
Dark skin Reddish-brown, very short stature, sub-brachycephalic or sub-dolichocephalic Negrito (s. r. Negrillo and Negrito) 2
Black, stature tall, dolichocephalic Negro (s. r. Nigritian and Bantu) 3
Brownish-black, medium stature, dolichocephalic Melanesian (s. r. Papuan and Melanesian) 4
B. CURLY OR WAVY HAIR.
Dark skin Reddish-brown, narrow nose, tall stature, dolichocephalic Ethiopian 5
Chocolate-brown, broad nose, medium stature, dolichocephalic Australian 6
Brownish-black, broad or narrow nose, short stature, dolichocephalic Dravidian (s. r. Platyrhine and Leptorhine) 7
Skin of a tawny white, nose narrow, hooked, with thick top, brachycephalic Assyroid 8
C. WAVY BBROWN OR BLACK HAIR, DARK EYES.
Clear brown skin, black hair, narrow, straight or convex nose, tall stature dolichocephalic Indo-Afghan 9
Tawny white skin, black hair Tall stature, elongated face Aquiline nose, prominent occiput, dolichocephalic, elliptical form of face Arab or semite 10
Straight, coarse nose, dolichocephalic, square face Berber (4 sub-races) 11
Straight, fine nose, mesocephalic, oval face Littoral European 12
Short stature, dolichocephalic Ibero-insular 13
Dull white skin, brown hair Short stature, strongly brachycephalic, round face Western European 14
Tall stature, brachycephalic, elongated face Adriatic 15
[Pg 286] D. FAIR, WAVY OR SSTRAIGHT HAIR, LIGHT EYES.
Reddish white skin, fair hair Somewhat wavy, reddish; tall stature, dolichocephalic Northern European 16
Somewhat straight, flaxen-haired, short stature, sub-brachycephalic Eastern European 17
E. SSTRAIGHT OR WAVY HAIRS, DARK, BLACK EYES.
Light brown skin, very hairy body, broad and concave nose, dolichocephalic Ainu 18
Yellow skin, smooth body Prominent nose, sometimes convex, tall stature, elliptical form of face, brachy- or meso-cephalic Polynesian 19
Short stature, flattened, sometimes concave nose, projecting cheek-bones, lozenge-shaped face, dolichocephalic Indonesian 20
Short stature, prominent straight or concave nose, meso- or dolichocephalic South-American (s. r. Palæo-Am. & S. Amer.) 21
F. SSTRAIGHT HAIR.
Warm yellow skin Straight or aquiline nose Tall stature, mesocephalic North American (s. r. Atlantic and Pacific) 22
Short stature, brachycephalic Central American 23
Straight nose, tall stature brachycephalic, square face Patagonian 24
Brownish-yellow skin, short stature, round flattened face, dolichocephalic Eskimo 25
Yellowish-white skin Turned-up nose, short stature, brachycephalic Lapp 26
Straight or concave nose, short stature, meso- or dolichocephalic, projecting cheek-bones Ugrian (s. r. Ugrian and Yeniseian) 27
Straight nose, medium stature, strongly brachycephalic Turkish or Turco-Tatar 28
Pale yellow skin, projecting cheek-bones, Mongoloid eye, slightly brachycephalic Mongol (s. r. Northern and Southern) 29

My table contains the enumeration of the principal somatic characters for each race. Arranged dichotomically for convenience of research, it does not represent the exact grouping of the races according to their true affinities. It would be[Pg 287] vain to attempt to exhibit these affinities in the lineal arrangement of a table; each race, in fact, manifests some points of resemblance, not only with its neighbours in the upper or lower part of the table, but also with others which are remote from it, in view of the technical necessities of construction of such a table. In order to exhibit the affinities in question, it would be necessary to arrange the groups according to the three dimensions of space, or at least on a surface where we can avail ourselves of two dimensions. In the ensuing table (p. 289) are included twenty-nine races, combined into seventeen groups, arranged in such a way that races having greatest affinities one with another are brought near together. Seven of these groups only are composed of more than one race. They may be called as follows (see the table):—XIII., American group; XII., Oceanian; II., Negroid; VIII., North African; XVI., Eurasian; X., Melanochroid; IX., Xanthochroid. This table shows us clearly that the Bushman race, for example, has affinities with the Negritoes (short stature) and the Negroes (nature of the hair, form of nose); that the Dravidian race is connected both with the Indonesian and the Australian; that the place of the Turkish race is, by its natural affinities, between the Ugrians and the Mongols; that the Eskimo have Mongoloid and American features; that the Assyroids are closely related to the Adriatics and the Indo-Afghans; that the latter, by the dark colour of their skin, recall the Ethiopians, and the Arabs by the shape of the face, etc. Here are, moreover, some details of the twenty-nine races (marked by their numbers of order) of the first table, and of the seventeen groups of the second (marked in Roman figures).

My table lists the main physical characteristics for each race. It's organized dichotomously for easier research, but it doesn’t represent the true relationships between the races. It would be[Pg 287] pointless to try to show these relationships in a linear table; each race actually shares similarities not just with its neighboring races on the table but also with those that are quite distant, due to the technical limitations of constructing such a table. To accurately depict these relationships, groups would need to be arranged in three dimensions, or at least on a surface where we can use two dimensions. In the following table (p. 289), twenty-nine races are grouped into seventeen categories, arranged so that races with the closest connections are placed near each other. Only seven of these groups have more than one race. They are as follows (see the table):—XIII., American group; XII., Oceanian; II., Negroid; VIII., North African; XVI., Eurasian; X., Melanochroid; IX., Xanthochroid. This table clearly shows that, for example, the Bushman race has connections with the Negritoes (short stature) and the Negroes (hair type, nose shape); that the Dravidian race is linked to both the Indonesian and Australian races; that the Turkish race is naturally situated between the Ugrians and Mongols; that the Eskimo have both Mongoloid and American traits; that the Assyroids are closely related to the Adriatics and Indo-Afghans; and that the latter, with their dark skin, resemble Ethiopians, while their face shape is similar to that of Arabs, etc. Additionally, here are some details of the twenty-nine races (identified by their order numbers) from the first table and of the seventeen groups from the second (marked in Roman numerals).

I. 1. The Bushman race is found in a relative state of purity among the people called Bushmen (Fig. 24), and less pure among the Hottentots (Fig. 143). The presence of the Bushman type may be detected among a great number of Negro peoples to the south of the equator (for example, among the Bechuana and Kiokos, etc.).

I. 1. The Bushman race exists in a relatively pure state among the group known as Bushmen (Fig. 24), and is less pure among the Hottentots (Fig. 143). The Bushman type can be observed among many Black African groups south of the equator (for instance, among the Bechuana and Kiokos, etc.).

II. The Negroid group comprises three races: Negrito, Negro, and Melanesian.

II. The Negroid group includes three races: Negrito, Negro, and Melanesian.

2. The Negrito race may be split up into two sub-races: a, the Negrilloes of Africa, of which the pure representatives are the Akkas, the Batuas, and other sub-dolichocephalic pigmies; and b, the Negritoes of Asia (Andamanese, Fig. 124, black Sakai, Fig. 123, Aetas, etc.), mesocephalic or sub-brachycephalic, of a little taller stature than the Negrilloes. The presence of Negrito elements has been noticed among different Bantu negroes (for example, among the Adumas). As to the influence of the Negrito type on that of the Malays, the Jakuns, certain Indonesians, etc., it is perfectly well recognised.

2. The Negrito race can be divided into two sub-races: a, the Negrilloes of Africa, which include pure representatives like the Akkas, the Batuas, and other sub-dolichocephalic pygmies; and b, the Negritoes of Asia (Andamanese, Fig. 124, black Sakai, Fig. 123, Aetas, etc.), who are mesocephalic or sub-brachycephalic and slightly taller than the Negrilloes. The presence of Negrito traits has been observed among various Bantu people (for example, among the Adumas). As for the influence of the Negrito type on the Malays, such as the Jakuns and certain Indonesians, it is widely recognized.

3. The Negroes may likewise be sub-divided into two sub-races: a, the Nigritians, of the Sudan (Fig. 140) and of Guinea (Fig. 9), more prognathous (more “negroid,” if we may thus express it) than b, the Bantus of sub-equatorial and southern Africa (Figs. 47, 141, and 142). The Negro element is strongly represented in the mixed populations of Africa (certain Berbers and Ethiopians, islanders of Madagascar). The majority of the Negroes of America belong to the Negritic sub-race.

3. The Black people can also be divided into two sub-races: a, the Nigritians from the Sudan (Fig. 140) and Guinea (Fig. 9), who are more prognathous (more “negroid,” if we can say that) than b, the Bantus from sub-equatorial and southern Africa (Figs. 47, 141, and 142). The Black element is significantly present in the mixed populations of Africa (some Berbers and Ethiopians, and islanders of Madagascar). Most of the Black people in America belong to the Negritic sub-race.

4. The Melanesian race differs from the Negro race especially in having less woolly hair with broader spirals (see p. 39), and the skin a lighter colour. It comprises two variations or sub-races: one with elongated ovoid face, hooked nose, especially prevalent in New Guinea (Papuan sub-race, Figs. 53 and 152), and the other with squarer and heavier face, which occupies the rest of Melanesia (Melanesian sub-race properly so called, Fig. 153).[331] The first of these sub-races enters into the composition of several mixed tribes of Celebes, Gilolo, Flores (Figs. 146 to 148), Timur, and other islands of the Asiatic Archipelago situated farther to the east.

4. The Melanesian race is different from the Negro race, primarily in having less tightly curled hair with broader spirals (see p. 39), and lighter skin color. It consists of two variations or sub-races: one with an elongated oval face and a hooked nose, especially common in New Guinea (Papuan sub-race, Figs. 53 and 152), and the other with a squarer and heavier face, found throughout the rest of Melanesia (Melanesian sub-race in the strict sense, Fig. 153).[331] The first of these sub-races contributes to several mixed tribes in Celebes, Gilolo, Flores (Figs. 146 to 148), Timur, and other islands in the Asiatic Archipelago that are located further to the east.

III. 5. The Ethiopian race forms by itself the third group. It is preserved fairly pure among certain Bejas (Fig. 138) and the Gallas, but is modified by the admixture of Arab blood[Pg 289] among the Somalis, Abyssinians, etc., and by Negro blood among the Zandehs (Niam-Niams, etc.), and especially among the Fulbé or Peuls, though among the latter fine Ethiopian types, almost pure, are still met with (Fig. 139).

III. 5. The Ethiopian race is the third group on its own. It remains relatively untainted among certain Bejas (Fig. 138) and the Gallas, but is changed due to the mixing of Arab blood[Pg 289] in the Somalis, Abyssinians, etc., and by Negro blood in the Zandehs (Niam-Niams, etc.), especially among the Fulbé or Peuls. However, among the latter, there are still some fine Ethiopian types that are almost pure (Fig. 139).

GROUPING OF THE HUMAN RACES ACCORDING TO THEIR AFFINITIES.

GGROUPING OF THE HUMAN RACES BASED ON THEIR AAFFINITIES.

Table: Classification

IV. 6. The Australian race (Figs. 14, 15, 149, and 150) is remarkable for its unity and its isolation on the Australian continent, and even the Tasmanians (see Chapter XII.), the nearest neighbours to the Australians, at the present day extinct, had a different type.

IV. 6. The Australian race (Figs. 14, 15, 149, and 150) is notable for its unity and isolation on the Australian continent, and even the Tasmanians (see Chapter XII.), the closest neighbors to the Australians, are now extinct and had a different type.

V. 7. The Dravidian race, which it would have been better to call South-Indian, is prevalent among the peoples of Southern India speaking Dravidian tongues, and also among the Kols and other peoples of India; it presents two varieties or sub-races, according to Schmidt:[332] a, leptorhinean, thin nose, very elongated head (Nairs, etc.); b, platyrhinean, with very broad nose and a somewhat shorter head (Dravidians properly so called, Figs. 8, 126, and 127). The Veddahs (Figs. 5, 6, and 133) come much nearer to the Dravidian type, which moreover penetrates also among the populations of India, even into the middle valley of the Ganges.

V. 7. The Dravidian race, which would be better referred to as South-Indian, is found among the people of Southern India who speak Dravidian languages, as well as among the Kols and other groups in India. According to Schmidt, it has two varieties or sub-races: a, leptorhinean, characterized by a thin nose and a very elongated head (like the Nairs, etc.); b, platyrhinean, with a very broad nose and a somewhat shorter head (the Dravidians themselves, see Figs. 8, 126, and 127). The Veddahs (see Figs. 5, 6, and 133) are much closer to the Dravidian type, which also extends into various populations of India, even reaching the central valley of the Ganges.

VI. 8. The Assyroid race, so named because it is represented in a very clear manner on the Assyrian monuments, is not found pure in any population, but it counts a sufficient number of representatives to give a character to entire populations, such as the Hadjemi-Persians (Fig. 22), the Ayssores, certain Kurdish tribes, and some Armenians and Jews. The characteristic Jewish nose of caricature, in the form of the figure 6, is an Assyroid nose; it is almost always associated with united eyebrows and thick lower lip. The Todas (Fig. 130) partly belong, perhaps, to this type.

VI. 8. The Assyroid race, named for its clear depiction on Assyrian monuments, isn’t found in its pure form in any population, but there are enough representatives to influence entire groups, like the Hadjemi-Persians (Fig. 22), the Ayssores, certain Kurdish tribes, and some Armenians and Jews. The stereotypical Jewish nose, resembling figure 6, is an Assyroid nose; it’s almost always paired with joined eyebrows and a thick lower lip. The Todas (Fig. 130) may partially belong to this type.

VII. 9. The Indo-Afghan race (see Chapter X.) has its typical representatives among the Afghans, the Rajputs, and in the caste of the Brahmins, but it has undergone numerous alterations as a consequence of crosses with Assyroid, Dravidian, Mongol, Turkish, Arab, and other elements (Figs. 125 and 134).

VII. 9. The Indo-Afghan race (see Chapter X.) has its typical representatives among the Afghans, Rajputs, and the Brahmins, but it has undergone many changes due to mixing with Assyroid, Dravidian, Mongol, Turkish, Arab, and other groups (Figs. 125 and 134).

VIII. The North African group is composed, 10, of the Arab or Semite race, represented by typical individuals among the Arabs and certain Jews (Fig. 21), the features of which are often found in most of the populations of Syria, Mesopotamia, Beloochistan (Fig. 134), Egypt, and the Caucasus; 11, of the Berber race (Fig. 136), which admits four varieties or “types,” according to Collignon (see Chapter XI.).

VIII. The North African group includes, 10, the Arab or Semite race, seen in typical individuals among Arabs and some Jews (Fig. 21), whose features are commonly found in most populations of Syria, Mesopotamia, Beloochistan (Fig. 134), Egypt, and the Caucasus; 11, of the Berber race (Fig. 136), which has four varieties or “types,” according to Collignon (see Chapter XI.).

IX. The Melanochroid group comprises the four dark-complexioned races of Europe (12 to 15), Littoral, Ibero-insular, Western (Fig. 98), and Adriatic.

IX. The Melanochroid group includes the four dark-skinned races of Europe (12 to 15), Littoral, Ibero-insular, Western (Fig. 98), and Adriatic.

X. The Xanthochroid group contains the two fair races of Europe (16 and 17), Northern (Figs. 88 to 90) and Eastern. (For further details respecting groups IX. and X. see Chapter IX.)

X. The Xanthochroid group includes the two fair races of Europe (16 and 17), Northern (Figs. 88 to 90) and Eastern. (For more information about groups IX. and X., see Chapter IX.)

XI. 18. The Ainu race is preserved fairly pure among the people of this name (Figs. 49 and 117); it forms one of the constituent elements of the population of Northern Japan (see Chapter X.).

XI. 18. The Ainu race remains largely intact among the people with this name (Figs. 49 and 117); it is one of the components of the population in Northern Japan (see Chapter X.).

XII. The Oceanian group is formed of two races, the relations of which are somewhat vague. 19. The Polynesian race (Figs. 154 to 156), found more or less pure from the Hawaiian Islands to New Zealand, undergoes changes in the west of Polynesia owing to intermixture with the Melanesians (Fiji, New Guinea). It furnishes perhaps a more hirsute sub-race in Micronesia. 20. The Indonesian race is represented by the Dyaks, the Battas, and other populations of the Malay Archipelago (Nias, Kubus), or of Indo-China (Nicobariese, Nagas, Fig. 17 and Frontispiece). It is modified by intermixture with Negrito elements (White Sakai of the Malay peninsula), Hindus (Javanese, Fig. 145), Mongoloids (Malays, Khamtis, Fig. 22), or Papuans (Natives of Flores, Figs. 146 to 148).

XII. The Oceanian group consists of two races, which have somewhat unclear relationships. 19. The Polynesian race (Figs. 154 to 156) is found relatively pure from the Hawaiian Islands to New Zealand but experiences changes in the western part of Polynesia due to mixing with Melanesians (Fiji, New Guinea). It may produce a hairier sub-race in Micronesia. 20. The Indonesian race includes the Dyaks, Battas, and other groups from the Malay Archipelago (Nias, Kubus) or Indo-China (Nicobariese, Nagas, Fig. 17 and Frontispiece). This race is influenced by intermixing with Negrito groups (White Sakai of the Malay Peninsula), Hindus (Javanese, Fig. 145), Mongoloids (Malays, Khamtis, Fig. 22), or Papuans (Natives of Flores, Figs. 146 to 148).

XIII. The American group comprises the four races numbered in my table 21 to 24, which will be dealt with in the chapter devoted to America. Let me merely say that the type of Central Americans, brachycephalic, short, with straight or aquiline nose (Figs. 163 and 164), is frequently[Pg 292] met with on the Pacific slope of the two Americas, as well as on several points of the Atlantic slope of South America. In the former of these two regions the population is principally formed of a blending of this type with the North American race; in the latter, with the South American race (Fig. 171).

XIII. The American group includes the four races listed in my table 21 to 24, which will be discussed in the chapter focused on America. I’ll just point out that the type of Central Americans, who are brachycephalic, short, and have either straight or aquiline noses (Figs. 163 and 164), is commonly found on the Pacific side of both Americas, as well as at various locations on the Atlantic side of South America. In the first of these two regions, the population mainly consists of a mix between this type and the North American race; in the latter, it's mixed with the South American race (Fig. 171).

Two sub-races may be distinguished in the North American race: a, Atlantic, mesocephalic, of very tall stature, good representatives of which, for example, are the Siouans (Figs. 158 and 159); and b, the Pacific, of which the Tlinkit Indians may give an approximate idea, differing from the former by shorter stature, more rounded head, and better developed pilous system. Further, in the South American race we most probably admit two sub-races: a, the dolichocephalic race, with hair often wavy, or even frizzy (Figs. 48, 165, 172, and 175),[333] which is perhaps derived from the oldest inhabitants of the continent, and which I called Palæo-American type in my first attempt at a classification of the human races (1889), and another (b), which would be the present type of South American mesocephalic race with straight hair (Figs. 167 to 170). The tall Patagonian race, brachycephalic, of deep brown colour, has its representatives among the Patagonians and among certain peoples of Chaco and the Pampas.[334]

Two sub-races can be identified in the North American race: a, the Atlantic, which has a medium head shape and includes very tall individuals. Good examples of this are the Siouans (Figs. 158 and 159); and b, the Pacific, represented by the Tlinkit Indians, who differ from the Atlantic group by being shorter, having rounder heads, and a more developed hair system. Additionally, in the South American race, we likely recognize two sub-races: a, the dolichocephalic race, with often wavy or even curly hair (Figs. 48, 165, 172, and 175),[333] which may be descended from the continent's earliest inhabitants, referred to as the Palæo-American type in my first classification of human races (1889), and another (b), which would be the current type of South American mesocephalic race with straight hair (Figs. 167 to 170). The tall Patagonian race, with a round head shape and deep brown skin, includes representatives among the Patagonians and some groups from Chaco and the Pampas.[334]

XIV. 25. The Eskimo race (Fig. 157) has kept fairly pure on the east coast of Greenland, as well as in the north of Canada; but it is modified by intermixtures with the North American race in Labrador, in Alaska, on the west coast of Greenland (where there is, further, intermixture with the Northern European race), and with the Mongolic races (Chukchi, Aleuts, etc.) on the shores of Behring’s Sea.

XIV. 25. The Eskimo population (Fig. 157) has remained relatively pure on the east coast of Greenland and in northern Canada; however, it has mixed with the North American population in Labrador, Alaska, and on the west coast of Greenland (where there is also intermixing with the Northern European population), as well as with Mongolic groups (Chukchi, Aleuts, etc.) along the shores of Bering Sea.

XV. 26. The Lapp race is fairly pure among some tribes of Scandinavian Lapps; elsewhere it is blended with the northern and eastern races (Scandinavians, Finns, Russians).

XV. 26. The Lapp race is relatively pure among certain tribes of Scandinavian Lapps; in other areas, it mixes with northern and eastern races (Scandinavians, Finns, Russians).

XVI. The two races which compose the Eurasian group (so named because its representatives inhabit Europe as well as Asia) have only a few common characters (yellowish-white skin, modified Mongolian features, etc.). 27. The Ugrian race predominates among the eastern Finns (Ostiaks, Permiaks, Cheremiss, Fig. 106), and perhaps as a variety among the Yeniseians. It is found again interblended with the Samoyeds, and perhaps with the Yakuts. 28. The Turkish race, which I would willingly call Turanian, if this term were not too much abused, enters into the composition of the peoples called Turco-Tatars, who speak Turkish idioms. The type, fairly pure, is common among the Kirghiz and the Tatars of Astrakhan (Figs. 107, 108), but in other ethnic groups it is weakened by intermixture with such races as the Mongolo-Tunguse (Yakuts), Ugrian (Shuvashes), Assyroid (Turkomans, Osmanli Turks, etc.).

XVI. The two races that make up the Eurasian group (named because their members live in both Europe and Asia) share only a few common traits (yellowish-white skin, altered Mongolian features, etc.). 27. The Ugrian race is predominant among the eastern Finns (Ostiaks, Permiaks, Cheremiss, Fig. 106), and possibly exists as a variety among the Yeniseians. It is also found mixed with the Samoyeds and maybe the Yakuts. 28. The Turkish race, which I would prefer to call Turanian, if that term weren't so overused, contributes to the peoples known as Turco-Tatars, who speak Turkish languages. The relatively pure type is common among the Kirghiz and the Tatars of Astrakhan (Figs. 107, 108), but in other ethnic groups, it becomes diluted due to mixing with other races like the Mongolo-Tungus (Yakuts), Ugrian (Shuvashes), and Assyroid (Turkomans, Osmanli Turks, etc.).

XVII. The Mongol race admits two varieties or sub-races: Tunguse or Northern Mongolian, with oval or round faces and prominent cheek-bones, spread over Manchuria, Corea, Northern China, Mongolia (Figs. 20, 115, 116, and 118); and Southern Mongolian, with lozenge-shaped or square faces and cheek-bones laterally enlarged, which may be observed especially in Southern China (Fig. 119) and in Indo-China (Fig. 121).

XVII. The Mongol race has two varieties or sub-races: Tunguse or Northern Mongolian, characterized by oval or round faces and prominent cheekbones, found in Manchuria, Korea, Northern China, and Mongolia (Figs. 20, 115, 116, and 118); and Southern Mongolian, which has lozenge-shaped or square faces and laterally enlarged cheekbones, particularly seen in Southern China (Fig. 119) and Indo-China (Fig. 121).

We have now sketched out the classing of races, that is to say of the somatological units. It remains for us to deal with the “ethnic groups” or sociological units.

We have now outlined the classification of races, which refers to the physical units. Next, we will address the “ethnic groups” or social units.

In these the grouping must rest on linguistic, sociological, and especially geographical affinities, for sociological difference, are very often the product of differences in the immediate environment.

In these, the grouping should be based on linguistic, sociological, and especially geographical similarities, since sociological differences often stem from variations in the immediate environment.

I have already spoken of the classing of languages (p. 127) and social states (p. 124). In subordinating them to con[Pg 294]siderations of habitat, I shall give the table of mixed classification, geographico-linguistic, which I have adopted in the descriptive part of this work. But first, a few words on the relations of the different classifications of ethnic groups one with another.

I have already talked about grouping languages (p. 127) and social statuses (p. 124). By connecting them to factors related to habitat, I'll provide the table for mixed classification, geographico-linguistic, which I've used in the descriptive section of this work. But first, let me say a few words about how the different classifications of ethnic groups relate to each other.

The purely linguistic grouping does not correspond with the geographical grouping of peoples: thus in the Balkan peninsula, which forms a unit from the geographical point of view, we find at least four to six different linguistic families; in the British Isles, two or three, etc. Neither does this grouping coincide with the somatological grouping: thus, the Aderbaijani of the Caucasus and Persia, who speak a Turkish language, have the same physical type as the Hadjemi-Persians, who speak an Iranian tongue; the Negroes of North America speak English; several Indians of Mexico and South America speak Spanish as their mother-tongue; different Ugrian tribes (Zyrians, Votiaks, Permiaks) make use of Russian, etc. In European countries cases of changes of language in any given population are known to every one. The limits of the Breton language in France, of the Irish in Ireland in the sixteenth century, were at least 60 miles to the east of their present frontier. The limits of Flemish in France, of Lithuanian in Prussia, have perceptibly receded to the east during the last hundred years; it is the same with so many other linguistic limits in Europe, the only continent where accurate data on this subject exist.

The purely linguistic groupings don’t line up with the geographical groupings of people. For example, in the Balkan Peninsula, which is geographically a unit, there are at least four to six different language families; in the British Isles, there are two or three, and so on. This grouping also doesn’t match up with physical characteristics: for instance, the Azerbaijanis in the Caucasus and Persia speak a Turkish language but share the same physical traits as the Hadjemi-Persians, who speak an Iranian language. North American Black people speak English; some Indigenous people in Mexico and South America speak Spanish as their first language; various Uralic tribes (Zyrians, Votiaks, Permiaks) use Russian, and so forth. In European countries, cases of language changes within any given population are well-known. The Breton language's boundaries in France and the Irish language in Ireland during the sixteenth century were at least 60 miles east of where they are today. The borders of Flemish in France and Lithuanian in Prussia have noticeably moved eastward in the last hundred years; the same goes for many other language borders in Europe, the only continent where accurate data on this topic is available.

But similar, though isolated facts may be adduced from other parts of the world. Thus in India the Irulas, who differ physically from the Tamils, yet speak their language; many of the Kol, Dravidian, and other tribes at the present time speak Hindustani instead of their primitive tongues. According to the last census,[335] out of 2,897,591 Gonds, only 1,379,580, less than half, speak the language of their fathers.

But similar, though separate, facts can be found in other parts of the world. For example, in India, the Irulas, who are physically different from the Tamils, still speak their language. Many of the Kol, Dravidian, and other tribes today speak Hindustani instead of their original languages. According to the last census,[335] out of 2,897,591 Gonds, only 1,379,580, which is less than half, speak the language of their ancestors.

However, in certain regions where there is little intermixture due to conquest, in South America for example, language may give valuable indications for the classification of ethnic groups. As to “states of civilisation,” it is very difficult to make clear[Pg 295] sub-divisions, seeing that frequently one and the same people may be at the same time shepherds and fishers (Chukchi), hunters and tillers of the soil (Tlinkits), hunters, shepherds, and tillers of the soil (Tunguses), etc. Certain characters of civilisation, especially of material culture, are of clearly defined extent, and form what Bastian calls “ethnographic provinces.” I have spoken of them in connection with the geographical distribution of plate-armour, the throwing-stick, pile dwellings, etc. But similarity of manners and customs, and identity of objects in common use, do not yet give us the right to infer an affinity of race or language, and still less a common origin. At the very most, they may indicate frequent communication, whether pacific or not, between two peoples and “adoption” of customs and material culture. Sometimes even two distinct peoples, having never communicated with each other, may happen to produce almost identical objects and adopt almost similar manners and customs, as I have previously shown.

However, in certain areas where there's little mixing due to conquest, like in South America, language can provide important clues for categorizing ethnic groups. When it comes to “states of civilization,” it’s challenging to clarify sub-divisions, as often one group can simultaneously be shepherds and fishers (like the Chukchi), hunters and farmers (like the Tlinkits), or hunters, shepherds, and farmers (like the Tunguses), etc. Specific characteristics of civilization, especially in material culture, are clearly defined and create what Bastian calls “ethnographic provinces.” I’ve discussed these in relation to the geographical distribution of plate armor, throwing sticks, pile dwellings, and so on. However, the similarity of customs and practices and the existence of common objects don't necessarily allow us to conclude a shared race or language, let alone a common origin. At best, they might suggest frequent interactions, whether peaceful or not, between two groups and the “adoption” of customs and material culture. Sometimes, even two distinct groups that have never interacted can end up creating almost identical objects and adopting nearly similar customs, as I have previously demonstrated.

Having said this much I shall proceed to give the classification of the “ethnic groups” adopted in this work.

Having said that, I'll now share the classification of the "ethnic groups" used in this work.

I adopt in the first place the best known geographical division, into five parts, of the world (including Malaysia or the Asiatic Archipelago with Oceania).[336] I afterwards divide each part of the world into great linguistic or geographical regions, each comprising several populations or groups of populations, according to the following arrangement:—

I first use the most recognized geographical breakdown, dividing the world into five parts (including Malaysia or the Asiatic Archipelago along with Oceania).[336] Then, I divide each part of the world into major linguistic or geographical regions, each containing several populations or groups of populations, following this setup:—

I. EUROPE.—We may distinguish here two linguistic groups: Aryan and Anaryan, and a geographical group, that of the Caucasians.

I. EEUROPE.—We can differentiate here between two language groups: Aryan and Non-Aryan, as well as a geographical group, which is the Caucasians.

The Aryans are sub-divided into six groups: the Latins or Romans (examples: Spaniards, French, etc.), the Germans or Teutons (Germans, English, etc.), the Slavs (Russians, Poles,[Pg 296] etc.), the Helleno-Illyrians (Greeks and Albanians), the Celts (Bretons, Gaels, etc.), and the Letto-Lithuanians (Letts and Lithuanians). The Anaryans are represented in Europe by the Basques (whose language is not classified), and by peoples of Finno-Ugrian languages (Lapps, Western Finns, Hungarians, and Eastern Finns; the latter partly in Asia). The Caucasians are the native peoples of the Caucasus; they form four groups: Lesgian, Georgian or Kartvel, Cherkess, and Ossets. The language of the last is Iranian; the idioms of the three others form a group apart, not classified.

The Aryans are divided into six groups: the Latins or Romans (e.g., Spaniards, French, etc.), the Germans or Teutons (Germans, English, etc.), the Slavs (Russians, Poles,[Pg 296] etc.), the Helleno-Illyrians (Greeks and Albanians), the Celts (Bretons, Gaels, etc.), and the Letto-Lithuanians (Letts and Lithuanians). The Anaryans are represented in Europe by the Basques (whose language is unclassified) and by people who speak Finno-Ugrian languages (Lapps, Western Finns, Hungarians, and Eastern Finns; the latter partly in Asia). The Caucasians are the indigenous peoples of the Caucasus; they consist of four groups: Lesgian, Georgian or Kartvel, Cherkess, and Ossets. The language of the last group is Iranian, while the languages of the other three form a separate, unclassified group.

II. ASIA.—We include in this continent six great geographical regions. Northern Asia comprises three groups of populations: Yenisians (Samoyeds, Toubas, etc.), the Palæo-asiatics (Chukchis, Giliaks, Ainus), and the Tunguses (Manchu, Orochons, etc.). Central Asia likewise contains three groups of populations: Turkish (Yakuts, Kirghiz, Osmanlis, etc.), Mongol (Buriats, Kalmuks, etc.), and Thibetan (Lepchas, Bods, etc.). Eastern Asia is occupied by three “nations”: Japanese, Coreans, and Chinese. Indo-China, or the Transgangetic peninsula, includes five ethnic divisions: the Aborigines (Negritoes, Tsiam, Mois, Mossos, Naga), the Cambodians, the Burmese, the Annamese, and the Thaï (Shans, Kakhyens, Siamese, Miao-tse, etc.). The Cisgangetic peninsula, or India, includes four linguistic divisions: the Dravidians (Tamils, Khonds, etc.), the Kols (Santals, etc.), the Indo-Aryans (Hindus, Kafirs, etc.), and the peoples whose languages are not classified (Veddahs, Singhalese, Nairs, etc.). Anterior Asia is divided between two great linguistic groups: Eranian or Iranian (Persians, Afghans, Kurds, etc.) and Semite (Syrians and Arabs, the latter partly in Africa), and further comprises some other peoples not classified (Brahuis, Takhtajis), or cosmopolites (Gypsies and Jews).

II. ASIA.—This continent is made up of six major geographical regions. Northern Asia includes three population groups: the Yenisians (Samoyeds, Toubas, etc.), the Palæo-asiatics (Chukchis, Giliaks, Ainus), and the Tunguses (Manchu, Orochons, etc.). Central Asia also has three population groups: Turkish (Yakuts, Kirghiz, Osmanlis, etc.), Mongol (Buriats, Kalmuks, etc.), and Thibetan (Lepchas, Bods, etc.). Eastern Asia is home to three “nations”: Japanese, Coreans, and Chinese. Indo-China, or the Transgangetic peninsula, consists of five ethnic divisions: the Aborigines (Negritoes, Tsiam, Mois, Mossos, Naga), the Cambodians, the Burmese, the Annamese, and the Thaï (Shans, Kakhyens, Siamese, Miao-tse, etc.). The Cisgangetic peninsula, or India, consists of four linguistic divisions: the Dravidians (Tamils, Khonds, etc.), the Kols (Santals, etc.), the Indo-Aryans (Hindus, Kafirs, etc.), and the peoples whose languages are not classified (Veddahs, Singhalese, Nairs, etc.). Anterior Asia is divided into two main linguistic groups: Eranian or Iranian (Persians, Afghans, Kurds, etc.) and Semite (Syrians and Arabs, partly in Africa), and also includes some other not classified groups (Brahuis, Takhtajis), or cosmopolites (Gypsies and Jews).

III. AFRICA.—In this continent there are three great divisions: one linguistic in the north, the Semito-Hamites; and two ethnic or even somatological ones in the south, the Negroes and the Bushmen-Hottentots. The peoples speaking Semitic or Hamitic languages may be united into three groups: the[Pg 297] Arabo-Berbers (Touaregs, Fellahs, etc.), the Ethiopians (Gallas, Bejas, Abyssinians), and the Fulah-Zandehs (Fulahs, Niam-Niams, Masai, etc.). The Bushmen-Hottentots form an ethno-somatological group quite apart. As to the Negroes, they may be divided as follows:—the Negrilloes or Pygmies (Akkas, Batuas, etc.), the Nigritians or Negroes properly so called (Dinkas, Hausas, Wolofs, Krus, Tshis, etc.), and the Bantus (Dwalas, Batekes, Balubas, Swaheli, Kafirs, Bechuanas, etc.). The populations of the Island of Madagascar also form a linguistic and geographical group apart.

III. AFRICA.—On this continent, there are three main divisions: one linguistic in the north, consisting of the Semito-Hamites, and two ethnic or even somatological groups in the south, the Negroes and the Bushmen-Hottentots. The peoples who speak Semitic or Hamitic languages can be categorized into three groups: the[Pg 297] Arabo-Berbers (Touaregs, Fellahs, etc.), the Ethiopians (Gallas, Bejas, Abyssinians), and the Fulah-Zandehs (Fulahs, Niam-Niams, Masai, etc.). The Bushmen-Hottentots are distinct as an ethno-somatological group. Regarding the Negroes, they can be divided as follows: the Negrilloes or Pygmies (Akkas, Batuas, etc.), the Nigritians or Negroes proper (Dinkas, Hausas, Wolofs, Krus, Tshis, etc.), and the Bantus (Dwalas, Batekes, Balubas, Swahili, Kafirs, Bechuanas, etc.). The populations of the Island of Madagascar also constitute a linguistic and geographical group of their own.

IV. OCEANIA.—Four ethnic regions are here well defined: Malaysia, Australia, Melanesia, and Polynesia. Malaysia (to which, strictly speaking, should be joined a portion of the populations of Madagascar, Indo-China, and the Sino-Japanese islands) comprises four great groups of populations: the Negritoes (Aeta, etc.), the Indonesians (Battas, Tagals, etc.), and mixed peoples like the Javanese, the Bugis, the Malays, etc. Australia is peopled, over and above the white or yellow colonists, by only one race-people, the Australians; the Tasmanians who lived near them no longer exist. Melanesia is peopled by Papuans (of New Guinea), and by Melanesians properly so called (of New Caledonia, Solomon Islands, etc.). Lastly, Polynesia comprises the Polynesians properly so called (Samoans, Tahitians), and the Micronesians (natives of the Carolines, the Marshall Islands, etc.).

IV. OOceania.—Four ethnic regions are clearly defined here: Malaysia, Australia, Melanesia, and Polynesia. Malaysia, which should actually include some populations from Madagascar, Indo-China, and the Sino-Japanese islands, consists of four major population groups: the Negritoes (like the Aeta, etc.), the Indonesians (such as the Battas, Tagals, etc.), and mixed peoples including the Javanese, Bugis, Malays, and others. Australia is inhabited, in addition to white or yellow colonists, by only one racial group, the Australians; the Tasmanians who once lived nearby are no longer around. Melanesia is populated by Papuans (from New Guinea) and by Melanesians (from New Caledonia, Solomon Islands, etc.). Finally, Polynesia includes the Polynesians (like the Samoans and Tahitians) and the Micronesians (natives of the Carolines, Marshall Islands, etc.).

V. AMERICA.—For North America we may adopt three ethno-geographical groups: the Eskimo, with the Aleuts; the American Indians (Athapascans, Yumas, Tlinkits, etc.); and the Indians of Mexico and of Central America (Aztecs, Pimas, Miztecs, Mayas, Isthmians, Ulvas, etc.).

V. AMERICA.—For North America, we can identify three ethnic and geographical groups: the Eskimo, along with the Aleuts; the American Indians (Athapascans, Yumas, Tlinkits, etc.); and the Indians of Mexico and Central America (Aztecs, Pimas, Miztecs, Mayas, Isthmians, Ulvas, etc.).

South America has four geographical groupings: the Andeans (Chibchas, Quechua-Aymara, etc.); the Amazonians (Caribs, Arawak, Pano, Miranha, etc.); the Indians of East Brazil, and of the central region (Tupi-Guarani, Ges or Botocudo-Kayapo, etc.); and, finally, the Patagonians, tribes of Chaco, of the Pampas, etc., with the Fuegians.

South America has four geographical groups: the Andeans (Chibchas, Quechua-Aymara, etc.); the Amazonians (Caribs, Arawak, Pano, Miranha, etc.); the Indigenous people of East Brazil and the central region (Tupi-Guarani, Ges or Botocudo-Kayapo, etc.); and, lastly, the Patagonians, tribes from Chaco, the Pampas, etc., along with the Fuegians.

It is likewise well, as regards the New World, to take into[Pg 298] account the imported Negroes, and the descendants of colonists: Anglo-Saxon in the north, Hispano-Lusitanians in the south. These settlers form the nucleus of the different civilised nations of the two Americas, around which are grouped other elements from Europe or originating on the spot (Half-breeds of various degrees, Quadroons, Creoles, etc.).

It’s also important to consider the imported Africans and the descendants of colonists in the New World: Anglo-Saxon people in the north and Hispano-Lusitanians in the south. These settlers are the core of the various civilized nations in the Americas, surrounded by other groups from Europe or from the local population (like mestizos of different backgrounds, quadroons, creoles, etc.).


CHAPTER IX.

RACES AND PEOPLES OF EUROPE.

Ethnic Groups of Europe.

Problem of European ethnogeny—I. ANCIENT INHABITANTS OF EUROPEPrehistoric races—Quaternary period—Glacial and interglacial periods—Quaternary skulls—Spy and Chancelade races or types—Races of the neolithic period—Races of the age of metals—Aryan question—Position of the problem—Migration of European peoples in the historic period—II. EUROPEAN RACES OF THE PRESENT DAY—Characteristics of the six principal races and the four secondary races—III. PRESENT PEOPLES OF EUROPEA. Aryan peoples: Latins, Germans, Slavs, Letto-Lithuanians, Celts, Illyro-Hellenes—B. Anaryan peoples: Basques, Finns, etc.—C. Caucasian peoples: Lesgians, Georgians, etc.

Problem of European origins—I. AANCIENT INHABITANTS OF EEUROPEPrehistoric races—Quaternary period—Glacial and interglacial periods—Quaternary skulls—Spy and Chancelade races or types—Races of the Neolithic period—Races of the metal age—Aryan question—Context of the problem—Migration of European peoples in the historic period—II. EEUROPEAN RACES OF TODAY—Traits of the six main races and the four secondary races—III. PRESPECTED INDIGENOUS PEOPLES OF EEUROPEA. Aryan peoples: Latins, Germans, Slavs, Letto-Lithuanians, Celts, Illyro-Hellenes—B. Non-Aryan peoples: Basques, Finns, etc.—C. Caucasian peoples: Lesgians, Georgians, etc.

Of all parts of the world Europe presents the most favourable conditions for the interblending of peoples. Easy of access, a mere peninsula of Asia, from which the Ural mountains and straits a few miles wide hardly separate it, Europe has a totally different configuration from the continental colossus, heavy and vague in outline, to which it is attached. Indented by numberless gulfs, bays, and creeks, provided with several secondary peninsulas, crossed by rivers having no cataracts, and for the most part navigable, it offers every facility for communication and change of place to ethnic groups. Thus from the dawn of history, and even from prehistoric times, a perpetual eddying has taken place there, a coming and going of peoples in search of fortune and better settlements.

Of all the regions in the world, Europe offers the best conditions for bringing together different peoples. It's easy to access, just a peninsula of Asia, with only the Ural mountains and narrow straits separating it. Europe has a completely different shape from the vast and indistinct continent it's attached to. With countless gulfs, bays, and inlets, plus several secondary peninsulas, and rivers that are mostly navigable and have no waterfalls, it provides every opportunity for communication and movement among ethnic groups. Therefore, since the earliest times, even in prehistoric eras, there has been a constant flow of people coming and going, searching for better opportunities and places to live.

These migrations, combined with innumerable wars and active commerce, have produced such a blending of races, such successive changes in the manners and customs and languages spoken, that it is very difficult to separate from this chaos the[Pg 300] elements of European ethnogeny, and that in spite of the great number of historical and linguistic works published on the subject. We may, however, thanks to the progress in prehistoric, anthropological, and ethnographical studies, obtain a glimpse of the main outlines of this ethnogeny, in which history and linguistics give us often but vague, and in any case very slight information.

These migrations, along with countless wars and thriving trade, have created such a mix of races and continuous changes in customs, practices, and languages spoken that it's really hard to untangle the core elements of European ethnic origins from this chaos, even with all the historical and linguistic works that have been published on the topic. However, thanks to advancements in prehistoric, anthropological, and ethnographical studies, we can get a sense of the main outlines of this ethnic origin, although history and linguistics often provide only vague and minimal information.

The better to understand the distribution of races at the present day, we must cast a glance at those which are extinct, going back to geological times removed from us by several hundreds or even thousands of centuries.

To better understand the current distribution of races, we need to look at those that are extinct, going back to geological times that are separated from us by hundreds or even thousands of years.

I.—ANCIENT INHABITANTS OF EUROPE.

Geological Times.—The portions of Europe emerging towards the end of the tertiary period of the geological history of our globe have been inhabited by man, probably from this very time, and assuredly from the quaternary period which succeeded it—the predecessor of the present geological period. The existence of tertiary man in Europe has not, however, been directly proved. The finds of artificially chipped flints in the miocene and pliocene beds in France (at Thenay, Puy-Courny, and Saint-Prest), in England (the uplands of Kent, Cromer), and in Portugal (Otta, near Lisbon); the discovery made in Italy (Monte Aperto) of bones with rude carvings on them, asserted to be the work of pliocene man, and so many other interesting facts, are now called in question by leading men of science, and have few supporters at the present day.[337] In every case in these finds we have to deal only with objects supposed to be worked by man, or by some[Pg 301] hypothetical being, for no remains of human bones have been found up to the present time in the tertiary beds of Europe.[338]

Geological Times.—The parts of Europe that emerged toward the end of the tertiary period in Earth's geological history have likely been inhabited by humans since that time, and certainly from the quaternary period that followed it—the era preceding the current geological period. However, the existence of tertiary man in Europe has not been directly proven. The discoveries of intentionally chipped flint in the Miocene and Pliocene layers in France (at Thenay, Puy-Courny, and Saint-Prest), in England (the highlands of Kent, Cromer), and in Portugal (Otta, near Lisbon); the find in Italy (Monte Aperto) of bones with crude carvings believed to be made by Pliocene humans, along with many other intriguing facts, are now being questioned by leading scientists and have few supporters today.[337] In each of these findings, we are dealing only with objects thought to be made by humans or by some[Pg 301] hypothetical being, as no human bones have been discovered so far in the tertiary layers of Europe.[338]

It is only in quaternary beds that the presence of human bones has been ascertained beyond question. The quaternary age in Europe is characterised, as we know, by the succession of “glacial periods,” each of which comprises a greater or less extension of glaciers, followed by their withdrawal (“interglacial periods”), with accompanying changes of climate. The well-known geologist Geikie[339] claims, from the end of the pliocene age to proto-historic times, the existence in Europe of six glacial periods; but most other geologists (Penck, Boule) reduce this number to two or three, considering the movements of the glaciers of some of Geikie’s periods as purely local phenomena, having exercised no influence on the continent as a whole.

Human bones have only been confirmed in quaternary layers without a doubt. The quaternary age in Europe is marked, as we know, by a series of “glacial periods,” each involving varying extents of glaciers followed by their retreat (“interglacial periods”), along with shifts in climate. The well-known geologist Geikie[339] asserts that from the end of the pliocene age to proto-historic times, there were six glacial periods in Europe; however, most other geologists (Penck, Boule) argue that there were only two or three, viewing the glacier movements during some of Geikie's periods as local events that had no impact on the continent as a whole.

At the beginning of quaternary times the climate of Europe was not the same as that of the present day; hot and moist, it was favourable to the growth of a sub-tropical flora. Dense forests gave shelter to animals which no longer exist in our latitudes—the Elephas meridionalis, a survival of the pliocene age, the Rhinoceros Etruscus, etc.

At the start of the Quaternary period, Europe's climate was different from today’s; it was hot and humid, which supported the growth of subtropical plants. Thick forests provided a home for animals that no longer live in our regions, like the Elephas meridionalis, a remnant from the Pliocene epoch, and the Rhinoceros Etruscus, among others.

But soon, from causes still imperfectly known, ice began to accumulate around certain elevated points of Northern Europe; a veritable “mer de glace” covered all Scandinavia, almost the whole of Great Britain, the emerged lands which were between these two countries, as well as the north of Germany and half of Russia.[340] This is the first glacial period, or the period of the[Pg 302] great spread of glaciers (Map 1). Such an accumulation of ice, combined with a change of climate, which had become cold and moist, was not very favourable to the peopling of the country. Besides, if we consider that all the great mountain chains, the Alps, the Pyrenees, the Caucasian range, with their advanced peaks, were covered entirely with ice, and that the Aralo-Caspian depression was filled with water as far as the vicinity of Kazan on the north (Map 1), we shall easily understand that the habitable space thus available for man at this period in Europe was very restricted.

But soon, for reasons still not fully understood, ice started to build up around certain high points in Northern Europe; a true “sea of ice” blanketed all of Scandinavia, nearly all of Great Britain, the land that emerged between these two areas, as well as the north of Germany and half of Russia.[340] This is the first glacial period, or the time of the[Pg 302] great spread of glaciers (Map 1). Such a buildup of ice, along with a shift to a cold and wet climate, was not very favorable for populating the region. Additionally, if we consider that all the major mountain ranges, like the Alps, the Pyrenees, and the Caucasus, with their towering peaks, were completely covered with ice, and that the Aralo-Caspian depression was filled with water up to the area near Kazan to the north (Map 1), we can easily understand that the space available for human habitation in Europe during this time was very limited.

Chellean Flint Implement

FIG. 84.—Chellean flint implement,
Saint-Acheul (Somme); half natural size.
(After G. and A. de Mortillet.)

FInstagram. 84.—Chellean flint tool,
Saint-Acheul (Somme); half natural size.
(After G. and A. de Mortillet.)

France with Belgium, the south of England, the three southern peninsulas (Iberian, Appenine, and Balkan), the south of Germany, Austria-Hungary, the plains of Southern Russia as far as the Volga, and the basin of the Kama, communicating on the south of the Ural by a narrow isthmus with the Siberian steppes—these were the only countries which quaternary man could occupy. These conditions only changed at the time that the glaciers began to withdraw (first interglacial period). The climate became milder again, and the Arctic flora gave place to the flora of the forests of the Temperate Zone. It is to this period that the most undoubtedly ancient vestiges of mankind in Europe are to be attributed.

France along with Belgium, the southern part of England, the three southern peninsulas (Iberian, Apennine, and Balkan), the southern part of Germany, Austria-Hungary, the plains of Southern Russia up to the Volga, and the Kama basin, connected to the Siberian steppes by a narrow isthmus south of the Urals—these were the only regions that quaternary humans could inhabit. This situation changed only when the glaciers began to retreat (first interglacial period). The climate warmed up again, and the Arctic vegetation was replaced by the flora of the Temperate Zone forests. This period is when the most definitive ancient traces of humans in Europe can be dated.

Europe, First Glacial Period

MAP 1.—Europe in the first glacial period. Light grey, glaciers;
medium grey, sea; dark grey, land; white points, floating ice.
(After De Geer.)

MAP 1.—Europe in the first glacial period. Light grey represents glaciers;
medium grey indicates sea; dark grey shows land; white dots are floating ice.
(After De Geer.)

The men of that period have handed down to us implements [Pg 304] of a very rude type: fragments of flint of pointed form, the sinuous edges of which are scarcely trimmed by the removal of some flakes.[341] These implements are called “knuckle-dusters” (G. de Mortillet), or “Chellean axes” (Fig. 84), from the Chelles bed in the valley of the Seine; but such implements are found in sitû in numerous places—in France (especially in the valley of the Somme), in England (valleys of the Ouse and the Thames), in Spain, Portugal, Austria, Belgium, etc.[342]

The men of that time passed down to us tools that are quite basic: pieces of flint in a pointed shape, with their wavy edges only slightly shaped by the removal of some flakes. These tools are known as “knuckle-dusters” (G. de Mortillet) or “Chellean axes” (Fig. 84), named after the Chelles bed in the Seine Valley; however, these tools are found in many locations—throughout France (especially in the Somme Valley), in England (in the Ouse and Thames valleys), as well as in Spain, Portugal, Austria, Belgium, and more.

The first interglacial period, characterised, as we have just seen, by a mild and moist climate, was followed by a new glacier invasion (second glacial period). This time the sea of ice did not extend as far as in the first period: it covered Ireland, Scotland, the north of England (as far as Yorkshire), Scandinavia, Finland, and stopped in Germany and Russia at a line passing nearly through the present site of Hamburg, Berlin, Warsaw, Vilna, Novgorod, Lake Onega, Archangel.

The first interglacial period, characterized, as we've just seen, by a mild and wet climate, was followed by another glacier invasion (second glacial period). This time, the ice didn't reach as far as it did in the first period: it covered Ireland, Scotland, the northern part of England (up to Yorkshire), Scandinavia, and Finland, stopping in Germany and Russia along a line that nearly goes through the current locations of Hamburg, Berlin, Warsaw, Vilna, Novgorod, Lake Onega, and Archangel.

To this period succeeded, after the withdrawal of the glaciers, a period called “post-glacial” (or second interglacial period), characterised at first by a continental climate, dry, with a very cold winter, and a short but hot summer, and by flora of the Tundras and steppes. At the end of this epoch, the climate becoming milder, there appeared the flora of the meadows and forests, which has remained to the present day.[343] The harsh[Pg 305] climate of the beginning of this period could only be favourable to the preservation and growth of thick-furred animals: the mammoth or elephant with curved tusks (Elephas primigenius), the rhinoceros with divided nostrils (R. tichorinus), the reindeer (Cervus tarandus), the saiga, the lemming, etc.

After the glaciers retreated, a phase known as the "post-glacial" (or second interglacial period) began. This period was initially marked by a continental climate that was dry, with very cold winters and short but hot summers, accompanied by tundra and steppe vegetation. As this era progressed and the climate became milder, meadow and forest flora emerged, which still exists today.[343] The harsh[Pg 305] climate at the start of this period was only suitable for the survival and proliferation of thick-furred animals: the mammoth or elephant with curved tusks (Elephas primigenius), the rhinoceros with divided nostrils (R. tichorinus), the reindeer (Cervus tarandus), the saiga, the lemming, and others.

The man who inhabited Europe during the two overflows of the glaciers and the two interglacial periods is known to us chiefly by the stone implements which are found in the strata of these periods, along with the bones of animals which are now extinct or which have migrated into other regions. It must not be inferred from this that palæolithic man used no other but stone tools or weapons. The finds of objects made out of bone, horn, stag’s horn, shell, and wood belonging to these periods are there to bear witness to the contrary. Only these finds are much more rare, on account of the ease with which bone, horn, and especially wood, decompose after a more or less prolonged stay in the ground. Basing their conclusions on the variety of the forms of the stone implements and partly on the frequent occurrence of bone objects, palæethnologists have divided the two interglacial periods which form their stone age or palæolithic period into two or three periods, according to country. It would have been better, in my opinion, to have replaced in the present instance the word “period” by the term “state of civilisation,” for these periods are far from being synchronous throughout the whole of Europe; the Vogules and the Samoyeds were in the “stone age” hardly a century ago.

The people who lived in Europe during the times when glaciers advanced and retreated, as well as during the warmer periods in between, are mostly known to us through the stone tools found in the layers from these times, along with the bones of animals that are now extinct or have moved to different areas. However, we shouldn't assume that prehistoric humans only used stone tools and weapons. There have been discoveries of items made from bone, antler, shell, and wood dating back to these periods, which prove otherwise. These finds are just much rarer because bone, antler, and especially wood break down easily after being in the ground for a while. Based on the variety of stone tools and the common occurrence of bone objects, prehistoric researchers have divided the two warmer periods that make up their stone age or paleolithic period into two or three phases, depending on the country. In my view, it would have been more appropriate to use the term “state of civilization” instead of “period” here, because these phases are not synchronous across all of Europe; the Voguls and Samoyeds were still in the “stone age” less than a century ago.

Nevertheless, for certain defined regions, we may consider it settled that the first so-called Chellean “period,” characterised by the “knuckle-duster,” belongs, as we have seen (p. 302), to the first interglacial period, and that the others coincide with the second (Boule). In a general way, we may distinguish in the latter a more ancient period, characterised by the abundance of mammoth bones and by smaller and more varied implements than the Chellean tool; and a more recent period characterised by the presence of the reindeer in Central and Western Europe, by the frequent occurrence of bone tools, and[Pg 306] by the appearance of the graphic arts, at least in certain regions.

Nevertheless, for certain specific regions, we can agree that the first so-called Chellean “period,” marked by the “knuckle-duster,” belongs, as we have noted (p. 302), to the first interglacial period, while the others align with the second (Boule). Generally, we can differentiate within the latter a more ancient phase, characterized by the abundance of mammoth bones and smaller, more diverse tools compared to the Chellean tool; and a more recent phase highlighted by the presence of reindeer in Central and Western Europe, the frequent use of bone tools, and[Pg 306] the emergence of graphic arts, at least in certain areas.

The first of these “periods” is known as the Mousterian; it is well represented in France, Belgium, southern Germany, Bohemia, and England.[344]

The first of these “periods” is known as the Mousterian; it is well represented in France, Belgium, southern Germany, Bohemia, and England.[344]

Quaternary Art (Magdalenian Period)

FIG. 85.—Quaternary art (Magdalenian period):
B, dagger of reindeer horn with sculptured haft,
Laugerie-Haute (Dordogne); A, “Baton of
command” with carving (La Madeleine, Dord.);
two-thirds natural size.
(After G. and A. de Mortillet.)

FIG. 85.—Quaternary art (Magdalenian period):
B, reindeer horn dagger with a carved handle,
Laugerie-Haute (Dordogne); A, “Command Baton” with carving (La Madeleine, Dord.);
two-thirds natural size.
(After G. and A. de Mortillet.)

Instead of a single flint implement, the “knuckle-duster,” which was used variously in the Chellean period, with or without a handle, as an axe, hammer, and dagger, a variety of implements make their appearance in the Mousterian period, and, among others, tools needed in the manufacture of garments, blades to open and skin animals, scrapers to make their hides supple, sharp-edged awls for cutting the skin and when necessary making cords or straps from it, for piercing it and making button-holes.[345] On the other hand, the use of the bow does not seem to have been known, for in the Mousterian deposits there have not been found any arrow-heads either in flint or bone. These arrow-heads appear only in the next period, generally called the reindeer age; in France styled, according to the classification of G. de Mortillet, the Magdalenian period.[346] The man of this period was still in the hunting stage,[Pg 307] but had more perfect hunting weapons than in the Mousterian period; he was also occasionally a fisher, and probably reared the reindeer. But his especial characteristic in certain regions, as in the south-west of France, is that he was a consummate artist. He has left us admirable carvings (Fig. 85, B), and engravings on bone most expressive in design (Fig. 85, A).[347]

Instead of a single flint tool, the “knuckle-duster,” which was used in various ways during the Chellean period—as an axe, hammer, and dagger, with or without a handle—multiple tools emerged in the Mousterian period. These included tools needed for making clothes, blades for opening and skinning animals, scrapers for softening hides, and sharp awls for cutting skin and, when necessary, creating cords or straps, and making buttonholes.[345] On the other hand, there’s no evidence that the bow was known during this time since no arrowheads made of flint or bone have been found in the Mousterian layers. Arrowheads first appear in the subsequent period, commonly referred to as the reindeer age; in France, it’s classified as the Magdalenian period, according to G. de Mortillet.[346] People during this period were still primarily hunters but had better hunting tools compared to the Mousterian period; they also occasionally fished and likely domesticated reindeer. However, what stands out particularly in certain areas, like the southwest of France, is that they were also exceptional artists. They left behind remarkable carvings (Fig. 85, B) and bone engravings that are highly expressive in design (Fig. 85, A).[347]

After the second glacial period, the era of great overflows and withdrawals of the glaciers came to a definite close for Central Europe; but it continued in the north, in Scotland, and especially around the Baltic, even as it is still prolonged to our own day in Greenland and Iceland.

After the second ice age, the time of massive advances and retreats of glaciers ended for Central Europe; however, it persisted in the north, in Scotland, and especially around the Baltic, and it continues even today in Greenland and Iceland.

According to Geikie and De Geer, the glaciers advanced and withdrew thrice again in Scandinavia and Scotland after continental Europe was almost entirely rid of them (Geikie’s fourth to sixth glacial periods).[348]

According to Geikie and De Geer, the glaciers moved forward and receded three more times in Scandinavia and Scotland after continental Europe had mostly shed them (Geikie’s fourth to sixth glacial periods).[348]

A slow sinking of the land, which submerged beneath the ocean all the countries to the north and north-east of Europe, marks the end of the quaternary period, and the beginning of the present era in the geological sense of the word. This era is characterised, from the archæological point of view, by the substitution for the “earlier stone age” (palæolithic period) of another “age,” or, better, of another stage of civilisation, that of the later stone age (neolithic).

A gradual sinking of the land, which caused all the countries to the north and northeast of Europe to be submerged under the ocean, marks the end of the Quaternary period and the start of the current geological era. This era is defined, from an archaeological perspective, by the replacement of the “earlier Stone Age” (Paleolithic period) with another “age,” or more accurately, another stage of civilization, that of the later Stone Age (Neolithic).

However, this “age” did not come in abruptly, after a lapse of time, the hiatus of ancient palæethnologists, during which man retired, it was supposed, from Central Europe and emigrated towards the north after the reindeer.[349] There must have been a transitional or mesolithic period.[350] Nor was neolithic civilisation established everywhere at the same time. Thus the Scandinavian peninsula, from[Pg 309] which the glaciers have not yet altogether withdrawn, was in course of formation during this period.[351] The “neolithic folk,” settling at first in Denmark, then in Gothland, have left us in the kitchen-middens (kitchen refuse, accumulations of shells) certain chipped stone implements, a sort of hatchet of a special form, contemporaneous with the neolithic tools of the rest of Europe.

However, this "age" didn't start all at once; after a while, during the hiatus of ancient paleontologists, it was thought that humans moved out of Central Europe and migrated north following the reindeer.[349] There must have been a transitional or Mesolithic period.[350] Neolithic civilization also wasn't established everywhere at once. For example, the Scandinavian peninsula, where the glaciers haven't fully retreated yet, was forming during this time.[351] The "neolithic people," initially settling in Denmark and later in Gothland, left us kitchen middens (kitchen waste, piles of shells) that contained certain chipped stone tools, including a specific type of hatchet, which were contemporary with the neolithic tools found throughout the rest of Europe.

These tools are associated in the geological beds and prehistoric stations with other objects which denote among the Europeans of this period a fairly advanced civilisation: knowledge of agriculture, pottery, the weaving of stuffs, the rearing of cattle.

These tools are found in geological layers and ancient sites alongside other items that indicate a relatively advanced civilization among Europeans of this time: knowledge of farming, pottery, textile weaving, and animal husbandry.

The “neolithic people” constructed pile-dwellings near lakesides, in Switzerland, France, Italy, Ireland; they buried their dead under dolmens, and raised other megalithic monuments (upright stones, the rows at Carnac, etc.), of which the meaning has not yet been cleared up.

The “Neolithic people” built pile dwellings by lakesides in Switzerland, France, Italy, and Ireland. They buried their dead under dolmens and erected other megalithic monuments (like upright stones and the rows at Carnac), the meaning of which is still not completely understood.

As may have been seen from this brief account, it is almost perfectly well known what were the stages of civilisation of the Europeans in the quaternary and neolithic periods. It is different with regard to the physical type of these Europeans. In fact, of interglacial man, contemporary of the Elephas antiquus, the maker of those flint implements exhumed from the lowest beds of the oldest quaternary alluvia, we have no remains, except perhaps two molar teeth, found by Nehring in the Taubach station (near Weimar), and some other disputed fragments (Neanderthal, Brux, and Tilbury skulls). This statement, made for the first time by Boule in 1888, is now admitted by many palæethnologists.[352] As far as man contemporary[Pg 310] with the mammoth (Elephas primigenius) and the reindeer is concerned, we possess a certain number of skulls and bones from the river drifts and caves. But a doubt exists as to the beds in which many of these specimens were found, and consequently as to their date. Eliminating all those of unknown or uncertain age, we have at the most, for the whole of Europe, but a dozen skulls or fragments of skulls and a score of other bones genuinely quaternary.[353] Evidently that is insufficient for the forming of an opinion on the physical type of quaternary Europeans. However, one significant fact is elicited from an examination of this small series, and it is this: that all the skulls composing it are very long, very dolichocephalic. The exceptions put forward, like the skulls of upper Grenelle (Seine), Furfooz (Belgium), La Truchère (Saône-et-Loire), Valle do Areciro[Pg 311] (Portugal), do not conflict with this assertion; there are reasons for believing that certain of these skulls belong to the neolithic period, and that others date from the mesolithic period, or, at the very outside, from the end of the quaternary period. These then, even admitting the authenticity of their date, would only be isolated precursors of the neolithic brachycephals with whom we shall deal further on.

As this brief overview shows, the stages of civilization of Europeans during the quaternary and neolithic periods are well understood. However, the physical characteristics of these Europeans are less clear. For example, when it comes to interglacial humans who coexisted with the Elephas antiquus, the creators of flint tools dug up from the oldest quaternary alluvium, we have very few remains—perhaps just two molar teeth discovered by Nehring at the Taubach station (near Weimar) and some other debated fragments (like those from the Neanderthal, Brux, and Tilbury skulls). This claim, first made by Boule in 1888, is now accepted by many paleoeanthropologists.[352] In terms of humans contemporary with the mammoth (Elephas primigenius) and the reindeer, we have a number of skulls and bones found in river deposits and caves. However, there is uncertainty about the layers where many of these specimens were discovered, which raises questions about their dating. If we exclude those of unknown or uncertain age, we are left with at most a dozen skulls or skull fragments and around twenty other bones that can genuinely be classified as quaternary.[353] Clearly, this is insufficient for forming a solid opinion on the physical type of quaternary Europeans. Nevertheless, one notable fact emerges from analyzing this small collection: all the skulls are very long and have a dolichocephalic shape. The exceptions cited, such as the skulls from upper Grenelle (Seine), Furfooz (Belgium), La Truchère (Saône-et-Loire), and Valle do Areciro[Pg 310] (Portugal), do not contradict this claim; there are reasons to suspect that some of these skulls are from the neolithic period, while others may date to the mesolithic period, or at the very latest, the end of the quaternary period. Thus, even if we accept their dating, these would only be isolated early examples of the neolithic brachycephals, which we will discuss further.

Let us return to our palæolithic dolichocephals. These appear to belong to two distinct types, the so-called Neanderthal or Spy type, referred to the Mousterian period, very well represented by the skulls and bones found at Spy, near Namur in Belgium; then the type of the Magdalenian period, represented by the skulls exhumed at Laugerie-Basse and Chancelade (Dordogne). The first of these types is characterised by marked dolichocephaly (ceph. ind. from 70 to 75.3), by the exceedingly low and retreating forehead, by the prominent brow ridges (Fig. 86), and probably by a low stature (about 1 m. 59). Several pithecoid characters are observable on the skull and bones of this type, the presence of which has been noted, from England (skull from Bury St. Edmunds, in Suffolk), Belgium (Spy skull, La Naulette jaw), and perhaps the[Pg 312] Rhenish province (Neanderthal skull), to the Pyrenees (jaw found at Malarnau, Ariège), Bohemia, Moravia (Predmost and Podbaba skulls), and Italy (Olmo skull). Like all the other prehistoric races, that of Neanderthal or Spy has not entirely disappeared; Neanderthaloid skulls are found, few in number it is true, in several prehistoric or historic burial-places (at Furfooz in Belgium, in the dolmens of France, England, Ireland, etc.). Scattered here and there, some rare individuals may still be observed in the populations of the present day showing the characters of this race, according to the statements of Roujoux, Quatrefages, Virchow, Kollmann, and other anthropologists.[354] The second so-called Laugerie-Chancelade race (Hervé) is represented at the present day by only three or four skulls and some other bones found at Laugerie-Basse, Chancelade (Dordogne), and Sordes (Landes). It is characterised by a dolichocephaly almost equal to that of the preceding race, but it differs from it in the high and broad forehead, the capacious skull, the absence of the brow ridges, the high orbits, and especially the face with projecting cheek-bones, high and broad at the same time (Fig. 87). Its stature[Pg 313] is rather low. This is the type to which approximates the race of the Baumes-Chaudes of Hervé or the true race of Cro-Magnon, which appeared quite at the end of the Magdalenian, if not at the transitional or mesolithic period. The latter race differs from the former in its very pronounced dolichocephaly (ceph. ind. from 63 to 74.8), its lower face and orbits, its very lofty stature (from 1 m. 71 to 1 m. 80), and many other characters.[355] We see then, at the beginning of the neolithic period, the second quaternary dolichocephalic race still existing slightly modified, but we also see the earliest brachycephals appearing along with it.

Let’s go back to our Paleolithic dolichocephals. They seem to belong to two distinct types: the so-called Neanderthal or Spy type, associated with the Mousterian period, well-represented by the skulls and bones found at Spy, near Namur in Belgium; and the type from the Magdalenian period, represented by the skulls discovered at Laugerie-Basse and Chancelade in Dordogne. The first type is characterized by notable dolichocephaly (ceph. ind. from 70 to 75.3), a very low and receding forehead, prominent brow ridges (Fig. 86), and likely a low stature (about 1 min. 59). Some apelike features can be observed on the skull and bones of this type, noted from places including England (skull from Bury St. Edmunds in Suffolk), Belgium (Spy skull, La Naulette jaw), possibly the[Pg 312] Rhenish province (Neanderthal skull), as well as the Pyrenees (jaw found in Malarnau, Ariège), Bohemia, Moravia (Predmost and Podbaba skulls), and Italy (Olmo skull). Like other prehistoric races, the Neanderthal or Spy type hasn’t completely disappeared; Neanderthaloid skulls, though rare, have been found in several prehistoric or historic burial sites (at Furfooz in Belgium, in dolmens throughout France, England, Ireland, etc.). Here and there, some rare individuals showing characteristics of this race can still be seen in modern populations, according to the reports of Roujoux, Quatrefages, Virchow, Kollmann, and other anthropologists.[354] The second type, known as the Laugerie-Chancelade race (Hervé), is currently represented by only three or four skulls and some other bones found at Laugerie-Basse, Chancelade (Dordogne), and Sordes (Landes). This type is characterized by dolichocephaly that is nearly equal to that of the earlier race, but it differs in having a high, broad forehead, spacious skull, no brow ridges, high orbits, and a face with pronounced cheekbones that are both high and broad (Fig. 87). Its stature[Pg 313] is relatively low. This is the type that closely resembles the race of the Baumes-Chaudes described by Hervé or the true race of Cro-Magnon, which emerged towards the end of the Magdalenian period, if not during the transitional or Mesolithic period. This latter race differs from the former in its very pronounced dolichocephaly (ceph. ind. from 63 to 74.8), its lower face and orbits, its tall stature (ranging from 1 min. 71 to 1 minute. 80), and many other features.[355] Therefore, at the start of the Neolithic period, we see the second Quaternary dolichocephalic race still existing with slight modifications, while we also observe the earliest brachycephals appearing alongside it.

Spy Skull

FIG. 86.—Spy skull, first quaternary race.
(After Fraipont and Jacques.)

FInstagram 86.—Spy skull, first quaternary race.
(After Fraipont and Jacques.)

Several hundred skulls, found in neolithic burial-places in France, Switzerland, Austria, and Germany, exhibit an intermixture of brachycephals and dolichocephals. According to the more or less frequent occurrence of the former in relation to the latter in each burial, we may, with Hervé,[356] trace the route followed by these brachycephals of Central Europe, from the plains of Hungary, by the valley of the Danube, into Belgium and Switzerland; from these last-named countries they flung themselves on the dolichocephalic populations of France and modified the primitive type, especially in the plains of the north-east and in the Alpine region.

Several hundred skulls found in Neolithic burial sites in France, Switzerland, Austria, and Germany show a mix of round-headed and long-headed individuals. Based on how frequently the round-headed individuals appear compared to the long-headed ones in each burial, we can, as Hervé suggests,[356] trace the path taken by these round-headed people from the plains of Hungary, through the Danube valley, into Belgium and Switzerland. From these countries, they spread out and mingled with the long-headed populations in France, altering the original type, particularly in the northeastern plains and the Alpine region.

Chancelade Skull

FIG. 87.—Chancelade skull, second quaternary race.
(After Testut.)

FInstagram. 87.—Chancelade skull, second quaternary race.
(After Testut.)

But if the “neolithic” people of France and Central Europe belonged to at least two distinct races, the same has not been the case with the other countries of our continent. In the British Isles we find ourselves, on the contrary, as regards this period, in presence of a remarkable homogeneity of type; it is without exception dolichocephalic (cephal. ind. from 65 to 75 for the men), with elongated faces, such as are found in the long-barrows. Did they come from the Continent in neolithic times, or are they the descendants of the palæolithic men of Great Britain, the physical type of which is unknown to us? This is a question which still awaits solution. In Russia also,[Pg 314] we only meet with dolichocephals during the later stone age (certain “Kourganes” and the neolithic station of Lake Ladoga).[357] In Spain, in Portugal, in Sweden, dolichocephalic skulls are found in conjunction with some brachycephalic ones, the latter somewhat rare however.[358]

But if the “Neolithic” people of France and Central Europe were part of at least two distinct races, the same can’t be said for other countries on our continent. In the British Isles, we actually see a remarkable uniformity in type during this period; they are all dolichocephalic (head shape index from 65 to 75 for men), with elongated faces, like those found in the long-barrows. Did they migrate from the continent during Neolithic times, or are they descendants of the Paleolithic people of Great Britain, whose physical characteristics remain unknown to us? This is a question that still needs an answer. In Russia, we also only find dolichocephals during the later Stone Age (certain “Kourganes” and the Neolithic site at Lake Ladoga). In Spain, Portugal, and Sweden, dolichocephalic skulls are found alongside some brachycephalic ones, though the latter are somewhat rare.

It is impossible for us to enter into details while treating of the period which followed the neolithic, that is to say the “age” of metals (copper, bronze, and iron). The metal which first took the place of stone was probably copper. In fact, the copper weapons are hammered or cast after the pattern of the stone axes and daggers, and in certain stations in Spain have been found ornaments in bronze (precious metal rarely) by the side of tools and arms in copper (ordinary metal). The existence of a “copper age” is, however, admitted to-day by almost all authorities, who regard it as an experimental period; it supplies one of the arguments in favour of the theory that the bronze industry did not come from the East (from the shores of the Euxine, Egypt, Mesopotamia, India, or Indo-China, according to different authors), as was thought until recent times, but sprang up locally in Europe itself.

It’s impossible for us to go into details about the period that followed the Neolithic, which is known as the “Age” of metals (copper, bronze, and iron). The first metal to replace stone was probably copper. In fact, copper weapons are made by hammering or casting them based on the design of stone axes and daggers, and in some sites in Spain, bronze ornaments (a rare precious metal) have been found alongside copper tools and weapons (a common metal). However, the existence of a “Copper Age” is now accepted by almost all experts, who see it as an experimental period. This supports the idea that the bronze industry didn’t originate from the East (from areas like the Euxine, Egypt, Mesopotamia, India, or Indo-China, as different authors suggested), but rather emerged locally in Europe itself.

The complete absence of oriental objects, for instance Assyrian cylinders or Egyptian sculptured scarabæi in the finds of the bronze age in Europe, is an argument in favour of the new theory, maintained chiefly by Salomon Reinach in France and Much in Austria. The Scandinavian authors, Sophus Müller and Montelius, admit the local development of the industry in metallic objects, but with materials supplied by the merchants of the Archipelago and Cyprus. The great trade-route for amber, and perhaps tin, between Denmark and the Archipelago is well known at the present day; it passes through[Pg 315] the valley of the Elbe, the Moldau, and the Danube. The commercial relations between the north and south explain the similarities which archæologists find between Scandinavian bronze objects and those of the Ægean district (Schliemann’s excavations at Mycenæ, Troy, Tiryns, etc.).[359]

The complete lack of Eastern objects, like Assyrian cylinders or Egyptian carved scarabs, in the bronze age discoveries in Europe supports the new theory primarily argued by Salomon Reinach in France and Much in Austria. Scandinavian scholars, Sophus Müller and Montelius, acknowledge that the local development of metalworking occurred, but with materials provided by merchants from the Archipelago and Cyprus. The well-known trade route for amber, and possibly tin, between Denmark and the Archipelago runs through the valley of the Elbe, the Moldau, and the Danube. The trade connections between the north and south help explain the similarities that archaeologists notice between Scandinavian bronze items and those from the Aegean area (Schliemann’s digs at Mycenæ, Troy, Tiryns, etc.).[359]

It is generally admitted that the ancient bronze age corresponds with the “Ægean civilisation” which flourished among the peoples inhabiting, between the thirtieth and twentieth centuries B.C., Switzerland, the north of Italy, the basin of the Danube, the Balkan peninsula, a part of Anatolia, and, lastly, Cyprus. It gave rise (between 1700 and 1100 B.C.) to the “Mycenian” civilisation, of which the favourite ornamental design is the spiral.[360]

It is widely recognized that the ancient Bronze Age coincides with the “Aegean civilization,” which thrived among the peoples living in what is now Switzerland, northern Italy, the Danube basin, the Balkan Peninsula, parts of Anatolia, and, finally, Cyprus, between the 30th and 20th centuries BCE. This era gave rise (between 1700 and 1100 BCE) to the “Mycenaean” civilization, known for its favored ornamental design: the spiral.[360]

In Sweden the bronze age began later, in the seventeenth or eighteenth century B.C., but it continued longer there than in Southern Europe.

In Sweden, the Bronze Age started later, in the seventeenth or eighteenth century BCE, but it lasted longer there than in Southern Europe.

So also, according to Montelius, the introduction of iron dates only from the fifth or third century B.C. in Sweden, while Italy was acquainted with this metal as far back as the twelfth century B.C. The civilisation of the “iron age” distributed over two periods, according to the excavations made in the stations of Hallstatt (Austria) and La Tène (Switzerland), must have been imported from Central Europe into Greece through Illyria. This importation corresponds perhaps with the Dorian invasion of the Peloponnesus. The so-called “Hallstattian” period lasted in Central Europe, France, and Northern Italy from the tenth or ninth to the sixth century B.C. The Hallstattian civilisation flourished chiefly in Carinthia, Southern Germany, Switzerland, Bohemia, Silesia, Bosnia, the south-east of France, and Southern Italy (the pre-Etruscan iron[Pg 316] age of Montelius). The period which followed, called the second or iron age, or the La Tène period,[361] was prolonged until the first century B.C. in France, Bohemia, and England. In Scandinavian countries the first iron age lasted till the sixth century, and the second iron age till the tenth century A.D.

According to Montelius, iron was only introduced in Sweden around the fifth or third century B.C., while Italy had been familiar with this metal since the twelfth century B.C. The civilization of the "iron age," spread across two periods based on excavations in Hallstatt (Austria) and La Tène (Switzerland), must have been brought from Central Europe into Greece through Illyria. This importation likely coincides with the Dorian invasion of the Peloponnesus. The so-called "Hallstattian" period lasted in Central Europe, France, and Northern Italy from the tenth or ninth to the sixth century B.C. The Hallstattian civilization thrived mainly in Carinthia, Southern Germany, Switzerland, Bohemia, Silesia, Bosnia, the southeast of France, and Southern Italy (the pre-Etruscan iron age of Montelius). The following period, known as the second or iron age, or the La Tène period, lasted until the first century B.C. in France, Bohemia, and England. In Scandinavian countries, the first iron age continued until the sixth century, and the second iron age lasted until the tenth century A.D.

The physical type of the inhabitants of Europe during the bronze age varies according to country. In England they were sub-brachycephals (ceph. ind. 81), of whom the remains found in the “round barrows” have been described by Thurnam and Beddoe. In Sweden and Denmark they were dolichocephals or mesocephals, tall and fair-haired, as far as one can gather from the remains of hair found in the burial-places (Montelius and S. Hansen). In the valley of the Rhine and Southern Germany they were typical dolichocephals, above the medium stature (type of the “Reihengräber” or row-graves, established by Holder and studied by Ranke, Lehmann-Nietsche, and others). In Switzerland, in the pile-dwellings, the neolithic brachycephals, of whom we have spoken, were succeeded in the bronze age by dolichocephals similar to those of Germany. During the Hallstattian period of the “iron age,” we notice the persistence of the dolichocephalic and tall type in the row-graves of the Rhine and Mein valleys; while during the following period of the same age (that of La Tène or the Marnian), we find in the forms of the skulls exhumed from the burial-places a diversity almost as great as that which is seen in the populations of the present day.

The physical characteristics of the people living in Europe during the Bronze Age differed by country. In England, they were sub-brachycephalic (ceph. ind. 81), and their remains found in the “round barrows” were described by Thurnam and Beddoe. In Sweden and Denmark, they were dolichocephalic or mesocephalic, tall and fair-haired, based on the hair remnants discovered in burial sites (Montelius and S. Hansen). In the Rhine Valley and Southern Germany, they were typical dolichocephalic individuals, taller than average (as seen in the "Reihengräber" or row-graves, identified by Holder and studied by Ranke, Lehmann-Nietsche, and others). In Switzerland, the neolithic brachycephalic population mentioned earlier was followed in the Bronze Age by dolichocephalics similar to those in Germany. During the Hallstatt period of the “Iron Age,” we still observe the prevalence of dolichocephalic and tall individuals in the row-graves of the Rhine and Mein valleys, while in the subsequent La Tène or Marnian period, the skull shapes found in burial sites show a diversity nearly as significant as that found in modern populations.

The ages of bronze and iron, as we have seen, overlapped, in certain regions, the historic period, the period of the Phœnician voyages, the development of Egypt, the origin of Greek civilisation; and yet it is very difficult to say to what peoples known to history must be attributed the characteristic civilisations of each of the periods of the age of metals, and[Pg 317] what were the languages spoken by these peoples. Most historians believed until quite recently that the Euscarians, and perhaps the Ligurians or Lygians of Western Europe, as well as the Iberians, the Pelasgian Tursans or Turses[362] of the three southern peninsulas of our continent, were the “autochthones,” or rather the oldest European peoples known to history. These would then be the probable descendants of the palæolithic Europeans, the races of Neanderthal, Spy, and Chancelade. Further, according to the philologists and historians, these peoples spoke non-Aryan languages, and at a certain period, which D’Arbois de Jubainville[363] places vaguely at twenty or twenty-five centuries B.C., Europe was invaded by the Aryans, coming from Asia, who imposed their languages on the autochthones. The Basque language of the present day, derived from the Euscarian, is the only dialect surviving this transformation. The central point for the ethnographic history of Europe is, according to the philologists, the arrival of the Aryans.

The Bronze and Iron Ages, as we've seen, overlapped in certain areas with the historical period, including the time of the Phoenician voyages, the growth of Egypt, and the beginnings of Greek civilization. However, it's quite challenging to determine which historical peoples are credited with the distinct civilizations of each period of the Metal Age, as well as the languages they spoke. Until recently, most historians believed that the Euscarians, and possibly the Ligurians or Lygians of Western Europe, along with the Iberians, the Pelasgian Tursans, or Turses of the three southern peninsulas of our continent, were the "autochthones," or the oldest European peoples known to history. They would likely be the descendants of Paleolithic Europeans, such as the Neanderthal, Spy, and Chancelade races. Additionally, according to linguists and historians, these peoples spoke non-Aryan languages, and at some point, which D’Arbois de Jubainville places vaguely around twenty to twenty-five centuries B.C., Europe was invaded by the Aryans from Asia, who imposed their languages on the autochthonous populations. The modern Basque language, which evolved from Euscarian, is the only dialect that has survived this change. According to historians, the arrival of the Aryans is the central event in the ethnographic history of Europe.

But who were these Aryans? Nobody quite knows. It is no part of my plan to write the history of the Aryan controversy.[364] It is enough to say that men of acknowledged authority in science (Pott, Grimm, Max Müller) have maintained for a long time, without any solid proof, the existence not only of a primitive Aryan language, which gave birth to the dialects of nearly every people of Europe, but also of an “Aryan race,” supposed to have sprung up “somewhere” in Asia, one part migrating towards India and Persia, while the remainder made its way by slow stages to Europe. Generations of scientific men have accepted this hypothesis, which, after all, had no other foundation than such aphorisms as “ex oriente lux” put forward by Pott, or “the irresistible impulse towards the west” invented by[Pg 318] Grimm. It must, however, be mentioned that objections against this hypothesis by recognised authorities were raised as soon as it was promulgated; they came from philologists like Latham (1855), ethnographers like d’Omalius d’Halloy, anthropologists like Broca (1864); but it was only about 1880 that a somewhat lively reaction took place against the current ideas, and it originated in the camp of the philologists themselves. De Saussure, Sayce, and others, returning to the ideas expressed long before by Benfey, rightly observed that the assumed close relationship between Sanscrit and Zend and the primitive Aryan language rests solely on the fact of the archaic forms of these two dialects being preserved to the present time in written monuments, while the Aryan languages of Europe do not possess documents so ancient. They said further, that the European languages of the present day, such as Lithuanian, for example, are much nearer the primitive Aryan forms than the Asiatic dialects, Hindu for example. As to the Asiatic origin of the Aryans, a somewhat rude blow was struck at this second hypothesis by Poesche and Penka, who, taking up the ideas of Linné and d’Omalius d’Halloy on the exclusive existence in Europe of fair-haired populations, identified these populations, without any proof, it is true, with the Aryans.[365] In reality, the hypothesis of the fair-haired “Aryan race,” tall and dolichocephalic (Fig. 88), indigenous to Europe, does not rest on a firmer foundation than that of the “Aryan race” coming from Asia.

But who were these Aryans? Nobody really knows. I'm not planning to write the history of the Aryan debate.[364] It's enough to say that respected figures in science (Pott, Grimm, Max Müller) have for a long time claimed, without any solid evidence, that there was not only a primitive Aryan language that led to the dialects of almost every European people, but also an “Aryan race” thought to have emerged “somewhere” in Asia, with one group migrating towards India and Persia and the other slowly making its way to Europe. Generations of scientists have accepted this idea, which really had no more foundation than slogans like “ex oriente lux” coined by Pott, or “the irresistible impulse towards the west” created by[Pg 318] Grimm. However, it's important to note that prominent scholars raised objections to this theory as soon as it was put forth; these came from linguists like Latham (1855), ethnographers like d’Omalius d’Halloy, and anthropologists like Broca (1864). But it wasn't until around 1880 that a significant backlash against the prevailing views emerged, and it came from the philologists themselves. De Saussure, Sayce, and others, returning to earlier ideas expressed by Benfey, rightly pointed out that the proposed close relationship between Sanskrit and Zend and the primitive Aryan language only rested on the archaic forms of these two languages being preserved in written records, while the Aryan languages of Europe lack such ancient documents. They also claimed that modern European languages, like Lithuanian, are much closer to the primitive Aryan forms than the Asian languages, such as Hindu. Concerning the Asian origin of the Aryans, Poesche and Penka challenged this second hypothesis by referring to the works of Linné and d’Omalius d’Halloy about the exclusive presence of fair-haired populations in Europe, identifying these groups, without any proof, as the Aryans.[365] In reality, the idea of a fair-haired “Aryan race,” tall and dolichocephalic (Fig. 88), native to Europe, is not based on a stronger foundation than the notion of the “Aryan race” originating from Asia.

Anthropology is powerless to say if the ancient owners of the dolichocephalic skulls in Southern Europe spoke an Aryan language or not. Moreover, the works of modern philologists, with Oscar Schrader[366] at their head, show that we can no longer speak to-day of an “Aryan race,” but solely of a family of[Pg 319] Aryan languages, and perhaps of a primitive Aryan civilisation which had preceded the separation of the different Aryan dialects from their common stock.

Anthropology cannot determine whether the ancient people who owned the dolichocephalic skulls in Southern Europe spoke an Aryan language. Furthermore, the research of contemporary linguists, led by Oscar Schrader[366], indicates that we can no longer refer to an “Aryan race” today, but only to a family of[Pg 319] Aryan languages, and possibly to a primitive Aryan civilization that existed before the different Aryan dialects separated from their common origin.

Islander of the Hebrides

FIG. 88.—Islander of Lewis (Hebrides), Northern Race.
(Phot. Beddoe.)

FIG. 88.—Islander from Lewis (Hebrides), Northern Ethnicity.
(Photo by Beddoe.)

This civilisation, as reconstituted by O. Schrader, differs much from that which Pictet had sketched out in his essay on “Linguistic Palæontology.” This was something analogous to the neolithic civilisation; metals were unknown in it (with the exception, perhaps, of copper), but agriculture and the breeding of cattle had already reached a fair stage of development. However, there is nothing to prove that peoples speaking non-Aryan languages had not been in possession of the same civilisation, which with them would be developed in an independent manner. Hence we see the uselessness of looking for a centre from which this Aryan culture might have proceeded. The only question which we may still ask ourselves is, what was the point from which diffusion of the Aryan languages in[Pg 320] Europe began. This point no one at the present time seeks any longer in Asia. It is in Europe, and what we have to do is to define it (S. Reinach). Latham and d’Omalius d’Halloy located the habitat of the primitive Aryans in the south or south-east of Russia. Penka had placed it in Scandinavia. Other learned authorities have selected intermediate points between these extremes.[367]

This civilization, as restructured by O. Schrader, is quite different from what Pictet outlined in his essay on “Linguistic Paleontology.” It was somewhat similar to Neolithic civilization; metals were mostly unknown (except maybe copper), but agriculture and livestock breeding had already made significant progress. However, there's no evidence that non-Aryan speaking peoples didn't have the same civilization, which they could have developed independently. Therefore, it's pointless to search for a single center from which this Aryan culture originated. The only question we can still consider is where the spread of Aryan languages in[Pg 320] Europe began. No one currently looks for this starting point in Asia. It’s in Europe, and our task is to identify it (S. Reinach). Latham and d’Omalius d’Halloy placed the original Aryans in the south or southeast of Russia, while Penka suggested Scandinavia. Other scholars have proposed locations between these two extremes.[367]

On the whole, the Aryan question to-day has no longer the importance which was formerly given to it. All that we can legitimately suppose is that, in the period touching the neolithic age, the inhabitants of Europe were Aryanised from the point of view of language, without any notable change in the constitution of their physical type, or, probably, of their civilisation.

Overall, the Aryan question isn't seen as important today as it once was. All we can reasonably assume is that during the Neolithic age, the people of Europe were Aryanized in terms of language, without any significant change in their physical characteristics or, likely, their culture.

Migrations of European Peoples during the Historic Period.—It would require volumes to relate even succinctly all the movements and dislocations of European peoples. We can only recall here the more salient facts.

Migrations of European Peoples during the Historic Period.—It would take many books to briefly describe all the movements and displacements of European peoples. Here, we can only highlight the most significant facts.

The confirmation afforded by history respecting European populations does not go farther back than the eighth or ninth century B.C. for the Mediterranean district, and than the second or third century B.C. for the rest of Europe. But proto-historic archæology makes us acquainted with a movement of peoples between the tenth and the eleventh century B.C. The Dorians[Pg 321] and the inhabitants of Thessaly penetrated at this date into Greece and forced a portion of the inhabitants of this country (the Achæans, the Eolians) to seek refuge on the nearest coast of Asia Minor. About the same period the Tyrrhenians or Turses (a small section of the Pelasgians) moved into Central Italy, taking with them the Mycenian civilisation, somewhat debased, and founding there the Etruscan “nation.” This nation drove back the Ombro-Latins or Italiotes, who, in their turn, expelled the Sicules (a branch of the Ligurians, according to D’Arbois de Jubainville) in Sicily.

The historical evidence regarding European populations dates back to the eighth or ninth century BCE for the Mediterranean region and the second or third century BCE for the rest of Europe. However, proto-historic archaeology reveals a migration of peoples occurring between the tenth and eleventh century BCE. During this time, the Dorians[Pg 321] and the people of Thessaly entered Greece, forcing some of the local inhabitants (the Achæans and the Eolians) to seek refuge on the nearest shores of Asia Minor. Around the same period, the Tyrrhenians or Turses (a small group of the Pelasgians) moved into Central Italy, taking with them a somewhat degraded version of Mycenaean civilization and establishing the Etruscan “nation.” This nation then pushed back the Ombro-Latins or Italiotes, who in turn expelled the Sicules (a branch of the Ligurians, according to D’Arbois de Jubainville) in Sicily.

The Venetes and the Illyrians made their appearance at nearly the same period on the coasts of the Adriatic, and the Thracians in present Bosnia.

The Venetes and the Illyrians appeared around the same time on the Adriatic coasts, while the Thracians showed up in what is now Bosnia.

Central Europe was occupied, probably from this period, by Celtic populations who, from their primitive country between the upper Danube and the Rhine, spread into the valley of the Po (bronze age of the “terramare,” sites or foundations of prehistoric huts), in the middle valley of the Danube (Hallstatt), and later (seventh century B.C.?) into the north of Gaul, whence they reached the British Isles (“ancient Celts” of the English archæologists, “Gaelic Celts” of the philologists).[368] It was also about the tenth century B.C. that the Scythians, established in Southern Russia some time before, spread themselves towards the mid-Danube.

Central Europe was likely occupied by Celtic populations around this time. These groups spread from their early homeland between the upper Danube and the Rhine into the Po Valley (the bronze age “terramare,” which are sites of prehistoric huts), through the middle Danube Valley (Hallstatt), and later (perhaps in the seventh century B.C.) into northern Gaul, eventually reaching the British Isles (referred to as the “ancient Celts” by English archaeologists and “Gaelic Celts” by philologists).[368] It was also around the tenth century B.C. that the Scythians, who had established themselves in Southern Russia earlier, expanded toward the mid-Danube.

About the fifth century B.C. there evidently occurred another movement of peoples. The Trans-Alpine Celts or Galatians invaded, under the name of Celto-Belgæ, Jutland, Northern Germany, the Low Countries, England (the “new Celts” or Britons of English authors). They also spread over a large part of Gaul, and into Spain (Celtiberians), and then in 392 B.C.,[369] they penetrated into Italy, where they found their kinsmen, who had been settled there for three centuries, and were under the subjugation of the Etruscans; these they overturned, and only halted after having taken Rome (390). A[Pg 322] little later (about 300), other waves of Celts, the Galatians, occupied the valley of the Danube, whence they chased the Illyrians and the Thracians. The more audacious of them continued their course across Thrace and penetrated into Asia Minor, where they established themselves in the country, since known as Galatia (279).

Around the fifth century BCE, another movement of people occurred. The Trans-Alpine Celts or Galatians invaded, known as the Celto-Belgæ, Jutland, Northern Germany, the Low Countries, and England (the “new Celts” or Britons in English writings). They also spread across a large part of Gaul and into Spain (Celtiberians), and then in 392 BCE,[369] they moved into Italy, where they found their relatives who had been living there for three centuries and were being dominated by the Etruscans. They overthrew them and only stopped after capturing Rome (390). A[Pg 322] little later (around 300), other waves of Celts, the Galatians, occupied the Danube valley, driving out the Illyrians and the Thracians. The bolder among them pressed on through Thrace and into Asia Minor, where they settled in what became known as Galatia (279).

During this period (from the fifth to the third century), which may be called Celtic, by analogy with that which followed, styled the Roman period, history mentions the Germans as a people similar to the Celts, and dwelling to the north-east of the latter.

During this time (from the fifth to the third century), often referred to as the Celtic period, similar to the following era known as the Roman period, history notes the Germans as a people resembling the Celts, living to the northeast of them.

Norwegian of South Osterdalen

FIG. 89.—Norwegian of South Osterdalen. Ceph. ind., 70.2. Northern race.
(After Arbo.)

FIG. 89.—Norwegian from South Osterdalen. Ceph. ind., 70.2. Northern race.
(After Arbo.)

The Roman conquest of transalpine Europe, effected in the first centuries B.C. and A.D., imposed the language of Latium on the majority of Celts, Iberians, and Italo-Celts, and maintained the populations within almost the same bounds during three centuries.

The Roman takeover of transalpine Europe, which took place in the first centuries BCE and CE, imposed the Latin language on most Celts, Iberians, and Italo-Celts, and kept the populations largely within the same borders for three centuries.

Norwegian, Profile View

FIG. 90.—Same subject as Fig. 89, seen in profile.

FInstagram. 90.—Same subject as Fig. 89, viewed from the side.

The period extending from the second to the sixth century[Pg 323] of the Christian era comprises the great historic epoch of the “migrations of peoples.” In this period we see the Slavs spreading in all directions: towards the Baltic, beyond the Elbe, into the basin of the Danube and beyond, into the Balkan peninsula; this movement determined that of the Germans, who invaded the south-east of England (Angles, Saxons, Jutes), Belgium, the north-east of France (Franks), Switzerland, and Alsace (Alemanni), the south of Germany (Bavarians), and spread even beyond the Alps (Longobards). The Celts in their turn pushed the Iberians farther and farther into the south-west of France and Spain, while the Italo-Celts absorbed little by little the rest of the Etruscans and Ligurians. Towards the end of this period a final wave of invasion, that of the Huns (fifth century), the Avars (sixth), and other allied tribes, once more threw Europe into a state of perturbation; they spread out into the plains of Champagne, then drew back, severed the Slavs into two groups (northern and southern),[Pg 324] and subsided in the plains of Hungary, already partly occupied for several centuries by the Dacians. Almost at the same time the Bulgarians removed from the banks of the Volga to both sides of the Danube. After the sixth century other ethnic movements, less general, but not less important, occurred in every part of Europe. In the eighth or ninth century the invasion of the Varecks (Scandinavians or Letts?) took place in the north-west of Russia. In the ninth century the Hungarians, pushed by the tribes of the Pechenecks and the Polovtsis who invaded the south of Russia, crossed the Carpathians and settled in the valley of the Tissa. From the ninth or tenth century, the Normans or Northmen (Danes, Scandinavians) established themselves in the north and east of the British Isles as well as the north of France, a part of which still bears their name. Almost at the same time (tenth to eleventh century) the Arabs made themselves masters of the Iberian peninsula, of Southern Italy and Sicily; they maintained their position to the south of the Guadalquivir until the fifteenth century. In the twelfth century the Germans drove back the western Slavs to the banks of the Vistula, which led to the expansion of the eastern Slavs towards the north-east at the expense of the Finnish tribes. In the thirteenth century came the Mongols, or rather the Turco-Mongolian hordes; they occupied the whole of Russia (as far as Novgorod in the north), and penetrated into Europe as far as Liegnitz in Silesia. They soon withdrew from Western Europe, but remained until the fifteenth century in the east of Russia, and even until the eighteenth century in the Crimea and the steppes of southern Russia. Finally, the fourteenth and fifteenth centuries witnessed the invasion of the Osmanli Turks into the Balkan peninsula, Hungary, and even into lower Austria, as well as the migrations of the Little Russians into the upper basin of the Dnieper. About the sixteenth century began the definite movement of the Little Russians towards the steppes of Southern Russia, and the slow but sure march of the Great Russians beyond the Volga, the Ural mountains, and farther, into Siberia—a movement which continues in our own time.[Pg 325] We can only mention other migrations or colonisations of a more limited range, that of the Illyrians and Albanians into Southern Italy, that of the Germans in Hungary and Russia, etc., as well as the arrival of non-European peoples, Gypsies and Jews, who are scattered at the present day among all the nations of our continent.

The period from the second to the sixth century[Pg 323] of the Christian era marks a significant historic phase known as the “migrations of peoples.” During this time, the Slavs expanded in all directions: towards the Baltic, beyond the Elbe, into the Danube basin and beyond, into the Balkan peninsula; this movement influenced the Germans, who invaded southeastern England (Angles, Saxons, Jutes), Belgium, northeastern France (Franks), Switzerland, and Alsace (Alemanni), as well as southern Germany (Bavarians), and even spread beyond the Alps (Longobards). The Celts pushed the Iberians further into southwestern France and Spain, while the Italo-Celts gradually absorbed the rest of the Etruscans and Ligurians. Toward the end of this period, a final wave of invasions, from the Huns (fifth century), the Avars (sixth), and other allied tribes, once again unsettled Europe; they expanded into the plains of Champagne, then retreated, dividing the Slavs into two groups (northern and southern),[Pg 324] and settled in the plains of Hungary, which had been partially inhabited by the Dacians for centuries. Around the same time, the Bulgarians moved from the banks of the Volga to both sides of the Danube. After the sixth century, there were other ethnic movements across Europe that were less widespread but still significant. In the eighth or ninth century, the invasion of the Varecks (Scandinavians or Letts?) occurred in northwestern Russia. In the ninth century, the Hungarians, driven by the Pechenecks and Polovtsis who invaded southern Russia, crossed the Carpathians and settled in the Tissa valley. From the ninth or tenth century, the Normans or Northmen (Danes, Scandinavians) established themselves in the north and east of the British Isles as well as in northern France, a region that still bears their name. Almost simultaneously, in the tenth to eleventh century, the Arabs took control of the Iberian peninsula, southern Italy, and Sicily; they maintained their hold south of the Guadalquivir until the fifteenth century. In the twelfth century, the Germans pushed the western Slavs back to the banks of the Vistula, which led to the expansion of the eastern Slavs toward the northeast at the expense of the Finnish tribes. The thirteenth century saw the arrival of the Mongols, or rather the Turco-Mongolian hordes; they occupied all of Russia (as far north as Novgorod) and reached Europe as far as Liegnitz in Silesia. They quickly withdrew from Western Europe but remained in eastern Russia until the fifteenth century, and in the Crimea and the southern Russian steppes into the eighteenth century. Finally, during the fourteenth and fifteenth centuries, the Osmanli Turks invaded the Balkan peninsula, Hungary, and even lower Austria, while the Little Russians migrated into the upper Dnieper basin. Around the sixteenth century, the Little Russians started moving towards the steppes of southern Russia, and the slow yet certain expansion of the Great Russians beyond the Volga, Ural mountains, and further into Siberia began—a movement that continues to this day.[Pg 325] We can only briefly mention other migrations or colonizations of a more limited scope, such as the Illyrians and Albanians into southern Italy, the Germans in Hungary and Russia, etc., as well as the arrival of non-European peoples, Gypsies and Jews, who are now spread across all the nations of our continent.

II.—EUROPEAN RACES OF THE PRESENT DAY.

Setting out from the fact that the peoples or nations of Europe, like those of the rest of the earth for the matter of that, are formed of the intermixture in varying proportions of different races or varieties (see the Introduction), I have endeavoured, by grouping the exact characters, carefully abstracted from many million individuals, relating to stature, form of head, pigmentation, and other somatic particulars, to determine the constituent elements of these intermixtures. I have thus succeeded in distinguishing the existence of six principal and of four secondary races, the combinations of which, in various proportions, constitute the different “European peoples” properly so called, distinct from the peoples of other races, Lapp, Ugrian, Turkish, Mongolian, etc., which are likewise met with in Europe.[370]

Starting from the fact that the peoples or nations of Europe, like those from the rest of the world, are made up of various races or varieties mixed together in different proportions (see the Introduction), I have attempted to identify the basic components of these mixtures by analyzing specific traits collected from millions of individuals, including height, head shape, skin color, and other physical characteristics. This analysis has allowed me to identify six main races and four secondary races. The combinations of these races in various proportions create the different "European peoples," which are distinct from other racially diverse groups found in Europe, such as Lapp, Ugrian, Turkish, Mongolian, etc.[370]

Here, in short, are the characters and geographical distribution of those races which, in order to avoid every interpretation drawn from linguistic, historical, or nationalist considerations, I describe according to their principal physical characters, or for the sake of brevity, according to the geographical names of the regions in which these races are best represented or least crossed.

Here’s a brief overview of the characteristics and geographical spread of those races that I describe based solely on their main physical traits, using geographical names of the regions where these races are most distinctly represented or least mixed, to avoid any interpretations based on language, history, or nationalism.

Young Sussex Farmer

FIG. 91.—Young Sussex farmer. Dolichocephalic, fair. Northern race.
(After Beddoe.)

FIG. 91.—Young Sussex farmer. Long-headed, light-haired. Northern race.
(After Beddoe.)

We have in Europe, to begin with, two fair-haired races, one dolichocephalic, of very tall stature (Northern race), and another, sub-brachycephalic, comparatively short (Eastern race). Then[Pg 326] four dark-haired races: two of short stature, one of which (Ibero-insular) is dolichocephalic, the other (Cevenole or Western) brachycephalic; and two of high stature, of which one is sub-dolichocephalic (Littoral), the other brachycephalic (Adriatic). Among the four secondary races two have a relation to the fair-haired race, while the two others may be considered as intermediate between the fair and dark-haired races (see Map 2). I now give a few details respecting these races.

We have in Europe, to start with, two light-haired groups: one is long-headed and very tall (Northern group), and the other is slightly short-headed (Eastern group). Then[Pg 326] there are four dark-haired groups: two are short, one of which (Ibero-insular) is long-headed, and the other (Cevenole or Western) is short-headed; and two are tall, one of which is slightly long-headed (Littoral) and the other is short-headed (Adriatic). Among the four secondary groups, two are related to the light-haired group, while the other two can be seen as intermediate between the light and dark-haired groups (see Map 2). I will now provide a few details about these groups.

[Pg 327]

[Pg 327]

Distribution of Races in Europe

MAP 2.—Approximate distribution of the races of Europe.

MAP 2.—Approximate distribution of the ethnic groups in Europe.

1. Fair, dolichocephalic race of very high stature, which may be called the Northern Race, because its representatives are grouped together almost exclusively in the north of Europe. Principal characters: very lofty stature (1 m. 73 on an average);[371] [Pg 328] fair, sometimes reddish, wavy hair; light eyes, for the most part blue; elongated, dolichocephalic head (cephalic index on the living subject from 76 to 79); ruddy white skin, elongated face, prominent straight nose. The race of this type, pure or slightly modified, of whose principal traits Figs. 88 to 92 give a fairly good representation, is found in Sweden, Denmark, Norway (with the exception of the west coast); in the north of Scotland; on the east coast and in the north of England,[Pg 329] in Ireland (with the exception of the north-west), in the northern Faroe Isles, in Holland (north of the Rhine); in the Frisian countries, in Oldenburg, Schleswig-Holstein, Mecklenburg; lastly, in the Baltic provinces of Russia, and among the Tavasts of Finland. It is the Cymric race of Broca, the Germanic race (the race of the row-graves) of German authors, or, in fine, the Homo Europeus of Lapouge.

1. Tall, fair-skinned group with a long head, often referred to as the Northern Race, because its members mainly live in northern Europe. Key traits: very tall stature (average height around 1 minute. 73);[371] [Pg 328] light, sometimes reddish, wavy hair; mostly light-colored eyes, especially blue; long, narrow head (cephalic index for living subjects ranges from 76 to 79); rosy white skin, long face, prominent straight nose. This race, whether pure or slightly mixed, is represented fairly well by the principal features in Figs. 88 to 92. It can be found in Sweden, Denmark, Norway (excluding the west coast), northern Scotland, the east coast and north of England,[Pg 329] Ireland (except the northwest), the northern Faroe Islands, northern Holland, the Frisian regions, Oldenburg, Schleswig-Holstein, Mecklenburg, and finally in the Baltic provinces of Russia, as well as among the Tavasts in Finland. This is known as the Cymric race by Broca, the Germanic race (known as the race of the row-graves) by German authors, or simply Homo Europeus according to Lapouge.

Englishwoman of Plymouth

FIG. 92.—Englishwoman of Plymouth (Devon).
Mixed Northern and North-western races (?).
(Phot. Beddoe.)

FIG. 92.—English woman from Plymouth (Devon).
Mixed Northern and North-western heritage (?).
(Phot. Beddoe.)

To this race is related a secondary race, fair, mesocephalic, of tall stature, called Sub-northern, with angular face, turned-up nose, straight hair; it is found more especially in Northern Germany, among the Letto-Lithuanians, in Finland, and on the west coast of Norway (in part Figs. 89 and 90).

To this race is related a secondary race, fair, mesocephalic, of tall stature, called Sub-northern, with an angular face, upturned nose, and straight hair; it is mainly found in Northern Germany, among the Letto-Lithuanians, in Finland, and along the west coast of Norway (in part Figs. 89 and 90).

2. Fair, sub-brachycephalic, short race, or Eastern race, so styled because its representatives are almost exclusively grouped together in the east of Europe. Principal characters: stature somewhat short (1 m. 63 or 1 m. 64 on an average), moderately rounded head (cephalic index, 82 to 83 on the living subject), straight, light yellow or flaxen hair, square-cut face, nose frequently turned up, blue or grey eyes. The representatives of this race are the White Russians, the Polieshchooki of the Pinsk marshes, and certain Lithuanians. Blended with others this type is frequent among the Vielkorousses or Great Russians of Northern and Central Russia, as well as in Finland and Eastern Prussia (Figs. 104 and 105, modified type).

2. Fair, sub-brachycephalic, short race, or Eastern race, is called this because its members are mostly found in the eastern part of Europe. Key characteristics: average height somewhat short (around 1 min. 63 or 1 minute. 64), moderately rounded head (cephalic index of 82 to 83 in living individuals), straight, light yellow or blonde hair, square-shaped face, often upturned nose, blue or gray eyes. This race includes the White Russians, the Polieshchooki from the Pinsk marshes, and some Lithuanians. When mixed with other types, this characteristic is common among the Vielkorousses or Great Russians in Northern and Central Russia, as well as in Finland and Eastern Prussia (Figs. 104 and 105, modified type).

With this race we have to connect a secondary race, fair, mesocephalic, of very short stature (Vistulian race), the characters of which are frequently met with among the Poles, the Kashoobs, and probably in Saxony and Silesia.

With this race, we need to connect a secondary race, fair, mesocephalic, of very short stature (Vistulian race), which features are often found among the Poles, the Kashoobs, and likely in Saxony and Silesia.

3. Dark, dolichocephalic, short race, called Ibero-insular, because it is chiefly found in the Iberian peninsula and the islands of the western Mediterranean. It is found, however, somewhat softened, in France (in Angoumois, Limousin, and Perigord) and in Italy (to the south of the Rome-Ascoli line). Principal characters: very short stature (1 m. 61 to 1 m. 62 on an average), very elongated head (cephalic index averaging 73 to 76 on the living subject), black, often curled, hair, very dark eyes, tawny skin, straight or turned-up nose, etc. It forms, partly,[Pg 330] the “Mediterranean race” of Sergi,[372] or the Homo meridionalis of certain authors (Ripley, Lapouge). Figures 99 and 100 represent traits of this race, but modified by intermixtures.

3. Dark, long-headed, short race, called Ibero-insular, because it's mainly found in the Iberian Peninsula and the islands of the western Mediterranean. However, it appears slightly modified in France (in Angoumois, Limousin, and Perigord) and in Italy (south of the Rome-Ascoli line). Key characteristics: very short stature (averaging between 1 minute. 61 and 1 min. 62), very elongated head (cephalic index averaging 73 to 76 in living individuals), black, often curly hair, very dark eyes, tawny skin, and a straight or upturned nose, etc. It partly forms the “Mediterranean race” of Sergi,[372] or the Homo meridionalis of some authors (Ripley, Lapouge). Figures 99 and 100 show traits of this race, but altered by intermixtures.

Fisher People, Island of Aran

FIG. 93.—Fisher people of Island of Aran (Ireland).
North-western race (?).
(Phot. Haddon.)

FIG. 93.—Fisher people from the Island of Aran (Ireland).
North-western ethnicity (?).
(Phot. Haddon.)

4. Dark, very brachycephalic, short race, named the Western or Cevenole race, because of the localisation of its most characteristic type in the extreme west of Europe, in the Cévennes, on the central table-land of France, and also in the western Alps. But it is met with, a little modified, in Brittany (with the exception of Morbihan), in Poitou, Quercy, the middle valley of the Po, in Umbria, in part of Tuscany, in Transylvania, and probably the middle of Hungary. Blended with other races, it is found again at a number of points in Europe, from the basin of the middle Loire to that of the Dnieper, passing through Piedmont, Central and Eastern Switzerland, Carinthia, Moravia, Galicia, and Podolia. In Southern Italy it is blended[Pg 331] with the Ibero-insular race. It is the Celtic or Rhetian race, the Celto-Slav, Ligurian, or Celto-Ligurian race of some anthropologists, the Homo Alpinus of others. It is characterised by a very rounded skull (average ceph. ind. on the living subject from 85 to 87); by shortness of stature (1 m. 63 or 1 m. 64 on an average); by brown or black hair, light or dark brown eyes, rounded face, thick-set figure (Fig. 98, perceptibly softened type of this race).

4. Dark, very brachycephalic, short race, known as the Western or Cevenole race, due to the location of its most distinctive type in the far west of Europe, in the Cévennes, on the central plateau of France, and also in the western Alps. However, it is found, slightly modified, in Brittany (excluding Morbihan), in Poitou, Quercy, the middle valley of the Po, in Umbria, in parts of Tuscany, in Transylvania, and likely central Hungary. Mixed with other races, it appears again in various places across Europe, from the basin of the middle Loire to the Dnieper, passing through Piedmont, Central and Eastern Switzerland, Carinthia, Moravia, Galicia, and Podolia. In Southern Italy, it merges with the Ibero-insular race. It is the Celtic or Rhetian race, the Celto-Slav, Ligurian, or Celto-Ligurian race according to some anthropologists, and the Homo Alpinus by others. Its features include a very rounded skull (average ceph. ind. for living subjects from 85 to 87); short stature (approximately 1 min. 63 or 1 minute. 64 on average); brown or black hair, light or dark brown eyes, rounded face, and a sturdy build (Fig. 98, noticeably softer type of this race).

Young Woman of Arles

FIG. 94.—Young woman of Arles.
Mixed Littoral race (?).
(Phot. lent by School of Anthropology, Paris.)

FInstagram. 94.—Young woman from Arles.
Mixed Littoral race (?).
(Photo provided by School of Anthropology, Paris.)

5. Dark, mesocephalic, tall race, Littoral or Atlanto-Mediterranean race, so styled because it is found in a pure or mixed state along the shores of the Mediterranean from Gibraltar to the mouth of the Tiber, and on several points of[Pg 332] the Atlantic coast, from the straits of Gibraltar to the mouth of the Guadalquivir, on the Bay of Biscay, in the lower valley of the Loire, etc. It is not met with anywhere at a greater distance than 120 or 150 miles from the sea. This Littoral race is still little studied; it is distinguished by its moderate dolichocephaly or mesocephaly (ceph. ind. on living subject 79 to 80), by its stature above the average (1 m. 66), and very deep colouring of the hair and eyes. It corresponds pretty well with the “Mediterranean race” of Houzé,[373] and with the Cro-Magnon race of certain authors.

5. Dark, mesocephalic, tall race, Littoral or Atlanto-Mediterranean race, named because it exists either in pure or mixed forms along the Mediterranean coasts from Gibraltar to the mouth of the Tiber, and in various locations along the [Pg 332] Atlantic coast, from the Strait of Gibraltar to the mouth of the Guadalquivir, in the Bay of Biscay, in the lower Loire valley, etc. It is not found more than 120 to 150 miles from the sea. This Littoral race has not been extensively studied; it is characterized by its moderate dolichocephaly or mesocephaly (cranial index in living subjects 79 to 80), by its above-average height (1 min. 66), and by the very deep coloring of its hair and eyes. It aligns quite well with the “Mediterranean race” as described by Houzé,[373] and with the Cro-Magnon race as noted by some authors.

Pure Type of Highlander

FIG. 95.—Pure type of Highlander (clan Chattan);
grey eyes, hair dark brown.
(Phot. Beddoe.)

FInstagram. 95.—Pure type of Highlander (clan Chattan);
gray eyes, hair dark brown.
(Phot. Beddoe.)

It is probably with this Littoral race that we must connect a secondary so-called North-Western race, tall, sub-dolichocephalic, with chestnut hair, often almost brown. It is found chiefly in[Pg 333] the north-west of Ireland (Fig. 93), in Wales (Fig. 19), and the east of Belgium.

It’s likely that we should associate this Littoral race with a secondary so-called North-Western race, which is tall, sub-dolichocephalic, and has chestnut hair that is often nearly brown. This race is primarily found in[Pg 333] the north-west of Ireland (Fig. 93), in Wales (Fig. 19), and in the eastern part of Belgium.

Highlander, Profile View

FIG. 96.—The same, seen in profile.

FIG. 96.—The same, viewed from the side.

6. Dark, brachycephalic, tall race, called Adriatic or Dinaric, because its purest representatives are met with along the coast of the Northern Adriatic and especially in Bosnia, Dalmatia, and Croatia. They are also found in Rumania, Venetia, among the Slovenes, the Ladinos of the Tyrol, the Romansch of Switzerland, as well as in the populations of the tract of country which extends south to north from Lyons to Liège, at first between the Loire and the Saône, then on to the table-land of Langres, in the upper valleys of the Saône and the Moselle, and into the Ardennes. In all these parts the Adriatic race appears with its essential characters: lofty stature (1 m. 68 to 1 m. 72 on an average), extreme brachycephaly (ceph. ind. 85–86), brown or black wavy hair; dark eyes, straight eyebrows; elongated face, delicate straight or aquiline nose; slightly tawny skin. The same characters, somewhat softened,[Pg 334] are met with among the populations of the lower valley of the Po, of the north-west of Bohemia, in Roman Switzerland, in Alsace, in the middle basin of the Loire, among the Polish and Ruthenian mountaineers of the Carpathians, and lastly among the Malorousses or Little Russians, and probably among the Albanians and the inhabitants of Servia.

6. Dark, broad-headed, tall race, known as Adriatic or Dinaric, because its purest examples are found along the coast of the Northern Adriatic and especially in Bosnia, Dalmatia, and Croatia. They are also seen in Romania, Venetia, among the Slovenes, the Ladinos of the Tyrol, the Romansch of Switzerland, and in the populations of the region that stretches from Lyon to Liège, initially between the Loire and the Saône, then moving to the plateau of Langres, in the upper valleys of the Saône and the Moselle, and into the Ardennes. In all these areas, the Adriatic race displays its key characteristics: tall stature (1 minute. 68 to 1 minute. 72 on average), extreme broad-headedness (ceph. ind. 85–86), brown or black wavy hair; dark eyes, straight eyebrows; elongated face, delicate straight or aquiline nose; slightly tawny skin. The same traits, somewhat softened,[Pg 334] can be found among the populations of the lower valley of the Po, in northwest Bohemia, in Roman Switzerland, in Alsace, in the middle basin of the Loire, among the Polish and Ruthenian mountaineers of the Carpathians, and finally among the Malorousses or Little Russians, and likely among the Albanians and the people of Serbia.

We may connect with this principal race a secondary race, not quite so tall (medium stature 1 m. 66) and less brachycephalic (average ceph. ind. from 82 to 85), but having lighter hair and eyes. This race, which we might call Sub-Adriatic, springing probably from the blending of the principal race with the tall, fair mesocephals (secondary Sub-northern race), is found in Perche, Champagne, Alsace-Lorraine, the Vosges, Franche-comté, Luxemburg, Zealand (Holland), the Rhenish provinces, Bavaria, the south-east of Bohemia, German Austria, the central district of the Tyrol, and a part of Lombardy and Venetia. It partly corresponds with the Lorraine Race of Collignon.[374]

We can associate with this main race a secondary race that is not as tall (medium height 1 min. 66) and less brachycephalic (average ceph. ind. from 82 to 85), but with lighter hair and eyes. This race, which we might call Sub-Adriatic, likely comes from the mixing of the main race with the tall, fair mesocephals (secondary Sub-northern race). It can be found in Perche, Champagne, Alsace-Lorraine, the Vosges, Franche-comté, Luxembourg, Zealand (Holland), the Rhenish provinces, Bavaria, the southeast of Bohemia, German Austria, the central region of the Tyrol, and parts of Lombardy and Venetia. It partially corresponds with the Lorraine Race of Collignon.[374]

III.—PRESENT PEOPLES OF EUROPE.

Linguistic study being older than anthropological study, the classing of the best known peoples in Europe is that which is based on difference of language. Nearly every one knows that the ethnic groups of our continent are as a consequence distributed into “Aryan” and an-Aryan peoples. The former are divided (1) into three great linguistic families, Latin or Roman in the south-west of Europe, Teutonic in the centre and north, Slav in the south-east and east; and (2) into three smaller ones: Celtic in the extreme north-west of the continent, Helleno-Illyrian in the extreme south-east, and Letto-Lithuanian in the centre. As to the non-Aryan group, it comprises the Basques, the Finno-Ugrians, the Turks, the Mongols, the Semites, and the Caucasian peoples.

Linguistic study is older than anthropological study, so the classification of the best-known people in Europe is primarily based on language differences. Most people are aware that the ethnic groups on our continent are divided into “Aryan” and non-Aryan peoples. The Aryan group is further divided (1) into three major language families: Latin or Roman in the southwest of Europe, Teutonic in the center and north, and Slav in the southeast and east; and (2) into three smaller ones: Celtic in the extreme northwest of the continent, Helleno-Illyrian in the extreme southeast, and Letto-Lithuanian in the center. The non-Aryan group includes the Basques, Finno-Ugrians, Turks, Mongols, Semites, and the Caucasian peoples.

These groups are heterogeneous enough in physical type[Pg 335] and civilisation. What, for example, have the two Latin peoples, the Portuguese and Romans, in common? or the two Slav peoples, like the Kashoobs, fair, short, thick-set, peaceful cultivators of the plain, and the Montenegrins, dark, tall, slender, warlike shepherds of the mountain? What more striking contrast can we imagine than that between a Norwegian, tall and fair, a bold sailor, whose flag floats in every port of the world, and a Tyrolese of the north, dark and short, a sedentary cultivator of the soil, whose horizon is bounded by the summits of his mountains? However, both these are included in the “Germanic” group.

These groups vary significantly in physical characteristics[Pg 335] and culture. For instance, what do the two Latin peoples, the Portuguese and the Italians, have in common? Or take the two Slav peoples: the Kashoobs, who are fair, short, stocky, and peaceful farmers, and the Montenegrins, who are dark, tall, slender, and warrior-like shepherds from the mountains? What could be a more striking contrast than that between a Norwegian, tall and fair, a daring sailor whose flag flies in every port worldwide, and a Tyrolese from the north, dark and short, a settled farmer whose view is limited by the peaks of his mountains? Yet, both of these groups are classified within the “Germanic” category.

Nevertheless, and only to bring out better the differences between linguistic divisions and those of ethnography and ethnology, I shall rapidly pass in review the “peoples” of Europe, according to the linguistic grouping as outlined above.

Nevertheless, to better highlight the differences between linguistic divisions and those of ethnography and ethnology, I will quickly review the "peoples" of Europe based on the linguistic categories mentioned earlier.

A. ETHNIC “ARYAN” GROUPS.

A. ETHNIC “ARYAN” GROUPS.

I. Latin or Roman Peoples, that is to say speaking languages derived from the Latin. The majority of philologists divide them into seven distinct groups, viz., French of the north, Languedocian-Catalan, Spanish, Portuguese-Galego, Italian, Romansch-Ladino, and Rumanian.

I. Latin or Roman Peoples, meaning those who speak languages that come from Latin. Most language experts categorize them into seven different groups: French from the north, Languedocian-Catalan, Spanish, Portuguese-Galego, Italian, Romansch-Ladino, and Rumanian.

1. The French group of the north, or the Langue d’oil, comprises the populations (Fig. 98) on the north of the line which, starting from the Gironde, passes by Angoulême, Montmorillon, Montlucon, Lyons, and the crests of the Jura, to terminate in the neighbourhood of Berne in Switzerland.[375] Among the numerous dialects recognisable in it, we must make special mention of Wallon, spoken in the southern part of the department of the north in France, and in the southern half of Belgium,[376] in the commune of Malmedy in Prussia, and in[Pg 336] several places in the grand duchy of Luxemburg. Northern French is likewise spoken in the west part of Lorraine and lower Alsace annexed to Germany, as well as in several places in upper Alsace.

1. The French group of the north, or the Langue d’oil, includes the populations (Fig. 98) north of the line that starts from the Gironde, goes through Angoulême, Montmorillon, Montluçon, Lyons, and the peaks of the Jura, ending near Berne in Switzerland.[375] Among the many dialects found in this region, we should especially highlight Wallon, spoken in the southern part of the northern department in France and in the southern half of Belgium,[376] in the commune of Malmedy in Prussia, and in[Pg 336] several locations in the grand duchy of Luxembourg. Northern French is also spoken in the western part of Lorraine and lower Alsace, which has been annexed to Germany, as well as in several areas of upper Alsace.

Anglian Type

FIG. 97.—Anglian type,
common in north and north-east of England.
(After Beddoe.)

FInsta. 97.—Anglian type,
common in the north and northeast of England.
(After Beddoe.)

2. The Languedocian-Catalan group, or the Langue d’oc, situated south of the line referred to above, comprises four great dialectal divisions which make a distinction between the Gascons (south of the Garonne) (Figs. 99 and 100) and the Languedocians and Provençals (Fig. 94), while admitting the mixed so-called Rhodanian group (basin of the upper Rhone, Roman Switzerland, Savoy, and the French valleys of Piedmont)[377] and the Catalan group (Roussillon in France,[Pg 337] Catalonia and Valencia in Spain, the Balearic Islands, and a point on the west coast of Sardinia).

2. The Languedocian-Catalan group, or Langue d’oc, located south of the aforementioned line, consists of four main dialect divisions that distinguish between the Gascons (south of the Garonne) (Figs. 99 and 100) and the Languedocians and Provençals (Fig. 94), while also including the mixed so-called Rhodanian group (covering the upper Rhône basin, Roman Switzerland, Savoy, and the French valleys of Piedmont)[377] and the Catalan group (comprising Roussillon in France, [Pg 337] Catalonia and Valencia in Spain, the Balearic Islands, and a location on the west coast of Sardinia).

3rd and 4th. The Spanish group comprises the peoples of Castillian language, that is to say, the whole population of Spain, with the exception of the Catalans and the inhabitants of Galicia; the latter speak Galego, an idiom allied to Portuguese, and form with the population of Portugal our fourth linguistic group, Galego-Portuguese.

3rd and 4th. The Spanish group includes the people who speak Castilian, which means the entire population of Spain, except for the Catalans and the people of Galicia; the latter speak Galego, a language related to Portuguese, and together with the population of Portugal, they make up our fourth linguistic group, Galego-Portuguese.

Frenchman of Ouroux

FIG. 98.—Frenchman of Ouroux (Morvan).
Mixed western race.
(Phot. School of Anthropology, Paris.)

FInstagram 98.—Frenchman from Ouroux (Morvan).
Mixed western ethnicity.
(Photo by School of Anthropology, Paris.)

5. The Italian group comprises the Italians[378] of the peninsula, of Sicily, Sardinia, and the inhabitants of Corsica, of southern Tyrol (south of Botzen), of the Swiss canton of Tessin, and of the coast of Istria and Dalmatia. The Italian dialect enters also into the constitution of the Maltese jargon, derived for the most part from the Arabic.

5. The Italian group includes the Italians[378] from the peninsula, Sicily, Sardinia, and the people of Corsica, southern Tyrol (south of Botzen), the Swiss canton of Tessin, and the coast of Istria and Dalmatia. The Italian dialect is also part of the Maltese language, which mainly comes from Arabic.

Frenchmen of Dordogne

FIG. 99.—Dolichocephalic Frenchmen of Dordogne.
Ibero-insular race (?).
(Phot. Collignon.)

FIG. 99.—Dolichocephalic Frenchmen of Dordogne.
Ibero-insular race (?).
(Phot. Collignon.)

Frenchmen, Profile View

FIG. 100.—The same subjects as in Fig. 99, seen in profile.

FInstagram. 100.—The same subjects as in Fig. 99, viewed from the side.

6. The Romansch-Ladino or Rheto-Roman group is formed[Pg 338] by the Romansches of the southern part of the canton of Grisons (German Switzerland) and by the Ladinos of the south-east of Tyrol (Groedner Thal, etc.). These are probably the remnants of the old Alpine population, having adopted the language of the Roman legionaries of the time of the conquest.[Pg 339] They are, moreover, in process of extinction as a linguistic unit; their language gives place to Italian in the Tyrol, to German in Switzerland. It is the same with the Friulans who are related to this group, and who inhabit the basin of the Tagliamento in Venetia.

6. The Romansch-Ladino or Rheto-Roman group is formed[Pg 338] by the Romansches from the southern part of the canton of Grisons (German Switzerland) and by the Ladinos from the southeast of Tyrol (Groedner Thal, etc.). These are likely the remnants of the old Alpine population, having adopted the language of the Roman soldiers during the conquest.[Pg 339] They are also in the process of disappearing as a linguistic group; their language is being replaced by Italian in Tyrol and by German in Switzerland. The same goes for the Friulans who are related to this group and who live in the Tagliamento basin in Venetia.

7. The Rumanian group comprises the Rumanians who are found, beyond Moldo-Wallachia, again in Transylvania (Austria), the south-east of Hungary, the north-east of Servia, Bessarabia, and in the lower valley of the Dniester (south-west of Russia). To the Rumanians are related the Aromunes or Kutzo-Vlakhs, or Zinzars of Epirus and Macedonia, speaking a dialect allied to Rumanian, but modified by contact with Turks, Greeks, and Albanians.[379]

7. The Rumanian group includes the Rumanians found, in addition to Moldo-Wallachia, in Transylvania (Austria), the southeast of Hungary, the northeast of Serbia, Bessarabia, and in the lower valley of the Dniester (southwest of Russia). The Rumanians are related to the Aromunes or Kutzo-Vlakhs, or Zinzars of Epirus and Macedonia, who speak a dialect that is similar to Rumanian but has been influenced by interactions with Turks, Greeks, and Albanians.[379]

There is no unity of type in any of these seven Latin linguistic families. Among the Languedocian-Catalans we distinguish the presence of at least three races: Western or Cevenole, which prevails on the central table-lands of France, Littoral or Atlanto-Mediterranean, predominant in Provence and Catalonia; Ibero-insular, which we find in Angoumois as in Catalonia (see p. 329, and Map 2). In the same way we may perceive in the Italian group the existence of representatives of almost all the European races (except the Northern); we have only to recall the striking contrast between the Venetian, tall, chestnut coloured, brachycephalic, and the inhabitant of Southern Italy, short, dark, and dolichocephalic. It is among the Portuguese, perhaps, that we find the greatest unity of type; the majority of them belong to the Ibero-insular race, except in the north of the country, where we find intermixtures with the Western race, as among the Galicians of Spain.

There is no single type among these seven Latin language families. In the Languedocian-Catalans, we can identify at least three different ethnic groups: the Western or Cevenole, which is dominant in the central highlands of France; the Littoral or Atlanto-Mediterranean, prevalent in Provence and Catalonia; and the Ibero-insular, found in Angoumois as well as in Catalonia (see p. 329, and Map 2). Similarly, in the Italian group, we see representatives of nearly all European races (except for the Northern ones); just think of the sharp contrast between the tall, chestnut-haired, brachycephalic Venetians and the short, dark, dolichocephalic people of Southern Italy. Among the Portuguese, we may find the greatest uniformity; most of them belong to the Ibero-insular race, except in the north of the country, where there are intermixes with the Western race, similar to the Galicians in Spain.

II. The Germanic or Teutonic peoples are usually divided into three great linguistic groups: Anglo-Frisian, Scandinavian, and German.

II. The Germanic or Teutonic peoples are typically divided into three main linguistic groups: Anglo-Frisian, Scandinavian, and German.

1. The languages of the Anglo-Frisian group, derived probably from the ancient Gothic, are spoken by the Frisians[Pg 340] of the north of Holland and the extreme north-west of Germany, by the inhabitants of England (Figs. 91, 92, 97, and 101), and a considerable part of Scotland (Figs. 88, 95, and 96), Ireland (Fig. 93), and Wales (Fig. 19), where English encroaches more and more on the domain of the ancient Celtic languages.

1. The languages in the Anglo-Frisian group, likely derived from ancient Gothic, are spoken by the Frisians[Pg 340] in northern Holland and the far northwest of Germany, by people in England (Figs. 91, 92, 97, and 101), and a significant portion of Scotland (Figs. 88, 95, and 96), Ireland (Fig. 93), and Wales (Fig. 19), where English increasingly takes over from the ancient Celtic languages.

The English language, which comprises many dialects,[380] is, in the main, the Anglo-Saxon dialect, a branch of low German imported into the island in the fifth century and modified in the eleventh century by the language of gallicised Normans.

The English language, which includes many dialects,[380] is primarily the Anglo-Saxon dialect, a branch of Low German brought to the island in the fifth century and changed in the eleventh century by the language of French-speaking Normans.

2. The Scandinavian group comprises the Swedes, Norwegians (Figs. 89 and 90), and Danes, the two last speaking almost the same language. The Swedish language is also found in Finland (especially on the coast), as Danish is in Schleswig. The Icelanders, descended for the most part from Danish colonists, speak a special dialect, which approaches most nearly to the old Norse.

2. The Scandinavian group includes the Swedes, Norwegians (Figs. 89 and 90), and Danes, with the last two speaking almost the same language. The Swedish language is also spoken in Finland (especially along the coast), just as Danish is in Schleswig. The Icelanders, mostly descended from Danish colonists, speak a unique dialect that is closest to the old Norse.

Englishman, Saxon Type

FIG. 101.—Englishman (Gloucestershire),
Saxon type.
(After Beddoe.)

Fig. 101.—Englishman (Gloucestershire),
Saxon type.
(After Beddoe.)

3. The German or Teutonic group. The Germans of the north (Saxons, Hanoverians, etc.) speak low German (platt-Deutsch, nieder-Deutsch). One of the dialects of this idiom is transformed into the Flemish or Dutch tongue, employed by the Netherlanders, as well as the Flemings of the north of Belgium,[381] and several cantons of the department of the north in France. The southern Germans (the Alemanni of German Switzerland, of Alsace and Baden; the Swabians of this last province, Wurtemberg, and of Bavaria; the Bavarians of eastern Bavaria and of Austria) speak high German (hoch-Deutsch). The inhabitants of middle Germany (Thuringians, Franconians, etc.) speak middle German (mittel-Deutsch). This is also the language of the Prussians, a people formed in part from the Slavo-Lithuanian elements germanised but a few centuries ago. The boundary-line between low and high German passes, from the Flemish zone in France and Belgium,[Pg 341] almost by Dusseldorf, Cassel, Dessau, and curving round Berlin in the north reaches the confluence of the Oder and of the Warta, following the course of this last.[382] There exist further in Europe several German colonies: in upper Italy (Sette-Communi, etc.), in Bohemia, in Hungary, and in the south and south-east of Russia. The German tongue is much spoken in the Baltic provinces of Russia, as well as in Poland and Austria-Hungary.[383]

3. The German or Teutonic group. The Germans from the north (Saxons, Hanoverians, etc.) speak low German (platt-Deutsch, nieder-Deutsch). One of the dialects of this language has evolved into the Flemish or Dutch language, which is used by the people of the Netherlands as well as the Flemings in northern Belgium,[381] and several areas in the northern part of France. The southern Germans (the Alemanni of German Switzerland, Alsace, and Baden; the Swabians from Wurtemberg and Bavaria; the Bavarians from eastern Bavaria and Austria) speak high German (hoch-Deutsch). The inhabitants of central Germany (Thuringians, Franconians, etc.) speak middle German (mittel-Deutsch). This is also the language of the Prussians, a group that is partly composed of Slavo-Lithuanian elements that were Germanized just a few centuries ago. The boundary between low and high German runs from the Flemish region in France and Belgium,[Pg 341] almost through Dusseldorf, Cassel, Dessau, and then curves around Berlin in the north to the confluence of the Oder and Warta rivers, following the latter's course.[382] There are also several German communities in Europe: in northern Italy (Sette-Communi, etc.), in Bohemia, in Hungary, and in the south and southeast of Russia. The German language is widely spoken in the Baltic provinces of Russia, as well as in Poland and Austria-Hungary.[383]

Russian Carpenter

FIG. 102.—Russian carpenter,
47 years old, district of Pokrovsk (gov. Vladimir).
(Phot. Bogdanoff, Coll. Museum of Nat. Hist., Paris.)

FIG. 102.—Russian carpenter,
47 years old, district of Pokrovsk (gov. Vladimir).
(Phot. Bogdanoff, Coll. Museum of Nat. Hist., Paris.)

From the somatological point of view, the Germanic group is no more homogeneous than the “Latin.” Let us take, for example, the Anglo-Frisians. We find among them at least three races in manifold combinations. The Northern race (see p. 328, and Map 2) is prevalent in the Frisian countries of Germany and Holland, as well as in that part of England situated north of the line from Manchester to Hull, and on the east coast, south of this line (Figs. 88, 91, and 97). The secondary North-west race preponderates in the centre of England (counties of Oxford, Hertford, and Gloucester, Fig. 101, etc.), while the influence of the secondary Sub[Pg 343]-northern race is especially felt in the counties of Leicester and Nottingham, and on the south coast, with the exception of Cornwall and Devon, where the Northern and North-western races are counter-balanced (Fig. 92). In Scotland the Northern type is often disguised by the dark colouring of the hair (Figs. 95 and 96). The Scandinavian group is fairly homogeneous, especially formed as it is of the Northern race (Figs. 88 to 90). But in the German group diversities reappear, and we find in it elements of almost all the races of Europe except the Littoral and Ibero-insular ones.

From a biological perspective, the Germanic group isn't any more uniform than the “Latin” group. Take the Anglo-Frisians, for example. Among them, we can identify at least three different races in various combinations. The Northern race (see p. 328, and Map 2) is mainly found in the Frisian regions of Germany and Holland, as well as in the part of England that lies north of the line from Manchester to Hull, and along the east coast, south of this line (Figs. 88, 91, and 97). The secondary North-west race is predominant in central England (in the counties of Oxford, Hertford, and Gloucester, Fig. 101, etc.), while the influence of the secondary Sub-northern race is especially noticeable in Leicester and Nottingham counties, and along the south coast, except for Cornwall and Devon, where the Northern and North-western races balance each other out (Fig. 92). In Scotland, the Northern type is often obscured by the darker hair color (Figs. 95 and 96). The Scandinavian group is fairly uniform, largely consisting of the Northern race (Figs. 88 to 90). However, within the German group, various differences arise, composed of elements from nearly all the races in Europe, excluding the Littoral and Ibero-insular ones.

Russian Carpenter, Profile View

FIG. 103.—Same subject as Fig. 102, seen in profile.
(Phot. Bogdanoff, Coll. Museum of Nat. Hist., Paris.)

FIG. 103.—Same subject as Fig. 102, shown in profile.
(Phot. Bogdanoff, Coll. Museum of Nat. Hist., Paris.)

III. The Slav peoples may be divided into three great[Pg 344] linguistic groups—eastern, western, and southern.[384] The eastern group comprises the Great Russians or Vielkorousses (Figs. 102 to 105), the Little Russians or Malorousses, otherwise called Ukrainians or Ruthenians, and the Bielorousses or White Russians. The latter inhabit the upper basins of the Dnieper, the Dwina, and the Vistula as far as the river Pripet (a tributary of the Dnieper), which separates them from the Little Russians. As to the boundary between these and the Great Russians, it follows an undulating line from the town of Souraj towards the Don, then a little to the north of the province of Kharkov, and thence to the south as far as the shores of the Sea of Azov. The Little Russians of eastern Galicia and Bukovina are known by the collective name of Ruthenians, or the local names of Gorales (mountaineers), Huzules, Boïki, Tukholtsi, etc. The colonisers of eastern and northern Russia have been Great Russians; the Little Russians have founded colonies in the south-east of Russia.

III. The Slavic peoples can be categorized into three main[Pg 344] linguistic groups—eastern, western, and southern.[384] The eastern group includes the Great Russians or Vielkorousses (Figs. 102 to 105), the Little Russians or Malorousses, also known as Ukrainians or Ruthenians, and the Bielorousses or White Russians. The latter group lives in the upper basins of the Dnieper, Dwina, and Vistula rivers up to the Pripet River (a tributary of the Dnieper), which acts as a boundary with the Little Russians. The boundary between the Little Russians and Great Russians follows an undulating line from the town of Souraj towards the Don, then slightly north of the province of Kharkov, and finally south to the shores of the Sea of Azov. The Little Russians from eastern Galicia and Bukovina are referred to collectively as Ruthenians, or by local names like Gorales (mountaineers), Huzules, Boïki, Tukholtsi, and others. The settlers of eastern and northern Russia have primarily been Great Russians, while the Little Russians have established colonies in southeastern Russia.

The western Slav group is composed of Poles of Russian Poland, western Galicia, Posen, and eastern Prussia (Mazours, Kashoobs), whose language is somewhat common in Lithuania; of Wends or Lujichanes or Sorobes, of the kingdom of Saxony and the Prussian province of Saxony (several thousands are in process of being germanised), of Czechs or Bohemians of Bohemia, and of a part of Moravia, of Slovaks, of Moravia and Hungary.

The western Slav group includes Poles from Russian Poland, western Galicia, Posen, and eastern Prussia (Mazours, Kashoobs), whose language is somewhat common in Lithuania; Wends or Lujichanes or Sorobes from the kingdom of Saxony and the Prussian province of Saxony (many of them are in the process of being germanized), Czechs or Bohemians from Bohemia, and a portion of Moravia, as well as Slovaks from Moravia and Hungary.

As to the southern group, it comprises the Slovenes or Slovintsi of Carniola and the interior of Istria (Austria-Hungary), and the Serbo-Croats, known by the name of Khorvates in Hungary, of Serbs in Servia, of Morlaks,[Pg 345] Uskoks, etc., in Dalmatia, of Herzogovinians, Bosnians, Montenegrins, or Tsrnagortsi in other parts of the Balkan peninsula. The Servian tongue is also spoken in a portion of Macedonia. The Slav colonies which still existed some centuries ago in Greece and Thessaly must have been formed largely of Serbo-Croats. We must, lastly, include in this group the Bulgarians, a people of Turco-Finnish origin, slavonised for at least ten centuries; their habitat is in Bulgaria, Rumelia, a part of Macedonia, and several localities of Turkey. There exist several Bulgarian colonies in Russia (Crimea, northern shore of the Sea of Azov).

As for the southern group, it includes the Slovenes or Slovintsi from Carniola and the central region of Istria (Austria-Hungary), and the Serbo-Croats, referred to as Khorvates in Hungary, Serbs in Serbia, Morlaks, [Pg 345] Uskoks, and others in Dalmatia, and the Herzogovinians, Bosnians, Montenegrins, or Tsrnagortsi in different parts of the Balkan Peninsula. The Serbian language is also spoken in parts of Macedonia. The Slav communities that existed a few centuries ago in Greece and Thessaly were likely made up mostly of Serbo-Croats. Finally, we should include in this group the Bulgarians, a people of Turco-Finnish descent who have been Slavicized for at least ten centuries; they primarily live in Bulgaria, Rumelia, part of Macedonia, and various areas of Turkey. There are also several Bulgarian communities in Russia (Crimea, northern coast of the Sea of Azov).

No greater homogeneity is shown by the Slav group than by the two great preceding ones, from the point of view of corporeal structure, and it is useless to look for a “Slav type.” Among the Slav peoples there is an interblending, as far as is known at present, of three principal and three secondary races, without taking into account the Turco-Ugrian elements. The traits of the secondary Vistulian race appear especially among the Poles of Prussia and Russia; the Eastern race is most marked in the White Russians, but is also met with among the Great Russians, the Mazours, and the Wends; the Adriatic race characterises the Serbo-Croats, as well as certain Czechs and Ruthenians; the sub-Adriatic race is well represented by a section of the Czechs, while numerous elements of the Western race are met with among the Slovaks, the Little Russians, and certain Great Russians.

No greater uniformity is found in the Slavic group than in the two large groups that came before it, from the perspective of physical structure, and it's pointless to search for a "Slavic type." Among the Slavic peoples, there is a mix, as far as we know now, of three main races and three secondary races, not including the Turco-Ugrian elements. The characteristics of the secondary Vistulian race are especially evident among the Poles of Prussia and Russia; the Eastern race is most prominent in the White Russians, but is also found among the Great Russians, the Mazours, and the Wends; the Adriatic race is typical of the Serbo-Croats, as well as some Czechs and Ruthenians; the sub-Adriatic race is well represented by a portion of the Czechs, while various elements of the Western race can be seen among the Slovaks, the Little Russians, and some Great Russians.

Joined to the three great linguistic groups of Aryan peoples which we have just characterised are three others, less considerable but not less interesting, their manner of speech perhaps being nearer to the primitive Aryan tongue. These are the Letto-Lithuanian, Helleno-Illyrian, and Celtic groups.

Joined to the three major language groups of Aryan peoples that we've just described are three others, which are smaller but still fascinating, possibly having a way of speaking that is closer to the original Aryan language. These are the Letto-Lithuanian, Helleno-Illyrian, and Celtic groups.

The peoples of the first group are the Letts of Livonia and Kurland (Russia), and the Lithuanians peopling the provinces of Vilna, Grodno, the north of Russian Poland, as well as western Prussia, where they are germanised for the most part.

The people of the first group are the Letts from Livonia and Kurland (Russia), along with the Lithuanians living in the provinces of Vilna, Grodno, northern Russian Poland, and western Prussia, where they have mostly been germanized.

The majority of the Letts belong to the Northern or Sub[Pg 346]-northern race, while the Lithuanians exhibit elements of the Sub-northern and Eastern race.

The majority of the Letts belong to the Northern or Sub[Pg 346]-northern race, while the Lithuanians show traits of the Sub-northern and Eastern races.

Russian Woman, District of Veréïa

FIG. 104.—Russian woman of the district of Veréïa
(gov. Moscow), 20 years old, Eastern race (?).
(Phot. Bogdanoff, Coll. Museum of Nat. Hist., Paris.)

FIG. 104.—A 20-year-old Russian woman from the district of Veréïa
(Moscow region), Eastern descent (?).
(Photo by Bogdanoff, Collection Museum of Natural History, Paris.)

Among the peoples of the Helleno-Illyrian group the Greeks are distributed outside the political frontiers of the kingdom of Greece, in Epirus, and on the coast of Macedonia and the Propontis. Greek colonies are found in the rest of Turkey, in southern Russia, and in the south-east of Italy (province of Lecce, Terra d’Otranto). The Albanians or Skiptars form a people whose linguistic affinities are little known. Two sub-divisions are recognised, formed of very distinct elements from the physical point of view: the Gegs and the Mirdites on the north, the Tosks on the south.[Pg 347] Albanian colonies are found in Greece, in the south of Italy (Basilicata, Calabria, and Sicily), and Corsica (in Cardevole).

Among the Helleno-Illyrian group, the Greeks are found beyond the political borders of Greece, in Epirus, and along the Macedonian coast and the Propontis. Greek colonies exist throughout the rest of Turkey, southern Russia, and southeastern Italy (province of Lecce, Terra d’Otranto). The Albanians or Skiptars form a group whose linguistic connections are not well understood. Two subdivisions are recognized, consisting of very distinct physical elements: the Gegs and the Mirdites in the north, and the Tosks in the south.[Pg 347] Albanian communities can be found in Greece, southern Italy (Basilicata, Calabria, and Sicily), and Corsica (in Cardevole).

Russian Woman, Profile View

FIG. 105.—Same subject as Fig. 104, seen in profile.
(Phot. Bogdanoff, Coll. Mus. of Nat. Hist., Paris.)

FIG. 105.—Same subject as Fig. 104, viewed from the side.
(Phot. Bogdanoff, Coll. Mus. of Nat. Hist., Paris.)

The physical types are very diversified among the Greeks, and still require to be studied. The Albanians of the north appear to be connected with the Adriatic or sub-Adriatic race, but nothing is known about the southern Albanians. The Albanian colonists in Italy and Corsica have the same physical traits as the surrounding population.

The physical types among the Greeks are very diverse and still need to be studied. The northern Albanians seem to be linked to the Adriatic or sub-Adriatic race, but there's little information about the southern Albanians. The Albanian settlers in Italy and Corsica share the same physical features as the local population.

The peoples speaking Celtic languages are divided into two sections according to dialect: the Gaelic section comprises the Celts of the north-west of Scotland, the west of Ireland, and the Isle of Man. The second or Cymric section is composed of the inhabitants of Wales (Welsh language) and[Pg 348] of Brittany (Bas Breton). The Cornish language, spoken two centuries ago in Cornwall, is now a dead language. The other Celtic dialects are also destined to disappear owing to the spread of such highly developed and widely known languages as English and French. There is no “Celtic” type or race. The Gaels of Scotland, as well as the Irish of Munster, appear to be connected with the Northern race; the Irish of Connaught present two or three types, variants of the secondary North-western race, which is predominant among the Welsh, and which is found again modified in Cornwall and in Devon (Fig. 92), by side, perhaps, of the remnants of Neolithic types; and lastly, the Low Bretons belong to the Western race, more or less intermixed, like the French of the central table-land.[385]

The people who speak Celtic languages are divided into two groups based on dialect: the Gaelic group includes the Celts from the north-west of Scotland, the west of Ireland, and the Isle of Man. The second group, called Cymric, consists of the people of Wales (Welsh language) and[Pg 348] of Brittany (Bas Breton). The Cornish language, which was spoken two centuries ago in Cornwall, is now extinct. Other Celtic dialects are also likely to disappear due to the influence of widely spoken languages like English and French. There is no single “Celtic” type or race. The Gaels of Scotland, as well as the Irish from Munster, seem to be connected to the Northern race; the Irish from Connaught show two or three types, variations of the secondary North-western race, which is most common among the Welsh and can also be seen, though changed, in Cornwall and Devon (Fig. 92), possibly alongside remnants of Neolithic types; finally, the Low Bretons belong to the Western race, somewhat mixed, similar to the French from the central highlands.[385]

B. AN-ARYAN PEOPLES.

B. AN-ARYAN PEOPLE.

As we have already said, peoples speaking Aryan tongues are not the only ones to inhabit Europe. We find in it the representatives of other linguistic families: Basque, Finno-Ugrian, Turkish, Mongolian, Semitic, etc.

As we have already mentioned, people who speak Aryan languages are not the only ones living in Europe. It also includes representatives from other language families: Basque, Finno-Ugrian, Turkish, Mongolian, Semitic, etc.

The Basques inhabit the extreme south-west corner of France (in the department of the Basses Pyrenées) and the adjoining part of Spain, provinces of Guipuzcoa and Biscay (as far as Bilbao on the west), and the north of the provinces of Navarre and Alava. The affinities of their agglutinous language have not yet been clearly determined. As to their physical type, it is also quite peculiar. Its chief characteristics, according to Collignon, are its mesocephaly “with a peculiar swelling in the parietal regions,” conical torso, elongated and pointed face, etc. In the main this type approaches most nearly to the Littoral race, and is met with, in a pure state, especially among the French Basques.[386]

The Basques live in the far southwestern corner of France (in the Basses Pyrenées department) and the nearby part of Spain, specifically in the provinces of Guipuzcoa and Biscay (up to Bilbao in the west), as well as the northern parts of Navarre and Alava. The connections of their unique language, which is agglutinative, are still not fully understood. Regarding their physical characteristics, they are quite distinctive. According to Collignon, the main features include mesocephaly "with a distinctive bulging in the parietal areas," a conical torso, and an elongated, pointed face, among others. Overall, this type is most similar to the Littoral race and can be found, in its pure form, especially among the French Basques.[386]

Peoples speaking the Finno-Ugrian dialects.The Magyars or Hungarians[387] occupy in a compact mass, four millions and a half in number, the plain of Hungary. They represent 43 per cent. of the population of this State. There may still be distinguished among them traces of the ancient divisions into various tribes (Haiduks, Yazigs, Kumans, etc.). The eastern portion of Transylvania is also inhabited by a division of the Magyars, the Szeklers, who differ by their mesocephalic skull from the other Hungarians, who are brachycephalic for the most part. The Western Finns are divided into Finns properly so called or Suomi, Baltic Finns, and Karelians. The Suomi (in the singular Suomalaiset) occupy Finland, with the exception of certain points on the coast, taken by the Swedes; they are sub-divided into several small sections, according to their dialects: Savolaks, Tavasts, Kvénes or Kvanes. The latter inhabit the north of Sweden. The Baltic Finns, formerly very numerous, are reduced to two peoples, the Esthonians or Esths of the Russian provinces of Esthonia and Livonia, with the adjacent islands (Ösel, Dago, etc.); and the Livonians, quartered to the number of 2000 at the extremity of the north coast of Kurland; they have entirely disappeared from Livonia, from which they derive their name. The Karelians are scattered in groups, more or less important, over the south-east of Finland, in the Russian province (“government”) of Olonetsk, and in the north-west of the province of Archangel. Isolated groups of this population found on the plateau of Valdai and almost in the heart of Russia (in the north of the province of Tver) are indications of the ancient expansion of the western Finns towards the east. We must connect with the Karelians the Veps (to the south of Lake Onega) and the Chukhontsi, Finns of the province of St. Petersburg, descendants of the ancient Ingrians and Chudes whose name recurs often in Russian chronicles and legends.[388]

Peoples speaking the Finno-Ugrian dialects.The Magyars or Hungarians[387] make up a compact group of about four and a half million people living in the plains of Hungary. They represent 43 percent of the population of this country. You can still see traces among them of the ancient divisions into different tribes (Haiduks, Yazigs, Kumans, etc.). The eastern part of Transylvania is also home to a subgroup of the Magyars, known as the Szeklers, who have a different skull shape from the other Hungarians, most of whom are brachycephalic. The Western Finns are divided into Finns, also called Suomi, Baltic Finns, and Karelians. The Suomi (singular: Suomalaiset) occupy Finland, except for certain coastal areas taken by the Swedes; they are subdivided into several small groups based on their dialects: Savolaks, Tavasts, Kvénes or Kvanes. The Kvénes live in the northern part of Sweden. The Baltic Finns, once numerous, are now down to two groups, the Estonians or Esths from the Russian provinces of Esthonia and Livonia, along with the nearby islands (Ösel, Dago, etc.); and the Livonians, who number around 2,000 at the northern tip of Kurland; they have completely disappeared from Livonia, which is where their name comes from. The Karelians are spread out in smaller groups across the southeast of Finland, in the Russian province of Olonetsk, and in the northwest of the Archangel province. Isolated groups of this population found on the Valdai Plateau and nearly in the heart of Russia (in the north of the Tver province) show the historical spread of the western Finns eastward. We should also mention the Veps (south of Lake Onega) and the Chukhontsi, Finns from the St. Petersburg province, who are descendants of the ancient Ingrians and Chudes, whose name often appears in Russian chronicles and legends.[388]

Cheremiss, Ural Mountains

FIG. 106.—Cheremiss of Ural Mountains.
(Phot. Sommier.)

FIG. 106.—Cheremiss from Ural Mountains.
(Phot. Sommier.)

The 42nd degree of longitude east of Greenwich seems to[Pg 350] mark the boundary between the western Finns and the following group, that of the eastern Finns or Ugrians. These are tribes dispersed in the north-east of Russia, for the most part mixed with the Russians, and Russianised in language, religion, and customs. We may distinguish among them three principal divisions. The northern division comprises the Zyrians, reduced to some thousand families, buried in the midst of the Russian population, in the eastern part of the provinces of Archangel and Vologda (between the 60th degree of latitude north and the polar circle). The middle division is composed of two neighbouring peoples, Votiaks and Permiaks, dwelling among the Russians, in more or less considerable islets in the[Pg 351] space comprised between the Vetluga and the Kama, tributaries of the Volga. More to the south, in the middle basin of the Volga, as far as about the 50th degree of north latitude, we find the southern group of the Ugrians composed of Cheremiss (Fig. 106) on the left bank of the upper Volga and of Mordva or Mordvinians on both banks of the middle Volga in numerous islets between the 42nd and 54th degree east longitude.[389]

The 42nd degree of longitude east of Greenwich marks the boundary between the western Finns and the next group, the eastern Finns or Ugrians. These tribes are spread out in the northeast of Russia, mostly mixed with Russians and influenced by their language, religion, and customs. We can identify three main divisions among them. The northern division consists of the Zyrians, reduced to a few thousand families, who are surrounded by the Russian population in the eastern part of the Archangel and Vologda provinces (between the 60th latitude north and the polar circle). The middle division includes two neighboring peoples, the Votiaks and Permiaks, living among Russians in various isolated areas between the Vetluga and Kama rivers, which are tributaries of the Volga. Further south, in the middle basin of the Volga, up to around the 50th degree north latitude, is the southern group of the Ugrians, made up of Cheremiss (Fig. 106) on the left bank of the upper Volga and Mordva or Mordvinians on both banks of the middle Volga, in many islets between the 42nd and 54th degrees east longitude.[389]

We may class among the Finns, for linguistic reasons, three peoples differing from each other as much as they are distinguished from the groups I have just mentioned. These are the Lapps, the Samoyeds, and the Ostiaks. The Lapps occupy the most northern region of Sweden and Norway (Scandinavian Lapps), as well as the north of Finland and the Kola peninsula in the north of Russia (Russian Lapps or Lopari). They appear to have been formerly spread much more to the south of their present habitat. They are the shortest in stature of all Europeans, and almost the most brachycephalic (see Appendices I. and II.). One portion only of the Samoyeds inhabits Europe, on the east of the river Mezen and to the north of the polar circle; the rest wander about Siberia between the Arctic Ocean and the lower Obi. Their neighbours on the south, the Ostiaks, extend from the middle Obi to the Ural mountains, over which they pass to occupy several points in Europe. The Ostiaks of both slopes of the Urals bear also the name of Vogules or Manz.[390]

We can group three peoples among the Finns for linguistic reasons, even though they differ significantly from each other and from the groups I just mentioned. These are the Lapps, the Samoyeds, and the Ostiaks. The Lapps live in the northernmost regions of Sweden and Norway (Scandinavian Lapps), as well as in northern Finland and the Kola Peninsula in northern Russia (Russian Lapps or Lopari). They seem to have once lived much further south than where they are now. They are the shortest of all Europeans and are almost the most brachycephalic (see Appendices I. and II.). Only a small part of the Samoyeds lives in Europe, east of the river Mezen and north of the polar circle; the rest move around Siberia between the Arctic Ocean and the lower Obi. Their southern neighbors, the Ostiaks, stretch from the middle Obi to the Ural Mountains, from which they cross over to occupy several areas in Europe. The Ostiaks on both sides of the Urals are also known as Vogules or Manz.[390]

As regards physical type there is a great difference between[Pg 352] the western and the eastern Finns. The former are the offspring of the union of the Northern or Sub-northern race with the Eastern race, somewhat tall, mesocephalic, and light-complexioned, while the latter belong for the most part to a special Ugrian race, short, dolichocephalic, dark, with slightly Mongoloid face.

As for physical type, there is a significant difference between[Pg 352] western and eastern Finns. The western Finns are descendants of a mix between the Northern or Sub-northern race and the Eastern race; they tend to be somewhat tall, have medium-sized heads, and light complexions. In contrast, eastern Finns mostly belong to a distinct Ugrian race, which is generally shorter, has long heads, darker skin, and slightly Mongoloid facial features.

For the other Eurasian peoples (Turks, Armenians, Gypsies, Jews, etc.), see the following chapter.

For the other Eurasian peoples (Turks, Armenians, Gypsies, Jews, etc.), see the following chapter.

Kundrof Tatar, Astrakhan

FIG. 107.—Kundrof Tatar (Turkoman) of Astrakhan, with cap.
(Phot. Sommier.)

FIG. 107.—Kundrof Tatar (Turkoman) of Astrakhan, wearing a cap.
(Phot. Sommier.)

Tatar, with Skull-cap

FIG. 108.—The same in profile, with skull-cap,
which is never removed, worn under the cap.
(Phot. Sommier.)

FIG. 108.—The same in profile, with a skull cap,
which is never taken off, worn under the hat.
(Phot. Sommier.)

C. CAUCASIAN PEOPLES.[391]

C. WHITE PEOPLE.[391]

All who have seen the ethnographical maps of the Caucasus must have been struck by the motley appearance which they present; fifty various tribes may in fact be counted in this isthmus, the area of which is less than that of Spain. I shall speak here only of[Pg 354] the Caucasians properly so called—that is to say, of the peoples who dwell only in the Caucasus, putting on one side all others (Iranians, Europeans, Turks, Mongols, Semites, etc.) who have overflowed into this country from the adjacent regions.

All who have seen the ethnographical maps of the Caucasus must have noticed the diverse appearance they show; you can actually count about fifty different tribes in this area, which is smaller than Spain. I will focus here only on[Pg 354] the Caucasians in the strict sense—that is, the people who live solely in the Caucasus, excluding all others (Iranians, Europeans, Turks, Mongols, Semites, etc.) who have moved into this region from nearby areas.

The Caucasians are sub-divided into four linguistic or ethnic groups: the Cherkess (on the north-west of the Caucasian range), the Lesgian Chechen (on the north-east of the range), the Kartvels or Georgians (on the south-west of the range), and the Ossets (in the centre of the range on both slopes). The last, by their language, are the nearest to the Iranians and the Armenians, but the three other groups form a perfect linguistic unit. The dialects which they speak preserve the impress of a common origin and form a family apart which has nothing in common with any other.

The Caucasians are divided into four linguistic or ethnic groups: the Cherkess (in the northwest of the Caucasian range), the Lesgian Chechen (in the northeast of the range), the Kartvels or Georgians (in the southwest of the range), and the Ossets (in the center of the range on both slopes). The Ossets, based on their language, are the closest to the Iranians and Armenians, but the other three groups form a cohesive linguistic unit. The dialects they speak reflect a shared origin and create a distinct family that has no relation to any others.

The Cherkess or Circassians, until the middle of this century, inhabited all the western part of Ciscaucasia; but, since the conquest of their country by the Russians, they have emigrated en masse into the Ottoman empire. At the present day there are only a few remnants of them in the Caucasus. Principal tribes, Abkhazians, Adighé or Cherkess (Circassians) properly so called, Kabards of the plain, Abadzeh, Chapsugh, etc.

The Cherkess or Circassians, until the middle of this century, lived throughout the entire western part of Ciscaucasia; however, after their country was conquered by the Russians, they largely migrated en masse to the Ottoman Empire. Today, only a few remnants of them remain in the Caucasus. The main tribes include the Abkhazians, Adighé or Cherkess (properly known as Circassians), Kabards of the plain, Abadzeh, Chapsugh, and others.

The Chechen-Lesgians are divided, as the name implies, into two groups: the Chechen (with the Ingushes, the Kists, etc.) of the upper basin of the Terek, who have long been considered as a population apart (Figs. 110 and 111), and the Lesgians of Daghestan. These last are sub-divided into five great sections, according to their dialects: (1) The Avars-Andi, with the Dido, whose language tends to preponderate owing to the historic part played by the tribe of the Avars, to which belonged the famous Shamil, the hero of the Caucasus, whose memory still lives. (2) The Dargha in the centre of Daghestan, the best known tribe of which is that of the Kubachi, living in little houses piled one above the other on the sides of the mountains. (3) The Kurines of the Samur basin, with the Tsakhurs (Tabassaurans, etc.). (4) The Laks or Kazi-Kumyks, with which are connected lesser known tribes, like the Agul, the Budukh, and the Khinalugh, whose[Pg 355] language is distinct from all the other dialects of Daghestan. (5) The Udes, an ancient Christian tribe converted to Islamism, of which there remain but 750 individuals still acquainted with their mother-tongue (district of Nukha, province of Elisabetpol).

The Chechen-Lesgians are split, as the name suggests, into two groups: the Chechen (along with the Ingushes, the Kists, etc.) from the upper basin of the Terek, who have long been seen as a separate population (Figs. 110 and 111), and the Lesgians from Daghestan. The latter are further divided into five major sections based on their dialects: (1) The Avars-Andi, including the Dido, whose language is dominant due to the historical role of the Avars tribe, which included the legendary Shamil, a hero of the Caucasus whose legacy continues. (2) The Dargha in central Daghestan, best known for the Kubachi tribe, who live in small houses stacked on the mountainsides. (3) The Kurines of the Samur basin, including the Tsakhurs (Tabassaurans, etc.). (4) The Laks or Kazi-Kumyks, associated with lesser-known tribes like the Agul, the Budukh, and the Khinalugh, whose[Pg 355] language is unique among all Daghestan dialects. (5) The Udes, an ancient Christian tribe that converted to Islam, of which only about 750 people still know their native language (located in the Nukha district of the Elisabetpol province).

Georgian Imer of Kutais

FIG. 109.—Georgian Imer of Kutais.
(Phot. from Coll. of Author.)

FIG. 109.—Georgian Imer of Kutais.
(Photo from the Author's Collection.)

The Kartvels, Karthli or Georgians, who alone of the Caucasians possess a special mode of writing, and a literature, are divided into three linguistic sections: (1) Gruzin, which comprises the Georgians properly so called of the plains of the province of Tiflis, Georgians of the mountains (Khevsurs, Pshavs, and Toushs, 21,300 in all), and the Imers (Fig. 109) with the Gurians. (2) The Mingrelian section of people[Pg 356] living more to the west, composed of the Mingrelians of the Kutais country and the Lazes of the Batum circle. (3) The Swan section, comprising the tribe of Swanet or Swanetians, driven back into the unhealthy regions of the province of Kutais, where the race degenerates; cretins and those afflicted with goitre form a third part of the population.

The Kartvels, Karthli, or Georgians, who uniquely among the Caucasians have their own writing system and literature, are divided into three language groups: (1) Gruzin, which includes the Georgians proper from the plains of Tiflis, the mountain Georgians (Khevsurs, Pshavs, and Toushs, totaling 21,300), and the Imers alongside the Gurians. (2) The Mingrelian group, located further to the west, consists of the Mingrelians from the Kutais region and the Lazes from the Batum area. (3) The Swan group, which includes the Swanet tribe or Swanetians, has been pushed into the unhealthy areas of the Kutais province, where the population suffers from degeneration; cretins and those with goitre make up a significant part of the community.

Chechen of Daghestan

FIG. 110.—Chechen of Daghestan.
(Phot. Chantre.)

FIG. 110.—Chechen from Daghestan.
(Photo by Chantre.)

The Ossets, while speaking a language which (in the Digorian dialect) is nearly allied to Iranian, have nevertheless much in common with the other Caucasians, from whom they are distinguished perhaps by the frequent occurrence of fair hair (10 per cent.) and light eyes (29 per cent.); more frequent than among all the other Caucasian peoples, the Imers, the Lesgi-Dido, and the Chechen excepted. But figures are still too inadequate in regard to the number of subjects with dark hair and eyes (51 and 53 per cent.) to enable us to affirm, as all authors from Am. Marcellinus to our own days have done, that the Ossets are a people of fair[Pg 357] race. They are above the average in stature (1 m. 68), and sub-brachycephalic (ceph. ind. on the liv. sub. 82.6).

The Ossets, who speak a language that is closely related to Iranian in the Digorian dialect, share many traits with other Caucasian groups. They are particularly notable for having a higher occurrence of fair hair (10 percent) and light eyes (29 percent), which is more common than among most other Caucasian peoples, except for the Imers, Lesgi-Dido, and Chechen. However, the data on the number of people with dark hair and eyes (51 and 53 percent) is still too limited to support the claim made by many authors, from Am. Marcellinus to the present, that the Ossets are predominantly of fair [Pg 357] race. They have an above-average height (1.68 m) and are classified as sub-brachycephalic (ceph. ind. on the liv. sub. 82.6).

Chechen, Profile View

FIG. 111.—Same as Fig. 110, seen in profile.
(Phot. Chantre.)

FIG. 111.—Same as Fig. 110, shown from the side.
(Photo. Chantre.)

As to the somatic characters of the other Caucasians, we know little of those of the Cherkess (sub-brachycephalic, of medium height), but we are better informed in regard to the Lesgians and the Kartvel. The contrast between the two groups is striking. The Lesgians are very brachycephalic (see Appendix II.), especially the tribes of the east; their stature is fairly high. To these characters are united others which, in their totality, produce the most singular effect; the prominent nose, straight or curved, recalls the Semites, while the projecting cheek-bones, broad face, and angles of the lower jaw directed outward, suggest the Mongols; lastly, the whole aspect becomes still more odd, owing to the light-grey or greenish eyes, and fair or chestnut hair, so common among the Lesgians (Figs. 110 and 111).

As for the physical traits of other Caucasian groups, we know little about the Cherkess (who are sub-brachycephalic and of average height), but we have more information regarding the Lesgians and the Kartvel. The difference between these two groups is quite noticeable. The Lesgians are very brachycephalic (see Appendix II.), especially the eastern tribes; they are relatively tall. These traits are combined with others that, together, create a unique appearance: the prominent nose, either straight or curved, resembles that of Semites, while the high cheekbones, wide face, and outward-angled jaw give off a Mongolian vibe; additionally, the overall look is made even more unusual by the light-grey or greenish eyes and light or chestnut hair that are typical among the Lesgians (Figs. 110 and 111).

Quite different are the characters of the Kartvel. In the first[Pg 358] place, they form a less homogeneous group; we must distinguish in it between the eastern and the western Georgians. The former (Gruzins) are true brachycephals, though in a lesser degree than the Lesgians, while the latter (Mingrelians, Imers) are distinguished from all the other Caucasians by the elongated form of the head (see Appendix II.). The stature varies in harmony with the cranial forms; the Kartvel tribes with rounded heads have the shortest stature, and the dolichocephalic tribes the highest; light hair is less common in the two groups than among the Lesgians, but we find among the Georgians in general a great number of subjects in whom the iris has a particular yellow colour, a grey or greenish yellow. The Gruzins have a rather rounded face and broad nose, while the Imers have an elongated visage, thin nose, tight lips, pointed chin (Fig. 109); their physiognomy reminds one of a goat’s head, according to Pantiukhof, who considers the Imers to be the purest representatives of the primitive Kartvels.[392]

The characters of the Kartvel are quite different. First of all, they are less homogeneous; we should distinguish between the eastern and western Georgians. The eastern Georgians (Gruzins) are true brachycephals, although to a lesser degree than the Lesgians, while the western Georgians (Mingrelians, Imers) are different from all other Caucasians because of their elongated head shape (see Appendix II.). Height varies with cranial shapes; the Kartvel tribes with rounded heads tend to be shorter, while the dolichocephalic tribes are taller. Light hair is less common in these two groups compared to the Lesgians, but among the Georgians overall, there are many individuals with a distinctive yellow eye color—a grey or greenish-yellow. The Gruzins typically have a somewhat rounded face and broad nose, while the Imers have a more elongated face, slim nose, thin lips, and pointed chin (Fig. 109); their features are said to resemble a goat's head, according to Pantiukhof, who views the Imers as the most authentic representatives of the primitive Kartvels.[392]


CHAPTER X.

RACES AND PEOPLES OF ASIA.

Asians and their cultures.

ANCIENT INHABITANTS OF ASIA.—Prehistoric times—Pithecanthropus erectus (Dub.)—Ages of stone and metals.—PRESENT INHABITANTS OF ASIA.—Races of Asia—I. Peoples of Northern Asia—Yeniseian, Palæasiatic and Tunguse groups.—II. Peoples of Central Asia—Turkish, Mongolian, and Thibetan groups—Peoples of the south-west of Thibet and of South China (Lolo, Miao-tsé, Lu-tsé, etc.).—III. Peoples of Eastern Asia—Chinese, Coreans, and Japanese.—IV. Peoples of Indo-China—Aborigines, Mois, Kuis, Siam, Naga, etc.—More recent mixed populations: Annamese, Cambodians, Thai, etc.—V. Peoples of India—Castes—Dravidians and Kolarians—Indo-Aryans and unclassified populations—VI. Peoples of Anterior Asia—Iranians and Semites.

AAncient IINHABITANTS OF ASIA.—Prehistoric times—Pithecanthropus erectus (Dub.)—Stone and metal ages.—PRESENT IINHABITANTS OF ASIA.—Asian races—I. Northern Asian Peoples—Yeniseian, Paleoasiatic, and Tungus groups.—II. Central Asian Peoples—Turkish, Mongolian, and Tibetan groups—Peoples from southwestern Tibet and South China (Lolo, Miao-tsé, Lu-tsé, etc.).—III. Eastern Asian Peoples—Chinese, Koreans, and Japanese.—IV. Indo-China Peoples—Aboriginal groups, Mois, Kuis, Siamese, Naga, etc.—More recent mixed populations: Annamese, Cambodians, Thai, etc.—V. Indian Peoples—Castes—Dravidians and Kolarians—Indo-Aryans and unclassified populations.—VI. Anterior Asian Peoples—Iranians and Semites.

ANCIENT INHABITANTS OF ASIA.

Prehistoric Times.—It is a common practice to call Asia, or at least certain regions of Asia, “the cradle of mankind,” the “officina gentium.” The migrations and invasions of the Asiatic peoples into Europe, which took place from the most remote times, gave birth, naturally enough, to this idea among the western peoples (p. 317 et seq.). However, no serious data authorise us to say that the first man was born rather in Asia than Europe. Nowhere do we find there any traces of tertiary man.[393] Eugène Dubois discovered, it is true, quite close to the [Pg 360] Asiatic continent in the very uppermost tertiary beds (upper pliocene) of the Island of Java, the bones of a being which he considers as intermediate between man and the anthropoid apes, and which he has called Pithecanthropus erectus (Figs. 112 and 113). But Java belongs to-day as much to the Oceanian world as to Asia, and the Pithecanthropus is not altogether a man, either according to his discoverer or many other authorities. Some regard this being simply as a gigantic gibbon, while others (myself among the number) hold that he is a being more closely related to man than to the anthropoid apes, or even a man of a race inferior to all existing ones. If this last hypothesis be correct we must admit the existence of tertiary man in Asia, since it is highly probable that even at the end of the tertiary period the islands of Sumatra and[Pg 361] Java were connected with the great continent by the Malay peninsula.[394]

Prehistoric Times.—It's a common belief to refer to Asia, or at least some parts of Asia, as “the cradle of mankind” and “the workshop of nations.” The migrations and invasions of Asian peoples into Europe, which have occurred since ancient times, naturally led to this idea among Western cultures (p. 317 et seq.). However, there’s no solid evidence to say that the first humans appeared in Asia rather than Europe. There are no signs of early humans in that region.[393] Eugène Dubois did discover, close to the [Pg 360] Asian continent, in the highest tertiary layers (upper pliocene) on the Island of Java, the bones of a being that he considers to be a link between humans and anthropoid apes, which he named Pithecanthropus erectus (Figs. 112 and 113). However, today Java is as much a part of the Oceanian world as it is of Asia, and the Pithecanthropus is not fully considered a human, according to both its discoverer and many other experts. Some see this being as simply a giant gibbon, while others (myself included) believe that it is more closely related to humans than to anthropoid apes, or even a human of an inferior race compared to all existing ones. If this last theory is correct, we must acknowledge the existence of early humans in Asia, since it is very likely that even at the end of the tertiary period, the islands of Sumatra and[Pg 361] Java were connected to the larger continent via the Malay peninsula.[394]

Skull of Pithecanthropus Erectus

FIG. 112.—Skull of the Pithecanthropus erectus, Dub. The calvaria
(a) and the teeth (b, c) are designed by P. Moutet after the casts
and photographs of E. Dubois. The reconstruction of the rest
is made after Dubois and Manouvrier.

FIG. 112.—Skull of the Pithecanthropus erectus, Dub. The calvaria
(a) and the teeth (b, c) are created by P. Moutet based on the casts
and photographs of E. Dubois. The reconstruction of the rest
is done based on Dubois and Manouvrier.

As to quaternary man, if no bones have yet been found, tools absolutely similar to those of Europe have been noted almost everywhere in Asia; in Siberia, around Lake Baikal (Tchersky and Poliakof), and near to Tomsk in the loess, beside a dismembered and calcined skeleton of a mammoth, the remains of a pantagruelic repast of quaternary Siberians (Kuznétzof); in Japan, in the ancient province of Jenchiou, now Osaka, the Ivate and Miaghi province, northern Nippon (S. Fuse), western Nippon (Vidal) in the country of Rikuzen, now in the province of Etzigo or Teshigo (Inuzuka); then in anterior Asia, in the grottos at the mouth of the Nahr-el-Kelb, near Beirut (Lortet); at Hannauch to the east of Tyre (Lortet and Pelagaud), in Galilee (Cazalis of Fondouce and Moretain), in Phœnicia (Zumoffen), etc.[395] In India, attention has been drawn to several palæo[Pg 362]lithic stations in the midst of the ancient alluvia of the rivers Nerbadda, Krishna, and Godaveri (Wynn); in certain places there quartzite implements were associated with the bones of extinct animals (Equus nomadicus, Hippopotamus palæindicus) or animals which have since emigrated into other regions (Bos palæindicus, etc.). Single tools have been found in the beds of laterite near Madras, in Scinde, at Banda, in the central provinces (Rivett-Carnac), in the south-east of Bengal.[396]

As for the early humans, even though no bones have been found yet, tools very similar to those in Europe have been discovered almost everywhere in Asia. In Siberia, around Lake Baikal (Tchersky and Poliakof), and near Tomsk in the loess, next to a fragmented and burned mammoth skeleton, there were signs of a massive feast by early Siberians (Kuznétzof). In Japan, in the ancient province of Jenchiou, now Osaka, as well as in the Ivate and Miaghi provinces in northern Japan (S. Fuse) and western Japan (Vidal) in the area of Rikuzen, now part of the province of Etzigo or Teshigo (Inuzuka); then in western Asia, in the caves at the mouth of the Nahr-el-Kelb near Beirut (Lortet); at Hannauch to the east of Tyre (Lortet and Pelagaud), in Galilee (Cazalis of Fondouce and Moretain), in Phoenicia (Zumoffen), etc.[395] In India, several paleolithic sites have been noted in the ancient alluvial plains of the Nerbadda, Krishna, and Godaveri rivers (Wynn). In certain areas, quartzite tools were found alongside the bones of extinct animals (Equus nomadicus, Hippopotamus palæindicus) or animals that have since migrated to other regions (Bos palæindicus, etc.). Individual tools were discovered in laterite deposits near Madras, in Scinde, at Banda, in the central provinces (Rivett-Carnac), and in southeast Bengal.[396]

Skull of Pithecanthropus Erectus

FIG. 113.—Calvaria of
Pithecanthropus, seen
from above.
(Phot. Dubois.)

FIG. 113.—Calvaria of
Pithecanthropus, viewed
from above.
(Phot. Dubois.)

Monuments and objects of the polished stone and bronze periods, often confounded in Asia, have been found almost everywhere. They are connected with peoples who presented at that remote date great differences in their civilisation and probably in their physical type. The excavations of Schliemann at Hissarlik (Asia Minor) have brought to light a civilisation which appears to correspond with the end of the stone age and the beginning of the bronze epoch (2,500 years B.C.?). Prehistoric objects in polished stone and bronze have been found at other points of Asia Minor (A. Martin), in Lycaonia (Spiegelthal), in the Sinai peninsula (Bauermann and Richard), on the shores of Lake Issik-koul (Russian Turkestan). Southern Siberia, the Kirghiz steppes, north and north-western Mongolia are covered with stone circles (Kereksur), barrows, tumuli, menhirs (Kishachilo) of every form, with burial-places in which are found objects in wood, bone, bronze, copper, iron (Radloff, Potanin, Klementz). The skulls which have been taken from some of these burial-places, in the upper valley of the Yenisei, are dolichocephalic; the plaster mortuary masks[Pg 363] found in the same region by Adrianof present a type somewhat European.[397]

Monuments and items from the polished stone and bronze periods, which are often confused in Asia, have been discovered almost everywhere. They are linked to societies that, at that distant time, showed significant differences in their civilization and likely in their physical appearance as well. The excavations by Schliemann at Hissarlik (Asia Minor) revealed a civilization that seems to align with the end of the Stone Age and the start of the Bronze Age (around 2,500 years BCE?). Prehistoric artifacts made of polished stone and bronze have also been found in various locations in Asia Minor (A. Martin), in Lycaonia (Spiegelthal), in the Sinai Peninsula (Bauermann and Richard), and along the shores of Lake Issik-koul (Russian Turkestan). Southern Siberia, the Kirghiz steppes, and northern and northwestern Mongolia are dotted with stone circles (Kereksur), barrows, tumuli, menhirs (Kishachilo) of various shapes, and burial sites containing items made of wood, bone, bronze, copper, and iron (Radloff, Potanin, Klementz). The skulls retrieved from some of these burial sites in the upper valley of the Yenisei are dolichocephalic; the plaster mortuary masks[Pg 363] found in the same area by Adrianof show a somewhat European type.[397]

Polished Stone Axe, Cambodia

FIG. 114.—Polished stone axe
found in Cambodia. Prehistoric
type peculiar to Indo-China.

FInstagram. 114.—Polished stone axe
discovered in Cambodia. A prehistoric
style unique to Indo-China.

It must not be forgotten that many of these monuments date from the historic epoch and belong, as proved by the runiform inscriptions of Mongolia discovered by Yadrintsef and deciphered by Thomson, to the seventh and eighth centuries of the Christian era.[398]

It should not be overlooked that many of these monuments are from the historical period and, as demonstrated by the runic inscriptions in Mongolia found by Yadrintsef and decoded by Thomson, belong to the seventh and eighth centuries of the Christian era.[398]

The kitchen-middens of Omori, near Tokio, and of several other localities in Japan examined by Morse, Milne, and Tsuboi, afford evidence of the existence in this country of a fairly civilised race which was acquainted with pottery, but employed only bone and partly polished stone implements. The excavations of ancient underground dwellings in the islands of Yezo (Morse, Tsuboi) and Saghalien (Poliakoff) lead us to believe that this race extended much farther to the north. It is possible that it was related to the men whose polished flint implements have been found in Siberia in the valley of the Tunka, in that of the Patcha, one of the tributaries of the river Amur (Uvarof), and in the shell-heaps of the Pacific coast near Vladivostok (Margaritof).[399] Polished stone hatchets[Pg 364] have been found in the north-east of China in the vicinity of tumuli resembling the American “mounds” (Williamson); others have been picked up in the Yunnan (Sladen), and in Burma (Theobald); Moura, Jammes, and Morel exhumed in Cambodia, between Lake Tonlé-Sap and the Mekong, side by side with objects of bronze, several polished stone implements of a peculiar type (Fig. 114), a kind of square-tongued axe (shouldered celt), which has since been found again in several other places in Indo-China as far as the upper Laos (Lefèvre-Pontalis) and Burma.[400] In the district of Somron-Sen (Cambodia), previously explored by Jammes, as well as in the neighbourhood of Saigon, Corre discovered similar implements close to shell-heaps containing, besides pottery and stone tools, human bones, but no skulls.

The kitchen middens of Omori, near Tokyo, and several other locations in Japan studied by Morse, Milne, and Tsuboi provide evidence of a fairly civilized society that knew about pottery but primarily used bone and partly polished stone tools. Excavations of ancient underground homes on the islands of Yezo (Morse, Tsuboi) and Sakhalin (Poliakoff) suggest that this society extended much further north. It's possible that it was connected to the people whose polished flint tools have been discovered in Siberia in the Tunka Valley, in the Patcha Valley, a tributary of the Amur River (Uvarof), and in the shell heaps along the Pacific coast near Vladivostok (Margaritof). Polished stone axes have been found in northeastern China near burial mounds resembling the American “mounds” (Williamson); others have been discovered in Yunnan (Sladen) and in Burma (Theobald); Moura, Jammes, and Morel unearthed several polished stone tools of a unique type in Cambodia, between Lake Tonlé-Sap and the Mekong, alongside bronze objects (Fig. 114), including a kind of square-tongued axe (shouldered celt), which has since been found in various other locations in Indo-China up to upper Laos (Lefèvre-Pontalis) and Burma. In the Somron-Sen district (Cambodia), previously explored by Jammes, as well as near Saigon, Corre found similar tools near shell heaps containing pottery and stone tools, along with human bones, but no skulls.

Lastly, in India, the “cromlechs,” “mounds,” and finds of stone objects similar to those which are found in Europe, may be counted in hundreds. It is certain that the stone “circles” of the central provinces and the “Kouroumbarings” of Southern India date from a period anterior to the Aryan immigration. As in Europe, so in Asia the age of metals borders very closely on the historic period of which the[Pg 365] Chinese annals have preserved for us a record. The monuments of Chaldea, Assyria, Asia Minor, India, and Cambodia, also reveal ethnographical facts of great interest (see, for instance, note 2, p. 419).

Lastly, in India, the "cromlechs," "mounds," and discoveries of stone objects similar to those found in Europe can be counted in the hundreds. It's clear that the stone "circles" of the central provinces and the "Kouroumbarings" of Southern India date back to a time before the Aryan migration. Just like in Europe, the age of metals closely approaches the historical period that the [Pg 365] Chinese records have preserved for us. The monuments of Chaldea, Assyria, Asia Minor, India, and Cambodia also reveal ethnographic facts of great interest (see, for instance, note 2, p. 419).

PRESENT INHABITANTS AND RACES OF ASIA.

It is impossible in the present state of our knowledge to draw up a complete table of the migrations which have taken place on the Asiatic continent in historic times. I shall mention those in connection with some peoples whose history is partially known (Chinese, Turks, Mongols, Thai).

It is impossible with our current knowledge to create a complete list of the migrations that have occurred on the Asian continent during historic times. I will mention those related to some peoples whose history is somewhat known (Chinese, Turks, Mongols, Thai).

So also, in the present state of anthropological knowledge, we can only discern in the midst of the numerous Asiatic populations, in a quite general way, the elements furnished by the following eleven races:—Five races peculiar to Asia (Dravidian, Assyroid, Indo-Afghan, Ainu, Mongolian), and six races which are also met with in other parts of the world: Negrito, Indonesian, Arab, Ugrian, Turkish, and Eskimo (leaving out of account the Assyroid and Indo-Afghan races, which are found again among the Jews and the European Gypsies). I have already given (p. 285 et seq.) the principal characters of these races; it only remains to say a few words as to their geographical distribution in Asia.

In today's understanding of anthropology, we can generally identify among the various Asian populations the elements represented by the following eleven races: five unique to Asia (Dravidian, Assyroid, Indo-Afghan, Ainu, Mongolian), and six also found in other parts of the world: Negrito, Indonesian, Arab, Ugrian, Turkish, and Eskimo (excluding the Assyroid and Indo-Afghan races, which are also present among Jews and European Gypsies). I've already outlined (p. 285 et seq.) the main characteristics of these races; it remains to briefly discuss their geographical distribution in Asia.

The Eskimo race is quartered in the north-east of the continent; that of the Ainus in Saghalien, Yezo, and perhaps in northern Japan; while the Ugrian race is represented by its Yeniseian variant. The Mongolian race (with its two secondary races, northern and southern) is found almost all over Asia. The Turkish race is limited more particularly to the inland regions of Central Asia. The Indonesians are numerous in Indo-China, and in the islands from Japan to the Asiatic Archipelago, while the Dravidians and Indo-Afghans abound in India. The latter are also met with in anterior Asia, side by side with the Assyroids and Arabs. Some representatives of the Negrito race inhabit the Malay peninsula and the Andaman Islands; the elements of this race are also found among the inhabitants of Indo-China and perhaps India.

The Eskimo population is found in the northeast of the continent; the Ainus are in Saghalien, Yezo, and possibly in northern Japan; while the Ugrian population is represented by its Yeniseian variant. The Mongolian race (which includes its two subgroups, northern and southern) is spread throughout most of Asia. The Turkish population is mainly in the inland areas of Central Asia. The Indonesians are abundant in Indo-China and in the islands from Japan to the Asian Archipelago, while the Dravidians and Indo-Afghans are prevalent in India. The latter can also be found in western Asia, alongside the Assyroids and Arabs. Some members of the Negrito race live in the Malay Peninsula and the Andaman Islands; elements of this race are also present among the people of Indo-China and possibly India.

As to existing populations of the Asiatic continent, I shall rapidly pass them in review, grouping them, according to geographical region, under six heads: peoples of Northern Asia; of Central Asia; of Eastern Asia; of Indo-China; of India; and lastly, of Anterior or Western Asia.

As for the current populations of the Asian continent, I will quickly go over them, organizing them by geographical region into six categories: people of Northern Asia; Central Asia; Eastern Asia; Indo-China; India; and finally, Anterior or Western Asia.

I. NORTHERN ASIA, consisting almost exclusively of Siberia, a cold country covered with dense virgin forests (taïga) or marshy, frozen plains (tundra), harbours, in addition to Russian or Chinese colonists, only a few somewhat wretched tribes, mainly hunters, but depending partly on fishing and hoe-culture.

I. NNORTHERN ASIA, which is almost entirely Siberia, is a cold region filled with thick untouched forests (taïga) or muddy, frozen plains (tundra). Besides Russian and Chinese settlers, it is home to only a handful of struggling tribes, mainly hunters, who also rely on fishing and small-scale farming.

We may group them thus:—(1) tribes of Western Siberia, having some affinities with the Samoyeds and the eastern Finns, which I shall call Yeniseians or Tubas; (2) peoples of the extreme north-east of the Asiatic continent, whom Schrenck[401] describes as Palæasiatics; (3) the Tunguses of Eastern Siberia and Manchuria.

We can categorize them like this: (1) tribes from Western Siberia, related to the Samoyeds and the eastern Finns, which I will call Yeniseians or Tubas; (2) peoples from the far northeast of the Asian continent, referred to by Schrenck[401] as Palæasiatics; (3) the Tunguses from Eastern Siberia and Manchuria.

1. Yeniseians or Tubas.—Besides the Samoyeds of Asia, who differ from their kinsfolk in Europe only by their more Mongoloid features, the Yeniseians comprise two distinct groups of populations. In the first place the so-called Ostiaks of the Yenisei, on the right bank of this river (between Yeniseisk and Touroukhansk), probable descendants of the Kien-Kouen and the Ting-ling of the Chinese annals. It is a tribe in process of extinction, whose language differs from the Samoyed tongue and the Finnish dialects properly so called (Castren). Then come the tribes who formerly formed the Tuba nation, mentioned until the seventh century A.D. by the name of Tupo by the Chinese annalists; they inhabited the basin of the upper Yenisei, the Altai region, and north-western Mongolia, and bore the local names of Matores, Arines, Kottes, Assan, Tuba, etc.

1. Yeniseians or Tubas.—In addition to the Samoyeds of Asia, who only differ from their European relatives by having more Mongoloid traits, the Yeniseians consist of two distinct groups. First are the so-called Ostiaks of the Yenisei, located on the right bank of the river (between Yeniseisk and Touroukhansk), likely descendants of the Kien-Kouen and the Ting-ling mentioned in Chinese records. This tribe is on the verge of extinction, and their language is different from the Samoyed language and proper Finnish dialects (Castren). Next are the tribes that were once part of the Tuba nation, which Chinese historians referred to as Tupo until the seventh century CE; they lived in the upper Yenisei basin, the Altai region, and northwestern Mongolia, and were known locally as Matores, Arines, Kottes, Assan, Tuba, etc.

These peoples have disappeared as linguistic units,[402] but[Pg 367] their physical type, some of their characteristic manners, as well as a few words of their language, are preserved among certain populations speaking a Turkish dialect. The Russians call these populations “Tatars”; they might more suitably be called by the name of Altaians. This ethnic group, whose physical type has been altered by intermixtures with peoples of Turkish or Mongolian race, comprises the “Tatars” of Abakan, that is to say, Katchines, Koibals (eight hundred individuals), Sagai, and Kizils; the “Tatars” of Altai and those of Chulim, among whom must be noted the “Tatars of the black forests” (Chernievyié Tatary in Russian), called “Tubas” by their neighbours. The latter are mesocephalic, of medium height; they have abandoned little by little the hunting state, and become primitive cultivators of the soil; they break up the ground with the hoe, which was used by them until not very long ago to dig up edible roots, and they cut their corn with hunting-knives.[403] The Soiots or Soyons of North-western Mongolia, who call themselves Tubas, are probably the descendants of the ancient Uigurs (Turkish nation) commingled with aboriginal Yeniseians of this country and partly Mongolised about the seventeenth century.

These groups have faded away as distinct linguistic communities,[402] but[Pg 367] their physical characteristics, some of their unique customs, and a few words from their language have been retained among certain populations that speak a Turkish dialect. The Russians refer to these populations as “Tatars,” but they might be more accurately identified as the Altaians. This ethnic group, whose physical traits have been changed due to mingling with Turkish or Mongolian peoples, includes the “Tatars” of Abakan, specifically, the Katchines, Koibals (about eight hundred individuals), Sagai, and Kizils; as well as the “Tatars” of Altai and those from Chulim, including the “Tatars of the black forests” (Chernievyié Tatary in Russian), known as “Tubas” to their neighbors. These people are mesocephalic, of average height; they have gradually moved away from a hunting lifestyle and have become primitive farmers. They till the soil using hoes, which they used until recently to dig up edible roots, and they harvest their crops with hunting knives.[403] The Soiots or Soyons of northwestern Mongolia, who identify as Tubas, are likely descendants of the ancient Uigurs (a Turkish group) mixed with the indigenous Yeniseians of this region and partially influenced by Mongolian culture around the seventeenth century.

Tunguse Hunter, Siberia

FIG. 115.—Tunguse hunter (Siberia) with ski and staff.
(Phot. Shimkiévich.)

FIG. 115.—Tungus hunter (Siberia) with skis and a pole.
(Phot. Shimkiévich.)

2. The Palæasiatic group should comprise, according to Schrenck, all the ancient peoples of Asia driven back at the present day towards the north-eastern extremity of the Continent. The more important of these peoples are the following:—The Chuchi (or Chukchi), numbering about 8000, are the most typical representatives of the group; they inhabit the north-east of Siberia, and the occupation of some is the breeding of reindeer, and fishing of others; however, the distinction between the nomadic and fishing Chukchi is both of an economic and ethnic order.[404] The Koriaks dwell to the south of the Chukchi, as far as Kamtchatka; they bear a close resemblance to them and speak the same language. The [Pg 370] Eskimo of Asia, Namuollo, or Yu-Ite formerly occupied the coast of the Chukchi country, as shown by their ancient habitations excavated by Wrangel and Nordenskiold. At the present day they are not found except in isolated camps on the coast and in the islands of the Behring Sea. They differ but very little from the Eskimo of Alaska; their ornaments, however, recall rather those of the Aleuts. The Kamtchadals of the centre and west of Kamtchatka differ from the peoples just mentioned. They number 4,250 at the present day, and are becoming Russianised very rapidly. They have completely given up their language, which has no relation to any linguistic family now known, and they speak a very corrupt form of Russian. Nominally orthodox Christians, they are at bottom animists, and the anthropomorphic element, often under obscene forms, occupies a large place in their myths and legends. They are fishers and hunters.

2. The Palæasiatic group should include, according to Schrenck, all the ancient peoples of Asia who have been pushed back to the northeastern edge of the continent today. The key groups are as follows: The Chuchi (or Chukchi), numbering about 8,000, are the most typical members of the group; they live in northeastern Siberia, and some breed reindeer while others fish. However, there is a clear distinction between the nomadic and fishing Chukchi in both economic and ethnic terms.[404] The Koriaks reside to the south of the Chukchi, extending to Kamchatka; they closely resemble them and speak the same language. The Eskimo of Asia, Namuollo, or Yu-Ite formerly lived along the coast of Chukchi territory, as evidenced by their ancient dwellings excavated by Wrangel and Nordenskiold. Today, they are only found in isolated camps along the coast and on the islands of the Bering Sea. They are quite similar to the Eskimo of Alaska, although their ornaments are more reminiscent of those of the Aleuts. The Kamtchadals in central and western Kamchatka are different from the people just mentioned. They number 4,250 today and are rapidly assimilating into Russian culture. They have completely abandoned their language, which is unrelated to any known language family, and now speak a heavily corrupted version of Russian. While they identify as nominally Orthodox Christians, they are fundamentally animists, and anthropomorphic elements, often in obscene forms, play a significant role in their myths and legends. They are primarily fishers and hunters.

Tunguse, Full Face

FIG. 116.—Same subject as Fig. 115, full face.
(Phot. Shimkiévich.)

FIG. 116.—Same subject as Fig. 115, full face.
(Phot. Shimkiévich.)

The Yukaghirs are the last remnants of a somewhat powerful people who formerly occupied all that part of Siberia situated to the east of the Lena, and who were composed of several tribes: Omoks, Anauls, Cheliags, etc.[405] It was believed until the last few years that even the Yukaghirs had disappeared, but quite recently Iokhelson[406] ascertained that there are at least 700 individuals, and that their language, which has no affinities with any of the Uralo-Altaic dialects, is spoken by a certain number of Tunguse-Lamuts (see p. 373), their neighbours. On the other hand, the Yukaghirs of Verkhoiansk, have adopted the Lamut dialect, and those of the[Pg 371] banks of the Iana the Yakut tongue. By several peculiar manners and customs (classificatory system of relationship, pictography, etc.) they approach very closely certain North American Indians. Physically they resemble the Tunguse-Lamuts, though more brachycephalic and somewhat less dark-haired as a rule.

The Yukaghirs are the last remnants of a once-powerful group of people who used to inhabit all of Siberia east of the Lena River. They were made up of several tribes: Omoks, Anauls, Cheliags, and others.[405] Until a few years ago, it was thought that the Yukaghirs had vanished, but recently Iokhelson[406] discovered that there are at least 700 individuals left, and that their language, which doesn’t relate to any Uralo-Altaic dialects, is still spoken by some of the neighboring Tunguse-Lamuts (see p. 373). On the other hand, the Yukaghirs in Verkhoiansk have adopted the Lamut dialect, while those along the[Pg 371] banks of the Iana speak Yakut. Through various unique customs and practices (like their system of relationships and pictography), they bear a close resemblance to certain North American Indian tribes. Physically, they look similar to the Tunguse-Lamuts, but they tend to be more brachycephalic and generally have lighter hair.

Ainu with Crown of Shavings

FIG. 117.—Ainu of Yezo (Japan) with crown of shavings.
(Phot. lent by Collignon.)

FIG 117.—Ainu of Yezo (Japan) with a crown of shavings.
(Photo provided by Collignon.)

The Ainus (Figs. 49 and 117), who are classed among the Palæasiatics, inhabit the north and east parts of the island of Yezo, the south of Saghalien, and the three most southern islands of the Kuriles. They form a group by themselves, different from all the other peoples of Asia. Their elongated heads (ceph. index on the liv. sub. 77.8), their prominent supraciliary ridges, the development of the pilous system, the form of the nose, give to them some resemblance to the Russians, the Todas, and the Australians; but other characters[Pg 372] (coloration of the skin, prominent cheek-bones, short stature, frequent occurrence of the os japonicum, etc.) distinguish them from these peoples and afford grounds for classing them as a separate race (see Chap. VIII.). According to Japanese historians, the Ainus or Asuma Yebissu occupied the whole of Nippon from the seventh century B.C. until the second century of the Christian era. In the seventh century A.D. they still occupied all that portion of this island situated to the north of the 38th degree of north latitude, and even in the ninth century the chronicles speak of the incursions of these “barbarians.” Thus the Ainu element enters very largely into the composition of one of the types of the Japanese people, not only at Yezo but in the north of Nippon (province of Aomori), where several Ainu words still survive in current speech. In the Kurile islands the Ainus are intermixed with the Kamtchadals and the Aleuts introduced by the Russo-American Company about the middle of the present century.

The Ainus (Figs. 49 and 117), who are categorized as Palæasiatics, live in the northern and eastern parts of the island of Yezo, the southern area of Saghalien, and the three southernmost islands of the Kuriles. They form a distinct group, separate from all other peoples of Asia. Their elongated heads (ceph. index on the liv. sub. 77.8), prominent brow ridges, hair development, and nose shape give them some similarities to Russians, Todas, and Australians; however, other characteristics[Pg 372] (skin color, pronounced cheekbones, short stature, frequent presence of the os japonicum, etc.) set them apart and justify classifying them as a separate race (see Chap. VIII.). According to Japanese historians, the Ainus, or Asuma Yebissu, occupied all of Nippon from the seventh century BCE until the second century of the Christian era. In the seventh century CE, they were still present in all areas of this island north of the 38th parallel, and even in the ninth century, records mention the incursions of these "barbarians." Therefore, the Ainu influence is significant in one of the types of the Japanese people, not only in Yezo but also in northern Nippon (Aomori province), where several Ainu words are still used in everyday language. In the Kurile Islands, the Ainus are mixed with the Kamtchadals and Aleuts brought by the Russo-American Company around the middle of this century.

It is calculated that there are about 18,500 Ainus (of whom 1,300 are in the island of Saghalien) at the present time; their number at Yezo has remained stationary for several years. The dress of the Ainus is a sort of greatcoat with broad sleeves, fastened with a girdle so that the right lappel covers the left lappel as among Turkish peoples, and contrary to the way it is done among the Chinese and Mongols. The chief occupation of the Ainus is hunting and fishing; they engage but little in agriculture. Their religion is pure animism; the word Kamui, which means spirit (like the Kami of the Japanese Shintoists), also serves to indicate everything incomprehensible, in the same way as the word “shif,” the literal meaning of which is “animal” (may this be a word corresponding to totem?).

It’s estimated that there are around 18,500 Ainu people (with about 1,300 living on the island of Sakhalin) currently; their population in Hokkaido has remained steady for several years. Ainu clothing consists of a type of greatcoat with wide sleeves, secured with a belt, so that the right flap overlaps the left flap, similar to Turkish styles, and unlike how it’s done by the Chinese and Mongols. The main activities of the Ainu are hunting and fishing; they do very little farming. Their belief system is pure animism; the term Kamui, which means spirit (similar to the Kami in Japanese Shinto), also refers to anything incomprehensible, just like the word “shif,” which literally means “animal” (could this be a term linked to totems?).

The Ainus, like most Asiatic peoples, such as the Giliaks, Tunguses, etc., have a special veneration for the bear; they organise festivals in its honour, during which a bear is killed, after having received the homage of many inaou (staffs decorated with shavings).

The Ainus, like many Asian groups, including the Giliaks and Tunguses, have a deep respect for bears. They hold festivals to honor them, during which a bear is killed after receiving tributes from many inaou (staffs adorned with shavings).

The Ainu language is agglutinative, and has no analogy with any known language.[407]

The Ainu language is agglutinative and doesn't resemble any known language.[407]

The Giliaks, who inhabit the north of Saghalien, and the mainland to the north of the mouth of the Amur, suggest by their traits sometimes the Ainus, sometimes the Tunguses, but they are brachycephalic. They are a people of fishers, living on the banks of rivers and the sea, in the winter in huts half buried in the ground, in the summer in little houses on piles. The Giliaks are readily disposed to trade, and are distinguished by their taste for ornaments. Their number hardly exceeds 5000 individuals.[408]

The Giliaks, who live in the northern part of Saghalien and on the mainland north of the Amur River's mouth, sometimes resemble the Ainus and sometimes the Tunguses, but they have a broad skull shape. They are a fishing community, residing along riverbanks and the coast, spending winters in huts that are partially underground and summers in small elevated houses. The Giliaks are open to trading and are known for their love of ornaments. Their population is barely over 5,000 people.[408]

The Tunguses, while speaking a particular language, exhibit the Mongol type, softened by intermixtures with the primitive inhabitants (Palæasiatics?) of their territory, which extends from the Arctic Ocean to the 40th degree of north latitude, and from the Yenisei to the Pacific Ocean. Their number can hardly exceed 50,000 individuals over this immense stretch of country. They are divided into southern and northern Tunguses and maritime Tunguses or Lamuts. The river Amur forms the approximate boundary between the first two sections of Tunguses. The Lamuts occupy the shores of the sea of Okhotsk, the north-west of Kamtchatka, and extend more to the west to the river Iana. The Northern Tunguses are split up into several tribes, of which the following are the principal, going from east to west:—The Olchas or Mangoon, at the mouth of the Amur; their congeners the[Pg 374] Oroks, in the north of the island of Saghalien; the Orochons, of a very pure Tunguse type; the Manegres (Fig. 43), and the “Olennyié” Tunguses, or the Tunguses with reindeer (Figs. 115 and 116). As to the southern Tunguses, they comprise the Goldes of the lower Amur and Ussuri, of a very pure type, and having a fairly well developed ornamental art; the Oroches of the coast; and lastly the Solon-Daurs, very much intermixed with the Mongols, of which colonies exist in the Kuldja.

The Tungus people, while speaking a specific language, show features typical of Mongols, softened by intermingling with the original inhabitants (Palæasiatics?) of their region, which stretches from the Arctic Ocean to the 40th parallel north and from the Yenisei River to the Pacific Ocean. Their population likely doesn't exceed 50,000 individuals across this vast area. They are divided into southern and northern Tunguses and maritime Tunguses or Lamuts. The Amur River roughly separates the first two groups of Tunguses. The Lamuts inhabit the shores of the Sea of Okhotsk, the northwestern part of Kamchatka, and extend further west to the Iana River. The Northern Tunguses are divided into several tribes, with the main ones listed from east to west: the Olchas or Mangoon at the mouth of the Amur; their relatives, the Oroks, in the northern part of Sakhalin Island; the Orochons, who have a very pure Tungus appearance; the Manegres (Fig. 43), and the “Olennyié” Tunguses or Tunguses with reindeer (Figs. 115 and 116). As for the southern Tunguses, they include the Goldes of the lower Amur and Ussuri, who have a very pure appearance and a fairly developed ornamental art; the Oroches of the coast; and finally the Solon-Daurs, who are heavily mixed with Mongols, with colonies existing in Kuldja.

The Manchus, reduced to a small number, belong by their dialect as well as by their physical type to the Tunguse group. They are being absorbed more and more by the Chinese, and hardly form a tenth part of the population of the country which bears their name (Pozdniéef). It is probable that the Niu-chi or Yu-chi of Shan-alin and Sien-pi on the northern border of Corea, mentioned in the Chinese annals, were Tunguse tribes.

The Manchus, now only a small population, are connected to the Tunguse group through both their dialect and physical appearance. They are increasingly being absorbed by the Chinese, making up less than ten percent of the population in the country named after them (Pozdniéef). It's likely that the Niu-chi or Yu-chi of Shan-alin and Sien-pi, referenced in Chinese historical records, were also Tunguse tribes.

The type which predominates among the Tunguses represents the secondary race called North Mongolian and characterised by mesocephaly or a slight sub-dolichocephaly, and by a rather elongated face. The stature varies; the Orochons are of average stature and the Manchus very tall, etc.[409]

The type that is most common among the Tunguses is from the secondary race known as North Mongolian, which is characterized by a medium head shape or a slight elongated head shape and a rather long face. Height varies; the Orochons are of average height, while the Manchus are very tall, etc.[409]

II. PEOPLES OF CENTRAL ASIA.—The immense central Asiatic region, whose waters have no outlet towards the sea, is formed principally of denuded table-lands (Thibet) or of plains, sometimes grassy, sometimes desert (Mongolia, Turkestan). It is inhabited for the most part by populations which may be grouped from the linguistic point of view under three heads, Turks, Mongols, Thibetans.[410]

II. PPEOPLE OF CCENTRAL ASIA.—The vast central Asian region, whose waters don't flow to the sea, mainly consists of eroded plateaus (Tibet) or plains, which can be grassy at times or desert-like (Mongolia, Turkestan). It's mostly inhabited by populations that can be categorized linguistically into three groups: Turks, Mongols, and Tibetans.[410]

The peoples speaking the different Turkish dialects who are called Turco-Tatars or Turanians are scattered over an immense area comprising half of Asia and a large portion of Eastern Europe, from the Arctic Ocean (Yakuts) to Kuen-lun (Polus) and Ispahan (Turkomans of Persia), from the banks of the Kolima and the Hoang-ho (Yegurs) to Central Russia (Tatars of Kasimov) and Macedonia (Osmanli Turks). All these peoples may be gathered together into three great groups: eastern, central, and western.[411]

The groups that speak the various Turkish dialects, known as Turco-Tatars or Turanians, are spread over a vast region covering half of Asia and a significant part of Eastern Europe, stretching from the Arctic Ocean (Yakuts) to Kuen-lun (Polus) and Ispahan (Turkomans of Persia), and from the shores of the Kolima and the Hoang-ho (Yegurs) to Central Russia (Tatars of Kasimov) and Macedonia (Osmanli Turks). All these groups can be categorized into three main categories: eastern, central, and western.[411]

The eastern group comprises the Yakuts, who have preserved in its purity the ancient Turco-Uigurian language, but who in type, manners, and customs show the influence of contiguity with the Palæasiatics; then the various tribes of non-Yeniseian “Tatars” (see p. 366) of Siberia, like the Altaians (called Kalmuks of Altai, although they have nothing in common with the true Kalmuks), nomads who have recently adopted settled habits, like the Teleuts (or Kara-Kalmuks), likewise nomads, or the Tatars of Siberia, divided, according to their habitat, into Tatars of the Baraba steppes, Tatars of Irtish, of Tobol, etc.[412]

The eastern group includes the Yakuts, who have kept the ancient Turco-Uigurian language intact, but who, in their appearance, behavior, and traditions, show the impact of their proximity to the Palæasiatics. Then there are the various tribes of non-Yeniseian "Tatars" (see p. 366) in Siberia, such as the Altaians (referred to as Kalmuks of Altai, even though they are not related to the true Kalmuks). These are nomads who have recently started living more settled lives, like the Teleuts (or Kara-Kalmuks), who are also nomadic, or the Tatars of Siberia, divided based on their regions into Tatars of the Baraba steppes, Tatars of Irtish, Tatars of Tobol, etc.[412]

To this group must be added the Taranchi and other “Turks” of East Turkestan, as well as the Polus of the northern slope of the Kuen-lun, more or less mingled with Indo[Pg 376]-Afghan elements; the Yegurs of the province of Kan-su in China, etc.[413]

To this group should be added the Taranchi and other "Turks" from East Turkestan, along with the Polus from the northern slope of the Kuen-lun, who are somewhat mixed with Indo[Pg 376]-Afghan elements; the Yegurs from the province of Kan-su in China, and so on.[413]

The central group comprises, in the first place, the Kirghiz-Kazak of the plains between the Irtish and the Caspian, with the Kara-Kirghiz of the Tian-chan mountains, typical nomads who under a Mussulman veneer have preserved many ancient Turkish animist customs;[414] then the Uzbegs and Sartes, villagers or citizens, more or less mingled with Iranian elements, of Russian Turkestan; and finally the Tatars of the Volga, or of European Russia. Among these last, the so-called Kazan Tatars, descendants of the Kipchaks, must be specially mentioned. Arriving on the banks of the Volga in the thirteenth century, they intermingled there with the Bulgarians. They differ from the Astrakhan Tatars (Figs. 107 and 108), descendants of the Turco-Mongols of the Gold horde, mixed with the Khazars, as well as from the Nogai of the Crimea,[415] representatives of whom we find also in the Caucasus, near Astrakhan, and in Lithuania, where, while remaining Mussulmans, they have adopted the language and the garb of Poles. With this group we must connect the Bashkir-Mesthcheriaks, a tribe intermixed with Turkish, Mongol, and Ugrian elements; and their congeners the Shuvashes, as well as the Kumyks, the Karachai, the Kabards, or Tatars of the Caucasus mountains, distinct from the true Kabards.

The central group mainly includes the Kirghiz-Kazak from the plains between the Irtish and the Caspian, along with the Kara-Kirghiz from the Tian-chan mountains, typical nomads who, under a Muslim facade, have kept many ancient Turkish animist traditions;[414] followed by the Uzbegs and Sartes, villagers or urban dwellers, somewhat mixed with Iranian elements, from Russian Turkestan; and finally the Tatars of the Volga or of European Russia. Among these, the so-called Kazan Tatars, descendants of the Kipchaks, should be specifically highlighted. They arrived on the banks of the Volga in the thirteenth century and blended with the Bulgarians there. They are different from the Astrakhan Tatars (Figs. 107 and 108), who are descendants of the Turco-Mongols from the Golden Horde, mixed with the Khazars, as well as from the Nogai of the Crimea,[415] some of whom we also find in the Caucasus, near Astrakhan, and in Lithuania, where they have remained Muslims while adopting the language and clothing of Poles. This group also includes the Bashkir-Mesthcheriaks, a tribe mixed with Turkish, Mongol, and Ugrian influences; as well as their counterparts, the Shuvashes, the Kumyks, the Karachai, the Kabards, or Tatars of the Caucasus mountains, who are distinct from the true Kabards.

The western group is composed of Turkomans of Persia (Khojars, Afshars) and Russian (Turkmen) or Afghan Turkestan (Jemshids, etc.), of Aderbaijani, Turkish-speaking Iranians[Pg 377] of the Caucasus and Persia, and lastly the Osmanli Turks. Included under this name are subjects of the Sultan speaking the Turkish language and professing Islamism. We must distinguish among them the settled Osmanli, much intermixed, and the nomadic tribes (Turkomans, Yuruks, etc.), who exhibit several characteristics of the Turkish race.

The western group consists of Turkomans from Persia (Khojars, Afshars) and from Russia (Turkmen) or Afghan Turkestan (Jemshids, etc.), along with Aderbaijani, Turkish-speaking Iranians[Pg 377] from the Caucasus and Persia, and finally the Osmanli Turks. This term also includes the subjects of the Sultan who speak Turkish and practice Islam. We need to differentiate between the settled Osmanli, who are quite mixed, and the nomadic tribes (Turkomans, Yuruks, etc.), who display various traits of the Turkish race.

The Turkish race, so far as can be gathered from recent anthropological works, is preserved in a comparatively pure state among the Turks of the central group, but in the eastern group it has been profoundly modified in consequence of intermixtures with the Mongolian, Tunguse, and Ugrian races; as also in the western group, in which we have to take into account elements of the Assyroid, Indo-Afghan, and Arab races, and certain European races (Adriatic chiefly). The Turkish race may be thus described: Stature, above the average (1 m. 67–1 m. 68); head, hyper-brachycephalic (ceph. ind. on the liv. sub., 85 to 87), elongated oval face, non-Mongoloid eyes, but often with the external fold of eyelid (p. 78); the pilous system moderately developed; broad cheek-bones, thick lips; straight, somewhat prominent nose; tendency to obesity.[416]

The Turkish race, according to recent anthropological studies, is mostly preserved in a relatively pure form among the central group of Turks. However, in the eastern group, it has been significantly altered due to intermixing with Mongolian, Tunguse, and Ugrian races. The western group is also affected by influences from the Assyroid, Indo-Afghan, Arab races, and certain European races (mainly from the Adriatic). The Turkish race can be described as follows: Height is above average (between 1 min. 67 and 1 min. 68); head shape is hyper-brachycephalic (ceph. ind. on the liv. sub., 85 to 87), with an elongated oval face, non-Mongoloid eyes, but often featuring an external fold of eyelid (p. 78); hair is moderately developed; broad cheekbones, thick lips; a straight, somewhat prominent nose; and a tendency to be overweight.[416]

The Turks are essentially nomadic, and when they change their mode of life it is rather towards the chase, commerce, or trade that their efforts are directed; the true cultivators of the soil (Taranchi, Sartes, Osmanli, Volga Tatars) are Turks already powerfully affected by intermixtures. The Turkish tent is the most highly finished of transportable habitations (p. 164166). Meat and milk products form the staple foods, as they do among all nomads. With the exception of the Christian Chuvashes and the Shaman Yakuts, all the Turks are Mussulmans; but often they are only nominally such, at bottom remain[Pg 378]ing Shamans. The veneer of Islamism becomes thinner and thinner among the Turkish peoples as we go from west to east. The Osmanlis, the most fanatical of all the Turks, are the most mixed as regards type, language, manners, and customs. It is perhaps to this mixed origin that they owe the relative stability of the state which they have founded, for no nomadic Turkish tribe has been able to create a political organism of long duration, and the vast empires of the Hiungnu, the Uigurs, the Kipchaks, have had only an ephemeral existence.

The Turks are mostly nomadic, and when they shift their way of life, they tend to focus on hunting, commerce, or trade. The true farmers (Taranchi, Sartes, Osmanli, Volga Tatars) are Turks who have been significantly influenced by mixing with others. The Turkish tent is the most advanced form of portable living space (p. 164166). Meat and dairy are their main foods, just like with all nomadic groups. Aside from the Christian Chuvashes and the Shamanistic Yakuts, almost all Turks are Muslims; however, many are only nominally so and fundamentally still practice Shamanism. The surface of Islam becomes thinner among the Turkish people as we move from west to east. The Osmanlis, who are the most devoted of all Turks, have the most mixed backgrounds in terms of type, language, customs, and traditions. It may be their mixed origins that account for the relative stability of the state they've built, because no nomadic Turkish tribe has managed to establish a long-lasting political structure, and the large empires of the Hiungnu, the Uigurs, and the Kipchaks were only short-lived.

2. The Mongols[417] form an ethnic group more homogeneous as regards manners and customs and physical type than the Turks. Their name is chiefly known on account of the great empire founded by Genghis Khan, but it must be observed that the nomadic hordes united into a single body, and led to victory by this conqueror, were only very partially composed of Mongols, other nomadic peoples, and especially Turks, formed more than half of them. Hence the practice among Europeans, as among the Chinese,—a practice which is kept up to the present time,—of giving the name of one of the Turkish tribes, Ta-ta or Tatar, transformed into Tartar, to the Mongols, and extending it to many of the Mongoloid peoples, like the Tunguses for example.

2. The Mongols[417] are an ethnic group that is more uniform in terms of customs, behavior, and physical appearance compared to the Turks. They're mainly recognized for the vast empire established by Genghis Khan, but it's important to note that the nomadic groups unified into one under his leadership were not solely Mongols; other nomadic communities, especially Turks, made up more than half of them. This explains why Europeans, just like the Chinese— a practice that still exists today—often refer to the Mongols using the name of a Turkish tribe, Ta-ta or Tatar, which evolved into Tartar, and even apply it to various Mongoloid groups, like the Tunguses, for instance.

Three principal divisions are recognised in this group: Western Mongols or Kalmuks, the Eastern Mongols, and the Buriats.[418] The Western Mongols, who style themselves[Pg 379] Eleuts, and whom the neighbouring peoples call Kalmuks, are scattered, owing to wars and migrations, over the immense tract lying between Siberia and Lassa, from the banks of the Hoang-ho to those of the Manich (a tributary of the Don). The more compact groups are found in European Russia (Kalmuks of Astrakhan, Figs. 20 and 44, and the Caucasus); in Dzungaria (the Torgoots) and north-western Mongolia, between Altai and Thian-Shan; lastly, in Alashan and farther to the west in the Chinese province of Kuku-Nor and northern Thibet. They number about a million.

Three main groups are recognized in this category: the Western Mongols, known as Kalmuks, the Eastern Mongols, and the Buriats.[418] The Western Mongols, who refer to themselves[Pg 379] as Eleuts and are called Kalmuks by neighboring peoples, are spread out because of wars and migrations across the vast area between Siberia and Lhasa, from the banks of the Yellow River to those of the Manich (a tributary of the Don). The more concentrated groups are located in European Russia (Kalmuks of Astrakhan, Figs. 20 and 44, and the Caucasus); in Dzungaria (the Torgoots), and northwestern Mongolia, between the Altai and Tian Shan mountains; and finally, in Alashan and further west in the Chinese province of Kuku-Nor and northern Tibet. Their population is around one million.

The Eastern Mongols occupy almost the whole of the region known by the name of Mongolia properly so called. In the south of this country they are broken up into a multitude of tribes (Tumets, Shakars or Tsakhar, etc.); while in the north they form a single nation, that of the Khalkhas, which has still preserved, in spite of its submission to China, some traces of its ancient political organisation. The Khalkhas number about 200,000, and the southern Mongols 500,000.

The Eastern Mongols make up nearly the entire area known as Mongolia. In the south, they are divided into many tribes (Tumets, Shakars or Tsakhar, etc.); while in the north, they form a unified nation, the Khalkhas, which still retains some aspects of its ancient political structure despite being under Chinese control. The Khalkhas population is around 200,000, while the southern Mongols number about 500,000.

The Buriats form a population sprung from the Khalkhas, intermixed at several points with various Siberian elements, Tunguse, Yakut, Russian; they occupy the steppes and forests of the province of Irkutsk, but their central seat is Transbaikal, whence they spread out even into Mongolia, into the valleys of the Orkhon and the Argun. They number about 250,000.

The Buriats are a group of people that originated from the Khalkhas and have mixed with different Siberian groups, including Tungus, Yakut, and Russians. They live in the steppes and forests of the Irkutsk province, but their main area is Transbaikal, from where they have also moved into Mongolia, particularly in the valleys of the Orkhon and the Argun. Their population is around 250,000.

The type of the Mongolian race is very strongly marked among most of the Kalmuks and Khalkhas; it is less distinct among the Buriats, etc. It may thus be described: Nearly average stature (1 m. 63–64); head, sub-brachycephalic (ceph. ind. on the liv. sub. 83); black straight hair, pilous system little developed; the skin of a pale-yellow or brownish hue, prominent cheek-bones, thin straight flattened nose, Mongoloid eyes (p. 77), etc.

The characteristics of the Mongolian race are quite pronounced among most of the Kalmuks and Khalkhas; they are less prominent among the Buriats and others. It can be described as follows: almost average height (1 minute. 63–64); head shape, slightly brachycephalic (ceph. ind. on the liv. sub. 83); black straight hair, underdeveloped hair system; skin that is pale yellow or brownish; high cheekbones, thin straight flattened nose, Mongoloid eyes (p. 77), etc.

With the exception of some Buriat tribes the Mongols are typical nomadic shepherds. Their live-stock, camels, sheep, and horses supply them not only with food, the raw material[Pg 380] for the manufacture of tents and garments, but also means of transport and fuel (camel excrement or dried dung). Unlike the nomadic Turks, who are fond of fighting, the Mongols of the present day are gentle and peaceable folk. Can this be the effect of the influence of Lama-Buddhism, which they all profess except a few small Buriat tribes, who have remained Shamans? We are inclined to believe this when we consider the important part which this religion plays in the daily life of the Mongols.

Except for some Buriat tribes, the Mongols are typical nomadic shepherds. Their livestock, including camels, sheep, and horses, provides them with food, raw materials[Pg 380] for making tents and clothing, as well as transportation and fuel (camel droppings or dried dung). Unlike the nomadic Turks, who enjoy fighting, today's Mongols are gentle and peaceful people. Could this be due to the influence of Lama-Buddhism, which most of them practice, except for a few small Buriat tribes that have stuck with Shamanism? We tend to believe this, especially when we consider the significant role this religion plays in the everyday lives of the Mongols.

3. Thibetans.[419]—We may include under this name the non-Mongolian populations of Thibet and the surrounding countries, known by the name of Bod, or Thibetans properly so called in southern Thibet, by the name of Tanguts in the Chinese province of Kuku-Nor, of Si-fan in western Sechuen, by that of Ladaki and Champa in eastern Cashmere (province of Leh), of Gurong, Limbu, Mangar and Murmi in Nepal, of Lepchas or Rongs in Sikkin, of Bhutani in Bhotan, etc. The Abors, Mishmee, etc., of the Himalayan country who dominate Assam are also included among the Thibetans, but they approach the Indonesians in type. It is the same with the Garro and their neighbours on the east, the Khasia or Djainthia, whose language, however, differs from the Thibetan.[420]

3. Tibetans.[419]—Under this name, we can include the non-Mongolian populations of Tibet and the nearby regions, known as Bod, or Tibetans in southern Tibet, called Tanguts in the Chinese province of Kuku-Nor, Si-fan in western Sichuan, Ladaki and Champa in eastern Kashmir (Leh province), and Gurong, Limbu, Mangar, and Murmi in Nepal, Lepchas or Rongs in Sikkim, Bhutani in Bhutan, and so on. The Abors, Mishmee, and others from the Himalayan region who dominate Assam are also included among the Tibetans, but they are somewhat similar in appearance to Indonesians. The same goes for the Garro and their neighbors to the east, the Khasia or Djainthia, whose language, however, is different from Tibetan.[420]

Most Thibetans are cultivators of the soil or shepherds, pillagers in case of need, and fervent votaries of numerous Lamaite-Buddhist sects, of which that of the Geluk-pa (yellow caps) represents the ruling church. Its chief, the Dalai-Lama, residing at Lassa, is at the same time the sovereign of Thibet.

Most Tibetans are farmers or herders, and they may resort to raiding if necessary. They are strong followers of various Lamaist-Buddhist sects, with the Geluk-pa (yellow hats) being the dominant church. Its leader, the Dalai Lama, who lives in Lhasa, is also the ruler of Tibet.

From the somatological point of view the Thibetans exhibit certain sufficiently marked variations. The Bothia are below the average stature (1 m. 62 or 1 m. 63); the Lepchas are short (1 m. 57); and the Thibetans of Nepal vary as regards average stature from 1 m. 59 (Mangars) to 1 m. 67 (Murmis). The head is mesocephalic (ceph. ind. 80.7 on the liv. sub.), but sub-dolichocephalic or sub-brachycephalic forms are frequently met with. As a general rule, side by side with the Mongoloid type may be seen among the Thibetans, singly or united, the traits of another type, a somewhat slender figure, thin, prominent, often aquiline nose, straight eyes with undrooping eyelids, long and sometimes wavy hair, reminding one, in short, of the Gypsy type.[421] This type, moreover, is found beyond Thibet. The Lo-lo or Nésus, as they call themselves, of western Sechuen and the north-east of Yunnan, with whom we must connect the Kolo or Golyk of the country of Amdo (east of Thibet), perhaps represent it in its purest form, if the portrait of them drawn by Thorel is correct. With slight figure, brownish complexion, they have a straight profile, oval face, high forehead, straight and arched nose, thick beard even on the sides of the face and always frizzy or wavy hair.[422] Their language, however, fixed by a hieroglyphic mode of writing, appears to belong to the Burmese family.[423] The Lo-lo not under Chinese rule are of a gay disposition; they love dancing and singing. Woman is held among them in great respect; there are some tribes even whose chiefs belong to the weaker sex.

From a physical perspective, the Tibetans show some distinct variations. The Bothia people are below average height (1.62m or 1.63m); the Lepchas are shorter (1.57m); and the Tibetans in Nepal range in average height from 1.59m (Mangars) to 1.67m (Murmis). Their heads are generally mesocephalic (ceph. ind. 80.7 on the liv. sub.), but sub-dolichocephalic or sub-brachycephalic shapes are often found. Typically, alongside the Mongoloid type seen among the Tibetans, there are also features of another type, characterized by a somewhat slender build, thin but prominent often aquiline nose, straight eyes with non-drooping eyelids, long and sometimes wavy hair, resembling the Gypsy type. This type is also present beyond Tibet. The Lo-lo or Nésus, as they refer to themselves, from western Sichuan and northeastern Yunnan, along with the Kolo or Golyk from Amdo (east of Tibet), may represent this type in its purest form, if Thorel's depiction is accurate. They have a slight build, a brownish complexion, straight profiles, oval faces, high foreheads, straight and arched noses, thick beards even on the sides of their faces, and hair that is always frizzy or wavy. Their language, however, written in a hieroglyphic script, seems to belong to the Burmese family. The Lo-lo who aren't under Chinese rule tend to be cheerful; they enjoy dancing and singing. Women are highly respected among them, and there are even some tribes where the chiefs are female.

We must connect with the Lo-lo a multitude of other tribes, less pure in type: the various Miao-tsé, mountaineers of the southern part of the province of Hunnan, of Kwei-chow, of[Pg 382] the northern part of the Kwang-si, the north-west district of Kwang-tung, more or less intermixed with the Chinese; the Lissus of the Lu-tse-Kiang (Upper Salwen) and the Lantsan-Kiang (Upper Mekong), near to the new boundary of China and British India; the Mosso or Nashis of the district of Li-Kiang to the east of the Lissus, related to the latter and having an iconomatic writing; lastly, the Lu-tse or Kew-tse, who call themselves Melams or Anoogs, to the west of the Lissus and separated by an inhabited tract from the Mishmee, the Sarong and other Thibeto-Indonesian tribes. The language of the Lu-tse differs from that of any of the neighbouring peoples, and their physical type places them between the Lissus and the Indonesians, such as the Naga for example; they are short (1 m. 56 according to Roux), but strong and vigorous; their hair is frizzy.[424] The Mu-tse mentioned by Terrien de Lacouperie, the Lawa or Does described by Holt Hallet, the Muzours of T. de Lacouperie or the Musos of Archer, the Kas-Khuis of Garnier, scattered between the Mekong and the Salwen from the twentieth to the twenty-fifth degree of north latitude, are probably akin to the Lo-lo and the Mossos.[425]

We need to connect with the Lo-lo and numerous other tribes, which are less pure in type: various Miao-tsé, who are mountain dwellers in the southern part of Hunnan, Kwei-chow, and the northern part of Kwang-si, as well as the north-west district of Kwang-tung, often mixed with the Chinese; the Lissus of the Lu-tse-Kiang (Upper Salwen) and the Lantsan-Kiang (Upper Mekong), near the new border of China and British India; the Mosso or Nashis from Li-Kiang to the east of the Lissus, who are related to them and have an iconomatic writing; finally, the Lu-tse or Kew-tse, who call themselves Melams or Anoogs, to the west of the Lissus, separated by an inhabited area from the Mishmee, the Sarong, and other Thibeto-Indonesian tribes. The Lu-tse language is distinct from those of nearby peoples, and their physical characteristics place them between the Lissus and the Indonesians, like the Naga, for example; they are short (1 minute. 56 according to Roux), but strong and robust; their hair is curly.[424] The Mu-tse referenced by Terrien de Lacouperie, the Lawa or Does described by Holt Hallet, the Muzours of T. de Lacouperie or the Musos of Archer, the Kas-Khuis of Garnier, scattered between the Mekong and the Salwen from the twentieth to the twenty-fifth degree of north latitude, are probably related to the Lo-lo and the Mossos.[425]

III. POPULATIONS OF EASTERN ASIA.—The far east of Asia is inhabited by three nations of mixed origin: Chinese, Coreans, Japanese.

III. PPOPULATIONS OF EASTERN ASIA.—The far east of Asia is home to three nations of mixed heritage: Chinese, Koreans, and Japanese.

1. The Chinese form by themselves alone more than the third, if not the half of the population of Asia. They occupy in a solid mass the whole of China properly so called, and[Pg 383] stretch in isolated groups far beyond the political limits of the “eighteen provinces.” Manchuria, Southern Mongolia, Dzungaria, a portion of Eastern Turkestan and Thibet have been invaded by Chinese colonists; and outside of the Empire it is estimated there are not less than three millions of “Celestials” who have emigrated to Indo-China, Malaysia, the two Americas, and even to the islands of the Pacific Ocean and Africa.

1. The Chinese alone make up more than a third, if not half, of Asia's population. They occupy all of what is known as China and[Pg 383] extend in isolated groups far beyond the political borders of the “eighteen provinces.” Chinese settlers have moved into Manchuria, Southern Mongolia, Dzungaria, parts of Eastern Turkestan, and Tibet; and outside of the Empire, it is estimated that there are at least three million “Celestials” who have migrated to Indo-China, Malaysia, the Americas, and even to the islands of the Pacific Ocean and Africa.

The Chinese people have sprung from manifold intermixtures, and indeed there are several types to discover in this nation, the anthropological study of which is scarcely more than outlined; as it is, however, according to historical data we may presume that five or six various elements enter into its composition.

The Chinese people come from a variety of mixtures, and there are definitely several types to identify within this nation. The anthropological study of this is barely more than a rough outline; however, based on historical information, we can assume that five or six different elements make up its composition.

We know from the books of Shu-King that the primitive country of the Chinese was the north of the present province of Kan-su. Thence the agricultural colonists moved (about the year 2200 B.C., according to a doubtful chronology) into the fertile valley of the Houng-ho and its tributary the Wei or Hwei. Little by little, the Chinese colonists spread along other valleys, but it took them centuries to conquer the aboriginal tribes (the Djoong, the Man, the Pa, the Miao-tse). Again in the seventh century B.C. (when exact chronology commences) the territory occupied by the Chinese scarcely extended beyond the valley of the lower Yang-tsi on the south and that of the Pei-ho on the north, and comprised within these limits several aboriginal tribes like the Hoai, of the valley of the same name, or the Lai of the Shantung peninsula, who maintained their independence. However that may be, the Chinese succeeded, little by little, in driving back the first occupiers of the soil into the mountains of the west and south, where they are still found under the names of Man-tse, Miao-tse, I-gen, Mans, Thos, etc.[426]

We know from the Shu-King writings that the early civilization of the Chinese was in the northern part of what is now Kan-su province. From there, agricultural settlers moved (around 2200 BCE, based on somewhat uncertain timelines) into the rich valley of the Houng-ho and its tributary, the Wei or Hwei. Gradually, the Chinese settlers expanded into other valleys, but it took them centuries to defeat the indigenous tribes (the Djoong, the Man, the Pa, the Miao-tse). By the seventh century BCE (when accurate timelines begin), the area controlled by the Chinese barely stretched beyond the valley of the lower Yang-tsi to the south and the Pei-ho valley to the north, which included several native tribes like the Hoai from the valley of the same name, and the Lai from the Shantung peninsula, who maintained their independence. Nevertheless, the Chinese gradually managed to push the original inhabitants back into the mountains to the west and south, where they are still found under the names Man-tse, Miao-tse, I-gen, Mans, Thos, etc.[426]

Educated Chinaman, Manchu

FIG. 118.—Educated Chinaman of Manchu origin,
interpreter to Embassy, twenty-one years old, height 1 m. 75.
(Coll. Mus. Nat. Hist. Paris.)

FInstagram. 118.—Educated Chinese man of Manchu descent,
interpreter to the Embassy, twenty-one years old, height 1 minute. 75.
(Coll. Mus. Nat. Hist. Paris.)

While this work of driving back was carried on in the south, the Turkish tribes, the Tunguses, the Mongols, the Manchus,[Pg 384] invaded in turn the north of the country. Thence resulted a marked difference between the northern and the southern Chinese, while the Chinese of the central parts have perhaps best preserved the original type (Fig. 119). The Chinese of the south belong very largely to the southern Mongolian race (p. 293); they are short, sub-brachycephalic, except in Kwang-si, where mesocephaly predominates, in consequence, probably, of intermixtures with the aborigines of Indonesian race (H. Girard); while the Chinese of the north are on the contrary almost tall of stature; the head is sub-brachycephalic with a tendency towards mesocephaly in the north, towards brachycephaly in the south (Fig. 118). The skin is lighter among the former than among the latter, the face more elongated, etc. One of the peculiarities of the Chinese skull is[Pg 385] the retreating forehead, and the contraction at the level of the temples.[427]

While efforts to push back resistance were happening in the south, the Turkish tribes, the Tunguses, the Mongols, and the Manchus[Pg 384] invaded the northern part of the country in turn. This created a clear distinction between the northern and southern Chinese, while those from the central regions have likely best maintained the original type (Fig. 119). The southern Chinese mainly belong to the southern Mongolian race (p. 293); they are generally shorter and sub-brachycephalic, except in Kwang-si, where mesocephaly is more common, probably due to mixing with the indigenous Indonesian populations (H. Girard). In contrast, the northern Chinese are typically taller; their heads are sub-brachycephalic with a tendency towards mesocephaly in the north and brachycephaly in the south (Fig. 118). The skin is lighter among the northern Chinese than the southern Chinese, and their faces are more elongated, among other differences. A notable feature of the Chinese skull is[Pg 385] the receding forehead and the narrowing at the temples.[427]

Chinese Woman, born at Foo-chow

FIG. 119.—Leao-yu-chow, Chinese woman,
born at Foo-chow, eighteen years old, height 1 m. 52.
(Coll. Mus. Nat. Hist. Paris.)

FInstagram. 119.—Leao-yu-chow, Chinese woman,
born in Foo-chow, eighteen years old, height 1 minute. 52.
(Coll. Mus. Nat. Hist. Paris.)

The multiplicity of dialects is equally great. The Chinese of the various provinces would have long since ceased to understand one another had they not possessed as a medium of communication the common signs of the written language (p. 141), which the mandarins read in their own dialects and languages not only in China but also in Corea, in Japan, and Indo-China. We distinguish the Mandarin, or northern, dialect (with which we connect the Hakka speech employed in Kwang-tung) and that of the south, then the dialects of Fu-[Pg 386]Kian, of Che-Kiang, etc. The peculiarities of the Chinese character—filial love, attachment to the soil, aptitude for agriculture and commerce, peaceful disposition, love of routine, respect for letters, observance of form, etc.—are sufficiently known.[428] Most of them are the corollaries of ancestor-worship, of the very rigorous patriarchal régime and the constitution of the commune (p. 248), the basis of the whole social fabric of the Chinese Empire, which, let it be said by the way, exhibits less organic cohesion than is generally supposed. The frequent co-existence of belief in three religions, Taoism, Confucianism, and Buddhism or Foism, in one and the same individual is one of the remarkable facts of Chinese sociology. Another fact, not less interesting, is the administrative and political mechanism inspired theoretically by very wise and moral ideas, but leading in practice to peculation and carelessness on the part of public officials of which we find it difficult to form any idea in Europe.

The variety of dialects is incredibly vast. The Chinese from different provinces would have long stopped understanding each other if they didn’t have the common written language (p. 141), which the mandarins read in their own dialects and languages, not just in China but also in Korea, Japan, and Indo-China. We differentiate between the Mandarin, or northern dialect (which includes the Hakka dialect spoken in Kwang-tung), and the southern dialects, as well as the dialects of Fu-[Pg 386]Kian, Che-Kiang, and so on. The characteristics of Chinese culture—such as filial piety, a strong connection to the land, a knack for agriculture and commerce, a peaceful nature, a love for routine, respect for education, and adherence to formalities—are fairly well-known.[428] Most of these traits stem from ancestor worship, the strict patriarchal system, and the structure of the commune (p. 248), which underpins the entire social framework of the Chinese Empire. It's worth mentioning that this structure shows less unity than commonly assumed. One notable aspect of Chinese society is the coexistence of beliefs in three religions—Taoism, Confucianism, and Buddhism—in one individual. Another interesting point is the administrative and political system that is theoretically based on wise and moral principles, but often leads to corruption and neglect among public officials, something that is hard for us in Europe to fully grasp.

2. The Coreans, who by their civilisation are connected with China, have in all probability sprung from the intermixture of Tunguse, Indonesian, and Japanese elements. The men are of tall stature,[429] strong, with sub-brachycephalic head (ceph. ind. on the liv. sub. 82.3, according to Elissiéef, Koganei, and Bogdanof). The women are more puny, and are not conspicuous for beauty; they have a yellowish complexion, small eyes, prominent brow, and very small feet, but not deformed like those of the Chinese (p. 175). The Corean values only one physical charm in woman, and that is her abundant head of hair and eyebrows, “fine as a thread” (Mme. Koïke). Besides, woman is of no account in Corean society; she[Pg 387] is an instrument of pleasure or work; she is kept strictly apart from men, rarely leaves the house, and must veil her face.

2. The Koreans, who are culturally linked to China, likely originated from a mix of Tunguse, Indonesian, and Japanese influences. The men are tall,[429] strong, with slightly broad heads (according to Elissiéef, Koganei, and Bogdanof, the cephalic index is 82.3). The women are smaller and not particularly beautiful; they have a yellowish skin tone, small eyes, a prominent forehead, and very small feet, though not deformed like those of the Chinese (p. 175). Korean culture values only one physical trait in women: their thick hair and “fine as a thread” eyebrows (Mme. Koïke). Additionally, women hold little value in Korean society; they are seen as tools for pleasure or labor. They are kept completely separate from men, rarely leave the house, and must cover their faces.

The Corean language belongs to the Uralo-Altaic family, and is closely related to the Southern Tunguse dialects. Its mode of writing, called wen-mun, differs from the Chinese, and appears either to have been invented or derived from the Sanscrit by the Buddhist monks (M. Courant).

The Korean language is part of the Ural-Altaic family and is closely related to the Southern Tungus dialects. Its writing system, called wen-mun, is different from Chinese and seems to have either been created or derived from Sanskrit by Buddhist monks (M. Courant).

The Coreans have no state religion. Buddhism, introduced towards the close of the fourth century, has not taken root among them, and is more and more in danger of extinction. Most Coreans live in a sort of irreligion tempered with some animistic practices: sacrifices to the spirits of the forests and mountains, etc. The Corean civilisation was borrowed entire from China of the fifth or sixth century. The associative tendency, and regard for form and ceremony, are perhaps stronger in Corea than in China. Further, enslavement for debt, crime, etc., exists as a regular thing in the country.[430]

The Koreans have no official state religion. Buddhism, which was brought in toward the end of the fourth century, hasn't really taken hold among them and is increasingly at risk of disappearing. Most Koreans live in a kind of irreligion mixed with some animistic practices like making sacrifices to the spirits of the forests and mountains, among others. Korean civilization was completely borrowed from China during the fifth or sixth century. The communal mindset and emphasis on form and ceremony might be even stronger in Korea than in China. Additionally, practices like debt bondage and enslavement for crime are regular occurrences in the country.[430]

3. The Japanese exhibit, like so many other peoples, a certain diversity in their physical type; the variations fluctuate between two principal forms. The fine type (Figs. 16 and 120), which may chiefly be observed in the upper classes of society, is characterised by a tall, slim figure; a relative dolichocephaly, elongated face, straight eyes in the men, more or less oblique and Mongoloid in the women, thin, convex or straight nose, etc. The coarse type, common to the mass of the people, is marked by the following characters: a thick-set body, rounded skull, broad face with prominent cheek-bones, slightly oblique eyes, flattish nose, wide mouth (Bälz).[431] These [Pg 389] two types may have been the result of crossings between Mongol sub-races (northern and southern) and Indonesian or even Polynesian elements. The influence of the Ainu blood is shown only in Northern Nippon.[432]

3. The Japanese show, like many other groups, a range of diversity in their physical characteristics; the variations fall between two main types. The fine type (Figs. 16 and 120) is mainly found in the upper classes of society and is characterized by a tall, slim build; a relatively long head, an elongated face, straight eyes in men, and more or less angled and Mongoloid eyes in women, along with a thin, convex, or straight nose, etc. The coarse type, common among the general population, is characterized by: a stocky body, rounded skull, broad face with prominent cheekbones, slightly slanted eyes, a flat nose, and a wide mouth (Bälz).[431] These [Pg 389] two types may have resulted from interbreeding between Mongol sub-races (both northern and southern) and elements from Indonesian or even Polynesian ancestry. The influence of Ainu genetics is evident only in Northern Nippon.[432]

Young Japanese Women

FIG. 120.—Young Japanese women taking tea; fine type.
(Phot. lent by Collignon.)

FIG. 120.—Young Japanese women enjoying tea; high-quality type.
(Photo courtesy of Collignon.)

In a general way the Japanese are of short stature (1 m. 59 for men, 1 m. 47 for women), rather robust and well proportioned. The colour of the skin varies from pale yellow, almost white, to brownish yellow. The Japanese have no colour in their cheeks, even when their skin is almost white; at birth there is an accumulation of pigments on the median line of the belly and pigmental spots (see p. 51). The pilous system is scantily developed, except in cases where an admixture of Ainu blood may be suspected. The head is mesaticephalic as a rule (ceph. ind. on the liv. sub. 78.2), with a tendency to brachycephaly in the gross type, to dolichocephaly in the fine type. The skull, which is capacious, exhibits two peculiarities: the os japonicum (p. 68) and the particular conformation of the upper jaw, which is very low and broad, without the canine fossa. With regard to Japanese writing, see p. 141.

Generally, the Japanese are shorter in height (1.59 m for men, 1.47 m for women), fairly robust, and well-proportioned. Skin color ranges from pale yellow, nearly white, to brownish-yellow. The Japanese typically have little color in their cheeks, even when their skin is quite light; at birth, there's a buildup of pigment along the center line of the belly and pigmented spots (see p. 51). Body hair is sparse, except in cases where there may be some Ainu ancestry. Typically, the head is mesaticephalic (ceph. ind. on the liv. sub. 78.2), with a tendency toward brachycephaly in the larger type and dolichocephaly in the smaller type. The skull is large and shows two specific features: the os japonicum (p. 68) and a uniquely shaped upper jaw that is very low and wide, without the canine fossa. For information on Japanese writing, see p. 141.

Tong King artisan, Son-tai

FIG. 121.—Tong King artisan of Son-tai,
twenty-three years old.
(Phot. Pr. Rd. Bonaparte.)

FIG. 121.—Tong King artisan of Son-tai,
twenty-three years old.
(Phot. Pr. Rd. Bonaparte.)

The most striking traits of the Japanese character are politeness and aptness in concealing the emotions; it must not be inferred from this that their nature is bad; on the contrary, they are honest, hard-working, cheerful, kind, and courageous (Mohnike, Mechnikof).[433] European civilisation and the re[Pg 390]forms introduced into Japan since 1868 have appreciably modified the manners and customs, but the essential traits of the national character remain unaltered, as they were previously unmodified by the introduction of the Chinese civilisation. The ancient chivalrous spirit of the aristocracy, holding trade in contempt, still survives at the present day, and partly explains the ardour with which persons of this class have flung themselves into political life, since Japan obtained a parliamentary administration (1889). The Japanese have two religions, Shintoism, or the national worship of the Kami (native[Pg 391] divinities), and Buddhism; but they are fundamentally very sceptical on the subject of religion.[434]

The most notable traits of the Japanese character are politeness and the ability to hide their emotions; this shouldn't be taken to mean that their nature is bad. On the contrary, they are honest, hard-working, cheerful, kind, and courageous (Mohnike, Mechnikof).[433] European civilization and the reforms introduced into Japan since 1868 have noticeably changed manners and customs, but the core traits of the national character remain unchanged, just as they were unaffected by the earlier influence of Chinese civilization. The old chivalrous spirit of the aristocracy, which looks down on trade, still exists today and partly explains why people from this class have eagerly engaged in political life since Japan adopted a parliamentary system (1889). The Japanese follow two religions, Shintoism, or the national worship of the Kami (native[Pg 391] deities), and Buddhism; however, they are fundamentally quite skeptical about religion.[434]

The islanders of the Liu-Kiu or Loo-choo archipelago resemble the Japanese (Chamberlain), but they have a thicker beard and a darker complexion (Bälz); they are of short stature (1 m. 58, according to Dr. Furukawa), and Wirth has even noted among them a tribe of pigmies 1 m. 30 in height in the island of Okinava.

The islanders of the Liu-Kiu or Loo-choo archipelago look similar to the Japanese (Chamberlain), but they have thicker beards and darker skin (Bälz). They are shorter in stature (1 min. 58, according to Dr. Furukawa), and Wirth has even identified a tribe of pygmies measuring 1 minute. 30 in height on the island of Okinava.

As to the natives of Formosa, the Chinese, who have colonised half of the island, divide them into Pepo-hoan (“mellowed” or tamed savages) and Sek-kuan or Che-hoan (raw or uncivilised savages). The former are met with almost everywhere, but chiefly in the north and west of the island, the latter have been driven back into the mountains of the interior and to the south coast. The Che-hoan are split up into several tribes (Atayal, Vonum in the north, Pai-wan, Sarisen, Butan in the south, Amia on the east coast, etc.), and remind us of the Indonesians by their type as well as by several customs (skull-hunting, tattooing, ear-ornaments, house in common or “Palankan”). Some of these “savages” are acquainted with agriculture, others live by the product of the chase. The languages of all these Formosans belong to the Malay family, especially approximating to the Tagal.[435]

As for the natives of Formosa, the Chinese who have settled in half of the island categorize them into Pepo-hoan (“tamed” or civilized natives) and Sek-kuan or Che-hoan (wild or uncivilized natives). The former can be found almost everywhere, particularly in the northern and western parts of the island, while the latter have retreated into the mountain regions and the southern coast. The Che-hoan are divided into several tribes (Atayal, Vonum in the north, Pai-wan, Sarisen, Butan in the south, Amia on the east coast, etc.), and they resemble Indonesians both in appearance and through various customs (like skull-hunting, tattooing, wearing ear ornaments, and communal living or “Palankan”). Some of these “natives” practice agriculture, while others rely on hunting for their livelihood. The languages spoken by all these Formosans are part of the Malay family, particularly resembling Tagalog.[435]

IV. POPULATIONS OF INDO-CHINA.—We must distinguish in the transgangetic peninsula the probable Aborigines and the peoples sprung from the interminglings of these aborigines with the invaders coming from the adjoining countries, and whose migrations are at least partly known to history. These[Pg 392] mixed populations are the Annamese, the Thais, the Khmers or Cambodians, the Burmese, and the Malays.

IV. PPOPULATIONS OF INDO-CHina.—In the transgangetic peninsula, we need to differentiate between the likely original inhabitants and the groups that emerged from the mixing of these original inhabitants with the invaders from neighboring regions, whose migrations are at least somewhat documented in history. These[Pg 392] mixed populations include the Annamese, the Thais, the Khmers or Cambodians, the Burmese, and the Malays.

(1) The Aborigines.—The numerous populations scattered almost all over Indo-China having a right to this name may be mustered into eight groups, of which I proceed to give a short account.

(1) The Aborigines.—The various populations spread throughout Indo-China that are entitled to this name can be organized into eight groups, which I will briefly describe.

a. The Mois.—We designate by this name the numerous so-called “savage tribes” dispersed over the table-lands and mountains between the Mekong and the Annamese coast, from the frontiers of Yun-nan to Cochin-China (district of Baria). In spite of the various names given to the Mois by the adjoining nations (they are called Mois in Annam, Peu-nongs in Cambodia, Khas in Laos, etc.), and of the multitude of tribes into which they are divided (the Mo, the Sas, the Bruns, the Bolovens, the Lové, the Bannars, the Rdé, the Laté, the Thioma, the Trao, etc.), the Mois exhibit a remarkable uniformity in physical type and manners (Neïs). They are as a rule short (1 m. 57), and dolichocephalic (ceph. ind. on the liv. sub. 77); their skin is tan-like white in colour, reddish; their hair is more or less wavy, they have straight eyes, etc. In short, they differ as much from the Annamese as the Thai, and in all probability belong for the most part to the Indonesian race. Hunters or primitive husbandmen (the crop is gathered by picking with the hand the rice from the stalk; the cooking of the rice is effected in bamboos, which roast on the fire, etc.), they go almost naked and use only primitive arms, spears, poisoned arrows, etc. They are of fairly peaceful habits.[436]

a. The Mois.—We refer to the various so-called “savage tribes” scattered across the highlands and mountains between the Mekong River and the Annamese coast, from the borders of Yun-nan to Cochin-China (district of Baria). Despite the different names given to the Mois by neighboring nations (they are called Mois in Annam, Peu-nongs in Cambodia, Khas in Laos, etc.), and the many tribes they are divided into (the Mo, the Sas, the Bruns, the Bolovens, the Lové, the Bannars, the Rdé, the Laté, the Thioma, the Trao, etc.), the Mois show a remarkable uniformity in their physical characteristics and behavior (Neïs). Generally, they are short (1 min. 57) and have long heads (ceph. ind. on the liv. sub. 77); their skin is a tan-like white color, reddish; their hair is somewhat wavy, and they have straight eyes, etc. In short, they are as different from the Annamese as they are from the Thai, and most likely primarily belong to the Indonesian race. As hunters or primitive farmers (they gather rice by hand from the stalk; they cook rice in bamboo, which roasts on the fire, etc.), they dress minimally and use only basic weapons, like spears and poisoned arrows. They tend to have fairly peaceful habits.[436]

b. The Kuis.—This name distinguishes two ethnic groups of Indo-China: one in the south-east of Siam and the north-west of Cambodia, the other in the country of Kieng-Tung or Xieng-Tong (Shan States, under British protection). The former appear to be aborigines like the Mois; the latter are simply a[Pg 393] branch of the Lo-lo or Mosso (see p. 381). The Kuis of Cambodia are in stature under the average (1 m. 63), sub-brachycephalic (ceph. ind. on the liv. sub. 82), and have a darker skin than the Laotians (Harmand). Nearly all of them can speak Cambodian and are forgetting their mother-tongue; they have the reputation of being skilful smiths.[437]

b. The Kuis.—This name refers to two ethnic groups in Indo-China: one located in the southeast of Thailand and the northwest of Cambodia, and the other in the region of Kieng-Tung or Xieng-Tong (Shan States, which are under British protection). The first group seems to be indigenous people like the Mois; the second is simply a[Pg 393] branch of the Lo-lo or Mosso (see p. 381). The Kuis in Cambodia are shorter than average (1 minute. 63), have a sub-brachycephalic head shape (ceph. ind. on the liv. sub. 82), and possess darker skin than the Laotians (Harmand). Nearly all of them can communicate in Cambodian and are gradually forgetting their native language; they are known for being skilled blacksmiths.[437]

Khamti, Lower Burma

FIG. 122.—Khamti of Lower Burma, Assam frontier.
(Coll. Ind. Mus., London.)

FInstagram. 122.—Khamti of Lower Burma, Assam border.
(Coll. Ind. Mus., London.)

c. The Mons or Talaing are the remnants of a population which formerly occupied the whole of lower Burma, and have been driven back into the unhealthy region of the deltas of[Pg 394] the Irrawaddy, Sittong, and Salwen rivers; their territory has mostly been taken by a population sprung from the intermingling of the Mons with the Burmese.

c. The Mons or Talaing are the remnants of a population that used to inhabit all of lower Burma and have been pushed back into the unhealthy delta regions of[Pg 394] the Irrawaddy, Sittong, and Salwen rivers. Their territory has mostly been taken over by a population that emerged from the mixing of the Mons with the Burmese.

The three groups of tribes which we have just enumerated speak monosyllabic dialects correlated as regards their vocabularies, at least so far as the words indicating numbers, the parts of the body, trades, etc., are concerned. These dialects further present analogies with the Khmer (p. 398) and Khasia languages (p. 380).[438]

The three groups of tribes we've just mentioned speak dialects that consist of single-syllable words related to their vocabularies, particularly concerning terms for numbers, body parts, trades, and so on. These dialects also show similarities with the Khmer (p. 398) and Khasia languages (p. 380).[438]

d. The Tziam or Chiam, on the other hand, are closely allied to the Malaysian linguistic family. Their language, fixed by writing of Indian origin, reminds us of the dialects of the Philippines. About 130,000 in number, they inhabit the province of Binh-Tuan and several other points of Southern Annam, as well as Cochin-China (province of Baria, etc.) and Cambodia. They represent all that remains of a once powerful people, the founders of the empire of Champa, which extended over the whole of Annam, as it now is, and the southern part of Tong King. A section of the Tziam are Mussulmans, but the majority are animist. The physical type is handsome; nose almost aquiline, eyes without the Mongoloid fold, wavy or frizzy hair, dark skin. Contrary to what exists among other peoples of Indo-China, among the Tziams it is the woman who asks the hand in marriage.[439]

d. The Tziam or Chiam, however, are closely related to the Malaysian language family. Their language, written in a script of Indian origin, resembles the dialects of the Philippines. With around 130,000 individuals, they live in Binh-Tuan province and several other areas in Southern Annam, as well as Cochin-China (specifically the province of Baria) and Cambodia. They are all that remains of a once powerful group, the founders of the Champa empire, which covered all of Annam as it is today and the southern part of Tong King. Some of the Tziam are Muslims, but most follow animist beliefs. They have an attractive physical appearance; their noses are almost aquiline, their eyes lack the Mongoloid fold, they often have wavy or frizzy hair, and have dark skin. Unlike other groups in Indo-China, among the Tziam, it is the woman who proposes marriage.[439]

e. The Karens, who inhabit the upper valley of the Me Ping and the mountainous districts of Arakan, Pegu, and Tenasserim, the country between the Sittong and the Salwen (red Karens), probably came into Burma at a later date than the Mons; they maintain that they came thither from Yunnan about the fifth century of the present era. In stature they are under the average (1 m. 64, according to Mason), and they exhibit traits[Pg 395] intermediate between those of the Malays and the Thai (see below). Numbering about a million, they are speedily becoming civilised while striving at the same time to preserve their independence.[440]

e. The Karens, who live in the upper valley of the Me Ping and the mountainous areas of Arakan, Pegu, and Tenasserim, the region between the Sittong and the Salwen (red Karens), likely arrived in Burma later than the Mons; they claim they came from Yunnan around the fifth century AD. They are below average height (1 minute. 64, according to Mason), and they show characteristics[Pg 395] that are a mix between the Malays and the Thai (see below). With a population of about a million, they are rapidly modernizing while also striving to maintain their independence.[440]

The Khyens or Chin of the mountains of Arakan and the Tung-tu of Tenasserim are Karens crossed with Burmese and Shans (p. 401). The Lemets, the Does, and the Khmus of Fr. Garnier (Kamu and Kamet of MacLeod) who inhabit the east of Luang-Prabang (French Laos), and perhaps the Lavas or Does of H. Hallet, mountaineers of West Siam, are related to the Karens or Khyens.

The Khyens or Chin from the mountains of Arakan and the Tung-tu of Tenasserim are Karens mixed with Burmese and Shans (p. 401). The Lemets, the Does, and the Khmus mentioned by Fr. Garnier (Kamu and Kamet of MacLeod), who live in the east of Luang-Prabang (French Laos), and possibly the Lavas or Does noted by H. Hallet, highlanders from West Siam, are connected to the Karens or Khyens.

f. The Nagas of Manipur and the mountains extending to the north (Patkoi, Barai) of this country are Indonesians more or less pure both in physical type (Frontispiece and Fig. 17) and manners and customs. They may be sub-divided into Angami, Kanpui, etc., wearing the petticoat or apron, of the west; into Lhota, Ho, etc., wearing the plaid, of the centre; and into Nangta, or naked, of the east. Various ethnic peculiarities, skull-hunting and multicoloured hair or feather ornaments, long shields (Frontispiece), breast-plates, method of weaving, and houses in common (Morong), connect them with the Dyaks and other Indonesians. Tattooing prevails only among the tribes with a monarchical organisation (Klemm). The Lushai, who live at the south of Manipur, are Nagas mixed with Kyens and Burmese of Arakan. They may be sub-divided into several tribes: the Kuki, subject to the English, very short (medium height 1 m. 57); the Lushai properly so called, partly in subjection (41,600 in Assam), somewhat slender (1 m. 63), with brown skin, flat nose, prominent cheek-bones, husbandmen;[441] the Saks, Kamis, and Shendons or Shaws. West of the[Pg 396] Lushai dwell the Tippera and the Mrows, tribes of short stature (1 m. 59), still more pronouncedly intermingled with the Burmese.[442]

f. The Nagas of Manipur and the mountains to the north (Patkoi, Barai) of this region are mostly pure Indonesians in both physical traits (Frontispiece and Fig. 17) as well as in their manners and customs. They can be divided into Angami, Kanpui, etc., who wear petticoats or aprons in the west; Lhota, Ho, etc., who wear plaid in the center; and Nangta, or those who are naked, in the east. Various ethnic traits, including skull-hunting, colorful hair or feather ornaments, long shields (Frontispiece), breast-plates, weaving techniques, and communal houses (Morong), link them to the Dyaks and other Indonesians. Tattooing is mainly found among tribes with a monarchal structure (Klemm). The Lushai, located to the south of Manipur, are Nagas mixed with Kyens and Burmese from Arakan. They can be further divided into several tribes: the Kuki, who are under English rule and are quite short (average height 1 min. 57); the Lushai proper, some of whom are under subjugation (41,600 in Assam), are somewhat slender (1 minute. 63), with brown skin, flat noses, and prominent cheekbones, and they are farmers;[441] the Saks, Kamis, and Shendons or Shaws. To the west of the [Pg 396] Lushai are the Tippera and the Mrows, tribes of shorter stature (1 min. 59), who are even more mixed with the Burmese.[442]

Black Sakai of Gunong-Inas

FIG. 123.—Black Sakai of Gunong-Inas
(Perak, Malay Peninsula).
(Phot. Lapicque.)

FInstagram. 123.—Black Sakai of Gunong-Inas
(Perak, Malay Peninsula).
(Phot. Lapicque.)

g. The Selungs are also regarded as Indonesians; numbering but a thousand in all, they live in their canoes in the Mergui archipelago, wandering from island to island like veritable gypsies of the sea, after the manner of the Orang-Sletar of the Straits of Singapore, now quite disappeared. In the same category we may also place the natives of the Nicobar islands,[Pg 397] though among the latter we must distinguish (1) the Nicobarese of the small islands and the coasts of Great Nicobar who have intermixed with the Malays, and (2) the Shom-Pen of the interior of the latter island, savages of a somewhat pure Indonesian type.[443]

g. The Selungs are also considered Indonesians; numbering only about a thousand, they live in their canoes in the Mergui archipelago, moving from island to island like true sea gypsies, similar to the now-extinct Orang-Sletar of the Straits of Singapore. In the same category, we can also include the natives of the Nicobar islands,[Pg 397] though among them we need to differentiate (1) the Nicobarese from the small islands and the coasts of Great Nicobar who have mixed with the Malays, and (2) the Shom-Pen from the interior of that island, who are savages of a somewhat pure Indonesian type.[443]

h. We must also include in this long list of the aboriginal peoples of Indo-China the Negritoes,[444] belonging to a distinct race, chiefly characterised by short stature, black skin, and frizzy or woolly hair (see p. 288). As genuine representatives of this race, only three tribes are known: the Aeta, who inhabit the Philippine islands (p. 483); the Sakai of the interior of the Malay peninsula; and the Minkopis of the Andaman islands.

h. We should also include in this extensive list of the indigenous peoples of Indo-China the Negritoes,[444] who belong to a distinct race primarily characterized by their short stature, dark skin, and curly or woolly hair (see p. 288). As true representatives of this race, only three tribes are known: the Aeta, who live in the Philippine islands (p. 483); the Sakai from the interior of the Malay peninsula; and the Minkopis from the Andaman islands.

The Minkopis or Andamanese (Fig. 124), of very short stature (1 m. 49), sub-brachycephalic (ceph. ind. 82.6 average on the skull and on the liv. sub.), are in the lowest scale of civilisation. They live in “chongs”—small roofs on four stakes (p. 160), go naked, and procure the strict necessaries of life by hunting, making use of a peculiar kind of bow (p. 263). In number they scarcely exceed five thousand (E. Reclus).

The Minkopis or Andamanese (Fig. 124), are very short people (about 1 m. 49), with a short skull shape (average cephalic index of 82.6 on the skull and living individuals). They are at a very basic level of civilization. They live in “chongs”—small shelters on four poles (p. 160), are typically unclothed, and gather the essentials of life through hunting, using a unique kind of bow (p. 263). Their population is barely over five thousand (E. Reclus).

i. The pure Sakai, Semangs or Menik (as for example those of Gunong-Inas, Fig. 123) are the same height as the Minkopis (1 m. 49), but their head is less round and their face more angular than those of the latter; they live likewise by hunting and by the gathering of honey, camphor, india-rubber, and other products of tropical forests, which they exchange with the Malays for tools, arms, etc. Several populations of the Malay peninsula, particularly the Mintra, the Jakhuns of Jokol, are Sakai-Malay half-breeds, as is shown by the light colour of their skin, their stature, higher than that of the Sakai, but still very short (1 m. 54), their frizzy hair, etc.

i. The pure Sakai, Semangs, or Menik (like those from Gunong-Inas, Fig. 123) are the same height as the Minkopis (1 min. 49), but their heads are less round and their faces more angular compared to the latter; they also survive by hunting and collecting honey, camphor, rubber, and other products from tropical forests, which they trade with the Malays for tools, weapons, etc. Several populations on the Malay peninsula, especially the Mintra and the Jakhuns of Jokol, are half-Sakai and half-Malay, as indicated by their lighter skin color, taller stature compared to the Sakai, yet still relatively short (1 minute. 54), their frizzy hair, and so on.

2. Let us pass on to the mixed populations of Indo-China, springing from the probable cross-breeds of the autochthones and the invaders.

2. Let’s move on to the mixed populations of Indo-China, which likely resulted from the interbreeding of the indigenous people and the invaders.

Chief, Middle Andaman

FIG. 124.—Negrito chief of Middle Andaman,
height 1 m. 49; cephalic ind. 83.4.
(Phot. Lapicque.)

FIG. 124.—Negrito chief of Middle Andaman,
height 1 min 49; cephalic index 83.4.
(Phot. Lapicque.)

The Cambodians or Khmers have the first place by seniority. At the present day they inhabit Cambodia, the adjoining parts of Siam, and the south of Cochin-China, but they formerly extended much farther. Two centuries ago, before the arrival of the Annamese, they occupied the whole of Cochin-China, while to-day they are found in any considerable number only in the unhealthy and marshy regions of the Rach-gia, Soktrang, and Tra-Vinh districts, where their number equals or exceeds that of the Annamese. It may be conjectured that the Khmers have sprung from the intermixing of the Malays and Kuis, with an infusion of Hindu blood at least in the higher classes of society. The Cambodians are taller (1 m. 65) than the Annamese and the Thai, but almost as brachy[Pg 399]cephalic (ceph. ind. on the liv. sub. 83.6); their eyes are rarely oblique, their hair is often wavy, etc. This population has preserved much of its primitive savagery in spite of the influence of several successive civilisations, of which remain the splendid monuments of Angkor-Vat, Angkor-Tom, etc.[445]

The Cambodians or Khmers have the top spot in terms of seniority. Today, they live in Cambodia, nearby parts of Thailand, and the southern region of Vietnam, but they used to occupy a much larger area. Two centuries ago, before the arrival of the Annamese, they inhabited all of Vietnam, but now they can only be found in significant numbers in the unhealthy and marshy areas of the Rach-gia, Soktrang, and Tra-Vinh districts, where their population is equal to or greater than that of the Annamese. It's believed that the Khmers originated from a mix of Malays and Kuis, with some Hindu ancestry, at least among the upper classes. The Cambodians are taller (1 min. 65) than the Annamese and the Thai, but are nearly as brachycephalic (ceph. ind. on the liv. sub. 83.6); their eyes are rarely slanted, their hair is often wavy, and so on. This population has retained much of its primitive savagery despite the influence of several successive cultures, evidenced by the stunning monuments of Angkor-Vat, Angkor-Tom, and others.[445]

The population which chronologically succeeds the Cambodians is that of the Annamese (Fig. 121), the inhabitants of the delta in Tong King, of the coast in Annam, and most of Cochin-China. Some Annamese colonies are also found in Cambodia, in Laos, and among the Mois. The Annamese people, fifteen to seventeen millions strong at the present time, is the outcome of numerous interminglings. Of western origin, according to its traditions, that is to say akin to the Thai peoples, it came at an early period into the country which it now occupies. It found already installed there the Mois, the Khmers, and the Malays, which it succeeded in assimilating or pushing back into the mountains and the unhealthy regions; but it has had to support in its turn the continual immigrations of the Chinese who brought their civilisation to it. In spite of these complex interminglings the Annamese type is very uniform (Harmand). The men are short in stature (1 m. 58), with slender limbs, brachycephalic head (ceph. ind. 82.8), of angular visage with prominent cheek-bones, and Mongoloid eyes.

The population that comes after the Cambodians is the Annamese (Fig. 121), who live in the delta of Tonkin, along the coast of Annam, and most of Cochinchina. Some Annamese communities can also be found in Cambodia, Laos, and among the Mois. Currently, the Annamese people number between fifteen and seventeen million and are the result of many different blendings. According to their traditions, they are of western origin, sharing roots with the Thai peoples, and arrived in their current territory at an early stage. They found the Mois, Khmers, and Malays already living there, whom they managed to either assimilate or push back into the mountains and less hospitable areas. However, they have also had to deal with ongoing immigration from the Chinese, who brought their civilization with them. Despite these complex mixes, the Annamese people are quite uniform in appearance (Harmand). The men are generally short (about 1 minute. 58), have slender limbs, a broad head (ceph. ind. 82.8), an angular face with pronounced cheekbones, and Mongoloid eyes.

The Annamese of Tong King are a little taller (1 m. 59) and darker than those of Cochin-China and Annam (height 1 m. 57); they have also a broader and flatter nose, the result perhaps of intermixture with the Thos mountaineers (p. 401) who live near them.[446] The social life of the Annamese is modelled on that of the Chinese; the village community and the patriarchal family form the base of it, in the same way as ancestor-worship is the religious foundation. Annamese Buddhism is only a colourless copy of Chinese Foism and has no great hold of the[Pg 400] people. Very docile, the Annamese are intelligent, cheerful, and well gifted, without being exempt from certain defects of character, common to all Asiatics of the far East, such as dissimulation, hypocrisy, and perfidy.

The Annamese of Tonkin are a bit taller (1 minute. 59) and darker than those from Cochinchina and Annam (height 1 min. 57); they also have a wider and flatter nose, possibly due to mixing with the Thos mountaineers (p. 401) who live nearby.[446] The social life of the Annamese is modeled after that of the Chinese; the village community and the patriarchal family are its foundation, just as ancestor worship is the basis of their religion. Annamese Buddhism is merely a dull imitation of Chinese Buddhism and doesn’t have much influence on the[Pg 400] people. Generally compliant, the Annamese are intelligent, cheerful, and well-gifted, though they do share certain character flaws common among East Asians, like deceitfulness, hypocrisy, and treachery.

The Burmese or Mramma made a descent on Indo-China perhaps at the same time as the Annamese, from their original country, which is supposed to be the mountains of the south-east of Thibet. To-day they occupy Upper Burma, Pegu, and Arakan. In the last-mentioned country they bear the name of Mag or Arakanese, and differ a little from the true Burmese of Upper Burma, who are the purest representatives of the Burmese people. Like the Annamese, they have attained a certain degree of civilisation, mainly due to the influence of India. We find existing among them monogamy, the order of castes, and Buddhism of the south but slightly altered. The Mag are mesocephalic (ceph. ind. 81.8) and of short stature (1 m. 61).[447]

The Burmese or Mramma migrated into Indo-China around the same time as the Annamese from their homeland, which is believed to be the mountains in southeastern Tibet. Today, they occupy Upper Burma, Pegu, and Arakan. In Arakan, they are known as Mag or Arakanese, and they have some differences from the true Burmese of Upper Burma, who are the most authentic representatives of the Burmese people. Like the Annamese, they have developed a certain level of civilization, mainly influenced by India. Among them, monogamy, a caste system, and a slightly altered form of Southern Buddhism exist. The Mag have a mesocephalic shape (ceph. ind. 81.8) and are of short stature (1 minute. 61).[447]

The Thai.—The numerous peoples speaking different Thai dialects were the last arrivals in Indo-China. Their migrations may be followed from the first century B.C., when the Pa-y tribes came from Sechuen into Western Yunnan to found there the kingdom of Luh-Tchao. Another kingdom, that of Muang-ling, was founded more to the south-west in Upper Burma, etc. The recent researches of Terrien de Lacouperie, Colquhoun, Baber, Hosie, Labarth, Billet, H. Hollet, Bourne, Deblenne, and of so many others besides, enable us to show the relations which existed between these various Thai peoples and to assign the limits with sufficient exactitude to their habitat, which extends from Kwei-chow to Cambodia, between the 14th and the 26th degrees of N. latitude.[448]

The Thai.—The many groups speaking different Thai dialects were the last to arrive in Southeast Asia. Their migrations can be traced back to the first century BCE, when the Pa-y tribes moved from Sichuan into Western Yunnan to establish the kingdom of Luh-Tchao. Another kingdom, Muang-ling, was founded further southwest in Upper Burma, among other locations. Recent research by Terrien de Lacouperie, Colquhoun, Baber, Hosie, Labarth, Billet, H. Hollet, Bourne, Deblenne, and many others allows us to illustrate the connections that existed among these various Thai peoples and to accurately define the boundaries of their territory, which stretches from Guizhou to Cambodia, between the 14th and 26th degrees of N. latitude.[448]

Four principal Thai peoples may be distinguished in this territory: the Thos-Muong in the north-east (Tong King and China), the Shans in the north-west (Upper Burma), the Laotians in the south-east (French Laos), and the Siamese in the south-west (Siam).

Four main Thai groups can be identified in this region: the Thos-Muong in the northeast (Tong King and China), the Shans in the northwest (Upper Burma), the Laotians in the southeast (French Laos), and the Siamese in the southwest (Siam).

We put together, under the name of Thos-Muong, all the natives of Upper Tong King and the Tong King hinterland (except the mountain summits occupied by the Mans, allied probably to the Lo-lo), as well as the primitive inhabitants of Kwang-si, Southern Kwei-chow, and Eastern Yunnan, now driven back to the mountains. The Thos inhabiting Tong King to the east of the Red River (basin of the Claire River), are sub-brachycephalic (ceph. ind. 82.5), of lofty stature (1 m. 67),[449] having elongated face, straight non-Mongoloid eyes, and brownish complexion. They partly recall the Indonesians, and partly the still mysterious race to which the Lo-lo belong (p. 381). They are husbandmen, living in houses on piles, and wearing a very picturesque costume different from that of their ancient masters the Annamese. The Muongs of Tong King to the west of the Red River (basin of the Black River), the Pueun and the Pu-Thai of Annamese Laos resemble them both in type and in language, which is a Thai dialect very much altered by Chinese and Annamese. The Tu-jen, the Pe-miao, the Pa-i, forming two-thirds of the population of Kwang-si, and found in the south of Kwei-chow and the north-west of Kwang-tung, as well as the Pe-jen or Minkia of Yunnan, are Thos slightly crossed with Chinese blood in the same way as the Nongs of Tong King, the neighbours of the Thos. Most of these peoples have a special kind of writing, recalling that of the Laotians. The latter, as well as the Shans, differ somewhat from the Thos in regard to type, in which we may discern interminglings with the Indonesians, Malays, Mois, and Burmese. Among the Shans we must distinguish the Khamti (Fig. 122), a very pure race, and the Sing-po with the Kackyen or Katchin, somewhat[Pg 402] intermixed with the Burmese, both of them races of mountaineers of the northern parts of Upper Burma, between the Lu-Kiang (upper Salwen) and the Lohit-Brahmaputra. The upper valley of the latter river is inhabited by the Assamese or Ahoms, cross-breeds between the Shans and Hindus, speaking a particular dialect of the Hindi language. The Laotians are sub-brachycephalic (83.6) and of short stature (1 m. 59); those of the north tattoo their bodies like the Shans. They are husbandmen, shepherds, and hunters.[450]

We brought together, under the name of Thos-Muong, all the locals from Upper Tonkin and the Tonkin hinterland (except for the mountain peaks occupied by the Mans, likely allies of the Lo-lo), as well as the original inhabitants of Guangxi, Southern Guizhou, and Eastern Yunnan, who have now retreated to the mountains. The Thos living in Tonkin, east of the Red River (in the Claire River basin), are sub-brachycephalic (ceph. ind. 82.5), tall (1 min. 67),[449] with elongated faces, straight non-Mongoloid eyes, and a brownish complexion. They partly resemble Indonesians and partly the still mysterious race to which the Lo-lo belong (p. 381). They are farmers, living in stilt houses, and wearing a colorful costume that differs from that of their former rulers, the Annamese. The Muongs of Tonkin, west of the Red River (in the Black River basin), along with the Pueun and the Pu-Thai from Annamese Laos, share similarities in both type and language, which is a dialect of Thai heavily influenced by Chinese and Annamese. The Tu-jen, Pe-miao, and Pa-i, making up two-thirds of the population of Guangxi and found in southern Guizhou and northwestern Guangdong, as well as the Pe-jen or Minkia of Yunnan, are Thos who have some Chinese ancestry, similar to the neighboring Nongs of Tonkin. Most of these groups have a unique writing system that resembles that of the Laotians. The latter, along with the Shans, differ slightly from the Thos in physical characteristics, showing some intermingling with Indonesians, Malays, Mois, and Burmese. Among the Shans, we should note the Khamti (Fig. 122), a very pure race, and the Sing-po along with the Kackyen or Katchin, who are somewhat intermixed with the Burmese, both being mountain-dwelling races from the northern regions of Upper Burma, situated between the Lu-Kiang (upper Salwen) and the Lohit-Brahmaputra rivers. The upper valley of the latter river is inhabited by the Assamese or Ahoms, who are hybrids of Shans and Hindus, speaking a specific dialect of Hindi. The Laotians are sub-brachycephalic (83.6) and short (1 minute. 59); those from the north tattoo their bodies like the Shans. They are farmers, shepherds, and hunters.[450]

It is perhaps among the Siamese that the primitive Thai type has been most changed by intermixture with the Khmers, Kuis, Hindus, and Malays. In stature above the average (1 m. 61), very brachycephalic (ceph. ind. 85.5) with olive complexion, they have prominent cheek-bones, lozenge-shaped face, and short flattish nose. They are fervent votaries of southern Buddhism, and are the most civilised of the Thai. They have succeeded in preserving their relative independence and forming a state in which several reforms of European character have been attempted in recent times.

It seems that the Siamese people show the most significant change from the original Thai type due to mixing with the Khmers, Kuis, Hindus, and Malays. They are taller than average (1 minute. 61), have very broad skulls (ceph. ind. 85.5), an olive skin tone, pronounced cheekbones, a diamond-shaped face, and a short, flat nose. They are passionate followers of southern Buddhism and are the most developed among the Thai. They have managed to maintain their relative independence and have established a state where several European-style reforms have been attempted in recent years.

V. THE POPULATION OF INDIA represents about a third of the inhabitants of Asia (287,223,431 inhabitants according to the census of 1891). It is sub-divided into a hundred tribes or distinct peoples, but this multiplicity of ethnic groups is rather apparent than real, and they may easily be incorporated into a small number of somatic races or linguistic families; these groups frequently represent castes alone.

V. THE PPOPULATION OF INDIA makes up about a third of Asia's population (287,223,431 people based on the 1891 census). It's divided into around a hundred tribes or distinct communities, but this diversity of ethnic groups is more about appearance than reality, and they can easily be categorized into a small number of racial or language families; these groups often mainly represent castes.

Caste is indeed an institution peculiar to India. Of ancient origin, this institution has developed very considerably, assuming the most varied forms. Springing from a Hindu or Brahman source, it penetrated little by little the other ethnic and religious groups of the peninsula, and one might say that it is the basis of the social organisation for four-fifths of the population of India, despite of the fact that its power is declining at the present day beneath the strong hand of British rule. About 2000 castes may be enumerated at the present[Pg 403] day, but year by year new ones are being called into existence as a certain number disappear.[451]

Caste is a social system unique to India. With roots in ancient history, this institution has evolved significantly, taking on various forms. Originating from Hindu or Brahman traditions, it gradually influenced other ethnic and religious communities across the peninsula. It's fair to say that it forms the foundation of social organization for about 80% of the Indian population, even though its influence is weakening today under British rule. There are around 2000 castes recognized currently[Pg 403], but every year, new ones emerge while some fade away.[451]

Gurkha, Nepal

FIG. 125.—Gurkha of the Kus or Khas tribe, Nepal;
mixed Indo-Thibetan type.
(Coll. Ind. Mus., London.)

FIG. 125.—Gurkha from the Kus or Khas tribe, Nepal;
mixed Indo-Tibetan type.
(Coll. Ind. Mus., London.)

The names of these castes are derived either from hereditary occupations (tanners, husbandmen, etc.); from a geographical source (Pathani, etc.), or a genealogical one—from a supposed common ancestor; or, especially among the Dravidians, from objects or animals singled out as totems (p. 247). The essential characteristics of all castes, persisting amid every change[Pg 404] of form, are endogamy within themselves and the regulation forbidding them to come into contact one with another and partake of food together (Sénart). Endogamy within the limits of the caste implies, as a corollary, exogamy among the sections of the caste. The typical form of these sections is the “gotra,” an eponymous group reputed to be descended from a common ancestor, usually from a rishi, a priest or legendary saint.

The names of these castes come from either hereditary occupations (like tanners, farmers, etc.); from geographic origins (like Pathani, etc.); or from genealogy, based on an assumed common ancestor. Among the Dravidians, they often come from specific objects or animals recognized as totems (p. 247). The key traits of all castes, which remain despite any changes[Pg 404], are that members marry within their own caste and are prohibited from interacting with or sharing meals with members of other castes (Sénart). Marrying within one's caste inherently requires marrying outside of the subdivisions of that caste. The common form of these subdivisions is known as “gotra,” which is a group believed to be descended from a shared ancestor, typically a rishi, a priest, or a legendary saint.

Outside of this endogamic rule marriage is forbidden in all castes between relatives to the sixth degree on the paternal side and to the fourth degree on the maternal side. Caste has no religious character; men of different creeds may belong to it. It is ruled by a chief and a council (panchâyet), and has not limits as rigid as is commonly supposed; the way is smoothed by compromises and liberal interpretations of rules for rich and clever people to pass from a lower to a higher caste.

Outside of this exclusive marriage rule, all castes forbid marriage between relatives up to the sixth degree on the paternal side and the fourth degree on the maternal side. Caste is not linked to religion; people of different faiths can belong to it. It is governed by a chief and a council (panchâyet), and its boundaries are not as strict as commonly believed; wealth and intelligence create opportunities for individuals to move from a lower to a higher caste through compromises and flexible interpretations of the rules.

In this way or some other a man may rise from one caste to another: in Mirzapur many Ghonds and Korvars have become Rajputs, etc. (Crooke). Employment is by no means the criterion of caste, as is very often supposed. “Those who have seen Brahmans,” says Sénart, “girdled with the sacred cord, offer water to travellers in the railway stations of India, who have seen them drilling among the sepoys of the Anglo-Indian army, are prepared for surprises of this kind.”[452] And in conclusion the castes do not always agree with ethnic and somatic divisions.[453]

In one way or another, a person can move from one caste to another: in Mirzapur, many Ghonds and Korvars have become Rajputs, etc. (Crooke). Employment is definitely not the measure of caste, as is often assumed. "Those who have seen Brahmans," says Sénart, "wearing the sacred thread, serving water to travelers at railway stations in India, and those who have seen them training with the sepoys of the Anglo-Indian army, are prepared for surprises like this."[452] And to sum up, the castes do not always align with ethnic and physical distinctions.[453]

Paniyan Men and Children, Malabar

FIG. 126.—Group of Paniyan men and children of Malabar.
(Phot. Thurston.)

FIG. 126.—Group of Paniyan men and children from Malabar.
(Phot. Thurston.)

Side by side with caste another characteristic institution of [Pg 406] the Cisgangetic Aryan or Aryanised peoples must be noted; it is the village (grama) with common proprietorship of the soil and family communities, on which I cannot dilate for want of space (see p. 247).

Side by side with caste, another important institution of the Cisgangetic Aryan or Aryanized peoples is worth mentioning: the village (grama) with shared ownership of land and family communities. I can't go into detail about this due to space constraints (see p. 247).

Young Irula Girl

FIG. 127.—Young Irula girl.
(Phot. Thurston.)

FIG. 127.—Young Irula girl.
(Photo by Thurston.)

India was the cradle of two great religions which have[Pg 407] become international, Brahmanism and Buddhism. This fact deserves to be borne in mind on account of the impress left on these two religions by the national Hindu character. The foundation of both is formed of those characteristically Hindu beliefs,—the ideas of metempsychosis, final deliverance, and the doctrine of the moral world, which form a contrast with the Semitic religions. Brahmanism is professed by about three-fourths (72 per cent.) of the inhabitants of India, while Buddhism and its derivative Jainism only number, apart from the island of Ceylon, three per cent. of the total population of the peninsula. The most widespread religion after Brahmanism is Islamism (20 per cent. of the whole population of India).

India was the birthplace of two major religions that have[Pg 407] become worldwide: Brahmanism and Buddhism. This is important to note because both religions have been shaped by the unique Hindu character. Their foundations are built on key Hindu beliefs—ideas of reincarnation, ultimate liberation, and moral principles—which contrast with Semitic religions. About three-quarters (72 percent) of India's population practice Brahmanism, while Buddhism and its offshoot Jainism make up only about three percent of the total population of the subcontinent, excluding the island of Ceylon. The most prevalent religion after Brahmanism is Islam, which accounts for 20 percent of India's entire population.

Santal, Bhagalpur Hills

FIG. 128.—Santal of the Bhagalpur hills.
(Coll. India Museum, London.)

FInstagram. 128.—Santal from the Bhagalpur hills.
(Coll. India Museum, London.)

From the somatological point of view it may be affirmed to-day, after the excellent works of Risley, Crooke, Thurston, Sarasin, Schmidt, Jagor, Mantegazza, etc., that the variety of types found in the country is due to the crossing of two[Pg 408] indigenous races, Indo-Afghan and Melano-Indian or Dravidian, with the admixture here and there of foreign elements: Turkish and Mongol in the north, Indonesian in the east, Arab and Assyroid in the west, and perhaps the Negritoid element in the centre. The Indo-Afghan race, of high stature, with light brown or tanned complexion, long face, wavy or straight hair, prominent and thin nose, dolichocephalic head, predominates in the north-west of India; the Melano-Indian or Dravidian race, also dolichocephalic but of short stature, with dark brown or black complexion, wavy or frizzy hair, is chiefly found in the south. In it two sub-races may be distinguished: a platyrhinian one, with broad flat nose, rounded face, found in the mountainous regions of Western Bengal, Oudh and Orissa, also at several points of Rajputana and Gujarat, then in Southern India, and in the central provinces to the south of the rivers Narbada and Mahanadi. The other sub-race, leptorhinian, with narrow prominent nose, and elongated face may be noted in some particular groups, especially among the Nairs, the Telugus, and the Tamils.[454]

From a biological perspective, it can be stated today, following the impressive works of Risley, Crooke, Thurston, Sarasin, Schmidt, Jagor, Mantegazza, and others, that the variety of ethnic groups found in the country is a result of the mixing of two indigenous races, Indo-Afghan and Melano-Indian (or Dravidian), with occasional influences from foreign elements: Turkish and Mongolian in the north, Indonesian in the east, Arab and Assyroid in the west, and possibly some Negritoid influences in the center. The Indo-Afghan race, which is tall, has a light brown or tanned complexion, a long face, wavy or straight hair, and a prominent thin nose, predominates in the north-west of India. The Melano-Indian or Dravidian race is also dolichocephalic but shorter, with a dark brown or black complexion and wavy or frizzy hair, primarily located in the south. Within it, two sub-races can be identified: a platyrhinian type, with a broad flat nose and rounded face, found in the mountainous regions of Western Bengal, Oudh, and Orissa, as well as in various parts of Rajputana and Gujarat, then extending into Southern India and the central provinces south of the Narbada and Mahanadi rivers. The other sub-race, known as leptorhinian, features a narrow prominent nose and an elongated face, which can be observed in certain groups, particularly among the Nairs, the Telugus, and the Tamils.[454]

1. Melano-Indians or Dravidians.—This group, at once somatological and linguistic, includes two sub-divisions, based on differences of language: the division of Kolarians, and that of Dravidians properly so called.

1. Melano-Indians or Dravidians.—This group, both in terms of physical characteristics and language, consists of two sub-divisions, categorized by language differences: the Kolarian division and the Dravidian division proper.

a. Kolarians.[455]—The numerous tribes speaking the languages of the Kol family and belonging to the platyrhinian variety of the Melano-Indian race, more or less modified by interminglings, occupy the mountainous regions of Bengal and the provinces of the north-west. Certain of these tribes, of the purest type, like the Juang or Patua of Keunjhar and Dhenkanal (Orissa), are distinguished by very short stature (1 m. 57),[Pg 409] zygomatic arches projecting outwards, and flat face, as well as by certain ethnic characters; they go nearly naked, live on the products of the chase and the fruits and roots gathered; they also practise a little primitive cultivation by burning the forests, etc. The Kharia of Lohardaga (Chota Nagpur), who resemble the Juang in type, language, and tattooings (three lines above the nose, etc.), are partly civilised; some cultivate the ground with a plough, have a rudimentary social constitution, etc. The other Kols are, for the most part, still further advanced. Such are the Santals or Sonthals (Fig. 128) of Western Bengal, of Northern Orissa, and of Bhagalpur, who call themselves “Hor”; the Munda or Horo-hu of Chota Nagpur; the Ho or Lurka-Kols of the district of Singbhum (Bengal); lastly, the Bhumij of Western Bengal, all probably sections of one and the same people, formerly much more numerous.[456] The Kols of the north-west provinces (height 1 m. 64; ceph. ind. 73.2, according to Risley and Crooke) are closely allied to the groups which I have just mentioned. The Savaras or Saoras, scattered over Orissa, Chota Nagpur, Western Bengal, and as far as the province of Madras, speak a language which Cunningham, Cust, and Fr. Müller consider Kolarian, while, according to Dalton, it belongs to the Dravidian family properly so called. Physically, they resemble the Malé Dravidians, and exhibit the tolerably pure type of the platyrhinian sub-race of the Melano-Indians.[457] The same[Pg 410] doubt exists in regard to the linguistic affinities of the Bhils of Central India and the north-west provinces.

a. Kolarians.[455]—The various tribes that speak languages from the Kol family and belong to the platyrhinian type of the Melano-Indian race, more or less influenced by intermixing, inhabit the mountainous areas of Bengal and the provinces in the northwest. Some of these tribes, like the Juang or Patua from Keunjhar and Dhenkanal (Orissa), are noted for their very short stature (1 min. 57),[Pg 409] projecting zygomatic arches, and flat faces, along with specific ethnic traits; they typically wear little clothing, survive on hunting and foraged fruits and roots, and practice some basic farming by burning forests, etc. The Kharia of Lohardaga (Chota Nagpur), who share similarities with the Juang in type, language, and tattoos (three lines above the nose, etc.), are partially civilized; some engage in farming using a plow and possess a basic social structure, etc. The other Kols are mostly more advanced. This includes the Santals or Sonthals (Fig. 128) from Western Bengal, Northern Orissa, and Bhagalpur, who refer to themselves as “Hor”; the Munda or Horo-hu from Chota Nagpur; the Ho or Lurka-Kols from Singbhum (Bengal); and finally, the Bhumij from Western Bengal, who are all likely parts of the same larger group that was previously much more populous.[456] The Kols in the northwest provinces (height 1 minute. 64; ceph. ind. 73.2, according to Risley and Crooke) are closely related to the groups I've just mentioned. The Savaras or Saoras, found across Orissa, Chota Nagpur, Western Bengal, and as far as the province of Madras, speak a language that Cunningham, Cust, and Fr. Müller categorize as Kolarian, while Dalton states it belongs correctly to the Dravidian family. Physically, they are similar to the Malé Dravidians and show a reasonably pure example of the platyrhinian sub-race of the Melano-Indians.[457] The same[Pg 410] uncertainty exists regarding the linguistic relationships of the Bhils from Central India and the northwest provinces.

b. Dravidians properly so called.—They may be divided into two groups, those of the north and those of the south.

b. Dravidians as they are commonly recognized.—They can be split into two groups: those from the north and those from the south.

Dravidians of the North.—These are in the first place the Malé (plural Maler) or Asal Paharia of the Rajmahal hills (Bengal), probably one of the sections of the Savara people (see above);[458] the Oraons (523,000 in 1891), several tribes of which are also found in the north-west of Chota Nagpur; lastly, the Gonds (three millions) of the Mahadeo mountains and part of the central provinces situated farther south, between the rivers Indravati and Seleru, tributaries of the Godavari. To the east of the Gonds dwell the Khands and the Khonds (600,000), who have spread into Orissa.

Dravidians of the North.—First, we have the Malé (plural Maler) or Asal Paharia from the Rajmahal hills in Bengal, likely one of the groups within the Savara people (see above);[458] the Oraons (523,000 in 1891), with several tribes also located in the northwest of Chota Nagpur; and finally, the Gonds (three million) from the Mahadeo mountains and parts of the central provinces further south, between the Indravati and Seleru rivers, which are tributaries of the Godavari. To the east of the Gonds live the Khands and the Khonds (600,000), who have spread into Orissa.

All these tribes have scarcely got beyond the stage of hunters or primitive husbandmen, who set their forests on fire in order to sow among the ashes. In this respect the Korwa of Sarguja, of Jashpur (Bengal), and Mirzapur (north-west province) resemble them, if they are not even more uncivilised. They are unacquainted with clothes of any kind, obtain fire by sawing one piece of wood with another, and have an animistic religion much less developed than that of the Gonds or Oraons.[459]

All these tribes have barely moved beyond the level of hunters or basic farmers, who burn their forests to plant crops in the ashes. In this way, the Korwa of Sarguja, Jashpur (Bengal), and Mirzapur (north-west province) are similar to them, if not even less advanced. They don’t wear any clothes, make fire by rubbing two pieces of wood together, and have a much less developed animistic religion compared to the Gonds or Oraons.[459]

Dravidians of the South.—To the south of the Godavari dwell five black, half-civilised peoples, having a particular form of writing, professing Brahmanism, and showing an intermingling of two varieties of the Melano-Indian race. Side by side with them, and among them, are found a number of small[Pg 411] tribes more or less uncivilised and animistic, having somatic types of considerable variety.

Dravidians of the South.—To the south of the Godavari live five dark-skinned, semi-civilized groups who have their own unique writing system, practice Brahmanism, and represent a blend of two types of the Melano-Indian race. Alongside them and among them, there are several small[Pg 411] tribes that are more or less uncivilized and practice animism, displaying a range of physical types.

The five half-civilised Dravidian peoples are the Telingas or Telugus of the Coromandel coast, of Nizam and Jarpur (some twenty millions); the Kanaras of the Mysore table-land (about ten millions); the Malayalim of the Malabar coast (nearly six millions); the Tulus of Mangalore (350,000); lastly, the Tamils, occupying the rest of Southern India and the north of Ceylon (about fifteen millions).

The five semi-civilized Dravidian groups are the Telingas or Telugus from the Coromandel coast, around Nizam and Jarpur (about twenty million); the Kanaras from the Mysore plateau (about ten million); the Malayalim from the Malabar coast (nearly six million); the Tulus from Mangalore (350,000); and finally, the Tamils, who inhabit the rest of Southern India and northern Ceylon (about fifteen million).

As to the uncivilised tribes, some occupy the Anamalli hills (the Kader, the Madavars), others inhabit Travancore (Pulaya, Paligars, Tir, Shanar, etc.). Also to be noted are the Choligha, at the foot of the Mysore hills, the Paniyans (Fig. 126) of Vaïnad or Vinad (Malabar coast), very short (1 m. 57), dolichocephalic (ceph. ind. on the liv. sub. 74), and very platyrhine (nas. ind. 95.1); lastly, the very interesting tribes of the Nilgiri hills; the Irulas (Fig. 127) and, above these, the Kurumbas (Fig. 8), on the southern and northern slopes; the Badagas, the Kotas, and the Todas on the plateau crowning these heights.[460]

As for the uncivilized tribes, some live in the Anamalli hills (the Kader and the Madavars), while others are found in Travancore (Pulaya, Paligars, Tir, Shanar, etc.). It's also important to mention the Choligha at the base of the Mysore hills, the Paniyans (Fig. 126) from Vaïnad or Vinad (Malabar coast), who are very short (1 min 57 sec), dolichocephalic (ceph. ind. on the liv. sub. 74), and very platyrhine (nas. ind. 95.1); lastly, the fascinating tribes of the Nilgiri hills: the Irulas (Fig. 127) and, higher up, the Kurumbas (Fig. 8), located on the southern and northern slopes; the Badagas, the Kotas, and the Todas atop the plateau that crowns these heights.[460]

The Kurumbas and the Irulas (58,503 in 1891) are of short stature (1 m. 58 and 1 m. 60), dolichocephalic (ceph. ind. on the liv. sub. 75.8), and platyrhine (nas. ind. 87 and 85). They are the half-savage tribes of the jungles.

The Kurumbas and the Irulas (58,503 in 1891) are short, measuring around 1.58m and 1.60m. They have long heads (cephalic index on the living subjects 75.8) and flat noses (nasal index 87 and 85). They are semi-wild tribes from the jungles.

As to the tribes of the plateau, they are distinguished according to their occupation and type. The Badagas (29,613 in 1891) are husbandmen, the Kotas (1,201) are artisans, and the Todas (Figs. 7, 129, and 130) shepherds. The two former approximate to the other Dravidians in type; they are of average height (1 m. 64 and 1 m. 63), hyper-dolichocephalic (ceph. ind. on the liv. sub. 71.7 and 74.1), and mesorhine (nas. ind. 75.6). But the Todas present a particular type:[Pg 412] high stature (1 m. 70), associated with dolichocephaly (ceph. ind. on the liv. sub. 73.1) and mesorhiny (nas. ind. 74.9), somewhat light tint of skin, and the pilous system very developed (Figs. 129 and 130). In short, they appear to belong to the Indo-Afghan race, with perhaps an admixture of the Assyroid race. Besides, a number of customs and manners (group marriage, aversion to milk, rude polytheism, etc.) differentiate them from the other populations of India. They are a very small tribe, which, however, increases from year to year (693 individuals in 1871, 736 in 1891).

As for the tribes of the plateau, they are categorized based on their occupation and characteristics. The Badagas (29,613 in 1891) are farmers, the Kotas (1,201) are craftsmen, and the Todas (Figs. 7, 129, and 130) are shepherds. The first two are similar to other Dravidian groups in appearance; they have average heights (around 1.64 m and 1.63 m), are hyper-dolichocephalic (ceph. ind. on the liv. sub. 71.7 and 74.1), and are mesorhine (nas. ind. 75.6). However, the Todas have a distinct appearance: they are tall (about 1.70 m), with dolichocephaly (ceph. ind. on the liv. sub. 73.1) and mesorhiny (nas. ind. 74.9), a somewhat lighter skin tone, and a well-developed hair system (Figs. 129 and 130). In summary, they seem to belong to the Indo-Afghan race, possibly with some mixture from the Assyroid race. Additionally, several customs and practices (like group marriage, a dislike for milk, and a primitive form of polytheism) set them apart from other populations in India. They are a small tribe that continues to grow each year, with 693 individuals in 1871 and 736 in 1891.

Old Toda Man, Nilgiri Hills

FIG. 129.—An old Toda man of Nilgiri hills.
(Phot. Thurston.)

FIG. 129.—An elderly Toda man from the Nilgiri hills.
(Phot. Thurston.)

2. The Aryans of India form the greatest portion of the population to the north of the Nerbada and Mahanadi; they speak different dialects of the neo-Hindu language (ancient Bracha language, branch of the Prakrit or corrupt vulgar Sanscrit). The following are the principal dialects: the[Pg 413] Hindi, Bengali, Punjabi, Kashmiri, Guzrati, and Sindi. We distinguish several ethnic groups by these dialects, or the generic names designating aggregations of castes: Brahmans, Rajputs (10 12 millions), Jats and Gujars (9 millions altogether), Katis (42,000); or by their religion, as the Sikhs, renowned for their warlike disposition, and recognising, at least theoretically, no castes.[461]

2. The Aryans of India make up the largest part of the population to the north of the Nerbada and Mahanadi rivers; they speak various dialects of the neo-Hindu language (the ancient Bracha language, a branch of Prakrit or corrupted vulgar Sanskrit). The main dialects are: Hindi, Bengali, Punjabi, Kashmiri, Gujarati, and Sindhi. We identify several ethnic groups through these dialects or the general names designating groups of castes: Brahmans, Rajputs (10 1/2 million), Jats and Gujars (9 million in total), Katis (42,000); or by their religion, such as the Sikhs, known for their martial nature, who recognize, at least in theory, no castes.[461]

The root-stock of all these populations is formed by the Indo-Afghan race. This race we find again in almost a pure state among the Sikhs (stature 1 m. 71, ceph. ind. in the liv. sub. 72.7, nas. ind. on the liv. sub. 68.8), and a little weakened among the Punjabi (height, 1 m. 68, ceph. ind. 74.9, nas. ind. 70.2). Among the Hindus of Behar, of the north-west provinces and Oudh, among the Mahratis between the river Tapti and Goa, the type is still more changed in consequence of interminglings with the Dravidians; the stature becomes shorter (1 m. 63 and 1 m. 64), the head rounder (ceph. ind. 75.7), the nose broader (nas. ind. 80.5 and 74), the complexion darker, etc.[462] With the Indo-Aryans are grouped, according to their type and language, the Kafirs or Siahposh of Kafiristan, and the Dardi or Dardu, occupying the countries situated more to the east, between the Pamirs on the north, Kashmir on the south, Kafiristan to the west, and Baltistan to the east—that is to say, Chitral, Dardistan (Yassin, Hunza, Nagar), Gilghit, Chilas, Kohistan. The Dardis are divided into four castes or tribes (Biddulph); that of the Chins, forming the majority of the people, is distinguished by its short stature and its dark complexion, and recalls the Hindus of the north-west provinces (Ujfalvy); while another tribe, called Yeshkhun, speaks a language which, according to Biddulph, has affinities with the Turkish languages, and, according to Leitner, is a [Pg 415] non-Aryan agglutinative language presenting analogies with Dravidian dialects. The Yeshkhuns inhabit Dardistan. Biddulph affirms that one may often encounter among them individuals with light and especially red hair. The forty-four Yeshkhuns and Chins measured by Ujfalvy were below the average height (1 m. 61), dolichocephalic (ceph. ind. 75.8), with black wavy hair, fine shaped nose, and rather dark skin; while nineteen “Turki-Dardi” of Hunza-Nagar and Yassin measured by Risley and Capus give a stature above the average (1 m. 69), and the cephalic index almost mesocephalic (77). They are thus closely allied to the Chitrali (stature 1 m. 67, ceph. ind. 76.9 from six subjects only, measured by Risley).[463] Most of the Dardu tribes are endogamous; polygamy is general. In certain tribes there are to be found survivals of polyandry and of the matriarchate.[464]

The foundation of all these populations comes from the Indo-Afghan race. This race is mostly preserved in the Sikhs (height 1 minute. 71, ceph. ind. in the liv. sub. 72.7, nas. ind. on the liv. sub. 68.8), and slightly diluted among the Punjabis (height 1 minute. 68, ceph. ind. 74.9, nas. ind. 70.2). Among the Hindus of Behar, in the north-west provinces and Oudh, and among the Mahratis between the Tapti River and Goa, the type has changed even more due to mixing with the Dravidians; average height decreases (1 min. 63 and 1 min. 64), the head becomes rounder (ceph. ind. 75.7), the nose wider (nas. ind. 80.5 and 74), and the skin darker, etc.[462] The Indo-Aryans are grouped with the Kafirs or Siahposh of Kafiristan, and the Dardi or Dardu, who live in the eastern regions between the Pamirs to the north, Kashmir to the south, Kafiristan to the west, and Baltistan to the east—specifically in Chitral, Dardistan (Yassin, Hunza, Nagar), Gilgit, Chilas, and Kohistan. The Dardis are divided into four castes or tribes (Biddulph); the Chins, which make up the majority, are noted for their short stature and dark complexion, resembling the Hindus of the north-west provinces (Ujfalvy); another tribe, called Yeshkhun, speaks a language that Biddulph claims is related to Turkish languages, and according to Leitner, is a[Pg 415] non-Aryan agglutinative language with similarities to Dravidian dialects. The Yeshkhuns live in Dardistan. Biddulph notes that individuals with lighter and especially red hair are often found among them. The forty-four Yeshkhuns and Chins measured by Ujfalvy were below the average height (1 minute. 61), dolichocephalic (ceph. ind. 75.8), with black wavy hair, well-defined noses, and relatively dark skin; while nineteen “Turki-Dardi” from Hunza-Nagar and Yassin measured by Risley and Capus had above-average height (1 minute. 69), and a cephalic index that was nearly mesocephalic (77). They are therefore closely related to the Chitrali (height 1 minute. 67, ceph. ind. 76.9 based on measurements from only six subjects by Risley).[463] Most of the Dardu tribes practice endogamy; polygamy is common. In some tribes, remnants of polyandry and matriarchal systems can still be found.[464]

Group of Todas, Nilgiri Hills

FIG. 130.—Group of Todas of Nilgiri Hills.
(Phot. lent by Deyrolle.)

FIG. 130.—Group of Todas from the Nilgiri Hills.
(Photo provided by Deyrolle.)

The Baltis, neighbours of the Dardus on the east, speaking a Thibetan dialect, and the Pakhpuluk of the other side of the Kara-Korum (upper valley of the Karakash), speaking a Turkish tongue (Forsyth), are a mixture of Indo-Aryan and Turkish races. On the other hand, in the Himalayan region, the Nepalese (the Kulu-Lahuli and Paharias on the west, the Khas, the Mangars and other Gurkhas, Fig. 125, on the east), speaking a neo-Hindu language, have sprung from the intermingling of Indo-Afghan and Mongolic races (by the Thibetans). There are in India other peoples among whom linguistic or somatological affinities with the Indo-Aryans are found. Such are the Nairs of Malabar, a conglomerate of various castes and tribes, well known by their marriage customs (p. 232), many of these tribes forming a[Pg 416] contrast with the Dravidians by their fine type, their light complexion, their thin and prominent nose.[465]

The Baltis, who live east of the Dardus and speak a Tibetan dialect, along with the Pakhpuluk from across the Kara-Korum (upper valley of the Karakash), who speak a Turkish language (Forsyth), are a mix of Indo-Aryan and Turkish ethnic groups. In the Himalayan region, the Nepalese (including the Kulu-Lahuli and Paharias to the west, and the Khas, Mangars, and other Gurkhas, Fig. 125, to the east), who speak a neo-Hindu language, have emerged from the blending of Indo-Afghan and Mongolic races (influenced by the Tibetans). In India, there are other groups that share linguistic or physical traits with the Indo-Aryans. These include the Nairs of Malabar, a mix of various castes and tribes, noted for their marriage customs (p. 232), many of which contrast with the Dravidians due to their distinct appearances, including a more refined physique, lighter skin, and thinner, more prominent noses.[465]

Singhalese of Candy, Ceylon

FIG. 131.—Singhalese of Candy, Ceylon,
twenty-seven years old; ceph. ind. 72.4.
(Phot. Delisle.)

FInstagram. 131.—Singhalese of Kandy, Sri Lanka,
twenty-seven years old; ceph. ind. 72.4.
(Phot. Delisle.)

Singhalese, Profile View

FIG. 132.—Same subject as Fig. 131, seen in profile.
(Phot. Delisle.)

FIG. 132.—Same subject as Fig. 131, viewed from the side.
(Phot. Delisle.)

The Singhalese (Figs. 131 and 132) of the south of Ceylon speak a fundamentally Aryan language. They have certain[Pg 417] traits in common with the Indo-Afghans and the Assyroids, but their type has been affected by the neighbourhood of a small mysterious tribe, that of the Veddahs (Figs. 5, 6, and 133), driven back into the mountains of the south-west of Ceylon. This is the remnant of a very primitive population whose physical type approximates nearest to the platyrhine variety of the Dravidian race, at the same time presenting certain peculiarities. The Veddahs are monogamous; they[Pg 418] live in caves or under shelters of boughs (p. 160), hiding themselves even from the Singhalese.[466]

The Singhalese (Figs. 131 and 132) in the south of Ceylon speak a fundamentally Aryan language. They share some traits with the Indo-Afghans and Assyroids, but their characteristics have been influenced by a small mysterious tribe, the Veddahs (Figs. 5, 6, and 133), who have retreated into the mountains of southwest Ceylon. This group is a remnant of a very primitive population whose physical features most closely resemble the platyrhine variety of the Dravidian race, while also exhibiting certain distinct characteristics. The Veddahs practice monogamy; they[Pg 418] live in caves or under shelters made of branches (p. 160), avoiding contact even with the Singhalese.[466]

Singhalese of Candy, Ceylon

FIG. 133.—Tutti, Veddah woman of the village of Kolonggala, Ceylon;
twenty-eight years old, height 1 m. 39.
(Phot. Brothers Sarasin.)

FIG. 133.—Tutti, a Veddah woman from the village of Kolonggala, Ceylon;
twenty-eight years old, height 1 minute. 39.
(Phot. Brothers Sarasin.)

VI. PEOPLES OF ANTERIOR ASIA.—The multitude of peoples, tribes, castes, colonies, and religious brotherhoods of Iran, Arabia, Syria, and Asia Minor, this crossing-place of ethnic migrations, are chiefly composed in various degrees of the three races—Indo-Afghan, Assyroid, and Arab, with the addition of some other foreign races, Turkish, Negro, Adriatic, Mongolic, etc.

VI. PPEOPLE OF AINTERIOR ASIA.—The diverse groups, tribes, social classes, settlements, and religious communities of Iran, Arabia, Syria, and Asia Minor, which serve as a crossroads for ethnic migrations, are primarily made up, to varying extents, of the three races—Indo-Afghan, Assyroid, and Arab—along with some other foreign races such as Turkish, Black, Adriatic, Mongolic, and others.

From the linguistic point of view, this multitude may perhaps be reduced to two great groups: the Eranians or Iranians and[Pg 419] the Semites, if we exclude some peoples whose linguistic affinities have not yet been established.

From a linguistic perspective, this large number can likely be categorized into two main groups: the Eranians or Iranians and[Pg 419] the Semites, excluding some peoples whose language relationships have not yet been determined.

1. The Iranians or Eranians occupy the Iranian plateau and the adjoining regions, especially to the east. They speak different languages of the Eranian branch of the Aryan linguistic family. In physical composition the main characters are supplied by the Assyroid race (Fig. 22) with admixture of Turkish elements in Persia and Turkey, Indo-Afghan elements in Afghanistan, and Arab and Negroid elements in the south of Persia and Baluchistan.

1. The Iranians or Eranians live on the Iranian plateau and in the nearby areas, especially to the east. They speak various languages from the Eranian branch of the Aryan language family. In terms of physical characteristics, the primary traits come from the Assyroid race (Fig. 22), with some Turkish influences in Persia and Turkey, Indo-Afghan influences in Afghanistan, and Arab and Negroid influences in the southern parts of Persia and Baluchistan.

Among Iranian peoples the first place, as regards number and the part played in history, belongs to the Persians. They may be divided into three geographical groups. If within the approximate limits of Persia of the present day a line be drawn running from Astrabad to Yezd and thence towards Kerman, we shall have on the east the habitat of the Tajiks, on the west that of the Hajemis (between Teheran and Ispahan[467]), and that of the Parsis or Pharsis (between Ispahan and the Persian Gulf). The Tajiks, moreover, spread beyond the frontiers of Persia into Western Afghanistan, the north-west of Baluchistan, Afghan Turkestan and Russian Turkestan, as far as the Pamirs (Galcha), and perhaps even beyond. In fact, the Polu and other “Turanians” of the northern slope of the Kuen Lun, while speaking a Turkish language, bear a physical resemblance to the Tajiks (Prjevalsky). Like the Sartes, settled inhabitants of Russian Turkestan, and the Tats of the south-west shore of the Caspian, and the Aderbaijani of the Caucasus, they are Persians more or less crossed with Turks, whose language they speak.

Among the Iranian peoples, the largest group in terms of population and historical significance is the Persians. They can be divided into three geographical groups. If you draw a line from Astrabad to Yezd and then toward Kerman, you will find the Tajiks living to the east, the Hajemis (located between Tehran and Isfahan[467]) to the west, and the Parsis or Pharsis (between Isfahan and the Persian Gulf) as well. Additionally, the Tajiks extend beyond Persia's borders into Western Afghanistan, the northwest region of Baluchistan, Afghan Turkestan, and Russian Turkestan, reaching as far as the Pamirs (Galcha), possibly even further. In fact, the Polu and other "Turanians" living on the northern slopes of the Kuen Lun, while speaking a Turkish language, share a physical resemblance to the Tajiks (Prjevalsky). Similarly, the Sartes, settled communities in Russian Turkestan, the Tats of the southwest coast of the Caspian, and the Azerbaijanis of the Caucasus are Persians who have varying degrees of intermixing with Turks, whose language they also speak.

The Tajiks are brachycephalic (ceph. ind. 84.9), above the average height (1 m. 69), and show traces of intermixture with the Turkish race,[468] while the Hajemis (Fig. 22), and in[Pg 420] some measure the Parsis, who are dolichocephalic (77.9), and of average height (1 m. 65), are of the Assyroid or Indo-Afghan type.

The Tajiks have a broad skull shape (ceph. ind. 84.9), are taller than average (1 minute. 69), and show signs of mixing with the Turkish people,[468] while the Hajemis (Fig. 22), and to some extent the Parsis, who have a long skull shape (77.9) and are of average height (1 min. 65), are of the Assyroid or Indo-Afghan type.

The Parsis are not very numerous in Persia. Most of them emigrated into India after the destruction of the empire of the Sassanides (in 634); they form there an important and very rich community (89,900 individuals in 1891), having still preserved their ancient Zoroastrian religion. This community, if chiefly composed of bankers, has also many men of letters. The education of women in it is specially looked after, the first woman to obtain the diploma of Doctor in Medicine in India being a Parsi.[469] Physically they are of the mixed Indo-Assyroid type, the head sub-brachycephalic (ceph. ind. 82, according to Ujfalvy).

The Parsis are not very numerous in Persia. Most of them moved to India after the fall of the Sassanid Empire (in 634); they make up an important and very wealthy community there (89,900 individuals in 1891), having preserved their ancient Zoroastrian religion. This community, while primarily made up of bankers, also includes many intellectuals. The education of women is particularly emphasized, with the first woman to earn a Doctor of Medicine degree in India being a Parsi.[469] Physically, they are of a mixed Indo-Assyroid type, with a sub-brachycephalic head (ceph. ind. 82, according to Ujfalvy).

After the Persians come the Pathan Afghans[470] or Pashtu. They form the agricultural population of Afghanistan, and are divided into Duranis (in the west and south of the country), Ghilzis (in the east), and into several other less important tribes: the Swatis, the Khostis, the Waziris, the Kakars, etc. The Afghans of India and the Indo-Afghan frontier are divided into several tribes, of which the principal ones are the Afridis near the Khyber pass and the Yusafzais near Peshawar.[471]

After the Persians, the Pathan Afghans[470] or Pashtu come next. They make up the farming population of Afghanistan and are divided into Duranis (in the west and south of the country), Ghilzis (in the east), and several other smaller tribes: the Swatis, the Khostis, the Waziris, the Kakars, and others. The Afghans in India and along the Indo-Afghan border are split into several tribes, with the main ones being the Afridis near the Khyber Pass and the Yusafzais near Peshawar.[471]

The Baluchis or Biloch of Baluchistan and Western India speak an Eranian dialect akin to Persian; physically they belong to the Indo-Afghan race, but mixed with the Arabs on the south and the Jats and the Hindus on the east, with the Turks[Pg 421] on the north and the Negroes on the south-west. The Mekrani of the coast of Baluchistan and partly of Persia are a mixture of Indo-Afghan, Assyroid, and Negro races (Fig. 134). The Rinds (“Braves”) of the same coast of Mekran, who claim to be pure Baluchis, are only Arabs of the Kahtan tribe.[472] The nomadic Brahuis of Eastern Baluchistan, especially those of the environs of Kelat, resemble the Iranians. It is said that their language has some affinities with the Dravidian dialect. In reality, the ethnic place of this population, predominant in Baluchistan, is yet to be determined.

The Baluchis or Biloch of Baluchistan and Western India speak an Eranian dialect similar to Persian; they physically belong to the Indo-Afghan race but are mixed with Arabs in the south, Jats and Hindus in the east, Turks[Pg 421] in the north, and Negroes in the southwest. The Mekrani people from the coast of Baluchistan and parts of Persia are a mix of Indo-Afghan, Assyroid, and Negro races (Fig. 134). The Rinds (“Braves”) from the same coast of Mekran, who claim to be pure Baluchis, are actually Arabs from the Kahtan tribe.[472] The nomadic Brahuis of Eastern Baluchistan, particularly those around Kelat, resemble Iranians. It's said their language has some connections to Dravidian dialects. In reality, the ethnic classification of this population, which is predominant in Baluchistan, is still to be determined.

Singhalese of Candy, Ceylon

FIG. 134.—Natives of Mekran (Baluchistan):
on the right, Afghan type; on the left, the same with Negro intermixture.
(Phot. Lapicque.)

FInstagram. 134.—People from Mekran (Baluchistan):
on the right, Afghan type; on the left, the same with some African ancestry.
(Phot. Lapicque.)

With the Iranian group it is customary to connect, especially from linguistic considerations, the Kurds, the Armenians, and the Ossets (p. 356). The first-mentioned people, influenced here and there by interminglings with the Turks,[Pg 422] physically resemble the Hajemis: sub-dolichocephalic head, 78.5 when it is not deformed (p. 176), height above the average (1 m. 68), aquiline nose, etc. They occupy in a more or less compact mass the border-lands between Persia and Asia Minor; but they are found in isolated groups from the Turkmenian steppes (to the north of Persia) to the centre of Asia Minor (to the north-west of Lake Túz-gól). As to the Armenians or Hai, they are found in a compact body only around Lake Van and Mount Ararat, the rest being scattered over all the towns of the south-west of Asia, the Caucasus, the south of Russia, and even Galicia and Transylvania. It is a very mixed and heterogeneous ethnic group as regards physical type. The stature varies from 1 m. 63 to 1 m. 69 according to different localities, but the cephalic index is nearly uniformly brachycephalic (85 to 87). The predominant features are however formed by the Indo-Afghan, Assyroid, and perhaps Turkish and Adriatic races. Their language differs appreciably from the other Eranian tongues.[473]

With the Iranian group, it’s common to connect the Kurds, Armenians, and Ossets, especially from a linguistic standpoint (p. 356). The Kurds, influenced here and there by intermingling with the Turks, physically resemble the Hajemis: they generally have a sub-dolichocephalic head, measuring 78.5 when not deformed (p. 176), above-average height (1 m. 68), and an aquiline nose, among other features. They occupy more or less compact areas along the border between Persia and Asia Minor, but they can also be found in isolated groups from the Turkmenian steppes (to the north of Persia) to central Asia Minor (to the northwest of Lake Túz-gól). As for the Armenians or Hai, they exist in a compact population only around Lake Van and Mount Ararat; the rest are spread across towns in southwestern Asia, the Caucasus, southern Russia, and even Galicia and Transylvania. This group is very mixed and diverse in terms of physical characteristics. Heights range from 1 m. 63 to 1 m. 69 in different areas, but the cephalic index is almost consistently brachycephalic (85 to 87). The dominant features, however, are influenced by Indo-Afghan, Assyroid, and possibly Turkish and Adriatic races. Their language is quite different from the other Eranian languages.[473]

2. The Semite linguistic group is represented by Arabs, Syrians, and Jews.

2. The Semite linguistic group includes Arabs, Syrians, and Jews.

The Arabs occupy, besides Arabia, a portion of Mesopotamia, the shores of the Red Sea, the eastern coast of the Persian Gulf, and the north of Africa. The pure type, characterised by dolichocephaly (ceph. ind. 70), prominence of the occiput, elongated face, aquiline nose, slim body, etc., is still preserved in the south of Arabia among the Ariba Arabs, among the mountaineers of Hadramaout and Yemen (country of the ancient Himyarites or Sabeans), and among the Bedouins,[Pg 423] descendants of the Ismaelites of the interior of Central and Northern Arabia; but the tribes which have drawn nearer the coast or the valleys of Mesopotamia show signs of interminglings with populations of a predominant Assyroid or Turkish type, without taking into account, as at Haza and on the coast of Yemen, the Negro and Ethiopic influence. Typical nomads, having in the religion founded by Mahomet a national bond of union, the Arabs make their influence widely felt over the world. Traces of the Arab type are met with not only over the whole of Northern Africa (see p. 432), but also in Asia Minor, the Caucasus, Western Persia, in India; while numerous traces of the Arab language[474] and civilisation are found in Europe (Malta, Spain), in China, Central Asia, and in the Asiatic Archipelago. The Melkits and the Wahabits are two religious sects of Arabs.

The Arabs inhabit not only Arabia but also parts of Mesopotamia, the shores of the Red Sea, the eastern coast of the Persian Gulf, and northern Africa. The pure type, characterized by a long head (ceph. ind. 70), a prominent back of the head, an elongated face, an aquiline nose, a slim body, and so on, still exists in southern Arabia among the Ariba Arabs, in the mountain regions of Hadramout and Yemen (the land of the ancient Himyarites or Sabeans), and among the Bedouins,[Pg 423] descendants of the Ismaelites from the interior of Central and Northern Arabia. However, the tribes that have moved closer to the coast or the valleys of Mesopotamia exhibit signs of mixing with populations of a primarily Assyroid or Turkish background, not to mention the influence of Negro and Ethiopian ancestry in areas like Haza and the coast of Yemen. As typical nomads, united by the religion founded by Mohammed, the Arabs exert a significant influence around the world. Traces of the Arab type can be found not just across all of Northern Africa (see p. 432), but also in Asia Minor, the Caucasus, Western Persia, and India; while numerous traces of the Arab language[474] and civilization are present in Europe (Malta, Spain), China, Central Asia, and the Asiatic Archipelago. The Melkits and the Wahabits are two religious sects among the Arabs.

The people of Syria and Palestine, known by the name of Syrians in the towns, of Kufar in the country, is the product of the interminglings of Arabs with descendants of Phœnicians and with Jews. It also forms the basis of numerous ethnic groups connected solely by religion, and of constituent elements often very heterogeneous: such are the Maronites of Western Lebanon, the Nestorians, the Druzes of Hermon and Djebel Hauran (Kurdish elements), among whom woman occupies a higher position than among other Asiatics; the Metouali (Shiah sect) of Tyre; the Nazareans or Ansarieh, who perhaps represent, along with the Takhtaji (Gypsy elements), the Kizilbashes and the Yezides or Yezdi (Kurdish elements) of Mesopotamia, the remains of the primitive population of Asia Minor, akin, according to Luschan, to the Armenians.[475]

The people of Syria and Palestine, referred to as Syrians in towns and Kufar in the countryside, are the result of a mix of Arabs, descendants of Phoenicians, and Jews. This mix also leads to various ethnic groups connected mainly by religion, made up of quite diverse components. These include the Maronites of Western Lebanon, the Nestorians, and the Druzes from Hermon and Djebel Hauran (who have Kurdish roots), among whom women hold a higher status than in other Asian cultures. There are also the Metouali (Shiah sect) of Tyre and the Nazareans or Ansarieh, who might represent, along with the Takhtaji (Gypsy elements), the Kizilbashes and the Yezides or Yezdi (Kurdish elements) from Mesopotamia, remnants of the original population of Asia Minor, which Luschan suggests is related to the Armenians.[475]

The Jews are not very numerous (250,000) in Asia, and are found scattered in small groups throughout the world.[Pg 424] Even in the country which was formerly a Jewish State, Palestine, they scarcely exceed 75,000 in number at the present day. They are found in compact groups only in the neighbourhood of Damascus, at Jerusalem, and at the foot of the mountain-chain of Safed.

The Jews are not very numerous (250,000) in Asia and are spread out in small groups across the globe.[Pg 424] Even in the area that used to be a Jewish State, Palestine, they number fewer than 75,000 today. They are mostly found in concentrated groups only around Damascus, in Jerusalem, and at the base of the Safed mountain range.

It is well known that to-day the Jews are scattered over the whole earth. Their total number is estimated at eight millions, of which the half is in Russia and Rumania, a third in Germany and Austria, and a sixth in the rest of the world, even as far as Australia. The great majority of Jews are unacquainted with Hebrew, which is a dead language; they speak, according to the country they inhabit, particular kinds of jargon, the most common of which is the Judeo-German. Physically the Jews present two different types, one of which approximates to the Arab race (Fig. 21), the other to the Assyroid. Sometimes these types are modified by the addition of elements of the populations in the midst of which they dwell;[476] but, even in these cases, many traits, such as the convex nose, vivacity of eye, frequency of erythrism (p. 50), frizzy hair, thick under lip, inferiority of the thoracic perimeter, etc., show a remarkable persistence. The Arab type is common among the Spanish Jews who practise the Sefardi rite, among the native Jews of the Caucasus, very brachycephalic however (85.5 ceph. ind., according to Erckert and Chantre),[477] and among those of Palestine, while the Assyroid type dominates among the Jews of Asia Minor, Bosnia, and Germany. These last, like the Jews of Slav countries, practise the Askenazi rite. The Jews of[Pg 425] Bosnia, called Spaniols, coming from Spain by Constantinople, are under average height (1 m. 63) and mesocephalic (ceph. ind. 80.1, Gluck); those of Galicia, Western Russia, and Russian Poland are shorter (1 m. 61 and 62) and sub-brachycephalic (ceph. ind. 82); those of England are of the same stature (1 m. 62), but mesocephalic (ceph. ind. 80).[478]

It is well known that today the Jews are spread across the entire world. Their total population is estimated to be about eight million, with half residing in Russia and Romania, a third in Germany and Austria, and a sixth scattered throughout the rest of the world, even as far as Australia. The vast majority of Jews do not know Hebrew, which is a dead language; they speak different dialects depending on the country they live in, with the most common being Judeo-German. Physically, Jews display two distinct types: one resembling the Arab race (Fig. 21), and the other resembling the Assyroid. Sometimes these types are influenced by genetic elements from the populations around them;[476] but even in such cases, many features, such as a curved nose, bright eyes, cases of albinism (p. 50), curly hair, full lower lip, and smaller chest circumference, show notable consistency. The Arab type is commonly seen among the Spanish Jews who follow the Sefardi tradition, among the indigenous Jews of the Caucasus, who are very brachycephalic (85.5 cranial index, according to Erckert and Chantre),[477] and those from Palestine, while the Assyroid type is predominant among the Jews of Asia Minor, Bosnia, and Germany. These latter Jews, like those from Slavic countries, follow the Askenazi tradition. The Jews of[Pg 425] Bosnia, known as Spaniols, who migrated from Spain via Constantinople, are shorter than average (1 min. 63) and have a mesocephalic head shape (cranial index 80.1, Gluck); those from Galicia, Western Russia, and Russian Poland are even shorter (1 minute. 61 and 62) and sub-brachycephalic (cranial index 82); while those from England have a similar height (1 min. 62), but are mesocephalic (cranial index 80).[478]

Along with the Jews we must put another people, also dispersed over nearly the whole earth, and of Asiatic origin, probably from India, to judge by the affinities of its language with the Hindu dialects—the Gypsies. They are found in India (Banjars, Nats, etc.), Persia and Russian Turkestan (Luli, Mazang, Kara-Luli, etc.), in Asia Minor (where are also found their congeners, the Yuruks); then in Syria (Chingane), in Egypt (Phagari, Nuri, etc.), and all over Europe, with the exception, it is said, of Sweden and Norway; they are found in considerable numbers in Rumania (200,000), Turkey, Hungary, and the south-west of Russia. In all they number nearly a million. The pure so-called “Black Gypsies” are of the Indo-Afghan race (stature 1 m. 72, ceph. ind. on the liv. sub. 76.8), but very often they have intermingled with the populations in the midst of which they dwell.[479]

Along with the Jews, we should mention another group of people, also spread across nearly the entire globe and of Asian descent, likely originating from India, based on the similarities of their language to Hindu dialects—the Gypsies. They can be found in India (Banjars, Nats, etc.), Persia, and Russian Turkestan (Luli, Mazang, Kara-Luli, etc.), in Asia Minor (where their relatives, the Yuruks, are also located); then in Syria (Chingane), in Egypt (Phagari, Nuri, etc.), and throughout Europe, except reportedly for Sweden and Norway; they are found in significant numbers in Romania (200,000), Turkey, Hungary, and southwestern Russia. Altogether, they number nearly a million. The so-called “Black Gypsies” are of Indo-Afghan descent (height 1 min. 72, ceph. ind. on the liv. sub. 76.8), but very often they have mixed with the populations among whom they live.[479]


CHAPTER XI.

RACES AND PEOPLES OF AFRICA.

African Races and Peoples.

Ancient Inhabitants of Africa—Succession of races on the “dark continent”—PRESENT INHABITANTS OF AFRICAI. Arabo-Berber or Semito-Hamite Group: Populations of Mediterranean Africa and Egypt—II. Ethiopian or Kushito-Hamite Group: Bejas, Gallas, Abyssinians, etc.—III. Fulah-Zandeh Group: The Zandeh, Masai, Niam-Niam populations of the Ubangi-Shari, etc., Fulbé or Fulahs—IV. Nigritian Group: Nilotic Negroes or Negroes of eastern Sudan—Negroes of central Sudan—Negroes of western Sudan and the Senegal—Negroes of the coast or Guinean Negroes, Kru, Agni, Tshi, Vei, Yoruba, etc.—V. Negrillo Group: Differences of the Pygmies and the Bushmen—VI. Bantu Group: Western Bantus of French, German, Portuguese, and Belgian equatorial Africa—Eastern Bantus of German, English, and Portuguese equatorial Africa—Southern Bantus: Zulus, etc.—VII. Hottentot-Bushman Group: The Namans and the Sans—VIII. Populations of Madagascar: Hovas, Malagasi, Sakalavas.

Ancient Inhabitants of Africa—Successions of races on the “dark continent”—PRESENT IINHABITANTS OF AFRICAI. Arabo-Berber or Semito-Hamite Group: Populations of Mediterranean Africa and Egypt—II. Ethiopian or Kushito-Hamite Group: Bejas, Gallas, Abyssinians, etc.—III. Fulah-Zandeh Group: The Zandeh, Masai, Niam-Niam populations of the Ubangi-Shari, etc., Fulbé or Fulahs—IV. Nigritian Group: Nilotic Negroes or Negroes of eastern Sudan—Negroes of central Sudan—Negroes of western Sudan and the Senegal—Negroes of the coast or Guinean Negroes, Kru, Agni, Tshi, Vei, Yoruba, etc.—V. Negrillo Group: Differences among the Pygmies and the Bushmen—VI. Bantu Group: Western Bantus of French, German, Portuguese, and Belgian equatorial Africa—Eastern Bantus of German, English, and Portuguese equatorial Africa—Southern Bantus: Zulus, etc.—VII. Hottentot-Bushman Group: The Namans and the Sans—VIII. Populations of Madagascar: Hovas, Malagasi, Sakalavas.

THE term “Black Continent” is often applied to Africa, but it must not therefore be supposed that it is peopled solely by Negroes. Without taking into account the white Arabo-Berbers and the yellow Bushmen-Hottentots, which have long been known, it may now be shown, after a half-century of discovery, that the population of Africa presents a very much greater variety of types and races than was formerly imagined.

THE term “Black Continent” is often used to refer to Africa, but that doesn’t mean it’s inhabited only by Black people. Even without considering the white Arabo-Berbers and the yellow Bushmen-Hottentots, which have been recognized for a long time, it’s now clear, after fifty years of exploration, that the population of Africa shows a much broader range of types and races than previously thought.

ANCIENT INHABITANTS OF AFRICA.

We are only just beginning to know something about prehistoric Africa. Egypt, that classic land of the oldest historic monuments of the earth, has yielded in late years, thanks to the excavations of Flinders Petrie, D’Amelineau, and above all, of De Morgan, a large quantity of wrought stone objects, similar in character to[Pg 427] those of Europe, and if certain objections may still be raised in regard to the palæolithic period of Egypt, which is not dated by a fauna, we can scarcely deny the existence of the neolithic period in this country, the period which preceded or was contemporaneous with the earliest dynasties of which monuments have yet been discovered.[480]

We are just starting to learn about prehistoric Africa. Egypt, the classic land of some of the oldest historic monuments on Earth, has recently provided, thanks to the excavations by Flinders Petrie, D’Amelineau, and especially De Morgan, a significant number of crafted stone objects that are similar to those found in Europe. While there may still be some questions regarding the Paleolithic period in Egypt, which isn’t dated using fauna, we can hardly deny the presence of the Neolithic period in this region, the time that came before or aligned with the earliest dynasties for which monuments have been discovered.[480]

Hatchets, knives, and scrapers of very rude palæolithic and neolithic types have been discovered in Cape Colony (W. Gooch, J. Sanderson); flint arrow-heads and implements of the Chellean type in the country of the Somalis, in the Congo Free State;[481] ironstone arrow-heads in the country of the Monbuttus (Emin Pacha). Numerous stone implements and weapons of various palæolithic types, much finer than the preceding, as well as neolithic hatchets, have been found in Algeria (at Tlemcen), in South Algeria (at El-Golea, etc.), and as far as Timbuctoo (Weisgerber, Lenz, Collignon, etc.). Lastly, Tunis presents a progressive series of palæolithic implements absolutely similar to those of Europe in several stations (at Gafsa and, in a general way, west from the Gulf of Gabes).[482] But all these finds are very isolated and too far removed one from another to enable us to[Pg 428] infer from them the existence of one and the same primitive industry over the whole continent.[483] Numerous facts on the contrary, particularly the absence of stone implements among the most primitive of the existing tribes of Africa (with the exception of the perforated round stone with which the digging-stick is weighted, as well as the stone pestles met with among some Negro tribes), and the rarity of superstitions associated with stone implements, lead us to suppose that the stone age only existed on the dark continent in a sporadic state and in virtue of local and isolated civilisations. Further, the absence of bronze implements, outside of Egypt, leads us to suppose that the majority of the peoples of Africa, with the exception of the inhabitants of Egypt and the Mediterranean coast, passed from the age of bone and wood to that of iron almost without transition.

Hatchets, knives, and crude tools from the Paleolithic and Neolithic eras have been found in Cape Colony (W. Gooch, J. Sanderson); flint arrowheads and Chellean-type tools in Somali territory and the Congo Free State; [481] ironstone arrowheads in the Monbuttu region (Emin Pacha). Numerous stone tools and weapons of various Paleolithic types, much more refined than the earlier ones, as well as Neolithic hatchets, have been discovered in Algeria (at Tlemcen), southern Algeria (at El-Golea, etc.), and as far as Timbuktu (Weisgerber, Lenz, Collignon, etc.). Lastly, Tunis shows a continuous series of Paleolithic tools that are very similar to those found in Europe at several locations (at Gafsa and generally west of the Gulf of Gabes). [482] However, all these findings are quite isolated and too spaced out to allow us to conclude that there was a single primitive industry across the entire continent. [483] Numerous facts support the opposite view, particularly the lack of stone tools among the most primitive existing African tribes (apart from the perforated round stones used to weight digging sticks and the stone pestles found among some Black tribes), and the infrequency of superstitions linked to stone tools, which suggests that the Stone Age only occurred sporadically in Africa due to local and isolated civilizations. Furthermore, the absence of bronze tools outside of Egypt implies that most African peoples, except for those in Egypt and along the Mediterranean coast, transitioned directly from the era of bone and wood to iron with little to no intermediate phase.

Several palæethnologists go so far as to think that the iron industry was imported into Europe from Africa. At all events skilful smiths (Fig. 135) are found in the centre of Africa among Negro tribes somewhat backward in other respects.

Several paleoethnologists believe that the iron industry was brought to Europe from Africa. In any case, skilled blacksmiths (Fig. 135) can be found in central Africa among tribes that are less advanced in other areas.

Historic data are lacking in regard to most of the peoples of Africa, especially for remote periods, except in Egypt. However, combining the various historic facts known to us with the recent data of philology and those, still more recent, of anthropology, we may assume with sufficient probability the following superposition of races and peoples in Africa.

Historic data are lacking for most of the people in Africa, especially for ancient times, except in Egypt. However, by combining what we know from historical facts with recent linguistic data and even newer anthropological findings, we can reasonably assume the following layering of races and groups in Africa.

The primitive substratum of the population is formed of Negroes, very tall and very black, in the north; of Negrilloes, brown-skinned dwarfs, in the centre; of Bushmen, short, yellow, and steatopygous, in the south. On this substratum was deposited at a distant but indefinite period the so-called Hamitic element of European or Asiatic origin, the supposed continuators of the Cro-Magnon race.[484] This element has been preserved in a comparatively pure state among the[Pg 429] Berbers, and perhaps has been transformed by interminglings with the Negroes, into a new race, analogous to the Ethiopian, with which we must probably connect the ancient Egyptians. The Berbers drove back the Negroes towards the south, while the Ethiopians, a little later, filtered through the Negroid mass from east to west. This infiltration continues at the present day.

The original population consists of very tall and very dark-skinned Black people in the north, brown-skinned small people in the center, and short, yellow-skinned individuals in the south. Over time, a group of people of European or Asian descent, thought to be descendants of the Cro-Magnon race, settled on this foundation. This group has remained relatively pure among the Berbers and may have mixed with the Black population to create a new race similar to the Ethiopian, which is likely connected to the ancient Egyptians. The Berbers pushed the Black populations further south, while the Ethiopians later moved through the Black groups from east to west. This blending is still happening today.

A new wave of migration followed that of the Hamites. These were the southern Semites or Himyarites who crossed from the other side of the Red Sea. Probably as far back as the Egyptian neolithic period they began the slow but sure process of modifying the Berbers, Ethiopians, and Negroes of the north-east of Africa.

A new wave of migration came after the Hamites. These were the southern Semites or Himyarites who crossed from across the Red Sea. Likely as far back as the Egyptian Neolithic period, they began the gradual but definite process of changing the Berbers, Ethiopians, and Black Africans in the northeast of Africa.

The Negro populations driven back towards the south were obliged to intermingle with the Negrillo pygmies, the Ethiopians, and Hottentot-Bushmen, and gave birth to the Negro tribes composing to-day the great linguistic family called Bantu. Bantu migrations, at first from the north to the south, then in the opposite direction and towards the west, have been authenticated.[485] As a consequence of the interminglings due to these migrations, the Negrilloes and the Hottentots have been absorbed to a great extent by the Bantus, and the rare representatives of these races, still existing in a state of relative purity, are to-day driven back into the [Pg 431] most unhealthy and inhospitable regions of Central and Southern Africa. The last important invasion of alien peoples into Africa was that of the Northern Semites or Arabs. It was, rather, a series of invasions, ranging from the first century B.C. to the fifteenth century, when the climax was reached. The Arab tribes have profoundly modified certain Berber and Ethiopian populations from the somatic point of view as well as the ethnic. Moreover, the Arab influence under the form of Islamism continues to the present time its onward march over the dark continent, making from the north-east to the south-west. The Guinea coast, the basin of the Congo, and Southern Africa alone have as yet remained untouched by this influence. Let us note in conclusion the Malay-Indonesian migration towards Madagascar, and the European colonisation begun in the seventeenth century.

The Black populations pushed back to the south had to mix with the Negrillo pygmies, Ethiopians, and Hottentot-Bushmen, giving rise to the Black tribes that today make up the large linguistic group known as Bantu. Bantu migrations, initially from the north to the south and then in the opposite direction and westward, have been documented.[485] As a result of the mixing from these migrations, the Negrilloes and the Hottentots have been largely absorbed by the Bantus, and the few remaining members of these races, still existing in a relatively pure form, are now pushed into the [Pg 431] most unhealthy and inhospitable areas of Central and Southern Africa. The last major wave of foreign people into Africa was from the Northern Semites or Arabs. It was a series of invasions that occurred from the first century BCE to the fifteenth century, when it peaked. The Arab tribes have significantly altered certain Berber and Ethiopian populations both physically and ethnically. Additionally, the Arab influence, in the form of Islam, continues to spread across the dark continent from the northeast to the southwest. Only the Guinea coast, the Congo basin, and Southern Africa have remained untouched by this influence. Lastly, we should mention the Malay-Indonesian migration to Madagascar and the European colonization that began in the seventeenth century.

Kaffirs: Arts and Crafts

FIG. 135.—Arts and crafts among the Kafirs.
To the left, pottery making (coiling method);
to the right, smiths and a breaker of iron ore;
in the middle, woman playing a harp.
(Drawing by P. Moutet, partly after Wood.)

FIG. 135.—Arts and crafts among the Kafirs.
On the left, pottery making (coiling method);
on the right, blacksmiths and a person breaking iron ore;
in the middle, a woman playing a harp.
(Drawing by P. Moutet, partly after Wood.)

EXISTING POPULATIONS OF AFRICA.

Putting on one side the Madagascar islanders and the European and other colonists,[486] the thousands of peoples and tribes of the “dark continent” may be grouped, going from north to south, into six great geographical, linguistic, and, in part, anthropological units: 1st, the Arabo-Berbers or Semito-Hamites; 2nd, the Ethiopians or Kushito-Hamites; 3rd, the Fulah-Zandeh; 4th, the Negrilloes or Pygmies; 5th, the Nigritians or Sudanese-Guinea Negroes; 6th, the Bantus; 7th, the Hottentot-Bushmen.[487]

Setting aside the Madagascar islanders and the European and other colonists,[486] the thousands of peoples and tribes of Africa can be grouped, from north to south, into six major geographical, linguistic, and partly anthropological categories: 1st, the Arabo-Berbers or Semito-Hamites; 2nd, the Ethiopians or Kushito-Hamites; 3rd, the Fulah-Zandeh; 4th, the Negrilloes or Pygmies; 5th, the Nigritians or Sudanese-Guinea Negroes; 6th, the Bantus; 7th, the Hottentot-Bushmen.[487]

I. The Arabo-Berber or Semito-Hamitic group occupies the north of Africa as far as about the 15th degree of lat. N., and is composed, as its name indicates, of peoples having as a base the Arab and Berber races. Under the name of Berbers are included populations varying very much in type and manners and customs, speaking either Arabic (Semitic language) or Berberese (Hamitic language). Three-fourths of the “Arabs” of Northern Africa are only Berbers speaking Arabic, and are the more “Arabised” in regard to manners and customs as they are nearer to Asia. The nomads of the Libyan desert and Tripoli have preserved fairly well the Berber type, but they have become Arabs in language and usages. In Tunis and Algeria the Arab influence is still very much felt in the south; in Morocco it is very trifling. From the social point of view, the contrast is great between the settled Berber and the nomadic Arab. To give but one example, the democratic régime of the former, based on private property, bears no resemblance whatever to the autocratic régime of the latter, founded on collective property. But all the Berbers are not of settled habits (example: the Tuaregs), and several tribes have adopted the Arab mode of life.[488]

I. The Arabo-Berber or Semito-Hamitic group occupies the northern part of Africa up to about the 15th degree of latitude north. This group is made up of people who are primarily Arab and Berber. The term Berbers refers to various populations with different types and customs, who speak either Arabic (a Semitic language) or Berber (a Hamitic language). Three-fourths of the “Arabs” in Northern Africa are actually Berbers who speak Arabic, and they become more “Arabized” in their customs and behaviors the closer they are to Asia. The nomadic people in the Libyan desert and Tripoli have maintained much of their Berber identity, but they have adopted the Arabic language and customs. In Tunisia and Algeria, Arab influence is still quite strong in the south, while in Morocco, it is minimal. Socially, there's a significant contrast between the settled Berber and the nomadic Arab. For example, the democratic régime of the settled Berbers, which is based on private property, is completely different from the autocratic régime of the nomadic Arabs, which is based on collective property. However, not all Berbers live a settled lifestyle (for instance, the Tuaregs), and several tribes have adopted the Arab way of life.[488]

Physically, the Algero-Tunisian Berber also differs from the Arab. His height is scarcely above the average (1 m. 67), while the Arab is distinguished by his lofty stature. The Berber head is, generally speaking, not so long as the Arab, although both are dolichocephalic. The face is a regular oval in the Arab, almost quadrangular in the pure Berber. The nose is aquiline in the former, straight or concave in the latter, and moreover, the Berbers have a sort of transverse depression on the brow, above the glabella, which is not seen in the Arabs; on the other hand, they have not so prominent an occiput as the latter. This characterisation is quite general; in reality,[Pg 433] among the Arabs, and especially among the Berbers, there is a very great variety of type. According to Collignon,[489] four Berber sub-races or types must be recognised. (1) The Djerba sub-race, characterised by short stature, globular head (ceph. ind. on the living sub. 78 to 81.7), is well represented in the populations of the south-east and the east Tunisian coast, as well as by certain Kabyles, by the Mzabs,[490] and the Shawias of the Aures. (2) The Elles type, dolichocephalic, with broad face, occupies the centre of Tunis and the east of Kabylia. (3) The dolichocephalic Berber sub-race, with narrow face and stature above the average, forms the present type in Algeria-Tunisia. (4) The Jerid or Oasis type (Fig. 136), of somewhat lofty stature and dark complexion, is well represented around the Tunisian “Shotts.”

Physically, the Algero-Tunisian Berber is also different from the Arab. His height is just below average (1 minute. 67), while the Arab is known for his tall stature. The Berber head is, generally speaking, not as long as the Arab's, although both have long heads. The Arab has a typically oval face, while the pure Berber's face is almost quadrangular. The nose of an Arab is aquiline, while a Berber's is straight or concave, and additionally, Berbers have a kind of transverse depression on their brow, above the glabella, which isn't found in Arabs; on the other hand, they have a less prominent back of the head than Arabs. This description is quite general; in reality,[Pg 433] there is a wide variety of types among both Arabs and Berbers. According to Collignon,[489] four Berber sub-races or types should be recognized. (1) The Djerba sub-race, characterized by short stature and a round head (head index on the living sub. 78 to 81.7), is well represented in the populations of the southeast and the eastern Tunisian coast, as well as by certain Kabyles, the Mzabs,[490] and the Shawias of the Aures. (2) The Elles type, long-headed with a broad face, is found in central Tunis and the east of Kabylia. (3) The long-headed Berber sub-race, with a narrow face and above-average height, represents the current type in Algeria-Tunisia. (4) The Jerid or Oasis type (Fig. 136), of somewhat tall stature and dark complexion, is well represented around the Tunisian “Shotts.”

Tunisian Berber

FIG. 136.—Tunisian Berber, Oasis type. Ceph. ind. 70.
(After Collignon.)

FIG. 136.—Tunisian Berber, Oasis type. Ceph. ind. 70.
(After Collignon.)

Among the nomadic Berbers we must mention separately[Pg 434] the Tuaregs or Imoshagh, as they call themselves,[491] with their manifold divisions (Azjars, Haggars, etc.) spread over the western Sahara. Very characteristic of their costume is the black veil which covers the head leaving only the eyes free, the stone rings on the arms forming also a very national ornament. They employ certain characters in writing peculiar to themselves. In the Maghrebi, who roam over the plateaus situated to the west of the Nile, the Arab strain is very strongly marked.[492] On the other side of the great African river, towards the Red Sea, the Berbers have entirely disappeared and the population is formed of Arabs more or less unmixed. The Bedouins of Egypt (237,000 in 1894) are Berber-Arabs divided into numerous tribes (Aulad-Ali, Gavazi, Eleikat, etc.).

Among the nomadic Berbers, we should highlight separately[Pg 434] the Tuaregs or Imoshagh, as they refer to themselves,[491] with their various divisions (Azjars, Haggars, etc.) spread across the western Sahara. A distinctive feature of their attire is the black veil that covers the head, leaving only the eyes visible, along with stone rings on their arms which serve as a unique ornament. They use specific characters in their writing that are unique to them. In the Maghrebi, who inhabit the plateaus west of the Nile, the Arab influence is strongly evident.[492] On the opposite side of the great African river, towards the Red Sea, the Berbers have completely disappeared, and the population consists of Arabs who are more or less unmixed. The Bedouins of Egypt (237,000 in 1894) are a mix of Berber and Arab, divided into numerous tribes (Aulad-Ali, Gavazi, Eleikat, etc.).

Trarza-Moor, Senegal

FIG. 137.—Trarza-Moor of the Senegal.
(Phot. Collignon.)

FIG. 137.—Trarza-Moor of Senegal.
(Phot. Collignon.)

The nomadic or settled Moors (Fig. 137) of the western Sahara, extending from Morocco to the Senegal (the Trarza,[Pg 435] the Brakna, etc.), speak Arabic and “Zenagha,” which is a Berber dialect. These are Berbers more or less crossed with Negro blood. It must further be observed that the name of Moors is very wrongly applied to the Mussulman inhabitants of the towns of Algeria and Tunis and to the Riffians of Morocco.[493]

The nomadic or settled Moors (Fig. 137) of the western Sahara, stretching from Morocco to Senegal (the Trarza,[Pg 435] the Brakna, etc.), speak Arabic and “Zenagha,” which is a Berber dialect. These people are Berbers mixed to some extent with Black African ancestry. It's also important to note that the term Moors is incorrectly used to refer to the Muslim inhabitants of the towns in Algeria and Tunisia and to the Riffians of Morocco.[493]

The Fellaheen, Mussulmans (635,600 in 1894) of the lower valley of the Nile (as far as the first cataract), mixed descendants of the ancient Egyptians, must be included among the Arabo-Berbers because they have abandoned the speech of their ancestors, adopting that of the Arabs, but many of them have preserved intact the type of the primitive Egyptians, fundamentally Ethiopian, so well represented on various monuments in the valley of the Nile.[494] The ancient Egyptian language is preserved, however, under the form of the Coptic dialect which, until quite recent times, served as the liturgical language to the Christian section of the inhabitants of Lower Egypt, known by the name of Copts (500,000 in 1894; cephalic index 76, according to Chantre).

The Fellaheen, Muslims (635,600 in 1894) from the lower Nile Valley (up to the first cataract), are mixed descendants of the ancient Egyptians and should be classified among the Arabo-Berbers because they have given up their ancestral language in favor of Arabic. However, many still retain the physical characteristics of the original Egyptians, who were predominantly Ethiopian, as is well shown in various monuments throughout the Nile Valley.[494] The ancient Egyptian language survives in the form of the Coptic dialect, which, until relatively recently, was used as the liturgical language among the Christian community in Lower Egypt, referred to as the Copts (500,000 in 1894; cephalic index 76, according to Chantre).

We must likewise add to the Arabo-Berber group the Barabra (in the singular Berberi) inhabiting to the number of about 180,000 the part of the Nile valley situated between the first and the fourth cataract. It is a people sprung from the inter[Pg 436]mingling of Ethiopians, Egyptian Fellaheen, and Arabs (ceph. ind. 76). One of the most commercial tribes of this ethnic group is that of the Danagla inhabiting the country of Dongola.

We should also include the Arabo-Berber group known as the Barabra (singular: Berberi), which numbers about 180,000 people in the part of the Nile valley between the first and fourth cataracts. They are a group that has emerged from the mixing of Ethiopians, Egyptian Fellaheen, and Arabs (ceph. ind. 76). One of the most commercially active tribes within this ethnic group is the Danagla, who live in the region of Dongola.

II. The Ethiopians or Kushito-Hamites, who are sometimes called Nuba or Nubians,[495] inhabit the north-east of Africa, from the 25th degree lat. N. to the 4th degree lat. S. They occupy almost all the coast land of the Red Sea, and that of the Indian Ocean from the Gulf of Aden to Port Durnford or Wubashi. Their territory is bounded on the west by the Nile, the Bahr-el-Azrek, the western edge of the Abyssinian plateau, Lake Rudolf and Mount Kenia.[496]

II. The Ethiopians or Kushito-Hamites, who are sometimes referred to as Nuba or Nubians,[495] live in the northeast of Africa, from the 25th degree latitude north to the 4th degree latitude south. They cover almost all the coastal areas of the Red Sea and the Indian Ocean, stretching from the Gulf of Aden to Port Durnford or Wubashi. Their territory is bordered on the west by the Nile, the Bahr-el-Azrek, the western edge of the Abyssinian plateau, Lake Rudolf, and Mount Kenia.[496]

In the northern part of this territory dwell the Bejas or Nubians, the different tribes of which, Bejas or Bisharin, Hamrans (Fig. 138), Hadendowas, Hallengas, etc., are stationed one after another between the Red Sea and the Nile, from the first cataract to the Abyssinian plateau. Certain Beja tribes, like the Ababdeh (19,500), to the north in Upper Egypt, partly of settled habits, the Beni-Amer to the east, the Jalin to the west, are in a large measure Arabised, but still speak a Hamitic language, while side by side with them dwell Semitised Ethiopian tribes, speaking only Arabic like the Habab and the Hassanieh of the Bayuda steppe or the Abu-Rof and Shukrieh of the lower basin of the Blue Nile.[497][Pg 437] It is in the same category of Semitised Ethiopians, but speaking the Amharinga and Tigrenga dialects, etc., which have sprung from a different Semitic language, Ghéez, that we must place the inhabitants of the north and east of Abyssinia, as well as the natives of Kaffa and the east of Shoa, who have sprung from the intermingling of the Gallas (see below) with the Arabs.

In the northern part of this territory live the Bejas or Nubians, with various tribes such as the Bejas or Bisharin, Hamrans (Fig. 138), Hadendowas, and Hallengas, lined up between the Red Sea and the Nile, stretching from the first cataract to the Abyssinian plateau. Some Beja tribes, like the Ababdeh (19,500), located in the north of Upper Egypt and partially settled, along with the Beni-Amer to the east and the Jalin to the west, have largely assimilated Arab culture, but they still speak a Hamitic language. Meanwhile, nearby reside Semitised Ethiopian tribes that speak only Arabic, such as the Habab and the Hassanieh of the Bayuda steppe or the Abu-Rof and Shukrieh in the lower basin of the Blue Nile.[497][Pg 437] In the same category of Semitised Ethiopians, but speaking the Amharinga and Tigrenga dialects, which originated from a different Semitic language, Ghéez, are the inhabitants of northern and eastern Abyssinia, as well as the locals from Kaffa and east of Shoa, who are a result of the intermingling of the Gallas (see below) with the Arabs.

Hamran Beja, Daghil Tribe

FIG. 138.—Hamran Beja of Daghil tribe;
height, 1 m. 79, 25 years old.
Hair arrangement characteristic of Ethiopians.
(Author’s coll.)

FIG. 138.—Hamran Beja from the Daghil tribe;
height, 1 minute. 79, 25 years old.
Hairstyle typical of Ethiopians.
(Author’s coll.)

The Amharinga language is spoken in Amhara and Godjam; the Tigrenga farther to the north, in Tigre; the Curagheh, derived from the ancient Amharinga, to the west of Lake Zuwai and to the south of Shoa, and the sources of the Hawash. The term “Abyssinian” has only a political signification, like that of “Austrian” for example; it is a corruption of the word “Habeshi” (“mixed”), which the Arabs formerly gave in derision to the inhabitants of the Abyssinian plateau united together into a Christian state. The sub[Pg 438]stratum of the population of the Abyssinian plateau is formed by the Agaw, Ethiopian in type, Hamitic in language, but the Abyssinians of the higher classes are strongly Semitised. The national religion of the Abyssinians is monophysite Christianity, closely allied to the Coptic religion, but impregnated with Mussulman, Judaic, and indigenous animist elements.

The Amharinga language is spoken in Amhara and Godjam; the Tigrenga is found further north, in Tigre; the Curagheh, which comes from the ancient Amharinga, is located to the west of Lake Zuwai and south of Shoa, including the sources of the Hawash. The term “Abyssinian” has only a political meaning, similar to “Austrian”; it’s a distortion of the word “Habeshi” (“mixed”), which the Arabs used mockingly for the people of the Abyssinian plateau who came together to form a Christian state. The sub[Pg 438]stratum of the population on the Abyssinian plateau is made up of the Agaw, Ethiopian in heritage, Hamitic in language, but the higher-class Abyssinians are heavily influenced by Semitic culture. The national religion of the Abyssinians is monophysite Christianity, closely related to the Coptic faith, yet blended with Muslim, Jewish, and local animist beliefs.

To the south of the Abyssinian plateau, from the neighbourhood of Lake Tsana to the extreme limits of the extension of the Ethiopian peoples to the south and west is the territory of the Gallas or Oroma, representing the purest Ethiopian type. To the east of the Gallas, from about the 42nd degree long. east of Greenwich, dwell the Somalis, probably only Gallas more or less intermingled with the Arabs, who for several centuries have overrun the country. They occupy the whole of the seaboard from Cape Jibuti (at the southern extremity of Obok) to the mouth of the Jeb, or Jubba, and the plain of Aji-Fiddah, which extends below the equator, but in the interior of their country, especially in the north, numerous Galla tribes are found.

To the south of the Abyssinian plateau, from the area around Lake Tsana to the furthest points of the Ethiopian peoples to the south and west, lies the land of the Gallas or Oroma, representing the most authentic Ethiopian ethnicity. To the east of the Gallas, around the 42nd degree longitude east of Greenwich, live the Somalis, who are likely just Gallas mixed to some extent with Arabs, who have inhabited the region for several centuries. They occupy the entire coastline from Cape Jibuti (at the southern tip of Obok) to the mouth of the Jeb, or Jubba, and the Aji-Fiddah plain, which stretches just south of the equator. However, in the interior of their territory, especially in the north, there are many Galla tribes.

To the north of the Gallas, between Abyssinia and the coast (from Cape Jibuti to Hamfila Bay), are the Afar (in the plural Afara) or Danakil (Dankali is in the singular), who form the bulk of the population of the French colony of Obok-Tajura. Physically they resemble the Somalis, but they are less Arabised. To the north of the Danakil there is a population akin, it is said, to the Agaw, or aborigines of Abyssinia, and known by the name of Saho or Shaho. It occupies the southern part of the country of Massowah, the northern being taken by the Ethiopian tribes known by the collective name of Massowans.[498]

To the north of the Gallas, between Ethiopia and the coast (from Cape Djibouti to Hamfila Bay), are the Afar (plural: Afara) or Danakil (singular: Dankali), who make up most of the population in the French colony of Obok-Tajura. They physically resemble the Somalis, but they are less influenced by Arab culture. North of the Danakil is a population related, it’s said, to the Agaw, or the indigenous people of Ethiopia, known as the Saho or Shaho. This group occupies the southern part of the Massowah region, while the northern part is home to the Ethiopian tribes collectively referred to as the Massowans.[498]

From the somatological point of view, the Ethiopians are characterised by a rather high stature (1 m. 67 on the average), a brownish or chocolate-coloured complexion with a reddish tinge, by an elongated head (average ceph. ind., 75.7 to 78.1[Pg 439] on the living subject, according to Chantre), frizzy hair, intermediate between the curly hair of the Arabs and the woolly hair of the Negroes, and lastly by the face elongated to a perfect oval, and the prominent, straight or convex, very narrow nose.[499] Thin and slender, the Ethiopians have fine ankles and wrists, long and very sinewy limbs (especially the fore-arm), broad shoulders, and conical-shaped trunk like the ancient statues of Egypt. In short, they are good representatives of the Ethiopian race.

From a physical perspective, Ethiopians are characterized by a relatively tall height (averaging 1.67 m), a brownish or chocolate-colored skin tone with a reddish hue, and an elongated head (average cranial index ranging from 75.7 to 78.1 on living individuals, according to Chantre). They have frizzy hair that falls between the curly hair of Arabs and the woolly hair of Black individuals. Additionally, they possess a perfectly oval-shaped face and a prominent, straight or slightly curved, very narrow nose. Ethiopians are thin and slender, with fine ankles and wrists, long and muscular limbs (especially in the forearms), broad shoulders, and a cone-shaped torso reminiscent of ancient Egyptian statues. In summary, they are strong representatives of the Ethiopian race.

III. Fulah-Zandeh Group.—Under this term we include the whole series of populations resulting from the intermingling of the Ethiopians and the Nigritians (or Sudanese Negroes), and extending from east to west across the whole of Africa, over a belt of 5 to 6 degrees in width. This belt passes through the following regions, starting from the east: The country of the Masai (between Lake Rudolf and the 6th degree of latitude S.); the region comprised between the upper valleys of the right-hand tributaries of the Bahr-el-Arab on the one hand and the basin of the Ubangi-Welle on the other; Darfur, Dar-Runga, Wadai, Baghirmi, and Bornu; Dar Banda and the upper basin of the Shari; a good part of the basin of the Niger-Benue and the whole of the basin of the Senegal. This territorial zone may be divided from the ethnographical point of view into two distinct portions by the line of the watershed between the basins of the Nile and Congo on the one hand and the basins of the Chad, Niger, and Senegal on the other. To the east of this line dwell, in compact groups, the Zandeh or Niam-Niam, Masai, and other populations who have sprung from the intermingling of the Ethiopians with the Negroes of the eastern Sudan (Nilotic Negroes), and in some rarer cases with the Negrilloes and Bantus. To the west, on the contrary, we find, scattered over an immense tract, isolated groups of one population only, that of the Fulahs or Peuls, sprung from the crossings of[Pg 440] Ethiopians with the Negroes of the central and western Sudan, and further impregnated with a strain of Arabo-Berber blood.

III. Fulah-Zandeh Group.—This term refers to the entire series of populations that result from the mixing of Ethiopians and Nigritians (or Sudanese Black people), stretching from east to west across Africa, within a belt of 5 to 6 degrees wide. This belt covers the following areas, starting from the east: the land of the Masai (between Lake Rudolf and the 6th degree of latitude S.); the region between the upper valleys of the right tributaries of the Bahr-el-Arab and the basin of the Ubangi-Welle; Darfur, Dar-Runga, Wadai, Baghirmi, and Bornu; Dar Banda and the upper basin of the Shari; much of the Niger-Benue basin, and all of the Senegal basin. This territorial zone can be divided into two distinct parts from an ethnographical perspective by the line of the watershed between the basins of the Nile and Congo on one side, and the basins of the Chad, Niger, and Senegal on the other. To the east of this line, the Zandeh or Niam-Niam, Masai, and other groups that have resulted from the blending of Ethiopians with the Black populations of eastern Sudan (Nilotic Blacks), and in some rare instances, with the Negrilloes and Bantus, live in compact groups. In contrast, to the west, we find isolated groups of just one population, the Fulahs or Peuls, scattered across a vast area, which have arisen from the mixing of Ethiopians with the Black people of central and western Sudan, also infused with a mix of Arabo-Berber ancestry.

In the eastern group, which I propose to call provisionally the Zandeh group, we find the Masai and the Wakuafi peoples of an Ethiopian type modified by intermingling with the Nilotic Negroes of the north, with the Bantus and perhaps with the Bushmen of the south, to judge by the photographs published by Luschan. The Masai speak a Nilotic-Negro language. On the north-east they touch the habitat of the Gallas, and are surrounded on every other side by Bantu tribes, except on the north-west, where, between Lake Rudolf and the upper Bahr-el-Jebel, exist populations still imperfectly known, the Latukas, the Turkan, the Lurems, who are probably half-breeds in various degrees of Ethiopians and Nilotic Negroes,[500] as are the Drugu and the Lendu of the region of the sources of the Ituri, the Loggos and the Momvus or Mombuttus (who must not be confounded with the Mangbattus) of the upper valley of the Kibali.[501]

In the eastern group, which I propose to temporarily call the Zandeh group, we find the Masai and the Wakuafi peoples of an Ethiopian type modified by mixing with the Nilotic Negroes from the north, the Bantus, and possibly the Bushmen from the south, based on the photographs published by Luschan. The Masai speak a Nilotic-Negro language. To the northeast, they border the territory of the Gallas, and they are surrounded on all other sides by Bantu tribes, except to the northwest, where there are populations that are still not well known, such as the Latukas, the Turkan, and the Lurems, who are likely mixed in varying degrees between Ethiopians and Nilotic Negroes,[500] as are the Drugu and the Lendu from the region near the sources of the Ituri, as well as the Loggos and the Momvus or Mombuttus (who should not be confused with the Mangbattus) from the upper valley of the Kibali.[501]

To the west of these tribes, in the basin of the Ubangi-Welle, we find a compact group of several peoples who, under various names, have however a certain family likeness in their physical type, manners and customs, and language. These are, in the first place, the Niam-Niam or Zandeh, who with their congeners the Banja dwell to the north of the Welle. They extend beyond the ridge which divides this river from the White Nile, in the upper valleys of the Sere, the Jubé, and other tributaries of the great river. We also find a few isolated Zandeh groups to the south of the Welle, but the greater part of the country watered by the left tributaries of this waterway is the domain of the Ababuas, the Abarmbos, and the Mangbattus or Monbuttus, remarkable for their light[Pg 441] skin, as well as the lighter shade of their hair compared with that of the other Zandehs (fair hair in five per cent.). The Niam-Niam extend to the eastward to the country of the Makaraka (tribes of Bombeh, Idio, etc.), where they intermingle with the Mundus and the Babukurs. On the north-west the Zandeh are in contact with tribes still little known, like the Krej (basin of the upper Bahr-el-Arab), the Bandas, and the N’Sakkaras, who, however, seem to be closely related.[502]

To the west of these tribes, in the basin of the Ubangi-Welle, there’s a close-knit group of several peoples who, despite having different names, share a certain familial resemblance in their physical appearance, customs, and language. First are the Niam-Niam or Zandeh, who, along with their kin the Banja, live north of the Welle. Their territory stretches beyond the ridge that separates this river from the White Nile, into the upper valleys of the Sere, the Jubé, and other tributaries of the great river. We also find some scattered groups of Zandeh to the south of the Welle, but most of the land fed by the left tributaries of this waterway is occupied by the Ababuas, the Abarmbos, and the Mangbattus or Monbuttus, noted for their light[Pg 441] skin, along with a lighter shade of hair compared to the other Zandehs (with fair hair in about five percent). The Niam-Niam extend eastward to the lands of the Makaraka (tribes like Bombeh, Idio, etc.), where they blend with the Mundus and the Babukurs. To the northwest, the Zandeh come into contact with less-known tribes like the Krej (in the basin of the upper Bahr-el-Arab), the Bandas, and the N’Sakkaras, who seem to be closely related.

The Niam-Niam and the Mangbattus, who may be taken as types of Zandeh populations, suggest physically the Ethiopians; however, strains of Nilotic-Negro blood are manifest among them. They have a civilisation well characterised by several traits in their material life: anthropophagy (see p. 147), garments of bast (p. 183), ornaments worn in the nostrils and in the lips perforated for the purpose, spiral-shaped bracelets, weapons of a particular kind (pp. 259 and 269), partly borrowed from the Egyptians, as were perhaps their harp, bolster, and so many other objects. They are cultivators using the hoe (p. 192), fetichists partly converted to Islamism and forming little despotic states.[503]

The Niam-Niam and the Mangbattus, which can be seen as representations of Zandeh populations, physically resemble Ethiopians; however, they also show signs of Nilotic-Negro ancestry. They have a culture characterized by various traits in their everyday life: cannibalism (see p. 147), clothing made from bast fibers (p. 183), ornaments worn in their nostrils and lips that are pierced for this purpose, spiral-shaped bracelets, and unique weapons (pp. 259 and 269), some of which were influenced by the Egyptians, along with their harp, bolster, and many other items. They are farmers who use hoes (p. 192), practice fetishism blended with some aspects of Islam, and create small, tyrannical states.[503]

The populations encountered by the travellers Crampel, Dybowski, and Maistre westward of the countries peopled by the Zandeh, between the Ubangi and the Grinbingi (one of the principal branches of the Shari), must also be connected with the Zandeh group. These are, going from south to north, the Bandziri, the Ndris, the Togbo, the Languassi, the Dakoa, the Ngapu, the Wia-Wia, the Mandjo, the Awaka, and the Akunga. The physical type of these tribes suggests that of the Niam-Niam, except the stature, which is higher, (1 m. 73, according to Maistre). The language common to all these peoples, Ndris, differs from the Bantu dialects spoken on the Congo, and appears to approximate to the Zandeh[Pg 442] language. As to their material culture and civilisation, these are almost the same as among the Zandeh tribes.[504]

The populations that travelers Crampel, Dybowski, and Maistre encountered to the west of the Zandeh territories, between the Ubangi and the Grinbingi (one of the main branches of the Shari), are likely connected to the Zandeh group. Going from south to north, these include the Bandziri, the Ndris, the Togbo, the Languassi, the Dakoa, the Ngapu, the Wia-Wia, the Mandjo, the Awaka, and the Akunga. The physical characteristics of these tribes resemble those of the Niam-Niam, except that they are taller (1 m. 73, according to Maistre). The language shared by all these peoples, Ndris, differs from the Bantu dialects spoken in the Congo and seems to be closer to the Zandeh[Pg 442] language. Their material culture and civilization are almost identical to those of the Zandeh tribes.[504]

Yoro Combo, Fulah of Kayor

FIG. 139.—Yoro Combo, fairly pure Fulah of Kayor (Futa-Jallon);
height, 1 m. 72; ceph. ind., 68.3; nas. ind., 81.2.
(Phot. Collignon.)

FIG. 139.—Yoro Combo, a mostly pure Fulah from Kayor (Futa-Jallon);
height, 1 minute. 72; ceph. ind., 68.3; nas. ind., 81.2.
(Phot. Collignon.)

The western group of the great Fulah-Zandeh division, of which I have spoken above, is formed of a population more homogeneous in type and language than the Zandeh, but dispersed in isolated groups in the midst of the Negroes. These are the Fulbés or Fulahs[505] speaking the Fulah tongue, their true name being Pul-bé (in the singular Pul-o, which means “red”[Pg 443] or “light-brown” in the Fulah tongue). The Mandingans call them Fulbé, the Hausas Fellani, the Kanuri Fellata. It is a mixed population, the substratum of which is Ethiopian but with a predominance either of Arab and Berber, or Negro elements.[506]

The western group of the great Fulah-Zandeh division, which I mentioned earlier, consists of a population that is more uniform in type and language than the Zandeh, but scattered in isolated groups among the Negroes. These are the Fulbés or Fulahs[505] who speak the Fulah language, with their true name being Pul-bé (in the singular Pul-o, which means “red”[Pg 443] or “light-brown” in Fulah). The Mandingans refer to them as Fulbé, the Hausas call them Fellani, and the Kanuri know them as Fellata. This is a mixed population, originally Ethiopian but predominantly made up of either Arab and Berber or Negro elements.[506]

The favourite occupations of the Fulahs, stock-breeding and war, lead them away on more or less distant migratory journeys and expeditions; thus it happens that they are found dispersed among the Nigritian populations over a large tract of country comprised between the lower Senegal and 10° latitude N. on the one part, and from Darfur to the hinterland of the Cameroons on the other part. A fact to be noted in regard to their geographical distribution is that they have not yet reached any point on the coast of the Atlantic. They are especially numerous in the valleys of the Senegal and the Niger-Benue, as well as in Futa-Jallon and Darfur. The latter country is probably the primitive country of the Fulahs, whence they set out towards the west and the south; their migrations from the Senegal towards the east are of recent date and continue to the present day.

The main activities of the Fulahs, which are raising livestock and engaging in warfare, often take them on long migratory journeys and expeditions. As a result, they are scattered among the various populations of Niger over a large area that stretches between the lower Senegal and 10° latitude N on one side, and from Darfur to the interior of the Cameroons on the other. It's noteworthy that they have not yet made it to any point on the Atlantic coast. They are particularly numerous in the valleys of the Senegal and the Niger-Benue, as well as in Futa-Jallon and Darfur. The latter region is likely the original homeland of the Fulahs, from which they migrated westward and southward. Their movements from Senegal to the east are more recent and are still ongoing today.

IV. The Nigritians.—We include under this name all the Negro populations who do not speak the Bantu dialects; these populations exhibit as a rule the classic traits of the Negro: lofty stature (from 1 m. 70 among the Mandingans to 1 m. 73 among the Furs and the Wolofs, according to Collignon, Deniker, Felkin, Verneau, etc.), very marked dolichocephaly (ceph. ind. on the liv. sub. reaching from 73.8 among the Toucouleurs to 76.9 among the Ashantis, according to the same authors), black skin, woolly hair in a continuous mat, large and flat nose (nas. ind. varying from 96.3 among the Negroes of Tunis to 107.5 among the Ashantis), forehead bulging on the median line and often retreating, thick lips projecting outward, frequent prognathism. The territory of the various peoples composing the Nigritian group may be defined as[Pg 444] follows: on the north, a wavy line which at first, going from the mouth of the Senegal to the great bend of the Niger, then deviates little from the fourteenth parallel going to the Bahr-el-Ghazal and the Nile; on the south, the coast of the Gulf of Guinea to the Cameroons, then the mountain ranges of Adamawa and the seventh degree of latitude N., to the countries occupied by the peoples of the Fulah-Zandeh group, and farther to the east to the basin of the upper Nile. The latter constitutes the eastern limit, while to the west this limit is clearly indicated by the Atlantic Ocean.[507]

IV. The Nigritians.—This term encompasses all the Black populations who do not speak Bantu dialects. Generally, these populations display the classic features associated with Black individuals: tall stature (ranging from 1.70 m among the Mandingans to 1.73 m among the Furs and the Wolofs, according to Collignon, Deniker, Felkin, Verneau, etc.), very noticeable dolichocephaly (ceph. ind. on the living subjects varying from 73.8 among the Toucouleurs to 76.9 among the Ashantis, per the same authors), black skin, tightly curled hair in a continuous mat, large and flat nose (nas. ind. ranging from 96.3 among the Negroes of Tunis to 107.5 among the Ashantis), a forehead that bulges in the center and often recedes, thick lips that protrude, and frequent prognathism. The territory of the various people within the Nigritian group can be defined as[Pg 444] follows: to the north, a wavy line that initially extends from the mouth of the Senegal to the great bend of the Niger, then closely follows the fourteenth parallel towards the Bahr-el-Ghazal and the Nile; to the south, the coastline of the Gulf of Guinea up to the Cameroons, then the mountain ranges of Adamawa and the seventh degree of northern latitude, stretching to the areas inhabited by the Fulah-Zandeh peoples, and further east to the upper Nile basin. This basin forms the eastern boundary, while the Atlantic Ocean clearly marks the western limit.[507]

Among the Nigritians we also class the Tibus or Tedas of the country of Tibesti, which extends in the midst of the Sahara between the encampments of the Tuareg on the west and the Libyan desert on the east. But it is a population already much mixed with Berber and Arab elements.[508]

Among the Nigeriens, we also include the Tibus or Tedas from the region of Tibesti, located in the heart of the Sahara between the camps of the Tuareg to the west and the Libyan desert to the east. However, this population is already significantly mixed with Berber and Arab influences.[508]

The Nigritian group maybe divided into four great sections: a, the Nigritians of the Eastern Sudan (Anglo-Egyptian) or Nilotic Negroes; b, those of the Central Sudan (French), that is to say the Hausa-Wadai group, with the Tibu already mentioned; c, the Nigritians of the Western Sudan (French) and the Senegal; lastly, d, the Nigritians of the coast or Negroes of Guinea.

The Nigritian group can be divided into four main sections: a, the Nigritians of the Eastern Sudan (Anglo-Egyptian) or Nilotic Negroes; b, those of the Central Sudan (French), which includes the Hausa-Wadai group, along with the previously mentioned Tibu; c, the Nigritians of the Western Sudan (French) and Senegal; and finally, d, the Nigritians of the coast or Negroes of Guinea.

a. The Nigritians of the Eastern Sudan or Nilotic Negroes speak various dialects having a certain relationship, and brought together under the name of “Nilotic” languages. These populations are Negroes in every acceptation of the word, except the not uncommon instances where they are intermingled with the Ethiopians (chiefly in the east) or with the Arabo-Berbers (principally in the north). Thus the Nuba and the Funje of Fazokl are connected by several facial characteristics to the Ethiopians; they have besides even adopted a Hamitic dialect, just as the Negroes of Kordofan, intermixed[Pg 445] with the Arabs, have exchanged their language for the Semitic mode of speech. The Negroes of Darfur (the Furs or Furava and the Dajo), of high stature, and very black (Nachtigal), are much purer; they speak a Nilotic-Negro dialect. In the west of the country they are mixed with the Fulahs, and Arab tribes surround them on all sides. The predominant race is descended from pure Arabs established first in Tunis, who achieved the conquest of Darfur only in the nineteenth century.[509] To the south-east of Darfur, separated from this country by the encampments of the Bahr-el-Huer or Bagarra, Arabised Nilotes, dwell other Nilotics of a well-marked negro type. These are, first, the Nuers of the right bank, and the Shilluks (about a million) of the left bank of the Bahr-el-Ghazal from Mechra-et-Reg to Fashoda; then the Dinka, Denka, or Jangha (about a million) of the low country watered by the right-hand tributaries of the Bahr-el-Ghazal, and by the Bahr-el-Jebel or Upper Nile. All these tribes are shepherds, sometimes also fishers or husbandmen.

a. The people of Eastern Sudan, also known as the Nilotic Black people, speak various dialects that are related and grouped together as “Nilotic” languages. These groups are Black in every sense of the word, except in cases where they mix with Ethiopians (mainly in the east) or with Arab-Berbers (primarily in the north). For instance, the Nuba and the Funje of Fazokl share several facial traits with Ethiopians; they have even adopted a Hamitic dialect, just like the Black people of Kordofan, who have mixed with Arabs and switched their language to a Semitic one. The Black people of Darfur (the Furs or Furava and the Dajo), who are tall and very dark (Nachtigal), are much more homogenous; they speak a Nilotic-Black dialect. In the western part of the country, they are mixed with the Fulahs, and Arab tribes surround them completely. The dominant population descends from pure Arabs who initially settled in Tunis and conquered Darfur in the nineteenth century.[509] To the south-east of Darfur, separated from this region by the camps of the Bahr-el-Huer or Bagarra, Arabized Nilotes, reside other Nilotic groups with distinct Black characteristics. These include, first, the Nuers on the right bank, and the Shilluks (about a million) on the left bank of the Bahr-el-Ghazal from Mechra-et-Reg to Fashoda; followed by the Dinka, Denka, or Jangha (about a million) from the lowlands nourished by the right-hand tributaries of the Bahr-el-Ghazal and the Bahr-el-Jebel or Upper Nile. All these tribes are herders, sometimes also fishing or farming.

The upper valleys of the right-hand tributaries of the Bahr-el-Ghazal are occupied by the Bongo Negroes, divided into several tribes: Moru, Mittu, Bongo (said to be steatopygous). Slightly blent with the Ethiopians, they have an almost red skin, of the colour of the soil of their country, impregnated with ore. They are accomplished smiths and good agriculturists. Between the Bongo of the west, the Dinkas of the north, and the Niloto-Ethiopian tribes like the Latuka of the east, there are established in the country traversed by the Bahr-el-Jebel the Nilotic Negroes called Bari. As to the upper basin of the Bahr-el-Jebel, it is occupied by the Madi (not to be confounded with the A-Madi of the Welle), the Shueli or Shuli (whose speech connects them with the Shilluks), and the Luri, who are, like the Dinka and Shilluks, true representatives of the Negro race. Very tall and slim, they resemble, with their long limbs, the wading birds of the marshes whose approaches they inhabit; for the most part their head is elongated and com[Pg 446]pressed, the forehead retreating, their skin is black, and they are blubber-lipped; the face is the prognathous face of the Negroes, such as, in accordance with convention, they used generally to be represented. They are settled cattle-breeders and tillers of the soil.[510]

The upper valleys of the right-hand tributaries of the Bahr-el-Ghazal are home to the Bongo people, who are divided into several tribes: Moru, Mittu, and Bongo (said to have pronounced steatopygia). Somewhat mixed with Ethiopians, they possess a nearly reddish skin tone, similar to the color of their soil, which is rich in ore. They are skilled blacksmiths and good farmers. Between the Bongo in the west, the Dinkas in the north, and Niloto-Ethiopian tribes like the Latuka in the east, the Nilotic people known as Bari are found in the region crossed by the Bahr-el-Jebel. In the upper basin of the Bahr-el-Jebel, the territory is inhabited by the Madi (not to be confused with the A-Madi of the Welle), the Shueli or Shuli (whose language connects them with the Shilluks), and the Luri, who, like the Dinka and Shilluks, are true representatives of the Negro race. They are very tall and slim and resemble the wading birds of the marshes where they live, with long limbs. Generally, their heads are elongated and compressed, their foreheads are receding, their skin is black, and they have thick lips; their faces reflect the prognathous characteristics commonly associated with Negroes. They are settled cattle herders and farmers.[510]

b. The Nigritians of Central Sudan present almost the same type as the Nilotes. Such, for instance, are the Negroes of Wadai (the Tama, the Massalits) and of Baghirmi (the Barmaghé), or at least those among them who have remained free from intermixture, either with the Fulahs or the Arabs. As much cannot be said of the nomadic Tibu or Teda of Tibesti (p. 444), nor of their neighbours the Kanem, to the north of Lake Chad, and the Kanuri of Bornu and of the north of Adamawa, who closely resemble them, but who are tillers of the soil. The great nation of the Hausas prevails in the region situated between the Benue, Bornu, the middle course of the Niger, and Sahara (Sokoto, etc.); it extends even farther, into Adamawa. Their language has become the language of commerce in those parts of the country limited by the bend of the Niger, into which Fulah has not yet penetrated; it extends also into Bornu and Adamawa to the east, and into the country of the Mossi and the Kong to the west. The Hausa nation comprises a large number of peoples and tribes, with a greater or lesser Arab and Fulah intermixture, among whom also should probably be classed the Sara and their near relatives the Tumok between the Shari and the Logone. The Sara are distinguished by tall stature (average 1 m. 77, according to Maistre), very dark colour, and globular head (average cephalic index on the living subject, 82).[511]

b. The Nigritians of Central Sudan are almost identical to the Nilotes. This includes the Negroes of Wadai (the Tama, the Massalits) and Baghirmi (the Barmaghé), particularly those who haven't mixed with the Fulahs or the Arabs. The same can't be said for the nomadic Tibu or Teda of Tibesti (p. 444), nor for their neighbors, the Kanem, to the north of Lake Chad, and the Kanuri of Bornu and northern Adamawa, who closely resemble them but are farmers. The large Hausa nation dominates the area between the Benue, Bornu, the middle Niger, and the Sahara (Sokoto, etc.); it stretches further into Adamawa. Their language has become the trade language in the regions bounded by the Niger bend, where Fulah hasn't yet reached; it also spreads into Bornu and Adamawa to the east and into the land of the Mossi and Kong to the west. The Hausa nation includes many people and tribes, with varying degrees of Arab and Fulah mix, including the Sara and their close relatives, the Tumok, between the Shari and Logone rivers. The Sara are known for their tall height (average 1 minute. 77, according to Maistre), very dark skin, and round head shape (average cephalic index for living subjects, 82).[511]

c. The Nigritians of Western Sudan and of Senegal.—This[Pg 447] group, going from east to west, comprises: 1st, various mixed tribes, dwelling between the Niger and the basin of the upper Black Volta; 2nd, the Mandé or Mandingan peoples; 3rd, the Toucouleur; and, 4th, the Wolofs.

c. The Nigritians of Western Sudan and of Senegal.—This[Pg 447] group, moving from east to west, includes: 1st, various mixed tribes living between the Niger and the upper Black Volta basin; 2nd, the Mandé or Mandingan peoples; 3rd, the Toucouleur; and, 4th, the Wolofs.

1st. The peoples living between the Hausa on the east and the Mandingans on the west are still little known, and seem to be much mixed. Quite to the north, in the bend of the Niger, below Timbuctoo, are found the Songhai or Sonrhays, who speak a language apart, and in the north are mixed with the Ruma “Moors,” emigrants from Morocco, and in the south with the Fulahs. To the south of their territory live the Tombo, partly speaking Mandé, and the Mossi, whose language also has affinities with Mandé. To the north of Wagadugu, the Mossi, interblent with the Fulahs, speak their language, while south of this town, they are of purer type and have a knowledge of the Hausa dialect. To the east of the Mossi, in the region of the sources of the White Volta, live the Gurma; while the upper basin of this river, as well as that of the Red Volta, is occupied by the Gurunga who previously formed the Grussi (or Gurunssi?)[512] state. Farther to the south, in the territory made neutral by a treaty between Germany and England, are found the Dagomba, the Mampursi, and their congeners the Gonja; these last, whose centre is at Salaga, have exchanged their primitive language for “Guang,” which appears to be a dialect of the Ashanti tongue (Binger). In commercial relations they employ also the Hausa and sometimes the Mandé and Fulah languages, just as do the Dagomba and the Gurunga. The Bariba, natives of Borgu, the hinterland of Dahomey, have affinities with peoples we have just enumerated.

1st. The people living between the Hausa to the east and the Mandingans to the west are still not very well known and seem to be quite mixed. Further north, in the bend of the Niger River, just below Timbuktu, are the Songhai or Sonrhays, who speak a distinct language. In the north, they mix with the Ruma "Moors," who are immigrants from Morocco, and in the south with the Fulahs. To the south of their area live the Tombo, who partially speak Mandé, and the Mossi, whose language also has similarities with Mandé. North of Wagadugu, the Mossi, who blend with the Fulahs, speak their language, while south of this town, they are of a purer type and have knowledge of the Hausa dialect. To the east of the Mossi, in the area near the sources of the White Volta, live the Gurma; meanwhile, the upper basin of this river, along with that of the Red Volta, is occupied by the Gurunga, who were previously part of the Grussi (or Gurunssi?)[512] state. Further south, in the area made neutral by a treaty between Germany and England, are the Dagomba, the Mampursi, and their relatives, the Gonja; the Gonja, whose center is at Salaga, have adopted “Guang,” which seems to be a dialect of the Ashanti language (Binger). In trade, they also use Hausa and sometimes Mandé and Fulah, just like the Dagomba and the Gurunga. The Bariba, natives of Borgu, the region behind Dahomey, share similarities with the peoples we just described.

Bonna M’Bané, Mandingan-Sossé

FIG. 140.—Bonna M’Bané, Mandingan-Sossé;
height, 1 m. 74; ceph. ind., 74.7; nasal index, 102.
(Phot. Collignon.)

FIG. 140.—Bonna M’Bané, Mandingan-Sossé;
height, 1 minute. 74; ceph. ind., 74.7; nasal index, 102.
(Phot. Collignon.)

2nd. The Mandé, Mandingan,[513] or better Mandénké (the word[Pg 448] nké signifying “people” in the Mandé language) form a compact linguistic group whose domain extends from the Senegal and Upper Niger to that portion of the West African coast comprised between Saint Louis and Monrovia. The domain of the Mandé language extends much farther to the east than the territory of the Mandénké peoples properly so called; it encircles Timbuctoo, the countries of the Gurma and the Diumma, where it competes with the dialect of the Fulahs, and encroaches even on the domain of the Dogomba and the Gonja (to the north of Salaga), where the Hausa speech prevails. The Mandénké properly so called includes a large number of tribes, which may be divided into two great clans: the Bamma or Bambara, whose “tenné” or totem is the crocodile, and the Malinké (hippopotamus totem). The Mandénké are Mussulmans, except the clan Bamma or Bambara of the basin of the upper Niger, which has remained fetichist. Related to the Mandénké, according to their dialects, are the Soninké of the interior and many other populations of[Pg 449] the coast of Senegal. The Soninké or Sarakolés[514] inhabit the right bank of the Senegal, above Matam and the margins of the Niger, and below the Bamako as far as the vicinity of Timbuctoo; they are crossed with the Torodo, Bambaras, and Fulahs. As to the populations of the coasts, the following, proceeding from north to south, are the chief.[515] First, the Diola,[516] between Casamanze and the Gambia, who have remained fetichist. They are tall (1 m. 70) and dolichocephalic (cephalic index, 74.5 according to Collignon and Deniker). The principal tribe, that of the Felups, has imposed its dialect on all the others. To the south of the Diola are the Balantes and the Bagnoris, a bellicose and turbulent people; the Papels, one of the tribes of which, the Mandjacks, is the most in harmony with its masters, the Portuguese; the Bujagos of the Bissagos islands; the Biafares, the Nalus, the Landumans, fetichists of Rio Nunez, having affinities with the Hausa; finally, the Baga of the Compong delta, half-savage fishers, fetichist like the two preceding, but of much fairer skin and more pacific.[517] To the south of the Pongo river are met the Sussus or Sossé (Fig. 140), driven from Futa-Jallon by the Fulahs. Their language is spoken fluently in French Guinea, and even among the Nalus and Landumans. To the south of Mellacory, in Sierra Leone, the Timni take the place of the Sussus; then come the Vei or Way, who extend as far as Monrovia; alone among Negroes, they appear to possess a special mode of writing. All the Mandé peoples bear a strong likeness to each other in physical type (high stature, 1 m. 70, dolichocephalic, colour black, etc.), and the different tribes are only to be distinguished by tattooings and other signs of an ethnographic kind, and by their dialects.[518]

2nd. The Mandé, Mandingan,[513] or more accurately Mandénké (the word[Pg 448] nké means “people” in the Mandé language) make up a tight-knit linguistic group whose area stretches from Senegal and the Upper Niger to the part of the West African coast between Saint Louis and Monrovia. The Mandé language area extends much further east than the actual territory of the Mandénké peoples; it surrounds Timbuktu, the regions of Gurma and Diumma, where it competes with the Fulah dialect, and even overlaps into the territory of the Dogomba and Gonja (north of Salaga), where Hausa is dominant. The true Mandénké includes many tribes, which can be grouped into two main clans: the Bamma or Bambara, with the crocodile as their “tenné” or totem, and the Malinké (who have the hippopotamus as their totem). The Mandénké are Muslims, except the Bamma or Bambara tribe along the upper Niger, which has remained fetichist. Related to the Mandénké, based on their dialects, are the Soninké from the interior and several other communities on[Pg 449] the Senegal coast. The Soninké or Sarakolés[514] live on the right bank of the Senegal River, above Matam and along the Niger, and below Bamako as far as the area near Timbuktu; they intermingle with the Torodo, Bambaras, and Fulahs. On the coasts, the main groups moving from north to south are as follows:[515] First, the Diola,[516] situated between Casamanze and the Gambia, who have largely maintained their fetichist beliefs. They are tall (around 1.70 m) and dolichocephalic (cephalic index of 74.5 according to Collignon and Deniker). The leading tribe, the Felups, have influenced the dialects of the other tribes. South of the Diola are the Balantes and the Bagnoris, a fierce and unruly group; then the Papels, one of whose tribes, the Mandjacks, is the most integrated with their Portuguese rulers; the Bujagos from the Bissagos Islands; the Biafares, the Nalus, the Landumans, who are fetichists of Rio Nunez and have connections with the Hausa; and lastly, the Baga from the Compong delta, who are semi-wild fishers and are fetichist like the two preceding groups, but have lighter skin and are more peaceful.[517] South of the Pongo River are the Sussus or Sossé (Fig. 140), who were displaced from Futa-Jallon by the Fulahs. Their language is widely spoken in French Guinea, and even among the Nalus and Landumans. To the south of Mellacory in Sierra Leone, the Timni replace the Sussus; then come the Vei or Way, who reach as far as Monrovia; uniquely among Black populations, they seem to have a special writing system. All the Mandé peoples share a strong physical resemblance (tall stature, approximately 1.70 m, black skin, etc.), and the various tribes are distinguished mainly by their tattoos and other ethnographic markers, as well as their dialects.[518]

3rd. The Toucouleur or Torodo, regarded by some as Fulahs intermixed with Wolofs (see below), inhabit the left bank of the Senegal, from Dagana to Medine. They are to be found also in the Segu Sikoro country and in the basin of the upper Niger, in the midst of the Soninké and Fulah shepherds, to whom these agricultural populations are subject. The Toucouleur are tall (1 m. 73), and very dolichocephalic (ceph. ind. on living subject, 73.8).

3rd. The Toucouleur or Torodo, considered by some to be Fulahs mixed with Wolofs (see below), live along the left bank of the Senegal, from Dagana to Medine. They can also be found in the Segu Sikoro area and in the upper Niger basin, surrounded by Soninké and Fulah shepherds, to whom these farming communities are accountable. The Toucouleur are tall (1 minute. 73) and have very long heads (ceph. ind. on living subject, 73.8).

4th. The Yolofs, Wolofs, or Jolofs of Lower Senegal, with their congeners the Leybu and the Serers of Lower Gambia, are perhaps the most black of all Negroes; these are distinguished by tall stature (1 m. 73, according to Collignon, Deniker, and Verneau), and by moderate dolichocephaly (index on the living sub., 75.2). Their language is very widespread in Senegal and Guinea, for they are good merchants as well as tillers of the soil.[519]

4th. The Yolofs, Wolofs, or Jolofs of Lower Senegal, along with their related groups the Leybu and the Serers of Lower Gambia, are possibly the darkest-skinned among all Africans. They are characterized by their tall height (about 1.73 m, according to Collignon, Deniker, and Verneau) and by a moderate head shape (index on living subjects, 75.2). Their language is widely spoken in Senegal and Guinea, as they are skilled merchants as well as farmers.[519]

d. The Littoral Nigritians or Guineans occupy all the coast of Guinea from Monrovia to the Cameroons, and exhibit a great uniformity of physical type. Less tall, in general, than the Senegalese and the western Sudanese, the head is more elongated and the complexion fairer. Notwithstanding this uniformity, they are divided into several tribes, which, according to their linguistic affinities, may be grouped into five great sections.

d. The Littoral Nigritians or Guineans live along the entire coast of Guinea from Monrovia to the Cameroons, showing a high degree of physical similarity. Generally shorter than the Senegalese and the western Sudanese, they have longer heads and lighter complexions. Despite this uniformity, they are split into several tribes, which can be categorized into five main groups based on their language connections.

1. First, the tribes speaking the various dialects of the Kru language—that is to say, Kru properly so called or Krumen, Bassa in Liberia, and Grebo in French Guinea (to the east of Cape Palmas).

1. First, the tribes speaking the different dialects of the Kru language—specifically, the Kru people or Krumen, Bassa in Liberia, and Grebo in French Guinea (east of Cape Palmas).

The Kru are less tall (1 m. 69), less dark, but more hairy than the Senegalese; the head barely dolichocephalic (75.1 ceph. index on living subject).[520] Of all Negroes these are the[Pg 451] best factory workers, the best man-of-war’s men and ordinary seamen. They are obedient, faithful, and courageous; they enter readily into engagements, and make a fair bargain. They retain in their hands a good part of the trade of their country.[521]

The Kru are shorter (1 min. 69), lighter-skinned, but hairier than the Senegalese; their heads are not very long (75.1 cephalic index in living subjects).[520] Of all Black people, they are the[Pg 451] best factory workers, the best sailors, and regular seamen. They are obedient, loyal, and brave; they readily enter into agreements and make fair deals. They hold a significant portion of their country's trade.[521]

2. To the east of the Grebo, between San Pedro and Apollonia, live people speaking different dialects of the Agni language. These are the Assinians or Okin (stature, 1 m. 75), the Agni of Krinjabo or Sanwy (Fig. 9), the Apollonians or Zemma, the handsomest of the Negroes, who formerly furnished to Brazil its thousands of slaves; finally, the Pai-pi-bri, between San Pedro and Lahu, whom Admiral Fleuriot de Langle took for a white race. These Negroes are really of a bronzed tint, much fairer than, for example, the Okin. Other somatic traits (projecting nose, lips not thrust out, etc.), as well as ethnic traits (bark clothing, etc.), together with the recent arrival in the country of the Pai-pi-bri, have led it to be thought that they have a kinship with the Zandeh peoples.[522] Their neighbours to the east, the Jack-Jack or Jacks, live opposite Dabu, on a narrow tongue of land separating the lagoon from the sea; they call themselves Awekwom, and speak, like their Ebrié and Attié neighbours, a dialect of the Tshi language. They are excellent traders, nearly all knowing English.

2. To the east of the Grebo, between San Pedro and Apollonia, people speak various dialects of the Agni language. These include the Assinians or Okin (height, 1 minute. 75), the Agni of Krinjabo or Sanwy (Fig. 9), the Apollonians or Zemma, who are considered the most attractive among Black people and once supplied Brazil with thousands of slaves; finally, the Pai-pi-bri, located between San Pedro and Lahu, whom Admiral Fleuriot de Langle mistook for a white race. These Black people actually have a bronzed skin tone, much lighter than, for example, the Okin. Other physical traits (like a prominent nose, lips that are not protruding, etc.) along with cultural traits (like bark clothing, etc.) and the recent arrival of the Pai-pi-bri in the area have led people to believe they are related to the Zandeh groups.[522] Their neighbors to the east, the Jack-Jack or Jacks, live across from Dabu on a narrow strip of land that separates the lagoon from the sea; they refer to themselves as Awekwom and, like their Ebrié and Attié neighbors, speak a dialect of the Tshi language. They are great traders, with nearly all of them knowing English.

3. But the Awekwom and their congeners form only a linguistic parish in the Agni country. The true domain of the populations speaking the languages of the Tshi or Ochi family begins only on the east of Apollonia. In the interior are encountered the Ashanti and Ton shepherds and tillers—that is to say in the ancient kingdom of Ashanti (now an English possession),—and the Fanti traders on the coast, in the region of Elmina.[523]

3. But the Awekwom and their relatives make up just a linguistic group in the Agni region. The actual area where people speak languages from the Tshi or Ochi family begins only to the east of Apollonia. In the interior, you can find the Ashanti and Ton shepherds and farmers—that is, in the former kingdom of Ashanti (now a British territory)—and the Fanti traders along the coast, in the Elmina area.[523]

The Accredians of the coast, between the town of Accra and the mouth of the Volta, formed a mixed population whose language is not yet classed.

The Accredians along the coast, between the town of Accra and the mouth of the Volta, made up a diverse population whose language is still not classified.

4. The Volta provides the approximate limit between the Tshi tongues and the Evé or Ewe dialects. The bulk of the people speaking Ewe occupy the German colony of Togo and the west of the French colony of Dahomey. In this group are distinguished six dialectic families: The Anlo or Anglo of the coast between the Volta and Togo, whose dialect is the best known; the Krépis, mountaineers of the Akposso, to the north of the preceding, who speak the Anfueh language; the Ana, of Atakpamé; the Fon or Fawins, better known as Dahomese, to the east of the Anlo and Krépis, who speak the Jeji or Jege dialect; the Ewe properly so called, or Henhué, to the north of the preceding, especially around the town of Wida (Glé-ewé, “land of the Ewes”); lastly, the Mahi or Maki, entirely to the north, speaking the purest Ewe dialect, and coming, as they say, from the banks of the Niger.[524]

4. The Volta River marks the rough boundary between the Tshi languages and the Evé or Ewe dialects. Most people who speak Ewe live in the German colony of Togo and the western part of the French colony of Dahomey. This group includes six main dialect families: The Anlo or Anglo along the coast between the Volta and Togo, whose dialect is the most well-known; the Krépis, mountain dwellers from Akposso, located to the north of the Anlo, who speak the Anfueh language; the Ana from Atakpamé; the Fon or Fawins, commonly referred to as Dahomese, to the east of the Anlo and Krépis, who speak the Jeji or Jege dialect; the Ewe, or Henhué, to the north of the Fon, particularly around the town of Wida (Glé-ewé, “land of the Ewes”); and finally, the Mahi or Maki, completely to the north, who speak the purest Ewe dialect and claim to originate from the banks of the Niger.[524]

e. The River Wami separates in the east the Ewes from the peoples speaking the Yoruba tongues, and who are, from west to east: the Egba or Ikba of the Abeokuta country, the Nago of Porto Novo, the Ikelu and the Jebu of Lagos. The Yoruba originally occupied all the region comprised between the Slave Coast and to about the ninth latitude N.; but they have been driven back towards the coast and into the east by the Ewe peoples, who, towards the beginning of the eighteenth century, invaded the present country of the Dahomese, and later (in 1772), the Togo and the ancient kingdoms of Porto Novo and Wida (formerly Juida). In this last the Jege or Fon (of Ewe stock) have imposed their dominion on the Nagos (of Yoruba stock). Most of the Nagos have been reduced to slavery; they, together with the Mina, emigrants from Ashanti, formed, while the slave-trade flourished, the bulk of the black cargoes consigned to Brazil.[525]

e. The River Wami separates the Ewes in the east from the Yoruba-speaking people, who, from west to east, include the Egba or Ikba from the Abeokuta area, the Nago from Porto Novo, and the Ikelu and Jebu from Lagos. The Yoruba once occupied all the land stretching from the Slave Coast to about the ninth latitude N., but they have been pushed back towards the coast and into the east by the Ewe people, who invaded what is now Dahomey in the early eighteenth century, and later (in 1772) Togo, along with the old kingdoms of Porto Novo and Wida (formerly Juida). In Wida, the Jege or Fon (of Ewe descent) have taken control over the Nagos (of Yoruba descent). Most of the Nagos have been captured and enslaved; they, along with the Mina, who are migrants from Ashanti, made up the majority of the black cargoes sent to Brazil during the peak of the slave trade.[525]

The Ewes and the Yorubas are shorter in stature (1 m. 64 and 1 m. 65) than Nigritians in general, and are often brachycephalic or mesocephalic. These two characters, combined with the comparatively fair colour of the skin, observed by all travellers, and the great development of the pilous system, are, I consider, sufficiently indicative of the presence in these people of Negrillo elements, of which I shall presently speak.[526]

The Ewes and the Yorubas are shorter in height (1 min. 64 and 1 min. 65) compared to most Nigritians and usually have broader or average-shaped heads. These features, along with the relatively lighter skin color noted by travelers and the significant hair growth, suggest to me that these people have some Negrillo ancestry, which I will discuss shortly.[526]

The Protectorate of the Niger coast and the delta of this river are occupied by populations related to the Yorubas, but much intermixed. The Benin, in the interior, whose kingdom, where human sacrifices were much in vogue, has lately been destroyed by the English; then on the coast the active-trading Jakris tribe, the Bonky and the Calabaris, who formerly furnished so many slaves; finally, the Idzo or Ijos, of the delta of the Niger, divided into several tribes—Brass, Patani, etc., good ship-builders, but very turbulent,—who have attacked time after time the settlements of the Niger Company.[527] In the interior of the territory of this Company are found the Igbera, mountaineers, forming several independent little states (about a million and a half individuals) between Adimpa on the lower Niger and Sakun on the middle Niger, as well as on the Benue, and sub-divided into “Sima” of the towns and “Panda” of the forests. Their neighbours the Igara, speaking Yoruba, occupy the left bank of the Niger and lower Benue, where they are more or less subdued, while in the interior they remain wild hunters. In the Cameroons, the Bantu, like the Dualas and the Bakokos, have driven into hinterland the Bobondi, Buyala, and other Nigritian tribes.

The Niger coast and delta are home to populations connected to the Yorubas, but they are very mixed. The interior kingdom of Benin, known for its human sacrifices, has recently been destroyed by the British. Along the coast, there are the trade-focused Jakris tribe, as well as the Bonky and Calabaris, who used to supply many slaves. Lastly, the Idzo or Ijos live in the Niger delta, divided into several tribes—like Brass and Patani. They are skilled shipbuilders but quite restless, having repeatedly attacked the settlements of the Niger Company.[527] In the interior of this Company’s territory, the Igbera people, who are mountaineers, form several independent small states (about one and a half million people) between Adimpa on the lower Niger and Sakun on the middle Niger, as well as along the Benue River. They are divided into “Sima” for towns and “Panda” for forests. Their neighbors, the Igara, who speak Yoruba, occupy the left bank of the Niger and lower Benue, where they are more or less under control, while in the interior they remain wild hunters. In the Cameroons, the Bantu, such as the Dualas and Bakokos, have pushed the Bobondi, Buyala, and other Nigritian tribes further into the hinterland.

V. The Negrilloes.[528]—The pigmy black populations are dispersed over a large zone extending from three degrees north and south of the equator, across the entire African continent, from Uganda to the Gabun. The Akkas or Tiky-Tiky of the upper Nile and of the country of the Niam-Niam, the Afiffi of the country of the Momfu (between Kibali and Ituri), the Wambutti of the Ituri, the Watwa or Batua living to the south of the great curve of the Congo and the valleys of its tributaries on the right, the Chuapa-Bussera and the Lomami, the O-Bongo (plural Ba-Bongo), the Akua, the Achango of the French Congo, the Boyaeli and Bayago of the Cameroons, the Ba-Bengaye of Sanga, are the principal rings of this chain of dwarf peoples stretched between the region of the great lakes and the Atlantic ocean. But Negrilloes have also been noted outside these limits. Without stopping to consider the evidence of the traveller Mollien (1818), who speaks of dwarfs in the Tenda-Maië country, near the sources of the Niger, where modern explorers have never met with anything of the kind, we may, however, bring together a certain amount of serious testimony to the existence of dwarfs in the basin of the upper Kasai, as well as more to the east, as far as Lake Tanganyika, and lastly to the north of the Lakes Stefanie and Rudolf (English East Africa), near the borders of Kaffa, 7° latitude north, where pigmies have been described by older travellers under the name[Pg 455] of Dogbo, and where, in 1896, they were indeed discovered by D. Smith. They call themselves Dumes, are about 1 m. 50 (4 ft. 11 in.) in height, and resemble other pigmy tribes. According to Schlichter, other tribes of short stature live more to the north, in Kaffa and Shoa: the Bonno, the Aro, and the Mala; these last two are probably the same tribes as those spoken of by the old explorers, D’Abadie and L. des Avranches, under the name of Areya and Maléa.

V. The Negrilloes.[528]—The tiny black populations are spread out over a large area that stretches from three degrees north and south of the equator across the entire African continent, from Uganda to Gabon. The Akkas or Tiky-Tiky near the upper Nile and in the Niam-Niam region, the Afiffi of the Momfu area (between Kibali and Ituri), the Wambutti of Ituri, the Watwa or Batua who live south of the great bend of the Congo and along the valleys of its tributaries on the right, the Chuapa-Bussera and the Lomami, the O-Bongo (plural Ba-Bongo), the Akua, the Achango of French Congo, and the Boyaeli and Bayago from Cameroon, as well as the Ba-Bengaye of Sanga, make up the main groups of this chain of dwarf peoples that stretches between the Great Lakes region and the Atlantic Ocean. However, Negrilloes have also been reported outside of these boundaries. Without delving into the account by traveler Mollien (1818), who mentions dwarfs in the Tenda-Maië area near the Niger origins, where modern explorers have found no evidence of them, we can gather some credible accounts of the existence of dwarfs in the upper Kasai basin, and further east, as far as Lake Tanganyika, and to the north of Lakes Stefanie and Rudolf (in English East Africa), near the borders of Kaffa, at 7° latitude north, where earlier travelers referred to them as Dogbo, and where they were indeed found by D. Smith in 1896. They call themselves Dumes, are about 1 min. 50 (4 ft. 11 inches.) tall, and resemble other pygmy tribes. According to Schlichter, other short-statured tribes can be found further north in Kaffa and Shoa: the Bonno, the Aro, and the Mala; the last two are likely the same tribes mentioned by earlier explorers, D’Abadie and L. des Avranches, as Areya and Maléa.

According to Stuhlmann, the populations of the upper basin of the Ituri are a blend of Pigmies with Bantus (the Vambuba, the Vallessi), or with Nilotes (the Momfu).

According to Stuhlmann, the people in the upper basin of the Ituri are a mix of Pygmies with Bantus (the Vambuba, the Vallessi) or with Nilotes (the Momfu).

Several authors confound in one group of Pigmies the Negrilloes and the Bushmen. Nothing, however, justifies their unification. The colour of the skin in Bushmen is a fawn yellow, while in Negrilloes it is that of a chocolate tablet or of coffee slightly roasted; the hair of the former is black and tufted, while the hair of the latter is like extended fleece and often of a more or less light brown. The face of the Bushman is lozenge-shaped, the cheeks are prominent, and the eyes are often narrowed and oblique, which traits are not met with at all in Pigmies. Steatopygy (see p. 4041), a special trait of the Bushman race, has not been noted among Negrilloes, except in individual cases among the women, and to a less degree than among Bushmen, as, for example, is proved by the two portraits of Akka women published by Stuhlmann. At the same time the profile of the sub-nasal space, always convex in the Akkas according to Stuhlmann, is often to be observed among Bushmen. Thus, therefore, a slight degree of steatopygy in individual cases and the profile of the sub-nasal space would be the sole characters connecting the two races. In support of this connection, shortness of stature has also been adduced.

Several authors group Negrilloes and Bushmen together as one type of Pygmy. However, there's no reason to combine them. Bushmen have a fawn yellow skin tone, while Negrilloes have skin that resembles chocolate or lightly roasted coffee; the Bushmen typically have black, tufted hair, whereas the Negrilloes have hair that is like extended fleece, often in a light brown shade. Bushman faces are diamond-shaped with prominent cheeks, and their eyes are often narrow and slanted, features that are completely absent in Pygmies. Steatopygia (see p. 4041) is a distinctive trait of the Bushman race that has not been widely noted in Negrilloes, except in a few instances among women, and even then, it's less pronounced than in Bushmen, as shown by the two portraits of Akka women published by Stuhlmann. Additionally, the profile of the sub-nasal space, which is always convex in Akkas according to Stuhlmann, can often be seen in Bushmen. Therefore, a slight degree of steatopygia in some cases and the shape of the sub-nasal profile would be the only characteristics linking the two races. Short stature has also been mentioned as a point of connection.

At first sight this last appears feasible, but rigorous measurements on a sufficient number of subjects are still lacking. In the various series of Bushmen the figures vary from 1 m. 37 to 1 m. 57, and in those of Negrilloes from 1 m. 36 to 1 m. 51. These figures, however, are based on only from 3 to 6 individuals, except in three cases: a series of 50 Bushmen[Pg 456] of Kalahari, measured by Schinz, which gives the average height as 1 m. 57—that is to say, the same as the Japanese or Annamese; another series of 30 Akkas (by Emin Pasha) giving an average height of 1 m. 36; and a third series of 98 Watwas (by Wolff) giving an average of 1 m. 42.[529] On comparing these three large series, the only ones deserving attention, a difference of 0 m. 18 (7 inches) in height in favour of Bushmen is shown. As to the cranial form, it varies also. Notwithstanding the paucity of documents, it may be said that the Negrilloes are, in general, sub-dolichocephalic or mesocephalic (average index of 9 living subjects, 79.7); while Bushmen are undoubtedly dolichocephalic (average index of 11 living men, 75.8). Let me add in conclusion that the Negrilloes are covered with a fairly thick down over the entire body (Emin Pasha, Yunker, Stanley, Stuhlmann), and that nothing analogous has been noted in Bushmen.

At first glance, this last point seems doable, but there still aren't enough strict measurements on a large group of subjects. Among different groups of Bushmen, the height ranges from 1 minute 37 to 1 minute 57, and for Negrilloes, it ranges from 1 minute 36 to 1 minute 51. However, these numbers are based on only 3 to 6 individuals, except for three cases: a group of 50 Bushmen[Pg 456] from Kalahari, measured by Schinz, which averages 1 minute 57—same as the Japanese or Annamese; another group of 30 Akkas (by Emin Pasha) averaging 1 minute 36; and a third group of 98 Watwas (by Wolff) averaging 1 minute 42.[529] Comparing these three larger groups, the only ones worth noting, there is a height difference of 0m 18 (7 inches) favoring the Bushmen. As for head shape, it varies too. Despite the lack of documents, it's fair to say that Negrilloes are generally sub-dolichocephalic or mesocephalic (average index of 9 living subjects is 79.7), while Bushmen are definitely dolichocephalic (average index of 11 living men is 75.8). In conclusion, I should add that Negrilloes have a fairly thick down covering their entire body (Emin Pasha, Yunker, Stanley, Stuhlmann), and there haven't been any similar observations noted in Bushmen.

The Negrilloes live in the midst of other peoples (Bantus, Nilotes, etc.), either as isolated individuals (for the most part slaves) or in little groups (up to about 800 individuals), hidden in the deepest thickets. These little hunters have established a sort of modus vivendi with the agricultural populations surrounding them: they exchange with them the produce of their chase, or of their gathering, for foods and objects in metal; they also pay for the protection of their powerful neighbours by doing service, for the benefit of the latter, as clearers of the forest, where it is a critical matter to meet them on account of their arrows, poisoned with the juice of a certain Aroidea, or with certain putrid animal matters derived especially from the ant. The bow and arrows which they use are the same as those of their protectors, only proportioned to their stature.

The Negrilloes live among other groups (Bantus, Nilotes, etc.), either as isolated individuals (mostly slaves) or in small groups (up to about 800 people), hidden in the thickest forests. These small hunters have created a kind of modus vivendi with the agricultural communities around them: they trade the goods from their hunting or gathering for food and metal items. They also pay for protection from their powerful neighbors by providing services, like clearing the forest, where it's crucial to avoid them because of their arrows, which are poisoned with the juice from a particular Aroidea, or with decaying animal matter, especially from ants. The bows and arrows they use are similar to those of their protectors, just adjusted for their size.

Catrai, Ganguela-Bantu

FIG. 141.—Catrai, Ganguela-Bantu;
height, 1 m. 73; ceph. ind., 75.8; nasal index, 107.
(Phot. Prince Roland Bonaparte.)

FIG. 141.—Catrai, Ganguela-Bantu;
height, 1 minute. 73; ceph. ind., 75.8; nasal index, 107.
(Photo by Prince Roland Bonaparte.)

VI. The Bantu group comprises the numerous peoples of Central and Southern Africa whose dialects form the Bantu[Pg 457] linguistic family, without having any analogy with the Nigritian languages. They have all an agglutinative structure, and are especially characterised by the exclusive use of prefixes. Each principal prefix indicates an entire category of objects or ideas; such a prefix is M’, Um, or Umon (according to dialect), denoting the singular; Ba, Wa, or Va, denoting the plural. Thus the root Ntu (man) united to the prefix Umon means “a man” (Umon-Ntu) and with the prefix Ba “men” (Ba-Ntu). It is superfluous to say that physically the Bantus present a great variety of types. This is due especially to intermixture with the Negrilloes and Ethiopians to the north, and with the Bushmen-Hottentots to the south. Nevertheless, there may be discerned a probably primitive type, which, while being fundamentally Negro, yet is dis[Pg 458]tinguishable from the Nigritian type. In this type the stature is generally not so high, the head less elongated, and prognathism also less; the median convexity of the brow often disappears, and the nose is more prominent and narrower.

VI. The Bantu group includes the many peoples of Central and Southern Africa whose dialects make up the Bantu[Pg 457] linguistic family, distinct from the Nigritian languages. They all have an agglutinative structure, characterized by the exclusive use of prefixes. Each main prefix indicates a whole category of objects or ideas; for instance, the prefix M’, Um, or Umon (depending on the dialect) denotes the singular, while Ba, Wa, or Va indicates the plural. So, the root Ntu (man) combined with the prefix Umon means “a man” (Umon-Ntu), and with the prefix Ba means “men” (Ba-Ntu). It's worth mentioning that physically the Bantus show a great variety of traits. This is mainly due to mixing with the Negrilloes and Ethiopians to the north, and the Bushmen-Hottentots to the south. Nevertheless, there appears to be a likely primitive type, which, although fundamentally Negro, is still distinguishable from the Nigritian type. In this type, the stature is generally shorter, the head is less elongated, and there is less prognathism. The median convexity of the brow often fades, and the nose is more prominent and narrower.

We may divide the Bantus, according to their ethnographic and linguistic characters, into three large sections: western, eastern, and southern.

We can categorize the Bantus based on their ethnic and linguistic traits into three main groups: western, eastern, and southern.

1. The territory occupied by the Western Group[530] covers almost exactly the south-east of the Cameroons, French Congo, Angola, and Belgian Congo, except those parts of these states situated to the north of the Congo. The Dwala (28,000 individuals, stature 1 m. 69; ceph. ind. 76.2, according to Zintgraff) and the Bakunda of the Cameroons, relatively civilised, are found up to the point of junction of the Bantu and Nigritian peoples, where the African coast changes its westerly direction and becomes nearly north by south. Like their neighbours of the south, the Mungos or Minihé of the north-west, and the Balongs, who live in large phalansteries, they are intermixed with Nigritian elements. East of the Dwala are found the Basas and the Bakoris; these last are notable for their spirit of solidarity, for the practice of the taboo and worship of ancestors. From the somatic point of view, a great difference is to be observed among them in the stature of men and women. Like the Dwala, they use the drum language (see p. 134). The M’Fan or Fang, called Pahuins[531] by the [Pg 459] Negroes of the Gabun, occupy the country situated between the 3rd degree of N. latitude and the Ogowe, and its right tributary the Ivindo. But it is probable that their habitat extends farther to the east, for the Botu, whom Mizon had met with in the basin of the Sanga, appeared to be of the same race. The Fans touch the sea-board of the Atlantic only at a few points. With the Gabunese (Benga, Kumbé, etc.) and the M’Pongwes of the coast (whose language, which is very rich, has been adopted by other tribes), they form almost the whole of the population of French Congo to the north of the Ogowe. It is supposed that the Fans, certain traits and manners and customs of whom recall the Zandeh, have immigrated quite recently, perhaps at the end of the last century, into their present region, coming from Upper Ubangi, where the Zandeh tribes live (see p. 441).

1. The area occupied by the Western Group[530] covers nearly the southeast part of Cameroon, French Congo, Angola, and Belgian Congo, excluding the areas of these countries located north of the Congo River. The Dwala (28,000 people, average height 1 minute. 69; ceph. ind. 76.2, as noted by Zintgraff) and the Bakunda from Cameroon, who are relatively civilized, live up to where the Bantu and Nigritian peoples meet, at the point where the African coast shifts from a westerly to almost a north-south direction. Like their southern neighbors, the Mungos or Minihé from the northwest, and the Balongs, who live in large communities, they are mixed with Nigritian elements. East of the Dwala are the Basas and the Bakoris; the latter are noted for their sense of community, as well as their practice of taboos and ancestor worship. In terms of physical appearance, there is a significant difference in the height of men and women among them. Like the Dwala, they communicate using drum language (see p. 134). The M’Fan or Fang, referred to as Pahuins[531] by the [Pg 459] people of Gabun, inhabit the region between the 3rd parallel north and the Ogowe River, including its right tributary, the Ivindo. However, it is likely that their range extends further east, as the Botu, whom Mizon encountered in the Sanga basin, seemed to belong to the same ethnic group. The Fans only touch the Atlantic coastline at a few points. Together with the Gabunese (Benga, Kumbé, etc.) and the M’Pongwes from the coast (whose rich language has been adopted by other tribes), they make up nearly the entire population of French Congo north of the Ogowe. It is believed that the Fans, whose certain traits and customs resemble those of the Zandeh, migrated fairly recently, potentially at the end of the last century, from Upper Ubangi, where the Zandeh tribes reside (see p. 441).

In the valley itself of Low Ogowe are found the Baloa or Galois, and, farther to the south, between the Muni and Sette Camma, the Bakalai or Bahélé (about 100,000 according to Wilson), former nomads, who have become carriers and merchants. Ascending the Ogowe are met successively the Apingi, the Okanda, the Aduma, the Okota, etc. All these tribes speak the same language as the islanders of Corisco, and are for the most part very tall and dolichocephalic (average stature of the Okandas 1 m. 70, and ceph. ind. on the living sub., 74.2, according to Deniker and Laloy). But there are met with also among them tribes like the Aduma, who on the contrary are short (1 m. 59) and sub-brachycephalic (ceph. ind. 80.8, according to the same authorities), which indicates intermixtures with the Negrillo race, represented in the vicinity by the Obongos or Ashangos to the east (Du Chaillu), and by the Akoas to the west (Touchard and Dybowski). The Adumas, who are slave merchants (Guiral), are good boatmen. To the south of Bakel, in the basins of the coast rivers, Rembo, Nyanga, etc., are found the Balumbo, the Bavili, on the coast, and the Ashira in the interior. The basin of the lower Kuilu or Niari is occupied partly by Mayombé and the Loango (height 1 m. 65, ceph. ind. 77.5), mixed tribes, who are[Pg 460] dispersed equally over the coast from the river Nyanga to the north to Landana to the south.

In the Low Ogowe valley, you'll find the Baloa or Galois, and further south, between the Muni and Sette Camma, the Bakalai or Bahélé (around 100,000 according to Wilson), who were once nomads but have now become carriers and merchants. As you go up the Ogowe, you'll encounter the Apingi, Okanda, Aduma, Okota, and others. All these tribes share the same language as the islanders of Corisco and are mostly very tall and dolichocephalic (average height of the Okandas is 1 min. 70, and cephalic index on living individuals is 74.2, according to Deniker and Laloy). However, some tribes, like the Aduma, are shorter (1 minute. 59) and sub-brachycephalic (cephalic index 80.8, according to the same authors), indicating some mixing with the Negrillo race, represented nearby by the Obongos or Ashangos to the east (Du Chaillu) and the Akoas to the west (Touchard and Dybowski). The Adumas, who are involved in the slave trade (Guiral), are skilled boatmen. To the south of Bakel, in the river basins along the coast, such as Rembo and Nyanga, you can find the Balumbo, Bavili on the coast, and the Ashira inland. The lower Kuilu or Niari basin is partly occupied by the Mayombé and Loango (height 1 min. 65, cephalic index 77.5), mixed tribes who are[Pg 460] spread evenly along the coast from the Nyanga River in the north to Landana in the south.

As to the upper basin of the Niari, it is inhabited by the Bakuni or Bakunghé to the north, and by the Bakamba (height 1 m. 69, according to Maistre) to the south. These populations resemble the Loangos and somewhat also the Kacongo (height 1 m. 65, ceph. ind. 75.6, according to Zintgraff). Farther to the south are the Basundo, savages with, it is said, red hair, and the Babembé (height 1 m. 72, according to Maistre) and the Babuendi, recognisable by the tattoo of a crocodile on the breast, who people the right bank of the Congo from the mouth to Brazzaville. Among their neighbours the Bacongo or Bafyot, who thickly populate the opposite bank, the influence of the old Portuguese Christians is still to be recognised in many spots by processions with the crucifix, but the supreme god has become feminine, having relation both to the Virgin Mary and to the “Earthmother of All.”[532] This goddess, called Nzambi, is the principal personage of a trinity, the other members of which are a son, and a third spirit, Deisos. The Bacongo have also as an institution popular guardians of justice (p. 253), whom they call pagasarios. Above Brazzaville, on the right bank of the Congo, as far as Bolobo, are met various Bateke tribes, distinguished by their short stature (1 m. 64), marked dolichocephaly (73.6, according to Mense), powerful trunk, and tattoo marks of several rows of parallel strokes on the cheeks. They extend to the west as far as 10° long. E, and occupy to the north all the basin of the upper Alima. The Batekes, who, with their neighbours the Baboma and the anthropophagous Ballali, were the first to submit to French dominion, are travellers and, though practising anthropophagy, a temperate people. The Ashikuya of the region of the sources of the Nkheni, neighbours of the Batekes, are celebrated as the best weavers of the Congo. The lower valley of the Alima,[Pg 461] as well as the right bank of the Congo as far as the mouth of the Ubangi and even above, are occupied by the Bangi, Bubangis, or Bapfuru (height, 1 m. 73, according to Maistre), differing from other tribes by their mode of head-dress and their tattoo: a large swelling of flesh on each temple and on the middle of the brow. Their number is estimated at about a million.[533] North of the Bangis, between the Congo and the Ubangi, live their congeners the Baloi and the Bonjos, veritable athletes and proved to be cannibals (Dybowski). The river M’Poko, which enters the Congo opposite the town of Bangi, marks to the north the limit of the Bonjos, as of the Bantus generally of this part of Africa. Their immediate neighbours to the north, the Bandziris, are more like the Zandeh than the Bantus.

As for the upper basin of the Niari, it's home to the Bakuni or Bakunghé in the north, and the Bakamba (height 1 min. 69, according to Maistre) in the south. These groups are similar to the Loangos and somewhat to the Kacongo (height 1 min. 65, ceph. ind. 75.6, according to Zintgraff). Further south, you'll find the Basundo, rumored to have red hair, along with the Babembé (height 1 minute. 72, according to Maistre) and the Babuendi, who are identifiable by a crocodile tattoo on their chests, inhabiting the right bank of the Congo from the mouth up to Brazzaville. Among their neighbors, the Bacongo or Bafyot, who densely populate the opposite bank, you can still see the influence of the old Portuguese Christians in various rituals with the crucifix. However, their supreme god has taken on a feminine aspect, linked to both the Virgin Mary and the "Earthmother of All." This goddess, named Nzambi, is the main figure in a trinity that includes a son and a third spirit, Deisos. The Bacongo also have popular justice guardians (p. 253), known as pagasarios. Above Brazzaville, along the right bank of the Congo up to Bolobo, several Bateke tribes are found, recognized by their short stature (1 min. 64), noticeable dolichocephaly (73.6, according to Mense), strong build, and multiple parallel tattoo lines on their cheeks. They extend west to 10° long. E and occupy the entire upper Alima basin to the north. The Batekes, along with their neighbors the Baboma and the cannibalistic Ballali, were among the first to come under French rule; they are travelers and, despite practicing cannibalism, are a moderate people. The Ashikuya from the Nkheni source area, neighbors of the Batekes, are known as some of the best weavers in the Congo. The lower valley of the Alima,[Pg 461] along with the right bank of the Congo as far as the mouth of the Ubangi and beyond, is occupied by the Bangi, Bubangis, or Bapfuru (height 1 minute. 73, according to Maistre), who are different from other tribes due to their unique headgear and tattoos: a prominent flesh bump on each temple and on the forehead. Their population is estimated to be around a million.[533] North of the Bangis, between the Congo and the Ubangi, live their relatives the Baloi and the Bonjos, who are true athletes and have been documented as cannibals (Dybowski). The M’Poko River, which flows into the Congo opposite the town of Bangi, marks the northern limit for the Bonjos, as well as the Bantus in this region of Africa. Their closer neighbors to the north, the Bandziris, resemble the Zandeh more than the Bantus.

To the south of the Congo the various Bantu tribes are still little known.[534] On the coast, between the mouth of the Congo and the Kunene, the collective name of Angolese is given to various much-intermingled tribes: Mushikongo (1 m. 66, ceph. ind. 72.5), Kiamba, Kissama, Mondombé (plural, Bandombé; 1 m. 67, ceph. ind. 76.8), Bakissé (1.66, 75.5), etc. The mountainous region situated more to the east—that is to say, Bangala, the basin of the Kulu, the left tributaries of the Kasai (ancient kingdom of Muata-Yamvo), the region of the source of the Zambesi—is inhabited by populations who have preserved the Bantu type in purer form. These are, starting from the south, the Ganguela, occupying the table-land bordered on the east by the upper valley of the Kwando, on the south by the right tributaries of the[Pg 462] Zambesi, and on the west by the Mubungo tributary of Lake Ngami; they are excellent smiths, supplying articles in iron to their neighbours, who are the Amboella, the Kimbandé, and the Kioko or Akioko. These last, scarcely thirty-five years ago, taking up a position to the east of the Ganguelas, have to-day advanced to the 10th degree of S. latitude, into the western part of Muata-Yamvo. But the basis of the population of this ancient kingdom is constituted by the Lunda tribes, whose territory extends from the Kwango (affluent of the Kasai) to lakes Bangweolo and Moero. They occupy the basin of the Kasai (Kalunda), the swampy plains to the east of the upper Zambesi (the Balunda, the Lobalé), and are distinguished by their peaceable habits and hospitality. Their women enjoy a certain freedom.

To the south of the Congo, the different Bantu tribes are still not very well known.[534] On the coast, between the mouth of the Congo and the Kunene, the term Angolese is used to refer to various intermingled tribes: Mushikongo (1 minute. 66, ceph. ind. 72.5), Kiamba, Kissama, Mondombé (plural, Bandombé; 1 min. 67, ceph. ind. 76.8), Bakissé (1.66, 75.5), and others. The mountainous area further east—specifically, Bangala, the Kulu basin, and the left tributaries of the Kasai (the ancient kingdom of Muata-Yamvo), including the source of the Zambesi—is home to populations that have preserved a purer form of the Bantu type. These include the Ganguela, who occupy the plateau bordered to the east by the upper Kwando valley, to the south by the right tributaries of the[Pg 462] Zambesi, and to the west by the Mubungo tributary of Lake Ngami; they are skilled blacksmiths, providing iron goods to their neighbors, the Amboella, the Kimbandé, and the Kioko or Akioko. The latter, just thirty-five years ago, settled east of the Ganguelas and have since moved to the 10th degree of south latitude, advancing into the western part of Muata-Yamvo. However, the foundation of the population of this ancient kingdom is made up of the Lunda tribes, whose territory stretches from the Kwango (a tributary of the Kasai) to lakes Bangweolo and Moero. They inhabit the basin of the Kasai (Kalunda), the marshy plains east of the upper Zambesi (the Balunda, the Lobalé), and are known for their peaceful nature and hospitality. Their women enjoy a degree of freedom.

The Baluba, who form an important nation, occupy the territory between the Kasai, the chain of the Mitumba mountains and the 6th degree of S. latitude. They appear to have many analogies with the Lunda. Of tall stature (1 m. 70), their head is more globular and complexion less dark than with most Negroes (ceph. ind. 79, according to Wolff). The original country of these tribes is the upper basin of the Congo. Many of the Baluba are mixed with the Bashilange aborigines who dwell between the middle valley of the Kasai and that of its right affluent, the Lulua, and form a separate population, relatively civilised, who emigrate as far as the Congo, where they become engaged as carriers. These are a lively people; the head is slightly elongated (stature, 1 m. 68, cephalic index 76.9, according to Maistre). About 1870 they underwent a politico-religious revolution and introduced the hemp or “Riamba” cult, in accordance with which all the smokers of Riamba declare themselves friends, the duty of mutual hospitality is acknowledged, the sale of girls interdicted, etc. Crimes are punished by excessive administrations of the drug, which in the end stupefy the criminal (Pogge, Wolff). Their neighbours to the north, the Bakuba of the great bend of the Sankuru, who speak a different language, are more sedentary and busy themselves in trade and the[Pg 463] cultivation of their fields, with the assistance of Negrilloes who live among them. The Basongo, their neighbours to the north, are redoubtable man-eaters.

The Baluba, an important nation, reside in the area between the Kasai River, the Mitumba mountain range, and the 6th degree of S. latitude. They share several similarities with the Lunda. Generally tall (about 1 minute. 70), their heads are more rounded, and their skin tone is lighter compared to most Black Africans (ceph. ind. 79, according to Wolff). These tribes originally come from the upper Congo basin. Many Baluba have mixed heritage with the Bashilange natives who live between the central Kasai valley and its right tributary, the Lulua, forming a relatively civilized separate population that migrates all the way to the Congo, where they work as carriers. This community is lively; they have slightly elongated heads (height: 1 min. 68, cephalic index 76.9, according to Maistre). Around 1870, they experienced a socio-religious revolution and adopted the hemp or “Riamba” cult, where all Riamba smokers consider themselves friends, acknowledge the obligation of mutual hospitality, and prohibit the sale of girls, among other rules. Crimes are punished with heavy doses of the drug, which ultimately dulls the offender (Pogge, Wolff). Their northern neighbors, the Bakuba of the great bend of the Sankuru, speak a different language, are more settled, and engage in trade and the[Pg 463] cultivation of their fields with help from Negrilloes living among them. The Basongo to the north are known for being fierce man-eaters.

All these populations, who, as we have seen, are characterised by stature above the average and by moderate dolichocephaly, are distinguished also by fairer complexion than their neighbours the Bantus of the Congo (Maistre, Serpa Pinto, Deniker and Laloy). The region they hold has frequently (from the sixteenth to the eighteenth century) been invaded by the “Djaga,” armed bands in the service of certain families of the Balunda people. The invaders intermingled with the aboriginal race, which is probably allied to the Bushmen and Hottentots; at least, there are till now to be met with in the country individuals of very pure Bushman type, above all among the Kiokos.

All these populations, as we've seen, are characterized by above-average height and a moderate long-headedness. They also have a lighter complexion compared to their neighbors, the Bantus of the Congo (Maistre, Serpa Pinto, Deniker, and Laloy). The area they occupy has been frequently invaded from the sixteenth to the eighteenth century by the "Djaga," armed groups serving certain families of the Balunda people. The invaders mixed with the local people, who are probably related to the Bushmen and Hottentots; in fact, individuals of very pure Bushman type can still be found in the country, especially among the Kiokos.

The populations to be found between the great bend of the Congo and the 5th degree of south latitude, known collectively as the Mongo or Balolo, and Bayombe, seem to possess traits intermediate between the Lunda and the natives of French Congo. They are degenerate tribes. Such cannot be said of the Bayanzi of the right bank of the Congo, between Bolobo and Lake Tumba, nor of the Banga, between the Congo and the Ubangi, who are very alert, active, and intelligent. Their mode of head-dress, in which the hair is plaited into horns, is entirely characteristic.

The communities located between the large bend of the Congo and the 5th degree of south latitude, known as the Mongo or Balolo and Bayombe, appear to have characteristics that are a mix of the Lunda and the indigenous people of French Congo. They are considered less developed tribes. However, this doesn’t apply to the Bayanzi on the right bank of the Congo, between Bolobo and Lake Tumba, or the Banga, who live between the Congo and the Ubangi. These groups are quite alert, active, and intelligent. Their distinctive head-dress, which features hair styled into horn shapes, is very characteristic.

Most of the western Bantu of French Congo and Congo Free State wear ornaments in the lips, file or pull out the incisor teeth, tattoo, and build small square dwellings.[535]

Most of the western Bantu in French Congo and the Congo Free State wear lip ornaments, file or remove their incisor teeth, get tattoos, and build small square houses.[535]

b. The group of Eastern Bantus includes numerous tribes often having an intermixture of Ethiopian blood, and ranging from the region of the sources of the Nile to 15° S. latitude, between the east coast of Africa and the[Pg 464] great lakes. German ethnographers distinguish among them the ancient and modern Bantus, according to their immigration from the south or north (see p. 429). On the coast, between Cape Delgado and Port Durnford, the Bantus are interblent with the Arabs and form a compound population speaking the Kiswahili language.[536] This Bantu dialect has, owing to the simplicity of its structure, become the lingua franca of almost the entire region occupied by the eastern Bantus. To the west of the Swahili live, in Unyamwesi and the surrounding countries, the Usambara and the Unyamwesi, belonging to the “ancient Bantus,” and having, like them, migratory tendencies towards the north.

b. The group of Eastern Bantus includes many tribes that often have some Ethiopian ancestry, and they range from the Nile's source regions down to 15° S. latitude, between the east coast of Africa and the[Pg 464] great lakes. German ethnographers categorize them into ancient and modern Bantus based on whether they migrated from the south or north (see p. 429). Along the coast, between Cape Delgado and Port Durnford, the Bantus mix with Arabs, creating a diverse population that speaks the Kiswahili language.[536] This Bantu dialect, due to its simple structure, has become the lingua franca for nearly the entire area inhabited by the eastern Bantus. To the west of the Swahili live the Usambara and the Unyamwesi in Unyamwesi and nearby regions, which belong to the “ancient Bantus” and, like them, also have migratory tendencies toward the north.

As to the Bantus of the Lake Region, the tribes of which are dispersed between the south of Unyoro and Lake Tanganyika, they are not more free from intermixture. But they speak the dialect derived from that primitive Bantu language, “Kirundi,” or “Kikonjo,” which to-day is preserved in its original purity only in a narrow tract of some fifty kilometres, extending from the foot of Mount Ruwenzori to the northern extremity of Lake Tanganyika. Mixed with Nilotes in Unyoro, with Wahuma Hamites elsewhere, the language of these “ancient Bantus” was adopted by their conquerors. The most southern tribe of this group is that of the Makua, who extend to 16° S. latitude. The tribes who people Uganda (to the north-west of Lake Victoria Nyanza) have probably sprung from the same stock, but speak a different language.

As for the Bantus of the Lake Region, whose tribes are spread between the south of Unyoro and Lake Tanganyika, they also experience intermixing. However, they speak a dialect that comes from that original Bantu language, “Kirundi,” or “Kikonjo,” which is now only preserved in its pure form in a narrow area of about fifty kilometers, stretching from the base of Mount Ruwenzori to the northern tip of Lake Tanganyika. Combined with Nilotes in Unyoro and with Wahuma Hamites in other places, the language of these “ancient Bantus” was taken on by their conquerors. The southernmost tribe of this group is the Makua, reaching down to 16° S. latitude. The tribes inhabiting Uganda (to the northwest of Lake Victoria Nyanza) likely come from the same ancestry but speak a different language.

The peoples speaking Bantu to be met with south of Kilima Njaro, on the Iramba table-land, the Wakamba, Wataita, Wakaguru, and Wagogo, are Hamito-Bantus who have adopted the manners and customs of the Masai. These “Bantus of recent immigration” have come from the north-east, from the country of the Gallas, where their remaining fellows are still to be found under the name of Wapokompo in the upper valley[Pg 465] of the Tsana, and Watakosho, speaking Galla, near Lake Rudolf. Among the eastern Bantus are provisionally classed the Wavira, who perforate the lips like the western Bantus; the Wahuma, who are of Ethiopian type; and the other tribes who dwell between the middle Congo and the lakes, from the equator to 5° lat. S., who are also called Waregga (People of the Forest). These are cannibals who have come from the south-west; their language differs from that of their neighbours, the Manyuema, who are of Ethiopian type. The tribes living to the south of the Ituri valley, the Wambuba, the Wallessi, etc., appear to be a hybrid of Negrilloes and Bantus.

The Bantu-speaking people found south of Kilima Njaro, on the Iramba plateau, such as the Wakamba, Wataita, Wakaguru, and Wagogo, are Hamito-Bantus who have taken on the customs and traditions of the Masai. These “recently immigrated Bantus” have come from the northeast, specifically from the region of the Gallas, where their remaining relatives can still be found known as Wapokompo in the upper valley[Pg 465] of the Tsana, and Watakosho, who speak Galla, near Lake Rudolf. Among the eastern Bantus, we can tentatively include the Wavira, who pierce their lips like the western Bantus; the Wahuma, who have Ethiopian features; and other tribes that live between the middle Congo and the lakes, from the equator to 5° S latitude, who are also referred to as Waregga (People of the Forest). These groups are cannibals who have migrated from the southwest; their language is different from that of their neighbors, the Manyuema, who also have Ethiopian features. The tribes residing south of the Ituri valley, such as the Wambuba and the Wallessi, seem to be a mix of Negrilloes and Bantus.

The group of Southern Bantus[537] is composed of Kafir-Zulus to the east, of Bechuana to the centre, and of Herrero to the west. The Zulus (Fig. 47), of which the most southern tribe or “Ama,” the Amaxosa or Kafirs (Fig. 135), live in the eastern part of Cape Colony, and have of recent times advanced towards the north, far from the country of their origin, up to the region of Usagara. Among the chief Zulu tribes should be noted the Banyai, the Bakalaka, the Baronga, the Swazi (Fig. 142), and the Tonga, between Delagoa Bay and the Transvaal; the “Ama” Mpondo of Pondo, the “Ama” Tembu of Kafirland; the Makong, neighbours of the Shinia (Foa) on the banks of the middle Zambesi, etc. Except these Kafirs, who have a special language, all the other Zulus speak the Takesa tongue.

The group of Southern Bantus[537] consists of Kafir-Zulus in the east, Bechuana in the center, and Herrero in the west. The Zulus (Fig. 47) include the most southern tribe or "Ama," the Amaxosa or Kafirs (Fig. 135) who live in the eastern part of Cape Colony and have recently moved north, far from their homeland, reaching the Usagara region. Among the main Zulu tribes are the Banyai, the Bakalaka, the Baronga, the Swazi (Fig. 142), and the Tonga, located between Delagoa Bay and the Transvaal; the “Ama” Mpondo of Pondo, the “Ama” Tembu of Kafirland; the Makong, who are neighbors of the Shinia (Foa) along the middle Zambesi, etc. Except for these Kafirs, who have their own language, all the other Zulus speak the Takesa language.

The Bechuana, separated from the Zulus by the chain of the Drakensberg Mountains, are infused more or less with Hottentot blood; they are divided into Eastern Bechuana or Basuto, among whom Bantu traits predominate, and the Western Bechuana or Bakalahari, who show a more marked[Pg 466] intermixture of Hottentot elements. To the north of the Bechuanas, in the upper basin of the Zambesi, live the Barotsé, a people related to the Zulus, of which one tribe is known as the Mashona. Finally, two other Bantu tribes extend to the south of the Kunene, surrounding the table-land inhabited by the Hill Damaras or Haw-Koîn (see below); these are the Ovambo or Ovampo, tillers of the soil (over 100,000), to the north between 16.30° and 20° lat. S., and the Ova-Herrero or Damara shepherds, of a fine Bantu type, to the west and south.

The Bechuana, separated from the Zulus by the Drakensberg Mountains, have a mixed heritage that includes Hottentot ancestry. They are split into Eastern Bechuana or Basuto, where Bantu traits are more prominent, and the Western Bechuana or Bakalahari, who show a clearer mix of Hottentot characteristics. To the north of the Bechuanas, in the upper Zambezi basin, live the Barotsé, a group related to the Zulus, with one tribe known as the Mashona. Lastly, two other Bantu tribes are found to the south of the Kunene, surrounding the plateau inhabited by the Hill Damaras or Haw-Koîn (see below); these are the Ovambo or Ovampo, agricultural people (over 100,000), located to the north between 16.30° and 20° S. latitude, and the Ova-Herrero or Damara shepherds, who are of a strong Bantu lineage, situated to the west and south.

Swazi-Bantu Woman and Girl

FIG. 142.—Swazi-Bantu woman and girl.
(Coll. Anthr. Inst. Great Britain.)

FIG. 142.—Swazi-Bantu woman and girl.
(Coll. Anthr. Inst. Great Britain.)

Physically the Zulus are of high stature (1 m. 72, according to Fritsch) and dolichocephalic (average ceph. ind. of 86 skulls 73.2, according to Fritsch, Hamy, and Shrubsall). They have these traits in common with the[Pg 467] Nigritians,[538] but they are not so dark as the latter, and are less prognathous. The face also is square and the nose prominent, although somewhat coarse.

Physically, the Zulus are tall (1 minute. 72, according to Fritsch) and have long heads (average head index of 86 skulls 73.2, according to Fritsch, Hamy, and Shrubsall). They share these characteristics with the[Pg 467] Nigritians,[538] but they are not as dark as them and have less pronounced jawlines. Their faces are also square, and their noses are prominent, though somewhat rough.

N’Kon-yui, Bushman

FIG. 143.—N’Kon-yui, Bushman of the
region of Lake Ngami; 40 years old;
height, 1 m. 44; ceph. ind., 77.2;
nas. ind., 97.5.
(Phot. Coll. Anthr. Soc., Paris.)

FInstagram. 143.—N’Kon-yui, a Bushman from the
Lake Ngami area; 40 years old;
height, 1 min. 44; ceph. index, 77.2;
nasal index, 97.5.
(Phot. Coll. Anthr. Soc., Paris.)

VII. The Bushmen-Hottentots[539] probably occupied formerly the whole of South Africa from the 15th degree of south latitude to the Cape of Good Hope. Hardly pressed for three centuries by Bantus in the east and north, and for a century by Europeans in the south, they are reduced to-day to a few thousands of families, wandering or sedentary, in the uncultivated country of Namaqualand, in the desert of Kalahari, and in some points of the hinterland of the Cape. To the north of 18° S. latitude are found only a few islets of[Pg 468] Hottentots, and towards the south they are no longer met with in compact groups within sixty miles from the coast. To the east, their habitat is limited at about 23° longitude E. of Greenwich. And further, we must gather within these limits the territory between the Herrero country and 18° S. lat. of the Hill Damaras or Haw-Koin, who, although speaking a Hottentot dialect, possess a quite special physical type; they are notably much darker than the Hottentots, and recall rather the Negroes of Guinea. They are miserable savages who live by hunting and plunder.

VII. The Bushmen-Hottentots[539] probably once occupied the entirety of South Africa from the 15th degree of south latitude to the Cape of Good Hope. Under pressure for three centuries from Bantus to the east and north, and for a century from Europeans to the south, they are now reduced to just a few thousand families, either wandering or settled, in the uncultivated regions of Namaqualand, in the Kalahari desert, and in some areas of the hinterland of the Cape. North of 18° S. latitude, there are only a few pockets of Hottentots, and to the south, they can no longer be found in compact groups within sixty miles of the coast. To the east, their habitat is limited to about 23° longitude E. of Greenwich. Additionally, we should include within these boundaries the territory between the Herrero country and the 18° S. latitude of the Hill Damaras or Haw-Koin, who, although they speak a Hottentot dialect, have a distinct physical appearance; they are significantly darker than the Hottentots and resemble the Negroes of Guinea. They are impoverished people who survive by hunting and raiding.

In addition to the Hill Damaras there are to be noted in the group of which we are treating: 1st, the Naman, called Hottentots by Europeans (modification of the Dutch word “hüttentüt,” meaning of little sense, stupid), inhabiting the west of the territory we have just defined (Fig. 24); 2nd, the San (“Sab” in the masculine singular), called “Bosjesmen” or “Bushmen” by Europeans, in the east of this territory (Fig. 143). It should be remarked, however, that the word Bosjesman (in Dutch, “man of the bush”) is often applied to Hottentot populations, or to Hottentot-Bushmen like, for instance, the mixed breeds of Namaqualand who speak a Hottentot dialect. In certain works the name Koi-Koin is applied to the whole group before us. This is incorrect, for the Koi-Koin, or better, the Hau-Khoin, are no other than a Hottentot tribe, just as are the Nama, Gorana, and others (about 20,000).

In addition to the Hill Damaras, we should also note the following groups: 1st, the Naman, referred to as Hottentots by Europeans (a modification of the Dutch word “hüttentüt,” meaning of little sense, stupid), who live in the western part of the territory we just defined (Fig. 24); 2nd, the San (“Sab” in the masculine singular), referred to as “Bosjesmen” or “Bushmen” by Europeans, located in the eastern part of this territory (Fig. 143). It’s important to point out that the term Bosjesman (in Dutch, “man of the bush”) is often used for Hottentot populations or Hottentot-Bushmen, like the mixed groups in Namaqualand who speak a Hottentot dialect. In some sources, the name Koi-Koin is incorrectly used to refer to the entire group. In reality, the Koi-Koin, more accurately referred to as the Hau-Khoin, is just one Hottentot tribe, along with the Nama, Gorana, and others (about 20,000).

There are numerous likenesses between the San and the Naman, who are both representatives of the Bushman race[540] (see pp. 287 and 455), but there are also numerous differences. The Hottentot language is of the same stock[Pg 469] as that of the Bushmen; and both are characterised by the presence of certain articulations known as “clicks.” But the Hottentot dialects, which closely resemble each other, possess four palato-dental clicks, while the Bushmen dialects, differing much from each other, have besides these four clicks another guttural click, as well as a certain articulation which is not effected by inhalation as are the clicks proper, but by rapid and repeated expirations made between the two half-opened rows of teeth.

There are many similarities between the San and the Naman, who both belong to the Bushman group[540] (see pp. 287 and 455), but there are also many differences. The Hottentot language comes from the same root[Pg 469] as the Bushmen language; both are characterized by specific sounds known as “clicks.” However, the Hottentot dialects, which are quite similar to each other, have four palato-dental clicks, while the Bushmen dialects, which vary significantly from one another, have those four clicks as well as an additional guttural click, plus another sound that is not produced by inhaling like the clicks are, but by quick and repeated exhalations made between the slightly open rows of teeth.

The two peoples differ equally in manners and customs. Let it suffice to recall that the Bushmen live in the woods and are nomadic hunters, who do not practise circumcision, but whose custom it is to cut the finger-joints in sign of mourning. (See pp. 181, 204, 211, and 228 for other particulars.) The Hottentots, on the contrary, are nomadic shepherds; they live in the steppes, practise circumcision, and are unacquainted with the custom of ablation of the phalanges. Besides, they have lost all ethnic individuality; they dress in the European fashion, speak Dutch or English, and live like the white colonists. Children born of marriages between Hottentots and Europeans are called “Bastards,” a title which in Africa is not regarded as discreditable.

The two groups are quite different in their behaviors and traditions. For instance, the Bushmen live in the forests and are nomadic hunters. They don’t practice circumcision, but they do cut the finger joints as a sign of mourning. (See pp. 181, 204, 211, and 228 for more details.) In contrast, the Hottentots are nomadic shepherds living in the plains; they practice circumcision and do not have the custom of removing finger bones. Additionally, they have lost their unique ethnic identity; they wear European-style clothing, speak Dutch or English, and live like the white colonists. Children born from unions between Hottentots and Europeans are referred to as "Bastards," a term that is not seen as shameful in Africa.

VIII. The population of the island of Madagascar[541] may be divided into three great groups: the Hovas in the middle, the Malagasies of the east coast, and the Sakalavas of the rest of the island. There is further to be noted the Arab infusion, especially on the north-east and south-east coast.

VIII. The population of the island of Madagascar[541] can be divided into three main groups: the Hovas in the center, the Malagasies on the east coast, and the Sakalavas in the rest of the island. It's also important to mention the Arab influence, particularly on the north-east and south-east coasts.

The Hovas, or better, Huves, who occupy the high table-land of Imerina (from which comes their true name, [Pg 470]“Anta-Imerina”[542]) are Indonesians more or less intermixed with Malay stock; their skin is olive-yellow, their hair straight or slightly wavy, their eyes sometimes narrow; their stature is short, their head globular, the nose prominent and somewhat sharp (Fig. 144).[543] They preserve many manners and customs Indonesian in character—their square houses on piles, sarong, instruments of music, fadi or taboo for diet, infanticide, polygamy, canoe with balance-pole, cylindrical forge bellows, form of sepulture, etc. A half-civilised people, they are tillers of the soil, shepherds, and traders. The Sakalavas, on the contrary, are almost pure Bantu Negroes, black, dolichocephalic, of high stature, with frizzy hair and flat noses. They have preserved some features of Negro life (palavers, fetichism, etc.), but are adopting more and more the mode of life of the Hovas or the Malagasies. These last present traits intermediate between the two groups; of chocolate-brown complexion, with frizzy hair, of medium height, they have other features so modified as to recall sometimes the Hovas, sometimes the Sakalavas.

The Hovas, or better known as Huves, who live in the highlands of Imerina (which is where their true name “Anta-Imerina” comes from) are people of Indonesian descent, somewhat mixed with Malay ancestry. Their skin is a yellowish-olive tone, their hair is straight or slightly wavy, and their eyes can be narrow. They are short in stature, have round heads, and their noses are prominent and somewhat pointed. They maintain many Indonesian customs and traditions, such as their square houses on stilts, wearing sarongs, their musical instruments, dietary taboos, infanticide practices, polygamy, canoes with balance poles, cylindrical forge bellows, and burial practices. As a semi-civilized people, they are farmers, shepherds, and traders. In contrast, the Sakalavas are nearly pure Bantu Africans, with black skin, long heads, tall stature, frizzy hair, and flat noses. They have kept some aspects of traditional African life (like community discussions and fetichism) but are increasingly adopting the lifestyle of the Hovas or other Malagasies. The Malagasies themselves show features that are a mix of the two groups; they have a chocolate-brown complexion, frizzy hair, and are of medium height, with other characteristics that occasionally resemble either the Hovas or the Sakalavas.

The Hovas arrived in Madagascar only seven or eight centuries ago (Grandidier), and succeeded in subjugating the Sakalavas and the mixed populations. Up to the period of the French occupation (1896) they were masters of the island, with the exception of the west coast and some points in the south. They have imposed their language on the subjugated populations, and all the peoples of the island, notwithstanding their diversity of origin, of type, and of manners and customs, speak Malagasy, which is a dialect of the Maleo-Polynesian linguistic family with some intermixture of Bantu elements.

The Hovas arrived in Madagascar around seven or eight centuries ago (Grandidier) and were able to conquer the Sakalavas and mixed populations. Until the French occupation in 1896, they ruled the island, except for the west coast and some areas in the south. They imposed their language on the conquered peoples, and now all the inhabitants of the island, despite their varied origins, types, and customs, speak Malagasy, which is a dialect of the Maleo-Polynesian language family with some blend of Bantu elements.

It is supposed that before the advent of the Hovas other Malay and Indonesian incursions took place in the island,[Pg 471] though nothing certain is known in regard to this; that the arrival of the Negroes was due to their own action is problematical, notwithstanding the relative nearness (250 miles) of the coast of Mozambique, the notorious incapacity of the Negroes as navigators being taken into account. It is possible that the Negroes were introduced into the island entirely by the Maleo-Indonesians, who have always been good seamen. The Arab invasions date back hardly five or six centuries.

It is believed that before the arrival of the Hovas, other Malay and Indonesian groups had already made their way to the island,[Pg 471] although there is little concrete information about this. Whether the arrival of the Black inhabitants was due to their own efforts is uncertain, especially considering the relatively close distance (250 miles) from the coast of Mozambique, taking into account the known shortcomings of Black people as navigators. It’s possible that the Black inhabitants were brought to the island entirely by the Maleo-Indonesians, who have always been excellent sailors. The Arab invasions occurred only about five or six centuries ago.

The constitution of Hova society up till recently was divided into nobles (Andriana), freemen (Hovas), and slaves (Andevo). The abolition of Royalty and slavery, after the French occupation, have to a certain extent modified this hierarchy. For thirty years converts to Protestantism, at bottom the Hovas are very indifferent in religious matters, but cling to their ancient animistic beliefs. To the Hovas should be joined the Betsileo, who live to the south of the Imerina table-land; they are not of such pure race as the Hovas, while they are less intermixed than are the Malagasies.

The structure of Hova society until recently was divided into nobles (Andriana), freemen (Hovas), and slaves (Andevo). The abolition of royalty and slavery, following the French occupation, has somewhat changed this hierarchy. For thirty years, those who converted to Protestantism have found that, at their core, the Hovas are quite indifferent about religion but still hold onto their traditional animistic beliefs. The Betsileo, who live to the south of the Imerina plateau, should also be included with the Hovas; they are not of as pure a lineage as the Hovas, but they are less mixed than the Malagasies.

Among these last must first be distinguished the populations of the coast: the Betsimasaraka and the Antambahoaka to the north of the 20th degree of S. latitude; the Antaimoro, the Antaifasina, the Antaisaka, and the Antanosi to the south of this latitude; then the population of the interior: the Antsihanaka to the north of Imerina, the Bezanozano in the centre of the island, the Antanala or Tanala, and the Bara and Antaisara to the south.

Among these last, we should first distinguish the coastal populations: the Betsimasaraka and the Antambahoaka to the north of the 20th degree of S. latitude; the Antaimoro, the Antaifasina, the Antaisaka, and the Antanosi to the south of this latitude; then the populations of the interior: the Antsihanaka to the north of Imerina, the Bezanozano in the center of the island, the Antanala or Tanala, and the Bara and Antaisara to the south.

The Betsimasaraka are dolichocephalic (ceph. ind. 76.3, according to Collignon and Deniker), and of stature below the average (1 m. 64). The Antambahoaka and the Antaimoro claim an Arab origin, but they hardly differ from the other Malagasies; they are rather backward in culture and emigrate from their country readily, but with the idea of returning. The Antaifasina (who number about 200,000) have close affinities with the Antaisaka, their warlike neighbours on the coast, in closer proximity to Vangaindrano; both have many customs of Arab-Mussulman origin, and are connected, according to all probability, with the Bara tribe. This[Pg 472] last lives inland, to the south of Betsileo, side by side with the Antaisara, said to be true savages, but among whom are nevertheless observed signs of Arab blood (Scott Eliott). The Antanosi are grouped round Fort Dauphin, but some of this tribe has emigrated to the interior, extending as far as the neighbourhood of the west coast, where it has assimilated the customs of the Bara people. As a race the Antanosi are less negroid than the other Malagasies, and recall rather the Betsimasaraka. They have curly or almost smooth hair (Catat), and complexion of light chestnut. They are a peaceable and intelligent people, of cleaner habits than the other Malagasies. Like most of the tribes of the south of Madagascar, even the Sakalavas (as, for example, the Antavandroi), they wear garments of matting plaited with straw, except on the coast, where European fabrics have now replaced the native garments.

The Betsimasaraka have long heads (ceph. ind. 76.3, according to Collignon and Deniker) and are shorter than average (1 min. 64). The Antambahoaka and the Antaimoro claim they have Arab roots, but they don't really differ from other Malagasies; they are somewhat less developed culturally and often leave their country with the intent of coming back. The Antaifasina (around 200,000 in number) are closely related to the Antaisaka, their warlike neighbors on the coast near Vangaindrano; both groups share numerous Arab-Muslim customs and are likely connected to the Bara tribe. This[Pg 472] last group lives inland, south of Betsileo, alongside the Antaisara, who are described as true savages, though there are indications of Arab ancestry among them (Scott Eliott). The Antanosi are primarily found around Fort Dauphin, although some have moved inland to areas near the west coast, blending in with the customs of the Bara people. As a group, the Antanosi are less Negroid than other Malagasies and resemble the Betsimasaraka more closely. They have curly or almost straight hair (Catat) and a light chestnut complexion. They are a peaceful and intelligent group, maintaining cleaner habits than other Malagasies. Like most tribes in southern Madagascar, even the Sakalavas (such as the Antavandroi), they typically wear garments made from woven mats and straw, except on the coast, where European fabrics have now taken over native clothing.

Hova of Tananarivo

FIG. 144.—Hova of Tananarivo; 21 years old;
height, 1 m. 62; ceph. ind., 79.3.
(Phot. Collignon.)

FInstagram. 144.—Hova of Tananarivo; 21 years old;
height, 1 minute. 62; head index, 79.3.
(Phot. Collignon.)

The Sakalava tribes are numerous. The best known are the Menabe, Milaka, Ronondra, and Mahafali. In the north of the island the Sakalavas are mixed with the Betsimasaraka, and form the Antankar or Antankara people, wild shepherds and tillers of the soil, recalling the Bantus; their centre is at Diego-Suarez. In the south, blended with the Bara, they enter into the composition of the Antandroy population (about 20,000), almost savage, who depend largely for sustenance on the cactus berries of their sterile country, live by cattle-raising, and have many manners and customs borrowed from the Bara.

The Sakalava tribes are many. The most well-known are the Menabe, Milaka, Ronondra, and Mahafali. In the northern part of the island, the Sakalavas mix with the Betsimasaraka, forming the Antankar or Antankara people, who are wild shepherds and farmers, reminiscent of the Bantus; their center is in Diego-Suarez. In the south, combined with the Bara, they contribute to the Antandroy population (about 20,000), who are nearly savage and rely heavily on the cactus berries of their arid land for food, engage in cattle-raising, and have adopted many customs from the Bara.


CHAPTER XII.

RACES AND PEOPLES OF OCEANIA.

Peoples and Cultures of Oceania.

The Stone Age in Oceania—I. Australians: Uniformity of the Australian race—Language and manners and customs of the Australians—Extinct TasmaniansII. Populations of the Asiatic or Malay Archipelago: Papuan and Negrito elements in the Archipelago—Indonesians and Malays of Sumatra, Borneo, Celebes, etc.—III. Melanesians: Papuans of New Guinea—Melanesians properly so called of the Salomon and Admiralty Islands, New Hebrides, New Caledonia, etc.—IV. Polynesians: Polynesians properly so called of Samoa, Tahiti, and Sandwich Islands, New Zealand, etc.—Micronesians of the Caroline and Marianne Islands, etc.—Peopling of the Pacific Islands and of the Indian Ocean.

The Stone Age in Oceania—I. Australians: Consistency of the Australian population—Language, customs, and traditions of Australians—Extinct TasmaniansII. Populations of the Asiatic or Malay Archipelago: Papuan and Negrito groups in the Archipelago—Indonesians and Malays from Sumatra, Borneo, Celebes, etc.—III. Melanesians: Papuans from New Guinea—True Melanesians from the Solomon and Admiralty Islands, New Hebrides, New Caledonia, etc.—IV. Polynesians: True Polynesians from Samoa, Tahiti, and the Sandwich Islands, New Zealand, etc.—Micronesians from the Caroline and Marianne Islands, etc.—Settlement of the Pacific Islands and the Indian Ocean.

“OCEANIA” appears to me the term best adapted to designate comprehensively all the insular lands scattered in the immensity of the Pacific and Indian Oceans. These in their entirety are, from the ethnographic point of view, divided into a continent, Australia, which shelters a distinct race, the Australians, and into two groups of islands. The western group, that of the Asiatic Archipelago, formed especially of large islands, is peopled principally by Indonesians, pure and mixed. As to the eastern group, it falls into two regions: one region consisting of New Guinea (which, after Greenland, is the largest island of the world), together with the neighbouring archipelagoes peopled by the Melanesian race; and the other region formed of the innumerable islands, islets, rocks, and atolls situated farther east, and occupied by the Polynesian race. I shall describe separately the populations of these four regions, but I must say a few words in advance in regard to the prehistoric periods of Oceania.

“OOceania” seems to me the best term to describe all the island lands scattered across the vastness of the Pacific and Indian Oceans. From an ethnographic perspective, these areas can be divided into one continent, Australia, which is home to a distinct group known as the Australians, and two groups of islands. The western group, which is made up mainly of large islands in the Asiatic Archipelago, is predominantly inhabited by Indonesians, both pure and mixed. The eastern group is divided into two regions: one includes New Guinea (which is the largest island in the world after Greenland), along with nearby archipelagos inhabited by the Melanesian race; the other consists of countless islands, islets, rocks, and atolls located further east, occupied by the Polynesian race. I will describe the populations of these four regions separately, but I want to briefly mention the prehistoric periods of Oceania.

With the exception of Sumatra, Java, and perhaps Borneo, still connected with Asia at the end of the tertiary period, the rest of Oceania formed an insular world apart, of ancient geological origin. Except the discovery of the Pithecanthropus in Java (see p. 360), hardly any finds relating to quaternary man can be pointed to in this part of the world. The objects in chipped or polished flint noted here and there in Malaysia, Australia, or New Zealand, as having been found at a certain depth of earth, have no fixed date, and, seeing that all Oceania, except West Malaysia, was up to the end of the last century still in the “stone age,” and remains in that age yet at several places, it will be understood that these finds may hardly be dated back further than some tens or hundreds of years, and have no connection with geological periods.[544] As to the megalithic monuments,—the ruins of “Morai” and other erections in Oceania, of which the best known are those of Easter Island, but which exist also in the Marquesas, Tahiti, Pitcairn, and Caroline Islands,—a precise date can with no greater certitude be assigned to them.[545]

Except for Sumatra, Java, and maybe Borneo, which were still connected to Asia at the end of the Tertiary period, the rest of Oceania formed a separate insular world with ancient geological origins. Aside from the discovery of the Pithecanthropus in Java (see p. 360), there aren’t many finds related to Quaternary humans in this part of the world. The chipped or polished flint objects found here and there in Malaysia, Australia, or New Zealand, discovered at various depths, don't have a specific date, and considering that all of Oceania, except West Malaysia, was still in the "Stone Age" at the end of the last century, with some places still remaining in that age, it's clear that these finds can hardly be dated back more than a few tens or hundreds of years, and they don't have any connection to geological periods.[544] As for the megalithic monuments—like the ruins of "Morai" and other structures in Oceania, the most famous of which are found on Easter Island, but which also exist in the Marquesas, Tahiti, Pitcairn, and Caroline Islands—a precise date for them cannot be assigned with any greater certainty.[545]

The long duration of the stone age in Oceania may be explained especially by the absence of metallic deposits in Polynesia, and by the relative difficulty of working the iron and copper ores of New Zealand and of the rest of Oceania.[546]

The lengthy Stone Age in Oceania can be explained mainly by the lack of metal deposits in Polynesia, as well as the relative challenges of processing the iron and copper ores found in New Zealand and other parts of Oceania.[546]

The contemporary stone age, together with the affinity of the Malay, Polynesian, and Melanesian languages (Von[Pg 476] Gabelentz), are perhaps the most characteristic traits of Oceanic ethnography.

The modern Stone Age, along with the connection between the Malay, Polynesian, and Melanesian languages (Von[Pg 476] Gabelentz), are probably the most defining features of Oceanic ethnography.

1. AUSTRALIA.—The Australians form a distinct ethnic group, even a race apart from the rest of mankind. Notwithstanding some local differences, they exhibit great unity, not only from the somatic point of view, but also from the point of view of manners, customs, and speech. Up to a certain point this unity may be explained by the fact that the nature and surface of the soil, as well as the climate, the fauna and flora, vary to a relatively slight degree throughout the whole extent of the continent.[547]

1. AAUSTRALIA.—Australians are a unique ethnic group, almost a separate race from the rest of humanity. Despite some local differences, they show considerable unity, not just in physical characteristics but also in their behaviors, customs, and language. This unity can, to some extent, be attributed to the relatively uniform nature of the land, as well as the climate, animals, and plants across the entire continent.[547]

Ambit, Java

FIG. 145.—Ambit, Sundanese of Java (Preanger prov.),
30 years old; height, 1 m. 67; ceph. ind., 85.7; nas. ind., 88.6.
(Phot. Pr. Roland Bonaparte.)

FInstagram. 145.—Ambit, Sundanese from Java (Preanger region),
30 years old; height, 1 minute. 67; ceph. ind., 85.7; nas. ind., 88.6.
(Photo by Pr. Roland Bonaparte.)

Formerly owners of the entire face of their country, the Australians are now driven back farther and farther into poor, sterile, and unhealthy regions. Those who remain in contact with the invading European colonists are debased and degenerate, and disappear rapidly. The tribes of purest type, those of the mid-region and of the north coast, have recently been well studied by Stirling, Baldwin Spencer and Gillen, and W. Roth.[548]

Formerly the owners of their entire country, the Australians are now pushed further and further into poor, barren, and unhealthy areas. Those who still interact with the invading European settlers are degraded and declining, and they are disappearing quickly. The tribes with the purest heritage, those from the central region and the north coast, have recently been thoroughly studied by Stirling, Baldwin Spencer, Gillen, and W. Roth.[548]

The census of 1851 included 55,000 natives in Australia; that of 1881 declared only 31,700; and that of 1891, no doubt better compiled and including newly-discovered districts, gives a return of only 59,464 natives and cross-breeds.[549]

The 1851 census recorded 55,000 indigenous people in Australia; the 1881 census reported only 31,700; and the 1891 census, which was likely more accurate and included newly discovered areas, showed a total of just 59,464 indigenous people and mixed-race individuals.[549]

Between 1836 and 1881 the number of natives in Victoria fell from 5000 to 770; the tribe of the Narrinyeri in South Australia, which in 1842 was composed of 3,200 members, was by 1875 reduced to only 511 individuals. But no positive proof has been obtained of diminution in the number of the natives of the interior, nor of those of the west and north coasts.

Between 1836 and 1881, the number of Indigenous people in Victoria dropped from 5,000 to 770. The Narrinyeri tribe in South Australia, which had 3,200 members in 1842, was reduced to just 511 by 1875. However, there’s no solid evidence showing a decrease in the number of Indigenous people in the interior or along the west and north coasts.

Most Australians exhibit the sufficiently pure type of the Australian race as I have already described it (p. 285): dark chocolate-brown skin, stature above the average (1 m. 67); frizzy or wavy hair, very elongated dolichocephalic head (av. ceph. ind., 71.2 in skulls, and 74.5 on the living subject),[Pg 478] prominent superciliary arches, nose flat and often convex, sunken at the root, where it is very thin, but much enlarged on the level of the nostrils, thick and sometimes protruding lips, etc. The cranial capacity is rather low (see p. 99). The pilous system is well developed over the whole body (Figs. 14, 15, 149, 150). Some of these characters, the dolichocephaly and crooked nose, are common both to the Australians and the Melanesians of the archipelagoes extending north-east of the continent; while other traits (wavy or frizzy hair, etc.) differentiate these two races, and connect the Australians with the Veddahs of Ceylon and with certain of the Dravidian populations of India.

Most Australians display the distinct characteristics of the Australian race that I’ve already mentioned (p. 285): dark chocolate-brown skin, taller than average height (1 minute. 67); frizzy or wavy hair, a very elongated dolichocephalic head (average cephalic index, 71.2 in skulls, and 74.5 in living individuals),[Pg 478] prominent brow ridges, a flat and often convex nose that dips at the bridge and is quite thin but gets wider near the nostrils, thick and sometimes protruding lips, etc. The cranial capacity is relatively low (see p. 99). The hair grows well all over the body (Figs. 14, 15, 149, 150). Some of these traits, like dolichocephaly and a crooked nose, are found in both Australians and the Melanesians from the archipelagos to the northeast of the continent, while other features (like wavy or frizzy hair, etc.) differentiate these two groups, linking Australians to the Veddahs of Ceylon and certain Dravidian populations in India.

Deviations from the type just described are very slight, and have been attributed, without, I think, much justice, to intermixtures with Malays and Papuans on the coasts; elsewhere deviations are quite limited.

Deviations from the type just described are very minor and have been unfairly blamed on mixing with Malays and Papuans along the coasts; in other regions, deviations are quite limited.

The Australians have great powers of endurance, are temperate and fairly agile; they climb trees readily with the aid of a rattan rope, in the style of natives of India, of the Canacks and the Negroes (p. 275 and Fig. 81).

The Australians have impressive endurance, are moderate, and quite agile; they easily climb trees using a rattan rope, similar to the natives of India, the Canacs, and the Africans (p. 275 and Fig. 81).

Most travellers agree in regard to the low intellectual development of the Australians. However, they have sufficiently complex social customs, an extensive folk-lore,[550] and their children have been known, in the missionary schools, to learn to read and write more quickly than European children; arithmetic only appearing to be outside the limits of their intelligence. It should be remarked in regard to all Australian dialects that they have special words only for the figures one and two, occasionally for three and four; but most frequently “two and one” is used for “three,” and “two and two” for “four” (see p. 223).

Most travelers agree that Australians have a low level of intellectual development. However, they do have quite complex social customs, a rich folklore,[550] and their children have been known to learn to read and write faster than European kids in missionary schools; it seems that arithmetic is the only thing beyond their grasp. It’s worth noting that all Australian dialects have specific words for the numbers one and two, and sometimes for three and four; but more often, “two and one” is used to mean “three,” and “two and two” is used to mean “four” (see p. 223).

The Australian languages present great resemblances to each other; they all belong to a single family, having no affinity with any other linguistic group. All these languages are[Pg 479] agglutinative. The various forms of the words are produced by the addition of suffixes, while in the Malay and Papuan languages they are produced by means of prefixes. Abbreviations, slovenliness of pronunciation, and neologisms are very constant, and rapidly lead to changes in these dialects.

The Australian languages have a lot in common; they all come from a single family and have no connection to any other language group. All these languages are[Pg 479] agglutinative. The different forms of words are created by adding suffixes, while in the Malay and Papuan languages, they are created using prefixes. Abbreviations, careless pronunciation, and new words are very common and quickly cause changes in these dialects.

Natives of Livuliri, Floris

FIG. 146.—Natives of Livuliri (near Larantuka, Floris).
Indonesian race with intermixture in varying degrees of Papuan blood.
Height from 1 m. 55 to 1 m. 64; ceph. ind., 76.6 to 86.9.
(Phot. and particulars, Lapicque.)

FInstagram. 146.—People from Livuliri (near Larantuka, Flores).
Indonesian ethnicity with varying levels of Papuan ancestry.
Height ranges from 1 minute. 55 to 1 minute. 64; cranial index, 76.6 to 86.9.
(Photo and details, Lapicque.)

Gesture language is fairly developed, especially as an ideographic mode of communication between tribe and tribe. Very often a gesture completes the phrase, even in a colloquy between two members of the same tribe; certain of these gestures recall those of European children, such as lightly rubbing the stomach to signify “I have had enough” (W. Roth).

Gesture language is quite advanced, particularly as a symbolic way for different tribes to communicate. Often, a gesture adds to what’s being said, even in conversations between two people from the same tribe; some of these gestures are similar to those of European children, like lightly rubbing the stomach to mean “I’ve had enough” (W. Roth).

Buri, Adanara Island

FIG. 147.—Buri, a Solorian of Adanara Island (close to Floris);
Mussulman. Height, 1 m. 64; ceph. ind., 85.1.
(Phot. and particulars, Lapicque.)

FInstagram. 147.—Buri, a Solorian from Adanara Island (near Floris);
Muslim. Height, 1 min 64; ceph. ind., 85.1.
(Photo and details, Lapicque.)

The Australians are typical hunters (for their weapons, see pp. 259 and 267, and Figs. 75 and 78). They know nothing of cattle-raising; their only domestic animal, the dingo, is half wild. Fruit gathering and the digging up of roots of wild plants are the principal occupations of the women. Intoxicating drinks, apart from the regions penetrated by colonists,[Pg 481] are unknown; the custom of chewing “pituri” leaves (Duboisia) as a narcotic is fairly widespread.

The Australians are typical hunters (for their weapons, see pp. 259 and 267, and Figs. 75 and 78). They don’t know anything about raising cattle; their only domesticated animal, the dingo, is semi-wild. Gathering fruit and digging up the roots of wild plants are the main activities of the women. Apart from areas settled by colonists,[Pg 481] they don’t have intoxicating drinks; however, the practice of chewing “pituri” leaves (Duboisia) as a narcotic is fairly common.

Most of the tribes live under such shelters as nature affords, or in huts made of leafy branches, hemispherical or semi-ovoid in shape, and very low (p. 161); even these they do not take the trouble to put up if they have other means of protecting themselves from cold, such as the woollen blankets distributed by the Colonial Governments.

Most tribes live in whatever natural shelters they can find or in huts made from leafy branches, which are rounded or oval-shaped and quite low (p. 161); even these, they don’t bother to build if they have other ways to keep warm, like the wool blankets provided by the Colonial Governments.

Buri, Profile View

FIG. 148.—Same subject as Fig. 147, seen in profile;
a striking blend of Melanesian and Indonesian traits.
(Phot. Lapicque.)

FInstagram. 148.—Same subject as Fig. 147, viewed from the side;
a striking mix of Melanesian and Indonesian features.
(Phot. Lapicque.)

Sundry particulars have already been given in regard to the ornaments of the Australians (p. 178, and Figs. 59, 149, and 150), in regard to their marriage customs (p. 232), their system of affiliation (p. 234), the “corroborees,” and their ceremonies of initiation (p. 241), at which time are practised the circumcision and urethral sub-incision (mika operation, p. 239) of the young people. On p. 210, et seq., I have already[Pg 482] given some details in regard to the music, poetry, and arts of these people.

Sundry details have already been provided about the ornaments of the Australians (p. 178, and Figs. 59, 149, and 150), their marriage customs (p. 232), their system of affiliation (p. 234), the “corroborees,” and their initiation ceremonies (p. 241), during which circumcision and urethral sub-incision (the mika operation, p. 239) are performed on young people. On p. 210, et seq., I have already[Pg 482] shared some details about the music, poetry, and arts of these people.

In most ethnographical works, the extinct Tasmanian[551] people are described side by side with the Australian. The only reason of this lies in the proximity of their habitat, for really the Tasmanians recall rather the Melanesians, both in somatic traits and in mode of life. The language of the Tasmanians, which is agglutinative with prefixes and suffixes, presents no analogy either with Australian or Melanesian tongues. The Tasmanians appear to have been of stature below the average (1 m. 66); head, sub-dolichocephalic (ceph. ind., 76 to 77); broad and prognathous face; flattened and very broad nose; frizzy hair (which last constituted their chief difference from the Australians).[552]

In most ethnographic studies, the extinct Tasmanian[551] people are described alongside the Australians. The only reason for this is their close geographical location, as the Tasmanians actually resemble the Melanesians more, both physically and in their way of life. The Tasmanian language, which is agglutinative with prefixes and suffixes, has no similarities with either Australian or Melanesian languages. The Tasmanians were generally shorter than average (1 minute. 66); they had a sub-dolichocephalic head shape (ceph. ind., 76 to 77); a broad and protruding face; a flattened and very wide nose; and frizzy hair, which was their main distinguishing feature from the Australians.[552]

II. ASIATIC ARCHIPELAGO OR MALAYSIA.—The population of this part of Oceania may be separated into four great ethnic groups: Malays, Indonesians, Negritoes, and Papuans. The first two form the basis of most of the ethnic groups of the Archipelago, while the Negrito element is represented only in the Malay peninsula (which from the ethnic point of view may be associated with the Archipelago), in the Andaman Islands (see p. 397), in the Philippines, and perhaps in Riu-Linga; and the Papuan element in the Aru and Ke Islands, and in a lesser degree in the South-West Islands, Ceram, Buru, Timur, Floris, and the neighbouring islets. It has long been supposed that the interior of the Malay Islands is occupied by negroid races akin to the Negritoes or Papuans; but no[Pg 483] explorer of Sumatra, Borneo, Java,[553] or Celebes has yet encountered Negritoes there, although the centres of these islands have repeatedly been traversed; hence there is little hope of discovering negroid races in them. Besides, the assumed Negritoes of the Mergui Archipelago, of Nicobar and of Engano, described by Anderson, Lapicque, Man, Sherborn and Modigliani, have been shown to be simply Indonesians. The existence of true Negritoes has been affirmed only in the extreme north of the Archipelago, in the spots named above, the Andaman Islands, etc. If there be any trace whatever of intermixture with these races, it should not be necessary to search beyond the north parts of Sumatra and Borneo—in other words, beyond the equator going south.

II. ASIATIC AARCHIPELAGO OR MMALAYSIA.—The population of this part of Oceania can be divided into four main ethnic groups: Malays, Indonesians, Negritoes, and Papuans. The first two form the foundation of most ethnic groups in the Archipelago, while the Negrito element is only found in the Malay Peninsula (which, from an ethnic standpoint, can be linked to the Archipelago), the Andaman Islands (see p. 397), the Philippines, and possibly Riu-Linga; the Papuan element exists in the Aru and Ke Islands, and to a lesser extent in the South-West Islands, Ceram, Buru, Timur, Floris, and nearby islands. It has long been thought that the interior of the Malay Islands is populated by races similar to the Negritoes or Papuans; however, no[Pg 483] explorer of Sumatra, Borneo, Java,[553] or Celebes has yet found Negritoes there, despite many travels through the centers of these islands; thus, there is little hope of finding negroid races there. Furthermore, the supposed Negritoes of the Mergui Archipelago, Nicobar, and Engano, described by Anderson, Lapicque, Man, Sherborn, and Modigliani, have been shown to simply be Indonesians. The existence of true Negritoes has only been confirmed in the far north of the Archipelago, in the previously mentioned locations, the Andaman Islands, etc. If there is any indication of intermixing with these races, it should not be necessary to look further than the northern parts of Sumatra and Borneo—in other words, beyond the equator going south.

I have already given some particulars in regard to the Negritoes of Malacca and the Andamanese (p. 397). As to the people of the Philippines,[554] known under the name of Aeta or Aita (a corruption of the Malay word “hitam,” meaning black), they occupy the interior of Luzon Island in little groups, and are to be met with also in the Mindoro, Panay, and Negros islands, and in the north-east part of Mindanao. They are shorter (1 m. 47) than the Andamanese and the Sakai, but are very like them generally. They are uncivilised hunters; in certain districts where they are crossed with Tagals they have begun to till the soil.

I have already provided some details about the Negritos of Malacca and the Andamanese (p. 397). Regarding the people of the Philippines, [554] known as the Aeta or Aita (a variation of the Malay word “hitam,” which means black), they live in small groups in the interior of Luzon Island, and can also be found on Mindoro, Panay, and Negros islands, as well as in the northeastern part of Mindanao. They are shorter (1 minute. 47) than the Andamanese and the Sakai, but generally resemble them. They are non-sedentary hunters; in some areas where they have mixed with Tagals, they have started to cultivate the land.

“Billy,” Queensland Australian

FIG. 149.—“Billy,” Queensland Australian;
height, 1 m. 51; ceph. ind., 70.4; nas. ind., 107.5.
(Phot. Prince Roland Bonaparte.)

FIG. 149.—“Billy,” Queensland Australian;
height, 1 minute. 51; ceph. ind., 70.4; nas. ind., 107.5.
(Phot. Prince Roland Bonaparte.)

The Papuans (see p. 493) are still less numerous than the Negritoes in the Asiatic Archipelago. They are to be found, more or less pure, only in the Aru, Salawatti, and Waigiu Islands, etc. All these islands form part of the Archipelago only from the political point of view; they belong by their climate, their flora and fauna, to the New Guinea and Australian[Pg 484] world. There are also tribes which recall the Papuans in Ceram and Buru, in the Ke and Tenimber islands; but in the remainder of the Moluccas, and in Floris and Timur islands, only traces of Papuan or Melanesian blood can be discovered, generally in the form of intermixture with or modification of the Malay or Indonesian type (see p. 491, and Figs. 46 to 48). Such at least is the conclusion to which lead the researches of[Pg 485] Ten Kate and Lapicque,[555] the only anthropologists who have studied the question on the spot.

The Papuans (see p. 493) are still fewer in number than the Negritoes in the Asiatic Archipelago. They are mostly found, more or less in their original form, only on the Aru, Salawatti, and Waigiu Islands, among others. All these islands are politically part of the Archipelago; however, in terms of climate, flora, and fauna, they belong to the New Guinea and Australian[Pg 484] region. There are also tribes that resemble the Papuans in Ceram and Buru, as well as in the Ke and Tenimber islands; but in the rest of the Moluccas, and on the islands of Floris and Timur, only remnants of Papuan or Melanesian ancestry can be found, usually mixed with or altered by the Malay or Indonesian type (see p. 491, and Figs. 46 to 48). This is at least the conclusion drawn from the research of[Pg 485] Ten Kate and Lapicque,[555], the only anthropologists who have studied the issue on-site.

“Billy,” Profile View

FIG. 150.—Same subject as Fig. 149, in profile.
Tattooing by cicatrisation.
(Phot. Prince Roland Bonaparte.)

FInstagram. 150.—Same subject as Fig. 149, in profile.
Tattooing by scarring.
(Phot. Prince Roland Bonaparte.)

There remain the two principal groups of the population of[Pg 486] the Archipelago: the Indonesians and Malays, who differ from each other much less than till recently was supposed.

There are still two main groups in the population of[Pg 486] the Archipelago: the Indonesians and Malays, who actually differ from each other much less than people believed until recently.

It has been said and frequently repeated, though without precise documents to warrant the assertion, that the Indonesians resemble the Polynesians, and the Malays the Mongols, but recent anthropological research has proved that this is not the case.[556] The Indonesians, which is the collective name under which, since Junghuhn, Logan, and Hamy,[557] have been comprised the little intermixed inland populations of the large islands (Dyaks of Borneo, Battas of Sumatra, various “Alfurus” of Celebes and certain Moluccas, etc.), have none of the special characters of Polynesians. They are of very short stature (1 m. 57 on the average), mesocephalic or dolichocephalic (av. ceph. ind., 78.5 on the liv. sub.), while the Polynesians are very tall (1 m. 72 on the average) and brachycephalic; and if the yellow colour of the skin and the nature of the hair (straight or slightly curled) are almost the same in the two races, the form of the nose, of the lips, of the face, as well as various other traits, present notable differences.

It has been often said, and frequently repeated, though without concrete evidence to back up the claim, that Indonesians are similar to Polynesians and Malays are similar to Mongols. However, recent research in anthropology has shown that this is not true.[556] Indonesians, which is the collective term used since Junghuhn, Logan, and Hamy,[557] include the mostly unmixed inland populations of the large islands (such as the Dyaks of Borneo, Battas of Sumatra, various “Alfurus” of Celebes, and certain groups from the Moluccas, etc.), lack any of the distinctive features of Polynesians. They tend to be quite short (averaging 1 minute. 57), with either a medium or long head shape (average cranial index of 78.5), while Polynesians are much taller (averaging 1 minute. 72) and have a rounder head shape. Although the skin tone and hair type (straight or slightly curled) are nearly identical in both groups, there are significant differences in the shape of the nose, lips, and face, among various other characteristics.

On the other hand, the Indonesians singularly resemble the Malays. Speaking generally, the Malays are somewhat taller (av. height, 1 m. 61) and brachycephalic (av. ceph. ind., 85 on the liv. sub.), but there is a great variety of type in this group, which is much more mixed than the Indonesian. It is even possible that the Malays (that is to say, the Malays properly so called of Malacca and of Menangkabau in Sumatra, as well as the Javanese, Sundanese, and the riverine “Malays” of the other islands) are a mixed nation, sprung from the intermixture of Indonesians with various Burmese, Negrito, Hindu, Chinese, Papuan and other elements.[Pg 487] In this case, the Indonesians would be of the pure Malay type, the real Protomalays. Intermixtures of Indonesians and Chinese are especially pronounced in Java, in the north of Borneo, and in the Philippines of the north; while in Mindanao, in Sulu and Palawan islands, Arab elements (Moros) dominate, and Hindu elements in certain parts of Java, Sumatra, Bali, and of the south of Borneo. As to intermixtures with Negrito blood they are, as I have already said, specially notable in the north of the Archipelago, while Papuan influence predominates in the south-east.

On the other hand, Indonesians closely resemble Malays. Generally speaking, Malays tend to be a bit taller (average height, 1 minute 61) and have a rounder head shape (average cephalic index, 85 on the living sample), but there's a lot of variety within this group, which is more mixed than the Indonesian population. It's possible that Malays (specifically those from Malacca and Menangkabau in Sumatra, along with Javanese, Sundanese, and the river-dwelling “Malays” from other islands) are a mixed group, formed from the blending of Indonesians with various Burmese, Negrito, Hindu, Chinese, Papuan, and other elements.[Pg 487] In this scenario, Indonesians would represent the pure Malay type, the true Protomalays. The mixing of Indonesians and Chinese is particularly evident in Java, northern Borneo, and northern Philippines, while in Mindanao, Sulu, and Palawan islands, Arab influences (the Moros) are predominant, with Hindu influences also found in certain regions of Java, Sumatra, Bali, and southern Borneo. Regarding the mixing with Negrito ancestry, this is especially noticeable in the northern parts of the Archipelago, while Papuan influence is more prevalent in the southeast.

Apart from some savage tribes like the Olo-ot, the Punan of Borneo, and the Kubus of Sumatra, all the Indonesians and Malays are tillers of the soil, using the hoe. The plant most extensively cultivated is rice, a foreign importation; it has replaced the indigenous plant, millet (Panicum italicum), which only some backward Dyak tribes, the Alfurus of Buru, and the natives of Timur continue to cultivate. Mention has already been made of the use of siri or betel (p. 158), and of geophagy and anthropophagy (p. 145, et seq.) in the Archipelago. The characteristic dress of the Indonesians and Malays is the kaïn, a piece of stuff passed round the loins and between the legs; also the “sarong,” which appears to have been imported from India—a piece of stuff enveloping the body (Figs. 126 and 146), worn by both sexes; the women wear besides the javat or chastity belt. Among other ethnic characters special to the Malay-Indonesians should be mentioned the quadrangular houses on piles,[558] the use of the “sumpitan” (p. 261), the bow being of foreign importation, either from India (in Java and Bali) or from Melanesia (in the islands of the south-east and south-west, in Timur, and the east of Floris); the national weapon, the “kris,” an inlaid dagger with slightly bent handle and sheath in the form of an axe; the large quadrangular or hexagonal shield (Fig. 79); tattooing, practised among the Dyaks, the Igorrotes of the Philippines, the inhabitants of Ceram, of Timur Laut, the Tenimber Islands, etc.

Apart from some fierce tribes like the Olo-ot, the Punan of Borneo, and the Kubus of Sumatra, most Indonesians and Malays farm the land, using hoes. The main crop cultivated is rice, which is a foreign introduction; it has replaced the local crop, millet (Panicum italicum), which only some isolated Dyak tribes, the Alfurus of Buru, and the natives of Timur still grow. It has already been noted that siri or betel is used (p. 158), along with practices like geophagy and anthropophagy (p. 145, et seq.) in the Archipelago. The typical clothing of Indonesians and Malays includes the kaïn, a piece of cloth wrapped around the waist and between the legs; also the “sarong,” which seems to have been brought in from India—a piece of fabric that wraps around the body (Figs. 126 and 146), worn by both men and women; women also wear the javat or chastity belt. Other ethnic traits unique to the Malay-Indonesians include the quadrangular stilt houses,[558] the use of the “sumpitan” (p. 261), with the bow being a foreign influence, either from India (in Java and Bali) or from Melanesia (in the southeast and southwest islands, in Timur, and eastern Flores); the national weapon, the “kris,” a decorated dagger with a slightly curved handle and sheath shaped like an axe; the large quadrangular or hexagonal shield (Fig. 79); tattooing, practiced among the Dyaks, the Igorrotes of the Philippines, and the inhabitants of Ceram, Timur Laut, the Tenimber Islands, and others.

Among the customs of the family life should be noted the alterations of names (the father at the birth of a son takes the name of “the father of so-and-so”); exogamy in relation to the clan (the “saku” of the Malays of Sumatra, the “marga” of the Battas), practised everywhere in Malaysia except by the Dyaks and the Alfurus to the north of Celebes; the patriarchate, existing everywhere except in the “Padangshe Bovenlanden” (upper Padang district, Sumatra), among the Nias and the Alfurus of Baru and Ceram; the universal custom of carrying off the bride and the indemnity paid at once to the relatives (“halaku” of the Dyaks, the “sompo” of the Bugis). The barbarous practice of head-hunting, either to be assured of servitors in the other world, or to lend importance there (see p. 251), is in vogue with the Dyaks, the Nias, the Alfurus of Minahassa (north Celebes), the Toradja (mid Celebes), as well as in Ceram and Timur islands.[559] Family property exists almost throughout the Archipelago, side by side with individual property.

Among the customs of family life, we should note the changes in names (the father, upon the birth of a son, takes on the title “father of so-and-so”); exogamy related to the clan (the "saku" of the Malays in Sumatra, the "marga" of the Battas), practiced throughout Malaysia except by the Dyaks and the Alfurus to the north of Celebes; the patriarchal system, which exists everywhere except in the “Padangshe Bovenlanden” (upper Padang district, Sumatra), among the Nias and the Alfurus of Baru and Ceram; the widespread custom of carrying away the bride and paying an immediate indemnity to her relatives (“halaku” of the Dyaks, the “sompo” of the Bugis). The brutal practice of head-hunting, either to ensure the presence of servants in the afterlife or to gain status there (see p. 251), is practiced among the Dyaks, the Nias, the Alfurus of Minahassa (north Celebes), the Toradja (mid Celebes), as well as in Ceram and the Timur islands.[559] Family property exists almost throughout the Archipelago, alongside individual property.

The Malay languages, which form part of the Malayo-Polynesian family, are of agglutinative structure, with prefixes and suffixes; by the introduction of infixes they have a tendency towards flexion. Many words, however, do not change at all, and represent at the same time noun, verb, adjective, etc. Among the dialects, Tagal is the richest in affixes and gives to its words the finest shades; then comes the Batta dialect, the dialect of the Alfurus of Minahassa, and lastly, Javanese (see also p. 133). The dialect least complicated grammatically is the Malay properly so called; it has become the lingua franca and official language of the Mussulmans throughout the Archipelago. Among other dialects may be mentioned Mangkassarese and the “Behasa tanat” of the Moluccas.

The Malay languages, which are part of the Malayo-Polynesian family, have an agglutinative structure, featuring prefixes and suffixes. With the addition of infixes, they have a tendency to be more flexible. Many words, however, remain unchanged and can function as nouns, verbs, adjectives, etc. Among the dialects, Tagal is the richest in affixes and provides the most subtle distinctions; next is the Batta dialect, spoken by the Alfurus of Minahassa, followed by Javanese (see also p. 133). The least complicated dialect grammatically is Malay itself; it has become the lingua franca and official language of Muslims across the Archipelago. Other notable dialects include Mangkassarese and the “Behasa tanat” of the Moluccas.

The Javanese make use of a special alphabet; the inhabitants of the south of Sumatra have a hooked mode of writing, different from the rounded writing of the Battas; finally, the[Pg 489] Bugis and Mangkassars of Celebes, as well as the Bisayans and Tagals of the Philippines, have special forms of writing derived probably from the Devanagari. The Malays employ the Arabo-Persian alphabet.

The Javanese use a unique alphabet; the people in southern Sumatra have a hooked writing style, which is different from the rounded writing of the Battas. Lastly, the [Pg 489] Bugis and Mangkassars from Celebes, along with the Bisayans and Tagals in the Philippines, have distinct writing forms likely derived from the Devanagari script. The Malays use the Arabo-Persian alphabet.

I will now add some particulars of the population of each of the large islands of Malaysia.[560]

I will now provide some details about the population of each of the large islands of Malaysia.[560]

The interior of the island of Sumatra is inhabited by independent populations, known in the north under the name of Battas (with whom should probably be associated the Ala and the Gaja of the interior of Achin), and under the name of Kubu and Lubu in the south. All these tribes, who are primitive tillers of the soil, are famous as man-eaters and head hunters. As to the regions contiguous to the east and west coasts, they are inhabited (as well as in part the middle of the island, between the Kubu and the Batta) by the so-called Menangkabau Malays (the name of the ancient native kingdom). The north coast is taken up by the Achinese, a mixed Arabo-Indonesian people; while the south part of the great island is occupied by other compound populations, the Palenbangs or Javanese of Sumatra, the Rejangs (Malayo-Javanese), the Passumahs (Indonesians intermixed with Javanese blood), and finally the Lampongs, cross-breeds of Passumahs with Sundanese (see below) and the natives of the south, such as the Orang-Abong, who have to-day almost disappeared. The islands skirting west Sumatra are peopled with tribes resembling the Battas, like the islanders of Nias, of Engano (p. 486, note), etc. The islands to the east are peopled by Malays, except Riu and the middle of Biliton, which are occupied by the Baju, a tribe perhaps of Negrito race. The island of Bangka is occupied mostly by a branch of the Passumahs.

The interior of Sumatra is home to independent groups, known in the north as the Battas (along with the Ala and Gaja of the Achin region), and in the south as the Kubu and Lubu. These tribes, who are basic farmers, are infamous for being man-eaters and headhunters. The areas along the east and west coasts, as well as parts of the island’s center between the Kubu and Batta, are inhabited by the Menangkabau Malays (named after the ancient native kingdom). The north coast is settled by the Achinese, a mixed Arab-Indonesian group, while the southern part of the island is home to other mixed populations like the Palenbangs or Javanese of Sumatra, the Rejangs (Malayo-Javanese), the Passumahs (Indonesians mixed with Javanese), and finally the Lampongs, a mix of Passumahs and Sundanese, along with the local south natives, such as the Orang-Abong, who are now nearly extinct. The islands near west Sumatra are populated by tribes similar to the Battas, including the islanders of Nias and Engano (p. 486, note). The islands to the east are inhabited by Malays, except for Riau and central Biliton, which are occupied by the Baju, a tribe that may be of Negrito descent. The island of Bangka is largely settled by a branch of the Passumahs.

In Java are to be noted the Sundanese in the west, the Javanese in the east, the former being less affected by Hindu[Pg 490] elements. The Madurese of Madura and Bavean islands, as well as the Balinese of Bali, are like the Javanese. In the less accessible mountains of the province of Bantam (west of the island) live the Baduj, and in those of the east (province of Pasuruan) the Tenggerese. These are two fairly pure Indonesian tribes, who have preserved their heathen customs in the midst of the Mussulman population of Java. There are people like them in Bali, Lombok, and Sumbawa.[561]

In Java, you'll find the Sundanese in the west and the Javanese in the east, with the Sundanese being less influenced by Hindu elements. The Madurese from Madura and Bavean islands, as well as the Balinese from Bali, are similar to the Javanese. In the more remote mountains of Bantam province (in the west of the island) live the Baduj, and in the eastern mountains (Pasuruan province), you can find the Tenggerese. These two tribes are quite distinctly Indonesian and have maintained their traditional customs despite being surrounded by the Muslim population in Java. Similar groups exist in Bali, Lombok, and Sumbawa.[Pg 490][561]

In Borneo, the coast is occupied by Malays, except the north-east part, where are found Suluans (Arabised Indonesians from the Sulu Islands), Bugis, and the Bajaus or Sea Gypsies, analogous to those of Riu and Mergui (p. 396).

In Borneo, the coast is inhabited by Malays, except for the northeast part, where you’ll find Suluans (Arabized Indonesians from the Sulu Islands), Bugis, and the Bajaus or Sea Gypsies, similar to those from Riau and Mergui (p. 396).

The interior of the large island is, however, the exclusive domain of the Dyaks, the numerous tribes of which may be divided into two great groups, the one of stationary, the other of nomadic habits. The sedentary tribes, more or less intermixed with immigrant elements, Chinese, Malay, and Bugi, are more or less civilised. First come the Kayans, the Bahau, and the Segai; then the Tagans, among whom, it is said, the practice obtains of girls being deflowered by their fathers; and, lastly, the Dusuns or Sun Dyaks, the Baludupis, the Land Dyaks, and the Sea Dyaks of Sarawak, etc. Second, the nomads, who are purer than the fixed tribes, and sometimes half savage, as, for example, the Punan and Olo-ot of the middle of the island, are still little known.[562]

The interior of the large island is, however, the exclusive territory of the Dyaks, whose many tribes can be divided into two main groups: one that is settled and the other that is nomadic. The settled tribes, which are mixed with immigrant groups like the Chinese, Malay, and Bugi, are relatively more civilized. First are the Kayans, the Bahau, and the Segai; then the Tagans, among whom it’s said that girls are deflowered by their fathers; and finally the Dusuns or Sun Dyaks, the Baludupis, the Land Dyaks, and the Sea Dyaks of Sarawak, etc. Second are the nomads, who are purer than the settled tribes and sometimes quite wild, such as the Punan and Olo-ot from the center of the island, who are still not well known.[562]

The Philippine archipelago[563] contains, besides Negritoes (p. 483), a crowd of Indonesian tribes, which, from the lin[Pg 491]guistic and ethnic point of view, may be grouped as follows:—Starting in the north-east we meet first the Cagayanes or Ibangs around Lake Cagayan in the island of Luzon, and their neighbours the Ifugaos, who are hunters of skulls; then farther south we find the Igorrotes and their congeners; then the Tagals; then, still farther south, in the interior, on all the east coast of Luzon, as well as on the coast of Mindoro, are found the savage Mangianes. At many points these peoples are intermixed with Chinese blood. The west coast of Luzon is occupied by the Ilocanos, who are bold colonists, and, farther south, towards Manilla, tribes of the Zambales and Pangasinanes. The quite southern extremity of Luzon is occupied by the Bicols, nearly related to the Tagals, whom one finds again also scattered over the islands (Catanduanes Islands, north Masbate Island, etc.). West Mindanao is taken up by the mixed population (Arabo-Negrito-Indonesian) of pirates, Mussulman fanatics, known by the name of Moros; the east of this island being inhabited by several tribes as yet little known, such as Mandayas in the south, Bogobos in the north, etc., and the Caragas tribe of Bisaya or Vissaya. Most of these last people occupy the rest of the archipelago north of Mindanao, as far as and including the south of Masbate and Samar and Tablas islands. They are met again beside the Moros in Palawan Island between the Philippines and Borneo. The Tagaloc language is largely superseding other dialects in the archipelago; it has already displaced Bicol in the north of the province of Camarine, Bisayan on Marinduque Island, etc. Besides, Tagals emigrate to the other parts of the archipelago and even to Marianne Islands. Most of the Tagals are Christians; many can read and write Spanish, and not a few have received a superior education.

The Philippine archipelago[563] is home to, alongside the Negritoes (p. 483), a number of Indonesian tribes that can be categorized from a linguistic and ethnic perspective as follows: Starting in the northeast, we first encounter the Cagayanes or Ibangs around Lake Cagayan in Luzon, along with their neighbors the Ifugaos, known for their skull-hunting. Further south, we find the Igorrotes and their relatives; next are the Tagals. Still farther south, in the interior along the entire east coast of Luzon and the coast of Mindoro, live the savage Mangianes. At various points, these groups mix with Chinese ancestry. The west coast of Luzon is primarily inhabited by the Ilocanos, who are adventurous settlers, with Zambales and Pangasinanes tribes found farther south near Manila. The southernmost part of Luzon is occupied by the Bicols, closely related to the Tagals, who are also scattered across the islands (such as Catanduanes Islands and north Masbate Island, etc.). The western part of Mindanao is taken up by a mixed population (Arabo-Negrito-Indonesian) of pirates and Muslim fanatics referred to as Moros, while the eastern part of the island is home to several lesser-known tribes, such as the Mandayas in the south and Bogobos in the north, among others, as well as the Caragas tribe of Bisaya or Vissaya. Most of these groups inhabit the remaining parts of the archipelago north of Mindanao, including southern Masbate, Samar, and Tablas islands. They are also found alongside the Moros on Palawan Island, situated between the Philippines and Borneo. The Tagalog language is increasingly replacing other dialects across the archipelago; it has already taken over Bicol in the northern part of Camarines province and Bisayan on Marinduque Island, etc. Additionally, Tagalogs are migrating to other areas of the archipelago and even to the Mariana Islands. The majority of Tagalogs are Christians, many can read and write in Spanish, and quite a few have received advanced education.

Celebes Island is peopled in the north (Minahassa province) by the Alfurus; in the south by Mangkassars and Bugis, and by various tribes (Toraja, Gorontolo, etc.), who as yet have been little studied, in the middle. The Moluccas are inhabited by other “Alfurus,” with a greater strain of Papuan blood. Timur, apart from its Malay or Indonesian coast populations,[Pg 492] contains also tribes imbued with Papuan blood; such are the Emabelo of the middle of the island; the Timur-Atuli of the east coast; the Helong-Atuli in Samu Island opposite Kupang, the capital of Timur; and lastly, the Rottinese of Rotti Island, south-west of Timur, etc.

Celebes Island is home to the Alfurus in the north (Minahassa province), while the south is inhabited by the Mangkassars and Bugis, along with various tribes (like the Toraja and Gorontalo) that haven’t been extensively studied yet, in the central region. The Moluccas are also populated by other “Alfurus,” featuring a stronger influence of Papuan ancestry. Timur, besides its Malay or Indonesian coastal populations,[Pg 492] also includes tribes with Papuan heritage, such as the Emabelo from the center of the island, the Timur-Atuli on the east coast, the Helong-Atuli on Samu Island opposite Kupang, the capital of Timur, and finally, the Rottinese from Rotti Island, southwest of Timur, among others.

Young Papuan Woman, Samarai People

FIG. 151.—Young Papuan woman of the Samarai people
(Dinner Island, Moresby group, south of the south-east extremity of New Guinea).
Mixed type (Papuan-Melano-Polynesian).
(Phot. Haddon.)

FIG. 151.—Young Papuan woman from the Samarai people
(Dinner Island, Moresby group, south of the southeast tip of New Guinea).
Mixed heritage (Papuan-Melano-Polynesian).
(Phot. Haddon.)

In Floris Island, the Sikanese of the central isthmus and the east part possess traits intermediate between Papuans and Indonesians, while the Ata-Krowé of Koting and the Hokar mountaineers are almost pure Papuans. The Lios to the west of the Sikanese present again a mixed type, as do also the inhabitants of the region of Larantuka (Fig. 146), among[Pg 493] whom may be found all the degrees between Indonesian and almost pure Papuan. This applies also to the Solorese of the Solor Archipelago, east of Floris (Figs. 147 and 148).[564]

In Floris Island, the Sikanese from the central isthmus and the eastern part have traits that are a blend of Papuans and Indonesians, while the Ata-Krowé of Koting and the Hokar mountaineers are nearly pure Papuans. The Lios to the west of the Sikanese represent another mixed type, as do the people from the Larantuka region (Fig. 146), among whom you can find all variations between Indonesian and almost pure Papuan. This is also true for the Solorese of the Solor Archipelago, located east of Floris (Figs. 147 and 148).[564]

III. MELANESIA.—The Melanesians are a well-characterised race. However, they exhibit in somatic type differences sufficiently marked to separate the Melanesian race into two sub-races. The one, Papuan, with elongated face and hooked nose, is especially spread over New Guinea; the other, or Melanesian properly so called, with broader face, straight or concave nose, has a geographical area which covers (from north-west to south-east) the Admiralty Islands, New Britain (Bismarck Archipelago), Solomon, Santa-Cruz, and Banks Islands, the New Hebrides, Loyalty Islands, and the Fiji Archipelago. Further, there are a certain number of ethnic characters which also justify the separation of the Papuans from the Melanesians properly so called. (See pp. 494495.)

III. MELANESIA.—The Melanesians are a distinct ethnic group. However, they show enough differences in physical characteristics to classify them into two sub-groups. The first, Papuan, has an elongated face and a hooked nose, and is primarily found in New Guinea. The other, properly termed Melanesian, has a broader face and a straight or concave nose, and is found across a geographical area that extends from the north-west to the south-east, including the Admiralty Islands, New Britain (Bismarck Archipelago), Solomon Islands, Santa-Cruz and Banks Islands, the New Hebrides, Loyalty Islands, and the Fiji Archipelago. Additionally, there are several ethnic traits that further support distinguishing the Papuans from the Melanesians as defined. (See pp. 494495.)

The Papuans[565] are found in the large island of New Guinea and the coast islets; for the most part they present the more or less uniform type of the Papuan sub-race (long face, convex nose, etc.), but the Melanesian type properly so called is also[Pg 494] to be found among them. The frequency of individuals with a skin relatively fair, chocolate colour, especially in the south-east of the island (British New Guinea), joined to the frequency of wavy and straight hair, which, in the case of the children, is sometimes chestnut or sandy at the ends and black at the roots, has given the impression that there was a strong infusion of Polynesian blood in the veins of the Papuans; but this idea has been refuted by all ethnologists who have studied the populations on the spot—Miklukho-Maclay, Finsch, Haddon. According to the last, the evidence is in favour of some intermixture with the Melanesians, who, in general, are fairer than the Papuans, and have often wavy hair.[566] Some anthropologists (Miklukho-Maclay, Meyer, Hamy, Mantegazza) have also pointed out the presence of Negritoes or Negrito-Papuan cross-breeds in New Guinea, basing their opinion on the study of skulls. These Negrito-Papuans appear to be localised at a single spot on the island, at the mouth of the river Fly.[567]

The Papuans[565] are found on the large island of New Guinea and its coastal islets. For the most part, they show a fairly consistent type within the Papuan sub-race (long face, curved nose, etc.), but the true Melanesian type is also[Pg 494] present among them. There are many individuals with relatively fair skin and a chocolate hue, especially in the southeast of the island (British New Guinea). This, combined with occurrences of wavy and straight hair, which in children can sometimes be chestnut or sandy at the ends and black at the roots, has led to the belief that there is a significant Polynesian influence in the Papuans' lineage. However, this idea has been dismissed by ethnologists who have studied the populations directly—Miklukho-Maclay, Finsch, Haddon. According to Haddon, the evidence supports some mixing with the Melanesians, who are generally lighter-skinned than the Papuans and often have wavy hair.[566] Some anthropologists (Miklukho-Maclay, Meyer, Hamy, Mantegazza) have also noted the presence of Negritoes or Negrito-Papuan crossbreeds in New Guinea, based on skull studies. These Negrito-Papuans seem to be concentrated in one area of the island, at the mouth of the Fly River.[567]

It should also be said that some Polynesian customs, kava drinking, tattoo by pricking, the possession of outrigger[Pg 495] canoes, etc., to be met with at certain points of New Guinea, are equally to be found in Melanesia (New Hebrides, Fiji, etc.). Many ethnic characters may be brought forward which are proper to the Papuans, or in which either Indonesians or Australians resemble them—large phalanstery-houses (up to 300 feet) on piles with roofs of the shape of a reversed boat; the ceremony of initiation for the young of both sexes; the use of the bull-roarer and of very elaborate masks in religious ceremonies, the seated attitude of limbs crossed tailor-fashion, in which last they differ from the Melanesians, who rest squatting.

It should also be noted that some Polynesian customs, like kava drinking, tattooing by pricking, and the use of outrigger[Pg 495] canoes, etc., can also be found in certain areas of New Guinea and are similarly seen in Melanesia (like the New Hebrides and Fiji). Many ethnic traits can be highlighted that are unique to the Papuans or that show similarities with Indonesians or Australians—large communal houses (up to 300 feet) built on stilts with roofs shaped like inverted boats; initiation ceremonies for young people of both genders; the use of the bull-roarer and elaborate masks in religious rituals; and the seated position with legs crossed, which sets them apart from Melanesians, who usually sit in a squatting position.

The Papuans (perhaps a million in all) are divided into a great number of tribes. In the west (Dutch) portion are the Mafors or Nofurs; the Varopen or Vandamenes in Geelvink Bay and the islands lying within it; the Arfaks, their neighbours of the interior; then, on the north coast, the Amberbaki, the Karons, one of the tribes practising anthropophagy (tolerably rare among Papuans); lastly, the Talandjang, near Humboldt Gulf; the Onimes in the neighbourhood of McClure Gulf, and the Kovai farther to the south. The Papuans of German New Guinea present linguistic differences: those of Astrolabe Bay do not understand the natives of Finsch Haven, etc. In British New Guinea the following tribes are known: the Daudai to the west of the mouth of the Fly, the Kiwai in the mouth of this river; the Orokolo and the Motu-Motu or Toaripi in the Gulf of Papua; the Motu or Kerepunu (Fig. 152) of Port Moresby;[568] the Koitapu and the Kupele more in the interior of the country, near the Owen Stanley range; the Loyalupu and the Aroma to the south of the foot of Moresby; finally, the Massim of the extremity of the peninsula, the Samarai (Fig. 151) and their congeners of the Entrecasteaux Islands and the Louisiade archipelago.[569]

The Papuans (around a million in total) are split into many tribes. In the western (Dutch) part, there are the Mafors or Nofurs; the Varopen or Vandamenes in Geelvink Bay and its surrounding islands; the Arfaks, their neighbors from the interior; then, on the north coast, the Amberbaki, the Karons, one of the tribes that practice cannibalism (which is fairly rare among Papuans); and finally, the Talandjang near Humboldt Gulf; the Onimes near McClure Gulf, and the Kovai further south. The Papuans of German New Guinea have some linguistic differences: those from Astrolabe Bay don’t understand the natives from Finsch Haven, etc. In British New Guinea, the following tribes are known: the Daudai to the west of the Fly River's mouth, the Kiwai at the river's mouth; the Orokolo and the Motu-Motu or Toaripi in the Gulf of Papua; the Motu or Kerepunu (Fig. 152) of Port Moresby;[568] the Koitapu and the Kupele further in the country near the Owen Stanley Range; the Loyalupu and the Aroma south of Moresby; and finally, the Massim at the end of the peninsula, the Samarai (Fig. 151) and their relatives from the Entrecasteaux Islands and the Louisiade archipelago.[569]

[Pg 497] The Papuans are tillers of the soil, and especially cultivate sago, maize, and tobacco; occasionally they are hunters and fishers, and are then very adroit in laying snares and poisoning waters; their favourite weapons are the bow and arrow with flint heads. Excellent boat-builders, they merely do a coasting trade, and while understanding well how to handle a sail, rarely ever venture into the open sea. Graphic arts are developed among them (see p. 202, and Figs. 60 to 62). The practice of chewing betel is universal. The dress of the men is a belt of beaten bark (Fig. 60); that of the women an apron made of dry grasses. Funeral rites vary with the tribe: burial, exposure on trees, embalmment. Very superstitious, living in dread of “spirits” at the merest whispering of leaves in the forest, of a bad augury at the least cry of a bird, the Papuans have no religion properly so called any more than they have “chiefs”; all public matters are discussed at meetings where, however, individual influences are always predominant. Among their principal customs may be noted the vendetta and the headhunt.

[Pg 497] The Papuans are farmers who mainly grow sago, corn, and tobacco. Sometimes they hunt and fish, skillfully setting traps and poisoning water sources. Their preferred weapons are bows and arrows with flint tips. They are also great boat builders, engaging in coastal trade, and although they know how to handle a sail, they rarely go out into the open sea. They have developed graphic arts (see p. 202, and Figs. 60 to 62). Chewing betel is common among them. Men wear a belt made from beaten bark (Fig. 60), while women wear an apron made from dried grasses. Funeral customs differ by tribe and include burial, exposure on trees, or embalming. They are very superstitious, living in fear of "spirits" at the slightest rustle of leaves in the forest or a bad omen at the faintest bird call. The Papuans have no organized religion or formal chiefs; public matters are discussed in meetings, but individual influence is always prominent. Among their notable customs are the vendetta and headhunting.

Papuans of the Kerepunu Tribe

FIG. 152.—Papuans of the Kerepunu tribe at Tamain-Hula (New Guinea),
ready to turn up the soil with their pointed sticks.
(Phot. Haddon.)

FInstagram. 152.—Papuans from the Kerepunu tribe at Tamain-Hula (New Guinea),
prepared to use their pointed sticks to dig the soil.
(Phot. Haddon.)

Woman of the Fualu Clan

FIG. 153.—Woman of the Fualu clan (east coast of
New Caledonia), of pure Melanesian race.
(Phot. E. Robin.)

FInstagram. 153.—Woman of the Fualu clan (east coast of
New Caledonia), of pure Melanesian descent.
(Phot. E. Robin.)

The inhabitants of Torres Straits very much recall the Papuans; they have nothing in common with the Australians.[570]

The people of Torres Straits strongly remember the Papuans; they have nothing in common with the Australians.[570]

The Melanesians properly so called[571] are for the most part of the variety with large square or lozenge-shaped face, with the straight or retroussé nose of the Melanesian race[Pg 498] (Fig. 153). In general they are taller and more dolichocephalic than the Papuans. (See Appendices I. and II.) All tillers of the soil, cultivating especially the yam and taro, they practise hunting and fishing only at times; the pig is their only domestic animal. Most of the Melanesians still live in the stone age, but the former fine axes of polished serpentine, artistically hafted, are disappearing more[Pg 499] and more. They also make many weapons and tools of wood, of shells, and of human humerus bones. The favourite weapons are the club, bow, and spear, this last being used only in war (except in New Caledonia, where the bow is little employed).

The Melanesians, properly known as such[571], mostly have large square or diamond-shaped faces, with the straight or retroussé nose typical of the Melanesian race[Pg 498] (Fig. 153). They are generally taller and have longer heads than the Papuans. (See Appendices I. and II.) They primarily grow crops, especially yams and taro, and hunt and fish occasionally; pigs are their only domesticated animals. Most Melanesians still live in a stone-age lifestyle, but the previously well-crafted axes made from polished serpentine, which were beautifully handled, are becoming increasingly rare[Pg 499]. They also create various weapons and tools from wood, shells, and human bones. The preferred weapons are the club, bow, and spear, with the spear primarily used for warfare (except in New Caledonia, where bows are rarely used).

The arrow and spear heads are most often of human bone, barbed, and sometimes poisoned with juices of plants or microbes from the ooze of ponds or lagunes.

The arrow and spear heads are usually made of human bone, barbed, and sometimes poisoned with plant juices or microbes from the muck of ponds or lagoons.

The Melanesians build outrigger and twin canoes, but they do not sail far from the coasts. Pottery in certain islands is unknown; the dwellings are little houses on piles, except in New Caledonia, where circular huts are met with. Communal houses (“Gamal”) exist everywhere. Tattooing, little practised, is most often done by cicatrices. The habit of chewing betel is general, except in New Caledonia; but kava is almost unknown. Anthropophagy is now indulged in only on the Solomon Islands and in some islands of New Britain and New Hebrides, although the custom of preserving the skulls of the dead, and of hanging them near the hut side by side with those derived from head-hunting, is general. As in New Guinea, there exists a mob of dialects and tongues in each of the Melanesian Islands, and even in different parts of the same island. Melanesian women are very chaste and virtuous, and that notwithstanding the absence of the sense of modesty, at least in New Britain, where they go completely naked, as also do the men. The men, in certain islands, wear only antipudic garments (see p. 170). Taboo in Melanesia assumes a less clear form than in Polynesia, where it amounts to simple interdiction without the intervention of mysterious forces. As in Australia there are no “tribes” among the Melanesians (except perhaps in New Caledonia), but in each island there exists two or more exogamous “classes” or clans (as in Australia), and the regulations of group marriage (p. 231) are observed as strictly in the Solomon Islands as in Viti-Levu (the largest of the Fiji Islands). Secret societies (Duk-Duk, etc., p. 253) flourish especially in Banks Islands, but are met with also in the rest of Melanesia and even in the Fijis, where,[Pg 500] especially in the west islands, the population is already intermixed with Polynesian elements.[572]

The Melanesians build outrigger and twin canoes, but they don’t sail far from the shore. Pottery is absent on certain islands; houses are small structures on stilts, except in New Caledonia, where you find circular huts. Communal houses (“Gamal”) are common everywhere. Tattooing, which is rarely practiced, is mostly done with scars. Chewing betel is widespread, except in New Caledonia, but kava is nearly unknown. Cannibalism is now only practiced on the Solomon Islands and some islands in New Britain and New Hebrides, although the custom of keeping the skulls of the dead and hanging them near the hut alongside those from head-hunting is common. Like in New Guinea, there are many dialects and languages on each of the Melanesian Islands, and even within different areas of the same island. Melanesian women are very chaste and virtuous, despite the lack of modesty, especially in New Britain, where they go completely naked, as do the men. In certain islands, men wear only minimal clothing (see p. 170). In Melanesia, taboos are not as clearly defined as in Polynesia, where they are simply prohibitions without the influence of mysterious forces. Similar to Australia, there are no “tribes” among the Melanesians (except possibly in New Caledonia), but on each island, there are two or more exogamous “classes” or clans (as in Australia), and the rules regarding group marriage (p. 231) are followed as strictly in the Solomon Islands as they are in Viti-Levu (the largest of the Fiji Islands). Secret societies (Duk-Duk, etc., p. 253) thrive particularly in the Banks Islands, but are also found elsewhere in Melanesia and even in the Fijis, where, especially in the western islands, the population is already mixed with Polynesian elements.[Pg 500][572]

IV. POLYNESIANS.[573]—Seeing that the Polynesians are distributed over a number of islands, and exist under the most varied conditions, we might expect to find a multitude of types. This is not the case; the Polynesian race shows almost the same traits from the Hawaii Islands to New Zealand. This fact is due to the constant migrations from island to island, and the active trading conducted by all the Polynesians with each other, the effect of which is to efface, by process of intermixture, differences arising from insular isolation.

IV. POLYNESIANS.[573]—Given that Polynesians are spread across various islands and live in very different environments, we might expect to see a wide range of types. However, that’s not the case; the Polynesian race displays nearly the same characteristics from the Hawaiian Islands to New Zealand. This consistency is due to the ongoing migrations between islands and the active trade relationships among all the Polynesians, which blend together the differences that arise from living in isolated islands.

From the physical point of view the Polynesian is tall (1 m. 74, average of 254 measurements), sub-brachycephalic (ceph. ind., 82.6 according to 178 measurements on the living subject, 79 according to 328 skulls), of a fair complexion (warm yellow or brownish), with straight or curly hair, most often straight nose, the cheek-bones fairly projecting, the superciliary arches little marked, and, especially among the women, something languorous in the look (Figs. 154 to 156). The Polynesian therefore differs completely from the Melanesian, whose stature is below the average (1 m. 62 according to 295 measurements), and who is dolichocephalic (ceph. ind., 77 according to 223 measurements on living subject); he has dark skin, woolly or frizzy hair, concave or convex nose, and, lastly, prominent superciliary arches,[Pg 501] which, combined with the pigmentation of the cornea, give a fierce and suspicious look. The Polynesian is more subject to obesity than the Melanesian. He is more lively, more imaginative and intelligent, but also more dissolute in his habits than the Melanesian.

From a physical perspective, the Polynesian is tall (1.74 m, based on an average of 254 measurements), sub-brachycephalic (cranial index of 82.6 according to 178 measurements of living subjects, 79 based on 328 skulls), with a fair complexion (warm yellow or brownish), straight or curly hair, usually a straight nose, pronounced cheekbones, and lightly marked brow ridges. Especially among the women, there’s a somewhat languorous look (Figs. 154 to 156). The Polynesian clearly differs from the Melanesian, who has a lower average height (1.62 m according to 295 measurements) and is dolichocephalic (cranial index of 77 based on 223 measurements of living subjects); he has dark skin, woolly or frizzy hair, a concave or convex nose, and prominent brow ridges, which, along with the pigmentation of the cornea, create a fierce and suspicious appearance. The Polynesian is more prone to obesity than the Melanesian. He is livelier, more imaginative and intelligent, but also more dissolute in his habits compared to the Melanesian.

Before the advent of Europeans, the Polynesians of the upper volcanic islands were expert tillers of the soil (as witness the ruins of irrigation works in Tahiti, New Zealand, and elsewhere), and in the lower coral islands lived on the produce of the cocoa-nut and bread-fruit trees. Everywhere they were accustomed to fish. They cooked their foods by means of heated stones (p. 153), having (except in Micronesia, in the Tonga and Easter Islands) no knowledge of pottery; they excelled in the art of plaiting, in the preparation of tapa (p. 183), and especially in navigation. Their light canoes with outriggers (Fig. 82), or their large twin canoes connected by a platform and always carrying a single triangular sail of mat, furrowed the ocean in all directions. For weapons they had short javelins, slings, and wooden clubs, but neither bow nor shield. They made tools of shell and polished stone, and were proficient in the art of wood-sculpture (Fig. 71). Pictography appears to have been known only in Easter Island (p. 140). Kava (p. 158) was their national drink; tattooing had reached the condition of an art in New Zealand only. The custom of taboo (p. 252) probably originated in Polynesia, where also two or three social classes are to be met with. After the arrival of Europeans the Polynesians, adopting the customs of the new-comers, underwent rapid changes. For the most part Christians, especially Protestants, they have modified their very rich old mythology by the incorporation of Christian legends. In several islands, in Hawaii, Samoa, and New Zealand, the Polynesians have even risen to the height of having parliamentary institutions, in the management of which they themselves take part. On the other hand, civilisation, in ensuring peace, has had the effect of making the Polynesians unenterprising and lazy, and more inclined to dissipation than they were formerly. And the population is diminishing, owing either to imported epidemic[Pg 502] diseases (particularly syphilis and tuberculosis), or to cross-breeding.

Before the arrival of Europeans, the Polynesians of the upper volcanic islands were skilled farmers (as shown by the ruins of irrigation systems in Tahiti, New Zealand, and other places) and relied on the harvest from coconut and breadfruit trees on the lower coral islands. They were used to fishing everywhere. They cooked their food using heated stones (p. 153), and (except in Micronesia, Tonga, and Easter Islands) had no knowledge of pottery; they were masters of weaving, preparing tapa (p. 183), and especially skilled in navigation. Their lightweight canoes with outriggers (Fig. 82), or their large twin canoes joined by a platform and always carrying a single triangular mat sail, navigated the ocean in all directions. For weapons, they used short spears, slings, and wooden clubs, but had neither bows nor shields. They made tools from shell and polished stone and were talented in wood sculpture (Fig. 71). Pictography seems to have only been practiced on Easter Island (p. 140). Kava (p. 158) was their national drink; tattooing had developed into an art form only in New Zealand. The practice of taboo (p. 252) likely started in Polynesia, where there were also two or three social classes. After Europeans arrived, the Polynesians quickly changed by adopting the newcomers' customs. Mostly Christians, especially Protestants, they have modified their rich old mythology by blending it with Christian legends. In several islands, such as Hawaii, Samoa, and New Zealand, the Polynesians have even developed parliamentary institutions, taking part in their management. On the flip side, civilization, while bringing peace, has made the Polynesians less enterprising and lazy, and more prone to indulgence than before. The population is declining due to imported epidemic diseases (especially syphilis and tuberculosis) or interbreeding.

Tahitian Woman of Papeete

FIG. 154.—Tahitian woman of Papeete,
twenty-six years old. Pure Polynesian race.
(Phot. Prince Roland Bonaparte.)

FIG. 154.—Tahitian woman from Papeete,
twenty-six years old. Pure Polynesian descent.
(Phot. Prince Roland Bonaparte.)

In the Sandwich Islands, now subject to the United States, the Hawaiians do not number more than 31,019 out of the 109,020 inhabitants registered by the last census (1896), or 28 per cent. of the population; while in 1890 there were 34,436, constituting 38 per cent. of the total population. The chief causes of this reduction are phthisis and leprosy, as well as the Sino-Japanese and European immigration. In the Marquesas Islands, belonging to France, the native Polynesians numbered[Pg 503] only 4,304 at the census of 1894, while in 1887 there were still 5,246; the principal cause of this diminution being tuberculosis (Tautain). The Moriori of Chatham Island (east of New Zealand) are reduced to fifty in number; and the Maoris of New Zealand, so celebrated for their tattooings, their legends, and their ornamental art, do not count more than 41,933 (census of 1891), distributed over the northern island and over the northern part of the southern island. They are also losing their native originality, are growing civilised, and intermix with the Europeans.

In the Sandwich Islands, now part of the United States, the Hawaiian population is no more than 31,019 out of the 109,020 residents recorded in the last census (1896), which is 28 percent of the total population; in 1890, there were 34,436, making up 38 percent of the overall population. The main reasons for this decline are tuberculosis and leprosy, along with immigration from China, Japan, and Europe. In the Marquesas Islands, which belong to France, the native Polynesians numbered only 4,304 at the 1894 census, down from 5,246 in 1887, with tuberculosis being the primary cause of this decrease (Tautain). The Moriori of Chatham Island (east of New Zealand) have dwindled to just fifty individuals; and the Maoris of New Zealand, famous for their tattoos, legends, and artistic craftsmanship, number only 41,933 (census of 1891), scattered across the northern island and the northern part of the southern island. They are also losing their cultural uniqueness, becoming more civilized, and mixing with Europeans.

Tahitian Woman, Profile View

FIG. 155.—Same subject as Fig. 154, seen in profile.
(Phot. Prince Roland Bonaparte.)

FInstagram. 155.—Same subject as Fig. 154, viewed from the side.
(Phot. Prince Roland Bonaparte.)

The Samoans (35,000), and their neighbours the Tongans (25,000), who have frequent relations with the Fijians, seem to remain stationary in number. The native population (1,600) of Tahiti has not varied since the establishment of the French dominion. The Hervey or Cook Islands shelter 8000 Polynesians, the Tuamota Islands 7000, and the remaining islands less than 2000 each.

The Samoans (35,000) and their neighbors the Tongans (25,000), who often interact with the Fijians, appear to have stable populations. The native population of Tahiti (1,600) has not changed since the French took control. The Hervey or Cook Islands are home to 8,000 Polynesians, the Tuamotu Islands have 7,000, and the other islands each have fewer than 2,000.

Tahitian of Papeete

FIG. 156.—Tahitian of Papeete; pure Polynesian race.
(Phot. Prince Roland Bonaparte.)

FIG. 156.—Tahitian from Papeete; pure Polynesian descent.
(Photo. Prince Roland Bonaparte.)

The Polynesians of the western islands situated north of the equator (Gilbert, 35,000; Marshall, 12,000; Caroline, 22,000; Marianne) are called Micronesians. They differ slightly in type from the Polynesians; they are more hairy, are shorter,[Pg 505] their head is more elongated, and they possess some ethnic characters apart: rope armour, weapons of shark’s teeth, special money (p. 271), etc.[574]

The Polynesians from the western islands north of the equator (Gilbert, 35,000; Marshall, 12,000; Caroline, 22,000; Marianne) are known as Micronesians. They have some differences from the Polynesians; they tend to be hairier, are shorter, [Pg 505] their heads are more elongated, and they have unique ethnic traits, such as rope armor, shark tooth weapons, and specific forms of currency (p. 271), etc.[574]

The peopling of the innumerable islands of the Pacific and Indian oceans by three distinct races whose languages have affinities with Malay dialects, forms one of the most interesting problems of ethnology. Anthropologists have largely discussed the point of departure of these races.[575] According to common opinion it is from the south-east of Asia, from Indo-China, that the peoples now scattered from Madagascar to Easter Island originally set out; on the one hand driven by the monsoons of the Indian Ocean, and on the other by the monsoons of the Pacific, both of which, during a period of the year, are contrary to the directions of the prevailing winds. The peopling of Melanesia and Polynesia from west to east becomes very probable if, as Bernard[576] has justly remarked, the distribution of lands and islands, the disappearance of continents in proportion as we proceed eastward, is taken into account. It is in fact evident that migrations were effected more easily across large islands fairly near each other, like those of the Indian Ocean or the western Pacific, even granted contrary winds and currents, than across very small and very distant islands like those of the western Pacific, even granted favourable currents. If it is a question of involuntary migrations, the cyclones and tempests which drive canoes afar amount to an inversion of normal winds, and migrations of this kind are effected in all directions.[577] As to voluntary migrations, they are also deliberately made in a direction opposite to that of the prevailing winds. It was in order to ensure their safe return that primitive peoples noted the regular winds and currents, merely taking advantage of[Pg 506] some chance breeze in setting off. Legends afford little help to determine these migrations in detail, and, apart from some historic facts, it is difficult to state precisely the origin of the populations of each of the Oceanian islands.

The settlement of countless islands in the Pacific and Indian Oceans by three distinct races whose languages are related to Malay dialects is one of the most fascinating challenges in ethnology. Anthropologists have extensively debated the origins of these races. According to common belief, the peoples who are now spread out from Madagascar to Easter Island initially set off from Southeast Asia, particularly Indo-China, driven by the monsoons of the Indian Ocean on one side and the monsoons of the Pacific on the other, both of which, at certain times of the year, blow against the prevailing winds. The migration from Melanesia to Polynesia from west to east seems quite likely if we consider, as Bernard noted, the layout of lands and islands and how continents disappear as we move eastward. It’s clear that it was easier to migrate across large islands that were relatively close together, such as those in the Indian Ocean or western Pacific, even with opposing winds and currents, than it was to travel across very small and faraway islands in the western Pacific, even with favorable currents. When it comes to involuntary migrations, storms and cyclones that push canoes far away can alter the usual wind patterns, allowing migrations in all directions. As for voluntary migrations, these were often purposefully made against the direction of the prevailing winds. To ensure a safe return, early peoples noted the regular winds and currents, taking advantage of any favorable breeze when setting off. Legends provide little assistance in detailing these migrations, and aside from a few historical facts, it's challenging to pinpoint the exact origins of the populations on each of the Oceanian islands.


CHAPTER XIII.

RACES AND PEOPLES OF AMERICA.

Races and cultures of America.

The four ethnic elements of the New World—Origin of the Americans—ANCIENT INHABITANTS OF AMERICA—Problem of palæolithic man in the United States—Palæolithic man in Mexico and South America—Lagoa Santa race; Sambaquis and Paraderos—Problem of the Mound-Builders and Cliff-Dwellers—Ancient civilisation of Mexico and Peru—Present American RacesAmerican languages.

The four ethnic elements of the New World—Origin of the Americans—AANCIENT IINHABITANTS OF AMERICA—The issue of paleolithic man in the United States—Paleolithic man in Mexico and South America—Lagoa Santa race; Sambaquis and Paraderos—The issue of the Mound-Builders and Cliff-Dwellers—Ancient civilization of Mexico and Peru—Present American RacesAmerican languages.

PEOPLES OF NORTH AMERICA—I. Eskimo—II. Indians of Canada and United States: a. Arctic—Athapascan group; b. Antarctic—Algonquian-Iroquois, Chata-Muskhogi, and Siouan groups; c. Pacific—Northwest Indians, Oregon-California and Pueblo groups—III. Indians of Mexico and Central America: a. Sonorian-Aztecs; b. Central Americans (Mayas, Isthmians, etc.)—Half-breeds in Mexico and the Antilles.

PPEOPLE OF NORTH AMERICA—I. Eskimos—II. Indigenous Peoples of Canada and the United States: a. Arctic—Athapascan group; b. Antarctic—Algonquian-Iroquois, Chata-Muskhogi, and Siouan groups; c. Pacific—Northwest Indigenous Peoples, Oregon-California, and Pueblo groups—III. Indigenous Peoples of Mexico and Central America: a. Sonoran-Aztecs; b. Central Americans (Mayans, Isthmians, etc.)—Mixed-race individuals in Mexico and the Antilles.

PEOPLES OF SOUTH AMERICA—I. Andeans: Chibcha, Quechua, and other linguistic families; the Araucans—II. Amazonians: Carib, Arawak, Miranha, and Panos families; unclassed tribes—III. Indians of East Brazil and the Central Region: Ges linguistic family; unclassed tribes (Puri, Karaya, Bororo, etc.); Tupi-Guarani family—IV. South Argentine: Chaco and Pampas Indians, etc.; Patagonians, Fuegians.

PPEOPLE OF SOUTH AMURICA—I. Andeans: Chibcha, Quechua, and other language groups; the Araucans—II. Amazonians: Carib, Arawak, Miranha, and Panos groups; unclassified tribes—III. Indians of East Brazil and the Central Region: Ges language group; unclassified tribes (Puri, Karaya, Bororo, etc.); Tupi-Guarani group—IV. South Argentine: Chaco and Pampas Indians, etc.; Patagonians, Fuegians.

AT the present day about six-sevenths of the population of the two Americas are composed of Whites and Half-breeds of all sorts. The remainder is made up almost equally of Negroes and natives, the latter improperly called Indians.[578] Notwithstanding the relatively small number of these last (about 10 millions), I shall deal almost exclusively with them[Pg 508] in this chapter, as they are especially interesting from the ethnological point of view, besides having been the best studied from this point of view. A few words will suffice in regard to the Whites and Negroes. The white colonists and their uncrossed descendants belong for the most part to Anglo-Saxon or Germanic peoples in North America, and to Neo-Latin peoples in South America. Nine-tenths of the population of the United States owe their origin to the Anglo-Scotch, to the Irish, Germans, and Scandinavians, the fusion of which with other European types and with half-breeds tends to produce the Yankee type, which, if not a physical, is at least a social type. In Canada two-thirds of the white population are Anglophones, and the rest Francophones. In Mexico, in the Antilles, and in South America, nearly all the “white” population is made up of Neo-Latins—in Brazil descendants of the Portuguese, in Argentine of Italo-Spaniards, and elsewhere of Spaniards. The Latins have also contributed to form the half-breeds of America, of which several varieties exist. Half-breeds are especially numerous in Mexico and in the countries where the three elements, White, Indian, and Negro come together, as in the Antilles, in Columbia, Venezuela, and in Brazil. I shall give some particulars of the Half-breeds in connection with the populations of these lands (pp. 542 and 545). As to the Negroes of America, they are the descendants of slaves imported, during more than three centuries, almost exclusively from the West African coast, and particularly from Guinea. (See p. 452.) The Negroes are especially numerous in the south of the United States and in the Antilles, as well as in the north and on the east coast of South America, as far as Buenos Ayres.[579]

At present, about six-sevenths of the population of the Americas consists of Whites and various mixed-race individuals. The remainder is made up almost equally of Black people and Indigenous individuals, the latter of whom are incorrectly referred to as Indians.[578] Despite their relatively small population (around 10 million), I will focus primarily on them[Pg 508] in this chapter, as they are particularly interesting from an ethnological perspective and have been the best studied in this regard. A few words will suffice about the Whites and Black people. The white settlers and their unblended descendants mainly belong to Anglo-Saxon or Germanic groups in North America, and to Neo-Latin groups in South America. Ninety percent of the population of the United States traces its roots to the Anglo-Scots, Irish, Germans, and Scandinavians, and the blending of these with other European types and mixed-race individuals tends to create the Yankee type, which is at least a social identity, if not a physical one. In Canada, two-thirds of the white population are English speakers, while the rest are French speakers. In Mexico, the Caribbean, and South America, nearly all the “white” population consists of Neo-Latins—descendants of the Portuguese in Brazil, of Italo-Spaniards in Argentina, and of Spaniards elsewhere. The Latins have also contributed to the mixed-race individuals in the Americas, of which several types exist. Mixed-race individuals are particularly numerous in Mexico and in regions where the three groups, White, Indigenous, and Black, intersect, such as in the Caribbean, Colombia, Venezuela, and Brazil. I will provide more details about the mixed-race individuals in connection with the populations of these areas (pp. 542 and 545). Regarding the Black population in America, they are descendants of enslaved individuals who were imported over more than three centuries, primarily from the West African coast, especially from Guinea. (See p. 452.) Black people are especially numerous in the southern United States and in the Caribbean, as well as in the northern and eastern regions of South America, extending to Buenos Aires.[579]

Origin of the Americans.—To-day the existence of an American race, or rather a group of American races (p. 291), is generally conceded, a group to which all the native populations of the New World belong; but as to the origins of these races unanimity of opinion is far from being reached. According to[Pg 509] some authorities, the New World is a special centre of the manifestation of species, the Homo Americanus having developed on the spot; according to others, the ancestors of the present Indians came from neighbouring countries—a few from everywhere: from Siberia and China (by Behring’s Straits), from Polynesia (driven by currents), from Europe (failing Atlantis, by the table-land which in the quaternary period probably stretched between England and Greenland). Unfortunately, almost all these hypotheses are based on a confusion both of time and space. It may without difficulty be conceded that occasional Chinese and Japanese junks may have been driven towards America, although the existence of this continent remained unknown both to China and Japan till quite recent times. We know positively that the Northmen visited the shores of North America long before Christopher Columbus. And there is reason to suppose that the Polynesians, who are excellent navigators, may have ventured, urged forward by currents, as far as the South American coast. But all these occurrences would be too recent, and such migrations would be in fact both too insignificant and too isolated, to account for the peopling of a vast continent. The origins of American man are much more distant in the past, and the migrations, if migrations there were, must have taken place in the quaternary epoch, and probably as much from the coast of Europe as from the coast of Asia.

Origin of the Americans.—Today, the existence of an American race, or more accurately, a group of American races (p. 291), is generally accepted, a group that includes all the native populations of the New World. However, there is still no consensus on the origins of these races. Some experts argue that the New World is a unique center for the development of species, with Homo Americanus emerging locally. Others believe that the ancestors of today's Indigenous peoples came from nearby regions—a mix from various areas: Siberia and China (across Behring’s Straits), from Polynesia (driven by ocean currents), and from Europe (from the lost Atlantis, likely via a land connection that existed between England and Greenland during the last Ice Age). Unfortunately, nearly all these theories suffer from a mix-up of time and geography. It can be easily acknowledged that occasional Chinese and Japanese ships may have been swept toward America, even though the existence of this continent was unknown to both China and Japan until quite recently. We know for sure that the Norse reached the shores of North America long before Christopher Columbus. There is also reason to believe that Polynesians, who are skilled navigators, may have traveled as far as the South American coast, possibly influenced by ocean currents. However, these events are too recent, and such migrations would be too small and scattered to explain the settlement of a vast continent. The origins of Indigenous peoples in the Americas go back much further, and any migrations that occurred likely took place during the last Ice Age, possibly coming from both Europe and Asia.

ANCIENT INHABITANTS OF AMERICA.

Just as is the case with Europe, it is not certain that man existed in America during the tertiary period,[580] but it is certain that he appeared[Pg 510] there during the quaternary age. This period, in the New World as in the Old, had its glacial epochs. According to Dawson, Wright, and Chamberlin, there were two or three great movements of invasion and withdrawal of the American glaciers. It is not known if these movements were synchronous with those of Europe, but it is established that, as in Europe, the first invasion of glaciers was also the more widespread.[581]

Just like in Europe, it's unclear whether humans existed in America during the Tertiary period,[580] but it's certain they appeared[Pg 510] there during the Quaternary period. This time, both in the New World and the Old, had its ice ages. According to Dawson, Wright, and Chamberlin, there were two or three major movements of glacial advance and retreat in America. It’s unknown if these movements matched those in Europe, but it's known that, just like in Europe, the first advance of glaciers was also the most extensive.[581]

Chipped argilite tools, similar to the quaternary quartz tools of sub-Pyrennean countries, have been found by Abbott in the gravels of the Delaware, near Trenton (New Jersey), side by side with quaternary animals (probably of the second glacial period, notably the fragment of a jaw-bone). Other implements have been gathered on the spot by Haynes in New Hampshire; by Dr. Metz in the gravels of Little Falls (Minnesota), regarded by W. Upham as more recent than those of Trenton; by Cresson at Medora (Indiana), and at Claymont (mouth of the Delaware), in a more ancient deposit than the Trenton one; by Wright and Volk at Trenton (in 1895); without reckoning the thousands of finds either on the surface or in lesser-known beds, which have been enumerated in a special memoir by Wilson. If I dwell on these details, it is because all these finds have latterly been vigorously attacked in the United States, since Holmes, who had studied the ancient quarries of the Indians, pointed out the great resemblances between the spoiled or waste argilite axes and arrowheads which he had found in these quarries, and the supposed palæolithic implements, particularly those of Trenton. Several authorities, such as Chamberlin, MacGee, Brinton, have, like[Pg 511] Holmes himself, come to the conclusion that all the so-called palæolithic tools of America, and perhaps even those of Europe, are only spoiled or waste tools of the same kind, and relatively modern. This conclusion seems to overshoot the mark, seeing that specialists like Wilson, Boule, etc., are almost unable to distinguish undoubted quaternary tools of Europe from those of Trenton, and that the beds of many American prehistoric tools have been perfectly well ascertained not to have undergone any rehandling, and have been established as quaternary by competent geologists.[582]

Chipped argilite tools, similar to the quaternary quartz tools found in the sub-Pyrennean countries, have been discovered by Abbott in the gravels of the Delaware near Trenton (New Jersey), alongside quaternary animals (likely from the second glacial period, including a fragment of a jawbone). Other tools have been collected from the site by Haynes in New Hampshire; by Dr. Metz in the gravels of Little Falls (Minnesota), which W. Upham considers more recent than those from Trenton; by Cresson at Medora (Indiana), and at Claymont (the mouth of the Delaware), in a deposit older than that of Trenton; and by Wright and Volk at Trenton (in 1895); not to mention the thousands of surface finds or those from lesser-known sites that have been detailed in a special report by Wilson. I emphasize these details because all these finds have recently been heavily criticized in the United States, as Holmes, who examined the ancient quarries of the Native Americans, highlighted the significant similarities between the waste argilite axes and arrowheads he found in these quarries and the supposed Paleolithic tools, particularly those from Trenton. Several experts, including Chamberlin, MacGee, and Brinton, have come to the same conclusion as Holmes, suggesting that all the so-called Paleolithic tools in America, and possibly even those in Europe, are merely flawed or waste tools of a similar type and are relatively modern. This conclusion seems to miss the mark, considering that specialists like Wilson, Boule, and others are nearly unable to distinguish confirmed quaternary tools from Europe from those of Trenton, and that many sites of American prehistoric tools have been verified not to have been disturbed and have been classified as quaternary by qualified geologists.[582]

Outside the United States palæolithic finds in the New World are not very numerous, and often are questionable.

Outside the United States, Paleolithic discoveries in the New World are not very common and are often uncertain.

Palæolithic tools of the Chellean and Mousterian type have been found in Mexico by Franco and Pinart;[583] other quaternary tools, together with a fragment of a human jaw-bone, have been described in the valley of Mexico by S. Herrera.[584]

Palæolithic tools from the Chellean and Mousterian periods have been discovered in Mexico by Franco and Pinart;[583] and other Quaternary tools, along with a piece of a human jawbone, have been reported in the Valley of Mexico by S. Herrera.[584]

In Brazil, on the shores of Lake Lagoa-do-Sumidoro (province of Minas Geraes), Lund exhumed human skeletons[Pg 512] and flint objects, together with remains of animals which, if not quaternary, at least exist no longer in the country. Ameghino[585] also has collected in quaternary layers of the Pampas of the Argentine Republic remains of primitive human industries. I will only mention the numerous neolithic objects found almost everywhere in America. Among these objects it is necessary to give special attention to the “grooved axes” which are entirely characteristic of the New World (Wilson).

In Brazil, on the shores of Lake Lagoa-do-Sumidoro (Minas Gerais), Lund uncovered human skeletons[Pg 512] and flint tools, along with animal remains that, if not from the quaternary period, are definitely no longer found in the country. Ameghino[585] has also discovered primitive human artifacts in the quaternary layers of the Pampas in Argentina. I will only mention the numerous Neolithic objects found nearly everywhere in America. Among these, particular attention should be given to the "grooved axes," which are uniquely characteristic of the New World (Wilson).

As to prehistoric human bones, investigation reduces them to little. I have already said that the tertiary or quaternary skull of Calaveras (brachycephalic) is classed as doubtful. The skeleton of Pontimelo (with dolichocephalic skull), found by Roth under the carapace of the glyptodon, an enormous armadillo of the Pampas regions of the Rio Arrecifes, a tributary of Rio de la Plata, also inspires but a limited confidence in many authorities. Lastly, the skulls and bones of Lagoa Santa, if not quaternary, at least very ancient, afford special characters (dolichocephaly, short stature, third trochanter), on the strength of which De Quatrefages has established a special race,[586] whose probable descendants constitute my Palæ-American sub-race. (See p. 292.)

As for prehistoric human bones, investigations show they tell us very little. I’ve already mentioned that the Calaveras skull (brachycephalic) from the tertiary or quaternary period is considered questionable. The Pontimelo skeleton (with a dolichocephalic skull), discovered by Roth beneath the shell of the glyptodon, a massive armadillo from the Pampas regions near the Rio Arrecifes, which flows into the Rio de la Plata, also raises limited confidence among many experts. Finally, the skulls and bones from Lagoa Santa, though not definitively quaternary, are at least very ancient. They show unique characteristics (dolichocephaly, short stature, third trochanter), which have led De Quatrefages to define a distinct race,[586] whose likely descendants form my Palæ-American sub-race. (See p. 292.)

Side by side with finds of stone objects and bones in very ancient strata, it is necessary to note also the shell-heaps and kitchen-middens scattered along all the coast of both Americas, from Newfoundland, Nova Scotia, and Louisiana to Brazil, to Patagonia and Tierra del Fuego. In this last country the present inhabitants, who subsist especially on molluscs, contribute to the piling up of these heaps or to the formation of new ones. This is enough to indicate that all the kitchen-middens are not synchronous; and if there be some[Pg 513] which go far back into antiquity, on the other hand there are some which are quite modern. The “Sambaquis,” for instance, of the mouth of the Amazon and of the province of Parana must be very ancient; some of the skulls which have been found in them recall the Palæ-American or Lagoa Santa race.[587] The paraderos, or elongated hillock graves, discovered in the province of Entre Rios, in the valley of the Rio Negro (Argentine Republic), by Moreno and R. Lista, enclose flint tools (neolithic?) and numerous skulls, among which a certain number also exhibit likenesses to those of Lagoa Santa.[588]

Alongside discoveries of stone tools and bones in very ancient layers, it’s important to also mention the shell heaps and kitchen middens found along the coasts of both Americas, from Newfoundland, Nova Scotia, and Louisiana to Brazil, Patagonia, and Tierra del Fuego. In this last region, the current inhabitants, who mainly rely on mollusks for food, help build these heaps or create new ones. This indicates that not all kitchen middens are from the same time period; while some date back to ancient times, others are quite modern. The "Sambaquis," for example, at the mouth of the Amazon and in the province of Paraná, must be very old; some of the skulls found there are similar to those of the Paleo-American or Lagoa Santa race. The paraderos, or elongated hillock graves, discovered in Entre Rios province, in the valley of the Rio Negro (Argentina), by Moreno and R. Lista, contain flint tools (neolithic?) and numerous skulls, some of which also resemble those from Lagoa Santa.

In North America, the Mounds, fortified enclosures or tumuli of the most varied appearance, round, conical, and in the shape of animals, have also for long attracted the attention of archæologists. But if the discoveries and excavations made in these monuments have been many, an exact explanation of their meaning was lacking till recent times. The groups of mounds are scattered over an immense tract of country, from the great lakes to the Gulf of Mexico, from the Rocky Mountains to the Atlantic Ocean; but they abound particularly in the valley of the Mississippi, along its left tributaries, in Arkansas, Kansas, etc., as well as in the basin of the Ohio. Farther west, towards the Rocky Mountains, as well as towards the Atlantic coast, they become less frequent. Till recently, the construction of these hillocks was attributed to one and the same people, called by the not very compromising name of “Mound-Builders.” This people, tillers of the soil and relatively civilised, must have lived from the most remote antiquity in the region planted with these mounds, and must have been destroyed by the nomadic and wild hordes[Pg 514] represented by the present Indians. Such, at least, was the prevailing hypothesis. However, an attentive study of these mounds and the objects they covered has led little by little the most competent authorities (Cyrus Thomas, Carr, H. Hale, Shepherd, and the numerous members of the “Mound Exploring Division”) to distinguish several “types” of mounds, the geographical distribution of which would serve to indicate the settlements of diverse tribes. E. Schmidt, in a comprehensive work, has brought together all these investigations, and, by the light of linguistic data furnished by Hale, Brinton and others, has been able to state precisely who these various tribes were.[589]

In North America, the Mounds, which are fortified enclosures or burial mounds of various shapes, like round, conical, and animal-like forms, have long fascinated archaeologists. Although many discoveries and excavations of these monuments have taken place, a clear understanding of their significance has only emerged in recent times. The groups of mounds are spread across a vast area, from the Great Lakes to the Gulf of Mexico, and from the Rocky Mountains to the Atlantic Ocean; however, they are especially abundant in the Mississippi Valley, along its left tributaries in Arkansas, Kansas, and other areas, as well as in the Ohio basin. Further west, toward the Rocky Mountains, and toward the Atlantic coast, they become less common. Until recently, the construction of these mounds was attributed to a single group known as the “Mound-Builders.” This group, which farmed the land and was relatively advanced, likely lived in this region with mounds since ancient times and may have been wiped out by the nomadic and wild tribes represented by present-day Native Americans. This was the dominant theory. However, a careful examination of these mounds and the items they contained has gradually led qualified experts (Cyrus Thomas, Carr, H. Hale, Shepherd, and many members of the “Mound Exploring Division”) to identify several “types” of mounds, with their geographical distribution indicating the settlements of different tribes. E. Schmidt, in a detailed work, has compiled all these studies and, using linguistic data provided by Hale, Brinton, and others, has accurately identified who these various tribes were.[589]

It may be said at once that these investigations have by no means confirmed the great antiquity of the mounds; on the contrary, objects of European origin (iron swords, etc.), found in certain mounds, the tales of the early explorers which tell us that the Indians raised these mounds, and the traditions of the natives themselves, all force us to the conclusion that the builders of these funereal monuments or fortified enclosures were no other than the various Indian tribes whose remaining descendants exist to-day in the reservations. These tribes were tillers of the soil at the period of the discovery of America, as indeed the tales of contemporary explorers bear witness, as do also the traces of irrigation canals and other agricultural operations around these mounds. But the invasion of the country by Europeans from the seventeenth century onward, and the introduction of the horse, hitherto unknown, brought so much confusion into the existence of these tribes, that such of the Indians as survived the wars of extermination changed[Pg 515] their mode of life and became hunters or nomadic shepherds. If the distribution of the mounds be studied, three parallel archæological zones may be distinguished, extending from west to east, between the Mississippi and the Atlantic Ocean, each such zone presenting great differences in regard to the type of mound it circumscribes.[590] On comparing this distribution with the ancient settlements of the tribes the following result is arrived at: the mounds of the north have been built by the Iroquois and Algonquians, except the mounds of animal shape, which are due to Dakota-Siouan tribes; the mounds of the south may be attributed to tribes of the Muskoki or Muskhogi family; and, as regards the numerous monuments of the basin of the Ohio, there is a strong presumption in favour of their having been raised by the Shawnies and the Leni-Lenaps in the south, and by the Cherokis in the north. The study of these mounds, in connection with historic data, suffices to determine very satisfactorily the migrations of all these tribes, to which I shall refer later.

It can be stated right away that these investigations have not confirmed the great age of the mounds; on the contrary, European-made objects (like iron swords) found in certain mounds, accounts from early explorers claiming that the Native Americans built these mounds, and the natives' own traditions all lead us to conclude that the builders of these burial monuments or fortified structures were the various Indian tribes whose descendants still live today on reservations. These tribes were farming the land at the time of America's discovery, as contemporary explorers noted, along with evidence of irrigation canals and other farming activities around these mounds. However, the European invasion from the seventeenth century onward, along with the introduction of horses—previously unknown—brought so much disruption to these tribes' lives that those Indians who survived the extermination wars shifted their way of life to become hunters or nomadic herders. If we examine the distribution of the mounds, we can identify three parallel archaeological zones running from west to east between the Mississippi and the Atlantic Ocean, each showing significant differences in the type of mounds it contains. When we compare this distribution with the historical settlements of the tribes, we find that the northern mounds were built by the Iroquois and Algonquians, except for the animal-shaped mounds created by Dakota-Siouan tribes; the southern mounds can be linked to tribes from the Muskoki or Muskhogi family; and regarding the numerous monuments in the Ohio basin, there is strong evidence suggesting they were built by the Shawnees and Leni-Lenape in the south and by the Cherokees in the north. The study of these mounds, in combination with historical data, is enough to clearly determine the migrations of all these tribes, which I will discuss later.

West of the Rocky Mountains no more mounds are met with. Their place is taken by other monuments, structures of stone erected among the rocks and along the cañons. A large number of these are found in the valley of San Juan, in that of Rio Grande do Norte, of the Colorado Chiquito, etc. These monuments are still more modern than the mounds. The peoples who erected these structures, the “Cliff-Dwellers,” are still represented by the Moqui, Zuñi, and other tribes who inhabit the high table-lands of Arizona and New Mexico.

West of the Rocky Mountains, there are no more mounds. They have been replaced by other monuments, stone structures built among the rocks and along the canyons. Many of these can be found in the valley of San Juan, the Rio Grande do Norte, Colorado Chiquito, and others. These monuments are even more modern than the mounds. The people who built these structures, known as the “Cliff-Dwellers,” are still represented by the Moqui, Zuñi, and other tribes living in the high plateaus of Arizona and New Mexico.

Tribes probably related to the Cliff-Dwellers erected in Central America those immense phalansteries in stone or adobe of several storeys, constructed to shelter the whole clan,[Pg 516] which the conquering Spaniards called pueblos.[591] Adobe pueblos are still occupied by Zuñi people, descendants of the Cliff-Dwellers.

Tribes likely connected to the Cliff-Dwellers built those huge stone or adobe structures in Central America with multiple floors, designed to hold entire clans,[Pg 516] which the conquering Spaniards referred to as pueblos.[591] Adobe pueblos are still inhabited by the Zuñi people, who are descendants of the Cliff-Dwellers.

While in North America among the Mound-Builders only rude attempts at civilisation are found, in Central America and Mexico there flourished up to the period of the conquest a relatively advanced civilisation. Various peoples, whom many authors have sought to identify with the Mound-Builders, formed more or less well-organised states in Mexico. Such were the Mayas in the Yukatan peninsula; the Olmecs, and, later, the Aztecs, on the high table-land. And on the west of South America there developed a corresponding civilisation, that of the Incas of Peru. The Incas were none other than one of the tribes of the Quechua people, who, after having brought into subjection the Aymara aborigines founded in Peru a sort of communist-autocratic state. To the north, in present Columbia, lived the Chibchas, who have equally attained a certain degree of civilisation. Lastly, to the south flourished the civilisation of the Calchaquis.

While in North America the Mound-Builders only made rough attempts at civilization, Central America and Mexico had a relatively advanced civilization that thrived until the conquest. Various groups, which many writers have tried to connect with the Mound-Builders, established more or less organized states in Mexico. These included the Mayans in the Yucatán Peninsula, the Olmecs, and later the Aztecs in the highlands. In western South America, a similar civilization developed, that of the Incas in Peru. The Incas were actually one of the tribes of the Quechua people, who, after conquering the Aymara natives, created a sort of communist-autocratic state in Peru. To the north, in what is now Colombia, lived the Chibchas, who also achieved a certain level of civilization. Lastly, to the south, the civilization of the Calchaquis flourished.

Existing American Races.—The natives of America, cut off from the rest of the world probably since the end of the quaternary period, form, as we have already seen, a group of races which may be considered by themselves, in the same way as the Xanthochroid or Melanochroid groups of races (see Chap. VIII.). It must be borne in mind that there exists but a single character common to these American races, that is the colour of the skin, the ground of which is yellow. This appears to conflict with the current opinion that the Americans[Pg 517] are a red race, and yet it is the statement of a fact. None of the tribes of the New World have a red-coloured skin, unless they are painted, which often is the case. Even the reddish complexion of the skin, similar, for example, to that of the Ethiopians, is met with only among half-breeds. All the populations of America exhibit various shades of yellow colouring; these shades may vary from dark-brownish yellow to olive pale yellow.[592] By the yellow colour of the skin, as well as the straight hair common to most, but not to all, Americans, they have affinities with the Ugrian and Mongol races; but other characters, such as the prominent, frequently convex nose, and the straight eyes, separate them widely from these races.

Existing American Races.—The indigenous people of America, isolated from the rest of the world likely since the end of the Quaternary period, form a distinct group of races that can be viewed independently, similar to the Xanthochroid or Melanochroid groups (see Chap. VIII.). It's important to note that these American races share only one common characteristic: their skin color, which has a yellow undertone. This challenges the common belief that Americans are a red race, yet it is a factual observation. No tribes in the New World naturally have red skin unless they paint themselves, which frequently happens. Even the reddish tones seen in some people, like those of Ethiopians, only appear in mixed-race individuals. All populations in America show varying shades of yellow, ranging from dark brownish-yellow to olive pale yellow.[592] The yellow skin color, along with the straight hair typical of most, but not all, Americans, suggests connections to the Ugrian and Mongol races; however, other features, such as the prominent and often convex nose and the straight eyes, significantly differentiate them from these races.

As to the characters peculiar to the five races which I adopt provisionally for the New World: Eskimo, North American, Central American, South American, and Patagonian, with their sub-races, they have been given in Chapter VIII., to which I refer the reader.

As for the unique traits of the five races that I’m temporarily using for the New World: Eskimo, North American, Central American, South American, and Patagonian, along with their sub-races, these have been outlined in Chapter VIII., which I direct the reader to.

West Greenland Eskimo

FIG. 157.—West Greenland Eskimo.
(Phot. Sören Hansen.)

FIG. 157.—West Greenland Inuit.
(Phot. Sören Hansen.)

American Languages.—Several authors are of opinion that, as regards America, a more satisfactory classification of the peoples may be obtained from linguistic than from ethnic and somatological characters; they even think that these linguistic characters afford indications as to the races of the New World.[593] But opinions are divided on this point, as well as on the question whether all the American dialects belong to one and the same family. Brinton affirms that there exists, in spite of diversity of vocabulary and superficial differences of morphology, a common bond of union among all the American languages. This bond is to be looked for in[Pg 518] the inner structure of the dialects, a structure characterised especially by the development of pronominal forms, the abundance of generic particles, the more frequent use of ideas based on actions (verbs) than of ideas of existence (nouns), and as a consequence the subordination of the latter to the former in the proposition.[594] The latter feature characterises the process called incorporation, all American languages being polysynthetic (see p. 131). Does the simi[Pg 519]larity of structure of the American languages (which might further extend to other groups of agglutinative languages) warrant the opinion that they all have sprung from a single stock? Competent philologists like Fr. Müller and L. Adam think it does not, and Powell,[595] attributing much more importance to similarity of vocabulary than to similarities of grammatical form, arrives at the conclusion that the tribes of North America do not speak languages related to each other and springing from a single original stock; on the contrary, they speak several languages belonging to distinct families, which do not appear to have a common origin.

American Languages.—Several authors believe that for America, a better classification of the peoples can be derived from linguistic characteristics rather than ethnic and physical traits; they even suggest that these linguistic features provide clues about the races of the New World.[593] However, opinions are divided on this issue, as well as on whether all the American dialects belong to a single family. Brinton argues that despite differences in vocabulary and superficial morphological variations, there is a common thread connecting all American languages. This connection can be found in[Pg 518] the underlying structure of the dialects, which is particularly noted for its development of pronominal forms, a rich variety of generic particles, and a greater emphasis on actions (verbs) over states of being (nouns), leading to the latter being subordinate to the former in sentences.[594] This characteristic defines the process known as incorporation, as all American languages are polysynthetic (see p. 131). Does the similarity in structure among American languages (which might also extend to other groups of agglutinative languages) justify the belief that they all originated from a single source? Respected linguists like Fr. Müller and L. Adam believe it does not, and Powell,[595] placing more emphasis on vocabulary similarities than on grammatical structure, concludes that the tribes of North America do not speak related languages that come from a single origin; rather, they communicate in several languages that belong to distinct families without a shared ancestry.

The number of languages spoken by the natives of both Americas certainly exceeds a hundred, even without counting the secondary dialects. Brinton estimates the number of linguistic families known in the New World at 150 to 160; this figure is probably not far short of the truth, for Powell admits, merely for that part of the continent north of Mexico, 59 linguistic families, some of which comprise several dialects.[596]

The number of languages spoken by the indigenous people of both Americas definitely exceeds a hundred, even without including the various dialects. Brinton estimates there are 150 to 160 linguistic families recognized in the New World; this figure is likely close to accurate, as Powell reports that just for the area of the continent north of Mexico, there are 59 linguistic families, some of which include multiple dialects.[596]

PEOPLES OF NORTH AMERICA.

The greater part of the native population of North America is composed of tribes called Indians or Red-skins of the United States and Canada. They touch on the north the Eskimo and Aleuts, and on the south the Mexican and Central American Indians. I shall briefly review these three great divisions, going from north to south.

The bulk of the native population in North America consists of tribes known as Indians or Red-skins in the United States and Canada. To the north, they are bordered by the Eskimo and Aleuts, and to the south by the Mexican and Central American Indians. I will give a brief overview of these three main groups, moving from north to south.

I. The Eskimo,[597] or Innuit as they call themselves (about 360,000 in number), afford the remarkable example of a people occupying almost without a break more than 5000 miles of seaboard, from the 71st degree N. lat. (north-east of Greenland) to the mouth of the Copper river or Atna (west of Alaska). A section of this people has even crossed Behring’s Strait and inhabits the extreme north-east of Asia (see p. 370). Over the whole of this extent of country nowhere do the Eskimo wander farther than thirty miles from the coast. It is supposed that their original home was the district around Hudson’s Bay (Boas) or the southern part of Alaska (Rink), and that from these regions they migrated eastward and westward, arriving in Greenland a thousand years ago, and in Asia barely three centuries ago. Their migrations northward led them as far as the Arctic Archipelago.[598]

I. The Eskimo,[597] or Inuit as they refer to themselves (about 360,000 people), provide a remarkable example of a group occupying nearly 5,000 miles of coastline, from the 71st degree N. latitude (northeast of Greenland) to the mouth of the Copper River or Atna (west of Alaska). A section of this group has even crossed Bering Strait and lives in the extreme northeast of Asia (see p. 370). Throughout this vast area, the Inuit do not venture more than thirty miles from the coast. It is believed that their original home was the area around Hudson Bay (Boas) or the southern part of Alaska (Rink), and that from these places they migrated eastward and westward, reaching Greenland a thousand years ago, and Asia just under three centuries ago. Their northern migrations took them as far as the Arctic Archipelago.[598]

Physically, the pure Eskimo—that is to say, those of the northern coast of America, and perhaps of the eastern coast of Greenland—may form a special race, allied with the American races, but exhibiting some characteristics of the[Pg 521] Ugrian race (short stature, dolichocephaly, shape of the eyes, etc.). They are above average stature (1 m. 62), whilst the Eskimo of Labrador and Greenland are shorter, and those of southern Alaska a little taller (1 m. 66), in consequence perhaps of interminglings, which would also explain their cranial configuration (ceph. ind. on the living subject, 79 in Alaska, against 76.8 in Greenland), which is less elongated than among the northern tribes (average cephalic index of the skull, 70 and 72). Their complexion is yellow, their eyes straight, and black (except among certain Greenland half-breeds); their cheek-bones are projecting, the nose is somewhat prominent, the face round, and the mouth rather thick-lipped. The Eskimo language differs little from tribe to tribe. Fishers and peaceful hunters, the Eskimo have no chiefs, and know nothing of war; they cultivate the graphic arts, are always cheerful, and love dancing, singing, story-telling, etc.

Physically, the pure Eskimo—specifically those from the northern coast of America and possibly the eastern coast of Greenland—may represent a distinct race, related to the American groups but showing some features of the[Pg 521] Ugrian race (short stature, elongated skull shape, eye shape, etc.). They are generally taller than average (1 minute. 62), while the Eskimo from Labrador and Greenland are shorter, and those from southern Alaska are slightly taller (1 min. 66), likely due to some intermixing, which might also explain their skull shape (ceph. ind. on living subjects, 79 in Alaska compared to 76.8 in Greenland), which is less elongated than among the northern tribes (average cephalic index of the skull, 70 and 72). Their skin tone is yellow, their eyes are straight and black (except for some half-breeds in Greenland); their cheekbones are prominent, their noses are somewhat pronounced, their faces are round, and their lips are relatively thick. The Eskimo language is quite similar across different tribes. As fishers and peaceful hunters, the Eskimo don’t have chiefs and aren’t familiar with war; they engage in visual arts, are generally cheerful, and enjoy dancing, singing, and storytelling, among other activities.

I have already given, however, in the preceding pages (see especially pp. 137, 151, 160, 245, 263 et seq.) several characteristics of Eskimo life.[599]

I have already outlined several aspects of Eskimo life in the previous pages (see especially pp. 137, 151, 160, 245, 263 et seq.).[599]

The Aleuts, about 2000 in number, inhabiting the insular mountain-chain which bears their name, speak an Eskimo dialect, but differ from the true Eskimo in some respects, having brachycephalic heads and several peculiarities of manners and customs. Besides, the majority of them have adopted the habits and religion of the Russians.[600]

The Aleuts, around 2000 in number, live in the mountain chain that carries their name. They speak an Eskimo dialect but differ from true Eskimos in several ways, having rounder heads and various unique cultural traits. Additionally, most have adopted the lifestyles and religion of the Russians.[600]

Gahhigué-Vatake, Chief

FIG. 158.—Gahhigué-Vatake (chief), a Dakota-Siouan Indian
with tomahawk, 38 years old.
(Phot. Prince Roland Bonaparte.)

FIG. 158.—Gahhigué-Vatake (chief), a Dakota-Siouan Indian
with a tomahawk, 38 years old.
(Phot. Prince Roland Bonaparte.)

II. The Indians, improperly called Red-skins,[601] occupy a territory of such vast extent that, in spite of a certain common likeness, [Pg 524] considerable differences are noticeable among them, according to the countries they occupy, the climate, configuration, and fauna of which vary in a marked degree. We can in the first place distinguish the Indians of the Arctic and Atlantic slopes of Canada and the United States, belonging to a taller and less brachycephalic race than that which predominates among the Indians in the northern part of the Pacific slope. In the southern part of the Pacific slope we note the appearance of the Central American race, short and brachycephalic, and in the Californian peninsula perhaps the Palæ-American sub-race.[602] Each of the slopes in turn afford several “ethnographic provinces,”[603] the boundaries of which approximately coincide with those of the linguistic families now about to be rapidly passed in review.

II. The Indians, often incorrectly referred to as Red-skins,[601] occupy such a vast territory that, despite some similarities, [Pg 524] there are notable differences among them based on the regions they inhabit, as well as the varying climate, landscape, and wildlife. Firstly, we can distinguish between the Indians of the Arctic and Atlantic slopes of Canada and the United States, who belong to a taller and less round-headed race compared to those predominating among the Indians in the northern part of the Pacific slope. In the southern part of the Pacific slope, we observe the emergence of the Central American race, characterized by shorter stature and rounder heads, and in the Californian peninsula, we might find the Palæ-American sub-race.[602] Each slope has several “ethnographic provinces,”[603] which roughly align with the boundaries of the linguistic families that will now be briefly reviewed.

Chief, Front View

FIG. 159.—Siouan chief of Fig. 158, front face.
(Phot. Prince Roland Bonaparte.)

FInstagram. 159.—Siouan chief of Fig. 158, front face.
(Phot. Prince Roland Bonaparte.)

a. The Indians of the Arctic slope—that is to say, of the low-lying country watered by the Mackenzie and the Yukon—belong to one and the same linguistic family, called Athapascan.

a. The Indigenous people of the Arctic slope—that is to say, of the flat region along the Mackenzie and the Yukon rivers—are all part of the same language family, known as Athapascan.

The best known tribes are the Kenai in Alaska, the Loucheux on the lower Mackenzie, the Chippewas, the numerous Tinné clans between Hudson’s Bay and the Rocky Mountains, the Takullies to the west of these mountains, etc. All these Athapascans, of medium height (1 m. 66), and mesocephalic, are skilful hunters; they traverse the immense forests of their country hunting fur-bearing animals in winter on their snow shoes, in summer in their light beech-bark canoes. The Athapascan linguistic family is not, however, confined to the wooded region of Alaska and western Canada. Members of this tribe have migrated to a far distant part of the Pacific slope, where they have settled in two[Pg 525] different districts. The Athapascans of the West, or the Hupas who dwell in southern Oregon and northern California, differ but little physically from the Athapascans properly so called, but they are already Californians in ethnic character. The Athapascans of the south—that is to say, the Navajos or Nodehs and the Apaches (Fig. 161), taller (1 m. 69), more brachycephalic (ceph. ind. 84) than their northern kinsfolk[604]—live in the open country of the Pueblo Indians (Arizona, New[Pg 526] Mexico), from whom, however, they differ in regard to manners and usages. They are husbandmen relatively civilised, fierce warriors and bold robbers, whose name has been popularised by the novels of Gustave Aimard and Gabriel Ferry. They are more numerous (23,500 in the United States)[605] than the Athapascans of the north (8,500) and the Hupas (scarcely 900).[606]

The best known tribes are the Kenai in Alaska, the Loucheux on the lower Mackenzie, the Chippewas, the numerous Tinné clans between Hudson’s Bay and the Rocky Mountains, the Takullies west of these mountains, and so on. All these Athapascans, who are of medium height (1 minute. 66) and mesocephalic, are skilled hunters; they traverse the vast forests of their region, hunting fur-bearing animals in winter on their snowshoes and in summer in their lightweight beech-bark canoes. However, the Athapascan linguistic family isn't limited to the wooded regions of Alaska and western Canada. Some members of this tribe have migrated to a distant part of the Pacific slope, where they have settled in two[Pg 525] different areas. The Athapascans of the West, or the Hupas who live in southern Oregon and northern California, aren't very different physically from the original Athapascans, but they have already developed a Californian ethnic identity. The Athapascans of the south—that is, the Navajos or Nodehs and the Apaches (Fig. 161)—are taller (1 min. 69), more brachycephalic (ceph. ind. 84) than their northern relatives[604] and live in the open country of the Pueblo Indians (Arizona, New[Pg 526] Mexico), although they differ from them in terms of customs and practices. They are farmers who are relatively civilized, fierce warriors, and bold raiders, a reputation popularized by the novels of Gustave Aimard and Gabriel Ferry. They are more numerous (23,500 in the United States)[605] than the northern Athapascans (8,500) and the Hupas (barely 900).[606]

Woman of Wichita Tribe

FIG. 160.—Woman of Wichita tribe,
Pawnee Nation, Indian Territory, U.S.

FInstagram. 160.—Woman from the Wichita tribe,
Pawnee Nation, Indian Territory, U.S.

b. The Indians of the Atlantic slope are divided into three great linguistic families: Algonquian-Iroquoian, Muskhogean-Choctaw, and Siouan or Dakota.

b. The Native Americans of the Atlantic slope are divided into three major linguistic families: Algonquian-Iroquoian, Muskhogean-Choctaw, and Siouan or Dakota.

1. The Algonquians and Iroquoians occupy the “ethnographical province” which bears their name and extends over the east of Canada and the north-east of the United States, between the Mississippi and about the 36th degree of N. latitude. This province is characterised by a temperate climate, abundance of prairies, and broad water-ways; it affords facilities for the chase and the gathering of wild rice and tobacco; certain usages are common to all the tribes inhabiting it (tattooing, colouring the body, moccasins similar to those of the Athapascans, etc.).

1. The Algonquians and Iroquoians live in the “ethnographical province” named after them, which spans eastern Canada and the northeastern United States, between the Mississippi River and about the 36th parallel north. This area is known for its mild climate, plentiful prairies, and wide waterways; it provides opportunities for hunting and harvesting wild rice and tobacco. Some customs, like tattooing, body painting, and wearing moccasins similar to those of the Athapascans, are shared by all tribes living there.

The original home of the Algonquians was the region around Hudson’s Bay, where the Cree tribe, which speaks the purest Algonquian language, still exists. Leaving this region, they spread as far as the Atlantic, the Mississippi, and the Alleghany Mountains, driving back the Dakotas into the prairies of the right bank of the Mississippi. The Abnakis of Lower Canada, the Micmacs of Acadia and Newfoundland, the Leni-Lenapé of the Delaware, who fought so valiantly against the European immigrants; the Mohicans, idealised by Cooper; the warlike Shawnees, the Ojibwas or Chippewas (Fig. 30), who, to[Pg 527]gether with the Lenapé, are alone among the Red-skins in possessing a rudimentary writing; the Ottawas, the Black Feet, the Cheyennes, and so many other tribes besides belonged to this great Algonquian people. It has left traces of its existence in the “mounds” as well as in a great number of the geographical names of the region which it formerly occupied. It is estimated that at the present day there are not more than 95,000 Algonquians, of whom two-thirds inhabit Canada. The most numerous tribe is that of the Chippewas (31,000), while the “last” of the Mohicans were only 121 in the census of 1890. Among the Algonquians ought probably to be included a tribe which became extinct in 1827, that of the Beothucs of Newfoundland, whose affinities with other tribes have not yet been definitely established.[607]

The original home of the Algonquians was the area around Hudson’s Bay, where the Cree tribe, which speaks the clearest Algonquian language, still exists. Leaving this area, they spread as far as the Atlantic, the Mississippi, and the Alleghany Mountains, pushing back the Dakotas into the prairies on the east side of the Mississippi. The Abnakis of Lower Canada, the Micmacs of Acadia and Newfoundland, the Leni-Lenapé of Delaware, who fought fiercely against European settlers; the Mohicans, romanticized by Cooper; the warlike Shawnees, the Ojibwas or Chippewas (Fig. 30), who, along with the Lenapé, are the only ones among the Native Americans to have a basic form of writing; the Ottawas, the Black Feet, the Cheyennes, and many other tribes also belonged to this large Algonquian group. It has left signs of its presence in the “mounds” and in a wide range of geographical names in the area it once occupied. It’s estimated that today there are no more than 95,000 Algonquians, with two-thirds living in Canada. The largest tribe is the Chippewas (31,000), while the “last” of the Mohicans numbered just 121 in the 1890 census. Among the Algonquians, a tribe that went extinct in 1827, the Beothuks of Newfoundland, should probably be included, although their connections to other tribes haven't been clearly defined.[607]

At the time when the Algonquians held a large part of modern Canada and the United States, an isolated portion of their territory was peopled with Iroquoians around Lakes Erie and Ontario, as well as on the lower St. Lawrence. The Iroquoians, sprung from the same common stock as the Cherokis, the ancient mound-builders of the Ohio basin, have dwindled down to a few thousand families in the upper valley of the Tennessee (H. Hale). They are divided into Hurons (between Lakes Ontario and Huron) and Iroquois or Iroquoians properly so called. The latter formerly comprised five nations: Mohawks, Oneidas, Onondagas, Senecas, and Cayugas, united into a democratic confederacy by the famous chief Hiawatha, of whom Longfellow has sung. At a later date the Tuscaroras, who dwelt farther to the south-west in Virginia, were also admitted into the confederacy.[608]

At the time when the Algonquians occupied much of what is now Canada and the United States, a separate area of their land was inhabited by the Iroquoians around Lakes Erie and Ontario, as well as along the lower St. Lawrence. The Iroquoians, sharing the same ancestry as the Cherokis and the ancient mound-builders of the Ohio region, have decreased to a few thousand families in the upper Tennessee Valley (H. Hale). They are split into Hurons (located between Lakes Ontario and Huron) and Iroquois or Iroquoians in the stricter sense. The latter originally included five nations: Mohawks, Oneidas, Onondagas, Senecas, and Cayugas, which formed a democratic confederacy led by the renowned chief Hiawatha, who is celebrated in Longfellow's poetry. Later on, the Tuscaroras, who lived further southwest in Virginia, were also incorporated into the confederacy.[608]

The wars in which the Iroquoians have been engaged have singularly reduced their number; to-day there are only about 43,000, of whom 9000 are in Canada.

The wars the Iroquoians have fought have significantly decreased their population; today there are only about 43,000 left, with 9,000 of them in Canada.

2. The Muskhogean group comprises several tribes: Apalachi, Chata-Choctaw, Chicasaws, Creeks or Muskhogis, who formerly dwelt between the lower Mississippi, the Atlantic, the Tennessee River, and the Gulf of Mexico. To these we must add the Seminoles who formerly occupied the Florida peninsula.[609] The habits of the Muskhogean tribes, of which Hernando de Soto drew so vivid a picture in 1540, were those of husbandmen somewhat advanced in civilisation; they had a hieroglyphic writing (Brinton), but were unacquainted with the use of metals, gold excepted. The southern portion of the United States which these tribes occupied is a region with a sub-tropical climate, favourable to the cultivation of the sugar-cane, maize, and tobacco. The ancient Muskhogis wore garments of special texture, and daubed their bodies like the Algonquians, but were unacquainted with tattooing. At the present day they have dwindled down to 25,500 individuals. Certain tribes, like the Yamasis, have completely disappeared; in 1886 there were only three Apalachi women left. We include among the Muskhogis the tribes who formerly lived in the lower valley of the Mississippi, and whose dialects have not been classified: the Natchez, idealised by Chateaubriand, a score of whom still dwell among the Creeks and Cherokis; the Atacapas, reduced in number to a dozen individuals, in the Calcasieu Pass (Louisiana), etc.

2. The Muskhogean group includes several tribes: Apalachi, Chata-Choctaw, Chicasaws, Creeks or Muskhogis, who used to live between the lower Mississippi, the Atlantic, the Tennessee River, and the Gulf of Mexico. We should also include the Seminoles who once occupied the Florida peninsula.[609] The lifestyle of the Muskhogean tribes, which Hernando de Soto vividly described in 1540, was that of farmers somewhat advanced in civilization; they had a form of hieroglyphic writing (Brinton), but they were not familiar with the use of metals, except for gold. The southern part of the United States that these tribes inhabited has a sub-tropical climate, suitable for growing sugar cane, corn, and tobacco. The ancient Muskhogis wore specially made clothing and painted their bodies like the Algonquians, but they did not practice tattooing. Today, their population has decreased to 25,500 individuals. Some tribes, like the Yamasis, have completely vanished; in 1886, there were only three Apalachi women left. We also include among the Muskhogis the tribes that once lived in the lower Mississippi valley, whose dialects have not been categorized: the Natchez, idealized by Chateaubriand, of whom a few still live among the Creeks and Cherokees; the Atacapas, whose numbers have dwindled to a dozen individuals, in Calcasieu Pass (Louisiana), etc.

3. The Siouans or Dakotas (Figs. 158 and 159) occupied at the time of the discovery of America the whole country extending to the west of the Mississippi, between the river Arkansas on the south and the Saskatchewan on the north, as far as the Rocky Mountains. For a long time this was believed to be their original home; but it has been found[Pg 529] necessary to modify this opinion since the discovery by Hale and Gatschet of tribes speaking a Siouan tongue with archaic forms east of the Mississippi. These tribes are the Tutelos of Virginia, of whom but a score of individuals are left; the Biloxis of Louisiana, and the Winnebagos. It is now admitted that the original home of the Siouans was the Alleghany Mountains and the surrounding country; thence they were doubtless forced back by the Algonquians into the prairies to the west of the Mississippi, where they became buffalo-hunters.

3. The Siouans or Dakotas (Figs. 158 and 159) occupied what is now the entire area west of the Mississippi River, stretching from the Arkansas River in the south to the Saskatchewan in the north, all the way to the Rocky Mountains, at the time America was discovered. For a long time, it was thought to be their original home; however, this opinion has had to be changed since Hale and Gatschet discovered tribes that spoke a Siouan language with archaic forms east of the Mississippi. These tribes include the Tutelos of Virginia, of which only about twenty individuals remain; the Biloxis of Louisiana; and the Winnebagos. It is now recognized that the Siouans' original home was the Alleghany Mountains and the surrounding areas. They were likely pushed back by the Algonquians into the prairies west of the Mississippi, where they became buffalo hunters.

Christian Apache Indian

FIG. 161.—Christian Apache Indian.

FIG. 161.—Christian Apache person.

The principal Siouan tribes are: the Assinaboins on the Saskatchewan, the Minnetaris on the Yellowstone river, the[Pg 530] Ponkas and the Omahas in Nebraska, the Osages of the borders of Arkansas, the Hidatsas of Dakota, the Crows of Montana, the Siouans or Dakotas properly so called (Figs. 26, 158, and 159) in the upper basin of the Missouri, etc. The total number of the Siouans is estimated at 43,400 individuals, of whom 2,200 are in Canada.[610]

The main Siouan tribes are: the Assinaboins in Saskatchewan, the Minnetaris along the Yellowstone River, the [Pg 530] Ponkas and the Omahas in Nebraska, the Osages on the borders of Arkansas, the Hidatsas in Dakota, the Crows in Montana, and the Siouans or Dakotas in the upper Missouri basin (Figs. 26, 158, and 159). The estimated total population of Siouans is around 43,400 individuals, with about 2,200 living in Canada.[610]

The Indians of the four groups just enumerated all resemble each other in physical type: stature very high (from 1 m. 68 among the Cherokis of the east, to 1 m. 75 among the Cheyennes and Crows), head sub-dolichocephalic or mesocephalic (ceph. ind. on the liv. sub., from 79.3 among the Iroquoians to 80.5 among the Cheyennes), face, oval.[611] Near the Siouans, in the same ethnographic region of the plains of the Great West, dwelt the Pawnees or Caddoes, one of the tribes of which, the Aricaras or Rikaris (450 individuals at the present day), emigrated north towards the sources of the Mississippi. As to the Pawnees properly so called they were established in the valley of the Plata, whence they were transferred in 1878 into the Indian Territory; they numbered 820 individuals in the census of 1890. The rest of the nation, the Wichitas (Fig. 160), the Caddoes, etc., have abandoned the predatory habits of the true Pawnees and become good husbandmen distributed over different reservations.

The Indians from the four groups mentioned share similar physical traits: they are quite tall (ranging from 1 min. 68 among the Cherokees in the east to 1 min. 75 among the Cheyennes and Crows), have heads classified as sub-dolichocephalic or mesocephalic (with cranial indices between 79.3 among the Iroquoians and 80.5 among the Cheyennes), and have oval-shaped faces.[611] Close to the Siouans, within the same ethnographic area of the Great Plains, lived the Pawnees or Caddoes. One of their tribes, the Aricaras or Rikaris (now 450 individuals), moved north toward the headwaters of the Mississippi. The Pawnees as a whole were located in the Plata valley until they were relocated to Indian Territory in 1878, with a population of 820 recorded in the 1890 census. The remainder of the tribe, including the Wichitas (Fig. 160), the Caddoes, and others, have moved away from the traditional raiding lifestyles of the true Pawnees and have become established farmers distributed across various reservations.

The Kiowas form a small linguistic group by themselves. The neighbours formerly of the Comanches and the Shoshones, these ex-robbers are at the present day installed, to the number of 1,500, in the Indian Territory.

The Kiowas are a small linguistic group on their own. Once neighbors to the Comanches and the Shoshones, these former raiders now number around 1,500 and are living in the Indian Territory.

The Pawnees and Kiowas are tall and mesocephalic, with a tendency towards brachycephaly.

The Pawnees and Kiowas are tall and have an average head shape, with a tendency towards a broader head shape.

c. Indians of the Pacific slope.—The coast tribes of the Pacific might be united into a single group in spite of the great diversity of language existing among them.[612] In fact, most of these Indians belong to one and the same sub-division of the North American race, the Pacific sub-race. They are above medium height (from 1 m. 66 among the Utes to 1 m. 69 among the Chahaptes), sub-brachycephalic (mean ceph. ind. from 82.7 to 84.7, except the Utes, whose index is 79.5), with rounded face (Tsimshians and Haidas), or elongated (Kwakiutls); they have straight eyes and their pilous system is well developed (Boas). It is only in the region of the Pueblos that we can detect the admixture of the short, brachycephalic Central American race.[613] Ethnic characters enable us to divide the Indians of the Pacific into three groups: Indians of the north-west, Indians of Oregon-California, and Pueblo Indians.[614]

c. Indians of the Pacific slope.—The coastal tribes of the Pacific could be seen as a single group despite the significant differences in their languages.[612] Most of these Native Americans actually belong to the same sub-division of the North American race, the Pacific sub-race. They are generally taller than average (ranging from 1 min. 66 among the Utes to 1 min. 69 among the Chahaptes), with a mainly sub-brachycephalic skull shape (head circumference index averages from 82.7 to 84.7, except for the Utes, whose index is 79.5), featuring either rounded faces (like the Tsimshians and Haidas) or elongated faces (like the Kwakiutls); they have straight eyes and well-developed hair (Boas). Only in the Pueblo region do we notice the influence of the shorter, brachycephalic Central American race.[613] Ethnic characteristics allow us to categorize the Pacific Indians into three groups: the Indians of the northwest, the Indians of Oregon-California, and the Pueblo Indians.[614]

1. The Indians of the north-west[615] are divided into two slightly[Pg 532] distinct groups by their ethnic characters. In the north, on the indented coast of Alaska and British Columbia, as well as in the innumerable rocky islands lying off it, dwell tribes of fishers and hunters who form a very characteristic group by their ethnic traits, of which the following are the principal: garments of woven wool or of bark (before the arrival of the Whites); communal barracks, near which are raised “totem posts,” usually of slate, ornamented with anthropomorphic sculptures, grotesque or horrible, representing totems; plated armour, composite bow of wood and bone, tattooing, etc. The Pacific coast to the south of Vancouver and the Columbia drainage area is occupied by another group of populations, which, while having some traits in common with the former (communal barracks but without “totem post,” cooking by means of heated stones, zoomorph masks, etc.), exhibits a multitude of characters (garments of raw hides, cranial deformations, absence of tattooings, plain bow, etc.) which keep them widely separate.

1. The Indigenous peoples of the north-west[615] are divided into two slightly[Pg 532] distinct groups based on their ethnic characteristics. In the north, along the rugged coast of Alaska and British Columbia, as well as the countless rocky islands off the coast, live tribes of fishers and hunters who share unique ethnic traits, including the following: clothing made from woven wool or bark (before Europeans arrived); communal living quarters, where “totem posts” are often erected, typically made of slate and decorated with human-like sculptures, either strange or scary, representing totems; plated armor, composite bows made from wood and bone, and tattooing, among other things. The Pacific coast south of Vancouver and around the Columbia River is home to a different group of people, who, while sharing some similarities with the first group (communal living quarters but without “totem posts,” cooking with heated stones, animal masks, etc.), displays many characteristics (clothing made from raw hides, cranial shaping, no tattoos, simple bows, etc.) that keep them quite distinct.

The first group comprises the following tribes, beginning at Cape St. Elias and going towards the south: the Tlinkits or Kolushes as far as the 55th degree of N. lat. (6,437 individuals in 1880, according to Petroff); the Haidas or Skittagets of the Queen Charlotte Islands (2,500), skilful carvers in wood; the Tsimshians of the coast situated opposite to these islands; the Wakashes, sub-divided into Nootkas of Vancouver Island and Kwakiutls of the adjacent coast. The second group is composed of the remnants of the Salishans, Selish, or Flat-heads (12,000 in Canada, 5,500 in the “reservations” of the United States); of the Shahapts or “Nez-percés” (300), to the south of these; and lastly, the Chenooks, well known for their cranial deformations (p. 176).

The first group includes the following tribes, starting at Cape St. Elias and moving south: the Tlinkits or Kolushes up to the 55th degree of N. lat. (6,437 individuals in 1880, according to Petroff); the Haidas or Skittagets from the Queen Charlotte Islands (2,500), who are skilled wood carvers; the Tsimshians from the coast across from these islands; and the Wakashes, which is divided into Nootkas of Vancouver Island and Kwakiutls from the nearby coast. The second group consists of the remnants of the Salishans, Selish, or Flat-heads (12,000 in Canada, 5,500 in the “reservations” of the United States); the Shahapts or “Nez-percés” (300), to the south of these; and finally, the Chenooks, known for their cranial deformations (p. 176).

2. The seaboard of Oregon and California is a succession of short, isolated valleys, abounding in fibrous plants, fruit, and fish. These are excellent conditions for the formation of little isolated ethnic groups; thus it happens that the Indians of this coast are divided into twenty-four or twenty-six distinct linguistic families.

2. The coast of Oregon and California consists of a series of small, isolated valleys filled with plants, fruit, and fish. These are great conditions for forming small, separate ethnic groups; as a result, the Native Americans along this coastline are split into twenty-four or twenty-six different language families.

Of these the principal, as we go from north to south, are: the Copehs of the right bank of the Sacramento; the Pujunnas or Pooyoonas of the left bank of the same water-way; the Kulanapans to the north of San Francisco; the Costanos to the south of that town; the Salinas, who formerly inhabited the valley bearing the same name, but of whom there remain but a dozen individuals; the Maripos or Yokuts (145 individuals) to the east of the last-named tribe; the Chumashes around the mission of Santa-Barbara, 35° N. latitude, of whom scarcely two score individuals still speak the language of their fathers; the Hupas, very primitive in their habits. Among most of these populations are found vestiges of the ancient custom of tattooing and the use of garments fashioned from vegetable fibres.

Of these, the main groups from north to south are: the Copehs on the right bank of the Sacramento; the Pujunnas or Pooyoonas on the left bank of the same waterway; the Kulanapans north of San Francisco; the Costanos south of that town; the Salinas, who used to live in the valley with the same name, but now only about a dozen individuals remain; the Maripos or Yokuts (145 individuals) east of the last-mentioned tribe; the Chumashes around the mission of Santa Barbara, at 35° N. latitude, of whom barely about forty individuals still speak their ancestors' language; the Hupas, who are very traditional in their ways. Most of these groups still have remnants of the ancient practices of tattooing and use clothes made from plant fibers.

It is probably in this group that we must include the Yumas of the lower valley of the Colorado (Arizona) and of the Californian peninsula, of whom the principal tribes are as follows: the Mohaves (Fig. 4) and the Yumas properly so called, in the valley of the Colorado; the Maricopas of the valley of the Gila; the Soris or Seris in Mexico, opposite to the Californian peninsula; lastly, in this peninsula itself the Cochimis in the north and the Periquès, now extinct, at the southern extremity of the peninsula; there is not, however, any direct evidence that these last spoke a Yuma tongue; further, they burnt their dead while all the other Yumas buried theirs. The population of lower California was very scattered (10,000 individuals in all); they gained a miserable existence from hunting and fishing, and could not even make canoes. To-day but few are left. To judge from the bones gathered at the extreme end of the Californian peninsula, the Indians who dwelt there (the ancestors of the Periquès?) were if anything of short stature; by this characteristic, as well as by their dolichocephaly, they would appear then to be allied to the Palæo-American sub-race.[616]

It is likely in this group that we should include the Yumas from the lower valley of the Colorado (Arizona) and the Californian peninsula, with the main tribes being: the Mohaves (Fig. 4) and the Yumas themselves, located in the Colorado valley; the Maricopas from the Gila valley; the Soris or Seris in Mexico, across from the Californian peninsula; finally, in the peninsula itself, the Cochimis in the north and the now-extinct Periquès at the southern tip of the peninsula. However, there is no clear evidence that these last groups spoke a Yuma language; additionally, they cremated their dead while all the other Yumas buried theirs. The population of lower California was very sparse (about 10,000 individuals total); they survived in a poor manner through hunting and fishing and couldn't even make canoes. Today, very few remain. Judging by the bones found at the far end of the Californian peninsula, the Indians who lived there (possibly the ancestors of the Periquès?) were likely short in stature; this trait, along with their dolichocephaly, suggests they may be related to the Palæo-American sub-race.[616]

3. The name Pueblo Indians is sometimes given to the populations inhabiting the caves hollowed out of the sides of the deep cañons and the “pueblos” of the warm and arid table-lands of Arizona, New Mexico, and the adjacent parts of Utah, California, and Mexico.

3. The name Pueblo Indians is sometimes used to refer to the communities living in the caves carved into the sides of deep canyons and the "pueblos" in the warm, dry plateaus of Arizona, New Mexico, and nearby areas of Utah, California, and Mexico.

Some of these populations, the Moquis (2000) for example, belong to the Shoshone linguistic family,[617] others perhaps to the Pima stock (see p. 535); but there are three small groups of these cliff-dwellers whose languages present no analogy with one another nor with any other dialect. These are the Keres (3,560 individuals) and the Tanos (3,200 individuals), both in the upper basin of the Rio Grande, and the Zuñis, who to the number of 1,600 occupy the “pueblo” of the same name in the west of New Mexico.

Some of these populations, the Moquis (2000) for instance, belong to the Shoshone language family,[617] while others might belong to the Pima group (see p. 535); however, there are three small groups of these cliff-dwellers whose languages have no similarities with each other or with any other dialect. These include the Keres (3,560 individuals) and the Tanos (3,200 individuals), both located in the upper basin of the Rio Grande, and the Zuñis, who number 1,600 and inhabit the “pueblo” of the same name in western New Mexico.

In spite of the diversity of their dialects all the cliff-dwellers have certain physical characters in common, such as stature above the average, brachycephaly, etc.[618] It must not be forgotten that the cliff-dwellers are surrounded on all sides by immigrant populations of the Athapascan stock (see p. 524).

Despite the variety of their dialects, all the cliff-dwellers share some common physical traits, like being taller than average and having broad heads, among others.[618] It's important to remember that the cliff-dwellers are surrounded by immigrant populations of Athapascan descent (see p. 524).

III. The Indians of Mexico[619] and Central America may be divided, from the ethnographical point of view, into two great groups: the Sonoran-Aztecs, inhabiting the north of Mexico or what is improperly called the Anahuac plateau; and the Central Americans of Southern Mexico and the states situated more to the south as far as the Costa Rica republic.[620]

III. The Indians of Mexico[619] and Central America can be categorized, from an ethnographic perspective, into two main groups: the Sonoran-Aztecs, who live in the northern part of Mexico, or what is inaccurately referred to as the Anahuac plateau; and the Central Americans from Southern Mexico and the states further south down to the Costa Rica republic.[620]

a. The Sonoran-Aztecs are allied by language to the Shoshones, and by manners and customs to the true Pueblo Indians of the United States, while they exhibit some divergences as regards physical type. Physically the Sonorans are allied to the North Americans of the Atlantic slope, while the peoples of the Aztec group show a great infusion of Central American blood.

a. The Sonoran-Aztecs share a language with the Shoshones and have customs similar to the true Pueblo Indians of the United States, although there are some differences in their physical characteristics. Physically, the Sonorans are similar to the North Americans from the Atlantic coast, while the Aztec group shows a significant blend of Central American ancestry.

The Pimas and their congeners the Papajos constitute one of the principal tribes of the Sonorans. They dwell in pueblos or “casas grandes,” and expend a prodigious amount of labour in drawing their subsistence from the infertile soil of the Gila valley. However, they are fine tall men (mean height 1 m. 71, according to Ten Kate), slim and nimble, having the head a trifle elongated (ceph. ind. on the liv. sub., 78.6), the nose prominent, etc. Their neighbours the Yakis and the Mayas, included in the Cahita linguistic group, 20,000 strong, have the same type as the Pimas. They inhabit the sterile regions through which flow the rivers Yaki and Mayo, and have preserved their racial purity almost intact,[621] unlike their kinsmen[Pg 536] the Opatas and the Tarahumaras of Chihuahua and Sonora, in whom there is a powerful strain of Spanish blood.[622]

The Pimas and their relatives, the Papajos, are one of the main tribes of the Sonorans. They live in large adobe houses, or “casas grandes,” and put a tremendous amount of effort into making a living from the poor soil of the Gila valley. They are tall, standing at an average height of 1 minute. 71, according to Ten Kate, lean and quick, with slightly elongated heads (ceph. ind. on the liv. sub., 78.6) and prominent noses. Their neighbors, the Yakis and the Mayas, who are part of the Cahita language group and number around 20,000, share similar physical traits with the Pimas. They inhabit the barren areas along the Yaki and Mayo rivers and have maintained their racial purity nearly intact,[621] unlike their relatives[Pg 536] the Opatas and the Tarahumaras from Chihuahua and Sonora, who have a strong mix of Spanish blood.[622]

Under the collective name of Aztecs or Nahua are comprised several peoples and tribes who formerly occupied the Pacific slope from Rio de Fuerte (26th degree of N. lat.) to the frontiers of Guatemala, with the exception of the Isthmus of Tehuantepec; their colonies even extended farther into Guatemala and Salvador (example, the Pipils). On the other side, on the Atlantic slope the Nahua tribes inhabited the regions around Mexico. There they had formed, probably two or three centuries before the arrival of the Europeans, three confederate states: Tezcuco, Tlacopan and Tenochtitlan, under whose dominion were ranged tribes of the same origin scattered along the coast, among the Totonac people in the existing province of Vera Cruz; one of these tribes, the Nicaraos or Niquirans, migrated into Nicaragua.[623]

Under the collective name of Aztecs or Nahua, several peoples and tribes made up the groups that used to live along the Pacific slope from the Río de Fuerte (26° N latitude) to the borders of Guatemala, excluding the Isthmus of Tehuantepec; their settlements even reached further into Guatemala and El Salvador (for example, the Pipils). On the Atlantic side, the Nahua tribes inhabited areas around Mexico. They had likely formed, two or three centuries before the Europeans arrived, three confederate states: Tezcuco, Tlacopan, and Tenochtitlan, which governed tribes of the same origin spread along the coast, including the Totonac people in what is now the state of Veracruz; one of these tribes, the Nicaraos or Niquirans, migrated to Nicaragua.[623]

At the present day the Aztecs, about 150,000 in number, are dispersed over the whole Mexican coast from Sinaloa in the south to Tepic, Jalisco, Michoacan on the west. Very peaceful, sedentary, with a veneer of civilisation, they are nominally Catholics, though at bottom they are animists, and full of superstition. In many of the Aztec villages the ancient Nahua language is still spoken.[624]

Today, the Aztecs, numbering around 150,000, are spread throughout the entire Mexican coast, from Sinaloa in the south to Tepic, Jalisco, and Michoacan in the west. They lead mostly peaceful, settled lives and show some signs of civilization. They are officially Catholics, but deep down, they hold animist beliefs and are steeped in superstition. In many Aztec villages, the ancient Nahua language is still spoken.[624]

Side by side with the Aztecs there exist in Mexico three other ethnic groups which may be designated by the name of Mexicans properly so called. These are:—

Side by side with the Aztecs, there are three other ethnic groups in Mexico that can be referred to as Mexicans properly so called. These are:—

1st. The Otomis, presumably the aboriginal inhabitants of the Mexican table-lands, now settled in the state of Guanajuato, and the basin of the upper Moctezuma between Mexico and San Luis de Potosi. They afford a unique example of an American people speaking an almost monosyllabic language. They are below the average height, brachycephalic as a general rule, with a tendency towards mesocephaly.[625]

1st. The Otomis, likely the original inhabitants of the Mexican highlands, are now found in the state of Guanajuato and the upper Moctezuma basin between Mexico and San Luis de Potosi. They provide a unique example of an American group that speaks a language that is almost monosyllabic. They are shorter than average, typically have a round skull shape, with a tendency toward a medium shape.[625]

2nd. The Tarascos, formerly spread over the whole of the state of Michoacan, in Guanajuato and Queretaro,[626] have been absorbed by the half-breed population. Lumholtz, however, states that nearly 200,000 uncrossed Tarascos are still living (1896) in the mountains of Michoacan. They had a form of pictography peculiar to themselves, and must have come, according to their traditions, from the northern regions, like the Nahuatlans.

2nd. The Tarascos, who used to inhabit the entire state of Michoacan, along with parts of Guanajuato and Queretaro,[626] have been integrated into the mixed-race population. Lumholtz, however, points out that nearly 200,000 pure Tarascos were still living (1896) in the mountains of Michoacan. They had their own unique form of pictography and, according to their traditions, originated from the northern regions, similar to the Nahuatlans.

3rd. The Totonacs of the province of Vera Cruz, formerly very civilised, resemble physically their neighbours on the north-east, the Huaxtecs; the latter, however, belong to the Maya linguistic group (see below).

3rd. The Totonacs of the province of Vera Cruz, who were once quite advanced, bear a physical resemblance to their neighbors to the northeast, the Huaxtecs; however, the latter are part of the Maya linguistic group (see below).

b. The Central Americans.—They may be divided into three geographical groups, the Indians of Southern Mexico, the Mayas, and the Isthmians.

b. The Central Americans.—They can be divided into three geographical groups: the Indigenous peoples of Southern Mexico, the Mayas, and the Isthmians.

I. Among the numerous aboriginal peoples of Southern Mexico the Zapotecs of the state of Oajaca are the most[Pg 538] numerous (about 265,000 individuals). These are the descendants of a once powerful people who had attained to nearly the same degree of civilisation as the Aztecs.

I. Among the many indigenous groups in Southern Mexico, the Zapotecs of the state of Oaxaca are the most[Pg 538] numerous (about 265,000 individuals). They are the descendants of a once powerful civilization that had reached nearly the same level of advancement as the Aztecs.

The Miztecs (Figs. 163 and 164), who occupy the eastern part of the state of Oajaca and the adjacent regions of Guerrero, have dwindled to a few thousand individuals. They appear to be of fairly pure Central American race, are very short, brachycephalic, and have a dark brown skin and projecting cheek-bones.[627]

The Miztecs (Figs. 163 and 164), who live in the eastern part of the state of Oaxaca and nearby areas of Guerrero, have decreased to just a few thousand people. They seem to belong to a largely pure Central American ethnicity, are quite short, have a broad head shape, and have dark brown skin with prominent cheekbones.[627]

Young Creole Woman, Martinique

FIG. 162.—Young Creole woman of Martinique.
(Phot. Coll. Anthr. Soc. Paris.)

FInstagram. 162.—Young Creole woman from Martinique.
(Phot. Coll. Anthr. Soc. Paris.)

In the east of Oajaca and in Chiapa, on the frontier of Guatemala, are found the Zoques, the Mixes, and the Chapanecs, with whom it is customary to connect the Chontals and the Popolucas. But these two vocables signify in Nahuatlan merely “stranger” and “one who speaks badly or stammers.”[628] Among[Pg 539] the tribes of Oajaca and Tabasco, described under the name of Chontals, some speak a dialect peculiar to themselves, the Tequistlatecan, allied to the Yuma language (Brinton), while others speak the Maya dialects.[629]

In the east of Oaxaca and in Chiapas, on the border with Guatemala, you can find the Zoques, the Mixes, and the Chapanecs, who are usually associated with the Chontals and the Popolucas. However, these two terms in Nahuatl simply mean “stranger” and “someone who speaks poorly or stutters.”[628] Among[Pg 539] the tribes of Oaxaca and Tabasco, labeled as Chontals, some speak a unique dialect known as Tequistlatecan, which is related to the Yuma language (Brinton), while others speak various Maya dialects.[629]

Miztec Indian, Mexico

FIG. 163.—Miztec Indian (Mexico), Central American race.
(Phot. D. Charney, Coll. Mus. Nat. Hist. Paris.)

FIG. 163.—Miztec Indian (Mexico), Central American race.
(Phot. D. Charney, Coll. Mus. Nat. Hist. Paris.)

II. The peoples composing the Maya group appear to have come in post-quaternary times (by sea?), and in a state of civilisation already well advanced,[630] into the Yucatan peninsula. Thence they spread into Guatemala and the surrounding regions of Salvador and Honduras, where at the present day they form the bulk of the population. The ancient Maya[Pg 540] civilisation resembled that of Mexico, the sanguinary creeds of the latter excepted; their writing was of a perfect hieroglyphic type. Besides the Mayas properly so called of Yucatan, the principal tribes of this group are: the Tsendals or Chontals of Mexico, already mentioned above; the Mopans of Northern Guatemala; the Koïtches or Quichés farther south, the only Indian people possessing an aboriginal written literature; the Pokomams of the district around the town of Guatemala; the Chortis on the territory where the ruins of Copan stand; and a long way off, isolated from the rest of their kinsmen, in the Mexican province of Tamaulipas, the Huaxtecs (p. 537). In spite of linguistic differences, all the Guatemalans or Indians of Guatemala resemble each other physically; they are short, thick-set, with high cheek-bones, prominent and often convex nose.[631] Some characteristic habits, as for instance geophagy, are common to all these populations.

II. The groups that make up the Maya group seem to have arrived in post-quaternary times (possibly by sea?) in a state of civilization that was already quite advanced,[630] into the Yucatan peninsula. From there, they spread into Guatemala and the neighboring regions of El Salvador and Honduras, where today they make up most of the population. The ancient Maya[Pg 540] civilization was similar to that of Mexico, except for its bloody beliefs; their writing system was a perfect form of hieroglyphics. Besides the Mayas of Yucatan, the main tribes in this group are: the Tsendals or Chontals from Mexico, mentioned earlier; the Mopans from Northern Guatemala; the Koïtches or Quichés further south, the only Indigenous group with an original written literature; the Pokomams from the area around Guatemala City; the Chortis from the land where the ruins of Copan are located; and far away and isolated from the rest of their relatives, in the Mexican province of Tamaulipas, the Huaxtecs (p. 537). Despite differences in language, all Guatemalans or Indigenous people of Guatemala share physical traits; they tend to be short and stocky, with high cheekbones and prominent, often curved noses.[631] Some characteristic habits, such as geophagy, are common across all these populations.

III. The Isthmians.—We include under this name the native populations of Central America, scattered between Guatemala and the Isthmus of Panama, whose dialects do not fit into any group of American languages.[632]

III. The Isthmians.—We refer to the native populations of Central America, located between Guatemala and the Isthmus of Panama, whose dialects don't fit into any category of American languages.[632]

These are the Lenkas of the interior of Honduras; the Xicaks or Sihahv in the north of this country; the Chontals of Nicaragua, formed from the Matagalpes, speaking a language peculiar to themselves; and the tribes adjoining the Lenkas, the Guatusos or Huatusos, who inhabit the forests surrounding San Juan. The latter were formerly classed, without adequate reason, with the Nahua, and they were represented as having dark complexions, whereas they are as yellow as the rest of Americans. In number they scarcely exceed 600 individuals.[633]

These are the Lenkas from the interior of Honduras; the Xicaks or Sihahv in the northern part of this country; the Chontals of Nicaragua, who come from the Matagalpes, speaking their own unique language; and the tribes neighboring the Lenkas, the Guatusos or Huatusos, who live in the forests around San Juan. The latter were once inaccurately categorized with the Nahua and were described as having dark skin, when in fact they have a skin tone similar to many other Americans. Their population is barely over 600 individuals.[633]

Miztec Women, Mexico

FIG. 164.—Miztec women (Mexico).
(Phot. D. Charney, Coll. Mus. Nat. Hist. Paris.)

FIG. 164.—Miztec women (Mexico).
(Phot. D. Charney, Coll. Mus. Nat. Hist. Paris.)

To all these peoples there must be added certain uncivilised tribes of the Ulva group (Soumoo of the English),[634] on the coast of Mosquito, who are sometimes called Caribs, although they have nothing in common with the true Caribs (p. 552); then the Micas, the Siquias of the Rio Mico, the Subironas of the Rio Coco, etc., who are all distinguished by the colour of their skin, which is darker than that of Indians in general.

To all these groups, we must also include certain uncivilized tribes of the Ulva group (known as Soumoo in English),[634] along the coast of Mosquito, who are sometimes referred to as Caribs, even though they have no real connection to the true Caribs (p. 552); then there are the Micas, the Siquias from the Rio Mico, the Subironas from the Rio Coco, etc., all of whom are identified by their skin color, which is darker than that of most Indigenous peoples.

The Moscos or Mosquitos who inhabit the neighbourhood of the Blewfields lagoon (Mosquito reservation) are still darker, indeed, almost black like Negroes, without, however, exhibiting other points of resemblance with the latter. They are[Pg 542] short in stature, having a fine, prominent nose, etc., and it is not difficult to distinguish those who are the offspring of Mosquitos crossed with true Negro blood. About 6000 in number, the Mosquitos are relatively civilised, and make use of the Latin alphabet, introduced by missionaries, for writing their mother-tongue. In an island of the Blewfields lagoon, between the Rio Mico and the Rio San Juan, have been found the Rumas, of very high stature, but their language is as yet unknown.

The Moscos or Mosquitos living around the Blewfields lagoon (Mosquito reservation) are quite dark, almost black like Black people, but they don’t share other similarities with them. They are[Pg 542] short in height, have a prominent nose, and so on, making it easy to identify those who are descendants of Mosquitos mixed with true Black ancestry. There are about 6000 Mosquitos, and they are relatively civilized, using the Latin alphabet introduced by missionaries to write in their native language. On an island in the Blewfields lagoon, between the Rio Mico and the Rio San Juan, the Rumas have been found, and they are very tall, but their language is still unknown.

Half-breeds of North America.—In the United States and Canada the half-breeds of Indians and Whites, as well as Mulattos, form but a very slight portion of the population. This is not the case in Central America and Mexico. The aboriginal populations of Central America are reduced to a few thousand individuals; on the other hand, the half-breeds, produced by the crossings between them and the Europeans, form almost the whole of the population.

Half-breeds of North America.—In the United States and Canada, the mixed-race individuals of Native Americans and Whites, as well as Mulattos, make up only a small part of the population. However, this is not true in Central America and Mexico. The original populations of Central America have dwindled to just a few thousand people; on the other hand, the mixed-race individuals resulting from the intermingling of these groups and Europeans constitute almost the entirety of the population.

In Mexico the half-breeds form a little less than the half of the population, and in a general way they increase in number as we go from north to south and from west to east. Their nomenclature is somewhat complicated.[635] On the other hand, Negroes and Mulattos are not very numerous in Mexico and Central America. The Negro element exhibits a marked predominance only in the Antilles. The population of the[Pg 543] island of Haiti is almost wholly Negro or Mulatto; that of the other islands has sprung from the manifold crossings between the ancient Carib or Arawak aborigines (see p. 552), and between Negroes and Europeans. The children of a white man and a mulatto woman are called Quadroons in the Antilles, but most of the half-breeds among whom European blood predominates prefer the name of Creoles. The Creole type of the Antilles is indeed very fine, especially among the women (Fig. 162), who sometimes have a vivacious look and a bewitching smile unique of their kind.

In Mexico, mixed-race people make up just under half of the population, and their numbers generally increase as you travel from north to south and from west to east. Their naming can be a bit complicated.[635] On the other hand, Black people and Mulattos are not very common in Mexico and Central America. The Black community is predominantly found only in the Caribbean. The population of the[Pg 543] island of Haiti is almost entirely Black or Mulatto; the other islands have populations that come from various mixes between the ancient Carib or Arawak natives (see p. 552) and between Black people and Europeans. The children of a white man and a Mulatto woman are called Quadroon in the Caribbean, but most mixed-race individuals with European ancestry prefer to be called Creoles. The Creole people of the Caribbean are indeed quite striking, especially the women (Fig. 162), who often have a lively appearance and a charming smile that's distinctive to their heritage.

PEOPLES OF SOUTH AMERICA.

Accepting, with Brinton, the northern political frontier of Costa Rica as the ethnological limit of South America, I propose to pass in review the native populations of the continent, grouping them according to the four great natural regions: the Cordillera of the Andes; the plains of the Amazon and the Orinoco, with Guiana; the table-lands of eastern and southern Brazil; lastly, the Pampas of the southern part of the continent, with Tierra del Fuego.

Accepting, along with Brinton, that the northern political border of Costa Rica is the ethnological boundary of South America, I suggest we examine the indigenous populations of the continent, organizing them according to the four main natural regions: the Andes mountain range; the plains of the Amazon and Orinoco rivers, including Guiana; the plateaus of eastern and southern Brazil; and finally, the Pampas in the southern part of the continent, including Tierra del Fuego.

This division corresponds pretty well with the distribution of races, languages, and ethnographic provinces.[636] In fact, the substratum of the Andean populations is formed of the Central American race, while that of the Amazonians and Guianas is composed of the South American race with its two sub-races, South American properly so called, and Palæo-American; the latter predominates also in east Brazil and Tierra del Fuego, while there are mingled with it Patagonian and other elements in the south of Brazil and among the Pampeans.

This division aligns quite well with the distribution of races, languages, and cultural regions.[636] In fact, the foundation of the Andean populations is made up of the Central American race, whereas the populations in the Amazon and Guianas are formed from the South American race, which has two sub-races: the true South American and the Paleo-American. The latter is also dominant in eastern Brazil and Tierra del Fuego, where it mixes with Patagonian and other elements in southern Brazil and among the Pampas region.

As regards language there is the same difference. In the Andean dialects the pronominal particles are suffixes, while in the Amazonian dialects these particles are prefixes, but both groups allow of a limitative form of the personal pronoun in the plural. As to the Pampean dialects, they are without the limitative form in most cases, and sometimes make use of prefixes, sometimes of suffixes.[637]

As for language, there’s a similar difference. In the Andean dialects, the pronouns are attached as suffixes, while in the Amazonian dialects, these pronouns are added as prefixes. However, both groups have a form that limits the personal pronoun in the plural. In the Pampean dialects, they usually don’t have this limiting form and sometimes use prefixes and other times suffixes.[637]

The ethnological differences of the three groups are manifold. This subject will be briefly dealt with further on. For the present let us observe that, in a general way, the Andeans are husbandmen, and have had a highly-developed native civilisation, while the Amazonians and the Brazilians of the east are for the most part fishers or hunters, often in the lowest scale of civilisation. As to the Pampeans, they are typical pastoral nomads. Before the arrival of the Europeans, the Andeans were acquainted with the weaving of stuffs; they worked in gold, silver, and bronze, manufactured fine pottery, had houses of stone and fortified towns, and employed as their chief weapons clubs and slings. The Amazonians and their congeners, on the other hand, still go almost naked, and adorn themselves with feathers; they were unacquainted with metals on the arrival of the Europeans, and some are ignorant even now of the art of pottery; they dwell in shelters or huts of branches and leaves, and their weapons are the blow-pipe and poisoned arrows. The Pampeans, before being influenced by the Andean or European civilisation, clothed themselves with skins, were acquainted neither with metals nor pottery, dwelt in huts, and used the bollas as their principal weapon.

The cultural differences among the three groups are significant. We'll discuss this topic in more detail later. For now, let's note that, generally speaking, the Andeans are farmers and had a well-developed native civilization, while the Amazonians and the eastern Brazilians mostly rely on fishing or hunting and are often at a lower level of civilization. The Pampeans, on the other hand, are typical pastoral nomads. Before Europeans arrived, the Andeans knew how to weave, worked with gold, silver, and bronze, created fine pottery, built stone houses and fortified towns, and primarily used clubs and slings as weapons. In contrast, the Amazonians and their counterparts go nearly naked and decorate themselves with feathers; they were unaware of metals when Europeans arrived, and some still don't know how to make pottery; they live in shelters or huts made of branches and leaves, using blow-pipes and poisoned arrows as weapons. The Pampeans, before being influenced by Andean or European civilization, wore skins, had no knowledge of metals or pottery, lived in huts, and used bollas as their main weapon.

Before beginning a rapid review of the South American tribes, it must again be remarked that their nomenclature often leads to confusion. A great number of terms are only qualifications applied by Europeans to the most different peoples, in no way akin one to the other. Such, for example,[Pg 545] is the term “Bougres,” which is given in the east of Brazil to savages in general; or that of “Jivaros,” employed in the same sense in Peru; such also are the appellations of Coroados (crowned or tonsured), of Orejones (pierced ears), of Cherentes, Caribs, etc., without taking into account those relating to the half-breeds.[638]

Before diving into a quick overview of the South American tribes, it's important to note that their names can often be confusing. Many terms are just labels used by Europeans for very different groups of people who are not related at all. For instance, the term “Bougres” is used in eastern Brazil to refer to savages in general, while “Jivaros” has a similar meaning in Peru. Other examples include the names Coroados (crowned or tonsured), Orejones (pierced ears), Cherentes, Caribs, etc., not to mention those used for mestizos.[638]

I. The Andeans.[639]—By this name we shall describe the principal populations which are stationed in the Cordilleras, and on the high table-lands shut in by these mountains from Costa Rica to the 45th degree of S. latitude. Most of them belong to the Chibcha and Quechua linguistic families; but there are also several whose linguistic affinities have yet to be determined.

I. The Andeans.[639]—This name refers to the main populations located in the Andes and on the high plateaus that are surrounded by these mountains, stretching from Costa Rica to the 45th parallel south. Most of them belong to the Chibchan and Quechua language families, but there are also several groups whose language relationships have not yet been identified.

1. Chibcha Linguistic Family.—The Talamancas of Costa Rica, sub-divided into several tribes (Chirripos, Bribris, etc.), form the most northern tribe of this group; they dwell partly on the Atlantic slope, partly on the Pacific. By certain ethnic characters (feather ornaments, use of the blow-pipe) they are related to the Amazonians.[640] Farther away the Guaymis inhabit the region of Chiriqui (Panama), where such beautifully ornamented ancient pottery (Figs. 63 and 64) has been found in the tombs of a still mysterious population. They are short, thick-set, and flat-faced, resembling the Otomis of Mexico. There may be about 4000 of them, according to Pinart; but some of their tribes had dwindled to such an extent, that of the Muoi, for example, there were only three individuals in 1882. They organise feasts among the tribes, to which invitations are sent by means of a staff sent round (a portion of a liana-stem, having as many knots as there are days remaining before the feast). With their bodies daubed with red or blue, the Guaymis give themselves up during these feasts to drinking[Pg 546] and the game of balza, which consists in throwing a sort of club at the legs of their adversaries. There are also lesser feasts, feasts of initiation called here urotes.[641] The Chibchas of Columbia, whose civilisation is no whit behind that of the Nahuas,[642] have been under Spanish influence since the conquest, and to-day but a few tribes are met with who still speak their mother-tongue or who have preserved their ancient customs.

1. Chibcha Linguistic Family.—The Talamancas of Costa Rica, divided into several tribes (Chirripos, Bribris, etc.), represent the northernmost tribe of this group. They live partly on the Atlantic slope and partly on the Pacific. Their ethnic characteristics (feather ornaments, use of the blowpipe) connect them to the Amazonians.[640] Further south, the Guaymis inhabit the Chiriqui region (Panama), where beautifully decorated ancient pottery (Figs. 63 and 64) has been discovered in the tombs of an enigmatic population. They are short, stocky, and flat-faced, resembling the Otomis of Mexico. According to Pinart, there may be around 4,000 of them, but some of their tribes have diminished so much that, for instance, only three individuals of the Muoi were left in 1882. They organize feasts among the tribes, sending invitations through a staff that is circulated (a piece of a liana stem with as many knots as there are days left until the feast). With their bodies painted red or blue, the Guaymis fully engage during these feasts in drinking[Pg 546] and playing balza, a game where they throw a kind of club at their opponents' legs. There are also smaller feasts, initiation celebrations known as urotes.[641] The Chibchas of Colombia, whose civilization is no less advanced than that of the Nahuas,[642] have been influenced by the Spanish since the conquest, and today only a few tribes still speak their native language or have maintained their ancient customs.

Such are the Chimilas of the Sierra-Perija; the Tunebos, true cliff-dwellers, eastward of Bogota; the Arahuacos, dwelling to the number of 3000 in the Sierra-Nevada of Santa Marta. The latter have nothing in common with the true Arawaks, unless it be their name, which, however, they repudiate as an insult; the name they give to themselves is Cöggaba, that is to say, “Men.”[643] As to the Chibcha or Muisca Indians of the Rio Magdalena, who were the most civilised of all the peoples speaking the Chibcha tongue, no survivors are to be found.

Such are the Chimilas of the Sierra-Perija; the Tunebos, true cliff dwellers, to the east of Bogotá; the Arahuacos, numbering around 3,000 in the Sierra-Nevada of Santa Marta. The latter have nothing in common with the true Arawaks, except for their name, which they reject as an insult; the name they call themselves is Cöggaba, meaning “Men.”[643] As for the Chibcha or Muisca Indians of the Rio Magdalena, who were the most civilized of all the people speaking the Chibcha language, no survivors can be found.

2. The Quechua Linguistic Family is one of the most far-reaching of South America. The Quechua dialects are still spoken to-day on the coast, and along the chain of the Andes from Quito to the 30th degree S. latitude. This is practically the extent of the ancient empire of the Incas, the best known nation among the Quechua peoples. But the influence of the Inca civilisation and the Quechua language extended even farther, to Columbia, the borders of Ucayale, and the Bolivian table-land on the north, to the edge of the Pampas on the south (among the Calchaquis). For the western part of South America the Quechua tongue was the lengua general, as the Tupi-Guarani tongue was the lingua geral for the east[Pg 547] (Brazil, Paraguay, etc.). This language is not at all superseded by Spanish; on the contrary, the Whites learn it, and several Quechua words: guano, pampa, condor, quina, have found their way into the languages of all civilised nations.[644] The principal tribes are: the Huancas to the north-east of Lima, the Lamanas near Trujillo, the Incas in the vicinity of the Rio Apurimac, the Aymaras of the high table-lands of Bolivia (600,000 individuals, of whom two-thirds are of pure blood).

2. The Quechua Linguistic Family is one of the most widespread in South America. The Quechua dialects are still spoken today along the coast and throughout the Andes from Quito to the 30th degree S. latitude. This almost marks the boundaries of the ancient empire of the Incas, the most recognized nation among the Quechua peoples. However, the influence of Inca civilization and the Quechua language reached even further, into Colombia, the borders of Ucayale, and the highlands of Bolivia to the north, and to the edges of the Pampas to the south (among the Calchaquis). For the western part of South America, the Quechua language served as the lengua general, similar to how the Tupi-Guarani language was the lingua geral for the east[Pg 547] (Brazil, Paraguay, etc.). This language has not been replaced by Spanish; instead, many Europeans learn it, and several Quechua words like guano, pampa, condor, and quina have been adopted into the languages of all civilized nations.[644] The main tribes include the Huancas to the northeast of Lima, the Lamanas near Trujillo, the Incas around the Rio Apurimac, and the Aymaras of the Bolivian highlands (600,000 individuals, of whom two-thirds are of pure blood).

In spite of the diversity of dialects all the Quechuas and Aymaras present a remarkable uniformity of physical type. They are of low stature (1 m. 60 according to D’Orbigny, 1 m. 57 according to Forbes), thick-set, and very strong. The chest is broad, the head massive and globular, the nose aquiline, forehead retreating. This last peculiarity should however be attributed to the custom of deforming the head, very widespread among all the Quechuas and neighbouring peoples; this deformation is still practised in the same way as in the days of the Inca civilisation. It is very unlikely that the frequent occurrence of the “Inca bone” (p. 67) in Peruvian skulls has any connection with this deformation. The greatest part of the population of Peru is composed of Quechuas and Aymaras, or of Quechua-Spanish half-breeds.[645]

Despite the variety of dialects, all Quechuas and Aymaras share a striking uniformity in physical appearance. They are generally short (around 1 minute 60 according to D’Orbigny, 1 min 57 according to Forbes), sturdy, and quite strong. They have broad chests, large round heads, aquiline noses, and receding foreheads. This last feature can be attributed to the practice of head shaping, which is widespread among all Quechua and neighboring groups; this practice continues just as it did during the time of the Inca civilization. It's very unlikely that the common presence of the “Inca bone” (p. 67) in Peruvian skulls is related to this head shaping. The majority of Peru's population consists of Quechuas and Aymaras, or of Quechua-Spanish mixed individuals.[645]

Guaraunos Chief with His Wives

FIG. 165.—Guaraunos chief (Mouth of the Orinoco)
with his two wives.
(Phot. Crevaux, Coll. Mus. Nat. Hist. Paris.)

FInstagram. 165.—Guaraunos chief (Mouth of the Orinoco)
with his two wives.
(Phot. Crevaux, Coll. Mus. Nat. Hist. Paris.)

The Calchaquis,[646] the ancient inhabitants of the modern[Pg 548] south-west provinces, Argenton, Catamarca, Rioja, Santiago, etc., probably also spoke a Quechua dialect. It was a very civilised population; the only one in the South American continent which knew how to construct buildings of freestone. Although partly borrowed from the Peruvians, the Calchaqui civilisation has a character of its own, and in several respects[Pg 549] recalls that of the Pueblo Indians, particularly the Zuñis (arrangement of their cities in a series of seven, copper tools and weapons, etc.).

The Calchaquis,[646] the ancient inhabitants of what is now the modern[Pg 548] south-west provinces, Argenton, Catamarca, Rioja, Santiago, etc., likely spoke a Quechua dialect. They were a very advanced society; the only one on the South American continent that knew how to build freestone structures. Although they borrowed some ideas from the Peruvians, the Calchaqui civilization has its own unique character and in several ways[Pg 549] resembles that of the Pueblo Indians, particularly the Zuñis (with their cities arranged in a series of seven, their copper tools and weapons, etc.).

Guaraunos, Mouth of Orinoco

FIG. 166.—Guaraunos of the
mouth of the Orinoco.
(Phot. Crevaux, Coll.
Mus. Nat. Hist. Paris.
)

FIG. 166.—Guaraunos of the
mouth of the Orinoco.
(Phot. Crevaux, Coll.
Mus. Nat. Hist. Paris.
)

The last Calchaqui tribe, the Quilmes, was transported in 1670 by the Spaniards near to Buenos Ayres, where it forms the village of this name.

The last Calchaquí tribe, the Quilmes, was moved in 1670 by the Spaniards close to Buenos Aires, where it created the village of the same name.

3. Unclassified Tribes.—In Columbia let us note the following tribes:—

3. Unclassified Tribes.—In Columbia, let's take note of the following tribes:—

The Cuna Indians, also called Tula Dariens, etc., of southern Panama. They are people of low stature (1 m. 50, according to Brinton), thick-set, of light yellow complexion, very brachycephalic (ceph. ind. 88.6, according to Catat), with broad faces, somewhat resembling the Guaymis, their neighbours in the east (p. 545). It is asserted that individuals with grey eyes and chestnut or reddish hair are not rare among them. They are not numerous; the tribe of the Changuina Dorasks, which formerly numbered 5000, had dwindled down in 1883 to a dozen individuals, still speaking their mother-tongue; the Sambu Chocos, who occupied the whole of the lower valley of the Atrato, and extended westward to the Pacific coast, are now scarcely 600 in number in southern Darien. They are short (1 m. 55), brachycephalic (ceph. ind. on the liv. sub., 84.1), very broad-faced.[647][Pg 550] To the eastward of the Chibchas (p. 545) dwelt several families of the Paniquitas and Paezes, included in a distinct linguistic group, of which the other representatives, Colimas and Manipos, have entirely disappeared. In central Columbia (state of Antioquia) dwell the last remnants of the Nutabehs and Tahamis, tribes resembling the Muisca Indians (p. 546) in their customs and social state.

The Cuna Indians, also known as Tula Dariens, are located in southern Panama. They are short people, about 1 minute. 50 tall, as noted by Brinton, with a stocky build and light yellow skin tone. They have very short, broad skulls (ceph. ind. 88.6, according to Catat) and wider faces, somewhat similar to their eastern neighbors, the Guaymis (p. 545). It's reported that some individuals have grey eyes with chestnut or reddish hair, which isn’t uncommon among them. Their population is small; the Changuina Dorasks tribe, which used to have 5000 members, had shrunk to just a dozen individuals by 1883, still speaking their native language. The Sambu Chocos, who used to inhabit the entire lower valley of the Atrato and extend west to the Pacific coast, now number less than 600 people in southern Darien. They are also short, around 1 minute. 55 tall, with broad skulls (ceph. ind. on the liv. sub., 84.1) and very broad faces.[647][Pg 550] To the east of the Chibchas (p. 545), several families of the Paniquitas and Paezes lived, belonging to a distinct linguistic group, which also included the now-extinct Colimas and Manipos. In central Colombia (state of Antioquia) live the last remaining members of the Nutabehs and Tahamis, tribes that share similarities in customs and social structure with the Muisca Indians (p. 546).

As to the Ando-Peruvian region, several ethnic groups, using special dialects, are also found there, having no relation with the Quechuas. Such as the small tribe of the Puquinas in the neighbourhood of Lake Titicaca, the Yuncas or Cuna-Yuncas (“inhabitants of the hot lands” in the Quechua tongue), settled on the Pacific coast between the 5th and 10th degrees of S. latitude; finally, the Atacameños, fishers of the Loa valley, and the Shangos or Changos, more to the south, in the desert of Atacama. These two tribes are characterised by their low stature (1 m. 60, according to D’Orbigny).

As for the Ando-Peruvian region, several ethnic groups, speaking their own unique dialects, can also be found there, unrelated to the Quechuas. This includes the small tribe of the Puquinas near Lake Titicaca, the Yuncas or Cuna-Yuncas (“inhabitants of the hot lands” in Quechua), who live on the Pacific coast between the 5th and 10th degrees of south latitude; and finally, the Atacameños, fishermen from the Loa valley, along with the Shangos or Changos, located further south in the Atacama desert. These two tribes are noted for their short stature (1.60 meters, according to D’Orbigny).

It may be as well to class with the Andeans the Araucans, or Mapu-che as they call themselves, whose linguistic affinities are still obscure, but whom we must connect with the Central American race by their physical characters; stature almost low (1 m. 61), sub-brachycephalic (ceph. ind. on the liv. sub., 82, skull 81), elongated face, with slightly projecting cheek-bones, straight or convex nose, etc., the general appearance recalling the Aymaras and the Quechuas;[648] certain ethnic characters (perfected weaving of stuffs, irrigation, hoe-culture, metallurgy, etc.) place them in the same category as the Andeans, and point to Peruvian influence. They are only found, in fact, to the north of the Bio-Bio river (37°–38° S. lat.)[Pg 551]—that is to say, only in those places reached by the Inca civilisation. South of this line, with the exception of the coast, where European influence makes itself felt, the Araucans have remained until recent times hunters or nomadic shepherds, almost uncivilised. It is estimated that there are 40,000 Chilian Araucans. At a comparatively recent period some Araucan tribes migrated to the eastern slope of the Cordilleras (the Manzanieros)[649] and into the Argentine pampas, as far as the neighbourhood of Buenos Ayres. In these parts they have been pushed back, firstly by the European colonists, then by the Argentine soldiers, farther and farther south, beyond the Rio Negro. This population is a very mixed one; we find in it Patagonian, Quechua, Chaco, and even European elements (see p. 574).

It might be helpful to group the Andeans with the Araucans, or Mapu-che as they refer to themselves. Their language connections are still unclear, but we can link them to the Central American race based on their physical traits: they have a relatively short height (about 1.61 m), a sub-brachycephalic head shape (ceph. ind. on the liv. sub., 82, skull 81), an elongated face with slightly protruding cheekbones, a straight or slightly curved nose, etc. Their overall appearance is reminiscent of the Aymaras and the Quechuas; certain ethnic features (advanced weaving, irrigation, farming with hoes, metallurgy, etc.) categorize them with the Andeans and indicate Peruvian influence. They are found only north of the Bio-Bio River (37°–38° S. lat.)[Pg 551]—meaning they are located only in areas influenced by Inca civilization. South of this line, except for the coast where European influence is noticeable, the Araucans have, until recently, lived as hunters or nomadic shepherds, almost uncivilized. It's estimated there are 40,000 Chilean Araucans. Relatively recently, some Araucan tribes moved to the eastern slopes of the Cordilleras (the Manzanieros)[649] and into the Argentine plains, reaching near Buenos Aires. In these areas, they have been pushed further south, initially by European settlers and then by Argentine soldiers, beyond the Rio Negro. This population is highly mixed, incorporating Patagonian, Quechua, Chaco, and even European elements (see p. 574).

From the social point of view, all the Araucans have preserved their ancient organisation of hordes governed by a hereditary chief. Little is known about their religious ideas; it is understood that they hold in the highest reverence an evil spirit called “Pilgan” by the Andean Araucans, “Nervelu” (“bird with metal beak and claws”) by the Araucans of the Pampas. Formerly, the Araucan warriors were buried with their weapons, their horse was felled on the grave and consumed.[650]

From a social perspective, all the Araucans have maintained their traditional group structure led by a hereditary chief. There is limited knowledge about their religious beliefs; however, it is believed that they deeply respect an evil spirit known as “Pilgan” among the Andean Araucans, and “Nervelu” (“bird with a metal beak and claws”) among the Araucans of the Pampas. In the past, Araucan warriors were buried with their weapons, and their horse was killed at the grave and consumed.[650]

Among the Andean populations we must also mention the Yurucares, to the west of the Rio Mamoré, of very high stature, their skin being, it is said, almost as white as that of Europeans.

Among the Andean populations, we should also mention the Yurucares, located to the west of the Rio Mamoré. They are very tall, and it's said their skin is almost as white as that of Europeans.

II. The Amazonians.—The vast plains and impenetrable forests, rich in birds and arboreal mammalia, watered by the great tropical streams, the Amazon and the Orinoco, are peopled by a large number of tribes who may be grouped to-day—thanks to the recent works of philologists—into four families. Two of these, the Carib and Arawak, or Maypure families, comprise the tribes of the eastern part of the country;[651] the two others, which are less important, the Miranha and Pano families, are composed of the tribes of the western part of the country.

II. The Amazonians.—The expansive plains and dense forests, filled with birds and tree-dwelling mammals, nourished by the major tropical rivers, the Amazon and the Orinoco, are inhabited by a large number of tribes that can now be classified—thanks to recent research by linguists—into four families. Two of these, the Carib and Arawak (or Maypure) families, include the tribes from the eastern part of the country;[651] the other two, which are less prominent, the Miranha and Pano families, consist of the tribes from the western part of the country.

1. The Carib Family.—It was thought until recently that the peoples of this linguistic group had settlements only in the Guianas and the Antilles, but recent studies have shown that they extended much farther over the South American continent, as far as the source of the Yapura on the west, and the 14th degree of S. latitude on the south. As the speech of the southern Caribs is purer, less sprinkled with Arawak words than that of their northern brethren, philologists suppose that the original home of the Caribs in general should be found somewhere in the centre of Brazil, to the south of the Amazon. It is from there that they must have migrated into Guiana, whence their hordes moved towards the Antilles probably two centuries[Pg 553] before the arrival of Columbus. There they found already the Arawak tribes (see p. 557), whom they supplanted in the lesser Antilles, and against whom they directed their maritime expeditions as far as the east coast of the island of Haiti. These Antillian Caribs have been exterminated by the European colonists, and except in the islands in the vicinity of the Guianas, like Trinidad, there remain to-day but 192 individuals in the island of St. Vincent (census of 1881) and 200 individuals, of whom there are barely a dozen unhybridised, in the island of Dominica. Most of the Caribs of the island of St. Vincent were transported by the English in 1796 to Ruatan Island and Trujillo, on the north coast of Honduras. Their descendants, crossed with Negro blood, numbering about 6000, live in these places as well as in British Honduras, where they are known by the name of “Black Caribs.”

1. The Carib Family.—It was recently believed that the people of this linguistic group only had settlements in the Guianas and the Antilles, but new studies have shown that they extended much farther across the South American continent, reaching the source of the Yapura River to the west and the 14th degree of S. latitude to the south. Since the language of the southern Caribs is purer and has fewer Arawak words compared to their northern counterparts, linguists believe that the Caribs originally came from somewhere in central Brazil, south of the Amazon. It is from there that they must have migrated into Guiana, from where their groups moved towards the Antilles probably about two centuries[Pg 553] before Columbus arrived. There, they found the Arawak tribes (see p. 557), whom they replaced in the lesser Antilles and against whom they carried out maritime expeditions as far as the east coast of the island of Haiti. These Antillian Caribs were exterminated by European colonists, and aside from some islands near the Guianas, like Trinidad, only 192 individuals remain today on the island of St. Vincent (census of 1881) and 200 individuals, with barely a dozen remaining pure, on the island of Dominica. Most of the Caribs from St. Vincent were relocated by the English in 1796 to Ruatan Island and Trujillo, on the northern coast of Honduras. Their descendants, mixed with African ancestry, number about 6,000 and live in these areas as well as in British Honduras, where they are known as the “Black Caribs.”

The most southerly tribes of the Caribs are the Bakairis (Fig. 172), and the Nahuquas of the upper Xingu, as well as the Palmellas of the lower Guapore, a sub-tributary of the right of the Rio Madeira. The Apiacas of the lower Tocantins, who must not be confounded with the Tupi tribe of the same name (p. 569), form the link between this distant branch and the bulk of the Caribs peopling Guiana. The latter are known as Apotos and Waywai in Brazilian Guiana; as Roucouyennes and Galibis in French Guiana; as Kalinas in Dutch Guiana (Figs. 167 and 168). The Caribs of British Guiana belong chiefly to the Macusi tribe, those of Venezuela are represented by the Makirifares in the east, and farther away to the west, by the Motilones, who keep to the borders of Colombia (Ernst). The ancient Carib tribes of Venezuela called Chaimas and Kumanas are represented at the present day by the Indians of Aguasai (87 miles north of Bolivar), who speak Spanish, but who have preserved the Carib type (Ten Kate). It is the same with the Aborigines of Oruba Island, to the north-east of the Gulf of Venezuela (Pinart). Lastly, in the upper basin of the Yapura, outside of Brazilian territory, there are likewise known members of the Carib family,[Pg 554] particularly the Uitotos or Carijonas, who live side by side with the Miranhas (p. 560) (Crevaux). To judge from some ethnographical analogies (similarity of tattooing, etc.), the Araras or Yumas, who wander on the right bank of the Amazon, in the neighbourhood of the mouths of the Xingu, Tapajos, Madeira and Purus, belong also to the Carib family, but as yet nothing is known about their language.[652]

The southernmost tribes of the Caribs are the Bakairis (Fig. 172), and the Nahuquas from the upper Xingu, along with the Palmellas of the lower Guapore, which is a sub-tributary on the right side of the Rio Madeira. The Apiacas of the lower Tocantins, who should not be confused with the Tupi tribe of the same name (p. 569), serve as a connection between this remote branch and the larger group of Caribs living in Guiana. The latter are referred to as Apotos and Waywai in Brazilian Guiana; as Roucouyennes and Galibis in French Guiana; as Kalinas in Dutch Guiana (Figs. 167 and 168). The Caribs in British Guiana primarily belong to the Macusi tribe, while in Venezuela, the Makirifares represent the east, and further west are the Motilones, who reside along the borders of Colombia (Ernst). The ancient Carib tribes from Venezuela, known as Chaimas and Kumanas, are currently represented by the people of Aguasai (87 miles north of Bolivar), who speak Spanish but retain the Carib appearance (Ten Kate). The same applies to the Aborigines of Oruba Island, located to the northeast of the Gulf of Venezuela (Pinart). Lastly, in the upper basin of the Yapura, outside Brazilian territory, there are also known members of the Carib family,[Pg 554] particularly the Uitotos or Carijonas, who live alongside the Miranhas (p. 560) (Crevaux). Based on some ethnographic similarities (like tattooing), the Araras or Yumas, who roam the right bank of the Amazon near the mouths of the Xingu, Tapajos, Madeira, and Purus, also belong to the Carib family, but nothing is known about their language.[652]

Carib, Dutch Guiana

FIG. 167.—Kalina or Carib of Dutch Guiana.
(Coll. Mus. Nat. Hist., Paris.)

FIG. 167.—Kalina or Carib of Dutch Guiana.
(Coll. Mus. Nat. Hist., Paris.)

The physical type of the Caribs of Guiana and Venezuela differs slightly from that of the Caribs of the upper Xingu. The former are of low stature (1 m. 58 for men, 1 m. 45 for women), and mesocephalic (mean ceph. ind. in the liv. sub., 81.3), while the Caribs of the upper Xingu are below the[Pg 555] average height and sub-dolichocephalic (1 m. 61 for men, 1 m. 52 for women; mean ceph. ind. on the liv. sub., 79.6).[653] What is characteristic of certain Carib tribes of the south (Bakairis, etc.) is the frequent occurrence of individuals with wavy or frizzy hair and convex nose, in the midst of the common type having straight hair, short and somewhat broad nose, etc. The ancient Caribs of the Antilles were short, somewhat light-skinned, and had the custom of deforming the head by flattening the frontal region of the skull.

The physical type of the Caribs from Guiana and Venezuela is slightly different from that of the Caribs of the upper Xingu. The former are shorter in stature (1.58 m for men, 1.45 m for women) and have a medium head shape (mean cephalic index in the living sample, 81.3), while the Caribs of the upper Xingu are below average height and have a sub-dolichocephalic head shape (1.61 m for men, 1.52 m for women; mean cephalic index in the living sample, 79.6). What stands out in certain Carib tribes from the south (like the Bakairis, etc.) is the frequent appearance of people with wavy or frizzy hair and a convex nose, among those who typically have straight hair and a short, somewhat broad nose. The ancient Caribs of the Antilles were short, somewhat light-skinned, and practiced the custom of deforming their heads by flattening the front part of the skull.

Carib, Profile View

FIG. 168.—Same subject as Fig. 167, in profile.
(Coll. Mus. Nat. Hist., Paris.)

FIG. 168.—Same subject as Fig. 167, in profile.
(Coll. Mus. Nat. Hist., Paris.)

From the ethnic point of view, the Caribs are distinguished by their acquaintance with the hammock; a plaited (not woven) texture; and a particular kind of cassava squeezer (p. 188);[Pg 556] by their fondness for painting the body; by the practice of the “couvade” (p. 240), etc. The blow-pipe and poisoned arrows are not their “national weapons,” as has sometimes been said; the Caribs of the south are unacquainted with them, and, on the other hand, several non-Carib tribes of the Amazon basin make use of them. Their favourite weapon is or was the battle-axe of polished stone (basalt, diabase). The slight difference between the mode of life of the Caribs of the Antilles and that of the Caribs of the present day was due to the existence of anthropophagy, the presence of “communal houses” (Carbets), and to some other characteristics which denote their superiority over the modern Caribs from the social point of view.[654]

From an ethnic perspective, the Caribs are recognized for their use of hammocks, which are made with a plaited (not woven) texture, and for a unique type of cassava squeezer (p. 188);[Pg 556] their enjoyment of body painting; and the practice of “couvade” (p. 240), among other things. The blow-pipe and poisoned arrows are not their “national weapons,” as has sometimes been claimed; the Caribs in the south do not use them, while several non-Carib tribes in the Amazon basin do. Their preferred weapon is or was the stone battle-axe made of polished materials like basalt or diabase. The slight difference in lifestyle between the Caribs of the Antilles and the Caribs today can be attributed to aspects like cannibalism, the presence of “communal houses” (Carbets), and other traits that indicate their social superiority compared to modern Caribs.[654]

2. The Arawak linguistic family, as constituted by L. Adam, at first by the name of Maypure, has been called by Von den Steinen “Nu-Arawak,” from the prenominal prefix “nu” for the first person, common to all the Arawak tribes, scattered from the coast of Dutch Guiana and British Guiana to the upper basins of the Amazon and Orinoco. The principal tribes are: the Aturai and the Vapisiana of British Guiana; the Maypures and the Banivas of Venezuela; the Manaos and the Aruacos of the Rio Negro; the Yumanas and the Passehs of the left bank of the Solimães; the Marauas more to the south; the Paumary and the numerous Ipurina tribes of the Purus basin; lastly the half-civilised Moxos or Mohos of the upper Mamoré, and the Canopos or Antis of the forests of the upper basin of the Ucayale (Peru), of average stature, brown-coloured skin, skilful hunters.[655] The tribes of the upper Xingu are the Vaura and the Mehinacu. Let us also note the Parecis of the region of the sources of the Tapajos, among whom we observe the influences of the Quechua civilisation (Pandean pipes) or the Peruvian (a particular head-dress of birds’ feathers and porcupine quills,[Pg 557] cotton textiles, plaited hats, etc.). In upper Paraguay, as far as the 21st degree of S. latitude, are also found tribes speaking the Arawak tongue; the Quinquinaos, the Layanas, etc. (This is the Moho-Mbaure group of L. Quevedo) On the other hand, in the marshy island of Marajos, in the middle of the estuary of the Amazon, there dwelt a few decades ago the Aruan people, who spoke an Arawak dialect, while in the north of Venezuela, the peninsula of Goajira is occupied by the Goajires tribe, which also belongs to the same linguistic family. De Brette estimates its numerical force at 30,000 individuals (1890–95).[656]

2. The Arawak language family, as defined by L. Adam, was initially referred to as Maypure, but Von den Steinen called it “Nu-Arawak,” using the prefix “nu” for the first person, which is common among all Arawak tribes spread from the coasts of Dutch Guiana and British Guiana to the upper regions of the Amazon and Orinoco rivers. The main tribes include: the Aturai and Vapisiana of British Guiana; the Maypures and Banivas of Venezuela; the Manaos and Aruacos of the Rio Negro; the Yumanas and the Passehs on the left bank of the Solimões; the Marauas further south; the Paumary and numerous Ipurina tribes of the Purus basin; finally, the semi-civilized Moxos or Mohos of the upper Mamoré, and the Canopos or Antis from the forests of the upper basin of the Ucayale (Peru), who are of average height, have brown skin, and are skilled hunters.[655] The tribes of the upper Xingu include the Vaura and the Mehinacu. Additionally, we should mention the Parecis from the area around the sources of the Tapajos, where we observe influences from Quechua civilization (Pandean pipes) or Peruvian culture (a specific head-dress made from birds’ feathers and porcupine quills,[Pg 557] cotton textiles, woven hats, etc.). In upper Paraguay, up to the 21st degree of south latitude, tribes speaking the Arawak language are also found, such as the Quinquinaos and the Layanas (this is the Moho-Mbaure group identified by L. Quevedo). Additionally, a few decades ago, the Aruan people, who spoke an Arawak dialect, lived on the marshy island of Marajos in the middle of the Amazon estuary, while in northern Venezuela, the Goajira peninsula is inhabited by the Goajires tribe, which also belongs to the same language family. De Brette estimates their population at around 30,000 individuals (1890–95).[656]

The pre-Columbian aborigines of Porto Rico, Haiti, Jamaica, and Cuba were Arawaks, to judge from the toponymy of these islands. The authors of the eighteenth century speak of the Ciboneys in Cuba, Bahama, and the west of Haiti, and of the “Aravagues” in the east of this latter island and in Porto Rico. These aborigines, although in a state of constant warfare with the Caribs, resembled them in certain characteristic customs (cranial deformation, colouring of the body, etc.). They were exterminated by the Whites, being reduced to 4000 in Cuba as far back as 1554. In 1848 there remained of these tribes but a few hybrid families in the Sierra Maestra of Cuba and the village of Boya to the north of the town of San Domingo.[657]

The pre-Columbian natives of Puerto Rico, Haiti, Jamaica, and Cuba were Arawaks, based on the names of these islands. Eighteenth-century writers mention the Ciboneys in Cuba, the Bahamas, and western Haiti, and the “Aravagues” in eastern Haiti and Puerto Rico. Although these natives were frequently at war with the Caribs, they shared certain customs with them (like cranial shaping and body painting). They were nearly wiped out by European settlers, with their numbers in Cuba dropping to 4,000 by 1554. By 1848, only a few mixed families remained in the Sierra Maestra of Cuba and the village of Boya, located north of San Domingo.[657]

Miranha Indian, Rio Yapura

FIG. 169.—Miranha Indian of Rio Yapura.
(Phot. Crevaux, Coll. Soc. Anthr. Paris.)

FInstagram. 169.—Miranha Indian of Rio Yapura.
(Phot. Crevaux, Coll. Soc. Anthr. Paris.)

Physically the Arawaks present several types, as might have been expected from the wide diffusion of this group. Those of the Guianas, as well as the Ipurinas and their congeners are[Pg 558] a little lower in stature (1 m. 55 and 1 m. 59 according to Ten Kate and Ehrenreich) and a little more brachycephalic (ceph. ind. 83.4) than the Caribs of the same regions. Those of the upper Xingu, on the contrary, are a little taller (1 m. 64) and more dolichocephalic (ceph. ind. 78.2) than their Carib-speaking neighbours. Their face is somewhat broader and their eyes often oblique. The difference between the tribes of the north and those of the south is thus more pronounced among the Arawaks than among the Caribs. The Ciboneys, to judge from the skulls found in Cuba and Jamaica, were hyper-brachycephalic in consequence of deformations (Haddon). The occurrence of individuals with wavy or frizzy hair is also as[Pg 559] frequent among the Arawaks as among the Caribs. From the ethnographical point of view there are some differences between the Arawaks of the north and the south. The use of the blow-pipe is very general among the Arawak tribes of the upper Amazon and its tributaries, but it is unknown among others. With the exception of tribes influenced by the Quechua-Peruvian or European civilisation, the Arawaks are unacquainted with the weaving of cotton, and are still in the stone, and especially the wood age. Their scanty garments are made with plaited fibres or with beaten bark; their ornaments are birds’ feathers and the teeth of mammalia.

Physically, the Arawaks show several types, which makes sense given the wide spread of this group. Those from the Guianas, along with the Ipurinas and their relatives, are[Pg 558] a bit shorter (1.55 m and 1.59 m according to Ten Kate and Ehrenreich) and somewhat more brachycephalic (ceph. ind. 83.4) than the Caribs in the same areas. In contrast, those from the upper Xingu are a bit taller (1.64 m) and more dolichocephalic (ceph. ind. 78.2) than their Carib-speaking neighbors. Their faces are slightly broader, and their eyes are often slanted. The differences between the northern and southern tribes are more pronounced among the Arawaks than among the Caribs. The Ciboneys, judging by the skulls found in Cuba and Jamaica, were hyper-brachycephalic due to deformations (Haddon). Individuals with wavy or frizzy hair are also as[Pg 559] common among the Arawaks as among the Caribs. From an ethnographic perspective, there are some differences between the northern and southern Arawaks. The use of the blowpipe is widespread among the Arawak tribes of the upper Amazon and its tributaries, but it is unknown among others. Except for tribes influenced by Quechua-Peruvian or European cultures, the Arawaks do not know how to weave cotton and are still in the Stone Age, particularly the Wood Age. Their minimal clothing is made from plaited fibers or beaten bark; their adornments consist of bird feathers and mammal teeth.

Miranha Indian, Front View

FIG. 170.—Same subject as Fig. 169, seen full face.
(Phot. Crevaux, Coll. Soc. Anthr. Paris.)

FInstagram. 170.—Same subject as Fig. 169, viewed from the front.
(Photo by Crevaux, Collection of the Society of Anthropology, Paris.)

3. The tribes composing the Pano linguistic group, as[Pg 560] established by R. de la Grasserie,[658] chiefly inhabited the north-west of eastern Peru, but they are likewise met with in the west of Brazil (the Karipunas of the banks of the Madeira), and in the north of Bolivia (the Pacaguara), separated from their racial brothers by a series of tribes speaking the Arawak dialects. The principal Pano tribes in Peru are: the Kassivo, cannibals of the upper Ucayle who resemble the Fuegians; the Conibos of the same river, very low in stature;[659] the Panos, of whom there remain but a few families.[660] The Araunos, of the region comprised between the two principal branches of the Madeira (Madre de Dios and Beni) speak a Pano language, but with a considerable admixture of Quechua elements.

3. The tribes that make up the Pano linguistic group, as[Pg 560] identified by R. de la Grasserie,[658] primarily live in the northwest of eastern Peru, but they can also be found in western Brazil (the Karipunas along the Madeira River) and in northern Bolivia (the Pacaguara), separated from their ethnic relatives by several tribes that speak Arawak dialects. The main Pano tribes in Peru include: the Kassivo, cannibals from the upper Ucayali River who resemble the Fuegians; the Conibos from the same river, who are quite short in stature;[659] and the Panos, of whom only a few families remain.[660] The Araunos, from the area between the two main branches of the Madeira (Madre de Dios and Beni), speak a Pano language but mix in a significant amount of Quechua elements.

4. The tribes of the banks of the Iça and the Yapura have received from their neighbours the name of Miranhas, which, it appears, means “rovers.” Ehrenreich employed this name to designate various tribes whose dialects presented a certain family likeness. Of these tribes, which are rarely visited by the Brazilian-Portuguese merchants, the following are the chief: the Miranhas properly so called (Figs. 169 and 170), between the Iça and the lower Yapura, mentioned long ago by Martius; the Kœrunas on the left bank of the Yapura; the Tucanos and the Jupuas to the east of the last-named, in the vicinity of the river Uaupes. The Miranhas have maintained their primitive condition. Of a very warlike disposition, they use as their principal weapon a particular kind of club, a sort of broadsword of hard wood. They employ the drum language (see p. 134). Though living on the banks of fish-yielding rivers, they do not fish, but confine themselves to hunting, like the ancient[Pg 561] Quechuas, by means of nets stretched out between trees, into which they drive, with cries and gestures, the terrified animals (Crevaux).

4. The tribes along the banks of the Iça and the Yapura have been called Miranhas by their neighbors, which apparently means “rovers.” Ehrenreich used this name to refer to different tribes that have some similarities in their dialects. Among these tribes, which are infrequently encountered by Brazilian-Portuguese traders, the main ones are: the Miranhas themselves (Figs. 169 and 170), located between the Iça and the lower Yapura, noted long ago by Martius; the Kœrunas on the left bank of the Yapura; and the Tucanos and the Jupuas to the east of the last mentioned, near the Uaupes River. The Miranhas have preserved their traditional way of life. They are quite warlike and primarily use a specific type of club, resembling a broadsword made from hard wood, as their main weapon. They utilize the drum language (see p. 134). Although they live by rivers that are abundant in fish, they don’t fish but stick to hunting, similar to the ancient [Pg 561] Quechuas, using nets set up between trees to drive terrified animals into them with shouts and gestures (Crevaux).

In addition to the tribes forming the four families just described, several others, whose languages have not yet been classified, should be mentioned.

In addition to the tribes that make up the four families just mentioned, several others, whose languages haven't been classified yet, should be noted.

It is in the basin of the Orinoco that we meet with most of these tribes who have as yet been little studied; the Otomacs between the Apure and Meta rivers, geophagous and monogamous; the Guamos of the Rio Apure, reduced to a few families; the Piaroas, whose sub-brachycephalic heads are often deformed; the Chiricoas and the Guahibos, veritable “gypsies” of South America, who are encountered between the Meta, the Orinoco, and the Rio Branco; lastly, the Guaraunos or Warraus of the coast between the mouths of the Orinoco and the Corentin (Figs. 165 and 166), probably allied to the Guayqueris of the country around Cumana in Venezuela. The latter, however, are sub-dolichocephalic (ceph. ind. on five liv. subjects, 78.5 according to Ten Kate), while the Guaraunos are all mesocephalic (ceph. ind. 81.5 according to the same author). In the upper valleys of the numerous rivers which combine to form the Amazon, there are likewise dwelling tribes of undetermined linguistic affinities, whose names only are known. The most important, that of the Zaparos or Jeberos (about 15,000 individuals), is stationed between the Pastaza and Napo rivers, as well as along the Maranon from the mouth of the Zamora to that of the Morona. Farther north in the Cordilleras, in a state of complete independence, dwell the Jebaros or Jevaros (Civaros), fierce warriors, celebrated for their skill in preparing the heads of their vanquished enemies; these are hideous mummified and shrivelled objects with their long hair left on them.[661] To the east of the Jevaros are the Maynas, and on the Rio Javary, the Yameos or Lamas. Farther east again, near the Rio Napo, wander the hunting tribes, the Tecunas or Triconnas, and the Orejones, so named from their[Pg 562] habit of inserting wooden plugs into the lobe of the ear, a practice which, however, is also found among several other peoples.

It is in the Orinoco basin that we find most of these tribes, which have not been studied much yet; the Otomacs live between the Apure and Meta rivers, practicing geophagy and monogamy; the Guamos of the Rio Apure, now reduced to a few families; the Piaroas, whose sub-brachycephalic heads are often deformed; the Chiricoas and the Guahibos, true "gypsies" of South America, encountered between the Meta, the Orinoco, and the Rio Branco; lastly, the Guaraunos or Warraus of the coast between the mouths of the Orinoco and the Corentin (Figs. 165 and 166), likely related to the Guayqueris from the area around Cumana in Venezuela. The Guayqueris, however, are sub-dolichocephalic (ceph. ind. on five living subjects, 78.5 according to Ten Kate), while the Guaraunos are all mesocephalic (ceph. ind. 81.5 according to the same author). In the upper valleys of the many rivers that combine to form the Amazon, there are also tribes with undetermined linguistic ties, of which only the names are known. The most significant, the Zaparos or Jeberos (about 15,000 individuals), are found between the Pastaza and Napo rivers, as well as along the Maranon from the mouth of the Zamora to that of the Morona. Further north in the Cordilleras, living completely independently, are the Jebaros or Jevaros (Civaros), fierce warriors known for their skill in preparing the heads of their defeated enemies; these are grotesque mummified and shriveled remains with their long hair still attached.[661] To the east of the Jevaros are the Maynas, and along the Rio Javary, the Yameos or Lamas. Further east, near the Rio Napo, roam the hunting tribes, the Tecunas or Triconnas, and the Orejones, named for their[Pg 562] practice of inserting wooden plugs into their earlobes, a custom that is also found among several other groups.

III. The Indians of East Brazil and the Central Region of South America belong on the one side to the Ges or Ghes linguistic family (formerly called Tapuyas, Botocudos, etc.), and on the other form several tribes whose affinities are yet to be determined. Lastly, the Tupi-Guarani linguistic family (see p. 567) is also represented in this region. From the ethnological point of view these three groups of population have felt the influence of environment and habitat; we must therefore consider separately the Indians of east Brazil and those of the central region, and lastly the Tupi-Guarani family.

III. The Indigenous Peoples of East Brazil and the Central Region of South America belong to the Ges or Ghes linguistic family (previously referred to as Tapuyas, Botocudos, etc.), while also forming several tribes whose relationships are still being explored. Finally, the Tupi-Guarani linguistic family (see p. 567) is also present in this area. From an ethnological perspective, these three population groups have been influenced by their environment and habitat; thus, we need to separately consider the Indigenous peoples of East Brazil, those of the central region, and finally the Tupi-Guarani family.

Bakairi, Upper Xingu

FIG. 171.—Bakairi, Carib tribe of upper Xingu.
(Phot. Ehrenreich.)

FInstagram. 171.—Bakairi, Carib tribe of upper Xingu.
(Phot. Ehrenreich.)

1. East Brazil is composed of plateaux formed of friable rocks rising to the east of the Tocantins between the wooded Sierras. These plateaux do not afford so many resources as the Amazon region; thus it is that the tribes inhabiting them are more uncivilised, often more wretched than the Amazonians. The rarity of hard rocks suitable for the manufacture of tools causes many of them to be still in the wood age. The greater part belong to the Ges or Ghes linguistic family. This term, which comes from the syllable “ges” placed at the end of most of the tribal[Pg 563] names, was adopted by Martius to designate the Botocudos and some neighbouring tribes. But of recent years Von den Steinen and Ehrenreich have widened the meaning of this word.[662] Henceforth it denotes a collection of tribes which, besides linguistic character, exhibit many other common features in their habits and mode of life (great phalansterial houses with private hearths for each family, absence of hammocks, ignorance of navigation,[663] use of “botocs” or ear and lip plugs, arrows barbed on one side, etc.). Among the tribes of the Ges tongue we must distinguish those which dwell on the right bank of the Tocantins in east Brazil and those who have migrated to the west of this river into the centre of Southern America. The former have retained much better their individual character, but they have been partly decimated by the European colonists, and are not very numerous at the present day. Of the ancient Kamakans, of the Patacho, and so many other tribes, there remain but the memory or a few hybrid descendants, but three tribes have yet preserved themselves more or less intact in the midst of their forests: the Botocudos, the Kayapos, and the Cainguas. The Botocudos or Aymoros,[664] who call themselves Burus, dwell between the Rio Doce and the Rio Pardo (Minas Geraes Prov.). They are men of low stature (1 m. 59 according to Ehrenreich), dolichocephalic (mean ceph. ind. 74.1 on the skull, according to Rey, Peixoto, etc.; 78.2 on the liv. sub.), and their skulls recall very strongly[Pg 564] those of the prehistoric race of Lagoa Santa and the “Sambaquis,” while the living subjects are closely allied to the Fuegians, as much by the size and form of the head as by the lines of the face, the prominent supraciliary ridges, the sunk nose narrow at the root, etc. I have given (pp. 160, 210, etc.) several characteristics of the ethnography of the Botocudos. The Kayapos,[665] who were believed to be an extinct race, and who, on the contrary, are one of the most important and warlike tribes of Brazil, are divided into three sections. The Northern Kayapos occupy the middle Tocantins, and overflow on one side into the sterile “Sertaos” of the province of Maranon, and on the other into central Brazil, on the left bank of the lower Araguaya; the Western Kayapos, who keep in the upper valley of the Xingu, have been described by Ehrenreich and Von den Steinen under the names of Suya and Akua (the Chavantes-Cherentes of the Brazilians). They differ from the Botocudos in physique, being brachycephalic, tall, and very light-skinned. As to ethnical characteristics, these are for the most part borrowed from their Carib and Arawak neighbours. The Southern Kayapos (near the river Parana, 20° S. lat.) are merely known by name. The Kaingans or Kame, wrongly called Coroados (see p. 545), inhabit the mountains of the Brazilian provinces of São Paulo, S. Catharina, and Rio Grande do Sul; they are tribes of uncivilised and nomadic hunters.

1. East Brazil consists of plateaus made up of soft rocks that rise to the east of the Tocantins, nestled between the forested Sierras. These plateaus offer fewer resources than the Amazon region, which is why the tribes living there are often less developed and more miserable than those in the Amazon. The lack of hard rocks suitable for making tools means many of these tribes are still in the Stone Age. Most of them belong to the Ges or Ghes linguistic family. This term, derived from the syllable “ges” found at the end of many tribal[Pg 563] names, was used by Martius to refer to the Botocudos and some neighboring tribes. Recently, Von den Steinen and Ehrenreich have expanded the meaning of this term.[662] Now, it refers to a group of tribes that, besides sharing a language, have many other similar traits in their customs and way of life (large communal houses with private fires for each family, no hammocks, lack of knowledge about navigation,[663] use of “botocs” or ear and lip plugs, and arrows with barbs on one side, etc.). Among the tribes speaking the Ges language, we need to distinguish between those living on the right bank of the Tocantins in East Brazil and those who have moved west across the river into central South America. The former have better preserved their unique identities but have been partly decimated by European colonists, and today they are not very numerous. Of the ancient Kamakans, Patacho, and many other tribes, only memories or a few mixed descendants remain, but three tribes have managed to stay more or less intact in the forests: the Botocudos, the Kayapos, and the Cainguas. The Botocudos or Aymoros,[664] who call themselves Burus, live between the Rio Doce and the Rio Pardo (Minas Geraes Prov.). They are generally short (1 min. 59 according to Ehrenreich), have long heads (average cephalic index 74.1 based on skull measurements according to Rey, Peixoto, etc.; 78.2 for living subjects), and their skulls resemble those of the prehistoric Lagoa Santa and “Sambaquis” races; living individuals are closely related to the Fuegians, both in head size and shape and in facial features, including prominent brow ridges, a flat nose narrow at the base, and so on. I have listed (pp. 160, 210, etc.) several characteristics of Botocudo ethnography. The Kayapos,[665] once thought to be extinct, are actually one of the most significant and warlike tribes in Brazil, divided into three groups. The Northern Kayapos inhabit the middle Tocantins and spread into the barren “Sertaos” of Maranon province on one side and into central Brazil on the left bank of the lower Araguaya on the other; the Western Kayapos, found in the upper Xingu valley, have been described by Ehrenreich and Von den Steinen as Suya and Akua (the Chavantes-Cherentes of Brazilians). They differ from the Botocudos in physical traits, being shorter, and having lighter skin. As for cultural traits, these are mostly borrowed from their Carib and Arawak neighbors. The Southern Kayapos (near the Parana river, 20° S. lat.) are only known by name. The Kaingans or Kame, incorrectly referred to as Coroados (see p. 545), live in the mountains of the Brazilian provinces of São Paulo, Santa Catarina, and Rio Grande do Sul; they are tribes of uncivilized and nomadic hunters.

Besides the clans of the Ges family, we must also mention in the eastern region of Brazil the following tribes whose languages have not been classified, and whose affinities with the Ges are not very clear. The more important of these tribes are the Puris or Pouris and the Kiriris, wrongly called “Tapuyas” or “Coroados” (see p. 545). At the beginning of the century the Puris in fairly large numbers still inhabited—together with the Koropos—the mountains between Rio de Janeiro and Uro Preto. There is but a small remnant left at the present day, consisting of a few individuals living together in the hamlet of[Pg 565] San Laurenço and in the “aldeamento” of Etueto, near to the boundary line of the Minas Geraes and Spiritu Santo provinces. Formerly the Puris comprised several tribes, hunters and fishers. They plaited their hammocks, had special ceremonies when their daughters arrived at the age of puberty, believed in a superior spirit, “Tupan,” having the form of a white bird, etc.

Besides the clans of the Ges family, we should also highlight in the eastern region of Brazil the following tribes whose languages have not been classified, and whose connections with the Ges are not very clear. The more significant of these tribes are the Puris or Pouris and the Kiriris, incorrectly referred to as “Tapuyas” or “Coroados” (see p. 545). At the beginning of the century, the Puris still lived in fairly large numbers—along with the Koropos—in the mountains between Rio de Janeiro and Uro Preto. Today, only a small remnant remains, consisting of a few individuals living together in the hamlet of[Pg 565] San Laurenço and in the “aldeamento” of Etueto, near the border of the Minas Geraes and Spiritu Santo provinces. In the past, the Puris were made up of several tribes, hunters and fishers. They wove their hammocks, held special ceremonies when their daughters reached puberty, and believed in a superior spirit, “Tupan,” which took the form of a white bird, etc.

The Kiriris or Sabuyas of the province of Pernambuco formed, two centuries ago, a powerful and semi-civilised nation; there are now only 600 left, living under wretched conditions in the lower valley of the São Francisco.

The Kiriris or Sabuyas of Pernambuco two hundred years ago were a strong, semi-civilized nation; now only 600 remain, living in terrible conditions in the lower valley of the São Francisco.

2. The central region of South America is formed of table-lands and wooded chains which cover the south-east of Bolivia and the Brazilian province of Matto Grosso (twice as big as France). Corresponding to the diversity of the elevations and climates there is a diversity of peoples inhabiting the country. We have already observed in this region tribes of Carib speech (Bakairi, etc.), of Arawak (Paressi, etc.), of Ges (western and southern Kayapos), and we may further notice tribes of Tupi speech (the Chiquitos, etc.). But outside of these classified peoples there are other ethnic groups occupying the table-lands of Matto Grosso, whose affinities are not yet well known, the more important of them being the Karayas, the Trumai, and Bororos.[666]

2. The central region of South America consists of plateaus and forested ranges covering the southeast of Bolivia and the Brazilian province of Matto Grosso (which is twice the size of France). Reflecting the variety of elevations and climates, there is also a variety of people living in the area. We have already noted tribes that speak Carib (like the Bakairi, etc.), Arawak (such as the Paressi, etc.), and Ges (including the western and southern Kayapos), and we can also mention tribes that speak Tupi (like the Chiquitos, etc.). Additionally, there are other ethnic groups in the plateaus of Matto Grosso whose relationships are not yet well understood, the most significant being the Karayas, Trumai, and Bororos.[666]

The Karayas are divided into two sections which know nothing of each other. It was the northern Kayapos of Ges speech who thus separated the Karayas, driving them, on the one side, into the valley of the Xingu, and on the other, into the valley of the Araguaya. Like the Ges, the Karayas are unacquainted with the use of the hammock, but, unlike them, are good boatmen and draughtsmen. It has been observed that they have a special language for the women, which appears to be the ancient form of the present language of the men. They are fairly tall (1 m. 69) and dolichocephalic (ceph. ind. 73), their nose is convex, and their hair sometimes curly.

The Karayas are split into two groups that don’t know anything about each other. It was the northern Kayapos who spoke Ges that separated the Karayas, pushing them, on one side, into the Xingu valley, and on the other, into the Araguaya valley. Like the Ges, the Karayas don’t use hammocks, but unlike them, they are skilled boaters and players of draughts. It has been noted that they have a unique language for women, which seems to be an ancient version of the current men’s language. They are generally tall (1 min. 69) and have a long head shape (ceph. ind. 73), their noses are curved, and their hair is sometimes curly.

The Trumai of the sources of the Xingu are, on the contrary, short (1 m. 59) and mesocephalic (ceph. ind. 81.1), and they have convex noses and retreating foreheads.

The Trumai from the sources of the Xingu are, in contrast, short (1 minute. 59) and have a medium head shape (ceph. ind. 81.1), with convex noses and sloping foreheads.

The Bororos (Fig. 173), scattered from the upper Paraguay to the upper Parana, are hunters; they have great bows and arrows of bamboo or bone. Polygamy exists among them, and there are also cases of polyandry. They are tall (1 m. 74) and mesocephalic (ceph. ind. 81.5).[667]

The Bororos (Fig. 173), spread from the upper Paraguay to the upper Parana, are hunters; they use large bows and arrows made of bamboo or bone. Polygamy is practiced among them, and there are also instances of polyandry. They are tall (1 minute. 74) and have a medium head shape (ceph. ind. 81.5).[667]

Aramichau Indian, French Guiana

FIG. 172.—Aramichau Indian (Tupi or Carib tribe of French Guiana).
(Coll. Mus. Nat. Hist., Paris.)

FIG. 172.—Aramichau Indian (Tupi or Carib tribe from French Guiana).
(Coll. Mus. Nat. Hist., Paris.)

In spite of the diversity of language and race, several of the tribes of the central region, living side by side, have the same manners and customs, and the same kind of existence, as a result of mutual borrowings.[668] The best example of this is furnished by the Caribs, Arawaks, Ges, Tupis, and Trumai of the upper Xingu. They all go naked, the women sometimes wearing the triangular palm-leaf which plays the part of the fig-leaf;[Pg 567] their huts are grouped around the “house of flutes,” or the dwelling of the young men—a Carib importation—in which are preserved symbolic masks, which, like the pottery, are of Arawak invention. The tools are primitive, frequently of stone.[669] One might almost say that these tribes in ploughing imitate the movements of burrowing animals, for in this operation they make use of the long claws of the front paws of a great armadillo (Dasipus gigas), two of them attached together. The throwing-stick and blunt arrows are used by the Trumai, as by the Tupi tribes. They have no domestic animals, but keep some wild animals in captivity—parrots, lizards (to hunt insects), etc. The custom of the couvade and the existence of witch medicine-men are common to all these tribes.

Despite the differences in language and race, several tribes in the central region live closely together and share similar customs and lifestyles due to mutual influences.[668] A prime example of this is the Caribs, Arawaks, Ges, Tupis, and Trumai from the upper Xingu. They typically go nude, with women occasionally donning a triangular palm-leaf to cover themselves; [Pg 567] their huts are arranged around the “house of flutes,” or the young men's dwelling—a Carib influence—where symbolic masks are kept, alongside pottery, which is originally from the Arawak. Their tools are basic, often made of stone.[669] It could almost be said that their plowing resembles the motions of burrowing animals, as they use the long claws from the front paws of a large armadillo (Dasipus gigas), typically attached together. The Trumai use throwing sticks and blunt arrows, similar to the Tupi tribes. They don't have domesticated animals but do keep some wild ones, like parrots and lizards (to control insects), in captivity. The practice of couvade and the presence of witch doctors are common among all these tribes.

3. The Tupi-Guarani.—In South America there exist a great number of tribes scattered from Guiana to Paraguay, from the Brazilian coast to the eastern slope of the Andes, who speak the different dialects of the Tupi linguistic family.[670] They may be divided into two groups: on one side, to the east, the tribes speaking the ancient Tupi language, which, in imitation of Quechua, was a “lingua geral,” and on the other, the numerous tribes to the west, speaking different dialects which have only a vague resemblance to Tupi, according to L. Adam. At the time of the conquest the Tupi tribes, called Tupi-namba Tanuyo, who were cannibals, occupied not only the whole of the Brazilian coast from Para to Santos, but also the valley of the Amazon as far as Manaos. These primitive Tupis have mostly been exterminated by the Portuguese, but their language, which has become that of the converted Indians,[Pg 568] has spread as far as the valley of the Rio Negro, a tributary of the Amazon, where there have never been any Tupi tribes.

3. The Tupi-Guarani.—In South America, there are many tribes scattered from Guiana to Paraguay, and from the Brazilian coast to the eastern slope of the Andes, who speak various dialects of the Tupi language family.[670] They can be divided into two groups: on one side, to the east, the tribes that speak the ancient Tupi language, which, like Quechua, served as a “lingua geral,” and on the other side, the many tribes to the west, who speak different dialects that only vaguely resemble Tupi, according to L. Adam. At the time of the conquest, the Tupi tribes known as Tupi-namba Tanuyo, who practiced cannibalism, occupied the entire Brazilian coast from Para to Santos, as well as the Amazon valley up to Manaus. Most of these primitive Tupis have been wiped out by the Portuguese, but their language, which has become that of the converted Indians,[Pg 568] has spread as far as the valley of the Rio Negro, a tributary of the Amazon, where there have never been any Tupi tribes.

Bororo Woman, Matto Grosso

FIG. 173.—Bororo woman (unclassified tribe of Matto Grosso).
(Phot. Ehrenreich.)

FIG. 173.—Bororo woman (unclassified tribe of Mato Grosso).
(Phot. Ehrenreich.)

The Eastern or Guarani Tupis, formerly so numerous in the Brazilian provinces of São Paulo and the Rio Grande do Sul, are reduced at the present time to a few families; on the other hand, they still form the bulk of the population of Paraguay, and the territory of Missiones in the Argentine Republic. The Guarani of Paraguay, “tamed” in the commanderies by the Jesuits, have intermingled their blood with that of the Spaniards, and adopted their mode of life. However, there still remain in the depths of the forest some tribes who have kept intact their type and manners. Among the more interesting of these we must note the Cainguas or[Pg 569] Kaigguas[671] of south-east Paraguay and Missiones (Argentine), scattered in little groups, obeying one cacique or chief. They are short (1 m. 60), mesocephalic (mean ceph. ind. of 12 men, 80.4), of bronzed complexion; their hair is lank or wavy, often reddish in the children; the nose is straight, the cheek-bones are prominent. From ten to twenty thousand Cainguas are estimated to be in Paraguay alone. Extremely fond of dancing and music, they like drawing as well, and possess as a rule a quick understanding. They are husbandmen, going almost naked, obtain fire by friction, are acquainted with weaving and pottery, have barbed and sometimes blunt-pointed arrows.[672] Other tribes, the Jacunda, the Pacajas, the Tacunas, keep to the lower valley of the Xingu. The Mauhés, stationed between this latter river and the Madeira, are at the extreme limit of the expansion towards the west of the pure Tupis. On turning again towards the south we come across the Apiacas of Tapajos (who must not be confounded with the similarly named tribe of the Carib family), the Camayuras of the upper Xingu, the Chiquitos and the Chiriguanos of Bolivia, now Hispanified.

The Eastern or Guarani Tupis, once abundant in the Brazilian provinces of São Paulo and Rio Grande do Sul, have now dwindled to just a few families. In contrast, they still make up a large portion of the population in Paraguay and the Missiones region in Argentina. The Guarani of Paraguay, “tamed” by the Jesuits in commanderies, have mixed their blood with Spaniards and adopted their lifestyle. However, there are still some tribes deep in the forest that have preserved their identity and customs. Among the most notable of these are the Cainguas or Kaigguas of southeast Paraguay and Missiones (Argentina), who live in small groups led by one chief. They are short (about 1.60 m), have a medium head shape (average cephalic index of 80.4), and a bronzed complexion; their hair can be straight or wavy, often reddish in children; they have straight noses and prominent cheekbones. There are an estimated ten to twenty thousand Cainguas in Paraguay alone. They have a strong love for dancing and music, enjoy drawing, and generally have a quick understanding. They are farmers, usually go nearly naked, make fire by friction, are skilled in weaving and pottery, and use barbed as well as sometimes blunt-pointed arrows.[672] Other tribes, such as the Jacunda, Pacajas, and Tacunas, inhabit the lower valley of the Xingu. The Mauhés, located between this river and the Madeira, are at the farthest western extent of the pure Tupis. Turning back south, we find the Apiacas of Tapajos (who should not be confused with the similarly named tribe from the Carib family), the Camayuras from the upper Xingu, the Chiquitos, and the Chiriguanos from Bolivia, who are now influenced by Hispanic culture.

The migrations of the Tupis from the south to the north,[Pg 570] conjectured in D’Orbigny’s day, have now been absolutely demonstrated. Paraguay and the east of Bolivia were the starting-points of these migrations. The exodus of the Tupis took place at first towards the coast, then along the seaboard to the mouth of the Para, and thence further northward into French Guiana, where some Tupi tribes are still to be found, the Emerillons of the valley of the Saï, a left tributary of the Inini, the Ovampis of the upper Oyapoc, etc. The Aramichaux (Fig. 172), who were believed to be extinct, and who dwell between the Uaqui and the Arua,[673] seem to be also of the Tupi stock. Another stream of migration may be traced straight towards the north-east; it passes through the upper basin of the Xingu, to terminate eastward of the Tocantins (the tribe of the Guajajaza). An isolated Tupi group exists far to the north-west of the territory occupied by the bulk of this family. It consists of the Omaguas and the Cocomas, half-civilised tribes of the upper valley of the Maranon (Peru), to the eastward of the Jivaros. Individuals with wavy or frizzy[674] hair are not rare among these hybrid peoples.

The migrations of the Tupis from the south to the north,[Pg 570] which was speculated in D’Orbigny’s time, have now been fully proven. Paraguay and eastern Bolivia were the starting points of these migrations. The Tupis initially moved towards the coast, then along the shoreline to the mouth of the Para, and further north into French Guiana, where some Tupi tribes still exist, including the Emerillons from the Saï valley, a left tributary of the Inini, and the Ovampis from the upper Oyapoc, among others. The Aramichaux (Fig. 172), once thought to be extinct, who live between the Uaqui and Arua,[673] also seem to be of Tupi origin. Another wave of migration can be traced directly to the northeast; it goes through the upper basin of the Xingu and ends east of the Tocantins (the tribe of the Guajajaza). An isolated Tupi group exists far to the northwest of the main area occupied by this family. It includes the Omaguas and the Cocomas, semi-civilized tribes in the upper valley of the Maranon (Peru), east of the Jivaros. People with wavy or frizzy[674] hair are fairly common among these mixed groups.

The family of the Western Tupis, whose linguistic affinities are less clear, comprises, provisionally, the Mundrucus, or Mundurukus, of the middle Tapajoz, the Yurunas of the lower Xingu, the Anetö of the upper course of this river, etc.

The family of the Western Tupis, which has less clear linguistic ties, includes, for now, the Mundrucus or Mundurukus from the middle Tapajoz, the Yurunas from the lower Xingu, the Anetö from the upper section of this river, and so on.

Physically, the Tupis differ but little from the Caribs; those of the north, the Mauhés and the Mundurukus for example, studied by Barboza Rodriguez, are 1 m. 58 and 1 m. 60 in stature, whilst the Kamayuras and the Anetö of the upper Xingu are taller (1 m. 62 on an average); the cephalic index of the latter is 79 (Ehrenreich). The Guarani should be, according to D’Orbigny, more than 1 m. 66 in height.[675] But the anthropological study of the Tupis is still to be made.

Physically, the Tupis are very similar to the Caribs; those in the north, like the Mauhés and the Mundurukus, studied by Barboza Rodriguez, are about 1.58 m and 1.60 m tall, while the Kamayuras and the Anetö from the upper Xingu are taller (averaging around 1.62 m); the cephalic index of the latter is 79 (Ehrenreich). According to D’Orbigny, the Guarani should be over 1.66 m in height.[675] However, the anthropological study of the Tupis still needs to be done.

If we consider the accounts of the different dialects of the four great linguistic families which we have just described: Carib, Arawak, Ges, and Tupi, we are bound to admit the following hypothesis as to the migrations of the peoples belonging to these families. There have been two movements, centrifugal and centripetal. From the centre of the continent the Tupis have spread radially in all directions, and the Caribs towards the north-east, reaching as far as the Antilles. On the other hand, towards this centre converge the migrations of the Arawaks arriving from the north, perhaps from Columbia and the Antilles, and the migrations of the Ges coming from the east. Did the centrifugal movement of the Tupis and the Caribs and the centripetal movement of the Arawaks and the Ges take place simultaneously or in some order of succession? We have not sufficient information as yet to solve this problem, but the first supposition appears to be more probable, for we still see in our own day both movements going on simultaneously.

If we look at the accounts of the different dialects from the four main language families we've just described—Carib, Arawak, Ges, and Tupi—we have to accept the following theory about the migrations of the peoples within these families. There have been two movements: one spreading outwards (centrifugal) and one moving inwards (centripetal). The Tupis have radiated outwards from the center of the continent in all directions, while the Caribs moved northeast, reaching as far as the Antilles. At the same time, the migrations of the Arawaks are coming towards this center from the north, possibly from Colombia and the Antilles, along with the migrations of the Ges coming from the east. Were the outward movements of the Tupis and the Caribs and the inward movements of the Arawaks and the Ges happening at the same time or in some sequence? We don’t have enough information to answer this yet, but the first scenario seems more likely, as we can still observe both movements occurring simultaneously today.

IV. The Pampeans and the Fuegians.—That portion of the American continent situated beyond the 30th degree of S. lat., between the Andes, the Atlantic, and the Strait of Magellan, is a vast plain which passes imperceptibly from the rich pasturage of Chaco to the monotonous Pampas, and from the latter to the bare plateaux of Patagonia.

IV. The Pampeans and the Fuegians.—That area of the American continent located south of the 30th parallel, between the Andes, the Atlantic, and the Strait of Magellan, is a vast plain that gradually transitions from the lush grasslands of Chaco to the flat Pampas, and then from there to the barren plateaus of Patagonia.

Young Yahgan Fuegian Girl

FIG. 174.—Kamanakar Kipa;
young Yahgan Fuegian girl;
height, 1 m. 40; ceph. ind., 79.7.
(Phot. Cape Horn Scient. Mission.)

FInstagram. 174.—Kamanakar Kipa;
young Yahgan Fuegian girl;
height, 1 minute. 40; ceph. ind., 79.7.
(Phot. Cape Horn Scient. Mission.)

This plain is occupied by various tribes who have nothing in common but the nomadic and pastoral mode of life determined by the environment since the introduction of the horse. Of the ancient peoples who occupied these regions as well as Uruguay at the time of the conquest, there remain but the débris, or descendants hybridised to the furthest extent possible.

This plain is home to different tribes who share nothing in common except for their nomadic and pastoral lifestyle shaped by the environment since the introduction of the horse. Of the ancient peoples who lived in these areas, including Uruguay at the time of the conquest, only the remnants, or descendants greatly mixed, remain.

The Charruas and their congeners the Minuanes and the Yaros, who fought so valiantly during the centuries of the Spanish domination, at first with their clubs and bows, then, becoming horsemen, with “bolas” and the lasso, were exterminated only in 1832. The four last representatives of the race were exhibited[Pg 572] as curiosities in Paris in 1830. The Charruas had a very dark-coloured skin and were of somewhat high stature (1 m. 68), like their neighbours on the other side of the Rio de la Plata, the Chanases, and especially the Querandis, whose bands were decimated at the end of the sixteenth century, after their last attack on Buenos Ayres.[676]

The Charruas and their relatives, the Minuanes and the Yaros, who fought bravely during centuries of Spanish rule, first with their clubs and bows and later as horsemen using “bolas” and lassos, were wiped out by 1832. The last four representatives of the tribe were displayed[Pg 572] as curiosities in Paris in 1830. The Charruas had very dark skin and were relatively tall (1 minute. 68), similar to their neighbors across the Rio de la Plata, the Chanases, and especially the Querandis, whose groups were decimated at the end of the sixteenth century after their final assault on Buenos Aires.[676]

Their hybrid descendants, called Talhuets, were still fairly numerous in 1860 between Buenos Ayres and Rio Negro. The Abipones to the west of the Paraguay, so well described by Dobrizhoffer,[677] were destroyed at the end of the eighteenth century, partly through conflicts with their congeners the Mocovis, of whom there are no survivors.

Their mixed descendants, known as Talhuets, were still relatively numerous in 1860 between Buenos Aires and Rio Negro. The Abipones to the west of Paraguay, well documented by Dobrizhoffer,[677] were wiped out at the end of the eighteenth century, partly due to conflicts with their counterparts, the Mocovis, of whom there are no survivors.

All these tribes probably belonged to the Guaycuru linguistic family, established by L. Quevedo, whose most numerous representatives are now the Tobas of southern Choco to the north of Pilcomayo, and the Matacos who wander about between the latter river and the Vermejo.[678] We must further add to this group the Caduves or Caduvei of the Brazilian bank of the Paraguay, between 20° and 23° S. lat., a hundred or so of unhybridised individuals, all that remain of the ancient Mbaya people, and the Payaguas, an ancient warlike and plundering tribe thought to have disappeared, but of which there remain between two and three score representatives in the[Pg 573] immediate neighbourhood of Assumption, peaceful basket-makers, potters, or fishers.[679]

All these tribes probably belonged to the Guaycuru linguistic family, defined by L. Quevedo, whose most numerous representatives today are the Tobas from southern Choco, north of the Pilcomayo River, and the Matacos, who roam between that river and the Vermejo.[678] Additionally, we should include the Caduves or Caduvei from the Brazilian side of the Paraguay River, located between 20° and 23° S latitude, with about a hundred unhybridized individuals, who are all that's left of the ancient Mbaya people, and the Payaguas, an ancient warlike and raiding tribe believed to be extinct, but with approximately 40 to 60 members still living near Assumption, who are now peaceful basket-makers, potters, or fishermen.[679]

The Lenguas of the ancient authors (a term used by them to describe very different tribes), who lived side by side with the Tobas, and of whom there remain but a few individuals, seem to form, with the Guanes of southern Chaco, the Sanapanas, the Angaites, and other tribes between the Salado and the Yababeri (tributaries on the left of the Paraguay), a separate linguistic family, which Boggiani proposes to call Ennema. Their neighbours, the Samucos or Chamococos of the Bolivian Chaco also constitute a special linguistic group, but their manners and customs approximate to those of the southern Arawaks.[680]

The Lenguas from ancient authors (a term they used for very different tribes) lived alongside the Tobas, and only a few of them remain today. They seem to belong, along with the Guanes from southern Chaco, the Sanapanas, the Angaites, and other tribes between the Salado and the Yababeri (tributaries on the left side of the Paraguay), to a distinct linguistic family that Boggiani suggests naming Ennema. Their neighbors, the Samucos or Chamococos from the Bolivian Chaco, also form a unique linguistic group, but their customs and ways of life are more similar to those of the southern Arawaks.[680]

The Guatos of the marshes which extend from the Paraguay to the Sao Laurenço also speak a special language. They are excellent boatmen, who fish with their great bows and bone-pointed arrows. They are also renowned as hunters of jaguars.[681]

The Guatos from the marshes stretching from Paraguay to São Lourenço have their own unique language. They're skilled boaters who fish using their longbows and bone-tipped arrows. They're also well-known for hunting jaguars.[681]

Most of the Guaycurus and their neighbours seem to be of high stature and to have a brownish-yellow skin; but almost nothing is known either as to the shape of their head or their other somatic characters.

Most of the Guaycurus and their neighbors appear to be tall and have a brownish-yellow skin tone; however, very little is known about the shape of their heads or their other physical characteristics.

To the south of the Choco, between the Rio Salado de Santa Fe and the Rio Chubut, in the Pampas and the north of the Patagonian table-land, the primitive population which spoke the Guaycuru language in the north and the Patagonian language in the south, has disappeared. It has been absorbed or[Pg 574] modified by the invasions of the Araucans coming from the west, and by the encroachments of the Europeans coming from the east. The interminglings have given birth to new tribes like the Puelches, sprung from the Patagonians and the Araucans (p. 551), with a strain of Guaycuru blood, and the Gauchos, Guaycuru-European hybrids. The invasion of the Europeans increasing, the Puelches and the Araucans (Pehuenches, Rankels, Huilitches) have been pushed back farther and farther to the south. After the war of extermination waged by General Roca in 1881, the “Pampeans” migrated in a mass to the south of the Rio Negro, where they absorbed a portion of the Patagonians, driving away the remainder to the south of the Rio Santa Cruz.[682]

To the south of Chocó, between the Salado River of Santa Fe and the Chubut River, in the Pampas and northern Patagonian plateau, the original population that spoke Guaycuru in the north and Patagonian in the south has vanished. They have been absorbed or[Pg 574] changed by the invasions of the Araucans from the west and the encroachments of Europeans from the east. These intermixings have led to the creation of new tribes like the Puelches, who emerged from the Patagonians and Araucans (p. 551), with some Guaycuru ancestry, and the Gauchos, a mix of Guaycuru and European heritage. As the European invasion grew, the Puelches and Araucans (Pehuenches, Rankels, Huilitches) were progressively pushed further south. After the extermination campaign led by General Roca in 1881, the “Pampeans” migrated en masse to the south of the Negro River, where they absorbed some Patagonians, driving the rest south of the Santa Cruz River.[682]

Cramped between this river and the Strait of Magellan, the Patagonians or Tehuelches, who call themselves by the name of Tsoon-ké, are now reduced to 2000 individuals.[Pg 575] Those dwelling far from the coasts, as well as the Onas of Tierra del Fuego (the only Patagonian tribe that does not possess horses), have perhaps better preserved the characteristics of the Patagonian race. They are very tall (from 1 m. 73 to 1 m. 83 according to different authors), very brachycephalic (average ceph. ind. on the living sub., 85), have an elongated face, thinnish nose, eyes slightly oblique, projecting cheek-bones.[683]

Cramped between this river and the Strait of Magellan, the Patagonians or Tehuelches, who refer to themselves as Tsoon-ké, are now down to 2,000 individuals.[Pg 575] Those living far from the coasts, along with the Onas of Tierra del Fuego (the only Patagonian tribe without horses), may have better preserved the traits of the Patagonian race. They are very tall (ranging from 1 minute. 73 to 1 min. 83 according to various authors), have a very broad skull shape (average cranial index on living subjects is 85), feature an elongated face, a slender nose, slightly slanted eyes, and prominent cheekbones.[683]

Yahgan Fuegians

FIG. 175.—Tualanpintsis, Yahgan Fuegian (height 1 m. 59, ceph. ind. 81.6);
and his wife Ticoaeli (height 1 m. 40, ceph. ind. 80.1).
(Phot. Cape Horn Scient. Mission.)

FInstagram. 175.—Tualanpintsis, Yahgan Fuegian (height 1 minute. 59, head index 81.6);
and his wife Ticoaeli (height 1 min. 40, head index 80.1).
(Phot. Cape Horn Scient. Mission.)

The Fuegians (Figs. 48, 174, and 175) inhabit the southern and western coasts of Tierra del Fuego, as well as the archipelagoes which lie to the west and south of this great island. They form a population by themselves, divided into two tribes,[Pg 576] the Yahgans to the south of the chain running from Sarmiento to Mount Darwin, and the Alakalufs to the north of this chain. I have mentioned several facts concerning the somatic characters (pp. 89, 108, etc.) and the ethnic ones (p. 146, note 2, pp. 181, 189, 214, etc.) of the Fuegians. Let me further add that the predominant type among them is that of the Palæo-American sub-race. Their language is not yet classified. The Alakalufs are at the present day reduced to 200 individuals. The Yahgans, who numbered about a thousand individuals in 1884, no longer exist to-day as an independent tribe. The last survivors of ravages caused by epidemics are gathered together in the two missionary stations called Ushuaia (Beagle Channel) and Tekenika; numbering about 90, they are dressed in the European fashion, speak English, and are employed in the various works at the mission.[684]

The Fuegians (Figs. 48, 174, and 175) live on the southern and western coasts of Tierra del Fuego, as well as the archipelagos to the west and south of this large island. They make up a distinct population, divided into two tribes, [Pg 576] the Yahgans to the south of the mountain range from Sarmiento to Mount Darwin, and the Alakalufs to the north of this range. I've mentioned several details about their physical traits (pp. 89, 108, etc.) and ethnic characteristics (p. 146, note 2, pp. 181, 189, 214, etc.) of the Fuegians. Additionally, I should note that the dominant type among them is of the Palæo-American sub-race. Their language is still unclassified. Currently, the Alakalufs have dwindled to 200 individuals. The Yahgans, who numbered about a thousand in 1884, no longer exist as an independent tribe today. The last survivors, affected by epidemics, are gathered at the two missionary stations called Ushuaia (Beagle Channel) and Tekenika; numbering about 90, they are dressed in European style, speak English, and work in various tasks at the mission.[684]


APPENDIX I.

AVERAGE HEIGHT OF MEN, 288 SERIES (see p. 29).

AVERAGE HEIGHT OF MEN, 288 SERIES (see p. 29).

Number of
Subjects.
ETHNIC GROUPS. Height
in Milli-
metres.
LOW STATURES (UNDER 1 M. 60, OR 63 INCHES).
Africans.
38 Akka Negrilloes of the country of the Monbuttus 1,378
64 Kalahari Bushmen of Angra Pequena, etc. 1,529
Asiatics.
42 Aeta Negritoes of the Philippines 1,465
115 Andamanese 1,485
28 Black Sakais or Menings of Gunong-Inas 1,490
36 Jakuns and Mantras of Johor 1,535
25 Ostiaks of the Yenisei (Turukhansk) 1,540
33 Pure Veddahs of Central Ceylon 1,554
99 Samoyeds (of Asia and Europe) 1,555
75 Kurumbas of Wynaad (India) 1,556
58 Irulas (Nilgiri plains) 1,560
33 Malé (Nayar and Arrayan) of Southern India 1,564
32 Japanese (workmen and coolies) 1,570
95 Annamese of Cochin China 1,571
29 Paniyans of Malabar 1,574
26 Cherumas of Calicut 1,574
200 Mal Paharias (Dravidians of Bengal) 1,577
100 Dravidian Bhuiyas of Chota Nagpur 1,577
155 Veddhas of Ceylon generally 1,578
300 Trao Mois of French Indo-China 1,579
210 Ostiaks 1,581
45 Solorese of Flores and Solor 1,582
359 Annamese in general 1,583
457 Mois in general (French Indo-China) 1,585
2,500 Japanese (1,260 of them soldiers) 1,585
125 Islanders of Bavean (between Java and Borneo) 1,587
100 Munda Kols of Chota Nagpur 1,589
1,100 Japanese of the upper and middle classes 1,590
76 Annamese of Tonkin [Pg 578] 1,590
56 Laotians of Lower Laos 1,590
76 Sundanese of Java 1,591
90 Bhumij (Bils of Chota Nagpur) 1,592
100 Chakamas (Araknese-Bengali half-breeds) 1,596
29 Timurians (of the western part of the Island) 1,597
Americans.
28 Caribs of the three Guianas and Venezuela 1,572
26 Eskimo of Labrador 1,575
139 Yahgan and Alakaluf Fuegians 1,577
50 Mauhe and Mundurucus (probably Tupis) 1,588
Europeans.
259 Lapps of Scandinavia 1,529
25 Lapps of Russian Lapland 1,555
126 Vogules 1,591
STATURES BELOW THE AVERAGE (1600–1649 MM.,
OR 63–65 INCHES).
Asiatics.
105 Teneggerese of Eastern Java 1,604
58 Battas of Lake Toba (Sumatra) 1,605
27 Rotti Islanders (south-west of Timur) 1,605
30 Siamese 1,607
100 Kurmis (Kols of Chota Nagpur) 1,608
90 Maghs or Arakanese of Chittagong 1,608
45 Sumba Islanders (south of Flores) 1,609
31 Bugis of Celebes 1,609
27 Kulu-Lahulis of Nepal 1,610
45 Dards of Ghuraiz, Hunza and Ghilgit 1,611
58 Tipperahs of Chittagong (Lushai-Kumis) 1,611
83 Baltis 1,612
100 Santals 1,614
25 Southern Chinese Long-Chow (Kwang-si) 1,615
80 Javanese 1,616
100 Kharvars (Dravidians of Chota Nagpur) 1,617
149 Malays of Sumatra and Malacca 1,617
500 Oraons of Chota Nagpur 1,621
15,582 Southern Chinese (principally Hakkas) 1,622
45 Singhalese of Colombo and Candy 1,625
80 Kling Tamils born at Sumatra 1,629
25 Kothas of the Nilgiris 1,629
296 Kalmuks or Mongol Torgots of Dzungaria 1,629
695 Hindus of the province of Behar 1,630
82 Brahmans of Southern India 1,631
26 Nicobarese 1,631
685 Dravidians N.W. prov. and Oudh (Chero, etc.) 1,634
1,443 Dravido-Hindu castes, N.W. prov. and Oudh [Pg 579] 1,634
1,616 Malayalim of Southern India 1,634
142 Hindus of various castes, N.W. prov. 1,635
40 Singhalese in general 1,635
387 Kirghiz-Kazaks of the three Hordes 1,638
25 Uru-Kurubas of Southern India 1,639
100 Karens of Lower Burma 1,640
92 Derbete-Kalmuks of Astrakhan 1,646
117 Cambodians (Khmers) 1,648
64 Tamils of Ceylon 1,649
37 Chukchis 1,649
231 Burmese 1,649
Europeans.
4,220 Jews of Russian Poland 1,612
3,313 Chuvashes (3,076 of them conscripts) 1,612
100 Permiaks 1,618
119 Votiaks 1,619
6,607 Sardinians (soldiers) 1,619
1,200 Magyars of West Hungaria (conscripts) 1,619
247 Jews of Kuba and Kutais (Caucasus) 1,621
167,677 Poles of Russian Poland (conscripts) 1,624
6,517 Volga Tatars (principally conscripts) 1,627
1,210 Cheremisses (1,141 of them conscripts) 1,627
31,707 Conscripts of German Switzerland 1,629
500 Corsicans 1,633
132 Austrian Jews of Hungary 1,634
25 Lesgian Udes of Elizabetopol 1,634
32,024 Sicilians (soldiers) 1,635
2,532 Conscripts of Italian Switzerland 1,635
382 Rumanians of Hungary 1,635
61 Jews (Spaniol) of Bosnia 1,636
961 Bielorousses or White Russians 1,636
800 Portuguese 1,637
292 Hungarians (conscripts) 1,637
4,894 Spanish Basques 1,638
1,955 Bulgarians of Western Bulgaria 1,638
2,252 Mordvinians 1,639
890 Lithuanians of Russian Poland 1,639
1,355 Ruthenes of the Plains (Galicia) 1,640
1,771,948 Russians of European Russia (conscripts) 1,642
437 Karelians of Russia (conscripts) 1,642
100 Esthonians 1,642
2,000 Jews of the Ukraine 1,642
4,701 Lithuanians of Lithuania (conscripts) 1,643
1,831 Gruzin Georgians (mostly conscripts) 1,644
344,371 Italians in general (soldiers) 1,645
7,396 Spaniards [Pg 580] 1,645
77,579 Magyars of Hungary (soldiers in 1868) 1,646
447,172 French in general (conscripts) 1,646
9,456 Conscripts of French Switzerland 1,646
1,483 Mingrelian Georgians 1,646
33,541 Piedmontese (soldiers) 1,649
Americans.
90 Salishans (Harrison Lake, British Columbia) 1,613
30 Salishans of the Frazer River delta (British Col.) 1,618
28 Guaranis (Kamayuras and Anetos) 1,620
614 Eskimo of Greenland 1,621
73 Zuñis of New Mexico 1,623
54 Moquis 1,629
85 Eskimo of Alaska 1,630
55 Kwakiutl Indians (British Columbia) 1,639
Africans.
50 Mzabites (Berbers of M’Zab, Algeria) 1,620
36 Batekes of the Congo 1,641
Oceanians.
31 Aborigines of the island of New Britain 1,602
67 Papuans of German New Guinea 1,608
156 Natives of the Solomon Islands 1,616
38 Melanesians of the archipelago of New Britain 1,620
40 Australians of Southern New South Wales 1,630
142 Papuans of New Guinea in general 1,640
STATURES ABOVE THE AVERAGE (1650–1699 MM.,
OR 65–67 INCHES).
Asiatics.
32 Kols (of N.W. provinces and Oudh) 1,650
108 Hajemi Persians (principally of Teheran) 1,651
792 Armenians of the province of Tiflis (conscripts) 1,652
40 Badagas of the Nilgiri plains 1,658
362 Osmanli Turks (288 of them in Asia Minor) 1,660
60 Baluchis of Baluchistan 1,662
60 Khatris (Punjab caste) 1,662
72 Chuhras (do.) 1,666
979 Brahmans and other higher castes of the N.W. provinces and Oudh 1,666
56 Tamils of Southern India 1,667
54 Sartes of Russian Turkestan 1,668
33 Aissores of neighbourhood of Lake Urmia (Cauc.) 1,668
74 Kara Kirghiz of Russian Turkestan 1,668
53 Turkomans of the Transcaspian 1,670
54 Chinese of the north (Che Fu and Kuldja provinces) 1,674
38 Sibos (Manchu Tunguses) [Pg 581] 1,675
120 Uzbegs of Russian Turkestan 1,683
444 Punjabi in general 1,684
140 Kurds of the Caucasus 1,686
80 Pathans (Punjab caste) 1,687
155 Tajiks and Galchas of Russian Turkestan 1,692
192 Armenians of Transcaucasia 1,694
239 Aderbaijanis of Persia and Transcaucasia 1,698
Europeans.
59,761 Rumanians of the kingdom of Rumania (soldiers) 1,650
226 Abkhasians of the Caucasus 1,650
71 Greeks of the kingdom of Greece 1,651
140 Meshtcheriaks of Perm and Orenburg 1,652
2,012 Saxons of the Halle-Mansfeld district (Prussia) 1,653
61 Gypsies of Hungary (soldiers) 1,654
1,838 Gruzin Georgians 1,654
100 Jews of Bukovina 1,654
84,141 Russians of Asiatic Russia 1,654
35,416 Belgians in general 1,655
493 Dutch of the province of Zeeland (conscripts) 1,655
1,481 Mingrelians 1,656
2,865 Imer Georgians 1,656
1,003 Lithuanian Jmudins (conscripts) 1,656
31 Gypsies of Crimea 1,657
142 Svane Georgian highlanders 1,658
370 Bashkirs of Orenburg and Ufa 1,658
1,305 French Basques 1,658
231 Crimeans of the south coast 1,664
187 Ruthenian highlanders (Galicia) 1,666
20,509 Venetians 1,666
6,909 Thuringians of the Saxon prov., Prussia (conscripts) 1,667
60 Slovens 1,668
200 Ukrainians or Little Russians of Kief 1,669
200 Ruthenes of the Bukovine (soldiers) 1,670
200 Rumanians of the Bukovine (soldiers) 1,673
28 Lesgians (Avars and Kazi Kumyks) 1,676
22,979 Karelians of Finland 1,680
458 Ossets 1,680
1,220 Swedes of the province of Kalmar (conscripts) 1,681
80 Tavastians or Western Finns 1,682
44 Kabards (Cherkesses) of the Caucasus 1,684
9,345 Dutch (conscripts) 1,685
3,000 Danes 1,685
4,964 Sleswickians (soldiers) 1,692
89,021 German emigrants to the United States 1,693
741 Inhabitants of Wales 1,695
41 Gypsies of Bosnia [Pg 582] 1,695
176 Tatar (Kabard) highlanders (Caucasus) 1,697
Africans.
32 Arabs of Algeria 1,656
28 Mushikongos of the Congo 1,658
1,103 Berbers of Tunis 1,663
29 Abyssinians 1,669
35 Danakils of Tajura 1,670
52 Berbers of Biskra (Chauia tribe?) 1,673
244 Kabyles of Great Kabylia 1,677
180 Berbers of Algeria 1,680
27 Bashilange of the Kasai 1,680
2,020 Negroes of the United States 1,681
863 Mulattos of the United States 1,682
28 Bechuanas 1,684
25,828 Negroes and Mulattos of the United States (conscripts) 1,693
Oceanians.
50 Aborigines of Southern Australia 1,657
65 Australians in general 1,667
233 Australians of Central Australia 1,670
52 New Caledonians (Melanesians) 1,673
72 Papuans of British New Guinea 1,674
58 Australians of Victoria 1,677
50 Maoris of New Zealand 1,680
Americans.
61 Tinné of the S.W. (interior of British Columbia) 1,658
32 Hupa Indians (Tinné of Oregon) 1,661
121 Ute Indians 1,661
26 Bilkula Indians 1,661
37 Tsimshian Indians (Brit. Columbia) 1,666
165 Shushwap Indians (Salish) 1,670
104 Cherokis of the East 1,677
74 Comanches 1,678
30 Klamath Indians 1,679
59 Chicasaw Indians 1,679
68 Piute Indians 1,683
57 Cree Indians 1,685
147 Apaches and Navajos 1,686
37 Flathead Indians (Salishan Têtes plates) 1,687
32 Papagos of California 1,695
71 Sahaptin Indians (Nez percés) 1,697
28 Ottawa Indians [Pg 583] 1,699
HIGH STATURES (1 M 70, OR 67 INCHES AND
UPWARDS).
Americans.
111 Indians of the south of the State of California (Yuma?) 1,700
260 Choctaws 1,700
100 Pimas 1,703
21,645 Canadian soldiers (chiefly descendants of French) 1,703
76 Cherokis of the west 1,712
198 Ojibwas of the south 1,712
41 Pawnees 1,713
92 Delawares and Blackfeet 1,715
79 Micmacs and Abenakis 1,717
315,620 Citizens of the United States born in the country 1,719
29 Maricopas of California 1,722
1,413 Ojibwas of the east 1,723
612 Siouans 1,726
94 Iroquoians or Iroquois 1,727
517 Indians of the United States (chiefly Iroquois) 1,730
91 Omahas and Winnebagos 1,732
213 Crow Indians 1,732
53 Creek Indians 1,735
35 Mohaves of California 1,740
50 Cheyennes 1,745
Africans.
31 Mandingans in general 1,700
25 Bejas (called Nubians) 1,708
72 Kafirs (Ama-Xosa and Ama-Zulu) 1,715
56 Western Zandehs (Mandjas, Akungs, Awakas, etc.) 1,717
56 Somalis (Eyssa, Habis, Awals, etc.) 1,723
30 Toucouleurs or Torodos 1,725
62 Wolofs, Serers and Leybus 1,730
25 For Negroes of Darfur 1,730
35 Fulahs or Fulbés of French Sudan 1,741
Asiatics.
33 Awan (Ghazikhan tribe, Punjab) 1,706
97 Sikhs of the Punjab 1,709
29 Gypsies of Russian Turkestan (Lulis, etc.) 1,719
Oceanians.
25 Polynesians of the Samoan Islands 1,726
414 Polynesians in general 1,730
32 Polynesians of Tahiti, Pomotu, Tubuai 1,733
202 Polynesians of the Marquesas Islands [Pg 584] 1,743
Europeans.
605 Dutch of the province of Overijssel (conscripts) 1,701
61 Cossacks of Kuban (Little Russians) 1,701
68 Letts of Esthonia 1,704
232,367 Swedes in general (soldiers) 1,705
1,107 Serbs of the Kingdom of Servia (conscripts) 1,709
763 Bosnian-Herzogovinians (soldiers) 1,710
6,194 English in general 1,712
1,489 Finns of Finland in general (682 of them soldiers) 1,713
325 Dalmatians 1,715
9,979 Swedes of the province of Helsinghe (soldiers) 1,716
8,585 Inhabitants of the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Ireland 1,719
106,446 Norwegians (soldiers) 1,720
346 Irish 1,725
100 Livonians 1,736
1,304 Scotch in general 1,746
134 Scotch of the north (Ayrshire, etc.) 1,782
75 Scotch agriculturists of Galloway 1,792

APPENDIX II.

CEPHALIC INDEX, 336 SERIES (see p. 75).

CEPHALIC INDEX, 336 SERIES (see p. 75).

NUMBER. ETHNIC GROUPS. CEPH. IND.
Living
Subjects.
Skulls. Living
Subjects.
Skulls.
DOLICHOCEPHALS, BELOW 77 (75).
Oceanians.
73 (S.) Islanders of Viti-Levu (Fiji) 67.2
204 Natives of the Caroline Archipelago 69.4
52 Natives of the smaller Fiji Islands 69.0
148 Papuans of Misore Island 70.2
24 (S.) Islanders of Mallicollo (New Hebrides) 70.4
71 New Caledonians 70.7
10 29 (S.) Islanders of Lifu (Loyalty Islands) 72.4 70.8
118 (S.) Natives of the Duke of York Islands (New Britain) 71.7
16 (S.) Natives of Engineer Island (Louisiade Archipelago) 71.9
27 82 (S.) Various Australians 74.2 71.2
10 Australians of Queensland 72.2
20 Natives of Ruck Island (Carolines) 72.8
51 Maoris of New Zealand 73.6
20 Natives of the Solomon Islands 76.3
24 Papuans of the Fly River (New Guinea) 74.2
25 Tasmanians 74.9
23 30 (S.) Natives of New Britain Archipelago 76.7 72.4
Asiatics.
95 Badagahs of the Nilgiris 71.8
40 Cashmerians 72.2
32 Kols of the N.W. Prov. and Oudh 72.4
979 Brahmans, Rajputs, and other high castes of the N.W. Prov. 72.6
685 Kolarians, N.W. Prov. 72.7
80 Sikhs of the Punjab [Pg 586] 72.7
1,616 Hindus of various castes (N.W. Prov. and Oudh) 72.8
103 Baltis 73.6
1,443 Dravido-Hindus (N.W.Pr.& Oudh) 73.8
45 Todas 74.1
25 Kotas of the Nilgiris 74.1
444 Punjabi (Hindus, Baluchis, etc.) 74.2
54 Malayalim of the Shevaroy Hills 74.3
27 Kulu-Lahuli 74.6
100 Malé or Assal (Dravid. of Bengal) 74.8
90 Bhumij of Chota Nagpur 75.0
55 43 Veddahs of Ceylon 75.1 71.5
58 Irulas of the E. slope of the Nilg. 75.1
15 Gypsies of Lycia 75.2
100 Kharvars (Dravidians of Chota Nagpur) 75.6
45 Dardi (India) 75.6
100 Kurmi of Chota Nagpur 75.7
695 Hindus of the Prov. of Behar 75.7
100 Mal-Paharia (Drav. of Beng.) 75.8
25 Urur-Kurubas of Mysore 75.8
100 Bhuiyas (Drav. of Beng.) 76.0
20 Dums of Chota Nagpur 76.0
100 Santals of Chota Nagpur 76.1
12 Alfurus of Ceram 74.3
37 Ainus of Saghalien 74.8
64 Tamils of Ceylon 76.3
80 Pathans (Afghans) of Punjab 76.5
33 Kanarese of Mysore 76.8
1,570 Bengalese 76.9
27 Islanders of Rotti (to the S. of Timur) 76.9
Africans.
14 Mushikongo and Bakongo 72.5
36 Bateke (Congo) 73.6
30 Toucouleurs 73,8
30 30 Jagga (Bantu of Kilimandjaro) 71.9
15 Hottentot-Orlans 74.3
37 Fulahs or Fulbés 74.3
35 Danakils of Tajura 74.5
14 Duala or Dwala of the Cameroons 75.1
27 Negro-Krus 75.1
62 13 Wolofs, Serer, and Leybus 75.2 69.8
29 10 Various Mandingans 75.5 78.8
13 Kakongo 75.6
47 Arabs of Algeria [Pg 587] 76.3
56 Kafirs (Ama-Zulus and others) 72.5
184 Betsimisaraka (Madagascar) 76.3
13 Kabyles of Palestro 76.4
27 Bashilanges of the Kasai 76.8
13 Ashantis 76.9
Americans.
12 Karayas (Amazon Basin) 73.0
76 Hurons 74.7
614 31 Eskimo of Greenland 76.8 72.4
152 do. E. America 71.3
16 do. W. America 74.8
10 33 (S.) Botocudos 76.8 73.9
Europeans.
417 Portuguese 74.3
500 Corsicans 76.6
502 Spaniards of Valencia 76.8
SUB-DOLICHOCEPH. 77–79.6 (75–77.6).
Asiatics.
12 Ladaki 77.0
17 Inhabitants of Nagar, Hunaza, and Yasin 77.0
20 Chinese of the North 77.0
75 Kurumbas (to the E. of the Nilgiris) 77.3
136 Tamils of the South of India and Ceylon 77.4
360 Mois of French Indo-China 77.5
17 Sikas (Central Floris) 77.7
11 92 Ainus of Yezo 77.8 76.5
23 Turkomans of the Transcaspian 77.9
18 Lio (Central Floris) 78.1
208 Aderbaijanis 78.1
168 Persians in general 78.4
11 Disfulis of Susa 78.4
332 Kurds 78.5
78 64 Japanese of all classes 78.5 80.2
68 White and Yellow Sakais (Malay P.) 78.7
30 Atoni of the west of Timur 78.8
142 Singhalese 78.8
20 Yuruks of Lycia 78.9
28 Black Sakais of Gunong Inas (Malay Peninsula) 79.5
29 Tates of the Transcaucasus [Pg 588] 79.0
106 Moormen of Ceylon 79.1
45 44 Sumbawa Islanders 79.1
37 Nias Islanders 77.6
106 37 Ostiaks 79.3 74.3
16 Tatar-Tchern (Altaians) 79.5
25 South Chinese of Lang-Choo 79.5
Africans.
50 M’Zabits of Algeria 77.3
56 Western Zandeh (Mandja, etc.) 77.9
14 Bushmen 75.9
139 Negroes of Fernand-Vaz 75.9
13 Hausas 77.3
Americans.
62 Half-caste Algonquians 76.2
315 Natives of Santa Barbara Archip. 76.9
14 Arawaks of the Rio Xingu (Mehinaku, etc.) 78.2
31 Indians of Arizona 78.6
419 Pimas of New Mexico 78.4
123 Ute Indians 79.5
28 Tupis of the Xingu (Kamayuras and Anetos) 79.1
114 37 Eskimo of Alaska 79.2 77.0
103 Indians of the Californian coast 77.3
135 Iroquoians 79.3
26 27 Yahgan Fuegians 79.5 76.8
570 42 Indians: Algonquians, Abenaki, Cree, etc. 79.8 77.4
261 136 Siouans 79.8 78.9
Oceanians.
163 Natives of Solomon Islands 77.6
12 (S.) Morioris of the Chatham Islands 76.2
30 Natives of the Marquesas Islands 76.4
22 (S.) 22 (S.) Natives of the Gilbert Islands (Kingsmill) 78.4 73.8
59 Various Polynesians 79.7
Europeans.
122 Catalans of the Balearic Islands 77.7
6,579 Sardinians 77.5
1,410 Castillians 78.5
574 Catalans of Spain 78.1
8,368 Spaniards in general [Pg 589] 78.2
48 Swedes of the central provinces 78.2 76.0
50 French Catalans of Roussillon 78.6
59 Chuvashes 77.2
32,526 Sicilians 79.0
325 Spanish Basques 79.3
129 18 Cheremisses 79.2 76.8
362 Belgian Flemings 79.5
MESOCEPHALS, 79.7–81.9 (77.7–79.9).
Americans.
10 Bakairis of Brazil 79.0
84 10 Pawnee Indians 80.0 78.8
16 Yakis 79.8
257 38 Crow and Cheyenne Indians 80.5 79.8
28 Southern Caribs of the Rio Xingu 79.8
20 Bororos of the Amazon basin 81.2
15 Nahuquas of Brazil 80.6
30 Caribs of the four Guianas 80.9
225 99 (S.) Omahas 81.8 80.5
Asiatics.
130 Tenggerese of the east of Java 79.7
60 Baluchis of Baluchistan 80.0
125 Chinese in general 78.3
36 Nicobarese 80.4
13 Dungans of Kuldja 80.5
58 Tipperahs of Chittagong 80.5
20 Achinese 80.5
58 Battas of Lake Toba 80.6
22 Jakuns of Johor 80.9
61 84 (S.) Southern Chinese (princ. of Canton) 81.2 78.2
19 24 Andamanese 81.4 81.6
90 Magh or Arakanese of Chittagong 81.8
11 Teleuts or Telenghits (Siberia) 81.8
14 Eskimo of Asia 79.0
Europeans.
35 Gypsies of Hungary 79.9
37 Tatars of the Crimea 80.0
55 Jews of Bosnia 80.1
171 French of the dep. du Nord 80.4
60 Letts of the Baltic provinces 80.5
1,000 Limousins and Perigourdins 80.7
463 Spaniards of the Cantabrian region 80.3
30 (S.) 47 (S.) Dutch of the prov. of Gröningen [Pg 590] 81.0 77.6
1,000 Normans (Calvados, Seine-Inf., etc.) 81.3
87 Dutch of the province of Friesland 78.1
206 Inhabitants of the prov. of Prussia 79.2
96 (S.) Cherkess (Abkhazians, Chapsug, etc.) 79.4
159 Franconians of N.W. of Bavaria 79.8
59,165 Italians of the South (Abruzzi, Puglie, etc.) 81.2
54 Magyar-Szeklers 81.4
67 Georgian-Mingrelians, and Imers 81.4
91 Provençals 81.7
59 Meshtcheriaks 81.8
Oceanians.
14 Islanders of Fakaofu (Takelau Arch.) 80.6
12 Natives of New Ireland 81.0
SUB-BRACHYCEPHALS, 82–85.2 (80–83.2).
Asiatics and Eurasians.
22 Parsees of Bombay 82.0
20 Kouïs of Cambodia 82.0
97 (S.) 51 (S.) Kalmuks of the Volga 82.1 81.4
11 14 Coreans 82.6 81.6
25 Man-Tien of Kaobang (Tong King) 82.5
182 Annamese in general 82.8
49 Malays of Sumatra and Penang 82.8
231 Burmese 83.1
139 Yakuts 83.1
14 Tsiams of French Indo-China 83.2
18 (S.) Tunguse Reindeer-holders 81.2
21 Solorese (E. of Flores and Solor) 83.4
56 Laotians of Lower Laos 83.6
30 Cambodians 83.6
76 Annamese of Tong King 83.8
152 (S.) 15 (S.) Samoyeds 83.8 82.4
13 13 Takhtadji of Lycia 84.2
26 Ansariehs of Antioch 84.2
100 Chakama (Arakan-Bengali mongrels) 84.3
197 14 Kalmuks of Kuldja and Tarbagat 84.5 83.3
12 30 (S.) Bugis of Mangkassar 84.6 80.6
12 Islanders of Madura (N. of Java) 82.6
66 88 (S.) Javanese 84.6 83.0
18 Negrito Aetas (Philippines) [Pg 591] 84.7
107 27 Uzbegs of Russian Turkestan 84.8
74 Tajiks 84.8
Americans.
60 Arawaks of Dutch Guiana 82.6
63 (S.) Haidas 82.7
77 Maricopas (Yuma Indians) 82.9
129 Zuñi Indians 83.0
16 Indians of S. Oregon 84.0 82.2
22 Navajos (deformed) 84.2
26 (S.) Bilculas 84.5
74 Comanches 84.6
16 Yucatecs of Mexico 84.7
193 Moquis or Mokis 84.9
18 Patagonians 85.2
Africans.
20 Saras of Shari (Basin of Lake Chad) 82.4
14 Hovas of Madagascar 84.0
Oceanians.
10 Islanders of Fanafuti (Ellice group) 82.4
23 19 Islanders of Tonga Arch. 82.6 84.2
177 Hawaiians of Sandwich Islands 80.4
23 13 (S.) Samoans 83.7 77.5
43 52 (S.) Polynesians of Tahiti, Marquesas, Pomotu, and Tubuai Islands 85.1 76.0
Europeans.
126 Votiaks 82.0
100 Permiaks 82.2
36 Zyrians 82.2
199 Belgian Wallons 82.2
30,970 Italians of Liguria and Tuscany 82.3
290 Bielorousses or White Russians 82.4
775 Alsatians of Lower Alsace 82.5
294 Italians in general 82.7
261 Ossets 82.6
3,000 Bretons (France) 82.7
30 Tatars of Kassimov 82.8
447 421 (S.) Great Russians of the Central and N. provinces 82.9 80.7
220 French Basques [Pg 592] 83.0
98 Wurtembergers 83.1
168 Mordvinians 83.3
416 Jews of Galicia and Western Russia 83.4
1,355 Ruthenians of the Plain (Galicia) 83.4
90 Georgian-Gruzins 83.5
17 Veps or Chud of Olonetsk 83.5
187 Ruthenians of the Mountains (Galicia) 83.6
15,914 French in general 83.6
170 Tatars of the Mountains (Caucasus) 83.6
165 Cherkess-Kabards 83.7
20 Russian Lapps 83.8
19 Georgian-Svanes 83.9
6,800 Inhabitants of Baden 84.1
53,020 Italians (Lomb., Umbr., March.) 84.1
226 40 (S.) Magyars in general 84.5 82.3
78 Eastern Chechen 84.5
200 Little Russians of Kiev 84.6
52 Lesghi-Didos 84.6
44 Kumyks of the Caucasus 84.7
52,410 Italians of Venetia-Emilia 85.1
134 Swiss of Untervalden 83.8
53 Jews of Akhaltsikh (Caucasus) 85.2
BRACHYCEPHALS, 85.3–86.9 (83.3–84.9).
Asiatics.
56 Galchas (Russian Turkestan) 85.5
16 Tunguse-Orochons 83.4
17 17 Siamese 83.0
341 Armenians in general 85.6
13 Burmese of Arakan and Talaing 83.7
21 18 Sundanese (West Java) 86.3 85.5
20 (S.) 35 (S.) Giliaks 86.3 83.4
16 (S.) Bicols of Luzon (Philippines) 86.6
333 Taranchi of Russian and Eastern Turkestan 86.6
270 Armenians of Transcaucasia 85.6
Europeans.
1000 (S.) Bavarians of old Bavaria 83.2
32,790 Piedmontese 85.9
16 Tatar Nogai of the Caucasus 85.8
130 Lesghi-Darghis of the Caucasus [Pg 593] 86.2
200 Rumanians of Bukovina 86.3
25 Lesghi-Udes 86.6
27 Georgian Lazes 86.8
235 Savoyards 86.9
Oceanians and Americans.
20 20 (S.) Islanders of Tahiti 85.5 76.6
36 Aleuts 84.8
100 Araucans of Argentine Republic 83.9
HYPER-BRACHYCEPHALS, 87 (85)
AND ABOVE.
Europeans.
65 (S.) Romanches of Switzerland 85.0
30 Dalmatians 87.0
19 Jews of Daghestan (Mountaineers) 87.0
105 (S.) 41 (S.) Scandinavian Lapps 87.4 85.0
69 Magyars of Rumania 87.8
140 French (Haute-Loire, Lozère, Cantal) 87.4
Asiatics.
384 Kirghiz-Kasaks and Karakirghiz 87.2
33 Aissors of Transcaucasia and Urmia 88.7

APPENDIX III.

NASAL INDEX OF LIVING SUBJECTS, 71 SERIES (see p. 79).

NASAL INDEX OF LIVING SUBJECTS, 71 SERIES (see p. 79).

Number
of
Subjects.
ETHNIC GROUPS. Nasal
Index.
Observers.
Leptorhinians (less than 70).
110 Armenians 60.4 Pantiukhof
62 Georgian Imers 60.8 Pan., Chantre, Erckert
1,969 Brahmans, Rajputs and other high castes,
N.W. province and Oudh
63.0 Crooke, Drake-Brocken
100 French (fair type, dolicho.) 63.0 Collignon
41 Georgian Mingrelians 63.1 Pan., Chantre, Erckert
49 Georgian Gruzins 64.5 Pan., Chantre, Erckert
50 Lorraines 64.6 Collignon
30 French Catalans (Eastern Pyr.) 65.1  „
20 Anglo-Scotch 65.1 Beddoe
23 Arabs of Tunis 65.2 Collignon
50 French dolichoceph. of the South 65.7  „
184 Various Kabyles 66.5 Prengruber
160 French of Normandy 66.5 Collignon
88 Sardinians 66.6 Gilbert d’Hercourt
27 Galchas of Turkestan 66.8 Ujfalvy
237 Ossets 66.8 Ghiltchen., Ch., Erck.
168 Mordvinians 66.9 Maïnof
21 English 67.0 Beddoe
1,443 Dravido-Hindus, N.W. Prov. 67.0 ——
1,000 French in general 67.3 Collignon
70 Bretons 67.5  „
80 Pathans of the Punjab 68.4 Risley
80 Sikhs 68.8  „
98 Parisians 69.1 Collignon
60 Baluchis of Baluchistan 69.4 Risley
120 Tunisians (2nd Berber race) 69.8 Collignon [Pg 595]
Mesorhinians (70–84.9).
10 Scotch 70.0 Beddoe
1,334 Tunisians in general 70.2 Collignon
444 Punjabis 70.2 Risley
865 Dravidians(Kharvars, Korwas, Cheros, Khunjas)
of N.W. Prov.
71.0 Crooke, Drake-Brock.
20 Baltis of Cashmere 71.4 Ujfalvy
50 Berbers (brachycephalic race) 72.5 Collignon
29 Singhalese 74.9 Deschamps, Manouv.
36 Kalmuks of the Volga 74.7 Deniker, Erck., Chantre
40 Kara-Kirghiz of Semiriechie 74.9 Seeland
27 Todas 74.9 Thurston
40 Badagas of Nilgiris 75.6  „
23 Siouans 75.9 Denik., Laloy, Manouv.
33 Kanarese of Mysore 76.8 Thurston
40 Tamil-Brahmans of Madras 77.2  „
22 Kotas of the Nilgiri Hills 79.2  „
36 Malayalim of the Chevaroy Hills 74.4  „
20 Dums of Chota Nagpur 79.1 Risley
695 Hindus of Behar 80.0  „
1,616 Hindus of the N.W. Provs. and Oudh 80.9  „
17 Rhodias of Ceylon (both sexes) 81.3 Deschamps
32 Kols of the N.W. Provinces and Oudh 82.2 Risley and Oude
100 Kurmis of Chota Nagpur 82.6  „
90 Maghs or Arakanese of Chittagong 82.7  „
30 Annamese of Cochin-China 83.3 Deniker, Laloy
34 Irulas of the Nilgiris 83.4 Thurston
100 Chakamas (Arakanese-Bengalis) 85.4 Risley
23 Zuñis 84.9 Ten Kate
Platyrhinians (85–99.9).
23 Annamese of Tong King 86.2 Deniker, Laloy
90 Bhumij of Chota Nagpur 86.5 Risley
27 Bashilanges 87.0 Maistre
21 Bubangis 87.2  „
100 Santals of Chota Nagpur 88.8 Risley
15 Kurumbas of Wynaad 88.8 Thurston [Pg 596]
100 Munda-Kols of Chota Nagpur 89.0 Risley
13 Polynesians 89.8 After Collignon
11 New Caledonians and New Hebridians 93.8 Collignon
17 Fulahs or Fulbés 95.3 Deniker, Collignon
44 Negroes of Tunis 96.3 Collignon
21 Toucouleurs 99.9 Deniker
Ultraplatyrhinians (over 100).
23 Leybus and Serers 100.1 Deniker, Collignon
52 Negroes of Zambesi 101.5 After Collignon
21 Mandingans and Bambaras 101.6 Deniker, Collignon
13 Ashantis 107.5 Deniker
11 Australians 107.6 After Collignon
14 Angolese Negroes (both sexes) 107.9 Deniker

INDEX OF AUTHORS.

A B C D E F G H I J K L M
N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

Abbott, 511

Abbott, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Adam, L., 552

Adam, L., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Adrianof, 363

Adrianof, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Amat, 432

Amat, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Ambialet, 177

Ambialet, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Ameghino, 512

Ameghino, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Ammon, 74, 318

Ammon, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Anderson, G., 307

Anderson, G., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Anderson, J., 397

Anderson, J., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Andree, R., 109, 128, 198, 201, 206, 227, 250, 255, 274, 341, 425, 428

Andree, R., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_5__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_6__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_7__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_8__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_9__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_10__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_11__

Anuchin, 262, 277, 373

Anuchin, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__

Aranzadi, 348

Aranzadi, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Aubin, 140

Aubin, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Aymonier, 393, 394, 399, 400, 402

Aymonier, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__

Baber, C., 400

Baber, C., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Bachofen, 233

Bachofen, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Baden-Powell, 247

Baden-Powell, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Baelz, 51, 62, 64, 107

Baelz, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__

Bahnson, 520

Bahnson, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Bain, 294

Bain, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Balfour, H., 262, 272

Balfour, H., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Ball, 409

Ball, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Bancroft, H. H., 249, 521

Bancroft, H. H., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Bandelier, 536

Bandelier, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Barcena, 292

Barcena, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Bartels, Max, 95, 227, 230

Bartels, Max, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__

Barth, 446

Barth, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Barthel, 429

Barthel, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Bastian, A., 460

Bastian, A., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Batchelor, 373

Batchelor, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Bates, H., 159

Bates, H., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Beddoe, 50, 314, 348

Beddoe, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__

Bell, 23

Bell, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Béranger-Féraud, 442, 447, 450

Béranger-Féraud, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__

Bergaigne, 394

Bergaigne, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Bergemann, 146

Bergemann, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Bernard, A., 497, 505

Bernard, A., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Berthelot, S., 431

Berthelot, S., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Bertholon, 433

Bertholon, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Bertillon, A., 80

Bertillon, A., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Bertin, S., 435

Bertin, S., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Bertrand, 321

Bertrand, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Betz, 134

Betz, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Biart, 537

Biart, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Biddulph, 415

Biddulph, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Billet, 400, 401

Billet, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Binger, 447, 449, 451

Binger, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__

Bischoff, 18, 98

Bischoff, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Blanchard, 97

Blanchard, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Blandford, 362

Blandford, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Blumentritt, 490

Blumentritt, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Boas, 520, 531

Boas, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Boggiani, 573

Boggiani, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Bonaparte, Prince Roland, 351

Bonaparte, Prince Roland, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Bordier, 121

Bordier, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Borlase, W., 312

Borlase, W., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Bouchereau, 469

Bouchereau, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Boulart, 15, 18, 94

Boulart, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__

Boule, M., 301, 309, 511

Boule, M., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__

Bourne, 400

Bourne, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Bowditch, 106

Bowditch, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Boyd, 18

Boy, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Bremer, 335, 340

Bremer, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Breul, 46

Breul, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Brigham, 183

Brigham, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Brinton, 122, 490, 514, 517, 518, 521, 527, 535, 536, 544, 547

Brinton, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_5__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_6__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_7__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_8__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_9__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_10__

Broca, 16, 48, 55, 57, 61, 62, 64, 72, 73, 83, 85, 98, 177, 348

Broca, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_5__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_6__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_7__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_8__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_9__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_10__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_11__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_12__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_13__

Bruhl, 536

Bruhl, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Buch, 263

Book, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Buchner, M., 134

Buchner, M., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Bunge, 145

Bunge, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Burrows, 454

Burrows, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Buschmann, 534

Buschmann, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Butler, J., 396

Butler, J., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

[Pg 598]

Buttikofer, 451

Buttikofer, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Calori, 76, 100

Calori, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Campbell, J. M., 115

Campbell, J. M., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Capart, 427

Capart, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Capus, 415

Capus, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Cardi, Comte de, 453

Cardi, Count of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Cardoso, 413

Cardoso, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Carol, J., 469

Carol, J., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Carr, 514

Carr, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Cartailhac, 300, 309, 314, 362, 364

Cartailhac, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__

Castelnau, 564

Castelnau, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Castren, 366

Castren, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Catat, 469, 549

Catat, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Catlin, 521

Catlin, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Cauvin, 477

Cauvin, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Cavendish, A., 387

Cavendish, A., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Chalmers, 493, 494

Chalmers, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Chamberlain, B., 373, 391

Chamberlain, B., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Chantre, 355, 423

Chanter, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Chapman, R., 475

Chapman, R., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Chastaing, 387

Chastaing, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Chauvet, 362

Chauvet, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Christian, F., 475

Christian, F., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Chudzinsky, 95

Chudzinski, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Clercq, De, 420

Clercq, De, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Clozel, 458

Clozel, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Codrington, 497

Codrington, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Colini, 561

Colini, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Collignon, R., 5, 79, 88, 334, 348, 427, 433, 435, 450, 470

Collignon, R., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_5__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_6__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_7__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_8__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_9__

Colocci, 425

Colocci, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Colquhoun, 381, 400

Colquhoun, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Comte, P., 441

Comte, P., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Cooper, 273

Cooper, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Couillault, 427

Couillault, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Courant, 387

Current, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Crampel, 442, 454

Crampel, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Crooke, W., 231, 404, 408, 413

Crooke, W., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__

Cunningham, D., 15, 84

Cunningham, D., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Curr, 223, 477

Curr, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Cushing, 516, 534

Cushing, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Cuvier, 5, 69

Cuvier, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Dall, 520, 531

Dall, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Dalton, 380, 408, 409

Dalton, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__

D’Amelineau, 426

D’Amelineau, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Danielli, 486

Danielli, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Danilevski, 101

Danilevski, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Darwin, 6, 7, 23, 110, 115, 118, 146

Darwin, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_5__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_6__

David, A., 362

David, A., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Davidson, C., 172

Davidson, C., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Davy, 117

Davy, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Dawkins, Boyd, 307

Dawkins, Boyd, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Deblenne, 400

Deblenne, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Delafosse, 451

Delafosse, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Delage, Y., 6

Delage, Y., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Delisle, 177

Delisle, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

D’Enjoy, 255

Enjoy, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Deniker, 15, 18, 24, 64, 78, 94, 108, 109, 214, 215, 220, 223, 231, 242, 284, 292, 325, 358, 367, 373, 375, 377, 378, 399, 425, 435, 436, 450, 453, 454, 458, 468, 470, 486, 493, 494, 500, 512, 533, 555, 576

Deniker, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_5__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_6__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_7__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_8__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_9__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_10__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_11__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_12__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_13__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_14__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_15__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_16__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_17__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_18__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_19__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_20__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_21__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_22__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_23__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_24__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_25__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_26__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_27__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_28__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_29__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_30__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_31__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_32__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_33__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_34__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_35__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_36__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_37__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_38__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_39__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_40__

Deschamps, 408, 418

Deschamps, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Desgodins, 380

Desgodins, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Diguet, 535

Diguet, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Dodd, 391

Dodd, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Donaldson, H. H., 104

Donaldson, H. H., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Dorsey, 530

Dorsey, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Dourisboure, 392

Dourisboure, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Dubois, E., 18, 361

Dubois, E., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Duchenne, 93

Duchenne, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Duerden, 557

Duerden, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Duval, Mathias, 110

Duval, Mathias, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Duveyrier, 434

Duveyrier, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Dybowski, 442, 454, 458

Dybowski, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__

Ehrenreich, 73, 292, 517, 555

Ehrenreich, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__

Elisiéef, 386

Elisiéef, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Ellis, Sir A. B., 451, 453

Ellis, Sir A. B., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Ellis, A. J., 340

Ellis, A. J., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Ellis, Havelock, 51, 55, 56, 348

Ellis, Havelock, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__

Ellis, W., 500

Ellis, W., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Emin Bey, 454

Emin Bey, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Erckert, 353

Erckert, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Erman, 521

Erman, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Etheridge, 475

Etheridge, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Evans, A. J., 142, 315

Evans, A. J., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Evans, Sir J., 304

Evans, Sir J., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Faidherbe, 435, 449

Faidherbe, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Fawcett, Miss, 75

Fawcett, Miss, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Finsch, 493, 497

Finsch, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Fison, 232, 233, 234

Fison, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__

Flechsig, 103

Flechsig, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Flower, Sir W. H., 13, 21, 61, 62, 64, 283, 454, 497

Flower, Sir W. H., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_5__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_6__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_7__

Forsyth, 416

Forsyth, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Fournereau, 399

Fournereau, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Fox, 451

Fox, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Frazer, J. G., 248

Frazer, J. G., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Fritsch, 465, 467

Fritsch, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Frobenius, 446, 463

Frobenius, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Fuse, 262

Fuse, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

[Pg 599]

Gaches-Sarraute, Mme., 176

Gaches-Sarraute, Mrs., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Gaidoz, 336

Gaidoz, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Garnier, F., 381, 382

Garnier, F., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Garson, 72, 84, 85, 99, 351

Garson, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__

Gatschet, 517, 527

Gatschet, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Gautier, T., 145

Gautier, T., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Geer, G. de, 307

Geer, G. de, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Geikie, J., 301, 511

Geikie, J., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Gibbs, 530

Gibbs, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Giglioli, 280

Giglioli, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Gilchenko, 100

Gilchenko, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Gillen, F., 477, 478

Gillen, F., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Giraud-Teulon, 230

Giraud-Teulon, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Glaumont, 170

Glaumont, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Godden, Miss, 396

Godden, Miss, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Godron, 312

Godron, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Goebel, 145

Goebel, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Gomme, G. L., 215, 247

Gomme, G. L., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Gonner, 74

Goner, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Gooch, W., 427

Gooch, W., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Gosse, L. A., 177

Gosse, L. A., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Gottsche, 387

Gottsche, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Gould, 50, 508

Gould, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Grandidier, 469

Grandidier, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Groos, 197

Groos, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Gros, 500

Gros, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Grosse, E., 124, 202, 209, 212

Grosse, E., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__

Guiral, 458

Guiral, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Guppy, 497

Guppy, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Haddon, A. C., 202, 204, 493, 494, 497, 557

Haddon, A. C., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_5__

Haeckel, 284

Haeckel, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Hagen, 486, 497

Hagen, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Hahn, 192, 195

Hahn, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Hale, H., 135, 514, 527, 531

Hale, H., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__

Hamada, 107

Hamada, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Hamy, 62, 91, 135, 313, 454, 467, 486, 495, 511, 535, 536, 537, 550, 561

Hamy, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_5__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_6__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_7__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_8__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_9__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_10__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_11__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_12__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_13__

Hanoteau, 432

Hanoteau, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Harmand, 135, 392, 393, 402

Harmand, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__

Hartmann, 431, 435, 436

Hartmann, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__

Haxthausen, 236

Haxthausen, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Hedley, 500

Hedley, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Hellwald, 146, 159, 255

Hellwald, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__

Henning, 84

Henning, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Herrera, 511

Herrera, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Hervé, 96, 310, 313

Hervé, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__

Herzenstein, 111

Herzenstein, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Hettner, 120

Hettner, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Hiekisch, 374

Hiekisch, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Hirt, 320

Hirt, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Hoernes, 316

Hoernes, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Holm, G., 520

Holm, G., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Holm, S., 226

Holm, S., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Holmes, 184, 509, 511

Holmes, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__

Holub, 465

Holub, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Hösel, 163

Hösel, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Hosie, 400

Hosie, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Hough, 150, 269

Hough, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Houssay, 422

Houssay, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Houzé, 83, 332

Houzé, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Hovelacque, 96, 131

Hovelacque, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Hovorka, 83

Hovorka, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Howitt, A. W., 232, 233

Howitt, A. W., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Hoyer, 83

Hoyer, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Hull, H., 482

Hull, H., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Humboldt, A. von, 507, 517

Humboldt, A. von, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Hunt, 497

Hunting, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Huxley, 119, 283

Huxley, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Hyades, 64, 108, 109, 215, 220, 223, 231, 292, 512, 576

Hyades, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_5__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_6__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_7__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_8__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_9__

Ihering, 513

Ihering, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Imbault-Huart, 391

Imbault-Huart, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Im Thurn, E., 552

Im Thurn, E., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Ino, 391

Ino, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Inostrantsev, 314

Inostrantsev, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Inuzuka, 362

Inuzuka, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Iokhelson, 370

Iokhelson, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Ivanof, 64

Ivanof, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Ivanovsky, 92, 108, 230, 378

Ivanovsky, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__

Jackson, 521

Jackson, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Jacobs, J., 424

Jacobs, J., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Jacquard, 69

Jacquard, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Jacques, V., 458, 461

Jacques, V., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

James, H., 374

James, H., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Jellinghaus, 408

Jellinghaus, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Johansson, 74

Johansson, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Johnston, Sir H. H., 465

Johnston, Sir H.H., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Jolly, A., 469

Jolly, A., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Jubainville, D’Arbois de, 317, 321

Jubainville, D’Arbois de, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Junghuhn, 486

Junghuhn, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Junker, W., 440, 441, 454

Junker, W., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__

Junod, 465

Junod, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Karr, Seton, 427

Karr, Seton, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Keane, A., 132, 280, 351

Keane, A., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__

Kemp, D., 452

Kemp, D., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Key, Axel, 106

Key, Axel, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Kharouzin, 166, 376

Kharouzin, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Kidd, 23

Kidd, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Kingsley, Miss M., 453

Kingsley, Miss M., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

[Pg 600]

Kochs, 116

Koch brothers, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Köganei, 64

Köganei, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Kohlbrugge, 14, 483, 490

Kohlbrugge, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__

Koike, 386

Koike, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Koslowsky, 566

Koslowsky, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Kotelmann, 111

Kotelmann, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Kovalewsky, 247, 249

Kovalewsky, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Krause, 226, 254, 531

Krause, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__

Kropf, 465

Kropf, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Kubary, 271, 505

Kubary, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Kuhn, E., 394

Kuhn, E., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Kulischer, 114

Kulischer, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Kuznetsof, 361

Kuznetsof, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Labarth, 400

Labarth, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Lacerda, 513

Lacerda, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Lajard, 134

Lajard, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Laloy, 399, 450, 453, 454, 458, 486

Laloy, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_5__

Landor, A. H. S., 373

Landor, A. H. S., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Lang, A., 223

Lang, A., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Lang, L., 206

Lang, L., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Langle, Fleuriot de, 451

Langle, Fleuriot de, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Lapicque, 107, 397, 485

Lapicque, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__

Lapouge, 318

Lapouge, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Lartschneider, 95

Lartschneider, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Last, 469

Last, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Laveleye, 249

Laveleye, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Leclerc, 469

Leclerc, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Le Double, 96

Le Double, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Leitner, 413

Leitner, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Lenz, O., 454

Lenz, O., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Leroy-Beaulieu, 236

Leroy-Beaulieu, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Letourneau, 159, 169, 231, 252, 271

Letourneau, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__

Letourneux, 431

Letourneux, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Lister, 500

Lister, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Livon, 85

Livon, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Lloyd, 527

Lloyd, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Lubboch, Sir J., 231, 234

Lubboch, Sir J., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Lumholtz, 477, 535, 536

Lumholtz, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__

Luschan, F. von, 261, 423, 440, 451, 467, 497

Luschan, F. von, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_5__

Lydekker, 13

Lydekker, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Macalister, 95

Macalister, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

MacCauley, 528

MacCauley, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Macdonald, 465

Macdonald, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Macgregor, 493

Macgregor, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Madrolle, 449

Madrolle, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Maine, Sir H. S., 236, 247

Maine, Sir H. S., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Maïnof, 351

Maïnof, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Maistre, 442, 446

Maistre, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Malief, 64

Malief, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Mallery, G., 129, 138

Mallery, G., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Man, 397

Man, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Manolescu, 339

Manolescu, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Manouvrier, 55, 56, 87, 90, 99, 100, 361, 555

Manouver, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_5__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_6__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_7__

Mantegazza, 64, 73, 110, 158, 351

Mantegazza, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__

Margaritof, 363

Margaritof, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Marillier, 220

Marillier, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Markham, Sir Clements, 118

Markham, Sir Clements, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Markuse, 500

Markuse, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Marri, 84

Marry, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Marshall, 411

Marshall, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Martin, 87

Martin, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Martins, 274

Martins, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Martonne, E. de, 446

Martonne, E. de, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Mason, Mrs., 395

Mason, Mrs., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Mason, Otis, 153, 154, 182, 184, 191, 225, 261, 262, 270, 275, 278, 284

Mason, Otis, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_5__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_6__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_7__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_8__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_9__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_10__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_11__

Maspero, 278, 420

Maspero, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Mathews, R., 242

Mathews, R., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Maurel, 109, 394

Maurel, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

McLennan, J. F., 233

McLennan, J. F., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Medlicot, 362

Medlicot, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Meinecke, 500

Meinecke, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Menant, D., 420

Menant, D., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Mensé, 458

Mensé, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Metchnikof, 77

Metchnikov, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Metzger, 122

Metzger, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Meyer, A. R., 483

Meyer, A. R., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Meyer, E. H., 341

Meyer, E. H., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Middendorf, 547

Middendorf, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Milne, 363

Milne, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Mindeleff, 516

Mindeleff, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Möckler, 421

Möckler, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Modigliani, 216, 486

Modigliani, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Mohnike, 391

Mohnike, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Moloney, 453

Moloney, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Monnier, 228

Monnier, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Montano, 64, 483, 486

Montano, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__

Montefiore, 351

Montefiore, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Monteil, 446

Monteil, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Montelius, 314, 315

Montelius, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Mooney, 527, 530

Mooney, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Morel, 399

Morel, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Moreno, 513

Moreno, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Morgan, De, 426, 429

Morgan, De, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Morgan, Lewis, 124, 234, 516

Morgan, Lewis, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__

Morgen, 458

Tomorrow, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Morse, E., 264

Morse, E., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Mortillet, A. de, 304

Mortillet, A. de, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Mortillet, G. de, 184, 300, 304, 306, 309

Mortillet, G. de, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__

[Pg 601]

Moser, 278

Moser, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Moura, 399

Moura, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Much, 315

Much, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Müller, F., 114, 131, 283

Müller, F., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__

Müller, Max, 317

Müller, Max, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Munro, H. R., 16

Munro, H. R., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Nachtigal, 444, 445, 446

Nachtigal, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__

Nadaillac, 511

Nadaillac, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Naegeli, 5

Naegeli, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Nansen, 520

Nansen, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Nehring, 309

Nehring, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Neis, 169, 392

Neis, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Niblack, 531

Niblack, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Niederle, 344

Niederle, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Nillsson, 272

Nillsson, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Noetling, 359

Noetling, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Nordeck, C. de, 449

Nordeck, C. de, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Nordenskiold, 367, 516

Nordenskiold, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

O’Brien, H. O., 122

O’Brien, H. O., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Oliver, E., 420

Oliver, E., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Oppert, 411

Oppert, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Orozco y Berra, 535

Orozco and Berra, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Pagliani, 106

Pagliani, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Pallas, 115, 378

Pallas, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Pantiukhof, 116, 353, 358, 422

Pantiukhof, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__

Papillault, 169

Papillault, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Parker, L., 478

Parker, L., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Paspati, 425

Paspati, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Paulitschke, 436, 438

Paulitschke, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Peacock, 98

Peacock, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Peal, S., 364, 396

Peal, S., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Pearson, Karl, 75

Pearson, Karl, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Peary, 520

Peary, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Peixoto, 513

Peixoto, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Penka, 318

Penka, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Petersen, 423

Petersen, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Petitot, 520

Petitot, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Petrie, Flinders, 427, 428, 435

Petrie, Flinders, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__

Phillips, 262

Phillips, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Piette, 137, 308

Piette, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Pinabel, 392

Pinabel, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Pinart, 546

Pinart, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Pinto, Serpa, 461

Pinto, Serpa, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Pleyte, 475, 488

Pleyte, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Ploss, 97, 112, 240, 241

Ploss, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__

Poesche, 318

Poesche, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Pogge, 461

Pogge, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Pogio, 387

Pogio, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Poole, S., 435

Poole, S., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Porcher, 399

Porcher, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Post, 230, 250, 252

Post, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__

Potanin, 363

Potanin, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Powell, 254, 519, 521, 524

Powell, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__

Pozdniéef, 378

Pozdniéef, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Prjevalsky, 380, 381

Prjevalsky, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Pruner-Bey, 435

Pruner-Bey, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Pullé, 337

Pullé, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Pypine, 344

Pypine, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Quatrefages, De, 62, 214, 284, 313, 397, 454, 483, 505, 512

Quatrefages, De, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_5__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_6__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_7__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_8__

Quedenfeld, 432

Quedenfeld, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Quevedo, L., 572

Quevedo, L., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Quibell, 427

Quibell, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Rabentisch, 55

Rabentisch, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Radde, 116

Radde, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Radlof, 363

Radlof, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Ramon y Cajal, 104

Ramon y Cajal, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Ranke, J., 15, 341

Ranke, J., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Ranke, K. E., 517

Ranke, K. E., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Rasch, 122

Rasch, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Ratzel, 125

Ratzel, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Ray, 494, 497

Ray, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Read, 72

Read, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Reclus, Elie, 411, 416

Reclus, Elie, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Reclus, Elisée, 118, 383, 460, 463

Reclus, Elisée, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__

Regalia, 77

Regalia, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Regibus, 101

Regibus, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Reid, 396

Reid, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Rein, J. J., 391

Rein, J. J., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Reinach, Salomon, 300, 309, 310, 315, 317, 321, 427

Reinach, Salomon, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_5__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_6__

Retzius, 348, 516

Retzius, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Reuleaux, 187

Reuleaux, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Révoil, 438

Révoil, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Rey, P., 563

Rey, P., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Richthofen, 385

Richthofen, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Rigges, 530

Rigges, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Rink, 520

Rink, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Ripley, 325

Ripley, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Risley, 381, 404, 408, 413

Risley, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__

Rivett-Carnac, 362

Rivett-Carnac, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Rockhill, 380

Rockhill, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Roepstorff, 397

Roepstorff, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Rojdestvensky, 92

Rojdestvensky, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Rosenberg, 119

Rosenberg, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Rosenstadt, 113

Rosenstadt, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Rohlfs, 434

Rohlfs, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Romanes, 5

Romani, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Roth, Ling, 255, 482, 490

Roth, Ling, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__

Roth, W. E., 477

Roth, W. E., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

[Pg 602]

Roux, 382

Roux, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Royce, C., 527

Royce, C., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Ruskikh, 116

Russians, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Sachier, 336

Sachier, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Saint-Hilaire, J. G., 282

Saint-Hilaire, J. G., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Santelli, 438

Santelli, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Sarasin, 62, 64, 418, 493

Sarasin, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__

Sarzec, E. de, 420

Sarzec, E. de, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Sasaki, 107

Sasaki, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Schadenberg, 483

Schadenberg, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Schellong, 494

Schellong, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Schinz, 228, 456, 467

Schinz, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__

Schlegel, 149

Schlegel, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Schlichter, 454

Schlichter, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Schmelz, 226, 254

Schmelz, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Schmidt, E., 10, 106, 290, 408, 416, 435, 514

Schmidt, E., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_5__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_6__

Schrader, 366, 373, 374

Schrader, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__

Schramm, 225

Schramm, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Schrenck, 366, 373, 374

Schrenck, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__

Schwalbe, 83, 361

Schwalbe, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Schweinfurth, 429, 441, 446, 454

Schweinfurth, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__

Seler, 547

Seler, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Sénart, 404

Sénart, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Sergi, 73, 330, 435, 438

Sergi, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__

Serurrier, 450

Serurrier, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Shortt, 236, 411

Shortt, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Shevyref, 23

Shevyref, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Shrubsall, 467

Shrubsall, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Sibree, 469

Sibree, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Siret, H. & J., 314

Siret, H. & J., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Sittig, 505

Sitting, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Smeaton, 395

Smeaton, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Smirnov, 351

Smirnov, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Smith, E., 248

Smith, E., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Smith, Donaldson, 454

Smith, Donaldson, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Smith, Worthington, 312

Smith, Worthington, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Smith, W. T., 140, 475

Smith, W. T., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Smyth, Brough, 223, 226, 475

Smyth, Brough, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__

Sören Hansen, 51, 512, 520

Sören Hansen, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__

Sommier, 351

Sofa bed, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Spalikowski, 74

Spalikowski, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Spassovitch, 344

Spassovitch, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Spencer, Baldwin, 477, 478

Spencer, Baldwin, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Stainier, 427, 428

Stainier, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Stanley, H. M., 454

Stanley, H. M., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Staudinger, 446

Staudinger, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Stearns, 274

Stearns, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Steinen, K. von den, 170, 204

Steinen, K. von den, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Steinmetz, 148, 220

Steinmetz, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Stevenson, J., 526

Stevenson, J., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Stieda, 73

Stieda, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Stirling, E., 477

Stirling, E., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Stoddard, 552

Stoddard, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Stolpe, H., 202

Stolpe, H., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Strabo, 436

Strabo, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Studer, 195

Studer, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Stuhlmann, 440, 446, 454

Stuhlmann, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__

Tarentsky, 373

Tarentsky, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Tautain, 475, 500

Tautain, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Taylor, I., 317

Taylor, I., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Ten Kate, 62, 64, 68, 96, 450, 485, 493, 517, 524, 526, 533, 536, 547, 555, 569

Ten Kate, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_5__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_6__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_7__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_8__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_9__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_10__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_11__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_12__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_13__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_14__

Terrien de Lacouperie, 382

Terrien de Lacouperie, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Testut, 95, 96

Testut, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Thomas, Cyrus, 514

Thomas, Cyrus, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Thomson, J., 440

Thomson, J., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Thurston, 411

Thurston, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Török, 19

Török, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Topinard, 10, 18, 48, 64, 72, 73, 76, 91, 92, 97, 98, 99, 177, 280, 283, 432, 476, 477

Topinard, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_5__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_6__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_7__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_8__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_9__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_10__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_11__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_12__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_13__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_14__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_15__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_16__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_17__

Tourette, G. de la, 122

Tourette, G. de la, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Tourtoulon, 335

Tourtoulon, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Turner, Sir W., 16, 62, 64, 84, 85, 95, 103, 400, 477

Turner, Sir W., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_5__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_6__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_7__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_8__

Tylor, E. B., 135, 152, 161, 183, 184, 199, 210, 214, 217, 219, 220, 235, 240, 242

Tylor, E. B., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_5__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_6__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_7__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_8__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_9__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_10__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_11__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_12__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_13__

Ujfalvy, 416

Ujfalvy, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Uvarof, 361, 363

Uvarof, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Veckenstedt, E., 153

Veckenstedt, E., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Verneau, 84, 431, 450, 513

Verneau, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__

Vierkandt, 126

Vierkandt, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Vierordt, 107, 108

Vierordt, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Villot, 432

Villot, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Virchow, 64, 435, 436, 490

Virchow, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__

Vogt, 142

Vogt, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Voit, C., 100

Voit, C., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Waddell, 380, 416

Waddell, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Wallace, A. R., 5

Wallace, A. R., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Wallaschek, 209, 210

Wallaschek, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Wauters, 458, 461

Wauters, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Weber, Max, 493

Weber, Max, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Weeren, 186

Weeren, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Weigand, 339

Weigand, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Weisbach, 73

Weisbach, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Weiss, 63

Weiss, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Westermarck, E., 231, 235, 236, 237, 238

Westermarck, E., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__

[Pg 603]

Westermarck, F., 75

Westermarck, F., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Weule, 263

Weule, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Wilhelm, E., 83

Wilhelm, E., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Wilken, 145, 230, 475

Wilken, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__

Williams, 508

Williams, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Wilson, T., 511

Wilson, T., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Windle, B., 306, 314

Windle, B., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Windt, De, 242

Windt, De, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Wirth, A., 391

Wirth, A., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Wissmann, 146, 148, 456

Wissmann, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__

Wlislocki, H. von, 425

Wlislocki, H. von, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Wolff, 461

Wolff, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Woodthorpe, 215, 396

Woodthorpe, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Wright, F., 511

Wright, F., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Yadrintsef, 367

Yadrintsef, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Zaborowski, 427

Zaborowski, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Zintgraff, 458

Zintgraff, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Zograf, 344, 351

Zograf, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

[Pg 604]

INDEX OF SUBJECTS.

A B C D E F G H I J K L M
N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

Ababdeh, 436

Ababdeh, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Abnakis, 526

Abnakis, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Abyssinians, 437, 438

Abyssinians, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Accredians, 452

Accredians, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Achango, 454

Achango, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Achinese, 489

Achinese, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Aderbaijani, 294, 376, 419

Azerbaijani, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__

Aduma, 459

Aduma, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Ægean civilisation, 315

Aegean civilization, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Aetas, 397, 483

Aetas, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Afara, 438

Afara, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Afiffi, 454

Afiffi, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Africa, grouping of existing populations of, 431

Africa, a grouping of existing populations of, 431

Afridis, 420

Afridis, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Ainus, 44, 59, 68, 85, 110, 291, 365, 371373

Ainus, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_5__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_6__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_7__–__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_8__

Akkas, 454

Akkas, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Alakalufs, 576

Alacaluf, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Albinism, 51

Albinism, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Aleuts, 521

Aleuts, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Alfurus, 136, 491

Alfurus, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Algonquians, 526, 527

Algonquians, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Alimentation.—Geophagy, anthropophagy—preparation of foods—method of fire-making and cooking, pottery, stimulants and narcotics, 144160

Alimentation.—Eating dirt, cannibalism—how to prepare food—making fire and cooking, pottery, stimulants and drugs, 144160

Amazonians, 552

Amazonians, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

American linguistic families, number of, 519

Number of American linguistic families, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

American Indians (North), 38, 80, 87, 133, 151, 204, 241, 248, 521

American Indians (North), __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_5__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_6__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_7__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_8__

Andamanese,  56, 85, 91, 99, 159

Andamanese, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__

Andeans, 545

Andeans, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Andean dialects, 544

Andean dialects, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Angolese, 461

Angolan, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Animistic religion, absence of moral element in, 220

Animistic religion, lack of a moral component in, 220

Annamese, 98, 399

Annamese, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Antaifasina, 471

Antaifasina, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Antaimoro, 471

Antaimoro, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Antaisaka, 471

Antaisaka, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Antaisara, 472

Antaisara, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Antambahoaka, 471

Antambahoaka, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Antanosi, 472

Antanosi, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Anthropology and ethnology, distinction between, 9

Anthropology and ethnology; the difference between them, 9

Anthropological classification, various, 280284

Anthropological classification, various, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__–__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Apaches, 525

Apaches, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Apalachi, 528

Apalachi, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Apollonians, 451

Apollonians, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Arabs, 87, 422, 432

Arabs, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__

Araucans, 550

Araucans, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Arawaks, 556

Arawaks, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Arimichaux, 570

Arimichaux, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Armenians, 81, 422

Armenians, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Arts, the.—Primitive design, sculpture, dancing, music vocal and instrumental, musical instruments, poetry, 197212

Arts, the.—Basic design, sculpture, dance, vocal and instrumental music, musical instruments, poetry, 197212

Aryan question, 317320

Aryan issue, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__–__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Ashantis, 451

Ashantis, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Asia, peoples of Anterior, 418425; peoples of Central, 374382; peoples of Eastern, 382390; peoples of Northern, 366374

Asia, people of the Anterior, 418425; people of Central, 374382; people of Eastern, 382390; people of Northern, 366374

Asiatic races, geographical distribution and principal characters of existing, 365425

Asiatic races, geographical distribution and main characteristics of existing, 365425

Asikuya, 460

Asikuya, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Assinaboins, 529

Assiniboine, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Assinians, 451

Assyrians, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Assyroid race, 290, 365

Assyroid species, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

[Pg 605]

Athapascans, 524

Athabascans, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Australians, 39, 44, 80, 109, 137, 151, 170, 204, 207, 220, 226, 232, 241, 248, 290, 476

Australians, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_5__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_6__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_7__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_8__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_9__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_10__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_11__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_12__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_13__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_14__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_15__

Awekwom, 451

Awekwom, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Aymaras, 547

Aymaras, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Aztecs, 536, 537

Aztecs, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Bacongo, 460

Bacongo, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Badagas, 411

Badagas, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Bajaus, 490

Bajaus, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Bakairis, 553

Bakairis, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Bakalai, 459

Bakalai, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Bakamba, 460

Bakamba, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Bakoris, 458

Bakoris, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Bakunda, 458

Bakunda, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Balinese, 490

Balinese, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Ballali, 460

Ballali, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Baltis, 415

Baltis, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Baluba, 462

Baluba, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Baluchis, 420

Baluchis, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Banga, 463

Banga, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Bangi, 461

Bangi, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Banja, 440

Banja, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Bantus, 159, 429, 456, 463

Bantus, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__

Barabra, 435

Barabra, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Basas, 458

Basas, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Bashkir-Meshcheriaks, 376

Bashkir-Meshcheriaks, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Basques, 87, 99, 240, 348

Basques, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__

Bateke, 460

Bateke, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Battas, 489

Battas, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Batua, 454

Batua, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Bayanzi, 463

Bayanzi, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Bechuana, 206, 465, 466

Bechuanaland, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__

Bedouins, 422

Bedouins, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Bejas, 436

Bejas, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Benin, 453

Benin, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Berbers, 432, 433

Berbers, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Betsileo, 471

Betsileo, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Betsimasaraka, 471

Betsimasaraka, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Bicols, 491

Bicols, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Biped attitude, condition of brain development, 16

Biped stance, level of brain development, 16

Black Feet, 527

Blackfeet, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Bongo, 445

Bongo, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Bonjos, 461

Bonjos, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Bororos, 566

Bororos, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Botocudos, 50, 147, 159, 170, 563

Botocudos, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__

Bows, 262

Bows, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Boyaeli, 454

Boyaeli, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Brahuis, 421

Brahuis, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Brain weight among different races; relative weight of, in men and women; relation of stature and weight of body to weight of brain, etc., 97104; brain weights of man and anthropoid apes, 17, 18; weight at different ages, 107

Brain weight across different races; comparative weight in men and women; relationship of height and body weight to brain weight, etc., 97104; brain weights of humans and great apes, 17, 18; weight at various ages, 107

Bubuendi, 460

Bubuendi, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Bujis, 490

Bujis, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Buriats, 379

Buryats, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Burmese, 400

Burmese, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Bushmen, 41, 44, 56, 80, 94, 204, 206, 287, 467

Bushmen, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_5__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_6__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_7__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_8__

Bushmen-Hottentots, 467

Bushmen-Hottentots, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Cagayanes, 491

Cagayanes, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Cahitas, 535

Cahitas, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Cainguas, 563, 568

Cainguas, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Calchaquis, 547

Calchaquis, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Cambodians, 398

Cambodians, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Caribs, 541, 552

Caribs, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Caste and class organisation, 249

Caste and class structure, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Caste in India, 402

Caste system in India, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Cayugas, 527

Cayugas, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Celts, 323, 347

Celts, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Cephalic index, its numerical expression and nomenclature, 5759; its relation to mentality, 76

Cephalic index, its numerical expression and name, 5759; its connection to mentality, 76

Chapanecs, 538

Chapanecs, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Characterisation of races in author’s classification, 285293

Characterization of races in the author's classification, 285293

Charruas, 571

Charruas, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Chechen-Lesgians, 354

Chechen-Lesgians, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Che-hoan, 391

Che-hoan, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Chenooks, 532

Chenooks, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Cherkess (Circassians), 354

Cherkess (Circassians), __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Cheyennes, 527

Cheyennes, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Chibchas, 546

Chibchas, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Chicasaws, 528

Chickasaws, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Children.—Voluntary limitation of, infanticide, rearing of children among primitive peoples, naming, education, etc., 239241

Children.—Choosing to limit the number of children, infanticide, raising children among primitive societies, naming, education, etc., 239241

Chinese, 38, 43, 47, 50, 109, 141, 382, 386

Chinese, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_5__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_6__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_7__

Chins, 413

Chins, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Chippewas, 524, 526

Chippewas, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Chontals, 538, 540

Chontals, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Chukchi, 149, 182, 191, 242, 367

Chukchi, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__

Ciboneys, 557

Ciboneys, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Classification of ethnic groups, 293298

Classification of ethnic groups, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__–__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Commerce, conduct of, in primitive societies, 270

Commerce, the way it's conducted in primitive societies, 270

Coreans, 386, 387

Coreans, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Corroborees, 207

Corroborees, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

[Pg 606]

Couvade, 240

Couvade, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Cranial capacity of different races, 56

Cranial capacity of various races, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Cranial characters, 5355

Cranial traits, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__–__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Creeks, 528

Creeks, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Crees, 526

Crees, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Crows, 530

Crows, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Dagomba, 447

Dagomba, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Dakotas, 530

Dakotas, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Damaras, 466

Damaras, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Danagla, 436

Danagla, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Dardi or Dardu, 413

Dardi or Dardu, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Death, conception of, among uncivilised peoples, 216

Death, the idea of it, among uncivilized people, 216

Denakil, 438

Denakil, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Dental formulæ of monkeys, anthropoid apes, and man, 13

Dental formulae of monkeys, apes, and humans, 13

Dental index of man, anthropoid apes, chimpanzee, orang, and gorilla, 21

Dental index of humans, anthropoid apes, chimpanzees, orangutans, and gorillas, 21

Dinka, 445

Dinka, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Disease, primitive conceptions of, 227

Disease, primitive beliefs about, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Distinctive morphological characters of human races.—Stature, 25, 31; influence of environment on stature, 31, 32; difference of stature of men and women, 32, 33. Teguments: the skin, hair of head and body, 37. Four principal types of hair, 38, 46. Pigmentation: colouring of the skin, eyes, and hair, 4652

Distinctive morphological traits of human races.—Height, 25, 31; impact of surroundings on height, 31, 32; variation in height between men and women, 32, 33. Skin: the outer layer, hair on the head and body, 37. Four main types of hair, 38, 46. Pigmentation: the color of skin, eyes, and hair, 4652

Domestication of animals, 194196

Animal domestication, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__–__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Dravidians, 44, 47, 99, 290, 365, 410

Dravidians, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_5__

Dress and ornament: nakedness and modesty, adornment of the body, ethnic mutilations, adornment by objects attached to the body, making of garments, spinning and weaving, 170184

Dress and ornament: nudity and modesty, body decoration, cultural alterations, embellishment with objects worn on the body, creating clothing, spinning and weaving, 170184

Druzes, 423

Druzes, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Duala, 243, 458

Duala, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Duk-Duk societies, 253

Duk-Duk societies, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Dyaks, 45, 490

Dyaks, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Endocannibalism and exocannibalism, 148

Endo- and exocannibalism, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Eskimo, 137, 151, 160, 245, 263, 292, 365, 520, 521

Eskimo, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_5__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_6__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_7__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_8__

Ethiopians, 288, 436

Ethiopians, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Eurasians, 81, 293

Eurasians, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

European ethnogeny, problem of, 299300

European ethnogenesis, issue of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__–__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

European peoples, migrations during historic period, 320325

European peoples, migrations during the historic period, 320325

European races, characters and geographical distribution of six principal and four secondary, 325334; linguistic divisions, 335358

European races, traits, and geographical spread of six main and four secondary, 325334; language divisions, 335358

Ewes, 453

Ewes, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Facial index, 70, 72, 76, 77

Facial index, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__

Family organisation, 248

Family organization, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Fans, 459

Fans, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Fellaheen, 435

Fellahin, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Felups, 449

Felups, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Finns, 45, 80, 349

Finns, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__

Fœtal likeness in man and apes, 23, 24

Fetal similarity in humans and apes, 23, 24

French, 87, 335

French, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Fuegians, 81, 85, 87, 91, 146, 170, 181, 189, 214, 241, 571, 575

Fuegians, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_5__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_6__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_7__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_8__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_9__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_10__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_11__

Fulahs, 45, 47, 439, 442

Fulahs, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__

Funereal rites, burial of weapons, pottery, etc., mourning and funeral feasts, modes of sepulture, etc., 242244

Funeral rites, the burial of weapons, pottery, etc., mourning and funeral feasts, types of burial, etc., 242244

Furs, 445

Furs, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Gabunese, 459

Gabonese, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Gallas, 438

Gallas, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Games and recreations, sports and spectacles, 197201

Games and recreation, sports and shows, 197201

Ganguela, 461

Ganguela, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Genital organs, differences of, according to race, 96

Genital organs, differences in, based on race, 96

Germans, 87, 111, 323, 339

Germans, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__

Ges, 562

Got it, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Gesture language, 128, 129

Sign language, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Giliaks, 373

Giliaks, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Goajires, 557

Goat cheese, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Gonds, 410

Gonds, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Gonja, 447

Gonja, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Group marriage: exogamy and endogamy, the matriarchate, filiation and relationship, 231234

Group marriage: marrying outside the group and marrying within the group, the matriarchal system, parentage and relationships, 231234

Guanches, 87

Guanches, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Guaraunos, 561

Guaraunos, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Guatos, 573

Guatos, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Guaycurus, 572, 573

Guaycurus, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

[Pg 607]

Guaymis, 545

Guaymis, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Gurkhas, 415

Gurkhas, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Gurma, 447

Gurma, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Gurunga, 447

Gurunga, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Gypsies, 425

Romani people, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Habitation, primitive types of—huts, tents, villages; furniture, heating, lighting, 160169

Habitation, basic types of—huts, tents, villages; furniture, heating, lighting, 160169

Hair of head and body, 37; four principal varieties of hair, straight, wavy, frizzy, woolly, 3846

Hair on the head and body, 37; four main types of hair: straight, wavy, frizzy, and woolly, 3846

Hajemis, 419

Hajemis, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Hamrans, 436

Hamrans, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Hausas, 446

Hausas, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Hawaiians, 502

Hawaiians, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Head of living subject, measurements of, 68, 69

Head of living subject, measurements of, 68, 69

Hidatsas, 530

Hidatsas, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Homo Americanus, problem of, origin of, 509

Homo Americanus, issue of, source of, 509

Hottentots, 42, 94, 97

Hottentots, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__

Hovas, 469, 470

Hovas, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Huaxtecs, 537, 540

Huaxtecs, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Hunting, fishing and agriculture, primitive methods of, 185194

Hunting, fishing, and agriculture, primitive methods of, 185194

Hupas, 525, 553

Hupas, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Hurons, 527

Hurons, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Hut, origin and development of primitive, 160163

Hut, origin and development of primitive, 160163

Idzo, 453

Idzo, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Igara, 453

Igara, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Igbera, 453

Igbera, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Igorrotes, 491

Igorots, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Illyro-Hellenes, 346

Illyro-Hellenes, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Incas, 546

Incas, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Indo-Afghan race, 290, 365

Indo-Afghan race, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Indonesians, 47, 153, 365, 406

Indonesians, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__

Initiation, ceremonies connected with, circumcision, etc., 241, 242

Initiation, ceremonies related to circumcision, etc., 241, 242

Ipurinas, 556

Ipurinas, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Iranians, 44, 80, 419

Iranians, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__

Iroquoians, 526, 527

Iroquoians, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Irulas, 411

Irulas, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Jakris, 453

Jakris, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Japanese, 42, 44, 51, 68, 87, 107, 170, 243, 387391, 489

Japanese, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_5__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_6__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_7__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_8__–__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_9__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_10__

Javanese, 99, 489

Javanese, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Jews, 50, 80, 93, 118, 423425

Jews, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__–__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_5__

Kabards, 376

Kabards, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Kabyles, 87

Kabyles, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Kafirs, 159, 163, 170, 211, 413

Kafirs, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__

Kalinas, 553

Kalinas, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Kalmuks, 50, 111, 375, 379

Kalmuks, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__

Kanaras, 411

Kanaras, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Karayas, 565

Karayas, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Karens, 394

Karens, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Kartvels or Georgians, 355

Kartvels or Georgians, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Kayapos, 563, 564

Kayapos, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Kenai, 524

Kenai, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Kerepunu, 495

Kerepunu, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Khalkas, 379

Khalkas, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Khands, 410

Khands, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Khas, 415

Khas, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Khonds, 219, 259, 410

Khonds, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__

Kiowas, 530

Kiowas, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Kirghiz, 108, 376

Kirghiz, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Kizilbashes, 423

Kizilbashes, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Kolarians, 408

Kolarians, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Koriaks, 367

Koriaks, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Kotas, 411

Kotas, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Kru, 450

Kru, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Kuis, 392

Kuis, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Kulu-Lahuli, 415

Kulu-Lahuli, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Kurds, 422

Kurds, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Kumyks, 376

Kumyks, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Kurumbas, 411

Kurumbas, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Kwakiutls, 532

Kwakiutl, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Lampongs, 489

Lampongs, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Lamuts, 373

Lamuts, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Languages, monosyllabic, agglutinative, polysynthetic, inflectional, 130133

Languages, monosyllabic, agglutinative, polysynthetic, inflectional, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__–__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Lapps, 80, 293

Lapps, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Latins, 235, 335

Latinx, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Leni-Lenapé, 526

Leni-Lenapé, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Lenkas, 540

Lenkas, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Levirate, 236

Levirate marriage, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Linguistic characters: gesture and speech, divisions of language according to structure, optic and acoustic signals, handwriting, mnemotechnic objects, pictography, ideography, alphabets, 127143

Linguistic characters: gestures and speech, categories of language based on structure, visual and sound signals, handwriting, memory aids, pictographs, ideograms, alphabets, 127143

Lo-lo, 381

Lo-lo, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Loucheux, 524

Louche, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Lunda, 402

Lunda, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Luri, 445

Luri, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Lushai, 395

Lushai, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

[Pg 608]

Lu-tse, 382

Lu-tse, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Macusis, 134, 553

Macusis, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Madurese, 490

Madurese, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Maghrebi, 434

Maghreb, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Mahratis, 413

Maharashtrians, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Makirifares, 553

Makirifares, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Makua, 464

Makua, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Malayalim, 411

Malayalam, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Malays, 44, 47, 59, 63, 80, 83, 85, 87, 99, 107, 137, 288, 493, 497

Malays, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_5__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_6__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_7__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_8__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_9__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_10__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_11__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_12__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_13__

Mampursi, 447

Mampursi, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Manchus, 374

Manchus, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Mandingans, 447, 448

Mandingans, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Mangars, 415

Mangars, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Mangbattus, 440

Mangbattus, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Manyuema, 465

Manyuema, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Maoris, 503

Māoris, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Maricopas, 532

Maricopas, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Maronites, 423

Maronites, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Masai, 440

Masai, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Mashona, 466

Mashona, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Matrimonial customs, loan of wife, real and simulated abduction, marriage by capture, duration of union, etc., 237239

Matrimonial customs, wife-sharing, actual and feigned kidnapping, marriage by capture, length of the union, etc., 237239

Mayas, 539

Mayans, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Maypures, 556

Maypures, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Melanesians, 46, 59, 63, 80, 83, 85, 87, 99, 107, 137, 288, 493, 497

Melanesians, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_5__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_6__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_7__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_8__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_9__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_10__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_11__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_12__

Melanism, 51

Melanism, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Melanochroids, 291

Melanochroids, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Melkits, 423

Melkits, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Metal age in Europe, 314316

Metal Age in Europe, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__–__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Metouali, 423

Metouali, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Miao-tse, 381

Miao-tse, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Micronesians, 504

Micronesians, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Minkopis, 397

Minkopis, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Minnetaris, 529

Minnetaris, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Miranhas, 560

Miranhas, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Mixes, 538

Mixes, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Miztecs, 538

Miztecs, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Modesty, conventionality of, 170

Modesty, conventionality of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Mohaves, 533

Mohaves, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Mohicans, 526

Mohicans, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Mois, 392

Mois, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Money, primitive standards of exchange, beads, cocoa-seed, cakes of tea, cowries, origin of modern money, etc., 271274

Money, basic forms of exchange, beads, cocoa seeds, tea bricks, cowry shells, the beginnings of modern money, etc., 271274

Mongo, 463

Mongo, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Mongols, 38, 41, 44, 46, 49, 77, 80, 82, 87, 99, 112, 164, 241, 293, 365, 379

Mongols, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_5__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_6__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_7__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_8__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_9__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_10__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_11__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_12__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_13__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_14__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_15__

Monogenesis and polygenesis, 7

Monogenesis and polygenesis, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Mons or Talaing, 393

Mons or Talaing, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Moors, 434

Moors, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Moquis, 524

Moquis, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Morality of the uncivilised, its utilitarian basis, 251252

Morality of the uncivilized, its practical foundation, 251252

Morioris, 503

Morioris, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Moros, 491

Morose, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Moscos, 541

Mosquitos, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Mossi, 447

Mossi, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Mosso, 382

Mosso, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Muskhogis, 528

Muskogee, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Mycenian civilisation, 315

Mycenaean civilization, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Myths, their intermediate position between science, poetry, and religion, 222

Myths have a unique role that sits between science, poetry, and religion, 222

Nagas, 45, 395

Nagas, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Nahuas, 546

Nahuas, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Nahuquas, 553

Nahuquas, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Nairs, 415

Nairs, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Nasal index, 6364

Nasal index, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__–__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Natchez, 528

Natchez, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Navigation,  methods of—rafts, canoes, etc., 278279

Navigation methods—rafts, canoes, etc., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__–__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Nazareans, 423

Nazarenes, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Negrilloes, 454

Negrilloes, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Negritoes, 482, 490

Negritos, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Negroes, 63, 67, 80, 83, 89, 91, 96, 98, 107, 117, 135, 186, 220, 288

Black people, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_5__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_6__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_7__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_8__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_9__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_10__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_11__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_12__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_13__

Nepalese, 415

Nepalese, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Nestorians, 423

Nestorians, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Nevajos, 525

Nevajos, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Niam-Niams, 47, 147, 440

Niam-Niams, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__

Nias, 216, 240

Nias, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Nicobarese, 396

Nicobarese, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Niquirans, 536

Niquirans, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Nubians, 436

Nubians, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Nuers, 445

Nuers, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Odour of Negroes, Chinese, etc., 109

Odor of Black people, Chinese, etc., 109

Ojibwas, 526

Ojibwe, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Olchas, 373

Olchas, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Old men, the fate of, in primitive societies, their voluntary suicide, etc., 242

Old men, the fate of, in primitive societies, their voluntary suicide, etc., 242

Omahas, 530

Omahas, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Oneidas, 527

Oneidas, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Onondagas, 527

Onondagas, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Oraons, 410

Oraons, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Orbital index, 6163

Orbital index, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__–__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Orochons, 374

Orochons, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Oroks, 374

Oroks, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

[Pg 609]

Osages, 530

Osage Nation, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Ossets, 111, 356, 421

Ossets, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__

Otomis, 537

Otomis, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Ottawas, 527

Ottawa, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Paharias, 415

Paharias, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Pai-pi-bri, 451

Pai-pi-bri, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Palæ-American sub-race, 292, 512

Palæ-American subrace, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Palenbangs, 489

Palenbangs, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Palkhpuluk, 415

Palkhpuluk, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Pampeans, 571

Pampeans, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Panos, 559

Panos, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Papajos, 535

Papayas, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Papuans, 483, 484, 493497

Papuans, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__–__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__

Parsis, 419, 420

Parsis, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Pashtu, 420

Pashto, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Passumahs, 489

Passumahs, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Patagonians, 574

Patagonians, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Pawnees, 530

Pawnees, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Pelvic index, 84

Pelvic index, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Pepo-hoan, 391

Pepo-hoan, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Persians, 419

Persians, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Peruvians, 67, 85

Peruvians, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Physiological characters, functions of nutrition and assimilation, respiration and circulation, reproduction, etc., 105120

Physiological traits, the roles of nutrition and assimilation, breathing and circulation, reproduction, etc., 105120

Pictography, 137140

Pictogram, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__–__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Pigmentation, race variations of, 46; ten principal shades of colour of skin, 47; pigmentation of the iris, 48; three fundamental shades of the iris, 49; colour of the eye in different races, 49; colouring of the hair, 49; four principal shades, 49; pigmentation at birth, 50; absence of pigment, 51

Pigmentation, variations in race, 46; ten main skin color shades, 47; iris pigmentation, 48; three basic shades of the iris, 49; eye color among different races, 49; hair coloring, 49; four primary shades, 49; pigmentation at birth, 50; absence of pigment, 51

Pigmies, 455

Pygmies, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Pimas, 535

Pimas, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Pithecanthropus erectus, 360

Pithecanthropus erectus, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Politeness, rules of.—“Exchanging blood,” salutations, etc., 254255

Politeness, rules of.—“Exchanging blood,” greetings, etc., 254255

Polyandry, 235

Polyandry, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Polygamy and monogamy, the patriarchate, 237

Polygamy, monogamy, and patriarchy, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Polymorphism, 5

Polymorphism, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Polynesians, 47, 63, 85, 87, 91, 112, 204, 206, 500

Polynesians, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_5__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_6__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_7__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_8__

Ponkas, 530

Ponkas, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Pottery-making, modelling, moulding, and coiling methods of, 154, 155

Pottery-making, shaping, molding, and coiling techniques of, 154, 155

Prehistoric “finds” in Africa, 427; in Oceania, 475

Prehistoric discoveries in Africa, 427; in Oceania, 475

Promiscuity, 231

Casual dating, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Property, systems under which held, collective, family, individual, 245247

Property, the systems it’s held under, collective, family, individual, 245247

Psychological and Pathological characters, 121

Psychological and pathological traits, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Quaternary age in Europe, 301

Quaternary period in Europe, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Quaternary human remains in Europe, 309

Quaternary human bones in Europe, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Quaternary man in Asia, 361

Quaternary humans in Asia, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Quechuas, 547

Quechua people, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Race, in what manner term applied, 8

Race, however the term is used, 8

Rejangs, 489

Rejangs, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Religion—animism, fetichism, worship of natural objects and phenomena, religion and morality, rites and ceremonies, priesthoods, 214223

Religion—animism, fetishism, worship of natural objects and phenomena, religion and morality, rituals and ceremonies, priesthoods, 214223

Respiration among uncivilised peoples and among Europeans, 108

Respiration among uncivilized people and among Europeans, 108

Right and justice, the power of taboo, vendetta, ordeals, oath-taking, extra-legal judges, etc., 252254

Right and justice, the power of taboo, revenge, trials, swearing oaths, unofficial judges, etc., 252254

Russians, 111, 167, 344

Russians, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__

Sakai, 397

Sakai, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Sakalavas, 470

Sakalavas, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Salishans, 532

Salish people, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Samarai, 495

Samarai, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Samoans, 504

Samoans, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Santals (Sonthals), 114, 409

Santals (Sonthals), __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Sartes, 376, 419

Sartes, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Savaras (Saoras), 409

Savaras (Saoras), __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Scandinavians, 47, 186, 220, 228

Scandinavians, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__

Scapular index, 85

Scapular index, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Sciences, primitive—knowledge of numbers, calculation of time, calendars and clocks, geography and cartography, 223228

Sciences, basic—understanding numbers, tracking time, calendars and clocks, geography and map-making, 223228

Selungs, 396

Selungs, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Senecas, 527

Seneca people, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Sexes, relation of, before marriage, 229

Pre-marital relationships, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Shans, 401

Shans, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Shawnees, 526

Shawnees, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Shield, evolution of the, 266269

Shield, evolution of the, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__–__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Shiluks, 445

Shiluks, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

[Pg 610]

Shuvashes, 376

Shuvashes, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Siamese, 402

Siamese, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Sikanese, 492

Sikanese, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Singhalese, 416

Singhalese, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Siouans, 528

Siouan people, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Skeleton of trunk and limbs, differentiative racial characters of, 83, 93

Skeleton of the body and limbs, distinct racial characteristics of, 83, 93

Skin, structure of the, 34; differences according to race, 36

Skin, structure of the, 34; differences based on race, 36

Skull, comparison of human skull and that of anthropoid apes, 18, 19

Skull, comparison of human skull and that of ape-like humans, 18, 19

Slavs, 59, 323, 343

Slavs, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__

Social groups, stages of, conditions of progress of, classification of “states of civilisation,” 123127

Social groups, stages of development, conditions for progress, classification of "civilization states," 123127

Social organisation, under group marriage, totemism, clan rule, 247248

Social organization, under group marriage, totemism, clan rule, 247248

Somalis, 438

Somalis, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Somatological units, 3

Somatic units, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Soninké, 449

Soninké, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Sonoran-Aztecs, 535

Sonoran-Aztecs, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Sonrhays, 447

Sonrhays, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Sonthals, 114, 409

Sonthals, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Spaniols, 425

Spaniards, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Species, what constitutes, 58

Species, what defines, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__–__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Spine, curvature of, in the Cercopithecidæ, in the anthropoid apes, in man, 13, 14

Spine curvature, in the Cercopithecidæ, in anthropoid apes, in humans, 13, 14

Staff messages, 135

Staff messages, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

“States of civilisation,” classification of, 127

"Classification of civilization states," __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Stature, variations of, at birth, 25; average heights of different populations, 25; limits of stature, giantism, dwarfism, 2731; influence of environment on stature, 31, 32; stature of men and women compared, 33

Stature, changes at birth, 25; average heights of various populations, 25; limits of stature, gigantism, dwarfism, 2731; impact of the environment on stature, 31, 32; comparison of stature between men and women, 33

Steatopygia, 93

Steatopygia, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Stone and metal ages in Asia, 362365

Stone and metal ages in Asia, 362365

Sundanese, 489

Sundanese, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Swazi, 465

Swazi, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Syrians, 423

Syrians, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Taboo, 252

Taboo, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Tagals, 491

Tagals, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Tails, pretended existence of men with, 95

Tails, the fake existence of men with, 95

Tajiks, 419

Tajiks, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Takhtaji, 423

Takhtaji, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Takullies, 524

Takullies, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Talamancas, 545

Talamancas, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Tamils, 411

Tamils, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Taranchi, 375

Taranchi, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Tarascos, 537

Tarascos, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Tasmanians, 482

Tasmanians, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Tatars, 367, 375, 376

Tatars, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__

Tecunas, 561

Tecunas, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Teguments, in man and apes, 22

Teguments in humans and apes, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Tehuelches, 574

Tehuelches, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Teleuts, 375

Teleuts, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Telingas, 411

Telling, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Tenggerese, 496

Tengger people, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Tent, origin and development of, 163, 164

Tent, history and evolution of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Territorial organisation, 249

Territorial organization, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Tertiary man in Europe, 300

Tertiary man in Europe, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Thai, 76, 400

Thai, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Thibetans, 43, 380, 381

Thais, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__

Thos-Muong, 401

Thos-Muong, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Tinné, 524

Tinné, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Tlinkits, 110, 292, 532

Tlinkits, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__

Todas, 411

All, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Toes and fingers of man and of anthropoid apes, 20, 21

Toes and fingers of humans and anthropoid apes, 20, 21

Tombo, 447

Tombo, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Tonga, 465

Tonga, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Tools of primitive industry, methods of making stone implements, etc., 184188

Tools of early industry, techniques for creating stone tools, etc., 184188

Totonacs, 536, 537

Totonacs, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Toucouleur, 450

Toucouleur, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Transport and means of communication—primitive vehicles, sledges, chariots, etc., 275277

Transport and communication methods—basic vehicles, sleds, chariots, etc., 275277

Trumai, 566

Trumai, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Trunk and limbs of living subject, racial characters of, 93

Trunk and limbs of living subject, racial traits of, 93

Tsimshians, 532

Tsimshians, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Tuaregs, 434

Tuaregs, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Tubas, 444

Tubas, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Tula Dariens, 549

Tula Dariens, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Tulus, 411

Tulus, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Tunguses, 246, 373

Tunguses, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Tupi-Guarani, 562, 567

Tupi-Guarani, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Turkomans, 376

Turkmen, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Turks, 59, 293, 365, 377

Turks, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__

Tyrolese, 59

Tyrolean, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Tziam, 394

Tziam, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Ugrians, 293, 365, 521

Ugrians, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__

Ulvas, 541

Ulvas, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

United States, white population of, 508

United States, white population, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

[Pg 611]

Uzbegs, 376

Uzbek people, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Veddahs, 85, 87, 91, 145, 157, 159, 270, 417

Veddahs, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_5__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_6__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_7__

Vei, 449

Vei, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Wagogo, 464

Wagogo, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Wahabits, 423

Wahhabis, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Wakamba, 464

Wakamba, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Wakguro, 464

Wakguro, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Wambutti, 454

Wambutti, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Wapokompo, 464

Wapokompo, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Wataita, 464

Wataita, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Weapons of offence and defence, clubs, missile weapons, boomerangs, the bow and arrow, methods of arrow release, shields, protective armour, 257269

Weapons for attack and defense, clubs, projectiles, boomerangs, bows and arrows, ways to shoot arrows, shields, protective gear, 257269

Wichitas, 530

Wichita, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Yakuts, 375

Yakuts, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Yamas, 554

Yamas, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Yasafzais, 420

Yasafzais, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Yeniseians or Tubas, 366

Yeniseians or Tubas, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Yeshkhun, 413

Yeshkhun, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Yezides, 423

Yezidis, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Yolofs, 450

Yolofs, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Yorubas, 453

Yorubas, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Yukagirs, 370

Yukagirs, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Yumas, 533

Yumas, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Zaparos, 561

Zaparos, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Zapotecs, 537

Zapotecs, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Zoques, 538

Zoques, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Zulus, 465

Zulus, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Zuñis, 155, 225, 534

Zuñis, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__

THE END.

THE END.

THE WALTER SCOTT PRESS, NEWCASTLE-ON-TYNE

THE WALTER SCOTT PRESS, NEWCASTLE UPON TYNE


Footnotes:

Footnotes:

[1] In these ethnic groups there may further be distinguished several subdivisions due to the diversity of manners, customs, etc.; or, in the groups with a more complicated social organisation, yet other social groups—priests, magistrates, miners, peasants, having each his particular “social type.”

[1] Within these ethnic groups, we can identify several subdivisions based on the variety of behaviors, customs, and more; or, in groups with a more complex social structure, there are additional social groups—like priests, magistrates, miners, and peasants—each with its own distinct “social type.”

[2] Naegeli, Mechanisch-Physiol. Theorie der Abstammungslehre, Munich, 1883.

[2] Naegeli, Mechanisch-Physiol. Theory of Evolution, Munich, 1883.

[3] The most recent definitions of species given by Wallace and Romanes approximate closely to that of Cuvier. Eimer has suggested another, based solely on the physiological criterion. His definition has the advantage of covering cases of polymorphism, in which the female gives birth to two or several individuals so unlike that we should not hesitate to classify them in two species if guided only by morphology.

[3] The latest definitions of species provided by Wallace and Romanes are quite similar to Cuvier's. Eimer has proposed another definition that is mainly based on physiological criteria. This definition has the benefit of including cases of polymorphism, where the female gives birth to two or more individuals that are so different from each other that we would not hesitate to classify them as two separate species if we were only following morphology.

[4] See on this point, Y. Delage, L’Hérédité, pp. 252 et seq. Paris, 1895.

[4] For more on this, see Y. Delage, L’Hérédité, pp. 252 and following. Paris, 1895.

[5] The question is summed up by Darwin, Descent of Man, vol. i., p. 264, 2nd edition. London, 1888.

[5] The question is summarized by Darwin, Descent of Man, vol. i., p. 264, 2nd edition. London, 1888.

[6] In questions of hybridity, it must be observed, we often confound the notions of “race” and “people,” or “social class,” and we have to be on our guard against information drawn from statistics. Thus in Central America we consider “hybrids” all those descendants of the Spaniards and the Indians who have adopted the semi-European manner of life and the Catholic religion, without inquiring whether or not this physical type has reverted to that of one of the ancestors—a not infrequent occurrence.

[6] When it comes to hybridity, we often mix up the concepts of “race” and “people,” or “social class,” and we need to be cautious about information taken from statistics. For example, in Central America, we label as “hybrids” all those descendants of Spaniards and Indigenous people who have embraced a semi-European lifestyle and the Catholic faith, without checking whether this physical type has reverted to that of one of the ancestors—a not uncommon situation.

[7] Darwin, loc. cit., vol. i., p. 280.

[7] Darwin, the same source, vol. i., p. 280.

[8] Such is, for example, the scheme of Topinard, consisting of two double parts (Elements d’Anthropologie, p. 216, Paris, 1885), to which corresponds the system newly propounded by Em. Schmidt (Centralblatt für Anthropologie, etc., vol. ii., p. 97, Breslau, 1897). The last-mentioned admits in reality two divisions, Ethnography and Ethnology, in what he calls Ethnic Anthropology; and two others, Phylography and Phylology, in what he names Somatic Anthropology. The two last divisions correspond to the Special Anthropology and the General Anthropology of Topinard.

[8] For example, this is the framework proposed by Topinard, which has two main parts (Elements d’Anthropologie, p. 216, Paris, 1885), and corresponds to the system recently introduced by Em. Schmidt (Centralblatt für Anthropologie, etc., vol. ii., p. 97, Breslau, 1897). The latter actually accepts two divisions: Ethnography and Ethnology, under what he calls Ethnic Anthropology; and two others, Phylography and Phylology, under what he refers to as Somatic Anthropology. The last two divisions align with Topinard's Special Anthropology and General Anthropology.

[9] If we include the Lemurs in the order of Primates, the five families just enumerated are all included in a “sub-order,” that of Anthropoidea. (See, for further details, Flower and Lydekker, Introduction to the Study of Mammals Living and Extinct, London, 1891.)

[9] If we count the Lemurs as part of the Primates, the five families mentioned earlier all fall under a “sub-order” called Anthropoidea. (For more information, see Flower and Lydekker, Introduction to the Study of Mammals Living and Extinct, London, 1891.)

[10] J. H. Kohlbrugge, “Versuch einer Anatomie ... Hylobates,” Zoolog. Ergeb. einer Reise in Ned. Ind., von M. Weber, vols. i. and ii. Leyden, 1891.

[10] J. H. Kohlbrugge, “An Attempt at an Anatomy ... Hylobates,” Zoological Results of a Journey to the Netherlands Indies, by M. Weber, vols. i. and ii. Leyden, 1891.

[11] D. J. Cunningham, “The Lumbar Curve in Man and the Apes,” Cunningham Memoirs of the Royal Irish Academy, No. II., Dublin, 1886.

[11] D. J. Cunningham, “The Lumbar Curve in Humans and Apes,” Cunningham Memoirs of the Royal Irish Academy, No. II., Dublin, 1886.

[12] J. Ranke, “Ueber die aufrechte Körperhaltung, etc.,” Corr.-Bl. der deutsch. Gesell. f. Anthr., 1895, p. 154.

[12] J. Ranke, “On Upright Posture, etc.,” Journal of the German Society for Anthropology, 1895, p. 154.

[13] The enormous development of the laryngeal sacs in the orang-utan is perhaps also in harmony with this protective function, as I have shown in a special work. See Deniker and Boulart, “Notes anat. sur ... orang-utans,” Nouv. Arch. Mus. d’hist. nat. de Paris, 3rd Series, vol. vii., p. 47, 1895.

[13] The significant growth of the laryngeal sacs in orangutans may align with this protective role, as I've demonstrated in a separate study. See Deniker and Boulart, “Notes anat. sur ... orang-utans,” Nouv. Arch. Mus. d’hist. nat. de Paris, 3rd Series, vol. vii., p. 47, 1895.

[14] R. Munro, “On Interm. Links, etc.,” Proceed. Roy. Soc. Edinb., vol. xxi. (1896–97), No. 4, p. 349, and Prehistoric Problems, pp. 87 and 165, Edin.-Lond. 1897; Turner, Pres. Address Brit. Assoc., Toronto Meeting, Nature, Sept. 1897.

[14] R. Munro, “On Interm. Links, etc.,” Proceed. Roy. Soc. Edinb., vol. 21 (1896–97), No. 4, p. 349, and Prehistoric Problems, pp. 87 and 165, Edin.-Lond. 1897; Turner, Pres. Address Brit. Assoc., Toronto Meeting, Nature, Sept. 1897.

[15] Topinard, L’homme dans la Nature, p. 214. Paris, 1891.

[15] Topinard, Man in Nature, p. 214. Paris, 1891.

[16] Deniker and Boulart, loc. cit., p. 55.

[16] Deniker and Boulart, same reference, p. 55.

[17] Boyd, “Table of Weights of the Human Body, etc.,” Philos. Trans. Roy. Soc. London, 1861; Bischoff, Das Hirngewicht der Menschen, Bonn, 1880. The difference remains nearly the same if, instead of the weight of the body, we take its surface, as was attempted by E. Dubois (Bull. Soc. Anthr. Paris, p. 337, 1897).

[17] Boyd, “Table of Weights of the Human Body, etc.,” Philos. Trans. Roy. Soc. London, 1861; Bischoff, Das Hirngewicht der Menschen, Bonn, 1880. The difference is almost the same if we look at the body's surface instead of its weight, as E. Dubois tried to do (Bull. Soc. Anthr. Paris, p. 337, 1897).

[18] For further details about this plane, see p. 59.

[18] For more information about this plane, see p. 59.

[19] See on this subject the interesting study of Dr. Török in the Centralblatt für Anthropologie, etc., directed by Buschan, 1st year, 1896, No. 3.

[19] Check out the intriguing study by Dr. Török in the Centralblatt für Anthropologie, etc., edited by Buschan, 1st year, 1896, No. 3.

[20] Pfitzner, “Die kleine Zehe,” Arch. f. Anat. u. Phys., 1890.

[20] Pfitzner, “The Little Toe,” Archives of Anatomy and Physiology, 1890.

[21] Bell, The Naturalist in Nicaragua, p. 209, 1874; Shevyref, “Parasites of the Skin, etc.,” Works Soc. of Naturalists, St. Petersburg, 1891, in Russian.

[21] Bell, The Naturalist in Nicaragua, p. 209, 1874; Shevyref, “Parasites of the Skin, etc.,” Works Soc. of Naturalists, St. Petersburg, 1891, in Russian.

[22] Walter Kidd, “Certain Vestigial Characters in Man,” Nature, 1897, vol. lv., p. 237.

[22] Walter Kidd, “Certain Vestigial Characters in Humans,” Nature, 1897, vol. 55, p. 237.

[23] See for further details Deniker, Recherches anatom. et embryol. sur les singes anthropoides, Paris and Poitiers, 1886 (Extr. from Arch. de Zool. experim., 30 ser., vol. iii., supp., 1885–86).

[23] For more details, see Deniker, Anatomical and Embryological Researches on Anthropoid Apes, Paris and Poitiers, 1886 (Excerpt from Archives of Experimental Zoology, 30th series, vol. iii., supplement, 1885–86).

[24] Deniker, “Les Races de l’Europe,” Bull. Soc. Anthr. Paris, p. 29, 1897.

[24] Deniker, “The Races of Europe,” Bull. Soc. Anthr. Paris, p. 29, 1897.

[25] Joest, Verh. Berl. gesell. Anthr., p. 450, 1887; Topinard, Elem. Anthr. gén., p. 436.

[25] Joest, Verh. Berl. gesell. Anthr., p. 450, 1887; Topinard, Elem. Anthr. gén., p. 436.

[26] Manouvrier, Bull. Soc. Anthr. Paris, p. 264, 1896.

[26] Manouvrier, Bull. Soc. Anthr. Paris, p. 264, 1896.

[27] B. A. Gould, Investigations in the Milit. and Anthrop. Statistics of American Soldiers, New York, 1869.

[27] B. A. Gould, Investigations in the Military and Anthropological Statistics of American Soldiers, New York, 1869.

[28] Final Report of the Anthropometric Committee, Brit. Ass., 1883.

[28] Final Report of the Anthropometric Committee, British Association, 1883.

[29] Pagliani, Lo sviluppo umano per età, etc. Milan, 1879.

[29] Pagliani, Human Development by Age, etc. Milan, 1879.

[30] These figures differ from those up to the present given in most works, according to Topinard (Elem. Anthro. gén., p. 462), who fixes the limits between 1 m. 44 (Bushmen of the Cape) and 1 m. 85 (Patagonians), but the first of these figures is that of a series of six subjects only, measured by Fritsch, and the second the average of ten subjects measured by Lista and Moreno. This is insufficient, and since the publication of Topinard’s work we have only been able to add a few isolated observations concerning those interesting populations the actual height of which is still to be determined.

[30] These numbers are different from the ones typically presented in most studies up to now, according to Topinard (Elem. Anthro. gén., p. 462), who sets the height range between 1 minute. 44 (Bushmen of the Cape) and 1 min. 85 (Patagonians). However, the first figure is based on just six individuals measured by Fritsch, and the second is the average of ten individuals measured by Lista and Moreno. This data is not enough, and since Topinard’s work was published, we have only been able to collect a few isolated observations about those intriguing populations whose actual height remains to be determined.

[31] Topinard, Elem. Anthr. gén., p. 463.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Topinard, Elem. Anthr. gén., p. 463.

[32] Final Report Brit. Assoc., 1883, p. 17.

[32] Final Report Brit. Assoc., 1883, p. 17.

[33] Beddoe, The Stature and Bulk of Man in the Brit. Isles, pp. 148 et seq. London, 1870.

[33] Beddoe, The Stature and Bulk of Man in the Brit. Isles, pp. 148 et seq. London, 1870.

[34] Houzé, Bull. Soc. Anthr. Bruxelles, 1887; Roberts, A Manual of Anthropometry, London, 1878, and Jour. Stat. Soc., London, 1876; Anuchin, “O geograficheskom, etc.,” Geograph. Distrib. of Stature in Russia, St. Petersburg, 1889; Erisman, Arch. f. soz. gesetzgeb., Tübingen, 1888.

[34] Houzé, Bull. Soc. Anthr. Bruxelles, 1887; Roberts, A Manual of Anthropometry, London, 1878, and Jour. Stat. Soc., London, 1876; Anuchin, “On Geographic, etc.,” Geographic Distribution of Stature in Russia, St. Petersburg, 1889; Erisman, Arch. f. soz. gesetzgeb., Tübingen, 1888.

[35] Collignon, “L’Anthropologie au conseil de révision,” Bull. Soc. Anthr. Paris, 1890, p. 764.

[35] Collignon, “Anthropology at the Review Board,” Bull. Soc. Anthr. Paris, 1890, p. 764.

[36] Ammon, Die Natur. Auslese beim Menschen, Jena, 1893; Vacher de Lapouge, Les selections sociales, Paris, 1896; Beddoe, loc. cit., p. 180; Ranke, Der Mensch., vol. ii., p. 109, Leipzig, 1887.

[36] Ammon, The Nature. Selection in Humans, Jena, 1893; Vacher de Lapouge, Social Selections, Paris, 1896; Beddoe, loc. cit., p. 180; Ranke, Humanity, vol. ii., p. 109, Leipzig, 1887.

[37] Boas (Zeit. f. Ethnol., 1895, p. 375) found, however, in thirty-nine series of Indians the difference greater with tribes of high stature (13.5 centimetres) than with tribes of low stature (9.9 centimetres).

[37] Boas (Zeit. f. Ethnol., 1895, p. 375) found that, in thirty-nine groups of Indigenous peoples, the difference was greater among taller tribes (13.5 centimeters) compared to shorter tribes (9.9 centimeters).

[38] Rollet, Mensurations des os longs, etc., Lyons, 1889 (thesis).

[38] Rollet, Measurements of Long Bones, etc., Lyon, 1889 (thesis).

[39] Manouvrier, Mem. Soc. Anthro., 2nd ser., vol. iv., p. 347, Paris, 1893.

[39] Manouvrier, Mem. Soc. Anthro., 2nd ser., vol. iv., p. 347, Paris, 1893.

[40] Rahon, Mem. Soc. Anthro., vol. iv., p. 403, Paris, 1893.

[40] Rahon, Mem. Soc. Anthro., vol. 4, p. 403, Paris, 1893.

[41] Bischoff, Sitzungsber. Mat. Phys. Cl. Bayr. Akad., Munich, 1882, pp. 243 and 356.

[41] Bischoff, Proceedings of the Mathematical and Physical Class of the Bavarian Academy of Sciences, Munich, 1882, pp. 243 and 356.

[42] Galton, Finger Prints. London, 1892.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Galton, Fingerprints. London, 1892.

[43] Haeckel, Natur. Schöpfungsgeschichte, 4th ed., p. 603. Berlin, 1873.

[43] Haeckel, Natural History of Creation, 4th ed., p. 603. Berlin, 1873.

[44] Pruner-Bey, “Chevelure comme caracterist. des races hum.,” Mem. Soc. Anthr., vol. ii., p. 1, Paris, 1863; Latteux, Technique microscopique, p. 239, Paris, 1883; Waldeyer, Atlas der Menschl. u. Thier Haare, Lahr, 1894.

[44] Pruner-Bey, “Hair as a Characteristic of Human Races,” Mem. Soc. Anthr., vol. ii., p. 1, Paris, 1863; Latteux, Microscopic Techniques, p. 239, Paris, 1883; Waldeyer, Atlas of Human and Animal Hair, Lahr, 1894.

[45] Topinard, Elem. Anthrop. gén., p. 265; J. Ranke, loc. cit., vol. ii., p. 172.

[45] Topinard, Elem. Anthrop. gén., p. 265; J. Ranke, loc. cit., vol. ii., p. 172.

[46] Baelz, “Körperl. Eigensch. d. Japaner,” Mitth. Deut. Gesell. Nat. und Völkerk. Ostasiens, vol. iii., fasc. 28, p. 330, and vol. iv., fasc. 32, p. 39, Yokohama, 1883–85; Montano, Mission aux îles Philippines, Paris, 1885 (Extr. from Arch. Miss. Scient., 3rd series, vol. xi.).

[46] Baelz, “Physical Characteristics of the Japanese,” Transactions of the German Society for Natural History and Ethnology of East Asia, vol. iii, fasc. 28, p. 330, and vol. iv, fasc. 32, p. 39, Yokohama, 1883–85; Montano, Mission to the Philippine Islands, Paris, 1885 (Extract from Archives of Scientific Missions, 3rd series, vol. xi.).

[47] P. S. Unna, “Ueber das Haar als Rassenmerkmal,” Deutsche Med. Zeit., 1896, Nos. 82 and 83.

[47] P. S. Unna, “On Hair as a Racial Characteristic,” German Medical Journal, 1896, Nos. 82 and 83.

[48] See Stewart, Microsc. Journ., 1873, p. 54; and T. Anderson Stuart, Journ. Anat. Phys., 1881–82, xvi., p. 362.

[48] See Stewart, Microsc. Journ., 1873, p. 54; and T. Anderson Stuart, Journ. Anat. Phys., 1881–82, xvi., p. 362.

[49] B. A. Gould, loc. cit., p. 562.

[49] B. A. Gould, loc. cit., p. 562.

[50] Breul, “Vertheil. d. Hautpigments bei verschied. Menschenrassen,” Morph. Arb., directed by G. Schwalbe, vol. vi., part 3. Jena, 1896.

[50] Breul, “Distribution of Skin Pigments Among Different Human Races,” Morphological Studies, edited by G. Schwalbe, vol. vi., part 3. Jena, 1896.

[51] Broca, Instructions génér. pour les rech. Anthropologiques sur le vivant, 2nd ed., Paris, 1879.

[51] Broca, General Instructions for Anthropological Research on Living Beings, 2nd ed., Paris, 1879.

[52] J. G. Garson and Ch. H. Read, Notes and Queries on Anthropology, edit. for the Anthro. Institute, 2nd ed., London, 1892.

[52] J. G. Garson and Ch. H. Read, Notes and Queries on Anthropology, edited for the Anthro. Institute, 2nd ed., London, 1892.

[53] Fair hair with all its shades is met with especially among the European populations of the North; it is rarer in the South. There are, it is computed, 16 fair-haired individuals to every 100 Scotchmen; 13 to every 100 Englishmen; and 2 only to every 100 Italians (Beddoe). On the other hand, brown hair is met with in 75 cases out of 100 Spaniards, 39 out of 100 Frenchmen, and 16 only of 100 Scandinavians (Gould). The fair variety is rarer among straight-haired races; it is found, however, among the western Finns, among certain Russians, etc.

[53] Light hair, along with its various shades, is especially common among Northern European populations; it’s less frequent in the South. It’s estimated that there are 16 light-haired individuals for every 100 Scots, 13 for every 100 English, and only 2 for every 100 Italians (Beddoe). In contrast, brown hair appears in 75 out of 100 Spaniards, 39 out of 100 Frenchmen, and just 16 out of 100 Scandinavians (Gould). The fair type is less common among straight-haired groups, but it can still be found among certain western Finns, some Russians, and others.

[54] Baelz, loc. cit., vol. iv., p. 40; Matignon, Bull. Soc. Anthr., p. 524, Paris, 1896; Collignon, ibid., p. 528; Sören-Hansen, Bidrag Vestgrönl. Anthr., Copenhagen, 1893; Extr. from Meddel. om Grönl., vol. vii., p. 237.

[54] Baelz, loc. cit., vol. iv., p. 40; Matignon, Bull. Soc. Anthr., p. 524, Paris, 1896; Collignon, ibid., p. 528; Sören-Hansen, Bidrag Vestgrönl. Anthr., Copenhagen, 1893; Extr. from Meddel. om Grönl., vol. vii., p. 237.

[55] Havelock Ellis, Man and Woman, p. 223. London, 1897.

[55] Havelock Ellis, Man and Woman, p. 223. London, 1897.

[56] These characters, in conjunction with several others—the small development of the lower jaw-bone, the frontal sinuses poorly developed, the much greater development of the cranial vault proportionately to its base, the persistence of the frontal and parietal bumps—make the feminine skull approximate to the infantile form. See the works of Broca, Manouvrier, and also Rabentisch, Der Weiberschädel, Morpholog. Arb., Schwalbe, 1892, vol. ii., p. 207; and H. Ellis, loc. cit., p. 72.

[56] These features, along with a few others—the slight development of the lower jaw, the underdeveloped frontal sinuses, the relatively larger size of the cranial vault compared to its base, and the presence of frontal and parietal bumps—make the female skull resemble the shape of an infant's skull. See the works of Broca, Manouvrier, and also Rabentisch, Der Weiberschädel, Morpholog. Arb., Schwalbe, 1892, vol. ii., p. 207; and H. Ellis, loc. cit., p. 72.

[57] H. Ellis, loc. cit., p. 89 and onwards; L. Manouvrier, article “Cerveau” in the Dict. de Physiol. de Ch. Richet, vol. ii., part 8, Paris, 1897.

[57] H. Ellis, loc. cit., p. 89 and onwards; L. Manouvrier, article “Cerveau” in the Dict. de Physiol. de Ch. Richet, vol. ii., part 8, Paris, 1897.

[58] According to the quinary nomenclature adopted in many countries of Europe, the indices are grouped by series of five: dolichocephalic from 70 to 74.9; mesocephalic from 75 to 79.9; brachycephalic from 80 to 84.9; hyper-brachycephalic from 85 to 89.9. The two systems might be combined with advantage, as I proposed ten years ago, under the following nomenclature, which I have adopted in this work:—Cephalic index of the skull: From 69.9 and under, hyper-dolichocephalic; from 70 to 74.9, dolichocephalic; from 75 to 77.7, sub-dolichocephalic; from 77.7 to 79.9, mesocephalic; from 80 to 83.2, sub-brachycephalic; from 83.3 to 84.9, brachycephalic; from 85 to 85.9, hyper-brachycephalic; from 90 and upwards, ultra-brachycephalic.

[58] According to the five-category naming system used in many European countries, the indices are grouped in sets of five: dolichocephalic from 70 to 74.9; mesocephalic from 75 to 79.9; brachycephalic from 80 to 84.9; hyper-brachycephalic from 85 to 89.9. The two systems could be effectively combined, as I suggested ten years ago, using the following classification, which I have adopted in this work:—Cephalic index of the skull: From 69.9 and below, hyper-dolichocephalic; from 70 to 74.9, dolichocephalic; from 75 to 77.7, sub-dolichocephalic; from 77.7 to 79.9, mesocephalic; from 80 to 83.2, sub-brachycephalic; from 83.3 to 84.9, brachycephalic; from 85 to 85.9, hyper-brachycephalic; from 90 and above, ultra-brachycephalic.

[59] Skulls may also be grouped by sections (for instance, ascending to the quinary nomenclature of the cephalic index) to see what is the proportional part of each of these sections. Thus if we take a series of 10 skulls having the following indices, 75, 77, 78, 80, 80, 81, 81, 81, 82, 84, their average index will be expressed by the figure 80 (the sum of the indices divided by the number of skulls), while the most frequent mean index will be 81. Further, the series should be considered as not very homogeneous, for it comprises 1 dolichocephalic, 1 sub-dolichocephalic, 1 mesocephalic, 6 sub-brachycephalic, and 1 brachycephalic.

[59] Skulls can also be categorized by sections (for example, following the five-part classification of the head shape) to understand the proportional part of each section. So, if we look at a set of 10 skulls with the following indices: 75, 77, 78, 80, 80, 81, 81, 81, 82, 84, the average index would be 80 (which is the total of the indices divided by the number of skulls), while the most common mean index would be 81. Furthermore, we should note that the series is not very uniform, as it includes 1 dolichocephalic, 1 sub-dolichocephalic, 1 mesocephalic, 6 sub-brachycephalic, and 1 brachycephalic.

[60] It is rather a line than a plane; the cranium always being asymmetrical, we cannot make a horizontal plane pass exactly through the borders of the two orbits and the two auditory meatus.

[60] It's more of a line than a flat surface; since the skull is always asymmetrical, we can't create a horizontal plane that perfectly aligns with the edges of both eye sockets and both ear canals.

[61] Broca, “Recherches sur l’indice orbitaire,” Rev. Anthro., p. 577, Paris, 1875.

[61] Broca, “Research on the Orbital Index,” Rev. Anthro., p. 577, Paris, 1875.

[62] C.E., an abbreviation which is met with in other tables for Crania ethnica of De Quatrefages and Hamy, Paris, 1882.

[62] C.E., an abbreviation found in other tables for Crania ethnica by De Quatrefages and Hamy, Paris, 1882.

[63] L. Weiss, Beitr. Anat. der Orbita, part 3, p. 25, Tübingen, 1890.

[63] L. Weiss, Contributions to the Anatomy of the Orbit, part 3, p. 25, Tübingen, 1890.

[64] Ten Kate, L’Anthropologie, 1894, p. 617.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Ten Kate, L’Anthropologie, 1894, p. 617.

[65] Ten Kate, Zur Anthropologie der Mongoloiden, Berlin, 1882 (thesis).

[65] Ten Kate, On the Anthropology of the Mongoloids, Berlin, 1882 (thesis).

[66] See P. Broca, Instruc. gén., etc.; Garson and Read, Notes and Queries, etc.; as well as P. Topinard, “Instruc. Anthropometr. pour les voyageurs,” Rev. d’Anthro., p. 397, Paris, 1885.

[66] See P. Broca, General Instructions, etc.; Garson and Read, Notes and Queries, etc.; as well as P. Topinard, “Anthropometric Instructions for Travelers,” Anthropological Review, p. 397, Paris, 1885.

[67] Sergi, Congr. internat. d’Archéol. et d’Anthr. préhist., 11th sess., Moscow, 1893, vol. ii., p. 296.

[67] Sergi, International Congress of Archaeology and Prehistoric Anthropology, 11th session, Moscow, 1893, vol. ii, p. 296.

[68] Ehrenreich, Anthr. Stud. Urbewohner Brasiliens, chap. i., Brunswick, 1897.

[68] Ehrenreich, Anthr. Stud. Urbewohner Brasiliens, chap. i., Brunswick, 1897.

[69] A. Gonner, “Vererbung der Forme ... des Schädels,” Zeits. für Geburtshilfe und Gynäkologie, 1895, vol. xxxiii., p. 1.

[69] A. Gonner, “Inheritance of the Shape ... of the Skull,” Journal for Obstetrics and Gynecology, 1895, vol. xxxiii., p. 1.

[70] Spalikowski, “Études d’anthropologie normande,” Bull. Soc. amis Sciences nat. Rouen, 1895, Nos. 1 and 2, p. 113; Ammon, loc. cit., p. 143; Johansson, and F. Westermarck, Skandin. Arch. f. Physiol., vol. vii., 1897, p. 341; Miss Fawcett and K. Pearson, Proc. Roy. Soc. London, vol. 62, 1898, p. 413.

[70] Spalikowski, “Études d’anthropologie normande,” Bull. Soc. amis Sciences nat. Rouen, 1895, Nos. 1 and 2, p. 113; Ammon, loc. cit., p. 143; Johansson, and F. Westermarck, Skandin. Arch. f. Physiol., vol. vii., 1897, p. 341; Miss Fawcett and K. Pearson, Proc. Roy. Soc. London, vol. 62, 1898, p. 413.

[71] Elem. Anthro. gén., p. 567.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Elementary Anthropology, p. 567.

[72] Regalia, “Orbita ed obliquità dell’ occhio Mongolico,” Archivio p. Antr., vol. xviii., p. 1, Florence, 1888.

[72] Regalia, “Orbit and Obliquity of the Mongolian Eye,” Archivio p. Antr., vol. xviii., p. 1, Florence, 1888.

[73] E. Metchnikof, Zeitsch. f. Ethnol., p. 153, Berlin, 1874.

[73] E. Metchnikof, Journal of Ethnology, p. 153, Berlin, 1874.

[74] J. Deniker, “L’Étude sur les Kalmouks,” Revue d’Anthropologie, 2nd series, vol. vi., p. 696, Paris, 1883.

[74] J. Deniker, "The Study on the Kalmyks," Anthropology Review, 2nd series, vol. vi., p. 696, Paris, 1883.

[75] Collignon, “La nomenclature quinaire de l’indice nasal,” Rev. d’Anthropol., 3rd series, t. ii., p. 8, Paris, 1887.

[75] Collignon, “The five-part naming of the nasal index,” Rev. d’Anthropol., 3rd series, vol. ii., p. 8, Paris, 1887.

[76] German anthropologists take the measurement of the breadth of the nose, not level with the nostrils, but behind, at the point of their attachment to the maxillary bone, compressing the soft parts; the nasal indices thus obtained are much too low, and not comparable to those which result from the measurements taken according to the Broca-Collignon method.

[76] German anthropologists measure the width of the nose, not at the level of the nostrils, but further back, where it attaches to the maxillary bone, pressing on the soft tissue; the nasal indices derived this way are too low and cannot be compared to those obtained using the Broca-Collignon method.

[77] A. Bertillon, “Morphologie du Nez,” Rev. d’Anthro., 3rd series, vol. ii., 1887.

[77] A. Bertillon, “Morphology of the Nose,” Journal of Anthropology, 3rd series, vol. ii., 1887.

[78] P. Broca, “Recher. sur l’ind. nas.,” Rev. d’Anthro., vol. i., Paris, 1872; Houzé, “L’ind. nas. des Flamands et des Wallons,” Bull. Soc. Anthr., Bruxelles, vol. vii., 1888–89; O. Hovorka, Die aussere Nase, Wien, 1893; Hoyer, “Beitr. zur Anthr. der Nase,” Schwalbe’s Morph. Arb., vol. iv., p. 151, 1894.

[78] P. Broca, “Research on the Nasal Index,” Journal of Anthropology, vol. i., Paris, 1872; Houzé, “The Nasal Index of the Flemish and Walloons,” Bulletin of the Anthropological Society, Bruxelles, vol. vii., 1888–89; O. Hovorka, The External Nose, Wien, 1893; Hoyer, “Contributions to the Anthropology of the Nose,” Schwalbe’s Morphological Studies, vol. iv., p. 151, 1894.

[79] Schwalbe, “R. Virchow’s Festschrift,” 1891; E. Wilhelm, Rev. Biol. du nord de la France, Lille, 1892, No. 6.

[79] Schwalbe, “R. Virchow’s Festschrift,” 1891; E. Wilhelm, Rev. Biol. du nord de la France, Lille, 1892, No. 6.

[80] See the summing up of the question in Cunningham, “The Neural Spine,” Journal of Anat. and Physiol., vol. xx., p. 637.

[80] Check out the summary of the issue in Cunningham, “The Neural Spine,” Journal of Anat. and Physiol., vol. xx., p. 637.

[81] See, for further details, Verneau, Le bassin dans les sexes, etc., Paris, 1875; Turner, “Report Hum. Skelet.,” Rep. of Challenger: Zoology, part 47; J. Garson, “Pelvimetry,” Journ. Anat. Physiol., vol. xvi., London, October, 1881; Henning, “Rassenbecken,” Arch. für Anthr., 1885, and Sitzungsb. Naturforsch. Gesell., Leipzig, 1890–91, p. 1; Marri, Archivio per l’Antr., 1892, p. 17.

[81] For more details, see Verneau, Le bassin dans les sexes, etc., Paris, 1875; Turner, “Report Hum. Skelet.,” Rep. of Challenger: Zoology, part 47; J. Garson, “Pelvimetry,” Journ. Anat. Physiol., vol. xvi., London, October, 1881; Henning, “Rassenbecken,” Arch. für Anthr., 1885, and Sitzungsb. Naturforsch. Gesell., Leipzig, 1890–91, p. 1; Marri, Archivio per l’Antr., 1892, p. 17.

[82] On the index of the shoulder-blade see Broca, Bull. Soc. Anthr., 1878, p. 66; Livon, De L’omoplate (thesis), Paris, 1879; Garson, Journ. Anat. Physiol., vol. xiv., 1879–80, p. 13; Turner, loc. cit.

[82] For details about the shoulder blade's index, see Broca, Bull. Soc. Anthr., 1878, p. 66; Livon, De L’omoplate (thesis), Paris, 1879; Garson, Journ. Anat. Physiol., vol. xiv., 1879–80, p. 13; Turner, loc. cit.

[83] Transformed into terms of the pelvic index of Broca these figures, according to the formula: ind. Turn.: 100 = 100: x, we have the figures: Fuegians, 129.8; Australians, 129.8; Europeans, 126.5; European women, 134.6; Australian women, 130.5; Andamanese women, 131.5.

[83] When converted to the pelvic index of Broca, these numbers, using the formula: ind. Turn.: 100 = 100: x, yield the following results: Fuegians, 129.8; Australians, 129.8; Europeans, 126.5; European women, 134.6; Australian women, 130.5; Andamanese women, 131.5.

[84] It has been thought that this frequency was due to the facility with which the thin lamella in question forming the bottom of the cavity can be destroyed after prolonged interment. However, there are prehistoric burial-places, as, for example, certain long barrows of Great Britain, in which not a single perforated humerus in a series of from ten to thirty bones has been found.

[84] It's been believed that this frequency was caused by how easily the thin layer at the bottom of the cavity can be damaged after being buried for a long time. However, there are prehistoric burial sites, like certain long barrows in Great Britain, where not a single perforated humerus has been found among a collection of ten to thirty bones.

[85] Houzé, “Le 3e trochanter,” Bull. Soc. Anthr., Brussels, 1883.

[85] Houzé, “The 3e trochanter,” Bull. Soc. Anthr., Brussels, 1883.

[86] See the summary of the question by Dwight in Journ. of Anat. Physiol., vol. xxiv., pt. i., London, 1889, p. 61; also that by Costa, in Archivio per l’Antr., vol. xx., 1890, p. 280; and by Poirier in his Traité d’Anatomie, vol. i., p. 221, Paris, 1890.

[86] Check out the summary of the question by Dwight in Journ. of Anat. Physiol., vol. xxiv., pt. i., London, 1889, p. 61; also check out the one by Costa in Archivio per l’Antr., vol. xx., 1890, p. 280; and by Poirier in his Traité d’Anatomie, vol. i., p. 221, Paris, 1890.

[87] Manouvrier, Mémoires Soc. Anthr., 2nd ser., vol. iii., Paris, 1888.

[87] Manouvrier, Mémoires Soc. Anthr., 2nd ser., vol. iii., Paris, 1888.

[88] Ibid., vol. iv., 1890.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Same source., vol. iv., 1890.

[89] Hamy, Rev. d’Anthrop., 1872, p. 79.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Hamy, Anthropological Review, 1872, p. 79.

[90] Topinard, L’homme dans la Nature, p. 126.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Topinard, Man in Nature, p. 126.

[91] Rojdestvensky, “Proportions of the Head,” Bull. Soc. Friends of Nat. Sc., vol. xc., part 1, Moscow, 1895 (in Russian).

[91] Rojdestvensky, “Proportions of the Head,” Bull. Soc. Friends of Nat. Sc., vol. xc., part 1, Moscow, 1895 (in Russian).

[92] Ivanovsky, “Mongols, etc.,” Bull. Soc. Friends of Nat. Sc., vol. lxxi., Moscow, 1893 (in Russian); Topinard, Elem. Anthro. générale, p. 1076.

[92] Ivanovsky, “Mongols, etc.,” Bull. Soc. Friends of Nat. Sc., vol. lxxi., Moscow, 1893 (in Russian); Topinard, Elem. Anthro. générale, p. 1076.

[93] See Ivanovsky, loc. cit., p. 257; Topinard, loc. cit., p. 1089.

[93] See Ivanovsky, loc. cit., p. 257; Topinard, loc. cit., p. 1089.

[94] Deniker and Boulart, loc. cit., p. 53.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Deniker and Boulart, same source, p. 53.

[95] M. Bartels, Arch. f. Anthr., vol. xiii., 1880, p. 1.

[95] M. Bartels, Arch. f. Anthr., vol. 13, 1880, p. 1.

[96] Lartschneider, “Die Steissbeinmuskeln, etc.,” Denkschr. K. Akad. Wiss. Wien. mat. nat. Kl., vol. lxii., 1895.

[96] Lartschneider, “The Coccygeal Muscles, etc.,” Proceedings of the K. Academy of Sciences Vienna. Math. Nat. Class., vol. lxii., 1895.

[97] See on this subject, Le Double, Traité des variations du Syst. musc. de l’homme, 2 vols., Paris, 1897; and Testut, Anomalies muscul., Paris, 1884.

[97] For more on this topic, see Le Double, Treatise on the Variations of the Muscular System of Man, 2 vols., Paris, 1897; and Testut, Muscle Anomalies, Paris, 1884.

[98] Hovelacque and Hervé, Précis d’Anthro., p. 301. Paris, 1887.

[98] Hovelacque and Hervé, Overview of Anthropology., p. 301. Paris, 1887.

[99] Ten Kate, “Sur quelques points d’ostéologie ethnique,” Revista del Museo de La Plata, vol. vii., 1896, p. 263.

[99] Ten Kate, “On Some Points of Ethnic Osteology,” Journal of the La Plata Museum, vol. 7, 1896, p. 263.

[100] R. Blanchard, “Observations sur le tablier ... d’après Peron et Lesueur,” Bull. Soc. Zool. de France, 1883, with Figs.

[100] R. Blanchard, “Observations on the apron ... based on Peron and Lesueur,” Bull. Soc. Zool. de France, 1883, with Figs.

[101] H. Ploss, Das Weib, 5th edit., by Max Bartels, vol. i. Leipzig, 1897.

[101] H. Ploss, The Woman, 5th ed., by Max Bartels, vol. i. Leipzig, 1897.

[102] Topinard, L’homme dans la Nature, p. 215.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Topinard, Man in Nature, p. 215.

[103] Topinard, Elem. d’Anthrop. génér., p. 571.

[103] Topinard, Fundamentals of General Anthropology, p. 571.

[104] According to the same author, the average weight of the brain of 364 Bavarians is 1372 grammes.

[104] According to the same author, the average weight of the brain of 364 Bavarians is 1372 grams.

[105] Manouvrier, “De la quantité dans l’encéphale,” Mém. Soc. Anthr., 2nd ser., vol. iii., p. 162. Paris, 1888.

[105] Manouvrier, “On Quantity in the Brain,” Mém. Soc. Anthr., 2nd ser., vol. iii., p. 162. Paris, 1888.

[106] Elem. Anthr. gén., pp. 611 et seq. The figures are drawn from the series of Broca and Flower, the latter being augmented by 64 c.c. (the mean difference established by Topinard and Garson between the two systems of determining cranial capacity).

[106] Elem. Anthr. gén., pp. 611 et seq. The numbers are based on the work of Broca and Flower, with the latter increased by 64 c.c. (the average difference found by Topinard and Garson between the two methods of measuring cranial capacity).

[107] Article “Cerveau,” in the Dict. de Physiol. of Ch. Richet, vol. ii., part 3, p. 687. Paris, 1897.

[107] Article “Brain,” in the Dictionary of Physiology by Ch. Richet, vol. ii., part 3, p. 687. Paris, 1897.

[108] “11 Ossetes, 1465 grammes; 15 Ingush-Chechen, 1454 grammes; 11 Georgians, 1350 grammes; but 12 Armenians of medium height of 1634 mm. give 1369 grammes for the brain.”—Gilchenko, Congr. Intern. Arch. préhis., vol. i., p. 183, Moscow, 1892.

[108] “11 Ossetians, 1465 grams; 15 Ingush-Chechen, 1454 grams; 11 Georgians, 1350 grams; but 12 Armenians of average height of 1634 mm. weigh 1369 grams for the brain.”—Gilchenko, Congr. Intern. Arch. préhis., vol. i., p. 183, Moscow, 1892.

[109] C. Voit, “Gewichte d. Organe,” Zeitsch. für Biologie, 1894, p. 510.

[109] C. Voit, “Weights of Organs,” Journal of Biology, 1894, p. 510.

[110] Manouvrier has demonstrated (Dict. Phys., p. 688), working on three series of from 54 to 58 Frenchmen, that individuals of low stature have a lighter brain (1329 grammes) than those of high stature (1398 grammes); two series of women (23 and 27 individuals) yielded a similar result (1198 grammes for the low-statured, and 1218 for the tall). A series of 44 distinguished men of all nations and all statures gave a mean weight of 1430 grammes—that is to say, exceeding that of the French of high stature and the Scotch. From this may be drawn the conclusion that intelligence causes an increase in the weight of the brain independently of the stature. Here, by way of documents, are several data of this interesting series. The minimum of this series belongs to the anatomist Döllinger, who died at the age of seventy-one (1207 grammes), the maximum to the novelist Thackeray, who died at the age of fifty-three (1644 grammes). Between these two extremes are inserted, Harless (1238 grammes), Gambetta (1294 grammes), Liebig (1352 grammes), Bischoff (1452 grammes), Broca (1485 grammes), Gauss (1492 grammes), Agassiz (1512 grammes), and De Morny (1520 grammes), to mention only the best known names ranging between these extremes. M. Manouvrier has excluded from this series exceptionally heavy brains, like those of Schiller (1781 grammes), of Cuvier (1829 grammes), of Tourgenieff (2012 grammes), and lastly of Byron (2238 grammes).

[110] Manouvrier has shown (Dict. Phys., p. 688) that in studying three groups of 54 to 58 Frenchmen, individuals of shorter height have a lighter brain weight (1329 grams) compared to taller individuals (1398 grams). Two groups of women (23 and 27 individuals) showed a similar trend, with the shorter women averaging 1198 grams and the taller ones 1218 grams. A group of 44 notable men from all nations and all heights had a mean brain weight of 1430 grams, which is higher than that of the tall French and Scots. This suggests that intelligence leads to an increase in brain weight regardless of height. Here are some data points from this interesting series: the lowest brain weight is from the anatomist Döllinger, who passed away at seventy-one (1207 grams), while the highest is from the novelist Thackeray, who died at fifty-three (1644 grams). In between these two extremes are Harless (1238 grams), Gambetta (1294 grams), Liebig (1352 grams), Bischoff (1452 grams), Broca (1485 grams), Gauss (1492 grams), Agassiz (1512 grams), and De Morny (1520 grams), to name just a few well-known figures within this range. M. Manouvrier has excluded from this series exceptionally heavy brains, like those of Schiller (1781 grams), Cuvier (1829 grams), Tourgenieff (2012 grams), and finally Byron (2238 grams).

[111] According to Danilevsky and Dr. Regibus, the weight of the grey substance represents 37 or 38 per cent. of the total weight of the brain.

[111] Danilevsky and Dr. Regibus state that the weight of the grey matter makes up 37 or 38 percent of the total weight of the brain.

[112] Every nerve-fibre of the adult is composed of an axis-cylinder which communicates with the nerve-cells and with a myeline sheath formed around it. In the course of the development of the embryo this sheath appears after the formation of the axis-cylinder.

[112] Every nerve fiber in an adult is made up of an axis cylinder that connects with the nerve cells and is surrounded by a myelin sheath. This sheath develops after the axis cylinder is formed during the embryo's development.

[113] Flechsig, Gehirn und Seele, 2nd ed., Leipzig, 1896; Die Localization der geistigen Vorgänge, Leipzig, 1896.

[113] Flechsig, Brain and Soul, 2nd ed., Leipzig, 1896; The Localization of Mental Processes, Leipzig, 1896.

[114] Sir W. Turner, Opening Address at the British Association, Toronto, 1897, Nature, 2nd Sept. 1897.

[114] Sir W. Turner, Opening Address at the British Association, Toronto, 1897, Nature, September 2, 1897.

[115] See the summary of the question in Ramon y Cajal, Nouv. idées struct. syst. nerveux, French trans., Paris, 1894; also Donaldson, Growth of the Brain, ch. vii., 1895.

[115] See the summary of the question in Ramon y Cajal, New Ideas on the Structure of the Nervous System, French translation, Paris, 1894; also Donaldson, Brain Growth, chapter 7, 1895.

[116] See the works of Bowditch on 2,500 American children of both sexes, Eighth Ann. Rep. State Board of Massachusetts (1877); of Pagliani on the Italians (Archivio per l’Antr., 1876, vol. vi.); of Axel Key on 1,800 Swedish children (Intern. Congr. Med., Berlin, 1887); of Schmidt on 10,000 German children, etc.

[116] Check out Bowditch's studies on 2,500 American kids of both genders, Eighth Ann. Rep. State Board of Massachusetts (1877); Pagliani's research on Italians (Archivio per l’Antr., 1876, vol. vi.); Axel Key's work on 1,800 Swedish children (Intern. Congr. Med., Berlin, 1887); and Schmidt's study on 10,000 German kids, etc.

[117] H. Vierordt, “Das Massen-wachsthum, etc.,” Arch. für Anatom. u. Phys.; Anatom. Division, 1890, supplem. volume, p. 62.

[117] H. Vierordt, “Mass Growth, etc.,” Archives for Anatomy and Physiology; Anatomy Division, 1890, supplemental volume, p. 62.

[118] Baelz, “Die Körperlichen Eigenschaften der Japaner,” Mittheil. Deutsch. Gesell. Ost. Asi., 1882, vol. iii., p. 348; Hamada and Sasaki in Seii-Kwai (Japanese Med. Journ. of Tokio), February No., 1890.

[118] Baelz, “The Physical Characteristics of the Japanese,” Report of the German Society for the Study of East Asia, 1882, vol. iii., p. 348; Hamada and Sasaki in Seii-Kwai (Japanese Medical Journal of Tokyo), February Issue, 1890.

[119] Lapicque, Rev. Mens. École. Anthr., 1897, No. 12.

[119] Lapicque, Rev. Mens. École. Anthr., 1897, No. 12.

[120] Hyades and Deniker, loc. cit., p. 181.

[120] Hyades and Deniker, loc. cit., p. 181.

[121] These figures, as well as those relating to the pulse, are borrowed for the Fuegians from Hyades and Deniker, loc. cit., p. 182; for the American populations from Gould, loc. cit.; for the Europeans from the work of H. Vierordt, Anatomische Daten und Tabellen, 1893; and for the rest from the memoir (in Russian) of Ivanovsky, “The Mongol-Torgootes,” already quoted.

[121] These numbers, as well as those about the pulse, come from Hyades and Deniker for the Fuegians, loc. cit., p. 182; from Gould for the American populations, loc. cit.; from H. Vierordt's work, Anatomische Daten und Tabellen, 1893, for the Europeans; and for the rest from Ivanovsky's Russian memoir, “The Mongol-Torgootes,” already mentioned.

[122] Maurel, Bull. Soc. Anth. Paris, 1883, p. 699; Hyades and Deniker, p. 183.

[122] Maurel, Bull. Soc. Anth. Paris, 1883, p. 699; Hyades and Deniker, p. 183.

[123] R. Andree, Ethnol. Parallele, Neue Folge, Leipzig, 1889.

[123] R. Andree, Ethnol. Parallele, New Series, Leipzig, 1889.

[124] Darwin, Expression of the Emotions, London, 1872; Mantegazza, Physiognomy and Expression (English trans.), London, 1895; M. Duval, Anatomie artistique, p. 285, Paris, 1881.

[124] Darwin, Expression of the Emotions, London, 1872; Mantegazza, Physiognomy and Expression (English trans.), London, 1895; M. Duval, Anatomie artistique, p. 285, Paris, 1881.

[125] See Globus, 1897, vol. xxi., No. 7.

[125] See Globus, 1897, vol. xxi., No. 7.

[126] Kotelmann, “Die Augen, etc.,” Zeit. f. Ethn., 1884, Verh., p 77.

[126] Kotelmann, “The Eyes, etc.,” Journal of Ethnology., 1884, Proceedings, p 77.

[127] Dr. Herzenstein, Izviestia, etc., of Friends of Science, Moscow, vol. xlix., part 4, p. 347 (in Russian).

[127] Dr. Herzenstein, Izviestia, etc., of Friends of Science, Moscow, vol. xlix., part 4, p. 347 (in Russian).

[128] See for further details, Ploss, loc. cit., vol. i., p. 288.

[128] For more details, see Ploss, loc. cit., vol. i., p. 288.

[129] B. Rosenstadt, “Ursachen welche die Zahl der Conceptionen, etc.,” Mitth. Embryol. Instit. Univers. Wien, 2nd series, part 4, Vienna, 1890.

[129] B. Rosenstadt, “Causes Affecting the Number of Conceptions, etc.,” Mitth. Embryol. Instit. Univers. Wien, 2nd series, part 4, Vienna, 1890.

[130] Fr. Müller, Allgem. Ethnographie, 2nd ed., p. 212, Vienna, 1879; Kulischer, Zeit. f. Ethn., vol. viii. (Verh., p. 152), Berlin, 1876.

[130] Fr. Müller, Allgem. Ethnographie, 2nd ed., p. 212, Vienna, 1879; Kulischer, Zeit. f. Ethn., vol. viii. (Verh., p. 152), Berlin, 1876.

[131] Correspondence of the Temps of the 6th of February 1896.

[131] Correspondence of the Temps from February 6, 1896.

[132] J. M. Campbell, Journ. Anthr. Soc. Bombay, vol. iv., 1895, No. 1.

[132] J. M. Campbell, Journal of the Anthropological Society of Bombay, vol. 4, 1895, No. 1.

[133] I cannot refute here all the erroneous assertions in regard to the assumed influence of environment, referring the reader to the works of Pallas (Acta of the Acad. of St. Petersburg, 1780, part ii., p. 69) and of Darwin (especially to The Descent of Man). It is enough to give some examples. Negroes are not black because they inhabit tropical countries, seeing that the Indians of South America, who live in the same latitudes, are yellow; Norwegians and Great Russians, who are fair and tall, live side by side with the Laplanders and the Samoyeds, who are dark and of very low stature. It has been said and repeated frequently that the Jews who immigrated to Cochin (India), after the destruction of Jerusalem by Titus, became as black as the indigenous Tamils among whom they live. This is so little true that in this country the name of “white Jews” is given to the descendants of true Jews (who really are white), to distinguish them from the “black Jews” or Tamils converted to Judaism. Further, it has been pretended, according to an assertion of Khanikof, reproduced by Darwin (Descent of Man, p. 304), and repeated by so many others, that the Wurtemburgers of blond type, who emigrated to the Caucasus in 1816, had become dark. This statement is no truer than the preceding one. Radde, who has studied these settlers, says expressly (Zeit. f. Ethnol., vol. ix., Verh., p. 12) that they are as fair as their compatriots who have remained in Germany. According to Pantioukhof (Anth. Observ. in the Caucasus, p. 25, Tiflis, 1893, in Russian), 25 out of 51 of the settlers, or 55 per cent., have light eyes, while in Wurtemburg the proportion of light eyes among children is 65 per cent. (Arch. f. Anthr., 1886, p. 412), which reduces the figure to about 56 per cent. or 58 per cent. for the adults,—a figure very near to the preceding one.

[133] I can’t address all the incorrect claims about the supposed influence of environment here, so I refer readers to the works of Pallas (Acta of the Acad. of St. Petersburg, 1780, part ii., p. 69) and Darwin (especially The Descent of Man). Here are some examples. Black people aren’t black just because they live in tropical regions, since the indigenous people of South America, who reside in the same latitudes, are yellow. Norwegians and Great Russians, who are fair and tall, live alongside the Laplanders and Samoyeds, who are dark and quite short. It has often been claimed that the Jews who moved to Cochin (India) after the destruction of Jerusalem by Titus became as black as the local Tamils. This is so untrue that in this country, the term “white Jews” is used for the descendants of genuine Jews (who are indeed white) to differentiate them from the “black Jews,” or Tamils who converted to Judaism. Furthermore, it has been asserted, based on a claim by Khanikof that Darwin repeated (Descent of Man, p. 304) and echoed by many others, that the blond Wurtemburgers who emigrated to the Caucasus in 1816 turned dark. This claim is as false as the previous one. Radde, who studied these settlers, states clearly (Zeit. f. Ethnol., vol. ix., Verh., p. 12) that they are as fair as their compatriots who stayed in Germany. According to Pantioukhof (Anth. Observ. in the Caucasus, p. 25, Tiflis, 1893, in Russian), 25 out of 51 settlers, or 55 percent, have light eyes, while in Wurtemburg, the proportion of light eyes among children is 65 percent (Arch. f. Anthr., 1886, p. 412), which brings the figure for adults down to about 56 percent or 58 percent—a figure very close to the previous one.

[134] S. Russkikh, “Influence of the Polar Night on the Human Organism,” Zapiski of the Ourtian Friends of Nat. Sc. Soc., Ekaterinburg, 1895 (in Russian).

[134] S. Russkikh, “How the Polar Night Affects the Human Body,” Notes of the Ourtian Friends of the Natural Science Society, Ekaterinburg, 1895 (in Russian).

[135] W. Kochs, “Eine wichtige Veränderung, etc.,” Biol. Centralbl., p. 289, 1891.

[135] W. Kochs, “An Important Change, etc.,” Biol. Centralbl., p. 289, 1891.

[136] Davy, Philos. Transac. Roy. Soc. London, 1850, p. 437.

[136] Davy, Philos. Transac. Roy. Soc. London, 1850, p. 437.

[137] Darwin, Descent of Man, 3rd ed., p. 208.

[137] Darwin, Descent of Man, 3rd ed., p. 208.

[138] Cl. Markham, Travels in India and Peru, London, 1869; Elisée Reclus, Géographie universelle, vol. viii., p. 630, Paris, 1883.

[138] Cl. Markham, Travels in India and Peru, London, 1869; Elisée Reclus, Géographie universelle, vol. viii., p. 630, Paris, 1883.

[139] Rosenberg, Malayshe Archip., Leipzig, 1878, Preface.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Rosenberg, Malayshe Archip., Leipzig, 1878, Preface.

[140] Huxley, Evidence as to Man’s Place in Nature, London, 1863.

[140] Huxley, Evidence Regarding Humanity's Position in Nature, London, 1863.

[141] Hettner, Zeits. Gesel. Erdk., vol. xxvi., 1891, p. 137.

[141] Hettner, Zeits. Gesel. Erdk., vol. xxvi., 1891, p. 137.

[142] Proceedings Geogr. Soc. London, 1891, p. 34.

[142] Proceedings of the Geographical Society of London, 1891, p. 34.

[143] For details see Bordier, Géogr. Médicale, Paris, 1883, with atlas.

[143] For details, see Bordier, Géogr. Médicale, Paris, 1883, with atlas.

[144] Bull. Géogr. histor. et descript., p. 53, Paris, 1889.

[144] Bull. Géogr. histor. et descript., p. 53, Paris, 1889.

[145] G. de la Tourette, Journal de Médecine, February, 1893.

[145] G. de la Tourette, Journal de Médecine, February, 1893.

[146] Brinton, Science, 16th Dec. 1892; and Globus, 1893, 1st half-year, p. 148.

[146] Brinton, Science, December 16, 1892; and Globus, 1893, first half-year, p. 148.

[147] See Logan’s Journal of the Indian Archipelago, vol. iii., Calcutta, 1849, pp. 457, 464, and 530; H. O. O’Brien, “The Latah,” Journ. of the Straits Branch of the R. Asiat. Soc., Singapore, June 1883, p. 144; Metzger, “Amok und Mataglap,” Globus, vol. lii., 1882, No. 7; Rasch, Neurolog. Centralbl., 1894, No. 15; 1895, No. 19.

[147] See Logan’s Journal of the Indian Archipelago, vol. iii., Calcutta, 1849, pp. 457, 464, and 530; H. O. O’Brien, “The Latah,” Journ. of the Straits Branch of the R. Asiat. Soc., Singapore, June 1883, p. 144; Metzger, “Amok und Mataglap,” Globus, vol. lii., 1882, No. 7; Rasch, Neurolog. Centralbl., 1894, No. 15; 1895, No. 19.

[148] L. Morgan, Proc. Am. Assoc. Acad. Sc., Detroit Session, 1875, p. 266, and Journal Anthro. Inst., vol. vi., 1878, p. 114. The distinction between the first and the second form lies, according to Morgan, in the knowledge of pottery—a somewhat unreliable and narrow criterion, which, however, does not directly interest us here.

[148] L. Morgan, Proc. Am. Assoc. Acad. Sc., Detroit Session, 1875, p. 266, and Journal Anthro. Inst., vol. vi., 1878, p. 114. According to Morgan, the difference between the first and second forms is based on the understanding of pottery—an unreliable and somewhat limited measure, but one that isn't our main concern here.

[149] Grosse, Die Formen der Wirtschaft, etc., Leipzig, 1896.

[149] Grosse, The Forms of Economy, etc., Leipzig, 1896.

[150] Ratzel, History of Mankind, vol. i., p. 24. London, 1896.

[150] Ratzel, History of Mankind, vol. i., p. 24. London, 1896.

[151] Vierkandt, Naturvölker und Kulturvölker, Leipzig, 1896; and Geogr. Zeitschr., vol. iii., pp. 256 and 315, 2 maps, Leipzig, 1897.

[151] Vierkandt, Naturvölker und Kulturvölker, Leipzig, 1896; and Geogr. Zeitschr., vol. iii., pp. 256 and 315, 2 maps, Leipzig, 1897.

[152] That is to say, engaged in the pursuit of land animals (hunting), or of aquatic (fishing); or gathering plants or fruits.

[152] In other words, involved in hunting land animals, fishing in water, or gathering plants or fruits.

[153] Andree, Anthropologische Parallele, p. 52.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Andree, Anthropological Parallels, p. 52.

[154] G. Mallery, “Sign Language,” First Annual Report Bur. of Ethnol., 1879–80, p. 269. Washington, 1881.

[154] G. Mallery, “Sign Language,” First Annual Report Bur. of Ethnol., 1879–80, p. 269. Washington, 1881.

[155] See for the details Fr. Müller, Grundr. d. Sprachwissensch., vol. i., Vienna, 1876; Hovelacque, Linguistique, Paris, 1877.

[155] For details, see Fr. Müller, Basics of Linguistics, vol. i., Vienna, 1876; Hovelacque, Linguistics, Paris, 1877.

[156] For resumé of the question see A. Keane, Ethnology, p. 206., London, 1896.

[156] For a summary of the question, see A. Keane, *Ethnology*, p. 206, London, 1896.

[157] Such are the lingua franca and the sabir, a medley of French, English, Italian, and Turkish spread over all the Asiatic and African coast-lines of the Mediterranean, and particularly among the Levantines. Such also is the Pigeon (or Pidjin) English, a mixture of Chinese, English, and Portuguese, employed in the ports of the Far East; the “whalers’ language,” a mixture of Hawaiian, Chinese, English, Chukchi, Japanese, etc., which is heard in the north of the Pacific Ocean; the Foky-Foky of Guiana, etc.

[157] These are the lingua franca and the sabir, a blend of French, English, Italian, and Turkish used along the coasts of Asia and Africa in the Mediterranean, especially among the Levantines. There's also Pigeon (or Pidjin) English, a combination of Chinese, English, and Portuguese that's used in the ports of the Far East; the “whalers’ language,” which mixes Hawaiian, Chinese, English, Chukchi, Japanese, and others, spoken in the northern Pacific Ocean; and the Foky-Foky of Guiana, among others.

[158] Lajard, Bull. Soc. Anthr. Paris, 1891, p. 469, and 1892, p. 23.

[158] Lajard, Bull. Soc. Anthr. Paris, 1891, p. 469, and 1892, p. 23.

[159] M. Buchner, Kamerun, Leipzig, 1887; Andree, Verh. Berl. Ges. Anthr., 1888, p. 411; Betz, Mitth. Forschungsreisenden deut. Schutzgeb., vol. xi., part 1, 1898.

[159] M. Buchner, Kamerun, Leipzig, 1887; Andree, Proceedings of the Berlin Society of Anthropology, 1888, p. 411; Betz, Reports of German Colonial Explorers, vol. xi., part 1, 1898.

[160] See for details, H. Hale, “Four Huron Wampum Records,” Journ. Anthr. Inst., vol. xxvi., No. 3 (1887), and the interesting note of E. B. Tylor at the end of this paper. Hamy, Galerie Americ. du Mus. Trocadéro, Paris, 1897, Pl. I.

[160] For details, see H. Hale, “Four Huron Wampum Records,” Journ. Anthr. Inst., vol. xxvi., No. 3 (1887), and the interesting note from E. B. Tylor at the end of this paper. Hamy, Galerie Americ. du Mus. Trocadéro, Paris, 1897, Pl. I.

[161] Harmand, Mém. Soc. Anthro., Paris, 2nd ser., vol. ii., 1875–85, p. 339.

[161] Harmand, Mém. Soc. Anthro., Paris, 2nd ser., vol. ii., 1875–85, p. 339.

[162] Piette, “Étude d’ethnogr. prehist.,” L’Anthropologie, 1896, No. 4, p. 385. Article accompanied by an excellent folio atlas.

[162] Piette, “Study of Prehistoric Ethnography,” Anthropology, 1896, No. 4, p. 385. Article included with a great folio atlas.

[163] S. Mallery, “Pictographs of the North American Indians,” Fourth Rep. Bur. Ethn., 1882–83, Washington, 1884. By the same, “Picture Writing of the American Indians,” 1888–89, Tenth Rep. Bur. Ethn., 1893.

[163] S. Mallery, “Pictographs of the North American Indians,” Fourth Rep. Bur. Ethn., 1882–83, Washington, 1884. By the same author, “Picture Writing of the American Indians,” 1888–89, Tenth Rep. Bur. Ethn., 1893.

[164] Among the present natives of Easter Island there are only one or two who can decipher these tablets.—W. Thomson Smith’s Rep. U.S. Nat. Mus., 1889, p. 513.

[164] Among the current residents of Easter Island, there are only a few who can read these tablets.—W. Thomson Smith’s Rep. U.S. Nat. Mus., 1889, p. 513.

[165] Aubin, Revue orientale et Americaine, vol. iii., p. 255.

[165] Aubin, Oriental and American Review, vol. iii., p. 255.

[166] The two hundred and fourteen “keys” or hieroglyphics comparable with the hieratic characters of Egypt—that is to say, ideograms representing categories of objects or symbolising general ideas—joined to a thousand phonetic signs, suffice by their combinations to convey a definite sense to the series of homophonous hieroglyphics forming the forty-four thousand characters of Chinese handwriting. Thus the word or syllable pa signifies banana, war-chariot, scar, cry, etc. To distinguish the various acceptations of the word, there must be joined to the phonetic sign pa (derived from a word the proper sense of which has long been obliterated) the key of plants, or that of iron, of diseases, of the mouth, according to the sense which it is desired to give to it. The monosyllabic structure of Chinese lends itself admirably to this hieroglyphic writing.

[166] The two hundred and fourteen "keys" or hieroglyphs, which are similar to the hieratic characters of Egypt—meaning ideograms representing categories of objects or symbolizing general ideas—combined with a thousand phonetic signs, are enough by their combinations to convey a clear meaning to the series of homophonous hieroglyphs that make up the forty-four thousand characters of Chinese writing. For example, the word or syllable pa means banana, war chariot, scar, cry, and so on. To differentiate the various meanings of the word, you need to add to the phonetic sign pa (which comes from a word whose original meaning has long been lost) the key of plants, or that of iron, diseases, or the mouth, depending on the intended meaning. The monosyllabic nature of Chinese works very well with this hieroglyphic writing.

[167] The discovery by A. J. Evans of a special syllabic writing in the island of Crete leads one to conjecture, on the contrary, that it was from this unfortunate island that the first alphabet set out. This writing, more ancient than the Phœnician characters, is a direct derivative of pictography; it is found again at Cyprus and in Asia Minor at the epoch of the Ægean civilisation.—A. J. Evans, Rep. Brit. Ass., 1896, p. 914.

[167] The discovery by A. J. Evans of a distinct syllabic writing on the island of Crete suggests, on the contrary, that it was from this unfortunate island that the first alphabet originated. This writing, which predates the Phoenician characters, is a direct evolution of pictography; it also appears in Cyprus and Asia Minor during the era of Aegean civilization.—A. J. Evans, Rep. Brit. Ass., 1896, p. 914.

[168] C. Vogt, “L’Écriture, etc.,” Rev. Scient., 2nd half-year, p. 1221., Paris, 1880.

[168] C. Vogt, “Writing, etc.,” Scientific Review, 2nd half-year, p. 1221., Paris, 1880.

[169] Bunge, Lehrbuch physiol. Chemie, 2nd ed., p. 110, Leipzig, 1896.

[169] Bunge, Textbook of Physiological Chemistry, 2nd ed., p. 110, Leipzig, 1896.

[170] Goebel, Bull. Ac. Sc. St. Petersb., vol. v. (1861), p. 397, and Schmidt, ibid., vol. xvi. (1871), p. 203.

[170] Goebel, Bull. Ac. Sc. St. Petersb., vol. v. (1861), p. 397, and Schmidt, ibid., vol. xvi. (1871), p. 203.

[171] Wilken, Vergelijk. Volkenk. v. Ned Ind., p. 89, Leyden, 1893; Science et Nature, Paris, 1885, 1st half-year, p. 393.

[171] Wilken, Comparative Ethnology of the Dutch East Indies, p. 89, Leyden, 1893; Science and Nature, Paris, 1885, 1st half-year, p. 393.

[172] T. Gautier, “Sur une certaine argile blanche, etc.,” Actes de la Soc. Scient. du Chili, vol. v. (1895), pt. 1 to 3, Santiago, 1895.

[172] T. Gautier, “On a Certain Kind of White Clay, etc.,” Proceedings of the Scientific Society of Chile, vol. v. (1895), pts. 1 to 3, Santiago, 1895.

[173] Hellwald, Ethnogr. Rosselsprünge, p. 168, Leipzig, 1891.

[173] Hellwald, Ethnogr. Rosselsprünge, p. 168, Leipzig, 1891.

[174] Thus, merely from a phrase heard from the lips of a Fuegian boy by Byron, and reproduced in the Voyage of the Beagle by Darwin, the Fuegians have until the present time been accused of cannibalism, and yet no observer living months and years among these savages has been able to verify the existence of this custom, in spite of all efforts to discover it.

[174] So, just from a phrase that Byron heard from a Fuegian boy and later repeated in the Voyage of the Beagle by Darwin, the Fuegians have been accused of cannibalism to this day. However, no observer who has spent months and years living among these people has been able to confirm that this practice actually exists, despite all attempts to uncover it.

[175] Wissmann, Im Inneren Afrikas, p. 152, Leipzig, 1888.

[175] Wissmann, In the Heart of Africa, p. 152, Leipzig, 1888.

[176] P. Bergemann, Verbreitung d. Anthropoph., Breslau, 1893.

[176] P. Bergemann, Spread of Anthropophagy., Wrocław, 1893.

[177] Among the Kalebus of Central Africa (between Lomami and Lukassi, 6° lat. S.) the whole of the body is eaten with the exception of the fingers, which are left untouched from a fear of disease “which retires to them as the last place of refuge” (Wissmann).

[177] Among the Kalebus of Central Africa (between Lomami and Lukassi, 6° lat. S.), they consume the entire body except for the fingers, which are left alone out of fear of disease “that retreats to them as its last refuge” (Wissmann).

[178] R. S. Steinmetz, “Endocannibalismus,” Mittheilungen der Anthropol. Gesel. in Wien, vol. xxvi. (xvi.), pt. 1–2, 1896.

[178] R. S. Steinmetz, “Endocannibalism,” Communications of the Anthropological Society in Vienna, vol. xxvi. (xvi.), pt. 1–2, 1896.

[179] It seems to me that Steinmetz’s theory encounters a great difficulty in the fact that anthropophagous peoples (for example, certain Australian tribes) avoid eating relatives, with the exception of infants; the clans exchange one with another the bodies of their dead in order that each may only eat individuals unrelated to it.

[179] It seems to me that Steinmetz’s theory has a major flaw in the observation that cannibalistic groups (like some Australian tribes) avoid consuming their relatives, except for infants; the clans trade the bodies of their dead with each other so that each group only eats individuals who are not related to them.

[180] Schlegel, “Festgabe Bastians” (suppl. No. to vol. ix. of Internat. Archiv. für Ethnogr., 1896).

[180] Schlegel, “Festgabe Bastians” (supplement No. to vol. ix. of International Archives for Ethnology, 1896).

[181] W. Hough, “The Methods of Fire-making,” Report of the U.S. National Museum for 1890, p. 95. Washington, 1891.

[181] W. Hough, “The Methods of Fire-making,” Report of the U.S. National Museum for 1890, p. 95. Washington, 1891.

[182] An apparatus of this sort was in use half a century ago among Polish peasants (Globus, vol. lix., 1891, p. 388).

[182] A device like this was used fifty years ago among Polish farmers (Globus, vol. lix., 1891, p. 388).

[183] Tylor, Anthropology, p. 262.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Tylor, *Anthropology*, p. 262.

[184] A certain moderation must nevertheless be observed in the explanation of myths and practices in which fire is concerned. See on this subject an intelligent though somewhat exaggerated critique by E. Veckenstedt, “Das wilde, heilige und Gebrauchsfeuer,” Zeitschr. für Naturwiss., vol. lxvi., p. 191, Leipzig, 1893.

[184] It's important to be somewhat moderate when explaining myths and practices related to fire. For a thoughtful, albeit somewhat overstated critique on this topic, see E. Veckenstedt's “Das wilde, heilige und Gebrauchsfeuer,” Zeitschr. für Naturwiss., vol. lxvi., p. 191, Leipzig, 1893.

[185] O. Mason, Origins of Invention, p. 158, London, 1895.

[185] O. Mason, Origins of Invention, p. 158, London, 1895.

[186] Otis Mason, loc. cit., p. 158.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Otis Mason, loc. cit., p. 158.

[187] Internation. Arch. für Ethnographie, vol. ix., pt. 3, Leyden, 1896.

[187] International Archives of Ethnography, vol. 9, pt. 3, Leyden, 1896.

[188] Revue scientifique, 1892, 1st half-year, p. 145. It is also from hygienic considerations in regard to the mouth that many peoples of India and the Negroes of Senegal chew continually the dried roots of different plants reputed antiseptic. In Siberia and in the east of Russia the chewing of pine resin (“séra”) has probably the same origin. The habit of chewing tobacco is only common among European sailors and among the Javanese and Chukchi.

[188] Revue scientifique, 1892, 1st half-year, p. 145. It’s also for health reasons related to oral hygiene that many people in India and the Black communities of Senegal continuously chew dried roots of various plants known for their antiseptic properties. In Siberia and eastern Russia, chewing pine resin (“séra”) likely has a similar background. The practice of chewing tobacco is mainly seen among European sailors and the Javanese and Chukchi people.

[189] Hellwald, Rosselsprünge, etc., p. 206

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Hellwald, Rosselsprünge, etc., p. 206

[190] H. Bates, Naturalist on ... Amazons, vol. i., p. 331, London, 1863.

[190] H. Bates, Naturalist on ... Amazons, vol. i., p. 331, London, 1863.

[191] Letourneau, Sociologie, p. 44, Paris, 1880.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Letourneau, *Sociologie*, p. 44, Paris, 1880.

[192] The beaten-earth and sun-dried clay structures of the Sudan, of Turkestan, and Mexico are of “secondary formation”; they are derived probably from the straw huts, as we shall see further on.

[192] The earthen and sun-baked clay buildings of Sudan, Turkestan, and Mexico are of "secondary formation"; they likely come from straw huts, as we will explore later.

[193] We call every habitation “fixed” which has not been constructed with the view of being removed, however light and imperfect it be. Thus, the rude hut which the Fuegian abandons so readily is nevertheless a fixed habitation, whilst the tent of the Kirghiz, a much more complicated structure, and far more comfortable, must nevertheless be classed among movable habitations.

[193] We refer to any dwelling as “fixed” if it wasn't built to be moved, no matter how simple or poorly made it is. So, the basic hut that the Fuegian leaves behind is still considered a fixed home, while the tent of the Kirghiz, which is a much more complex and comfortable structure, is still categorized as a movable dwelling.

[194] E. B. Tylor, Anthropology, p. 281.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ E. B. Tylor, *Anthropology*, p. 281.

[195] L. Hösel, “Die Rechteckige Schrägdachhütte Mittelafrikas,” Globus, 1894, vol. xxvi., pp. 341, 360, and 378, with map.

[195] L. Hösel, “The Rectangular Shed Roof Hut of Central Africa,” Globus, 1894, vol. xxvi., pp. 341, 360, and 378, with map.

[196] There are many other types of dwellings peculiar to different regions: the reed-built houses of Lob Nor (Eastern Turkestan), the Finnish houses derived from semi-underground structures, the dwellings of the Caucasian mountaineers, etc.

[196] There are many other kinds of homes specific to different areas: the reed houses of Lob Nor (Eastern Turkestan), the Finnish homes that come from semi-underground designs, the homes of the Caucasian mountain people, and so on.

[197] This tent has never, as a general rule, been placed among the Turco-Mongols on a waggon, to be carried from place to place, as authors have been pleased to affirm, from Rubruquis to our own day. The habit in question has only existed in some Nogaï tribes, and has only been practised in special circumstances (marriage, conveyance of women), the survival of which is found among the Tatars of Koundrov, near Astrakhan.

[197] This tent has generally never been transported on a wagon among the Turco-Mongols, despite what various authors have claimed from Rubruquis to the present day. This practice has only been observed in some Nogaï tribes and has been carried out under specific circumstances (like marriage and transporting women), remnants of which can still be seen among the Tatars of Koundrov, near Astrakhan.

[198] Kharouzin, Istoria, etc. (History of the Development of the Habitation among Turco-Mongol Nomads of Russia), Moscow, 1896 (in Russian).

[198] Kharouzin, Istoria, etc. (History of the Development of the Habitation among Turco-Mongol Nomads of Russia), Moscow, 1896 (in Russian).

[199] It is possible that in Western Europe a hard leaf of some plant folded in a certain way has served as a model for the lamps with wicks called Roman, to judge from certain actual forms.—Letourneau and Papillault, Bull. Soc. Anthr. Paris, 1896, p. 348. Vinchon, ibid., p. 615.

[199] It's possible that in Western Europe, a stiff leaf from some plant, folded in a specific way, inspired the design of the wick lamps known as Roman lamps, based on certain existing shapes. —Letourneau and Papillault, Bull. Soc. Anthr. Paris, 1896, p. 348. Vinchon, ibid., p. 615.

[200] Neis, Excursions et Reconnaissances, Saigon, vol. x., p. 33, 1881.

[200] Neis, Excursions and Reconnaissances, Saigon, vol. x., p. 33, 1881.

[201] Von den Steinen, Unter d. Naturvölk, Zent. Brazil, Berlin, 1894, p. 190.

[201] Von den Steinen, Among the Natural Peoples, Central Brazil, Berlin, 1894, p. 190.

[202] Glaumont, “Usages, etc.,” Rev. d’Ethnogr., Paris, 1888, p. 101.

[202] Glaumont, “Usages, etc.,” Rev. d’Ethnogr., Paris, 1888, p. 101.

[203] C. Davidson, “Das Nackte, etc.,” Globus, vol. lxx., 1896, No. 18.

[203] C. Davidson, “The Naked, etc.,” Globus, vol. 70, 1896, No. 18.

[204] Mme. Dr. Gaches-Sarraute, L’Hygiène du Corset, Paris, 1896.

[204] Dr. Gaches-Sarraute, The Corset's Hygiene, Paris, 1896.

[205] This intentional deformation must be distinguished from that which is caused by the manner of placing the child in the cradle. This is always less strongly marked, and may pass unnoticed in the head of the living subject, but it may always be recognised in the skull.

[205] This intentional distortion should be differentiated from the kind that occurs due to how the child is positioned in the crib. This is usually less pronounced and might go unnoticed in the living person's head, but it can always be identified in the skull.

[206] See for the details, L. A. Gosse, Essai déform. artif. crâne, Paris, 1885; Broca, Instr. craniol., 1875; P. Topinard, Revue Anthro., 1879, p. 497, and Elem. Anthro., p. 744; Delisle, Déform. du crâne, Paris, 1880, and Congr. Américaniste, Paris, 1892, p. 300; Ambialet, L’Anthropologie, 1893, p. 11.

[206] For details, see L. A. Gosse, Essai déform. artif. crâne, Paris, 1885; Broca, Instr. craniol., 1875; P. Topinard, Revue Anthro., 1879, p. 497, and Elem. Anthro., p. 744; Delisle, Déform. du crâne, Paris, 1880, and Congr. Américaniste, Paris, 1892, p. 300; Ambialet, L’Anthropologie, 1893, p. 11.

[207] O. Mason, loc. cit., p. 274.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ O. Mason, loc. cit., p. 274.

[208] Note also that almost everywhere foot-gear and often head-gear are made from materials obtained from the mammals: leather, fur, and felt.

[208] It’s worth noting that almost everywhere, footwear and often headwear are made from materials sourced from mammals: leather, fur, and felt.

[209] See for details W. Brigham, “Hawaiian Kapa-making,” Hawaiian Alman. and Annual, p. 76. Honolulu, 1896.

[209] For more information, see W. Brigham, “Hawaiian Kapa-making,” Hawaiian Alman. and Annual, p. 76. Honolulu, 1896.

[210] Tylor, Anthropology, p. 246.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Tylor, *Anthropology*, p. 246.

[211] For details see G. de Mortillet, Origines de la chasse, de la pêche, etc.; O. Mason, loc. cit.; Tylor, Anthrop.; Holmes, Fifteenth Rep. Bur. Ethnol.

[211] For more information, see G. de Mortillet, Origins of Hunting and Fishing, etc.; O. Mason, loc. cit.; Tylor, Anthropology; Holmes, Fifteenth Report of the Bureau of Ethnology.

[212] Weeren, “Analyse, etc.,” Verh. Berl. Ges. Anthr., June-Oct. 1895.

[212] Weeren, “Analysis, etc.,” Proceedings of the Berlin Society of Anthropology, June-Oct. 1895.

[213] Reuleaux, Hist. du développ. des machines dans l’humanité (translated from the German), Paris, 1876 (extr. from the section Cinématique).

[213] Reuleaux, History of the Development of Machines in Humanity (translated from German), Paris, 1876 (excerpt from the section Kinematics).

[214] This is a long woven bag in which the tough warp and woof run spirally and diagonally, so that when the two ends are forced together the cylinder becomes short and wide, and when pulled apart, it becomes long and slender.

[214] This is a long woven bag where the strong threads go spirally and diagonally. When the two ends are pushed together, the bag becomes short and wide, and when pulled apart, it stretches out to be long and slender.

[215] Hahn, Die Hausthiere, etc., Leipzig, 1896, in 8vo, with map.

[215] Hahn, Die Hausthiere, etc., Leipzig, 1896, in 8vo, with map.

[216] This opinion of Hahn’s appears to be corroborated by this fact, that millet is still the “national cereal” of the Turkish peoples, who, like all other nomad shepherds, beginning with hoe-culture, have arrived at their present state through having preferred to breed animals other than those used in ploughing—that is to say, the camel, sheep, and later, the horse.

[216] Hahn’s view seems to be supported by the fact that millet remains the "national cereal" of the Turkish people, who, like other nomadic shepherds, started with hoe-culture and have evolved to their current way of life by choosing to raise animals other than those used for farming—specifically, the camel, sheep, and later, the horse.

[217] Th. Studer, “Beiträge zur Geschichte unserer Hunderassen,” Naturwissench. Wochenschrift, 1897, No. 28. See also Mem. Soc. Hélvétique sciences naturelles, 1896.

[217] Th. Studer, “Contributions to the History of Our Dog Breeds,” Natural Science Weekly, 1897, No. 28. See also Memoirs of the Swiss Society of Natural Sciences, 1896.

[218] K. Groos, Die Spiele der Thiere, 1896; Die Spiele der Menschen, 1899.

[218] K. Groos, The Games of Animals, 1896; The Games of Humans, 1899.

[219] Roulette flourished among the Eskimo of Greenland in the eighteenth century; it is known under the name of “Chombino” among the Assiniboines and Blackfeet Indians.—H. Egede and Wied, cited by Andree, Ethnogr. Paral., p. 104 (Neue Folge).

[219] Roulette thrived among the Inuit of Greenland in the 1700s; it's referred to as "Chombino" among the Assiniboine and Blackfoot tribes. —H. Egede and Wied, cited by Andree, Ethnogr. Paral., p. 104 (Neue Folge).

[220] See the interesting study on this game by Tylor, Journ. Anthr. Inst., vol. viii., p. 116, and in Internationales Archiv. Ethnog., suppl. vol. ix. (Festg. Bastian), Leyden, 1896.

[220] Check out the fascinating study on this game by Tylor in Journ. Anthr. Inst., vol. viii., p. 116, and in Internationales Archiv. Ethnog., suppl. vol. ix. (Festg. Bastian), Leyden, 1896.

[221] “Hawaiian Surf-Riding,” Haw. Alman., p. 106, Honolulu, 1896.

[221] “Hawaiian Surf-Riding,” Haw. Alman., p. 106, Honolulu, 1896.

[222] See, for more details, the excellent article of Andree on “Masks” in his Ethnographische Parallele, Neue Folge, p. 107.

[222] For more information, check out Andree's great article on “Masks” in his Ethnographische Parallele, New Series, p. 107.

[223] In this connection see E. Grosse, Die Anfänge der Kunst, Freib. and Leip., 1894; Haddon, Evolution in Art, London, 1895; H. Stolpe, Studies i Amerikansk Ornamentik, Stockholm, 1896.

[223] In this regard, see E. Grosse, The Beginnings of Art, Freiburg and Leipzig, 1894; Haddon, Evolution in Art, London, 1895; H. Stolpe, Studies in American Ornamentation, Stockholm, 1896.

[224] Von den Steinen, Unt. Natürvolk. Zent. Braz., Berlin, 1894.

[224] Von den Steinen, Unt. Natürvolk. Zent. Braz., Berlin, 1894.

[225] See the plate at p. 77 of Haddon’s work, already quoted.

[225] Check out the plate on p. 77 of Haddon’s work, which has already been referenced.

[226] Andree, Eth. Paral., N.F., p. 67.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Andree, Eth. Paral., N.F., p. 67.

[227] See on this subject I. Lang, Billedkunst. Fremstell., etc.; Vidensk. Selsk. Shrif., 5th series; Hist. Philos., vol. v., No. 4, Copenhagen, 1892 (with French Summary).

[227] For more on this topic, see I. Lang, Billedkunst. Fremstell., etc.; Vidensk. Selsk. Shrif., 5th series; Hist. Philos., vol. v., No. 4, Copenhagen, 1892 (includes French summary).

[228] Wallaschek, Primitive Music, chap. viii., London, 1893.

[228] Wallaschek, Primitive Music, chap. viii., London, 1893.

[229] Grosse, Anf. d. Kunst, chap. iii.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Grosse, Anf. d. Kunst, ch. 3.

[230] Miss. Scientif. Cap Horn; vol. i. Hist. d. Voy. by Martial, p. 210, Paris, 1888.

[230] Miss. Scientif. Cap Horn; vol. i. Hist. d. Voy. by Martial, p. 210, Paris, 1888.

[231] Tylor, Anthropology, p. 292; Wallaschek, loc. cit., pp. 151, 155, and Mitth. Anthr. Ges. Wien., 1897, vol. xxiii., Sitzungsb., p. 11. According to the investigations of Weber, the ear can distinguish sounds which vary 164th of a semitone.

[231] Tylor, Anthropology, p. 292; Wallaschek, loc. cit., pp. 151, 155, and Mitth. Anthr. Ges. Wien., 1897, vol. xxiii., Sitzungsb., p. 11. According to Weber's research, the ear can distinguish sounds that differ by 164th of a semitone.

[232] According to Wallaschek (loc. cit., p. 155), the heptatonic scale (diatonic) owes its origin to the construction of the primitive flute, which had at most six to eight holes. To have had more would have been useless, as the instrument could not have been held without more fingers. Facility in making this instrument is due to the fact that, holes simply being pierced at regular intervals along the tube, a series of the most harmonious sounds can be obtained.

[232] According to Wallaschek (loc. cit., p. 155), the heptatonic scale (diatonic) originated from the design of the early flute, which typically had six to eight holes. Having more holes would have been impractical since the player wouldn't have enough fingers to hold it properly. The ease of making this instrument comes from the fact that holes are simply drilled at regular intervals along the tube, allowing for a range of harmonious sounds to be produced.

[233] Here is a description of it: a quill split and cut into the form of a leaf is attached to the end of a bow (Fig. 71); it is held to the mouth and set vibrating; it is then a reed and a stringed instrument combined. But it gives forth such feeble sounds that the artist is obliged to stuff one of his fingers in his nose and the other in his ear so as better to hear the music; it serves thus as a sort of microphone.

[233] Here's a description of it: a quill shaped like a leaf is attached to the end of a bow (Fig. 71); it's held to the mouth and set vibrating; it's both a reed and a string instrument combined. However, it produces such weak sounds that the player has to stick one finger in his nose and the other in his ear to hear the music better; it acts like a kind of microphone.

[234] The only all-round study that I know is the chapter “Poetry” in Grosse’s work, Die Anf. d. Kunst, from which I borrow my account and some selected examples, which he gives from Eyre, Spencer, and Grey.

[234] The only comprehensive study I’m aware of is the chapter “Poetry” in Grosse’s work, Die Anf. d. Kunst, from which I’ve taken my summary and some chosen examples that he provides from Eyre, Spencer, and Grey.

[235] Deniker, “Les Kalmouks,” Rev. d’Anthr., 1884, p. 671.

[235] Deniker, “The Kalmyks,” Journal of Anthropology, 1884, p. 671.

[236] De Quatrefages, L’espèce humaine, 2nd ed., p. 356, Paris, 1890.

[236] De Quatrefages, The Human Species, 2nd ed., p. 356, Paris, 1890.

[237] E. B. Tylor, Primitive Culture, vol. i.

[237] E. B. Tylor, Primitive Culture, vol. i.

[238] These Yahgans give the name of “Kachpik” vaguely to: 1, very wicked imaginary beings living in the depth of the forests, and, 2, every person who has a strange or wicked character. They give the name of “Hanuch” to: 1, imaginary beings with an eye at the back of the head and no hair, and, 2, to madmen or individuals living alone in the forests. It is the belief in these three or four imaginary beings to which all religious manifestations of the Yahgans may be reduced. (Hyades and Deniker, loc. cit., p. 253.)

[238] The Yahgans refer to “Kachpik” as: 1, very evil imaginary beings that live deep in the forests, and 2, anyone who has an unusual or immoral character. They call “Hanuch” those: 1, imaginary beings with an eye on the back of their head and no hair, and 2, mad people or those living alone in the forests. The belief in these three or four imaginary beings is the foundation of all religious expressions of the Yahgans. (Hyades and Deniker, loc. cit., p. 253.)

[239] R. Woodthorpe, Journ. Anthr. Inst., vol. xxvi., No 1, August 1896. In Yorkshire the country people call the night butterfly (sphinx) “soul,” and in Ireland butterflies are the souls of ancestors (L. Gomme, Ethnology in Folklore).

[239] R. Woodthorpe, Journ. Anthr. Inst., vol. xxvi., No 1, August 1896. In Yorkshire, locals refer to the night butterfly (sphinx) as “soul,” and in Ireland, butterflies are considered to be the souls of ancestors (L. Gomme, Ethnology in Folklore).

[240] Modigliani, Un Viaggio a Nias, p. 277, Milan, 1890. Besides, the Nias admit, like many other peoples, three souls in man; that which manifests itself by the breath is comparable to the “double” of the ancient Egyptians.

[240] Modigliani, Un Viaggio a Nias, p. 277, Milan, 1890. Additionally, the Nias, like many other cultures, believe that a person has three souls; the one that expresses itself through breath is similar to the "double" of the ancient Egyptians.

[241] The word “fetichism” is a corruption of the Portuguese term feitiço, “charm,” derived probably from the Latin factitius, in the sense “full of magical artifices,” which the first navigators on the coast of Guinea applied to the fetiches venerated by the Negroes. Des Brosses was the first to introduce, in 1760, the term “fetichism” to denote the belief in fetiches. Auguste Comte gave a much more extended meaning to the word, to denote a religious state opposed to polytheism and monotheism. To-day the fetichism of Auguste Comte is the animism of English ethnographers, of which true fetichism forms only a part. (E. Tylor, Prim. Cult., vol. ii., p. 143.)

[241] The word “fetishism” comes from the Portuguese term feitiço, meaning “charm,” which likely originates from the Latin factitius, meaning “filled with magical creations.” The early navigators on the coast of Guinea used this term to refer to the fetishes worshiped by the African people. Des Brosses was the first to use the term “fetishism” in 1760 to describe the belief in these fetishes. Auguste Comte expanded the definition to represent a religious state that is different from both polytheism and monotheism. Today, the fetishism defined by Auguste Comte is known as animism among English ethnographers, with true fetishism being just one part of it. (E. Tylor, Prim. Cult., vol. ii., p. 143.)

[242] In certain cases, fetiches are supposed to be animated with power of movement; thus the staffs which negro sorcerers put into the hands of men in convulsions, caused by wild dances, are reputed to draw these men in their mad career, and to direct them in the search of persons accused of crime. Similarly, the two staffs which the Siberian Shamans hold in their hands during their exorcisms are supposed to draw them, like horses driven at full gallop, towards regions inhabited by spirits.

[242] In some cases, fetishes are believed to have the ability to move on their own; for example, the staffs that African sorcerers place in the hands of individuals in convulsions, caused by wild dancing, are thought to guide these individuals in their frenzied movements and lead them in the search for people accused of crimes. Similarly, the two staffs that Siberian Shamans hold during their exorcisms are believed to pull them, like horses running at full speed, toward areas inhabited by spirits.

[243] Macpherson, quoted by Tylor, Primitive Culture, vol. ii., p. 325.

[243] Macpherson, cited by Tylor, Primitive Culture, vol. ii., p. 325.

[244] E. Tylor, Primitive Culture, vol. i., p. 427.

[244] E. Tylor, Primitive Culture, vol. i., p. 427.

[245] Put forward by Tylor (Prim. Cult., vol. ii., chaps. xii. and xvii.), the ideas which I here formulate have been developed by L. Marillier (“Survivance de l’âme:” Paris, 1894, Pub. École prat. Hautes Études, sect. Sc. relig.), and combated by Steinmetz (Arch. für Anthro., vol. xxiv., p. 577), but the arguments of the latter do not seem to me convincing. He compares, for example, the difference of the destiny of the noble and the common Polynesians in the other world to distributive justice.

[245] Proposed by Tylor (Prim. Cult., vol. ii., chaps. xii. and xvii.), the ideas I present here have been expanded upon by L. Marillier (“Survivance de l’âme:” Paris, 1894, Pub. École prat. Hautes Études, sect. Sc. relig.), and challenged by Steinmetz (Arch. für Anthro., vol. xxiv., p. 577), but I don't find Steinmetz's arguments convincing. He, for instance, likens the differing fates of the noble and common Polynesians in the afterlife to the concept of distributive justice.

[246] Hyades and Deniker, loc. cit., p. 254.

[246] Hyades and Deniker, loc. cit., p. 254.

[247] E. Tylor, loc. cit., vol. ii., p. 199.

[247] E. Tylor, same source, vol. ii., p. 199.

[248] See A. Lang, Culture and Myth; and his Modern Mythology, London, 1897.

[248] See A. Lang, Culture and Myth; and his Modern Mythology, London, 1897.

[249] Legends, traditional tales, proverbs, etc., are simplified myths, with the poetic element predominating. The study of them forms a special branch of ethnology called “Folk-lore.”

[249] Legends, traditional stories, proverbs, etc., are simplified myths, with a strong poetic element. The study of these forms a specialized area of ethnology known as “Folklore.”

[250] Hyades and Deniker, loc. cit., p. 316.

[250] Hyades and Deniker, loc. cit., p. 316.

[251] Brough Smyth, The Aborigines of Victoria, vol. ii., p. 3, London, 1878; Curr, The Australian Race, Melbourne-London, 1886–87, 4 vols. passim.

[251] Brough Smyth, The Aborigines of Victoria, vol. ii., p. 3, London, 1878; Curr, The Australian Race, Melbourne-London, 1886–87, 4 vols. passim.

[252] R. Schramm, “Jahrform, etc.,” Mittheil. der Geogr. Gesell., vol. xxvii., 1884, p. 481, Vienna.

[252] R. Schramm, “Year Form, etc.,” Communications of the Geographic Society, vol. 27, 1884, p. 481, Vienna.

[253] O. Mason, Origins of Invention, pp. 71 and 116.

[253] O. Mason, Origins of Invention, pp. 71 and 116.

[254] Brough Smyth, loc. cit., vol. i., p. 284.

[254] Brough Smyth, same source, vol. i., p. 284.

[255] Schmeltz and Krause, “Museum Godeffroy,” Hamburg, 1881, p. 271 and plate xxxii.

[255] Schmeltz and Krause, “Museum Godeffroy,” Hamburg, 1881, p. 271 and plate xxxii.

[256] S. Holm, Meddelels. om Groenl., p. 101, Copenhagen, 1887.

[256] S. Holm, Meddelels. om Groenl., p. 101, Copenhagen, 1887.

[257] See for the details, Andree, Ethn. Paral., p. 197.

[257] For more details, check out Andree, Ethn. Paral., p. 197.

[258] See Max Bartels, Medecin der Naturvölker, Leipzig, 1893.

[258] See Max Bartels, Medicine of Indigenous Peoples, Leipzig, 1893.

[259] M. Monnier, La France Noire, p. 110, Paris, 1894.

[259] M. Monnier, La France Noire, p. 110, Paris, 1894.

[260] H. Schintz, Deutsch Süd-west Africa, p. 396, Oldenburg, 1894.

[260] H. Schintz, Deutsch Süd-west Africa, p. 396, Oldenburg, 1894.

[261] S. Wilken, Verglijk. Volkenkunde van Nederl. Ind., p. 293, Leyden, 1893; Ivanowsky, loc. cit., p. 19 of the original impression; Post, Grundz. ethnol. Jurisprud., vol. i., Oldenb.-Leipzig, 1894.

[261] S. Wilken, Comparison. Ethnology of the Dutch East Indies, p. 293, Leyden, 1893; Ivanowsky, op. cit., p. 19 of the original print; Post, Principles of Ethnological Jurisprudence, vol. i., Oldenb.-Leipzig, 1894.

[262] Bartels, “Reife-Unsitten, etc.,” Zeit. f. Ethn.,1896 (Verh., p. 363).

[262] Bartels, “Reife-Unsitten, etc.,” Zeit. f. Ethn.,1896 (Verh., p. 363).

[263] Giraud-Teulon, Origines du mariage et de la famille, p. 33, note, Paris, 1884; Wilken, loc. cit., p. 294.

[263] Giraud-Teulon, Origins of Marriage and Family, p. 33, note, Paris, 1884; Wilken, op. cit., p. 294.

[264] See for further details, Letourneau, The Evolution of Marriage, etc., chap. i., London; and Westermarck, History of Human Marriage, chaps. iv. to vi., London, 1891.

[264] For more information, see Letourneau, The Evolution of Marriage, etc., chap. i., London; and Westermarck, History of Human Marriage, chaps. iv. to vi., London, 1891.

[265] Lubbock, Origin of Civilisation, chap. iii., 1875.

[265] Lubbock, Origin of Civilisation, chapter 3, 1875.

[266] The long list of peoples practising promiscuity given by Lubbock dwindles as we become better acquainted with the different populations in question. Certain peoples, like the Fuegians (Hyades and Deniker, loc. cit.), the Bushmen, the Polynesians (Westermarck, loc. cit.), the Irulas (Thurston, Bull. Madras Mus., vol. ii., No. 1, 1897), the Teehurs of Oude (W. Crooke, Tribes and Castes N. W. Province, etc., vol. i., p. clxxxiii., Calcutta, 1896), should be mercilessly struck out of this list, since they all have individual marriage to the exclusion of other forms. Others, like the Australians, the Todas, the Nairs, have been entered in it because they practise “group marriage” or certain forms of polyandry, which is not the same thing as promiscuity. There remains of the list but two or three tribes about whom we have no exact general information at all (example, the Olo-Ot of Borneo).

[266] The long list of cultures practicing promiscuity mentioned by Lubbock gets shorter as we learn more about the different populations involved. Some groups, like the Fuegians (Hyades and Deniker, loc. cit.), the Bushmen, the Polynesians (Westermarck, loc. cit.), the Irulas (Thurston, Bull. Madras Mus., vol. ii., No. 1, 1897), and the Teehurs of Oude (W. Crooke, Tribes and Castes N. W. Province, etc., vol. i., p. clxxxiii., Calcutta, 1896), should definitely be removed from this list, as they all practice individual marriage and exclude other forms. Others, like the Australians, the Todas, and the Nairs, have been included because they engage in “group marriage” or specific forms of polyandry, which is not the same as promiscuity. The list only leaves two or three tribes about whom we have no clear general information at all (for example, the Olo-Ot of Borneo).

[267] A. W. Howitt, “Australian Group Relations,” Smithsonian Rep., Washington, 1883; A. W. Howitt and L. Fison, “Kamilaroi and Kurnai,” Melbourne-Sydney, 1880, and Journ. Anthr. Inst., vol. xii., p. 30, 1882.

[267] A. W. Howitt, “Australian Group Relations,” Smithsonian Rep., Washington, 1883; A. W. Howitt and L. Fison, “Kamilaroi and Kurnai,” Melbourne-Sydney, 1880, and Journ. Anthr. Inst., vol. xii., p. 30, 1882.

[268] A. W. Howitt, “Dieri, etc.,” Journ. Anthr. Inst., vol. xx., 1890, p. 53. Among the Nairs of the coast of Malabar things are done in exactly the same way. The main point in both cases is the prohibition of marriage in the clan itself (L. Fison, “Classificat. Relationship,” Journ. Anthr. Inst., vol. xxv., 1895, p. 369). Among the Todas of Nilgiri the groups are limited in this sense, that the men who cohabit with a woman must be brothers, and at the same time can only marry with the sisters of this woman.

[268] A. W. Howitt, “Dieri, etc.,” Journ. Anthr. Inst., vol. xx., 1890, p. 53. Among the Nairs on the coast of Malabar, things are done in exactly the same way. The key point in both situations is the prohibition of marriage within the clan itself (L. Fison, “Classificat. Relationship,” Journ. Anthr. Inst., vol. xxv., 1895, p. 369). Among the Todas of Nilgiri, the groups are restricted in that the men who live with a woman must be brothers and can only marry the sisters of that woman.

[269] Bachofen, Das Mutterrecht, Stuttgart, 1861; J. F. McLennan, Studies in Ancient History, London, 1876.

[269] Bachofen, Das Mutterrecht, Stuttgart, 1861; J. F. McLennan, Studies in Ancient History, London, 1876.

[270] L. Fison, loc. cit., Journ. Anthr. Inst., vol. xxiv., 1895, p. 36.

[270] L. Fison, loc. cit., Journ. Anthr. Inst., vol. xxiv., 1895, p. 36.

[271] Thus, if there are four clans, A, B, C, and D, as among the Kamilaroi, for example, the children sprung from the parents of the clans A and B may not intermarry; they belong to the clan C, the members of which may only marry with the members of the clan D. It is their children only who will be able to contract marriages in the groups A and B. In this way incest is only possible between the grandfather and the granddaughter, that is to say, reduced practically to zero.

[271] So, if there are four clans—A, B, C, and D, like among the Kamilaroi—kids from the parents of clans A and B can’t marry each other; they belong to clan C, whose members can only marry members of clan D. Only their children can form marriages between groups A and B. This way, incest can only occur between a grandfather and his granddaughter, which basically makes it almost nonexistent.

[272] L. Morgan, “Syst. of Consanguinity, etc.,” Smithson. Contrib. Knowl., vol. xvii., Washington, 1871; and Ancient Society, London, 1877. See also the very clear statement of the system in Lubbock, loc. cit., and its extension to the Australians and the Melanesians of the Fiji Islands in Howitt and Fison, loc. cit.

[272] L. Morgan, “Syst. of Consanguinity, etc.,” Smithson. Contrib. Knowl., vol. xvii., Washington, 1871; and Ancient Society, London, 1877. See also the very clear explanation of the system in Lubbock, loc. cit., and its application to the Australians and the Melanesians of the Fiji Islands in Howitt and Fison, loc. cit.

[273] Tylor, Journ. Anthr. Inst., vol xviii., 1888–89, p. 262.

[273] Tylor, Journ. Anthr. Inst., vol 18, 1888–89, p. 262.

[274] Westermarck, loc. cit., p. 82; L. Fison, loc. cit. (“Classific. System”), p. 369.

[274] Westermarck, same source, p. 82; L. Fison, same source (“Classific. System”), p. 369.

[275] Maine, Ancient Law, p. 241, London, 1885; Westermarck, loc. cit., p. 510.

[275] Maine, Ancient Law, p. 241, London, 1885; Westermarck, loc. cit., p. 510.

[276] Shortt, Transact. Ethn. Soc., London, N.S., vol. vii., p. 264; Haxthausen, Transcaucasia, p. 403, London, 1854. Leroy-Beaulieu (L’Empire des Tzars, vol. vi., chap. 5, p. 488, Paris, 1885–89) attributes this custom to the over-exercise of paternal authority.

[276] Shortt, Transact. Ethn. Soc., London, N.S., vol. vii., p. 264; Haxthausen, Transcaucasia, p. 403, London, 1854. Leroy-Beaulieu (L’Empire des Tzars, vol. vi., chap. 5, p. 488, Paris, 1885–89) attributes this custom to excessive paternal authority.

[277] The Torgoot Mongols, who practise this custom, explain it by the general rules of hospitality (Ivanovski, loc. cit.); in this respect they are in agreement with Westermarck, loc. cit., chap. vi.

[277] The Torgoot Mongols, who follow this tradition, justify it by the common principles of hospitality (Ivanovski, loc. cit.); in this regard, they align with Westermarck, loc. cit., chap. vi.

[278] It must be observed on this point that, according to Westermarck, the horror of incest is not an instinctive sentiment (animals do not have it), but rather a social habit springing from sexual repulsion for persons, even unrelated to the family, with whom one has been brought up from infancy. Thus we often see marriages prohibited between one village and another (ancient Peru), or between god-parents, who superintend the baptism of a child, and are in no way allied to each other by blood (Russia). The learned Helsingfors professor, who believes in the omnipotence of sexual selection, explains the frequency of the aversion to incest by the survival of individuals who did not contract consanguineous marriages, always mischievous in his opinion. However, he admits that the bad effects of consanguineous marriages may be mitigated by material well-being, as is the case in Europe.

[278] It's important to note that, according to Westermarck, the disgust towards incest isn't an instinctive feeling (animals don't have it) but a social construct that arises from sexual aversion towards people, even those unrelated to the family, with whom one has grown up since childhood. This is why we often see marriages banned between different villages (like in ancient Peru) or between godparents who oversee a child's baptism but aren't related by blood (as in Russia). The knowledgeable professor from Helsingfors, who believes in the power of sexual selection, explains the common aversion to incest as the result of individuals who did not marry close relatives, which he views as always harmful. However, he acknowledges that the negative impacts of such marriages can be lessened by financial stability, as seen in Europe.

[279] See Ploss, Das Weib, 5th ed., vol. ii., 1897, Leipzig.

[279] See Ploss, Das Weib, 5th ed., vol. ii., 1897, Leipzig.

[280] E. Tylor, Journ. Anthr. Inst., vol. xviii., p. 248.

[280] E. Tylor, Journ. Anthr. Inst., vol. 18, p. 248.

[281] Ploss (loc. cit.) mentions Australian, Eskimo, and North American Indian tribes among whom the child is suckled till the age of fourteen or fifteen.

[281] Ploss (loc. cit.) mentions Australian, Eskimo, and North American Indian tribes where children are breastfed until they are fourteen or fifteen.

[282] For an illustration of this see the “Description of Australian Initiation” (Bura), by R. Mathews, Journ. Anthr. Inst., vol. xxv., 1896, No. 4.

[282] For an example of this, see the “Description of Australian Initiation” (Bura), by R. Mathews, Journ. Anthr. Inst., vol. xxv., 1896, No. 4.

[283] Deniker, “Le peuple Tchouktch, etc.” (from Avgustinovich), Rev. d’Anthr., 1882, p. 323, and De Windt, Globus, 1897, vol. lxxi., p. 300.

[283] Deniker, “The Chukchi People, etc.” (from Avgustinovich), Journal of Anthropology, 1882, p. 323, and De Windt, Globus, 1897, vol. lxxi., p. 300.

[284] Tylor, loc. cit. (Anthr.), pp. 346, 420.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Tylor, loc. cit. (Anthr.), pp. 346, 420.

[285] In various countries in Europe these objects give place to a piece of money put into the mouth or the hand of the dead; as one never knows what may happen, it is always well to have a little money at one’s service.

[285] In different countries across Europe, these items are replaced by a coin placed in the mouth or hand of the deceased; since you can never predict what might happen, it’s always a good idea to have some money on hand.

[286] Many practices in relation to the dead are explained by the belief that they are sleeping for a greater or less time (see p. 216). Thus, among the Micronesians of the Gilbert Islands, the woman sleeps by the side of her dead husband, and covers her body with the putrid matter which oozes from the corpse.

[286] Many customs related to the dead are rooted in the belief that they are merely sleeping for a short or long period (see p. 216). For instance, among the Micronesians of the Gilbert Islands, a woman lies next to her deceased husband and covers herself with the decaying matter that seeps from the body.

[287] Even in the cases where several arrows have pierced the animal their reciprocal positions decided to whom belonged such or such part of the slain animal; the skin, for instance, was his whose arrow had penetrated nearest to the heart.

[287] Even in situations where multiple arrows have struck the animal, their positions determined who owned each part of the animal that was killed; for example, the skin belonged to the person whose arrow went in closest to the heart.

[288] Kovalewsky, Tableau des origines de la famille, etc., pp. 59 and 91, Stockholm, 1890; Maine, Early History of Institutions, London, 1875.

[288] Kovalewsky, Table of the Family Origins, etc., pp. 59 and 91, Stockholm, 1890; Maine, Early History of Institutions, London, 1875.

[289] G. L. Gomme, The Village Community, London, 1890; and Kovalewsky, loc. cit. Baden-Powell, Indian Village Com., London, 1896.

[289] G. L. Gomme, The Village Community, London, 1890; and Kovalewsky, loc. cit. Baden-Powell, Indian Village Com., London, 1896.

[290] J. G. Frazer, Totemism, London, 1887 (expanded from his article in vol. xxiii. of the Encyclopædia Britannica); E. Smith, Second Ann. Rep. Bur. of Ethnol., 1880–81, p. 77, Washington, 1883.

[290] J. G. Frazer, Totemism, London, 1887 (expanded from his article in vol. xxiii. of the Encyclopædia Britannica); E. Smith, Second Ann. Rep. Bur. of Ethnol., 1880–81, p. 77, Washington, 1883.

[291] This family régime of society is closely allied to the worship of ancestors and the “hearth,” as the names given to the communities show (“feu” in France, “pechtchiché” in the Ukraine).

[291] This family régime of society is closely connected to the veneration of ancestors and the “hearth,” as the names given to the communities indicate (“feu” in France, “pechtchiché” in Ukraine).

[292] Laveleye, Propriété primitive, p. 9, Paris, 1891; Kovalewsky, loc. cit., passim; Sakuya Yoshida, Geschichtl. Entwickl. d. Staats-Verfass. in Japan, p. 46, Hague, 1890; Bancroft, Native Races of Pacific States, vol. ii., p. 226, San Francisco, 1882.

[292] Laveleye, Primitive Property, p. 9, Paris, 1891; Kovalewsky, loc. cit., passim; Sakuya Yoshida, Historical Development of State Constitutions in Japan, p. 46, Hague, 1890; Bancroft, Native Races of the Pacific States, vol. ii., p. 226, San Francisco, 1882.

[293] See Andree, Ethnolog. Parallele, p. 250.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ See Andree, Ethnolog. Parallele, p. 250.

[294] See for further details, Post, loc. cit., Grundriss der ethnol. Jurisprud., vol. i.

[294] For more details, see Post, loc. cit., Outline of Ethnological Jurisprudence, vol. i.

[295] See for more details, Ch. Letourneau, L’évolution de la Morale, Paris, 1887, and A. Post, loc. cit., 2nd vol., Leipzig, 1895.

[295] For more details, see Ch. Letourneau, The Evolution of Morality, Paris, 1887, and A. Post, loc. cit., 2nd vol., Leipzig, 1895.

[296] The most common ordeals are the trial by water (swimming across a river, remaining some time under water, etc.) and that by fire. In the latter case the accused is made to run on hot coals, as in India, among the Somalis, in Siam; to lick red-hot iron, as among the Dyaks, the Khonds, the Negroes of Sierra-Leone; or again, to dip the hands in molten lead, as in Burma among the Jakuns of Malacca, or the Alfurus of Buru, etc.

[296] The most common trials are the water trial (swimming across a river, staying underwater for a bit, etc.) and the fire trial. In the latter case, the accused has to run over hot coals, like in India, Somalia, and Siam; lick red-hot iron, as done by the Dyaks, the Khonds, and the Black people of Sierra-Leone; or even dip their hands in molten lead, which is practiced in Burma among the Jakuns of Malacca and the Alfurus of Buru, etc.

[297] Schmeltz and Krause, Ethnogr.-Anthr. Abt. Mus. Godeffroy, p. 17, Hamburg, 1881; W. Powell, Wanderings amongst Cannibals of New Britain, London, 1883; Graf von Pfeil, “Duk-Duk, etc.,” Journ. Anthr. Institute, 1897, p. 197.

[297] Schmeltz and Krause, Ethnogr.-Anthr. Abt. Mus. Godeffroy, p. 17, Hamburg, 1881; W. Powell, Wanderings amongst Cannibals of New Britain, London, 1883; Graf von Pfeil, “Duk-Duk, etc.,” Journ. Anthr. Institute, 1897, p. 197.

[298] G. Schultheiss, Globus, 1896, vol. lxx., No. 22.

[298] G. Schultheiss, Globus, 1896, vol. lxx., No. 22.

[299] The custom of applying the nose to the cheek and drawing a breath, with closed eyes and a smacking of the lips, exists among the Southern Chinese, but only as an act of love. According to P. D’Enjoy, it is an olfactory gesture derived from the sensations of nutrition, as the European kiss on the lips is derived from the lascivious bite. (Bull. Soc. Anthr., Paris, 1897, pt. 2.)

[299] The tradition of pressing the nose to the cheek and inhaling deeply with closed eyes and a smacking of the lips is found among the Southern Chinese, but it’s seen only as an expression of love. According to P. D’Enjoy, this olfactory gesture comes from feelings of nourishment, much like the European kiss on the lips originates from a sensual bite. (Bull. Soc. Anthr., Paris, 1897, pt. 2.)

[300] See for details Ling Roth, Journ. Anthr. Inst., vol. xix., 1889, p. 164; Andree, Eth. Paral., N.F., p. 225; Hellwald, Rosselsp., p. 1.

[300] For more details, see Ling Roth, Journ. Anthr. Inst., vol. xix, 1889, p. 164; Andree, Eth. Paral., N.F., p. 225; Hellwald, Rosselsp., p. 1.

[301] The difference between offensive and defensive weapons is often not very marked even in our civilisation; thus the sword and the sabre serve as much for giving as warding off blows; the same is true among savages in regard to the staff, the club, etc. Frequently, too, objects which originally have nothing in common with war, become offensive or defensive weapons. Thus the bracelet is sometimes a defensive weapon. Among several Negroes (Ashantis, Kafirs, Vakambas), and in Melanesia, warriors put on their legs and arms bracelets formed of the long hair of different animals (goat, boar, zebra) which almost completely cover the limbs and protect them effectually against the blows of club and spear. The bracelets of wire rolled in numerous spirals around the fore-arm or the leg, which are met with among the Dyaks, the Mois of Indo-China, the Niam-Niams, and the Baghirmis of Central Africa, are veritable protective armour; they are the prototypes of the vantbrace and greaves.

[301] The distinction between offensive and defensive weapons is often not very clear even in our society; for example, swords and sabers are used for both striking and blocking attacks. The same applies to primitive cultures in regard to staffs, clubs, etc. Often, items that originally have nothing to do with combat become offensive or defensive weapons. For instance, bracelets can sometimes serve as defensive weapons. Among various African tribes (like the Ashantis, Kafirs, and Vakambas) and in Melanesia, warriors wear bracelets made from the long hair of different animals (like goats, boars, and zebras) on their legs and arms, which cover their limbs almost completely and protect them effectively against strikes from clubs and spears. The wire bracelets wrapped in multiple spirals around the forearms or legs, found among the Dyaks, the Mois of Indo-China, the Niam-Niams, and the Baghirmis of Central Africa, serve as true protective armor; they are the early versions of the vambrace and greaves.

In certain rarer cases the bracelet is an offensive weapon. Among the Jurs, a negro tribe of the upper Nile, bracelets are found provided with two points or spurs, four inches long, and very dangerous. The bracelet of the Irengas (to the east of the upper Nile), as well as that of the Jibba (living on the banks of the Jibba, a left-hand tributary of the Sabba), is a great disc, with an opening in the middle through which to pass the arm. A portion of the disc is removed in order to give it more elasticity, and its outer edge, exceedingly sharp, forms a kind of circular sabre. In order not to wound himself, the wearer covers the edge with a circular case which he only removes for battle.

In some rare cases, the bracelet is used as a weapon. Among the Jurs, a Black tribe from the upper Nile, they have bracelets with two sharp points or spurs, about four inches long, making them quite dangerous. The bracelets of the Irengas (to the east of the upper Nile) and the Jibba (living on the banks of the Jibba, a left-hand tributary of the Sabba) are large discs with a hole in the middle for the arm to pass through. A section of the disc is cut out to make it more flexible, and the outer edge is very sharp, resembling a circular saber. To avoid injuring himself, the wearer covers the sharp edge with a circular case, which he only removes in battle.

[302] See for details and series of forms, Lane-Fox (now Pitt Rivers), Cat. Anthr. Collection in the Bethnal Green Museum, London, 1877, with illustrations. (The remarkable collection in question is now at Oxford.)

[302] For more information and a series of forms, see Lane-Fox (now Pitt Rivers), Cat. Anthr. Collection in the Bethnal Green Museum, London, 1877, with illustrations. (The impressive collection mentioned is now at Oxford.)

[303] O. Mason, “Throwing-sticks,” Rep. U.S. N. Mus. for 1884; F. v. Luschan, “Wurfholz, etc.,” Festschr.... Bastian, p. 131, Berlin, 1896.

[303] O. Mason, “Throwing-sticks,” Rep. U.S. N. Mus. for 1884; F. v. Luschan, “Wurfholz, etc.,” Festschr.... Bastian, p. 131, Berlin, 1896.

[304] See H. Balfour, “On the Structure and Affinities of the Composite Bow,” Journ. Anthr. Inst., London, 1889, vol. xix., p. 220; Anuchin, Look i Strely (Bow and Arrows), Moscow, 1889 (in Russian); O. Mason, “Bows, Arrows, and Quivers of the North American Aborigines,” Smithsonian Report, Washington, 1893.

[304] See H. Balfour, “On the Structure and Affinities of the Composite Bow,” Journ. Anthr. Inst., London, 1889, vol. xix., p. 220; Anuchin, Look i Strely (Bow and Arrows), Moscow, 1889 (in Russian); O. Mason, “Bows, Arrows, and Quivers of the North American Aborigines,” Smithsonian Report, Washington, 1893.

[305] Phillips, Trans. N. Zeal. Inst., vol. x., p. 97, Wellington, 1877.

[305] Phillips, Trans. N. Zeal. Inst., vol. 10, p. 97, Wellington, 1877.

[306] M. Buch, Die Wotiaken, p. 78, Helsingfors, 1882; Extract from Acta Soc. Scient. Fennicæ, vol. xii.

[306] M. Buch, Die Wotiaken, p. 78, Helsinki, 1882; Extract from Acta Soc. Scient. Fennicæ, vol. xii.

[307] The prototype of the true composite bow, characterised by the addition to it of a mass of moistened sinews which, on drying, make the bow curve up, must have had another form; it bore a resemblance probably to the bow of the Indian tribes of the north-west of America and of California, in which the sinew covering often goes beyond the body of the bow and hangs down at its two extremities.

[307] The prototype of the true composite bow, which is defined by the addition of damp sinews that, when dried, cause the bow to bend upwards, must have had a different design; it likely resembled the bows used by the Indigenous tribes of the north-western United States and California, where the sinew covering often extends past the body of the bow and hangs down at both ends.

The improved forms of the composite bow are only found on the Asiatic continent. The so-called “Tatar” or Mongolian bow, the Chinese “kung,” is chiefly composed of a piece of wood to which is fixed with bird-lime on the inner side a piece of horn, and on the outer side two layers of sinews covered with two layers of birch-bark. All other composite bows, Persian, Hindu, etc., are only complicated forms of this type, to which we may also refer the exceptional types of bow of the Lapp and Javanese, etc.

The advanced versions of the composite bow are only found on the Asian continent. The so-called “Tatar” or Mongolian bow, known as the Chinese “kung,” mainly consists of a piece of wood to which a piece of horn is attached on the inner side using bird-lime, and on the outer side, there are two layers of sinews covered with two layers of birch-bark. All other composite bows, including Persian, Hindu, and others, are just complicated variations of this design, which can also include the unique types of bows from the Lapp and Javanese, among others.

Accepting the view of General Pitt Rivers, loc. cit., we may say that the composite bow is not a more perfect weapon than the simple bow, and that it could only have had its origin in countries where the absence of very elastic varieties of wood make it necessary to seek in the superposition of various materials the elasticity required to augment the force of the weapon.

Accepting General Pitt Rivers' perspective, loc. cit., we can say that the composite bow is not a better weapon than the simple bow, and that it must have originated in regions where the lack of very elastic types of wood made it necessary to combine different materials to achieve the elasticity needed to increase the weapon's power.

[308] The substance used in the manufacture of the bow-string varies with the region; thus in the west of Africa it is always of rattan, as far as Butembo (country of the Ponondas), where strings of Crotalaria and bamboo begin to be used. (Weule, Ethnol. Notizblatt. Mus. Berlin, vol. i., No. 2, p. 39, 1895–96.)

[308] The material used to make bow strings varies by region; in western Africa, it's typically made from rattan, up to Butembo (the land of the Ponondas), where strings made from Crotalaria and bamboo start to appear. (Weule, Ethnol. Notizblatt. Mus. Berlin, vol. i., No. 2, p. 39, 1895–96.)

[309] E. Morse, “Ancient and Modern Methods of Arrow-release,” Essex Inst. Bull., Salem, Oct.-Dec., 1885.

[309] E. Morse, “Old and New Ways to Release Arrows,” Essex Inst. Bull., Salem, Oct.-Dec., 1885.

[310] With regard to greaves, see the note on p. 257.

[310] For information about greaves, refer to the note on p. 257.

[311] W. Hough, “Prim. Am. Armour,” Rep. U.S. Nat. Mus. for 1893, p. 625, Washington, 1895.

[311] W. Hough, “Prim. Am. Armour,” Rep. U.S. Nat. Mus. for 1893, p. 625, Washington, 1895.

[312] O. Mason, loc. cit., p. 364.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ O. Mason, loc. cit., p. 364.

[313] Letourneau, L’évolution du commerce, Paris, 1897.

[313] Letourneau, The Evolution of Trade, Paris, 1897.

[314] Kubary, Ethn. Beitr. Karolinen-Archipel., p. 1, Leyden, 1889–95.

[314] Kubary, Ethn. Beitr. Karolinen-Archipel., p. 1, Leyden, 1889–95.

[315] Balfour, Journ. Anthro. Inst., vol. xix., 1889, p. 54.

[315] Balfour, Journ. Anthro. Inst., vol. 19, 1889, p. 54.

[316] Nillsson, Ureinwohner Skand. Nordens, p. 37, Hamburg, 1866, i. Nachtr.

[316] Nillsson, Indigenous Peoples of Scandinavia. The North, p. 37, Hamburg, 1866, i. Addendum

[317] Cooper, The Mishmee Hills, London, 1873.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Cooper, The Mishmee Hills, London, 1873.

[318] It is the English who have given to this porcelain the name of cauri or cowry, which appears to be a corruption of the Sanscrit word Kaparda, Kapardika, whence Kavari in the Mahratta dialect; the Portuguese call it Bouji or Boughi; the inhabitants of the Maldives, boli; the Siamese, bios (which means shell in general in their language); the Arabs, wadda or vadaat.

[318] The English named this porcelain cauri or cowry, which seems to be a twisted version of the Sanskrit word Kaparda, Kapardika, leading to Kavari in the Mahratta dialect; the Portuguese call it Bouji or Boughi; the people of the Maldives refer to it as boli; the Siamese call it bios (which means shell in their language); and the Arabs use wadda or vadaat.

[319] Martens, “Über verschiedene Verwendungen von Conchylien,” Zeit. für Ethn., Berlin, 1872, vol. iv., p. 65; Andree, Ethnol. Parall., p. 233; Stearns, “Ethno-conchology,” Report U.S. Nat. Mus. for 1887.

[319] Martens, “On the Various Uses of Shells,” Journal of Ethnology, Berlin, 1872, vol. iv., p. 65; Andree, Ethnological Comparisons, p. 233; Stearns, “Ethno-conchology,” Report of the U.S. National Museum for 1887.

[320] In 1858, 2,938 piculs of cowry-shells (about 177 tons) were exported from Manilla, for the most part to England. In 1848, 59 12 tons of cowries were imported into Liverpool. At the time of the Dutch dominion of Ceylon, Amsterdam was the principal market of this trade; there were sold there in 1689 192,951 pounds (Dutch) of these shells; and in 1780 133,229 pounds (Johnston).

[320] In 1858, 2,938 piculs of cowry shells (about 177 tons) were exported from Manila, mostly to England. In 1848, 59 12 tons of cowries were imported into Liverpool. During the Dutch rule in Ceylon, Amsterdam was the main market for this trade; in 1689, 192,951 pounds (Dutch) of these shells were sold there, and in 1780, 133,229 pounds (Johnston).

[321] O. Mason, loc. cit., p. 327, and “Prim. Travel and Transport,” Smithsonian Report U.S. Nat. Mus. for 1894, p. 239, Washington, 1896.

[321] O. Mason, loc. cit., p. 327, and “Prim. Travel and Transport,” Smithsonian Report U.S. Nat. Mus. for 1894, p. 239, Washington, 1896.

[322] D. Anuchin, “Sani, etc.” (The sledge, the canoe, and horses in funeral rites, in Russian), Drévnosti (Antiquities), vol. xiv., Moscow, 1890.

[322] D. Anuchin, “Sani, etc.” (The sledge, the canoe, and horses in funeral rites, in Russian), Drévnosti (Antiquities), vol. xiv., Moscow, 1890.

[323] See the Assyrian bas-reliefs, Maspero, Hist. anc. de l’Orient, vol. ii., p. 628, Paris, 1897; O. Mason, Origins of Invention, p. 334; and Moser, A travers l’Asie Centrale, p. 220, Paris, 1885.

[323] Check out the Assyrian bas-reliefs in Maspero's Hist. anc. de l’Orient, vol. ii., p. 628, Paris, 1897; O. Mason's Origins of Invention, p. 334; and Moser's A travers l’Asie Centrale, p. 220, Paris, 1885.

[324] See for the history of classifications, Topinard, L’Anthr. gén., pp. 28–107, 264–349; Giglioli, Viaggio ... della Magenta, p. xxvii., Milan, 1875; and Keane, Ethnology, p. 162, Cambridge, 1896.

[324] For the history of classifications, see Topinard, L’Anthr. gén., pp. 28–107, 264–349; Giglioli, Viaggio ... della Magenta, p. xxvii., Milan, 1875; and Keane, Ethnology, p. 162, Cambridge, 1896.

Principal Races. Secondary Races.
(1) Caucasian. (1) Caucasian, (2) Alleghanian (Red Indian).
(2) Mongolian. (3) Hyperborean (Lapps), (4) Malay, (5) American
(except the Red Indian), (6) Mongolian, (7) Paraborean
(Eskimo), (8) Australian.
(3) Ethiopian. (9) Kafir, (10) Ethiopian, (11) Negro, (12) Melanesian.
(4) Hottentot. (13) Hottentot.

—Isid. Geoffroy Saint-Hilaire, “Classif. Anthropologique,” Mem. Soc. Anthr. Paris, vol. i., p. 125, 1861.

—Isid. Geoffroy Saint-Hilaire, “Classif. Anthropologique,” Mem. Soc. Anthr. Paris, vol. i., p. 125, 1861.

Principal Races. Secondary Races or “Modifications.”
(1) Negroid. (1) Bushmen, (2) Negro, (3) Papuan.
(2) Australoid. (4) Australians, (5) Black race of Deccan(Dravidians),
(6) Ethiopian (Hamite).
(3) Mongoloid. (7) Mongol, (8) Polynesian, (9) American,
(10) Eskimo, (11) Malay.
(4) Xanthochroid. (12) Xanthochroid of Northern Europe.
(5) Melanochroid. (13) Melanochroid of Southern Europe, (14) Melanochroid
of Asia (Arabs, Afghans, Hindus, etc.).

—T. Huxley, “Geogr. Distrib. of Mankind,” Journ. Ethnol. Soc. London, N.S., vol. ii., p. 404, map, 1870. The classification of Flower (Jl. Anthro. Inst., vol. xiv., 1885, p. 378) differs from that of Huxley in a few details only. This eminent anatomist grouped his eleven races and three sub-races under three “types”—Negro, Mongolian, and Caucasian.

—T. Huxley, “Geogr. Distrib. of Mankind,” Journ. Ethnol. Soc. London, N.S., vol. ii., p. 404, map, 1870. Flower’s classification (Jl. Anthro. Inst., vol. xiv., 1885, p. 378) differs from Huxley’s in just a few details. This notable anatomist categorized his eleven races and three sub-races into three “types”—Negro, Mongolian, and Caucasian.

[327] In the first edition of his classification (Rev. d’Anthr., 2nd series, vol. i., p. 509, Paris, 1878), Topinard admits sixteen races in three groups:—

[327] In the first edition of his classification (Rev. d’Anthr., 2nd series, vol. i., p. 509, Paris, 1878), Topinard recognizes sixteen races divided into three groups:—

(a) Straight-haired Races.—Eskimo, Red Indians, Mexico-Peruvians, Guarani-Caribs, Mongols.

(a) Straight-haired Races.—Eskimos, Native Americans, Mexicans, Peruvians, Guarani, Caribs, Mongols.

(b) Wavy or Frizzy-haired Races.—Fair-haired people of Europe (Xanthochroids of Huxley), dark-haired people of Europe and Semites (Melanochroids of Huxley), Australians and Indo-Abyssinians (Australoids of Huxley), Fulbé, Finns, Celto-Slavs, Turanians.

(b) Wavy or Frizzy-haired Races.—Light-haired people from Europe (Xanthochroids of Huxley), dark-haired people from Europe and Semitic groups (Melanochroids of Huxley), Australians, and Indo-Abyssinians (Australoids of Huxley), Fulbé, Finns, Celto-Slavs, Turanians.

(c) Woolly-haired Races.—Bushmen, Papuans, Kafirs, Negritoes.

(c) Woolly-haired Races.—Bushmen, Papuans, Kafirs, Negritos.

In the second edition, dating from 1885 (Elém. Anthr. gén., p. 502), we find nineteen races grouped under three heads:—

In the second edition, published in 1885 (Elém. Anthr. gén., p. 502), we see nineteen races categorized into three main groups:—

(a) White Leptorhine Races.—Anglo-Scandinavians, Finns (first type, Western), Mediterraneans, Semito-Egyptians, Lapono-Ligurians, Celto-Slavs.

(a) White Leptorhine Races.—Anglo-Scandinavians, Finns (first type, Western), Mediterraneans, Semito-Egyptians, Lapono-Ligurians, Celto-Slavs.

(b) Yellow Mesorhine Races.—Eskimo, Tehuelches, Polynesians, Red Indians, yellow peoples of Asia (including Finns of the second type), Guaranis (or South Americans, except the Tehuelches), Peruvians.

(b) Yellow Mesorhine Races.—Eskimo, Tehuelches, Polynesians, Native Americans, yellow-skinned people of Asia (including the second type of Finns), Guaranis (or South Americans, except the Tehuelches), Peruvians.

(c) Black Platyrhine Races.—Australians, Bushmen, Melanesians, Negroes, Tasmanians, Negritoes.

(c) Black Platyrhine Races.—Australians, Bushmen, Melanesians, Black people, Tasmanians, Negritos.

[328] Tribes (sub-divisions): (1) Lophocomi (woolly hair, tufted), comprising the following species (races): Papuans, Hottentots; (2) Eriocomi (woolly hair, growing uniformly and not in tufts): Kafirs and Negroes; (3) Euthycomi (straight hair): Australians, Malays, Mongols, Arctic people (Hyperboreans), Americans; (4) Euplocomi (curly hair): Dravidians, Nubians (Ethiopians), Mediterraneans (Aryans). (Haeckel, Natürl. Schöpfungsgesch., 7th ed., pp. 628 and 647, 1879; Fr. Mueller, Allg. Ethnogr., 2nd ed., pp. 17 and 19, Vienna, 1879.)

[328] Tribes (sub-divisions): (1) Lophocomi (woolly hair, tufted), which includes the following species (races): Papuans, Hottentots; (2) Eriocomi (woolly hair, growing uniformly and not in tufts): Kafirs and Negroes; (3) Euthycomi (straight hair): Australians, Malays, Mongols, Arctic people (Hyperboreans), Americans; (4) Euplocomi (curly hair): Dravidians, Nubians (Ethiopians), Mediterraneans (Aryans). (Haeckel, Natürl. Schöpfungsgesch., 7th ed., pp. 628 and 647, 1879; Fr. Mueller, Allg. Ethnogr., 2nd ed., pp. 17 and 19, Vienna, 1879.)

[329] “Trunks”: (1) Negro, with its “branches,” Indo-Melanesian, Australian, African, and Austro-African; (2) Yellow, with its “branches,” Siberian, Thibetan, Indo-Chinese, and American (Eskimo-Brazilian); (3) White, with its “branches,” Allophyle (Ainu, Miao-tse, Caucasian, Indonesian-Polynesian, etc.), Finnish, Semitic, and Aryan. “Mixed Races”: (1) Oceanians (Japanese, Polynesian, Malay); (2) Americans (of North, Central, and South America). (A. de Quatrefages, Hist. Gen. Races Hum., pp. 343 et seq., Paris, 1889.)

[329] “Trunks”: (1) Black, with its “branches,” Indo-Melanesian, Australian, African, and Austro-African; (2) Yellow, with its “branches,” Siberian, Tibetan, Indo-Chinese, and American (Eskimo-Brazilian); (3) White, with its “branches,” Allophyle (Ainu, Miao-tse, Caucasian, Indonesian-Polynesian, etc.), Finnish, Semitic, and Aryan. “Mixed Races”: (1) Oceanians (Japanese, Polynesian, Malay); (2) Americans (from North, Central, and South America). (A. de Quatrefages, Hist. Gen. Races Hum., pp. 343 et seq., Paris, 1889.)

[330] Deniker, “Essai d’une classification des races hum., etc.,” Paris, 1889 (Extr. du Bull. Soc. Anthr., vol. xii., p. 320). Cf. O. Mason, Smithson. Report for 1889, p. 602.

[330] Deniker, “Essay on a Classification of Human Races, etc.,” Paris, 1889 (Excerpt from Bulletin of the Anthropological Society, vol. xii., p. 320). See also O. Mason, Smithsonian Report for 1889, p. 602.

[331] Fig. 153 represents individuals of one tribe only, but belonging to the two sub-races mentioned. Fig. 151 represents the blending of the two types with Polynesian admixture.

[331] Fig. 153 shows people from one tribe only, but from the two mentioned sub-races. Fig. 151 shows the combination of the two types with Polynesian influence.

[332] E. Schmidt, “Die Anthropologie Indiens,” Globus, vol. 61, 1892, Nos. 2 and 3.

[332] E. Schmidt, “The Anthropology of India,” Globe, vol. 61, 1892, Nos. 2 and 3.

[333] Ehrenreich, loc. cit. (Urbewohner Brasil.), and Von den Steinen, loc. cit., describe numerous individuals with wavy or frizzy hair among the Bakairis, the Karayas, the Arawaks, etc. I myself have noticed Fuegians with frizzy or wavy hair (Hyades and Deniker, loc. cit.). See also Fig. 171, which represents the blending of the Central American and South American types, and portraits of the Goajires in Le Tour du Monde, 1898, 1st half year.

[333] Ehrenreich, loc. cit. (Urbewohner Brasil.), and Von den Steinen, loc. cit., describe many people with wavy or frizzy hair among the Bakairis, Karayas, Arawaks, and others. I have also seen Fuegians with frizzy or wavy hair (Hyades and Deniker, loc. cit.). See also Fig. 171, which shows the mixing of Central American and South American types, along with portraits of the Goajires in Le Tour du Monde, 1898, 1st half year.

[334] A. Barcena, “Arte ... lengua Toba,” Rev. Mus. de la Plata, vol. v., 1894, p. 142.

[334] A. Barcena, “Art ... Toba Language,” Rev. Mus. de la Plata, vol. v., 1894, p. 142.

[335] Bain, Census of India, 1891. Calcutta, 1896.

[335] Bain, Census of India, 1891. Kolkata, 1896.

[336] Each continent in fact contains distinct populations, with the exception, however, of Asia, to which belongs half a score of peoples, of whom part live outside its borders: in America (Eskimo), Oceania (Malays and Negritoes), Africa (Arabs), Europe (Samoyeds, Vogule-Ostiaks, Tatars, Kirghiz, Kalmuks, Caucasians, Armenians, and Russians), or in other parts of the world (Greeks, Jews, Gypsies).

[336] Each continent actually has distinct populations, except for Asia, which is home to a variety of groups, some of whom live outside its borders: in America (Eskimos), Oceania (Malays and Negritos), Africa (Arabs), Europe (Samoyeds, Vogul-Ostiaks, Tatars, Kyrgyz, Kalmyks, Caucasians, Armenians, and Russians), or in other parts of the world (Greeks, Jews, Gypsies).

[337] See for details, De Mortillet, Le Préhistorique, chap. iii., Paris, 1883; Stirrup, “So-called Worked Flints of Thenay,” Journ. Anthr. Inst., vol. xiv., 1885, p. 289, and Rev. d’Anthr., 1885; Cartailhac, La France Préhistorique, p. 35, Paris, 1889; Newton, “The Evidence for the Existence of Man in the Tertiary Period,” Proceed. Geolog. Assoc., vol. xv., London, 1897; Salomon Reinach, Antiquités Nationales, Descrip. Musée St.-Germain, vol. i., p. 96, Paris, 1889,—this work contains a mass of prehistoric information and a copious bibliography.

[337] For more information, see De Mortillet, Le Préhistorique, chap. iii., Paris, 1883; Stirrup, “So-called Worked Flints of Thenay,” Journ. Anthr. Inst., vol. xiv., 1885, p. 289, and Rev. d’Anthr., 1885; Cartailhac, La France Préhistorique, p. 35, Paris, 1889; Newton, “The Evidence for the Existence of Man in the Tertiary Period,” Proceed. Geolog. Assoc., vol. xv., London, 1897; Salomon Reinach, Antiquités Nationales, Descrip. Musée St.-Germain, vol. i., p. 96, Paris, 1889,—this work includes a wealth of prehistoric information and a detailed bibliography.

[338] The so-called tertiary skeleton of Castenedolo, near Brescia, discovered by Ragazonni, is an “odd fact,” an “incomplete observation,” to use the happy phrase of Marcellin Boule, and cannot be taken into account.

[338] The so-called tertiary skeleton of Castenedolo, near Brescia, discovered by Ragazonni, is an “odd fact,” an “incomplete observation,” to use the fitting phrase of Marcellin Boule, and cannot be considered valid.

[339] J. Geikie, Great Ice Age, London, 1894; Marcellin Boule, “Paléontol. stratigr. de l’Homme,” Rev. d’Anthr., Paris, 1888.

[339] J. Geikie, Great Ice Age, London, 1894; Marcellin Boule, “Paleontological Stratigraphy of Man,” Journal of Anthropology, Paris, 1888.

[340] The extreme limit of the spread of glaciers to the south at that period may be indicated by a line which would pass near to Bristol, London, Rotterdam, Cologne, Hanover, Dresden, Cracow, Lemberg; then would go round Kief on the south, Orel on the north, and rise again (on the south of Saratov) up to Nijni-Novgorod, Viatka, the upper valley of the Kama, to blend with the line of the watershed of this river and the Pechora (see Map 1.).

[340] The farthest point of glacier expansion to the south during that time can be represented by a line that would pass near Bristol, London, Rotterdam, Cologne, Hanover, Dresden, Cracow, and Lemberg; then it would curve around Kief to the south, Orel to the north, and rise again (south of Saratov) up to Nijni-Novgorod, Viatka, the upper valley of the Kama, blending with the watershed line of this river and the Pechora (see Map 1.).

[341] See G. and A. de Mortillet, Musée préhistorique, Paris, pl. vi. to ix.; J. Evans, Ancient Stone Implements, 2nd ed., chap. xxiii., London, 1897.

[341] See G. and A. de Mortillet, Prehistoric Museum, Paris, pl. vi. to ix.; J. Evans, Ancient Stone Tools, 2nd ed., chap. xxiii., London, 1897.

[342] Frequently these implements have been found, in sufficiently deep beds, beside bones of the straight-tusked elephant (Elephas antiquus), the smooth-skinned, two-horned rhinoceros (Rhinoceros Merckii), the great hippopotamus—that is to say, of animals characteristic of the first interglacial period. As these species are allied to the elephant, the rhinoceros, and the hippopotamus of Africa of the present day, the hypothesis has been propounded that they came from this continent, utilising the numerous isthmuses then existing (between Gibraltar and Morocco, between Sicily, Malta and Tunis, etc.). Man, the maker of the Chellean implements, followed, it is supposed, in their steps. One might argue with equal force that the migration took place in the opposite direction.

[342] These tools have often been found buried deep alongside the bones of the straight-tusked elephant (Elephas antiquus), the smooth-skinned, two-horned rhinoceros (Rhinoceros Merckii), and the great hippopotamus—all animals typical of the first interglacial period. Since these species are related to the elephants, rhinoceroses, and hippopotamuses we see in Africa today, it's been suggested that they originated from that continent, taking advantage of the many land bridges that existed at the time (like between Gibraltar and Morocco, between Sicily, Malta, and Tunisia, etc.). It is thought that humans, the creators of the Chellean tools, followed in their wake. One could just as easily argue that the migration happened in the opposite direction.

[343] Woldrich (after Nehring), Mit. Anthr. Gesell., vol. xi., p. 187, Vienna.

[343] Woldrich (after Nehring), Mit. Anthr. Gesell., vol. xi., p. 187, Vienna.

[344] In England it is sometimes designated the “cave period” to distinguish it from the Chellean, called “River-drift” period, but this term is open to objection; thus, for example, in the celebrated Kent cavern there have been found at the bottom implements of the Chellean type identical with certain objects of the River-drift. (See the works already quoted, as well as Windle, Life in Early Britain, p. 26, London, 1897.)

[344] In England, it’s sometimes referred to as the “cave period” to differentiate it from the Chellean, known as the “River-drift” period, but this term has its drawbacks; for instance, in the famous Kent cavern, tools of the Chellean type have been found at the bottom that are identical to certain objects from the River-drift. (See the previously mentioned works, as well as Windle, Life in Early Britain, p. 26, London, 1897.)

[345] According to G. de Mortillet, Mousterian industry also differs from the Chellean in regard to technique. In the Chellean period what is utilised is the core or nucleus of the stone cut right round on both sides; while in the Mousterian period what are fashioned are the splinters struck off from this core, which are trimmed especially on one face, the inner face remaining smooth and showing the trace of its origin under the form of a “cone” or “bulb of percussion,” which corresponds to a hollow in the block from which the splinter has been dislodged. However, implements recalling at first sight the “knuckle-duster,” but which differ from it by their amygdaloidal form and their straight edges (Saint-Acheul type), are still to be found at this period.

[345] According to G. de Mortillet, Mousterian tools differ from Chellean tools in terms of technique. During the Chellean period, the core or nucleus of the stone is shaped around both sides; whereas in the Mousterian period, the tools are made from chips struck off this core, which are shaped mainly on one side, while the inner side stays smooth and shows signs of its origin in the form of a "cone" or "bulb of percussion," reflecting a hollow in the block from which the chip was removed. However, tools that might look like "knuckle-dusters" at first glance, but differ with their almond shape and straight edges (Saint-Acheul type), can still be found during this period.

[346] In G. de Morlillet’s classification a yet additional period is inserted between the Mousterian and the Magdalenian. This is the Solutrian, characterised by finely cut heads (spear or arrow?) in the shape of a laurel leaf. But the zone in which these implements are met with is limited to certain regions of the south and west of France only. For many palæethnographers this is a “facies local” of the Magdalenian period.

[346] In G. de Morlillet’s classification, an additional period is added between the Mousterian and the Magdalenian. This is the Solutrian, which is characterized by finely crafted heads (for a spear or arrow?) shaped like a laurel leaf. However, the areas where these tools are found are limited to certain regions in the south and west of France. For many paleoanthropologists, this is considered a “local variant” of the Magdalenian period.

[347] There may be added to the masterpieces here reproduced the famous representation of the mammoth carved on the tusk of this animal itself by a man of La Madeleine (Dordogne), discovered and described by Lartet; and by Boyd Dawkins, Early Man in Brit., p. 105, London, 1880. See Cartailhac, loc. cit., p. 72.

[347] In addition to the masterpieces featured here, there's the well-known image of the mammoth carved on its own tusk by a person from La Madeleine (Dordogne), which was discovered and described by Lartet and Boyd Dawkins, Early Man in Brit., p. 105, London, 1880. See Cartailhac, loc. cit., p. 72.

[348] After the second interglacial period the “Great Baltic Glacier” still covered the Scandinavian peninsula, with the exception of its southern part (Gothland), extended over the emerged bottom of the Baltic, over nearly the whole of Finland, and spreading round Gothland invaded the east coast of Denmark and the littoral of Germany to the east of Jutland. After the retreat of this glacier and a series of changes in the surface of the ground (a sinking which brought the Baltic into communication with the North Sea by means of the Strait of Svealand, followed by the upheaval which cut off that communication and made of the Baltic the Ancylus Lake of the geologists), the climate became milder in these parts, and the trees of Central Europe, first the pines, then the oaks and birches, penetrated into Denmark and Gothland, while in the north of Sweden there were two other new glacier movements. (Gerard de Geer, Om Skandinavens Geografiska Utveckling, Stockholm, 1897; G. Andersson, Geschichte Végétat. Schwed., Leipzig, 1896.)

[348] After the second interglacial period, the “Great Baltic Glacier” still covered the Scandinavian peninsula, except for the southern part (Gothland). It extended over the emerged floor of the Baltic, nearly all of Finland, and around Gothland, invaded the east coast of Denmark and the coastline of Germany to the east of Jutland. After this glacier retreated and a series of changes to the land's surface occurred (a sinking that allowed the Baltic to connect with the North Sea via the Strait of Svealand, followed by a rise that cut off that connection and turned the Baltic into the Ancylus Lake described by geologists), the climate in these areas warmed. Trees from Central Europe, first pines, then oaks and birches, began to spread into Denmark and Gothland, while in northern Sweden, there were two additional glacier movements. (Gerard de Geer, Om Skandinavens Geografiska Utveckling, Stockholm, 1897; G. Andersson, Geschichte Végétat. Schwed., Leipzig, 1896.)

[349] This supposition is invalidated by this fact among others, that, in the neolithic “shell heaps” of Scandinavia no remains of the reindeer are found.

[349] This assumption is proven wrong by several facts, including the finding that there are no reindeer remains in the Neolithic "shell heaps" of Scandinavia.

[350] As witnessed by the diggings of Piette at Mas d’Azil, see p. 163.

[350] As shown by Piette's excavations at Mas d’Azil, see p. 163.

[351] There was yet to take place another sinking of the ground which established a communication, by means of the Sound, between the “Ancylus Lake” of the preceding period with the North Sea, transforming it thus into a very salt and warm sea called, from the principal fossil which reveals to us its existence, the Littorina Sea.

[351] There was still to come another sinking of the land that created a connection, through the Sound, between the “Ancylus Lake” of the earlier period and the North Sea, turning it into a very salty and warm sea known, based on the main fossil that indicates its existence, as the Littorina Sea.

[352] Nehring, Zeitschr. f. Ethnol., 1895, No. 6 (Verh., pp. 425 and 573); Salomon Reinach, L’Anthropologie, 1897, p. 53; P. Salmon, Races hum. préhist., p. 9, Paris, 1888; Cartailhac, loc. cit., p. 327; M. Boule, loc. cit., p. 679; G. de Mortillet, La Format. de la Nat. Franc., p. 289.

[352] Nehring, Journal of Ethnology, 1895, No. 6 (Proceedings, pp. 425 and 573); Salomon Reinach, Anthropology, 1897, p. 53; P. Salmon, Prehistoric Human Races, p. 9, Paris, 1888; Cartailhac, op. cit., p. 327; M. Boule, op. cit., p. 679; G. de Mortillet, The Formation of Natural France, p. 289.

[353] Out of forty-six skulls to which the title “quaternary” has been applied, I have only been able, after a careful examination of all evidence, to recognise as such the ten to fifteen following skulls. For the age of the mammoth or “Mousterian” period, seven skulls certainly quaternary: two skulls from Spy (Belgium), and those from Egisheim (Alsace), Olmo (Val d’Arno, Italy), Bury St. Edmunds (England), Podbaba (Bohemia), and Predmost (Moravia). Perhaps we should refer to this period the skulls which cannot be definitely traced to a certain alluvial bed, like those of Neanderthal (Rhenish Prussia), Denise (Auvergne), Marcilly-sur-Eure (Eure), La Truchère (Saône), and Tilbury (near London). As to the skulls of the “reindeer” age (Magdalenian period), three only are known which are not called in question: these are the skulls of Laugerie-Basse, Chancelade (Dordogne), and Sordes (Landes). Perhaps we should include among them the skulls of uncertain date, like those of Bruniquel, Engis, Sargels (near Larzac), and perhaps others which certain authorities classify as belonging to mesolithic and even neolithic times: the three skulls of Cro-Magnon (Dordogne); the six so-called Mentone skulls (Baoussé-Roussé, Maritime Alps); the skulls of the Trou de Frontal at Furfooz (Belgium), of Solutré (Valley of the Saône), Bohuslan (near Stangenas, Sweden), Clichy and Grenelle (Paris). And, lastly, we have no data on which to form an opinion as to the date of the skulls of Canstatt (Wurtemberg), Maëstricht (Holland), Gibraltar, Brux (Bohemia), Lhar, Nagy-Sap (Hungary), Schebichowitz (Bohemia), Valle do Areciro (Portugal), etc. Cf. S. Reinach, loc. cit. (Antiquités Nation.), p. 134; and Hervé, Rev. École Anthr., p. 208, Paris, 1892.

[353] Out of forty-six skulls labeled as “quaternary,” I have only been able to confirm, after thoroughly examining all evidence, that the following ten to fifteen skulls are definitely from that period. For the age of the mammoth or “Mousterian” period, there are seven skulls that are certainly quaternary: two from Spy (Belgium) and the ones from Egisheim (Alsace), Olmo (Val d’Arno, Italy), Bury St. Edmunds (England), Podbaba (Bohemia), and Predmost (Moravia). We might also include skulls that can't be clearly traced to a specific alluvial layer, such as the ones from Neanderthal (Rhenish Prussia), Denise (Auvergne), Marcilly-sur-Eure (Eure), La Truchère (Saône), and Tilbury (near London). Regarding the skulls from the “reindeer” age (Magdalenian period), only three are well-established: the skulls from Laugerie-Basse, Chancelade (Dordogne), and Sordes (Landes). We may also consider skulls of uncertain age, like those from Bruniquel, Engis, Sargels (near Larzac), and possibly others that some experts classify as mesolithic or even neolithic: the three skulls of Cro-Magnon (Dordogne); the six so-called Mentone skulls (Baoussé-Roussé, Maritime Alps); the skulls from the Trou de Frontal at Furfooz (Belgium), Solutré (Valley of the Saône), Bohuslan (near Stangenas, Sweden), Clichy, and Grenelle (Paris). Lastly, we have no information to form an opinion about the age of the skulls from Canstatt (Wurtemberg), Maëstricht (Holland), Gibraltar, Brux (Bohemia), Lhar, Nagy-Sap (Hungary), Schebichowitz (Bohemia), Valle do Areciro (Portugal), etc. Cf. S. Reinach, loc. cit. (Antiquités Nation.), p. 134; and Hervé, Rev. École Anthr., p. 208, Paris, 1892.

[354] The instances of the skull of Saint Mensuy, an Irish bishop, and others, are universally known. See on this subject, Godron, Mem. Acad. Stanislas, p. 50, Nancy, 1884; Worthington Smith, Man, the Primeval Savage, p. 38, London, 1893; and W. Borlase, The Dolmens of Ireland, vol. iii., p. 922, London, 1897.

[354] The cases of the skull of Saint Mensuy, an Irish bishop, and others, are widely recognized. For more on this topic, see Godron, Mem. Acad. Stanislas, p. 50, Nancy, 1884; Worthington Smith, Man, the Primeval Savage, p. 38, London, 1893; and W. Borlase, The Dolmens of Ireland, vol. iii., p. 922, London, 1897.

[355] De Quatrefages and Hamy, Cr. Ethn., p. 44; De Quatrefages, Hist. Gén. Races Hum., vol. i., p. 67; Hervé, Rev. École. Anthr., Paris, 1893, p. 173; 1894, p. 105; 1896, p. 97.

[355] De Quatrefages and Hamy, Cr. Ethn., p. 44; De Quatrefages, Hist. Gén. Races Hum., vol. i., p. 67; Hervé, Rev. École. Anthr., Paris, 1893, p. 173; 1894, p. 105; 1896, p. 97.

[356] Hervé, “Les brachycéphales néolith.,” Rev. École. Anthr., Paris, 1894, p. 393; and 1895, p. 18.

[356] Hervé, “Neolithic Brachycephalics,” Journal of the School of Anthropology, Paris, 1894, p. 393; and 1895, p. 18.

[357] J. Beddoe, The Races of Britain, Bristol-London, 1885, and “Hist. de l’indice ceph. dans les îles Britan.,” L’Anthropol., 1894, p. 513; Windle, loc. cit., p. 9; Inostrantsev, Doïstoritcheskii, etc. (Prehistor. Man of Ladoga), St. Petersburg, 1882, fig. and pl.

[357] J. Beddoe, The Races of Britain, Bristol-London, 1885, and “Hist. de l’indice ceph. dans les îles Britan.,” L’Anthropol., 1894, p. 513; Windle, loc. cit., p. 9; Inostrantsev, Doïstoritcheskii, etc. (Prehistor. Man of Ladoga), St. Petersburg, 1882, fig. and pl.

[358] Montelius, Temps. préhist. en Suède, p. 41, Paris, 1895; Cartailhac, Âges préhist. Esp. et Portug., p. 305, Paris, 1886; H. and S. Siret, Prem. âges du métal dans le sud-est de l’Esp., 3rd part (by V. Jacques), Antwerp, 1887.

[358] Montelius, Prehistoric Times in Sweden, p. 41, Paris, 1895; Cartailhac, Prehistoric Ages of Spain and Portugal, p. 305, Paris, 1886; H. and S. Siret, Early Ages of Metal in Southeast Spain, 3rd part (by V. Jacques), Antwerp, 1887.

[359] S. Reinach, “Mirage oriental,” L’Anthropologie, 1894, pp. 539 and 699; A. Evans, “Eastern Question,” Rep. Brit. Assoc., 1896, p. 911; Montelius, loc. cit.; Much, “Die Kupferzeit in Europa,” Jena, 1893.

[359] S. Reinach, “Oriental Mirage,” L’Anthropologie, 1894, pp. 539 and 699; A. Evans, “Eastern Question,” Rep. Brit. Assoc., 1896, p. 911; Montelius, loc. cit.; Much, “The Copper Age in Europe,” Jena, 1893.

[360] A. Evans, loc. cit., “Eastern Question”; Sal. Reinach, L’Anthropol., 1893, p. 731; Montelius, “The Tyrrhenians, etc.,” Jour. Anthr. Inst., vol. xxvi., 1897, p. 254, pl.; and “Pre-classic Chronology in Greece,” ibid., p. 261.

[360] A. Evans, loc. cit., “Eastern Question”; Sal. Reinach, L’Anthropol., 1893, p. 731; Montelius, “The Tyrrhenians, etc.,” Jour. Anthr. Inst., vol. xxvi., 1897, p. 254, pl.; and “Pre-classic Chronology in Greece,” ibid., p. 261.

[361] This term, used first in Germany, is accepted by almost all men of science. The La Tène period corresponds pretty nearly with the “âge Marnien” of French archæologists and the late Celtic of English archæologists. Cf. M. Hoernes, Urgesch. d. Mensch., chaps. viii. and ix., Vienna, 1892.

[361] This term, which was first used in Germany, is commonly accepted by nearly all scientists. The La Tène period is roughly equivalent to the “âge Marnien” of French archaeologists and the late Celtic of English archaeologists. See M. Hoernes, Urgesch. d. Mensch., chaps. viii. and ix., Vienna, 1892.

[362] Together with the Sards, the Turses are the only European peoples of which the Egyptian inscriptions anterior to the thirteenth century B.C. make mention, under the name of Shordana and Thursana (W. Max Müller, Europa und Asien, 1894).

[362] Along with the Sards, the Turses are the only European peoples mentioned in Egyptian inscriptions from before the thirteenth century B.C. under the names Shordana and Thursana (W. Max Müller, Europa und Asien, 1894).

[363] D’Arbois de Jubainville, Les Anciens Habitants de l’Europe, new ed., vol. i., p. 201, Paris.

[363] D’Arbois de Jubainville, The Ancient Inhabitants of Europe, new ed., vol. i., p. 201, Paris.

[364] See for this history, Isaac Taylor, The Origin of the Aryans, chap. i., London, 1890, and S. Reinach, L’origine des Aryens, Paris, 1892.

[364] For this history, see Isaac Taylor, The Origin of the Aryans, chapter 1, London, 1890, and S. Reinach, L’origine des Aryens, Paris, 1892.

[365] Th. Poesche, Die Arier, Jena, 1878; Penka, Die Herkunft der Arier, Vienna, 1886. This identification has been turned to account by several men of science, especially by O. Ammon (loc. cit.) in Germany and V. de Lapouge (Sélections sociales, Paris, 1895) in France, in the construction of somewhat bold sociological theories.

[365] Th. Poesche, Die Arier, Jena, 1878; Penka, Die Herkunft der Arier, Vienna, 1886. This identification has been utilized by several scientists, particularly O. Ammon (loc. cit.) in Germany and V. de Lapouge (Sélections sociales, Paris, 1895) in France, in the development of some rather bold sociological theories.

[366] Osc. Schrader, Sprachvergl. u. Urgesch., 2nd ed., Jena, 1890.

[366] Osc. Schrader, Sprachvergl. u. Urgesch., 2nd ed., Jena, 1890.

[367] According to Hirt, “Die Urheimat ... d. Indogermanen,” Geogr. Zeitsch., vol. i., p. 649, Leipzig, 1895, the home of dispersion of the primitive Aryan language would be found to the north of the Carpathians, in the Letto-Lithuanian region. From this point two linguistic streams would start, flowing round the mountains to the west and east; the western stream, after spreading over Germany (Teutonic languages), left behind them the Celtic languages in the upper valley of the Danube, and filtered through on the one side into Italy (Latin languages), on the other side into Illyria, Albania, and Greece (Helleno-Illyrian languages). The eastern stream formed the Slav languages in the plains traversed by the Dnieper, then spread by way of the Caucasus into Asia (Iranian languages and Sanscrit). In this way we can account, on the one hand, for the less and less marked relationship between the different Aryan languages of the present day and the common primitive dialect, and, on the other hand, the diversity between the two groups of Aryan languages, western and eastern.

[367] According to Hirt, “Die Urheimat ... d. Indogermanen,” Geogr. Zeitsch., vol. i., p. 649, Leipzig, 1895, the original homeland of the early Aryan language would be located north of the Carpathians, in the Letto-Lithuanian area. From there, two linguistic paths would emerge, flowing around the mountains to the west and east; the western path, after spreading across Germany (Teutonic languages), left behind the Celtic languages in the upper Danube Valley, and filtered into Italy (Latin languages) on one side, and into Illyria, Albania, and Greece (Helleno-Illyrian languages) on the other side. The eastern path gave rise to the Slavic languages in the plains along the Dnieper, then spread through the Caucasus into Asia (Iranian languages and Sanskrit). This explains, on one hand, the increasingly weaker connection between the various Aryan languages today and the common early dialect, and, on the other hand, the diversity between the two groups of Aryan languages, western and eastern.

[368] A. Bertrand and S. Reinach, Les Celtes dans la vallée du Pô, etc., Paris, 1894.

[368] A. Bertrand and S. Reinach, The Celts in the Po Valley, etc., Paris, 1894.

[369] D’Arbois de Jubainville, loc. cit., vol. ii., p. 297.

[369] D’Arbois de Jubainville, loc. cit., vol. ii., p. 297.

[370] For particulars see J. Deniker, “Les Races de l’Europe,” Bull. Soc. d’Anthropol., 1897, pp. 189 and 291; L’Anthropologie, 1898, p. 113 (with map); and “Les Races de l’Europe,” first part, L’indice Céphal., Paris, 1899 (coloured map). Cf. Ripley, “Racial Geography of Europe,” Appleton’s Popular Science Monthly, New York, for the years 1897, 1898, and 1899.

[370] For details, see J. Deniker, “The Races of Europe,” Bull. Soc. d’Anthropol., 1897, pp. 189 and 291; L’Anthropologie, 1898, p. 113 (with map); and “The Races of Europe,” first part, L’indice Céphal., Paris, 1899 (colored map). See also Ripley, “Racial Geography of Europe,” Appleton’s Popular Science Monthly, New York, for the years 1897, 1898, and 1899.

[371] See in Appendices I. to III. the figures relative to the different populations of Europe, taken from the works referred to by me in the previous note.

[371] Check out Appendices I. to III. for the statistics on the various populations of Europe, sourced from the works I mentioned in the previous note.

[372] Sergi, Origine ... Stirpe Mediterranea, Rome, 1895.

[372] Sergi, Origine ... Stirpe Mediterranea, Rome, 1895.

[373] Houzé, “Caract. phys. des races européennes,” Bull. Soc. Anthro., Brussels, vol. ii., 1883, 1st part.

[373] Houzé, “Physical Characteristics of European Races,” Bulletin of the Society of Anthropology, Brussels, vol. ii., 1883, 1st part.

[374] R. Collignon, Bull. Soc. Anthro., Paris, 1883, p. 463, and L’Anthropologie, 1890, No. 2.

[374] R. Collignon, Bull. Soc. Anthro., Paris, 1883, p. 463, and L’Anthropologie, 1890, No. 2.

[375] Ch. de Tourtoulon and Bringuier, “Limite ... de la langue d’oc, etc.,” Arch. Miss. Sc. Paris, 1876. Cf. Rev. École Anthr. Paris, 1891, p. 218.

[375] Ch. de Tourtoulon and Bringuier, “Limite ... de la langue d’oc, etc.,” Arch. Miss. Sc. Paris, 1876. Cf. Rev. École Anthr. Paris, 1891, p. 218.

[376] Province of Namur, nearly the whole of the provinces of Hainault, Liège, and Luxemburg, as well as the southern part of Brabant. Cf. Bremer, Nationalit. und Sprache in Belgien (with map), Stuttgart, 1887.

[376] Province of Namur, almost all of Hainault, Liège, and Luxembourg, along with the southern part of Brabant. See Bremer, Nationalit. und Sprache in Belgien (with map), Stuttgart, 1887.

[377] H. Gaidoz, “Die französisch. Thäler Piemonts,” Globus, p. 59, 1891, with map; Sachier, Le Français et le Provençal (Fr. trans. by Monet, Paris, 1891).

[377] H. Gaidoz, “The French Valleys of Piedmont,” Globus, p. 59, 1891, with map; Sachier, The French and the Provençal (Fr. trans. by Monet, Paris, 1891).

[378] F. Pullé, “Profilo antr. dell’ Italia,” Archivo. p. Antr., 1898 (with maps).

[378] F. Pullé, “Anthropological Profile of Italy,” Archive. p. Anthrop., 1898 (with maps).

[379] Dr. N. Manolescu, Igiena Teranului (Hygiene of the Rumanian peasant, an ethnographical inquiry), Bucharest, 1895; S. Weigand, Die Aromunen, vol. i., Leipzig, 1895 (with plates and maps).

[379] Dr. N. Manolescu, Igiena Teranului (Hygiene of the Romanian peasant, an ethnographic study), Bucharest, 1895; S. Weigand, Die Aromunen, vol. i., Leipzig, 1895 (with illustrations and maps).

[380] A. J. Ellis, English Dialects, London, 1890, two maps; and other publications of the English Dialect Society (1873–98).

[380] A. J. Ellis, English Dialects, London, 1890, two maps; and other publications of the English Dialect Society (1873–98).

[381] Almost all the two Flanders, the half to the north of Brabant, the provinces of Antwerp and of Limbourg. Cf. Bremer, loc. cit.

[381] Almost all of the two Flanders, the northern part of Brabant, the provinces of Antwerp and Limburg. See Bremer, loc. cit.

[382] R. Andree, “Gränzen Niederd. Sprache,” Globus, 1891, vol. lix., No. 2.

[382] R. Andree, “Gränzen Niederd. Sprache,” Globus, 1891, vol. lix., No. 2.

[383] See Langhans, Deutsch. Kolon. Atlas, maps Nos. 3 to 7. For a comprehensive view of the Germans generally, see Ranke, Der Mensch., vol. ii. (Somat., Archeol.), and E. H. Meyer, “Deutsche Volkskunde” (Ethnography, Folk-lore), Strassburg, 1898; for the Austrians: Oester.-Ung. Monarchie, vols. iv. and vi., Vienna, 1886–89; and for the Bavarians, Beiträge z. Anthr., etc., Bayerns, Munich (1876–99).

[383] See Langhans, Deutsch. Kolon. Atlas, maps Nos. 3 to 7. For a comprehensive view of the Germans in general, see Ranke, Der Mensch., vol. ii. (Somat., Archeol.), and E. H. Meyer, “Deutsche Volkskunde” (Ethnography, Folk-lore), Strassburg, 1898; for the Austrians: Oester.-Ung. Monarchie, vols. iv. and vi., Vienna, 1886–89; and for the Bavarians, Beiträge z. Anthr., etc., Bayerns, Munich (1876–99).

[384] See for the Slav languages: A. Pypine and Spassovitch, Istoria, etc. (Hist. of Slavonic Literatures), St. Petersburg, 1879, 2 vols., of which there is a translation of the first in French by S. Denis (1881); for a slight general view: F. von Hellwand, Die Welt der Slaven, Berlin, 1890; Zograf, Les peuples de la Russie, Moscow (1895); and Oester-Hung. Monarch., vols. ix., xi., xiv., xv. (1891–96); for ethnogeny and archæology: Lubor Niederle, O Puvodu Slovanu (Origin of the Slavs), Prague, 1897 (in Czech); and Cheloviechestvo, etc. (Prehistoric Man), Russian translation, St. Petersburg, 1898.

[384] For the Slavic languages, see A. Pypine and Spassovitch, Istoria, etc. (History of Slavic Literatures), St. Petersburg, 1879, 2 vols., with the first volume translated into French by S. Denis (1881); for a brief overview: F. von Hellwand, Die Welt der Slaven, Berlin, 1890; Zograf, Les peuples de la Russie, Moscow (1895); and Oester-Hung. Monarch., vols. ix., xi., xiv., xv. (1891–96); for ethnogenesis and archaeology: Lubor Niederle, O Puvodu Slovanu (Origin of the Slavs), Prague, 1897 (in Czech); and Cheloviechestvo, etc. (Prehistoric Man), Russian translation, St. Petersburg, 1898.

[385] Beddoe, “The Kelts of Ireland,” Journ. of Anthropol., 1871, p. 117 (map); Broca, “La Question Celtique,” Bull. Soc. Anthro. Paris, 1873, pp. 313 and 247; Havelock Ellis, “The Men of Cornwall,” New Century Review, 1897, Nos. 4 and 5.

[385] Beddoe, “The Kelts of Ireland,” Journal of Anthropology, 1871, p. 117 (map); Broca, “The Celtic Question,” Bulletin of the Society of Anthropology, Paris, 1873, pp. 313 and 247; Havelock Ellis, “The Men of Cornwall,” New Century Review, 1897, Nos. 4 and 5.

[386] T. Aranzadi, El pueblo Escalduna, San Sebastian, 1889 (maps); R. Collignon, “La Race Basque,” L’Anthropologie, vol. v., 1894, p. 276.

[386] T. Aranzadi, El pueblo Escalduna, San Sebastián, 1889 (maps); R. Collignon, “The Basque Race,” L’Anthropologie, vol. v., 1894, p. 276.

[387] Oester.-Ung. Monarchie, vols. v., ix., and xii., 1888–93.

[387] Austro-Hungarian Monarchy, vols. v., ix., and xii., 1888–93.

[388] Retzius, Finska Kranier, Stockholm, 1878, pl. (with French summary); see also publications of the Finno-Ugrian Society of Helsingfors, etc.

[388] Retzius, Finska Kranier, Stockholm, 1878, pl. (with French summary); see also publications of the Finno-Ugrian Society of Helsinki, etc.

[389] S. Sommier, Un Estate in Siberia, Florence, 1885; and Archivo p. l’Antro., vols. xvii. and xix. (1887–89); Maïnof, Resooltaty, etc. (Anthr. and Jurid. Studies of the Mordva); “Zapiski,” Russian Geog. Socy. (Ethnog. Sec.), vols. xi. and xiv. (1883–85); works of Smirnov on the Mordva, Cheremiss, etc., Fr. trans. by Boyer (Paris, 1897–98).

[389] S. Sommier, A Summer in Siberia, Florence, 1885; and Archive for the Cave, vols. xvii. and xix. (1887–89); Maïnof, Results, etc. (Anthropological and Juridical Studies of the Mordva); “Notes,” Russian Geographical Society (Ethnographical Section), vols. xi. and xiv. (1883–85); works of Smirnov on the Mordva, Cheremiss, etc., French translation by Boyer (Paris, 1897–98).

[390] P. Mantegazza and Sommier, Studii antr. sui Lapponi, Turin, 1880 (phot. pl.); “Notes on the Lapps,” by Prince R. Bonaparte, Keane, and Garson, Jour. Anthr. Inst., vol. xv., 1885, pp. 210 et seq.; Montefiore, “The Samoyeds,” Jour. Anthr. Inst., vol. xxiv., 1895, p. 396; Zograf, “Esquisse des Samoyedes,” Izviestia (Bull.) Soc. Friends. Nat. Sc., Moscow, vol. xxxi., 1878–79, supl. (analysed in the Rev. d’Anthr., 1881); Sommier, loc. cit. (analysed Rev. d’Ethnogr.), Paris, 1889.

[390] P. Mantegazza and Sommier, Studies on the Lapps, Turin, 1880 (photo plates); “Notes on the Lapps,” by Prince R. Bonaparte, Keane, and Garson, Journal of the Anthropological Institute, vol. xv., 1885, pp. 210 et seq.; Montefiore, “The Samoyeds,” Journal of the Anthropological Institute, vol. xxiv., 1895, p. 396; Zograf, “Outline of the Samoyeds,” Izviestia (Bulletin) Society of Natural Sciences Friends, Moscow, vol. xxxi., 1878–79, supplementary (analyzed in the Review of Anthropology, 1881); Sommier, loc. cit. (analyzed in Review of Ethnography), Paris, 1889.

[391] R. Erckert, Der Kaukasus u. Seine Völker, Leipzig, 1885 (with map); E. Chantre, Rech. Anthropol., dans le Caucase, Lyons, 1885–87, 4th vol., and atlas; Pantiukhof, “Obser. Anthr. au Caucase,” Zapiski Caucasian Sec. of Russ. Geog. Soc., vol. xv., Tiflis, 1893, phot.

[391] R. Erckert, The Caucasus and Its Peoples, Leipzig, 1885 (with map); E. Chantre, Anthropological Research in the Caucasus, Lyons, 1885–87, 4th vol., and atlas; Pantiukhof, “Anthropological Observations in the Caucasus,” Notes of the Caucasian Section of the Russian Geographical Society, vol. xv., Tiflis, 1893, phot.

[392] For particulars see Deniker, loc. cit. (Races de l’Europe).

[392] For details, see Deniker, loc. cit. (Races de l’Europe).

[393] The flint flakes resembling palæolithic tools, found by F. Noetling (Records Geol. Survey, India, vol. xxvii., p. 101, Calcutta, 1894) in Miocene or lower Pliocene beds, at Yenang-Yung (Central Burma), are considered by Oldham and other scholars as natural products. However, Noetling has since (in 1897) described an animal bone, artificially polished(?), of the same beds.—Nat. Science, London-New York, 1894, p. 345; 1895, 1st half-year, p. 367; 2nd, pp. 199 and 294; and 1887, 1st half-year, p. 233.

[393] The flint flakes that look like prehistoric tools, discovered by F. Noetling (Records Geol. Survey, India, vol. xxvii., p. 101, Calcutta, 1894) in Miocene or early Pliocene layers at Yenang-Yung (Central Burma), are regarded by Oldham and other researchers as natural formations. However, Noetling later (in 1897) described an animal bone, possibly polished artificially, from the same layers.—Nat. Science, London-New York, 1894, p. 345; 1895, 1st half-year, p. 367; 2nd, pp. 199 and 294; and 1887, 1st half-year, p. 233.

[394] The bones of the Pithecanthropus, a thigh-bone, a calvaria (Figs. 112 and 113), and two molar teeth (Fig. 112), were found by Dr. Dubois at Trinil (province of Madioun), on the bank of the river Bengavan, in a layer of lava, by the side of bones of animals of the Pliocene period. The calvaria, indicating a cranial capacity of about 900 cubic centimetres, recalls rather the Neanderthal-Spy skull (Fig. 86) than that of a gibbon; the thigh-bone is entirely human; the teeth are of a form intermediate between those of Man and of the Anthropoids.—For particulars see E. Dubois, Pithecanthropus ... aus Java, Batavia, 1894; and his articles in the Anat. Anzeig., 1896, No. 1, and the Jour. Anthr. Inst., London, vol. 25, p. 240 (1896); Manouvrier, Bull. Soc. Anthr., Paris, 1895, pp. 12 and 553; 1896, pp. 396 and 467; G. Schwalbe, Zeitsch. Morph. u. Anthr., vol. i., p. 16, Stuttgart, 1899.

[394] The bones of the Pithecanthropus, including a femur, a skull cap (Figs. 112 and 113), and two molar teeth (Fig. 112), were discovered by Dr. Dubois at Trinil (Madioun province), on the riverbank of the Bengavan, embedded in a layer of lava alongside bones of animals from the Pliocene era. The skull cap, which suggests a brain capacity of around 900 cubic centimeters, resembles the Neanderthal-Spy skull (Fig. 86) more than that of a gibbon; the femur is fully human; the teeth have a form that lies between those of humans and anthropoids.—For details, see E. Dubois, Pithecanthropus ... aus Java, Batavia, 1894; and his articles in the Anat. Anzeig., 1896, No. 1, and the Jour. Anthr. Inst., London, vol. 25, p. 240 (1896); Manouvrier, Bull. Soc. Anthr., Paris, 1895, pp. 12 and 553; 1896, pp. 396 and 467; G. Schwalbe, Zeitsch. Morph. u. Anthr., vol. i., p. 16, Stuttgart, 1899.

[395] Uvarof, Arkheologia, etc. (Archeol. of Russia, vol. i., Moscow, 1881, p. 162, in Russian); Kuznétzof, Mittheil. Anthr. Gesell., Vienna, 1896, Nos. 4 and 5; “Age de la pierre au Japon,” Mater. hist.... homme, Toulouse-Paris, 1879, p. 31; S. Fuse, Journ. Anthr. Soc. Tokyo, vol. xi., 1896, No. 122 (in Japanese); Inuzuka, ibid., No. 119; E. Cartailhac, “L’âge de la pierre en Asie,” Congr. Orientalistes, 3rd ser., 1, p. 315, Lyons, 1880; G. Chauvet, “Age de la pierre en Asie,” Congr. intern. arch. prehis., 11th session, vol. i., p. 57, Moscow, 1892. The arrows picked up by Abbé A. David in Mongolia, and supposed to be palæolithic, belong to the historic period (Hamy, Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat., 1896, p. 46).

[395] Uvarof, Arkheologia, etc. (Archeol. of Russia, vol. i., Moscow, 1881, p. 162, in Russian); Kuznétzof, Mittheil. Anthr. Gesell., Vienna, 1896, Nos. 4 and 5; “Age of Stone in Japan,” Mater. hist.... homme, Toulouse-Paris, 1879, p. 31; S. Fuse, Journ. Anthr. Soc. Tokyo, vol. xi., 1896, No. 122 (in Japanese); Inuzuka, ibid., No. 119; E. Cartailhac, “Stone Age in Asia,” Congr. Orientalistes, 3rd ser., 1, p. 315, Lyons, 1880; G. Chauvet, “Stone Age in Asia,” Congr. intern. arch. prehis., 11th session, vol. i., p. 57, Moscow, 1892. The arrows collected by Abbé A. David in Mongolia, believed to be paleolithic, actually belong to the historic period (Hamy, Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat., 1896, p. 46).

[396] Medlicot and Blandford, Manual of Geol. of India, Calcutta, 1879, 2 vols.; Cartailhac, loc. cit.; Rivett-Carnac, Journ. Anthr. Inst., vol. xiii., 1884, p. 119.

[396] Medlicot and Blandford, Manual of Geol. of India, Calcutta, 1879, 2 vols.; Cartailhac, loc. cit.; Rivett-Carnac, Journ. Anthr. Inst., vol. xiii., 1884, p. 119.

[397] Potanin, Otcherki, etc. (North-West Mong. Sketches), St. Petersburg, 1881–83, 4 vols., (in Russian); Adrianof, “Zapiski, etc.,” Mem. Russ. Geog. Soc., Sect. Gen. Geog., vol. xi., 1888, p. 149; Radloff, Aus Sibirien, Leipzig, 1884, 2 vols., and Arbeit. Orkhon. Exped., St. Petersburg, 1893–97 (in course of publication). For summary of the question and bibliography, see Deniker, Nouvelles Geogr., p. 54, Paris, 1892 (with map).

[397] Potanin, Otcherki, etc. (North-West Mong. Sketches), St. Petersburg, 1881–83, 4 vols., (in Russian); Adrianof, “Zapiski, etc.,” Mem. Russ. Geog. Soc., Sect. Gen. Geog., vol. xi., 1888, p. 149; Radloff, Aus Sibirien, Leipzig, 1884, 2 vols., and Arbeit. Orkhon. Exped., St. Petersburg, 1893–97 (in course of publication). For a summary of the question and bibliography, see Deniker, Nouvelles Geogr., p. 54, Paris, 1892 (with map).

[398] Radloff, loc. cit. (Arbeit., etc.); Thomson, Mem. Soc. Finno-Ougrienne vol. v., Helsingfors, 1896. We cannot admit as a general rule an exact synchronism between the prehistoric periods of Europe and those of Northern Asia. If, as Uvarof says, the age of the mammoth was earlier in Siberia than in Europe, it is none the less true that many peoples of Eastern Siberia were still in the midst of the “stone age” at the time when the Russians penetrated into this country (seventeenth century). As to the peoples of Western Siberia and the Kirghiz Steppes, the beginning of their bronze age goes back at the furthest to the beginning of the Christian era.

[398] Radloff, loc. cit. (Arbeit., etc.); Thomson, Mem. Soc. Finno-Ougrienne vol. v., Helsingfors, 1896. We can’t generally say there was a precise overlap between the prehistoric times of Europe and those of Northern Asia. If, as Uvarof states, the age of the mammoth was earlier in Siberia than in Europe, it is still true that many groups in Eastern Siberia were still in the "stone age" by the time the Russians entered the area in the seventeenth century. Regarding the peoples of Western Siberia and the Kirghiz Steppes, the start of their bronze age dates back at the latest to the beginning of the Christian era.

[399] Margaritof, Memoirs Amurian Soc. of Naturalists, vol. i., Vladivostok, 1887. The only skull found in these heaps is dolichocephalic and reminds one of the Ainu skull. Thus one might suppose, as Milne had done (Trans. As. Soc. Jap., Tokio, 1899, vol. vii., p. 61), in connection with the similar kitchen refuse found in Japan, that they are the work of the Ainus; however, the presence of pottery, unknown to the Ainus even to recent times, militates against this view.

[399] Margaritof, Memoirs Amurian Soc. of Naturalists, vol. i., Vladivostok, 1887. The only skull found in these piles is long-headed and resembles the Ainu skull. So one might think, like Milne did (Trans. As. Soc. Jap., Tokio, 1899, vol. vii., p. 61), when considering the similar kitchen waste found in Japan, that it was created by the Ainus; however, the presence of pottery, which the Ainus hadn't known about even recently, goes against this idea.

[400] The Nagas have still at the present day axes of precisely the same form, which they use as hoes. (S. Peal, Journ. As. Soc. Bengal, vol. lxv., Part III., p. 9, Calcutta, 1896.) Cf. Noulet, “Age de la pierre ... au Cambodge d’après Moura,” Mus. Nat. Hist., vol. i., p. 3, Toulouse, 1879; and Mater. Hist. Nat. Homme, vol. xiv., p. 315, Toulouse, 1879; Cartaillac, L’Anthropol., p. 64, 1890 (a summary of Jammes’s discoveries).

[400] The Nagas still use axes that are exactly the same as before, and they use them as hoes. (S. Peal, Journ. As. Soc. Bengal, vol. lxv., Part III., p. 9, Calcutta, 1896.) See Noulet, “Age de la pierre ... au Cambodge d’après Moura,” Mus. Nat. Hist., vol. i., p. 3, Toulouse, 1879; and Mater. Hist. Nat. Homme, vol. xiv., p. 315, Toulouse, 1879; Cartaillac, L’Anthropol., p. 64, 1890 (a summary of Jammes’s discoveries).

[401] Schrenck, Reisen in Amur-Lande, vol. iii., Parts I. and II., St. Petersburg, 1881–91.

[401] Schrenck, Travels in the Amur Lands, vol. iii., Parts I. and II., St. Petersburg, 1881–91.

[402] Müller and Gmelin saw in 1753 the last surviving Arines, and in 1855 Castren was still able to find five individuals speaking the Kotte tongue.

[402] Müller and Gmelin saw the last remaining Arines in 1753, and in 1855, Castren was still able to find five people speaking the Kotte language.

[403] Yadrintsef, “Ob Altaïtsakh, etc.” (On the Altaians and Tatars of Chern), Izviestia of the Russ. Geogr. Soc., St. Petersb., 1881.

[403] Yadrintsef, “On the Altaians and Tatars of Chern,” Izviestia of the Russ. Geogr. Soc., St. Petersburg, 1881.

[404] Nordenskiold, Voyage de la Vega, vol. ii., chap. xii., Paris, 1883–84; Deniker, loc. cit. (Rev. Anthr., p. 309, 1882).

[404] Nordenskiold, Voyage de la Vega, vol. ii., chap. xii., Paris, 1883–84; Deniker, loc. cit. (Rev. Anthr., p. 309, 1882).

[405] The disappearance of these tribes is more apparent than real. The Anauls, in the neighbourhood of the Gulf of Anadyr, exterminated by the Cossacks in 1649, were only a fraction of the Yukaghirs, as is indicated by the termination “ul” which is found again in the name “Odul,” which the Yukaghirs use to describe themselves. The word “Omok” means simply people, “tribe” in Yukaghir language. As to the Cheliags, who, according to the Cossack Amossof, occupied at the end of the last century the Siberian coast between the Gulf of Chaun and the mouth of the Kolima—they were probably one of the Chukchi tribes.

[405] The disappearance of these tribes seems more significant than it actually is. The Anauls, near the Gulf of Anadyr, were wiped out by the Cossacks in 1649, but they were only a small part of the Yukaghirs, as shown by the ending “ul,” which appears again in the name “Odul,” used by the Yukaghirs to identify themselves. The word “Omok” simply means people or tribe in the Yukaghir language. Regarding the Cheliags, who, according to the Cossack Amossof, occupied the Siberian coast between the Gulf of Chaun and the mouth of the Kolima at the end of the last century—they were likely one of the Chukchi tribes.

[406] Iokhelson, “Izviestia, etc.,” Bull. East-Siberian Sect. of the Russ. Geogr. Soc., vol. xxix., p. 8, Irkutsk, 1898.

[406] Iokhelson, “Izviestia, etc.,” Bull. East-Siberian Sect. of the Russ. Geogr. Soc., vol. xxix., p. 8, Irkutsk, 1898.

[407] Anuchin, “Izviestia” Soc. Friends Sc. Moscow, suppl. to vol. xx., 1876 (analysed Rev. d’Anthr., 1878, p. 148); Scheube, Mitt. Deut. Gesell. Natur. u. Volkenk, vol. iii., pp. 44 and 220, Yokohama-Tokio, 1880–82; G. Batchelor, Trans. As. Soc. Japan, vol. x., part 2, Tokio, 1882, and The Ainu of Japan, London, 1892; Chamberlain, Mem. Imper. Univ. Japan, Litter. coll. No. 1, Tokio, 1887 (analysed Rev. d’Anthr., 1888, p. 81); Tarenetsky, Mem. Ac. Sc. St. Petersburg, 1890, vol. xxxvii., No. 13; Hitchcock, Rep. U.S. Nat. Mus. for 1890, pp. 408 and 429; S. Landor, Alone with the Hairy Ainu, 1893; Koganeï, Beitr. z. Phys. Anthr. Aino (extr. from Mit. Med. Fakult., vols. i. and ii., Tokio, 1893–94).

[407] Anuchin, “Izviestia” Soc. Friends Sc. Moscow, suppl. to vol. xx., 1876 (analyzed Rev. d’Anthr., 1878, p. 148); Scheube, Mitt. Deut. Gesell. Natur. u. Volkenk, vol. iii., pp. 44 and 220, Yokohama-Tokyo, 1880–82; G. Batchelor, Trans. As. Soc. Japan, vol. x., part 2, Tokyo, 1882, and The Ainu of Japan, London, 1892; Chamberlain, Mem. Imper. Univ. Japan, Litter. coll. No. 1, Tokyo, 1887 (analyzed Rev. d’Anthr., 1888, p. 81); Tarenetsky, Mem. Ac. Sc. St. Petersburg, 1890, vol. xxxvii., No. 13; Hitchcock, Rep. U.S. Nat. Mus. for 1890, pp. 408 and 429; S. Landor, Alone with the Hairy Ainu, 1893; Koganeï, Beitr. z. Phys. Anthr. Aino (extracted from Mit. Med. Fakult., vols. i. and ii., Tokyo, 1893–94).

[408] Schrenck, loc. cit.; Seeland, Russiche Rev., vol. xi., St. Petersburg, 1882; Deniker, Les Ghiliaks, Paris, 1884 (extr. from Rev. d’Ethnogr.).

[408] Schrenck, loc. cit.; Seeland, Russian Rev., vol. xi., St. Petersburg, 1882; Deniker, The Ghiliaks, Paris, 1884 (excerpt from Ethnography Review).

[409] C. Hiekisch, Die Tungusen, St. Petersburg, 1879; L. Schrenck, loc. cit.; H. James, “A Journey in Manchuria,” Proc. Geogr. Soc. London, 1886, p. 779; D. Pozdniéef, Opissanie, etc. (Description of Manchuria, in Russian), vol. i., chap. vi., St. Petersburg, 1897. For measurements, see Appendices II. and III.

[409] C. Hiekisch, The Tungus, St. Petersburg, 1879; L. Schrenck, loc. cit.; H. James, “A Journey in Manchuria,” Proc. Geogr. Soc. London, 1886, p. 779; D. Pozdniéef, Opissanie, etc. (Description of Manchuria, in Russian), vol. i., chap. vi., St. Petersburg, 1897. For measurements, see Appendices II. and III.

[410] This classification is not at all absolute. Turks and Mongols inhabit the wooded regions of Northern Asia (Yakuts, Buriats); they are also to be found in Europe and Asia Minor. The table-land of Iran, belonging to the region without outlet, assimilated since the works of Richthofen to Central Asia, is mostly inhabited by Iranian peoples having a connection with those of anterior Asia. The Thibetans chiefly occupy the upper valley of the Yaro-tsanpo, which is now in the line of communication between Central and peripheral Asia, etc.

[410] This classification isn't absolute at all. Turks and Mongols live in the forested areas of Northern Asia (like the Yakuts and Buriats); they can also be found in Europe and Asia Minor. The plateau of Iran, which has been considered part of the landlocked region similar to Central Asia since Richthofen's studies, is mostly inhabited by Iranian people who are connected to those of ancient Asia. The Tibetans primarily reside in the upper valley of the Yaro-tsanpo, which is now a key route connecting Central and peripheral Asia, etc.

[411] See my articles “Turks” and “Tatars” in the Dict. Univ. de Geogr. of Vivien de Saint-Martin and Rousselet, vol. vi., Paris, 1894; and for details the works of Radloff and Vambery, to which reference is therein made.

[411] Check out my articles "Turks" and "Tatars" in the Dict. Univ. de Geogr. by Vivien de Saint-Martin and Rousselet, vol. vi., Paris, 1894; and for more details, see the works of Radloff and Vambery, which are referenced there.

[412] These “Tatars” have sprung from the intermixture of three elements: the primitive Tatars, the probable descendants of the Tu-Kiue of Chinese authors, the founders of the kingdom of Sibir destroyed by the Russians in the sixteenth century; the Sartes and the Uzbegs, coming especially from Bokhara; lastly, the Tatars of the Volga, immigrating in the wake of the Russians. In the west of Siberia there are also Ostiak tribes which bear the name of Tatars (such as the Zabolotnyé Tatary), because they have adopted the customs and religion of their neighbours the Tatars.

[412] These “Tatars” are a mix of three groups: the original Tatars, likely descendants of the Tu-Kiue mentioned by Chinese writers, who established the kingdom of Sibir that was destroyed by the Russians in the sixteenth century; the Sartes and the Uzbegs, primarily from Bokhara; and finally, the Tatars from the Volga, who migrated following the Russians. In western Siberia, there are also Ostiak tribes known as Tatars (like the Zabolotnyé Tatary), as they have adopted the customs and religion of their Tatar neighbors.

[413] Dutreuil de Rhins and Grenard, Miss. Sc. Haute Asie, vol. ii., Paris, 1898.

[413] Dutreuil de Rhins and Grenard, Miss. Sc. Haute Asie, vol. ii., Paris, 1898.

[414] See bibliography in the monograph on the Kirghiz-Bukei by Kharouzin, “IzviestiaSoc. Friends of Nat. Sc., Moscow, vol. 72, 1891.

[414] See the bibliography in the monograph on the Kirghiz-Bukei by Kharouzin, “IzviestiaSoc. Friends of Nat. Sc., Moscow, vol. 72, 1891.

[415] We must distinguish among the “Tatars of the Crimea” two ethnic groups, speaking the same Turkish dialect: the Tatars of the Steppes (Nogai), and the Tatars of the Mountains and of the Coast, or Tauridians (Krimchaki in Russian). These are the Islamised descendants of the ancient populations of the Taurus (Kipchaks, Genoese, Greeks, Goths). The Nogai belong to the Turkish race, more or less crossed, while the Tauridians have many traits of the Adriatic and Indo-Afghan races.

[415] We need to recognize two ethnic groups among the “Tatars of the Crimea,” who speak the same Turkish dialect: the Tatars of the Steppes (Nogai) and the Tatars of the Mountains and of the Coast, or Tauridians (Krimchaki in Russian). These groups are the Islamized descendants of the ancient populations of the Taurus, including the Kipchaks, Genoese, Greeks, and Goths. The Nogai belong to the Turkish race, with some intermixing, while the Tauridians exhibit many characteristics of the Adriatic and Indo-Afghan races.

[416] For statistics as to stature, ceph. index, etc., see Appendices I. to III.; these figures are borrowed from the works of Benzengre, Bogdanof, Chantre, Elissiéef, Erckert, Hecker, Kharuzin, Lygin, Malief, Merejkovsky, Nazarof, Païssel, Pantiukhof, Sommier, Ujfalvy, Vyrubof, Weisbach, Weissenberg, Yadrintzef, etc. (Cf. Deniker, Les Races de l’Europe, 1. Ind. ceph., Paris, 1899.)

[416] For statistics on height, head index, etc., see Appendices I. to III.; these numbers are taken from the works of Benzengre, Bogdanof, Chantre, Elissiéef, Erckert, Hecker, Kharuzin, Lygin, Malief, Merejkovsky, Nazarof, Païssel, Pantiukhof, Sommier, Ujfalvy, Vyrubof, Weisbach, Weissenberg, Yadrintzef, and others. (See Deniker, Les Races de l’Europe, 1. Ind. ceph., Paris, 1899.)

[417] Pallas, Samml. Hist. Nachricht., St. Petersburg, 1776–1801, 2 vols.; Bergmann, Nomad. Streifereien. u. d. Kalmuk, Riga, 1804, 4 vols.; Howorth, History of Mong., London, 1877, 4 vols.; Deniker, loc. cit. (Rev. Anthr., 1883–84); Ivanovsky, loc. cit. (Mongols-Torg.); Potanin, loc. cit.; A. Pozdniéef, Mongolia, etc. (Mongolia and the Mongols, in Russian), St. Petersburg, 1896, vol. i., and other publications of this learned writer.

[417] Pallas, Samml. Hist. Nachricht., St. Petersburg, 1776–1801, 2 vols.; Bergmann, Nomad. Streifereien. u. d. Kalmuk, Riga, 1804, 4 vols.; Howorth, History of Mong., London, 1877, 4 vols.; Deniker, loc. cit. (Rev. Anthr., 1883–84); Ivanovsky, loc. cit. (Mongols-Torg.); Potanin, loc. cit.; A. Pozdniéef, Mongolia, etc. (Mongolia and the Mongols, in Russian), St. Petersburg, 1896, vol. i., and other works by this knowledgeable author.

[418] In many works to these three divisions of Mongols are also added the so-called Hezare or Hazara and the Aimaks, tribes styled Mongolian, left by Tamerlane in Afghanistan. It appears that at the present time these tribes have only preserved of their origin a few physiognomical features; they speak a Turkish dialect and have intermixed with the Jemchids, whose mode of life and religion they have adopted.

[418] In many works, these three groups of Mongols are also joined by the so-called Hezare or Hazara and the Aimaks, tribes identified as Mongolian that were left behind by Tamerlane in Afghanistan. It seems that today these tribes have only retained a few physical characteristics of their origins; they speak a Turkish dialect and have blended with the Jemchids, adopting their way of life and religion.

[419] Cf. Prjevalsky, Trétie, etc. (Third Journey in Central Asia), St. Petersburg, 1883; and Jour. Geog. Soc., 1886–87; Rockhill, The Land of the Lamas, London, 1891; Ethnol. of Tibet, Washington, 1895; and Rep. U.S. Nat. Mus. for 1893, p. 665; Desgodins, Le Tibet, 2nd ed., Paris, 1885; Waddell, Buddhism of Thibet, London, 1895; and Among the Himalayas, London, 1899.

[419] See Prjevalsky, Trétie, etc. (Third Journey in Central Asia), St. Petersburg, 1883; and Jour. Geog. Soc., 1886–87; Rockhill, The Land of the Lamas, London, 1891; Ethnol. of Tibet, Washington, 1895; and Rep. U.S. Nat. Mus. for 1893, p. 665; Desgodins, Le Tibet, 2nd ed., Paris, 1885; Waddell, Buddhism of Thibet, London, 1895; and Among the Himalayas, London, 1899.

[420] See Dalton, Descrip. Ethnol. of Bengal, p. 13 et seq., Calcutta, 1872. We leave untouched the peoples sprung from the intermixture of the Thibetans with the Mongols (Kara-Tanguts of the Kuku-Nor), with the Iranians and the Hindus (Balti, of Cashmere, etc.), with the Punjabi Hindus (Gurkhas, Nepalese), with the Assam peoples (Dophlas, Miris, etc.).

[420] See Dalton, Descrip. Ethnol. of Bengal, p. 13 et seq., Calcutta, 1872. We will not address the communities that have come from the mixing of Tibetans with Mongols (Kara-Tanguts of Kuku-Nor), with Iranians and Hindus (Balti, from Cashmere, etc.), with Punjabi Hindus (Gurkhas, Nepalese), and with the peoples of Assam (Dophlas, Miris, etc.).

[421] Prjevalsky, loc. cit.; Risley, “Tribes and Castes of Bengal,” Anthr. Data, Calcutta, 1891, 2 vols.; Rockhill, loc. cit.; Dutreuil de Rhins, loc. cit.

[421] Prjevalsky, same source as above; Risley, “Tribes and Castes of Bengal,” Anthr. Data, Calcutta, 1891, 2 vols.; Rockhill, same source as above; Dutreuil de Rhins, same source as above

[422] Fr. Garnier, Voyage ... en Indo-Chine, Paris, 1873, vol. i., p. 519, and vol. ii., p. 32 (Memoir of Thorel).

[422] Fr. Garnier, Voyage ... en Indo-Chine, Paris, 1873, vol. i., p. 519, and vol. ii., p. 32 (Memoir of Thorel).

[423] Colb. Baber, “Travels ... in West China,” Supp. Pap. Geogr. Soc., vol. i., London, 1882; Colquhoun, Across Chryse, London, 1883, vol. ii., Appendix.

[423] Colb. Baber, “Travels ... in West China,” Supp. Pap. Geogr. Soc., vol. i., London, 1882; Colquhoun, Across Chryse, London, 1883, vol. ii., Appendix.

[424] Roux, Le Tour du Monde, 1897, 1st half, p. 254. The adorning of the body and limbs with rings, so characteristic of the Dyaks and other Indonesians, is also found among the Lu-tse; they wear around the loins and limbs numerous iron wire rings coated with black wax and fastened together in two places with metal rings. Great phalanstery-like houses, 40 metres long, similar to those of certain Indonesians and Polynesians, and used by several families, in which men and women sleep promiscuously, are met with among the western Kew-tse on the boundary of their country with the Khamti (see p. 40).

[424] Roux, Le Tour du Monde, 1897, 1st half, p. 254. The practice of decorating the body and limbs with rings, which is typical of the Dyaks and other Indonesians, can also be seen among the Lu-tse; they wear many iron wire rings coated with black wax around their waists and limbs, secured in two spots with metal rings. Large communal houses, 40 meters long, resembling those of certain Indonesians and Polynesians, and occupied by multiple families, where men and women sleep together, can be found among the western Kew-tse near their border with the Khamti (see p. 40).

[425] Terrien de Lacouperie, The Languages of China before the Chinese, p. 92, London, 1887; Fr. Garnier, loc. cit.; H. Hallet, Proc. Geogr. Soc., p. 1, London, 1886 (with map).

[425] Terrien de Lacouperie, The Languages of China before the Chinese, p. 92, London, 1887; Fr. Garnier, loc. cit.; H. Hallet, Proc. Geogr. Soc., p. 1, London, 1886 (with map).

[426] See the summary of the data in this respect in Richthofen, China, vol. i., Berlin, 1875, and in Reclus, Geogr. Univ., vol. vi., Paris, 1882.

[426] Check out the data summary on this topic in Richthofen, China, vol. i., Berlin, 1875, and in Reclus, Geogr. Univ., vol. vi., Paris, 1882.

[427] See in the appendices the statistics of stature, ceph. index, etc., from the works of Girard, Hagen, Janka, Poyarkof, Ten Kate, Weisbach, Zaborowski, and my own observations.

[427] Check the appendices for the statistics on height, head measurements, etc., from the works of Girard, Hagen, Janka, Poyarkof, Ten Kate, Weisbach, Zaborowski, and my own observations.

[428] Note also the inferior position of woman, her ability to move about limited by deformation of the feet (p. 175).

[428] Also note the lower status of women, with their movement restricted by foot binding (p. 175).

[429] The exact figures for the height of Coreans are contradictory: Dr. Koïke (Internat. Arch. Ethnogr., vol. iv., Leyden, 1891, Parts I. and II.) gives the excessively high stature of 1 m. 79 as the average of seventy-five men measured; while Elissiéef (“IzviestiaRuss. Geogr. Soc., St. Petersburg, 1890) found 1 m. 62 the average height, but according to the measurements of ten men only.

[429] The exact stats on the height of Koreans don't match up: Dr. Koïke (Internat. Arch. Ethnogr., vol. iv., Leyden, 1891, Parts I. and II.) reports an unusually tall average of 1 min. 79 from seventy-five men measured; whereas Elissiéef (“IzviestiaRuss. Geogr. Soc., St. Petersburg, 1890) found an average height of 1 minute. 62, but his data is based on just ten men.

[430] W. Carles, Life in Corea, London, 1888; Gottsche, “Land. u. Leute in Korea,” Verh. Ges. Erdk., p. 245, Berlin, 1886; A. Cavendish and Goold-Adams, Korea, London, 1894; Pogio, Korea, trans. from the Russian, Vienna and Leipzig, 1895; L. Chastaing, “Les Coréens,” Rev. Scientif., p. 494, 1896, second half-year; Maurice Courant, Bibliogr. Coréenne, Introduc., vol. i., Paris, 1895; and Transact. As. Soc. Japan, vol. xxiii., p. 5.

[430] W. Carles, Life in Corea, London, 1888; Gottsche, “Land. u. Leute in Korea,” Verh. Ges. Erdk., p. 245, Berlin, 1886; A. Cavendish and Goold-Adams, Korea, London, 1894; Pogio, Korea, trans. from the Russian, Vienna and Leipzig, 1895; L. Chastaing, “Les Coréens,” Rev. Scientif., p. 494, 1896, second half-year; Maurice Courant, Bibliogr. Coréenne, Introduc., vol. i., Paris, 1895; and Transact. As. Soc. Japan, vol. xxiii., p. 5.

[431] See Appendices I. and III. for the measurements given from Miss Ayrton, Bälz, Koganei, etc.

[431] See Appendices I. and III. for the measurements provided by Miss Ayrton, Bälz, Koganei, and others.

[432] It might be supposed that the representatives of the first type were the descendants of tribes who had come by way of Corea and the Tsu-shima and Iki-shima islands in the south-west of Nippon at some period unknown, but at any rate very remote. As to the coarse type, its representatives are perhaps descended from the warriors who invaded about the seventh century B.C. (according to a doubtful chronology) the west coast of the island of Kiu-siu and then Nippon. These invaders, intermixing with the aborigines of unknown stock, founded the kingdom of Yamato, and drove back the Ainus towards the north (see p. 372).

[432] It might be suggested that the representatives of the first group are the descendants of tribes who arrived through Korea and the Tsushima and Iki islands in the southwest of Japan at a time that's unknown, but certainly very ancient. As for the rough type, its representatives likely come from the warriors who invaded the west coast of Kyushu around the seventh century B.C. (according to a questionable timeline) and then moved into Japan. These invaders, mixing with the local populations of unclear origin, established the kingdom of Yamato and pushed the Ainu people northward (see p. 372).

[433] The ancient practice of suicide in case of injury (Harakiri), now abolished, also denoted great courage; sometimes it was a disguised form of vendetta, for the relatives of the suicide were bound in honour to exterminate the offender.

[433] The old practice of suicide in the event of injury (Harakiri), which is no longer allowed, was also seen as a sign of great bravery; at times, it served as a hidden form of revenge, as the family of the person who took their own life felt obligated to eliminate the wrongdoer.

[434] Mohnike, Die Japaner, Münster, 1872; Bälz, loc. cit.; J. J. Rein, Japan, Leipzig, 1881–86, 2 vols.; Mechnikof, L’empire Japonais, Paris-Geneva, 1882; B. Chamberlain, Things Japanese, Yokohama, 1891; “Tokyo Jinruigaku,” etc. (Journ. Anthr. Soc. Tokio, in Japanese), 1888–98.

[434] Mohnike, The Japanese, Münster, 1872; Bälz, loc. cit.; J. J. Rein, Japan, Leipzig, 1881–86, 2 vols.; Mechnikof, The Japanese Empire, Paris-Geneva, 1882; B. Chamberlain, Japanese Things, Yokohama, 1891; “Tokyo Anthropology,” etc. (Journ. Anthr. Soc. Tokio, in Japanese), 1888–98.

[435] Dodd, Jour. Str. Br. As. Soc., No. 15, p. 69, Singapore, 1885; I. Ino, “Distrib. géog. tribu. Formose,” Tokyo Jinruigaku, p. 301, 1898 (analysed in l’Anthropologie,1899); Imbault-Huart, L’île de Formose, Paris, 1893; A. Wirth, “Eingeborn. Stämme auf Formosa u. Liu-Kiu,” Peterm. Mitt., p. 33, 1898.

[435] Dodd, Jour. Str. Br. As. Soc., No. 15, p. 69, Singapore, 1885; I. Ino, “Distrib. géog. tribu. Formose,” Tokyo Jinruigaku, p. 301, 1898 (analyzed in l’Anthropologie, 1899); Imbault-Huart, L’île de Formose, Paris, 1893; A. Wirth, “Eingeborn. Stämme auf Formosa u. Liu-Kiu,” Peterm. Mitt., p. 33, 1898.

[436] Dourisboure, Les Sauv. Ba-Hnars, Paris, 1873; Neïs, Excurs. et Reconn., Saigon, Nos. 6 (1880), 10 (1881), and Bull. Soc. Géogr., p. 372, Paris, 1884; Harmand, loc. cit., and Tour du Monde, 1879 and 1880; Pinabel, Bull. Soc. Géogr., p. 417, Paris, 1884.

[436] Dourisboure, Les Sauv. Ba-Hnars, Paris, 1873; Neïs, Excurs. et Reconn., Saigon, Nos. 6 (1880), 10 (1881), and Bull. Soc. Géogr., p. 372, Paris, 1884; Harmand, loc. cit., and Tour du Monde, 1879 and 1880; Pinabel, Bull. Soc. Géogr., p. 417, Paris, 1884.

[437] Aymonier, “Voyage dans le Laos,” Ann. Mus. Guimet. (Bibl. d’Étude, vol. v.), vol. i., p. 38, Paris, 1895; Harmand, loc. cit.

[437] Aymonier, “Journey through Laos,” Ann. Mus. Guimet. (Study Library, vol. v.), vol. i., p. 38, Paris, 1895; Harmand, same source.

[438] E. Kuhn, Sitzungsberichte, Phil.-hist. Kl. Bayer. Akad. Wiss., p. 289, Munich, 1889.

[438] E. Kuhn, Proceedings, Phil.-hist. Class Bavarian Academy of Sciences, p. 289, Munich, 1889.

[439] Aymonier, Excurs. et Reconn., Saigon, Nos. 8 and 10 (1881), 24 (1885), chap. viii., No. 32 (1890), and Rev. d’Ethnogr., 1885, p. 158; Bergaigne, Journ. Asiat., 8th series, vol. xi., 1888; Maurel, Mem. Soc. Anthr., 1893, vol. iv., p. 486.

[439] Aymonier, Excurs. et Reconn., Saigon, Nos. 8 and 10 (1881), 24 (1885), chap. viii., No. 32 (1890), and Rev. d’Ethnogr., 1885, p. 158; Bergaigne, Journ. Asiat., 8th series, vol. xi., 1888; Maurel, Mem. Soc. Anthr., 1893, vol. iv., p. 486.

[440] Mrs. Mason, Civilising Mountain Men, etc., London, 1862, and other works of this author. Smeaton, The Loyal Karen, etc., London, 1886.

[440] Mrs. Mason, Civilising Mountain Men, etc., London, 1862, and other works by this author. Smeaton, The Loyal Karen, etc., London, 1886.

[441] There exists among them a strange custom: the men experience great pleasure in putting into their mouths and then spitting out the juice from the narghiles smoked by the wives. The offer of tobacco juice is one of the first duties of hospitality.

[441] Among them, there's a strange custom: the men take great pleasure in putting the juice from the wives' smoked narghiles into their mouths and then spitting it out. Offering tobacco juice is one of the first duties of hospitality.

[442] J. Butler, “Angami Nagas,” Jour. As. Soc. Bengal, vol. xliv., p. 216, Calcutta, 1875; Woodthorpe, “Notes ... Naga Hills,” Jour. Anthro. Inst., vols. ix. (1882) and xix. (1890); Reid, Chin-Lushai Land, Calcutta, 1893; Peal, “Naga,” Jour. Anthr. Inst., vol. iii., 1874, p. 476; Nature, 20th May 1897; Jour. As. Soc. Bengal, vol. lxv., part 3, p. 17, Calcutta, 1897; and “Ein Ausflug, etc.,” Zeit. f. Ethn., 1898, p. 281 (trans. by Klemm, with notes and bibliog.); Miss Godden, “Naga, etc.,” Jour. Anthr. Inst., vols. xxvi. and xxvii. (1896–97).

[442] J. Butler, “Angami Nagas,” Jour. As. Soc. Bengal, vol. xliv., p. 216, Calcutta, 1875; Woodthorpe, “Notes ... Naga Hills,” Jour. Anthro. Inst., vols. ix. (1882) and xix. (1890); Reid, Chin-Lushai Land, Calcutta, 1893; Peal, “Naga,” Jour. Anthr. Inst., vol. iii., 1874, p. 476; Nature, 20th May 1897; Jour. As. Soc. Bengal, vol. lxv., part 3, p. 17, Calcutta, 1897; and “Ein Ausflug, etc.,” Zeit. f. Ethn., 1898, p. 281 (trans. by Klemm, with notes and bibliog.); Miss Godden, “Naga, etc.,” Jour. Anthr. Inst., vols. xxvi. and xxvii. (1896–97).

[443] J. Anderson, The Selungs, Lond., 1890; Lapicque, Bull. Soc. Anthr., 1894, p. 221, and “A la rech. des Negritos,” Le Tour du Monde, 1895, 2nd half-year, and 1896, 1st half-year; Man, Journ. Anthr. Inst., vol. xiv., 1886, p. 428; Roepstorff, Zeitschr. f. Ethnol., 1882, p. 51.

[443] J. Anderson, The Selungs, London, 1890; Lapicque, Bull. Soc. Anthr., 1894, p. 221, and “Searching for the Negritos,” Le Tour du Monde, 1895, 2nd half-year, and 1896, 1st half-year; Man, Journ. Anthr. Inst., vol. xiv., 1886, p. 428; Roepstorff, Zeitschr. f. Ethnol., 1882, p. 51.

[444] Man, “Aborig. Andam. Isl.,” Jour. Anthr. Inst., vol. xi., 1882; De Quatrefages, Les Pygmées, Paris, 1887; Lapicque, loc. cit., and “La race Negrito,” Ann. de Geogr., No. 22, Paris, 1896.

[444] Man, “Aborig. Andam. Isl.,” Jour. Anthr. Inst., vol. xi., 1882; De Quatrefages, Les Pygmées, Paris, 1887; Lapicque, loc. cit., and “La race Negrito,” Ann. de Geogr., No. 22, Paris, 1896.

[445] Moura, Royaume de Cambodge, Paris, 1883, 2 vols.; Aymonier, Géographie du Cambodge, Saigon-Paris, 1876; L. Fournereau and Porcher, Les Ruins d’Angkor, etc., Paris, 1890; Morel, Mém. Soc. Anthr., vol. iv., Paris, 1893.

[445] Moura, Kingdom of Cambodia, Paris, 1883, 2 vols.; Aymonier, Geography of Cambodia, Saigon-Paris, 1876; L. Fournereau and Porcher, The Ruins of Angkor, etc., Paris, 1890; Morel, Mém. Soc. Anthr., vol. iv., Paris, 1893.

[446] Deniker and Laloy, “Races exot.,” L’Anthropologie, 1890, p. 523.

[446] Deniker and Laloy, “Exotic Races,” L’Anthropologie, 1890, p. 523.

[447] Risley, loc. cit.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Risley, loc. cit.

[448] Terrien de Lacouperie, loc. cit.; Colquhoun, loc. cit., Appendix and Preface by T. de Lacouperie; Bourne, Parliam. Pap., C., 5371, London, 1888; C. Baber, loc. cit.; Hosie, Three Years’ Jour. in Western China, London, 1890; Labarth, “Les Muongs,” Bull. Soc. Géogr. hist. et descr., Paris, 1886, p. 127; H. Hollet, loc. cit.; Aymonier, loc. cit., ch. vii; Billet, “Deux ans dans le Haut Tonkin,” Bull. Scient. de la France et de la Belgique, vol. xxviii., Paris, 1896–98; Deblenne, Mission Lyonnaise en Chine, p. 34, Lyons, 1898.

[448] Terrien de Lacouperie, loc. cit.; Colquhoun, loc. cit., Appendix and Preface by T. de Lacouperie; Bourne, Parliam. Pap., C., 5371, London, 1888; C. Baber, loc. cit.; Hosie, Three Years’ Jour. in Western China, London, 1890; Labarth, “Les Muongs,” Bull. Soc. Géogr. hist. et descr., Paris, 1886, p. 127; H. Hollet, loc. cit.; Aymonier, loc. cit., ch. vii; Billet, “Deux ans dans le Haut Tonkin,” Bull. Scient. de la France et de la Belgique, vol. xxviii., Paris, 1896–98; Deblenne, Mission Lyonnaise en Chine, p. 34, Lyons, 1898.

[449] From Dr. Girard, quoted by Billet, loc. cit., p. 69.

[449] From Dr. Girard, cited by Billet, loc. cit., p. 69.

[450] Harmand, loc. cit.; Aymonier, loc. cit. (Voyage au Laos).

[450] Harmand, loc. cit.; Aymonier, loc. cit. (Journey to Laos).

[451] The so-called primitive division into four castes: Brahmans (priests), Kshatriya (soldiers), Vaisyas (husbandmen and merchants), and Sudra (common people, outcasts, subject peoples?), mentioned in the later texts of the Vedas, is rather an indication of the division into three principal classes of the ruling race as opposed, in a homogeneous whole, to the conquered aboriginal race (fourth caste).

[451] The so-called basic division into four castes: Brahmans (priests), Kshatriya (warriors), Vaisyas (farmers and merchants), and Sudra (common people, outcasts, subject peoples?), mentioned in the later texts of the Vedas, actually reflects the division into three main classes of the ruling race in contrast to the unified, conquered indigenous race (fourth caste).

[452] Sénart, “Les Castes dans l’Inde,” Ann. Mus. Guimet., Bibl. de Vulgar, Paris, 1896 (sums up the question). To the bibliographic references to castes which are found in this excellent book must be added the “Introduction” to the work of W. Crooke, already quoted; it appeared subsequently.

[452] Sénart, “The Castes in India,” Ann. Mus. Guimet., Bibl. de Vulgar, Paris, 1896 (summarizes the topic). In addition to the bibliography on castes included in this outstanding book, the “Introduction” to W. Crooke's work, previously mentioned, should also be noted as it was published later.

[453] The ingenious deductions of Risley (loc. cit., Ethnogr. Glossary, vol. i., Preface, p. 34, Calcutta, 1892), which may be summed up in the aphorism, “The nasal index increases in a direct ratio to the social inferiority of the caste,” have been criticised by Crooke (loc. cit., p. 119), who however is too absolute in his statements, and does not take any account of the seriation of anthropometric measurements.

[453] The clever observations made by Risley (loc. cit., Ethnogr. Glossary, vol. i., Preface, p. 34, Calcutta, 1892), which can be summarized with the saying, “The nasal index increases in direct proportion to the social inferiority of the caste,” have been challenged by Crooke (loc. cit., p. 119), who, however, is too definitive in his claims and ignores the variation in anthropometric measurements.

[454] E. Schmidt, “Die Anthrop. Indiens,” Globus, vol. lxi. (1892), Nos. 2 and 3. For the measurements of the different peoples of India see Appendices I. to III.; the figures are chiefly borrowed from Risley, loc. cit., Crooke, loc. cit., Jagor, Thurston, loc. cit., Sarasin, loc. cit., E. Schmidt, loc. cit., Deschamps, Au pays des Veddas, Paris, 1892, with pl.

[454] E. Schmidt, “The Anthropology of India,” Globus, vol. lxi. (1892), Nos. 2 and 3. For the measurements of the different peoples of India, see Appendices I. to III.; the figures are mainly taken from Risley, loc. cit., Crooke, loc. cit., Jagor, Thurston, loc. cit., Sarasin, loc. cit., E. Schmidt, loc. cit., Deschamps, In the Land of the Veddas, Paris, 1892, with pl.

[455] Jellinghaus, “Sagen, Sitten ... der Munda-Kolhs,” Zeit. f. Ethn., vol. iii., 1872, p. 328; Dalton, loc. cit., p. 150; Risley, loc. cit., Ethnogr. Glossary; Crooke, loc. cit.

[455] Jellinghaus, “Legends, Customs ... of the Munda-Kolhs,” Journal of Ethnology, vol. iii., 1872, p. 328; Dalton, same source, p. 150; Risley, same source, Ethnographic Glossary; Crooke, same source

[456] The word Ho (Hor or Horo), which recurs in the name of all these tribes, signifies everywhere “man,” and indicates their close linguistic relationship; their manners and customs are also alike, especially in regard to the constitution of the community. Religion among them all is an animism blended with very vague polytheism. In their physical characters there are some differences; the Munda and the Bhumij are short (1 m. 59) and very dolichocephalic (ceph. ind. on the liv. sub. 74.5 and 75), the Santals are below the average height (1 m. 61) and a little less dolichocephalic (76.1). The Ho, among whom we may assume a greater infusion of Indo-Afghan blood, are of somewhat high stature (1 m. 68). The number of these four tribes, united under the name of Santals in the census of 1891, amounted to a million and a half.

[456] The word Ho (Hor or Horo), which appears in the names of all these tribes, means “man” everywhere and shows their close linguistic connection; their customs and traditions are also similar, particularly in how their communities are structured. Their religion is a mix of animism and vague polytheism. There are some physical differences among them; the Munda and the Bhumij are short (1 min. 59) and have long heads (ceph. ind. on the liv. sub. 74.5 and 75), the Santals are below average height (1 minute. 61) and somewhat less dolichocephalic (76.1). The Ho, who likely have a greater mix of Indo-Afghan ancestry, are of somewhat taller stature (1 minute. 68). In the 1891 census, the total number of these four tribes, grouped under the name Santals, was about one and a half million.

[457] Ball, Jungle Life in India, p. 267; Fawcet, “The Saoras of Madras,” Journ. Ant. Soc. Bombay, vol. i., 1888, p. 206; E. Dalton, loc. cit., p. 149.

[457] Ball, Jungle Life in India, p. 267; Fawcet, “The Saoras of Madras,” Journ. Ant. Soc. Bombay, vol. i., 1888, p. 206; E. Dalton, loc. cit., p. 149.

[458] They must not be confused with the Mal-Paharia, who dwell farther to the south in the same district of Santhal Parganos (Bengal), and whose affinities are still obscure; from the somatic point of view there is, however, hardly any difference between the two groups.

[458] They should not be confused with the Mal-Paharia, who live further south in the same area of Santhal Parganos (Bengal), and whose connections are still unclear; from a physical perspective, there is, however, barely any difference between the two groups.

[459] They must not be confounded with the Kharwar or Kharvar, Dravidians of Chota Nagpur, the southern parts of Behar and Mirzapur; these are half-civilised husbandmen, having a particular social organisation. Their higher castes have an infusion of Hindu blood, while the type of the lower castes recalls that of the Santals. The Kûrs of the Mahadeva hills are closely allied to the Kharwar.

[459] They should not be confused with the Kharwar or Kharvar, who are Dravidians from Chota Nagpur, the southern regions of Bihar, and Mirzapur; they are semi-civilized farmers with a distinct social structure. The higher castes have some Hindu ancestry, while the lower castes resemble the Santals. The Kûrs of the Mahadeva hills are closely related to the Kharwar.

[460] Cf. Shortt, Account of the Tribes of the Nilghiris, 1868; Marshall, A Phrenologist among the Toda, London, 1873; Elie Reclus, Primitive Folk, ch. v.; Thurston, Madras Gov. Museum Bullet., vol. i., No. 1, and vol. ii., No. 4; G. Oppert, The Original Inhabitants of India, London, 1894, and Zeit. f. Ethnol., 1896, pt. 5.

[460] See Shortt, Account of the Tribes of the Nilghiris, 1868; Marshall, A Phrenologist among the Toda, London, 1873; Elie Reclus, Primitive Folk, ch. v.; Thurston, Madras Gov. Museum Bulletin, vol. i., No. 1, and vol. ii., No. 4; G. Oppert, The Original Inhabitants of India, London, 1894, and Zeit. f. Ethnol., 1896, pt. 5.

[461] The name Rajputs is only honorary, and is attached to a crowd of tribes and castes varying in origin, in mode of life, and in dress. The Jats of the Punjab, of which the Sikhs are only a section, are constituted of a mixture of strongly differentiated populations.

[461] The name Rajputs is mainly honorary and refers to a group of tribes and castes that differ in origin, lifestyle, and clothing. The Jats of Punjab, of which the Sikhs are just one part, consist of a blend of distinct populations.

[462] Risley, loc. cit.; Crooke, loc. cit.; Fonseca Cardoso, “O indigena de Satory,” Revista de Scien. Naturæs, vol. iv., No. 16, Oporto, 1896.

[462] Risley, loc. cit.; Crooke, loc. cit.; Fonseca Cardoso, “The Indigenous People of Satory,” Journal of Natural Sciences, vol. iv., No. 16, Oporto, 1896.

[463] Biddulph, Tribes of the Hindoo-Koosh, Calcutta, 1880; De Ujfalvy, Aus dem Westl. Himalaya, Leipzig, 1884; Leitner, The Hunza and Nagar Handbook, London, 1893; Capus, Manuscript Notes; Risley, loc. cit.

[463] Biddulph, Tribes of the Hindoo-Koosh, Calcutta, 1880; De Ujfalvy, From the Western Himalayas, Leipzig, 1884; Leitner, The Hunza and Nagar Handbook, London, 1893; Capus, Manuscript Notes; Risley, same source

[464] The brother of the dead husband may marry all the latter’s widows, and none of them has the right to marry again without the consent of her brother-in-law. There is no term in the Chin and Yeshkhun languages to denote nephews and nieces—they are called “sons or daughters”; aunts on the maternal side are called “mothers.”

[464] The brother of the deceased husband can marry any of his widows, and none of them can remarry without the approval of her brother-in-law. In the Chin and Yeshkhun languages, there are no specific terms for nephews and nieces—they are referred to as "sons or daughters"; maternal aunts are referred to as "mothers."

[465] De Ujfalvy, “Les Koulou,” Bull. Soc. Anthr., 1882, p. 217; Forsyth, Yarkand Mission, Calcutta, 1875; S. Mateer, Native Life in Travancore, London, 1883; Elie Reclus, loc. cit., p. 143 (Nairs); E. Schmidt, “Die Naïrs,” Globus, vol. lxviii. (1895), No. 22; Waddell, loc. cit. (Am. Himal.), chap. ix.

[465] De Ujfalvy, “Les Koulou,” Bull. Soc. Anthr., 1882, p. 217; Forsyth, Yarkand Mission, Calcutta, 1875; S. Mateer, Native Life in Travancore, London, 1883; Elie Reclus, loc. cit., p. 143 (Nairs); E. Schmidt, “Die Naïrs,” Globus, vol. lxviii. (1895), No. 22; Waddell, loc. cit. (Am. Himal.), chap. ix.

[466] Sarasin, loc. cit., gives bibliog.; Deschamps, Ceylan, loc. cit. For the measurements of these peoples, see the Appendices I. and II.

[466] Sarasin, loc. cit., provides bibliography; Deschamps, Ceylan, loc. cit. For the measurements of these groups, see the Appendices I. and II.

[467] The Hajemis of the Caspian littoral are called more particularly Talych and Mazandarani.

[467] The Hajemis of the Caspian coast are specifically referred to as Talych and Mazandarani.

[468] The interminglings with the Turks must be of recent date; for if we may still discuss the “Turanian” characters of the Sumero-Acadian language, there is no indication of the existence of the Turkish race in Asia Minor in ancient times. The famous sculptured head of Tello (in the Louvre) has a false Turkish air, owing to the head-dress and the broken nose; three other statuettes from the same locality, preserved at Paris, have a fine and prominent nose and meeting eyebrows: Assyroid characters (see De Clercq, Album des Antiq. de la Chaldée, Paris, 1889–91; Maspero, Hist. des peupl. Orient. Class., vol. i., p. 613, Paris, 1895; and E. de Sarzec, Découvertes en Chaldée, published by Heuzey, Paris, 1885–97).

[468] The interactions with the Turks must be recent; because while we can still talk about the “Turanian” aspects of the Sumero-Acadian language, there's no evidence to suggest that the Turkish race existed in Asia Minor in ancient times. The well-known sculpted head of Tello (in the Louvre) has a misleading Turkish appearance, due to the headgear and the broken nose; three other statuettes from the same area, kept in Paris, feature a fine and prominent nose and close-set eyebrows: Assyrian traits (see De Clercq, Album des Antiq. de la Chaldée, Paris, 1889–91; Maspero, Hist. des peupl. Orient. Class., vol. i., p. 613, Paris, 1895; and E. de Sarzec, Découvertes en Chaldée, published by Heuzey, Paris, 1885–97).

[469] D. Menant, “Les Parsis,” Ann. Mus. Guin., Bibl. Et., vol. vii., Paris.

[469] D. Menant, “The Parsis,” Ann. Mus. Guin., Bibl. Et., vol. vii., Paris.

[470] E. Oliver, Across the Border, Pathan and Biloch, London, 1890.

[470] E. Oliver, Across the Border, Pathan and Biloch, London, 1890.

[471] For the measurements of the Iranians see Appendices I. to III. (from Danilof, Houssey, Ujfalvy, Bogdanof, Chantre, Troll, Risley).

[471] For the Iranian measurements, see Appendices I. to III. (from Danilof, Houssey, Ujfalvy, Bogdanof, Chantre, Troll, Risley).

[472] Möckler, “Origin of Baluch,” Proc. As. Soc. Bengal, 1893, p. 159.

[472] Möckler, “Origin of Baluch,” Proc. As. Soc. Bengal, 1893, p. 159.

[473] Chantre, Rech. Anthr. As. Occid. Transcaucasie, Asie Min. et Syrie, Lyons, 1895 (with pl. and fig.); and “Les Kurdes,” Bull. Soc. Anthr. Lyons, 1897. The Lurs of Western Persia living south of the Kurds are akin to the latter; they may be divided into Luri-Kuchucks (250,000) or little Lurs in Luristan, and into Luri-Buzury, farther south, in Hazistan, a part of Fars. Their best known tribes are those of the Bakhtyari and Maamaseni. The Lurs are above the average height (1 m. 68), and sub-brachycephalic (ceph. ind. 84.5), according to Houssay, Duhousset, and Gautier. Cf. Houssay, “Les Peuples de la Perse,” Bull. Soc. Anthr. Lyons, 1887, p. 101; and Pantiukhof, loc. cit.

[473] Chantre, Rech. Anthr. As. Occid. Transcaucasie, Asie Min. et Syrie, Lyons, 1895 (with pl. and fig.); and “Les Kurdes,” Bull. Soc. Anthr. Lyons, 1897. The Lurs of Western Persia living south of the Kurds are related to them; they can be divided into Luri-Kuchucks (250,000) or little Lurs in Luristan, and into Luri-Buzury, further south in Hazistan, a region of Fars. Their most well-known tribes are the Bakhtyari and Maamaseni. The Lurs are taller than average (1 minute. 68) and sub-brachycephalic (ceph. ind. 84.5), according to Houssay, Duhousset, and Gautier. See Houssay, “Les Peuples de la Perse,” Bull. Soc. Anthr. Lyons, 1887, p. 101; and Pantiukhof, loc. cit.

[474] The Arab tongue of the present day includes three dialects: Western, extending from Morocco to Tunis; Central, spoken in Egypt; and Eastern, spoken in Arabia and Syria.

[474] The modern Arabic language has three main dialects: Western, which is spoken from Morocco to Tunisia; Central, found in Egypt; and Eastern, used in Arabia and Syria.

[475] Petersen and Von Luschan, Reisen in Lykien, etc., chap, xiii., Vienna, 1889; Chantre, loc. cit.

[475] Petersen and Von Luschan, Reisen in Lykien, etc., chap. xiii, Vienna, 1889; Chantre, loc. cit.

[476] It is known, in fact, that the isolation of the Jews from the rest of the population is not always absolutely complete. There have been peoples of other races converted to Judaism: the Khasars in the seventh century, the Abyssinians (present Falacha), the Tamuls or “black Jews” (p. 115, note), the Tauridians of the Karaite sect, etc. (p. 222). Cf. J. Jacobs, “Racial Charact.... Jews,” Journ. Anth. Inst., vol. xv. (1885–86), p. 24; and Jacobs and Spielmann, ibid., vol. xix. (1889–90).

[476] It's actually known that the Jews' separation from the rest of the population isn't always totally complete. There have been people of other races who converted to Judaism: the Khazars in the seventh century, the Abyssinians (now called Falacha), the Tamils or “black Jews” (p. 115, note), the Tauridians of the Karaite sect, and others (p. 222). See J. Jacobs, “Racial Charact.... Jews,” Journ. Anth. Inst., vol. xv. (1885–86), p. 24; and Jacobs and Spielmann, ibid., vol. xix. (1889–90).

[477] The Aissors or Chaldeans who migrated to the Caucasus are probably allied to these “Jews of the mountains”; they are also very brachycephalic (ceph. ind. 88) and of rather high stature (1 m. 67) (Erckert, Chantre).

[477] The Aissors or Chaldeans who moved to the Caucasus are likely connected to these “Jews of the mountains.” They also have a broad head shape (ceph. ind. 88) and are fairly tall (1 minute. 67) (Erckert, Chantre).

[478] See the art. “Juifs” in the Dict. Géog. Univers. of Vivien de Saint-Martin and Rousselet, vol. ii., Paris, 1884 (with bibliog.); Andree, Zur Völkerkunde der Juden, Bielefeld, 1881, with map; and publications of the Soc. des Études Juives, Paris. The measurements given in the Appendices are after Ikof, Chantre, Jacobs and Spielmann, Gluck, Kopenicki, Weissenberg, Weisbach, etc.

[478] See the article “Jews” in the Dict. Géog. Univers. by Vivien de Saint-Martin and Rousselet, vol. ii., Paris, 1884 (with bibliography); Andree, Zur Völkerkunde der Juden, Bielefeld, 1881, with map; and publications from the Soc. des Études Juives, Paris. The measurements provided in the Appendices are according to Ikof, Chantre, Jacobs and Spielmann, Gluck, Kopenicki, Weissenberg, Weisbach, etc.

[479] See my art. “Tsiganes,” in the Dict. Géog. Univ., quoted above, vol. vi., 1893; Paspati, Étude sur les Tchinghiané, Constantinople, 1870; A. Colocci, Gli Zingari, Turin, 1889, with map; H. von Wlislocki, Vom ... Zigeuner-Volke, Hamburg, 1890; and the publications of the Gypsy-Lore Society, London (1886–96).

[479] Check out my work. “Tsiganes,” in the Dict. Géog. Univ., mentioned earlier, vol. vi., 1893; Paspati, Étude sur les Tchinghiané, Constantinople, 1870; A. Colocci, Gli Zingari, Turin, 1889, with map; H. von Wlislocki, Vom ... Zigeuner-Volke, Hamburg, 1890; and the publications of the Gypsy-Lore Society, London (1886–96).

[480] Fl. Petrie and Quibell, Nagada and Ballas, London, 1896; De Morgan, Recherches sur les Origines de l’Egypte, Paris, 1897–98, 2 vols. See for summary of the question: S. Reinach, L’Anthropol., 1897, p. 322; and J. Capart, Rev. Université, Brussels, 4th year (1898–99), p. 105. Let us remember while on this point that at the quaternary period lower Egypt was still covered by the sea, and that the climate of Egypt and the Sahara was much more humid than to-day (Shirmer, Le Sahara, p. 136, Paris, 1893). Most of the prehistoric finds in Egypt have been made on the table-lands, not covered by the alluvial soils of the Nile.

[480] Fl. Petrie and Quibell, Nagada and Ballas, London, 1896; De Morgan, Recherches sur les Origines de l’Egypte, Paris, 1897–98, 2 vols. For a summary of the issue, see S. Reinach, L’Anthropol., 1897, p. 322; and J. Capart, Rev. Université, Brussels, 4th year (1898–99), p. 105. It’s important to remember that during the quaternary period, lower Egypt was still underwater, and the climate in Egypt and the Sahara was much more humid than it is today (Shirmer, Le Sahara, p. 136, Paris, 1893). Most prehistoric discoveries in Egypt have been found in the tablelands, which are not covered by the Nile’s alluvial soils.

[481] W. Gooch, Journ. Anthr. Inst., vol. xi. (1882), p. 124; Seton Karr, “Discov. of Evid. Paleolith. Age in Somaliland,” Journ. Anthr. Inst., vol. xxv. (1896), p. 271; X. Stainier, “L’âge de la pierre au Congo,” Annales Mus. du Congo, 3rd series (Anthr.), vol. i., part 1, Brussels, 1899 (with plates).

[481] W. Gooch, Journ. Anthr. Inst., vol. xi. (1882), p. 124; Seton Karr, “Discovery of Evidence of the Paleolithic Age in Somaliland,” Journ. Anthr. Inst., vol. xxv. (1896), p. 271; X. Stainier, “The Stone Age in Congo,” Annales Mus. du Congo, 3rd series (Anthr.), vol. i., part 1, Brussels, 1899 (with plates).

[482] R. Collignon, “Les âges de la pierre en Tunisie,” Mater. Hist. Nat. Homme, 3rd series, vol. iv., Toulouse, 1887; Couillault, “Station préhist. Gafsa,” L’Anthropologie, vol. v., 1894, p. 530; Zaborowski, “Period néolith. Afr. du nord,” Rev. Ec. Anthr., Paris, 1899, p. 41.

[482] R. Collignon, “The Ages of Stone in Tunisia,” Mater. Hist. Nat. Homme, 3rd series, vol. iv., Toulouse, 1887; Couillault, “Prehistoric Site Gafsa,” L’Anthropologie, vol. v., 1894, p. 530; Zaborowski, “Neolithic Period in North Africa,” Rev. Ec. Anthr., Paris, 1899, p. 41.

[483] See for details, R. Andree, “Steinzeit Afrikas,” Globus, vol. xli. (1882), p. 169; and X. Stainier, loc. cit., p. 18.

[483] For details, see R. Andree, “Stone Age of Africa,” Globus, vol. xli. (1882), p. 169; and X. Stainier, loc. cit., p. 18.

[484] Recent discoveries of stone objects in Egypt have revived the question of Asiatic or European influence in Africa. While Flinders Petrie, De Morgan, and others suppose that Petrie’s “new race” of the neolithic period which preceded Egyptian civilisation in the Nile valley is related to the Libyans coming from the north-west of Africa, and perhaps from Europe, Schweinfurth (Zeitsh. f. Ethnol., 1897; Verhandl., p. 263) thinks that these neolithic people were immigrants from Arabia (Semites?), who had come into the Nile valley from the south, through Nubia. The recent discovery of chipped flints in the country of the Somalis, as well as considerations of a botanic character, confirm this supposition, without excluding, however, the possibility of the arrival of the Libyans of the north-west in the palæolithic period, and the tribes of Syria and Mesopotamia in historic times. (Evidence: the “Hyksos” of the Egyptian annals, the presence of cuneiform tablets at Tel-el-Amarna, upper Egypt, to which attention was drawn by Sayce, etc.)

[484] Recent findings of stone tools in Egypt have reignited the debate over whether Asia or Europe had an influence on Africa. While Flinders Petrie, De Morgan, and others suggest that Petrie’s “new race” of the Neolithic period, which came before Egyptian civilization in the Nile Valley, is linked to the Libyans originating from northwestern Africa, and possibly Europe, Schweinfurth (Zeitsh. f. Ethnol., 1897; Verhandl., p. 263) argues that these Neolithic people were immigrants from Arabia (Semites?), who entered the Nile Valley from the south, through Nubia. The recent discovery of flint tools in Somalia, along with botanical evidence, supports this theory, while also leaving open the possibility that Libyans from the northwest arrived during the Paleolithic period, and that tribes from Syria and Mesopotamia settled in historic times. (Evidence: the “Hyksos” mentioned in Egyptian records, the presence of cuneiform tablets at Tel-el-Amarna in Upper Egypt, noted by Sayce, etc.)

[485] Barthel, “Völkerbewegungen ... Afrikan. Kontin.,” Mittheil. Verein Erdkunde, Leipzig, 1893, with map.

[485] Barthel, “Population Movements ... African Continent,” Journal of Geography, Leipzig, 1893, with map.

[486] Jews and Maltese on the coast of the Mediterranean; Persians and Hindus on the east coast and the islands off it; a few hundred Chinese introduced into the Congo State and the Mauritius and Réunion islands. Among the Europeans, the Boers of Cape Colony, of the basin of the Orange river, and the Transvaal, as well as the Portuguese of Angola and Mozambique, are more or less intermingled with the natives. The English of the Cape, and the French of Algeria-Tunis, and the “Creoles” of the island of Réunion have kept themselves more free from intermixture. Finally, let us note the Spanish of Algeria-Morocco and the Canary Isles, the latter the hybrid descendants of the prehistoric Guanches, which are perhaps connected with the European Cro-Magnon race. (See S. Berthelot, “Les Guanches,” Mem. Soc. Ethnol., Paris, vols. i. and ii., 1841–45; Verneau, Iles Canaries, Paris, 1891.)

[486] Jews and Maltese along the Mediterranean coast; Persians and Hindus on the east coast and the nearby islands; a few hundred Chinese brought into the Congo State and the islands of Mauritius and Réunion. Among Europeans, the Boers from Cape Colony, the Orange River basin, and the Transvaal are somewhat mixed with the locals. The English in the Cape, the French in Algeria-Tunis, and the “Creoles” of Réunion have maintained a clearer separation from intermingling. Finally, we should mention the Spanish in Algeria-Morocco and the Canary Islands, the latter being hybrid descendants of the prehistoric Guanches, who may have links to the European Cro-Magnon race. (See S. Berthelot, “Les Guanches,” Mem. Soc. Ethnol., Paris, vols. i. and ii., 1841–45; Verneau, Iles Canaries, Paris, 1891.)

[487] Hartmann, “Les Peuples de l’Afrique,” Paris, 1880 (Bibl. Internat.), a work written from a different standpoint from the present chapter.

[487] Hartmann, “The Peoples of Africa,” Paris, 1880 (Internat. Library), a work written from a different perspective than the current chapter.

[488] See for details, Hanoteau and Letourneux, La Kabylie, etc., Paris, 1872–73; Quedenfeld, “Berberbevölkerung in Marokko,” Zeits. f. Ethn., vol. xx.-xxi., 1888–89; Topinard, “Les types de ... l’Algérie,” Bull. Soc. Anthr. Paris, 1881; Villot, Mœurs, coutumes ... des indig. de l’Algérie, Algiers, 1888; Ch. Amat, “Les Beni-Mzab,” Rev. Anthr., 1884, p. 644.

[488] For more details, see Hanoteau and Letourneux, La Kabylie, etc., Paris, 1872–73; Quedenfeld, “Berber Population in Morocco,” Journal of Ethnology, vol. xx.-xxi., 1888–89; Topinard, “The Types of ... Algeria,” Bulletin of the Anthropological Society of Paris, 1881; Villot, Customs and Traditions of the Indigenous People of Algeria, Algiers, 1888; Ch. Amat, “The Beni-Mzab,” Anthropological Review, 1884, p. 644.

[489] Collignon, “Ethn. gén. de la Tunisie,” Bull. Géogr. hist. et descr., Paris, 1887. Cf. Bertholon, “La population de la Tunisie,” Rev. gén. des Sc., Paris, 1896, p. 972 (with fig.).

[489] Collignon, “General Ethnography of Tunisia,” Geographical Historical and Descriptive Bulletin, Paris, 1887. See Bertholon, “The Population of Tunisia,” General Science Review, Paris, 1896, p. 972 (with fig.).

[490] It is to be noted that these last belong, like the islanders of Djerba, to the Ibadite sect, an offshoot of orthodox Islamism.

[490] It's important to mention that these people, like the islanders of Djerba, are part of the Ibadite sect, which is a branch of orthodox Islam.

[491] Duveyrier, Les Touareg du Nord, Paris, 1864; Schirmer, loc. cit.

[491] Duveyrier, The Tuareg of the North, Paris, 1864; Schirmer, same source

[492] Rohlfs, Quer durch Africa, vol. i., Leipzig, 1888.

[492] Rohlfs, Across Africa, vol. i., Leipzig, 1888.

[493] Faidherbe, “Les Berbers ... du Sénégal,” Bull. Soc. Anthr. Paris, 1864, p. 89; R. Collignon and Deniker, “Les Maures du Sénégal,” L’Anthropologie, 1895, p. 287.

[493] Faidherbe, “The Berbers ... of Senegal,” Bull. Soc. Anthr. Paris, 1864, p. 89; R. Collignon and Deniker, “The Moors of Senegal,” L’Anthropologie, 1895, p. 287.

[494] According to the best preserved monuments, the ancient Egyptians had a brownish-reddish complexion of skin, long face, pointed chin, scant beard, straight or aquiline nose like the Ethiopian race (see p. 288). The hair of the mummies makes us think of the black and frizzy hair of the Ethiopians themselves. Lastly, the few ancient Egyptian skulls examined are meso- or dolicho-cephalic. See Pruner-Bey, Mem. Soc. Anthr. Paris, vol. i., 1863; Hartman, Zeits. für Ethnol., vols. i. and ii., 1869–70, and Die Nigritier, Berlin, 1876; E. Schmidt, Arch. f. Anthr., vol. xvii., 1888; S. Poole, Journ. Anthr. Inst., vol. xvi., 1886, p. 371; S. Bertin, ibid., 1889, vol. xviii., p. 104; Phot. Coll., Flinders Petrie (Brit. Assoc. 1887); Sergi, Africa Antropol. della stirpe camitica, Turin, 1897. Virchow (Sitzungsb. Preuss Akad. Wiss., 1888) has endeavoured to show that the most ancient type of the Egyptians was brachycephalic, but his deductions are disputable, being based on measurements of statues.

[494] Based on the best-preserved monuments, the ancient Egyptians had a brownish-reddish skin tone, long faces, pointed chins, thin beards, and straight or slightly curved noses similar to the Ethiopian people (see p. 288). The hair of the mummies resembles the black, frizzy hair of Ethiopians. Lastly, the few ancient Egyptian skulls examined are classified as meso- or dolichocephalic. See Pruner-Bey, Mem. Soc. Anthr. Paris, vol. i., 1863; Hartman, Zeits. für Ethnol., vols. i. and ii., 1869–70, and Die Nigritier, Berlin, 1876; E. Schmidt, Arch. f. Anthr., vol. xvii., 1888; S. Poole, Journ. Anthr. Inst., vol. xvi., 1886, p. 371; S. Bertin, ibid., 1889, vol. xviii., p. 104; Phot. Coll., Flinders Petrie (Brit. Assoc. 1887); Sergi, Africa Antropol. della stirpe camitica, Turin, 1897. Virchow (Sitzungsb. Preuss Akad. Wiss., 1888) attempted to demonstrate that the earliest type of Egyptians was brachycephalic, but his conclusions are debatable, as they are based on measurements of statues.

[495] Sometimes the Barabras are also similarly designated, in my opinion wrongly, for this leads to a triple confusion, “Nuba” being still the name of a Negro tribe (see p. 444). It would be more correct to employ this term as a synonym of Northern Ethiopian; besides, according to Strabo (Book XVII.), Eratosthenes refers to the “Nubians” in his time as a people distinct from the Negroes and Egyptians. The Barabras are not so dark, have not such frizzy hair, and are not so tall as the Bejas, the Hamrans, and other Ethiopians their neighbours, and consequently belong, not only by their language, but also by their physical type, to the Arabo-Berber group.

[495] Sometimes the Barabras are mistakenly called that, which I think is wrong, because it causes a lot of confusion—“Nuba” is still the name of a Black tribe (see p. 444). It would be more accurate to use this term as a synonym for Northern Ethiopian; additionally, according to Strabo (Book XVII), Eratosthenes referred to the “Nubians” in his time as a group separate from the Black people and Egyptians. The Barabras are not as dark, don’t have such tightly coiled hair, and aren’t as tall as the Bejas, the Hamrans, and other nearby Ethiopians, so they belong, not only by their language but also by their physical characteristics, to the Arabo-Berber group.

[496] For general works see Paulitschke, Beiträge Ethnogr. u. Anthr. d. Somâl. Galla, Leipzig, 1886, and Ethnogr. Nordost Africas, Berlin, 1893–96, 2 vols.; Sergi, loc. cit. (Africa).

[496] For general works, see Paulitschke, Contributions to the Ethnography and Anthropology of the Somali Galla, Leipzig, 1886, and Ethnography of Northeast Africa, Berlin, 1893–96, 2 vols.; Sergi, loc. cit. (Africa).

[497] Hartmann, “Die Bedjah,” Zeit. f. Ethnol., vol. xi., 1879, p. 117; Virchow, Zeit. f. Ethn., vol. x., 1878 (Verh. p. 333, etc.), and vol. xi., 1879 (Verh. p. 389); Deniker, Bull. Soc. Anthr. Paris, 1880, p. 594.

[497] Hartmann, “Die Bedjah,” Journal of Ethnology, vol. xi., 1879, p. 117; Virchow, Journal of Ethnology, vol. x., 1878 (Proceedings p. 333, etc.), and vol. xi., 1879 (Proceedings p. 389); Deniker, Bulletin of the Anthropological Society of Paris, 1880, p. 594.

[498] Révoil, La Vallée du Darrar, Paris, 1882; Paulitschke, loc. cit.; Sergi, loc. cit., p. 178; Santelli, Bull. Soc. Anthr. Paris, 1893, p. 479.

[498] Révoil, La Vallée du Darrar, Paris, 1882; Paulitschke, loc. cit.; Sergi, loc. cit., p. 178; Santelli, Bull. Soc. Anthr. Paris, 1893, p. 479.

[499] See Appendices I. to III. for the measurements given from the works already quoted of Deniker, Paulitschke, Santelli, Sergi, and Virchow.

[499] See Appendices I. to III. for the measurements provided from the previously mentioned works of Deniker, Paulitschke, Santelli, Sergi, and Virchow.

[500] J. Thomson, Through Masai Land, 2nd ed., London, 1887; Stuhlmann, Mit Emin Pascha ins Herz von Afrika, Berlin, 1894; F. von Luschan, Beitr. zur Völkerk. d. Deutsch. Schulzgebiet, Berlin, 1897, with meas. and phot.

[500] J. Thomson, Through Masai Land, 2nd ed., London, 1887; Stuhlmann, With Emin Pasha in the Heart of Africa, Berlin, 1894; F. von Luschan, Contributions to the Ethnography of the German Schulzgebiet, Berlin, 1897, with measurements and photographs.

[501] W. Junker, Reisen in Afrika, Vienna and Olmütz, 1889–91; and Ergänzungsh. Peter. Mit., Nos. 92 and 93, Gotha, 1888–89.

[501] W. Junker, Travels in Africa, Vienna and Olmütz, 1889–91; and Supplementary Publications. With., Nos. 92 and 93, Gotha, 1888–89.

[502] Schweinfurth, “Die Monbuttu,” Zeits. f. Ethn., 1873, p. 1, and Artes Africanæ, Leipzig, 1875; Junker, loc. cit.; P. Comte, Les N’Sakkaras, Bar-le-Duc, 1895.

[502] Schweinfurth, “The Monbuttu,” Journal of Ethnology, 1873, p. 1, and African Arts, Leipzig, 1875; Junker, loc. cit.; P. Comte, The N'Sakkaras, Bar-le-Duc, 1895.

[503] See Schweinfurth, loc. cit. (Artes Africanæ), and The Heart of Africa, 2nd ed., London, 1878; Junker, loc. cit.

[503] See Schweinfurth, loc. cit. (Artes Africanæ), and The Heart of Africa, 2nd ed., London, 1878; Junker, loc. cit.

[504] Crampel, Le Tour du Monde, 1890, 2nd half-year, p. 1; Dybowski, La Route du Tchad, Paris, 1893; Maistre, De l’Oubanghi à la Bénoué, Paris, 1895.

[504] Crampel, Le Tour du Monde, 1890, 2nd half-year, p. 1; Dybowski, La Route du Tchad, Paris, 1893; Maistre, De l’Oubanghi à la Bénoué, Paris, 1895.

[505] Béranger-Féraud, Peuples de la Senagambie, chap, iii., Paris, 1879; and the works of Faidherbe, Binger, Tautin, P. C. Meyer, quoted later.

[505] Béranger-Féraud, Peoples of Senegambia, ch. iii., Paris, 1879; and the works of Faidherbe, Binger, Tautin, P. C. Meyer, mentioned later.

[506] Stature, 1 m. 75; ceph. ind., 74.3; nas. ind., 95.3 (Collignon and Deniker on 32 subjects).

[506] Height, 1 minute. 75; cranial index, 74.3; nasal index, 95.3 (Collignon and Deniker on 32 subjects).

[507] It follows from what has been said previously that in many places the northern portion of the Negro territory is invaded by the Ethiopians, the Fulah-Zandeh, and the Arabo-Berbers.

[507] Based on what has been discussed, it's clear that in many areas, the northern part of the Black territory is being encroached upon by the Ethiopians, the Fulah-Zandeh, and the Arabo-Berbers.

[508] Nachtigal, Sahara et Soudan, vol. i. (trans. into French), p. 245, Paris, 1881.

[508] Nachtigal, Sahara et Soudan, vol. i. (trans. into French), p. 245, Paris, 1881.

[509] Nachtigal, Sahara und Sudan, Berlin-Leipzig, 1879–89, 3 vols.

[509] Nachtigal, Sahara and Sudan, Berlin-Leipzig, 1879–89, 3 vols.

[510] Schweinfurth, loc. cit., vol. i., chaps. vii. and lciv.; Stuhlmann, loc. cit., chap. xxii.; Frobenius, Die Heiden-Neger, Berlin, 1893; E. de Martonne, Annales de Géogr., Paris, 1896, p. 506, and 1897, p. 57.

[510] Schweinfurth, loc. cit., vol. i., chaps. vii. and lciv.; Stuhlmann, loc. cit., chap. xxii.; Frobenius, Die Heiden-Neger, Berlin, 1893; E. de Martonne, Annales de Géogr., Paris, 1896, p. 506, and 1897, p. 57.

[511] Nachtigal, loc. cit.; Barth, Reisen ... in Nord u. Centr. Afr., Gotha, 1857–58, 5 vols.; Monteil, De Saint-Louis à Tripoli, Paris, 1895; Maistre, loc. cit.; Staudinger, Im Herzen der Haussaländer, Berlin, 1889, 2 vols.

[511] Nachtigal, loc. cit.; Barth, Travels ... in North and Central Africa, Gotha, 1857–58, 5 vols.; Monteil, From Saint-Louis to Tripoli, Paris, 1895; Maistre, loc. cit.; Staudinger, In the Heart of the Hausa Lands, Berlin, 1889, 2 vols.

[512] The Diumma or Diammo, to the north-east of the bend of the Black Volta, are probably a branch of the Gurunga; only having for long been subject to the Ashantis they have adopted their language, which is the only one they use in addressing strangers. (Binger, Du Niger au golfe de Guinée, Paris, 1892.)

[512] The Diumma or Diammo, located to the northeast of the bend of the Black Volta, are likely a branch of the Gurunga. Having been under the influence of the Ashantis for a long time, they have adopted their language, which is the only one they use when speaking to outsiders. (Binger, Du Niger au golfe de Guinée, Paris, 1892.)

[513] Béranger-Féraud, loc. cit., ch. v., and Rev. Anthr., 1874, p. 444; Binger, loc. cit.

[513] Béranger-Féraud, loc. cit., ch. v., and Rev. Anthr., 1874, p. 444; Binger, loc. cit.

[514] Faidherbe, “Les Sarakolés,” Rev. de Linguist., 1881, p. 80.

[514] Faidherbe, “The Sarakolés,” Journal of Linguistics, 1881, p. 80.

[515] For details see C. Madrolle, En Guinée, Paris, 1895.

[515] For more information, check out C. Madrolle, In Guinea, Paris, 1895.

[516] They must not be confounded with the Diula of the regions of Kong and the upper Niger, one of the first Mandénké tribes converted to Islamism, at the same time one of the least fanatic, perhaps because the most given to trade. (See M. Monnier, loc. cit.)

[516] They should not be confused with the Diula from the Kong region and the upper Niger, one of the earliest Mandénké tribes to convert to Islam, and also one of the least fanatical, possibly because they are the most engaged in trade. (See M. Monnier, loc. cit.)

[517] Coffinières de Nordeck, Tour du Monde, vol. li., p. 273, 1886.

[517] Coffinières de Nordeck, World Tour, vol. li., p. 273, 1886.

[518] Binger, loc. cit.; Tautin, “Les Castes des Mandingues,” Rev. Ethnogr., vol. iii., Paris, 1884.

[518] Binger, loc. cit.; Tautin, “The Castes of the Manding,” Rev. Ethnogr., vol. iii., Paris, 1884.

[519] For details in regard to the Wolofs, the Toucouleur, etc., see Béranger-Féraud, loc. cit., chap. i., and Rev. Anthr., 1875; Tautin, “Études ... ethnol. peuples Senegal,” Rev. Ethnogr., 1885; Deniker and Laloy, loc. cit., p. 259; Collignon and Deniker, unpublished notes; Verneau, “Serer, Leybou, Ouolofs,” L’Anthropol., 1895, p. 510.

[519] For information on the Wolofs, Toucouleur, etc., see Béranger-Féraud, loc. cit., chap. i., and Rev. Anthr., 1875; Tautin, “Études ... ethnol. peuples Senegal,” Rev. Ethnogr., 1885; Deniker and Laloy, loc. cit., p. 259; Collignon and Deniker, unpublished notes; Verneau, “Serer, Leybou, Ouolofs,” L’Anthropol., 1895, p. 510.

[520] Deniker and Laloy, loc. cit.; Ten Kate and Serrurier, Musée Ethnogr. Leyden, Notices Anth., No. I., undated (1891?), in fol.

[520] Deniker and Laloy, loc. cit.; Ten Kate and Serrurier, Museum Ethnography Leyden, Anthro. Notices, No. I., undated (1891?), in fol.

[521] Buttikofer, Reisebilder aus Liberia, vol. ii., Leyden, 1890.

[521] Buttikofer, Travel Stories from Liberia, vol. ii., Leyden, 1890.

[522] Fleuriot de Langle, Le Tour du Monde, 1873, 2nd half-year; Binger, loc. cit., 2nd vol.; Delafosse, “Les Agni,” L’Anthropologie, 1893, p. 403.

[522] Fleuriot de Langle, Le Tour du Monde, 1873, 2nd half-year; Binger, loc. cit., 2nd vol.; Delafosse, “Les Agni,” L’Anthropologie, 1893, p. 403.

[523] Ellis, The Tshi-speaking Peoples, etc., London, 1887, and The Ewe-speaking Peoples, etc., London, 1890; Foa, Le Dahomey, Paris, 1895; D’Albecca, Le Tour du Monde, Feb. 1896; F. von Luschan, loc. cit. (Beitr. Deutsch. Schützg....).

[523] Ellis, The Tshi-speaking Peoples, etc., London, 1887, and The Ewe-speaking Peoples, etc., London, 1890; Foa, Le Dahomey, Paris, 1895; D’Albecca, Le Tour du Monde, Feb. 1896; F. von Luschan, loc. cit. (Beitr. Deutsch. Schützg....).

[524] Rev. Dennis Kemp, Nine Years on the Gold Coast, London, 1898.

[524] Rev. Dennis Kemp, Nine Years on the Gold Coast, London, 1898.

[525] The name Mina was applied in Brazil without distinction to all Negroes imported from the Slave Coast, while those from the Gold Coast were called Apollonians. Batty, “Yorouba Country,” Journ. Anthro. Inst., vol. ix. (1890), p. 160; Moloney, ibid., p. 213; Ellis, The Yoruba-speaking Peoples, London, 1894.

[525] In Brazil, the name Mina was used to refer indiscriminately to all Black people brought in from the Slave Coast, while those from the Gold Coast were called Apollonians. Batty, “Yorouba Country,” Journ. Anthro. Inst., vol. ix. (1890), p. 160; Moloney, ibid., p. 213; Ellis, The Yoruba-speaking Peoples, London, 1894.

[526] Deniker, “Les Dahoméens,” Rev. gén. Sciences, 1891, p. 174; Deniker and Laloy, loc. cit.

[526] Deniker, “The Dahomeans,” General Review of Sciences, 1891, p. 174; Deniker and Laloy, same place cited.

[527] See, about these populations, the 1st Appendix, by Comte de Cardi, in West Afric. Stud., by Miss M. Kingsley, London, 1899.

[527] Check out the 1st Appendix by Comte de Cardi on these populations in West Afric. Stud. by Miss M. Kingsley, London, 1899.

[528] Schweinfurth, loc. cit.; Stanley, In Darkest Africa, London, 1890; Wolff, Zeit. f. Ethn., 1886 (Verh., p. 25); De Quatrefages, loc. cit. (Les Pygmées), p. 253; De Quatrefages and Hamy, Cran. Ethn., p. 334; Falkenstein, Zeit. f. Ethn., 1877 (Verh., p. 194 and pl. xii.-xiv.); W. Flower, Journ. Anthr. Inst., vol. xviii. (1889), p. 3; Deniker and Laloy, loc. cit., p. 288; Emin Bey (afterwards Pasha), “Sur les Akka, etc.,” Zeit. f. Ethn., 1886, p. 145; Junker, loc. cit.; Nebout, Tour du Monde, 1892, vol. i., p. 64; Crampel, “Les Bayagas,” Compte rend. Soc. Geogr., Paris, 1890, p. 548; O. Lenz, Ueber Zwergvölker Afr., Vienna, 1894; Deniker, Bull. Soc. Anthr., 1894, p. 440; Dybowski, La Nature, 1894, 2nd half-year; Stuhlmann, loc. cit., pl. xvi.-xvii., p. 436; Schlichter, “Pygmy of Africa,” Scot. Geog. Mag., 1892, p. 289, and Peterm. Mitteil., 1896, p. 235; Donaldson Smith, Geog. Journ., London, 1896, pp. 225 and 235; Burrows, loc. cit.

[528] Schweinfurth, loc. cit.; Stanley, In Darkest Africa, London, 1890; Wolff, Zeit. f. Ethn., 1886 (Verh., p. 25); De Quatrefages, loc. cit. (Les Pygmées), p. 253; De Quatrefages and Hamy, Cran. Ethn., p. 334; Falkenstein, Zeit. f. Ethn., 1877 (Verh., p. 194 and pl. xii.-xiv.); W. Flower, Journ. Anthr. Inst., vol. xviii. (1889), p. 3; Deniker and Laloy, loc. cit., p. 288; Emin Bey (later Pasha), “Sur les Akka, etc.,” Zeit. f. Ethn., 1886, p. 145; Junker, loc. cit.; Nebout, Tour du Monde, 1892, vol. i., p. 64; Crampel, “Les Bayagas,” Compte rend. Soc. Geogr., Paris, 1890, p. 548; O. Lenz, Ueber Zwergvölker Afr., Vienna, 1894; Deniker, Bull. Soc. Anthr., 1894, p. 440; Dybowski, La Nature, 1894, 2nd half-year; Stuhlmann, loc. cit., pl. xvi.-xvii., p. 436; Schlichter, “Pygmy of Africa,” Scot. Geog. Mag., 1892, p. 289, and Peterm. Mitteil., 1896, p. 235; Donaldson Smith, Geog. Journ., London, 1896, pp. 225 and 235; Burrows, loc. cit.

[529] Schinz, loc. cit.; Emin, loc. cit.; Wissmann, Wolff, Von François, and Müller, Im Innern. Afrik., Leipzig, 1888, Appendix IV., and Zeit. f. Ethn., 1884, Verh., p. 725.

[529] Schinz, loc. cit.; Emin, loc. cit.; Wissmann, Wolff, Von François, and Müller, Im Innern. Afrik., Leipzig, 1888, Appendix IV., and Zeit. f. Ethn., 1884, Verh., p. 725.

[530] Dybowski, loc. cit.; Maistre, loc. cit.; Clozel, Tour du Monde, 1896, vol. ii.; Guiral, Le Congo Français, Paris, 1889; Deniker and Laloy, loc. cit., p. 274; Buchner, Kamerun, Leipzig, 1887; Morgen, Durch Kamerun, Leipzig, 1893; Zintgraff, Nord-Kamerun, Berlin, 1895, and “Congo-Völk.,” Z. f. Ethn., 1886, Verh., p. 27, and 1889, p. 90; F. von Luschan, loc. cit. (Beitr., etc.); V. Jacques, “Le Congolais de l’expos. d’Anvers,” Bull. Soc. Anthr., p. 284, Brussels, 1894; J. Wauters, L’État Indép. du Congo, Brussels, 1899; Mensé, “Völk. Mittl. Kongo,” Z. f. Ethn., 1897, Verh., p. 624.

[530] Dybowski, loc. cit.; Maistre, loc. cit.; Clozel, Tour du Monde, 1896, vol. ii.; Guiral, Le Congo Français, Paris, 1889; Deniker and Laloy, loc. cit., p. 274; Buchner, Kamerun, Leipzig, 1887; Morgen, Durch Kamerun, Leipzig, 1893; Zintgraff, Nord-Kamerun, Berlin, 1895, and “Congo-Völk.,” Z. f. Ethn., 1886, Verh., p. 27, and 1889, p. 90; F. von Luschan, loc. cit. (Beitr., etc.); V. Jacques, “Le Congolais de l’expos. d’Anvers,” Bull. Soc. Anthr., p. 284, Brussels, 1894; J. Wauters, L’État Indép. du Congo, Brussels, 1899; Mensé, “Völk. Mittl. Kongo,” Z. f. Ethn., 1897, Verh., p. 624.

[531] The Oshyeba are a section of the Fan people; they may be divided into Makima (in the Upper Ogowe) and into Mazuna (of the Gabun). They are a people of famous warriors, composed of 200,000 individuals, which number is increasing with extraordinary rapidity.

[531] The Oshyeba are a part of the Fan people; they can be split into Makima (in the Upper Ogowe) and Mazuna (of the Gabun). They are known for being a group of famous warriors, consisting of 200,000 people, and that number is growing at an incredible rate.

[532] A. Bastian, Zeilschr. f. Ethnol., vol. vi., 1874; E. Reclus, Geogr. Univers., vol. xiii., p. 125, Paris, 1888.

[532] A. Bastian, Journal of Ethnology, vol. vi., 1874; E. Reclus, Universal Geography, vol. xiii., p. 125, Paris, 1888.

[533] It is supposed that the Bubangis arrived at the north of French Congo about the eighteenth century, and their migration towards the south, stayed for the time being by the Batekes, has gone on to the present day.

[533] It is believed that the Bubangis came to the north of French Congo around the eighteenth century, and their migration south, temporarily halted by the Batekes, has continued to this day.

[534] Pogge, Im Reiche d. Muata Jamwo, Berlin, 1880, and Mittheil. Afrik. Gesell., vol. iv., 1883–85, p. 179; Wolff, Verh. Gesell. Erdkunde, Berlin, 1887, No. 2; A. J. Wauters, L’État independant du Congo, Brussels, 1899, p. 257 et seq.; Serpa Pinto, How I Crossed Africa, 2 vols., London, 1881, with figs.; Wissmann, Wolff, Von François, and Müller, Im Inneren Afrikas, Leipzig, 1888, with figs.; Jacques, Les Congolais.

[534] Pogge, In the Realm of Muata Jamwo, Berlin, 1880, and Reports of the African Society, vol. iv., 1883–85, p. 179; Wolff, Proceedings of the Geographic Society, Berlin, 1887, No. 2; A. J. Wauters, The Independent State of the Congo, Brussels, 1899, p. 257 et seq.; Serpa Pinto, How I Crossed Africa, 2 vols., London, 1881, with figures; Wissmann, Wolff, Von François, and Müller, In the Heart of Africa, Leipzig, 1888, with figures; Jacques, The Congolese.

[535] L. Frobenius (Der Ursprung der Afrik. Kulturen, Berlin, 1898) sees in this last-cited fact a proof of the supposed influence of the Malays; E. Reclus (Geogr. Univers., vol. xiii., p. 271) regards it as the result of imitation of the European factories which have been established for three centuries on the coast.

[535] L. Frobenius (The Origin of African Cultures, Berlin, 1898) views this last-mentioned fact as evidence of the alleged influence of the Malays; E. Reclus (Universal Geography, vol. xiii., p. 271) considers it a result of imitation of the European factories that have been set up on the coast for three centuries.

[536] The prefix Ki means “language,” as U means “country,” and Va-Ua, or Ba, “people,” or “men.”

[536] The prefix Ki means “language,” just like U means “country,” and Va-Ua, or Ba, means “people” or “men.”

[537] Fritsch, Die Eingeborenen Sud-Afrikas, Breslau, 1872, with atlas; Holub, Sieben Jahre in Sud-Afrika, Vienna, 1881, vol. ii., figs. and maps, and “Die Matabele,” Zeitschr. f. Ethnol., vol. xx., 1893; Kropf, Das Volk d. Xosa-Kaffern, Berlin, 1889; Wood, loc. cit., vol. i.; Macdonald, “Manners ... South-African Tribes,” Journ. Anth. Inst., vol. xix., p. 264, and vol. xx., p. 123 (1889–90); Johnston, British Central Africa, London, 1897; Junod, “Les Ba-Ronga,” Bull. Soc. Neuchateloise de Géogr., vol. x., 1898.

[537] Fritsch, The Natives of South Africa, Breslau, 1872, with atlas; Holub, Seven Years in South Africa, Vienna, 1881, vol. ii., figures and maps, and “The Matabele,” Journal of Ethnology, vol. xx., 1893; Kropf, The Xhosa Kaffirs, Berlin, 1889; Wood, loc. cit., vol. i.; Macdonald, “Manners ... South African Tribes,” Journal of the Anthropological Institute, vol. xix., p. 264, and vol. xx., p. 123 (1889–90); Johnston, British Central Africa, London, 1897; Junod, “The Ba-Ronga,” Bulletin of the Neuchâtel Geographical Society, vol. x., 1898.

[538] The Bechuana are a little shorter (1 m. 68, according to Fritsch) and more dolichocephalic (ceph. ind. of four skulls, 70.9, according to Hamy, “Documents Cafrerie,” Arch. Mus. Hist. Nat., p. 357, Paris, 1882). Shrubsall (Journ. Anth. Inst., N.S., vol. i., 1898) gives the ceph. index as 71.3 for the Basuto skulls. The Herrero and Damara skulls have the indices, 71 and 72.

[538] The Bechuana are slightly shorter (1.68 m, according to Fritsch) and have a more long-shaped head (cephalic index of four skulls is 70.9, according to Hamy, “Documents Cafrerie,” Arch. Mus. Hist. Nat., p. 357, Paris, 1882). Shrubsall (Journ. Anth. Inst., N.S., vol. i., 1898) reports a cephalic index of 71.3 for the Basuto skulls. The Herrero and Damara skulls have indices of 71 and 72.

[539] Fritsch, loc. cit.; Schinz, loc. cit.; Von Luschan, loc. cit.

[539] Fritsch, same source; Schinz, same source; Von Luschan, same source

[540] The Bushmen represent the race almost in its purity, while the Hottentots show the traits of this race somewhat modified. The stature of the latter is higher, the head more dolichocephalic, the complexion darker, and the hands are not so small as is the case with Bushmen. Their features are more negroid, and it has been suggested that contact with the neighbouring Bantu tribes has had something to do with this. (See Deniker, “Les Hottentots,” Rev. d’Anthrop., 1889, p. 1.) The skin of the Hottentots, however, is still of a hue of yellow, and their steatopygy is almost as pronounced as with the Bushmen.

[540] The Bushmen represent the race in its almost pure form, while the Hottentots show some variations of this race. The Hottentots are taller, have longer heads, darker skin, and their hands are not as small as those of the Bushmen. Their features are more resembling of Black Africans, and it has been suggested that contact with the nearby Bantu tribes has contributed to this. (See Deniker, “Les Hottentots,” Rev. d’Anthrop., 1889, p. 1.) However, the skin tone of the Hottentots still has a yellow hue, and their steatopygia is almost as pronounced as that of the Bushmen.

[541] For particulars see Sibree, Great Afric. Island ... Madagascar, 1880; M. Leclerc, “Les peuplades de Madagascar,” Rev. d’Ethnogr., vol. v., 1886, p. 397, and vol. vi., 1887, p. 1; Catat, Voyage à Madagascar, Paris, 1895, in quarto; Grandidier, “Les Hovas,” Rev. gén. des Sciences, No. for 1st June, 1895; A. Jolly, L’Anthropologie, 1894, p. 385; Besson, ibid., p. 674; “Le Madagascar,” Rev. gén. des Sciences, Paris, No. for 15th Aug., 1895, fig.; Last, Journ. Anthr. Inst., 1896, p. 47; Bouchereau, L’Anthr., 1897, p. 149; J. Carol, Chez les Hovas, Paris, 1898.

[541] For details, see Sibree, Great Afric. Island ... Madagascar, 1880; M. Leclerc, “Les peuplades de Madagascar,” Rev. d’Ethnogr., vol. v., 1886, p. 397, and vol. vi., 1887, p. 1; Catat, Voyage à Madagascar, Paris, 1895, in quarto; Grandidier, “Les Hovas,” Rev. gén. des Sciences, No. for 1st June, 1895; A. Jolly, L’Anthropologie, 1894, p. 385; Besson, ibid., p. 674; “Le Madagascar,” Rev. gén. des Sciences, Paris, No. for 15th Aug., 1895, fig.; Last, Journ. Anthr. Inst., 1896, p. 47; Bouchereau, L’Anthr., 1897, p. 149; J. Carol, Chez les Hovas, Paris, 1898.

[542] The prefix Antan or Anta (in some dialects Ta) in Malagasy language means “people of,” and is found in the nomenclature of all the tribes and people of the island.

[542] The prefix Antan or Anta (in some dialects Ta) in the Malagasy language means “people of,” and is used in the names of all the tribes and communities on the island.

[543] See the measurements given in Appendices I. to III., according to Bouchereau, loc. cit., and my own unpublished observations made in conjunction with Dr. Collignon.

[543] Check the measurements listed in Appendices I. to III., based on Bouchereau, loc. cit., and my own unpublished observations made alongside Dr. Collignon.

[544] For particulars see C. Pleyte, “De prähist. steenen wapenen ... Oost-Indish. Archipel.,” Bijdr. t. d. Taal-Land-en Volkenk. van Nederl. Ind., Batavia, 5th series, vol. ii., p. 586; Wilken, loc. cit., p. 83; Etheridge, “Has Man a Geological History in Australia?” Proc. Linn. Soc. N. S. Wales, 1890, p. 259; B. Smyth, loc. cit., vol. i., p. 239, and vol. ii., p. 234; R. Chapmann, Trans. N. Zeal. Inst., 1891, p. 479.

[544] For details, see C. Pleyte, “De prähist. steenen wapenen ... Oost-Indish. Archipel.,” Bijdr. t. d. Taal-Land-en Volkenk. van Nederl. Ind., Batavia, 5th series, vol. ii., p. 586; Wilken, loc. cit., p. 83; Etheridge, “Does Man Have a Geological History in Australia?” Proc. Linn. Soc. N. S. Wales, 1890, p. 259; B. Smyth, loc. cit., vol. i., p. 239, and vol. ii., p. 234; R. Chapmann, Trans. N. Zeal. Inst., 1891, p. 479.

[545] See W. Thomson Smith, loc. cit.; Tautain, “Monuments des Marquises,” L’Anthropol., 1897, p. 4; F. Christian, “On Micronesian Weapons,” Journ. Anthr. Inst., N.S., 1899, vol. i., p. 288, pl. xx. and xxiv.

[545] See W. Thomson Smith, loc. cit.; Tautain, “Monuments des Marquises,” L’Anthropol., 1897, p. 4; F. Christian, “On Micronesian Weapons,” Journ. Anthr. Inst., N.S., 1899, vol. i., p. 288, pl. xx. and xxiv.

[546] Besides, the Maoris of New Zealand know nothing of pottery, notwithstanding their clay deposits, nor of weaving, notwithstanding the presence in their island of Formium and other textile plants.

[546] Additionally, the Maoris of New Zealand are unaware of pottery, despite having clay deposits, nor do they engage in weaving, even with the availability of Formium and other textile plants on their island.

[547] The division, based on physical characters, of tribes of the interior, composed of a strong people of high stature and regular features, and of tribes of the coast, formed of a little, ugly, and puny people, a division proposed by Topinard (Bull. Soc. Anthro., 1872), has not been confirmed by later investigations.

[547] The classification based on physical traits of inland tribes, made up of a strong group with tall stature and regular features, and coastal tribes, consisting of a small, unattractive, and weak group, a classification suggested by Topinard (Bull. Soc. Anthro., 1872), has not been supported by subsequent research.

[548] “Report ... Horn Scientif. Exped. Centr. Austr.,” Part IV., Anthropology, by E. Stirling, London-Melbourne, 1896; Baldwin Spencer and F. Gillen, The Native Tribes of Central Australia, London, 1899, pl.; W. E. Roth, Ethnol. Stud.... N. W. Centr. Queensl. Aborig., Brisbane-London, 1897. For tribes of the east and south, see E. Curr, The Australian Race, Melbourne, 1886, 3 vols. with atlas; Lumholtz, Among Cannibals, London, 1890; and the works already quoted of Howitt, Fison, and B. Smyth. The measurements given in the Appendices are obtained from the works of Stirling and Gillen, Houzé (Bull. Soc. Anthr. Bruxelles, vol. iii., 1884–85); Cauvin, “Les Races de l’Océanie,” Arch. Miss. Scient., 3rd series, vol. iii., Paris, 1882; Topinard, loc. cit.; Turner, loc. cit., etc.

[548] “Report ... Horn Scient. Exped. Centr. Austr.,” Part IV., Anthropology, by E. Stirling, London-Melbourne, 1896; Baldwin Spencer and F. Gillen, The Native Tribes of Central Australia, London, 1899, pl.; W. E. Roth, Ethnol. Stud.... N. W. Centr. Queensl. Aborig., Brisbane-London, 1897. For tribes in the east and south, see E. Curr, The Australian Race, Melbourne, 1886, 3 vols. with atlas; Lumholtz, Among Cannibals, London, 1890; and the works already mentioned by Howitt, Fison, and B. Smyth. The measurements provided in the Appendices are taken from the works of Stirling and Gillen, Houzé (Bull. Soc. Anthr. Bruxelles, vol. iii., 1884–85); Cauvin, “Les Races de l’Océanie,” Arch. Miss. Scient., 3rd series, vol. iii., Paris, 1882; Topinard, loc. cit.; Turner, loc. cit., etc.

[549] These natives and mixed breeds are apportioned by colonies, thus:—Victoria, 565; New South Wales, 8,280; South Australia, 23,789; West Australia, 6,245; Queensland, 20,585 (of which 12,000 are pure aborigines).

[549] The native populations and mixed breeds are distributed across the colonies as follows: Victoria, 565; New South Wales, 8,280; South Australia, 23,789; Western Australia, 6,245; Queensland, 20,585 (of which 12,000 are pure Aboriginal people).

[550] See L. Parker, Australian Legendary Tales, London and Melbourne, 1897, and More Australian Tales, ib., 1898; Spencer and Gillen, loc. cit.

[550] See L. Parker, Australian Legendary Tales, London and Melbourne, 1897, and More Australian Tales, ib., 1898; Spencer and Gillen, loc. cit.

[551] Estimated at 1000 in 1817, the Tasmanians numbered 340 in 1824 (first census). The number fell to 111 in 1834, to 51 in 1842, to 16 in 1854, to 4 in 1865 (H. Hull, Statist. Summary of Tasmanians, 1866). The last representative of the Tasmanian people, a woman called Truganina, died in 1876. Miss F. C. Smith, still living, and described as a Tasmanian, in 1889, is a Tasmano-European half-breed (Ling Roth, Journ. Anthr. Inst., vol. xxvii., p. 451, 1897–98).

[551] Estimated at 1,000 in 1817, the Tasmanians numbered 340 in 1824 (the first census). The population dropped to 111 in 1834, to 51 in 1842, to 16 in 1854, and to 4 in 1865 (H. Hull, Statist. Summary of Tasmanians, 1866). The last known Tasmanian person, a woman named Truganina, died in 1876. Miss F. C. Smith, still alive and referred to as a Tasmanian in 1889, is a Tasmano-European mixed-race individual (Ling Roth, Journ. Anthr. Inst., vol. xxvii., p. 451, 1897–98).

[552] In his work, The Aborigines of Tasmania, 2nd ed., London, 1899, with figs., Ling Roth has conscientiously summarised all that has been published about the Tasmanians.

[552] In his book, The Aborigines of Tasmania, 2nd ed., London, 1899, with illustrations, Ling Roth has thoroughly summarized everything that has been published about the Tasmanians.

[553] There is no justification for supposing that the Kalangs of Java are Negritoes, as A. R. Meyer has assumed in his memoir (Leopoldina, part xiii., Nos. 13–14, 1877). See on this point, Kohlbrugge, “L’Anthr. des Tenggerois,” L’Anthropologie, p. 4, 1898.

[553] There’s no basis for thinking that the Kalangs of Java are Negritoes, as A. R. Meyer suggested in his memo (Leopoldina, part xiii., Nos. 13–14, 1877). For more on this, see Kohlbrugge, “L’Anthr. des Tenggerois,” L’Anthropologie, p. 4, 1898.

[554] See Montano, “Mission aux Philippines,” Arch. Miss. Scient., 3rd series, vol. xi., with figs., Paris, 1885; De Quatrefages, loc. cit. (Les Pygmées); Schadenberg, Zeitschr. f. Ethnol., 1880.

[554] See Montano, "Mission to the Philippines," Arch. Miss. Scient., 3rd series, vol. xi., with figures, Paris, 1885; De Quatrefages, loc. cit. (The Pygmies); Schadenberg, Zeitschr. f. Ethnol., 1880.

[555] Ten Kate, “L’Anthropologie d’Oceanie,” L’Anthropologie, vol. iv., 1893, p. 279; “Verslag eener Reis in Timorgrœp,” Tijdschr. Nederl. Aardrijk. sk. Genoot., Amsterdam, vol. xi., 1894, with summary in French; and Anthropol. Problem in Insulindie ... Festbundel ... Dr. P. Veth aangeboden, p. 212, Leyden, 1894; Lapicque, loc. cit. (Tour du Monde).

[555] Ten Kate, “The Anthropology of Oceania,” Anthropology, vol. iv., 1893, p. 279; “Report of a Journey in Timorgrœp,” Journal of the Dutch Geographic Society, Amsterdam, vol. xi., 1894, with a summary in French; and Anthropological Problems in the Malay Archipelago ... Festschrift ... Presented to Dr. P. Veth, p. 212, Leyden, 1894; Lapicque, loc. cit. (Tour of the World).

[556] Modigliani, loc. cit., and L’isola delle Donne ... Engano, Milan, 1894; Danielli, “Cranii di Engano,” Archiv. p. l’anthr., vol. xxiv. See also the works already quoted of Montano, Hagen (as well as his Anthropolog. Atlas Ostasiat.... Völk., Wiesbaden, 1898), Ten Kate, Deniker and Laloy, Lapicque, Kohlbrugge, etc.

[556] Modigliani, loc. cit., and L’isola delle Donne ... Engano, Milan, 1894; Danielli, “Cranii di Engano,” Archiv. p. l’anthr., vol. xxiv. See also the previously mentioned works of Montano, Hagen (including his Anthropolog. Atlas Ostasiat.... Völk., Wiesbaden, 1898), Ten Kate, Deniker and Laloy, Lapicque, Kohlbrugge, etc.

[557] Junghuhn, Battaländer auf Sumatra, vol. ii., p. 375; Hamy, “Les Alfourous de Gilolo,” Bull. Soc. Geogr. Paris, 6th ser., vol. xiii., p. 490.

[557] Junghuhn, Battaländer auf Sumatra, vol. ii., p. 375; Hamy, “The Alfourous from Gilolo,” Bull. Soc. Geogr. Paris, 6th ser., vol. xiii., p. 490.

[558] The dwellings in trees at Sumbawa, among the Mandayas of Mindanao (Philippines), among the Lubu of Sumatra, should also be noted.

[558] The tree houses in Sumbawa, among the Mandayas of Mindanao (Philippines), and among the Lubu of Sumatra, are also worth mentioning.

[559] Pleytte, “De Geogr. Otbreiding v. h. Koppensnellen, etc.,” Tijdschr. v. h. Aardrijksk. Genoots, p. 908, Amsterdam, 1891.

[559] Pleytte, “The Geographic Expansion of the Koppensnellen, etc.,” Journal of Geography, p. 908, Amsterdam, 1891.

[560] For the anthropometry of some of the peoples enumerated below, see Appendices I. to III. The figures there given are derived from the works of Hagan, Ten Kate, Lapicque, Deniker and Laloy, Kohlbrugge, Jacobs, Weisbach, Lubbers and Langen.

[560] For the body measurements of some of the groups listed below, see Appendices I. to III.. The figures provided come from the research of Hagan, Ten Kate, Lapicque, Deniker and Laloy, Kohlbrugge, Jacobs, Weisbach, Lubbers, and Langen.

[561] See J. Jacobs, De Badoejs, S’Gravenhage, 1891, and Kohlbrugge, loc. cit., and “De heilige bekers d. Tenegerezen,” Tijdschr. v. Ind. Taal-Land-in Volkenk, vol. xxxiv., 1896. Among the Tenggerese some vestiges of Buddhism may be discovered.

[561] See J. Jacobs, De Badoejs, The Hague, 1891, and Kohlbrugge, loc. cit., and “The Holy Cups d. Tenegerezen,” Journal of Ind. Language-Country-People, vol. xxxiv., 1896. Among the Tenggerese, some traces of Buddhism can be found.

[562] See Ling Roth, The Natives of Sarawak, 2 vols., London, 1896, and Jour. Anthr. Inst., vols. xxi. and xxii. (1892–93).

[562] See Ling Roth, The Natives of Sarawak, 2 vols., London, 1896, and Jour. Anthr. Inst., vols. xxi. and xxii. (1892–93).

[563] Blumentritt, “Versuch. einer Ethnographie der Philip.,” Ergänzungsheft, Peterm. Mitteil., No. 67, Gotha, 1887, with map; Montano, loc. cit.; Virchow, “Die Bevölker. d. Philip.,” Sitzungsber. Berlin Acad. Wiss., 1897, p. 279, and 1899, p. 14; Brinton, “The Peoples of Philip.” (short summary), Amer. Anthropologist, October, 1898.

[563] Blumentritt, “Attempt at an Ethnography of the Philippines,” Supplementary Issue, Peterm. Communications., No. 67, Gotha, 1887, with map; Montano, loc. cit.; Virchow, “The Population of the Philippines,” Proceedings of the Berlin Academy of Sciences., 1897, p. 279, and 1899, p. 14; Brinton, “The Peoples of the Philippines.” (short summary), American Anthropologist, October, 1898.

[564] For the populations of Celebes, Timur, Floris, etc., see Max Weber, Tijdsch. Aardrijksk. Genoots., 2nd ser., vol. vii., Amsterdam, 1890, and Inter. Arch. Ethnogr., suppl. to vol. iii., Leyden, 1890, pl.; Brothers Sarasin, Verh. Ges. Erdk. Berlin, 1894, 1895, and 1896; Ten Kate, “Reis in de Timor groep,” Tijd. Aardr. Genoot., 2nd ser., vol. xi., p. 199, Amsterdam, 1894, and L’Anthropologie, 1893, p. 279; Lapicque, loc. cit.

[564] For the populations of Sulawesi, Timor, Flores, etc., see Max Weber, Journal of the Geographical Society, 2nd ser., vol. vii., Amsterdam, 1890, and International Archives of Ethnography, suppl. to vol. iii., Leyden, 1890, pl.; Brothers Sarasin, Proceedings of the Geographic Society Berlin, 1894, 1895, and 1896; Ten Kate, “Journey in the Timor Group,” Journal of the Geographical Society, 2nd ser., vol. xi., p. 199, Amsterdam, 1894, and L’Anthropologie, 1893, p. 279; Lapicque, loc. cit.

[565] See my summary of what was known of the Papuans in 1882 in the Rev. d’Anthr., 1883, p. 484, and the following works which have since appeared: Chalmers, Pioneering in New Guinea, London, 1887, and other works; De Clercq and Schmeltz, Ethnogr. Beschrijving van de W. en N. Nederl. New Guin., Leyden, 1893; Finsch, Samoafahrten, Leipzig, 1888, and his articles in the Ann. naturh. Hofmus., Vienna, 1888 and 1891, in the Rev. d’Ethnogr., 1886, etc.; Haddon, “Decorat. art Brit. N. Guin.,” Cunningham Memoirs, vol. x., Roy. Irish Acad., 1894; and “The Ethnography of Brit. New Guinea,” Science Progress, vol. ii., 1894, pp. 83 and 227, London, with map and bibliog.; Macgregor, Proc. R. Geogr. Soc., 1890, p. 191, and his official reports; Thomson, Brit. New Guinea, London, 1892.

[565] Check out my summary of what was known about the Papuans in 1882 in the Rev. d’Anthr., 1883, p. 484, along with the following works that have been published since then: Chalmers, Pioneering in New Guinea, London, 1887, and other works; De Clercq and Schmeltz, Ethnogr. Beschrijving van de W. en N. Nederl. New Guin., Leyden, 1893; Finsch, Samoafahrten, Leipzig, 1888, and his articles in the Ann. naturh. Hofmus., Vienna, 1888 and 1891, in the Rev. d’Ethnogr., 1886, etc.; Haddon, “Decorat. art Brit. N. Guin.,” Cunningham Memoirs, vol. x., Roy. Irish Acad., 1894; and “The Ethnography of Brit. New Guinea,” Science Progress, vol. ii., 1894, pp. 83 and 227, London, with map and bibliography; Macgregor, Proc. R. Geogr. Soc., 1890, p. 191, and his official reports; Thomson, Brit. New Guinea, London, 1892.

[566] It is also to be noted that the supposed Papuan-Polynesian cross-breeds of the south-east of New Guinea neither drink kava nor know the art of pottery, unlike true Polynesians. Besides, their language approximates more nearly to the Melanesian dialects and presents no affinities with Polynesian languages (Ray, “Languages of Brit. N. Guinea,” Journ. Anthr. Inst., vol. xxiv., p. 15, 1894).

[566] It's important to note that the so-called Papuan-Polynesian crossbreeds in the southeast of New Guinea neither drink kava nor have the skill of pottery, which sets them apart from true Polynesians. Additionally, their language is much closer to the Melanesian dialects and shows no connections to Polynesian languages (Ray, “Languages of Brit. N. Guinea,” Journ. Anthr. Inst., vol. xxiv., p. 15, 1894).

[567] Papuan skulls are generally very dolichocephalic (av. ceph. ind. 73), and the presence of brachycephalic skulls in the series of New Guinea origin is certainly of significance, only their proportion is very slight. Out of 500 New Guinea skulls described I have been able to find only 36 brachycephalic, or seven per cent. More than half of these skulls come from one and the same locality, the Kiwai and Canoe Islands in the delta of the Fly. Either a Malay colony may therefore be assumed there, a remnant of Negritoes, or that it was a centre of the custom of deforming the head, a custom which in fact obtains in the neighbourhood of the mouth of the Fly. On this question see my summary of 1882 cited above, and Haddon, loc. cit.; Schellong, “Anthr. d. Papus,” Zeit. f. Ethn., p. 156, 1891; J. Chalmers, “Anthropometr. observ., etc.,” Journ. Anthr. Inst., vol. xxvii. (1897).

[567] Papuan skulls are usually very long (average cranial index 73), and the existence of round skulls among those from New Guinea is definitely noteworthy, even though their proportion is quite small. Of the 500 New Guinea skulls I’ve looked at, I’ve found only 36 round skulls, which is about seven percent. More than half of these skulls come from the same area, the Kiwai and Canoe Islands in the delta of the Fly River. This suggests that there might have been a Malay settlement there, a remnant of Negrito populations, or it could be a place where head deformation was practiced, a custom that indeed exists near the mouth of the Fly. For more on this topic, see my summary from 1882 mentioned above, along with Haddon, loc. cit.; Schellong, “Anthr. d. Papus,” Zeit. f. Ethn., p. 156, 1891; J. Chalmers, “Anthropometr. observ., etc.,” Journ. Anthr. Inst., vol. xxvii. (1897).

[568] The Kerepunu are good agriculturists; their mode of working is quite remarkable (Fig. 152). The soil is turned up at the word of command by a row of men, each of whom thrusts into the earth two pointed sticks, then using these sticks as levers a layer of earth is raised and a furrow is thus made.

[568] The Kerepunu are skilled farmers; their method of work is quite impressive (Fig. 152). A line of men turns the soil at a command, each inserting two pointed sticks into the ground, then using these sticks as levers to lift a layer of soil and create a furrow.

[569] Hamy, “Papous de la mer d’Entrecasteaux,” Rev. Ethnog., 1889.

[569] Hamy, “Papous of the Entrecasteaux Sea,” Rev. Ethnog., 1889.

[570] Haddon, Journ. Anthr. Inst., vol. xix., p. 297; S. Ray and Haddon, “Languages of Torres Straits,” Proceed. R. Irish Acad., 3rd ser., vol. iv., 1897; Rev. Hunt, Journ. Anthr.... Inst., N.S., vol. i., p. 5, 1898–99.

[570] Haddon, Journ. Anthr. Inst., vol. 19, p. 297; S. Ray and Haddon, “Languages of Torres Straits,” Proceed. R. Irish Acad., 3rd ser., vol. 4, 1897; Rev. Hunt, Journ. Anthr.... Inst., N.S., vol. 1, p. 5, 1898–99.

[571] R. Codrington, The Melanesians, Oxford, 1891, fig.; Finsch, loc. cit., Rev. Ethnogr., 1883, p. 49, and Anthrop. Ergeb. einer Reise in der Sudsee, Berlin, 1884, with fig.; Flower, “Cran. caract. Fiji Islanders,” Journ. Anthr. Inst., vol. x., 1881, p. 153; Hagen and Pineau, “Les Nouvelles-Hébrides,” Rev. Ethnogr., 1888, p. 302; Guppy, The Solomon Islands and their Natives, London, 1887; Hagen, “Les Indigènes des Salomon,” L’Anthropol., 1893, pp. 1 and 192; Aug. Bernard, La Nouvelle Caledonie (thesis), p. 249 et seq., Paris, 1894; Luschan, loc. cit.; Schellong, loc. cit.

[571] R. Codrington, The Melanesians, Oxford, 1891, fig.; Finsch, loc. cit., Rev. Ethnogr., 1883, p. 49, and Anthrop. Ergeb. einer Reise in der Sudsee, Berlin, 1884, with fig.; Flower, “Cran. caract. Fiji Islanders,” Journ. Anthr. Inst., vol. x., 1881, p. 153; Hagen and Pineau, “Les Nouvelles-Hébrides,” Rev. Ethnogr., 1888, p. 302; Guppy, The Solomon Islands and their Natives, London, 1887; Hagen, “Les Indigènes des Salomon,” L’Anthropol., 1893, pp. 1 and 192; Aug. Bernard, La Nouvelle Caledonie (thesis), p. 249 et seq., Paris, 1894; Luschan, loc. cit.; Schellong, loc. cit.

[572] The number of Polynesians (2,310 in 1897) has diminished by half in the Fijis since 1881, while that of the natives (100,321 in 1897) has hardly varied. The Polynesian element is appreciable in the Aoba, Tanna, and Espiritu Santo islands of the New Hebrides, but its importance has been exaggerated so far as the Loyalty Islands and New Caledonia are concerned (see my note in the Bull. Soc. Anthr., p. 791, 1893).

[572] The number of Polynesians (2,310 in 1897) has dropped by half in Fiji since 1881, while the native population (100,321 in 1897) has barely changed. The Polynesian presence is noticeable in the islands of Aoba, Tanna, and Espiritu Santo in the New Hebrides, but its significance has been overstated regarding the Loyalty Islands and New Caledonia (see my note in the Bull. Soc. Anthr., p. 791, 1893).

[573] Ellis, Polynesian Researches, 4 vols., London, 1853; Tautain, “Les Marquisiens,” L’Anthropologie, 1894, 1895, and 1898; Meinecke, Die Inselen des stillen Oceans, 2 vols., Leipzig, 1875; Markuse, Die Hawaischen Inselen, Berlin, 1894; Lister, “Natives of Fakaofu (Bowditch Island),” Journ. Anthr. Inst., vol. xxi., 1892, p. 43; Ch. Hedley, “The Atoll of Fanafuti, Ellice group,” Australian Museum, Memoir III., Sydney, 1897; H. Gros, “Les populations de la Polynesie française en 1891,” Bull. Soc. Anthr. Paris, 1896, p. 144; Ten Kate, loc. cit.

[573] Ellis, Polynesian Researches, 4 vols., London, 1853; Tautain, “Les Marquisiens,” L’Anthropologie, 1894, 1895, and 1898; Meinecke, Die Inselen des stillen Oceans, 2 vols., Leipzig, 1875; Markuse, Die Hawaischen Inselen, Berlin, 1894; Lister, “Natives of Fakaofu (Bowditch Island),” Journ. Anthr. Inst., vol. xxi., 1892, p. 43; Ch. Hedley, “The Atoll of Fanafuti, Ellice group,” Australian Museum, Memoir III., Sydney, 1897; H. Gros, “Les populations de la Polynesie française en 1891,” Bull. Soc. Anthr. Paris, 1896, p. 144; Ten Kate, loc. cit.

[574] Kubary, loc. cit., and Journ. Mus. Godeffroy, parts 2 and 4, 1873.

[574] Kubary, loc. cit., and Journ. Mus. Godeffroy, parts 2 and 4, 1873.

[575] De Quatrefages, Les Polynesiens et leurs migrations, Paris, 1866, with maps.

[575] De Quatrefages, The Polynesians and Their Migrations, Paris, 1866, with maps.

[576] A. Bernard, loc. cit., p. 272.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ A. Bernard, same source, p. 272.

[577] Sittig, “Unfreiwillige Wanderungen ...,” Peterm. Mittheil., p. 61, 1890.

[577] Sittig, “Involuntary Travels ...,” Peterm. Mittheil., p. 61, 1890.

[578] A. von Humboldt, in his Évaluation numérique de la population du Nouveau Continent, Paris, 1825, reckoned that in the Americas there were 13 millions of Whites, 6 millions of Half-breeds, 6 millions of Negroes, and 9 millions of Indians; three-quarters of a century later (in 1895–97) it was computed that there were 80 millions of Whites, 37 millions of Half-breeds, 10 millions of Negroes and 10 millions of Indians in a total population of 137 millions (1897).

[578] A. von Humboldt, in his Numerical Assessment of the Population of the New World, Paris, 1825, estimated that in the Americas there were 13 million Whites, 6 million mixed-race people, 6 million Black people, and 9 million Indigenous people; three-quarters of a century later (in 1895–97), it was estimated that there were 80 million Whites, 37 million mixed-race people, 10 million Black people, and 10 million Indigenous people in a total population of 137 million (1897).

[579] Williams, Hist. of the Negro Race in America, 2 vols., New York, 1885; B. A. Gould, loc. cit.

[579] Williams, History of the Black Race in America, 2 vols., New York, 1885; B. A. Gould, referenced work

[580] The celebrated skull discovered by Whitney in the auriferous sands of Calaveras (California), which has been said to belong to the pliocene age, has been disputed both as regards its authenticity and the supposed date of its bed; and it is the same with the pestles and mortars discovered in the same neighbourhood by such geologists as Skertchly and C. King (cf. W. Holmes, “Prelim. Revis. Evidence to Aurif. Gravel Man in Calif.,” Am. Anthropologist, N.S., vol. i., Nos. 1 and 2, New York, 1899). The imprints of human feet, or rather of moccasins, discovered at Carson (Nevada), even granted that they are authentic, have in any case been found in beds whose period is by no means tertiary.

[580] The famous skull found by Whitney in the gold-bearing sands of Calaveras (California), which has been claimed to date back to the Pliocene era, has been questioned regarding both its authenticity and the supposed age of its layer; the same goes for the pestles and mortars discovered nearby by geologists such as Skertchly and C. King (see W. Holmes, “Prelim. Revis. Evidence to Aurif. Gravel Man in Calif.,” Am. Anthropologist, N.S., vol. i., Nos. 1 and 2, New York, 1899). The footprints of human feet, or more accurately moccasins, found in Carson (Nevada), even if proven authentic, were discovered in layers that are definitely not from the Tertiary period.

[581] At this period Greenland, all Canada, a corner of Alaska, and a good part of the United States were covered with glaciers almost uninterruptedly. The limit of the moraine to the south may be indicated by a line which, leaving New York, for Lake Erie, would follow the course of the Ohio as far as the region of its junction with the Mississippi, and would be continued along or a little to the west and to the south of the Missouri to coincide then with the Canadian frontier. The fauna of the American quaternary period differed somewhat from that of Europe: the Rhinoceros tichorhinus, for instance, was missing, while the Mastodon ohioticus and several large edentata, such as the Megatherium, Mylodon, etc., are met with.

[581] During this time, Greenland, all of Canada, parts of Alaska, and much of the United States were almost completely covered by glaciers. The southern edge of the moraines can be traced by a line that starts in New York, moves toward Lake Erie, follows the path of the Ohio River to where it connects with the Mississippi, and continues along or slightly west and south of the Missouri to align with the Canadian border. The wildlife of the American Quaternary period was somewhat different from that of Europe: for example, the Rhinoceros tichorhinus was absent, while the Mastodon ohioticus and several large, toothless mammals, like the Megatherium and Mylodon, were present.

[582] See for details, Abbott, Primitive Industry, Cambridge (Mass.), 1881, and Evidence ... Antiquity of Man in East N. America, 1888; F. Wright, The Ice Age in North America, New York, 1889, chaps. xxi. and xxii., and Meet. Amer. Assoc. Adv. Sc. of Buffalo, 1896; Geikie, loc. cit. (chap. li., written by T. Chamberlin); Metz, Proceed. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., vol. xxiii., p. 242; W. Upham, ibid., p. 436; Hille-Cresson, Proceed. Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist., 1889; Holmes, loc. cit. (Fifteenth Rep. Bur. Ethn.); Th. Wilson, A Study of Prehist. Anthrop., Washington, 1890 (Extract from Rep. U.S. Nat. Mus., 1887–88, p. 597). For the discussion, see Science for 1892 and 1898. Marcellin Boule has summarised most of the works quoted, and shows the present state of the question in Revue d’Anthropologie, 1888, p. 647, and in L’Anthropologie, 1890 and 1892; see also Nadaillac, L’Anthropologie, 1897 and 1898. I will merely note that the tendency of surface objects to sink towards deep beds, brought forward by the opponents of Abbott, Wright, etc., altogether fails to explain why other implements (in flint, jade, etc.) or pieces of pottery have not similarly been carried down, and that only argilite tools are found flat in deep beds.

[582] For more information, see Abbott, Primitive Industry, Cambridge (Mass.), 1881, and Evidence ... Antiquity of Man in East N. America, 1888; F. Wright, The Ice Age in North America, New York, 1889, chapters xxi. and xxii., and Meet. Amer. Assoc. Adv. Sc. of Buffalo, 1896; Geikie, loc. cit. (chapter li., written by T. Chamberlin); Metz, Proceed. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., vol. xxiii., p. 242; W. Upham, ibid., p. 436; Hille-Cresson, Proceed. Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist., 1889; Holmes, loc. cit. (Fifteenth Rep. Bur. Ethn.); Th. Wilson, A Study of Prehist. Anthrop., Washington, 1890 (Extract from Rep. U.S. Nat. Mus., 1887–88, p. 597). For the discussion, see Science from 1892 and 1898. Marcellin Boule has summarized most of the referenced works and provides the current state of the issue in Revue d’Anthropologie, 1888, p. 647, and in L’Anthropologie, 1890 and 1892; see also Nadaillac, L’Anthropologie, 1897 and 1898. I will simply point out that the argument about surface objects sinking into deeper layers, raised by critics of Abbott, Wright, etc., fails to explain why other tools (made from flint, jade, etc.) or pieces of pottery haven't been similarly displaced, while only argilite tools are found flat in deep layers.

[583] Hamy, “Anthropologie du Mexique,” Miss. scientifique du Mexique (Rech. zool., 1st part), p. 11, Paris, 1884.

[583] Hamy, “Anthropology of Mexico,” Scientific Missions of Mexico (Zoological Research, 1st part), p. 11, Paris, 1884.

[584] S. Herrera, Proceed. Am. Ass. Adv. Sc., Madison, 1893, pp. 42 and 312; Th. Wilson, loc. cit.; De Nadaillac, L’Amerique préhistorique, Paris, 1883, and Revue d’Anthropol., 1879 and 1880.

[584] S. Herrera, Proceed. Am. Ass. Adv. Sc., Madison, 1893, pp. 42 and 312; Th. Wilson, loc. cit.; De Nadaillac, L’Amerique préhistorique, Paris, 1883, and Revue d’Anthropol., 1879 and 1880.

[585] Ameghino, La Antiguedad del hombre en El Plata, Paris-Buenos-Ayres, 1880, 2 vols.

[585] Ameghino, The Antiquity of Man in El Plata, Paris-Buenos-Aires, 1880, 2 vols.

[586] De Quatrefages, “L’homme foss. de Lagoa-Santa,” Izviestia Soc. of Friends of Nat. Sc., Moscow, vol. xxxv., 1879; Sören Hansen and Lutken, Lagoa Santa Racen, Copenhagen, 1889, extract from E Museo Lundii, vol. iv.; Hyades and Deniker, loc. cit., p. 163.

[586] De Quatrefages, “The Fossil Man of Lagoa-Santa,” Izviestia Soc. of Friends of Nat. Sc., Moscow, vol. xxxv., 1879; Sören Hansen and Lutken, Lagoa Santa Racen, Copenhagen, 1889, extract from E Museo Lundii, vol. iv.; Hyades and Deniker, loc. cit., p. 163.

[587] Lacerda and Peixoto, “Contribuições ... raças indig. do Brasil,” Archiv. do Mus. nac., Rio-de-Janeiro, vol. i., 1876, and Mem. Soc. Anthrop., Paris, 2nd ser., vol. ii., 1875–82, p. 535; H. von Ihering, “A civilisaçao prehist. de Brazil merid.,” Revista do Museu-Paulista, vol. i., p. 95, S. Paulo, 1895.

[587] Lacerda and Peixoto, “Contributions ... indigenous races of Brazil,” Archiv. do Mus. nac., Rio de Janeiro, vol. i., 1876, and Mem. Soc. Anthrop., Paris, 2nd ser., vol. ii., 1875–82, p. 535; H. von Ihering, “The prehistoric civilization of southern Brazil,” Revista do Museu-Paulista, vol. i., p. 95, São Paulo, 1895.

[588] Moreno, “Cimet. et paraderos prehist., etc.,” Rev. Anthrop., 1874, p. 72; Verneau, “Crânes préhist. de Patagonie,” L’Anthropol., 1894, p. 420.

[588] Moreno, “Cimets and prehistoric stops, etc.,” Rev. Anthrop., 1874, p. 72; Verneau, “Prehistoric skulls from Patagonia,” L’Anthropol., 1894, p. 420.

[589] E. Schmidt, Die Vorgeschichte Nord-Amerikas, Brunswick, 1894; cf. Arch. f. Anthrop., vol. xxiii., 1894. For details see Cyrus Thomas, “Burial Mounds,” Fifth Ann. Rep. Bur. Ethn., Washington, 1887 and “Rep. Mound Explorat.,” Twelfth Rep. Bur. Ethn. for 1890–91, Washington, 1894; Carr, “Crania from Stone Graves, etc.,” Eleventh Rep. Peabody Mus.; Hale, “Indian Migration, etc.,” Amer. Antiquar., 1883; Shepherd, Antiquities of State Ohio, Cincinnati, 1890; Brinton, Essays of an Americanist, p. 90, Philadelphia, 1890.

[589] E. Schmidt, The Prehistory of North America, Brunswick, 1894; see also Arch. f. Anthrop., vol. xxiii., 1894. For more information, refer to Cyrus Thomas, “Burial Mounds,” Fifth Ann. Rep. Bur. Ethn., Washington, 1887 and “Rep. Mound Explorat.,” Twelfth Rep. Bur. Ethn. for 1890–91, Washington, 1894; Carr, “Crania from Stone Graves, etc.,” Eleventh Rep. Peabody Mus.; Hale, “Indian Migration, etc.,” Amer. Antiquar., 1883; Shepherd, Antiquities of Ohio, Cincinnati, 1890; Brinton, Essays of an Americanist, p. 90, Philadelphia, 1890.

[590] The northern zone, circumscribing the great lakes, is characterised by monuments of rude form; the southern zone, between the Gulf of Mexico and the basin of the Ohio, is distinguished by mounds in the form of a truncated pyramid; while the middle zone, that of the basin of the Ohio, presents a large number of mounds of peculiar and very perfected types. In each of these zones special regions may be distinguished, characterised by the shape of the mounds and by the nature of the objects immured in them.

[590] The northern area surrounding the Great Lakes is marked by crude monuments; the southern area, between the Gulf of Mexico and the Ohio basin, is known for mounds shaped like truncated pyramids; while the middle area, that of the Ohio basin, features many unique and well-crafted mounds. In each of these areas, specific regions can be identified, characterized by the shapes of the mounds and the types of objects buried within them.

[591] Cushing, C. R. Congr. Internat. des Americanistes, p. 150, Berlin, 1888; V. Mindeleff, “Pueblo Architecture,” Eighth Report Bur. Ethnol. for 1886–87, p. 1, Washington, 1891–93; C. Mindeleff, “Casa Grande Ruin,” Thirteenth Report Bur. Ethn. for 1891–92, Washington, 1894; Nordenskiold and Retzius, The Cliff-Dwellers, etc., Stockholm, 1893, in fol. L. Morgan has sought to show in his monograph, “Houses and House Life of Am. Aborigines,” Contrib. N. Amer. Ethn., vol. iv, Washington, 1881, that the phalanstery-houses were the typical form of dwelling-place all of the North, and some of the South Americans, in association with the communal organisation of the tribes.

[591] Cushing, C. R. Congr. Internat. des Americanistes, p. 150, Berlin, 1888; V. Mindeleff, “Pueblo Architecture,” Eighth Report Bur. Ethnol. for 1886–87, p. 1, Washington, 1891–93; C. Mindeleff, “Casa Grande Ruin,” Thirteenth Report Bur. Ethn. for 1891–92, Washington, 1894; Nordenskiold and Retzius, The Cliff-Dwellers, etc., Stockholm, 1893, in fol. L. Morgan has attempted to demonstrate in his monograph, “Houses and House Life of Am. Aborigines,” Contrib. N. Amer. Ethn., vol. iv, Washington, 1881, that phalanstery-style houses were the common type of residence for many North and some South American tribes, linked to their communal organization.

[592] I have always maintained this opinion, which is amply confirmed to-day by the investigations made by Ten Kate (“Somatol. Observ. Ind. South-west,” Journ. Amer. Ethnol., vol. iii., p. 122, Cambridge, Mass., and Rev. d’Anthrop., 1887, p. 48), from Canada to the Pampas. As to South America, the prevalent yellow colouring has been further noticed by A. von Humboldt, and recently confirmed by Ranke (Zeitsch. f. Ethnol., 1898, p. 61).

[592] I've always held this opinion, which is strongly supported today by the research conducted by Ten Kate (“Somatol. Observ. Ind. South-west,” Journ. Amer. Ethnol., vol. iii., p. 122, Cambridge, Mass., and Rev. d’Anthrop., 1887, p. 48), from Canada to the Pampas. Regarding South America, the common yellow coloration has also been noted by A. von Humboldt and recently verified by Ranke (Zeitsch. f. Ethnol., 1898, p. 61).

[593] Gatschet, “Klamath Indians,” Contrib. N. A. Ethnol., vol. ii., Part I., p. 43, Washington, 1890; D. Brinton, The American Race, p. 57, New York, 1891; Ehrenreich, loc. cit.

[593] Gatschet, “Klamath Indians,” Contrib. N. A. Ethnol., vol. ii., Part I., p. 43, Washington, 1890; D. Brinton, The American Race, p. 57, New York, 1891; Ehrenreich, loc. cit.

[594] D. Brinton, “Certain Morph. Traits of Am. Languages,” Amer. Antiquarian, November, 1894.

[594] D. Brinton, “Certain Morph. Traits of Am. Languages,” Amer. Antiquarian, November, 1894.

[595] Powell, “Indian Linguist. Families, etc.,” Seventh Rep. Bur. Ethn. for 1885–86, Washington, 1891 (92), p. 1 (with map).

[595] Powell, “Indian Linguist. Families, etc.,” Seventh Rep. Bur. Ethn. for 1885–86, Washington, 1891 (92), p. 1 (with map).

[596] A curious fact is brought out by the study of the linguistic chart published by Powell: that most of the families of different languages are grouped in the western, mountainous part of North America. Thus, out of 59 linguistic families, 40 are found in the limited area between the Pacific and the Rocky Mountains, while all the rest of the continent is divided among 19 linguistic families only. The same fact is observed in South America. We can reduce to a dozen groups the languages of the Atlantic slope of this continent, while in the Andes and on the Pacific slope an enormous number of linguistic families have been noted without any apparent common connection.

[596] A curious fact is highlighted by the linguistic chart published by Powell: most language families are concentrated in the western, mountainous region of North America. Out of 59 language families, 40 are located in the small area between the Pacific and the Rocky Mountains, while the rest of the continent is divided among only 19 language families. The same pattern is observed in South America. We can categorize the languages of the Atlantic slope of this continent into about a dozen groups, whereas the Andes and the Pacific slope reveal a vast number of language families that seem to have no obvious connection.

[597] E. Petitot, Monogr. Esquim. Tchiglit du Mackenzie, Paris, 1876, 4to; Dall, “Tribes of ... extr. North-West,” Contrib. to North Amer. Ethnol., vol. i, p. 1, Washington, 1877; Ray, Intern. Polar Exped. Point Barrow, Washington, 1888; Sören Hansen, loc. cit., and “Ost Grönl. Anthropol.,” Meddel om Groenland, vol. x.; Boas, “The Central Eskimo,” Sixth Ann. Rep. Bur. Ethn., 1888, p. 409; G. Holm, loc. cit.; Rink, “The Eskimo Tribes,” Meddelel. om Grönl., vol. xi., and other works by this author in Danish, quoted by Bahnson, Ethnographien, vol. i., p. 223, Copenhagen, 1894; F. Nansen, Eskimo Life, London, 2nd edit., 1894, figs.; Dix Bolles, Catal. Eskimo Collect. Rep. U.S. Nation. Mus. for 1887, p. 335; R. Peary, Northward over the Great Ice, 2 vols., New York, 1898.

[597] E. Petitot, Monogr. Esquim. Tchiglit du Mackenzie, Paris, 1876, 4to; Dall, “Tribes of ... extr. North-West,” Contrib. to North Amer. Ethnol., vol. i, p. 1, Washington, 1877; Ray, Intern. Polar Exped. Point Barrow, Washington, 1888; Sören Hansen, loc. cit., and “Ost Grönl. Anthropol.,” Meddel om Groenland, vol. x.; Boas, “The Central Eskimo,” Sixth Ann. Rep. Bur. Ethn., 1888, p. 409; G. Holm, loc. cit.; Rink, “The Eskimo Tribes,” Meddelel. om Grönl., vol. xi., and other works by this author in Danish, quoted by Bahnson, Ethnographien, vol. i., p. 223, Copenhagen, 1894; F. Nansen, Eskimo Life, London, 2nd edit., 1894, figs.; Dix Bolles, Catal. Eskimo Collect. Rep. U.S. Nation. Mus. for 1887, p. 335; R. Peary, Northward over the Great Ice, 2 vols., New York, 1898.

[598] The most northern point now inhabited by the Eskimo is situated on the Greenland side of Smith’s Sound, 78° 8´ N. lat. (see the description of this tribe of 2,344 persons in Peary, loc. cit., vol. i., p. 479); but Greely found traces of the permanent settlement of this people near Fort Conger, in Greenland, 81° 44´ N. lat. The most southern point occupied by the Eskimo is Hamilton Inlet (55° N. lat.) in Labrador, but it is not long since they reached as far as the straits of Belle-Isle in Newfoundland and even farther south, to the estuary of the St. Lawrence (50° N. lat.).

[598] The northernmost point currently inhabited by the Eskimo is located on the Greenland side of Smith’s Sound, at 78° 8´ N. lat. (see the description of this group of 2,344 individuals in Peary, loc. cit., vol. i., p. 479); however, Greely discovered evidence of a permanent settlement of these people near Fort Conger, Greenland, at 81° 44´ N. lat. The southernmost point occupied by the Eskimo is Hamilton Inlet (55° N. lat.) in Labrador, but they have only recently been seen as far south as the straits of Belle-Isle in Newfoundland and even further south, to the estuary of the St. Lawrence (50° N. lat.).

[599] A great change in the habits of the Eskimo of Alaska will be effected by the introduction of reindeer, through the agency of the United States Government (see Jackson, Rep. Introd. Reindeer in Alaska, Washington, 1894 and 1895).

[599] A significant shift in the lifestyle of the Alaskan Eskimo will occur with the introduction of reindeer, facilitated by the United States Government (see Jackson, Rep. Introd. Reindeer in Alaska, Washington, 1894 and 1895).

[600] Erman, “Ethnol. Wahrnem Behring Meeres,” Zeitsch. für Ethnol., vol. iii., pp. 159 and 205; Dall, Alaska, etc., London, 1870; Bancroft, Native Races Pacif. St. of America, Washington, vol. i., 1875–76, pp. 87 and 111, and 1882, p. 562.

[600] Erman, “Ethnol. Wahrnem Behring Meeres,” Journal of Ethnology, vol. iii., pp. 159 and 205; Dall, Alaska, etc., London, 1870; Bancroft, Native Races of the Pacific States of America, Washington, vol. i., 1875–76, pp. 87 and 111, and 1882, p. 562.

[601] Brinton, loc. cit. (Amer. Race); Schoolcraft, loc. cit.; Powell, loc. cit. (Ind. Ling. Fam.); Catlin, Letters and Notes N. Amer. Ind., London, 1844 (cf. Report U.S. Nation. Mus., 1885).

[601] Brinton, loc. cit. (Amer. Race); Schoolcraft, loc. cit.; Powell, loc. cit. (Ind. Ling. Fam.); Catlin, Letters and Notes N. Amer. Ind., London, 1844 (cf. Report U.S. Nation. Mus., 1885).

[602] Ten Kate, Bull. Soc. Anthrop., Paris, 1884, p. 551, and 1885, p. 241.

[602] Ten Kate, Bull. Soc. Anthrop., Paris, 1884, p. 551, and 1885, p. 241.

[603] According to Powell, Smiths. Rep., 1895, p. 658, the Atlantic slope may be divided into four provinces: Algonquian, Iroquoian, that of the southern part of the United States (Muskhogean), and that of the plains of the Great West. The Pacific slope is split up in its turn into five provinces: North Pacific, Columbia, Interior Basin, California-Oregon, and the Pueblos region which encroaches upon Mexico.

[603] According to Powell, Smiths. Rep., 1895, p. 658, the Atlantic slope can be divided into four areas: Algonquian, Iroquoian, the southern part of the United States (Muskhogean), and the plains of the Great West. The Pacific slope is further divided into five areas: North Pacific, Columbia, Interior Basin, California-Oregon, and the Pueblos region, which stretches into Mexico.

[604] The “Pueblos,” Zuñis, Moquis, etc., from whom these Athapascans have conquered their territory, are short and brachycephalic. Interminglings have modified only the form of the head of the Southern Athapascans; but it must be remembered that the practice of deforming the skull prevails among them.

[604] The “Pueblos,” Zuñis, Moquis, and others from whom these Athapascans have taken their land are short and have broad heads. Mixing with these groups has only changed the shape of the Southern Athapascans' heads; however, it's important to note that skull deformation is a common practice among them.

[605] There are some Apache tribes in Mexico, the Lipans, the Jarros, but their numerical force is not known.

[605] There are some Apache tribes in Mexico, the Lipans and the Jarros, but the exact number of people in these tribes is not known.

[606] See J. Stevenson, “Navajo Ceremonial,” Eighth Rep. Bur. Ethnol., and articles by Matthews on the Navajos in the 2nd, 3rd, and 5th Reports of the Bur. Ethnol.; Ten Kate, Reizen en Ondezokongei in N. Amer., Leyden, 1885; cf. Bull. Soc. Anthropol., 1883, and “Somatol. Observ. Ind. South-west,” Journ. Amer. Ethnol., vol. iii., Cambridge, 1891.

[606] See J. Stevenson, “Navajo Ceremonial,” Eighth Rep. Bur. Ethnol., and articles by Matthews on the Navajos in the 2nd, 3rd, and 5th Reports of the Bur. Ethnol.; Ten Kate, Reizen en Ondezokongei in N. Amer., Leyden, 1885; cf. Bull. Soc. Anthropol., 1883, and “Somatol. Observ. Ind. South-west,” Journ. Amer. Ethnol., vol. iii., Cambridge, 1891.

[607] Lloyd, “On the Beothucs,” Journ. Anthropol. Inst. Great Britain, vols. iv. and v. (1874–75); and Gatschet, Proc. Am. Philos. Soc., 1885–86, and 1890.

[607] Lloyd, “On the Beothuks,” Journal of the Anthropological Institute of Great Britain, vols. iv. and v. (1874–75); and Gatschet, Proceedings of the American Philosophical Society, 1885–86, and 1890.

[608] H. Hale, “The Iroquois Book of Rites,” No. 2 of the Library of Aborig. Amer. Lit. of Brinton, Philad., 1883, chaps. i. and ii. (history of the confederation summarised from the standard works of Morgan, Colden, etc.); C. Royce, “The Cherokee Nation, etc.,” Fifth Rep. Bur. Ethn. for 1883–84; Mooney, “Sacred Formulæ of Cherokee,” Seventh Rep. Bur. Ethn. for 1885–86.

[608] H. Hale, “The Iroquois Book of Rites,” No. 2 of the Library of Aborig. Amer. Lit. of Brinton, Philad., 1883, chaps. i. and ii. (history of the confederation summarized from the standard works of Morgan, Colden, etc.); C. Royce, “The Cherokee Nation, etc.,” Fifth Rep. Bur. Ethn. for 1883–84; Mooney, “Sacred Formulæ of Cherokee,” Seventh Rep. Bur. Ethn. for 1885–86.

[609] The primitive population of Florida, the Timuquanans, appear to have been exterminated in the eighteenth century. See MacCauley, “The Seminol Ind.,” Fifth Rep. Bur. Ethn. for 1883–84, p. 467, Washington, 1887.

[609] The original inhabitants of Florida, the Timuquanans, seem to have been wiped out in the eighteenth century. See MacCauley, “The Seminole Ind.,” Fifth Rep. Bur. Ethn. for 1883–84, p. 467, Washington, 1887.

[610] R. Rigges, “Dictionary ... and Ethnogr. of Dakota,” Contrib. N. Amer. Ethn., vol. viii.; Dorsey, “Furniture and Implements of Omaha,” Thirteenth Rep. Bur. Ethn.; “Omaha Sociology,” Third Rep. Bur. Ethn.; Mooney, “Siouan Tribes of the East,” Bull. Bur. of Ethn., No. 24, Washington, 1894.

[610] R. Rigges, “Dictionary ... and Ethnography of Dakota,” Contributions to North American Ethnology, vol. viii.; Dorsey, “Furniture and Tools of the Omaha,” Thirteenth Report of the Bureau of Ethnology; “Omaha Sociology,” Third Report of the Bureau of Ethnology; Mooney, “Siouan Tribes of the East,” Bulletin of the Bureau of Ethnology, No. 24, Washington, 1894.

[611] See Appendices I. to III.; the measurements there given are principally taken from Boas, Ten Kate, the American military commission, and my own observations with Laloy.

[611] See Appendices I. to III.; the measurements provided there are mainly sourced from Boas, Ten Kate, the American military commission, and my own observations with Laloy.

[612] Not less than 39 linguistic families may be enumerated on that long but narrow strip of land which extends from Alaska to California, between the Rocky Mountains and the ocean. (Powell, loc. cit.)

[612] There are at least 39 language families that can be counted in that long but narrow stretch of land that runs from Alaska to California, situated between the Rocky Mountains and the ocean. (Powell, loc. cit.)

[613] The Moquis and Zuñis are in fact 1 m. 62 in height, and have a ceph. ind. of 83.3 and 84.9. We must, however, notice some exceptions in regard to the somatic type of the Indians of the Pacific slopes: the Salishans of the coast (with the exception of the Bilcoolas) are almost short and brachycephalic, while those of the interior are almost tall and brachycephalic, like the Bilcoolas, the Maricopas, the Mohares (Fig. 4).

[613] The Moquis and Zuñis are actually 1 minute. 62 in height, with a ceph. ind. of 83.3 and 84.9. However, we should note some exceptions regarding the physical characteristics of the Native Americans on the Pacific slopes: the Salishans of the coast (excluding the Bilcoolas) are generally shorter and have round heads, while those from the interior are usually taller and also have round heads, similar to the Bilcoolas, Maricopas, and Mohares (Fig. 4).

[614] The first of these groups occupies Powell’s North Pacific and Columbian “ethnographic provinces” (loc. cit.); the second, the province of Oregon-California; the third, the Interior Basin and the region of the Pueblos.

[614] The first of these groups is found in Powell’s North Pacific and Columbia “ethnographic provinces” (loc. cit.); the second is in the Oregon-California province; the third encompasses the Interior Basin and the Pueblo region.

[615] Gibbs, “Tribes of W. Washington and N.-W. Oregon,” Contrib. N. Am. Ethn., vol. i., p. 157, Washington, 1887; Dall, “Tribes N.W. Washington,” ibid.; Petroff, Rep. on Populat.... of Alaska, Washington, 1884; Amerikas Nordwesküste (Publ. Ethn. Mus.), Berlin, 1883–84, 2 vols., fol.; Krause, Die Tlinkit Indianer, Jena, 1885; “Reports ... Committee, North-West Tribes ... Canada” (in the Rep. Brit. Assoc. from 1885 to 1898; especially the reports by H. Hale and Wilson on the Black-Feet in 1885 and 1887, and the full reports of Boas, 1888 to 1890, and in 1898, partly summarised in Peterm. Mittheil., 1887 and 1896, and in the Transact. Roy. Soc. Canada, 1888, 2nd sect.); Boas, “Die Tsimshian,” Zeitsch. f. Ethn., 1888, p. 231; Niblack, “Coast Ind. South Alaska and N. Brit. Colomb.,” Rep. U.S. Nat. Mus. for 1898.

[615] Gibbs, “Tribes of W. Washington and N.-W. Oregon,” Contrib. N. Am. Ethn., vol. i., p. 157, Washington, 1887; Dall, “Tribes N.W. Washington,” ibid.; Petroff, Rep. on Populat.... of Alaska, Washington, 1884; Amerikas Nordwesküste (Publ. Ethn. Mus.), Berlin, 1883–84, 2 vols., fol.; Krause, Die Tlinkit Indianer, Jena, 1885; “Reports ... Committee, North-West Tribes ... Canada” (in the Rep. Brit. Assoc. from 1885 to 1898; especially the reports by H. Hale and Wilson on the Black-Feet in 1885 and 1887, and the full reports of Boas, 1888 to 1890, and in 1898, partly summarized in Peterm. Mittheil., 1887 and 1896, and in the Transact. Roy. Soc. Canada, 1888, 2nd sect.); Boas, “Die Tsimshian,” Zeitsch. f. Ethn., 1888, p. 231; Niblack, “Coast Ind. South Alaska and N. Brit. Colomb.,” Rep. U.S. Nat. Mus. for 1898.

[616] Bancroft, loc. cit., vol. iii.; Ten Kate, Bull. Soc. Anthrop., Paris, 1884, and loc. cit.; Deniker, Bull. du Museum d’Hist. Nat., 1895, No. 2.

[616] Bancroft, loc. cit., vol. iii.; Ten Kate, Bull. Soc. Anthrop., Paris, 1884, and loc. cit.; Deniker, Bull. du Museum d’Hist. Nat., 1895, No. 2.

[617] The Shoshones, who inhabited by themselves the interior basin between the Rocky Mountains and the Sierra-Nevada, have now dwindled to 17,000 individuals, just managing to subsist by fishing and gathering roots on infertile soil. They are composed of twelve tribes, of which the more important are those of the Shoshones, the Utes (Fig. 40), the Piutes or Pai-Utes, and the Comanches. Buschmann (Die Spuren d. Aztek Sprache, etc., Berlin, 1859) was the first to draw attention to the affinity of their dialect with the Sonoran-Aztec linguistic group (see p. 535), while Gibbs (loc. cit., p. 224) was the first to point out their probable migration from the region situated between the Rocky Mountains and the Great Lakes towards the deserts of the Great Basin. Brinton (Amer. Race, p. 119) confirms this observation, arriving at his conclusion from new facts.

[617] The Shoshones, who lived alone in the interior basin between the Rocky Mountains and the Sierra-Nevada, have now decreased to 17,000 individuals, barely surviving by fishing and gathering roots in infertile land. They consist of twelve tribes, with the most significant being the Shoshones, the Utes (Fig. 40), the Piutes or Pai-Utes, and the Comanches. Buschmann (Die Spuren d. Aztek Sprache, etc., Berlin, 1859) was the first to highlight the similarity of their dialect with the Sonoran-Aztec language group (see p. 535), while Gibbs (loc. cit., p. 224) was the first to suggest their likely migration from the area between the Rocky Mountains and the Great Lakes towards the deserts of the Great Basin. Brinton (Amer. Race, p. 119) confirms this point, reaching his conclusion based on new evidence.

[618] It should be mentioned that this brachycephaly is also found, even a little more accentuated, in the skulls which Mr. Cushing and the members of the Hemenway expedition discovered in the ancient habitations of the Salado valley and in the Hanolawan pueblo, attributed to the not very remote ancestors of the Pueblos of the present day. These skulls are hyper-brachycephalic (mean ceph. ind. of 94 skulls, 89); they also exhibited an extraordinary frequency of the “Inca bone” (p. 67), and several other osteological peculiarities, as, for instance, in the structure of the hyoid bone (p. 96).

[618] It's worth noting that this brachycephaly is also present, even slightly more pronounced, in the skulls that Mr. Cushing and the Hemenway expedition members found in the ancient dwellings of the Salado Valley and in the Hanolawan pueblo, which are linked to the not-so-distant ancestors of today's Pueblo people. These skulls are hyper-brachycephalic (mean ceph. ind. of 94 skulls, 89); they also showed a striking occurrence of the “Inca bone” (p. 67), along with several other unique osteological features, such as the structure of the hyoid bone (p. 96).

[619] Orozco y Berra, Geografia de las lenguas ... de Mexico, Mexico, 1864, with ethn. chart (which may still be profitably consulted).

[619] Orozco y Berra, Geography of Languages ... of Mexico, Mexico, 1864, with ethnographic chart (which may still be worth consulting).

[620] According to Brinton, the great Uto-Aztecan linguistic family is composed of three branches: Shoshonean (or Ute), Sonoran, and Nahuatlan (Aztec).

[620] Brinton states that the large Uto-Aztecan language family has three branches: Shoshonean (or Ute), Sonoran, and Nahuatlan (Aztec).

[621] It is the same with the Coras (3000), and especially with the Huicholes (4000) of the Nayarit Sierra (north of Jalisco), who are tillers of the soil, and the last remnants of a formerly numerous and warlike population. The Huicholes worship the sun and various plant divinities, more particularly the “peyote” (a cactus, Anhalonium Lewinii), the fruit of which has stimulative and anaphrodisiac properties. (Hamy, Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat., 1898, p. 197; Lumholtz, Bull. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist., 1898, p. 1, with plates; L. Diguet, Nouv. Arch. Miss. Scientif., vol. ix., p. 571, plates, Paris, 1899.)

[621] The same goes for the Coras (3000) and especially the Huicholes (4000) from the Nayarit Sierra (north of Jalisco), who farm the land and are the last survivors of a once large and battle-ready population. The Huicholes worship the sun and various plant deities, particularly the “peyote” (a cactus, Anhalonium Lewinii), whose fruit has stimulating and anaphrodisiac effects. (Hamy, Bull. Mus. Hist. Nat., 1898, p. 197; Lumholtz, Bull. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist., 1898, p. 1, with plates; L. Diguet, Nouv. Arch. Miss. Scientif., vol. ix., p. 571, plates, Paris, 1899.)

[622] Hamy, “Distrib. geogr. des Opatus, Tarahumars, etc.,” Bull. Soc. Anthrop., Paris, 1883, p. 785; Ten Kate, “Sur les Pimas, etc.,” Bull. Soc. Anthr., 1883; Lumholtz, “Tarahumara,” Bull. Amer. Geogr. Soc., 1894, p. 219.

[622] Hamy, “Geographical Distribution of the Opata, Tarahumara, etc.,” Bull. Soc. Anthrop., Paris, 1883, p. 785; Ten Kate, “About the Pimas, etc.,” Bull. Soc. Anthr., 1883; Lumholtz, “Tarahumara,” Bull. Amer. Geogr. Soc., 1894, p. 219.

[623] It is impossible to enter here into details on the ancient Aztec society. Let us simply bear in mind that from the economic point of view it was based on “hoe-culture” (see p. 192) of maize, tobacco, and cocoa, as well as on a well-developed industry: the weaving of stuffs, pottery, manufacture of paper, malleation and melting (a somewhat rare case in pre-Columbian America) of gold, silver, copper, and bronze. Architecture and sculpture had attained there a great perfection, as well as ideographic and iconomatic writing (see p. 140). It was politically a confederacy of democratic states, often under the dominion of a dictator on whom the Spaniards bestowed the title of king. It was thought until recent times that there had been several invasions of different peoples into Mexico, the Toltecs in the first instance, then the Chichimecs, lastly the Nahuatlans; but from the recent works by Morgan, loc. cit. (The House-life, etc.), Bandelier (Report Peabody Mus., vol. ii., Cambridge, Mass., 1888), Brinton (Essays of an Americanist, Philadelphia, 1890, and Am. Race), and Bruhl (Die Culturvolker Alt-Amerikas, Cincinnati, 1875–87), we may conclude that the name Toltec has only relation to a small clan or even perhaps to an imaginary mythical people. As to that of Chichimec, it was employed by the Nahuas to denote all those peoples outside of their own civilisation; they used this term as the Romans did that of “barbarian.”

[623] It's impossible to go into details about the ancient Aztec society here. Let's just keep in mind that from an economic standpoint, it was based on “hoe-culture” (see p. 192) of maize, tobacco, and cocoa, as well as a well-developed industry: the weaving of textiles, pottery, paper-making, and the processes of forging and melting (which was somewhat uncommon in pre-Columbian America) gold, silver, copper, and bronze. Their architecture and sculpture had reached a high level of perfection, along with ideographic and iconographic writing (see p. 140). Politically, it was a confederacy of democratic states, often ruled by a dictator whom the Spaniards referred to as a king. Until recently, it was believed that there had been several invasions of different groups into Mexico, starting with the Toltecs, followed by the Chichimecs, and finally the Nahuatlans; however, from recent works by Morgan, loc. cit. (The House-life, etc.), Bandelier (Report Peabody Mus., vol. ii., Cambridge, Mass., 1888), Brinton (Essays of an Americanist, Philadelphia, 1890, and Am. Race), and Bruhl (Die Culturvolker Alt-Amerikas, Cincinnati, 1875–87), we can conclude that the name Toltec likely refers only to a small clan or perhaps to a mythical group. As for the term Chichimec, it was used by the Nahuas to refer to all those peoples outside their own civilization; they used this term much like the Romans used “barbarian.”

[624] L. Biart, Les Aztèques, histoire, mœurs, Paris, 1885.

[624] L. Biart, The Aztecs: History and Customs, Paris, 1885.

[625] E. Hamy, loc. cit. (Anthr. Mex.); Brinton, loc. cit. (Am. Race).

[625] E. Hamy, here cited (Anthr. Mex.); Brinton, here cited (Am. Race).

[626] E. Hamy, loc. cit., Bull. Soc. Anthrop., Paris, 1883, p. 787, chart.

[626] E. Hamy, loc. cit., Bull. Soc. Anthrop., Paris, 1883, p. 787, chart.

[627] D. Charnay, quoted by Hamy, loc. cit. (Anthr. Mex.).

[627] D. Charnay, cited by Hamy, loc. cit. (Anthr. Mex.).

[628] Berendt, Bull. Amer. Geogr. Soc., New York, 1875–76, No. 2; Brinton, loc. cit. (Am. R.), p. 117.

[628] Berendt, Bull. Amer. Geogr. Soc., New York, 1875–76, No. 2; Brinton, loc. cit. (Am. R.), p. 117.

[629] The Chontals of Nicaragua are the Lenkas (see p. 540). The “Popolucas” of Puebla speak a Miztec dialect; those of Vera Cruz the Mixe dialect; those of Guatemala the Cakchiquel, one of the Maya dialects adopted as the official language by the Catholic Church, etc.

[629] The Chontals of Nicaragua are the Lenkas (see p. 540). The “Popolucas” of Puebla speak a Miztec dialect; those from Vera Cruz speak the Mixe dialect; and those from Guatemala speak Cakchiquel, which is one of the Maya dialects recognized as the official language by the Catholic Church, etc.

[630] Mercer, Hill-Caves of Yucatan, Philad., 1896.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Mercer, Hill-Caves of Yucatan, Philadelphia, 1896.

[631] A. Stoll, Zur Ethnogr. d. Rep. Guatemala, Zurich, 1884; K. Sapper, “Ethnogr. von S.-E. Mexico und Brit. Honduras,” Peterm. Mittheil., 1895, p. 177, chart, and “Die unabhängige Indianerstaaten von Yucatan,” Globus, vol. 67, 1893, p. 196.

[631] A. Stoll, The Ethnography of the Republic of Guatemala, Zurich, 1884; K. Sapper, “Ethnography of Southeastern Mexico and British Honduras,” Petermann's Mitteilungen, 1895, p. 177, chart, and “The Independent Indian States of Yucatan,” Globus, vol. 67, 1893, p. 196.

[632] See for the geographical distribution of these peoples in pre-Columbian times, D. Pector, Arch. Soc. Americaine, new series, vol. vi, Paris, 1888, pp. 97 and 145.

[632] For information on the geographical distribution of these peoples in pre-Columbian times, see D. Pector, Arch. Soc. Americaine, new series, vol. vi, Paris, 1888, pp. 97 and 145.

[633] Fernandez and Bramford, Rep. Smiths. Inst., 1882, p. 675; Brinton, loc. cit. (Am. R.), p. 163.

[633] Fernandez and Bramford, Rep. Smiths. Inst., 1882, p. 675; Brinton, loc. cit. (Am. R.), p. 163.

[634] Wickham, “Soumoo or Woolwa Indians,” Journ. Anthr. Inst., vol. xxiv., 1894–95, p. 198.

[634] Wickham, “Soumoo or Woolwa Indians,” Journ. Anthr. Inst., vol. xxiv., 1894–95, p. 198.

[635] The name half-breed (Mestizo) is given in Mexico only to a child born of the union of a Spaniard with an Indian woman. By being crossed with a Spaniard a “Mestizo” may give birth to a “Castiza”; the scion of the latter and a Spaniard reverts, it is said, to the race of the father, and is set down as Spanish. A Mulatto woman, the offspring of a Spaniard and a negress, may give birth to a “Morisco” by uniting with a Spaniard; this Morisco will produce with a Spaniard what is called an “Albino,” and it is only to her son, the offspring of a Spanish father, who should revert to his father’s race, that the name of “Tornatro” will be applied. An Indian marrying a negress produces a “Sobo,” and the latter engenders with a negress a “Chino.” The progeny of a Chino and an Indian is called “Cambujo,” and that of an Indian and a half-breed, “Cayote.” (Hamy, following Ignacio de Castro, quoted by de Quatrefages, Hist. Gén. Races Hum., p. 605.)

[635] The term half-breed (Mestizo) is used in Mexico to refer specifically to a child born from the union of a Spaniard and an Indian woman. When a Mestizo has a child with a Spaniard, the offspring may be called a “Castiza.” The child of a Castiza and a Spaniard is said to revert to the father's race and is classified as Spanish. A Mulatto woman, who is the child of a Spaniard and a Black woman, can have a child known as a “Morisco” when she partners with a Spaniard; this Morisco will then produce what is known as an “Albino” when having a child with a Spaniard, and the son of this Spanish father, who reverts to his father's race, will be called a “Tornatro.” An Indian who marries a Black woman produces a “Sobo,” and a Sobo can have a child referred to as a “Chino” with another Black woman. The child of a Chino and an Indian is called a “Cambujo,” while the offspring of an Indian and a half-breed is referred to as a “Cayote.” (Hamy, following Ignacio de Castro, quoted by de Quatrefages, Hist. Gén. Races Hum., p. 605.)

[636] I think that it corresponds better with the facts themselves than the mixed and chronological classification of the South Americans into four groups (Eskimoid and Ugroid peoples of the early stone age; Caribs of the later stone age; Mongoloid semi-civilised brachycephals of the stone and bronze ages; hunting and warlike tribes of the bronze age) proposed by Siemiradzki, Mittheil. Anthrop. Gesellsch., vol. xxviii., p. 127, Vienna, 1898.

[636] I believe it aligns more accurately with the actual facts than the mixed and chronological classification of South Americans into four groups (Eskimoid and Ugroid peoples of the early Stone Age; Caribs of the late Stone Age; Mongoloid semi-civilized brachycephals of the Stone and Bronze Ages; hunting and warlike tribes of the Bronze Age) suggested by Siemiradzki, Mittheil. Anthrop. Gesellsch., vol. xxviii., p. 127, Vienna, 1898.

[637] Lafone Quevedo, Preface to the “Arte de la lengua Toba” of Barcena, Revista Mus. La Plata, vol. v., p. 143, 1894. This distinction is criticised by Brinton, Proc. Am. Philos. Soc., vol. xxxvii., p. 179, Philad., 1898.

[637] Lafone Quevedo, Preface to the “Arte de la lengua Toba” of Barcena, Revista Mus. La Plata, vol. v., p. 143, 1894. This distinction is criticized by Brinton, Proc. Am. Philos. Soc., vol. xxxvii., p. 179, Philad., 1898.

[638] The “Mamelucos” or Paulists of the province of Sao Paulo (Brazil), European and Indian half-breeds; the Gauchos of Chaco, offspring of Whites and Indians of the Pampas; the Curibocos, Indo-negro half-breeds in Brazil, etc.

[638] The “Mamelucos” or Paulists from the province of Sao Paulo (Brazil), people of mixed European and Indigenous ancestry; the Gauchos from Chaco, descendants of Europeans and Indigenous people of the Pampas; the Curibocos, mixed Indigenous and African descendants in Brazil, etc.

[639] D’Orbigny, L’homme Americain, Paris, 1859, 2 vols.

[639] D’Orbigny, The American Man, Paris, 1859, 2 vols.

[640] G. Bovalius, “En reza ... Talamanca Land,” Ymer, p. 183, map, Stockholm, 1885.

[640] G. Bovalius, “In regard to ... Talamanca Land,” Ymer, p. 183, map, Stockholm, 1885.

[641] Pinart, “Chiriqui,” Bull. Soc. Géogr., Paris, 1885, p. 433.

[641] Pinart, “Chiriqui,” Bull. Soc. Géogr., Paris, 1885, p. 433.

[642] The Chibchas were husbandmen, manufacturers, and merchants, but unacquainted with the use of metals, except gold. They too have not left any great monuments of architecture (see for further information the works already quoted of Bruhl, Brinton, etc.).

[642] The Chibchas were farmers, craftsmen, and traders, but they didn't know how to use metals, except for gold. They also didn't leave behind any significant architectural monuments (see the previously mentioned works by Bruhl, Brinton, etc. for more information).

[643] Are they not related to the Cayapas of Ecuador, described by Santjago Basurco? (Tour du Monde, 1894, p. 401.)

[643] Aren't they connected to the Cayapas of Ecuador, as described by Santjago Basurco? (Tour du Monde, 1894, p. 401.)

[644] I shall not deal further with the important part which the Quechua civilisation played in all the western regions of South America. Let me observe, however, that this civilisation differed in many respects from that of the Nahuas; the Incas lived under a despotic communistic régime, they had no art of writing, and were content with mnemonic means to communicate with one another, they reared the llama, their religious rites were less sanguinary than those of the Nahua, etc. (Seler, Peruanische Alterthüm, Berlin, 1893; Brinton, loc. cit.; Bruhl, loc. cit.; Uhle, Kultur Sud-Amerik. Völker, vol. ii., Berlin, 1889–90.)

[644] I won’t go into more detail about the significant role the Quechua civilization played in the western regions of South America. However, it's worth noting that this civilization was different in many ways from that of the Nahuas; the Incas operated under a despotic communal system, they didn’t have a writing system and relied on mnemonic methods to communicate, they raised llamas, and their religious ceremonies were less violent than those of the Nahuas, etc. (Seler, Peruanische Alterthüm, Berlin, 1893; Brinton, loc. cit.; Bruhl, loc. cit.; Uhle, Kultur Sud-Amerik. Völker, vol. ii., Berlin, 1889–90.)

[645] Middendorf (E.), Peru, Berlin, 1893, 3 vols.

[645] Middendorf (E.), Peru, Berlin, 1893, 3 vols.

[646] Ten Kate, “Excursion Archæol.... Catamarca, etc.,” Rev. Mus. La Plata, vol. v., 1893, p. 329; Intern. Arch. für Ethnog., vol. vii., 1894, p. 142; Ambrozetti, “Archeol. Calchaqui,” Bol. Inst. Geog. Arg., 1896, p. 117; Brinton, Amer. Anthropologist, N.S., vol. i., No. 1, New York, 1899.

[646] Ten Kate, “Excursion Archæol.... Catamarca, etc.,” Rev. Mus. La Plata, vol. v., 1893, p. 329; Intern. Arch. für Ethnog., vol. vii., 1894, p. 142; Ambrozetti, “Archeol. Calchaqui,” Bol. Inst. Geog. Arg., 1896, p. 117; Brinton, Amer. Anthropologist, N.S., vol. i., No. 1, New York, 1899.

[647] L. Catat, “Les Habitants du Darien Merid.,” Rev. Ethnogr., 1888, p. 397; Pinart, “Les Indiens de Panama,” Rev. Ethnogr., No. 33, 1887, p. 117.

[647] L. Catat, “The Inhabitants of Darien Merid.,” Ethnographic Review, 1888, p. 397; Pinart, “The Indians of Panama,” Ethnographic Review, No. 33, 1887, p. 117.

[648] Siemiradzki, loc. cit., p. 160. The figures here given from Oldendorf, Manouvrier, Hamy, Virchow, and derived from my own observations, relate to the Chilian Araucans. The Araucans of the Pampas are shorter (1 m. 57, according to De la Vaulx, Compt. rend. Soc. Geogr., Paris, 1898, p. 99), and brachycephalic, to judge from the measurements of Ten Kate (Rev. Mus. La Plata, vol. iv., p. 209), who finds the mean cephalic index of 53 skulls to be 83.92 in a series in which, however, several skulls of the Palæo-American type are met with.

[648] Siemiradzki, loc. cit., p. 160. The data provided here from Oldendorf, Manouvrier, Hamy, Virchow, and my own observations pertain to the Chilean Araucans. The Araucans of the Pampas are shorter (1 min. 57, according to De la Vaulx, Compt. rend. Soc. Geogr., Paris, 1898, p. 99), and brachycephalic based on the measurements from Ten Kate (Rev. Mus. La Plata, vol. iv., p. 209), who finds the average cephalic index of 53 skulls to be 83.92, in a sample that includes several skulls of the Paleo-American type.

[649] The Manzanieros, so named from the country of crab-apple-tree forests which they inhabit, have preserved better than the Araucans of the Pampas their physical type; but they have adopted for the most part, like the latter, the manners and customs of the Indians of the Pampas and the Gauchos Euro-Indian half-breeds, similar to the Cow-boys of the western parts of the United States. They live as nomadic shepherds in tents of guanaco skins, and wear garments of tanned skin, after the manner of the Gauchos; they have no pottery, subsist almost exclusively on meat, etc. Excellent horsemen, they hunt the guanaco with bolas, exactly like the Patagonians and the Gauchos.

[649] The Manzanieros, named after the crab-apple tree forests they live in, have maintained their physical characteristics better than the Araucans of the Pampas; however, they have largely adopted the customs and traditions of the Pampas Indians and the Euro-Indian half-breeds known as the Gauchos, similar to the Cowboys in the western United States. They live as nomadic shepherds in tents made from guanaco skins and wear clothing made from tanned hide, following the style of the Gauchos. They do not have pottery and mainly rely on meat for food. Skilled horse riders, they hunt guanaco using bolas, just like the Patagonians and the Gauchos.

[650] The Archipelagoes of Chiloé and Chonos, which lie off the Chilian coast in the neighbourhood of Cape Peñas, were peopled by Araucan tribes of Gauchos, Payos and Chonos, of whom there remain only a few descendants, with a strain of Spanish blood. These Gauchos must not be confounded with the half-breeds of the same name (see above, note 1), nor the Chonos with the tribe of the same name living farther to the south between Cape Peñas and the Straits of Magellan; the latter tribe appears to be related rather to the Fuegians.

[650] The Archipelagos of Chiloé and Chonos, located off the Chilean coast near Cape Peñas, were inhabited by Araucan tribes known as Gauchos, Payos, and Chonos. Today, only a few descendants remain, tracing their lineage partly to Spanish ancestry. It’s important to note that these Gauchos are not the same as the mestizos also referred to as Gauchos (see above, note 1), and the Chonos tribe in this context should not be confused with the tribe of the same name that lives further south between Cape Peñas and the Straits of Magellan; the latter seems to have a closer connection to the Fuegians.

[651] For the philology of the Caribs and the Arawaks, see L. Adam, “Trois fam. linguist.... de l’Amazone, de l’Orénoque, etc.,” Congrès Intern. Americanistes, Berlin, 1888, p. 489, and Biblioth. linguist. Americaine, vol. xviii., Paris, 1893; Von den Steinen, loc. cit., and Centr. Brasil, Leipzig, 1886; Ehrenreich, loc. cit., and Peterm. Mitth., 1897, No. 4. For the ethnography, see the works already quoted of Ehrenreich, of Von den Steinen, and the following works: Schomburgh, Reisen in Brit. Guyana, Leipzig, 1847, 2 vols.; Coudreau, “Note sur 54 trib. Guyane,” Bull. Soc. Geogr., Paris, 1891, and “Dix ans de Guyane,” ibid., p. 447, map; E. Im Thurn, Among the Indians of Guiana, London, 1883; Crevaux, Voyages dans l’Amer. du Sud, Paris, 1883; Stoddard, Cruising among the Caribbees, London, 1895.

[651] For the study of the Carib and Arawak languages, refer to L. Adam, “Three linguistic families from the Amazon, Orinoco, etc.,” International Congress of Americanists, Berlin, 1888, p. 489, and Linguistic Library of America, vol. xviii., Paris, 1893; Von den Steinen, loc. cit., and Central Brazil, Leipzig, 1886; Ehrenreich, loc. cit., and Peterman's Mitteilungen, 1897, No. 4. For the ethnography, see the already cited works of Ehrenreich, Von den Steinen, and the following: Schomburgh, Travels in British Guiana, Leipzig, 1847, 2 vols.; Coudreau, “Note on 54 tribes in Guiana,” Bulletin of the Geographic Society, Paris, 1891, and “Ten Years in Guiana,” ibid., p. 447, map; E. Im Thurn, Among the Indians of Guiana, London, 1883; Crevaux, Voyages in South America, Paris, 1883; Stoddard, Cruising among the Caribbeans, London, 1895.

[652] According to Siemiradzki, loc. cit., p. 147, the Guancavelica and Montubio Indians of the coast of Ecuador, who are completely Hispanified, as well as the Payaguas (see p. 572), bear a strong resemblance in physical type to the Caribs.

[652] According to Siemiradzki, loc. cit., p. 147, the Guancavelica and Montubio Indians on the coast of Ecuador, who are fully assimilated into Hispanic culture, as well as the Payaguas (see p. 572), strongly resemble the Caribs in physical appearance.

[653] These figures are given from the measurements of Manouvrier and Deniker (Bull. Soc. Anthrop., Paris, 1893), of Maurel (Mem. Soc. Anthrop., Paris, 2nd ser., vol. ii., 1875–85), Ten Kate (Rev. d’Anthr., Paris), and Prince Roland Bonaparte (Les Habitants de Surinam, Paris, 1884), for the Caribs of the north; from Ehrenreich, loc. cit. (Anthrop. Stud.), for the Caribs of the south.

[653] These figures come from the measurements taken by Manouvrier and Deniker (Bull. Soc. Anthrop., Paris, 1893), Maurel (Mem. Soc. Anthrop., Paris, 2nd ser., vol. ii., 1875–85), Ten Kate (Rev. d’Anthr., Paris), and Prince Roland Bonaparte (Les Habitants de Surinam, Paris, 1884), for the northern Caribs; and from Ehrenreich, loc. cit. (Anthrop. Stud.), for the southern Caribs.

[654] See, for example, the summary of the data of ancient authors in J. Ballet’s La Guadeloupe, vol. i., 2nd pt., p. 220, Basse-Terre, 1894.

[654] Check out the summary of ancient authors' data in J. Ballet’s La Guadeloupe, vol. i., 2nd pt., p. 220, Basse-Terre, 1894.

[655] O. Ordinaire, “Les Sauvages du Perou,” Rev. Ethnogr., 1887, p. 264.

[655] O. Ordinaire, “The Savages of Peru,” Ethnographic Review, 1887, p. 264.

[656] This traveller also mentions a tribe very different from the Goajires, inhabiting the mountains of the north, now completely unknown. These Indians call themselves Piecer(?). They might possibly have some slight relation with the Arawaks inhabiting the upper valleys of Sierra Nevada. De Brette, loc. cit.; H. Candelier, Rio Hacha et les ... Goajires, Paris, 1893.

[656] This traveler also mentions a tribe that's very different from the Goajires, living in the northern mountains, which is now completely unknown. These Indigenous people refer to themselves as Piecer(?). They may have some slight connection to the Arawaks who live in the upper valleys of Sierra Nevada. De Brette, loc. cit.; H. Candelier, Rio Hacha et les ... Goajires, Paris, 1893.

[657] Particulars concerning the archæological and osteological remains of the aborigines of the Greater Antilles will be found in J. Duerden’s “Aborig. Ind. Remains in Jamaica,” Journ. of the Instit. of Jamaica (with “note on the craniology,” by Haddon), Kingston, 1897, vol. ii., No. 4; and in Brinton’s “The Archæology of Cuba,” Amer. Archæologist, vol. ii., No. 10, Columbus, 1898.

[657] You can find details about the archaeological and skeletal remains of the indigenous people of the Greater Antilles in J. Duerden’s “Aborig. Ind. Remains in Jamaica,” Journ. of the Instit. of Jamaica (including a “note on the craniology” by Haddon), Kingston, 1897, vol. ii., No. 4; and in Brinton’s “The Archæology of Cuba,” Amer. Archæologist, vol. ii., No. 10, Columbus, 1898.

[658] R. de la Grasserie, Congr. Internat. Americanistes, Berlin, 1888, p. 438.

[658] R. de la Grasserie, Internat. Congress of Americanists, Berlin, 1888, p. 438.

[659] Barboza Rodriguez (Revista da Exposiçao Anthrop. brazileira, Rio de Janeiro, 1882) has measured four specimens, which have given him the mean height of 1 m. 47.

[659] Barboza Rodriguez (Revista da Exposiçao Anthrop. brazileira, Rio de Janeiro, 1882) measured four specimens, which gave him an average height of 1 minute. 47.

[660] Ordinaire (loc. cit.) also describes together with these populations the wholly savage tribe of the Lorenzos living completely in the stone age on the banks of the Palcazu.

[660] Ordinaire (loc. cit.) also mentions that along with these populations, there is the entirely primitive tribe of the Lorenzos who live completely in the stone age along the banks of the Palcazu.

[661] Hamy, Rev. d’Anthr., 1873, p. 385; Colini, Atti. Acc. Lincei., Rome, 1883.

[661] Hamy, Rev. d’Anthr., 1873, p. 385; Colini, Atti. Acc. Lincei., Rome, 1883.

[662] Both these authors prefer the term “Ges” to that of Tapuyas, by which the aborigines in question are known to the Brazilians. In fact, the word “Tapuya,” which in the Tupi tongue means “barbarian,” is not only applied to the Ges, but also to a host of other backward tribes, as, for instance, the Puris (p. 565).

[662] Both these authors prefer the term “Ges” over “Tapuyas,” which is how the indigenous people are referred to by the Brazilians. In fact, the word “Tapuya,” which means “barbarian” in Tupi, is not only used for the Ges but also for many other marginalized tribes, such as the Puris (p. 565).

[663] Probably on account of the numerous cataracts on the rivers.

[663] Probably because of the many waterfalls on the rivers.

[664] Maxim Pr. von Wied Newied, Reise nach Brasil., Frankfort-a-M., 1820, 2 vols.; Martius, Beitr. zur Ethnogr.... Amerikas, Erlangen-Leipzig, 1863–67; Lacerda and Peixolo, “Contrib. estudo. Anthrop. das raças Indig. do Brazil,” Archiv. de Mus. Nacion., Rio de Janeiro, vol. i., 1876, p. 47; Ph. Rey, Étud. Anthrop. sur les Botocudos, Paris, 1880 (thesis); Peixoto, “Novos estudos. craniol. sobra Botocudos,” Arch. Mus. Nac., Rio de Janeiro, vol. vi., 1884, p. 205; Ehrenreich, “Ueber die Botocudos,” Zeitschr. für Ethnol., 1887, pp. 1 and 49.

[664] Maxim Pr. von Wied Newied, Journey to Brazil, Frankfort-a-M., 1820, 2 vols.; Martius, Contributions to the Ethnography of America, Erlangen-Leipzig, 1863–67; Lacerda and Peixolo, “Contribution to the Study of the Anthropology of the Indigenous Races of Brazil,” Archives of the National Museum, Rio de Janeiro, vol. i., 1876, p. 47; Ph. Rey, Anthropological Study on the Botocudos, Paris, 1880 (thesis); Peixoto, “New Studies in Craniology on Botocudos,” Archives of the National Museum, Rio de Janeiro, vol. vi., 1884, p. 205; Ehrenreich, “About the Botocudos,” Journal for Ethnology, 1887, pp. 1 and 49.

[665] Castelnau, Expedition parties Centr. Am. dn Sud. Hist. des vog., Paris, 1852–57, 6 vols.; Martius, loc. cit.; Ehrenreich, loc. cit. (Peterm. Mitt.).

[665] Castelnau, Expedition parties Centr. Am. dn Sud. Hist. des vog., Paris, 1852–57, 6 vols.; Martius, loc. cit.; Ehrenreich, loc. cit. (Peterm. Mitt.).

[666] See the works of Castelnau, Von den Steinen, and Ehrenreich, already quoted.

[666] Check out the works of Castelnau, Von den Steinen, and Ehrenreich, which have already been mentioned.

[667] J. Koslowsky, “Algun. datos sobre los Bororos,” Bol. Inst. Geogr. Argent., vol. vi., 1895; Ehrenreich, loc cit. (Anthr. Unter.).

[667] J. Koslowsky, “Some data on the Bororos,” Bol. Inst. Geogr. Argent., vol. vi., 1895; Ehrenreich, loc cit. (Anthr. Unter.).

[668] See on this point the suggestive monograph of H. Meyer, “Bows and Arrows in Centr. Brazil,” Smiths. Rep. for 1896, p. 549, pl., Washington, 1898.

[668] Check out the insightful monograph by H. Meyer, “Bows and Arrows in Central Brazil,” Smiths. Rep. for 1896, p. 549, pl., Washington, 1898.

[669] The way in which the aborigines cut trees with their stone hatchets is remarkable: they make in the first place a great number of holes all around the trunk, then enlarge them till they touch, and so form a continuous incision. Similarly, in order to cut a thin piece of wood from a tree branch they make notches in the latter at equal distances, then they remove the portions of wood between the notches, making use of the same stone hatchet like a wedge. (Ehrenreich, “Mittheil.... Xingu Exped.,” Zeitschrift für Ethnol., 1890, p. 61.)

[669] The way the indigenous people cut trees with their stone hatchets is impressive: first, they create a lot of holes all around the trunk, then they enlarge them until they connect, forming a continuous cut. Likewise, to slice a thin piece of wood from a tree branch, they make notches in the branch at regular intervals, then remove the wood between the notches, using the same stone hatchet like a wedge. (Ehrenreich, “Mittheil.... Xingu Exped.,” Zeitschrift für Ethnol., 1890, p. 61.)

[670] L. Adam, Bibliothèque Linguist. Amer., vol. xviii., Paris, 1896.

[670] L. Adam, Linguistic Library. America., vol. xviii., Paris, 1896.

[671] I. Ambrosetti, “Los Indios Caingua,” Bol. Inst. Geogr. Argentino, vol. xv., Buenos Ayres, 1895.

[671] I. Ambrosetti, “The Caingua Indians,” Bol. Inst. Geogr. Argentino, vol. xv., Buenos Aires, 1895.

[672] It is in the vicinity of the Cainguas, between the Parana and the central chain of Paraguay, south of the sources of the Acaray, that the five or six hundred Guayakis dwell, primitive hunters, still in the stone age, of whom Bove (Bull. Soc. Geogr. Ital., 1884, p. 939) had caught a glimpse, and whom La Hitte and Ten Kate have quite recently described (Ann. Mus. La Plata, vol. ii., Anthrop., 1897). Armed with their enormous bows and their polished stone hatchets, with their caps of jaguar skin, they have rather a grotesque appearance, and their low stature (the only adult subject measured was 1 m. 52, and the skeleton of a woman, 1 m. 42), as well as their legs wide apart, are not such as to improve their appearance. They are sub-brachycephalic, and nevertheless in type remind us of the Fuegians and the Botocudos. Their habitations are tree shelters, sometimes eighty feet long; their principal tool consists of a tooth of the agôuti fastened to the thigh-bone of a monkey. Their household vessels are plaited baskets rendered impermeable by the addition of a layer of wax, etc. The Cainguas are perhaps hybridised Guayakis.

[672] Near the Cainguas, situated between the Paraná River and the central mountains of Paraguay, south of the Acaray River's sources, live around five or six hundred Guayakis. These primitive hunters are still in the stone age, glimpsed by Bove (Bull. Soc. Geogr. Ital., 1884, p. 939), and more recently described by La Hitte and Ten Kate (Ann. Mus. La Plata, vol. ii., Anthrop., 1897). Equipped with their massive bows and polished stone axes, and wearing jaguar skin caps, they have a somewhat bizarre appearance. Their short stature (the only adult measured was 1 minute. 52, and a woman's skeleton was 1 min. 42) and wide stance do not add to their look. They have a sub-brachycephalic skull shape, and in some ways, they resemble the Fuegians and Botocudos. They live in tree shelters, sometimes as long as eighty feet, and their main tool is a tooth from an agouti attached to a monkey’s thigh bone. Their household items are woven baskets made waterproof with a layer of wax, among other materials. The Cainguas might be hybridized Guayakis.

[673] Coudreau, loc. cit., pp. 123 and 131.

[673] Coudreau, loc. cit., pp. 123 and 131.

[674] Köppig, quoted by Brinton (Am. R., p. 231). We must not confound these Cocomas with the tribe of the same name living between the upper Burus and the Jurua, and which appears to belong to the Pano family.

[674] Köppig, as quoted by Brinton (Am. R., p. 231). We shouldn’t confuse these Cocomas with the tribe of the same name that resides between the upper Burus and the Jurua, which seems to be part of the Pano family.

[675] Barboza Rodriguez, loc. cit.; Ehrenreich, loc. cit. (Anthrop. Stud.); D’Orbigny, loc. cit., vol. ii., p. 324.

[675] Barboza Rodriguez, same source; Ehrenreich, same source (Anthropological Studies); D’Orbigny, same source, vol. ii., p. 324.

[676] Martin de Moussy, Descrip. Confed. Argent., vol. ii., p. 141, Paris, 1861, and Industr. des Indiens La Plata, Paris, 1866; Lafone Quevedo, “La Razza Americana de Brinton, etc.,” Bol. Inst. Geogr. Argent., vol. xiv., 1894, p. 524 (on the disappearance of the Charruas), and Bol. Inst. Geogr. Argent., vol. xviii., 1897, pp. 124 and 127; Arrivée en France de quatre sauvages Charrua, Paris, 1830, and Flourens, Ann. Sc. Nat., 2nd ser., Zool., vol. viii., p. 156; F. Outes, Los Querandies, Buenos Ayres, 1897, and Ethnogr. Argent., Seconda Contrib. al Ethnog. Querandi, Buenos Ayres, 1899; Ambrozetti, “Alfarerias Minuanes,” Bol. I. G. Argent., vol. xiv., 1893, p. 212; I. Quevedo, Bol. Inst. Geogr. Argent., vol. xviii., 1897, pp. 117 and 130.

[676] Martin de Moussy, Descrip. Confed. Argent., vol. ii., p. 141, Paris, 1861, and Industr. des Indiens La Plata, Paris, 1866; Lafone Quevedo, “La Razza Americana de Brinton, etc.,” Bol. Inst. Geogr. Argent., vol. xiv., 1894, p. 524 (on the disappearance of the Charruas), and Bol. Inst. Geogr. Argent., vol. xviii., 1897, pp. 124 and 127; Arrivée en France de quatre sauvages Charrua, Paris, 1830, and Flourens, Ann. Sc. Nat., 2nd ser., Zool., vol. viii., p. 156; F. Outes, Los Querandies, Buenos Ayres, 1897, and Ethnogr. Argent., Seconda Contrib. al Ethnog. Querandi, Buenos Ayres, 1899; Ambrozetti, “Alfarerias Minuanes,” Bol. I. G. Argent., vol. xiv., 1893, p. 212; I. Quevedo, Bol. Inst. Geogr. Argent., vol. xviii., 1897, pp. 117 and 130.

[677] Dobrizhoffer, An Account of the Abipones, London, 1822, 2 vols.

[677] Dobrizhoffer, An Account of the Abipones, London, 1822, 2 vols.

[678] L. Quevedo, loc. cit., La Razza, etc., p. 519, Arte Toba, etc.; Massei and L. Quevedo, “Grupo Mataco-Mataguayo,” Bol. Inst. Geogr. Arg., 1895 and 1896; Pelleschi, “Los Indios Matacos,” Bol. Inst. Geogr. Arg., 1897, p. 173.

[678] L. Quevedo, loc. cit., La Razza, etc., p. 519, Arte Toba, etc.; Massei and L. Quevedo, “Grupo Mataco-Mataguayo,” Bol. Inst. Geogr. Arg., 1895 and 1896; Pelleschi, “Los Indios Matacos,” Bol. Inst. Geogr. Arg., 1897, p. 173.

[679] Certain authorities (Ameghino, Brinton, etc.) place the Charruas, the Chanases, and the Querandis in the Tupi-Guaranian family, and make a separate group of the Matacos.

[679] Some experts (Ameghino, Brinton, etc.) categorize the Charruas, the Chanases, and the Querandis as part of the Tupi-Guaranian family, while grouping the Matacos separately.

[680] Boggiani, Viaggi d’un artista in Amer. Merid., I. Caduvei, II. Ciamococo, Rome, 1894–95 (preface and note by Colino); and “Ethnografia del Alto Paraguay,” Bol. Inst. Geog. Arg., vol. xviii., 1897, p. 613, ethn. chart. According to Brinton (“Ling. Cartogr. of Chaco,” Proc. Am. Phil. Soc., vol. 37, p. 178, Philad., 1898), the dialect of the Samucos should belong to the Arawak family.

[680] Boggiani, Journeys of an Artist in South America, I. Caduvei, II. Ciamococo, Rome, 1894–95 (preface and note by Colino); and “Ethnography of Upper Paraguay,” Bulletin of the Argentine Geographic Institute, vol. xviii., 1897, p. 613, ethnographic chart. According to Brinton (“Linguistic Cartography of Chaco,” Proceedings of the American Philosophical Society, vol. 37, p. 178, Philadelphia, 1898), the dialect of the Samucos should be classified within the Arawak family.

[681] Koslowsky, “Tres semanas entre ... Guatos,” Bol. Inst. Geog. Arg., vol. vi., p. 221, Buenos Ayres, 1895.

[681] Koslowsky, “Three Weeks Among ... Guatos,” Bulletin of the Geographic Institute of Argentina, vol. vi., p. 221, Buenos Aires, 1895.

[682] Siemiradzki, loc. cit.; De la Vaulx, C. R. Soc. Geog. Paris, 1898.

[682] Siemiradzki, loc. cit.; De la Vaulx, C. R. Soc. Geog. Paris, 1898.

[683] Ch. Musters, At Home with the Patagonians, London, 1871, and “The Races of Patagonia,” Journ. Anthrop. Inst., vol. i., 1875, p. 193; F. Moreno, Viage à la Patagon. settentr. ... Buenos Ayres, 1876, and Viage Pat. Austral., Buenos Ayres, 1879; R. Lista, Viage al païs de Tehuelches, Buenos Ayres, 1878, and Explorat. de la Pampa, etc., Buenos Ayres, 1883. As regards the Onas, see R. Lista, “La Tierra del Fuego,” Bol. Inst. Geog. Arg., vol. ii., 1881, and Viage al païs ... Ona, Buenos Ayres, Darapsky, “Patagonia,” Bol. Inst. Geog. Arg., vol. x., 1889, p. 368; J. Hultkrantz, “Nagra Bidrag, etc.,” Ymer, pt. i., Stockholm, 1898, with figs. The three Ona skulls described by Hultkrantz are dolichocephalic (ceph. ind. 74.7).

[683] Ch. Musters, At Home with the Patagonians, London, 1871, and “The Races of Patagonia,” Journ. Anthrop. Inst., vol. i., 1875, p. 193; F. Moreno, Viage à la Patagon. settentr. ... Buenos Ayres, 1876, and Viage Pat. Austral., Buenos Ayres, 1879; R. Lista, Viage al païs de Tehuelches, Buenos Ayres, 1878, and Explorat. de la Pampa, etc., Buenos Ayres, 1883. For information about the Onas, see R. Lista, “La Tierra del Fuego,” Bol. Inst. Geog. Arg., vol. ii., 1881, and Viage al païs ... Ona, Buenos Ayres, Darapsky, “Patagonia,” Bol. Inst. Geog. Arg., vol. x., 1889, p. 368; J. Hultkrantz, “Nagra Bidrag, etc.,” Ymer, pt. i., Stockholm, 1898, with figs. The three Ona skulls described by Hultkrantz are dolichocephalic (ceph. ind. 74.7).

[684] For measurements see the Appendices. The bibliography of the Fuegians will be found in the work of Hyades and Deniker already quoted. To these must be added the following selection from important works omitted or recently published: L. Darapski, “Fuegians,” Bol. Inst. Geog. Arg., vol. x., 1889, p. 276; Bridges, “La Tierra del Fuego, etc.,” Bol. Inst. Geog. Arg., vol. xiv., 1893; and O. Nordenskjold, “Das Feuerland,” Geog. Zeitsch., vol. ii., p. 663, Leipzig, 1896.

[684] For measurements, see the Appendices. The bibliography of the Fuegians can be found in the work of Hyades and Deniker already cited. To these, you should also add the following selection from significant works that were omitted or published recently: L. Darapski, “Fuegians,” Bol. Inst. Geog. Arg., vol. x., 1889, p. 276; Bridges, “La Tierra del Fuego, etc.,” Bol. Inst. Geog. Arg., vol. xiv., 1893; and O. Nordenskjold, “Das Feuerland,” Geog. Zeitsch., vol. ii., p. 663, Leipzig, 1896.

Transcriber’s Note:

Transcription Note:

This e-text is based on the 1900 edition of the book. Minor punctuation errors, as well as inconsistencies in hyphenation, have been tacitly corrected; misspelled or inconsistent proper names, however, have been retained. Geographical names and names referring to tribes or nations have been harmonised.

This e-text is based on the 1900 edition of the book. Minor punctuation errors and inconsistencies in hyphenation have been silently corrected; misspelled or inconsistent proper names, however, have been kept as they are. Geographical names and names referring to tribes or nations have been standardized.

A number of illustrations have been repositioned compared to the original book version; the ‘List of Illustrations’ has been adapted accordingly. Extremely wide tables have been split and reformatted.

Some illustrations have been rearranged compared to the original book version, and the ‘List of Illustrations’ has been updated accordingly. Very wide tables have been divided and reformatted.

The following passages have been corrected or need to be commented:

The following passages have been corrected or need to be commented on:

# p. 59: ‘aveolocondylean’ → ‘alveolocondylean’
# p. 108: Lung capacities in cubic metres are wrong; should read ‘cubic decimetres’ or ‘litres’; ‘per second’ should read ‘per minute’
# p. 194: ‘Canis familiaris matris opitimæ’ → ‘Canis familiaris matris optimæ’
# p. 286 (left column of table): ‘fair hair’: ‘fair’ added according to Chapter IX.
# p. 293: ‘Southern Mongolia’ → ‘Southern Mongolian’
# p. 294: ‘geographico-lingustic’ → ‘geographico-linguistic’
# p. 404: ‘corollay’ → ‘corollary’
# pp. 486, 487: ‘Bornea’ → ‘Borneo’
# p. 493: ‘Figs. 197 and 198’ → ‘Figs. 147 and 148’
# p. 533: ‘as follow:’ → ‘as follows:’
# p. 557: ‘Venezeula’ → ‘Venezuela’
# pp. 578, 580: ‘M.’ (metres) → ‘MM.’ (millimetres)
# Footnote 13: ‘orang-outan’ → ‘orang-utan’
# Footnote 79: ‘Feftschrift’ → ‘Festschrift’
# Footnote 108: ‘Amenians’ → ‘Armenians’
# Footnote 329: ‘Semetic’ → ‘Semitic’
# Footnote 599: missing footnote anchor added
# Footnote 631: ‘Gutemala’ → ‘Guatemala’

# p. 59: ‘aveolocondylean’ → ‘alveolocondylean’
# p. 108: Lung capacities in cubic metres are incorrect; it should say ‘cubic decimetres’ or ‘litres’; ‘per second’ should say ‘per minute’
# p. 194: ‘Canis familiaris matris opitimæ’ → ‘Canis familiaris matris optimæ’
# p. 286 (left column of table): ‘fair hair’: ‘fair’ added according to Chapter IX.
# p. 293: ‘Southern Mongolia’ → ‘Southern Mongolian’
# p. 294: ‘geographico-lingustic’ → ‘geographico-linguistic’
# p. 404: ‘corollay’ → ‘corollary’
# pp. 486, 487: ‘Bornea’ → ‘Borneo’
# p. 493: ‘Figs. 197 and 198’ → ‘Figs. 147 and 148’
# p. 533: ‘as follow:’ → ‘as follows:’
# p. 557: ‘Venezeula’ → ‘Venezuela’
# pp. 578, 580: ‘M.’ (metres) → ‘MM.’ (millimetres)
# Footnote 13: ‘orang-outan’ → ‘orang-utan’
# Footnote 79: ‘Feftschrift’ → ‘Festschrift’
# Footnote 108: ‘Amenians’ → ‘Armenians’
# Footnote 329: ‘Semetic’ → ‘Semitic’
# Footnote 599: missing footnote anchor added
# Footnote 631: ‘Gutemala’ → ‘Guatemala’


Download ePUB

If you like this ebook, consider a donation!